JP7832638B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to amusement machines such as pachinko machines (commonly referred to as "pachinko machines").

Pachinko machines and similar gaming machines are equipped with multiple prize-winning slots in the game area through which the balls are played. These slots award predetermined prizes to players who enter them, and an outlet at the lower end of the game area that discharges balls that do not enter any of the prize-winning slots. In addition to the outlet at the lower end of the game area, some gaming machines of this type are known to have multiple outlets located along the game area (for example, Patent Document 1).

However, if multiple payout slots are provided, it becomes difficult to distinguish between payout slots and payout slots. Some players may mistake a payout slot for a payout slot, leading to frustration when they don't receive a reward despite entering a slot, potentially diminishing their enjoyment of the game. While labeling each payout slot could address this problem, such prominent labeling might create a sense of unease for players and further reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2019-136134

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances , the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in entertainment value.

The present invention
A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The game board is provided with a center mechanism having a peripheral wall that prevents game balls from entering the inside.
The center component is
In a front view, it extends outward from the peripheral wall portion and has an extended flow region in front of which game balls can flow down.
The extended flow region is provided with a first protrusion that extends forward from the front surface of the extended flow region, and a second protrusion that extends forward from the first protrusion, and both the first and second protrusions can influence the flow pattern of the game balls.
Furthermore, the game board is provided with a prize entry opening into which game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, an out entry opening at the lower part of the game area into which game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, and a sub-out entry opening above the out entry opening into which game balls can enter.
Near the sub-out port, an out indicator is provided to show that the sub-out port is not a prize entry port.
The aforementioned out-of-notation portion has at least a main notation body portion that forms the basis of the notation and a peripheral notation portion that is in contact with the periphery of the main notation body portion, and a character or symbol is formed therein.
The main body of the notation is formed such that its degree of light transmission is lower than that of a specific decorative area outside the outer notation portion .
Furthermore, behind the "Out" marking section and the specific decorative area, a light-emitting substrate is arranged on which a light-emitting element that emits light toward the front is mounted.
The light-emitting element is positioned so as not to overlap with the "out" indicator when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
It is characterized by the following:
Furthermore, the following means are disclosed for reference as separate inventions from the present invention.
Means 1:
A gaming machine comprising a game board having a prize slot into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter and into which points are awarded, and an out slot into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
At least a first outlet and a second outlet are provided as the aforementioned outlets.
The game board is provided with a first out notation corresponding to the first out opening and a second out notation corresponding to the second out opening.
The first out indicator and the second out indicator are characterized by being provided in different sizes.

Here, "winning slots" refer to: "general winning slots that are always open within the game area," "starting winning slots (starting slots) that are always open within the game area and where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state that is beneficial to the player as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball," "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, special feature winning slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter within the game area as a predetermined benefit when a game ball enters a specific receiving slot (chucker) within the game area," and "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter as a predetermined benefit depending on the result of a normal lottery held when a game ball passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area." Examples include: "a prize entry slot for special features, etc.," "a variable-start prize entry slot (variable-start slot) where, depending on the result of a normal lottery conducted when a game ball passes through a specific area within the game area (e.g., a gate, checker, etc.), a special lottery is held to determine whether or not a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball, which is advantageous to the player," "a V-prize entry slot where, upon game balls entering the prize entry slot and being distributed by a distribution means, a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit," and "a large prize entry slot or prize entry slot that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to allow game balls to enter, as a special advantageous game state for the player."

Furthermore, examples of "out markings," such as the first and second out markings, include: "characters from languages such as English (alphabet) and Japanese (katakana, hiragana)," "designs such as patterns, symbols, and pictograms," and "images or characters that evoke negative images." Additionally, examples of out markings include: "those with different light transmission properties than the surrounding decorations and materials," and "those with different light reflectivity than the surrounding decorations and materials." When out markings are text, they may be written horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Moreover, out markings may be placed on stickers, printed together with the decorations on decorative sheets, or integrally molded with materials such as ball entry slot components.

Furthermore, "different identification methods" include: "those with different characters such as the alphabet or katakana," "those with different appearances (designs) such as characters, symbols, and pictograms," "those with different colors," "those with different sizes," "those with different orientations of text strings such as horizontal, vertical, and diagonal writing," "those with different light transmittance," "those with different light reflectivity," and "those with different formation methods such as sticker application, printing, and integral molding with the ball entry opening component."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board having a prize entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, wherein at least a first out entry point and a second out entry point are provided as the out entry points, and the game board is provided with a first out entry marking corresponding to the first out entry point and a second out entry marking corresponding to the second out entry point, and the first and second out entry markings are provided in different identification manners. (See Chapter 30. Out Entry Point Markings, Figures 346 to 349, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention])

In this configuration, the game board's game area is provided with multiple prize entry points and multiple output points, such as the first and second output points. The first output point is indicated by a first output marking, and the second output point is indicated by a second output marking, each with a different identification method. This allows players to notice the presence of the output points by visually identifying them. Therefore, players will not mistake the first or second output points for prize entry points, and even if no bonus is awarded for entering the first or second output points, they will not become frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, by providing the first and second out-out indicators, which correspond to the first and second out-out openings, in different identification patterns, it becomes possible to align each indicator with the opening direction of the out-out opening or with the decoration of the area where the out-out opening is located. This allows the indicators to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous. Specifically, for example, if the first out-out opening is diagonally upwards to the right and the second out-out opening is upwards, writing the first out-out indicator diagonally and the second out-out indicator horizontally will align each indicator with the opening edge of the corresponding out-out opening. This makes each indicator less conspicuous and less likely to cause any sense of incongruity. As a result, the indicators do not cause any sense of incongruity to the player, the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decrease in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, it is desirable that at least one of the multiple out indicators, including the first and second out indicators, be composed of text that aligns with the decorations on the game board. This allows the out indicators to appear as part of the decoration, making them less conspicuous while still allowing players to recognize them as out indicators. This ensures that the decorative quality of the game board is not diminished, and the presence of out indicators does not detract from its appearance.

Furthermore, at least one of multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be applied to the sticker. This allows for the out indicator to be provided by attaching the sticker with the printed out indicator around the corresponding out opening. Additionally, for example, if the same ball entry component is used as either a prize entry opening or an out opening depending on the specifications or model, this can be handled by simply changing the sticker, thereby reducing the cost associated with the gaming machine.

Furthermore, when applying the "out" marking to a sticker as described above, it is desirable to attach the sticker to a part that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the back of the transparent component, the front plate of the component forming the out opening, etc.). This prevents the sticker from peeling off due to contact with the game ball. Additionally, it is desirable to attach the sticker to a part that is difficult for workers to touch (for example, the back of the transparent component), in addition to the game ball, thus preventing the sticker from being peeled or damaged by workers touching it during maintenance of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, at least one of the multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be integrally molded with the ball entry member forming the corresponding out opening. This allows the out indicator to be reliably displayed without the possibility of forgetting to apply a sticker, compared to the case where the out indicator is provided by applying a sticker. It also eliminates the need for sticker application, thus reducing the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry slot component, it will not peel off even if it comes into contact with the game ball or worker, compared to when the "out" indicator is applied using a sticker or printing (painting). It is desirable to place the "out" indicator in a location that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the front of the front panel, the back of the base plate, etc.).

Furthermore, it may be possible to make at least the first and second out indicators, as well as multiple other out indicators, less translucent than their surroundings. This allows the out indicators to appear relatively darker when the surrounding area is brighter, making them recognizable to the player while still being difficult to see, thus mitigating the visual deterioration caused by the out indicators.

Furthermore, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be made so conspicuous that it is difficult for balls to enter the corresponding out openings. For example, by placing an out opening that is difficult for balls to enter near the upstream of a prize-winning opening (e.g., a large prize-winning opening, a special prize-winning opening, etc.) where a favorable game state allows for the entry of many game balls, and by making the corresponding out indicators conspicuous, the existence of the out opening can be strongly recognized along with the prize-winning opening, and players can be strongly encouraged to avoid entering that out opening. Although the probability of a game ball entering this out opening is low, the conspicuousness of the corresponding out indicator ensures that the existence of the out opening is fully recognized beforehand. Even if a game ball does enter this out opening, the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and players can continue to enjoy playing with game balls.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-out slots are made more prominent, for example, if an easy-to-enter out-out slot is provided downstream of a prize slot that allows many game balls to enter due to the occurrence of a favorable game state (e.g., a large prize slot, a special prize slot), or near a prize slot where entering a game ball does not create a favorable game state (e.g., a general prize slot), and the corresponding "out" marking is made less prominent, players will pay less attention to game balls circulating near that out-out slot. Therefore, even if the existence of the out-out slot is recognized by the marking, it will not be strongly remembered, and interest in easy-to-enter out-out slots will be reduced. As a result, players will be less likely to notice game balls entering easy-to-enter out-out slots, and the enjoyment of the game will not diminish even if a game ball enters such an out-out slot.

Therefore, as described above, making the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds areas more prominent will alert players to their presence, preventing them from mistaking them for prize-winning areas. Even if no reward is given for entering an out-of-bounds area, players will not feel frustrated. Furthermore, making the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds areas more prominent will not cause players any discomfort, thus preventing a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
At least one of them consists of a string of characters that conforms to the decoration applied to the game board."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 2, at least one of the multiple out indicators, including the first and second out indicators, is composed of a string of characters that conforms to the decoration applied to the game board. (See the description of the out indicator 2050 and Figure 348 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design aligns the "out" indicator with the decorations on the game board, making it appear as part of the overall design. This allows players to recognize it as an "out" point while keeping it inconspicuous, without compromising the decorative quality of the game board. The presence of the "out" indicator does not detract from the overall appearance.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
At least one of them is applied to the sticker.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, at least one of multiple out markings, including at least a first out marking and a second out marking, is applied to the seal. (See the description of the first out marking 2050a and Figure 347 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows for the "out" designation to be added by attaching a sticker with the "out" designation printed on it to the area around the corresponding out opening. Furthermore, even if the same ball entry component is used as either a prize entry opening or an out opening depending on the specifications or model, this can be handled by simply changing the sticker, thereby reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, it is desirable to affix the "Out" sticker to a part that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the back of the transparent component, the front plate of the component forming the out opening, etc.). This will prevent the sticker from peeling off due to contact with the game ball. Additionally, it is desirable to affix the sticker to a part that is difficult for workers to touch (for example, the back of the transparent component), thus preventing the sticker from being peeled or detached by workers during maintenance of the gaming machine.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
At least one of them is integrally molded with the ball entry member that forms the corresponding outlet."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least one of multiple out indicators, including at least a first out indicator and a second out indicator, is integrally molded onto the ball entry member forming the corresponding out opening. (See the description of the out opening indicator 2050, the receiving portion 2450 of the attacker unit 2400, and Figure 348, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry component that forms the out exit. Compared to cases where the "out" indicator is provided by attaching a sticker, this eliminates the possibility of forgetting to attach the sticker, ensuring reliable "out" indication. Furthermore, it eliminates the need for sticker attachment, thus suppressing increases in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, because the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry slot component, it will not peel off even if it comes into contact with the game ball or by an operator, unlike cases where the "out" indicator is applied using stickers or printing (painting). It is preferable to place the "out" indicator in a location that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the front of the front panel, the back of the base plate, etc.).

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
"The light transmission is lower than that of the surrounding area."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, at least the first and second out markings, as well as multiple other out markings, have lower light transmission than the surrounding areas. (See the description of the out marking 2050 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design, by making the "out" indicator less translucent than its surroundings, causes it to appear relatively darker when the surrounding area is bright. This allows the indicator to be recognized by the player while still being difficult to see, thus minimizing the visual deterioration caused by the "out" indicator.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 5,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
The corresponding out-of-bounds opening is designed to be so conspicuous that it is difficult for the ball to enter.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 6, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, are provided in such a conspicuous manner that it is difficult for the ball to enter the corresponding out gate. (See the descriptions of the first out gate indicator 2050a, the second out gate indicator 2050b, the third out gate indicator 2050c, and Figure 349 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows for, for example, the placement of an out-out opening near the upstream of a prize-winning opening (e.g., a large prize-winning opening, a special prize-winning opening, etc.) that allows for the entry of many game balls when a favorable game state occurs. Furthermore, by making the corresponding out-out opening's markings more prominent, the existence of the out-out opening can be strongly recognized along with the prize-winning opening, thus strongly encouraging players to avoid entering it. Although the probability of a game ball entering this out-out opening is low, the prominent corresponding out-out markings ensure that its existence is fully recognized beforehand. Even if a game ball does enter this out-out opening, the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and players can continue to enjoy playing with the game balls.

Furthermore, if an easy-to-enter exit is provided downstream of an entry point that allows many game balls to enter due to the occurrence of a favorable game state (e.g., a large entry point, a special prize entry point, etc.), or near an entry point that does not generate a favorable game state even if a game ball enters (e.g., a general entry point), and the corresponding exit marking is made inconspicuous, then players will pay less attention to the game balls circulating near that exit point. Even if the existence of the exit point is recognized by the exit marking, it will not be strongly remembered, thus reducing attention to the easy-to-enter exit point. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice game balls entering the easy-to-enter exit point, and the enjoyment of the game does not diminish even if a game ball enters that exit point.

Therefore, the "out" indicator makes the presence of the out-of-bounds area noticeable, preventing players from mistaking it for a prize-winning area. Even if no reward is given for entering the out-of-bounds area, players won't feel frustrated. Furthermore, by making the "out" indicator for the difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds area prominent, it avoids causing players any discomfort and helps prevent a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Means 7: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 6,
The gaming machine is,
This pachinko machine is characterized by awarding predetermined benefits when a game ball enters the aforementioned prize-winning slot.

Here, "pachinko machine" refers to a machine that includes "a lottery means for conducting a special lottery to generate an advantageous game state in which the player is at an advantage as a predetermined benefit when a game ball enters the starting opening; a special lottery result display means which is a display device that displays special symbols in a variable manner according to the special lottery result drawn by the lottery means, then displays them stopped, and displays the special lottery result drawn by the combination of special symbols displayed stopped; and an advantageous game state generating means which opens and closes the large prize opening in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous game state when a special lottery result that generates an advantageous game state is displayed on the special lottery result display means (a so-called digital pachinko machine)" and "a distribution means for distributing game balls that have entered the prize opening and Examples include: a machine equipped with a "favorable game state generation means" that, when a game ball distributed by a distribution means enters the V-prize slot, opens and closes a prize slot in a predetermined pattern as a predetermined benefit, thereby generating a favorable game state for the player (a so-called "wing-type" machine); and a machine equipped with a "large prize slot" and a prize slot, which, according to the result of a special lottery drawn by the entry of a game ball into the start slot (start entry), opens and closes the large prize slot or prize slot in a predetermined pattern, and when a game ball that enters the prize slot is distributed to the V-prize slot, it opens and closes the prize slot or large prize slot in a predetermined pattern as a predetermined benefit, thereby generating a favorable game state for the player (a so-called "combined machine").

According to the configuration of means 7, the game machine is a pachinko machine that awards predetermined benefits when game balls enter the prize slots. This allows the pachinko machine to achieve any of the effects of the means described above.

Thus, according to the present invention , it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in interest.

This is a front view of a pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the design. This is a right-side view of a pachinko machine. This is a left side view of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front right. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine, seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the back. This is a front view of a pachinko machine with the press operation part of the performance control unit in the raised position. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the performance control unit is in the raised position. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine from the front, with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the front after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of a pachinko machine, showing it from the rear after it has been separated into the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. This is a front view of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of the outer frame. This is a right side view of the outer frame. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the back. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the left and right outer frame assemblies, viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly, seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly as seen from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and below. This is a front view of the door frame of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of the door frame. This is a left side view of the door frame. This is a right-side view of the door frame. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the front right. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from the back. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame, showing it from the rear after being separated into its main components. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit, seen from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the door frame base unit, showing each main component separately from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock on the door frame from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a) from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in (a) from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in Figure 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock in Figure 34(a) as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit, seen from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after it has been disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and anti-tampering member have been removed and viewed from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit, seen from the rear. This is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed. (a) is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. This is a disassembled perspective view of the handle cover unit, taken from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the handle cover unit, taken from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the handle unit, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the handle unit, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-I in Figure 41(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. This is a perspective view of the tray unit in the door frame. This is a perspective view of the plate unit from the rear. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the door frame, cut horizontally at the lower lamp bulb supply opening, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of a conventional door frame, cut at the same location as (a). This is a plan view showing an enlarged view of the ball dispensing operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from the front with the performance control buttons facing upwards, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from (a) from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the performance control unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front and above. This is an exploded perspective view of the production control unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front and below. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit with the performance control unit in the lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring in the upper end position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit with the performance control unit moved to the raised position from the state in (a). This is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit, with the performance control unit in the lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring in the lowered end position. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the outer decorative substrate of the performance control unit, the outer decorative substrate of the button, and the inner decorative substrate of the button, in a plan view of the performance control unit as seen from the pressing direction of the press operation section. (a) is a front view of the plate unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance control unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance control unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection elements are provided in the performance control unit of the performance control unit. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example in which multiple contact detection elements are connected to a single contact detection sensor body; (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor body and the multiple contact detection elements in (a); and (c) is a schematic diagram illustrating an example in which the left plate decoration unit, the right plate decoration unit, and the performance operation unit of the plate unit can move back and forth, and contact detection elements are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit, etc. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing another embodiment of the performance control unit. (a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame seen from the rear. This is a disassembled perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame, seen from the rear. This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-E in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along the O-O line in Figure 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, showing the outer layer of the two-color molded door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, showing the inner layer as is and the outer layer as transparent in (a). This is a front view showing each decorative base plate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative circuit board for the door frame's control unit. This is a rear view showing the decorative substrates installed around the door window of the door frame. This is a front view of the main frame of a pachinko machine. This is a rear view of the main frame of a pachinko machine. This is a perspective view of the main frame from the front right. This is a perspective view of the main frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the main frame from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the main frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the main frame, broken down into its main components and viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the main frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the main frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main frame. This is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the cable guide member for the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main frame. (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher, seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit, seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit, seen from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center in the front-to-back direction of the dispensing blades. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-to-back direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in (a). This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame's foul cover unit and the lower full-ball path unit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls within the main frame. (a) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit of the main frame, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit, seen from the rear. This is a perspective view of the circuit board unit, seen from the rear and below. This is a disassembled perspective view of the circuit board unit, broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the circuit board unit, broken down into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of a pachinko machine, cut down the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit seen from the rear. (a) is a plan view of the main frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main frame in a perspective view seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical tank with the tank rails and other components assembled, seen from the front and above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 100(a) is an exploded perspective view taken from the front. This is an explanatory diagram showing the area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank at the top of the main frame circulate. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank at the top of the main frame. This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage at the top of the main frame. This is an enlarged view showing the area around the tank rail in a perspective view of the main frame seen from the rear on the hinge side. This is a perspective view showing a close-up of the tank rail portion of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail, etc., as seen from the rear, according to another embodiment. (a) is a plan view showing the tank rails etc. of Figure 106 assembled together with the spherical tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rails etc. of (a) from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rails etc. of (a) from the rear. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rails etc. in Figure 107, as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rails etc. in Figure 107, as seen from the rear. Figure 107(a) shows a cross-sectional view of a tank rail, etc., cut along the caulk line. Figure 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the flow of game balls within the tank rail. (a) is a front view of a substrate unit of another embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) viewed from the front left. (a) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit in Figure 111(a) viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit in Figure 111(a) viewed from the lower right rear. Figure 111(a) is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit after it has been disassembled and viewed from the front. Figure 111(a) is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit, taken from the rear after disassembly. (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key-key line in Figure 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cool line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the k-ke line in (a). This is a bottom view of a pachinko machine equipped with the circuit board unit shown in Figure 111(a), showing the portion behind the door frame. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-of-bounds outlet of the out-of-bounds passage. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-of-sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the out-of-sensor has been removed in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, payout control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit of (a) as seen from the front left. (a) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit in Figure 119, viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit in (a), viewed from the lower right rear. (a) is a plan view of the substrate unit in Figure 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line in (a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in Figure 121(a). Figure 119 is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit after it has been disassembled and viewed from the front. Figure 119 is a disassembled perspective view of the circuit board unit, seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the spherical path member of the substrate unit in Figure 119, viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the spherical path member of the substrate unit in Figure 119, viewed from the rear. Figure 119 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how to resolve ball jamming in the circuit board unit. Figure 119 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how to prevent the intrusion of a linear unauthorized tool into the substrate unit. Figure 119 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the substrate unit. This is a front view of a pachinko machine with the center mechanism and other components made opaque. Figure 129 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. Figure 129 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from the back. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the wiring layout from the function display unit to the main control board. This is a front view of the game board with the center components and other parts made transparent. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, showing it broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the game board, showing it from the rear after being broken down into its main components. This is a front view of the game board, showing the game area where the game balls circulate and the obstacle pins, with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as seen from the rear. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the front component and the upper right corner of the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a) cut along the susceptible line, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of (a) taken from the front, with each main component separated. (a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board, seen from the back. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage in the center component, as seen from the front, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage in the center component, as seen from the right, as it is cut in half horizontally at the separation hole. (a) is a perspective view of the gate member from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member from the rear. (a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in (a). This is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game balls on the right side of the front unit. This is an explanatory diagram showing enlarged views of the first and second attacker units in Figure 144. This is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet; (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by a magnetic sensor using a perspective view; (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material in which magnetic field lines from a magnet cannot be detected; and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic material in which magnetic field lines from a magnet can be detected. (a) is a perspective view showing the magnetic sensor being held by the retaining member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the retaining member and the magnetic sensor separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing the retaining member in cross-section. (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the back. This is a front view of the back-stage performance unit in the back-stage unit. (a) is a perspective view of the front-facing back-stage performance unit in the back-stage unit, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front-facing back-stage performance unit in the back-stage unit, seen from the rear. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-stage performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part of (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part of (a). This is a disassembled perspective view of the front left decorative unit of the front back performance unit, along with the light guide plate, as seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit, showing only the rear front left first decorative element, rear front left second decorative element, rear front left third decorative element, and rear front left decorative element base, viewed from the rear. (a) is a front view of the first decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; (b) is a front view of the second decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; (c) is a front view of the third decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; and (c) is a front view of the base of the decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the front-rear performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating the light guide plate and the front-rear left decorative unit, as seen from the front. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the front-rear performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating the decorative body of the front-rear lower performance unit, as seen from the front. This is a front view showing the front left decorative unit with the illumination effect activated. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern of the light guide plate is illuminated. This is an explanatory diagram showing the light emission configuration of the second pattern on the light guide plate. This is a front view of the back-facing display unit, showing the second pattern on the light guide plate illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the first decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper display unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position while facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear upper movable decorative element of the rear upper display unit of the rear unit moved to the lowered position, with the rear upper second decorative part facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left movable decorative element and the rear right movable decorative element in the rear lower display unit of the rear unit, with the elements moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the lower front decorative element of the lower front display unit of the back unit in a raised position. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the front left logo decoration section, front upper left logo decoration section, front left sub-decoration section, and front left band decoration section of the front left decoration unit 3120 of the front front display unit of the back unit are illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate of the back front display unit illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the rear front display unit of the rear unit illuminated, and the rear left movable decorative body and rear right movable decorative body in the rear lower display unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image on the light guide plate of the back front display unit illuminated. This is a block diagram that shows the control configuration of a pachinko machine in general terms. This is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. This is a rear view perspective of the peripheral control unit after disassembly. This is a front view of the peripheral control unit. (a) is a perspective view of a ROM socket with a conversion board, and (b) is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless package mounted in the ROM socket. This is a view from arrow P in Figure 173(a). This is a cross-sectional view of a through-hole, showing an overview of the positional relationship between through-holes formed on the peripheral control board and through-holes formed on the conversion board. (a) is a perspective view of a control ROM and ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and (b) is a top view of the control ROM having a leadless package mounted in the ROM socket. These are schematic diagrams (a) to (c) showing the board management numbers of the peripheral control boards. This is a block diagram of the power supply system for a pachinko gaming machine. This is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. This is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with an error detection function. This is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. This is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. (a) is a perspective view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and (b) is a perspective view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism. (a) is a perspective view of the setting key switch from the front right, (b) is a perspective view of the setting key switch from the front left, and (c) is a top view of the setting key switch. This is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box. Figure (a) shows the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted; Figure (b) (part 1) shows the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted; and Figure (c) (part 2) shows the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. This is a continuation of Figure 186, and is Figure (3) (d) showing the mounting side (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder side (back) of the main control board, and Figure (4) (e) showing the mounting side (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder side (back) of the main control board. This is a schematic diagram illustrating the general arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board. This is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board, illustrating the general wiring patterns to the main control MPU from the main control board. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the first embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board; (b) is a schematic diagram of the cross-section of the line X-X in (a); and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified example of (b). (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the second embodiment, which are formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310; (b) is a schematic diagram of the cross-section of the line X-X in (a); and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified example of (b). (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the third embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board; (b) is a schematic diagram of the cross-section of the line X-X in (a); and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified example of (b). (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the fourth embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board; (b) is a schematic diagram of the cross-section of the line X-X in (a); and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified example of (b). (a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, but of the same area as in (a). (a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) where the front left decorative unit of the front back performance unit is illuminated. Figure 195(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the game panel with its panel board illuminated. This is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and cell in the third embodiment of the game board, viewed from the front after disassembly. (a) is a front view of the functional display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a) along the line S-S, (c) is a perspective view of the functional display unit of (a) from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the functional display unit of (a) from the rear. Figure 198 is a disassembled perspective view of the function display unit, seen from the front. Figure 198 is a disassembled perspective view of the function display unit, seen from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating the relationship between the function display unit in Figure 198 and the player. This is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. This is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the mounting of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, (c) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b) in an exploded state, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor with a different holding member than in (c). (a) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element is also used as a positioning hole for the second member; (b) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example in which a closed space is formed behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element by the second member; (c) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating the state in (b) where decorative elements of different thicknesses are attached; and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element is also used as a mounting hole for the decorative element. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member with a decorative element attached, viewed from the front; (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a); and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member with a different decorative element attached, viewed from the front. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative element and the first member; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative element and the first member; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative element and the first member; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative element with a different shape from (c) and the first member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative element and the movable first member from the front; (b) is a cross-sectional view obtained by cutting along the tartare line in (a); (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative element and the first member in (a) and (c); (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative element of a different form from (a) and the movable first member from the front; and (e) is a cross-sectional view obtained by cutting along the chi-chi line in (d). This is a general overview of a slot machine. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the main control side power is turned on. This flowchart shows the continuation of the power-on process on the main control side in Figure 210. This flowchart shows an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. This flowchart shows an example of the process for changing settings. This flowchart shows an example of a process for confirming and displaying settings. This flowchart shows an example of error display processing. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the power to the payout control unit is turned on. This flowchart shows the continuation of the power-on processing for the dispensing control unit in Figure 216. Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the power is turned on to the dispensing control unit. This flowchart shows an example of a timer interrupt process in the payout control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the processing that occurs when the peripheral control unit is powered on. A flowchart showing an example of V-blank interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing. This flowchart shows an example of interrupt processing for receiving commands from the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows an example of the interrupt processing for a power outage warning signal in the peripheral control unit. This flowchart shows the procedure for controlling special symbols and special electric features (step S114). This is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the first start port passage process (step S232). This flowchart shows the procedure for the pre-production judgment process (step S245). This flowchart shows the procedure for the second start port passage process (step S234). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern processing (step S238). This flowchart shows the procedure for the normal processing of the first special symbol (step S280). This flowchart shows the procedure for the collision detection process (step S305). Various tables showing the winning determination table (A), the big winning symbol determination table (B), and the small winning symbol determination table (C). This flowchart shows the procedure for setting the first special symbol stop symbol (step S281). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283). This flowchart shows the procedure for stopping the first special symbol (step S284). This flowchart shows the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow color effect. This is an explanatory diagram showing the grouping of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative circuit boards installed on a game board. This is an explanatory diagram showing the grouping of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative circuit boards installed in the door frame. This is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow color effect. This is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored animation during an abnormal situation. (A) is a front perspective view of the rear upper movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the rear upper movable decorative body cut along line A-A. This is a timing diagram showing the first variation of the rainbow color effect. This is a timing diagram showing the first variation of the rainbow color effect. This is a timing diagram showing a second variation of the rainbow effect. This is a timing diagram showing a second variation of the rainbow effect. (a) is a schematic front view of the divided game board, and (b) is a schematic rear view of the divided game board. (a) is a rear perspective view of the divided game board, seen from the lower left rear, before the right and left game boards that make up the divided game board are combined, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the divided game board, seen from the lower left rear. This is a schematic front view of the divided game board after the decoration of the divided game board shown in Figure 248(a) has been changed. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of a serial output circuit for photosensor information. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of multiple ID output circuits. This is a list showing the compatibility (alignment) / incompatibility (misalignment) of combinations. This flowchart shows an example of the power-on processing for a peripheral control unit that can perform ID determination. This table shows how to handle various errors when the power is turned on (Specific Example 1). This table shows various error handling methods (Specific Example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection during the progression of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers. This table shows how to handle various errors involving magnetic detection during the progression of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers (Specific Example 1). This table shows how to handle various errors when the power is turned on (Specific Example 2). This table shows various error handling methods (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection during the progression of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers. This table shows how to handle various errors involving magnetic detection during the progression of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers (Specific Example 2). This is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of a relay board installed in a dish unit. This circuit shows an example of a modified version of Figure 262. Figure 262 shows a circuit diagram illustrating an example where the LED driver constituting the ID comparison circuit on the frame-side decorative substrate is replaced with a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit. This is a schematic diagram showing the general allocation of each unit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of the ID output circuit in each unit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit that further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in the ID output circuit of each unit in Figure 267. (a) is a schematic front view of a split game board equipped with an ID error detection switch, and (b) is a schematic rear view of the split game board equipped with an ID error detection switch. This is a schematic disassembled perspective view of the right-side game board, separated into the right-side game panel and the right-side back box, as seen from the front. This is a schematic perspective view of a portion of the right-side back box of the back unit of the right-side game board, seen from the front. This is a schematic disassembled perspective view of the right-side game board, with a portion of it separated into the right-side game panel and the right-side back box, as seen from the front. This is an example of the behavior when changing the setting values when the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is in a state of compatibility (alignment). This is an example of the behavior when changing the setting values while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetic field is generated during the execution of a setting change process while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the power-on operation check, which is performed after the setting change process is completed, while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of the behavior when changing the setting value while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of the behavior when an unauthorized magnetic field is generated while the setting change process is being executed with the right-side game board 5AR disconnected. This is an example of behavior when an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the power-on operation check, which is performed after the setting change process is completed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of the behavior when the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is compatible (aligned) and the setting value is displayed for confirmation. This is an example of the behavior when displaying confirmation of the set values while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetic field is generated during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the power-on operation check, which is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, while the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of the behavior when displaying the setting value confirmation while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of the behavior when an unauthorized magnetic field is generated while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed with the right-side game board 5AR disconnected. This is an example of behavior when an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the power-on operation check, which is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is a schematic diagram showing a modified version of the main control board. This is an example of the behavior when the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is controlled to transition to confirmation mode when it is found to be compatible (matched). This is an example of the behavior when the system is controlled to switch to confirmation mode when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of the behavior when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the system is controlled to switch to confirmation mode. This is a time chart showing the start timing of specific performances. This is a time chart for ending specific performance sequences. This is a time chart showing the start timing of specific effects during abnormal states. This is a time chart for ending specific effects in abnormal situations. This is a timing chart showing an example of the display mode of a performance display device. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode for a performance display device. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the second specific performance, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the first specific performance. (C) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the second specific performance. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the second specific performance, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the first specific performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode for a performance display device. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the front mounting surface of a rear rear left movable decorative substrate provided on the rear rear left movable decorative body. This is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a rear-left movable decorative substrate provided on the rear-left movable decorative body. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the back mounting surface of a rear-rear left movable decorative substrate provided on the rear-rear left movable decorative body. This is a front view of a game board of a fourth embodiment, which differs from the game board in Figure 129, in which the transparent center component and other elements are made opaque. Figure 304 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the front right. Figure 304 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front left. Figure 304 is a perspective view of the game board from the rear. Figure 304 is an exploded perspective view of the game board, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. Figure 304 is an exploded perspective view of the game board, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is a front view of the game board, showing the game area through which the game balls circulate, with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a perspective view from the front of the assembly of the game board in Figure 304, which includes the front components, game panel, and front unit, and (b) is a perspective view from the rear of the assembly of the game board in Figure 304, which includes the front components, game panel, and front unit. Figure 311 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. Figure 311 is a disassembled perspective view of the assembly shown, with its main components separated and viewed from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram showing a plan view of the assembly shown in Figure 311, which has been cut in the middle of the vertical direction. This is a disassembled perspective view of the front components and game panel, seen from the front. This is a disassembled perspective view of the front components and game panel, seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the first information display section of the game board in the aforementioned component; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the first information display section of the game board; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a disassembled perspective view of the first information display section of the game board and the first information sticker base; and (d) is a perspective view of the first information sticker base with the first information sticker attached, viewed from the front. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the second information display section of the game board in the aforementioned component; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the second information display section of the game board; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a disassembled perspective view of the second information display section of the game board and the second information sticker base; and (d) is a perspective view from the front of the second information sticker base to which the second information sticker is attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the third information display section of the game board in the aforementioned component; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the third information display section of the game board; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a disassembled perspective view of the third information display section and the third information sticker base; and (d) is a perspective view of the third information sticker base with the third information sticker attached, viewed from the front. Figure 304 is a front view showing the center component of the game board. Figure 304 is a perspective view of the center component of the game board, seen from the front. Figure 304 is a perspective view of the center component of the game board, seen from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram showing the center component of the first embodiment, cut in the middle of the vertical direction while attached to the game panel, along with the previous component members. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative element of the center piece from the front, separated into a front decorative element and a rear decorative element, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative element consisting of the front decorative element and the rear decorative element from the front. This is an explanatory diagram showing the center frame of the central component in Figure 323 with its rear end facing downwards and the frame placed on the base. This is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross-section of a center component equipped with a center frame to which a different decorative element is attached, as shown in Figure 323. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the main part of the center component of the second embodiment as seen from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a) cut along the line A-A, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the center component of (a) with the center frame placed on a base with the rear end facing downwards. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the center mechanism in Figure 320 where the large prize opening is located, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the same area as in (a) from the front, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the large prize opening in the ball passage of the center mechanism. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the upper right end of the center mechanism in Figure 321, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of (a) from the rear, and (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a cross-section of the part of the center mechanism that extends vertically in the ball passage. (a) is a front view of an attacker unit equipped with a passageway decoration section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the passageway decoration section of the attacker unit in (a). This is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example of a passageway decoration. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shapes of recesses in the passageway decoration section. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shapes of protrusions in the passageway decoration section. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing a passageway decoration section equipped with multiple protrusions and recesses of different shapes. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in which a second protrusion of the same shape is provided on the first protrusion; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in which a second protrusion of a different amount of protrusion is provided on the first protrusion; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in which a second protrusion of a different shape is provided on the first protrusion; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in which a second protrusion is also provided on the inclined surface of the first protrusion. (a1) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passageway decoration section in which a second protrusion of the same shape as the first protrusion is provided; (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) from the front; and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a passageway decoration section in the front in which a recess of a different shape from (a2) is provided. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part fitted into the opening of a game panel, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in a different form from (a). This is a front view of the game board, showing the lower left and lower right decorative elements of the back decorative unit in their normal state, with the elements moved from their retracted position to their visible position. This is a front view of the game board, showing the lower left and lower right decorative elements on the back in their expanded positions, as shown in Figure 338. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left decorative element of the rear display unit in its normal state, with the unit moved from its retracted position to its appearance position. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear right decorative element of the rear back effect unit in its normal state, with the unit moved from its retracted position to its appearance position. This is a front view of the game board, showing the left and right rear decorative elements of the rear-view display unit in their normal state, with the elements moved from their retracted positions to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear decorative element of the rear display unit in its normal state, with the rear decorative element moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. This is a front view of the game board, showing the front decorative element of the front-back performance unit and the rear left and rear right decorative elements of the rear-back performance unit, respectively, moved from their retracted positions to their appearance positions in the normal state. This is a block diagram illustrating the control configuration of the game board in the fourth embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram showing a magnified view of the outlet sign. (a) is a lower front view of a game board with an outlet marking, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) from the front. This is an explanatory diagram showing a front view of a portion of a game board where the output slot markings are aligned with the pattern of the decorative part. This is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of a game board from the front, where multiple output slots are indicated with varying degrees of prominence. (a) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine in which the output opening is indicated so as to overlap with the performance control unit when viewed from the front, and (b) is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in (a) cut in the center in the left-right direction. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the output gate markings and the LED in a front view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the player seated in front, the output gate markings, and the LED. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a magnified view of the area on the game board where the out-out indicator is located in a front view; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the out-out indicator and the LED in a front view of the game board in (a); and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the player seated in front of the game board in (a), the out-out indicator, and the LED. This is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment. This is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment. This is a left side view of the door frame of the second embodiment. This is a right side view of the door frame of the second embodiment. This is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, seen from the front right. This is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, seen from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is a vertical cross-sectional view of the door frame of the second embodiment. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the intermediate reinforcing frame of the door frame reinforcement unit, seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the intermediate reinforcing frame of the door frame reinforcement unit, seen from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the intermediate reinforcing frame portion in the vertical cross-section of the door frame of the second embodiment. This is an explanatory diagram showing the dimensional relationship of the upper part of the intermediate reinforcement frame. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 1 of the intermediate reinforcing frame in the door frame of the second embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 2 of the intermediate reinforcing frame, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 3 of the intermediate reinforcing frame. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 4 of the intermediate reinforcing frame in the door frame of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 5 of the intermediate reinforcing frame. This is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, plate unit, and performance control unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, plate unit, and performance control unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the rear. This is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, taken from the front after disassembly. This is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, taken from the rear after disassembly. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, handle, handle return spring, and handle touch sensor in the handle unit in a perspective view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) disassembled in a perspective view. This is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, handle, handle return spring, handle touch sensor, and inner base of the handle unit, viewed from the rear in a perspective view. This is a modified example of the handle unit and is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, handle, handle return spring, handle touch sensor, and inner base in a perspective view from the rear. (a) is a perspective view showing the performance control unit in the door frame of the second embodiment with the transparent portion made opaque and the lever operating part not protruding, and (b) is a perspective view showing the performance control unit in (a) with the lever operating part protruding. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the performance control unit, along with the retraction mechanism, from the right side with the lever operating part not protruding, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the lever operating part protruding as in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from the front with the transparent parts made transparent, and (b) is a right side view of the performance control unit in (a). Figure 377 is a front view perspective of the unit reinforcement frame in the performance control unit. This is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the rotating body in the lever operating section. This is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-sectional view of an example of a security measure using a glass unit or the like in a door frame of the second embodiment. Figure 382 is an explanatory diagram showing a security measure using a glass unit and the like, viewed from the rear. This is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 1 of a security measure using a glass unit or the like in a door frame different from those shown in Figures 382 and 383. This is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 2 of security measures using different glass units, etc., from Figure 384.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1, which is one embodiment of the present invention, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 12. Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine, which is one embodiment of the present invention. Figure 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, Figure 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and Figure 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Figure 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front right, Figure 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front left, and Figure 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the rear. Figure 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position, and Figure 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. Figure 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine, disassembled into the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame, viewed from the front. Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine, disassembled into the door frame, game board, main frame, and outer frame, viewed from the rear.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) in a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed to close the front of the outer frame 2, a main body frame 4 that can be opened and closed to support the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front and has a game area 5a that is visible to the player through the door frame 3 and into which the player puts game balls B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart horizontally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the upper left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the upper left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, thereby enabling the main frame 4 to be opened and closed forward, centered on the left side when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is closed, the door frame 3, in cooperation with the speaker unit 620a of the circuit board unit 620 in the main frame 4, forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. This inverts the phase of the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward, allowing the player to hear deeper bass sounds.

The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5, into which the game balls B are inserted, making it visible from the front. It stores the game balls B to be inserted into the game area 5a and is equipped with a handle 195 operated by the player to insert the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. Furthermore, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with a separate performance control unit 301 that can be operated by the player, in addition to the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance control unit 301. This allows the player to enjoy the game not only through gameplay with the game balls B, but also through the operation of the performance control unit 301.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear end can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5; an upper hinge member 510 and a lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable; a main frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main frame base unit 500; a ball launching device 540 for launching game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and a ball launching device for supplying balls from the island equipment of the game hall. The system includes a payout base unit 550 for receiving game balls B, a payout unit 560 for dispensing the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a for powering on the pachinko machine 1, a board unit 620 having a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 covering the rear of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 for locking the space between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a game area 5a where the game is played by inserting game balls B. It also dispenses the game balls B to the player and discharges the used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment in the gaming hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Furthermore, the main frame 4 is attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment in the gaming hall, at the top and bottom of the front left side, and a door frame 3 is attached to it, which can be opened and closed, to close the open front side.

The game board 5 comprises a game area 5a where game balls B are played by the player's operation, a front component 1000 that demarcates the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is roughly rectangular when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcates the rear end of the game area 5a, a circuit board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200 that has a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The system comprises a control unit 1300, a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see Figure 12) located behind the game panel 1100, a performance display device 1600 located in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying predetermined performance images, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is equipped with various performance units capable of performing movable and light-emitting effects according to the game state.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, there are multiple obstacle pins N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement that come into contact with the game balls B, and a general prize entry point 2001, a first start entry point 2002, a gate 2003, a second start entry point 2004, and a large prize entry point 2005 that grant predetermined benefits to the player (for example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) upon receipt or passage of the game balls B. The obstacle pins N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the gate 2003, the second start entry point 2004, and the large prize entry point 2005 are provided on the front unit 2000.

Within the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player can insert game balls B by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy the action of inserting the balls B into the general prize slots 2001, the first starting slot 2002, the gate 2003, the second starting slot 2004, and the large prize slot 2005 within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the game board 5 can entertain players by displaying predetermined animation images on the animation display device 1600, or by performing light-up and movable animations using the front-reverse animation unit 3100, the upper-reverse animation unit 3200, the lower-reverse animation unit 3300, etc., in accordance with the game state that changes when game balls B are played into the game area 5a.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 18. Figure 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Figure 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front, and Figure 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame from the rear. Figure 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a gaming hall or the like. The outer frame 2 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically; an outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20; an outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the upper left end of the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30; and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame 2, in cooperation with the speaker unit 620a of the circuit board unit 620 in the main frame 4, forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Furthermore, it allows the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 to be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

The outer frame 2 allows the upper hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2, through the upper hinge assembly 50 and the lower hinge member 60, can coaxially support the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, enabling the main frame 4 to be mounted so that it can open and close forward, centered on the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, when disassembled and viewed from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate coaxially, and are used to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-back direction, an upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper right side of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a fixed cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy profile. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a on the rear portion of its left side (divided into three equal parts in the front-to-back direction), a bulge 11b on the right side (opposite the recess 11a), and a cavity 11c that penetrates the bulge 11b vertically. The left outer frame member 11 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recess 11a and bulge 11b, while its weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Furthermore, the left outer frame member 11 has multiple grooves extending vertically on both its left and right sides. The grooves on the left side are V-shaped, while the grooves on the right side are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is symmetrically formed with the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the upper outer frame member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 comprises a horizontally extending, flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the front-to-back direction, and a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c into the cavity 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and further abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing screws into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the lower left end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the notch 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing screws into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 and the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 comprises a horizontally extending, flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending briefly to the right from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11, with the rear surface of the contact portion 13d abutting against the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b abutting against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a aligning with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, with the horizontal fixing portion 13a abutting against the upper surface of the left end of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c inserted into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 comprises an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-back direction, an upper right connecting member 22 attached to the upper left end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and a lower hooking member 25 attached to the lower left side of the outer frame right member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a fixed cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy profile. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a on the rear portion of its right side (divided into three equal parts in the front-to-back direction), a bulge 21b on the left side (opposite the recess 21a), and a cavity 21c that penetrates the bulge 21b vertically. The right outer frame member 21 has increased strength and rigidity due to the recess 21a and bulge 21b, while its weight is reduced by the cavity 21c.

Furthermore, the right outer frame member 21 has multiple grooves extending vertically on both its left and right sides. The grooves on the right side are V-shaped, while the grooves on the left side are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed symmetrically to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 comprises a horizontally extending, flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the front-to-back direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the cavity 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and further abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, while screws are screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the lower right end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and screwing screws into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the right outer frame member 21 and the right end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 comprises a horizontally extending, flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat plate-shaped upper horizontal fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and further rearward than the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending briefly to the left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing part 23b from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21, with the rear surface of the contact portion 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a aligning with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, with the horizontal fixing portion 23a abutting against the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c inserted into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to secure the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and includes a flat mounting portion 24a attached to the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a flat hooking piece 24b extending to the left from the front edge of the mounting portion 24a, to which the upper outer frame hook 653 is secured.

The lower hooking member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is attached to the left side of the right outer frame member 21; a flat hooking piece 25b that extends to the left from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and into which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked; and an insertion opening 25c that penetrates the hooking piece 25b from front to back and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame component]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 18. The upper outer frame member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart to the left and right. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-back direction that is approximately the same as the front-to-back width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The length of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 has notches 30a on both the left and right sides, located in the center of the front-to-back direction, that penetrate vertically and are recessed towards the center in the left-to-right direction. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into these notches 30a at both ends and attached accordingly.

Furthermore, the upper frame member 30 has a mounting step 30b at its left end, where the top and front surfaces are recessed compared to the general surface. The upper frame hinge assembly 50, described later, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower outer frame assembly]
The lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 20. Figure 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, disassembled and viewed from the front. The lower outer frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart on the left and right, and also serves to close and decorate the area below the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 comprises an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and outer frame right assembly 20, which are spaced apart to the left and right, and extends to the left and right; a box-shaped front panel member 42 positioned in front of the outer frame lower member 41, extending to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and having an open rear end; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open front, extending to the left and right; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43.

The lower outer frame member 41 has a width in the front-to-back direction that is approximately the same as the front-to-back width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21, a constant thickness in the vertical direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The length of the lower outer frame member 41 in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The lower outer frame member 41 has notches 41a on both the left and right sides, located in the center of the front-to-back direction, that penetrate vertically and are recessed towards the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into these notches 41a at both ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected.

Furthermore, the lower outer frame member 41 is recessed from its upper surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the rear fascia member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and exits from a position slightly towards the rear of the center in the front-to-back direction towards the front end. This recess 41b maximizes the volume of the internal space 40a of the fascia, which is formed by the front fascia member 42 and the rear fascia member 43.

The front panel member 42 extends in the left-right direction to the same length as the lower outer frame member 41, and is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular box shape with a shorter depth in the front-to-back direction relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The front panel member 42, by closing its open rear side with the rear panel member 43, works together with the rear panel member 43 to form the internal space 40a of the front panel, which becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The front panel member 42 has an elongated opening 42a on its front surface near the right end, which penetrates from front to back and extends from left to right.

The rear fascia member 43 extends slightly shorter in the left-right direction than the lower outer frame member 41 and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front fascia member 42 to its front surface, the rear fascia member 43 works in cooperation with the front fascia member 42 to form the internal fascia space 40a, which becomes part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear fascia member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a at the center of its upper surface, extending left and right and protruding upward, communicating with the internal fascia space 40a. The upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined such that it is positioned higher towards the rear from the front end, which coincides with the general upper surface of the rear fascia member 43. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at a 45-degree angle.

The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately one-third the length of the entire rear panel member 43, and a depth in the front-to-back direction that is slightly shorter than the entire depth of the rear panel member 43. Multiple ribs 43b are provided inside the connecting cylinder portion 43a, connecting the front end and the rear end. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the circuit board unit 620 in the main frame 4 is connected to the upper end of this connecting cylinder portion 43a, creating communication with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and forming the enclosure 624.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by preventing the game ball B from accumulating at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, specifically at the portion of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame.

The ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43 and includes a mounting portion 44a that is flat so as to be adjacent to the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame (described later), a first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b on the mounting portion 44a, a vertical wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end projection 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it approaches the rear.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed to a size that allows game balls B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the internal space 40a of the fascia panel, but open to the rear surface of the rear fascia panel member 43. Therefore, game balls B that enter the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the rear fascia panel member 43.

This ball-joint prevention mechanism 44 prevents unauthorized tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted through the gap between the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame (described later). The vertical wall portion 44d, rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, prevents the unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool bends upward upon contact with the vertical wall portion 44d, it will contact the forward-projecting upper end projection 44e located at the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d, preventing further intrusion. Therefore, unauthorized actions can be prevented through the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame.

Incidentally, if a vertical wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, any game balls B that fall onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason will be prevented from moving backward by the vertical wall portion 44d, making it easy for the game balls B to accumulate on the mounting portion 44a. Furthermore, when closing the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the game balls B can get trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, preventing the main frame 4 from being closed.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b of the lower hinge member 60, or through the second discharge port 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from getting caught between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 comprises a pair of guide members 45 positioned spaced apart to the left and right on the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43; a flat plate-shaped grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear; a port member 47 having two cylindrical parts extending front and rear, mounted inside the front panel member 42 to close the opening 42a while sandwiching the grill member 46; and a frame-shaped sealing member 48 positioned at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are positioned so that the lower end of the door frame 3 contacts the outer frame 2 when the main frame 4 is closed. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, making the lower end of the main frame 4 slide easily and facilitating opening and closing.

The grille member 46 is a strip-shaped plate extending in the left-right direction and has multiple fin portions 46b spaced apart in the vertical direction. The fin portions 46b are inclined such that their front ends are higher than their rear ends (see Figure 47). This grille member 46 allows ventilation between the interior of the front panel member 42 (the interior space 40a of the panel) and the exterior through the gaps between the fin portions 46b.

The port member 47 connects the internal space 40a (enclosure 624) of the fascia panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 via the gap between the fin portions 46b of the grill member 46, using two cylinders. The port member 47 is formed with two cylinders of a predetermined inner diameter and length, and by the principle of Helmholtz resonance, it resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main frame speaker 622 towards the rear (inside the enclosure 624), allowing rich bass to be radiated towards the front of the outer frame 2 (towards the player). In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, allowing players to hear deep bass.

The sealing member 48 is compressed between the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. This prevents sound from leaking from the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 through the gap between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

According to the grill member 46 of this embodiment, the air vibrations released from the internal space 40a of the fascia by the main frame speaker 622 can be directed by the multiple inclined vane portions 46b through the notched opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 in the handle cover unit 290 located diagonally upward and forward, into the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 in which the handle unit 180 is housed. This allows the main frame speaker 622 to vibrate and send air into the front cylindrical portion 291a when the player inserts their fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) to rotate the handle 195 (the device for inserting the game ball B), thereby surprising the player and creating an unprecedented effect.

Furthermore, because the port member 47 is open towards the front, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple vane portions 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. Therefore, the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, as well as by other players circulating within the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This allows the sound effects to attract the players' attention, providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided on the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, relative to the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 located on the main frame 4, the volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. This allows for the output of deeper bass sounds, which can entertain players and prevent a decline in their enjoyment.

[2-4. Upper hinge assembly of the outer frame]
The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 21. Figure 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front and above, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and below. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate with a hinge. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 includes an outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, and mounting screws 53 that attach the locking member 52 to the outer frame upper hinge member 51.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 comprises an upper fixing portion 51a that is a horizontally extending flat plate and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30; a flat plate-shaped forward extension portion 51b that extends forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; a bearing groove 51c that extends from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b toward the left and right center of the forward extension portion 51b and penetrates vertically; a flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 51d that extends downward from the left edge of the forward extension portion 51b, around the front edge, to the part where the bearing groove 51c opens, and is a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that extends downward from the edge and is continuous with the lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 (described later) within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a strip-shaped locking body 52a extending front to back, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward to the left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached by mounting screws 53 to the lower surface of the forward-extending portion 51b of the upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame, at a location rearward from the bearing groove 51c.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame, the lock body 52a is able to block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end extends forward so that it can contact the portion of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. In addition, the tip of the elastic portion 52c that extends to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a contacts the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame. The locking member 52 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c so that its front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 52a of the locking member 52 near the front end contacts the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c in front of the lock body 52a, capable of accommodating the upper hinge pin 512 of the upper hinge member 510.

This locking member 52 allows the lock body 52a to be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic part 52c by operating the operating piece 52b. By operating the operating piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the lock body 52a from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, allowing the bearing groove 51c to be fully open. This allows the upper hinge pin 512 to be inserted into the bearing groove 51c or removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower hinge component of the outer frame]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 comprises a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a, a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a point on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a that is further back than the center in the front-to-back direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and an ejection hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a vertically and is sized to allow only one game ball B to pass through. This lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base when viewed from above. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical, with the upper part above the vertical center narrowing to a frustoconical shape. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is mounted near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, slightly to the left. The discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central part of the vertical portion 60b in the front-rear direction, and extends in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The lower outer frame hinge member 60, when assembled to the outer frame 2, has its rear horizontal portion 60a resting on the mounting portion 44a of the rear fascia member 43 on the lower outer frame assembly 40, and is fixed to the rear fascia member 43 with screws (not shown). The vertical portion 60b is attached to the right side of the left outer frame member 11, in front of the bulging portion 11b, with screws (not shown). This lower outer frame hinge member 60 can be attached to the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner by inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, in cooperation with the upper outer frame hinge member 51.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40. This allows the game balls B on the horizontal section 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when closing the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 will roll towards the rear where the gap is wider as the main frame 4 is closed, and will be discharged through the discharge hole 60d. In this case, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position approximately the same as the rear end of the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily prevent the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from rolling further behind the main frame 4 by discharging them through the discharge hole 60d, and thus making it less likely for the game balls B to get stuck in the area of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame from the front right, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame from the front left, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed as a rectangle extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2. It is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4, allowing it to be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5, where the game balls B are inserted, allowing it to be visible from the front. It stores the game balls B for insertion into the game area 5a and includes a handle 195 operated by the player to insert the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. Furthermore, the door frame 3 serves to decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 consists of a rectangular door frame base unit 100 with an outer shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180. The system comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 mounted on the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left door frame side unit 420 mounted on the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right door frame side unit 430 mounted on the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top door frame unit 450 mounted on the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left door frame side unit 420 and the right door frame side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 comprises a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that extends vertically through the front and back, forming a rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear; a main door frame relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end when viewed from the rear; a sub-door frame relay board 105 attached to the left of the main door frame relay board 104 when viewed from the rear; a rear handle relay board 106 attached to the left of the sub-door frame relay board 105 when viewed from the rear; a door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the main door frame relay board 104 and a part of the sub-door frame relay board 105 from the rear; a rear handle relay board cover 108 that covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear; and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door frame lower hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, an opening and closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 above the handle rear relay board 106, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view on the right side.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and provide rigidity. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and the lower door frame hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 works in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open, close, lock, and lock the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

Furthermore, the ball supply unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 on the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that were launched by the ball launching device 540 but did not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides game balls B dispensed from the payout device 580 to either the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 is equipped with a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player. The handle unit 180 is used to launch game balls B from the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 using the ball launcher 540, by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers its outer circumference.

[3-1. Overall configuration of the door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, disassembled into its main components, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, disassembled into its main components.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 on a hinged rotatable hinge on its left side when viewed from the front. It allows the front of the main frame 4 to be opened and closed, while also allowing the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 comprises a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 with an elongated vertical shape, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, specifically at the lower right corner when viewed from the rear.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a main door frame relay board 104 mounted near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear of the door frame base 101, a sub-door frame relay board 105 mounted to the left of the main door frame relay board 104 at the lower rear of the door frame base 101, a rear handle relay board 106 mounted to the left of the sub-door frame relay board 105 at the lower rear of the door frame base 101, a door frame relay board cover 107 mounted on the rear of the door frame base 101 that covers the main door frame relay board 104 and a portion of the sub-door frame relay board 105 from the rear, a rear handle relay board cover 108 mounted on the rear of the door frame base 101 that covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear, and a cable cover 109 mounted on the rear of the door frame base 101 that covers the wiring cable.

Furthermore, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door frame lower hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, an opening and closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 above the handle rear relay board 106, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view on the right side.

The door frame base unit 100 is fitted with the following components: a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 at the lower front corner; a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a; a left side unit 420 on the left outer front of the door window 101a; a right side unit 430 on the right outer front of the door window 101a; and a top unit 450 on the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a rectangular shape with an extended vertical outer shape when viewed from the front. The door frame base 101 has a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner circumference shape that is roughly rectangular with an extended vertical shape when viewed from the front. The upper edge and both left and right edges that form the inner circumference of the door window 101a are close to the outer perimeter of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower edge that forms the inner circumference is located at a height of approximately 1/3 of the height from the lower end of the door frame base 101 in the vertical direction. In this way, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. This door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 includes a handle mounting surface 101b (see Figure 42, etc.) formed at the lower right corner of the front view, with the left end slightly protruding forward compared to the right end; a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a, into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted; and a ball feeding opening 101e that penetrates front to back on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b in a front view, allowing the entry point 141a and ball exit point 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 to face forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 includes a lower ball passage opening 101f located slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction and extending from front to back at approximately the same height as the handle mounting surface 101b, allowing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward; an upper ball passage opening 101g located near the left end in the front view, adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a, allowing the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to face forward; and a glass unit mounting portion 101h recessed from the rear to the front along the inner circumference of the door window 101a, into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has multiple vertically elongated slits 101i formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that penetrate from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear of the multiple slits 101i. Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 of the tray unit 200 is located at the front of the multiple slits 101i, while the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a of the main frame 4 is located at the rear, allowing sound from the main frame speaker 622 to be radiated forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through-hole 101j that penetrates from front to back, located below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting surface 101b. This through-hole 101j is through which a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 and the dish unit 200 is inserted, and is formed to coincide with the through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later.

[3-1b. Speaker Duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This allows the sound radiated (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 to be guided forward without diffusion, and can be effectively guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the player) through the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

Furthermore, the speaker duct 103 is equipped with a cable holder 103a on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion to hold the connecting cable 503. The cable holder 103a is positioned to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 in a front view, and holds the connecting cable 503, which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, so that it extends toward the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub-relay board, handle rear relay board]
The main relay board 104, sub-relay board 105, and rear handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The main relay board 104 is formed in the shape of a rectangle that extends vertically and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the rear handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4, and a part of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an external shape that is an inverted L-shape, with a vertically extending rectangle on the upper right side of the front view and a horizontally extending rectangle on the right side of the upper part. It is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending portion is adjacent to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 serves to relay connections between the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate unit 200, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the door frame top relay board of the door frame top unit 450, etc., and the interface board 635 of the main frame 4. The remaining portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to it.

The main door frame relay board 104 and the sub-door frame relay board 105 are mounted on the door frame base 101 so that their connection terminals protrude towards the rear. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the upper and lower extending portions of the main door frame relay board 104 and the sub-door frame relay board 105 are covered at the rear by the door frame relay board cover 107, while the remaining portion of the sub-door frame relay board 105 is covered at the rear by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a rectangular shape with an outer shape extending to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball supply opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear handle relay board 106 serves to relay connections between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball supply solenoid 145 of the ball supply unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the rear handle relay board 106 is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, covering the rear side of a portion of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 (the inverted L-shaped portion extending upwards and downwards). The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left side open when viewed from the front. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, which cover the rear side, are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 can be inserted into the interior from the open left side and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the tray unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, with openings for passing the wiring cable near the left end of the front and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat door frame base 101 and providing rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that extend vertically and are spaced apart to the left and right, an upper reinforcement frame 113 that extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position slightly above the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and which extends to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and a number of hooking members 116 that are attached vertically spaced apart to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 and to which the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 is hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple through-holes that are spaced apart vertically and penetrate through in the front-to-back direction. These through-holes are through which the tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends horizontally with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally with a width wider vertically than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a rectangular notch 114a near its left end, extending downward from the upper end, and a through-hole 114b near its right end, extending front to back. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 comprises a pair of rear sections, spaced apart to the left and right and formed as flat rectangular plates extending vertically in a front view; a pair of side sections, each extending forward in a flat plate shape from the opposite sides of the pair of rear sections; and a flat front section connecting the front ends of the pair of forward extensions. In plan view, the cylinder mounting frame 115 has a convex shape projecting forward. The left rear section of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear section is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front section of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hooking member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, at the location of the through-hole that penetrates from front to back. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked onto these hooking members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113, intermediate reinforcing frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hooking member 116, which constitute the door frame reinforcement unit 110, are formed by stamping and bending metal plates using press molding. These are assembled using rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is assembled such that the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are aligned along the left, right, and top edges of the door frame base 101, while the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by multiple screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 align with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can hinge rotatably in cooperation with the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame. The upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, an upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 comprises a rectangular, flat mounting piece 121a in front view, and flat, protruding pieces 121b extending forward from the upper and lower edges of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 penetrates from below near the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b on the hinge bracket 121. The upper end extends above the upper protruding piece 121b, while the horizontally extending portion abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 on the main frame upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to the portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b on the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around the vertically extending portion of the upper hinge pin 122 between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b on the hinge bracket 121. This lock spring 124 biases the upper hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124. The horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 abuts against the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b, thereby restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

The upper hinge assembly 120 can move the entire upper hinge pin 122 downward by moving the horizontally extending lower end portion of the upper hinge pin 122 downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, thereby allowing the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 to retract below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 can be inserted into and removed from the upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510 from below. By inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 into the upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3, as viewed from the front, can be supported relative to the main frame 4 in a hinge-rotatable manner.

Furthermore, the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame has a vertically extending portion of the upper hinge pin 122 that is coaxial with the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125, which will be described later. This allows the door frame 3 to rotate smoothly relative to the main frame 4 through the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1g. Door frame lower hinge component]
The lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in a front view. The lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can hinge rotatably in cooperation with the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and comprises a rectangular, flat mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat projection piece 125b extending forward from the lower edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the projection piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and projection piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod with a tapered chamfer on the outer circumference of its lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to the projection piece 125b at a location coaxial with the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120.

This lower door frame hinge member 125 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotatably supported relative to the main frame 4 by inserting the lower door frame hinge pin 126 into the lower door frame hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder Lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the front and rear, (c) is a perspective view of a cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) viewed from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) viewed from the front after disassembly, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) viewed from the rear after disassembly. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and works in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, and to open, close, lock, and lock the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending front to back, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 provided at the rear of the cylinder body 131 that rotates together with the rotation of the correct key inserted into the keyhole 132.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (more specifically, a conical shape with a diameter increasing towards the rear), and has a pair of notches cut out from the rear end towards the front at positions opposite each other on the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 is inserted from the rear. The pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches, thereby transmitting the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) to the transmission cylinder 654, allowing it to rotate.

To elaborate further, the cylinder lock 130 comprises: a first cam member 134 provided on the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and rotating together with the rotation of the correct key inserted into the keyhole 132; a second cam member 135 mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 at a portion below the cylinder body 131 so as to be rotatable around a front-rear axis; a strip-shaped first arm 136, whose upper end is rotatably mounted to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and whose lower end is rotatably mounted to the right of the rotation center of the second cam member 135; and a strip-shaped second arm 137, whose upper end is rotatably mounted below the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and whose lower end is rotatably mounted below the rotation center of the second cam member 135.

Furthermore, the cylinder lock 130 includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, the first cam member 134, the first arm 136, and the second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133); and rivets 139 that rotatably attach the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively.

The first cam member 134 has its upper end attached to the rear side of the first arm 136, and its upper end attached to the front side of the second arm 137. The second cam member 135 is rotatably mounted from the rear by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is integrally rotatably mounted on the rear side of the cylinder mounting frame 115, sandwiching the front surface. The second cam member 135 has its lower end attached to the front side of the first arm 136, and its lower end attached to the front side of the second arm 137, further forward than the first arm 136.

The first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned such that the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached and the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached are separated by a 90-degree angle around their respective axes of rotation. Furthermore, the portion to which the first arm 136 is attached is located further from the center of rotation than the portion to which the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is detachably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 by screws (not shown) at its upper end, with the shaft portions 138a, which protrude outward in a cylindrical shape from the lower ends of both the left and right sides, being locked into the L-shaped locking slits 115b of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, cylinder body 131, rotation transmission member 133, first cam member 134, second cam member 135, first arm 136, and second arm 137, all made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

Here, we will describe a conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that penetrates the front portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front portion. In this cylinder lock 130A, a rotational transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment will be described. In conventional cylinder locks 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the rotational transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131. In contrast, in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotational transmission member 133 is provided at a position separated downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In its normal state, as shown in Figure 36(a), the cylinder lock 130 has its upper and lower ends attached to the right-hand side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, while the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower-hand side of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated by a standard key in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions by 90 degrees each, from its normal position.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using the key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, since the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a significant force acts on the second cam member 135 to rotate it counterclockwise. In contrast, since the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second cam member 135 to rotate it counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The upward force acting due to this counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the lateral distance between the point where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, the upward force acting on the first arm 136 decreases, while the upward force acting on the second arm 137 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 in the counterclockwise direction exceeds 45 degrees from its normal state, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates counterclockwise mainly via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated up to a 90-degree angle counterclockwise from its normal state (see Figure 36(b)).

Furthermore, when using the key to rotate the device 90 degrees counterclockwise from its normal position back to its normal position by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the operation will be reversed compared to the above.

On the other hand, when the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using a key inserted into the keyhole 132 from the normal state, the first arm 136, whose upper end is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, moves downward, while the second arm 137, whose upper end is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, moves upward. In this case, because the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134, a significant force acts on the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise. In contrast, because the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the rotation center of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 is proportional to the lateral distance between the point where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, the force exerted by the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, while the force exerted by the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the rotation angle of the first cam member 134 exceeds 45 degrees clockwise from its normal position, the force exerted by the second arm 137 on rotating the second cam member 135 becomes greater than that of the first arm 136. As a result, the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise primarily via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated up to a 90-degree angle clockwise from its normal position (see Figure 36(c)).

Furthermore, when using the key to rotate the device 90 degrees clockwise from its normal position back to its normal position by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise, the operation will be reversed compared to the above.

Thus, in this embodiment of the cylinder lock 130, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, which are mounted at a 90-degree phase from each other, thereby transmitting rotation. Therefore, regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132), rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, causing the second cam member 135 (the rotation transmission member 133) to rotate. This allows for smooth locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, according to the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, by transmitting rotation using the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4) can be positioned at a different location from the axis of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, without changing the locking unit 650, the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 can be changed to any desired position. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be placed in a location that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, thus providing a highly decorative pachinko machine 1 for the door frame 3.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 is changed, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4. Therefore, the locking unit 650 can be reused, and the increase in costs for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In contrast, in conventional cylinder locks 130A, the rotational transmission member 133 is located at the rear of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, a fraudster who is aware of this configuration could insert a tool from the front into the rear of the cylinder body 131 and illegally rotate the rotational transmission member 133, thereby opening the door frame 3 and committing fraud. In contrast, the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment has the rotational transmission member 133 located away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if a tool is inserted into the rear of the cylinder body 131 to attempt to rotate the rotational transmission member 133, the rotational transmission member 133 is not present in that location. This prevents the rotation of the rotational transmission member 133, thus preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 at points separated by a 90-degree rotation angle relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portion of one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 lies on a straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the points furthest from the straight line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, preventing the transmission of rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other arm can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. This prevents significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134, allowing the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to rotate smoothly, facilitating unlocking and locking. Furthermore, it prevents the key from being forcibly rotated, thus preventing damage to the key.

Furthermore, since the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by the two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, to the rotation transmission member 133 located at an eccentric position, even if one arm is damaged for any reason, the rotation can still be transmitted by the remaining arm, thus providing a highly reliable cylinder lock 130 for the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the smooth, rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137 transmit the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to the rotation transmission member 133, which is positioned at an eccentric location, if rotation were transmitted by gears, there would be a risk that the tip of a tool could catch on the teeth of the gears, causing the gears to rotate and thus the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 smooth and rod-shaped, it is difficult for the tip of a tool to catch on the first arm 136 or second arm 137, thus preventing the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by the movement of the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the locking unit 650 from being tampered with and unlocking the door frame 3 or main body frame 4.

In this embodiment, the cylinder lock 130 uses a rotation transmission mechanism that transmits the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, employing a first arm 136 and a second arm 137. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using gears and a rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and a chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and a belt, etc., may also be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the rear. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after it has been disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and anti-tampering member have been removed and viewed from the rear. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4, and can also remove the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball release button 222.

The ball supply unit 140 has a box-shaped front cover 141 that is open at the rear and has an entry port 141a that penetrates in the front-to-back direction and a ball removal port 141b that opens below the entry port 141a, into which game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a rear cover 142 that is open at the front and closes the rear end of the front cover 141 and has a ball supply port 142a for supplying game balls B that have entered through the entry port 141a of the front cover 141 to the ball launching device 540, and the rear cover 142 and The system includes a ball removal member 143 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the front cover 141, and has a partition portion 143a that separates the entry port 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of the front cover 141; a ball feeding member 144 that feeds the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142, and is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142; and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that rotates the ball feeding member 144.

As shown in the figure, in a front view, the ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 positioned to the right of the inlet 141a, the ball removal member 143 positioned to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 positioned to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c, formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 143, to the left of the ball extraction opening 141b when viewed from the front. The operating rod 143c of the ball extraction member 143, described later, extends forward from this slit 141c. Furthermore, the upper part of the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance opening 141a, and is designed to close, from the rear, the portion of the ball feeding guide path 241b and ball extraction guide path 241c of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball extraction rear unit 240 that is open to the rear when the door frame 3 is assembled.

The ball removal member 143 includes a partition portion 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b below the entrance 141a, with its upper surface becoming lower toward the ball feeding member 144; a rotating rod portion 143b that extends downward from the end of the partition portion 143a opposite to the ball feeding member 144, and bends in a V-shape toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b from near the middle in the vertical direction, with its lower end supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction; a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b; and a weight portion 143d that protrudes from the side of the rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c toward the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball release member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see Figure 37(a)). The operating rod 143c contacts the upper end (upper surface) of the operating transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball release slider 242, which moves downward when the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed, via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 comprises a fan-shaped blocking section 144a in plan view, which faces the entrance 141a and the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 and extends vertically towards the rotation axis; a ball holding section 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end of the blocking section 144a toward the rotation axis; and a rod-shaped shaft section 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding section 144b. The blocking section 144a and the ball holding section 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of approximately 180° around the rotation axis. The ball holding section 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft section 144c, which is positioned eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 is designed to rotate between a supply position where the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position where the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game balls B held in the ball holding portion 144b are supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and game balls B that have entered the partition portion 143a from the entry port 141a are prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and remain on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the shaft portion 144c side closes the ball supply opening 142a, so that only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held inside the ball holding portion 144b.

Furthermore, the ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings vertically when driven (energized) by the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction due to the vertical swinging movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and also rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding actuation rod 146 is equipped with an iron plate 146a at the lower part of the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding actuation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 (the right end) is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends front to back. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the generated magnetic force pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upwards), causing the rod 146 to rotate around the right end so that the left end, which is closer to the ball feeding crank 147, moves upward. Subsequently, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts on it, causing it to rotate around the right end so that the left end, which is closer to the ball feeding crank 147, moves downward, returning it to its initial state. As a result, the ball feeding rod 146, at its left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147, swings vertically due to the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 comprises an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding actuation rod 146; a shaft portion 147b positioned on the opposite side of the engaging portion 147a from the side engaging with the ball feeding actuation rod 146, and pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142; and a transmission portion 147c extending upward from the shaft portion 147b and engaging with a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c (see Figure 38(b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the pivot center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around its front-to-back axis via the ball feeding crank 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding actuation rod 146 upward through the ball feeding actuation rod 146.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal operation), the ball feeding actuation rod 146 of the ball feeding unit 140 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip is positioned downwards, and in this state the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding actuation rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upwards, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 144 can send (supply) the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540. The drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in this ball feeding unit 140 is controlled synchronously with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see Figure 169) of the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, the ball feeding unit 140 is subjected to a moment that causes it to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front, either by the rotatably supported ball removal member 143 or the weight portion 143d. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted because the operating rod 143c, which protrudes forward from the ball removal member 143, abuts against the upper end of the operating transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is operated by pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entry point 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, preventing game balls B from entering the ball removal opening 141b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper tray ball release button 222 of the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball release slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, and as the actuation transmission unit 242b moves downward, the actuation rod 143c also moves relatively downward. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, the ball release member 143 rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition 143a moves from between the entry port 141a and the ball release port 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered from the entry port 141a falls towards the ball release port 141b, is discharged from the ball release port 141b into the ball release guide path 241c of the upper tray ball release unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

Furthermore, the upper tray ball-removal slider 242, which has an operating transmission section 242b that contacts the operating rod 143c of the ball-removal member 143, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if the game ball B is forcefully supplied onto the partition section 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the operating rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball-removal member 143 and other components, and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition section 143a.

Furthermore, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see Figure 38(b), etc.) formed in the upper right corner of the rear view of the ball supply opening 142a of the rear cover 142, which is recessed forward. An anti-tampering member 148 is mounted within this mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is made of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably mounted from the rear side within the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142.

The anti-tampering member 148 has a rectangular shape extending horizontally when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper portion 148a and a lower portion 148b, separated vertically at approximately the center of the vertical direction, at a predetermined distance from the right edge to the left; and inclined portions 148c, each formed in a C-chamfer shape at the tip side (right end side when viewed from the front) of the opposing edges of the upper portion 148a and the lower portion 148b. The upper portion 148a of the anti-tampering member 148 is bent so that its right end protrudes backward when viewed from the front relative to the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. The lower portion 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the anti-tampering member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper portion 148a and the lower portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens towards the right.

The anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper portion 148a and the lower portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball supply opening 142a.

According to this anti-fraud member 148, when a fraudulent act is attempted in which a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached is launched from the upper tray through the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540, and the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B is manipulated to move the fraudulent game ball B in and out of the first start opening 2002, the force of the fraudulent game ball B launched (shot) by the ball launching device 540 causes the string attached to the fraudulent game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then cut by the V-shaped narrowed portion formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball B with a string attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower right side of the rear of the door frame base 101 in a rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is for guiding game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 and have not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and for guiding game balls B dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 comprises a shallow, box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 and with the front open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The foul cover unit 150 includes a through-ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner in a front view, connecting the lower normal discharge passage 610a of the lower full-ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full-ball receiving port 150b that opens towards the rear at the lower right side of the through-ball passage 150a in a front view, and is capable of communicating with the lower full-ball discharge passage 610b of the lower full-ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 includes a foul ball receiving port 150c, which opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b in a front view and receives game balls B (foul balls) that were launched by the ball launching device 540 of the main frame 4 but did not reach the game area 5a; and a ball discharge port 150d, which opens forward near the lower right corner in a front view and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward, and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e formed between the full ball receiving opening 150b and the foul ball receiving opening 150c and the ball discharge opening 150d by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152, and having a width sufficient to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through-ball passage 150a is formed spanning both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed between the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 comprises a flat, movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the lid member 152; a full-tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e; and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

This foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e when the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is full of game balls B and no more game balls B are released from the ball discharge port 150d towards the lower tray 202. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that its upper end moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full-tray detection sensor 154. This allows it to be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, and when the full-tray detection sensor 154 detects that it is full, it stops the dispensing of any more game balls B and notifies the player or staff of the gaming hall to encourage them to clear the lower tray 202.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit body 151 and below the through-ball passage 150a. It has a door opening/closing contact portion 150f that can contact the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full-ball passage unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (described later) of the main body frame 4 (see Figure 90). The door opening/closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as its rear surface moves downward. When the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 contacts this door opening/closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream end (front opening) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full-ball payout passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass Unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is detachably installed by being inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear, so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the player's side (front), while also closing the front of the game area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h; two transparent glass plates 162 that enclose the inside of the glass frame 161 and whose outer circumferences are attached to the glass frame 161; and a pair of glass unit mounting members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a strip-shaped locking piece 161b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 are capable of contacting the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see Figure 96). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart front to back so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction, and a rod-shaped projection portion 163b that protrudes from the base portion 163a perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the two upper corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163, which is attached to the door frame base 101, so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 from above, and bring the front end of the glass frame 161 into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, bringing the protruding portion 163b into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This attaches the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, follow the reverse procedure described above. This allows the glass unit 160 to be detachably attached to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

Furthermore, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is positioned below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibrations or other forces act on the glass unit mounting member 163, it will not rotate to a position where the protruding portion 163b is above the base portion 163a. Consequently, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released spontaneously, and the glass unit 160 will not spontaneously detach from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security Cover]
The security cover 170 on the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 comprises a flat main body portion 171 whose outer circumference is formed into a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection 172 that protrudes a short distance to the rear along the outer edge of the main body portion 171, and a pair of locking pieces 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, protrude forward of the main body portion 171, and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to follow the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to follow a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out-guiding section 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the aforementioned component 1000, and is designed so that it does not protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projection 172 is formed along almost the entire circumference of the outer edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow, box-like shape that opens to the rear, due to the main body 171 and the rear projection 172, resulting in high strength and rigidity. Furthermore, the rear projection 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171, distinct from its outer edge. This rear projection 172, protruding rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171, is formed to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the rear projection 172 is not formed in the portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game balls B (launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 do not come into contact with the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, and thus do not obstruct the entry of the game balls B into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front of the main body portion 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion protruding rearward from the lower edge of the main body portion 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Furthermore, the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170, which protrudes rearward from the lower edge of the main body portion 171, protrudes further rearward than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a from below the front of the game board 5 through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, thus preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle Unit and Handle Cover Unit]
The handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the parts of the handle unit and handle cover unit in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in Figure 1. Note that in Figure 46, only the door frame 3 is shown, with the outer frame 2 and main frame 4 omitted.

In this embodiment, the handle unit 180, together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer circumference, is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the tray unit 200. By operating it, the player can launch the game balls B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, let's describe the handle unit 180. The handle unit 180 comprises a handle base 181, whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 (described later); a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181; a plurality of handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided to the handle cover base 291 (described later); a disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end of the handle 195; a handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface; and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 at the rear of the handle 195, a shaft member 187 to which the handle 195 is attached at its front end and which is rotatably mounted by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer circumference, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 having a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and being sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end to the handle 195, which biases the handle 195 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end to the transmission gear 188, which biases the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, a single-shot button 193 whose tip protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer circumference of the handle base 181 in a front view, and whose base end is rotatably mounted on the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 comprises a cylindrical base portion 181a extending front to back, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and three groove portions 181c that are recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a, extending axially and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290. Furthermore, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291. Furthermore, with the protrusions 291d inserted into each of the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 comprises a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (three in this case) spoke portions 195b extending radially outward from the central hub portion 195a at circumferential intervals, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the ends of the multiple spoke portions 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-rear direction, and a locking projection 195e protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center relative to the slits 195d, to which the other end of the handle return spring 190 is engaged. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of a conventional pachinko machine handle.

The three spoke sections 195b of the handle 195 are arranged such that, when the handle 195 is in a free state (not rotating), two spoke sections 195b extend from a single spoke section 195b that extends horizontally to the left from the central hub section 195a, at 120-degree angles in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions, respectively. The three spoke sections 195b extend to a length such that a gap is formed between the central hub section 195a and the outer ring section 195c, allowing the player's fingers to be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is located coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in an annular shape with a fixed cross-sectional shape, where the curved side of the U-shape faces forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be translucent throughout, and a portion of it, from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c, is electrically continuous with plating. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect a touch on the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be inserted even when the outer ring portion 195c is rotated.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. The three handle guides 196 are mounted such that the guide portion 196a is positioned behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, with the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195. The handle guide 196's movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described later) into the inside of the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disc shape with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and has three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from its rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 by passing through the slit 195d of the handle 195 from the front. Because the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 pass through the slit 195d of the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a abut against the circumferential ends of the slit 195d, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in a triple concentric circle arrangement: one in the center, three on the middle circumference at regular intervals, and six along the outer circumference at regular intervals. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: the one in the center, the three in the middle, the two on the upper left of the outer circumference, the two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and the two on the lower part of the outer circumference (see Figure 72). The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b, each with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and is configured to control the 10 LEDs 184a (divided into five groups) using a total of 15 systems (3 systems per group) to ensure full-color illumination.

The handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires (though not shown in the diagram): two power lines (one of which is a ground wire) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED drivers 184b; one control signal line for receiving commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED drivers 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. The LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board). In response to that command, it can cause the ten LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

Thus, because this handle decoration board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (in this case, in sets) control the illumination of more LEDs 184a than the number of wires constituting the connected wiring cable. This reduces the number of wires and simplifies the electrical wiring configuration.

The front lens 185 of the handlebar has a rounded, forward-protruding front surface and is translucent. Inside the front lens 185 is a three-dimensionally formed lens element made of a transparent material. This front lens 185 can be illuminated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front of the handlebar decoration substrate 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor. When the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, by rotating the handle 195 and changing the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 (described later) changes according to that internal resistance, allowing the game ball B to be launched into the game area 5a with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When a player touches the handle 195, the sensor detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. When the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact and the handle 195 is rotated, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 receives the detection signal, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be launched.

Therefore, even if a player attempts to rotate the handle 195 without touching it, and tries to launch the game ball B into the game area 5a, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. As a result, the launch solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be launched. This prevents players from rotating the handle 195 in a way that is not intended, thereby reducing the load (burden) on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects when the player presses the single-shot button 193. When this sensor detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the drive of the launch solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the launch of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without having to reverse the rotation of the handle 195. Furthermore, by releasing the pressure on the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be launched into the game area 5a again with the same force as before the single-shot button 193 was pressed.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 comprises: a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180 rearward from the handle 195 and whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101; an inner 292 that covers the outer circumference of the handle cover base 291 and whose rear end is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200; an annular handle cover decorative substrate 293 provided in front of the inner 292 and on which multiple LEDs 293a are mounted; an annular substrate cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative substrate 293 from the front; and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer circumference of the inner 292 and whose rear end is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 comprises a cylindrical front section 291a extending front to back with an inner diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer ring section 195c of the handle 195; a middle wall section 291b extending forward from the rear end of the front section 291a such that its inner diameter decreases as it moves forward; a cylindrical rear section 291c extending front to back, penetrating the middle wall section 291b and having an inner diameter that allows insertion of the base section 181a of the handle base 181; and multiple (three in this case) protrusions 291d projecting inward from the inner circumference of the rear section 291c and extending front to back, positioned at locations corresponding to the groove section 181c of the handle base 181 in the circumferential direction.

Furthermore, the handle cover base 291 includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion behind the front end of the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a, a cylindrical outer cylinder portion 291f projecting forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a, a guide piece 291g projecting outward from the front cylinder portion 291a in the portion between the front end of the front cylinder portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the front cylinder portion 291a.

The inner wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends in an arc shape with a cross-section that bulges outward from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to near the center in the front-rear direction. The rear cylindrical portion 291c is attached at its rear end to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear cylindrical portion 291c is formed to the same length as the base portion 181a of the handle base 181, and the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into it. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181, and by being inserted into the groove portions 181c, the handle base 181 can be made non-rotatable relative to the handle base 181. The outer cylindrical portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. In this handle cover base 291, multiple triangular ribs are provided circumferentially, connecting the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer circumferential surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a, from the center between the outer circumference of the front cylinder portion 291a and the inner circumference of the outer cylinder portion 291f, to a position closer to the front cylinder portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends circumferentially over a length of approximately 110 degrees, and three of them are provided circumferentially at 10-degree intervals. By inserting the rear end of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 in the handle unit 180 behind the guide piece 291g and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g can be positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, thereby restricting the forward and backward movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195).

The opening 291h extends from the rear end of the front cylindrical portion 291a to the vicinity of the flange portion 291e in the front-to-back direction, and its circumferential size is within an angle range of approximately 90 degrees. It penetrates the front cylindrical portion 291a.

The inner part 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e; a leg portion 292b extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the base portion 292a; and a plurality (four in this case) of notches 292c that are cut out from the rear end of the leg portion 292b to the vicinity of the base portion 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The base portion 292a is positioned behind the flange portion 291e, into which the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted from the front. The leg portion 292b extends in a curved shape that bulges outward, and its rear end is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the upper and lower portions and the left and right portions of the leg portion 292b, respectively.

The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative substrate 293 is mounted with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b having a unique address for emitting light from each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a single row with spacing in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups: two on the lower left, two on the left, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right, and two on the lower right (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 18 systems in total (3 systems per group) so that each of the 10 LEDs 293a divided into 6 groups can emit light in full color.

The handle cover decorative circuit board 293 has a wiring cable consisting of four wires, although not shown in the diagram: two power lines (one of which is a ground wire) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and LED drivers 293b; one control signal line for receiving commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED drivers 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. The LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative circuit board 293 receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board). In response to that command, it can cause the twelve LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The base plate cover 294 has an annular front plate portion 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and approximately the same outer diameter as the base portion 292a of the inner 292, and a cylindrical side plate portion 294b whose outer peripheral edge of the front plate portion 294a extends shortly to the rear. In this base plate cover 294, the front plate portion 294a is positioned between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative base plate 293, and the side plate portion 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner diameter the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291. It is formed in a spindle-shaped (igloo-shaped, bowl-shaped, etc.) cylindrical form that bulges towards the rear, and has multiple (four in this case) notched openings 295b extending circumferentially from the rear end towards the front. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer circumference of the inner 292, with the multiple notched openings 295b aligned with the notches 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the plate unit body 252 of the plate unit 200 via the inner 292.

The steering wheel cover 295 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and light transmittances. More specifically, the steering wheel cover 295 is molded in two colors using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming circular and radial patterns. In other words, the circular and radial patterns visible on the surface of the steering wheel cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and these patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). Note that when molding the steering wheel cover 295, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in Figure 46 and other figures, in this embodiment, when assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the handle unit 180 and the handle cover unit 290 have the portion of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 inserted inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, while the handle 195 and the front handle lens 185 are positioned in front of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101, sandwiching the portion that closes the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290.

The handle 195 of this handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a that is rotatably supported by the handle base 181. Furthermore, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195a is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to its rear side. The rear end of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196a is inserted (locked) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, thereby restricting movement in the front-rear direction (axial direction) while allowing it to rotatably support the handle.

The handle 195 and the handle cover unit 290, including the handle cover base 291, inner 292, substrate cover 294, and handle cover 295, are formed to be translucent. By illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decorative substrate 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated. Furthermore, the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front cylindrical portion 291a) and the handle cover 295 can also be illuminated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching notched openings 295b and 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner 292. Therefore, when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and the bottom that communicate with the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This alleviates the player's anxiety about inserting their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

Furthermore, the upper notched opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper notched portion 292c of the inner part 292) is closed by the right-hand decorative unit 275 and the right-side unit 430 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the steering wheel cover unit 290 has a front cylindrical portion 291a of the steering wheel cover base 291 into which the rear side of the steering wheel unit 180 is inserted. This front cylindrical portion 291a communicates with the lower notches 292c and 295b of the inner 292 and steering wheel cover 295, respectively, through an opening 291h (see Figure 47). This allows liquids such as beverages or game balls B to enter the front cylindrical portion 291a of the steering wheel cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the steering wheel 195, and then be discharged downwards through the lower opening 291h, notch 292c, and 295b of the steering wheel cover unit 290.

Furthermore, if liquid or game balls B enter the notched openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can be discharged downwards through the gap between the front cylinder portion 291a and the leg portion 292b of the inner 292, via the lower notched opening 295b.

Furthermore, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the lower notch 292c of the inner 292, and the lower notched opening 295b of the handle cover 295 are located on the extension of the inclination direction of the fin portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, as shown in Figure 47. This allows the wind (wind pressure) released diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the fin portion 46b due to the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front cylinder portion 291a through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notched opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts their fingers into the inside of the handle cover 295 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for inserting the game ball B), the main body speaker 622 vibrates, sending air into the front cylindrical portion 291a. This can surprise the player and create an unprecedented visual effect.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a notched opening 295b, when opening the door frame 3 or the main frame 4, one can place a finger on the notched opening 295b on the right side and pull, thus serving as a handle for opening the door frame 3, etc.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 is plated up to the outer ring portion 195c, the handle touch sensor 192 can detect touch on the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be inserted even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a notched opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping it with fingers on the outer ring portion 195c and the notched opening 295b. This allows the player to continuously drive the game balls B into the game area 5a with a consistent force without having to continuously twist their hand. Thus, because the handle 195 can be rotated in various ways to drive the game balls B, a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows the player to select a driving operation suitable for them.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that, in a plan view, the right end is positioned further back than the left end, and it faces outward (towards the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180, which is attached via the handle cover base 291, is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined so that it faces outward from the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1) and is fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 and allows for comfortable and natural rotation.

As described above, according to the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is provided so as to be openable and closable with the left side as the axis and which closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 so that it can be seen from the front. The handle 195 has a disc-shaped central hub portion 195a, a plurality of spoke portions 195b that protrude radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c that connects the tips of the plurality of spoke portions 195b. A cylindrical handle cover unit extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. Because of the inclusion of handle 290, the handle 195 and handle cover unit 290, which have never been seen before, are visible in the area where the handle is normally located on a pachinko machine. This creates a strong impact on players, attracting their attention and increasing their desire to play this pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, it makes it easier for players browsing a gaming hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed to choose it as their preferred machine to play.

Furthermore, since the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, when the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a, if the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's fingers are inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This provides the player with a different feel when operating the handle 195 compared to conventional pachinko machine handles, allowing for a new sensation in shooting the game ball B and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Then, when the player operates the handle 195, the main frame speaker 622, which is provided in the speaker unit 620a of the circuit board unit 620A of the main frame 4, outputs a sound effect. The vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air inside the enclosure 624 made up of the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air inside the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the internal space 40a of the fascia panel and the port member 47 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is in communication with the enclosure 624. In this case, the multiple fin portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 allow the sound pressure (sound air) from the main frame speaker 622 to be guided into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notched opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, thereby providing sound pressure stimulation to the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the space between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, depending on the game state within the game area 5a, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the notched openings 295b and 291h, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of impending opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, thereby entertaining the player, preventing them from getting bored, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since sound pressure (sound air) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the notched opening 295b and the opening 291h, the inside of the handle cover unit 290 can be cooled, making the environment around the player's hands and fingers more comfortable while operating the handle 195. This reduces stress on the player and helps prevent a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, when a player operates the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided on the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 on which the handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 are installed, is guided by the multiple vane portions 46b of the grill member 46 to provide stimulation to the player's fingers. Therefore, compared to the case where a vibration device is installed on the handle 195, damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single-button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanisms on the handle 195 is avoided, making the handle unit 180 less susceptible to damage. This prevents the player from experiencing discomfort due to damage to the handle unit 180, thus suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to a car's steering wheel. Therefore, even though its appearance differs significantly from that of conventional pachinko machine handles, it allows players to intuitively recognize that operating the handle 195 is the same as that of conventional pachinko machines. Consequently, even players seeing this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 without confusion, making it easier for players to choose this pachinko machine 1 as a machine to play without hesitation.

Furthermore, since the handle cover unit 290 has notched openings 295b and 291h on the lower side of its outer surface, allowing the player's fingers to be inserted between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, when viewing the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 is visible through opening 291h and the lower notched opening 295b. This provides a sense of openness to the cylindrical handle cover unit 290, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting their fingers into the handle cover unit 290 and allowing them to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

Furthermore, the handle cover unit 290 has through-holes 295b and 291h on the downward-facing portion of its outer circumferential surface, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) is opened forward. Therefore, even if liquids such as beverages or game balls B enter the handle cover unit 290, they can be discharged downward through the lower notches 295b and 291h, while preventing the discharged liquids from entering the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, a spoke portion 195b, and an outer ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, which has the same diameter at the front end as the outer ring portion 195c, is provided with multiple notched openings 295b. As a result, the central hub portion 195a can be used to grip and operate the handle in the same way as a conventional pachinko machine handle, the spoke portion 195b can be used to operate the handle with just the fingers, the outer ring portion 195c can be used to operate the handle like a car's steering wheel, the outer ring portion 195c can be used to grip the handle by placing fingers on the outer ring portion 195c and the notched openings 295b, and the inner and outer sides of the handle cover unit 290 can be pinched with the fingers, straddling the outer ring portion 195c, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows for a variety of game ball B insertion operations (handle operation). Therefore, depending on the game state and the player's condition, the game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, making it less likely for the player to get bored, and allowing the player to enjoy the operation of driving in the game ball B, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, by gripping the handle 195 by placing fingers on the outer ring portion 195c and the notched opening 295b, or by pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with fingers, straddling the outer ring portion 195c, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed. Therefore, in addition to the same handle operations as conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to perform handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines. This provides players with a variety of handle operations, making the game more enjoyable and less likely to bore them.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 appears to extend rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle cover unit 290 to appear integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is visually appealing and attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c, it is possible to suppress the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming unnecessarily large. This prevents the game area 5a (door window 101a) from being compressed upward by the handle cover unit 290, thus avoiding a reduction in the game area 5a. This allows for a relatively larger game area 5a, and the larger game area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LED 293a of the handle cover decoration substrate 293, the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated. Therefore, even when the player operates the handle 195, the illumination of the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and the outer ring portion 195c stand out and providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the player's attention.

Furthermore, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3, opposite the hinge side. Additionally, a notched opening 295b is provided in the right-facing portion of the outer surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290. Therefore, this notched opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. Consequently, there is no need to provide an unsightly handle on the door frame 3, thus improving its appearance.

Furthermore, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) is provided with a flange portion 291e and a guide piece 291g that support the outer ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction, while also restricting its movement in the front-rear direction. Therefore, even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide piece 291g and the like can restrict its forward movement. As a result, the outer ring portion 195c and the spoke portion 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c to the central hub portion 195a will not deform, thus preventing damage to the handle 195.

Furthermore, since the handle touch sensor 192 detects when the player is touching the handle 195 and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to launch the game ball B, the game ball B can be launched even if the player is only touching the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c while operating the handle 195. This allows for a variety of launching operations (handle operations) as described above, and prevents the launching of game ball B when the player is not touching the handle 195, thereby preventing the use of tools to operate the handle and reducing the burden on the pachinko parlor.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit in the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit from the rear. The tray unit 200 is attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, below the door window 101a. The tray unit 200 includes an upper tray 201 for storing game balls B to be played into the game area 5a, and a lower tray 202 located below the upper tray 201 and capable of storing game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The plate unit 200 comprises a plate base unit 210 having an upper plate 201 and mounted on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a plate decoration unit 250 mounted on the front of the plate base unit 210 and having a lower plate 202; and a performance operation unit 300 mounted on the front of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The pan base unit 210 comprises a flat pan unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper pan body 212 mounted on the upper front of the pan unit base 211 and having an upper pan 201, a mounting base (not shown) mounted to the right of the upper pan body 212 and protruding forward, a pan unit relay board (not shown) mounted to the right of the mounting base, a ball dispensing operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base, an upper pan ball removal unit (not shown) mounted below the mounting base, and an upper pan ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper pan ball removal unit.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and having a lower plate 202; a plate unit body 252 attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer circumference of the lower plate body 251; a lower plate ball release unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, attached to the upper front of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart to the left and right.

The performance control unit 300 includes a performance control section 301 that can be operated by the player, comprising a contact control section 302 that the player can touch and operate, and a press control section 303 that the player can press and operate. The performance control unit 300 also includes a performance control section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 housed within the performance control section cover unit 310 and mounted on the front of the plate decoration unit 250, an annular performance control section outer peripheral decoration board 320 mounted on the upper surface of the operation section base 315, an outer peripheral board cover 325 covering the upper part of the performance control section outer peripheral decoration board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 mounted on the rear side of the operation section base 315.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 includes a performance control unit 350 that is capable of protruding upward from the performance control unit cover unit 310 and is equipped with a performance control unit 301; a performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 attached to the control unit base 315 that supports the performance control unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered; and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the performance control unit 350 by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward overall. The performance control unit 301 is positioned so that its upper surface faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction. The upper plate 201 is located to the left of the performance control unit 300 on its upper surface, the ball dispensing control unit 220 is located to the right of the performance control unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is located below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the performance control unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by the tray unit base 211 and the upper tray body 212, and is formed in a container shape that bulges significantly forward on the left side from the center when viewed from the front, and is open upward. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges out the most at about 1/3 of the distance from the left end to the right of the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. The front end of the upper tray 201 recedes backward as it moves from the most bulging part toward the right when viewed from the front, and has a guide passage portion 201a (see Figure 73) whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage portion 201a, is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end of the guide passage portion 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball dispensing operation unit 220.

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 is inclined such that its bottom surface slopes downward from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball supply port (not shown in the figure). This allows game balls B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored in the upper tray 201, and also allows the received game balls B to be supplied to the ball supply unit 140 from the right end of the guide passage 201a through the upper tray ball supply port.

Furthermore, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal grounding fitting that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1. When the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls over) this fitting, the static electricity accumulated on the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part when the door frame is cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part when the same part as (a) is cut in a conventional door frame. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201 and, in a front view, is positioned to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3). The lower tray 202 is formed from a lower tray body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B and has a lower tray ball release hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and allows game balls B to be discharged. The lower tray ball release hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed by a lower tray ball release lid 265 of the lower tray ball release unit 260, which can be opened and closed.

The lower tray 202 has a roughly rectangular shape in plan view, extending horizontally, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side. The lower tray 202 has a vertically penetrating ball outlet 202a located near the front end, close to the right edge. The bottom surface of the lower tray 202 slopes downward towards the ball outlet 202a. When assembled with the tray unit 200, the ball outlet 202a is located slightly to the left of the front of the ball supply port 211c and below the performance control unit 300.

The lower tray 202 can store game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c when the lower tray ball release hole 202a is closed, and by opening the lower tray ball release hole 202a, the stored game balls B can be discharged downwards from the tray unit 200 (for example, to a coin box). Furthermore, when the lower tray ball release hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball release hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downwards from the lower tray ball release hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

In conventional pachinko machines, as shown in Figure 50(b), the lower tray ball outlet 202b is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 210, which is connected to the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150, on the central axis. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is shaped like a straight cylinder extending forward so that the game balls B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 150d travel straight towards the lower tray ball outlet 202b. This allows the game balls B discharged forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly discharged downward through the lower tray ball outlet 202b by traveling the shortest distance.

By the way, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j guides the game balls B straight towards the lower tray ball release hole 202b, and the lower tray ball release hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball release cover 265, then because the lower tray ball release hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right edge of the lower tray 202, there is a risk that the game balls B will concentrate in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202. Furthermore, if the game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the area in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, the game balls B will not be released from the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 towards the lower tray 202. This could cause the full-tray detection sensor 154 to activate, potentially leading to the lower tray 202 being incorrectly determined to be full, even though there is still space in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50(a), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c is inclined to extend diagonally forward and to the left. More specifically, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c is inclined diagonally forward and to the left at the point directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, such that the distance between it and the front surface of the tray unit base 211 is sufficient for at least one game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (indicated by the dashed line) of the rear end (ball discharge port 150d) of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

This allows the lower tray ball release hole 202a to move to the left, causing the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball release hole 202a) to move to the left. This reduces the concentration of game balls B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball release hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, within the lower tray 202, multiple game balls B are stored from the lower tray ball release hole 202a. Even when they reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front surface of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally, creating a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which the game balls B can flow. Therefore, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) and the upper tray ball release unit 240 (ball release guide path 241c) towards the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, ensuring that game balls B are properly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the full-tank detection sensor 154 from activating and issuing a full-tank notification even though there is still sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B.

[3-5c. Plate Base Unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 that is attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extends to the left and right, an upper dish body 212 that is attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and has an upper dish 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 that is attached to the rear surface of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

Furthermore, the pan base unit 210 includes a ball dispensing operation unit 220 mounted on the upper front of the pan unit base 211, an upper pan ball removal unit (not shown) mounted on the front of the pan unit base 211 below the ball dispensing operation unit 220, and an upper pan ball removal unit 240 mounted on the rear side of the pan unit base 211 behind the upper pan ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Plate Unit Base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a flat plate shape (a shallow box shape with the rear open) that extends left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The tray unit base 211 includes an upper tray ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner in a front view and extends cylindrically to the rear; a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper tray ball supply port 211a and has perforated metal attached to its front side; a lower tray ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to back and extends cylindrically to the rear at the lower left of the center in a front view; a notch 211d on the right side wall of the cylindrical portion extending to the rear of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, cut out to a size that allows game balls B to pass through; and an upper tray ball feeding port (not shown) that penetrates from front to back and extends vertically on the upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c in a front view, with its upper part located at the right end of the upper tray body 212.

The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211, when assembled with the door frame 3, has its front end opening into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and its cylindrical rear end passing through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connecting to the front end of the ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, game balls B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 are supplied (dispensed) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

The lower tray ball supply port 211c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has its front end opening into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and its cylindrical rear end passing through the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front and connecting to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. This allows the game balls B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to be supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. Furthermore, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are discharged into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the upper tray ball supply port, the entry port 141a and ball release port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball release guide path 241c of the upper tray ball release unit 240, and the notch 211d, when the upper tray ball release button 222 is operated.

The upper tray ball supply port, when assembled with the tray base unit 210, is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 in the upper tray ball removal unit 240. Game balls B in the upper tray 201 are supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper tray body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and works in cooperation with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the top and rear open. The upper tray body 212 extends to the left and right, with the left side bulging forward more significantly than the center when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 recedes backward as it moves from the most forward-bulging part toward the right when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-back direction is formed to be slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is sloped so that the right end is the lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

The upper tray body 212, when assembled with the tray unit 200, is mounted so that the closed upper portion near the right end tucks beneath the ball dispensing operation unit 220. Furthermore, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit mounting section 212a formed in the middle of its upper section in the left-right direction, and a portion of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit mounting section 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish Unit Relay Board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is for relaying connections between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is mounted near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When mounted on the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball dispensing operation unit]
The ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be explained mainly with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51 is a plan view showing an enlarged view of the ball dispensing operation unit in the tray unit of the door frame. This ball dispensing operation unit 220 is used to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, to dispense a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball dispensing machine (not shown) located adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, to display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball dispensing machine, to return the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine minus the amount of game balls B that were dispensed, to adjust the volume, to adjust the light intensity, and so on.

The ball dispensing operation unit 220 comprises a base portion 221 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball release button 222 located near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, a translucent, disc-shaped ball dispensing operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball release button 222 on the upper surface of the base portion 221, a ball dispensing button 224 located on the front left side of the ball dispensing operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball dispensing operation base 223, a ball dispensing indicator 226 located at the rear lower part of the ball dispensing operation base 223, a volume control button 227 located outside the base portion 221 and in front of the ball dispensing button 224, and a light intensity control button 228 located to the left of the volume control button 227.

The upper tray ball release button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base 221 and can be moved downward when pressed by the player. The ball dispensing button 224 is circular in shape and has the character "玉" (ball) inscribed on its top surface. The return button 225 is triangular in shape. The ball dispensing display unit 226 consists of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and when illuminated, it is clearly visible to the player through the transparent ball dispensing operation base 223.

The ball dispensing operation unit 220 can dispense game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray by pressing the upper tray ball release button 222. Furthermore, by inserting cash or a prepaid card with remaining balance into the ball dispensing machine and then pressing the ball dispensing button 224, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper tray 201. Pressing the return button 225 returns the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine minus the amount of the dispensed game balls B. The ball dispensing display unit 226 displays the remaining balance of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball dispensing machine. The ball dispensing display unit 226 also displays an error code if the ball dispensing machine malfunctions.

The volume control button 227 is used to adjust the volume of music, voices, sound effects, and other sounds output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3, and the main frame speaker 622 for bass frequencies in the main frame 4. This volume control button 227 is shaped like a double-circular gourd, with two circles joined together. The volume control button 227 has a "+" sign in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" sign in the center of the other (lower) circle. A picture of sound emitting from a speaker is depicted in the area between the two circles. The diameter of the "+" side of the volume control button 227 is larger than the diameter of the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the volume control button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards located on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a double-circular gourd, with two circles joined together. The button 228 has a "+" sign in the center of one (upper) circle and a "-" sign in the center of the other (lower) circle, with a light bulb icon in the area between the two circles. The diameter of the "+" side of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of the button 228 brightens the light, and pressing the "-" side dims it. In addition to the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 may also be adjustable.

The volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are colored differently (for example, the volume control button 227 is white and the light intensity control button 228 is black) to prevent players from making mistakes.

By the way, if the volume and light intensity are adjusted using the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 301, when a player-participation performance requiring operation of the performance operation unit 301 is not being performed, the player would have to appropriately operate the performance operation unit 301 to display a setting menu for adjusting the volume, light intensity, etc. on the performance display device 1600, select the item to adjust, and then operate the contact operation section 302 to change the volume level, light intensity brightness, etc., which would be time-consuming and cumbersome to adjust. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted directly by operating the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, thereby simplifying the process of adjusting the volume and light intensity and providing a pachinko machine 1 that can be adjusted in a short time.

[3-5c-5. Unit after removing the upper tray bulb]
The upper tray ball removal unit and the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray ball removal unit 240 works in cooperation with the ball supply unit 140 to discharge the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball dispensing operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray bulb removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 to close the upper tray bulb supply port from the rear, an upper tray bulb removal slider 242 mounted on the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray bulb removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball release slider 242 is slidably mounted and opens forward, providing a ball receiving opening (not shown) through which game balls B can pass; a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the game balls B received in the ball receiving opening downward and then backward on the rear surface of the rear base 241; and a ball release guide path 241c that guides the game balls B downward from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides them to the right when viewed from the rear.

The ball receiving port, when assembled to the tray base unit 210, is formed at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage 201a of the upper tray 201, opening forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. The ball supply guide path 241b, when assembled to the door frame 3, is formed such that the entry port 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows the game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 to enter the entry port 141a of the ball supply unit 140 through the ball receiving port and the ball supply guide path 241b.

The portions of the ball removal guide path 241c that extend to the left and right protrude to the right in a rear view from the portion where the upper pan ball removal slider 242 is slidably mounted, and are inclined so that the right end in a rear view is lower, opening to the right side in a rear view. The rear of the portions of the ball removal guide path 241c that extend to the left and right is closed by the rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion of the ball removal guide path 241c that extends vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140, and the right end of the portions that extend to the left and right in a rear view is connected to the notch 211d of the lower pan ball supply opening 211c in the pan unit base 211. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are released into the lower tray 202 through the ball release guide path 241c and the notch 211d via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball release slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an actuation receiving portion (not shown) protruding forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmission portion 242b protruding rearward from the rear surface behind the actuation receiving portion. The actuation receiving portion has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmission portion 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it approaches the rear, and its lower surface extends horizontally so as to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball release slider 242 has an operating receiver that penetrates the tray unit base 211 from the rear and protrudes forward, with the lower end of the upper tray ball release button 222 in contact with the upper surface of the operating receiver. Furthermore, when assembled to the door frame 3, the operating transmission unit 242b of the upper tray ball release slider 242 protrudes behind the rear base 241, with the operating rod 143c of the ball release member 143 of the ball supply unit 140 in contact with its upper surface.

The spring has its upper end attached to the rear base 241 and its lower end attached to the upper plate ball release slider 242, biasing the upper plate ball release slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball release slider 242 is positioned at its upward movement end due to the spring's biasing force, and can move downward by resisting the spring's biasing force.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240, by the biasing force of a spring, positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upward movement end, and also positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upward movement end via the operating receiving portion of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. Furthermore, because the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at its upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring, downward movement of the operating rod 143c, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission portion 242b, is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entry point 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball release button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entry port 141a and the ball release port 141b. This allows the game balls B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port to be sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the entry port 141a and the ball feeding member 144 through the ball supply port 142a.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball release button 222 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the spring, the upper tray ball release slider 242 moves downward, allowing the operating rod 143c of the ball release member 143, which is in contact with the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball release slider 242, to move downward. The weight portion 143d of the ball release member 143 causes the ball release member 143 to rotate, and the partition portion 143a retracts from between the entry port 141a and the ball release port 141b. As a result, the game balls B that entered the entry port 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving port and the ball feeding guide path 241b are discharged forward from the ball release port 141b which is open below the entry port 141a. Then, the game balls B discharged forward from the ball removal opening 141b are guided through the ball removal guide path 241c to the lower tray ball supply opening 211c via the notch 211d, and then released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c, thus discharging the game balls B in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball release button 222 is released, the spring biasing force causes the upper tray ball release slider 242 to move upward, raising the upper tray ball release button 222. Simultaneously, the operating rod 143c, which is in contact with the operating transmission unit 242b, causes the ball release member 143 to rotate, repositioning the partition 143a between the entry point 141a and the ball release opening 141b, returning it to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can either supply the game balls B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launching device 540 via the ball supply unit 140, or discharge them to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 comprises a lower plate body 251 attached to the lower front of the plate unit base 211 and cooperating with the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202; a plate unit body 252 attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the outer circumference of the lower plate body 251; a lower plate ball release unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251; and a left plate decoration unit 270 and a right plate decoration unit 275, respectively, attached to the upper front of the plate unit body 252, spaced apart to the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower tray body]
The lower tray body 251 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower tray body 251 works in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower tray 202. The lower tray body 251 extends to the left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the top and rear open. This lower tray body 251 is attached to the lower front part of the plate unit base 211, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, such that the open rear is closed.

The lower pan body 251 has a roughly rectangular shape in plan view, extending horizontally, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side. In plan view, the lower pan body 251 has a vertically penetrating lower pan ball release hole 202a near the front right end. The bottom surface of the lower pan body 251 is sloped downwards toward the lower pan ball release hole 202a. The lower pan ball release hole 202a is closed and opened/closed by the lower pan ball release cover 265 of the lower pan ball release unit 260.

When assembled with the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray body 251 has its outer circumference and a portion of its bottom surface covered by the tray unit body 252. Furthermore, when assembled with the tray unit 200, the bottom surface of the lower tray body is located below the lower tray ball supply opening 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball release hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c. This allows for the storage of game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

[3-5d-2. Plate Unit Body]
The plate unit body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The plate unit body 252 is attached to the front of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 and decorates the front of the plate unit 200. The plate unit body 252 bulges outwards at the center in the left-right direction on the upper side, and bulges outwards at the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. In addition, the top surface of the plate unit body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The plate unit body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The plate unit body 252 includes upper side bulges 252a that bulge forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extend downward, spaced apart on the left and right sides, and lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward from the left side of the center in the left-right direction so as to cover the outer circumference of the lower plate body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a are fitted with the left and right plate decorative units 270 and 275 respectively on their front surfaces.

The tray unit body 252 has a lower tray opening 252d that extends front to back between the upper side bulge 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative part 252b. The lower tray opening 252d is sized to allow a player's fingers to be inserted and is formed to widen vertically towards the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending front to back by the lower tray body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulge 252a on the left side.

Furthermore, although not shown in the illustration, the plate unit body 252 is formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a that are in the center in the left-right direction, and includes a mounting section for the performance control unit 300. The performance control unit mounting section is formed to a width of approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the plate unit body 252.

The dish unit body 252, when assembled with the dish unit 200, is formed to completely cover the front surface of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker opening 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Lower tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower tray body 251 and opens and closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to store game balls B in the lower tray 202 and to discharge game balls B from the lower tray 202.

The lower tray bulb removal unit 260 includes a lower tray bulb removal button 263 and a lower tray bulb removal cover 265 that opens and closes a through-hole when the lower tray bulb removal button 263 is operated.

In the assembled state of the lower tray ball release unit 260 with the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball release button 263 aligns with the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b of the tray unit body 252, and the lower tray ball release cover 265 closes the lower tray ball release hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball release hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball release cover 265, allowing game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, pressing the lower tray ball release button 263 backward moves the lower tray ball release cover 265, opening the lower tray ball release hole 202a. This allows the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to be discharged downwards into the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball release hole 202a.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball release button 263 is pressed, the lower tray ball release cover 265 remains in that position, keeping the lower tray ball release hole 202a open and allowing the game balls B in the lower tray 202 to be continuously discharged downwards.

To close the lower tray ball release hole 202a from this state, the lower tray ball release button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, is pressed backward, and then the pressure is released. The lower tray ball release cover 265 returns to its normal position, closing the lower tray ball release hole 202a. This allows the game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left plate decorative unit and right plate decorative unit]
The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 48, etc. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit body 252. The left plate decoration unit 270 and the right plate decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300 on the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The left-side decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical, translucent left-side decorative body 271, a translucent left-side decorative lens 272 penetrating the left-side decorative body 271, and a left-side decorative substrate 273 located behind the left-side decorative lens 272, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface.

The left-side decorative element 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulge 252a. The left-side decorative element 271 is formed in a shape resembling a twisted semi-circular arc, with its central axis extending diagonally upward and to the left at the left end, and its central axis extending left and right at the right end. This left-side decorative element 271 is made of milky white material.

The left-side decorative lens 272 extends longitudinally, aligning with the front surface of the left-side decorative body 271. Multiple LEDs mounted on the left-side decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by illuminating them, the left-side decorative body 271 can be illuminated.

The left-side decorative unit 270, when assembled to the door frame 3, has its left end continuous with the lower end of the left-side door frame unit 420. Because the left-side decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along its longitudinal direction in the left-side decorative body 271, illuminating the multiple LEDs on the left-side decorative substrate 273 allows for nearly uniform illumination of the entire front surface of the left-side decorative body 271, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-side decorative unit 275 comprises a semi-cylindrical, translucent right-side decorative body 276, a translucent right-side decorative lens 277 penetrating the right-side decorative body 276, and a right-side decorative substrate 278 located behind the right-side decorative lens 277, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface.

The right-hand decorative element 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper right side bulge 252a. The right-hand decorative element 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with its central axis extending diagonally upwards and to the right at the right end, and its central axis extending to the left and right at the left end, forming a shape resembling a twisted semicylinder. This right-hand decorative element 276 is made of milky white material.

The right-side decorative lens 277 extends longitudinally, aligning with the front surface of the right-side decorative body 276. Multiple LEDs mounted on the right-side decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by illuminating them, the right-side decorative body 276 can be illuminated.

The right-hand decorative unit 275, when assembled to the door frame 3, has its right end continuous with the lower end of the right-side unit 430 of the door frame. Because the right-hand decorative unit 275 does not have ribs along its longitudinal direction in the right-hand decorative body 276, illuminating the multiple LEDs on the right-hand decorative substrate 278 allows for nearly uniform illumination of the entire front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left and right decorative units 270 and 275 of the tray protrude upward from the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the tray unit body 252 of the tray decorative unit 250. This creates a step between the left and right decorative units 270 and 275, with the left and right decorative units 270 being higher. This step allows the player to grip the trays with their fingers, providing a grip for leveling the game balls B in the upper tray 201 or operating the performance control unit 301 (described later). Furthermore, the step between the left and right decorative units 270 and 275 and the upper side bulge 252a prevents the game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from flowing forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production control unit]
The overall configuration of the performance control unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 52 to 56. Figure 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance control unit from the front with the performance control buttons facing upwards, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance control unit of (a) from the rear. Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance control unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front and above, and Figure 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance control unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front and below. Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit with the performance control unit in the lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring in the upper end position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit after it has moved from the state in (a) to the raised position. Figure 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance control unit with the performance control unit in the lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring in the lower end position.

The performance control unit 300 is located in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. It not only decorates the plate unit 200 but also allows the player to participate in the performance by operating it when a player-participation performance is being executed. The performance control unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The performance control unit 300 includes a performance control section 301 that can be operated by the player. The performance control section 301 consists of a contact control section 302 that the player can touch and operate, and a press control section 303 that the player can press. It can receive player input and move (vibrate) the performance control section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of inserting the game ball B, but also in the performance effects during the game. The contact control section 302 is located above the press control section 303. The contact control section 302 and the press control section 303 of the performance control unit 301 are formed in a circular shape with a diameter approximately 5/8 of the outer diameter of the performance control unit 300.

The performance control unit 300 comprises a performance control cover unit 310 with a spherical outer shape, located on the front of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200; an operation base 315, to which the performance control cover unit 310 is attached externally and which is mounted on the front of the plate decoration unit 250; a performance control outer periphery decoration board 320, located on the upper surface of the operation base 315 and equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part of the performance control cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312); an outer periphery board cover 325, attached to the operation base 315 so as to cover the performance control outer periphery decoration board 320 from above; and an operation relay board unit 330, attached to the rear surface of the operation base 315.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 comprises a performance control unit 350 having a performance control section 301, a performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 for raising and lowering the performance control unit 350, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 for adjusting the protrusion force of the performance control unit 350. The performance control unit 350 is mounted so as to be able to move upward and backward from the upper surface of the performance control unit cover unit 310 by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Performance Control Unit Cover Unit]
The performance control unit cover unit 310 of the performance control unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance control unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance control unit mounting portion of the plate unit body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 via the control unit base 315. The performance control unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer circumference of the performance control unit 300 (around the performance control unit 350) at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical lower unit cover 311 open upwards and backwards, and an annular upper unit cover 312 provided above the lower unit cover 311 and having an insertion opening 312a through which the performance control unit 301 is inserted. The lower unit cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape to cover the front and bottom of the control unit base 315. The upper unit cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the lower unit cover 311. In other words, the outer surface of the performance control unit cover unit 310 is formed in a substantially spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance control unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment has a spherical shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The control panel cover unit 310 is mounted at an angle such that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it extends upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line.

The control panel cover unit 310, when assembled to the door frame 3, has its front end aligned with the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit's lower cover 311 is approximately half the total width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 has at least the upper cover 312 of the unit that is translucent, and can be illuminated by the light emitted from multiple LEDs on the performance control unit outer peripheral decorative substrate 320, which will be described later.

The performance control unit cover unit 310, when assembled to the plate unit 200, has its front end protruding significantly further forward than the upper plate 201 and lower plate 202. Furthermore, the performance control unit cover unit 310 is connected to the left and right sides of the lower cover 311 of the unit, with the left plate decorative element 271 and the right plate decorative element 276 extending outward. This makes the performance control unit 300 more prominent and improves its appearance through integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Control Unit Base]
The control unit base 315 of the performance control unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear of the control unit base 315 is attached to the performance control unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the control unit base 315 are covered by the lower unit cover 311, and the top is covered by the upper unit cover 312 and the performance control unit 301. The control unit base 315 is formed in a container shape with the top open.

The control unit base 315 comprises a roughly cubic, box-shaped main body 315a with an open top, and a flange portion 315b extending outward from the upper end of the main body with a circular outer circumference. The main body 315a houses the performance control unit 350. The lower ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 (described later) in the performance control unit 350 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Furthermore, the lower end of the adjustment screw 384 of the projection force adjustment mechanism 380 is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 315a. Finally, the circuit board base 331 of the control unit relay circuit board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The flange portion 315b has the outer periphery decorative substrate 320 of the performance control unit mounted on its upper surface. Furthermore, an annular outer periphery substrate cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the outer periphery decorative substrate 320 of the performance control unit. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer periphery substrate cover 325.

When assembled to the performance control unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b of the control unit base 315 is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit's lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation Panel Relay Board Unit]
The control unit relay board unit 330 of the performance control unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The control unit relay board unit 330 is mounted on the rear surface of the control unit base 315. The control unit relay board unit 330 comprises a board base 331 mounted on the rear surface of the main body portion 315a of the control unit base 315, a control unit relay board 332 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 mounted on the board base 331 so as to cover the control unit relay board 332 from the rear.

The control unit relay board 332 relays the connections between the outer periphery decoration board 320 (front decoration board 321 and rear decoration board 322) of the performance control unit, the outer button decoration board 355, the vibration motor 356, the contact detection sensor body 358, the inner button decoration board 364, the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the pressure detection sensor 373, the lifting detection sensor 374, the thrust force detection sensor 375, and the thrust force adjustment drive motor 381, and the plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Performance Control Unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the upper unit cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as a contact operation unit 302 or a pressing operation unit 303.

The performance control unit 350 comprises a bottomed cylindrical button body 351 with its upper end closed, a disc-shaped contact detection element 352 mounted on the upper part of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disc-shaped button base 354 attached to the lower end of the button sleeve 353 and supported so as to be vertically movable by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, and an annular button exterior decoration substrate 355 positioned above the button base 354 and having multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 350 includes a vibration motor 356 positioned between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 connected to the contact detection element 352 and mounted on the outer circumference of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is made entirely of transparent material. The button body 351 has a disc-shaped upper surface portion 351a that curves upward, a cylindrical portion 351b that extends downward from the outer circumference of the upper surface portion 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the cylindrical portion 351b. The upper surface portion 351a is shaped to form part of a sphere with the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance control unit cover unit 310. This upper surface portion 351a is decorated with a circular ornament that has a diameter of approximately 1/2 of the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface portion 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the performance control unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 of the diameter of the upper surface portion 351a. The locking portions 351c are provided in four equal-spacing positions around the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are secured to the button base 354. Incidentally, the button body 351 in this embodiment has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detection body 352 has a circular outer circumference and is formed in a dish shape with a certain width of inward bulging upward from the outer circumference. The contact detection body 352 is located below the circular decoration on the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, bulging diagonally upward and having a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detection body 352 appear as part of the decoration on the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 has flat, downwardly extending pieces 352a extending downward from both the left and right ends and the rear end of the outer edge. The contact detection body 352 is attached to the lower surface of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detection body 352 is made of perforated metal. The capacitance of the contact detection body 352 relative to its overall area is suppressed by the multiple holes in the perforated metal, preventing false detections. Furthermore, because the contact detection element 352 is made of perforated metal, light from the LED 364a of the button's decorative substrate 364 located below it can be transmitted upwards, allowing the central portion of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in a good manner.

The contact detection element 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connection connector on the contact detection sensor body 358. This allows the contact detection element 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, enabling detection of contact or approach of the object to be detected (the player's hand) to the top or side surface of the button body 351. In other words, the contact detection element 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 work together to enable the button body 351 to function as a contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a extending vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b extending outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a of the button's outer decorative substrate 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disc-shaped with approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351 and is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end of the button body 351. The button base 354 includes a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at symmetrical points with respect to the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude toward the center from the inner surface of the central hole. The guide shafts 362 of the lifting mechanism 360 of the performance control unit are slidably inserted into each of the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b has an inner diameter large enough for the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are mounted so as to be rotatable around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360. The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer surface of the button base 354. The button base 354 is guided to move up and down by a pair of guide shafts 362 inserted through a pair of guide holes 354a. Furthermore, the button base 354 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 354c guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the lower surface of the button base 354, and it is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decoration substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its upper surface. These LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on a double concentric circle. More specifically, the LEDs 355a are located slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353, and near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a of the button exterior decoration substrate 355, the area outside the contact detection element 352 on the upper surface of the button body 351, and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotating shaft, and generates vibration by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotating shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotating shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward direction of the performance control unit 301. Furthermore, the vibration motor 356 is located in a position that lies on a straight line passing through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance control unit 301 (performance control unit 350) in the vertical direction. This allows for effective transmission of vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to the performance control unit 301. Additionally, the vibrations from the vibration motor 356 can reduce the impact on the pair of guide holes 354a (the pair of guide shafts 362).

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the contact detection sensor body 358 includes a sensor IC with a surge protection circuit, an oscillator circuit, a detection and smoothing circuit, and a comparator circuit, an output circuit, a constant voltage circuit for supplying power to the sensor IC and output circuit, a sensor electrode, and a connection connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the sensor electrode it contains. Furthermore, the connection connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 has an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, and this external electrode terminal is connected to the contact detection body 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the contact detection body 352 function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when it exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, an ON signal is output when the predetermined capacitance is exceeded, but it may also output multiple signals depending on the magnitude of the capacitance.

In this embodiment, the performance control unit 350 has a contact detection body 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. This contact detection body 352 functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance via a contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, contact or approach of the object to be detected (the player's hand) to the upper surface of the button body 351 can be detected via the contact detection body 352. Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352 of the performance control unit 350 has multiple downwardly extending pieces 352a, contact or approach of the object to be detected (the player's hand) to the side of the button body 351 can be detected even when the performance control unit 350 is projecting upwards. Thus, the performance control unit 350, with the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, can make the button body 351 function as a contact control unit 302.

The performance control unit 350 is supported by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can move up and down. When the performance control unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal position), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 coincides with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance control unit cover unit 310, making the performance control unit 300 appear as a single sphere. When the performance control unit 350 is moved upward from its normal position by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and by being pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, it can function as a press operation unit 303.

In detail, when the performance control unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it cannot be pressed any further downwards, making it impossible to perform a press operation. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360. When the performance control unit 350 is moved upwards from its normal position by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates from the press detection sensor 373, resulting in a non-detection state. Then, when the upper surface of the performance control unit 350 is pressed downwards, and the performance control unit 350 is lowered to its lowest position against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the press detection sensor 373. This detects a press operation of the performance control unit 350 (press operation unit 303).

Furthermore, since the control unit 350 covers the contact detection element 352, which is made of perforated metal, with the button body 351, when operating the contact control unit 302, the player touches the smooth, spherical upper surface of the button body 351. The player does not directly touch the surface of the perforated metal, which has multiple holes and irregularities, allowing the player to operate the contact control unit 302 smoothly. Also, because the contact detection element 352 is covered by the button body 351, it is possible to create fine irregularities or multiple grooves on the surface (upper surface) of the button body 351, thereby providing the contact control unit 302 with a desired tactile sensation. This increases the design flexibility of the contact control unit 302, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, while the button body 351 is described as transparent above, it is not limited to this. It may also be opaque or semi-transparent, making it difficult to see the lower side through the button body 351. This makes the contact detection element 352, made of perforated metal, less visible through the button body 351, thereby improving the appearance of the performance control unit 350. Also, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable that it be translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated by light from the LEDs 355a on the outer decorative substrate 355 and the LEDs 364a on the inner decorative substrate 364, providing entertainment for the player through the illumination of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Lifting mechanism for the stage control unit]
The lifting mechanism 360 for the performance control unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The lifting mechanism 360 for the performance control unit is attached to the control unit base 315 and is capable of raising and lowering the performance control unit 350. The performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361, which is mounted inside the main body portion 315a of the control unit base 315 below the performance control unit 350 and has a substantially circular outer circumference; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362, which are arranged symmetrically with respect to the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the control unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the control unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disc-shaped upper base 363, which connects the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and has an outer circumference smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button interior decoration substrate 364, which is mounted on the upper surface of the upper base 363 and has a plurality of LEDs 364a mounted on it that can emit light upward.

Furthermore, the staging control unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a pair of lifting springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, each biasing the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that penetrates vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the lifting mechanism 360 of the performance control unit comprises: an operation button lifting drive motor 367 mounted on the lower surface of the lifting mechanism base 361 such that its rotating shaft protrudes upward; a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367; a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368 and is rotatably mounted on the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably mounted through which a central shaft 366 is inserted.

Furthermore, the staging control unit lifting mechanism 360 includes a lifting cam member 371 whose lower end is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and which is rotatably mounted with a central shaft 366 inserted through it, causing the button base 354 to move up and down by rotating; and a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Furthermore, the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 includes a pressure detection sensor 373 mounted on the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressure control unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 mounted on the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting and lowering of the performance control unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protrusion force detection sensor 375 mounted on the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the protrusion force of the performance control unit 350 by detecting the lifting and lowering of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The lifting mechanism base 361 comprises a disc-shaped base body 361a, a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through holes 361c that penetrate the base body 361a and through which a lifting spring 365 can pass together with a pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner circumference diameter of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and a protruding force detection sensor 375 are mounted on the upper surface of the base body 361a. In addition, an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and a protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 are mounted on the lower surface of the base body 361a. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating unit base 315. This creates a space between the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating unit base 315 and the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, where the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is positioned. A pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, at positions half the diameter of the base body 361a, extending forward and backward from the center, respectively.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through holes 361c located in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, extending forward and backward from the center. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The lower ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operating unit base 315, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The upper base 363 has an outer diameter approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a downward projection. By bringing the downward projection of the upper base 363 into contact with the upper projection of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button's decorative circuit board 364 has multiple full-color LEDs 364a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a, the button's decorative circuit board 364 can illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, and a guide shaft 362 is inserted through each of them. The lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 abut against the lower spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, while the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 comprises a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the lifting cam member 371 is connected, and a lifting detection piece 370c that protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the gear portion 370a and has two opposing notches that are detected by the lifting detection sensor 374. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is cylindrical in shape and is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through its center. The lifting cam member 371 penetrates the gear cover 372 and is located between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on its cylindrical outer surface and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a comprises a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near its lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d (see Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and the distance between adjacent cam portions 371a is smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

Furthermore, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting cam member 371 is formed such that when the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view of the lifting cam member 371, it extends upward from the rear end of the first cam 371b. By rotating, the lifting cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 via the cam portion 371a, thereby raising and lowering the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350), which is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through-hole through which the lifting spring 365 and the lifting cam member 371 can pass. Furthermore, the gear cover 372 has an upwardly projecting upper projection at the portion facing the lower projection of the upper base 363. By bringing the upper projection of the gear cover 372 into contact with the lower end of the lower projection of the upper base 363, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressing operation of the performance control unit 350 (pressure control unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance control unit 350. When the performance control unit 350 is moved to its lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance control unit 350 is moved upward from its normal position by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 separates, and the pressure detection sensor 373 becomes non-detective. Furthermore, when the upper surface of the performance control unit 350 is pressed downwards, causing the performance control unit 350 to descend to its lower end against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354, thereby detecting the press operation of the performance control unit 350 (press operation unit 303).

The lifting detection sensor 374 detects the lifting detection piece 370c of the lifting cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f, which is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lower spring holding member 385 in the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 supports the performance control unit 350 via the button base 354 using a pair of front-to-back guide shafts 362, and can bias the performance control unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. Furthermore, the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 can raise and lower the performance control unit 350 (performance control unit 301) relative to the performance control unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 with the operation button lifting drive motor 367. Additionally, the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 can illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button's decorative substrate 364.

In the normal state, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c provided on the lower end of the lifting cam member 371 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 (see Figure 55(a)). In this normal state, the performance control unit 350 is positioned at its downward movement end via the button base 354, and even if the performance control unit 350 (press operation portion 303) is pressed downward, the performance control unit 350 will not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the press operation portion 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (upper surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance control unit cover unit 310 and the upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance control unit 350 coincide, and the performance control unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

In the normal state (when the control unit 350 is in the lowered position), when the lifting drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, the lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lifting drive gear 368, and the lifting cam member 371, which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370, also rotates in the same direction. When this lifting cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a visible in the front view in Figure 55(a) moves to the right, causing the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 to roll from the locking portion 371c to the left side of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, and simultaneously causing the button base 354 to move slightly downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

As the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b, moves from the left end of the first cam 371b towards the second cam 371d. Since the second cam 371d extends perpendicularly upward relative to the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the second cam 371d. This causes the button base 354 to rise together with the guide pin 354c, bringing the performance control unit 350 to the raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d separates from the pressure detection sensor 373, resulting in the pressure detection sensor 373 being in a non-detection state.

Furthermore, the lower spring retaining member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, to which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various vertical positions by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail later. Since the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 can be changed according to the vertical position of the lower spring retaining member 385, the performance control unit 350 can be projected to the raised position with a protrusion force corresponding to the compression amount of the lifting spring 365.

When the control unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in Figure 55(b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam section 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam section 371a. In this state, the operation of the control button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance control unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Furthermore, when the performance control unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance control unit 350 (performance control unit 301) is in an upward position, and the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit's upper cover 312.

In this raised position, if the button body 351 (press operation part 303) of the performance control unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the performance control unit 350 will move downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 will come into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance control unit 350 (press operation part 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this manner, when the button base 354 contacts the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and the pressure of the button body 351 (pressure operation part 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the control unit 350 (press operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367. As shown in Figure 55(b), the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 354c). Therefore, the guide pin 354c is pressed downward by the third cam 371e, causing the button base 354 to move downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 354c.

Furthermore, when returning the performance control unit 350 to its lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lower holding member 385 of the lifting spring downward, reducing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). This weakens the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 that biases the performance control unit 350 upward. Consequently, the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is also weakened. This reduces the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 that rotates the lifting cam member 371, thereby reducing the risk of damage (failure) to the operation button lifting drive motor 367. Additionally, a low-torque, inexpensive motor can be used as the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

Then, as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e towards the first cam 371b. This stops the downward movement of the button base 354, and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. Subsequently, when the guide pin 354c reaches the position of the locking portion 371c on the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 354c into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c. Simultaneously, the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 stops, returning the performance control unit 350 to its original lowered position.

In the above description, in the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, thereby moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to extend rapidly from the lowered position. However, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance control unit 350) is in the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 may also be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367. Incidentally, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance control unit 350) by the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 in this embodiment is approximately 40 mm.

When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated clockwise in the normal state, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the third cam 371e. When the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is stopped while the guide pin 354c is in an intermediate position along the third cam 371e, the button body 351 can be stopped from protruding upward at any position between the lowered and raised positions. By protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, allowing the button body 351 to function as a press operation part 303.

Furthermore, when the third cam 371e causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, it is desirable to move the lower spring holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operating button lifting drive motor 367) and also makes the pressing operation of the button body 351 lighter.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be changed according to the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371. Therefore, by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 according to the game state (for example, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving game balls B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004), the level of expectation for the game can be suggested to the player.

Furthermore, at least one shallow recess capable of engaging the guide pin 354c may be provided in the middle of the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to protrude stably to the same position, preventing variations in the protrusion amount. Additionally, if at least one recess is provided in the middle of the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need for the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to continuously stop the rotation of the lifting cam member 371, thereby reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56, etc. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can change the force (protrusion force) at which the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) protrudes upward by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 that biases the performance operation unit 350 upward. The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 comprises a protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 mounted on the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361; a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 mounted on the rotating shaft of the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381; a transmission gear 383 that meshes with the pinion gear 382 and is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the base body 361a; an adjustment screw 384 having a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a that meshes with the transmission gear 383, and a screw portion 384b that extends downward in a cylindrical shape from the gear portion 384a and has a spiral groove formed on its outer circumference, through which a central shaft 366 is inserted and which is rotatably supported; and a lifting spring lower holding member 385 that meshes with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass, and in contact with the lower ends of a pair of lifting springs 365.

The protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is mounted on the lower surface of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 such that a gap is formed between it and the lower surface of the base body 361a. The rotating shaft of the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 protrudes into this gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed with a length extending from the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operating unit base 315 to the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The lower spring retaining member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending front to back, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically through the center of the main body portion 385a and is screwed into a screw portion 384b, downwardly recessed spring retaining recesses 385c provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat plate-shaped detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The guide shaft 362 passes through the center of each of the pair of spring retaining recesses 385c of the lower spring retaining member 385. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360.

The force-out adjustment mechanism 380, when the force-out adjustment drive motor 381 rotates the pinion gear 382, can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and gear section 384a. By rotating the adjustment screw 384 with the force-out adjustment drive motor 381, the force-out adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lower spring holding member 385 vertically through the threaded hole 385b that meshes with the screw section 384b.

When the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, increasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. On the other hand, when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, decreasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). In other words, when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the biasing force that the lifting spring 365 exerts on the performance control unit 350 upward can be increased, and when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the biasing force that the lifting spring 365 exerts on the performance control unit 350 upward can be decreased. In this way, the lifting spring lower holding member 380 can adjust the upward lifting force of the performance control unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the lower spring retaining member 385 is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the lower spring retaining member 385 is raised to its highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 when the compression amount of the lower spring 365 is at its greatest. Therefore, when the lower spring retaining member 385 is being moved upward by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, if the protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d, the upward movement of the lower spring retaining member 385 by the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lower spring 365 and preventing damage to the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

Furthermore, as described above, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protrusion force of the performance operation unit 350. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, and the contact detection body 352 detects contact or approach of an object to be detected (for example, the player's fingers, etc.) to the button body 351, and the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the performance operation unit 350 to protrude and come into contact with the object to be detected, the vertical position of the lower spring holding member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protrusion force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the force applied to the player's fingers, etc., when the button body 351 protrudes upward. Therefore, if the button body 351 makes strong contact, it can make the player think that something good is going to happen, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can suggest to the player the level of expectation for the game by increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the button body 351 according to the game state (for example, according to the result of a special lottery drawn by receiving game balls B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004).

Incidentally, one possible method for changing the biasing force of a spring is to change the biasing force by applying torsion to the spring. However, in order to protrude the performance control unit 350, a compressed spring (compression coil spring) is required. If the biasing force is changed by applying torsion to the compression coil spring, an unnatural stress will be applied to the compression coil spring that is not intended for use, potentially causing premature deterioration and breakage of its internal structure. In contrast, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment adjusts the protrusion force (biasing force) of the performance control unit 350 by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 by moving the lower spring holding member 385 in the vertical direction. Therefore, no unnatural stress is applied to the lifting spring 365, reducing the risk of premature deterioration of the lifting spring 365, and allowing the performance control unit 350 to protrude stably over a long period of time.

[3-5e-7. Function of the Performance Control Unit]
Next, the operation of the performance control unit 300 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 57 and 58. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the outer decorative substrate of the performance control unit, the outer decorative substrate of the button, and the inner decorative substrate of the button in a plan view of the performance control unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation part. Figure 58(a) is a front view of the plate unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the performance control unit is in the raised position. The performance control unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape overall and has a performance control part 301 on its upper surface that can be operated by the player. The performance control part 301 consists of a contact operation part 302 that can be operated by contact or approach of the player's hand, etc., and a pressing operation part 303 that can be pressed. The contact operation part 302 is provided on the upper part of the pressing operation part 303 (button body 351).

The performance control unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 with the upward-projecting push-button operation section 303 (performance control unit 350) tilted so that its projection direction is inclined upwards relative to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the performance control section 301 is located in front of the apex of the spherical performance control unit 300. This makes the performance control section 301 easily visible to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In its normal state, the press-button 303 (performance control unit 350) of the performance control unit 300 is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance control unit 350 coincides with the spherical surface of the performance control cover unit 310. Furthermore, in the normal state, even if the press-button 303 is pressed downwards, the press-button 303 (performance control unit 350) does not move downwards. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance control unit 300 appears to the player as merely a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for them to recognize that it is operable.

As shown in Figure 57, the performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320 positioned below the unit upper cover 312 surrounding the outer periphery of the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350). Furthermore, an annular button outer decorative substrate 355 is positioned inside near the outer edge of the press operation unit 303, and a button inner decorative substrate 364 is positioned further inside. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged outward from the button inner decorative substrate 364, in the order of button outer decorative substrate 355, and performance operation unit outer periphery decorative substrate 320. The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decorative substrate 364 and the button outer decorative substrate 355 are positioned below the contact detection body 352. Because the contact detection body 352 is made of perforated metal and is therefore translucent, light from them can be transmitted well upwards (towards the player).

The performance control unit 300 can illuminate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LED 320a on the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the performance control section. Furthermore, the LED 355a on the outer button decorative substrate 355 can illuminate the peripheral edge and outer surface of the upper surface of the button body 351. Additionally, the LED 364a on the inner button decorative substrate 364 can illuminate the central portion of the upper surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the outer decorative substrate 320 of the performance control section, the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer decorative substrate 355 of the button, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button are each arranged in a circular pattern. Therefore, by sequentially illuminating them in the circumferential direction, the player can see a lighting effect where the light appears to rotate around the center of the press operation section 303. Furthermore, because the multiple LEDs 320a, 355a, and 363a are arranged concentrically, the player can see lighting effects where the light spreads outwards from the center of the press operation section 303, or where the light converges from the outside towards the center of the press operation section 303.

In its normal state, as shown in Figure 58(a), the press operation section 303 (performance operation unit 350) of the performance operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with its upper surface aligned with the surface of the unit's upper cover 312. In this state, the press operation section 303 is not possible. On the other hand, the contact operation section 302 can be made capable of contact operation depending on the player-participation performance being performed.

In the normal state where the press operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is not protruding, a performance (player-participatory performance) can be performed, for example, by displaying a performance image on the performance display device 1600 prompting the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300, or by outputting voices or sound effects. When the contact detection element 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the system proceeds to the next performance stage. Furthermore, when contact is detected, the button body 351 may be illuminated by the LED 355a on the button exterior decoration board 355 and the LED 364a on the button interior decoration board 364, allowing the player to recognize that a contact operation has been accepted and providing a tactile sensation to the contact operation unit 302. At this time, the color, brightness, and pattern of the illuminated button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the expected level of play (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state such as a "jackpot").

Alternatively, when the contact detection element 352 detects contact (or approach) to the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a tactile sensation to the contact operation section 302, strongly indicating to the player that their contact operation has been accepted. Furthermore, the vibration motor 356 may be used to apply strong, weak, or rhythmic vibrations to suggest to the player the level of anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, in the normal state of the performance (player-participatory performance), an image prompting the player to touch the top surface of the performance operation unit 300 is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and after outputting sounds and sound effects, when the contact detection body 352 detects contact of the player (hand or finger) with the top surface of the button body 351, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. In detail, under normal conditions, when the lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting/lowering cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 detaches from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the biasing force of the pair of lifting/lowering springs 365, the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation part 303) is forcefully pushed upward together with the button base 354, reaching the raised position (see Figure 55(b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the upper surface of the unit's upper cover 312, causing the button body 351 to protrude upward. Because the button body 351 protrudes upward as described above, any fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward along with it, greatly surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention.

Subsequently, the game transitions to a sequence where the player presses the button body 351 (pressure operation section 303), allowing the player to enjoy the experience of pressing the press operation section 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressure operation section 303) is in its raised position, pressing it downwards against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 causes the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to move downwards. The upper surface of the button body 351 becomes flush with the upper surface of the unit's upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. This detects the press operation of the button body 351 (pressure operation section 303), triggering a change in the performance and allowing the player to enjoy a player-participatory performance.

Furthermore, during the above-described presentation, the force of the protrusion (momentum) of the button body 351 may be adjusted using the force adjustment mechanism 380 to increase or decrease its strength, thereby suggesting to the player the level of expectation for the game based on the strength of the protrusion. Additionally, the button body 351 may be vibrated by the vibration motor 356 when it pops up or when it is pressed.

In a performance where the performance control unit 350 is made to protrude, the contact detection element 352 may detect when the player's fingers or other body parts approach the range of movement (protrusion range) of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This can cause the button body 351 (performance control unit 350) to protrude upward. This will cause the button body 351 to contact the player's fingers or other body parts, delivering an impact that can surprise the player and strongly attract their attention. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force of the button body 351, thereby suggesting to the player the level of anticipation for the game through the strength of the protrusion force.

Furthermore, in a performance where the performance control unit 350 is made to protrude, the contact detection element 352 may detect when the player's fingers or other body parts approach within a predetermined distance from the protruding button body 351, but outside the protruding range of the button body 351. In this case, the button body 351 (performance control unit 350) may be made to protrude upward. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protrusion of the button body 351 to hit the player's fingers or other body parts, surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force of the button body 351, suggesting to the player the level of anticipation for the game through the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers or other body parts.

Furthermore, as a visual effect for the protruding performance control unit 350, the button body 351 (performance control unit 350) may be made to protrude upward regardless of the detection of the player's fingers, etc., by the contact detection element 352. In this case, if the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to protrude the button body 351 with a strong force, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully, generating a sound (protrusion sound), which can surprise the player. Alternatively, if the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is used to protrude the button body 351 with a weak force, the button body 351 will protrude quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice the protrusion of the button body 351, thus surprising the player when the button body 351 has suddenly protruded.

As for the effects after the effect control unit 350 (button body 351) is extended, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the extension force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the button body 351 (pressure operation part 303) to be pressed in the same way as a typical push button. Alternatively, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 may be strengthened by the extension force adjustment mechanism 380 to perform an effect that causes the player to press the button body 351 with greater force.

Furthermore, as a performance after the performance control unit 350 (button body 351) is extended, a performance may be performed that causes the user to make contact with the extended button body 351. In this case, since the contact detection body 352 has a downwardly extending piece 352a, the side surface of the button body 351 may also be made to be made to make contact. In this case, it is desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 using the extension force adjustment mechanism 380. This makes it more difficult for the extended button body 351 to move, and makes it easier to make contact with the button body 351 (contact operation part 302).

Furthermore, as an example of a performance mechanism that causes the performance control unit 350 to protrude, the above example shows the lifting mechanism 360 of the performance control unit rotating the lifting cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction using the operation button lifting drive motor 367, thereby moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, and causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude rapidly from the lowered position to the raised position. However, the method is not limited to this example.

For example, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, the lifting cam member 371 may be rotated clockwise in a plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, thereby moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e. The rotation of the lifting cam member 371 may then be stopped midway through the third cam 371e, stopping the button body 351 from protruding upward at a position between the lowered and raised positions. In this case, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 is moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

Thus, even when the button body 351 is partially extended by the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371, the button body 351 can still be pressed, allowing it to function as a press operation part 303 and enabling the player to enjoy interactive gameplay. In this case, the amount of upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371. Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 can indicate the level of expectation for the game, thus entertaining the player.

Furthermore, as a feature to induce pressing of the protruding performance control unit 350 (button body 351), after the performance control unit 350 is protruding, the lower holding member 385 for the lifting spring 365 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lifting spring 365. As a result, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 is at its weakest state, allowing the performance control unit 350 to be pressed with light (weak) force, thereby improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation more enjoyable. Alternatively, as a feature to induce pressing of the performance control unit 350 (button body 351), the lower holding member 385 for the lifting spring 365 may be moved to an appropriate vertical position according to the result of a special lottery, so that the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 can be set to any strength from strongest to weakest. This allows players to press the performance control unit 350 harder or lighter, thus providing entertainment through variations in the force applied to the unit. Furthermore, it enables the presentation of a wider variety of effects, making it less likely for players to become bored.

Furthermore, as a performance using the performance control unit 300, multiple threshold levels corresponding to the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 may be provided so that contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the contact operation section 302 (button body 351) can be detected in multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the performance may be changed according to each stage. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 increases as the player's fingers, etc., approach the button body 351 (contact detection element 352), multiple threshold levels may be provided for the magnitude of this capacitance to detect it in multiple stages and utilize this for performance purposes. Specifically, for example, by dividing the game into stages such as when the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, when the player's fingers are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 but not in contact with it, and when the player's fingers are in contact with the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, a single contact detection sensor body 358 can present the player with a variety of presentations, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown as shown in Figure 55(a), with the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) in the lowered position and the lower spring retaining member 385 moved upward. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 56(a), the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position while the lower spring retaining member 385 is moved downward. This prevents the lifting spring 365 from being strongly compressed in the normal state, thus suppressing premature deterioration (fatigue) of the lifting spring 365. Furthermore, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress premature deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lower spring retaining member 385.

Thus, the performance control unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for various patterns of player-participatory performances, allowing players to enjoy a variety of performances, making it less likely for players to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Incidentally, the performance control unit 300 has a spherical performance control cover unit 310, on top of which a ring-shaped (two arcs joined together) performance control outer periphery decorative substrate 320 is provided. Furthermore, a contact detection sensor body 358 is provided on the performance control unit 350, which moves up and down inside the performance control outer periphery decorative substrate 320. Also, a fixed-position button inner decorative substrate 364 is provided inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance control unit 350. Since the contact detection sensor body 358 is equipped with sensor electrodes for detecting capacitance, when the performance control unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor body 358 (sensor electrodes) approaches the performance control outer periphery decorative substrate 320 and the button inner decorative substrate 364. This proximity may cause a change in the capacitance of the sensor electrodes, potentially leading to a false detection by the contact detection sensor body 358.

Therefore, a conductive shield (e.g., perforated metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the outer decorative substrate 320 of the performance control unit and the contact detection sensor body 358, and between the button interior decorative substrate 364 and the contact detection sensor body 358. This allows the contact detection sensor body 358 to function even when the distance between it and the outer decorative substrate 320 or button interior decorative substrate 364 changes due to the vertical movement of the performance control unit 350. The shield, connected to ground (GND) and remaining at a constant distance from the contact detection sensor body 358, reduces the impact of capacitance changes caused by the approach of the outer decorative substrate 320 or button interior decorative substrate 364, thus preventing false detections in the contact detection sensor body 358.

[3-5f. Another Embodiment of the Dish Unit]
Next, a plate unit 200 of a different embodiment from the above will be described mainly with reference to Figures 59 to 61. Figure 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection elements are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Figure 60(a) is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example in which multiple contact detection elements are connected to a single contact detection sensor body, (b) is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor body and the multiple contact detection elements in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the plate left decorative unit, plate right decorative unit, and performance operation unit of the plate unit can move back and forth, and contact detection elements are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit, etc. Figure 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection element, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figures 59 to 61, the same reference numerals are used for components that are the same as described above.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 59, the contact detection body 352 is divided into left and right contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R on the lower side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the left contact detection sensor body 391L and right contact detection sensor body 391R are connected to the left contact detection body 390L and right contact detection body 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, for example, when a player moves their fingers or the like from left to right on the upper surface of the button body 351, first, when the player's fingers or the like are positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L changes and the left contact detection sensor body 391L detects contact, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R does not change and the right contact detection sensor body 391R remains non-detecting. When the player's fingers or other body parts move to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection element 390L and the right contact detection element 390R changes, causing both the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R to detect contact. Furthermore, when the player's fingers or other body parts move to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection element 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L to become non-detective, while the capacitance of the right contact detection element 390R changes, resulting in the right contact detection sensor body 391R remaining detected.

In this way, the movements of the player's fingers and other body parts can be detected by the combination of detection and non-detection patterns of the left contact sensor body 391L and the right contact sensor body 391R, as detected by the left contact sensor body 390L and the right contact sensor body 390R, and the patterns of changes in these combinations. This allows for the detection of a wider variety of contact operations, enabling the presentation of player-participatory features that allow for diverse contact operations on the contact operation unit 302, and further enhancing the enjoyment of player-participatory features that involve operating the contact operation unit 302. Furthermore, by adding more contact sensor bodies, it becomes possible to detect even more complex movements.

The embodiment shown in Figure 60(a) is an example in which multiple contact detection elements 393 are connected to a single contact detection sensor body 392. According to this embodiment, even with multiple contact detection elements 393 installed at different locations, a single contact detection sensor body 392 can detect contact from any of the contact detection elements 393, such as a human body.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detection elements 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, contact can be detected by any of the contact detection elements 393 regardless of which part of the surface of the button body 351 the player's fingers or other body parts touch, thereby improving the detection accuracy of contact with the contact operation section 302.

Furthermore, multiple contact detection elements 393 may be installed in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that players should not touch (for example, areas where players may be injured, areas where players may be inconvenienced, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and a warning or alert may be issued when any of the contact detection elements 393 detects a person or other object.

Furthermore, the embodiment shown in Figure 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor body 392 and multiple contact detection elements 393, allowing only one of the contact detection elements 393 to be connected to the contact detection sensor body 392. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the multiple contact detection elements 352 using the switching unit 394, contact of a human body or the like can be detected only at the desired location (contact detection element 352). The switching unit 394 can be configured in various ways, including: "switching using a switching circuit with relays or transistors," "switching using other electronic circuits," or "switching in accordance with the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left-side decorative unit 270, right-side decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in Figure 60(c))."

For example, in the performance control unit 301 (contact control unit 302), multiple contact detection elements 393 are distributed, and when a player-participation performance is executed in which the player touches the parts detected by each contact detection element 393 in sequence, the contact detection elements 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 are switched by the switching unit 394 in the order of touch, so as to detect whether or not the player's fingers or other body parts have made contact with the contact detection elements 393. This allows for the presentation of highly engaging player-participation performances using multiple contact detection elements 393, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60(c), if the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300 are designed to move forward and backward, a first contact detection body 393a may be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detection body 393b may be provided on the rear side of the left plate decoration unit 270, the right plate decoration unit 275, and the performance operation unit 300. When the performance operation unit 300 etc. are projected forward, the first contact detection body 393a and the contact detection sensor body 392 may be connected by a switching unit 394. When the performance operation unit 300 etc. are retracted, the switching unit 394 may be switched to connect the second contact detection body 393b and the contact detection sensor body 392.

This allows the first contact detection element 393a to detect contact or approach of a player when the performance control unit 300, etc., is extended (moved) forward, thereby stopping the forward movement of the performance control unit 300, etc. This prevents the performance control unit 300, etc., from unnecessarily pressing against a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, thus avoiding causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the performance control unit 300 is extended forward, a gap may be formed behind it. If a player's fingers or other body parts are inserted into this gap and the performance control unit 300 is moved back to its initial position, there is a risk that the player's fingers or other body parts may be caught and injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when moving the performance control unit 300, which has been moved forward, backward, the switching unit 394 switches the connection of the second contact detection element 393b to the contact detection sensor body 392. When the second contact detection element 393b detects the player's fingers or other body parts, the backward movement of the performance control unit 300 is stopped, and the player is notified to release their fingers or other body parts from behind the performance control unit 300. The performance control unit 300 is then moved backward to return to its initial state only when the second contact detection element 393b does not detect anything. This prevents players from getting injured by gaps at the rear of the control unit 300, thereby enhancing the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the embodiment shown in Figure 61(a) features a star-shaped contact detection element 395 that detects contact from the player's fingers, giving it a decorative (design) appearance. The shape of the decorative contact detection element 395 is not limited to a star; it may also be circular, polygonal, geometric, modeled after a specific character, item, logo, or frame-like. This allows the contact detection element 395, visible through the transparent button body 351, to have a decorative (design) appearance, thereby improving the overall appearance of the button body 351 and, consequently, the pachinko machine 1, providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the contact detection element 352 formed from perforated metal, it is not limited to this. The contact detection element may also be formed from a metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects and advantages as described above can be achieved. It is desirable to place the contact detection element on the back side of the transparent surface member so that the player's fingers or other body parts do not directly touch it. This prevents wear on the contact detection element and allows the surface member to provide a smoother tactile feel.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a button-internal decorative substrate 364 (LED 364a) provided below the contact detection element 352, the invention is not limited to this configuration. As shown in Figure 61(b), a contact detection element 397 may be provided below the transparent surface member 396, and a decorative element 398 may be provided below that. This allows the decorative element 398 to be visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detection element 397, thereby enhancing the decorative appeal of the performance control unit on which the surface member 396 is located, and improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 61(b), the contact detection body 397 may be formed by metal deposition. Under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detection body 397 may prevent the decorative body 398 located below it from being visible. However, upon detection of contact with the surface member 396, an LED located below the contact detection body 397 may illuminate the decorative body 398, allowing the decorative body 398 to be visible through both the surface member 396 and the contact detection body 397.

Furthermore, the contact detection element 352 may be formed in a way that makes it unrecognizable to the player. Examples of unrecognizable contact detection elements include those made from transparent materials, or those formed to appear integrated with the surface decoration of the button body or other surface components. As a result, the player cannot perceive the contact detection element 352 in the performance control unit 301 where it is located. This creates the illusion that the unit is not detecting or manipulating contact with the player's fingers or other body parts. For example, when a predetermined player-participation performance is executed and the player's fingers or other body parts come into contact with or approach the button body 351, the performance control unit's lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward. This causes the player to notice the presence of the contact detection element 352 (contact control unit 302) for the first time, greatly surprising the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The left side unit 420 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame from the rear. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the left side unit of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line U-U in Figure 62(a). The left side unit 420 of the door frame is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and in a front view, it decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a.

The left side unit of the door frame 420 includes a left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a left side decorative substrate 422 attached to the upper front of the left side base 421 and on which multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front, and a multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front, attached to the lower front of the left side base 421. It comprises a decorative base plate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, a left-side upper reflector 424 mounted on the left-side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front of the left-side upper decorative base plate 422 of the door frame, a left-side lower reflector 425 mounted on the left-side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front of the left-side lower decorative base plate 423 of the door frame, and a left-side decorative body 426 mounted on the left-side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front of the left-side upper reflector 424 and the left-side lower reflector 425 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the left side unit 420 of the door frame includes a left-side upper light guide member 427 that guides light from the first LED 422a of the left-side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame forward, a left-side middle light guide member 428 that guides light from the first LED 423a located above the vertical center of the left-side lower decorative substrate 423 of the door frame forward, and a left-side lower light guide member 429 that guides light from the first LED 423a located below the vertical center of the left-side lower decorative substrate 423 of the door frame forward.

The left side base 421 of the door frame extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that opens forward. The left side base 421 of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, similar to the handle cover 295 described above, the left side base 421 of the door frame is molded in two colors using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming circular and radial patterns. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the left side base 421 of the door frame are the inner layer 3a, and these patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). Note that when molding the left side base 421 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The decorative substrate 422 on the upper left side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. Multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 422 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 422b are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 422a. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 422c, which has a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and the second LEDs 422b, is mounted on the decorative substrate 422.

On the decorative substrate 422 on the upper left side of this door frame, a total of 12 full-color LEDs are mounted: four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a, which have second LEDs 422b on both the upper and lower sides, are positioned in the center (center between) the second LEDs 422b. Furthermore, at least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front.

On the decorative circuit board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, as shown in Figure 72, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two sets: the top two and the remaining two. Similarly, the eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three sets: the top two, the third to fifth LEDs from the top, and the sixth to eighth LEDs from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the four first LEDs 422a (divided into two sets) and the eight second LEDs 422b (divided into three sets) using a total of 15 systems (3 systems per set) to ensure full-color illumination.

The decorative circuit board 422 on the upper left side of this door frame (not shown in the diagram) is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, the second LED 422b, and the LED driver 422c; one control signal line for receiving commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c of this decorative circuit board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can cause the four first LEDs 422a (divided into two sets) and the eight second LEDs 422b (divided into three sets) to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each set, according to that command.

The decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, with its right side having an uneven surface. Multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 423b are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 423a. Furthermore, a 24-bit LED driver 423c, having a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b, is mounted on the decorative substrate 423.

This decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame has a total of 18 full-color LEDs mounted on it: six first LEDs 423a and twelve second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a, which have second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, are positioned in the center (center between) the second LEDs 423b. Furthermore, at least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front.

On the decorative circuit board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, as shown in Figure 72, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two from top to bottom. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four sets: three sets of three from the top (1st to 3rd LEDs), three sets of three from the top (4th to 6th LEDs), three sets of three from the top (7th to 9th LEDs), and three sets of three from the top (10th to 12th LEDs). The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the six first LEDs 423a (divided into three sets) and the twelve second LEDs 423b (divided into four sets) with a total of 21 systems (3 systems per set) to enable full-color illumination for each set.

The decorative circuit board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires (one of which is a ground wire) to supply power for driving the first LED 423a, the second LED 423b, and the LED driver 423c (though this is not shown in the diagram). These wires include one control signal wire for receiving commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510, and one clock wire for synchronizing the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. The LED driver 423c on this decorative circuit board 423 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal wire. In response to this command, it can cause the six first LEDs 423a (divided into three groups) and the twelve second LEDs 423b (divided into four groups) to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each group.

The left-side upper reflector 424 has a through-hole 424a that extends front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The rear end of the left-side upper reflector 424 around the through-hole 424a is formed to abut against the front surface of the left-side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens towards the front. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be widely diffused forward.

The retaining cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a of the left-side upper light guide member 427 (described later) straight in the front-rear direction by inserting the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 427a into it. This retaining cylinder 424b is located in the center between the through-holes 424a. As a result, the light from the second LED 422b of the door frame left-side upper decorative substrate 422, viewed through the through-holes 424a on both the top and bottom sides of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the left-side upper light guide member 427 that protrudes forward through the retaining cylinder 424b, illuminates the light guide shaft portion 427a with equal light intensity from both above and below, thus preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft portion 427a from being cast on the back of the door frame left-side decorative body 426.

Furthermore, the upper left-side reflector 424 has a mounting hole located in the center (on the center line) between the through-holes 424a for attachment to the left-side base 421 of the door frame. This prevents the shadow of the screw head inserted through the mounting hole from being cast on the back of the left-side decorative element 426 of the door frame.

The left-side lower reflector 425 has a through-hole 425a that extends front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the left-side lower decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The rear end of the left-side lower reflector 425 around the through-hole 425a is formed to abut against the front surface of the left-side lower decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens towards the front. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be widely diffused forward.

The retaining cylinder 425b of the lower left-side reflector 425 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 428a of the left-side middle light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left-side light guide member 429 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them into the cylinder. This retaining cylinder 425b is provided in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, the light from the second LED 423b of the lower left-side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, viewed through the through-holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft portion 428a of the left-side central light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the left-side lower light guide member 429, which protrude forward through the retaining cylinder 425b, illuminates the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a with equal light intensity from both the upper and lower sides. This prevents the shadows of the light guide shaft portions 428a and 429a from being cast on the back of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the lower left-side reflector 425 has a mounting hole located in the center (on the center line) between the through-holes 425a for attachment to the left-side base 421 of the door frame. This prevents the shadow of the screw head inserted through the mounting hole from being cast on the back of the left-side decorative element 426 of the door frame.

The decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a translucent, milky white color. The decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a shape where a semi-circular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame is formed in a semi-tubular shape that is open to the rear. This decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame has a plurality of openings 426a that penetrate from front to back at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of the width in the left-right direction. The plurality of openings 426a are provided in positions corresponding to the retaining cylinder 424b of the upper left-side reflector 424 and the retaining cylinder 425b of the lower left-side reflector 425. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left-side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle left-side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left-side light guide member 429 are inserted into these openings 426a from the rear. The decorative element 426 on the left side of the door frame is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the base 421 on the left side of the door frame. Furthermore, the decorative element 426 on the left side of the door frame has a decorative portion 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction, with a fixed, arc-shaped recess to avoid the multiple openings 426a.

The left-side upper light guide member 427 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 427a extending front to back, and a runner portion 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 427a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 427a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the four retaining cylinders 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424. The light guide shafts 427a also extend front to back with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining cylinders 424b. Each light guide shaft 427a penetrates the retaining cylinder 424b of the left-side upper reflector 424 from the rear and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the door frame left-side decorative body 426, so that its tip surface is in line with the surface of the door frame left-side decorative body 426. This left-side upper light guide member 427, via its light guide axis 427a, guides light from the first LED 422a of the left-side upper decorative substrate 422 of the door frame forward, allowing it to illuminate outward from its tip, thereby brightly illuminating the opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The left-side central light guide member 428 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 428a extending front to back, and a runner portion 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 428a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 428a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three upper retaining cylinders 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. The light guide shafts 428a also extend front to back with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining cylinders 425b. Each light guide shaft 428a penetrates the retaining cylinder 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame, so that its tip surface is in line with the surface of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame. This left-side light guide member 428, via its light guide shaft 428a, guides light from the first LED 423a of the lower left-side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame forward, allowing it to illuminate outward from its tip, thereby brightly illuminating the opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

The left-side lower light guide member 429 has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending front to back, and a runner portion 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a, and is made of a transparent material. The three light guide shafts 429a are provided at regular intervals vertically to correspond to the three retaining cylinders 425b on the lower side of the left-side lower reflector 425. The light guide shafts 429a also extend front to back with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining cylinders 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a penetrates the retaining cylinder 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into the corresponding opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame, so that its tip surface is in line with the surface of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame. This lower left-side light guide member 429, via its light guide axis 429a, guides light from the first LED 423a of the lower left-side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame forward, allowing it to illuminate outward from its tip, thereby brightly illuminating the opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the door frame left side unit 420 has circular or radial pattern areas on the door frame left side base 421 that are the same color as the circular or radial pattern areas on the handle cover 295, and the area outside the circular or radial pattern on the door frame left side base 421 is the same color as the area outside the circular or radial pattern on the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the left side unit 420 of the door frame has a portion above the center in the vertical direction that protrudes slightly forward compared to the portion below, and the lower end is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this left side unit 420 is above the door window 101a and located below the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame, while the lower end is below the door window 101a and located above the speaker opening 211b on the dish base unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. Furthermore, the upper part of the left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a on the door frame base 101, giving the appearance of a cylindrical fluorescent lamp being embedded.

According to the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 423 are provided at a position a certain distance behind the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426. Therefore, the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on these substrates spreads sufficiently and illuminates the back surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be illuminated uniformly.

Furthermore, the light from the first LED 422a of the upper left-side decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the lower left-side decorative substrate 423, which are located at a distance from the front to the rear of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame, is guided forward (light guided) by the light guide axis 427a of the upper left-side light guide member 427, the light guide axis 428a of the middle left-side light guide member 428, and the light guide axis 429a of the lower left-side light guide member 429. This allows the opening 426a of the left-side decorative body 426 of the door frame to emit light more brightly and in a point-like manner than other parts.

Furthermore, the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative substrate 422 of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are positioned in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are illuminated with equal light intensity from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides. Therefore, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the left side decorative element 426 of the door frame from behind, these shadows become less visible, allowing the left side decorative element 426 of the door frame to be illuminated evenly and uniformly.

Furthermore, the decorative element 426 on the left side of the door frame has a decorative section 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction, connecting the multiple openings 426a. This means that even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the decorative element 426 due to the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the presence of the decorative section 426b in the area where the shadows are projected makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a less noticeable, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration on the decorative element 426 on the left side of the door frame.

[3-7. Right side unit of the door frame]
Next, the right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, (c) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame from the rear. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the right side unit of the door frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in Figure 66(a). The right side unit 430 of the door frame is attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and in a front view, it decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a.

The door frame right side unit 430 comprises: a door frame right side base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame right side base 431, on which multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame right side base 431, on which multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a right side reflector 434 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 433; and a door frame right side decorative body 435 attached to the door frame right side base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right side reflector 434.

Furthermore, the right side unit 430 of the door frame includes a right-side upper light guide member 436 that guides light from the first LED 423a of the right-side upper decorative substrate 432 of the door frame forward, and a right-side lower light guide member 437 that guides light from the first LED 433a of the right-side lower decorative substrate 433 of the door frame forward.

Furthermore, the right side unit 430 of the door frame comprises: a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that covers and attaches to the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a that penetrate from left to right in a predetermined shape; a light-transmitting right side left lens 439 that is provided between the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a decorative portion 439a that is fitted to close the decorative holes 438a of the door frame right side left side decorative body 438; a door frame right side right side decorative body 440 that covers and attaches to the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has a plurality of decorative holes 440a that penetrate from left to right in a predetermined shape; and a light-transmitting right side right lens 441 that is provided between the door frame right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a decorative portion 441a that is fitted to close the decorative holes 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative body 440.

The right side base 431 of the door frame extends vertically with approximately constant width on both sides. Furthermore, the rear end of the right side base 431 extends vertically along its entire height, while the front end extends almost straight downwards from the top to approximately the center in the vertical direction, then curves diagonally backward, before curving vertically near the bottom and extending vertically to the bottom end.

The right side base 431 of the door frame has multiple reflector sections 431a that are recessed from the left and right sides and extend forward to the front end, at the height where the decorative holes 438a of the left side decorative body 438 of the right side decorative body 438 and the decorative holes 440a of the right side decorative body 440 of the right side decorative body (decorative sections 439a of the left lens 439 and 441a of the right lens 441) are located. These reflector sections 431a have their rear ends, which are on the inside of the decorative sections 439a and 441a, inclined towards the side, and their bottom surfaces are curved.

Furthermore, the right side base of the door frame 431 has a reflector portion 431a that corresponds to the decorative holes 438a and 440a (decorative portion 439a of the left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a of the right lens 441) located further back than the center in the front-to-back direction of the left side decorative body 438 and the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame. The front portion of the reflector portion, excluding the parts inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, penetrates in the left-to-right direction (it is recessed from the left and right sides and connected to each other).

These reflector portions 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame reflect light emitted from the third LED 432c of the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame in a left-right direction, causing the decorative portion 439a of the left side lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a of the right side lens 441 to emit light (see Figure 70, etc.).

The decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. Multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 432b are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 432a. Furthermore, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 432d, which has a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, is mounted on the decorative substrate 432.

On the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of this door frame, a total of 16 full-color LEDs are mounted: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LEDs 432a, which have second LEDs 432b on both their upper and lower sides, are positioned in the center (center between) the second LEDs 432b. Furthermore, at least the second LEDs 432b and third LEDs 432c are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front.

On the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame, as shown in Figure 72, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets: the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are also divided into three sets: the top two, the third to fifth LEDs from the top, and the sixth to eighth LEDs from the top. Furthermore, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two sets: the top two and the remaining two.

The decorative circuit board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c. Therefore, to illuminate each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c in full color, there are three circuits per set, totaling 21 circuits. In contrast, the LED driver 432d of the decorative circuit board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame can control up to 24 circuits. Therefore, in addition to the 21 circuits mentioned above, it controls the upper set of the third LEDs 433c (which are divided into two sets) on the lower right side decorative circuit board 433 of the door frame (described later), totaling 24 circuits.

The decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d (though these are not shown in the diagram); one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, the LED driver 432d on the upper right-side decorative board 432 of the door frame, upon receiving a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), can, in response to that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a (divided into two sets), the eight second LEDs 432b (divided into three sets), the four third LEDs 432c (divided into two sets), and the two third LEDs 433c (the upper of the two sets) on the lower right-side decorative board 433 of the door frame to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each set.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a vertically extending strip. Multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and two second LEDs 433b are mounted vertically between the first LEDs 433a. Furthermore, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate 433 at vertical intervals. In addition, a 24-bit LED driver 433d, which has a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c, is mounted on the decorative substrate 433.

This decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame has a total of 22 full-color LEDs mounted on it: 6 first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and 4 third LEDs 433c. The first LEDs 433a, which have second LEDs 433b on both the upper and lower sides, are positioned in the center (center between) the second LEDs 433b. Furthermore, at least the second LEDs 433b and third LEDs 433c are wide-angle, top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front.

On the decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, as shown in Figure 72, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two from top to bottom. The twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four sets: three from the top (1st to 3rd LEDs), three from the top (4th to 6th LEDs), three from the top (7th to 9th LEDs), and three from the top (10th to 12th LEDs). Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two sets: the top two and the remaining two.

The decorative circuit board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. Therefore, to illuminate each of the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c in full color, there are three sets of LEDs per set, totaling 27 sets of LEDs. However, the LED driver 433d on the lower right side decorative circuit board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 sets. Therefore, on the lower right side decorative circuit board 433, the upper set of the two sets of third LEDs 433c (three sets) is controlled by the LED driver 432d on the upper right side decorative circuit board 432, while the remaining 24 sets (all of the front first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c at the rear) are controlled by the LED driver 433d on the lower right side decorative circuit board 433. This helps to limit the number of LED drivers required.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of this door frame (not shown in the diagram) is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one of which is a ground wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, the second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and the LED driver 433d; one control signal line for receiving commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 433d on this decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can cause the six first LEDs 433a (divided into three sets), the twelve second LEDs 433b (divided into four sets), and the two lower third LEDs 433c (divided into two sets) to illuminate with appropriate colors and intensities for each set, according to the command.

The right-side reflector 434 has through-holes 434a that extend front to back at positions corresponding to the second LED 432b on the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame and the second LED 433b on the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. A cylindrical retaining tube 434b extending front to back is also formed at positions corresponding to the first LEDs 432a and 433a. The rear end of the right-side reflector 434a around the through-holes 434a is formed to abut against the front surfaces of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The area around the front side of the through-holes 434a is formed in a dish-like shape that widens towards the front. This allows the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b to be widely diffused forward.

The retaining cylinder 434b of the right side reflector 434 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 436a of the right side upper light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 straight in the front-rear direction by inserting them into the cylinder. This retaining cylinder 434b is provided in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, the light from the second LED 432b of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the second LED 433b of the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, viewed through the through-holes 434a on both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a, is illuminated with equal light intensity from both above and below. This prevents the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a from being cast on the back of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the right-side reflector 434 has a mounting hole located in the center (on the center line) between the through-holes 434a for attachment to the right-side base 431 of the door frame. This prevents the shadow of the screw head inserted through the mounting hole from being cast on the back of the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame.

The right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame is formed in a translucent, milky white color. The right-side decorative element 435 is formed in a shape where a semi-circular arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the right-side decorative element 435 is formed in a semi-tubular shape that opens to the rear. This right-side decorative element 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate vertically at regular intervals along the center of its width in the left-right direction. These multiple openings 435a are positioned corresponding to the retaining cylinder 434b of the right-side reflector 434. The tips of the light guide shaft portion 436a of the right-side upper light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right-side lower light guide member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. This right-side decorative element 435 is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right-side left-side decorative element 438 and the right-side right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame. The decorative element 435 on the right side of the door frame has the same light transmittance as the decorative element 426 on the left side of the door frame. Furthermore, the decorative element 435 on the right side of the door frame also has a decorative section 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction, with a fixed, arc-shaped recess to avoid multiple openings 435a.

The upper right-side light guide member 436 has four cylindrical light guide shafts 436a extending front to back, and a runner portion 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light guide shafts 436a, and is made of a transparent material. The four light guide shafts 436a are provided above the right-side reflector 434 at regular intervals vertically, corresponding to the four retaining cylinders 434b. The light guide shafts 436a also extend front to back with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining cylinders 434b. Each light guide shaft 436a penetrates the retaining cylinders 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame, so that its tip surface is in line with the surface of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame. This upper right-side light guide member 436, via its light guide shaft 436a, guides light from the first LED 432a of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame forward, allowing it to irradiate outward from its tip, thereby brightly illuminating the opening 435a of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame.

The lower right-side light guide member 437 has six cylindrical light guide shafts 437a extending front to back, and a runner portion 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light guide shafts 437a, and is made of a transparent material. The six light guide shafts 437a are provided at regular intervals vertically from below the right-side reflector 434, corresponding to the six retaining cylinders 434b. The light guide shafts 437a also extend front to back with a diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the retaining cylinders 434b. Each light guide shaft 437a penetrates the retaining cylinders 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into the corresponding opening 435a of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame, so that its tip surface is in line with the surface of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame. This lower right-side light guide member 437, via its light guide axis 437a, guides light from the first LED 433a of the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame forward, allowing it to irradiate outward from its tip, thereby brightly illuminating the opening 435a of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame.

The right-side left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame is formed in a plate shape that extends vertically and has a plurality of decorative holes 438a that penetrate in the left-right direction in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end of the right-side left-side decorative element 438 is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame. The right-side left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the right-side left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, similar to the handle cover 295 and the left-side base 421 of the door frame described above. A part of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming circular or radial patterns. In other words, some of the circular and radial patterns visible on the surface of the left-side decorative element 438 of the right-side door frame are the inner layer 3a, and these circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). Note that when molding the left-side decorative element 438 of the right-side door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface of the right-side left decorative element 438 of the door frame. It has a decorative portion 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the right-side left decorative element 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative portion 439a coincides with the outer (left) surface of the right-side left decorative element 438 of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right-side left decorative element 438 of the door frame. The decorative portion 439a of this right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the right-side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated by light from the third LED 432c of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame and the third LED 433c of the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the right-side left lens 439 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right-side left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 439a visible through the decorative hole 438a of the right-side left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame appears the same as the radial pattern area that is two-color molded on the right-side left-side decorative element 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative part 439a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

The right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame is formed in a vertically extending plate shape and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate horizontally in a predetermined shape (radial pattern). The right-side decorative element 440 also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion with a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right-side decorative element 440 is formed so that its vertical dimension is approximately the same as the overall height of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the front end of the right-side decorative element 440, from the upper end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b, is shaped to follow the rear end of the right-side decorative element 435.

The right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame, like the handle cover 295, the left-side base 421 of the door frame, and the left-side decorative element 438 of the door frame, is molded in two colors using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming circular and radial patterns. In other words, a portion of the circular and radial patterns visible on the surface of the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame is the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). Note that when molding the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame, the inner layer 3a may be injection molded first, or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side right lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape along the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame, and has a decorative part 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame from the inside (left side). When the decorative part 441a is fitted into the decorative hole 440a, its surface coincides with the outer (right) surface of the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right-side right lens 441 is made of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame. The decorative portion 441a of the right-side lens 441 is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a on the right-side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated by light from the third LED 432c on the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the right-side right lens 441 is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative part 441a visible through the decorative hole 440a of the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame appears the same as the radial pattern area, which is two-color molded on the right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative part 441a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the right side unit 430 of the door frame has circular and radial patterns on the left side decorative element 438 and the right side decorative element 440 of the door frame, and the colors of these patterns are the same as those on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame. Furthermore, the colors of the outer parts of the circular and radial patterns on the left side decorative element 438 and the right side decorative element 440 of the door frame are the same as those on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the right side unit 430 of the door frame protrudes significantly further forward than the portion of the left side unit 420 at the same height, above the center in the vertical direction. This right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from top to bottom. The upper part of the right side unit 430 is located to the right outside of the door frame top unit 450.

The right side unit 430 of the door frame, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, making the right side decorative element 435 of the door frame appear as if a cylindrical fluorescent light is embedded within it.

The right side unit 430 of the door frame protrudes significantly forward from the top to approximately half its height, forming a partition. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of a pachinko machine adjacent to it on the right side of the island setup in a gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (gaming area 5a). Therefore, because the right side unit 430 of the door frame is formed in a partition-like manner, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire gaming area 5a. This reduces the feeling of being watched by other players, allowing them to play without feeling self-conscious.

According to the right-side door frame unit 430 of this embodiment, the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 are positioned a certain distance behind the front surface of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame. Therefore, the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b mounted on these substrates spreads sufficiently and illuminates the back surface of the right-side decorative body 435, allowing the right-side decorative body 435 to be illuminated uniformly.

Furthermore, the right-side unit 430 of the door frame guides (directs light) the light from the first LED 432a of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the first LED 433a of the lower right-side decorative substrate 433, which are located at a position away from the front and rear of the right-side decorative body 435 of the door frame, forward using the light guide axis 436a of the upper right-side light guide member 436 and the light guide axis 437a of the lower right-side light guide member 437. This allows the opening 435a of the right-side decorative body 435 to emit light more brightly and in a point-like manner than other parts.

Furthermore, the right-side unit 430 of the door frame can illuminate the decorative part 439a of the left-side lens 439, which is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the left-side decorative body 438 of the right-side base 431, and the decorative part 441a of the right-side lens 441, which is fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the right-side decorative body 440 of the right-side base 431, via the reflector part 431a of the right-side base 431. Also, since parts of the left and right sides of the partition-like right-side unit 430 (the areas of the decorative parts 439a and 441a) can be illuminated, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous to other players, providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and second LED 432b on the front side of the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame, and the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side of the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, illuminate the front end door frame right side decorative body 435. In addition, the third LED 432c on the rear side of the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame, and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, illuminate the left side decorative body 43 of the door frame, which is behind the right side decorative body 435. Because the right side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame is illuminated, the presence of the upper decorative substrate 432 and the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame prevents light from the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b from illuminating the rear left side decorative element 438 and the right side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame, and prevents light from the third LED 432c and third LED 433c from illuminating the front right side decorative element 435 on the door frame. This allows the right side decorative element 435 and the rear left side decorative element 438 and the right side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame to be illuminated completely independently, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that can present a more visually appealing illumination effect to the player.

Furthermore, the right-side unit 430 of the door frame has the first LED 432a of the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the first LED 433a of the lower right-side decorative substrate 433, as well as the light guide shaft portion 436a of the upper right-side light guide member 436 and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right-side light guide member 437, positioned in the center between two adjacent second LEDs 432b and 433b. This ensures that the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are illuminated with equal light intensity from both the second LEDs 432b and 433b on either side. Therefore, even if shadows of the light guide shaft portions 436a and 437a are projected onto the right-side decorative body 435 from behind, these shadows become less visible, allowing the right-side decorative body 435 to be illuminated evenly and uniformly.

Furthermore, the right-side unit 430 of the door frame has a decorative section 435b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction, connecting multiple openings 435a to each other. This allows the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a to be projected onto the right-side decorative section 435 due to the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b. Because the decorative section 435b is present in the area where the shadows are projected, the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a are less noticeable, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration on the right-side decorative section 435.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be explained mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30, etc. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper parts of the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; a top cover 452 mounted on the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451; a door frame top decorative element 453 attached to the front end of the top cover 452; and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative element 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, which is mounted at the rear of the door frame top decorative body 453 and in the center of the front of the top cover 452, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; a door frame top left decorative board 456, which is mounted at the rear of the door frame top decorative body 453 and to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top cover 452, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a door frame top right decorative board 457, which is mounted at the rear of the door frame top decorative body 453 and to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top cover 452, with multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface (see Figure 72).

Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 includes a pair of top central speakers (not shown) provided on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) provided on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top central speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top central speakers and top side speakers, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends horizontally for approximately the same length as the distance between the left side unit 420 and the right side unit 430 of the door frame. The top cover 452, in a plan view, protrudes forward in a semi-circular shape and has a large cutout opening 452a extending forward from its rear end. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative element 453 is formed in a translucent, milky white color. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative element 453 extends in a semi-circular arc to the left and right, following the front end of the top cover 452. Furthermore, the front surface of the door frame top decorative element 453 is formed in a semi-circular arc, with the center in the vertical direction protruding forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative element 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape that opens to the rear.

The central decorative substrate 455 at the top of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The multiple LEDs 455a mounted on the front of the central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a, the central portion of the decorative body 453 at the top of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated.

The left decorative substrate 456 at the top of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The multiple LEDs 456a mounted on the front of the left decorative substrate 456 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a, the left portion of the decorative body 453 at the top of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated.

The right decorative substrate 457 at the top of the door frame is formed in a strip-like shape extending to the left and right. The multiple LEDs 457a mounted on the front of the right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a, the right portion of the decorative body 453 at the top of the door frame can be illuminated and decorated.

The pair of top-center speakers are positioned spaced apart on the left and right. These top-center speakers are full-range speakers, outputting sounds such as voice and music across a wide frequency range. The pair of top-side speakers are tweeters, outputting high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed from perforated metal, consisting of a metal plate with countless through-holes. Through the top lower cover 465, sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board is used to relay connections between the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the top central speaker, and the top side speakers, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The top panel 468 of the door frame closes the opening 452a of the top cover 452. Its front end is secured to the top cover 452, and its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the upper outer surface of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are connected so that they sink in from the front, behind the upper inner surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player through a pair of top central speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, showing the outer layer of the two-color molded door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the right side unit of the door frame, showing the inner layer as is and the outer layer transparent as in (a). As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a roughly rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is surrounded all around the perimeter of the door window 101a by the plate left decorative element 271 and plate right decorative element 276 of the plate unit 200, the unit top cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the door frame left side decorative element 426 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side decorative element 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, and the door frame top decorative element 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

The left and right decorative elements 271, 426, 435, and 453 surrounding the outer perimeter of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing the player to see the door window 101a as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, the left plate decorative board 273, right plate decorative board 278, performance control unit outer perimeter decorative board 320, upper left door frame decorative board 422 and lower left door frame decorative board 423, upper right door frame decorative board 432 and lower right door frame decorative board 433, central door frame top decorative board 455, left door frame top left decorative board 456, and right door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged behind or below the left plate decorative board 271, right plate decorative board 276, unit upper cover 312, left door frame decorative board 426, right door frame decorative board 435, and top right door frame decorative board 453 that surround the outer perimeter of the door window 101a. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on these decorative boards, it is possible to illuminate the entire outer perimeter of the door window 101a, or to show the player an illumination effect where the light moves along the outer perimeter of the door window 101a.

In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, a spherical-shaped performance control unit 300, with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201, is mounted in the center in the left-to-right direction. This central placement of the large spherical performance control unit 300 in the tray unit 200 enhances its visual impact and makes the performance control section 301 (contact control section 302 and press control section 303) of the performance control unit 300 more prominent.

Furthermore, in the normal state, the upper surface of the button body 351, which serves as the performance control unit 301, aligns with the upper surface of the unit's upper cover 312, forming a single sphere. This makes it difficult for the player to perceive the performance control unit 301 (button body 351) as operable. Moreover, the large spherical performance control unit 300 allows the player to immediately recognize that this pachinko machine 1 is distinct from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting their attention and increasing its appeal, making it easier for them to choose this pachinko machine 1 as their preferred machine to play.

Furthermore, in the plate unit 200, the center of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned in front of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300. As a result, the upper surface of the performance operation section 301 (contact operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) faces the direction of the head (face) of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the entire performance operation section 301 can be easily seen by a player who recognizes the large sphere located in the center of the plate unit 200 as the performance operation section 301, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. Furthermore, it strongly encourages players to want to operate the large, spherical performance control unit 301, thereby increasing their anticipation for the execution of player-participatory performances involving the operation of the performance control unit 301. Additionally, when a player-participatory performance is executed, players can actively operate the performance control unit 301, allowing them to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in their interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns applied to its outer surface. Figure 71 shows the right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 as an example of part of its exterior.

To elaborate, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is formed by two-color molding using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, thus forming the circular and radial patterns.

For example, using the right side unit 430 of the door frame as an example, as shown in Figure 71(a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the areas with circular patterns, while the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in the areas without patterns, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes circular or radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71(b), making the outer layer 3b transparent allows the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a to be seen through the outer layer 3b, making the circular and radial patterns relatively less visible. In other words, the exterior appearance emphasizes the honeycomb pattern applied to the inner layer 3a.

In Figure 71, the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, has a decorative part 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a. Since this decorative part 441a is a separate component from the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative part 441a) does not change.

Thus, according to this embodiment, since the main components constituting the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding, the appearance can be significantly altered while maintaining the same shape by appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittances of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b.

Therefore, for example, during minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be modified without incurring additional costs by making the outer layer 3b transparent to allow the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be visible.

Alternatively, by changing the colors of the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b for each manufacturing lot, and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same gaming hall and installing them in island-style setups, it's possible to create a more colorful appearance and enhance its appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, a two-color molded product is shown, but it is not limited to this; multi-color molding, such as three-color or four-color molding, is also possible. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is constructed by combining a two-color molded right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame with a right-side lens 441. However, in a three-color molded product, the right-side decorative body 440 of the door frame and the right-side lens 441 may be formed as a single unit.

Furthermore, while the above embodiments show circular and radial patterns, the invention is not limited to these, and various shapes of patterns may be formed.

Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, decorative elements such as the handle cover 295, the left side base 421 of the door frame, the left side decorative element 438 of the right side of the door frame, and the right side decorative element 440 of the door frame, which are provided on the outside of the door window 101a facing forward in the game area 5a of the door frame 3, are molded in two colors (multicolor molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and a polka dot pattern is applied through this two-color molding. Therefore, the decorative elements are formed into the desired shape and simultaneously given the desired decoration. This eliminates the need to apply the desired decoration by painting or other means after forming the desired shape, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines, thus reducing the effort required for decoration and suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, because the decoration is formed by two-color molding, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot pattern using two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a (forming the inside of the polka dot circles) and the outer layer 3b (forming the outside of the circles) are formed with the same color but different light transmittances, the polka dots become difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b are the same color, resulting in an appearance as if no polka dot decoration is present. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a is white and the outer layer 3b is pink, the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b makes the polka dots clearly visible, resulting in an appearance of white polka dots on a pink background. Thus, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decoration, the appearance of the decoration can be easily changed, and the cost associated with changing the appearance can be reduced.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative element, the appearance of the decorative element can be easily changed. Therefore, by changing the combination of synthetic resins used for each manufacturing lot, and shipping different lots of this pachinko machine 1 to the same gaming hall and installing them in a row on the island equipment, the island equipment can be made to appear colorful. This can create a strong impact on players circulating within the gaming hall, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can attract players.

Furthermore, since decorative elements such as a handle cover 295, a door frame left side base 421, a door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and a door frame right side right side decorative element 440 are provided on the part of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing forward in the game area 5a, the door frame left side base 421, the door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and the door frame right side right side decorative element 440 are provided, the outside of the door window 101a can be decorated with these decorative elements to improve its appearance.

Furthermore, because the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, the inner layer 3a can be made less visible through the outer layer 3b. This makes the boundary of the decoration (polka dot pattern) composed of the inner layer 3a more clearly visible, thus making the decoration more distinct.

Furthermore, by making the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make the inner layer 3a difficult to see through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b was made with low light transmittance to prevent the inner layer 3a from being visible from the outside. During model changes, by using a synthetic resin with high light transmittance for the outer layer 3b, the inner layer 3a can be made visible, significantly changing the appearance of the decorative element. This allows for easy modification of the appearance (decoration) without altering the shape of the decorative element.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the low light transmittance of the outer layer 3b makes the inner layer 3a difficult to see. Therefore, by applying a pattern (a pattern created by shape, paint, printing, or sticker application) to the surface of the inner layer 3a, the initial model can be made to prevent the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being visible through the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance. During model changes, by using a transparent synthetic resin for the outer layer 3b, the pattern of the inner layer 3a can be made visible. This allows for significant changes to the appearance (decoration) of the decorative element without altering its shape, thereby suppressing the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the right-side left decorative element 438 and the right-side right decorative element 440 of the door frame are equipped with a third LED 432c on the upper right decorative substrate 432 and a third LED 433c on the lower right decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, which are capable of emitting light. In addition, the inner layer 3a is formed of a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the others, causing the third LEDs 432c and 433c located inside the right-side left decorative element 438 and the right-side right decorative element 440 of the door frame to emit light. This allows the inner layer 3a (the polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the left and right sides of the door frame's right and right side decorative elements 438 and 440 to be brightly illuminated. By illuminating the outside of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, the appearance is improved, and players can enjoy the illuminated decorations of the left and right side decorative elements 438 and 440, thus preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the outer layer 3b can also be illuminated by light from the third LED 432c and third LED 433c irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a. This allows the entire right-side left-side decorative element 438 and the right-side right-side decorative element 440 of the door frame to be illuminated, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that beautifully displays the right-side left-side decorative element 438 and the right-side right-side decorative element 440, strongly attracting the player's attention.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations of the decorative elements such as the left side decorative element 438 and the right side decorative element 440 of the right side decorative element of the door frame are formed by two-color molding (multi-color molding) of multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances. Therefore, depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the differences in light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means) such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c are not emitting light can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are emitting light. This change in decoration can strongly attract the attention of the player. To elaborate, for example, if we explain using two-color molding as an example of multi-color molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a in the area covered by the outer layer 3b, then when the LEDs are not emitting light, only the part of the inner layer 3a that is exposed on the surface is visible. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, in the areas where holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, the light from the LED shines directly onto the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a. As a result, the shape of the holes in the inner layer 3a becomes visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b, and both the exposed areas and the holes in the inner layer 3a become visible, resulting in a different decoration than when the LED is not illuminated. Alternatively, for example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, when the LED is illuminated in yellow, only the areas of the inner layer 3a on the surface decoration will be illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated in green (or white), both the areas of the inner layer 3a and the areas of the outer layer 3b on the surface will be illuminated. Therefore, by changing the color of the light emitted by the LED, the areas of the decoration that are illuminated can be changed, and the illuminated decoration can be altered. In this way, the decoration of the decoration can be changed by emitting light from the LED, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and entertain them. Furthermore, by illuminating LEDs according to the game state, the changes in the decorative elements can suggest to the player the arrival of a chance or a change in the shooting operation (for example, "shooting to the right"), thus providing a pachinko machine 1 capable of diverse effects.

Furthermore, by different protrusion amounts in the front-to-back direction of the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame, which are provided on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (game area 5a), the impression (appearance) of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the left front and the right front can be made different. Therefore, in a gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, even if a player initially passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when they approach it from the opposite side, the different appearance compared to their initial pass will attract their attention to the pachinko machine 1. This makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, as it can entice players who are browsing the gaming hall in search of a pachinko machine to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system in door frames]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 72 and 73. Figure 72 is a front view showing each decorative circuit board of the door frame, and Figure 73 is a plan view showing the decorative circuit board of the performance operation unit part of the door frame. As shown in Figure 72, the door frame 3 is provided with a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of each spoke portion 195b, and has an appearance similar to a car steering wheel.

The handle 195 has its front central hub portion 195a covered by a front handle lens 185. Between the front handle lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a, a handle decorative substrate 184 is provided, with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface. Furthermore, a handle cover decorative substrate 293, with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface, is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decoration board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in a triple concentric circle arrangement: one in the center, three on the middle circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction, and six along the outer circumference at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: the one in the center, the three in the middle connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, and the two on the upper left of the outer circumference, the two on the upper right of the outer circumference, and the two on the lower part of the outer circumference, each connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 circuits, allowing each group of LEDs 184a to emit light in full color as appropriate.

On the other hand, the steering wheel cover decorative substrate 293 has 12 LEDs 293a arranged in a row with spacing in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: two on the lower left, two on the left side, two on the upper left, two on the upper right, two on the right side, and two on the lower right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 circuits, allowing each group of LEDs 293a to emit light in full color as appropriate.

Thus, since the handle 195 is equipped with a handle decoration board 184 and a handle cover decoration board 293, it is possible to show the player various lighting effects, such as a light rotating around the handle 195, a light concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, or a light spreading outwards from the handle 195. Furthermore, the LED 293a on the handle cover decoration board 293 allows for the illumination and decoration of the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a roughly rectangular door window 101a extending vertically, located in the center of the front view, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is surrounded all around by the left and right decorative elements 271 and 276 of the plate unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left side decorative element 426 of the left side unit 420, the right side decorative element 435 of the right side unit 430, and the top decorative element 453 of the top unit 450.

The left and right decorative elements 271, 426, 435, and 453 surrounding the outer perimeter of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape. This allows the player to see the door window 101a as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In this door frame 3, as shown in Figure 72, the following are provided facing forward: the left plate decorative base plate 273 behind the left plate decorative body 271 surrounding the outer perimeter of the door window 101a; the right plate decorative base plate 278 behind the right plate decorative body 276; the upper left side decorative base plate 422 and lower left side decorative base plate 423 behind the left side decorative body 426; the upper right side decorative base plate 432 and lower right side decorative base plate 433 behind the right side decorative body 435; and the central top decorative base plate 455, left top decorative base plate 456, and right top decorative base plate 457 behind the top decorative body 453.

More specifically, the left-hand decorative substrate 273 of the dish has four LEDs 273a mounted on its front surface in a single row running horizontally, and an LED driver (not shown in the diagram) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a of the right-hand decorative substrate 278, which will be described later. These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets: two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by the LED driver in six separate circuits, allowing each set of LEDs 273a to emit light in full color as appropriate.

The right-hand decorative substrate 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on its front surface, arranged in a single row from left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets: two on the left and two on the right, as indicated by the dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled by the LED driver on the left-hand decorative substrate 273 via six separate circuits, allowing each set of LEDs 278a to emit full-color illumination in appropriate colors.

The decorative substrate 422 on the upper left side of the door frame is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c to illuminate the total of twelve first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front. The four first LEDs 422a on the decorative substrate 422 on the upper left side of the door frame are divided into two sets: the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 72. The eight second LEDs 422b are also divided into three sets: the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eighth from the top, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 72. The four first LEDs 422a, divided into two sets, and the eight second LEDs 422b, divided into three sets, are controlled by the LED driver 422c via 15 circuits. Each set of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for illuminating a total of eighteen first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three sets of two from the top, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are divided into four sets, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: three from the 1st to 3rd from the top, three from the 4th to 6th from the top, three from the 7th to 9th from the top, and three from the 10th to 12th from the top. The six first LEDs 423a, divided into three groups, and the twelve second LEDs 423b, divided into four groups, are controlled by the LED driver 423c via 21 circuits. Each group of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b can emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in pairs, arranged vertically between the first LEDs 432a, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for illuminating a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, as well as the two third LEDs 433c on the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two sets, the top two and the remaining two, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 72. Furthermore, the eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: the top two, the third to fifth from the top, and the sixth to eighth from the top. Additionally, the four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: the top two and the remaining two. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper of the two groups of third LEDs 433c on the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame are controlled by the LED driver 432d in 24 circuits, allowing each group of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame includes six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front in pairs, arranged vertically between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, the second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three sets of two from top to bottom, as indicated by the dashed lines in Figure 72. Furthermore, the twelve second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: three from the top (1st to 3rd), three from the top (4th to 6th), three from the top (7th to 9th), and three from the top (10th to 12th). Additionally, the four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72: the top two and the remaining two. The six first LEDs 433a (divided into three groups), the twelve second LEDs 433b (divided into four groups), and the two third LEDs 433c (the lower of the two divided groups) are controlled by the LED driver 433d in 24 circuits, allowing each group of first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the upper left-side decorative substrate 422 and the lower left-side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, located on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, located on the right side of the door window 101a, are formed in an asymmetrical shape with respect to the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction. Furthermore, the upper left-side decorative substrate 422 and the lower left-side decorative substrate 423, and the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the lower right-side decorative substrate 433, also differ in shape in the front-to-back direction.

Furthermore, the upper left-side decorative substrate 422 and the lower left-side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, and the upper right-side decorative substrate 432 and the lower right-side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b mounted on their respective front surfaces, as well as the same number of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b. The arrangement and systems (the systems connected by dashed or double-dotted lines in Figure 72) are also symmetrical. This makes it easier to create data for the LED lighting patterns used to create the light-emitting effects.

The central decorative substrate 455 at the top of the door frame is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface, spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown in the figure) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the left decorative substrate 456 at the top of the door frame, and the LEDs 457a on the right decorative substrate 457 at the top of the door frame. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from left to right, as indicated by the dashed lines in Figure 72. These six LEDs 455a are controlled by the LED driver in nine separate circuits, allowing each group of LEDs 455a to emit light in full color as appropriate.

The decorative circuit board 456 on the left top of the door frame is equipped with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, with openings extending to the left and right. As shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72, the four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets: two on the left and two on the right. These two sets of four LEDs 456a are controlled by the LED driver on the central decorative circuit board 455 of the door frame, using six separate systems. Each set of LEDs 456a can emit full-color illumination in appropriate colors.

The right decorative circuit board 457 at the top of the door frame is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, with openings extending to the left and right. As shown by the dashed lines in Figure 72, the four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets: two on the left and two on the right. These two sets of four LEDs 457a are controlled by the LED driver on the central decorative circuit board 455 at the top of the door frame via six circuits, allowing each set of LEDs 457a to emit full-color illumination in appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, light from the first LED 422a of the upper left side decorative substrate 422 of the door frame, the first LED 423a of the lower left side decorative substrate 423 of the door frame, the first LED 432a of the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame, and the first LED 433a of the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame are guided by the light guide axis 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide axis 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428, the light guide axis 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429, the light guide axis 436a of the upper right side light guide member 436, and the light guide axis 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 to the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and are irradiated outward (forward). This allows the player to see a bright, point-like illumination effect on the front of the decorative elements 426 on the left side of the door frame and 435 on the right side of the door frame. This unique, spot-like illumination effect, unlike anything seen in previous pachinko machines, is sure to surprise and delight the player.

Furthermore, in the door frame 3, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs surrounding the outer perimeter of the door window 101a—the LED 273a on the left decorative board 273, the LED 278a on the right decorative board 278, the second LED 422b on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a on the central top decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a on the left top decorative board 456 of the door frame, and the LED 457a on the right top decorative board 457 of the door frame—it is possible to illuminate the entire outer perimeter of the door window 101a, or to show the player a lighting effect where the light moves along the outer perimeter of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the dashed line in Figure 72 allows for spot illumination on the front surfaces of the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame, while the LED system connected by the single-dash line in Figure 72 allows for surface illumination (surface emission) of the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame.

Furthermore, with respect to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a of the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and then illuminated forward from there. As a result, the openings 426a and 435a can be made to emit bright, spot light with high luminosity compared to the general surfaces of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. In this configuration, since the decorative elements 426 on the left side of the door frame and 435 on the right side of the door frame are positioned outside the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, even if the openings 426a of the decorative element 426 and 435a of the decorative element 435 are illuminated with high brightness, the glare will not obscure the view inside the game area 5a through the door window 101a. This allows for clear viewing of the game balls B, animation images, and decorative elements within the game area 5a through the door window 101a.

Furthermore, in the case of the door frame 3, the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame protrude forward beyond the door window 101a (game area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a, which emit high-brightness spot light, are located on the ridge portion at the front end of the forward-protruding left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view). Therefore, the spot-emitting light does not shine towards the rear (door window 101a side). Consequently, the spot-emitting light from the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame is not reflected towards the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, preventing the inside of the game area 5a behind the door window 101a from becoming difficult to see, and the high-brightness spot-emitting light can attract the attention of other players to this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the case of the door frame 3, the spot-emitting parts are provided on the left side decorative member 426 and the right side decorative member 435 of the door frame, which protrude forward and outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the spot-emitting parts are located approximately at the same position as the outer perimeter of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting parts are located outside the player, so the player does not obstruct the light. This means that when spot-emitting lights are emitted from the left side decorative member 426 and the right side decorative member 435 of the door frame, the high-luminosity spot-emitting light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This effectively draws attention to the presence of the pachinko machine 1, attracting players' interest and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can entice players wandering around the hall to choose a machine to play.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, 433b) on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, 433a) used to spot-illuminate the front surfaces of the left and right side decorative elements of the door frame belong to the same system. This ensures that the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pins (light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a) that guide the light from the spot LEDs illuminate in the same manner. As a result, the same amount of light is emitted from both sides of the light guide pins at the same time, making the shadows of the light guide pins less visible on the left and right side decorative elements of the door frame.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73, the door frame 3 is located below the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and includes an annular performance operation section outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 on its upper surface, with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on it. This performance operation section outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 includes two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative substrate 321 and a rear decorative substrate 322.

On the front decorative board 321 of the outer perimeter decorative board 320 of the performance control unit, 18 of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, 6 are spaced apart on the circumference near the inner circumference, 3 are spaced apart on the circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining 9 are spaced apart on the circumference near the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the outer perimeter decorative board 320 of the performance control unit. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are arranged in pairs near the ends of the arc on the circumference close to the inner circumference, three are arranged in pairs on the circumference midway between the inner and outer circumference, and the remaining six are arranged in pairs near the ends of the arc on the circumference close to the outer circumference, with spacing between them.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative substrate 321 are divided into a total of 9 sets, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: the 6 LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into 3 sets of 2 LEDs each in the circumferential direction; the 3 LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into 3 sets of 1 LED each; and the 9 LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into 3 sets of 3 LEDs each in the circumferential direction. Similarly, the 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative substrate 322 are divided into a total of 7 sets, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: the 4 LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into 2 sets of 2 LEDs each near both ends; the 3 LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into 3 sets of 1 LED each; and the 9 LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into 2 sets of 3 LEDs each near both ends. In other words, the 31 LEDs 320a on the outer perimeter decorative substrate 320 of the performance control unit are divided into 16 sets. These 16 groups of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 separate circuits, allowing each group of LEDs 320a to emit light in full color as appropriate.

This decorative circuit board 320 for the outer perimeter of the performance control unit allows for the illumination of 31 LEDs 320a in 48 circuits, enabling the player to see various light effects in the performance control unit 301, such as rotating light, light concentrating towards the center, or light spreading outwards.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, on the left and right sides of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, there are a left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430, which extend vertically along the door window 101a so that their protrusion amounts in the front-to-back direction are different. Behind the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435, there is a left side upper decorative board 422 on which multiple first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, and a left side lower decorative board 423 on which multiple first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and multiple The door frame's upper right side decorative substrate 432 is equipped with a number of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b, and the door frame's lower right side decorative substrate 433 is equipped with a number of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b. In addition, the left upper light guide member 427 has a light guide axis 427a, the left middle light guide member 428 has a light guide axis 428a, the left lower light guide member 429 has a light guide axis 429a, and the right upper light guide member 436 has a light guide axis that guides the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a to the front of the door frame's left side decorative body 426 and the door frame's right side decorative body 435 and illuminates it forward. Because section 436a and the light guide shaft portion 437a of the right side lower light guide member 437 are provided, the second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b of the upper left side decorative substrate 422, lower left side decorative substrate 423, upper right side decorative substrate 432, and lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame can be illuminated, thereby causing the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in a planar manner (surface illumination), and the first LEDs 422a and 433b of the upper left side decorative substrate 422, lower left side decorative substrate 423, upper right side decorative substrate 432, and lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame can be illuminated in a planar manner (surface illumination), and the first LEDs 422a and 433 When LEDs 23a, 432a, and 433a are illuminated, the light irradiated forward is guided by the columnar light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a to the vicinity of the front surface of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame. Afterward, the light is emitted forward from their front ends (front surfaces), causing the parts of the left side decorative body 426 and the right side decorative body 435 corresponding to the tips of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a to emit point-like light (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and second LED 422b, first LED 423a and second LED 423b, first LED 432a and second LED 432b, and first LED 433a and second LED 433b of the upper left side decorative substrate 422, lower left side decorative substrate 423, upper right side decorative substrate 432, and lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame, the decorative body 426 on the left side of the door frame and the door, which are located outside the play area 5a (door window 101a), will be illuminated. The entire right-side decorative element 435 of the frame can be illuminated in a surface-like manner, or parts of the left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a point-like manner, or the entire left-side decorative element 426 and the right-side decorative element 435 of the door frame can be illuminated in a surface-like manner while parts of them are illuminated in a point-like manner. This allows for a variety of illumination effects to be shown to the player, preventing boredom and ensuring enjoyment, thus suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the systems in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the upper left side decorative board 422 and the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame are separated, and the systems in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LED 433a, and second LEDs 433b on the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame are separated are symmetrical to each other, and in each case, the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LEDs 423a, first LEDs 432a, and first LEDs 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LEDs 423b, second LEDs 432b, and second LEDs 433b are separated, so the first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the first LEDs on the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are separated, and in each case, the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LEDs 423a, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame are separated, so When creating the lighting pattern data for ED432a, second LED432b, first LED433a, and second LED433b, it is possible to reuse data for the left side decorative element 426 of the door frame as data for the right side decorative element 435 of the door frame, or to create similar data flows for both the left side decorative element 426 and the right side decorative element 435 of the door frame. This simplifies the effort required to create the lighting pattern data, making it easier to construct more complex lighting patterns (with the same creation time). This allows for a variety of lighting effects to be shown to the player, and enables the creation of a pachinko machine 1 that can provide sufficient visual effects for the lighting effects on the left side decorative element 426 and the right side decorative element 435 of the door frame on both the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are positioned between the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a, are in the same system, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are positioned to sandwich the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a), will always light up simultaneously. Therefore, the light guide shafts 427a and 428a, By illuminating the light guide shafts 429a, 436a, and 437a from both sides, the shadows cast by the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a from the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b are faintly reduced, effectively canceling them out. This makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a projected onto the left and right side decorative elements of the door frame less visible, allowing for even, surface-level illumination and decoration of the left and right side decorative elements.

Furthermore, the left and right side decorative elements of the door frame, 426 and 435, which are illuminated in a planar manner by the second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, can be illuminated in a point-like manner at the front ends of the light guide shafts 427a, 423a, 432a, and 433a by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a. This allows for a unique lighting effect, previously unseen in pachinko machines, where the lights illuminate both planarly and partially in a point-like manner. This effect strongly attracts the player's attention with bright, point-like illumination, and the unique, sparkling, point-like illumination can surprise the player, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative boards 422 and 423 on the left side of the door frame, and the decorative boards 432 and 433 on the right side of the door frame, are asymmetrical in shape, it is possible to distinguish between them at a glance. This prevents mistakes in assembling the wrong decorative boards during the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, improving assembly efficiency and suppressing cost increases.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrates]
Next, using the door frame 3 as an example, the identification of the various decorative circuit boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 74. Figure 74 is a rear view showing each decorative circuit board provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the following will be explained in detail as examples, using the left plate decorative circuit board 273, the right plate decorative circuit board 278, the upper left side decorative circuit board 422, the lower left side decorative circuit board 423, the upper right side decorative circuit board 432, the lower right side decorative circuit board 433, the center top decorative circuit board 455, the left top decorative circuit board 456, and the right top decorative circuit board 457 of the door frame, which are provided around the door window 101a of the door frame 3.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, a white circuit board is used for the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted. The LED drivers and connectors for LEDs other than white are mounted on the rear side of the circuit board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front of the decorative circuit board to be reflected forward, making the decorative elements at the front brighter and less conspicuous from the front (the player's side).

Furthermore, the white decorative circuit board may be coated with white solder resist (protective material), or the circuit board material itself may be white.

In the pachinko machine 1, since it has many decorative circuit boards, each decorative circuit board is provided with a different identification section 7 on its rear surface to allow for easy identification of each board (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 includes a character identification section 7a using characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, and model numbers, and a color identification section 7b using different colors (shown as shades of shading in Figure 74).

More specifically, the character identification section 7a features the following characters: the left plate decorative board 273 displays "down left," the right plate decorative board 278 displays "down right," the upper left side decorative board 422 displays "upper left," the lower left side decorative board 423 displays "lower left," the upper right side decorative board 432 displays "upper right," the lower right side decorative board 433 displays "lower right," the center top decorative board 455 displays "upper center," the left top decorative board 456 displays "upper left," and the right top decorative board 457 displays "upper right."

Furthermore, the color identification section 7b is a different color for each decorative substrate and is applied to approximately the entire front surface of the rear. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 74, the color identification section 7b is not applied to the entire rear surface, but only partially to avoid interfering with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative substrate.

The identification section 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk screen printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

Furthermore, although the above explanation used the decorative circuit board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as an example, identification units 7, such as the character identification unit 7a and the color identification unit 7b, may also be provided on various decorative circuit boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, and the game board 5, etc.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an identification unit 7 equipped with both a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b, it is not limited to this configuration. It may also be equipped with only a character identification unit 7a, or only a color identification unit 7b.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification unit 7 (character identification unit 7a and color identification unit 7b), decorative circuit boards with similar shapes can be easily distinguished, preventing the incorrect decorative circuit board from being installed during assembly and improving the efficiency of the assembly process.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, since the identification unit 7 is located on the rear surface of the decorative circuit board, the front side of the decorative circuit board can be made as white as possible. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front of the decorative circuit board to be reflected forward, making the decorative elements at the front brighter and more luminous. At the same time, the decorative circuit board can be made less conspicuous from the front (the player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the color identification section 7b, which serves as the identification section 7, is applied to almost the entire surface of the decorative circuit board. Therefore, by simply looking at a portion of the decorative circuit board, it is possible to recognize whether or not it is the desired (desired color) decorative circuit board. Consequently, even when multiple types of decorative circuit boards are stacked on top of each other during assembly, if a portion of the decorative circuit board is visible, the desired board can be easily found, simplifying the assembly process.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, since the color identification section 7b is different for each decorative circuit board, when preparing the decorative circuit boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there are decorative circuit boards with the same colored color identification section 7b, it is easy to recognize that duplicate decorative circuit boards have been prepared. Alternatively, if there are insufficient colors in the color identification section 7b of the prepared decorative circuit boards, it is easy to recognize that there are missing decorative circuit boards. Therefore, when preparing the decorative circuit boards required for the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize whether extra circuit boards have been prepared or whether there are insufficient circuit boards, ensuring that only the necessary number of circuit boards are prepared, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to assemble. Consequently, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be carried out smoothly, reducing assembly time and suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, in the case of pachinko machine 1, a character identification section 7a is provided on the rear surface of the decorative circuit board to distinguish it from other circuit boards. Therefore, by reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, the operator can easily determine which part the decorative circuit board belongs to, thus achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the front and rear surfaces of each decorative circuit board are white, and an identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface. Therefore, even if the transparency of the decorative element located in front of the decorative circuit board is high, the decorative circuit board can be made less conspicuous from the front (player side), improving the appearance of the decorative element. Additionally, the white front surface of the decorative circuit board allows light from the LEDs to be reflected forward, enabling brighter illumination of the decorative element. This creates a highly effective lighting effect that entertains players and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are located on the rear of the decorative circuit board, making them invisible from the front (player side). This avoids the unsightly appearance caused by the functional components being visible through the decorative elements, thus improving the overall appearance of the decorative elements (gaming machine). Additionally, because the functional components are hidden by being located on the rear of the decorative circuit board, there is no need to color them white (or yellow) to make them less conspicuous. The components can be used as they are, eliminating the need for coloring and thus reducing the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Effects of Door Frames]
According to this embodiment, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 are provided at different positions from one another. By switching the connection between a contact detection body 393 provided at a desired location where the approach or contact of a player is to be detected and the contact detection sensor body 392, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes when a player approaches or makes contact with the contact detection body 393 at the desired location. The contact detection sensor body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393 can detect this change in capacitance, thereby detecting the approach or contact of a player at the desired location. In response to the detection by the contact detection sensor body 392, the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 can execute predetermined controls. On the other hand, when the switching unit 394 connects the contact detection element 393 of the desired location to the contact detection sensor body 392, the connection between the contact detection elements 393 provided in other locations and the contact detection sensor body 392 is disconnected. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection element 393 provided in other locations changes due to the player approaching or touching those locations, the connection to that contact detection element 393 is disconnected by the switching unit 394. As a result, the change in capacitance of that contact detection element 393 is not detected, and only the capacitance of the contact detection element 393 of the desired location can be reliably detected, thus preventing false detections.

In this way, since the contact detection elements 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 are appropriately selected and switched by the switching unit 394 for multiple contact detection elements 393 located at different positions, it becomes possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detection elements 393 with a single contact detection sensor body 392. This reduces the number of channels used for detecting the approach or contact of a player in the control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512, thereby increasing the number of channels available for performance effects. Consequently, it becomes possible to control more performance effects (e.g., movable decorations, light-emitting decorations, performance display devices, etc.) by the control means. This increase in performance effects allows for the presentation of a wider variety of effects to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored, ensuring they are fully entertained, and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, by providing contact detection elements 393 on multiple parts of the pachinko machine 1 that are not to be touched by the player, and by connecting the contact detection element 393 located at the desired location to the contact detection sensor body 392 via a switching unit 394 according to the game state, it becomes possible to detect the player's approach or contact to the desired location and ignore predetermined warnings or alarms issued by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512. Therefore, a single contact detection sensor body 392 can monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1 while relatively increasing the number of channels that can be used for performances, achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, since multiple contact detection elements 393 are detected by a single contact detection sensor body 392, each contact detection element 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392 are positioned separately. This allows the sensor body, which contains electronic components such as the sensor IC and output circuit, to be placed in a location less visible to the player, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor body 392 is equipped with pre-existing connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection elements 393, the contact detection sensor body 392 can detect the capacitance of the contact detection elements 393 simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection elements 393 to the connection terminals of the contact detection sensor body 392. This simplifies the assembly process of the pachinko machine 1 and helps to reduce the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor body 392 is pre-equipped with connection terminals, the contact detection sensor body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection element 393 to the connection terminals of the contact detection sensor body 392. Compared to a case where a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor body 392 and connected to the contact detection element 393 via the conductive member, the number of parts can be reduced, lowering the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Additionally, the design of the conductive member for connecting to the contact detection element 393 can be eliminated, increasing the flexibility of the placement of the contact detection element 393 and the contact detection sensor body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the aforementioned effects.

Furthermore, a switching unit 394 is provided to switch the contact detection element 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392. Since the switching unit 394 allows selection of the contact detection element 393 to be detected, for example, when a player-participation feature is implemented where multiple contact detection elements 393 are distributed and the player is instructed to touch them in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 can be used to switch the contact detection element 393 connected to the contact detection sensor body 392 at the timing when the player touches the elements in order. This allows for detection of whether the player touched the contact detection elements 393 in the correct order, enabling the realization of highly engaging player-participation features using a single contact detection sensor body 392, thereby providing a more enjoyable pachinko machine 1 for players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, when a player's fingers or other body approach or come into contact with the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, which can be pressed by the player, the player approaches the contact detection element 352, which is made of a metal plate covered by the button body 351 on the player's side, and the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 changes. Since the capacitance of this contact detection element 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, the change in the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 can be detected, and therefore, the approach or contact of the player to the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) can be detected via the contact detection element 352.

In this way, when the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 detect the player's approach to or contact with the performance operation unit 350, a predetermined performance is output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351 by performance means such as the button exterior decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button interior decoration board 364, and sudden output adjustment mechanism 380. This allows the player to be entertained by the performance and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game. At this time, since a predetermined performance is output when the player approaches or contacts the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358 can make the performance operation unit 350 function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit. Furthermore, since the performance control unit 350, which functions as both a non-contact and a contact control unit, can be pressed by the player when extended, the performance control unit 350 allows for a variety of performance operations, including non-contact, contact, and press operations. This makes it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with a different appearance from conventional pachinko machines equipped with buttons that only allow press operations, thereby differentiating it from other pachinko machines and providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, the system outputs predetermined effects to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 by the contact detection sensor body 358. Since the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the contact detection element 352 (button body 351) and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, allowing for the output of different effects for each threshold. Therefore, it becomes possible to detect the distance from the player's approach to the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to contact in multiple stages. By outputting effects corresponding to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, preventing boredom and maintaining a sense of enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor body 358, which detects the capacitance of the contact detection element 352, is located away from the contact detection element 352, the contact detection sensor body 358, which contains electronic components such as the sensor IC and output circuit, can be installed in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is not easily visible to the player. This improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhances its appeal to players.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the control unit allows for a variety of performance operations, including non-contact, contact, and pressing operations. By enabling player-participatory performances that allow for player control, a diverse range of performance operations can be enjoyed, preventing players from becoming bored. Additionally, the player-participatory performances can be enjoyed, thus preventing a decline in players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the contact detection body 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, is made of perforated metal consisting of a metal plate with multiple holes, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 can be reduced when the player is not approaching or touching the button body 351 due to the multiple holes, thereby preventing false detections by the contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, and arrangement of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing the increase in capacitance, thereby widening the range in which the contact detection body 352 detects the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350). This allows the contact detection element 352 to be enlarged, thereby widening the detection range. Therefore, as in the above embodiment, when the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) that the player can press is enlarged, and the contact detection element 352 is made to be the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, when a player is required to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) due to the execution of a player-participation performance, the contact detection element 352, which is covered by the button body 351, is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. This shortens the distance the player's fingers or other body must move to approach or touch the performance operation unit 350, allowing for quicker operation of the performance operation unit 350. This makes it less likely for the player to miss the timing of operations in a player-participation performance, ensures reliable participation in the performance, and allows the player to enjoy the performance and prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the contact detection element 352 is made of perforated metal, the light emission from the LED 364a of the button's decorative circuit board 364, which is located on the opposite side of the contact detection element 352 from the player, can be output to the player through the multiple holes formed in the contact detection element 352. This ensures that the player can enjoy the light emission and prevents a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the pressable performance control unit 350 (button body 351) is equipped with a contact detection element 352, the contact detection element 352, made of perforated metal, which has a certain degree of strength and rigidity, can reinforce the performance control unit 350. Therefore, even if the player strongly presses or strikes the performance control unit 350 (button body 351) during the press operation, the performance control unit 350 is less likely to deform or break. Consequently, because the contact detection element 352 makes the performance control unit 350 less susceptible to damage, players can press the performance control unit 350 without hesitation, allowing them to enjoy the player-participatory performances involving the operation of the performance control unit 350 more fully and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the contact detection element 352 is made of perforated metal, compared to the case where the contact detection element 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same thickness, the thickness of the contact detection element 352 can be reduced. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detection element 352, facilitating its installation, and increasing design flexibility, thus making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, because the contact detection element 352 is made of perforated metal, its thickness is constant compared to expanded metal. This allows for easy processing of the contact detection element 352 into a desired three-dimensional shape through press working. This makes it easier to create a shape optimized for detecting the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350), thus reliably realizing the aforementioned effects and advantages.

Furthermore, in the performance control unit 350, the player-facing side of the contact detection element 352 is covered by the button body 351. This prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection element 352, which is made of perforated metal with multiple holes. This avoids causing discomfort to the player by preventing them from touching the perforated contact detection element 352. Additionally, in player-participation performances where the button body 351 is used as the control unit, the button body 351 can be operated without discomfort, allowing the player to enjoy the performance and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the player-facing side of the contact detection element 352, which is made of perforated metal, is covered by the button body 351, dust, food, and other contaminants do not adhere to the multiple holes formed in the contact detection element 352. This makes cleaning easier, and as a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to clean, it reduces the burden on the amusement hall that installs this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the external decorative circuit board 355, vibration motor 356, performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, internal decorative circuit board 364, and protruding output adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the side of the contact detection body 352 opposite to the player's side. This allows predetermined performances to be output to the player through the contact detection body 352 and the button body 351. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (performance control unit 350), the predetermined performance is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detection body 352 and the transparent button body 351. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the performance control unit 350, ensuring they enjoy the performance output through the unit and preventing a decline in their interest.

Furthermore, since the performance means such as the button exterior decoration board 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button interior decoration board 364, and sudden output adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the side of the contact detection body 352 opposite to the player's side, the performance means are covered by the contact detection body 352. This allows the contact detection body 352 (performance operation unit 350) and the performance means to be compactly integrated. Therefore, the performance operation unit 350 and performance means, which exhibit the above-mentioned effects, can be easily installed in desired locations on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance control unit 350 (button body 351), which is provided to move up and down in the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 of the performance control unit 350 changes. Therefore, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 with the contact detection sensor body 358, the approach or contact of the player to the performance control unit 350 can be detected. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the approach or contact of the player to the performance control unit 350, the performance control unit 350 protrudes upward due to the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 of the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360. Therefore, if the performance control unit 350 protrudes while the player is not in contact with it, it will come into contact with (collide with) the player. If the performance control unit 350 protrudes while the player is in contact with it, it can present the player with a performance effect that uses a physical force to push the player. Therefore, the unique effects not seen in previous pachinko machines can create a strong impact on players, drawing their attention to the effects control unit 350 and ensuring they notice its protrusion.

When extending the performance control unit 350, moving the lower spring retaining member 385 of the extension force adjustment mechanism 380 toward the upper end of the spring 365 (upward) increases the compression of the spring 365, thereby increasing the biasing force. Moving it toward the direction away from the upper end of the spring 365 (downward) weakens the compression of the spring 365, thereby decreasing the biasing force. By moving the lower spring retaining member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the performance control unit 350 by the spring 365 can be changed. In this way, the performance control unit 350 can be extended with various extension forces, increasing the variety of performances caused by physical force, making it less likely for players to get bored, and allowing them to enjoy the performance caused by the extension of the performance control unit 350, thus preventing a decline in players' interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the force output of the performance control unit 350 is changed according to the game state, when a player approaches or touches the performance control unit 350 with their fingers or other body parts, the strong force with which the unit 350 makes contact creates a strong impact on the player. This can strongly suggest that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state), thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the performance control unit 350 is equipped with a pressable operation unit 303, when a player-participation performance is executed, the player can be made to press the performance control unit 350, thereby allowing the player to participate in the performance and preventing a decline in enjoyment by providing an enjoyable experience of pressing the performance control unit 350.

Furthermore, since the performance control unit 350 is designed to be pressable, for players who have their fingers or other body parts resting on the performance control unit 350 (the upper surface of the button body 351) so that they can press it at any time, when a player-participation performance requiring the press of the performance control unit 350 is executed, the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360 extends the performance control unit 350. This allows players to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation performance without needing to be notified by performance images or sounds, thereby increasing their motivation to press the performance control unit 350 and making the player-participation performance even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, since the performance control unit 350 is extended by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, compared to the case where the performance control unit 350 is extended using a drive motor, the performance control unit 350 can be extended more easily and forcefully, making it easier to achieve the effects described above.

Furthermore, by detecting the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 using the contact detection sensor body 358, the system detects the player's approach to or contact with the performance control unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 varies depending on the distance between the performance control unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, allowing the performance control unit 350 to protrude with different protrusion forces for each threshold. Therefore, the contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the distance from the player's fingers or other body parts approaching the performance control unit 350 to contact in multiple stages. By protruding with protrusion forces appropriate to each stage, a wider variety of performances can be presented to the player, preventing boredom and maintaining a sense of enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or touches the performance operation unit 350, which is provided so that the player can move forward and backward when the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 is popped up by the execution of a player-participation performance, the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 provided on the back side of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 that the player touches changes. On the other hand, the contact detection sensor body 358, which is provided separately from the contact detection body 352 in the performance operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Therefore, it can capture the change in capacitance of the contact detection body 352 due to the player's approach or contact, and thus it can detect the player's approach or contact to the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, based on the detection by the contact detection sensor body 358 or the player's movement (pressing) of the performance control unit 350, predetermined performances are executed by the performance means, including the performance control unit's outer decorative substrate 320, button outer decorative substrate 355, performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decorative substrate 364, protruding output adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600. In other words, since predetermined performances are executed by the player moving the performance control unit 350 forward or backward, or approaching or touching the performance control unit 350, these performances can entertain the player and prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the player approaches or touches the performance control unit 350, the performance is executed, allowing the performance control unit 350 (button body 351) to function like a performance control unit (non-contact control unit, contact control unit). Conversely, when the player moves the performance control unit 350 forward or backward (presses it), the performance is executed, allowing the performance control unit 350 to function like a performance control unit (press control unit). Therefore, since the player can perform a variety of performance operations, by implementing player-participatory performances that allow for player-operated performances, a variety of performance operations can be enjoyed, preventing players from becoming bored, and allowing players to enjoy player-participatory performances, thus suppressing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the player is detected by the capacitance of a contact detection element 352 located near the part of the button body 351 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a) in the performance control unit 350. Since the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detection element 352 (button body 351) and the player, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds for executing predetermined performances, and execute different performances for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the distance from the player's fingers or other body to contact with the performance control unit 350 in multiple stages. By presenting performances according to each stage, a wider variety of performances can be offered to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since a predetermined performance is executed upon detection of the player by the contact detection element 352 and the contact detection sensor main unit 358, this performance can provide a sense of control to the performance operations (non-contact operations and contact operations) using the contact detection element 352 and the contact detection sensor main unit 358, thereby making the performance operation more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, because the system includes a performance control unit 350 that the player can move forward and backward (press), and a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the performance control unit 350, it becomes possible to request a variety of operations from the player during player-participation performances, such as moving the performance control unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operation) or approaching or touching the performance control unit 350 with fingers, etc. (non-contact operation, contact operation). These diverse operations can increase the player's desire to participate in the player-participation performance, making it easier for them to participate. When the player participates in the player-participation performance, the variety of operations using the performance control unit 350, the contact detection body 352, and the contact detection sensor body 358 can keep the player from getting bored, allow them to enjoy the player-participation performance, and prevent a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, by locking the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the performance control unit 350 to the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 in the performance control unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance control unit 350 can be locked to prevent it from moving forward or backward. Therefore, until an effect that causes the performance control unit 350 to move forward or backward is executed, the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 keep the performance control unit 350 immobile, preventing it from moving or shaking unintentionally. Consequently, it is possible to avoid causing distrust or anxiety in the player due to the performance control unit 350 moving or shaking unintentionally, and to allow the player to enjoy the performances provided by the performance control unit 350 more fully.

Furthermore, since the contact detection sensor body 358 in the performance control unit 350 is positioned away from the contact detection element 352, the contact detection sensor body 358, which contains electronic components such as the sensor IC and output circuit, can be placed in a location that is difficult for the player to see, thereby improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the contact detection element 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detection sensor body 358, which has a sensor IC and output circuit for detecting the capacitance of the contact detection element 352, are separate components, the shape and material of the contact detection element 352 can be appropriately selected independently of the contact detection sensor body 358. Therefore, the contact detection element 352 can be optimally matched to the shape, form, and specifications of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, thereby reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the effects described above.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the door frame 3's performance operation unit 300, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the button interior decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398, the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 or contact detection element 397 provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the button interior decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 changes. In response to this change, a predetermined performance is executed in which light is emitted towards the player by the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the button interior decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398. As a result, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the button interior decorative substrate 364, or the decorative body 398 by the light emitted towards the player, and the player can be entertained by the performed performance. In this case, the contact detection element 352 or 397, which is provided between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button's outer decorative substrate 355 or the button's inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative element 398, is formed to follow the decorative portion provided on the button body 351 or surface member 396. Therefore, the player can be made to perceive the contact detection element 352 or 397 as part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detection element 352 or 397 is for detecting the player.

In this way, since the contact detection element 352 or 397 is made undetectable by the player, even if the contact detection element 352 or 397 obstructs part of the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detection element 352 or 397. Furthermore, even if the contact detection element 352 or 397 is positioned in front of the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398, its presence will not cause the player any discomfort. Therefore, the effects of the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398 can be displayed to the player in a good state, allowing the player to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., to the button body 351 or surface member 396 using the contact detection element 352 or contact detection element 397, a light effect is performed on the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the button interior decorative substrate 364, or the decorative element 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396, so that light is projected toward the player. This allows the button body 351 or surface member 396 to function like a performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302), and also provides the player with a sense of operation through light. Therefore, for example, when a player-participation feature is executed, the player's fingers or other body parts are brought close to or into contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396. The contact detection element 352 or 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or other body parts, triggering the execution of the feature by the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398. This allows the player to participate in the player-participation feature and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the contact detection element 352 or 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, the effects of the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398 can be varied depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc. Therefore, the effects of the button's outer decorative board 355, the button's inner decorative board 364, or the decorative element 398 can be changed according to the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing for a wider variety of effects to be shown to the player. This variety of effects can also help to keep the player from getting bored and prevent a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, the system is designed to detect changes in the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 or 397. When a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 or 397, located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the button's outer decorative substrate 355 or the button's inner decorative substrate 364 or decorative element 398, changes. This allows for easy detection of the player's approach or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, thus reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the aforementioned effects.

Furthermore, since the contact detection element 352 or 397 is used to detect changes in capacitance, the contact detection element 352 or 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if the contact detection element 397 is made of a metal vapor-deposited film, it can be made transparent by making the vapor-deposited film thin, or it can be made to have a metallic luster by making the vapor-deposited film thicker, making it appear as part of the decoration. Alternatively, if the contact detection elements 352 and 395 are made of perforated metal with an aesthetically pleasing shape such as a star or heart, the contact detection elements 352 and 395 can be made to appear as part of the decoration. Therefore, the contact detection elements 352, 395, and 397 can be made unrecognizable by the player, and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when a player's fingers or the like approach or touch the transparent button body 351 covering the upper side (surface side). As a result of this change, the contact detection body 395 (including contact detection body 352, left contact detection body 390L, right contact detection body 390R, contact detection body 393, and contact detection body 397, etc.) that causes the performance presentation means such as the button outer decoration substrate 355, vibration motor 356, performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, button inner decoration substrate 364, sudden output adjustment mechanism 380, and performance display device 1600 to present a predetermined performance is formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape that has design appeal. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated by the contact detection body 395 itself, making it look good and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Furthermore, the surface of the contact detection element 395, etc., is covered with a transparent button body 351, and in response to the change in capacitance of the contact detection element 395, etc., caused by the approach of the player's fingers, etc., to the contact detection element 395, etc., the performance presentation means presents a predetermined performance via the button body 351 and the contact detection element 395, etc. Therefore, in response to the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., to the button body 351, a predetermined performance is presented, and the button body 351 can function as a performance operation unit 301. Moreover, since the contact detection element 395, etc., visible through the button body 351 has a design aesthetic, the performance operation unit 301 appears to have a design aesthetic, and the pachinko machine 1, equipped with a performance operation unit 301 that has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines, can make a strong impact on the player and can be made into a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as described above, the aesthetically pleasing contact detection element 395, etc., can make a strong impact on the player, thereby generating strong interest in the contact detection element 395, etc. (button body 351), increasing anticipation for operating the button body 351 (performance operation unit 301), and allowing the player to enjoy operating the button body 351 when a player-participation performance involving the button body 351 is executed, thus preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the contact detection element 395, which detects the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351, is formed in an aesthetically pleasing outer shape, it is possible to make it difficult for some players to notice the presence of the performance operation unit 301 (button body 351) that is used to present performances by the performance presentation means at first glance. Therefore, when a player-participation performance that involves operating the performance operation unit 301 is performed, prompting the player to approach or touch the button body 351 allows the player to realize for the first time that the button body 351 is the performance operation unit 301 controlled by the contact detection element 395, etc., adding an element of surprise to the player and making the player-participation performance more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation type of performance is executed using the performance control unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with their fingers or other body without realizing it is the performance control unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detection element 395, etc., changes, and a performance is presented by the performance presentation means. This can surprise the player, and the presented performance can entertain the player and prevent a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the presentation means displays effects in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detection element 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach and contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detection element 395, etc., making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because the presentation means displays effects in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detection element 395, etc., it is possible to detect the distance from the approach to the contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 covering the contact detection element 395, etc., in multiple stages. By displaying effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the outer circumference of the contact detection element 395 is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as perforated metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detection element 395, it is possible to give the contact detection element 395 aesthetic appeal, prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the contact detection element 395, and make the contact detection element 395 stand out, thereby making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the outer shape of the contact detection element 395, etc., is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to construct an aesthetically pleasing device without having to form the contact detection element 395, etc., into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detection element 395, etc., can be made into a planar shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost of the contact detection element 395, etc.

Furthermore, since the surface of the contact detection element 395, etc., is covered with a transparent button body 351, dust, food, and other contaminants do not adhere to the contact detection element 395, etc., making cleaning much easier. More specifically, because the contact detection element 395, etc., uses a material with irregularities such as perforated metal, dust, food, and other contaminants easily adhere to these irregularities, making cleaning time-consuming. However, because the surface of the contact detection element 395, etc., is covered with the button body 351, even if a material with irregularities like perforated metal is used for the contact detection element 395, etc., the button body 351 prevents the adhesion of contaminants, making cleaning easier and reducing the burden on the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the surface of the contact detection element 395 is covered with a transparent button body 351, preventing the player from touching the contact detection element 395, if a material that enhances the design, such as a metal vapor-deposited film or foil stamping, is used for the contact detection element 395, premature wear due to player contact can be prevented, thereby increasing the durability of the contact detection element 395.

Furthermore, the surface of the contact detection element 395 is covered with a transparent button body 351. As described above, since the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detection element 395, it becomes possible to use materials that are rough to the touch or that would cause discomfort to the player as the contact detection element 395. This increases the freedom of materials used for the contact detection element 395, allowing it to be formed using materials that meet specific needs.

Furthermore, by bringing the player's fingers or other body parts close to or touching the button body 351, which covers the contact detection element 395, etc., the capacitance of the contact detection element 395, etc., is changed. This causes a predetermined visual effect to be presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection element 395, etc. Therefore, the visual effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detection element 395, etc., allows the player to intuitively recognize that their fingers or other body parts have come close to or touched the button body 351, thus allowing the player to enjoy the action of their fingers or other body parts.

Furthermore, the system presents visual effects to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection element 395. When the player's fingers or other body parts approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detection element 395, the visual effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detection element 395 are executed. This allows the button body 351 to function like a contact operation unit, while the presented visual effects provide a sense of operation, enabling the player to enjoy operation using the button body 351 (player-participatory visual effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with their fingers or the like, and when the contact detection body 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects that the fingers or the like have entered the detection area of the button body 351, the following effects are performed: a lighting effect in which light is shone on the player through the button body 351 by the illumination of multiple LEDs 355a on the button exterior decoration board 355 and multiple LEDs 364a on the button interior decoration board 364; a vibration effect in which the player's fingers or the like that are in contact with the button body 351 are vibrated by the vibration motor 356; and an effect in which the button body 351 is extended upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, thereby applying impact, pushing up, wind pressure, etc., to the player through the button body 351. As a result, the button body 351 can function as a contact operation unit 302, and the player can be entertained. Furthermore, during this process, the player receives various effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and air pressure through the button body 351. These effects can surprise and entertain the player, increasing their motivation to operate the button body 351. When the player's fingers touch the button body 351 and move them appropriately to press it downwards, the button body 351 functions as a press operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation detected by the contact detection element 352, along with the press operation of the button body 351, allows the player to enjoy a variety of effects, preventing boredom and maintaining a high level of interest.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., is composed of a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, and the contact detection body 352 is positioned near the back surface of the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, even if the contact detection sensor body 358, which contains the detection circuit, is positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, the contact detection body 352 can still detect the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., on the upper surface portion 351a of the button body 351, thus achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, since the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., is composed of a contact detection body 352 and a contact detection sensor body 358, the contact detection sensor body 358, which has the detection circuit, can be placed on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the upper surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button body 351. This allows the contact detection sensor body 358 to be placed in a less conspicuous location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the button's outer decorative circuit board 355, the button's inner decorative circuit board 364, and the effect control unit lifting mechanism 360 are provided on the back (bottom) side of the button body 351, it is easier to apply effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward push, and air pressure to the player through the button body 351, thereby achieving the same effects as described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main frame]
The overall configuration of the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main frame from the front right, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main frame from the front left, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main frame from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a game area 5a where the game is played by inserting game balls B. It also dispenses the game balls B to the player and discharges the used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment side of the gaming hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main frame 4 is attached to the outer frame 2, which is mounted on the island equipment of the gaming hall, at the top and bottom of the front left side, and a door frame 3 is attached to it, which can be opened and closed, to close the open front side.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear end can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5; a main frame upper hinge member 510 attached to the upper left end of the main frame base unit 500 in a front view, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a main frame lower hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower left end of the main frame base unit 500 in a front view, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

Furthermore, the main frame 4 includes a main frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 in a front view, a ball launching device 540 attached to the lower front of the main frame base unit 500 for launching game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper and left edges in a front view on the rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear of the payout base unit 550 for dispensing game balls B to the player, a circuit board unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500, a back cover 640 attached to the rear of the main frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable and covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 in a front view for locking the space between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 comprises a main frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape with an elongated vertical shape when viewed from the front; a connection cable guide member 502 for guiding the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3; and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, extending to the left and right and open upwards; a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, extending to the left in a groove shape and open upwards; a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 in a front view; a ball flow straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The dispensing unit 560 includes a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, a dispensing device 580 that dispenses the game balls B guided by the ball guidance unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the dispensing control board 633, an upper full-tank ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the dispensing device 580 downward, and a lower full-tank ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The circuit board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a mounted on the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e mounted on the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 vertically, a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 for moving the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main frame base unit 500 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connecting cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main frame. The main frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 comprises a main frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a connection cable guide member 502 attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main frame base 501 for guiding the connection cable 503; and a game board lock member 505, which is rotatably attached to the lower front surface of the main frame base 501 around an axis extending front to back, for detachably holding the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises: a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a game board insertion opening 501b extending from slightly below the upper end of the base body 501a, penetrating from front to back for approximately 3/4 of the total height, into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front; a game board mounting section 501c forming the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b, on which the game board 5 is placed; and a game board restricting section 501d protruding upward from the left-right center of the game board mounting section 501c, restricting the left-right and rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5.

Furthermore, the main frame base 501 includes a launching device mounting section 501e which is recessed to the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting section 501c on the front of the base body 501a and is used to mount the ball launching device 540, a cylinder insertion opening 501f which penetrates from front to back on the right side of the launching device mounting section 501e in a front view and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, a circular speaker opening 501g which penetrates from front to back on the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting section 501c and allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the circuit board unit 620 to face forward, and the main frame base 501 is recessed to the rear below the speaker opening 501g and extends to the left and right and is used to mount the connecting cable guide member 502, and a cable insertion opening 501i which penetrates from front to back at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in a front view.

Furthermore, the main frame base 501 extends in a plate-like shape to the rear from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b in the base body 501a when viewed from the front. A locking unit 650 is attached to its right side, and a rear cover 640 is rotatably attached to its rear end. It also includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l formed near both the upper and lower ends of the left edge of the rear surface of the base body 501a when viewed from the front, for attaching the upper hinge member 510 and the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame.

Furthermore, the main frame base 501 has a door frame release switch mounted below the cylinder insertion opening 501f on the front surface of the base body 501a through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4. The door frame release switch is released when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, allowing detection of the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the main frame base 501 has a main frame release switch mounted on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame release switch is mounted, for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. The main frame release switch is released when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, allowing detection of the opening of the main frame 4. The detection signal from the main frame release switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably mounted on the main frame base 501, below the game board mounting section 501c on the front and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 restricts the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby allowing the game board 5 to be attached and detached from the opening.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends horizontally from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the area where the game board locking member 505 is attached, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically.

The connecting cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending to the left and right, a pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding forward from both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extending to the right of the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a plurality of through holes 502d that penetrate the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a in the front-to-back direction and are arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction.

The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and is formed to a size that can be accommodated within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connecting cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a vertically extending axis near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h, with its mounting shaft 502c. This allows the connecting cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotation) so that its left end protrudes forward.

This connecting cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connecting cable 503. The connecting cable 503 consists of multiple wiring cords; one end is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is connected to the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, the effects of the connecting cable guide member 502 will be explained. As shown in Figure 83, the connecting cable guide member 502 is rotatably attached to the main frame base 501 at the end opposite to the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably mounted in the left-right direction, around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connecting cable 503, which connects the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the main door frame relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3, is attached to the guide body 502a by fastening it together with the guide body 502a using a cable tie 504, which is inserted through a pair of through holes 502d (located in the same left-right direction) among the multiple through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a, while the end connected to the interface board 635 is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a of the connecting cable guide member 502.

The connecting cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed relative to the main frame 4 (see Figure 83(a)). In this state, the connecting cable 503 extends to the left from the connecting cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the door frame relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is located to the left of the left end of the connecting cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connecting cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connecting cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, causing the connecting cable guide member 502 to rotate around the mounting shaft 502c at its right end. In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is formed to satisfy α/2 ≥ β (preferably α/3 ≥ β) (see Figure 83(b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but the increase stops once the opening angle α exceeds a certain point (for example, approximately 90 degrees). In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the left end of the connecting cable guide member 502 rotates so that it moves forward of the main frame base 501. This guides the connecting cable 503, preventing it from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connecting cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward. This causes the left end of the connecting cable guide member 502 to be pressed backward by the connecting cable 503, resulting in the connecting cable guide member 502 rotating around the mounting axis 502c so that its left end moves backward. At this time, because the connecting cable guide member 502 is open at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, it does not obstruct the closing movement of the door frame 3, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly. Furthermore, because the connecting cable 503 is guided by the connecting cable guide member 502, the connecting cable 503 is not caught between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when closing the door frame 3, preventing any malfunction of the connecting cable 503.

Furthermore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connecting cable 503 guided by the connecting cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees. This creates a crease in the folded portion of the connecting cable 503. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened, the 180-degree folded portion of the connecting cable 503 opens, and the crease acts as a closing force on the connecting cable 503. This prevents the connecting cable 503 (and the connecting cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction when the door frame 3 is closed, and instead guides the connecting cable 503 (and the connecting cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connecting cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame than the tip of the connecting cable guide member 502. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, the connecting cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip of the connecting cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and lower hinge pin 126.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the angle at which the tangent line intersects the front surface of the main frame 4 with the circle that passes through the rotation center of the connecting cable guide member 502 and the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame, and the portion (pressing portion) that protrudes rearward on the side of the central axis (axis) of the upper hinge pin 122 and lower hinge pin 126 of the speaker duct 103 compared to the cable holder 103a, is 45 degrees or less. As a result, when closing the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, the pressing portion comes into contact with the connecting cable 503, pressing the tip of the connecting cable guide member 502, which is open via the connecting cable 503, in the closing direction. Therefore, as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Furthermore, since the maximum opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door frame 3, can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connecting cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction when closing the door frame 3, thereby achieving the same effects as described above.

[4-2. Upper hinge component of the main frame]
The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, as well as rotatably attaching to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate with its rear portion bent downwards in an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512, which protrudes upwards in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 and is pivotally supported by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view of the horizontally extending portion, for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge member 510 of the main frame has a portion of the upper hinge body 511 that is bent downwards and extends vertically, which is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base unit 500. The upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and pivotally supported. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper hinge member 510 of the main frame works in cooperation with the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame to enable hinge-rotatable mounting of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and also enables hinge-rotatable mounting of the door frame 3 to the main frame 4.

[4-3. Main frame lower hinge assembly]
The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to it.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 comprises a first lower hinge body 521, in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L-shape, and a second lower hinge body 522, positioned above the first lower hinge body 521, in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is also bent upward in an L-shape. The horizontally extending portion of the second lower hinge body 522 is positioned at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the first lower hinge body 521, and the vertically extending portion of the second lower hinge body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first lower hinge body 521.

The first lower hinge body 521 penetrates vertically near the front end of its horizontally extending portion and has an outer frame lower hinge hole 521a into which the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second body 522 has a lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame, which penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. It also includes a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a on the left side of the horizontally extending portion, for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, at the vertically extending portions of the first lower hinge body 521 and the second lower hinge body 522. The lower hinge assembly 520, in cooperation with the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame, allows the main frame 4 to be hinge-rotatably mounted to the outer frame 2, and also allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotatably mounted to the main frame 4.

[4-4. Main frame reinforcement frame]
The main frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side of the main frame base 501 in the main frame base unit 500. The main frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-section in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed from a metal extruded profile.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has two left position restricting members 531 attached to the rear of the portion extending to the right from the front end. These members restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shape on its front side, which is open on the right side in a plan view, and a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a. When the left reinforcement frame 111 is inserted into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes meandering in a plan view, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the left side. The main frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and also prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side, passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

[4-5. Ball Launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 84. Figure 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device from the rear. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower front of the main frame base unit 500 and is used to launch game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4. The ball launching device 540 can launch game balls B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 comprises a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main frame base unit 500, a launching solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right side of the launching base 541 in a front view, with its pivot axis extending forward through the launching base 541, a ball striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the pivot axis of the launching solenoid 542, and a launching rail 544 attached to the front surface of the launching base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the ball striking hammer 543, on which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is configured so that game balls B are supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game balls B are supplied to the upper right end of the launching rail 544, the launching solenoid 542 is driven with a force corresponding to the rotation angle, and the striking hammer 543 strikes the game balls B. The game balls B struck by the striking hammer 543 are then guided through the launching rail 544 to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and driven into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, if, due to factors such as the force with which the game ball B is struck, the struck game ball B does not reach the game area 5a, it will fall from between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving opening 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be discharged into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispensing Base Unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 85. Figure 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit viewed from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a dispensing base 551 which is attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 has a top plate portion 551a which extends left and right with a width that is approximately constant in the front-to-back direction, a left side plate portion 551b which extends long downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width that is approximately the same as the top plate portion in the front-to-back direction, a right side plate portion 551c which extends short downward from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in a front view with a width that is approximately the same as the top plate portion 551a in the front-to-back direction, and a back plate upper portion 551d which extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the bottom side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the left side plate portion The dispensing base 551 comprises: a left back plate portion 551e extending to the right with a roughly constant width from a position slightly forward of the rear edge of 551b to near the bottom edge; an inner plate portion 551f extending from the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e to the rear to the same position as the rear edge of the left side plate portion 551b; a bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front of the lower edge of the left side plate portion 551b to the right to approximately the same position as the right edge of the left back plate portion 551e; and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom plate portion 551g to the lower edge of the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is a box-shaped structure open to the front and inward of the L-shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a that extends horizontally with a length approximately equal to the width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b that extends vertically with a length approximately equal to the height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

Furthermore, the dispensing base 551 has a shallow recessed area that is open to the rear and extends vertically, formed by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side of the back plate portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to this area. The dispensing base 551 also has a back cover mounting portion 551i that protrudes to the right from the upper right side of the inner plate portion 551f in a front view, to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 includes a box-shaped spherical tank 552 that extends to the left and right and is open upwards, mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551; and a tank rail 553 that extends to the left in a groove-like shape and is open upwards, mounted on the left side of the spherical tank 552, above the portion of the dispensing base 551 that extends to the left and right.

Furthermore, the discharge base unit 550 includes a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 midway along its left-right direction; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 in a front view, and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553; a spherical flow straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; and a spherical stopper member 557 attached near the left end in a front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 is formed to have a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the discharge base 551 in the left-right direction, and a length in the front-back direction that is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-back direction. The spherical tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position slightly to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the spherical tank 552 is sloped so that the left end is lower. The left end of the spherical tank 552 is in communication with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, near the rear end to the left of the center in the left-right direction. In plan view, the tank rail 553 is formed with a shape where, from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, it extends diagonally to the left and rear, with a depth in the front-to-back direction that is several times the outer diameter of the game ball B, then approximately one ball's worth, and then extends straight to the left with a depth in the front-to-back direction that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is sloped so that the left end is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface opens downwards with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

Furthermore, the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is inclined so that the height of the left end is slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B, with the left end being lower than the horizontal at a steeper angle than the bottom surface. The rear end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that it approximately coincides with the rear edge of the top plate portion 551a. Additionally, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball flow straightening member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-back depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or contracting due to the pressure of the game balls B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball flow straightening member 556 is mounted at the upper end of the tank rail 553, between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, with its end on the first rail cover 554 side rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball flow straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see Figure 91). This straightening piece 556a slows down the flow of the upper game balls B, which are flowing in two stages, and straightens the flow so that they flow in a single stage downstream. This prevents ball jamming even when the height inside the tank rail 553 decreases.

The ball-stopping member 557 is mounted on the lower surface of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, and is slidable in the left-right direction. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream dispensing unit.

Furthermore, the payout base unit 550 is further equipped with an external terminal board 558, which is mounted on the upper surface of the portion extending left and right from the payout base 551, on the left side of the ball tank 552 in a front view. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown in the illustration, the external terminal board 558 has an earth connection section facing the game board insertion opening 501b side of the main frame base 501. An earth wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the earth connection section.

[4-7. Overall configuration of the dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left side 551e of the back plate of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, a payout device 580 located below the ball guidance unit 570 that dispenses the game balls B guided by the ball guidance unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies game balls B, which are aligned in a single line by the tank rail 553, to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, based on instructions from the payout control board 633, the payout device 580 releases game balls B from the payout passage 580a towards the upper full-ball path unit 600, and releases game balls B from the ball removal passage 580b, where the ball removal lever 593 is operated, towards the upper full-ball path unit 600.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610, via the upper full ball path unit 600, guides the game balls B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 toward the door frame 3, and guides the game balls B released from the ball removal passage 580b toward the circuit board unit 620.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left side 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is for receiving game balls B from the tank rail 553 and guiding the game balls B toward the payout device 580.

The ball guidance unit 570 includes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which game balls B can flow; a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front of the guidance unit base 571; a movable piece member 573 that moves in response to the game balls B flowing through the guidance passage 570a; and a ball depletion detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guidance passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The spherical guidance unit 570 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front cover 572 extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the height of the guidance unit base 571, then bends to the right, and extends downward in a meandering manner, repeatedly folding back and forth within the width of the guidance unit base 571, before opening downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

The guidance passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front-to-right direction and its width in the left-to-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, allowing the game ball B to be guided in a single line.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a movable piece member 573 mounted near its upper part so that it can move back and forth within the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis extending front to back at the right outer edge of the guidance passage 570a in a front view, and is formed so that a portion of its lower end protrudes into the guidance passage 570a due to its own weight. When a game ball B comes into contact with the portion of the movable piece member 573 protruding into the guidance passage 570a, the protruding portion is pushed back from the guidance passage 570a by the game ball B, returning to a state where it is not protruding.

The ball-deprivation detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a portion of it protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and detects the movable piece member 573 when a portion of it has retracted from the guide passage 570a and is not protruding. Therefore, the ball-deprivation detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and in a non-detection state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

In the assembled state on the main frame 4, the ball guidance unit 570 has its upstream end of the guidance passage 570a connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and its downstream end connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. Because the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game balls B extends in a meandering manner, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, allowing a large number of game balls B to be stored within the guidance passage 570a. Furthermore, the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guidance passage 570a using the ball depletion detection sensor 574, and therefore can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing vane. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing vane when the ball-removing movable piece is in the open position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in (a). The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball-guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The dispensing device 580 comprises a dispensing device body 581 having a box-shaped dispensing passage 580a through which game balls B can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b branching off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a; a flat plate-shaped dispensing device rear cover 582 that closes the dispensing device body 581 from the rear; and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front cover 583 attached to the front of the dispensing device body 581 and open to the rear.

Furthermore, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing motor 584 mounted on the rear surface of the dispensing device body 581 with its rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 mounted on the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, and second The device comprises a dispensing gear member 588 rotatably mounted between the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, having a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with a transmission gear 587 and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a; a dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a; and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 mounted on the rear side of the dispensing device body 581 for detecting the detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Furthermore, the dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing detection sensor 591 that detects game balls B and is attached to the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the dispensing passage 580a; a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached to the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 at the point where it branches off from the dispensing passage 580a, allowing the ball removal passage 580b to be opened and closed; and a ball removal lever 593 that is held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 is closing the ball removal passage 580b and is attached to the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from above. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is greater than the left-right width of the ball guidance unit 570 when viewed from the front, extending to the right.

As shown in Figure 88, the discharge passage 580a of the discharge device 580 opens upward at its upstream end, slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction, when viewed from the rear, and opens downward at its downstream end, near the right end in the left-right direction. The discharge passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to about 1/3 of its total height, gradually moving to the left as it moves downward from the upstream end. From there, it bends slightly diagonally downward to the right, then bends again at about 1/3 of its width and extends almost vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the discharge vane 589. Then, above the center of the payout vane 589, it bends to the right in a rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. After this, it extends downward in a concentric arc with the payout vane 589, forming a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between it and the outer circumference of the payout vane 589. Finally, it extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout vane 589 in a rear view.

Within the dispensing passage 580a, the dispensing detection sensor 591 is positioned below the dispensing vane 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end within the discharge passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge in a rear view to its lower end, and opens downward near the left end in a rear view of the bottom surface.

The main body 581 and the rear cover 582 of the dispensing device are provided with a main body side guide wall 581a and a rear cover side guide wall 582a, respectively, which protrude rearward and forward from each other at the point where the movable ball-removing piece 592 is attached at the point where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball-removing passage 580b diverge, and which are formed to be continuous with the left side wall of the dispensing passage 580a and the ball-removing passage 580b in a rear view. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a are formed at a position to the left in a rear view of the part of the dispensing passage 580a that branches off from the ball-removing passage 580b and extends to the right in a rear view at a height of approximately 1/3 from the top. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in a rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball-removing passage 580b. The ball-removing movable piece 592 rotates by passing between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is mounted on the right side of the dispensing passage 580a in the dispensing device body 581, in a rear view, at the point where the dispensing passage extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and dispensing gear member 588 are positioned in front of the dispensing device body 581, and their front sides are covered by the dispensing device front cover 583. The dispensing gear member 588 has three flat detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced at 120-degree angles in the circumferential direction.

The dispensing blade 589 is positioned between the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582. The dispensing blade 589 has three flat blade pieces 589a extending outward, spaced at 120-degree angles in the circumferential direction. The blade pieces 589a protrude into the dispensing passage 580a in such a way that the space between them and the side wall of the dispensing passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B, in the portion that extends from above towards the axis of rotation and then extends to the right in a rear view. Between the three blade pieces 589a, the dispensing blade 589 has a ball housing section 589b recessed in the center by an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball housing section 589b can accommodate only one game ball B. As a result, the dispensing vane 589 can restrict the movement of the game balls B in the dispensing passage 580a downstream of the dispensing vane 589 by the vane piece 589a, and can also move the game balls B stored in the ball storage section 589b downstream by rotating in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are mounted coaxially and rotatably by the rear cover 582 and front cover 583 of the dispensing device. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is positioned to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 in a rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting a detection piece 588b on the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

The ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatably mounted around an axis extending front-to-back at the upper ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a. The ball-removing movable piece 592 is bent in a V-shape, and is mounted so that the recessed side faces into the discharge passage 580a. The depth of the ball-removing movable piece 592 in the front-to-back direction is smaller than the gap between the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, allowing it to protrude into the ball-removing passage 580b or retract outside the ball-removing passage 580b through the gap between the two walls.

The ball release lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable vertically near the upper end of the ball release movable piece 592, to the left in a rear view. A portion of the ball release lever 593 protrudes rearward through the dispensing device rear cover 582, and it can be slid by operating this protruding portion. By positioning the ball release lever 593 at its lower end, its lower part can contact the ball release movable piece 592, restricting the rotation of the ball release movable piece 592 in a clockwise direction in a rear view, and allowing the ball release passage 580b to be closed by the ball release movable piece 592. Furthermore, by positioning the ball release lever 593 at its raised end, the ball release movable piece 592 can be rotated outward from the ball release passage 580b, allowing the ball release passage 580b to be opened (see Figure 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to allow the ball removal movable piece 592 to rotate, the game balls B, which were in a chain-like state upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592, flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 and down to the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, because the ball removal passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. Furthermore, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment side, there is nothing to restrict the flow of game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, resulting in the game balls B flowing down faster than those on the payout passage 580a side.

In this manner, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball-removing passage 580b at a high speed. Therefore, the game ball B forcefully strikes the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b. However, since the ball-removing movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball-removing passage 580b by passing between the main body-side guide wall 581a of the dispensing device body 581 and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a of the dispensing device rear cover 582, the force of this contact causes the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move outside the ball-removing passage 580b. As a result, the ball-removing movable piece 592 is not trapped between the wall of the ball-removing passage 580b and the game ball B. This prevents strong forces from acting on the ball-removing movable piece 592 by the game ball B, thereby suppressing a decrease in durability and damage to the ball-removing movable piece 592 due to collisions with the game ball B.

Therefore, since the ball-removing movable piece 592 can be made less prone to damage, more game balls B can be discharged more quickly to the island equipment side downstream of the ball-removing passage 580b. This reduces the time required for replacing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1, thereby easing the burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, when the ball-removing movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, it moves to the outside of the ball-removing passage 580b through the gap between the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, which is narrower than the gap between the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-removing movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-removing passage 580b, causing the ball-removing movable piece 592 to move outward through the gap between the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves towards the gap between the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a together with the ball-removing movable piece 592, the narrower gap between the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a prevents only the game ball B from moving outward.

Furthermore, the movement of the game ball B outward is prevented by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. This causes the game ball B to separate from the ball-removing movable piece 592, and the subsequent movement of the ball-removing movable piece 592 is due to inertia. Therefore, no strong force acts on the ball-removing movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged. Additionally, the game ball B will not fly out of the ball-removing passage 580b from between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B flows reliably downstream of the ball-removing passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full bulb path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is for guiding the game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in the shape of a rectangle that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full-tank ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full-tank base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and open at the rear, a box-shaped upper full-tank cover 602 attached to the rear of the upper full-tank base 601 and open at the front, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full-tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full-tank base 601 protrudes to the right from its right side in a front view and includes a rear cover mounting portion 601a for attaching a rear cover.

Furthermore, the upper full ball path unit 600 has an upper ball dispensing passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the upper surface in a front view and extends downward along the left side to a height of approximately 2/3 of the total height from the bottom, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that communicates with the upper ball dispensing passage 600a and extends to the right in a front view for about 3/4 of the total width and also extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and from the left side in a front view from the center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction, The system includes an upper normal discharge passage 600c that extends in the direction and opens downward on its lower surface, an upper full-tank discharge passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c and extending downward from the right side of the center of the upper ball storage passage 600b in a front view, and opening downward on its lower surface, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end of the upper surface in a front view, extends downward almost vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see Figure 91).

The upper full ball path unit 600 has, on its underside, an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full payout passage 600d, and an upper ball removal passage 600e opening downwards in order from the left side when viewed from the front. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled with the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal passage 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game balls B released (dispensed) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 are released downwards through either the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full payout passage 600d, passing through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b. Furthermore, the game balls B released downward from the ball release passage 580b of the payout device 580 are released downward through the upper ball release passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full-tank bulb path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 side or toward the circuit board unit 620 side. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that its front end is lower, and its rear end extends upward.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 comprises a lower full-tank base 611 that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward, having a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c; a lower full-tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full-tank base 611; a discharge passage opening/closing door 613 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full-tank base 611 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and is capable of opening and closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b; and a closing spring 614 that biases the discharge passage opening/closing door 613 in a direction that closes the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b.

The lower full-tank ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at its rear end, the lower normal discharge passage 610a, the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c arranged in order from left to right in a front view, with the upstream ends of each opening upward. The lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610. The lower full-tank discharge passage 610b extends forward at a slightly lower position than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball removal passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full-tank discharge passage 610b in a front view and opens to the right midway along its length in the front-to-back direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is rotatably mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, it closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-tank dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is equipped with an operating projection 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a, when viewed from the front, is formed in the shape of a short arc centered on the pivot point of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and its front end surface is inclined to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. This operating projection 613a is formed to contact the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4.

In the assembled lower full ball path unit 610 with the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which open upward at the rear upper end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, game balls B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d flow through the lower full payout passage 610b, and game balls B released downward from the upper ball removal passage 600e flow through the lower ball removal passage 610c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the lower full ball passage unit 610 has its front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b opening immediately after the through ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving opening 150b of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. Also, the downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens opposite the ball removal guide section 627, which opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the circuit board unit 620.

In the normal state (with the door frame 3 closed relative to the main frame 4), the lower full-ball passage unit 610 rotates counterclockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. This is because the operating projection 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 contacts the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full-ball dispensing passage 610b are open, communicating with the through-ball passage 150a and the full-ball receiving opening 150b of the foul cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating projection 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 separates from the door opening/closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150. The payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates clockwise in a front view direction due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, closing the downstream openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front openings. Therefore, even when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main frame. When assembled on the main frame 4, the payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball release lever 593 of the payout device 580 is in the lowered position, closing the ball release passage 580b, which branches off from the payout passage 580a, at the branching point. Also, in the lower full ball passage unit 610, the payout passage opening/closing door 613 is in the open state.

The ball tank 552, which is open to the top, receives a predetermined number of game balls B from the gaming hall island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball shortage by the ball shortage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. The game balls B supplied to and stored in the ball tank 552 are arranged in a line by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow) downstream of the payout vane 589, resulting in a state where multiple game balls B accumulate upstream of the payout vane 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses against the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. This indicates that at least the game ball B is stored in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout vane 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout vane 589 clockwise when viewed from the rear, the game balls B stored in the ball storage section 589b move clockwise when viewed from the rear and are released downstream of the payout vane 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game balls B released from the payout vane 589 (ball storage section 589b) are then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The game balls B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600, under normal conditions, flow down through the upper ball storage passage 600b to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. The game balls B that have flowed down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and are released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 of the tray unit 200.

When a large number of game balls B are dispensed from the dispensing device 580 and the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a. As a result, the game balls B dispensed from the dispensing device 580 accumulate in the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball passage unit 610. Furthermore, when game balls B are dispensed, they also accumulate in the upper normal dispensing passage 600c of the upper full ball passage unit 600, which is in communication with the lower normal dispensing passage 610a on the upstream side. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of game balls B, and more game balls B are dispensed, game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c upstream, and game balls B begin to flow down toward the upper full-capacity payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game balls B that flow down towards the upper full-capacity payout passage 600d pass through the lower full-capacity payout passage 610b of the lower full-capacity ball path unit 610 and are received by the full-capacity ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Afterward, the game balls B received by the full-capacity ball receiving port 150b are released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This allows the game balls B to be automatically dispensed into the lower tray 202 when the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are dispensed.

Furthermore, when the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and it is no longer possible to release game balls B forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will accumulate and be stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves, and the full-capacity detection sensor 154 detects this. The system then provides a voice alert (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") to the player indicating that the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and temporarily stops the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580 until the full-capacity detection sensor 154 no longer detects anything.

When discharging game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball release lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from its lowered position to its raised position. Then, the lower end of the movable ball release piece 592 is pushed by the game balls B, causing it to rotate clockwise when viewed from the rear. This pushes the movable ball release piece 592 through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, pushing it out to the outside of the ball release passage 580b. This allows the game balls B to enter the ball release passage 580b, which branches off from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game balls B are released downward through the ball release passage 580b.

In this process, at the location of the ball-removing movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B makes stronger contact with the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than with the ball-removing movable piece 592, thus making the ball-removing movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 pass through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. They are then released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c into the ball removal guide section 627 of the circuit board unit 620, and finally discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment side of the gaming hall) through the ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629.

[4-8. Circuit Board Unit]
The circuit board unit 620 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 92 to 96. Figure 92(a) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the circuit board unit viewed from the rear. Figure 93 is a perspective view of the circuit board unit viewed from the rear and below. Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 95 is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. Figure 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. The circuit board unit 620 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500.

The circuit board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting section 501c on the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base unit 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e mounted on the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a portion of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting section 501c on the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, a main frame speaker 622 mounted facing forward near the left end of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 in a front view, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 mounted on the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and open to the front.

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction and comprises a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that penetrates from front to back near the left end in a front view and is composed of multiple slits extending vertically; a front recess 621b for space that bulges from rear to front on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in a front view; and a connecting portion 621c that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the front recess 621b, extends in the left-right direction, and opens diagonally downward and towards the rear.

The main frame speaker 622 is mounted to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear, facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at a 45-degree angle so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker primarily designed to output low frequencies.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that opens to the front. The portion behind the main speaker frame 622 protrudes the most significantly to the rear, and the protrusion gradually decreases in a stepped manner towards the right when viewed from the front. This ensures sufficient space to the right and rear of the speaker box 623 from the center when viewed from the front, allowing for the placement of the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621, excluding the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623, forms part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. Because the speaker cover 621 has a forward-protruding recess 621b on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front, even if the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of rearward protrusion decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently wide space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is ensured.

When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a has a connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a, sandwiching the sealing member 48. This creates a communication between the space behind the main frame speaker 622 and the internal space 40a of the outer frame 2's fascia panel. Therefore, a spacious enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, front fascia panel member 42, and rear fascia panel member 43. This allows the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 to be output (radiated) forward through the opening 42a of the front fascia panel member 42.

To elaborate, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in a front view with a relatively wide depth, and communicates with the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection part 621c and the connection cylinder part 43a. Therefore, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear can be transmitted to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side without attenuating the low frequencies in particular. Furthermore, the transmitted low frequencies can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42.

In this configuration, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated with inverted phase. This causes it to resonate in a way that amplifies the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200. Therefore, even with a small diameter main frame speaker 622, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of the bass reflex type, allowing players to hear deep bass. This allows players to hear a sound with rich bass, produced by the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the disc unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grille member 46 of the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, the speaker unit 620a has a through-hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, extending in the front-to-back direction between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space. The speaker box 623 also has a through-cylinder 623a that extends cylindrically and communicates with the through-hole 621d, extending in the front-to-back direction. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-cylinder 623a communicate with each other, and the unit becomes independent of the enclosure 624. A connecting cable 503 is inserted through these through-holes 621d and 623a.

The base unit 620b of the circuit board unit 620 comprises a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear of the front base 625, on which the power supply unit 620c is attached.

Furthermore, the base unit 620b is formed by the cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and includes a ball release guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball release passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in a front view, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right in a front view downstream of the ball release guide section 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game balls B that have passed through the ball release guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628 downward.

The ball release guide unit 627 has an upstream end that opens to the left on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and a downstream end that opens to the left end of the discharged ball receiving unit 628. When assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end opening of the ball release guide unit 627 is positioned to coincide with the downstream end opening of the lower ball release passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, allowing it to receive the game balls B released from the lower ball release passage 610c and guide them to the discharged ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection receiving section 628 is open upwards and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the ball ejection receiving section 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball release guide section 627 at its left end in a front view, and slopes downwards towards the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and those discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view using the ball removal guide unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628, and then discharges them downward from the ball discharge port 629. This makes it easier to secure a wider space to the left of the center in a front view. As a result, the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be made larger, allowing players to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the circuit board unit 620 comprises a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 mounted on the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d comprises a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see Figure 96) housed within the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing of the ball dispensing button 224 of the ball dispensing operation unit 220 in the tray unit 200, or payout commands from the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, to dispense a specified number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is designed to leave traces of opening and closing. This allows for the detection of unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby increasing the deterrent against fraudulent activity.

The interface unit 620e comprises a circuit board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface circuit board 635 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board base 634, and an interface circuit board cover 636 attached to the circuit board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface circuit board 635.

The circuit board base 634 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 623, at the point that protrudes most far to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end of the connection cable 503 (the main frame 4 side) is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc., and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the circuit board base 634 (interface board 635) in a front view, covering a portion of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5, which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. In a front view, the right edge of the back cover 640 is rotatably attached around a vertically extending axis to the rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main frame base 501, which extends vertically, and the left edge is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape where the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward when viewed from the front. When assembled to the main frame 4, its rear surface is positioned approximately flush with the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate of the dispensing base 551. The back cover 640 has multiple slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the inside of the main frame 4 to be viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking Unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 97. Figure 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 and locks the space between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extending vertically; a plurality of door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3; a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2; and a transmission cylinder 654 protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moving the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 vertically depending on the rotational direction.

Furthermore, the locking unit 650 includes a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the assembled state on the main frame 4, the locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501. When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, its front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 on the door frame 3, transmitting the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 and causing it to rotate.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 on the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hooking member 24 and lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 on the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, inserting the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotating it counterclockwise (from a front view) causes multiple door frame hooks 652 to move upward via the transmission cylinder 654, unlocking the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4. Conversely, rotating the key clockwise (from a front view) causes multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, unlocking the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. With the door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, unlocking the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. In this way, the locks between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are angled so that their tips become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 move downward or upward, overcoming the hooking member 116, the upper hooking member 24, and the lower hooking member 25, before being locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in a perspective view of the main frame seen from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view seen from the front and above with the tank rails etc. assembled on the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front and below. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front, with Figure 100(a) disassembled. Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area in the upper part of the main frame through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view showing the area near the tank rails in a perspective view of the main frame seen from the rear on the hinge side.

As described above, the main frame 4 consists of a frame-shaped main frame base 501 whose rear end can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and which is attached to the outer frame 2 detachably and hinge-rotatably by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which is capable of supporting the outer circumference of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges in a front view on the rear side of the main frame base 501; a box-shaped (container-shaped) ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 that extends to the left and right and is open upwards; and a groove-shaped element attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 that is open upwards and extends to the left. The system comprises a tank rail 553, a first rail cover 554 attached to a portion of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 in a front view, a ball flow straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 at the rear of the payout base 551 for dispensing game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape in plan view, extending horizontally. It has a bottom wall 552a that slopes downwards on the left side in front view, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upwards from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upwards from the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a. It is formed as a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as amusement halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed.

Furthermore, the spherical tank 552 has an overflow section 552f formed by cutting out from above the front wall 552b, resulting in a section lower than the remaining upper edge of the outer circumference. This overflow section 552f extends from the end of the left wall 552d to the opposite end (the right wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b, covering approximately 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction.

In a front view, the right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 communicates with the interior of the ball tank 552, while the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction, moving away from the ball tank 552. At the bottom of the tank rail 553, it has a trough-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from near the upstream end to the downstream end and has a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B, which is formed to allow only one game ball B to flow through at a time. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower towards the left in a front view. Furthermore, in a plan view, the main guide section 553a is formed in a crank shape, extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to a position approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction from the right end, then moving backward as it moves to the left, extending diagonally from the right end to a position approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction from the right end, and then extending parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction to the left end. In the main guide section 553a, the tank rail 553 has a portion extending parallel to the axis extending from the left end to the right in the left-right direction, and this portion extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper end of this portion is closed by attaching the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball flow straightening member 556. Furthermore, in the portion where the upper end of the tank rail 553 is closed, the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows decreases towards the downstream end (left end). At the downstream end, the height is such that only one game ball B can flow (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

Furthermore, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide section 553a, from its upstream end to a closed section on the upper side. It has a bulging section 553b that is wider than the main guide section 553a, allowing multiple game balls B to be lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the direction of game ball B's flow. The bulging section 553b narrows in width from the upstream end downstream, eventually matching the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B, which were spread out in the width direction upstream, to be aligned so that their width becomes the width of a single game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that its width narrows from the upper end towards the main guide section 553a below. Therefore, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b so that their width becomes a single line as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge 553b of the tank rail 553 has its center of curvature located on the inward side and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Because the center of curvature of the bulge 553b is located above the main guide section 553a, a slightly chamfered corner is formed at the boundary between the main guide section 553a and the bulge 553b in the tank rail 553. Furthermore, the curvature of the bulge 553b is greater on the downstream side than on the upstream side. As a result, when a game ball B flows through the three-dimensionally curved bulge 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge 553b acts changes in various directions depending on the position of contact with the bulge 553b, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball jamming within the bulge 553b. In detail, if the bulge 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force will always act on the game ball B circulating within the bulge 553b from the inner surface of the bulge 553b in a constant direction. This reaction force is difficult to disperse, causing the game ball B inside to be constantly pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and increasing the likelihood of ball jams (ball jams). In contrast, because the bulge 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulge 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Therefore, the direction in which the multiple game balls B circulating inside are pushed is dispersed, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and reducing the likelihood of ball jams (ball jams).

Furthermore, the tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, allowing the interior to be seen from the outside. This means that even if a ball jam occurs within the tank rail 553, the condition of the game balls B inside can be seen from the outside, allowing for quick identification of the jam's location. Therefore, ball jams within the tank rail 553 can be quickly resolved, minimizing interruptions to gameplay and reducing the decline in player enjoyment. Additionally, because the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear of the game board 5 (rear unit 3000) attached to the main frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from behind. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the movable performance unit of the game board 5, the condition of the drive motor, gears, belts, and other transmission mechanisms can be checked while the game board 5 remains attached to the main frame 4, achieving the same effects as described above.

The main frame 4 is located in front of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction. The side on which the tank rail 553 is downstream in the left-right direction (the left side in a front view) extends outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. The frame includes an overflow surface 501m, which is sloped so that the rear end is at the same height as the overflow section 552f and the front end is higher, in order to return the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552. The frame also includes a detour passage 552g, which extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to above the bulging section 553b of the tank rail 553, which is open on the upper side, and is sloped so that the rear end is lower. The side on which the frame is furthest from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction (the left side) is lower, and the detour passage 552g guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m.

Furthermore, the main frame 4 is provided on the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, opposite the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552. It includes a discharge section 551j, where the distance in the left-right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball B, and the height of the bottom surface is lower than the open upper portion of the tank rail 553; an external terminal board 558, located on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g with the discharge section 551j in between, at a position lower than the overflow surface 501m, and having multiple wire connection terminals 558a that allow electrical wiring to be connected from the rear; and a terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558), with its upper surface extending horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends in a flat, plate-like shape backward from a position 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B, below the upper edge of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed as a vertically elongated rectangle in front view. The length of the overflow surface 501m in the left-right direction is approximately 1/3 the length of the main frame base 501 in the left-right direction, and its left end in front view is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction from the left end of the main frame base 501. The height of the overflow surface 501m from its front end to its rear end is approximately 1/2 the height of the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap of approximately 2 times the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is positioned on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m and has a flat plate-shaped left step section 501n and a right step section 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in a strip-like shape in the front-rear direction, with their upper ends higher than the left step section 501n and the right step section 501o on both the left and right outer sides of each, and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step section 501n is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is shorter than its length in the front-rear direction. Also, the left step section 501n is inclined such that, in a front view with respect to the horizontal plane, the rear right corner is slightly lower. The right step section 501o is formed so that its length in the left-right direction is longer than its length in the front-rear direction. Furthermore, the right-hand section 501o is inclined such that, in a front view, its rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane.

The multiple ribs 501p of the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. When the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, the gap between the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed to be narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the main frame base 501, in a front view, has the right end of the overflow surface 501m aligned with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, the left end of the overflow surface 501m aligned with the left end of the bypass passage 552g in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step section 501o aligned with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. Hereafter, the container-shaped region enclosed by the bottom wall 552a, front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, left side wall 552d, and right side wall 552e will also be simply referred to as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends flat to the left from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552, with its front end at the same height as the overflow section 552f and its rear end being lower, and a weir section that extends upward from the opposite end of the passage surface 552h to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552 at the left end (towards the weir 552i) when viewed from the front, and then extends diagonally, moving forward from the left end to the right end. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may also have a horizontal slope in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g, when assembled to the main frame 4, extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally in the left-right direction, which is crank-shaped in the left-right direction. In other words, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the direction of flow of the game ball B guided to the rear by the detour passage 552g changes so that it becomes perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the direction of flow of the game ball B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the wider portion of the tank rail 553 can receive the game ball B from the detour passage 552g. Furthermore, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (right-angle) to the direction of ball flow, it is possible to reduce the likelihood of ball jams occurring in the tank rail 553 due to game balls B from the bypass passage 552g.

The detour passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction, with its rear end moving backward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when the game ball B is released from the detour passage 552g towards the tank rail 553, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released towards the wider upstream side of the tank rail 553 rather than the narrower downstream side. By releasing the ball into the wider section, the occurrence of ball jamming within the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the area in the tank rail 553 where the detour passage 552g guides the game balls B corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left side of the rear wall 552c in a front view. Game balls B that have passed under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (towards the ceiling of the opening 552k) flow through this area. For this reason, in the area of the tank rail 553 behind the detour passage 552g, the height of the multiple game balls B stacked vertically will not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, at the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, a space (empty space) can be secured where game balls B can be stacked on top. This ensures that the game balls B guided backward by the bypass passage 552g are reliably received by the tank rail 553, and that game balls B do not spill out of the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface portion 552j that extends to the rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f on the left side wall 552d, within the interior enclosed by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. Furthermore, the guide surface portion 552j, in a front view, has a right edge that extends diagonally backward from approximately 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left edge of the front wall 552b, to approximately 1/9 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left edge of the front wall 552b, to approximately 1/2 of the total length of the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left edge of the rear wall 552c to approximately 1/3 of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction.

The spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed so that, in a plan view, the area enclosed by the right end edge of the guide surface portion 552j, which is formed in the shape described above, and the straight line connecting the end of the right end edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side, penetrates vertically. Furthermore, the spherical tank 552 has flat plate-shaped flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right direction and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b, on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f, and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l, are higher than the upper edges of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o of the main frame base 501).

When assembled, the spherical tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are connected at the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552, with the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 being connected. Furthermore, in a plan view, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends horizontally in a crank shape, and the portion extending straight horizontally to its left are positioned (protrude) behind the spherical tank 552. The rear end of the left bypass passage 552g on the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends horizontally in a crank shape.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the discharge base 551. When assembled to the main frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends backward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552, in a stepped manner. It extends backward from the rear of the flange portion 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 (as viewed from the front) to the tank rail 553, then along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (near the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction), and then extends backward again.

The external terminal plate 558 has multiple wire connection terminals 558a mounted on its rear surface, arranged horizontally. These wire connection terminals 558a are one-touch terminals; their gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grip the end of an electrical wire. When assembled to the main frame 4, the external terminal plate 558 is positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 that is closed off by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the spherical rectifier member 556. The terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper part of the external terminal plate 558 (multiple wire connection terminals 558a), is formed on the upper surface of the discharge base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the spherical tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, as shown by the white arrows in Figure 102, the overflow surface 501m, the left step 501n, the right step 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are inclined such that the rear end of the overflow surface 501m and bypass passage 552g is lower, the rear right corner of the left step 501n is lower, and the rear left corner of the right step 501o is lower. Furthermore, the bottom wall 552a and the tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined such that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. Also, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end, opposite to the bottom wall 552a, is lower.

As the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, the balls B can first flow out to the outside (forward) of the ball tank 552 by overflowing the lowest overflow section 552f on the upper edge of the outer circumference. This allows the overflowing game balls B to escape to the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B that have flowed out of the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface 501m can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the slope of the overflow surface 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, further increases in the number of game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented, thereby suppressing strong pushing between game balls B (increase in ball pressure) within the ball tank 552, and preventing jamming (so-called ball jamming) caused by the game balls B interlocking within the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, because a bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in Figure 104, game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This prevents strong rearward pressure from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 due to the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, thus preventing clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552. Also, because the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m from spilling onto the outside (rear side) of the main frame 4. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of problems where game balls B spilled onto the outside of the main frame 4 become trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, preventing the main frame 4 from opening and closing.

Furthermore, a portion of the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g. Additionally, game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position along the left side, away from the ball tank 552. This allows the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g to be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, thereby suppressing strong pushing between the game balls B within the tank rail 553 and preventing blockage.

Furthermore, at the upper edge of the outer circumference of the ball tank 552, the height of the remaining upper edge, excluding the overflow section 552f, is higher than the overflow section 552f. Therefore, the upper edge of the left-side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g, is higher than the overflow section 552f, i.e., the rear end of the overflow surface 501m. This prevents game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 beyond the overflow section 552f into the overflow surface 501m and are flowing from the overflow surface 501m into the bypass passage 552g from being blocked by the left-side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. This prevents them from returning to the ball tank 552 side from the bypass passage 552g, thus preventing game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against game balls B in the ball tank 552 and causing a blockage of game balls B within the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game balls B roll in the bypass passage 552g). This prevents the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. This prevents the inflow of game balls B from the side (ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g, thus allowing the flow of game balls B in the bypass passage 552g to be a constant flow from the overflow surface 501m at the front end to the tank rail 553 at the rear end, and thus the pressure of the game balls B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 to be constant. Therefore, within the tank rail 553, the direction of pressure applied to the game balls B is varied, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other and getting jammed, thus preventing jamming of the game balls B.

Furthermore, since the tank rail 553 has a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end, the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 will line up in a single row in the left-right direction when they reach the main guide section 553a. This allows the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 to be aligned and reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. Additionally, the upper part of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulge 553b that can accommodate multiple game balls B, allowing it to reliably receive game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, thus reliably achieving the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the closed portion at the top, and its width narrows towards the downstream side, matching the width of the main guide portion 553a. Therefore, as multiple game balls B move downstream within the bulging portion 553b, they can be aligned in a single line in the width direction. Additionally, the closed portion at the top of the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path for the game balls B decreases towards the downstream end. This allows multiple game balls B, which were stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (ball tank 552 side), to be guided downstream through the closed portion at the top of the tank rail 553, thereby reducing the number of layers in the height direction and aligning them in a single line. Thus, the tank rail 553 can guide multiple game balls B downstream (towards the payout device 580 side) in a single line.

Furthermore, because it is equipped with an overflow surface 501m and a bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in these areas. Additionally, because the tank rail 553 is equipped with a bulge 553b, the volume within the tank rail 553 can be increased, allowing for the storage of even more game balls B in combination with the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, since the external terminal board 558, equipped with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) are provided on the opposite side from the ball tank 552, with the bypass passage 552g and discharge section 551j in between, the wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k can be placed far away from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island equipment, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force in the ball tank 552 or overflow surface 501m, it is difficult for them to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and malfunctions such as short circuits or disconnections of electrical wiring due to contact by game balls B will not occur.

Furthermore, by orienting multiple wire connection terminals 558a towards the rear and raising the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k higher than the overflow surface 501m, it is possible to prevent game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 from bouncing off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, making it less likely for them to land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if game balls B do land on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, they are less likely to fall from the rear, thus making it easier to avoid the aforementioned problems.

Furthermore, the game balls B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 are directed upstream (to the right in Figure 103) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. This prevents the game balls B on the guide surface 552j from being pressed downstream against the game balls B inside the ball tank 552, thereby preventing jamming of the game balls B within the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and land on the left step 501n or right step 501o on either side of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, their inclinations can guide the game balls B to the overflow surface 501m or the detour passage 552g, preventing malfunctions from occurring due to the game balls B spilling outside the main frame 4.

Furthermore, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the configuration ensures that the game balls B pass beneath the guide surface 552j. Therefore, the guide surface 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on top of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the height of the guide surface 552j. Consequently, a space (empty space) can be secured on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, at the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, allowing for the stacking of game balls B on top and ensuring reliable reception of the game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g.

Furthermore, since multiple wire connection terminals 558a and terminal covers 551k are positioned in front of the closed upper portion of the tank rail 553, even if a game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553. This prevents the game ball B from affecting the game balls B inside the tank rail 553 and causing malfunctions.

[4-12. Another Embodiment, such as a Tank Rail]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553, etc., in the main frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 106 to 110. Figure 106 is a perspective view from the rear of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail, etc., of another embodiment, showing an enlarged view of the tank rail portion. Figure 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail, etc., of Figure 106 assembled together with the ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., of (a) from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail, etc., of (a) from the rear. Figure 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., of Figure 107, disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail, etc., of Figure 107, disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail, etc., cut along the carker line in Figure 107(a). Figure 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Figure 107 in cross-section. In a different embodiment from the one described above, the tank rail 553A, etc., differs from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555A, and spherical flow straightening member 556A in the tank rail 553A, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and spherical flow straightening member 556 in the above embodiment. Similar components are denoted by the same reference numerals and described accordingly.

In this embodiment, the tank rail 553A rectifies the flow of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and transfers them to the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upwards. The tank rail 553A is fitted with a first rail cover 554A to close its upper end, a second rail cover 555A located to the left of the first rail cover 554A in a front view, and a ball rectifying member 556A located above the second rail cover 555A. Additionally, a ball stopping member 557 capable of preventing the flow of game balls B is attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A.

As shown in Figure 107(a), the tank rail 553A has a meandering section 553c downstream of the bulging section 553b that meanders in the front-rear direction. This meandering section 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the meandering section 553c (towards the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends horizontally from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view), including the meandering section 553c, at the open upper end of the tank rail 553A. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b extending upward from both the front and rear ends upstream of the center of the cover portion 555a, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. In the area where the meandering section 553c of the tank rail 553A is provided, the pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a meandering shape following the meandering section 553c. The flow straightening piece 556a of the spherical flow straightening member 556A, described later, is inserted into the opening 555c so as to penetrate from above.

The ball flow straightening member 556A extends forward and backward at its upstream end and is mounted rotatably around its axis. The ball flow straightening member 556A is located above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, between a pair of protective walls 555b, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball flow straightening member 556A contacts the game balls B, which are stacked in multiple layers within the tank rail 553A, from above, making it easier to unravel the layers of game balls B and align them in a single line. It also suppresses the rapid downstream movement of the uppermost game ball B, preventing ball jamming on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

In this embodiment, the tank rail 553A, etc., when assembled, is positioned between the pair of protective walls 555b on the second rail cover 555A, below the upper end of the protective walls 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown as a dashed line in Figure 106) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal plate 558, which is provided on the front upper side of the part of the tank rail 553A to which the electric wire 556A is attached, from contacting the electric wire 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the electric wire 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the electric wire 556A from rotating upward even when a game ball B comes into contact with the rectifier piece 556a of the electric wire 556A, potentially preventing the electric wire 556A from rotating upward and thus preventing it from fully performing its rectifying effect on the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevent contact between the ball rectifier member 556A and the wire connected to the wire connection terminal 558a. Therefore, when a game ball B contacts the rectifier piece 556a of the ball rectifier member 556A, the ball rectifier member 556A can rotate upward, allowing it to fully exert its rectifying effect and preventing ball jamming or jamming within the tank rail 553A.

Furthermore, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a meandering section 553c, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering section 553c. However, in the tank rail 553A, where the height narrows towards the downstream side, if the upper game balls B, among the multiple layers of stacked game balls B, move downstream first, ball jamming is more likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the flow speed of the game balls B can be suppressed by the meandering section 553c, thus preventing the upper game balls B from moving downstream first and reducing the occurrence of ball jamming.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the wires from contacting the ball rectifier member 556A, thereby preventing ball jamming. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near terminal boards (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control boards to which many wires are connected, or to be positioned near the tank rail 553A. This provides a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of flexibility in the placement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal boards, etc.

[4-13. Another Embodiment of the Substrate Unit]
Next, a substrate unit 620A of a different embodiment (second embodiment) will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 111 to 116. Figure 111(a) is a front view of the substrate unit of the other embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front right, and (c) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) from the front left. Figure 112(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) from the rear upper right, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) from the rear lower right. Figure 113 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from the front, and Figure 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from the rear. Figure 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the key-key line in Figure 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the cool-k line in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the k-ke line in (a). Figure 116 is a bottom view showing the part of the pachinko machine equipped with the circuit board unit of Figure 111(a) that is behind the door frame.

The circuit board unit 620A of this embodiment is mounted on the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, replacing the circuit board unit 620 described above. In the circuit board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 differs significantly from that of the base unit 620b of the circuit board unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those in the circuit board unit 620 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted.

The circuit board unit 620A includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting section 501c on the rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 660 mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base unit 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker unit 620a from the rear, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 660, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e mounted on the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a portion of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

The base unit 660 includes a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 with a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface, an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662 through which the game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a mechanism to check each game ball B flowing through the out ball passage 663 one by one. The system includes an out-of-bounds sensor 664, a ball-removal guide unit 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball-removal passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right in a front view, a ball-removal discharge passage 665 through which the game balls B guided by the ball-removal guide unit 627 flow and which is located behind the out-of-bounds ball passage 663 in the rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 attached to the rear base 662 to close the rear side of the ball-removal discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long and open to the front. The rear base 662 has flat partition walls 662a that extend to the left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction. An out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide section 627 are formed on the front side of the partition walls 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition walls 662a. The rear side of the rear base 662a is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666, all made of transparent material. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out-ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 are also made of transparent material. Consequently, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out-ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from above and below the base unit 660, making it easier to check for ball blockages and other issues.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed on the front side of the flat, plate-shaped partition wall 662a that extends horizontally at approximately constant height in the vertical direction of the rear base 662, with its front end open. The open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 includes a ball discharge receiving section 663a that is open upward and extends to the left and right at approximately the center of the left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1; an out-ball straightening section 663b that straightens the game balls B received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a into a single line while causing them to meander significantly in the left-right direction; a downward guiding section 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a single line by the out-ball straightening section 663b downwards; and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downwards at the lower end of the downward guiding section 663c and discharges the game balls B downwards from the lower surface of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located behind the outer frame 2 (see Figure 116).

The ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out-ball passage 663 is formed with a depth in the front-to-back direction approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving section 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out-ball straightening section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a, downwards toward the left end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a. Furthermore, the depth of the out-ball straightening section 663b narrows as it moves downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a, its depth is slightly greater than the diameter of the game ball B. Also, the portion of the out-ball straightening section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a decreases in height as it moves downstream (to the left), and near the downstream end, its height is slightly greater than the diameter of the game ball B. This allows the out-ball straightening section 663b to align the game balls B in a single line.

The downward guide section 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball straightening section 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving section 663a. Midway along its vertical direction, the front wall is bent slightly backward in a crank-like curve so that it lies flush with the rear wall (partition wall). As a result, the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located behind the front surface of the partition wall 662a of the rear base 662. An out-sensor 664 is provided upstream of the cranked portion of this downward guide section 663c. Because the downward guide section 663c is curved so that the cranked portion does not have a horizontally extending section, even if a game ball B passes the out-sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not bounce up towards the out-sensor 664 above, preventing the out-sensor 664 from detecting a single game ball B twice.

The out-sensor 664 uses a non-contact electromagnetic proximity switch, which is highly durable and has a long lifespan, because game balls B pass over it frequently.

The ball release guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball release guide section 627 opens to the left at the upper left side in a front view, and the downstream end bends backward, extending to the rear of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, before connecting to the upstream end of the ball release passage 665 (see Figure 115(a), etc.).

The ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a in the rear base 662. The ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in an open state toward the rear, and its rear end is closed by the passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is positioned approximately one unit of the outer diameter of the game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one unit of the game ball B is formed between the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has its upstream end (left end) connected to the downstream end of the ball extraction guide section 627. It includes a lateral guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball extraction receiving section 663a at the same incline as the ball extraction receiving section 663a of the out-ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the lateral guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball extraction and discharge port 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball extraction and discharge port 665c is located slightly behind the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 (see Figure 116).

Furthermore, the ball removal and discharge passage 665 has multiple protrusions 665d that alternately project inward at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge passage 665 allows the game balls B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately contact the multiple protrusions 665d, thereby causing the game balls B to flow downward in a zigzag pattern and suppressing an increase in their flow speed. This suppresses the speed of the game balls B discharged downward from the ball removal and discharge port 665c.

This ball extraction and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage formed by a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b. Therefore, when operating the ball extraction lever 593 to discharge the game balls B from the ball tank 552, a large number of game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

In this embodiment, according to the circuit board unit 620A, game balls B that are driven into the game area 5a and discharged from the game board 5 are received by the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, detected by the out sensor 664, and then discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall. On the other hand, in order to discharge (remove) game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to discharge the game balls B to the ball removal passage 580b side, and these game balls B are then discharged to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball removal guidance section 627 and the ball removal discharge passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. As a result, only game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only game balls B discharged from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be configured to accurately calculate the payout rate (ball payout rate) of game balls B by using the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B counted by the out sensor 664 (number of out balls) is the sum of the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and received into the prize slots such as the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the gate 2003, the second start slot 2004, the large prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc., and discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a but not received into any prize slot and were received into the out slot 1008 and discharged from the game board 5. This represents the total number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of launched balls).

Furthermore, since the payout rate (ball payout rate) changes depending on the game state, the payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within the predetermined period ÷ Number of balls out within the predetermined period = Payout rate within the predetermined period."

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the circuit board unit 620A of the main frame 4 to which the game board 5 is detachably attached is provided with an out-ball passage 663 through which game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow. The out-ball sensor 664 detects the game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663. Since it is possible to detect game balls B discharged from the game board 5, there is no need to provide an out-ball detection unit on the game board 5 to detect "out-balls," thus simplifying the configuration of the game board 5 and reducing costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball extraction/discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This causes the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction/discharge passage 665 to be further away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc. As a result, the impact of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction/discharge passage 665 on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., can be reduced, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions caused by the flow of game balls B.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the game ball B, whose flow speed has been suppressed by the out-ball rectifier 663b of the out-ball passage 663, is detected by the out-sensor 664, the impact on the out-sensor 664 due to the flow of the game ball B can be weakened, thereby reducing the likelihood of the out-sensor 664 wearing out and breaking prematurely.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time, calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls per predetermined time, is displayed in a way that is visible to the player, then, since players desire a large payout of game balls B, a high displayed payout rate allows them to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B, making it easier for them to choose the pachinko machine 1 to play. Also, if the payout rate is displayed in a way that is visible to the player, then if fraudulent activity occurs that results in a large payout of game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal. This makes it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent activity, thus deterring fraudulent activity and making the pachinko machine 1 a highly effective deterrent against fraudulent behavior.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and out balls is displayed in a location invisible to the player, then staff at the amusement hall can detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as described above. Also, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, it suggests a possible malfunction within the machine (e.g., faulty nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.). This allows for early response to the malfunction, reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since an out-sensor 664 is provided in the out-ball passage 663 through which the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 flow, there is no need to provide a device (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game balls B discharged from the game board 5. This reduces the cost of the game board 5, and also allows for the creation of space on the game board 5 that would otherwise be used for detecting the game balls B. By using this space to install a display device, a pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) that can provide a more enjoyable experience for players can be created.

Furthermore, since the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d that alternately protrude from it, the speed at which the game balls B flow through this vertical guide section 665b can be suppressed. This prevents damage to the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 due to the impact of the flowing game balls B, and prevents damage to the island equipment in the gaming hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball extraction and discharge passage 665.

Furthermore, the out-ball passage 663 is provided with a meandering out-ball rectifier section 663b, and the ball extraction/discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide section 665b having multiple protrusions 665d. These features suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from the game balls B flowing through the out-ball passage 663 and the ball extraction/discharge passage 665. This minimizes the impact on nearby components such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions caused by the flow of game balls B.

Furthermore, since the out-ball discharge ports 663d and 665c of the out-ball passage 663 and ball-removal discharge passage 665, respectively, are designed to open downwards, the game balls B are discharged downwards from the out-ball passage 663 and ball-removal discharge passage 665. This makes it less likely for the game balls B to collide with other pachinko machines or walls located behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, thus preventing damage to other pachinko machines or walls. Additionally, because the game balls B are discharged downwards from the out-ball passage 663 and ball-removal discharge passage 665, the discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, making it easier for the island equipment to collect the game balls B discharged from the out-ball passage 663 and ball-removal discharge passage 665.

Furthermore, since a base unit 660 is provided below the part of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached, with a ball extraction/discharge passage 665 and an out-ball passage 663 formed therein, the game board 5 can simply discharge the game balls B that have been played into the game area 5a downwards, and transfer them to the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. This allows for a simpler (easier) configuration for discharging the game balls B from the game board 5, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

Furthermore, since the ball extraction and discharge port 665c of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is possible to prevent the game balls B discharged from the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the out-ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents the outer frame 2 from being damaged by the game balls B rapidly flowing through the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the out-ball passage 663 colliding with it, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to damage.

Furthermore, because the ball extraction and discharge port 665c of the ball extraction and discharge passage 665 and the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, it is not necessary to move the parts for collecting the game balls B on the island equipment side (out-receiving section, bucket, etc.) forward to a position where they overlap with the outer frame 2. This reduces the effort required for both installing and moving the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another Embodiment of Ball Discharge in a Substrate Unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball ejection in the above-described substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Figures 117 and 118, etc. Figure 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the ball ejection port of the ball ejection passage. Figure 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the ejection sensor is detachable, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the ejection sensor has been removed in (a).

The embodiment shown in Figure 117 is characterized by the provision of a guide piece 667 at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 663 in the base unit 660, specifically at the out-ball discharge port 663d, which guides the game ball B to the rear. More specifically, in this embodiment, the out-ball passage 663 has a merging section 663e near its downstream end where it merges with the ball removal passage 665. The merging section 663e opens downwards, and its opening end forms the out-ball discharge port 663d (ball removal port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes briefly to the rear from the front wall of the out-ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment shown in Figure 117, the game ball B discharged downward from the out-ball discharge port 663d comes into contact with the guide piece 667, thereby directing the discharge direction of the game ball B diagonally downward and rearward. This makes it easier to discharge the game ball B towards the recovery area (out-receiving section, bucket, etc.) located behind the island equipment in a gaming hall, rather than towards the front of the island equipment, ensuring reliable recovery of the game ball B at the island equipment.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in Figure 117, the guide piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game balls B diagonally downward and rearward. Therefore, even if the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located near the position directly below the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 (a position near the front of the island equipment), the game balls B can be reliably received into buckets or the like within the island equipment. Consequently, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be positioned as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 in the main frame 4 can be widened. As a result, the out-ball passage 663 is moved further away from the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc., the impact on the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, etc. due to electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663 can be reduced, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with fewer malfunctions due to the flow of game balls B.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 118 features an out-of-ball sensor 664 that can be attached and detached from below at the out-of-ball outlet 663d in the out-of-ball passage 663. This embodiment includes a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide portion 663c in the out-of-ball passage 663, which is open downwards to accommodate the out-of-ball sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 that restricts the downward movement of the out-of-ball sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-of-ball rectifier portion 663b in the out-of-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment as well, the base unit 660 is made of a transparent material, allowing the inside of the out-of-ball passage 663 to be viewed from above or below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body portion 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through hole 668b in the main body portion 668a that is through which the game ball B can pass, at a location that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f, and an elastically deformable locking claw portion 668c provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body portion 668a.

The sensor cover 668 is rotatably mounted at its base end to the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite to the out-of-bulb rectifier portion 663b. The locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 engages with a locking portion 663g located on the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the out-of-bulb rectifier portion 663b side of the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is closed by rotating it so that the locking claw portion 668c moves upward, with the out-of-ball sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out-of-ball sensor 664 aligns with the out-of-ball passage 663. This locks the locking claw portion 668c into the locking portion 663g, causing the main body portion 668a to contact the lower surface of the out-of-ball sensor 664, restricting its downward movement and allowing the out-of-ball sensor 664 to be attached to the base unit 660 (see Figure 118(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 aligns with the detection hole of the out-of-ball sensor 664. After the game ball B that has flowed through the out-of-ball passage 663 is detected by the out-of-ball sensor 664, it is discharged downward through the through-hole 668b. This through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out-of-ball discharge port 663d of the out-of-ball passage 663.

To replace (remove) the out-of-sensor 664, the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw portion 668c and release its engagement with the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 around the base end of the main body portion 668a so that the locking claw portion 668c moves downward, the main body portion 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the lower surface of the out-of-sensor 664, allowing the out-of-sensor 664 to be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see Figure 118(b)).

As shown in Figure 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, a certain gap is created between the lower end of the sensor cover 668 and the upper end of the object that may come into contact with (indicated by the dashed line) (for example, the upper end surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the lower end of the main frame 4 and the sensor cover 668. This prevents the sensor cover 668 from coming into contact with the object even when the main frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, thus preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

According to the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the out-sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are played into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Therefore, there is a risk of premature wear and tear and damage due to the large volume of game balls B in circulation. However, as described above, the out-sensor 664 can be easily replaced by opening the sensor cover 668 and attaching/detaching it from below.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened and closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the outer frame 2 or other objects that may come into contact with it, thus preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. In detail, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below, but since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 may come off due to vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during gameplay and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game balls B even though they are played into the game area 5a, and the main control board 1310 or the like will be notified of the occurrence of an abnormality. Upon receiving notification of this anomaly, staff at the gaming hall will open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to check for the anomaly. However, because there is a gap between the lower end of the opened sensor cover 668 and any objects that could come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with any such objects, thus preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the base end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite to the out-ball rectification section 663b. Since the base unit 660 is transparent, opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out-sensor 664 allows for clear visualization of the out-ball passage 663 from below. Therefore, when a game ball B jams in the out-ball passage 663, the passage can be visually inspected from the outside, allowing for immediate identification of the jammed game ball B and prompt resolution of the jam.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, since the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 is formed to be substantially flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 in the outer frame 2, the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright. This allows for easy replacement of the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and easy inspection of the out ball passage 663 and ball extraction/discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the out-sensor 664 is damaged, it can be easily replaced. Therefore, the game that was interrupted due to the failure of the out-sensor 664 can be resumed quickly, mitigating player frustration caused by the interruption and preventing a decline in enjoyment. This also helps to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the pachinko parlor.

Furthermore, since one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, when replacing the out-sensor 664, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened, the sensor cover 668 will remain suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, thus preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Furthermore, in the sensor cover 668 that holds the out sensor 664 from below, the outer part of the base unit 660, close to the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B pass, is mounted so as to be rotatable around the front-rear (horizontal) axis. As a result, the distribution of the downward force acting on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the passage of game balls B is largely concentrated on the side that is rotatably mounted to the base unit 660 (one end), and relatively smaller on the side of the locking claw portion 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660 (the other end). Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of this force can be received on the rotatably mounted end. This makes it difficult for the locking claw portion 668c on the other end to release, thus reducing the risk of the sensor cover 668 opening and the out sensor 664 falling out.

[4-14. Third Embodiment of the Circuit Board Unit]
Next, a third embodiment of the substrate unit 700, which is further different from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 119 to 128, etc. Figure 119(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the third embodiment, which omits the power supply unit, the dispensing control unit, and the interface unit, as seen from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as seen from the front left. Figure 120(a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of Figure 119 as seen from the rear upper right, and (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of (a) as seen from the rear lower right. Figure 121(a) is a plan view of the substrate unit of Figure 119, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a) cut along the line ----, (c) is a cross-sectional view of (a) cut along the line ----, and Figure 122 is a cross-sectional view of Figure 121(a) cut along the line ----.

Figure 123 is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit in Figure 119, viewed from the front. Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view of the circuit board unit in Figure 119, viewed from the rear. Figure 125(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball path member of the circuit board unit in Figure 119, viewed from the front. (b) is a perspective view of the ball path member of the circuit board unit in Figure 119, viewed from the rear. Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how to resolve ball jamming in the circuit board unit in Figure 119. Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how to prevent the intrusion of a linear, unauthorized tool into the circuit board unit in Figure 119. Figure 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove debris from the circuit board unit in Figure 119.

The third embodiment of the substrate unit 700 differs from the substrate units 620 and 620A described above only in the configuration of the base unit 710; all other configurations are identical. Therefore, components similar to those in the substrate units 620 and 620A are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted. Furthermore, the power supply unit 620c, the dispensing control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are omitted from Figures 119 to 128.

The circuit board unit 700 of this embodiment is mounted on the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500, replacing the circuit board unit 620 or circuit board unit 620A described above. The circuit board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting section 501c on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a base unit 710 mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker unit 620a from the rear; a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 710; a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e mounted on the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a portion of the payout control unit 620d from the rear.

This circuit board unit 700 includes a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a second ball path 702 located behind the first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can flow, a first ball sensor 703 for detecting game balls B flowing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 for detecting game balls B flowing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal passage 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 can flow. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an opening facing upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect one game ball B at a time in each before discharging them downward.

In this embodiment, in the game board 5, game balls B received at the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and game balls B received at the general prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the big prize port 2005, and the special prize port 2006 circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, out balls circulate through the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate through the second ball path 702, and the number of all out balls can be counted by the first ball sensor 703, and the number of all safe balls can be counted by the second ball sensor 704. As a result, if fraudulent activity occurs at the entry points (entry point sensors) of the game board 5, such as the general entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the large entry point 2005, and the special item entry point 2006, the number of safe balls counted by the game board 5 will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, allowing for the detection of fraudulent activity at the entry points.

To elaborate further, the base unit 710 of the circuit board unit 700 includes a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and having a ball removal passage 705, a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702, an anti-theft cover 714 that is openable and closable on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 to resolve ball jams of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools, a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end of the ball removal passage 705, and a frame relay circuit board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, spherical path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are formed transparently.

The front base 711 is formed in a long, box-like shape, open to the rear and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front wall of the front base 711 closes the front end of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that extends long in the left-right direction in the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that opens slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction in the lower peripheral wall. With the ball path member 713 housed inside the front base 711, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 are visible upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. Furthermore, the front base 711 supports the anti-theft cover 714 at the front end of the release opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction.

The rear base 712 is formed in a long, box-like shape that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal passage 705 that receives the game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, guides them to the right in a front view, and then guides them downwards for discharge. The ball removal passage 705 is located within the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end of the ball removal passage 705 is closed by a passage wall member 715. The portion of the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (the portion on the left end in a front view) penetrates in the front-to-back direction, with its front end closed by the front base 711 and its rear end closed by the passage wall member 715.

Furthermore, the rear base 712 has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives game balls B that have flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides them to the rear, and then discharges them downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives game balls B that have flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides them to the rear, and then discharges them downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward from the front wall of the rear base 712, with the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opening forward and the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opening upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are located at the same position in the front-rear direction. The rear side of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b is open to the rear from the front wall, and the rear end is closed by the passage wall member 715.

The rear base 712 has its ball removal passage 705, first discharge guide section 712a, and second discharge guide section 712b outlets positioned to the left of the front base 711's discharge opening 711b, and arranged sequentially from left to right. The outlet of the ball removal passage 705 widens significantly forward at its front end and slightly backward at its rear end compared to the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b (see Figure 120(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider (larger) in the front-to-back direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b.

The sphere path member 713 is inserted from the rear into the box-shaped front base 711 and housed there. The sphere path member 713 has a first sphere path 701 and a second sphere path 702. The sphere path member 713 has a left wall portion 713a that extends vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b that slopes downward to the right from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a, a stepped wall portion 713c that extends vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d that slopes downward to the right from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c, a straightening wall portion 713e that extends diagonally downward to the left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e It has a lower shelf section 713f that rises to the right from a position separated to the right and extends to the right of the upper right shelf section 713d; a right wall section 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf section 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall section 713a; an upper wall section 713h that extends to the left from the upper end of the right wall section 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf section 713d; and a U-shaped grooved wall section 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall section 713h and opens upward. The left end of the grooved wall section 713i is located slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the upper right shelf section 713d.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 includes an upper lower wall portion 713j extending to the left from the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the lower surface of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an overhang portion 713l extending downward to the left from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a short hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending to the left parallel to the upper lower wall portion 713j from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below the area between the lower end of the rectifying wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f is cut out vertically and horizontally to allow the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the spherical path member 713 has multiple obstructing ribs 713o that extend downward from the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The spherical path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that divides the space enclosed by the left wall portion 713a, the upper left shelf portion 713b, the stepped wall portion 713c, the upper right shelf portion 713d, the rectifying wall portion 713e, the lower shelf portion 713f, the right wall portion 713g, the grooved wall portion 713i, the upper part of the lower wall portion 713j, the middle wall portion 713k, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower part of the lower wall portion 713n into front-to-back sections.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, which are cut out so as to be recessed from the front and rear ends toward the partition wall section 713p. Each of these notches 713q is provided such that, when assembled to the circuit board unit 700, a gap smaller than the radius of the game ball B is formed between it and the front base 711 and the rear base 712. This gap allows debris and dust from within the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 to be discharged downwards.

Furthermore, the spherical path member 713 is provided in the area between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a plurality of guide protrusions 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the spherical path member 713 has a sensor housing front 713s, which houses the first spherical sensor 703, surrounded by the upper lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n, located in front of the partition wall portion 713p; and a sensor housing rear 713t, which houses the second spherical sensor 704, surrounded by the upper lower wall portion 713j, the hanging wall portion 713m, and the lower lower wall portion 713n, located behind the partition wall portion 713p.

In the front 713s and rear 713t of the sensor housing, the first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 are housed such that their detection holes are located below the area between the rectifier wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, that is, with the detection holes facing to the right. Although not shown in the illustration, the wiring cables extending from the first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 extend to the left of the middle wall 713k from the front 713s and rear 713t of the sensor housing.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 is provided in a portion of the lower surface of the lower wall portion 713n that is forward of the partition wall portion 713p, and has a first ball guide portion 713u that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When assembled to the substrate unit 700, the right half of the rear end of the first ball guide portion 713u is closed by the front surface of the rear base 712, while the left half faces the entrance side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide portion 713u can guide the game ball B that has flowed downward from between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in front of the partition wall portion 713p to the right, then to the rear, and hand it over to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall 713p in the ball path member 713, below the portion that opens downwards to the lower part 713n of the lower wall (the portion of the detection hole for the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t), there is an inlet that opens upwards to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712. This allows the game balls B that have flowed downwards from between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f behind the partition wall 713p to be transferred to the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf section 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the venting port 711b on the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf section 713d is located slightly to the right of the right end of the venting port 711b on the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf section 713f is located to the left of the left end of the venting port 711b on the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the venting port 711b on the front base 711 is covered by the flow straightening wall section 713e. The upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f are inclined in a straight line. On the other hand, the flow straightening wall section 713e is inclined in a curved shape, and its left end curves so that it faces vertically downwards. The distance (height) between the rectifying wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f is sloped to narrow towards the left, so that the left end is at a height that allows one game ball B to pass through. This rectifying wall 713e and lower shelf 713f allow multiple game balls B to be straightened and guided downwards in a single line.

As described above, the space between the flow straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f is formed so that the vertical dimension narrows as you move to the left (the downstream direction in which the game balls B flow). Therefore, depending on the flow rate of game balls B, multiple game balls B may get jammed between the flow straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, potentially causing a ball jam (see Figure 126). Since the flow straightening wall 713e is located above the release opening 711b, if a ball jam occurs between the flow straightening wall 713e and the lower shelf 713f, the security cover 714 can be opened to open the release opening 711b. A rod-shaped tool can then be inserted from below through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q of the lower shelf 713f, and the jammed game balls B can be pushed out with the tool to resolve the jam.

Furthermore, since the lower shelf section 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing ball jams and allowing debris and dust to fall downwards, there is a risk that a linear illegal tool, such as piano wire or a catheter, could be inserted from below through the notch 713q to the upper part of the lower shelf section 713f (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), and then the tip of the illegal tool could be extended upwards from the ball path member 713 (the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702), potentially leading to illegal activity against the game board 5 located above. Such insertion of illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf section 713f; similar concerns exist in the upper left shelf section 713b and the upper right shelf section 713d, where the notch 713q is also located.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with a plurality of flat, plate-shaped obstructing ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of a linear fraudulent tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it will abut against the obstructing ribs 713o, preventing further movement of the tip and thus preventing the insertion of the fraudulent tool (see Figure 127). Consequently, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), thereby reducing the burden on the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, and providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b, the portions to the right of the middle wall section 713k are closed off below and to the left and right by the straightening wall section 713e, the upper part of the lower wall section 713j, and the middle wall section 713k, which do not have a notch 713q. Therefore, it is impossible for an unauthorized tool to be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding portions of the upper right shelf section 713d and the upper left shelf section 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be performed through the notch 713q in those portions.

As described above, the spherical path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, allowing dust and debris to be discharged downwards through the notches 713q (see Figure 128). Dust and debris discharged downwards through the notches 713q located above the sensor housing front section 713s and the sensor housing rear section 713t in the upper left shelf section 713b are contained within the space enclosed by the rectifying wall section 713e, the upper part of the lower wall section 713j, and the middle wall section 713k. As a result, dust and debris do not adhere to the first spherical sensor 703 and the second spherical sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing front section 713s and the sensor housing rear section 713t.

Furthermore, wiring cables are connected by connectors to the left ends of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which are housed in the front 713s and rear 713t of the sensor housing section, respectively. The wiring cables and connectors protrude to the left from the front 713s and rear 713t of the sensor housing section. In other words, the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left of the middle wall section 713k. In this central wall section 713k, the canopy section 713l extends to the left from the upper part of the sensor housing front 713s and sensor housing rear 713t on the left side. Therefore, debris and dust that fall downward through the notch 713q formed in the upper left shelf section 713b are guided to the left by the inclination of the canopy section 713l, preventing them from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, which protrude to the left of the central wall section 713k. This prevents malfunctions caused by debris and other contaminants.

The base unit 710 forms the first ball path 701 with the front left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, stepped wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, rectifying wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, grooved wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The second ball path 702 is formed with the rear left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, stepped wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, rectifying wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, grooved wall portion 713i, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat shape and is attached to the front end of the release opening 711b of the front base 711 in a manner that allows its front end to rotate around an axis in the left-right direction. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking portion 714a at its rear end that engages with the rear base 712. As shown in Figure 122, when the security cover 714 is horizontal with the elastic locking portion 714a engaged with the rear base 712, the release opening 711b is closed. When the locking of the elastic locking portion 714a is released and the cover is rotated so that the rear end is positioned downwards and vertical, the release opening 711b is open. In other words, the security cover 714 can be used to open and close the release opening 711b.

The anti-theft cover 714, when closed, can close the relief opening 711b of the front base 711, thereby preventing a linear tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702) through the relief opening 711b. Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the anti-theft cover 714 can be opened, thereby opening the relief opening 711b of the front base 711. This allows a rod-shaped tool to be inserted from below through the relief opening 711b and the notch 713q of the lower shelf portion 713f to clear the ball jam of the game balls B. This ball jam clearing operation is performed with the main frame 4 opened forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release opening 711b of this security cover 714 is open (vertical), its lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) is located below the height of the object of contact (in this case, the connecting cylindrical portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 on the outer frame 2) (the height shown by the dashed line in Figure 122). Therefore, even if one attempts to close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 while the security cover 714 is still open, after opening the main frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 to resolve a jam of game balls B in the ball path member 713, the open security cover 714 will come into contact with the object of contact (the connecting cylindrical portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), preventing the main frame 4 from being closed. This prevents the security cover 714 from being left open, ensuring that the security cover 714 is securely closed and that its security function is effectively utilized.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for any reason while the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, even if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 in that state, an object posing a contact risk will come into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, since the front end of the security cover 714 is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis in the left-right direction, when an object posing a contact risk comes into contact with it from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. Therefore, the main frame 4 can be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on the object posing a contact risk, thus avoiding damage to the security cover 714 and the object posing a contact risk.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the anti-theft cover 714 rarely jams game balls B between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and is primarily designed to remain closed. Therefore, the locking mechanism by the elastic locking portion 714a is set to be firm to prevent it from opening easily.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 closes the rearward-opening portions of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b on the rear base 712, allowing the game balls B that have flowed through the first and second discharge guide sections 712a and 712b to be discharged downward. In addition, the passage wall member 715 sandwiches the frame relay board 716 between itself and the rear base 712, and also covers the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 serves to relay the connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single-button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 121(a), the base unit 710 of this embodiment has the upper left shelf section 713b and a portion of the upper right shelf section 713d of the ball path member 713 extending upward from the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711, allowing it to receive all the game balls B released downward from the game board 5. Game balls B that fall onto the upper left shelf section 713b or upper right shelf section 713d through the ball receiving opening 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf section 713d onto the lower shelf section 713f. Then, the game balls B that flow down onto the lower shelf section 713f roll to the left. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf section 713f, the upper flow straightening wall section 713e will break them down so that they form a single line as they move to the left.

When a game ball B rolls to the left along the lower shelf 713f, it falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f. If it lies in front of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the sensor housing front 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is then discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if it lies behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the sensor housing rear 713t, and then discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

As described above, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game balls B flow through paths separated from each other before and after the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 and are discharged downward. The area in front of the partition wall 713p is designated as the first ball path 701, and the area behind the partition wall 713p is designated as the second ball path 702. Therefore, game balls B that fall from the game board 5 in front of the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flow through the first ball path 701, are detected by the first ball sensor 703, and can be discharged downward. On the other hand, game balls B that fall from the game board 5 behind the partition wall 713p of the ball path member 713 flow through the second ball path 702, are detected by the second ball sensor 704, and can be discharged downward.

Furthermore, the base unit 710 can discharge the game balls B released from the lower ball release passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 downwards through the ball release passage 705 of the rear base 712, in order to remove the game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc. The game balls B discharged downwards from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), the second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702), and the ball release passage 705 of the base unit 710 are then passed to the game ball collection section (out receiving section, bucket, etc.) on the island equipment side.

In the base unit 710 of the circuit board unit 700 of this embodiment, since multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf section 713b, the upper right shelf section 713d, and the lower shelf section 713f, debris and dust can fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. This prevents debris from obstructing the flow of game balls B, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball jams and other problems.

Furthermore, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made of transparent material, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (circuit board unit 700) whether or not there is a jam of game balls B in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). Furthermore, in the section of the ball path member 713 where the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f align the game balls B in a single line, a notch 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the main frame 4 can be opened forward relative to the outer frame 2, and the security cover 714 can be opened. This allows a rod-shaped tool to be inserted from below through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q, between the rectifying wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and the ball jam can be resolved using this tool.

Furthermore, a downward-opening relief opening 711b is provided in the lower part of the rectifying wall 713e in the lower shelf section 713f, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the relief opening 711b. Therefore, ball jams can be resolved through the relief opening 711b as described above. Moreover, by keeping the relief opening 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the relief opening 711b, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714 that opens and closes the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end, if the security cover 714 is left open when attempting to close the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a potential object (the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), preventing the main frame 4 from closing. This alerts the user to the fact that the security cover 714 has been left open, ensuring that the security cover 714 is properly closed and thus enabling the security function of the security cover 714 to be activated.

Furthermore, since the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h are provided with multiple flat, plate-shaped obstruction ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward, even if the tip of a linear fraudulent tool attempts to move along the lower surfaces of the upper left shelf section 713b, the lower shelf section 713f, and the upper wall section 713h, it will come into contact with the obstruction ribs 713o, preventing further movement of the tip and thus preventing further insertion of the fraudulent tool. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the game board 5 through the ball path members 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), thereby reducing the burden on the game hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, and providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex flow path that meanders and turns due to the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide section 712a or the second discharge guide section 712b, the complex path can prevent its entry, thus preventing the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a separate unit (for example, an out-ball detection unit) for detecting the game balls B released from the game board 5. This reduces the cost of the game board 5 and allows for the creation of additional space on the game board 5 that would otherwise be used for detecting the released game balls B. By using this space to install a performance device, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made more entertaining for players.

Furthermore, since out balls circulate through the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate through the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is occurring on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per predetermined time, calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls per predetermined time, is displayed in a way that is visible to the player, then, since players desire a large payout of game balls B, a high displayed payout rate allows them to immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out a large number of game balls B, making it easier for them to choose the pachinko machine 1 to play. Also, if the payout rate is displayed in a way that is visible to the player, then if fraudulent activity occurs that results in a large payout of game balls B, the displayed payout rate will be higher than normal. This makes it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent activity, thus deterring fraudulent behavior and making the pachinko machine 1 a highly effective deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and out balls is displayed in a location invisible to the player, then staff at the amusement hall can detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as described above. Also, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1, it suggests a possible malfunction within the machine (e.g., faulty nails N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.). This allows for early response to the malfunction, reducing the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separated from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging game balls B from the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count the removed game balls B. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only the game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls are shown circulating through the first ball path 701 and safe balls through the second ball path 702. However, the embodiment is not limited to this configuration. Safe balls may circulate through the first ball path 701 and out balls through the second ball path 702. Alternatively, game balls B discharged from the game board 5, regardless of whether they are safe or out balls, may circulate through either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the opening 711b being opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, it is not limited to this, and the opening 711b may also be opened and closed by sliding it forward, backward, or left and right.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a configuration where a single partition wall 713p separates the game balls B released downward from the game board 5, causing them to be discharged through one of two separate ball paths, one before and one after the first ball path 701 and the other after the second ball path 702, the system is not limited to this configuration. It is also possible to provide three or more separate ball paths separated by multiple partition walls, allowing the game balls B released from the game board 5 to be discharged downward through any of these ball paths.

[4-14a. Characteristic effects of the substrate unit of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, if game balls B released from the game board 5 become jammed in the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided on the circuit board unit 700 located below the game board 5 in the main frame 4, the security cover 714 that closes the release opening 711b of the front base 711 can be opened, and a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver can be inserted through the notch 713q above the release opening 711b among the multiple notches 713q to poke the jammed game balls B, thereby breaking them up and easily resolving the jam. After that, by closing the release opening 711b with the security cover 714, the security cover 714 can prevent a wire-like illegal tool such as piano wire from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q. If an illegal tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 from the notch 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, even if the user attempts to move the tip of the illegal tool while bringing it into contact with the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 in order to extend its tip from the entrance of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, the illegal tool will come into contact with one of the multiple obstructing ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, and the obstructing ribs 713o will prevent the illegal tool from moving. In this way, the anti-theft cover 714 and the multiple obstructing ribs 713o can prevent illegal activity on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against illegal activity can be provided.

Furthermore, because the base unit 710 is made transparent, when a jam occurs in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location of the jam can be easily identified from the outside, making the clearing process easier and reducing the maintenance burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, since the base unit 710 has discharge passages for discharging game balls B consisting of independent first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, when a large number of game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short period of time, these game balls B can be distributed and discharged to each of the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702. This reduces the concentration of many game balls B in one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702, thus avoiding the likelihood of ball jams caused by the concentration of game balls B. It also allows for the rapid discharge of the large number of game balls B released from the game board 5 to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect game balls B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the number of game balls B discharged from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be counted. By comparing this number with the number of game balls B counted in the upstream game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity against the game board 5 or the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the discharge passage is configured by a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702 that are independent in the front-to-back direction, in the game board 5, game balls B (safe balls) that are received into the prize-winning slots and game balls B (out balls) that are not received into the prize-winning slots are discharged to positions in different front-to-back directions. This allows game balls B received into the prize-winning slots and game balls B that are not received into the prize-winning slots to be discharged by circulating through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, which are different from each other. Furthermore, since the game board 5 is equipped with a first ball sensor 703 and a second ball sensor 704 capable of detecting each game ball B circulating in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, it is possible to count the number of game balls B (safe balls) received into the prize pockets and the number of game balls B (out balls) not received into the prize pockets outside the game board 5. By comparing this with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted on the game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity at the prize pockets of the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity that reduces the burden on the pachinko hall.

Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 provided on the base unit 710 (ball path member 713) can count the number of game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide sensors or electronic circuits for counting the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside of the game board 5, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714, which opens and closes the relief opening 711b, is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinge-rotatable, even when the relief opening 711b is opened by the security cover 714, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711 by the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 is opened to resolve jams of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711, making it difficult to lose the security cover 714.

Furthermore, since the security cover 714 is provided on the underside of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and the hinge axis of the security cover 714 is provided to extend horizontally to the right at the front end of the security cover 714, when clearing jams of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the security cover 714 is opened, and a predetermined tool is inserted into the clearing opening 711b to clear the ball jam. Subsequently, after closing the security cover 714, the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. At this point, if the security cover 714 is open, its tip will contact the outer frame 2 (the object of potential contact), preventing the main frame 4 from closing. This alerts the user to the possibility of forgetting to close the security cover 714, ensuring that the security cover 714 is closed and the closure opening 711b is securely closed. Furthermore, even if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is being closed against the outer frame 2, when opening the main frame 4, the security cover 714 will contact the outer frame 2, causing it to rotate in the closing direction. Therefore, the main frame 4 will not become stuck, allowing it to open smoothly and preventing damage to the security cover 714, etc.

Furthermore, because the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 is provided with multiple notches 713q, debris that enters the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, as well as debris attached to the game balls B, can be discharged downwards through the notches 713q to the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. By reducing the amount of debris in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the occurrence of ball jams caused by debris can be reduced, thereby reducing the maintenance burden on the gaming hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since some of the multiple notches 713q are also used as tool insertion ports for inserting tools to clear ball jams, there is no need to provide separate tool insertion ports. This simplifies the structure of the pachinko machine 1, reduces cost increases, and achieves the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, in the base unit 710, debris falling through the notch 713q is prevented from coming into contact with the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. This prevents malfunctions in the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 due to debris accumulation, ensuring reliable detection of game balls B circulating through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 129 to 137. Figure 129 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine with the center mechanism and other elements made opaque. Figure 130 is a perspective view of the game board of Figure 129 seen from the front right, Figure 131 is a perspective view of the game board of Figure 129 seen from the front left, and Figure 132 is a perspective view of the game board seen from the rear. Figure 133 is a schematic diagram illustrating the wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. Figure 134 is a front view of the game board with the center mechanism and other elements made transparent. Figure 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. Figure 137 is a front view of the game board showing the game area where the game balls flow and the obstacle nails, with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are played when the player operates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is equipped with a general prize entry point 2001, a first start entry point 2002, a gate 2003, a second start entry point 2004, a large prize entry point 2005, and a special prize entry point 2006, which grant the player predetermined benefits (for example, the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) upon receipt or passage of game balls B. This game board 5 is designed to allow players to enjoy a game where game balls B are received or passed through the general prize slots 2001, first start slot 2002, gate 2003, second start slot 2004, major prize slot 2005, and special prize slot 2006, etc., within the game area 5a, through the operation of the handle 195 and the circulation of game balls B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that demarcates the outer perimeter of the game area 5a and has a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcating the rear end of the game area 5a, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a. Multiple obstacle nails N (see Figure 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the game board 5 includes a circuit board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200, which has a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169, etc.) that controls the game content performed by driving game balls B into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the game board 5 includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 located behind the game panel 1100; an effect display device 1600 located in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying predetermined effect images; a panel relay board 1710 located behind the game panel 1100 and relaying the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510; a front unit 2000 mounted on the front of the game panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 mounted on the rear of the game panel 1100.

A display device 1600 is mounted on the rear of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear of the display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is mounted behind the display device 1600 on the rear of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 serves to relay connections between the main control board 1310 and the following: general prize entry sensor 3001, first start entry sensor 3002, second start entry sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize entry sensor 2402, special prize entry sensor 2601, V prize entry sensor 3003, losing entry sensor 3004, start entry solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, special prize entry solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (three in this case) of general prize slots 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001, a gate 2003 that is always open to receive game balls B at yet another different location within the game area 5a, a second start slot 2004 that becomes open to receive game balls B according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when game balls B are received into gate 2003, and a gate that leads to the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004. The system includes: a large prize slot 2005 that allows the acceptance of game ball B according to the result of the first or second special lottery, which is determined by the acceptance of game ball B; a special prize slot 2006 that allows the acceptance of game ball B according to the result of the first or second special lottery, which is determined by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004; a V prize slot 2007 and a losing slot 2008 that provide an opportunity to accept game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize slot 2006; and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 comprises: a start-up unit 2100 mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, having a first start-up opening 2002; a side unit 2200 mounted to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, along the inner rail 1002, having three general prize-winning openings 2001; a side upper left unit 2300 mounted slightly above the left of the side unit 2200 in a front view; a first attacker unit 2400 located to the right of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, which is the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a front view, having a second start-up opening 2004, a large prize-winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2021; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 located above the start-up unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the approximate center in a front view of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 located to the right of the center prize mechanism 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, having a prize entry opening 2006; a side right-center unit 2700 located above the second attacker unit 2600, having one general prize entry opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800 located above the side right-center unit 2700, having a gate 2003.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second start-up sensor 2401 that detects game balls B received into the second start-up opening 2004, and a large prize-winning opening sensor 2402 that detects game balls B received into the large prize-winning opening 2005. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a prize-winning opening sensor 2601 that detects game balls B received into the prize-winning opening 2006. The gate member 2800 is equipped with a gate sensor 2801 that detects the passage of game balls B through the gate 2003.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and includes a box-shaped back box 3010 that is open at the front and has a square opening 3010a in its rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a general prize slot sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received into the general prize slot 2001 provided on the front unit 2000, a first start slot sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received into the first start slot 2002, a V prize slot sensor 3003 that detects game balls B received into the special prize slot 2006 and then distributed to the V prize slot 2007, and a losing slot sensor 3004 that detects game balls B received into the special prize slot 2006 and then distributed to the losing slot 2008 (see Figure 145, etc.).

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a V-prize door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V-prize opening 2007, and a V-distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V-prize door 3006 back and forth to distribute the game balls B received in the prize opening 2006 to either the V-prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 comprises a front rear performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the rear of the front rear performance unit 3100 and at the top of the rear box 3010, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located below the rear upper performance unit and at the bottom of the rear box 3010.

[5-1. Front Components]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. Figure 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the rear. Figure 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the susceptible line in (a), and (c) is an exploded perspective view of (a) as seen from the front, with each main component separated.

The front component 1000 is entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a roughly square outer shape when viewed from the front, and its inner shape is roughly circular, penetrating in the front-to-back direction. The inner circumference of the inner shape demarcates the outer perimeter of the game area 5a. This front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower left end of the left-center direction in a front view, passing the upper center of the front view and extending to the upper right diagonally; an inner rail 1002 positioned inside the front component 1000, roughly parallel to the outer rail 1001, and extending in an arc from the lower center of the front view to the upper left diagonally; and an out-guiding section 1003 formed at the lowest point of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view, and sloping downwards toward the rear.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a right-lower rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out-guiding section 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right edge of the front component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the right-lower rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with its upper part curving inward from the front component 1000; and a stopper 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and which the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

Furthermore, the aforementioned component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatable only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an out-hole 1008 located at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame, and which penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out-guide section 1003. The game ball B, guided backward by the out-guide section 1003, is discharged through the out-hole 1008 to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with anti-theft recesses 1009 that are recessed from the front end to the rear at the outer side of the parts of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically from the lower ends, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the anti-theft cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into these anti-theft recesses 1009. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a from below the front of the game board 5 through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, thus preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a notch 1010 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward, passing through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a sticker attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed to be almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100, located at the rear, to be visible from the front.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 139, the front component 1000 includes a spec sticker attachment section 1021 that is recessed from the front to the rear in a predetermined range along the right rail 1005 from the impact section 1006 in the upper right corner of the front view, to which a spec sticker 1020 displaying the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 is attached; an insertion pin 1022 that protrudes cylindrically from the rear of the spec sticker attachment section 1021 for positioning the impact section 1006; and a separation hole 1023 that penetrates from front to back at the center of the insertion pin 1022.

The spec seal application area 1021 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer dimensions of the spec seal 1020 and is recessed to the rear by a depth greater than the thickness of the spec seal 1020 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) (see Figure 139(b)). In this spec seal application area 1021, the horizontally extending portion at the lower end and the straight portion extending vertically upward from the right end of that portion are set as contact surfaces for applying the spec seal 1020.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec seal attachment portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The impact portion 1006 is positioned by the insertion of the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates from the front to the rear of the front component 1000. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends forward and backward with a constant inner diameter. When assembled to the game board 5, the front of the separation hole 1023 is closed by the spec seal 1020 attached to the spec seal attachment area 1021, and the rear is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, thus creating a closed space (closed space) within the separation hole 1023. As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is located near the edge of the spec seal attachment area 1021 (spec seal 1020).

The separation hole 1023 in this embodiment has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing sufficient pressure on the speck seal 1020. If the separation hole 1023 is larger than this, bending may occur at the separation hole 1023 portion of the speck seal 1020, potentially detracting from the appearance of the speck seal 1020.

According to the front component 1000 of this embodiment, if the spec seal 1020 cannot be properly attached to the spec seal attachment area 1021 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the spec seal 1020 from rear to front. This allows the edge of the spec seal 1020 to peel forward, and the peeled portion can be easily removed by the worker, allowing the spec seal 1020 to be reattached.

Furthermore, by separating the front component 1000 from the game panel 1100, passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the front component 1000, and pressing the spec seal 1020 from the rear with its tip, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal attachment area 1021. This makes the replacement of the spec seal 1020 when changing models much easier.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100 are separated, the spec seal 1020 can be easily removed from the spec seal attachment area 1021 using the separation hole 1023. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the spec sticker 1020 to the spec sticker attachment area 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1023, and makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, thus making it harder for them to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1023.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the game panel 1100, which is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 to which the spec sticker 1020 is affixed, closes the separation hole 1023 from the rear. Since there is no hole that penetrates to the rear, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent the insertion of a wire-like fraudulent tool, such as piano wire, into the game board 5 through this hole, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100, even if an illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole 1023 from the front, penetrating the spec seal 1020, the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023 is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool penetrating the spec seal 1020 leaves a trace on it, it deters fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is shown as being provided in the specification seal attachment area 1021. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration, and the separation hole may also be provided in the area where the seal is attached, such as the certification label attachment area 1012.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 138, etc. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 comprises a flat panel plate 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin, the outer circumference of which is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. Multiple obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement (see Figure 137, etc.).

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed from synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or from inorganic plates such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder and is the minimum necessary thickness (8-10 mm) to adequately hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front surface and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel 1110 is located at the lowest position within the game area 5a, and the area corresponding to the out opening 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from its lower end. Furthermore, the panel 1110 has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back, for attaching the front unit 2000.

Furthermore, although not shown in the illustration, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of positioning holes formed as circular holes and short elongated holes that penetrate from front to back, and a plurality of engagement steps that are spaced apart in the left-right direction at the upper and lower edges, and are formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning relative to the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are for detachably attaching to the panel holder 1120 by engaging with the engagement claws (not shown) and engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120.

As shown in Figure 138, the panel 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center mechanism 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center in a front view. This gives the panel 1110 a frame-like shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the direction of movement of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) is wider on the left and lower sides from the center, allowing multiple game balls B to be arranged side by side, while the upper side is narrower, making it impossible for multiple game balls B to be arranged side by side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is sized to enclose the panel plate 1110, has a roughly rectangular shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder 1120 has a retaining step (not shown) that is approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110 and recessed from the front to the rear, and a through-hole 1121 that penetrates the retaining step in the front-to-back direction, approximately the same size as the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has a notch 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to coincide with the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full ball payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 face forward, passing through the notch 1010 and the other notch.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has an outlet recess 1123 that extends upward from its lower end to a position corresponding to the outlet opening 1008, and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the outlet recess 1123 is in communication with the outlet opening 1008.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120, although not shown in the illustration, includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the retaining step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engaging claws that are positioned outside the retaining step and elastically engage with the engaging steps on the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engaging pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the retaining step and engage with the two engaging steps on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can be detachably attached to the panel plate 1110 while it is housed in the retaining step by engaging the engaging steps on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging pieces from diagonally above the front, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 backward to elastically engage the engaging steps on the upper and lower left inclined portions with the engaging claws. At this point, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, thereby positioning the panel plate 1110 in a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

Since this game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000 attached to the front, is made of transparent material, when assembled with the game board 5, it reduces the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, giving the player a sense of openness. Furthermore, although the actual size of the game area 5a remains unchanged, it makes the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is transparent along with the front component 1000, light from the display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player), making it appear as if it is emitting light, thereby further enhancing the overall decorative appeal of the game board 5.

[5-3. Circuit board holder]
The circuit board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The circuit board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally elongated box shape with the top and front open, and the bottom surface is inclined to become lower towards the center in the left-right direction. The circuit board holder 1200 has an ejection section 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the game board 5, the circuit board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000, which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, from below and from the rear, and the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to its rear surface.

When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the circuit board holder 1200 has its discharge section 1201 positioned directly above the ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the circuit board unit 620 of the main frame 4. This allows it to receive all the game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the out opening 1008, and all the game balls B discharged downwards from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000. These balls can then be discharged from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the ball receiving section 628 or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 115). The game balls B discharged into the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main Control Board Unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably mounted on the rear surface of the circuit board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 comprises a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see Figure 133) that can set the game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is mounted on the circuit board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 consists of a cover and a base. Both the cover and base are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The internal space formed by the cover and base can accommodate the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Because the cover and base are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent, the condition of the front and back surfaces of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether unauthorized modifications have been made or whether unauthorized ICs are mounted) can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover and base, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, it is necessary to destroy that sealing mechanism in order to open the main control board box 1320 again, thus leaving a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, thereby increasing the deterrent against unauthorized actions against the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general prize entry sensor 3001, the first start entry sensor 3002, the gate sensor 2801, the second start entry sensor 2401, the large prize entry sensor 2402, the special prize entry sensor 2601, the V prize entry sensor 3003, the losing entry sensor 3004, the start entry solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the special prize entry solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the magnetic sensor 1050, and other devices.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 includes a setting key switch 1311a that can switch and confirm the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b that can select and switch setting values, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates that switching the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 via a connector (board-to-board connection) (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may also be electrically connected via a harness). Through this connector connection (board-to-board connection), the signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the signals from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The setting change board 1311 has vertical distance dimensions of its right and left sides that are approximately the same as those of the main control board 1310, and its horizontal distance dimension is shorter than that of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the centerlines passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincide with the centerlines passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is positioned along the right side of the setting change board 1311, with its vertical distance dimension centered on the centerline, and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is positioned along the left side of the main control board 1310, with its vertical distance dimension centered on the centerline. Below the centerline of the setting change board 1311 is a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and above the centerline of the setting change board 1311 is a setting change switching button 1311b having a press operation part, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that can emit a single color (for example, red) is positioned on the centerline of the setting change board 1311, to the upper left of the setting key switch 1311a (to the lower left of the setting switching button 1311b). A setting indicator 1310g, consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), is positioned above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h, consisting of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center to the right edge, is positioned below the center line of the main control board 1310. A RAM clear switch 1310f with a press-button is positioned near the center of the lower edge of the main control board 1310. Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not limited to being installed on the main control board 1310; it may also be installed on the dispensing control board 633 or the power supply board 630. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be installed on any one of the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, or the power supply board 630.

In this embodiment, the initial position of the setting key switch 1311a is OFF when it is ready to receive the setting key into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, when the longitudinal direction of the rectangular socket is aligned vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and removed from the socket. Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 while the setting key is inserted into the socket, the setting key is positioned such that it does not interfere with or damage other components of pachinko machines (or components of the gaming hall's island equipment) arranged in a row facing each other in the gaming hall's island setup. The depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is designed to prevent this.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position to perform a first ON operation, which sets the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from its initial position to perform a second ON operation, which sets the setting key switch 1311a to the confirm key ON state. This confirm key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). Conversely, the setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the confirmation key is turned ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, two completely different functions—the setting key ON function and the confirm key ON function—can be realized by a single setting key switch 1311a, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated. This allows the setting key ON operation and the confirm key ON operation to be performed simultaneously using only the setting key switch 1311a.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320. However, to prevent wires or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the press operation part of the setting switch button 1311b, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding openings, wire intrusion prevention parts are molded into the cover body of each of these openings. The setting display unit 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover and base and cannot be touched at all. However, since the cover is molded to be transparent as described above, the setting value displayed by the setting display unit 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be viewed through the cover.

Furthermore, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring patterns for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting change board 1311 are formed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310... Furthermore, the wiring patterns for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the confirmation key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a) and the wiring pattern for transmitting signals from the setting switch button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (they are spaced apart). Similarly, the wiring patterns for transmitting signals from the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed so that they are not close to each other (they are spaced apart).

This section briefly explains the setting key switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g. First, it briefly explains how to change the setting value, and then briefly explains how to check the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that allows not only the change of setting value but also the confirmation of the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the amusement hall, are permitted to possess it, and this is limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the setting value, the "predetermined conditions for permission to change the setting value" must be met, which include the main body frame 4 being opened from the outer frame 2 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the setting key being inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder being rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the ON position. In other words, the person actually changing the setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the ON position and powering on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the "predetermined conditions for permitting setting value changes" described above may also include the condition that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated and an operation signal is input. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. If these "predetermined conditions for permitting setting value changes" are met, then the setting value can be changed.

The person performing the setting change must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. Next, operate the power switch 630a in Figure 7 to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (one of the setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from off to on.

When a user changes the setting value, pressing the press button 1311b triggers a detection signal from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time the user presses the press button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a, based on the detection signal from the setting change board 1311b, increases the current setting value by 1, and when it reaches the maximum value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, increases the value by 1 again, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g. Alternatively, instead of providing a setting change button 1311b, the setting value may be switched using the RAM clear switch 1310f. In this case, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Each time the person changing the setting value presses the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a increases the value by 1 from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When it reaches the maximum value of setting value 6, it returns to the initial value of setting value 1, and then increases the value by 1 again, displaying the setting value on the setting display unit 1310g.

When a user changes a setting value, they rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise to determine the setting value (that is, they rotate the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is OFF) to OFF, and then rotate it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

Furthermore, the setting key cylinder may be rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a is returned from its rotational position when the setting key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position when the setting key switch 1311a is OFF) to input the ON signal of the confirmation key from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In this case, after pressing the press operation part of the setting switching button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display unit 1310g, the setting value can be confirmed simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, and the setting key can then be removed from the setting key cylinder, improving work efficiency.

To change the setting value, the user turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the confirmation key is ON to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches from displaying the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to hiding it, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lit to off. In other words, the "predetermined condition for ending setting value changes" is met when the setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees clockwise, returning the setting key switch 1311a from its rotational position when the confirmation key is ON to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This fulfills the "predetermined condition for ending setting value changes," and thus ends the period during which the setting value can be changed.

The person performing the setting change removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the setting change procedure.

To display the currently set value, the following "predetermined conditions for permission to display the set value" must be met: when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. In other words, the person actually performing the display of the currently set value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state where power has been restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON.

The person performing the check and display of the currently set settings first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state where power has been restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), then opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and then inserts the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotates it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to setting values 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a was first turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if the person performing the confirmation display of the currently set setting value presses the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value will not be changed at all in response to this press, nor will the content displayed on the setting display unit 1310g be changed.

The person performing the confirmation and display of the currently set value, after confirming the current setting value, rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that activated the setting key to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that deactivates the setting key switch 1311a) to deactivate it. This setting key deactivation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting indicator 1310g from displaying the setting value to hiding it. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF when the setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees clockwise from the position where the confirmation key was pressed to its original position (i.e., the position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This fulfills a predetermined condition for ending the display of the setting value, thus ending the period during which the setting value can be viewed (the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g).

The person performing the verification and display of the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the verification and display of the currently set value.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions for permitting a change in the setting value require, as described above, that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for permitting the display of the setting value require, as described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Thus, the predetermined conditions for allowing changes to the set value and the predetermined conditions for allowing the display of the set value share a common requirement: the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the socket of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. Furthermore, the conditions for permitting setting value changes are defined as follows: when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the setting key is inserted into the slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON; and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. The conditions for permitting setting value display are also defined as follows: when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the setting key is inserted into the slot of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. The condition that the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 may be excluded from the conditions for permitting setting value changes and setting value display.

To briefly explain the settings, "settings" allow for changes to probabilities such as the probability used to determine whether a big win or a small win occurs, the probability used to determine whether a player wins a small win or not, the probability used to determine when transitioning from a bonus round to a normal round, and the distribution rate to areas advantageous to the player. These settings pre-set probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player (i.e., the number of game balls B that the player can acquire can be increased). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are pre-set, and the probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player are pre-set from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery judgments associated with set values (for example, a jackpot judgment table that defines the proportion of jackpot judgment values indicating a jackpot has been won, a jackpot symbol determination table that defines the proportion of judgment values for determining the jackpot symbols, a minor win judgment table that defines the proportion of minor win judgment values indicating a minor win, a minor win symbol determination table that defines the proportion of judgment values for determining the minor win symbols, a normal mode transition judgment table that defines the proportion of judgment values for determining the transition from probability variation to normal mode, etc.), and also selects various tables used in various distribution rates associated with set values (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the driving of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.). In the various tables used in various lottery judgments associated with set values, various judgment values are allocated in predetermined proportions. Furthermore, the various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of their values differ from each other. Similarly, the various tables used in the various distribution rates are set so that at least some of their values differ from each other, or they are set so that their values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of other electrical drive sources. Also, while the above-mentioned setting values were six integers ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the range may be smaller or larger. For example, it may be four integers ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight integers ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

As described above, the setting display unit 1310g displays the setting value. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a restores power, it checks the contents of its built-in RAM to determine if there is an abnormality. If an abnormality is found, and the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally when the power is cut off, the display unit displays an error indicating that the contents stored in its built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display unit 1310g as an error.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B that were fired into the game area 5a and recovered by the out-out port 1008 located in the game area 5a, which is partitioned on the game board 5. Game balls B fired into the game area 5a and recovered by the out-out port 1008 are detected by the out-sensor 664 (see Figure 169, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B collected by the output port 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of its built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h.

In the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), and then a second ON operation is performed by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise. This ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that activates the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This ON signal of the confirm key can then be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (this configuration of the setting key switch 1311a' may be described as "Modified form of the confirm key (1)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, a decision key button with a pressable operation part may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressable part of the confirmation key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the confirmation key button. A wire intrusion prevention section is molded into the cover body to prevent the insertion of wires or other objects through the "gap" between the pressable part of the confirmation key button and the corresponding opening, thereby preventing modification of the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. When the pressable part of the confirmation key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the confirmation key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressable part of the confirmation key button is pressed, and can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressable part of the confirmation key button is not pressed.

The position of the confirmation key button on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switching button 1311b. To prevent confusion between the confirmation key button and the setting switching button 1311b, stickers with the names of each button are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the confirmation key button and the setting switching button 1311b, respectively (instead of these stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). Furthermore, to prevent confusion between the confirmation key button and the setting switch button 1311b, a button with a cover that covers the pressable part of either the confirmation key button or the setting switch button 1311b (requiring the cover to be opened in order to press the pressable part) may be used, or the pressable parts may be of different colors, or the external shape or the shape of the pressable part of the confirmation key button and the setting switch button 1311b may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressable part may be used as the confirmation key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressable part as the confirmation key button include toggle switches with levers, slide switches with sliding parts, rotary switches with rotating parts, rocker switches, touch switches, and various other switches. Furthermore, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with a confirmation key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring patterns for the confirmation key button and the setting switch button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1311, and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also formed to be spaced apart. Similarly, on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns for transmitting the detection signal from the confirmation key button and the wiring patterns for transmitting the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON (the configuration of the confirmation key button (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified Configuration of the Confirmation Key (2)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the determining key is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 of the main control board 1310. Although the signals were previously input to 10a, instead, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether or not the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 in the handle unit 180, and a detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194, which detects whether or not the launch of the game balls B is forcibly stopped by the player's will, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the "Decision Key" is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while determining that the "Decision Key" is NOT ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195. Furthermore, based on the detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194, the "Decision Key" can determine that the launch of game balls B is forcibly stopped, while determining that the "Decision Key" is NOT ON when the launch of game balls B is not forcibly stopped (the configuration of the handle touch sensor (which may include the configuration of the single-shot button operation sensor) may be described as "Modified Configuration of the Decision Key (3)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This second ON operation turns the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, a firing reference pulse may be branched from the firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 (described later) at the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The launch reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be launched towards the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the launch reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the launch reference pulse is not input (the form of the launch reference pulse may be described as "Modified form of the decision key (4)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal for the setting key is received from the setting change board 1311. Although the signal was originally input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movements of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5, and the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, then the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor is capable of detecting the player's movements by having the light emitted from the light-emitting part pass through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3, reflect off the player's arm or hand, etc., within a predetermined distance dimension, and then having this reflected light pass through the transparent glass plate 162 again and be received by the light-receiving part. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance measuring sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is operation based on this detection signal. If it determines that there is operation, it can determine that the decision key is ON, while if it determines that there is no operation, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the configuration of the distance measuring sensor may be described as "Modified form of the decision key (5)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position to perform a first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from its initial position to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the confirm key ON state. This confirm key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Finally, the setting key switch 1311a is set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that activated the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to the OFF position, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to the OFF position, returning it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the confirmation key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, a serial output circuit may be provided on the setting key switch 1311a that can output information indicating setting key ON, confirmation key ON, and OFF as serial information to the outside. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a, which is equipped with this serial output circuit, was originally located on the setting change board 1311, but it may instead be located on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. When serial information output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether it is indicating setting key ON, confirmation key ON, or OFF (an embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "Modified form of confirmation key (6)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position to perform a first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from its initial position to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the confirm key ON state. This confirm key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a is then returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that set the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to the OFF position, and the setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to the OFF position, returning it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the confirmation key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, a pulse output circuit may be provided in the setting key switch 1311a that can output information indicating setting key ON, confirmation key ON, and OFF as pulse signals to the outside. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a, which is equipped with this pulse output circuit, was originally located on the setting change board 1311, but it may instead be located on the main control board 1310 or on the payout control board 633. The pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width of 1 ms when it indicates setting key ON, 3 ms when it indicates confirm key ON, and 5 ms when it indicates OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether it indicates setting key ON, confirm key ON, or OFF (an embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "Modified Confirm Key (7)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position to perform a first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In addition, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from its initial position to perform a second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. A signal indicating that the setting key is ON is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that activated the setting key to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the confirmation key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the confirmation key ON signal... The voltage levels of the ON and OFF signals may be measured using an intermediate potential (for example, a potential between 2V and 3V, within the range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. A comparator circuit may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the comparison result from the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a then determines the ON/OFF status of the setting key ON signal, the confirmation key ON signal, and the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (an embodiment of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential may be described as "Modified Confirmation Key (8)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, a decision key button with a pressable operation part may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressable part of the confirmation key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding dispensing control board box 632. A wire intrusion prevention section is molded into the cover body to prevent the dispensing control board 633 from being modified by a wire or the like entering through the "gap" between the pressable part of the confirmation key button and the corresponding opening. When the pressable part of the confirmation key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the confirmation key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressable part of the confirmation key button is pressed, and can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressable part of the confirmation key button is not pressed.

Furthermore, the position of the confirmation key button on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressable operation part, as described later. To prevent confusion between the confirmation key button and the error release switch, stickers with the names of each button are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the confirmation key button and the error release switch, respectively (instead of these stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). Also, to prevent confusion between the confirmation key button and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressable operation part of either the confirmation key button or the error release switch may be used (the cover must be opened to press the pressable operation part), or the pressable operation parts may be of different colors, or the external shape or the shape of the pressable operation part of the confirmation key button and the error release switch may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a pressable operation part may be used as the confirmation key button. Other types of switches that do not have a pressable part as a confirmation key button include, for example, toggle switches with levers, slide switches with sliding parts, rotary switches with rotating parts, rocker switches, touch switches, and various other switches. Furthermore, when a confirmation key button and an error release switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring patterns for the confirmation key button and the error release switch are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector on the dispensing control board 633 (the terminals of the connector on the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. Similarly, on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns that transmit the detection signal from the confirmation key button and the wiring patterns that transmit the detection signal from the error release switch are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON (the configuration of the confirmation key button (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified Configuration of the Confirmation Key (9)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal for the decision key was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, a signal from an error release switch having a press operation part on the dispensing control board 633 may be branched on the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON may be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error clearing switch is used to clear the error displayed on the error LED indicator. After power is restored, once the pachinko machine 1's system has finished starting up (completing power-on processing on various control boards and performing interrupt processing), and if no errors are present in the pachinko machine 1's state, the press button on the error clearing switch is never operated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the press button on the error clearing switch is operated based on the signal from the error clearing switch, and conversely, it can determine that the confirmation key is NOT ON when the press button on the error clearing switch is not operated based on the signal from the error clearing switch. This improves security regarding the presence or absence of the confirmation key (the form of the error clearing switch may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (10)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although the signal was previously input to the main control MPU 1310a, instead, the payout control board 633's payout control MPU may monitor the logic of the signal from the error release switch, which has a pressable operation section, in the port input processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later, and create a command. The command created in the command transmission processing of the payout control unit power-on processing described later is then sent to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which receives this command, determines whether the OK key is ON or not. As described above, the error release switch is for clearing errors displayed on the error LED indicator. After power is restored, the pachinko machine 1 system has finished starting up (it has completed the power-on processing of various control boards and is in a state where interrupt processing is being performed), and if there are no errors in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressable operation section of the error release switch is not operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command reception processing of the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when it receives a command from the dispensing control MPU indicating that the press operation unit has been operated based on the signal from the error release switch. Conversely, it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when it receives a command from the dispensing control MPU indicating that the press operation unit has not been operated based on the signal from the error release switch. This improves security regarding whether the confirmation key is ON or not (the second form of the error release switch may be described as "modified form of the confirmation key (11)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON for a second time. This signal of the decision key being ON is set Previously, the change board 1311 was configured to input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. The operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and is also branched on the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a then determines whether the decision key is ON or OFF based on the input operation signal. As described later, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a predetermined area of the RAM built into itself (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a predetermined area of the RAM it has built into. Thus, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f on the payout control board 633. Conversely, it can determine that the confirmation key is NOT ON when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f on the payout control board 633. This improves security regarding the presence or absence of the confirmation key.

The press-button portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the corresponding dispensing control board box 632. To prevent the dispensing control board 633 from being modified by inserting a wire or the like through the "gap" between the press-button portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body at the opening.

Furthermore, the position of the RAM clear switch 1310f on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error release switch having a pressable operation part, as described later. To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, stickers bearing the names of each button are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, respectively (instead of these stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). Also, to prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, a button with a cover that covers the pressable operation part of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error release switch (the cover must be opened to press the pressable operation part) may be used, or the pressable operation parts may be of different colors, or the external shape or the shape of the pressable operation part may be different between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, or another type of switch without a pressable operation part may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Other types of switches that do not have a press-button operation part, such as the RAM clear switch 1310f, include, for example, toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a sliding part, rotary switches with a rotating operation part, rocker switches, touch switches, and various other switches. Furthermore, when the payout control board 633 is equipped with both the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring patterns for the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the payout control board 633, and the connections to the terminals of the connector on the payout control board 633 (the terminals of the connector on the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. Similarly, on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns that transmit the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring patterns that transmit the detection signal from the error release switch are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Furthermore, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON (this configuration of the RAM clear switch (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified configuration of the confirmation key (12)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Although the signal was previously input to the main control MPU 1310a, instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. The dispensing control MPU on the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f during the port input processing of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit described later, and create a command. The command created during the command transmission processing of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit described later will be sent to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, upon receiving this command, may determine whether the OK key is ON or not. As described later, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a predetermined area of the RAM built into itself (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a is guaranteed to clear a predetermined area of the RAM built into itself. Thus, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key. In the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when it receives a command from the payout control MPU indicating that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f on the payout control board 633, while the main control MPU can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when it receives a command from the payout control MPU indicating that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f on the payout control board 633. This improves security regarding whether the confirm key is ON or OFF (the RAM clear switch embodiment 2 (which may include the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified form of the confirm key (13)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by performing a second ON operation (rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON. This decision key ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb depletion detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 are input to the dispensing control board 633. The signals are input to the MPU and also branched at the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or OFF. Alternatively, the logic of the detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb depletion detection sensor 574, or the dispensing detection sensor 591 may be monitored by the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 during the port input processing of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit described later, and a command may be created. The created command may then be sent to the main control board 1310 during the command transmission processing of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit described later. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, upon receiving this command, may determine whether the decision key is ON or OFF. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON (the configuration of the dispensing unit (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified configuration of the confirmation key (16)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the configuration of the main frame release switch (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (17)"). Note that in this case, the person changing the setting value must close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in order to turn the confirmation key ON. After turning the confirmation key ON, the main frame 4 must be opened again relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key removed from the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main frame 4 must be closed again relative to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal was input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, while determining that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the configuration of the door frame release switch (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn the confirmation key ON. After turning the confirmation key ON, the door frame 3 must be closed again relative to the main frame 4, the setting key removed from the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the main frame 4 closed relative to the outer frame 2.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then a second ON operation is performed by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise. This ON signal is then input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be provided on the main control board 1310 (this configuration of the setting key switch may be described as "Modified Configuration of the Configuration Key (18)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311 can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF, thereby performing a second ON operation. This ON signal is then input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. While this was the case, the setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310. By rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON back to its initial position, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a can then determine that the confirmation key is ON when the OFF signal is received, and that the confirmation key is not ON when the OFF signal is not received. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON (this second embodiment of the setting key switch (which may include the embodiment of setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (19)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, the main control board 1310 may be provided with a decision key button having a pressable operation part. In this case, the pressable portion of the confirmation key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the confirmation key button. A wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent the main control board 1310 from being modified by inserting a wire or the like through the "gap" formed between the pressable portion of the confirmation key button and the corresponding opening. When the pressable portion of the confirmation key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the confirmation key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressable portion of the confirmation key button is pressed, and can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressable portion of the confirmation key button is not pressed.

Furthermore, the position of the select key button on the main control board 1310 may be near the RAM clear switch 1310f. To prevent confusion between the select key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, stickers bearing the names of each button are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the select key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, respectively (the names of each button may be molded into the cover instead of these stickers). Additionally, to prevent confusion between the select key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover that conceals the press operation portion of either the select key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f (requiring the cover to be opened to press the press operation portion) may be used, or the press operation portions may be of different colors, or the external shape or press operation portion shape of the select key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be different, or another type of switch that does not have a press operation portion may be used as the select key button. Other types of switches that do not have a press-button operation section as a confirmation key button include, for example, toggle switches with levers, slide switches with sliding sections, rotary switches with rotating sections, rocker switches, touch switches, and various other switches. Furthermore, when the confirmation key button and RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns for the confirmation key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the main control board 1310 to prevent unauthorized modification. Also, when the confirmation key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON (this second form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (20)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the ON status As described later, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or when a setting change is made that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a predetermined area of the RAM built into itself (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a predetermined area of the RAM built into itself. Thus, the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This improves security regarding whether the confirmation key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON (the RAM clear switch embodiment 3 (which may include the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (21)"). Furthermore, since the period during which the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, as described later, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error release switch, as described later, an error release switch on the payout control board 633 becomes unnecessary.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the determining key is then transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main Although the signals were previously input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, instead, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 of the gate 2003, various sensors of various prize winning holes (for example, the second start hole sensor 2401, the big prize winning hole sensor 2402, the special prize winning hole sensor 2601, the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, and the first start hole sensor 3002) and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4, may determine whether the decision key is ON or OFF based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is ON (various forms of sensors, etc. (including the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified form of the decision key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the settings must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and send game balls B to the gate 2003, the various prize slots, and the out slot 1008 in order to turn on the confirm key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal of the setting key is received by the setting change board 1311. Previously, the signal was input from the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a. However, instead, if the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of the movable body (device) by controlling the drive of an electrical drive source such as a stepping motor, DC motor, or solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (device) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (such as a photosensor or distance sensor), the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or OFF based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is ON (an embodiment of the optical device sensor (which may include the embodiment of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the decision key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to activate the confirmation key, and move the movable part (device) so that the optical sensor can detect its original position, operating position, etc.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the decision key is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, instead, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism within the game area 5a, may determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the configuration of the magnetic sensor (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value needs to bring a magnet close to the front of the game board 5 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to turn the confirmation key ON.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the determining key is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. Although the input was previously set to 1310a, instead, if a vibration sensor is installed on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent activity such as shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to apply vibration to the pachinko machine 1 and change the path of the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, thereby causing the balls to enter various prize slots and gates provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and may also determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be set to a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is ON (the form of the vibration sensor (including the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified form of the decision key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value will need to shake or tap the pachinko machine 1 to activate the confirm key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. This ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 Although the signal from 310 was previously input to the main control MPU 1310a, instead, if radio wave sensors are installed on the game board 5 and the payout device 580 to detect fraudulent activity such as illegally obtaining game balls B by irradiating radio waves onto the pachinko machine 1 and causing various sensors on the various prize-winning slots on the game board 5 and various sensors on the payout device 580 to malfunction, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensors, and also determine whether or not the decision key is ON based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensors. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is ON (the configuration of the radio wave sensor (including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be described as "modified configuration of the decision key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value needs to emit radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 in order to activate the confirm key.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it OFF. This ON signal of the determining key is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. While the signals were previously input to U1310a, instead, detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 373, which detects the press operation of the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 350, and detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, which detects contact of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 350, may be input to the peripheral control board 1510. These signals are then branched on the peripheral control board 1510 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the confirmation key is ON or OFF. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be configured as a setting key switch 1311a', which can only rotate within a range from its initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON (this configuration of the performance operation button unit, including the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a', may be referred to as "Modified Configuration of the Confirmation Key (27)").

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which is composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is constructed by crimping the cover body and the base body together using one-way screws or the like in the crimping section. This crimping section is a sealing mechanism and is provided in multiple locations. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body together using one of these sealing mechanisms and the one-way screws or the like in the crimping section. To open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy this sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. This structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, although the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the confirmation key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to them, a wire intrusion prevention part is molded into the cover body at the openings to prevent the setting change board 1311 from being modified by inserting a wire or the like through the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the confirmation key button and the corresponding openings. If the structure of the setting change board box differs from the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, and the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body, an opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body that can detect the opening of the cover body relative to the base body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover body may be configured to be directly input to the main control board 1310, or it may be configured to be (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. Based on the detection signal from the opening/closing switch for the setting change board cover, the condition that the cover is released from the base can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above (the configuration of the setting change board box may be described as "modified form of the confirmation key (28)").

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the confirmation key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted. Furthermore, the wiring is arranged such that the settings change board 1311 is not close to each other (is spaced apart from each other), and the connections to the terminals of the connector SMCN of the settings change board 1311 (the terminals of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) are also spaced apart. On the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a) The wiring patterns (through which the ON signal is transmitted, and through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern (through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted) were also routed so as not to be close to each other (spaced apart from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, or the wiring pattern through which the confirmation key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the setting change base The connector SMCN on board 1311 may be connected to another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 via a separate connector, and the connector MSCN on the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 via a separate connector (inter-board connection). These other connectors on the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310 may be electrically connected via a harness (the configuration of the wiring pattern may be described as "Modified form of the confirmation key (29)").

Furthermore, any of the above-mentioned variations (1) to (29) of the decision key may be appropriately selected and combined (the selected combination of variations may be referred to as "Variation of the decision key (30)").

Furthermore, the above-mentioned settings allow for changes to probabilities for determining whether a big win or a small win occurs, as well as probabilities for determining whether a small win or a big win occurs. It also allows for changes to probabilities for determining when transitioning from a probability variation state to a normal state, and the distribution rate to areas advantageous to the player. A probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., an increase in the number of game balls B that the player can acquire) is pre-set. In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are pre-set, with probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player pre-set from setting value 1 to setting value 6. Incidentally, while the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines have a single setting value that pre-sets a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. In other words, there are two types of game specifications: one where multiple pre-set probabilities (degrees of advantage) exist for the player, as in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, requiring setting changes; and another where only a single pre-set probability (degree of advantage) exists for the player, requiring no setting changes at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned according to these game specifications, and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 become dependent on the game specifications. Therefore, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Thus, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 that are not dependent on the game specifications, that is, can be used commonly without requiring changes to the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification where there is only one predetermined setting value for the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player, and no setting changes are necessary, there is no need to use the setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, this can be addressed by changing the software design to assign setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 as follows:

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area), multiple machine verification operation patterns can be set (allowing variations in the startup method of the pachinko machine 1 after RAM clearing). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (mechanism) and the lighting of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs that are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, machine verification operation pattern 1 specifying "all operations (operation of the movable body (mechanism), lighting of light-emitting elements)" is assigned as setting value 1, machine verification operation pattern 2 specifying "operation of the movable body (mechanism)" is assigned as setting value 2, machine verification operation pattern 3 specifying "light-up of light-emitting elements" is assigned as setting value 3, and detailed operation of the movable body (mechanism) (variable movement speed, movement across the entire operating area, other structures and other movements) is assigned as setting value 4. Actual machine verification operation pattern 4 is assigned, which specifies operations such as interference checks with moving parts (mechanisms) and the order of operation with other moving parts (mechanisms). Actual machine verification operation pattern 5 is assigned, which specifies "lighting of light-emitting elements in units of one port (lighting of light-emitting elements by predetermined output port units of the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., each output port))" as setting value 5. Actual machine verification operation pattern 6 is assigned, which specifies "no operation" as setting value 6 (the manner in which the settings for changing the actual machine verification operation after RAM clearing are sometimes described as "Modification by common hardware configuration (1)"). The main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine verification operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby operating the moving parts (mechanisms) and lighting up light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can perform operations on the movable parts (features) and light-emitting elements controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting values included in the setting change command (actual machine verification operation pattern). The method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after a RAM clear can be varied depending on the configuration of the actual machine verification operation change setting after the RAM clear.

Furthermore, for example, it can be used as a setting value to set multiple time intervals from the end of the symbol variation until the demonstration (a demo performance performed while the player is waiting) begins. In this case, setting value 1 is assigned to time setting pattern 1, specifying "10 seconds", setting value 2 is assigned to time setting pattern 2, specifying "15 seconds", setting value 3 is assigned to time setting pattern 3, specifying "20 seconds", setting value 4 is assigned to time setting pattern 4, specifying "25 seconds", setting value 5 is assigned to time setting pattern 5, specifying "30 seconds", and setting value 6 is assigned to time setting pattern 6, specifying "35 seconds" (the manner in which the setting is changed from the end of the symbol variation until the player is waiting may be described as "Modified example using common hardware configuration (2)"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the settings for the time between the end of the symbol change and the start of the player waiting state, it is possible to vary the time between the end of the symbol change and the start of the demonstration.

Furthermore, for example, it can be used as a setting value to set multiple types of demonstrations (demonstration performances performed while the player is waiting) that take place after the pattern changes have finished. In this case, setting value 1 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 1, which specifies "comical performance," setting value 2 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 2, which specifies "comical performance and movement performance of movable parts (mechanical devices)," setting value 3 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 3, which specifies "serious performance," setting value 4 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 4, which specifies "serious performance and movement performance of movable parts (mechanical devices)," setting value 5 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 5, which specifies "period drama style performance," and setting value 6 is assigned to demo performance setting pattern 6, which specifies "period drama style performance and movable parts (mechanical devices)" (the manner in which the content of the demo performance can be changed may be described as "Modification by common hardware configuration (3)"). Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510, which receives setting change commands from the main control MPU 1310a, can perform demonstrations using demo animations (demo animation setting patterns) corresponding to the setting values included in the setting change commands. The content of these demo animations can be varied depending on how the settings are changed.

Furthermore, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows setting multiple default volume levels, which are adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the volume adjustment switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1, which specifies "volume 1", is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2, which specifies "volume 2", is assigned as setting value 2, volume setting pattern 3, which specifies "volume 3", is assigned as setting value 3, volume setting pattern 4, which specifies "volume 4", is assigned as setting value 4, volume setting pattern 5, which specifies "volume 5", is assigned as setting value 5, and volume setting pattern 6, which specifies "volume 6", is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the default volume can be changed may be described as "Modified example using common hardware configuration (4)"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default volume with a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Furthermore, the default volume for "Volume 1," assigned to setting value 1, may be set so that when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of decreasing the volume (the opposite direction to increasing the volume) and reaches the minimum volume end, the sound is muted, or it may be set to a volume that can be perceived when standing still in front of the pachinko machine. Similarly, the default volume for "Volume 6," assigned to setting value 6, may be set to the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction of increasing the volume (the opposite direction to decreasing the volume) and reaches the maximum volume end, or it may be set to a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (for example, 85%). This method of changing the default volume allows for variations in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, for example, it can be used as a setting value to set multiple volume levels for error notification sounds in error announcements such as various malfunctions, cheating, and errors. The various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it). While setting the volume to maximum makes it easier for staff at the amusement hall to notice a pachinko machine emitting an error notification sound, it may be irritating to players playing on other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is a need for a system that allows adjustment of the volume of the various error notification sounds. In this case, error alarm volume setting pattern 1 is assigned, specifying "error alarm volume 1" as setting value 1; error alarm volume setting pattern 2 is assigned, specifying "error alarm volume 2" as setting value 2; error alarm volume setting pattern 3 is assigned, specifying "error alarm volume 3" as setting value 3; error alarm volume setting pattern 4 is assigned, specifying "volume 4" as setting value 4; error alarm volume setting pattern 5 is assigned, specifying "error alarm volume 5" as setting value 5; and error alarm volume setting pattern 6 is assigned, specifying "error alarm volume 6 (maximum volume)" as setting value 6 (the manner in which the error alarm volume can be changed may be described as "Modification by common hardware configuration (5)"). The error notification sound volume is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that does not silence the sound, and is loud enough to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine emitting the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, and is loud enough to be heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine emitting the error notification sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the system to emit the error notification sound at a volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. This method of changing the error notification sound volume allows for variations in the volume of the error notification sound during error warnings.

Furthermore, it can be used as a setting value to set multiple default brightness levels for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light-emitting element controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1, specifying "Brightness 1," is assigned as setting value 1; default brightness setting pattern 2, specifying "Brightness 2," is assigned as setting value 2; default brightness setting pattern 3, specifying "Brightness 3," is assigned as setting value 3; default brightness setting pattern 4, specifying "Brightness 4," is assigned as setting value 4; default brightness setting pattern 5, specifying "Brightness 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and default brightness setting pattern 6, specifying "Brightness 6," is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the default brightness setting may be described as "Modified example using common hardware configuration (6)"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting element by repeatedly performing the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby controlling the lighting, blinking, and gradation of the light-emitting element. The peripheral control board 1510, upon receiving a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element it controls based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, thereby enabling functions such as lighting, blinking, and gradation of the light-emitting element. The default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs can be varied depending on the configuration of this default brightness setting.

Furthermore, for example, it can be used as a setting value to set multiple brightness levels for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in error notification for various malfunctions, tampering, and errors. For lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, error notification brightness setting pattern 1 is assigned as setting value 1, specifying "error notification brightness 1"; error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned as setting value 2, specifying "error notification brightness 2"; error notification brightness setting pattern 3 is assigned as setting value 3, specifying "error notification brightness 3"; error notification brightness setting pattern 4 is assigned as setting value 4, specifying "error notification brightness 4"; error notification brightness setting pattern 5 is assigned as setting value 5, specifying "error notification brightness 5"; and error notification brightness setting pattern 6 is assigned as setting value 6, specifying "error notification brightness 6 (maximum brightness)" (the manner of setting changes for the brightness of light-emitting elements in error notification may be described as "Modified example using common hardware configuration (7)"). The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (the lamp does not turn off, but its brightness is low enough that an error notification can be recognized when standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting element in the error notification by repeatedly performing the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later, thereby controlling the illumination, blinking, and gradation of the light-emitting element. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting element it controls based on the error notification brightness (error notification brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, thereby controlling the illumination, blinking, and gradation of the light-emitting element. This method of changing the brightness of the light-emitting element in the error notification allows for variations in the brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Furthermore, the various setting values assigned to the modified examples (1) to (7) using the common hardware configuration described above are displayed on the setting display unit 1310g when the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation and display processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a, as described later. However, they may also be displayed on the setting display unit 1310g at all times from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (this method of displaying the setting values may be referred to as "Modified Example (8) using the Common Hardware Configuration").

Furthermore, one of the variations (1) to (8) described above, based on the common hardware configuration, may be appropriately selected and adopted as the variation (30) of the decision key described above.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions for allowing the setting value to be changed as described above required that, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be open to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered back on, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are met, the main control MPU 1310a will perform a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceed with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. In other words, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions described above are met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered back on, in either case, the main control MPU 1310a will clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceed with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Therefore, as a predetermined condition for permitting setting value changes as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. In addition, the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f may also be pressed (this may be described as a "modified example of the predetermined condition for permitting setting value changes").

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions for permitting the display of the set value described above required that, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 be open to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the socket of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f not be operated. Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing when a modified version of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met, it has not yet performed the interrupt permission setting, so it does not perform the main control timer interrupt processing. Instead, it reads the detection signal from the main frame open switch to detect the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, causing the setting key cylinder to rotate 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby performing the first ON operation and turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. However, it does not store these signals as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, as described later. Therefore, when a modified version of the predetermined set value display permission condition is met and the set value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads the detection signal from the main frame release switch for detecting the release of the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the modified version of the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the modified version of the predetermined setting value display permission condition described above, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby assuming that the setting key is ON, the RAM clear switch 1310f When the press operation part is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on processing described later, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. On the other hand, when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this configuration, once the main control MPU 1310a starts the game, the setting value confirmation display process is never performed. In other words, once the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a, in the ball counting process of the main control side power-on processing described later, counts the number of game balls B collected by the out ball passage 663 of the main frame 4 via the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5, and outputs the count to the base monitor 1310h in the port output processing of the main control side power-on processing described later, displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display unit 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h as described above (this may be described as "a modified method of using the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current settings during the period from power restoration to the start of gameplay by enabling interrupts, etc. Furthermore, once gameplay begins after power restoration and enabling interrupts, it can display the number of game balls B collected by the out-out port 1008 (out-ball passage 663 of the main frame 4). Therefore, the need for a setting display unit 1310g is eliminated, contributing to cost reduction.

Furthermore, one of the following modifications—the modified conditions for allowing changes to predetermined settings, the modified conditions for allowing display of predetermined settings, and the modified method for using the base monitor—may be appropriately selected and adopted as the modified version (30) of the decision key described above.

Furthermore, one of the following modifications—the modified conditions for allowing changes to predetermined settings, the modified conditions for allowing display of predetermined settings, and the modified method for using the base monitor—may be appropriately selected and adopted in the modified versions (1) to (8) using the common hardware configuration described above.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 129, etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Based on control signals from the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs to display the game status, normal lottery results, special lottery results, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a regular symbol indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the results of the regular lottery drawn when game balls B are received into gate 2003, and a regular hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of hold balls related to the receipt of game balls B into gate 2003.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the first special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first start port 2002; a first special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved game balls related to the acceptance of game ball B into the first start port 2002; a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the second special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second start port 2004; and a second special reserved number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved game balls related to the acceptance of game ball B into the second start port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 includes a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 when the result of the first or second special lottery is "win," etc.

This function display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, symbols, etc., by appropriately lighting, extinguishing, and flashing the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral Control Units]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 132 and 136, etc. The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted behind the performance display device 1600, which is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 169) that controls the performances presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1505 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light effects, sound effects, and movable effects, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (See Figure 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The performance display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136, etc. The performance display device 1600 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back wall of the back box 3010, approximately in the center. When the game board 5 is assembled, the performance display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center feature 2500.

The display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display with a white LED backlight, and is mounted in a vertical orientation. The display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and videos.

The display device 1600 comprises a single left fixing piece 1601 protruding to the left from its left side, and two right fixing pieces 1602 protruding to the right from its right side. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 by inserting the two right fixing pieces 1602 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the right inner circumferential surface within the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 (described later) from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, then moving the left fixing piece 1601 forward, inserting the left fixing piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and sliding the locking mechanism upward in a rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. Figure 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit in the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit in the game board as seen from the rear. Figure 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game balls on the right side of the front unit. Figure 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in Figure 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a part of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this case) of general prize slots 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open and capable of receiving game balls B at a different location within the game area 5a from the plurality of general prize slots 2001, a gate 2003 provided at a predetermined location within the game area 5a for detecting the passage of game balls B, a second start slot 2004 that can receive game balls B according to the result of a normal lottery drawn when game balls B pass through the gate 2003, and the first start slot 200 The system includes: a large prize slot 2005 that allows the acceptance of game ball B according to the result of the first or second special lottery, which is determined by the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting slot 2004; a special prize slot 2006 located at a different position from the large prize slot 2005, which allows the acceptance of game ball B according to the result of the first or second special lottery, which is determined by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004; and a V prize slot 2007 that provides an opportunity for acceptance of game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize slot 2006.

The multiple (four in this case) general prize entry points 2001 are arranged such that three are located to the left of the center in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is located above the center in the vertical direction in the right part of the game area 5a. The first start entry point 2002 is located directly above the lowest exit entry point 1008 in the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. The gate 2003 is located near the right edge of the game area 5a in a front view, at a height of approximately 3/4 of the way up from the bottom in the vertical direction. The second start entry point 2004 is located in the lower right corner of the game area 5a, at a height slightly higher than the leftmost general prize entry point 2001. The large prize entry point 2005 is located between the first start entry point 2002 and the second start entry point 2004. The special prize entry point 2006 is located above the second start entry point 2004 and directly below the rightmost general prize entry point 2001. The V-prize entry point 2007 is located at the height between the prize entry point 2006 and the second start entry point 2004, behind the game panel 1100.

The first sub-out port 2021 is located below the second start port 2004, and the second sub-out port 2022 is located to the right of the general prize port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 comprises: a start-up unit 2100 mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, having a first start-up opening 2002; a side unit 2200 provided to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, along the inner rail 1002, having three general prize-winning openings 2001; a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above the left of the side unit 2200 in a front view; a first attacker unit 2400 provided to the right of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, at the lower right corner of the game area 5a in a front view, having a second start-up opening 2004, a large prize-winning opening 2005, and a first sub-out opening 2021; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 provided above the start-up unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the approximate center in a front view of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second attacker unit 2600 located to the right of the center prize mechanism 2500 and above the first attacker unit 2400, having a prize entry opening 2006; a side right-center unit 2700 located above the second attacker unit 2600, having one general prize entry opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800 located above the side right-center unit 2700, having a gate 2003.

[5-8a. Starter Unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140, etc. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that can accept only one game ball B.

The starter unit 2100, when attached to the game panel 1100, causes the first starter opening 2002 to protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100 and open upwards, positioned directly below the center of the center mechanism 2500 in the left-right direction.

The starting port unit 2100, while attached to the game panel 1100, guides the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and transfers it to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side Unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140, etc. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start unit 2100 within the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general prize slots 2001 that are open to receive game balls B at all times. The three general prize slots 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002. The two general prize slots 2001 on the right open upwards, and the general prize slot 2001 on the left opens to the upper left.

When assembled to the game board 5, the side unit 2200 has three general prize slots 2001 that protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 guides the game balls B received in the general prize slots 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and can transfer them to the first discharge passage 3181 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described, mainly with reference to Figure 140, etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to the left of the side unit 2200 and in contact with the inner rail 1002 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf section 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When assembled to the game board 5, the upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf section 2301 that protrudes forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game balls B, which have flowed down the left side of the center mechanism 2500, to the right side, below the center mechanism 2500, via the shelf section 2301.

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
Next, the first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145, etc. The first attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located to the right of the start opening unit 2100, which is in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, within the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening 2005 (see Figure 144, etc.).

In a front view, the first attacker unit 2400 has a second start port 2004 located slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction, a large prize port 2005 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second start port 2004, and a first sub-out port 2021 located below the second start port 2004 and lower than the large prize port 2005.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start-up sensor 2401 for detecting game balls B received into the second start-up opening 2004, a large prize-winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game balls B received into the large prize-winning opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting fraudulent magnetism (see Figure 169, etc.). Two large prize-winning opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 includes a second start gate door 2411 capable of guiding game ball B to the second start gate 2004, a start gate solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start gate door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery determined by the passage of game ball B through gate 2003, a large prize gate door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large prize gate 2005, and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize gate door 2413 according to the result of a first special lottery determined by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004, according to the result of a second special lottery.

As shown in Figure 144, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first shelf section 2421 that extends downward to the left from near the upper right corner in a front view, and a second shelf section 2422 that extends shorter than the first shelf section 2421, starting from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf section 2421 and extending downward to the left, with a gap slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and forming a second start opening 2004 between it and the first shelf section 2421. The machine also includes a third shelf section 2423 that extends to the left of the second shelf section 2422, starting from a position lower than the diameter of the game ball B and sloping downwards to the left, and a fourth shelf section 2424 that extends from the left end of the third shelf section 2423, at a distance of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B, starting from a position lower than the third shelf section 2423 and sloping downwards to the left, forming a large prize opening 2005 between it and the third shelf section 2423.

The right end of the first shelf section 2421 is slightly longer to the left than the diameter of the game ball B, from the right side of the first attacker unit 2400. The first shelf section 2421, the second shelf section 2422, and the third shelf section 2423 are all inclined at the same angle, while the fourth shelf section 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf section 2421, etc.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 includes a first vertical wall section 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf section 2421, a second vertical wall section 2426 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf section 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the first vertical wall section 2425, and a third vertical wall section 242 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf section 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first vertical wall section 2425. It includes 7, a fourth vertical wall section 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the third shelf section 2423 to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth vertical wall section 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf section 2423, a sixth vertical wall section 2430 extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424, and a seventh vertical wall section 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf section 2424.

The fifth vertical wall section 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf section 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf section 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, sloping downward to the left, and further extends downward to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400. Similarly, the sixth vertical wall section 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf section 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, sloping downward to the right, and further extends downward to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400. The left-right distance between the lower parts of the fifth vertical wall section 2429 and the sixth vertical wall section 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of the game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall section 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall section 2425, the second vertical wall section 2426, and the third vertical wall section 2427, and a second horizontal wall section 2433 that slopes downward to the left from a position lower than the lower end of the first vertical wall section 2425 on the right side of the first attacker unit 2400, leaving a gap between it and the first horizontal wall section 2432 that allows game balls B to pass through, and then slopes upward towards the middle of the fourth vertical wall section 2428 on the left. The second horizontal wall section 2433 is formed so that the lowest point is at the portion of the first sub-out opening 2021 below the second start opening 2004.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a third horizontal wall section 2434 that extends from near the lower parts of the fifth vertical wall section 2429 and the sixth vertical wall section 2430, respectively, in a direction approaching each other, to near the center between the fifth vertical wall section 2429 and the sixth vertical wall section 2430, and a partition section 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall sections 2434 and extends upward.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 extends in a stepped manner along its upper edge, sloping downwards to the left, and has an upper shelf section 2436 provided between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423, with a spacing that allows game balls B to circulate. The right end of the upper shelf section 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf section 2421, and the left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf section 2424. Also, the upper shelf section 2436 slopes downwards to the right near its right end.

Furthermore, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 has multiple triangular contact points protruding into the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, where the game balls B can flow to the left. These contact points are arranged alternately from the front and rear walls forming the space, in a staggered manner in the left-right direction. When the large prize opening 2005 is closed, these contact points cause the game balls B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag pattern in the front-back direction.

The second start port door 2411 is designed to move in the front-rear direction. When the start port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second start port door 2411 moves forward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412, closing the second start port 2004. When the start port solenoid 2412 is energized, the second start port door 2411 moves backward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412, opening the second start port 2004.

The starter solenoid 2412, when not energized, has its plunger protruding forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

The large prize opening door 2413 is a long, flat plate that moves back and forth. The large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring, moving the large prize opening door 2413 forward and closing the large prize opening 2005. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 retracts against the biasing force of the spring, moving the large prize opening door 2413 backward and opening the large prize opening 2005.

The attacker solenoid 2414, when not energized, has its plunger protruding forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

In the normal state, the first attacker unit 2400 has its start port solenoid 2412 and attacker solenoid 2414 both de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 also protrudes forward. In this state, the second start port door 2411 is located above the second start port 2004, preventing the acceptance of game balls B into the second start port 2004. In other words, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411 (see Figures 144 and 145).

Furthermore, in the normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 also protrudes forward. In this state, the large prize opening door 2413 is located above the large prize opening 2005, making it impossible to receive game balls B into the large prize opening 2005. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when a game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421, the inclination of the first shelf 2421 causes the game ball B to roll to the left, then rolls along the upper surface of the second start door 2411 and the second shelf 2422, before being released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize door 2413, depending on its momentum, and rolls to the left due to their inclinations. Furthermore, if the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 hits the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces back to the right, it may enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423.

At this time, the game ball B, rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 that is closing the large prize opening 2005, alternately strikes against multiple contact points provided in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, causing it to roll to the left in a zigzag pattern in the front-to-back direction. After rolling to the left on the large prize opening door 2413, the game ball B rolls along the fourth shelf 2424 and is then released from its left end to the outside of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when a game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf section 2421, it passes to the right of the first vertical wall section 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433, and, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall section 2433, rolls to the left and enters the first sub-out opening 2021. Also, when a game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf section 2422 and the third shelf section 2423, it passes between the third vertical wall section 2427 and the fourth vertical wall section 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall section 2433, and, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall section 2433, rolls to the right and enters the first sub-out opening 2021.

The game balls B that enter the first sub-outlet 2021 are not returned to the game area 5a, but are instead passed to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the lower front-rear performance unit 3160 in the front-rear performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the lower circuit board holder 1200. In this first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B that flow along the right side of the first shelf 2421 and the game balls B that pass through the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 are both configured to enter the first sub-outlet 2021, effectively providing two first sub-outlet 2021s.

In this normal state, when the game ball B passes through gate 2003, the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) according to the result of the normal lottery. Against the biasing force of the spring, the plunger retracts, and the second start port door 2411 moves backward. As the second start port door 2411 moves backward, the upper part of the second start port 2004 becomes open, allowing the game ball B to be received into the second start port 2004. In other words, the second start port 2004 becomes open.

When the second start port 2004 is open, a game ball B is received into the second start port 2004, flows down between the second vertical wall 2426 and the third vertical wall 2427, is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, and is then discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received into the second start port 2004 and discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is then passed to the third discharge passage 3183 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the lower circuit board holder 1200.

On the other hand, under normal conditions, when a game ball B is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the result of the special lottery (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is determined, the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), causing the plunger to retract against the biasing force of the spring, and the large prize opening door 2413 to move backward. As the large prize opening door 2413 moves backward, the large prize opening 2005 opens upward, making it possible to receive game ball B into the large prize opening 2005. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 becomes open.

When the large prize opening 2005 is open, if a game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005, it passes between the fifth vertical wall section 2429 and the sixth vertical wall section 2430, then between the fifth vertical wall section 2429 and the partition section 2435, or between the sixth vertical wall section 2430 and the partition section 2435, is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402, falls onto the third horizontal wall section 2434, and is discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400. The game ball B received into the large prize opening 2005 and discharged rearward from the first attacker unit 2400 is then passed to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the lower circuit board holder 1200.

Thus, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game balls B received in the large prize opening 2005 are divided into two by the partition 2435, and each is detected by a different large prize opening sensor 2402 before being released to the rear. This prevents the game balls B from becoming stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large prize opening sensor 2402, and allows for the reception of a large number of game balls B in a short time.

[5-8e. Center piece]
Next, the center feature 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 141. Figure 141(a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage portion of the center feature, as seen from the front, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of the front member on the front side of the lower right guide passage of the center feature, as seen from the right, after being cut in half horizontally. The center feature 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, above the start entrance unit 2100, slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center feature 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame, allowing the performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and the various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be seen from the front.

The frame-shaped center component 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100 along its entire circumference, preventing game balls B that have been played into the game area 5a from entering the frame.

The center component 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as the center frame) extending in the front-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and contacting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled on the game board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, the peripheral wall portion 2501 is shaped to follow the inner circumference of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 into which the center component 2500 is inserted. When assembled on the game board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 prevents game balls B from entering the inside of the frame from the outside of the center component 2500.

The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 are thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

The support sections 2503 are partially and in multiple locations on the inner circumference of the peripheral wall section 2501. Furthermore, the support sections 2503 are provided on the non-protruding parts of the flange section 2502 on the peripheral wall section 2501, reinforcing the peripheral wall section 2501. The protruding edges of the support sections 2503 are formed to conform to the front shape of the peripheral wall section 2501, or to be straight, making the support sections 2503 inconspicuous. The amount of protrusion from the peripheral wall section 2501 of the support sections 2503 is kept within the range of the thickness of the support section 2503 to the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), thus providing reinforcement while remaining inconspicuous to the player.

Furthermore, the center mechanism 2500 is equipped with a transparent, flat closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center mechanism 2500 and entering the rear (rear unit 3000).

The center mechanism 2500 includes a warp entrance 2511 located on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 in a front view, in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), which is open to allow game balls B from within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2512 that is open within the frame behind the front of the game panel 1100, allowing game balls B that have entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released; a stage 2513 that allows game balls B released from the warp exit 2512 to roll left and right before being released into the game area 5a; and a stage cover 2515 that covers the top of the stage 2513 (see Figure 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 is intended to prevent game balls B from entering the center mechanism 2500 from outside the frame by bouncing the game balls B that have bounced on the stage 2513 back towards the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center mechanism 2500 is curved with a recessed central section in the left-right direction. It is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. That is, when the center mechanism 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the approximately center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than both sides, creating a wave-like (W-shaped) form. The stage 2513 has a slightly higher central section (central release section 2513a) and the lowest sections on both sides (side release sections 2513b) that slope downwards towards the front. These sections allow game balls B to be released into the game area 5a.

When the center mechanism 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised central part (central release section 2513a) of the stage 2513 is positioned directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100. As a result, when game balls B are released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513, they are received by the first start opening 2002 with a very high probability.

Furthermore, the center component 2500 is located in the upper right corner and is equipped with a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which game balls B can pass. When assembled on the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the upper right corner end of the center component 2500) is approximately in contact with the inner periphery of the game area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the stopper portion 1006 of the front component 1000). This ensures that game balls B played into the upper right side of the center component 2500 always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The guide passage group 2520 has a vertical length that is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each of these guide passages 2520 is formed in a groove shape that opens forward, allowing the game balls B circulating inside to be clearly visible from the front.

The guide passage group 2520 is located outside the peripheral wall 2501 of the center component 2500 and consists of a first guide passage 2521, which is separated from the peripheral wall 2501, and a second guide passage 2522, which extends to the right of the first guide passage 2521 along the peripheral wall 2501. The entrances to the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are separated to the left and right. The exits to the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent to each other to the left and right, and open diagonally downward to the right, following the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 with the center component 2500 assembled on the game board 5. Furthermore, the right end of the entrance to the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the stopper portion 1006 of the previous component 1000, and is designed so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the stopper portion 1006 enter the first guide passage 2521.

Furthermore, the center mechanism 2500 protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and is equipped with a lower right guide passage 2530 that guides the game ball B from above to the right and then releases it downwards. This lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upwards across the width of the front in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally downwards to the left, with a width equivalent to one game ball B.

This lower right guide passage 2530, when assembled on the game board 5, has its right end nearly touching the right rail 1005 and is located between the first attacker unit 2400 and the second attacker unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacker unit 2600, the right-center side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are positioned between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

To further describe the center component 2500, it comprises a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc.; a transparent, flat front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 to close the front side of the lower right guide passage 2530; and a lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 attached to the front surface of the front member 2531, with a predetermined decoration printed on it (see Figure 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange portion 2540a that forms part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner in a front view and extends flat to the right; a guide passage wall 2540b that extends shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a along the lower edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, from the part of the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 that is in front of the flange portion 2502, so that the right end is lower; a flat vertical wall portion 2540c that extends vertically along the right edge near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and extends forward to the same position as the front of the guide passage wall 2540b; and a left-side guide portion 2540d that is continuous with the lower end edge of the vertical wall portion 2540c, extends diagonally to the lower left, and then extends diagonally to the lower right and bends. A gap is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall portion 2540c, allowing one game ball B to pass through.

The center base plate 2540 guides the game ball B, which has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b, to the right via the guide passage wall 2540b, then allows it to flow downwards between the guide passage wall 2540b and the vertical wall section 2540c, and finally releases it diagonally to the lower left via the leftward guide section 2540d. The center base plate 2540, along with the guide passage flange section 2540a, guide passage wall 2540b, vertical wall section 2540c, and leftward guide section 2540d, constitutes almost the entire lower right guide passage 2530.

The front member 2531 extends horizontally from the same position as the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right end edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a. Its upper end edge is located above the upper end edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, while its lower end edge is located below the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 has an adhesive recess 2531a that is recessed from the front to the rear, following the outer circumference; a separation hole 2531b that penetrates from front to back in the adhesive recess 2531a at a point that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view; and a plurality of mounting bosses 2531c that protrude cylindrically from the rear surface and are used for attachment to the center base plate 2540.

The adhesive recess 2531a is recessed to the rearward side, deeper than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) (see Figure 141(b)). In the adhesive recess 2531a, the left edge portion and the portion near the left edge on the upper edge are set as contact surfaces for attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a circular hole with a circular inner shape. When assembled with the center component 2500, the front of this separation hole 2531b is closed by the right-lower guide passage decorative sticker 2532 attached to the adhesive recess 2531a, and the rear is closed by the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, thus creating a closed space within the separation hole 2531b.

In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the separation hole 2531b is within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing sufficient pressure on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532. If the separation hole 2531b is larger than this, bending may occur at the separation hole 2531b portion of the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, potentially detracting from its appearance.

According to the center component 2500 of this embodiment, if the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 from rear to front. This allows the edge of the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 to peel forward, and the peeled portion can be easily removed by the worker from the attachment recess 2531a, allowing the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 to be reattached.

Furthermore, by separating the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540, and passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531, and pressing the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 from the rear with its tip, the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 can be easily removed from the adhesive recess 2531a. This makes the replacement of the right-lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 when changing models much easier.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the decorative seal 2532 for the lower right guide passage can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to the adhesive recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be concealed from the front. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 2531b, makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, and thus makes it harder for them to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 2531b.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, which is assembled to the rear of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 is attached, closes the separation hole 2531b from the rear. Because it does not have a hole that penetrates to the rear like conventional pachinko machines, it prevents wire-like fraudulent tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted through this hole into the game board 5 or the area where the game balls B flow, thus preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 closes the separation hole 2531b from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b from the front, penetrating the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, the guide passage wall 2540b prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the area where the game balls B flow from the front through the separation hole 2531b, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool penetrating the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 leaves a mark on it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activity.

Furthermore, in the center component 2500 of this embodiment, since a support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501, the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the outer edge of the center component 2500 in the area where the support portion 2503 is provided. This allows the area inside the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center component 2500) to be relatively wider, making the display images on the rear display device 1600 and the decorations on the back unit 3000 more visible through the frame of the center component 2500.

Furthermore, since a support portion 2503 is provided inwardly protruding from the peripheral wall portion 2501 in the area where the flange portion 2502 is not provided, the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501 can be reinforced. This prevents deformation or damage to the peripheral wall portion 2501 even if the game ball B comes into contact with the outside of the area where the support portion 2503 is provided. Additionally, since the strength of the center component 2500 can be increased by the support portion 2503, the center component 2500 can be demolded from the injection mold without deformation.

Furthermore, because the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes briefly from the inner circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is partially provided around the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501, it is possible to reduce the obstruction of visibility of the decorative elements of the rear unit 3000 and the display images of the display device 1600, which are located at the rear of the support portion 2503.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there is a portion where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. Therefore, in the area of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) near the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This allows the game area within the game area 5a to be widened as much as possible by the multiple obstacle nails N, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy the game as intended.

Furthermore, by making the peripheral wall portion 2501 similar in shape to the inner circumference of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and by making the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, while providing the support portion 2503 on approximately the same plane as the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the support portion 2503 can be made less conspicuous to the player, and the center mechanism 2500 can be made to appear as if it is integrated with the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, because the support section 2503 is provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the center component 2500, the area within the frame of the center component 2500 can be made wider compared to the case where the support section 2503 is provided around the entire circumference, making the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear more visible. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) partitioned by the peripheral wall section 2501 (center frame) of the center component 2500 appear larger, the support section 2503 may be provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall section 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support section 2503 extends to an extent that does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, a single separation hole 2531b is shown in the front member 2531. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration, and multiple separation holes 2531b may be provided in locations that coincide with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a location on the center base plate 2540 that is inside the curved leftward guide portion 2540d (the rightward side in a front view). If the separation hole 2531b is provided in this location, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b will not be directly closed by the center base plate 2540, but since the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the game panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b, the hole continuous with the separation hole 2531b will not penetrate to the rear of the game board 5, thus achieving the same effects as described above. In this case, even if an illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole 2531b from the front, penetrating the right lower guide passage decorative seal 2532, the leftward guide portion 2540d can prevent the tip of the illegal tool from entering the area where the game balls B flow, such as the right lower guide passage 2530. Furthermore, in this case, since the right side of the left guide section 2540d is open, a J-shaped linear tool can be used to insert the tool into the separation hole 2531b from the rear, even while the front member 2531 is still assembled, allowing the right lower guide passage decorative seal 2532 to be removed.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The second attacker unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located to the right of the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center mechanism 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the vertical center of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a mechanism entry opening 2006 that can be opened and closed toward the left.

The second attacker unit 2600 includes a prize entry sensor 2601 for detecting game balls B received into the prize entry opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 (see Figure 146) for detecting irrational magnetic fields acting near the prize entry opening 2006. The second attacker unit 2600 also includes a prize entry door 2611 for opening and closing the prize entry opening 2006, a prize entry solenoid 2612 for moving the prize entry door 2611 to open and close the prize entry opening 2006, a transmission member (not shown) for transmitting the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the prize entry solenoid 2612 to move the prize entry door 2611, and a guide passage 2613 for guiding the game balls B received into the prize entry opening 2006 and releasing them to the rear.

The second attacker unit 2600 has a prize entry opening 2006 that is positioned slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction and opens towards the left. A prize entry door 2611 is provided to close the prize entry opening 2006 from the left.

The prize entry door 2611 is formed in a so-called wing shape, consisting of a semicircular lower edge that bulges downward, a right edge that extends linearly upward from the right end of the lower edge, and an arc-shaped left edge that bulges to the left from the upper end of the right edge and is attached to the left side of the lower edge. The prize entry door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation axis 2611a extending in the front-rear direction with the center of the semicircular lower edge as its axis, and a link pin (not shown in the illustration) that protrudes cylindrically backward from a position away from the rotation axis. The lower rotation axis of the prize entry door 2611 is rotatably mounted so that the upper end moves to the left.

The prize entry solenoid 2612, although not shown in detail, is mounted with its plunger protruding downwards. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the prize entry solenoid 2612, and a slit that penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends in the left-to-right direction, into which the link pin of the prize entry door 2611 is slidably inserted. It is mounted to be slidable in the vertical direction.

When assembled on the game board 5, the second attacker unit 2600 is positioned so that its right edge is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, forming a space through which the game balls B can flow between the prize entry opening 2006 and the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center prize component 2500. Furthermore, when assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface of the second attacker unit 2600, including the rear end of the guide passage 2613, protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.

In the normal state, the solenoid 2612 for the prize entry opening of the second attacker unit 2600 is de-energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the prize entry opening door 2611 is upright, and the prize entry opening 2006 is closed by the prize entry opening door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, the game ball B cannot be received into the prize entry opening 2006.

In this normal state, when a game ball B is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the result of the special lottery (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is determined, the prize entry port solenoid 2612 is energized (ON). This causes the transmission member to move upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the prize entry port door 2611, which is inserted into the slit of the transmission member, is pulled upward and slides within the slit, causing the prize entry port door 2611 to rotate counterclockwise around the rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the prize entry door 2611 moves to the left, opening the prize entry opening 2006 to the left, and the right end of the prize entry door 2611 becomes tilted downwards. In other words, the prize entry opening 2006 becomes open. In this state, when a game ball B that has flowed down comes into contact with the prize entry door 2611, it rolls to the right due to the tilt and is received into the prize entry opening 2006. After the game ball B received into the prize entry opening 2006 is detected by the prize entry sensor 2601, it is guided by the guide passage 2613 and released to the rear. The game balls B released from the guide passage 2613 towards the rear are passed to the distribution passage 3158 of the front-front decorative unit 3140 in the front-rear display unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After being distributed to either the V-prize entry point 2007 or the losing entry point 2008, they are discharged onto the lower circuit board holder 1200 via the lower-rear display unit 3160.

[5-8g. Right-center side unit]
Next, the right-center side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. The right-center side unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is positioned directly above the second attacker unit 2600 within the game area 5a and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. This right-center side unit 2700 is equipped with one general prize entry opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

The right-center side unit 2700 has a general prize entry opening 2001 that is always open upwards with a width equivalent to one game ball B in the left-right direction, and a second sub-out opening 2022 that is always open upwards with a width equivalent to two game balls B in the left-right direction, adjacent to the right side of the general prize entry opening 2001.

Furthermore, the right-center side unit 2700 has a first guide passage 2701 that guides the game ball B received in the general prize entry opening 2001 to the rear, and a second guide passage 2702 that guides the game ball B received in the second sub-out opening 2022 to the rear. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general prize entry opening 2001, then bending to the right and then bending further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends downward from the second sub-out opening 2022 than the first guide passage 2701, and then bends rearward. The exits of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 are aligned vertically.

In this side-right-center unit 2700, when assembled to the game board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 each protrude further rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 on the game panel 1100.

Furthermore, when assembled to the game board 5, the right-center side unit 2700 has its right end approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and its lower end approximately in contact with the upper end of the second attacker unit 2600. A space for the game balls B to flow is formed between its left end and the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center mechanism 2500. In this right-center side unit 2700, the general prize entry opening 2001 opens upward slightly to the left of the mechanism prize entry opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 opens upward over approximately the entire area between the general prize entry opening 2001 and the right rail 1005 (see Figure 144).

The side right-center unit 2700 guides the game ball B received in the general prize entry opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the first guidance passage 2701, and then passes it to the first rear guidance passage 3156 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 located at the rear. The game ball B that has been passed to the first rear guidance passage 3156 is detected by the general prize entry opening sensor 3001 and then discharged onto the lower circuit board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160. Furthermore, the side right-center unit 2700 guides the game balls B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 to the rear of the panel board 1110 via the second guidance passage 2702, and then passes them to the second rear guidance passage 3157 of the rear-front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear-front display unit 3100 of the rear-front unit 3000 located at the rear. The game balls B passed to the second rear guidance passage 3157 are then discharged onto the lower circuit board holder 1200 via the rear-front lower display unit 3160.

[5-8h. Gate Members]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. Figure 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member from the rear. Figure 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is positioned within the game area 5a, between the guide passage group 2520 of the center mechanism 2500 and the side right-center unit 2700, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate member 2800 includes a gate 2003 where a normal lottery result is conducted, opening and closing the second start opening 2004 upon passage of a game ball B, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting when a game ball B has passed through gate 2003. The detection hole in the gate sensor 2801 for detecting the game ball B is designated as gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes diagonally downward to the left from near the right end of its lower surface. The guide piece 2802 is for guiding the game ball B, which has passed through the gate 2003, downward to the left. When assembled on the game board 5, the guide piece 2802 is inclined such that its extension passes near the left end of the general prize entry opening 2001 in the side right-center unit 2700.

The gate member 2800, when assembled to the game board 5, is positioned approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000 and the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center component 2500, forming gaps on both the left and right outer sides through which game balls B can pass. This gate member 2800 is positioned slightly to the left of directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center component 2500, and slightly to the right of directly above the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right-center unit 2700.

To further describe the gate member 2800, it comprises a gate body 2810 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holding the gate sensor 2801, and a gate seal 2811 attached to the front surface of the gate body 2810 and printed with a predetermined decoration. The gate body 2810 is made of transparent material.

The gate body 2810 comprises a long, flat front plate portion 2810a, a horizontally elongated, roughly rectangular adhesive recess 2810b on the front surface of the front plate portion 2810a that is recessed towards the rear, an anti-misapplication portion 2810c provided in the upper left corner of the adhesive recess 2810b, a separation hole 2810d that penetrates the front plate portion 2810a from front to back near the right end of the adhesive recess 2810b, a pair of arm portions 2810e extending rearward from both the left and right edges of the front plate portion 2810a, and flat flange portions 2810f extending outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arm portions 2810e and connected to each other at a portion below the front plate portion 2810a.

The pair of arm portions 2810e have their opposing surfaces separated by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. The flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 with its rear surface in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Furthermore, the gate body 2810 includes a recessed groove 2810g for housing the gate sensor 2801, which is recessed at a certain height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and on each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e; a rear extension portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e so as to extend the arm portion 2810e and the housing groove 2810g; and a locking portion 2810i extending rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e, further rearward than the rear extension portion 2810h, with its rear end bent to the left, for locking the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g.

Furthermore, the gate body 2810 is provided with a projection 2810j that protrudes into the housing groove 2810g at the point where the front plate portion 2810a and the left arm portion 2810e intersect. The projection 2810j is formed in a shape corresponding to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. The gate body 2810 also includes a guide piece 2802 that extends downward from the lower surface of the right arm portion 2810e.

The adhesive recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed to the rearward side, deeper than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) (see Figure 143(b)). The misapplication prevention portion 2810c is formed in a C-shaped chamfer that is larger than the chamfers of the other corners of the adhesive recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, since the gate seal 2811 (adhesion recess 2810b) is a long rectangle, it is difficult to determine the top and bottom orientation of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that it will be applied upside down. However, the misapplication prevention portion 2810c makes it possible to specify the application orientation of the gate seal 2811, and the gate seal 2811 can be applied in the correct orientation (the orientation in which the notch portion 2811a of the gate seal 2811 aligns with the misapplication prevention portion 2810c). Furthermore, if the gate seal 2811 is attempted to be applied to the application recess 2810b upside down, the misapplication prevention unit 2810c will cause a portion of the gate seal 2811 to protrude from the application recess 2810b, thereby alerting the worker to the misapplication of the gate seal 2811.

In this adhesive recess 2810b, the left edge portion and the diagonal portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c are set as contact surfaces for attaching the gate seal 2811. This ensures clearance for attaching the gate seal 2811 not only in the vertical and horizontal directions, but also vertically in the direction of the diagonally extending portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c. In other words, the effective clearance directions for attaching the gate seal 2811 are provided in three directions: vertical, horizontal, and diagonal, making the application process easier (see Figure 207(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular corner hole extending vertically. When assembled to the gate member 2800, the front of this separation hole 2810d is closed by the gate seal 2811 attached to the adhesive recess 2810b, and the rear is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g, thus creating a closed space within the separation hole 2810d.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 2810d has a long side and short side length within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing sufficient pressure on the gate seal 2811. If the separation hole 2810d is larger than this, bending may occur at the separation hole 2531b portion of the gate seal 2811, potentially detracting from the appearance of the gate seal 2811.

The inner circumferential surface on the right side of the separation hole 2810d is flush with the bottom surface (the left-facing surface) of the receiving groove 2810g formed in the right arm portion 2810e. Furthermore, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i protrudes slightly to the left relative to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d.

In addition to its function of removing the gate seal 2811 (described later), this separation hole 2810d can also function as a through-hole through which a core is inserted to form the rear end of the locking portion 2810i, which becomes the under-molding portion of the gate body 2810, thereby facilitating the injection molding of the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is formed with a shape that is offset inward at a certain distance from the outer shape of the adhesive recess 2810b, and is slightly longer in the left-right direction. A chamfered notch 2811a, corresponding to the misapplication prevention portion 2810c, is formed in the upper left corner of the gate seal 2811, allowing identification of the correct application orientation (in this case, up and down) relative to the adhesive recess 2810b. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is an adhesive surface with adhesive properties.

According to the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be properly attached to the adhesive recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a), and the gate seal 2811 can be pressed from rear to front with its tip. This allows the edge of the gate seal 2811 to peel forward, and the peeled portion can be easily removed by the worker, allowing the gate seal 2811 to be reattached.

Furthermore, by separating the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801, and passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810, and pressing the gate seal 2811 from the rear with its tip, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b. This makes the replacement of the gate seal 2811 when changing models much easier.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and the gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the adhesive recess 2810b, the separation hole 2810d can be concealed from the front. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 2810d, and makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, thus making it harder for them to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 2810d.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, which is housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached, closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear. Since there is no hole that penetrates to the rear, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent wire-like fraudulent tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 through this hole, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the front of the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the gate seal 2811 from the front and into the separation hole 2810d, the front of the gate sensor 2801 prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the unauthorized tool leaving a trace on the gate seal 2811 after penetrating it can deter fraudulent activity, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the adhesive recess 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is attached is provided with a mis-attachment prevention section 2810c, attempting to attach the gate seal 2811 upside down will prevent it from being attached correctly. This allows the worker to notice the mis-attachment of the gate seal 2811 and ensures that the gate seal 2811 is attached in the correct orientation, thus preventing the gate seal 2811 from being shipped upside down.

Furthermore, since the gate body 2810 has a projection 2810j in the housing groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the housing groove 2810g from the rear in an orientation where the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not align, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will come into contact with the projection 2810j before it comes into contact with the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, thus preventing the locking portion 2810i from being locked to the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, the locking portion 2810i engages with the rear end of the gate sensor 2801 and holds it in place only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the housing groove 2810g with the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 aligned. This prevents the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong orientation and suppresses the occurrence of malfunctions related to the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by housing the gate sensor 2801 in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 from the rear and engaging the locking portion 2810i with the gate sensor 2801, the movement of the gate sensor 2801 in the vertical, horizontal, and front-to-back directions can be restricted and positioned by the housing groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the rear side of the adhesive recess 2810b, thereby simplifying the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, since the separation hole 2810d is located at the front part of the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is housing in the housing groove 2810g, the front end of the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear. Therefore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the gate sensor 2801, which is mounted on the rear side of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached, closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear. Since there is no hole that penetrates to the rear, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent wire-like illegal tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through this hole, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, by locking the gate sensor 2801 to the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810, its movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool penetrates the gate seal 2811 and the separation hole 2810d from the front and pushes the gate sensor 2801 backward, the locking portion 2810i prevents the gate sensor 2801 from moving backward. This maintains the rearward closure of the separation hole 2810d by the gate sensor 2801, preventing unauthorized activity.

Furthermore, since the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d can also be used as a through-hole for inserting the core that forms the locking portion 2810i, allowing the gate body 2810 to be formed by injection molding.

From the above, we can understand the following technical concepts A to C.

[5-8h-1. Technical philosophy]
[5-8h-1a. Technical philosophy A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative object that has been given a specific decoration,
A front member having a part to be decorated, to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the part to be decorated from front to back, allowing the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear,
The device comprises a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which a game medium can flow,
The aforementioned front member is
The present invention further comprises a housing portion that extends rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion, is recessed forward from the rear end, and has the separation hole located on the front end side, and is capable of housing at least a part of the passage member from the rear.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative element, the gate body 2810 to the front member, the adhesive recess 2810b to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole for gate sensor 2801) to the passage section, the gate sensor 2801 to the passage member, and the housing groove 2810g to the housing section.

As a result, since the separation hole is located in the front portion of the housing section of the front member, when at least a portion of the passage member is housed in the housing section, the front end of the passage member can close the separation hole from the rear, thereby providing a gaming machine that achieves the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, because the front member has a housing section, at least a portion of the passage member can be housed in the housing section from the rear. This allows the housing section to restrict the movement of the passage member in the vertical, horizontal, and forward directions, thereby facilitating the assembly of the gaming machine and reducing its overall cost.

[5-8h-1b. Technical philosophy B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative object that has been given a specific decoration,
A front member having a part to be decorated, to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the part to be decorated from front to back, allowing the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear,
The device comprises a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and having a passage portion through which a game medium can flow,
The aforementioned front member is
It is characterized by having a locking portion that protrudes from behind the decorated portion and within the front projection range of the separation hole, for locking the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative element, the gate body 2810 to the front member, the adhesive recess 2810b to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (the detection hole for the gate sensor 2801) to the passage section, the gate sensor 2801 to the passage member, and the locking part 2810i to the locking part.

As a result, the locking portion that engages with the passage member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole. Therefore, when the passage member is engaged with the locking portion, the passage member is sandwiched between the rear of the covering decorative portion and the locking portion, effectively closing the separation hole from the rear. This allows the passage member to close the separation hole and restricts the passage member's movement in the front-to-back direction.

Furthermore, as described above, by locking the passage member into the locking mechanism, its movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool is used to push the passage member backward from the front through the decorative element and the separation hole, the locking mechanism prevents the passage member from moving backward, thus maintaining the rearward closure of the separation hole by the passage member and preventing unauthorized activity.

Furthermore, since the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as a through-hole for inserting the core that forms the locking portion, and the front member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8h-1c. Technical philosophy C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative object that has been given a specific decoration,
A front member having: a part to be decorated which is recessed to the rear of the depth of the decorative body in the front-to-back direction and to which the decorative body is attached from the front; a separation hole which penetrates the part to be decorated front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear; a housing part which extends rearward from the rear side of the part to be decorated and is recessed forward from the rear end, with the separation hole located at the front end; and a locking part which is rearward from the part to be decorated and protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole;
The front member is characterized by comprising a passage member which is housed in the housing portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and which is locked to the locking portion and has a passage portion through which a game medium can flow.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative element, the gate body 2810 to the front member, the adhesive recess 2810b to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole for gate sensor 2801) to the passage section, the gate sensor 2801 to the passage member, the housing groove 2810g to the housing section, and the locking part 2810i to the locking part.

As a result, a decorative body with a predetermined decoration is attached to the decorative portion on the front of the front member, which is located on the front side of the passage member that has a passage through which the game media flows. Therefore, the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. Furthermore, because the decorative portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed to the rearward side compared to the depth of the decorative body in the front-to-back direction, when the decorative body is attached to the decorative portion, the area surrounding the decorative portion on the front member protrudes forward more than the front of the decorative body. This protruding portion of the front member frames the decorative body, making it stand out and enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative body, thus improving the overall appearance of the game machine.

Furthermore, because the part to which the decorative element is attached is recessed towards the rear, the decorative element can be attached using the protruding area around the decorative element on the front member as a guide. This makes it easier to attach the decorative element in the correct position, reducing the chances of failure in attaching the decorative element and suppressing the increase in costs associated with the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorative portion of the front member is recessed towards the rear. Therefore, when the decorative element is attached to the decorative element, the contact surface between the decorative element and the decorative element is recessed. This makes it difficult to remove the decorative element from the front, requiring considerable effort. However, since a separation hole is provided in the decorative element, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the decorative element pressed forward, easily releasing the attachment to the decorative element and allowing for easy removal. Consequently, if the decorative element is not properly attached to the decorative element of the front member during manufacturing, the attachment can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative element from the rear with its tip. This allows for easy removal of the decorative element and subsequent reattachment. Furthermore, by separating the front member and the passage member, and passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member, and pressing the decorative element from the rear with its tip, the attachment to the decorated part can be easily released. This allows for easy removal of the decorative element from the decorated part, simplifying the replacement of decorative elements when changing machine models. Moreover, as described above, since the decorative element can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole when the front member and passage member are separated, it becomes easier to separate the components of the gaming machine by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, because a separation hole is provided in the decorative part, the separation hole can be made less visible or hidden from view by attaching a decorative element to the decorative part. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole, and also makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, thus making it difficult for them to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

Furthermore, by housing at least a portion of the passage member from the rear within the housing portion of the front member, and engaging the locking portion with the passage member, the movement of the passage member in the vertical, horizontal, and front-to-back directions can be restricted and positioned by the housing portion, the locking portion, and the rear side of the decorated portion, thereby simplifying the assembly of the gaming machine and reducing its cost. In this case, since the separation hole is located at the front of the housing portion of the front member, housing at least a portion of the passage member within the housing portion closes the separation hole from the rear by the front end of the passage member. Therefore, when assembled in the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member attached to the rear side of the front member to which the decorative body is attached. Because there is no hole penetrating to the rear as in conventional gaming machines, it is possible to prevent the insertion of wire-like illegal tools such as piano wire into the gaming machine through this hole, thus preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, because the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through the decorative body from the front and into the separation hole, the passage member prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the passage section from the front through the separation hole, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the unauthorized tool leaves a mark on the decorative body when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a gaming machine with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, by locking the passage member into the locking mechanism, its movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool is used to push the passage member backward from the front through the decorative element and the separation hole, the locking mechanism prevents the passage member from moving backward, thus maintaining the rearward closure of the separation hole by the passage member and preventing unauthorized activity.

Furthermore, since the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as a through-hole for inserting the core that forms the locking portion, and the front member can be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. When assembled on the game board 5, the center mechanism 2500 is located approximately in the center of the game area 5a. Within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center mechanism 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates upon contact with the game balls B is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 on the left side of the center mechanism 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted to the left of the center mechanism 2500 are adjusted to primarily direct game balls B, driven into the left side of the center mechanism 2500, to the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and, with a lower probability, to enter the area to the left of the center of the windmill W. This allows game balls B to enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center mechanism 2500 with a certain probability by being driven in so that they flow down the left side of the center mechanism 2500.

The multiple obstacle pins N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center mechanism 2500 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that game balls B that circulate through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 have a higher probability of passing through gate 2003 than game balls B that circulate through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. Furthermore, the multiple obstacle pins N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that game balls B mainly circulate to the left of the gate member 2800 rather than to the right.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right-center unit 2700 are primarily adjusted so that the game balls B flow to the left of the side right-center unit 2700.

Within the game area 5a, the game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and driven from the left side along the periphery of the game area 5a towards the top. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate to the left of the center mechanism 2500, as shown in Figure 137, multiple obstacle nails N planted to the left of the center mechanism 2500 guide the ball to either the warp entrance 2511 of the center mechanism 2500 or a part to the right of the center of the windmill W. A lower probability guides the ball to the part to the left of the center of the windmill W.

Game balls B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W are guided to the right by the shelf section 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flow down to the side unit 2200. There, they have the potential to be received into the three general prize pockets 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. Game balls B received into the general prize pockets 2001 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the first discharge passage 3181 of the lower front back performance unit 3160 in the front back performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general prize pocket sensor 3001, and then discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200. When game balls B are detected by the general prize pocket sensor 3001, a bonus is awarded in which a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed. Game balls B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W are almost never received into the first start pocket 2002. Then, any game balls B that are not accepted into the general prize slot 2001 are discharged from the out slot 1008 to outside the game area 5a.

Game balls B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W are guided towards the center (first starting opening 2002) in the left-right direction by multiple obstruction pins N arranged diagonally along the lower edge of the center mechanism 2500, and may be received by the first starting opening 2002. Alternatively, game balls B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the multiple obstruction pins N arranged diagonally, and may be received by the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200.

The game ball B that enters (is received) the warp entrance 2511 of the center mechanism 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth across the stage 2513 and is released forward from the central part in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first start opening 2002 with a high probability, as the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first start opening 2002. When the game ball B is released from the side release sections 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release section 2513a, it is received by the first start opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game balls B received in the first start port 2002 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200. When the game balls B are detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a lottery for the first special lottery result is held, and a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed, among other benefits. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first start port 2002 are discharged outside the game area 5a through the out port 1008.

Furthermore, game balls B that circulate to the left of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a cannot pass through gate 2003 or be received by the second starting opening 2004, the main prize opening 2005, or the mechanism prize opening 2006.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability of a game ball B being received by the first start opening 2002 when shot to the right of the center mechanism 2500 is set higher than the probability of a game ball B being received by the second start opening 2004 when shot to the right of the center mechanism 2500. This allows the player to be prompted to shoot game balls B to the left of the center mechanism 2500 ("left-handed shooting") when the large prize opening 2005 or the mechanism prize opening 2006 is not open.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is struck with enough force to enter the upper part of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center mechanism 2500, specifically the portion that slopes downward from the center in the left-right direction toward the right, the game ball B will flow through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

To be more specific, when a game ball B is struck with enough force to contact the impact point 1006, which protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the game area 5a (so-called "right-handed shot"), the game ball B that has contacted the impact point 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B that has entered this first guide passage 2521 is released downwards from a position slightly to the right of directly above the gate 2003.

The game balls B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 are guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800, in a manner that decreases in probability in the order of left side of gate member 2800, gate 2003, and right side of gate member 2800, and then flow down toward the side right middle unit 2700.

Meanwhile, when a game ball B is driven into the upper right side of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and, after flowing through the second guide passage 2522, is released downwards from the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521. The game ball B released downwards from the exit of the second guide passage 2522 is guided such that the left side of gate 2003 and gate member 2800 has approximately the same probability, while the right side of gate member 2800 has a lower probability, and then flows down towards the side right-center unit 2700.

The game ball B that passes to the right of the gate member 2800 is received into the second sub-outlet 2022. The game ball B received into the second sub-outlet 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then passed to the second rear guidance passage 3157 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. After passing through the rear front lower display unit 3160, it is discharged outside the game area 5a. Furthermore, the game ball B that passes through gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released towards the side right middle unit 2700. The detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2801 triggers a normal lottery result, which opens and closes the second start opening 2004.

The game balls B that pass through the left side of gate 2003 and gate member 2800 are, with a high probability, directed down the left side of the side right-center unit 2700 by multiple obstacle nails N planted between gate member 2800 and the side right-center unit 2700. They are occasionally received into the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right-center unit 2700, and rarely into the second sub-out opening 2022. Game balls B received into the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right-center unit 2700 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then passed to the first rear guidance passage 3156 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. After being detected by the general prize entry opening sensor 3001, they are discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200 via the rear front lower display unit 3160. At this time, a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed as a bonus.

The game ball B, flowing down the left side of the right-center unit 2700, is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the right-center unit 2700, and flows down to the left of the prize entry opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600.

In this case, if game ball B is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "prize win," the prize entry port 2006 will open and close in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, game ball B, which has flowed down the left side of the side right-center unit 2700, will be received into the prize entry port 2006 with a high probability.

The game ball B, received into the prize entry opening 2006, is detected by the prize entry opening sensor 2601 and then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, which is outside the game area 5a. It is then passed to the distribution passage 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. The detection of the game ball B by the prize entry opening sensor 2601 triggers a bonus where a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed.

The game balls B, which have been passed to the distribution passage 3158, are then distributed to either the V-prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by the drive of the V-distribution solenoid 3007. Game balls B distributed to the V-prize opening 2007 are detected by the V-prize opening sensor 3003 and then discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200. On the other hand, game balls B distributed to the losing opening 2008 are not detected by the V-prize opening sensor 3003, but are detected by the losing opening sensor 3004 and then discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200. When a game ball B is received into the V-prize opening 2007, the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, providing a special bonus.

Furthermore, game balls B that are not accepted into the prize entry opening 2006 and instead flow down to the left of the prize entry opening 2006 enter the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center prize mechanism 2500, and are released from the exit of the lower right guide passage 2530 toward the first attacker unit 2400.

The game balls B released downwards (diagonally to the lower left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500 flow down onto the first shelf section 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400. Since multiple obstacle pins N are installed between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacker unit 2400, the game balls B do not flow directly from the lower right guide passage 2530 to the right side of the first vertical wall section 2425 of the first attacker unit 2400.

The game ball B, having flowed down to the first shelf 2421 of the first attacker unit 2400, rolls to the left due to its inclination, then rolls along the upper surface of the second start door 2411 and the second shelf 2422, before being released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 then falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize door 2413, and, due to their inclination, rolls to the left, rolling from the large prize door 2413 to the fourth shelf 2424, before being released to the left from the fourth shelf 2424, outside the first attacker unit 2400.

Incidentally, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500, it may come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down to the upper shelf 2436 instead of the first shelf 2421. Then, the game ball B that flows down to the upper shelf 2436 rolls to the left due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2436, where it comes into contact with obstacle nails N planted on the left side, changes direction downwards, and flows down to the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the big prize opening door 2413, after which it rolls to the left along the big prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 and is released outside the first attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if the game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, depending on the timing of the release of the game ball B from the upper shelf 2436 and the timing of the opening of the large prize slot 2005, the game ball B may be received by the large prize slot 2005.

Furthermore, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500, it may bounce back to the right due to contact with obstacle nails N or the right end of the upper shelf section 2436, and flow down onto the first shelf section 2421. This causes the first shelf section 2421 to roll to the right against its inclination, and the game ball B may be released to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf section 2421. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf section 2421 flows down between the first vertical wall section 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the front component member 1000, near the right end of the second horizontal wall section 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall section 2433 to be received by the first sub-out opening 2021. The game ball B received in the first sub-outlet 2021 is not returned to the game area 5a, but is instead passed to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the lower front-rear performance unit 3160 in the front-rear performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the lower circuit board holder 1200.

When a game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500, if the passing of game ball B at gate 2003 results in a "regular win" being drawn as the result of the regular lottery, the second start opening door 2411 moves, and the second start opening 2004 opens in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball B, which is rolling to the left on the first shelf 2421, will be received by the second start opening 2004. Once the game ball B is received by the second start opening 2004, it is detected by the second start opening sensor 2401 and then discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200, which is outside the game area 5a. When the second start opening sensor 2401 detects the game ball B, a second special lottery result is drawn, and a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed, among other benefits.

Furthermore, when a game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf section 2422, if the game ball B is received by the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and a "jackpot" is drawn as the result of the first or second special lottery, the large prize opening door 2413 moves, causing the large prize opening 2005 to open and close in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf section 2422 is received by the large prize opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402 and then discharged onto the circuit board holder 1200 outside the game area 5a. This detection of the game ball B by the large prize opening sensor 2402 grants a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B being dispensed.

Furthermore, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422, it may strike the step on the lower surface of the upper shelf 2436, causing it to flow diagonally downwards to the right and enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423. The game ball B that enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third vertical wall 2427 and the fourth vertical wall 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and, due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433, rolls to the right and is received by the first sub-out opening 2021.

If the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center mechanism 2500 toward the first attacker unit 2400 is not accepted by the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, or the first sub-out opening 2021, it is discharged from the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a, towards the rear and below the game panel 1100, which is outside the game area 5a.

Therefore, in order to open and close the large prize slot 2005 and the special prize slot 2006, it is necessary to accept game ball B into the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004 to conduct a lottery for the first special lottery result, such as a "special prize win" or a "jackpot," or the second special lottery result. While the first start slot 2002 is always open, the second start slot 2004 requires game ball B to pass through gate 2003 to conduct a lottery (draw) for a "regular win" as a regular lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity to accept game ball B into the second start slot 2004 is lower than that of the first start slot 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can be instructed to insert the game ball B so that it flows down the left side of the center mechanism 2500, allowing the game ball B to be received into the first start opening 2002. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by observing the movement of the game ball B guided by multiple obstacle nails N, while also increasing their anticipation for the game ball B to be received into the first start opening 2002.

Then, when game ball B is received into the first starting opening 2002, if a "prize win" or "jackpot" is drawn as the first special lottery result, the large prize opening 2005 or prize opening 2006 will open and close. Therefore, by changing the operation of shooting game ball B to "right-hand shooting," the expectation of game ball B being received into the large prize opening 2005 or prize opening 2006 can be increased.

In this configuration, a group of guide passages 2520, consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522, is provided in the upper right corner of the center mechanism 2500. By adjusting the guide passage through which the game balls circulate, it becomes easier to pass through the gate 2003 or to receive them into the second sub-outlet 2022. Therefore, the force with which the game balls B are driven can be adjusted to ensure they circulate through the desired guide passage, allowing the player to enjoy the game ball-driving operation.

Furthermore, by performing a "right-handed shot," the game ball B passes through gate 2003, potentially triggering a "regular win" where the second start opening 2004 opens. Accepting the game ball B into the open second start opening 2004 may trigger a "special feature win" or a "jackpot," thus increasing the sense of anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

[5-8j. Magnetic Sensors]
Next, the multiple magnetic sensors 1050 in the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Figure 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. Figure 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the detection range by the magnetic sensor in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic material in which magnetic field lines from a magnet cannot be detected, and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic material in which magnetic field lines from a magnet can be detected. Figure 148(a) is a perspective view showing the state in which the magnetic sensor is held by the holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross-section.

Multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5 to detect unauthorized magnetism (magnetic field lines) acting within the game area 5a. As shown in Figure 148(c), the magnetic sensor 1050 comprises a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1052 with a white surface on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and a transparent sensor case 1053 covering the sensor substrate 1052 and the sensor body 1051. Although not shown in the figure, the sensor substrate 1052 also has ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, etc. mounted on it, in addition to the sensor body 1051.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped, with a rectangular shape in plan view and a height lower than the length of the shorter side of the rectangle. One side in the height direction is chamfered. The internal sensor body 1051 and sensor substrate 1052 of this magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic field lines parallel to the longest side of a rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147(a), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass in a direction parallel to the longest side, allowing the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 to be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147(b), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass perpendicular to the long side (perpendicular to the rectangular plane formed by the long and short sides), making it impossible to detect the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055.

Therefore, as shown by the shading in Figure 147(c), the magnetic sensor 1050 has detection areas DA for the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side of the long side direction with respect to the center of the magnetic sensor 1050. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 146, the game board 5 has multiple magnetic sensors 1050, each positioned in an appropriate direction. Each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned to detect fraudulent magnetic fields acting near the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the large prize entry point 2005, the special prize entry point 2006, and the warp entrance 2511 in the game area 5a. In other words, each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned in an appropriate orientation so that areas within the game area 5a where fraudulent activity using magnets is expected to occur are included within the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area shown by the dashed line in Figure 146).

Furthermore, in the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is designed so that its respective detection area DA does not overlap with the solenoids or drive motors, preventing it from detecting magnetism (magnetic field lines) from the start port solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, prize entry port solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid, and the drive motor located in the back unit 3000.

Next, as shown in Figure 147(d), when a magnetic material 1056 is placed in parallel with a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines are attracted to the magnetic material 1056. This reduces the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, potentially preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from detecting magnetic field lines (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 147(e), when a magnetic material 1057 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 capable of detecting magnetic field lines from a magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines are attracted by the magnetic material 1057, increasing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This allows for the detection of magnetism from distant magnets 1055 or magnets with weak magnetic force.

Incidentally, in conventional pachinko machines, magnetic sensors are attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material. Depending on the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the screw, magnetic field lines from a magnet used for fraudulent activities can be attracted to the highly permeable screw, reducing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor and making it impossible to detect the approach of the magnet. In contrast, this embodiment attaches the magnetic sensor 1050 without using screws.

To be more specific, as shown in Figure 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a retaining member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (in this case, synthetic resin). The retaining member 1060 has a housing portion 1061 that can accommodate the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that engages with the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in the housing portion 1061. Furthermore, the retaining member 1060 has a projection 1063 that protrudes into the housing portion 1061 from the leg portion of the elastic claw 1062. This retaining member 1060 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the housing portion 1061 from the outside, the elastic claws 1062 of the retaining member 1060 elastically deform away from the housing portion 1061. Once the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the housing portion 1061, the elastic claws 1062 return to their original position and lock onto the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the projections 1063 provided on the legs of the elastic claws 1062 abut against the magnetic sensor 1050, pressing the magnetic sensor 1050 against the opposite side of the inner surface of the housing portion 1061 from the elastic claws 1062.

The locking mechanism of the elastic claw 1062 prevents the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving out of the housing 1061, thereby preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling out. Furthermore, the projection 1063 presses the magnetic sensor 1050 into the housing 1061, preventing rattling of the magnetic sensor 1050 within the housing 1061.

Thus, because the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, when a magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 is prevented from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet, thus preventing a reduction in the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect magnetism acting on the game area 5a, enabling early detection of fraudulent activity using magnets. Furthermore, by notifying the magnetic sensor 1050 of suspicious magnetic field detection, fraudulent activity can be deterred, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the non-magnetic holding member 1060 prevents the attraction of magnetic field lines from the magnet, thus preventing a reduction in the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This allows for effective detection of the magnetism acting on the game area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, reducing the number of magnetic sensors 1050 and thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the retaining member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the retaining member 1060. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without the need for metal screws made of magnetic material. This also simplifies the assembly process of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the projection 1063 of the holding member 1060 biases (presses) the magnetic sensor 1050 toward the housing portion 1061, the biasing force by the projection 1063 suppresses fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050. This reduces the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or experiencing poor contact due to such vibrations, thus ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by a non-magnetic holding member 1060 and mounted on the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that attaches to the game board 5 can be positioned away from the magnetic sensor 1050, or outside the magnetic detection area DA in the game area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws used to attach the holding member 1060 to the game board 5, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect the magnetic field acting on the game area 5a, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against fraudulent activities using magnets.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by a transparent holding member 1060, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be shown to the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051, which is a different color (for example, black), can be made to stand out. Therefore, it is possible to strongly make the player aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is real and not a dummy, and the visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can deter those attempting to commit fraud using magnets, thereby increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities and reducing the burden on the amusement hall that installs this pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made less conspicuous, and it can also be mistaken for a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, it is possible to check for damage to the sensor body 1051 from the outside. This simplifies the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall composition of the hidden unit]
The overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 149. Figure 149(a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board seen from the rear. The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the performance display device 1600 and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and comprises a box-shaped back box 3010 with an open front and a square opening 3010a in its rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 for detachably attaching the display device 1600.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 comprises a front rear performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the rear of the front rear performance unit 3100 and at the top of the rear box 3010, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located below the rear upper performance unit and at the bottom of the rear box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b projecting rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at a distance, two fixing grooves 3010c on the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b that are recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right, into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the display device 1600 is inserted, and a notch 3010d on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b near the vertical center, cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010, into which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to accommodate the performance display device 1600 within its frame. A locking mechanism is mounted on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear of the back box 3010, allowing it to slide vertically.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 includes a flat, plate-shaped fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc., formed at appropriate positions for attaching the back front display unit 3100, etc.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 includes a general prize slot sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received into the general prize slot 2001 provided on the front unit 2000, a first start slot sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received into the first start slot 2002, a V prize slot sensor 3003 that detects game balls B received into the special prize slot 2006 and then distributed to the V prize slot 2007, and a losing slot sensor 3004 that detects game balls B received into the special prize slot 2006 and then distributed to the losing slot 2008 (see Figure 169, etc.).

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a V-prize door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V-prize opening 2007, and a V-distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V-prize door 3006 back and forth to distribute the game balls B received in the prize opening 2006 to either the V-prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008. These components—the general prize opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002, the V-prize opening sensor 3003, the losing opening sensor 3004, the V-prize opening door 3006, and the V-distribution solenoid 3007—are provided in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the front-rear performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 150 to 160. Figure 150 is a front view of the front-rear performance unit in the back unit. Figure 151(a) is a perspective view of the front-rear performance unit in the back unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front-rear performance unit in the back unit from the rear. Figure 152(a) is a cross-sectional view of the front-rear performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part in (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part in (a). Figure 153 is an exploded perspective view of the front-rear left decorative unit of the front-rear performance unit, disassembled and viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 is an exploded perspective view of the front-rear left decorative unit, disassembled and viewed from the rear, showing only the first front-rear left decorative body, the second front-rear left decorative body, the third front-rear left decorative body, and the base of the front-rear left decorative body. Figure 155(a) is a front view of the first decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; (b) is a front view of the second decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; (c) is a front view of the third decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state; and (c) is a front view of the base of the decorative element on the front left of the reverse side, shown in a transparent state.

Figure 156(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for illuminating the light guide plate and the left rear decorative unit in the front-rear performance unit, viewed from the front. Figure 156(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate for illuminating the decorative body of the lower rear performance unit, viewed from the front. Figure 157 is a front view showing the left rear decorative unit illuminated. Figure 158(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first pattern of the light guide plate illuminated, and Figure 158(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the second pattern of the light guide plate illuminated. Figure 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the illumination configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. Figure 160 is a front view of the front-rear performance unit showing the second pattern of the light guide plate illuminated.

The front-rear display unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the front end inside the back box 3010. The front-rear display unit 3100 comprises a transparent, flat light guide plate 3110 located in the center of the front view, a left front-rear decorative unit 3120 located on the left end of the light guide plate 3110, a right front-rear decorative unit 3140 located on the right end of the light guide plate 3110, a lower front-rear display unit 3160 located on the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 and connecting the lower ends of the left front-rear decorative unit 3120 and the right front-rear decorative unit 3140, and an upper connecting base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the left front-rear decorative unit 3120 and the right front-rear decorative unit 3140.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 includes a general prize entry sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received into the general prize entry 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a V prize entry sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that have been received into the special prize entry 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and then distributed to the V prize entry 2007, and a losing entry sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that have been received into the special prize entry 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and then distributed to the losing entry 2008. Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 includes a V-prize door 3006 for distributing the game ball B received in the prize entry opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 to either the V-prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008, and a V-distribution solenoid 3007 for moving the V-prize door 3006 forward and backward (opening and closing).

The rear front lower display unit 3160 includes a general prize entry sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received into the general prize entry point 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first start entry sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received into the first start entry point 2002 of the start entry unit 2100.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back-front display unit 3100 includes a first pattern 3111 (see Figure 158(a)) which is illuminated by reflecting only light from the left and right forward, and a second pattern 3112 (see Figure 158(b)) which is illuminated by reflecting only light from a specific area below forward. In other words, the light guide plate 3110 can illuminate the first pattern 3111 by illuminating the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the back-front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back-front left decorative unit 3120 (described later), and the multiple light guide plate LEDs on the back-front right first decorative substrate 3148, the back-front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the back-front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the back-front right decorative unit 3140. Furthermore, by illuminating the multiple LEDs 3176 on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the lower front display unit 3160, the second pattern 3112 can be illuminated.

The first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in the figure, consists of a pattern depicting the letter "A" in the center and patterns resembling outstretched "wings" on both the left and right sides. As shown in the figure, the first pattern 3111 is configured so that the intensity and brightness of the light emission differ depending on the part of the pattern, enhancing the design and decorative qualities of the pattern. More specifically, in Figure 158(a), the first pattern 3111 consists of multiple dots that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED in the areas with the darkest shade, multiple dots that emit light by spectrally separating the cocktail light from the LED in the areas with the lightest shade, and multiple lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED in the other areas with varying shades.

Here, "cocktail light" refers to light containing two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, if yellow light (a mixture of red and green light) is shone onto a spectral emission unit as cocktail light, the yellow light component will be spectrally separated into red and green light, resulting in areas that appear red or green. Alternatively, if white light is shone onto the spectral emission unit as cocktail light, the white light component will be spectrally separated into red, green, and blue light, resulting in areas that appear red, green, or blue, or a mixture of these colors, creating a shimmering, rainbow-colored emission. Note that if only one of the three primary colors of light is shone onto the spectral emission unit, that light will not have any spectrally separated components, and will emit light of that single color. Therefore, the spectral emission unit can emit light in a single color or in multiple shimmering colors depending on the color of the light being shone, allowing for a wider variety of illumination effects.

The LEDs (such as the LED 3128g for the light guide plate) used to illuminate the first pattern 3111 are mounted on the front-left decorative substrate 3128 of the front-left decorative unit 3120, the front-right first decorative substrate 3148, the front-right second decorative substrate 3149, and the front-right decorative substrate 3150 for the light guide plate of the front-right decorative unit 3140.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward from multiple points spaced apart horizontally near the lower end. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of multiple points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate, which will be described later. The multiple lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 are formed to reflect only the light from their respective LEDs 3176 forward, and each is formed to emit light independently.

The second pattern 3112 is divided into five line groups 3114 from left to right: the first line group 3114a, the second line group 3114b, the third line group 3114c, the fourth line group 3114d, and the fifth line group 3114e. Each line group 3114 consists of five lines 3113 from left to right: the first line 3113a, the second line 3113b, the third line 3113c, the fourth line 3113d, and the fifth line 3113e. In each line group 3114, the five lines 3113 (first line 3113a to fifth line 3113e) have their lower ends positioned at the same location, and they radiate upwards from this lower end.

The illumination of this second pattern 3112 creates a lighting effect for the player, similar to searchlights from below on a concert stage. This makes the game area 5a appear dazzling, entertains the player, and helps prevent a decline in interest in the game.

The LED 3176, which illuminates the second pattern 3112, is mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the lower front display unit 3160 in the front front display unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Front left decorative unit]
The front left decorative unit 3120 in the front back performance unit 3100 has a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and includes a vertically elongated front left logo decorative section 3121 consisting of a string of letters, a front upper left logo decorative section 3122 located above the front left logo decorative section 3121 and featuring a stylized "A", and a front left sub-decorative section 3123 located to the left of the front left logo decorative section 3121.

The rear front left decorative unit 3120 comprises a transparent rear front left first decorative element 3124, which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a transparent rear front left second decorative element 3125 located behind the rear front left first decorative element 3124; a transparent rear front left third decorative element 3126 located behind the rear front left second decorative element 3125; and a transparent rear front left decorative element base 3127 located behind the rear front left third decorative element 3126.

Furthermore, the front left decorative unit 3120 includes a front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating the first pattern 3111, the front left logo decorative section 3121, the front left upper logo decorative section 3122, and the front left sub-decorative section 3123 of the light guide plate 3110; a front left upper decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating the front left upper logo decorative section 3122; and a front left lower decorative substrate 3130 for illuminating the front left logo decorative section 3121 and the front left sub-decorative section 3123.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 includes a rear front left reflector 3131 located to the right of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, a rear front upper left reflector 3132 located below the rear front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and a rear front lower left reflector 3133 located above the rear front lower left decorative substrate 3130.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 includes a left diffusion lens 3134 located between the rear front left third decorative element 3126 and the rear front left decorative element base 3127.

The first decorative element on the front left of the rear front is attached to the front surface of the front left decorative element base 3127, sandwiching the second decorative element on the front left of the rear front, the third decorative element on the front left, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the left end of the light guide plate 3110. The first decorative element on the front left of the rear front is formed as a transparent, flat, vertically elongated rectangle. The first decorative element on the front left of the rear front is located at approximately 3/4 of its height from the bottom, and has a dividing decorative section 3124a that extends horizontally and penetrates horizontally.

Furthermore, the front left first decorative element 3124 has multiple through-decorative sections 3124b that penetrate from front to back. These multiple through-decorative sections 3124b are provided near the upper and lower ends, and near the upper right end of the dividing decorative section 3124a. The through-decorative sections 3124b are formed in a rhombus shape, as if the four sides of a square were replaced with inwardly bulging arcs.

Furthermore, the front left first decorative element 3124 on the reverse side has a first front left logo decorative element 3124c, which is located below the dividing decorative element 3124a on the front side and constitutes part of the front left logo decorative element 3121, and a relief-like first back left logo decorative element 3124d, which is located in the area corresponding to the first front left logo decorative element 3124c on the rear side. The right edge of the front left first decorative element 3124 is shaped to follow the lettering of the logos on the first front left logo decorative element 3124c and the first back left logo decorative element 3124d.

Furthermore, the first decorative element 3124 on the front left of the reverse side has a first upper left logo decorative element 3124e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative element 3124a on the reverse side and constitutes part of the upper left logo decorative element 3122 on the front left of the reverse side, and a plurality of first left sub-decorative elements 3124f, which are provided in relief to the left of the first back left logo decorative element 3124d on the reverse side and constitute part of the front left sub-decorative element 3123 on the reverse side. The first upper left logo decorative element 3124e constitutes the outermost part of the upper left logo decorative element 3122 on the front left of the reverse side. The first left sub-decorative elements 3124f are formed by overlapping circles of the same size by one-quarter and extracting a portion of one circle, and by removing the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern, and are arranged in rows vertically.

Although the front left first decorative element 3124 on the reverse side is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, etc., it is actually transparent. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(a), the first rear left logo decorative element 3124d, the first upper left logo decorative element 3124e, and the first left sub-decorative element 3124f, which are located on the rear surface, can be seen from the front.

The first front left decorative element 3124, when assembled with the front left decorative unit 3120, is positioned in front of the second front left decorative element 3125 and is mounted at an angle such that its right side is positioned behind its left side (see Figure 152). Furthermore, when assembled, the first front left decorative element 3124 is positioned so that its left side contacts the right side of the substrate holding portion 3125b of the second front left decorative element 3125, with the first lower LED 3128a and first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative substrate 3128 located to its left. Also, when assembled, the first LED of the upper front left decorative substrate 3129 is located above the top surface of the first front left decorative element 3124, and the first LED 3130a of the lower front left decorative substrate 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the first decorative element on the front left of the reverse front left, the first lower LED 3128a on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the lower front left decorative substrate 3130, are illuminated, the first front left logo decorative element 3124c, the first back left logo decorative element 3124d, and the first left sub-decorative element 3124f are illuminated by light entering the interior from below the left side dividing decorative element 3124a via the substrate holding portion 3125b of the second decorative element on the front left of the reverse front left, and by light entering the interior from the bottom surface. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative element 3124a and the inner surface of the through-decorative element 3124b located near the lower end are also illuminated.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3124a, when light incident inside from the first lower LED 3128a of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3124a, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3124a. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3124a reaches the opposite inner surface, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3124a. Thus, the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is significantly dimmed as it passes through the partition decorative section 3124a. Therefore, the first upper left logo decorative section 3124e above the partition decorative section 3124a is hardly illuminated (illuminated) by the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130. This allows only the first front left logo decorative section 3124c, the first back left logo decorative section 3124d, and the first left sub-decorative section 3124f to be brightly illuminated.

Furthermore, when the first front left decorative element 3124 on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED on the back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decorative element 3124e is illuminated by light incident from above the left side dividing decorative element 3124a via the substrate holding portion 3125b of the second front left decorative element 3125, and by light incident from above. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative element 3124a and the through-type decorative element located above the dividing decorative element 3124a are also illuminated.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3124a, when light incident inside from the first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3124a, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3124a. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3124a reaches the opposite inner surface, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3124a. Thus, the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is significantly attenuated as it passes through the partition decorative section 3124a. Therefore, the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 barely illuminates the first front left logo decorative section 3124c, the first back left logo decorative section 3124d, and the first left sub-decorative section 3124f below the partition decorative section 3124a. Instead, only the first upper left logo decorative section 3124e and the upper through-decorative section 3124b are brightly illuminated.

Thus, the front left first decorative element 3124 is configured so that the upper and lower sections can be illuminated independently, separated by the dividing decorative section 3124a.

The second decorative body 3125 on the front left of the back is made entirely of transparent material and has a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the first decorative body 3124 on the front left of the back, and a substrate holding portion 3125b provided around the decorative plate portion 3125a, excluding the right edge (left edge, top edge, bottom edge). The substrate holding portion 3125b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3125a and protrudes forward, and is recessed from the rear side toward the front. The substrate holding portion 3125b works in cooperation with the substrate holding portion 3127b of the front left decorative body base 3127 to clamp and hold the front left decorative substrate 3128, the upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the lower left decorative substrate 3130. The second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the back front has a substrate holding portion 3125b that is parallel to the front of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined such that its right side is positioned further back than its left side.

Furthermore, the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the back has a dividing decorative element 3125c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back, located approximately three-quarters of the way up from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3125a. This dividing decorative element 3125c is the same size and height as the dividing decorative element 3124a of the first decorative element 3124 on the front left of the back.

Furthermore, the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the reverse side is located below the dividing decorative element 3125c on the rear surface and has a relief-like second logo decorative element 3125d that forms part of the front left logo decorative element 3121. The right edge of the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the reverse side is shaped to follow the lettering of the logo on the second logo decorative element 3125d.

Furthermore, the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the reverse side has a second upper left logo decorative element 3125e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative element 3125c on the reverse side and constitutes part of the upper left logo decorative element 3122 on the front left of the reverse side, and a plurality of second left sub-decorative elements 3125f, which are provided in relief to the left of the second back left logo decorative element 3125d on the reverse side and constitute part of the front left sub-decorative element 3123 on the front left of the reverse side. The second upper left logo decorative element 3125e is formed to be slightly smaller than the first upper left logo decorative element 3124e of the first decorative element 3124 on the front left of the reverse side. The second left sub-decorative element 3125f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative element 3124f and is formed to be slightly smaller and in a similar shape.

Although the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the reverse side is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, etc., it is actually transparent. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(b), the second reverse left logo decorative element 3125d, the second upper left logo decorative element 3125e, and the second left sub-decorative element 3125f, which are located on the rear surface, can be seen from the front.

When assembled to the front left decorative unit 3120, the front left first decorative element 3124 is positioned in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a, as shown in Figure 152, and the front left third decorative element 3126 is positioned behind it. In addition, when assembled, the front left second decorative element 3125 has its front end sides inserted into the recessed substrate holding portion 3125b, which is recessed forward. The front end sides of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the front left reflector 3131, the front end sides of the upper left decorative substrate 3129 and the upper left reflector 3132, and the front end sides of the lower left decorative substrate 3130 and the lower left reflector 3133, respectively. On the left side of the decorative panel 3125a, the second lower LED 3128c and second upper LED 3128d of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are located to the left. On the upper surface, the second LED of the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 is located above, and on the lower surface, the second LED 3130b of the front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is located below, respectively.

When the second decorative element on the front left of the back front left, the decorative element 3125, illuminates, the second lower LED 3128c on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the front lower decorative substrate 3130 illuminate. Light entering the interior from below the partition decorative element 3125c on the left side of the decorative plate 3125a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate 3125a, illuminates the second back left logo decorative element 3125d and the second left sub-decorative element 3125f. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative element 3125c also illuminates.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3125c, when light incident inside from the second lower LED 3128c of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b of the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3125c, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3125c. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3125c reaches the opposite inner surface, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3125c. Thus, the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is significantly dimmed as it passes through the partition decorative section 3125c. Therefore, the second upper left logo decorative section 3125e above the partition decorative section 3125c is hardly illuminated (illuminated) by the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130. This allows only the second back left logo decorative section 3125d and the second left sub-decorative section 3125f to be brightly illuminated.

Furthermore, when the second upper LED 3128d on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decorative section 3125e is illuminated by light entering the interior from above the partition decorative section 3125c on the left side of the decorative plate section 3125a, and by light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate section 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative section 3125c is also illuminated.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3125c, when light incident inside from the second upper LED 3128d of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED of the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3125c, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3125c. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3125c reaches the inner surface on the opposite side, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3125c. Thus, the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is significantly attenuated as it passes through the partition decorative section 3125c. Therefore, the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the second LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 barely illuminates the second back left logo decorative section 3125d and the second left sub-decorative section 3125f below the partition decorative section 3125c, allowing only the second upper left logo decorative section 3125e to be brightly illuminated.

Thus, the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the reverse side is configured so that the upper and lower sections can be illuminated independently, separated by the dividing decorative section 3125c.

The third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the back is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3126a parallel to the decorative plate portion 3125a of the first decorative element 3124 and the second decorative element 3125 on the front left of the back, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a, excluding the right side. The rear surface of the flange portion 3126b of the third decorative element 3126 is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined such that its right side is positioned further rearward than its left side.

Furthermore, the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the back has a dividing decorative element 3126c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back, located approximately 3/4 of the way up from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3126a. This dividing decorative element 3126c is the same size and height as the dividing decorative element 3124a of the first decorative element 3124 on the front left of the back.

Furthermore, the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the reverse side is located below the dividing decorative element 3126c on the rear surface and has a relief-like third logo decorative element 3126d that forms part of the front left logo decorative element 3121. The right edge of the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the reverse side is shaped to follow the lettering of the logo on the third logo decorative element 3126d.

Furthermore, the reverse front left third decorative element 3126 has a third upper left logo decorative element 3126e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative element 3126c on the reverse side and constitutes part of the reverse front left upper logo decorative element 3122, and a plurality of third left sub-decorative elements 3126f, which are provided in relief to the left of the third reverse left logo decorative element 3126d on the reverse side and constitute part of the reverse front left sub-decorative element 3123. The third upper left logo decorative element 3126e is formed to be slightly smaller than the second upper left logo decorative element 3125e of the reverse front left second decorative element 3125. The third left sub-decorative element 3126f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative element 3124f and is formed to be similar in shape to the first left sub-decorative element 3124f and the second left sub-decorative element 3125f.

Although the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the reverse side is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, etc., it is actually transparent. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(c), the third rear left logo decorative element 3126d, the third upper left logo decorative element 3126e, and the third left sub-decorative element 3126f, which are located on the rear side, can be seen from the front.

When assembled to the rear front left third decorative element 3126 on the rear front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in Figure 152, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left first decorative element 3124 and the rear front left second decorative element 3125 are positioned in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a, while the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 are positioned behind it. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the rear front left third decorative element 3126 has the third lower LED 3128e and the third upper LED 3128f of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 positioned to the left of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3126a, the third LED of the rear front left upper decorative substrate 3129 positioned above the upper surface, and the third LED 3130c of the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 positioned below the lower surface.

When the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the back surface illuminates, the third lower LED 3128e on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the lower front left decorative substrate 3130 illuminate. Light entering the interior from below the partition decorative element 3126c on the left side of the decorative plate 3126a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate 3126a, illuminates the third back left logo decorative element 3126d and the third left sub-decorative element 3126f. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative element 3126c also illuminates.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3126c, when light incident inside from the third lower LED 3128e of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c of the front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3126c, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3126c. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3126c reaches the opposite inner surface, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3126c. Thus, the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130 is significantly dimmed as it passes through the partition decorative section 3126c. Therefore, the third upper left logo decorative section 3126e above the partition decorative section 3126c is hardly illuminated (illuminated) by the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the front lower left decorative substrate 3130. This allows only the third back left logo decorative section 3126d and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f to be brightly illuminated.

Furthermore, when the third decorative element on the front left of the back front left, the third upper LED 3128f on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative element 3126e is illuminated by light entering the interior from above the partition decorative element 3126c on the left side of the decorative plate 3126a, and by light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative element 3126c is also illuminated.

Furthermore, in the partition decorative section 3126c, when light incident inside from the third upper LED 3128f of the front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED of the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner surface, a portion of the light that reaches it is reflected by that inner surface to the upper interior side of the partition decorative section 3126c, while the remainder is radiated from the inner surface into the inside of the hole in the partition decorative section 3126c. Then, when the light radiated into the inside of the partition decorative section 3126c reaches the opposite inner surface, a portion of it is reflected back into the partition decorative section 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner surface into the lower interior side of the partition decorative section 3126c. Thus, the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 is significantly attenuated as it passes through the partition decorative section 3126c. Therefore, the third back left logo decorative section 3126d and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f below the partition decorative section 3126c are hardly illuminated (illuminated) by the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the third LED on the front upper left decorative substrate 3129. This allows only the third upper left logo decorative section 3126e to be brightly illuminated.

Thus, the third decorative element 3126 on the front left of the reverse side is configured so that the upper and lower sections can be illuminated independently, separated by the dividing decorative section 3126c.

The front left decorative base 3127 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a substrate holding portion 3127b provided around the decorative plate portion 3127a, excluding the right edge (left edge, top edge, bottom edge). The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100.

The substrate holding portion 3127b extends outward from the decorative plate portion 3127a, has its rear surface positioned towards the rear, and is recessed from the front side toward the rear. The substrate holding portion 3127b works in cooperation with the substrate holding portion 3125b of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 to clamp and hold the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, the rear front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and the rear front lower left decorative substrate 3130. Furthermore, the left end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper part of the substrate holding portion 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 is attached to the lower part.

Furthermore, the front left decorative base 3127 has three front left band decorative sections 3127c that extend vertically at a constant height across the entire width near the center of the rear surface of the decorative plate section 3127a, spaced apart vertically, and a base upper left logo decorative section 3127d that is provided in a relief-like manner near the upper part of the rear surface of the decorative plate section 3127a and forms part of the front left upper logo decorative section 3122. The base upper left logo decorative section 3127d is formed to be slightly smaller than the third upper left logo decorative section 3126e of the third front left decorative section 3126.

Although the front left decorative base 3127 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, it is actually transparent. Therefore, as shown in Figure 155(d), the front left band decorative section 3127c and the upper left logo decorative section 3127d, which are located on the rear surface, can be seen from the front.

When assembled to the front left decorative unit 3120, the front left decorative base 3127 has the light guide plate 3110 and the left diffusion lens 3134 positioned in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a, as shown in Figure 152, etc. Furthermore, in the assembled state, the rear ends of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the front left reflector 3131, the rear upper left decorative substrate 3129 and the rear upper left reflector 3132, and the rear lower left decorative substrate 3130 and the rear lower left reflector 3133 are inserted into the rearward-recessed substrate holding portion 3127b. The LEDs below the base 3128h and above the base 3128i of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are located to the left of the left side of the decorative plate portion 3127a.

The rear front left decorative base 3127 can illuminate the rear front left band decorative section 3127c of the decorative plate section 3127a when the LED 3128h under the base of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 is illuminated. Each of the three rear front left band decorative sections 3127c can be illuminated independently. Furthermore, the rear front left decorative base 3127 can illuminate the upper left logo decorative section 3127d of the base when the LED 3128i on the base of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 is illuminated.

The rear front left decorative substrate 3128 is a long, flat plate oriented vertically, with its surface facing left to right. The rear front left decorative substrate 3128 is positioned to the left of the rear front left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the rear front left decorative body base 3127. The rear front left decorative substrate 3128, together with the rear front left reflector 3131, is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the rear front left decorative body base 3127.

The back front left decorative substrate 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and has multiple first lower LEDs 3128a located below the dividing decorative section 3124a, multiple first upper LEDs 3128b located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and has multiple second lower LEDs 3128c located to the left of the decorative plate section 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and has multiple second lower LEDs 3128c located below the dividing decorative section 3125c, and the back front left second decorative It comprises a plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the body 3125 and positioned above the dividing decorative portion 3125c; a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and positioned below the dividing decorative portion 3126c; and a plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and positioned above the dividing decorative portion 3126c.

Furthermore, the front left decorative substrate 3128 includes multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), three base-under LEDs 3128h located to the left of the front left band decorative portion 3127c on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the front left decorative body base 3127, and multiple base-up LEDs 3128i located to the left of the base-upper left logo decorative portion 3127d on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the front left decorative body base 3127.

By illuminating the multiple first lower LEDs 3128a on the front left decorative substrate 3128, the first front left logo decoration section 3124c and the first back left logo decoration section 3124d of the front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple first upper LEDs 3128b on the front left decorative substrate 3128, the first upper left logo decoration section 3124e of the front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple second lower LEDs 3128c on the front left decorative substrate 3128, the second back left logo decoration section 3125d of the front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple second upper LEDs 3128d on the front left decorative substrate 3128, the second upper left logo decoration section 3125e of the front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated.

Furthermore, illuminating the multiple third lower LEDs 3128e on the front left decorative substrate 3128 allows the third back left logo decoration section 3126d, etc., of the front left third decorative body 3126 to be illuminated. Similarly, illuminating the multiple third upper LEDs 3128f on the front left decorative substrate 3128 allows the third upper left logo decoration section 3126e, etc., of the front left third decorative body 3126 to be illuminated.

When the multiple LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate on the front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated via the left diffusion lens 3134. When the multiple (three) LEDs 3128h under the base of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the front left band decorative section 3127c of the front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated. When the multiple LEDs 3128i on the base of the front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the upper left logo decorative section 3127d of the front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated.

The first lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, base lower LED 3128h, and base upper LED 3128i, all mounted on the right side of the front left decorative substrate 3128, are full-color LEDs.

Furthermore, the front left decorative substrate 3128 has a white solder resist (protective material) coating on its surface. This white solder resist makes the front left decorative substrate 3128 less visible and reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the first pattern 3111, the front left logo decoration section 3121, the upper left logo decoration section 3122, and the front left sub-decorative section 3123 of the light guide plate 3110 to emit brighter light. Additionally, the front left decorative substrate 3128 has letters and symbols printed on it using high-brightness and high-saturation ink (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates. This makes the letters and symbols less conspicuous. Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the front left decorative substrate 3128 also has connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. mounted on it, in addition to the LEDs.

The upper left decorative substrate 3129 is a long, flat plate with its surface oriented vertically. It is positioned above the first left decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the second left decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third left decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the base 3127. The upper left decorative substrate 3129, together with the upper left reflector 3132, is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the second left decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the base 3127.

The front left upper decorative substrate 3129, although not shown in the illustration, comprises a plurality of first LEDs located above the front left first decorative element 3124, a plurality of second LEDs located above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the front left second decorative element 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs located above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the front left third decorative element 3126.

By illuminating the multiple first LEDs on the front left upper decorative substrate 3129, the first upper left logo decoration section 3124e of the front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple second LEDs on the front left upper decorative substrate 3129, the second upper left logo decoration section 3125e of the front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple third LEDs on the front left upper decorative substrate 3129, the third upper left logo decoration section 3126e of the front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated.

The multiple first, second, and third LEDs mounted on the underside of the decorative circuit board 3129 on the upper left of the back are full-color LEDs.

Furthermore, the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 on the back is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface. This white solder resist makes the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 less visible and reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the front left upper logo decoration section 3122 and other elements to illuminate more brightly. Additionally, the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 has letters and symbols printed on it using high-brightness, high-saturation ink (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates. This makes the letters and symbols less conspicuous. Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the front left upper decorative substrate 3129 also has connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. mounted on it, in addition to the LEDs.

The rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is a long, flat plate with its surface oriented vertically. The rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 is positioned below the rear front left first decorative body 3124, the rear front left second decorative body 3125's decorative plate portion 3125a, the rear front left third decorative body 3126's decorative plate portion 3126a, and the rear front left decorative body base 3127's decorative plate portion 3127a. The rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130, together with the rear front left lower reflector 3133, is sandwiched between the substrate holding portion 3125b of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 and the substrate holding portion 3127b of the rear front left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 comprises a plurality of first LEDs 3130a located below the rear front left first decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs 3130b located below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c located below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126.

By illuminating the multiple first LEDs 3130a on the lower left front decorative substrate 3130, the first front left logo decorative section 3124c and the first back left logo decorative section 3124d of the first front left decorative body 3124 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple second LEDs 3130b on the lower left front decorative substrate 3130, the second back left logo decorative section 3125d of the second front left decorative body 3125 can be illuminated. By illuminating the multiple third LEDs 3130c on the lower left front decorative substrate 3130, the third back left logo decorative section 3126d of the third front left decorative body 3126 can be illuminated.

The multiple first LEDs 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c mounted on the underside of the decorative substrate 3130 on the lower left front of the back are full-color LEDs.

Furthermore, the decorative substrate 3130 on the lower left front of the back panel is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface. This white solder resist makes the decorative substrate 3130 less visible and reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the logo decoration section 3121 and other elements on the lower left front panel to illuminate more brightly. Additionally, the decorative substrate 3130 has letters and symbols printed on it using high-brightness, high-saturation ink (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative substrates and the mounted LEDs. This makes the letters and symbols less conspicuous. Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the decorative substrate 3130 also has connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc., mounted on it in addition to the LEDs.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is positioned between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 (rear front left reflector 3131), and is sandwiched between the rear front left third decorative element 3126 and the rear front left decorative element base 3127. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses the light from the multiple LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, illuminating the left side of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in Figure 157, the reverse front left decorative unit 3120 is formed by the overlapping of the first front left logo decorative section 3124c and the first reverse left logo decorative section 3124d of the first reverse front left decorative body 3124, the second reverse left logo decorative section 3125d of the second reverse front left decorative body 3125, and the third reverse left logo decorative section 3126d of the third reverse front left decorative body 3126, thereby forming a single reverse front left logo decorative section 3121. Because the front-to-back positions of these sections differ, the degree of overlap changes as the player's eye position shifts, allowing a predetermined logo consisting of multiple letters to be displayed three-dimensionally.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c of the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 as appropriate. This allows the first front left logo decorative section 3124c, the first rear left logo decorative section 3124d, the second rear left logo decorative section 3125d, and the third rear left logo decorative section 3126d to be illuminated independently, enabling the rear front left logo decorative section 3121 to be illuminated in a variety of lighting patterns.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 157, the front-left decorative unit 3120 is formed by the overlapping of the first upper-left logo decorative section 3124e of the first front-left decorative body 3124, the second upper-left logo decorative section 3125e of the second front-left decorative body 3125, the third upper-left logo decorative section 3126e of the third front-left decorative body 3126, and the base upper-left logo decorative section 3127d of the front-left decorative body base 3127, thereby forming a single front-left upper-left logo decorative section 3122. Because the front-to-back positions of these sections—the first upper-left logo decorative section 3124e, the second upper-left logo decorative section 3125e, the third upper-left logo decorative section 3126e, and the base upper-left logo decorative section 3127d—change as the player's eye position shifts, allowing the stylized "A" logo to appear three-dimensional.

Furthermore, even with logos such as the first upper left logo decoration section 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration section 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration section 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration section 3127d, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, the reverse front left first decoration section 3124, the reverse front left second decoration section 3125, the reverse front left third decoration section 3126, and the reverse front left decoration section base 3127 can be sequentially illuminated to present a dynamic, pseudo-animation to the player, strongly appealing to them. This animation-like illumination effect can be achieved by sequentially illuminating the first front left logo decoration section 3124c, the first reverse left logo decoration section 3124d, the second reverse left logo decoration section 3125d, and the third reverse left logo decoration section 3126d.

Furthermore, the front left decorative unit 3120 allows the first upper LED 3128b, second upper LED 3128d, third upper LED 3128f, base upper LED 3128i of the front left decorative substrate 3128, and the first, second, and third LEDs of the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 to be illuminated as appropriate, thereby independently illuminating the first upper left logo decoration section 3124e, the second upper left logo decoration section 3125e, the third upper left logo decoration section 3126e, and the base upper left logo decoration section 3127d. This enables the front upper left logo decoration section 3122 to be illuminated in a variety of lighting patterns.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is formed by the overlapping of the first left sub-decorative section 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second left sub-decorative section 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126, thereby forming a single back front left sub-decorative section 3123. Because the front-to-back positions of these three sections—the first left sub-decorative section 3124f, the second left sub-decorative section 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f—change as the player's eye position shifts, allowing the back front left sub-decorative section 3123 to appear three-dimensional.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 allows the first left sub-decorative section 3124f, the second left sub-decorative section 3125f, and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f to be illuminated independently by appropriately illuminating the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c of the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130. This enables the rear front left sub-decorative section 3123 to be illuminated in a variety of lighting patterns.

Furthermore, since the front left decorative unit 3120 includes a dividing decorative section 3124a of the first front left decorative body 3124, a dividing decorative section 3125c of the second front left decorative body 3125, and a dividing decorative section 3126c of the third front left decorative body 3126, the dividing decorative sections 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c clearly separate the luminous decoration on the lower side (front left logo decorative section 3121, front left sub-decorative section 3123) and the upper side (front left upper logo decorative section 3122), thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the luminous decoration of the front left logo decorative section 3121 and the front left sub-decorative section 3123, as well as the luminous decoration of the front left upper logo decorative section 3122. In this process, the partition decorative sections 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c are also illuminated, thereby improving their appearance and allowing for enjoyable illumination.

Furthermore, when the front left decorative unit 3120 illuminates the first lower LED 3128a of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the front lower left decorative substrate 3130, it can illuminate the through-type decorative section 3124b of the front left first decorative body 3124, which is below the dividing decorative section 3124a. Also, when the first upper LED 3128b of the front left decorative substrate 3128 and the first LED of the front upper left decorative substrate 3129 are illuminated, it can illuminate the through-type decorative section 3124b of the front left first decorative body 3124, which is above the dividing decorative section 3124a. This illumination of the through-type decorative section 3124b also improves the appearance.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 by illuminating the LED 3128g for the light guide plate on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, in cooperation with the LEDs for the light guide plate on the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, the rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and the rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

Thus, the rear front left decorative unit 3120, with its transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the rear front left logo decorative section 3121, the rear front upper left logo decorative section 3122, and the rear front left sub-decorative section 3123, can improve the appearance within the game area 5a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the front left logo decoration section 3121, the front upper left logo decoration section 3122, and the front left sub-decoration section 3123 can be illuminated in various lighting patterns, the diverse lighting effects can keep players from getting bored and prevent a decline in their interest.

In the above description, the partition decorative sections 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c, which block light from the LED, are shown as penetrating from front to back. However, the design is not limited to these, and grooves or protrusions may also be used. Furthermore, the second decorative body 3125 on the front left of the back may be provided with a projection that is inserted into the penetrating decorative section 3124b of the first decorative body 3124 on the front left of the back, allowing the first decorative body 3124 on the front left to be positioned by inserting the projection. In other words, the penetrating decorative section 3124b may also serve as a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Front right decorative unit]
The front right decorative unit 3140 in the front back performance unit 3100 has a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), and includes a vertically elongated front right logo decorative section 3141 consisting of a string of letters, a front right upper right logo decorative section 3142 (see Figure 151(b)) provided above the front right logo decorative section 3141 and featuring a stylized "A", and a front right sub-decorative section (not shown) provided near the front right logo decorative section 3141.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 comprises a transparent rear front right first decorative body 3144, which is vertically elongated in front view; a transparent rear front right second decorative body 3145 located behind the rear front right first decorative body 3144; a transparent rear front right third decorative body 3146 located behind the rear front right second decorative body 3145; and a transparent rear front right decorative body base 3147 located behind the rear front right third decorative body 3146 (see Figure 152).

The rear front right decorative base 3147 has the right end of the upper connecting base 3190 attached to its upper part, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the rear front lower display unit 3160 attached to its lower part. Furthermore, the rear front right decorative base 3147 has three rear front right band decorative sections 3147a that extend vertically at a constant height across its entire width, spaced apart vertically, near the center in the vertical direction (see Figure 151(b)).

Furthermore, the front-right decorative unit 3140 includes a first front-right decorative substrate 3148 and a second front-right decorative substrate 3149 for illuminating the first pattern 3111, the front-right logo decorative section 3141, the upper right front logo decorative section 3142, and the sub-decorative section of the front-right of the light guide plate 3110; a front-right decorative substrate 3150 for illuminating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110; an upper right front decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating the upper right front logo decorative section 3142; and a lower right front decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating the front-right logo decorative section 3141 (see Figure 156).

Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, a right middle diffusion lens 3154 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and a right lower diffusion lens 3155 provided between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right decorative substrate 3150 (see Figure 156). The upper right diffusion lens 3153, the right middle diffusion lens 3154, and the right lower diffusion lens 3155 are provided between the rear front right third decorative body 3146 and the rear front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 includes a first rear guidance passage 3156 that receives the game ball B, which is received in the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the first guidance passage 2701, and guides it downward; and a second rear guidance passage 3157 that receives the game ball B, which is received in the second sub-out opening 2022 of the side right middle unit 2700 and guided backward by the second guidance passage, and guides it downward. A general prize entry opening sensor 3001 is provided within the first rear guidance passage 3156. The game ball B guided in the first rear guidance passage 3156 and the second rear guidance passage 3157 are discharged to the lower circuit board holder 1200 via the rear front lower display unit 3160.

Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 includes a distribution passage through which game balls B, which have been received into the prize entry opening 2006 of the second attacker unit 2600 and guided to the rear by the guidance passage 2613, flow, and through which a V prize entry opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 are provided; a V prize entry door 3006 that moves back and forth within the distribution passage and distributes the game balls B received into the prize entry opening 2006 to either the V prize entry opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008; a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V prize entry door 3006 back and forth; a V prize entry sensor 3003 that detects the game balls B distributed to the V prize entry opening 2007; and a losing opening sensor 3004 that detects the game balls B distributed to the losing opening 2008. The game balls B detected by the V-prize sensor 3003 and the losing slot sensor 3004 are discharged to the lower circuit board holder 1200 via the lower front display unit 3160.

The configuration of the front right logo decoration section 3141, the front right logo decoration section 3142, and the front right sub-decoration section in the front right decoration unit 3140 is the same as that of the front left decoration unit 3120, and a detailed explanation is omitted.

Furthermore, the first front right decorative element 3144, the second front right decorative element 3145, and the third front right decorative element 3146 of the front right decorative unit 3140 have a dividing decorative element 3144a that extends left and right and penetrates front and back, between the front right logo decorative element 3141 and the front right upper right logo decorative element 3142. This dividing decorative element 3144a allows the front right logo decorative element 3141 and the front right upper right logo decorative element 3142 to be illuminated independently.

Furthermore, the front right first decorative element 3144 on the reverse side has multiple through-decorative sections 3144b that penetrate from front to back. These multiple through-decorative sections 3144b can achieve the same effects as the through-decorative section 3124b of the front left first decorative element 3124 on the reverse side.

Thus, the rear front right decorative unit 3140, similar to the rear front left decorative unit 3120, allows for the creation of transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the rear front right logo decorative section 3141, the rear front upper right logo decorative section 3142, and the rear front right sub-decorative section, thereby improving the appearance within the game area 5a and providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, since the front right logo decoration section 3141, the front right logo decoration section 3142, and the front right sub-decoration section can be illuminated in various lighting patterns, the diverse lighting effects can keep players from getting bored and prevent a decline in their interest.

Furthermore, by sequentially illuminating the front right first decorative element 3144, the front right second decorative element 3145, the front right third decorative element 3146, and the front right decorative element base 3147 in the front right logo decorative element 3141 and the front right upper right logo decorative element 3142, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, it is possible to present a dynamic, pseudo-animation to the player, thereby strongly appealing to them.

[5-9a-4. Backstage Front Stage Production Unit]
The lower front display unit 3160 in the front front display unit 3100 comprises a disc-shaped lower front decorative body 3161 with the word "SPIN" inscribed on the upper part of the center in the left-right direction, a lower front rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates the lower front decorative body 3161 around an axis in the front-rear direction, and a lower front lifting drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the lower front decorative body 3161. The lower front decorative body 3161 is translucent.

Furthermore, the rear front lower display unit 3160 includes a disc-shaped rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163 of the same size, located to the left of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161; a disc-shaped rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164 of the same size, located to the left of the rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163; a disc-shaped rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165 of the same size, located to the right of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161; and a disc-shaped rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166 of the same size, located to the right of the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165. The rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166 are translucent.

Furthermore, the lower front display unit 3160 is located to the left of the lower left outer decorative element 3164 and includes a lower front logo decorative element 3167 bearing the word "Queen." The lower front logo decorative element 3167 is translucent.

Furthermore, the lower front display unit 3160 includes a lower front central decorative board 3168 for illuminating the lower front central decorative element 3161, a lower front left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating the lower front left inner decorative element 3163, a lower front left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating the lower front left outer decorative element 3164, a lower front right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating the lower front right inner decorative element 3165, a lower front right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating the lower front right outer decorative element 3166, and a lower front logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating the lower front logo decorative element 3167 (see Figure 156(b)).

These rear front lower center decorative substrates 3168, rear front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, rear front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, rear front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, rear front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172, and rear front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 are located behind the rear front lower center decorative body 3161, rear front lower left inner decorative body 3163, rear front lower left outer decorative body 3164, rear front lower right inner decorative body 3165, rear front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and rear front lower logo decorative body 3167.

Furthermore, the rear front lower center decorative substrate 3168, the rear front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, the rear front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, the rear front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, the rear front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172, and the rear front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 all have multiple full-color LEDs mounted on their front surfaces and are coated with white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist reflects light from the LEDs and other sources, allowing the decorative elements located in front of each substrate to emit bright light.

Furthermore, the rear front lower center decorative substrate 3168, the rear front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, the rear front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, the rear front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, the rear front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172, and the rear front lower logo decorative substrate 3173 are screen-printed with letters and symbols using high-brightness and high-saturation ink (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates. This makes the letters and symbols less conspicuous through the decorative elements located at the front, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative elements is reliably achieved.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower center decorative board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower left inner decorative board 3169, rear front lower left outer decorative board 3170, rear front lower right inner decorative board 3171, rear front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and rear front lower logo decorative board 3173 are side-view type LEDs.

Furthermore, these decorative circuit boards have non-light-emitting components (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) on the rear (back) side to avoid interfering with the illumination.

The rear front lower center decorative element 3161, the rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166, and the rear front lower logo decorative element 3167 are positioned above the lower end of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 156. As a result, the lower end of the light guide plate 3110 is not visible from the player's side (front). Furthermore, the upper ends of the rear front lower center decorative element 3161, the rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166 are positioned below the lower end of the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 160, and are arranged in the left-right direction at intervals corresponding to each line group 3114 that constitutes the second pattern 3112.

More specifically, the front lower center decorative element 3161 is provided to correspond to the third line group 3114c, the front lower left inner decorative element 3163 to the second line group 3114b, the front lower left outer decorative element 3164 to the first line group 3114a, the front lower right inner decorative element 3165 to the fourth line group 3114d, and the front lower right outer decorative element 3166 to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, by illuminating the front lower center decorative element 3161, the front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the front lower right outer decorative element 3166 (either illuminating only the upper end or the entire element), the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 can be made to appear as if it is illuminated by light from the front lower center decorative element 3161, the front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the front lower right outer decorative element 3166, thus creating an illumination effect that has not been seen in previous pachinko machines.

Furthermore, the rear front lower display unit 3160 is located behind the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168, the rear front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the rear front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the rear front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the rear front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the rear front lower logo decorative board 3173. It includes the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 for illuminating (illuminating) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 (see Figure 156(a)).

The lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate each have five LED groups 3177, each consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 in each LED group 3177 are arranged from right to left in the order of first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e. Furthermore, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and is arranged from left to right in the order of first LED group 3177a, second LED group 3177b, third LED group 3177c, fourth LED group 3177d, and fifth LED group 3177e.

The decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate has LEDs 3176 from the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b mounted on it. The decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate has LEDs 3176 from the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e mounted on it.

The multiple LEDs 3176 mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are side-view type full-color LEDs. The lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces. This white solder resist makes the lower left and right decorative substrates 3174 and 3175 less conspicuous from the front. Furthermore, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs 3176 and other decorative substrates are screen-printed on the lower left and right decorative substrates using high-brightness and high-saturation ink (e.g., yellow). This makes the letters and symbols less conspicuous through the decorative elements provided at the front, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative elements is effectively realized.

The lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate can, when the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177 is illuminated, illuminate the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. Furthermore, when the second LED 3176b is illuminated, illuminate the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. Furthermore, when the third LED 3176c is illuminated, illuminate the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. In addition, when the fourth LED 3176d is illuminated, illuminate the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110. Furthermore, by illuminating the fifth LED 3176e, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration).

This allows each of the multiple lines 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 to be illuminated independently (illuminated decoration), enabling a variety of illumination effects to be shown to the player, keeping the player from getting bored, and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the rear front lower display unit 3160 supports the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161, the rear front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the rear front lower logo decorative body 3167, the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168, the rear front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the rear front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the rear front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the rear front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the rear front lower logo decorative board 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, etc., and is equipped with a long, flat unit base 3178. The lower ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140 are attached near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

Furthermore, the rear front lower performance unit 3160 has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives the game balls B received in the three general prize entry openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower circuit board holder 1200, a second discharge passage 3182 that receives the game balls B received in the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100 and discharges them to the lower circuit board holder 1200, and a second start opening 2004 of the first attacker unit 2400 It includes a third discharge passage 3183 that receives game balls B and discharges them to the lower circuit board holder 1200, a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives game balls B received at the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the lower circuit board holder 1200, and a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives game balls B received at the first sub-out opening 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the lower circuit board holder 1200.

The first discharge passage 3181 has three transfer ports corresponding to the three general prize entry ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general prize entry port sensors 3001 are provided corresponding to each transfer port. Furthermore, the second discharge passage 3182 is equipped with a first start port sensor 3002.

This lower front display unit 3160, consisting of a lower front center decorative element 3161, a lower front left inner decorative element 3163, a lower front left outer decorative element 3164, a lower front right inner decorative element 3165, a lower front right outer decorative element 3166, and a lower front logo decorative element 3167, can decorate the lower part of the game area 5a, improving its appearance. Furthermore, by illuminating these elements, it can entertain players with luminous effects. Additionally, the lower front center decorative element 3161 can rotate via a lower front rotation drive motor and move up and down via a lower front lifting drive motor 3162, allowing for movable effects to entertain players.

Furthermore, the lower front display unit 3160 can illuminate the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 using multiple LEDs 3176 on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate, allowing players to enjoy the illumination effect of the second pattern 3112.

[5-9a-5. Characteristic effects of the backstage production unit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the back front display unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5, LEDs 3176 for illuminating the light guide plate 3110 and the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are mounted on the front front lower display unit 3160, such as the back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168, back front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169, back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171, and back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172, which emit light forward. The back front lower center decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc., which are capable of being illuminated by LEDs, and by providing LEDs 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175) behind the back front lower center decorative body 3161, etc., the LEDs 3176 can be hidden from the player by the back front lower center decorative body 3161, etc., making it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the LEDs 3176, that is, the light guide plate 3110. In this state, when the LED 3176 illuminates the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 illuminate the back front lower middle decorative element 3161, the light from the LED 3176 is reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, while the light from the LEDs on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is directly shone forward. Therefore, the illuminated back front lower middle decorative element 3161 shines brighter than the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, strongly attracting the player's attention to the back front lower middle decorative element 3161. Furthermore, since the illuminated second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly above) close to the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., it is possible to strongly mislead the player into believing that the illuminated second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated using the light from the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc. as the light source. This allows the player to see an illumination effect using the light guide plate 3110 that has never been seen in previous pachinko machines, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their interest.

Furthermore, since the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and lower right decorative substrate 3175, and the lower front center decorative body 3161 are provided in front of the light guide plate 3110, the light from the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and lower right decorative substrate 3175 illuminates the light guide plate 3110, preventing the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being visible to the player. This allows the luminous display effect of the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to be fully realized, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that reliably achieves the aforementioned effects.

Furthermore, since the translucent rear front lower middle decorative element 3161, etc., is provided in front of the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate, when the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are illuminated, the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161, etc., can be illuminated. Therefore, in addition to the illumination display of the second pattern 3112, etc., on the light guide plate 3110, the illumination display of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161, etc., can also be shown to the player, allowing for a variety of effects that keep the player engaged and prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated, and the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate are illuminated, as described above, the LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the light guide plate cause the back front lower middle decorative element 3161 etc. to shine brightly, thereby attracting the player's attention to the illuminated back front lower middle decorative element 3161 etc. At the same time, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, which extends upward from a predetermined position above the back front lower middle decorative element 3161, etc., can direct the player's attention from the back front lower middle decorative element 3161 etc. to the upper end of the second pattern 3112 that extends from the light guide plate 3110. Therefore, since the upper end of the second pattern 3112 extends to a portion of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, the movable decorative element 3210 of the upper rear performance unit 3200 that moves up and down, etc., the player can be excited and thrilled depending on whether or not further performances (performances using performance images, movable performances, etc.) are executed at the end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple line groups 3114, each consisting of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position. Each line 3113 is capable of independently emitting light, and LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113. By sequentially illuminating the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177, the illuminated lines 3113 change, creating a pseudo-animation. Furthermore, because the lower front center decorative element 3161, etc., is positioned below the lower end of multiple lines 3113 (a predetermined position), the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 can appear to be moving using the light from the illuminated lower front center decorative element 3161, etc. as the light source. This creates a strong impact on the player, making them think that something good might happen, thus increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to the front-reverse display unit 3100 of this embodiment, there are multiple decorative bodies (front-reverse left first decorative body 3) that are provided with decorative parts of related shapes ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127d", "first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, third left sub-decorative part 3126f"). The front left second decorative element (3125), the front left third decorative element (3126), and the front left decorative element base (3127) are stacked in the front-to-back direction, and each decorative element can be illuminated independently by the light-emitting means (LEDs on the front left decorative substrate (3128), the front left upper decorative substrate (3129), and the front left lower decorative substrate (3130)). Because the front-to-back positions of each decorative element are different, illuminating each element creates a sense of depth in the light-emitting effect, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, each of the multiple decorative elements (the first decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3124, the second decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3125, the third decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3126, and the base of the front left decorative element on the reverse side 3127) has related decorative parts ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127d", "first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second Because the left sub-decorative section 3125f and the third left sub-decorative section 3126f are provided, the decorative sections can be illuminated in an appropriate order by the light-emitting means (LEDs on the front left decorative board 3128, the upper left decorative board 3129, and the lower left decorative board 3130). This allows the player to see a dynamic light-emitting effect, strongly attracting their attention and making them think that something good might happen, thereby increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, the decorative parts provided on each of the multiple decorative elements (the first decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3124, the second decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3125, the third decorative element on the front left of the reverse side 3126, and the base of the front left decorative element 3127) are: "the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, the first back left logo decorative part 3124d, the second back left logo decorative part 3125d, the third back left logo decorative part 3126d," "the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, and the upper left logo decorative part 3127 of the base. The "d" (first left sub-decorative section 3124f, second left sub-decorative section 3125f, third left sub-decorative section 3126f) can each be independently illuminated by light-emitting means (LEDs on the front left decorative board 3128, front upper left decorative board 3129, and front lower left decorative board 3130). Therefore, by appropriately combining the illuminated decorative sections, a variety of light-emitting effects can be presented to the player, preventing boredom and maintaining a high level of interest. Furthermore, because each decorative section can be independently illuminated, the combination of illuminated decorative sections according to the progress of the game can suggest to the player the likelihood of an advantageous game state occurring (for example, a "jackpot" game state).

Furthermore, in each of the decorative elements of the front left decorative unit 3120 (front left first decorative element 3124, front left second decorative element 3125, front left third decorative element 3126, and front left decorative element base 3127), light-shielding elements (dividing decorative elements 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c) are provided between the decorative elements (front left logo decorative element 3121, front left upper logo decorative element 3122, and front left sub-decorative element 3123) which are located at different positions. As a result, the light used to illuminate one decorative element is blocked from shining onto the other decorative element by the light-shielding elements, preventing the other decorative element from emitting light, and allowing only one (desired) decorative element to emit light. Therefore, since multiple decorative parts on a single decorative object can be illuminated independently, the appropriate decorative parts can be illuminated according to the progress of the game, allowing players to see a variety of lighting effects, thus preventing them from getting bored and suppressing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative elements of the front left decorative unit 3120 (front left first decorative element 3124, front left second decorative element 3125, front left third decorative element 3126, and front left decorative element base 3127), multiple decorative parts (front left logo decorative element 3121, front left upper logo decorative element 3122, and front left sub-decorative element 3123) are provided at different positions, and light-shielding parts (dividing decorative elements 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c) are provided between them, allowing each to be illuminated independently. Therefore, by making each decorative element of the decorative unit completely different in appearance, different types of illuminated decorations can be shown to the player as the game progresses, strongly attracting the player's attention and entertaining them with the illumination effects, thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative elements of the front left decorative unit 3120 (front left first decorative element 3124, front left second decorative element 3125, front left third decorative element 3126, and front left decorative element base 3127), perforated light-blocking sections (dividing decorative elements 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c) are provided between multiple decorative elements (front left logo decorative element 3121, front left upper logo decorative element 3122, and front left sub-decorative element 3123). Therefore, light for illuminating one of the decorative elements is emitted outward from a portion of the light-blocking section, allowing a portion of the light-blocking section to also be illuminated. Consequently, by forming the light-blocking section into a predetermined shape, the player can see both the illuminating decoration of the decorative elements and the illuminating decoration of the light-blocking section, enabling a more diverse range of illumination effects.

Furthermore, since the front-left first decorative body 3124 of the front-left decorative unit 3120 has a through-decorative section 3124b that penetrates from front to back in a predetermined shape, when the decorative sections (first front-left logo decorative section 3124c, first back-left logo decorative section 3124d, first upper-left logo decorative section 3124e, first left sub-decorative section 3124f) are illuminated as the game progresses, the circumferential surface of the through-decorative section 3124b will also illuminate. Therefore, in addition to the illumination of the decorative sections, the illumination of the through-decorative section 3124b can also be shown to the player, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

[5-9b. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figures 129 and 149. The rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the upper rear of the front performance unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010. The rear upper decoration unit 3200 includes a rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that is rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and is also movable up and down; a rear left side decorative body 3220 that has three rear left band decorative parts 3221 extending in the front-rear direction so as to be continuous with the three rear front left band decorative parts 3127c on the rear front left decorative body base 3127 of the rear front left decorative body unit 3120; and a rear right side decorative body 3230 (see Figure 131) that has three rear right band decorative parts 3231 extending in the front-rear direction so as to be continuous with the three rear front right band decorative parts 3147a on the rear front right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative body unit 3140.

The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative section 3211 (see Figure 129, etc.) in which five 7-segment display sections are arranged on the left and right, and a rear upper second decorative section 3212 (see Figure 162) located on the back side of the rear upper first decorative section 3211, in which predetermined characters (in this case, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row.

The first decorative section 3211 on the back upper movable decorative body 3210 has five 7-segment display sections, each of which is capable of independently illuminating. By combining these segments, a variety of characters, numbers, and patterns can be displayed. This allows for the display of the expected probability of whether the first or second special lottery result, determined by the acceptance of game balls B into the first and second start slots 2002 and 2004, is a "jackpot." Furthermore, the second decorative section 3212 on the back upper also has characters that are capable of independently illuminating.

The rear upper movable decorative body 3210, in its normal state, is in the raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. Depending on the results of the first and second special lottery draws, which are determined by the acceptance of game balls B into the first and second start openings 2002 and 2004, or depending on the acceptance (distribution) of game balls B into the V-prize opening 2007, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 rotates 180 degrees around its left and right axis to face the rear upper second decorative part 3212 forward, or moves from the raised position to the lowered position (see Figures 161 and 162).

This rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 can rotate and move up and down, suggesting the arrival of a chance to the player, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

The three rear left band decorative sections 3221 of the rear left side decorative body 3220 are provided so as to extend rearward from the right end of each of the three rear front left band decorative sections 3127c that extend left and right from the rear front left decorative body base 3127 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120. Each rear left band decorative section 3221 is capable of emitting light independently and is also capable of emitting light in a way that flows in the front-to-back direction.

The three rear right band decorative sections 3231 of the rear right side decorative body 3230 are provided so as to extend rearward from the right ends of each of the three rear front right band decorative sections 3147a that extend left and right from the rear front right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140. Each rear right band decorative section 3231 is capable of emitting light independently and is also capable of emitting light in a way that flows in the front-to-back direction.

[5-9c. Rear-view lower-stage production unit]
Next, the rear lower performance unit 3300 in the rear unit 3000 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figure 135, etc. The rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is mounted in the rear lower part of the rear front performance unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010, and below the rear upper performance unit 3200.

The rear lower display unit 3300 has a rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear right movable decorative body 3302, whose base ends, adjacent to each other on the left and right, are each supported so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction and so as to be vertically movable. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are formed to rotate in opposite directions as their base ends are raised and lowered.

The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302, in their normal state, rotate so that their respective ends are separated from each other, and are hidden behind the rear front display unit 3100, making them invisible from the front (player side) (see Figure 129, etc.).

The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate and rise around their base ends, with their respective tips moving upward, according to the results of the first and second special lottery draws, which are determined by the acceptance of game balls B into the first and second start openings 2002 and 2004. This causes the right side of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the left side of the rear right movable decorative body 3302 to come into contact with each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 become one large decorative body, and are positioned to be visible from the front (see Figure 163).

As a result, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 create a large decorative element in the center that depicts the letter "A," which can surprise the player and make them think that something good is about to happen, thus preventing a decline in their interest. The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 have a light-emitting decorative part made of translucent resin, and a decorative substrate with multiple LEDs mounted on the back of the light-emitting decorative part is provided. By illuminating the light-emitting decorative part with multiple LEDs, the appearance can be improved and the player's attention can be attracted.

As shown in Figure 167, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 are positioned to overlap the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 when in their appearance position. This allows the large decorative element formed by the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 to be illuminated by the first pattern 3111. Therefore, the three-dimensional decoration created by the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302, combined with the planar illumination of the first pattern 3111, creates a deep and impactful decoration for the player, strongly attracting their attention and preventing a decline in their interest in the game.

[5-10. Presentation on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the game board 5 will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 161 to 168. Figure 161 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the first rear upper decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper effect unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position with the rear upper facing forward. Figure 162 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the second rear upper decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper effect unit of the rear unit is moved to the lowered position with the rear upper second decorative part facing forward. Figure 163 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear left movable decorative body and the rear right movable decorative body in the rear lower effect unit of the rear unit are moved to the appearance position. Figure 164 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear front lower middle decorative body in the rear front lower effect unit of the rear front effect unit of the rear unit is raised.

Figure 165 is a front view of the game board showing the front left logo decoration section, front upper left logo decoration section, front left sub-decoration section, and front left band decoration section of the front front decoration unit 3120 of the front front display unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 166 is a front view of the game board showing the first image of the light guide plate in the front front display unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 167 is a front view of the game board showing the first image of the light guide plate in the front front display unit of the back unit illuminated, and the rear left movable decoration body and rear right movable decoration body in the rear lower display unit moved to their appearance positions. Figure 168 is a front view of the game board showing the second image of the light guide plate in the front front display unit of the back unit illuminated.

In this embodiment, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that demarcates the outer periphery of the game area 5a, a game panel 1100 that demarcates the rear end of the game area 5a, a starter unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side upper left unit 2300, a first attacker unit 2400, a center component 2500, a second attacker unit 2600, a side middle right unit 2700, and a gate member 2800, all of which are formed to be almost entirely transparent. Therefore, in the normal state, as shown in Figure 134, the back front performance unit of the back unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100 can be seen through them. The rear front left decorative unit 3120, rear front right decorative unit 3140 of unit 3100, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161, the rear front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the rear front lower logo decorative body 3167, the rear rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear rear left side decorative body 3220, and the rear rear right side decorative body 3230 of unit 3200, etc., can be clearly seen, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center feature 2500.

To elaborate further, the front left first decorative element 3124 of the front left decorative unit 3120 is located near the left edge of the center mechanism 2500, with about half of it located within the frame of the center mechanism 2500. Similarly, the front right first decorative element 3144 of the front right decorative unit 3140 is located near the right edge of the center mechanism 2500, with a portion of it located within the frame of the center mechanism 2500. The front lower display unit 3160 extends left and right at the bottom of the game area 5a and can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center mechanism 2500, with a portion of it being clearly visible through the frame of the center mechanism 2500.

Furthermore, the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 is located above the first start opening 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center mechanism 2500. The rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163 and the rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164 are located above the general prize opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the bottom edge of the center mechanism 2500. The rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165 and the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166 are located above the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and near the bottom edge of the center mechanism 2500. The upper parts of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161, the rear front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166 are located within the frame of the center mechanism 2500. The rear front lower logo ornament 3167 is located outside the center feature 2500 and in the lower left corner of the play area 5a.

Furthermore, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper display unit 3200 is positioned in the raised position and extends left and right above the game area 5a. The upper left portion, slightly above the center in the left-right direction, is visible through the transparent game panel 1100 and the center mechanism 2500, and a portion is clearly visible through the frame of the center mechanism 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative section 3211, which has multiple 7-segment sections, facing forward.

The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower display unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the rear front lower display unit 3160, making them invisible from the front (player side).

The game board 5, when game balls B are received into the first start slot 2002 and the second start slot 2004, determines the results of the first and second special lottery draws. Based on these results, the reverse front performance unit 3100, the reverse upper performance unit 3200, and the reverse lower performance unit 3300 of the reverse unit 3000 perform predetermined movable and illuminating effects.

Specifically, as an example of a movable display using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper display unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, as shown in Figure 161, the rear upper first decorative body 3211, which has five 7-segment sections, is moved from the raised position to the lowered position while remaining facing forward. This ensures that most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is positioned within the frame of the center mechanism 2500, allowing the rear upper first decorative body 3211 to be clearly visible. At this time, by displaying the five 7-segment sections of the rear upper first decorative body 3211 in a variable manner, the player's attention can be strongly attracted, and the player can experience suspense and excitement depending on whether or not the desired numbers or symbols are displayed in the five 7-segment sections.

Furthermore, as an example of using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, after moving the rear upper first decorative part 3211 to the lowered position while keeping it facing forward, it is rotated 180 degrees around the left-right axis, as shown in Figure 162, so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which has multiple strings of characters, faces forward. This causes the "JACKPOT" text to face forward, allowing the player to recognize that it is a "jackpot," thereby increasing the player's anticipation of a favorable game state ("jackpot" game state) and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating it around the left-right axis, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 may be made to repeatedly rotate forward and backward at the intermediate point, so that either the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward and stops rotating. This allows the player to feel suspense and excitement depending on whether the "JACKPOT" on the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward, thereby increasing the player's anticipation and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, it may be rotated 180 degrees around the left-right axis while remaining in the raised position so that the rear upper second decorative body 3212 faces forward.

Furthermore, as an effect using the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in Figure 163, from a retracted position where the respective tips are separated from each other and positioned downwards, the respective base ends are rotated in opposite directions around the axis extending front and back, and raised so that the respective tips rise and touch each other, moving to an appearance position where they are in contact with each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 form a single large decorative body stylized as the letter "A," which appears in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. This can greatly surprise the player, strongly attract their attention, and make them think that something good is about to happen, thereby increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, as an effect using the lower front decorative element 3161 in the lower front decorative element unit 3160 of the lower front decorative element unit 3100, for example, as shown in Figure 164, it can be raised or rotated around its front-to-back axis. This causes the lower front decorative element 3161 to rotate in the lower center of the game area 5a, making the player think something good is about to happen and increasing their anticipation for the game. Also, since the lower front decorative element 3161 is located directly above the first start opening 2002 and behind the stage 2513, its rotation and movement encourages the player to aim the game ball B at the first start opening 2002, allowing them to enjoy the original game ball B-shooting operation of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as an example of a performance using the front-front left decoration unit 3120 of the front-back performance unit 3100, as shown in Figure 165, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the front-front left decoration board 3128, the front-front upper left decoration board 3129, and the front-front lower left decoration board 3130, a lighting effect can be performed that illuminates the front-front left logo decoration section 3121, the front-front upper left logo decoration section 3122, the front-front left sub-decoration section 3123, the front-front left band decoration section 3127c, etc. For example, in the front-front left logo decoration section 3121, by sequentially illuminating the first front-left logo decoration section 3124c, the first back-left logo decoration section 3124d, the second back-left logo decoration section 3125d, and the third back-left logo decoration section 3126d, a lighting effect resembling a flowing neon sign can be displayed, entertaining the player.

Although not shown in the diagram, the front right decorative unit 3140 can also perform the same lighting effects as the front left decorative unit 3120, providing entertainment for the player.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the front-back effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in Figure 166, multiple LEDs 3128g for the light guide plate on the front-back left decorative substrate 3128 of the front-back left decorative unit 3120, and multiple LEDs for the light guide plate on the front-back right first decorative substrate 3148, the front-back right second decorative substrate 3149, and the front-back right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 of the front-back right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated to illuminate the first pattern 3111 (illuminated decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111, which is a stylized "A", is illuminated in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and make them think that something good is about to happen, thus preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in Figure 167, the first symbol 3111 is illuminated, and the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower effect unit 3300 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. This results in the first symbol 3111 and the large decorative element formed by the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 overlapping front to back. This creates a strong impact on the player, entertaining them and making them believe that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game) is about to occur, thus increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in Figure 168, multiple LEDs 3176 on the lower left decorative substrate 3174 and the lower right decorative substrate 3175 of the lower front display unit 3160 are appropriately illuminated to illuminate (illuminate) the second pattern 3112. As a result, multiple lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorative elements in the lower front display unit 3160—the lower front middle decorative element 3161, the lower left inner decorative element 3163, the lower left outer decorative element 3164, the lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the lower right outer decorative element 3166—are illuminated. This creates an illumination effect similar to searchlights from below on a concert stage, making the game area 5a appear dazzling and entertaining for the player.

Furthermore, as an effect using the light guide plate 3110, for example, as shown in Figure 168, the upper ends or the entirety of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161, rear front lower left inner decorative body 3163, rear front lower left outer decorative body 3164, rear front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and rear front lower right outer decorative body 3166 in the rear front lower effect unit 3160 may be illuminated while the second pattern 3112 is illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the illuminated line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 may be illuminated. This creates the illusion for the player that the line 3113 constituting the second pattern 3112 is illuminated by light from decorative elements such as the reverse front lower center decorative element 3161, the reverse front lower left inner decorative element 3163, the reverse front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the reverse front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and the reverse front lower right outer decorative element 3166, providing the player with an unprecedented luminous effect for entertainment.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 may be illuminated, and the rear upper movable decorative element 3210 may be moved to a lowered position. This allows the player to see the rear upper movable decorative element 3210 as if it were being illuminated from below by a searchlight, thus making the decorative element 3210 appear more luxurious and enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the game board 5 of this embodiment, the light-emitting and movable effects described above can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. This allows for a variety of effect patterns to be presented to the player by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., making it less likely for the player to get bored. It also allows for entertaining the player with various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control Configuration]
Next, the control configuration for various operations of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 169, etc. Figure 169 is a block diagram that schematically shows the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, with each being responsible for a specific control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during gameplay based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of game balls B, etc., and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, and RAM for temporarily storing data; a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device); a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input; a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids; a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a; a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and error displays; and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5.

The main control MPU 1310a incorporates not only its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), but also a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring its operation (system) and functions for preventing fraud.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a for individual identification. Because this ID code is stored in non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even with external devices. The main control MPU 1310a is designed to retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that forcibly resets the hardware if it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and, if the register changes to an inconsistent state, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, assuming it has been affected by electrical noise. This forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled or disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it resets without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and then executes the main control side power-on processing described later again. In this case, since the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error will inevitably occur in the main control's built-in RAM, as described later, and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633. Therefore, only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) restarts, while the payout control board 633 remains in an activated state.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that updates special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot or minor win state among various random numbers related to the game. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is predetermined), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset, rather than the predetermined initial value being fixed (i.e., the initial value is not fixed). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator, not shown, that is separate from the main control MPU 1310a), it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. This high-speed random number extraction is repeated by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from it as a special random number.

The main control input circuit lacks a reset terminal to forcibly reset the information received from detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and therefore does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from the main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit where various signals based on the detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals are output from its various output terminals, because the information based on that information is not reset by the main control system reset.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the game ball B received into the first start opening 2002, the second start opening sensor 2401 detects the game ball B received into the second start opening 2004, the general prize opening sensor 3001 detects the game ball B received into the general prize opening 2001, the gate sensor 2801 detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects the game ball B received into the large prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006. Detection signals from the following sensors, including the prize entry sensor 2601, the V-entry sensor 3003 which detects game balls B received into the V-entry slot 2007, the losing slot sensor 3004 which detects game balls B received into the losing slot 2008, the out sensor 664 which detects game balls B discharged from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 which detects unauthorized magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor which detects vibrations acting on the game board 5, are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports on the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the door frame release switch and the main frame release switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (that is, directly, without going through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit, which will be described later). From there, they are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports on the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Furthermore, the detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first start port sensor 3002, and the second start port sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and are then input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports on the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize port sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the large prize port sensor 2402, the special prize port sensor 2601, the V prize port sensor 3003, the losing port sensor 3004, the magnetic sensor 1050, and the vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are then input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports on the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit. This allows the main control solenoid drive circuit to output drive signals to the start solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, prize entry solenoid 2612, and V distribution solenoid 3007, indirectly via the panel relay board 1710. Alternatively, it can output drive signals to the status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, without going through other boards. Furthermore, based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the setting change board 1311.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various game-related information (game information) from the output terminals of its predetermined output ports to the payout control board 633, outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) from the output terminals of its predetermined output ports to the power outage monitoring circuit, and outputs a launch permission signal from the output terminals of its predetermined output ports to the payout control board 633 to indicate permission to launch game ball B. The logic of this launch permission signal, which indicates permission to launch, is set to launch permission logic when launching is permitted, and to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, when launching is not permitted. Furthermore, the logic of the launch permission signal is configured, as an initial value (default), to be set to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverted launch permission logic, from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the launch permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt processing described later begins. This is achieved through hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the gate sensor 2801, the large prize port sensor 2402, the special prize port sensor 2601, the V prize port sensor 3003, the losing port sensor 3004, and the out sensor 664 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general prize port sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because game balls B frequently enter or pass through the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the gate 2003, resulting in frequent detection of game balls B by the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801. Therefore, highly durable and long-lasting proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, and the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, when a favorable game state occurs that is advantageous to the player (such as a "jackpot" game), the large prize slot 2005 opens and game balls B enter frequently, resulting in frequent detection of game balls B by the large prize slot sensor 2402. For this reason, the large prize slot sensor 2402 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and a long lifespan. In addition, game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the out slot 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, resulting in frequent detection of game balls B by the out sensor 664. For this reason, the out sensor 664 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and a long lifespan. In contrast, the general prize slot 2001, into which game balls B do not enter frequently, does not experience frequent detection by the general prize slot sensor 3001. For this reason, the general prize slot sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch with a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not game ball B frequently enters the general prize slot 2001, a proximity switch with high durability and a long lifespan may be used.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. Note that, although a detailed explanation will follow later, when the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

The main control board 1310 receives various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, although a detailed explanation will follow later. This power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double-layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power supply to provide power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing, even when the power supply is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated upon power-up. The operation signal (detection signal) for this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors the decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing Control Board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b that performs launch control by launch solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED indicator that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch having a pressable operation part for clearing errors displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch for initiating a ball removal operation during maintenance by discharging the game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201).

[6-2a. Dispensing Control Unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various dispensing controls on the dispensing control board 633, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor with built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and commands, and RAM for temporarily storing data; a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device; an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally; a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580; and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port in a serial manner. In addition to receiving operation signals (detection signals) for the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, it also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, as well as detection signals from the ball depletion detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the flipper rotation detection sensor 590.

Detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 574 of the ball-guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and then to the payout control MPU via the payout control I/O port.

Furthermore, detection signals from the door frame release switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame release switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and then to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

Furthermore, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to predetermined input ports of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O, outputs a signal to the error LED indicator to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 via the payout control I/O port, transmits commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 serially via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually dispensed to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the amusement hall side. This hall computer monitors the players' games by understanding the number of game balls B dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator (not shown in the diagram) is a segment display that shows the status of pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, shapes, etc. The error LED indicator displays and notifies the following: For example, when the symbol "-" is displayed, it indicates that the system is "normal"; when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates a "connection error" (specifically, an electrical connection error between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633); when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates a "bulb out" (specifically, based on a detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, there are no game balls B in the payout device 580); when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates a "bulb jam" (specifically, based on a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a game ball B has jammed between the payout passage 580a and the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate); and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates a "counting switch error" (specifically, the payout detection sensor 59 Based on the detection signal from 1, it notifies that there is a malfunction in the payout detection sensor 591. When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that there is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it notifies that the unit is "full" (specifically, that the unit is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that the CR is "not connected" (that an electrical connection has been disconnected anywhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it notifies that the unit is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball dispensing request signal for game balls B from the ball dispensing button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be dispensed according to the ball dispensing request signal to the payout control board 633 via serial communication. This signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B dispensed, and outputs a signal to display the remaining balance to the ball dispensing operation unit 220. This signal is input to the ball dispensing display unit 226 of the ball dispensing operation unit 220 and displayed.

[6-2b. Launch Control Unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control using the launch solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145. The launch control unit 633b, although not shown in detail in the illustration, includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillator circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching game balls B toward the game area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillator circuit so that 100 game balls B per minute are launched toward the game area 5a and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball feeding reference pulse which is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single-shot button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the launch of game ball B should be forcibly stopped by the player's will, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. Furthermore, when the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, a CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which indicates permission to launch game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which game ball B is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

The launch timing control circuit does not output a launch reference pulse for launching game ball B toward the game area 5a unless launch condition 1 is met based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 (i.e., the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195), launch condition 2 is met based on the CR connection signal (i.e., the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected), and launch condition 3 is met based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 (i.e., the launch permission pulse for launching game ball B toward the game area 5a). Therefore, for example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542, and game ball B cannot be launched.

The launch solenoid drive circuit, based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotation position of the handle 195, triggered by the input of a launch reference pulse. Meanwhile, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit, triggered by the input of a ball feeding reference pulse, outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby receiving one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball feeding unit 140. When the input of the ball feeding reference pulse ends, the output of the constant current is stopped, sending the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit to the ball feeding solenoid 145 is controlled to be constant.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which performs launch control using the launch solenoid 542 and ball feeding control using the ball feeding solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633. However, it may be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be directly input to the power supply board 630, or it may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or it may be input to the power supply board 630 via an intermediate board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral Control Board]
As shown in Figure 169, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs performance control based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral Control Unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511, which controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510, is not shown in detail in the illustration, but it includes a peripheral control IC on which a CPU, RAM, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality performance, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC integrates multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., on a single semiconductor chip. Upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC transmits light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 to output lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. It also transmits drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decoration drive board to the drive motors or drive solenoids of the game board 5 to output drive signals to the drive motors that operate the various performance units provided on the game board 5. Furthermore, the system transmits door-side drive data, consisting of drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lifting drive motor 367, and sudden output adjustment drive motor 381, etc., provided on the door frame 3, and door-side light emission data, consisting of lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3, from the serial I/O port for the frame decorative drive substrate to the door frame 3. It also transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the performance display control unit 1512. In addition, it outputs control signals (sound commands) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

The detection signals from the contact detection sensor body 358, pressure detection sensor 373, lifting/lowering detection sensor 374, and protruding force detection sensor 375 of the performance control unit 300 installed on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the unit is functioning normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the playback of music and sound effects, etc., from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, which are located on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, respectively, to match various effects. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box housing the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, by sending acoustic signals (e.g., 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals, etc.) as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 side, and the main frame speaker 622 for bass on the main frame 4, it is possible to present more realistic sound effects (sound effects) than before.

Furthermore, the peripheral control unit 1511 is equipped with an external WDT (watchdog timer), not just the internal WDT built into the peripheral control IC's CPU. The peripheral control IC's CPU uses both the internal and external WDTs to diagnose whether its system is malfunctioning.

The display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the display control unit 1512 are performed via a serial input/output port. In this embodiment, the bitrate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (bps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side illumination/flashing commands, game board side illumination/flashing commands, movable body drive commands, etc., output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are performed via multiple serial input/output ports different from those used for the display commands. In this embodiment, the bitrate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Production display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU incorporates parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to indicate this. Furthermore, the display control MPU receives an execution signal from the VDP, and triggers an interrupt process every 16ms when this execution signal stops.

The display control ROM stores various programs for generating the screen to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to that control data (display commands). The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration, arranged chronologically, and specifies the order in which the screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 are displayed. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is composed of non-resident area transfer data arranged chronologically, specifying the order in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data pre-defines the order in which various data are transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in accordance with the progress of the schedule data, so that the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 is processed.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the corresponding schedule data. Then, it extracts the screen data following the first screen data from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data, which is arranged chronologically in the schedule data, one by one from the display control ROM, starting from the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

The VDP, upon receiving screen data output from the display control MPU, extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on this input screen data to generate drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, if the performance display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to indicate this. The VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a method in which drawing data for one line representing the left-right direction of the performance display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and this line of drawing data held in the line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

The image ROM stores a very large amount of sprite data, resulting in a large capacity. As the image ROM capacity increases, that is, as the number of sprites to be drawn on the display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes significant, affecting the drawing speed on the display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a faster access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. Note that the sprite data is the base data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

To explain "sprites" here, a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unified unit on the visual display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the visual display device 1600, the data used to draw each person is called a "sprite." Therefore, when displaying multiple people on the visual display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, elements that make up the background, such as houses, mountains, and roads, are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the visual display device 1600 after their positions on the screen and their overlapping order (hereinafter referred to as "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is composed of multiple rectangular areas, each 64 pixels wide and 64 pixels high. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using a single sprite character, while larger sprites, such as those of people, can be represented using a total of six sprite characters, for example, arranged in a 2x3 grid. Even larger sprites, like backgrounds, can be represented using even more sprite characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The display device 1600 is driven by a main scan, which sets the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan, which repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting the main scan. When the display device 1600 receives drawing data for one line output from the display control unit 1512, it performs a main scan, sequentially outputting to each pixel of that line, from left to right when viewed from the front. Once the output for one line is complete, the display device 1600 moves to the line directly below as a sub-scan. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is received, it performs a main scan based on this next line's drawing data, sequentially outputting to each pixel of that line, from left to right when viewed from the front.

[7. Configuration of the Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500, which is located on the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 170 to 172. Figure 170 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, Figure 171 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and Figure 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Note that in Figure 171, the terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the terminals of various connectors protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, but this has been omitted for the sake of clarity in the drawing.

As shown in Figures 170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a cover body 1501 having a box shape with an opening at the rear and being longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction; a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effects based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 which controls the progress of the game; a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510; a liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510; and a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are each mounted in predetermined positions within the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover]
The various circuit boards installed in the internal space of the cover body 1501 include, in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing images on the display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that occupies approximately two-thirds of the area when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501, and is positioned close to the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 occupy approximately one-third of the remaining area when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape and is positioned on the upper right side of the cover body 1501, while the liquid crystal output board 1530 has a square shape that is two sizes larger than the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and is positioned on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected via an inter-board connector, as described later. The peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 are also electrically connected via an inter-board connector, as described later. As a result, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected, sharing the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main frame 4.

The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, molded in an opaque black color, and, when viewed from the front, is a horizontally elongated rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) with cover side walls 1501b to 1501e projecting toward the rear (towards the front of the pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape with an opening.

The cover plate 1501a, when viewed from the front, has a square-shaped fan mounting recess 1501aa formed slightly to the upper right of its center, corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. This recess protrudes toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa, multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along multiple concentric circles centered on the top, bottom, left, and right centers of the bottom surface. Furthermore, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, cylindrical guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 are formed, corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square-shaped air-cooling fan. These guide protrusions have a predetermined height (shorter than the depth dimension of the air-cooling fan) and are inserted into these through holes th1 to th4, projecting toward the opposite side of the opening of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit holes 1501aaa as arc-shaped holes, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components from the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 are formed diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa on the cover plate 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air-cooling fan and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are positioned on the same plane. In this state, by screwing a pair of metal pan-head screws (screws with an integrated pan head and flat washer) into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2, from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan-head screw, comes into contact with the front of the cooling fan and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. This prevents the cooling fan from popping out of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a gap of a predetermined distance (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the side on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

Furthermore, the cover plate 1501a communicates with the fan mounting recess 1501aa, and a wiring exit recess 1501ab is formed projecting toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a position higher than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a position with a shorter distance dimension compared to the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). Once the cooling fan is mounted and fixed in the fan mounting recess 1501aa, multiple wires from the cooling fan can be routed through the wiring exit recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has a connector recess 1501ac formed along its lower edge, protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. This recess corresponds to the positions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. More precisely, it is a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom. The connector recess 1501ac is formed at a lower position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position with a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume control hole 1501ac8 are formed, corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac generally occupies the lower right area when viewing the cover plate 1501a from the front. Therefore, to address the insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) caused by the increased surface area of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, two elongated reinforcing ribs 1501aci1 and 1501aci2 are formed on the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, protruding forward at a predetermined distance apart, in a position that does not interfere with the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 become exposed through the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has a connector recess 1501ad formed along its lower edge, corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. This recess 1501ad is a closed, horizontally elongated rectangular area and is formed at a lower position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position with a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa), protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed, corresponding to the positions of connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 become exposed through the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad.

Furthermore, when viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a has a wiring exit opening 1501ae formed along its left edge at a position corresponding to the CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. A mounting recess 1501af for attaching a horizontally elongated rectangular wiring cover body 1503, which communicates with and can close the wiring exit opening 1501ae, is formed at a higher position than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa), protruding toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503. A cylindrical projection 1501afa, having a predetermined height (shorter than the depth dimension of the wiring cover body 1503), is inserted into this through hole 1503a and protrudes toward the opposite side of the opening of the cover body 1501. Additionally, mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are positioned on the same plane. In this state, the wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af by inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring outlet opening 1501ae and functions as a cover to protect the flexible flat cable (FFC (Flexible Flat Cable; a flexible flat cable consists of multiple flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the display device 1600, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator)) connected to the connector CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate and is molded in an opaque black color.

When viewing the cover body 1501 from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501c are formed on the left side wall 1501c of the cover body 1501, near the opening side of the cover body 1501, with a predetermined central distance between them, and protruding outwards from above and below. A hinge-hanging portion 1501cc is formed above the guide portion 1501ca and protruding outwards, and a hinge-hanging portion 1501cd is formed below the guide portion 1501cb and protruding outwards. The rear surface of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb is chamfered. In contrast, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd are formed on the front surface of the left end of the hinge-hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd, protruding forward. Furthermore, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea, which protrudes outward, is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 on the right-side cover wall 1501e.

To ensure that the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a has four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that protrude from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from its back surface. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed on the surface (mounting side) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back (solder side) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so that these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are soldered in such a way that their copper foil surfaces are not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is oriented toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are positioned to align with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back side (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Additionally, the shaft (threaded portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. Therefore, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via metal pan head screws. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the LCD output board 1530, thus sharing the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected, resulting in a shared ground (GND).

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed in are positioned so that they do not protrude inward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (that is, they do not protrude outward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

To ensure that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is positioned on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed such that, when viewed from its back surface, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are diagonally projecting from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 are formed on the surface (mounting side) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back (solder side) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so that these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are soldered in such a way that the copper foil surface is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is oriented toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Furthermore, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are in contact with the seating surface of the metal pan head screw. Additionally, the shaft (threaded portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. Therefore, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the LCD output board 1530, thus sharing the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected, resulting in a shared ground (GND).

Furthermore, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed in are positioned inward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., not protruding outward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). Additionally, the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are positioned on the same plane.

To ensure that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is positioned on the lower right side of the back of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed such that, when viewed from its back, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 are diagonally projecting from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed on the surface (mounting side) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back (solder side) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Wiring patterns are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Furthermore, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are soldered in such a way that the copper foil surface is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the front surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is oriented toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the surface (mounting side) 1530x of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Furthermore, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder side) 1530y of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are in contact with the seating surface of the metal pan head screw. Additionally, the shaft (threaded portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

As described above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. Therefore, the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan head screw. As a result, the cover body 1501 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the LCD output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thus sharing the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the LCD output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected, resulting in a shared ground (GND).

Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed in are positioned inward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., not protruding outward from the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e). Additionally, the back side (solder side) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are all positioned on the same plane.

In this configuration, when various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space with a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of each substrate (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap with the aforementioned predetermined distance (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right, lower right, lower left, and left sides of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the cooling fan mounted in the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation expels air from the inner space of the cover body 1501 toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. Air is drawn in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, thereby air-cooling the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a). These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width of 6.5 mm in the left-right direction, and a pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm in the up-down direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501. Additionally, a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled from the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades, thereby drawing in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through the described ventilation holes 1501az, and also through the gap (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the gap formed in the cover body 1501) The input is received through the gaps formed between the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume control switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510, the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501.

The sum of the areas of each of the multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (total area) is smaller than the sum of the area of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the area of the gaps described above (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed between the volume control switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501). Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan mounted in the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation expels air from the inner space of the cover body 1501 toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. This allows for a reduction in the airflow velocity of the air entering each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 when air is drawn in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500.

Furthermore, when the blades of the cooling fan mounted in the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled from the peripheral control unit 1500 to the outside. This allows the airflow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 to be kept low when air is drawn in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. However, when the blades of the cooling fan mounted in the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation may cause air to be drawn in through the blades and sent out towards the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the cooling fan may not primarily serve the purpose of exchanging air within the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but rather simply to cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base Body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, molded in an opaque black color, and when viewed from the front, the base side walls 1502b to 1502e are provided protruding forward (towards the rear side of the pachinko machine 1) from the top, left, bottom, and right sides of the horizontally elongated rectangular base plate 1502a, respectively, forming a box shape with an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact) with each other.

The base plate 1502a, when viewed from the front, has elongated, vertically oriented anti-disconnection ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed along its lower edge at predetermined intervals. These ribs prevent interference with the connectors CN2 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. (That is, since each terminal of the connectors CN2 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x to the back (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and protrudes from the back (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, these ribs prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from bending and causing the electrical wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 to break due to the force applied when inserting the connectors for connecting wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7.)

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an outwardly projecting engagement portion 1502ca is formed on the left base side wall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. This engagement portion 1502ca has guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad at positions corresponding to the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad have U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed on them.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, by wrapping the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 around the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 can be hooked and engaged with the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad.

Furthermore, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed in the center of the right-side base wall 1502e, protruding outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 are also formed on the upper and lower sides of the right-side base wall 1502e, respectively, for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5.

[7-3. Various Connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501, includes a peripheral control IC 1510a that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip; a control ROM 1510b that pre-stores various programs that can control the progress of game effects and demonstrations (demonstration effects performed while the player is waiting), and various schedule data (effect data) that defines the progress of effects; and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access) that can store various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The system comprises an SDRAM 1510c consisting of Memory 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d for adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power supply is interrupted, a power supply generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip, and combines the functions of the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the display control unit 1512 (excluding the functions of various ROMs).

The control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the display control ROM of the display control unit 1512, and has a storage capacity of 256 Mbit (or 128 Mbit). The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

The peripheral control board 1510 offers various I/O interfaces, including various serial I/O and parallel I/O. These serial I/O interfaces include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Associative Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is employed as the communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via connector CN5). SPI communication and I2C communication are employed as communication methods for transmitting control data to various boards on the game board 5 side and various boards on the door frame side (communication is performed via the corresponding connectors among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to transmit drive data to drive control ICs that drive electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 side and electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data is also transmitted to LED control ICs for multiple LEDs (communicating via connector CN7) on the game board 5 side and multiple LEDs (communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side. Furthermore, signals from various sensors (communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 side and signals from various sensors (communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3 side are received as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

Various types of parallel I/O include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, signals from the cooling fan FAN, which is located in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5, are input to the GPIO (via connector CN1) to indicate the rotation status of the cooling fan FAN. Signals from various sensors (not shown) located on the game board 5 that confirm the operation and origin position of the controlled object are input to the GPIO (via connector CN6). Control signals for the controlled object (not shown) located on the game board 5 are output from the GPIO (via connector CN6). Signals are also output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 located on the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (i.e., connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist), UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (i.e., connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication compliant with the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a located on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, achieving a high-speed transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supporting up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a, under the instructions of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, can rapidly transfer various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a located on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, or to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), enabling high-speed data communication. Various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is rapidly transferred to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for board-to-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for board-to-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for board-to-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for board-to-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs image rendering data for display devices such as performance display devices from the special connector SCN2 in multiple video signal formats. These multiple video signal formats include, for example, RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded DisplayPort), and clockless formats. In this embodiment, four formats (a total of four formats) are employed: one RGB format, two LVDS formats (first LVDS format, second LVDS format), and the MIPI format. Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS formats (for example, the first LVDS format) is used as the video signal format input to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, instead of the MIPI method, for example, the eDP method can be adopted, and a peripheral control board 1510 can be created with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and one eDP system.

Furthermore, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is further equipped with LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. LEDML1 is used to confirm (monitor) the state in which +5V is supplied, and remains lit when +5V is supplied. LEDML2 is used to confirm (monitor) the state in which +12V is supplied, and remains lit when +12V is supplied. LEDML3 monitors the presence of a +24V power supply and remains lit when +24V is available. LEDML4 monitors the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a and remains lit when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space with a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above. This space can be brightly illuminated by the LEDML1 to LEDML4 on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 differ in structure from the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, in that they are equipped with a floating mechanism. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and plug are mated by inserting and pushing in the plug of the corresponding connector perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of connectors CN1 to CN10 are designed so that, when mating, there is absolutely no vertical movement of the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 when viewed from the front.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, while the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530 are sockets.

The socket of the special connector SCN3, located on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1, located on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket and plug are mated together by pushing them in. The socket of the special connector SCN3 located on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a floating mechanism that allows the socket to move within a predetermined distance range in the front-to-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510), thereby absorbing any front-to-back errors that occur when pushing it in. Furthermore, the socket of the special connector SCN3, which is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, is designed so that even when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is mounted and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is viewed from the front, even if it moves to its maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above, the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 will not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket of the special connector SCN4, located on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2, located on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket and plug are mated together by pushing them in. The socket of the special connector SCN4 located on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is equipped with a floating mechanism that allows the socket to move within a predetermined distance range in the front-to-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510), thereby absorbing any errors in the front-to-back direction that occur when pushing it in. Furthermore, when the LCD output board 1530 is mounted and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the LCD output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to its maximum extent within the predetermined distance range as viewed from the front, a gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN4 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, we will briefly explain the reasons for adopting the special connector SCN3 for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 for the LCD output board 1530. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a (including the functions of the image ROM of the aforementioned performance display control unit 1512) that can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of various control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images for drawing various performance images on the performance display device 1600; light emission data defining the light emission modes (on, gradation, blinking, off, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5; sound data such as music, voice, warning sounds, and notification sounds; and drive data for driving and controlling various movable performance elements on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, which is less expensive, has a large capacity, and can write various types of data at high speed compared to NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, allowing for reduced power consumption, and can achieve high transfer speeds through SATA-compliant communication.

As described above, by adopting NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, cost reduction is achieved, power consumption is suppressed, and stored data can be read at high transfer speeds. However, while the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, this low operating voltage makes it susceptible to noise. Furthermore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a configuration is adopted in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the impact of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various circuit boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. However, since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 requires the socket of the special connector SCN3 on its surface (mounting surface) 1520x to be inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and then pressed in, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Therefore, by employing the special connector SCN3 socket with the aforementioned floating mechanism, the forward-backward error that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensuring the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such cases, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the forward-backward error that occurs when fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures reliable formation of the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

The LCD output board 1530 is an important board that outputs image rendering data for the performance display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 via connector CN10. This data displays the progress of game performances (for example, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, is about to occur; an image informing that a jackpot game state will not occur; an image informing that a jackpot game state will not occur, but that the player is approaching a state where a jackpot game state will occur compared to the normal state) and demonstrations (demo performances performed while the player is waiting) as images to the performance display device 1600. For this reason, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit the image rendering data for the performance display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the LCD output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a configuration is adopted in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the impact of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for mounting various circuit boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. However, since the LCD output board 1530 requires the insertion of the socket of the special connector SCN4 on its surface (mounting surface) 1530x into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the LCD output board 1530 to be fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, employing the special connector SCN4 socket with the aforementioned floating mechanism allows for the absorption of forward/backward errors that occur when fixing the LCD output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, ensuring a reliable transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530.

Furthermore, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such cases, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN4 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-back error that occurs when fixing the LCD output board 1530 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures reliable formation of the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back surfaces of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane. Therefore, compared to a three-dimensional arrangement where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and LCD output board 1530 are placed on the front surface of the peripheral control board 1510, the front-to-back (i.e., depth) distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced. This contributes to securing sufficient depth dimension for, for example, arranging a large movable performance unit (an electrical drive source and drive mechanism capable of operating a movable performance body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) on the game board 5.

[7-4. Assembly Method for Peripheral Control Units]
Here, we will explain how to assemble the peripheral control unit 1500. First, insert the socket of the special connector SCN3, which is located on the surface (mounting side) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, into the plug of the special connector SCN1, which is located on the surface (mounting side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and push it in. Next, insert the socket of the special connector SCN4, which is located on the surface (mounting side) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530, into the plug of the special connector SCN2, which is located on the surface (mounting side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and push it in.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are turned toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting metal pan-head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwing them towards the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a by inserting metal pan-head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwing them towards the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed in toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed last to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby restricting its movement in the up, down, left, and right directions. Similarly, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby restricting its movement in the up, down, left, and right directions. In contrast, the peripheral control board 1510 does not have mounting boss protrusions formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict its movement in the up, down, left, and right directions. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby constraining their vertical, horizontal, and vertical directions. The dimensional errors resulting from this constraint can be absorbed by the dimensional margins provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when fixing it to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and by the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502. Simultaneously, the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502.

Next, with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 in contact with the U-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad, the base body 1502 is wrapped around to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and with the base body 1502 in place over the cover body 1501, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted into the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is inserted and screwed toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby sealing the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502.

In this sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are in in-situ (surface contact) with each other. At the same time, the front surfaces of the wire breakage prevention ribs 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 formed on the base body 1502 come into contact with the back surface (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become electrically conductive, as they are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above. To release this sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which consists of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, can be detected, thereby enhancing the deterrent against unauthorized actions against the peripheral control board box 1505.

Next, the cooling fan is pushed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Multiple wires from the cooling fan are then routed through the wiring exit recesses 1501ab formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal pan head screws (screws with an integrated pan head and flat washer) are then screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, a connector for connecting multiple wires (harnesses) to the display device 1600 is inserted and attached to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the wiring exit opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is then fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed in from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively, thereby fixing the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the multiple wires are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner to the game panel 1100 on the game board 5, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side with the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and screwed into mounting holes (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 to secure it.

Furthermore, in the assembly method described above, in the procedure for mounting various circuit boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back), and then the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). The peripheral control board 1510 can also be fixed in the predetermined position described above (the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned tightly to the left of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back of the cover body 1501) by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3, which is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, into the plug of the special connector SCN1, which is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in, and inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4, which is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, into the plug of the special connector SCN2, which is provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. In the installation procedures for these various circuit boards, by employing the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 equipped with the aforementioned floating mechanism, the forward and backward errors that occur during the pushing process are absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket. This ensures reliable formation of transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, as well as between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510.

Incidentally, there are multiple types of game boards installed in pachinko machines, each with different game specifications. In this embodiment, the cover body 1501 is configured so that various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530, can be mounted on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, which is divided into three sections. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common and is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, as peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a. The LCD output board 1530 is a board that depends on the format of the video signal input to the display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is independent of the game specifications of the game board and independent of the format of the video signal input to the display device 1600, and is a standardized board that can be reused. Furthermore, since the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which contains peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the aforementioned inter-board connector, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced to match the game specifications of the game board.

The video signals input to display devices such as performance display devices can take several forms, including, as mentioned above, RGB, LVDS, MIPI, eDP, and clockless formats. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these formats are electrically connected via the aforementioned inter-board connector. In other words, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced to match the video signal format input to the performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS formats (for example, the first LVDS format) is used as the video signal format input to the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530, matched to the video signal format (LVDS format) input to the performance display device 1600, is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the aforementioned inter-board connector.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate. When various circuit boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) using metal pan head screws, they are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of these boards, resulting in the same ground (GND). Therefore, noise entering from the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 is directed to the circuit board ground (the ground (GND) of the various circuit boards), allowing the noise to be removed (hereinafter, this may be referred to as "noise reduction effect by the conductive resin peripheral control board box 1505"). This eliminates the need to provide each circuit board with its own dedicated filter for removing such noise, contributing to cost reduction of the various circuit boards.

Here, the arrangement of the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, these multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az not only allow for air cooling of the inner space of the cover body 1501, but also serve the function of checking for any irregularities.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in Figure 172, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed to the right of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are distributed to cover an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b, so that the part number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be checked from multiple angles. This allows modifications to the control ROM 1510b to be confirmed through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML1, positioned near the control ROM 1510b, maintains its illuminated state when +5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. While its primary function is to monitor the supply of +5V, it also functions as a spotlight, brightly illuminating the control ROM 1510b. This contributes to improving the visibility of the control ROM 1510b's surface and the IC pins.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed to the left of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are distributed and arranged to provide a large area where the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked. This area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (composed of a special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and furthermore, the part number and model number (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as well as the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, can be visually confirmed. In other words, the area is large enough to allow for a nearly complete check of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the state of the IC pins from multiple angles. This allows modification of the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to be confirmed through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML3, positioned near the special connector SCN1, maintains its illuminated state when +24V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. While it primarily functions to confirm (monitor) the supply of +24V, it also functions as a spotlight, brightly illuminating the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting side) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520. This contributes to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector between the two boards.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are distributed and arranged to cover an area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530), so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be checked. This allows modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 to be checked through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML4, positioned near the special connector SCN2, is designed to remain lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. While its primary function is to monitor the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, it also functions as a spotlight, brightly illuminating the inter-board connector between the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting side) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. This contributes to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector between the two.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are distributed to cover an area larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, so that the part numbers and model numbers printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be visually confirmed, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be checked from multiple angles. This allows modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 to be confirmed through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML2, positioned near the SDRAM 1510c (composed of SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2), maintains its illuminated state when +12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied via the interface board 635. While its primary function is to monitor the supply of +12V, it also functions as a spotlight, brightly illuminating the SDRAM 1510c. This contributes to improving the visibility of the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (i.e., SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2) and the IC pins.

Furthermore, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the gaps between the multiple blades constituting the air-cooling fan's blades (specifically, by rotating the air-cooling fan's blades to check the gaps between the blades). This allows for confirmation, through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, whether any counterfeit boards are placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this embodiment, the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mount type LEDs with a wide angle of approximately 120 degrees and weak directionality, making them suitable for illumination. When the various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530, are mounted and fixed to predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space with a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above. By lighting up the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for illumination, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

Furthermore, on the back surface and surrounding area of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, which faces the light-emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, reflective portions (not shown) are formed to reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 back towards the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective portions (not shown) may be made of a bright colored paint such as white, or a glossy colored paint, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

Furthermore, near the game board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are positioned above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is positioned to the side of the game board 5. As a result, the game balls rub against each other in the ball path formed by these components, becoming charged and then discharged, which becomes a source of noise. Therefore, the area near the game board 5 where the ball path is formed is an environment that is affected by noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game balls. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 is lined up facing away from the island equipment in the gaming hall, other pachinko machines may also become sources of noise and affect the machine. Thus, the area around the game board 5 is an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, as described above, and are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530. This allows noise entering through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, which is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, to be routed to the ground of the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, etc. (the ground (GND) of the various boards), thereby removing the noise.

[7-5. Implementation of the control ROM]
Here, the method for mounting the control ROM 1510b onto the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to Figures 173 to 176. Figure 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of the state in which a control ROM having a leadless package is mounted on the ROM socket. Figure 174 is a view taken along arrow P in Figure 173(a). Figure 175 is a cross-sectional view of a through-hole showing an overview of the positional relationship between through-holes formed on the peripheral control board and through-holes formed on the conversion board. Figure 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM having a leadless package and a ROM socket mounted on the conversion board, and a top view (b) of the state in which a control ROM having a leadless package is mounted on the ROM socket.

First, as shown in Figures 173 to 176, multiple rectangular pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is placed. These pads are arranged in two rows spaced apart by a predetermined distance. Specifically, the pads 1510v are positioned to correspond to multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as "lead-type package"), is attached and detached. The lead terminals of the lead-type ROM socket are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the lead-type ROM socket to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The pad 1510v is located near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the surface-side markings indicating the part number of the surface-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (and may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the surface-side electronic component) are printed by silkscreen printing on a solid green resist using white paint that is easily visible against the green. (For example, in Figure 173(b), the part number 1510v1 of the control ROM 1510b, the position where the control ROM 1510b will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols (L-shaped symbols) indicating the four corners) 1510v2, and the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol (triangle symbol (△)) indicating the position of the first terminal) 1510v3).

Furthermore, on the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 (the side on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted, and which may be hereafter referred to as the "non-mounted side") 1510y, in addition to the back-side mounted electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and various ICs, a back-side marking section indicating the attributes of the back-side electronic components (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the back-side electronic components) is printed by silkscreen printing on a solid green resist using white paint that is easily visible against the green.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, has a storage capacity of 256 M bits, and 35 lead terminals (70 lead terminals in total) protrude outward from each of the two longitudinal sides.

The control ROM 1510b has a leaded package, but if it becomes scarce or discontinued, it will be necessary to substitute it with one of a different package. However, if the package is changed, in the case of a leadless package (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "leadless package"), the lead terminals do not protrude from the side of the leadless package, but the connection terminals are located on the bottom of the leadless package. Therefore, the shape and arrangement of pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring patterns to pads 1510v must be modified. This means that the peripheral control board 1510 needs to be manufactured simply because of the package change, even though there are no electrical problems with other circuits.

Therefore, the pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be positioned at locations corresponding to multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, is attached and detached. This mechanism allows for package changes by changing the target to which the pads 1510v are soldered. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510, or the routing of the wiring patterns to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v become identical), allowing for common use. Thirty-five pads 1510v per row are arranged in two rows on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, spaced apart by a predetermined distance.

As mentioned above, the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leaded package total 70, whereas the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are fewer, with 56 terminals (the number of connection terminals may be fewer than 56) arranged on the bottom of the leadless package. This is because the number of power terminals to which the external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals to which the ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected) are reduced.

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a leaded package to a leadless package, as shown in Figure 173(a), this can be accommodated using a detachable ROM socket 1510s and a conversion board 1510t that changes the number of terminals, which allows for the attachment and detachment of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package. The ROM socket 1510s allows for the attachment and detachment of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package using a special tool, and mainly consists of a mounting section 1510sa, a pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and a plurality of lead terminals 1510sc. The mounting section 1510sa is on which the control ROM 1510b, which has a leadless package, is mounted. The pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are in an open state when the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is mounted on the mounting section 1510sa. However, when the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is mounted and held on the mounting section 1510sa, the pieces rotate to hold the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, applying force towards the bottom surface.

When the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are closed, a force acting from the top surface of the leadless package control ROM 1510b toward the bottom surface is maintained, and one end of each of the 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the leadless package control ROM 1510b, which is placed on the mounting section 1510sa, is electrically connected to one end of each corresponding lead terminal 1510sc (56 terminals).

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are fixed to the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is formed to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc, by soldering them to pads 1510ta (56 of them).

The shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is identical to the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm). Their size is the same, and the distance between the pads (the so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510.

The external dimensions of the conversion board 1510t are rectangular and plate-like, larger than those of the IC package, and almost identical to those of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, is inserted and removed.

The thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm). A green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting side) 1510x and back side (solder side, non-mounting side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 by applying a green resist liquid to a layer (copper plane) on which pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. The conversion board 1510t has multiple through-holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through-holes") formed on the surface (mounting side) 1510tx and back side (non-mounting side) 1510ty that have lands that are electrically connected to the wiring patterns. The inner circumferential walls of the through-holes are copper plated to provide conductivity. The through-holes, excluding the end-face through-hole 1510tb described later, are filled with insulating resin. One end and the other end of the insulating resin filling the through-holes are machined to be flush with the surface (mounting side) 1510tx and the back (non-mounting side) 1510ty, respectively. Along with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin filling the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (referred to as "resin filling").

As shown in Figure 174, semicircular end-face through-holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t, corresponding to the multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, is attached and detached. The inner circumferential walls 1510tba of the end-face through-holes 1510tb are copper-plated to provide conductivity. The end-face through-holes 1510tb are formed in a circular shape during manufacturing and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. Lands are formed on the front (mounting side) 1510tx and back (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively.

The end-face through-holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are located at the same positions as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b, which has a leaded package, and are the same (for example, 0.8 mm) as the distance between pads (so-called pitch) of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The difference between the control ROM 1510b with a leaded package and the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is, as mentioned above, the number of power terminals to which the external control power supply is electrically connected, the ground terminals to which the ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and the number of NC terminals that are not connected. Therefore, on the front (mounting side) 1510tx and back (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, the wiring patterns are routed so that the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are electrically connected to the end face through-holes 1510tb, matching the number of power terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leaded package.

Returning to Figure 173, the positional relationship between the 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t and the 70 end-face through-holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion substrate 1510t is as shown in Figure 173(b). The pads 1510ta and end-face through-holes 1510tb are positioned such that the point where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower edges of the conversion substrate 1510tx intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right edges coincides (or nearly coincides) with the point where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower edges of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right edges. This arrangement ensures that the pads 1510ta and end-face through-holes 1510tb are spaced apart with a predetermined clearance dimension zd to prevent electrical contact.

The 70 end-face through-holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. This ensures that the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact (i.e., the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, without any gaps).

Furthermore, the exposed copper surfaces on the front (mounting side) 1510tx and back (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are coated with solder using a solder rivet, providing protection for the exposed copper surfaces and improving wettability during mounting. A water-soluble flux may also be used as the solder rivet for the conversion board 1510t.

The land of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounted surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t will be in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 when the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, resulting in an electrically conductive state. This is because, when the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered together, the land of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered together, the land of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is in surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. A water-soluble flux may be used as the solder rivet for the peripheral control board 1510.

Lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t in the end face through hole 1510tb, but it is not necessary to form lands. In this case, it is preferable that the pad 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through hole 1510tb and the end face through hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the end face through hole 1510tb are spaced apart with a predetermined clearance dimension zd (for example, 0.5 mm or more). In this case, a lower pad that is electrically connected to the lower end of the end face through hole 1510tb may also be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. The shape of this lower pad is smaller than the shape of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) (for example, a rectangular shape of 1.5 mm to 1.6 mm x 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm), and the distance dimension between pads (so-called pitch) is the same as that of the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, 0.8 mm). As described above, solder is applied to this lower pad by a solder rivet (coated with solder), and a treatment is applied to protect the surface of the exposed copper part and improve wettability during mounting. Even with this configuration, the lower pad, which is electrically connected to the lower end of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounted surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, becomes electrically conductive when the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are soldered together, by making surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, this configuration enhances the peel strength that prevents the pad 1510v from separating from the substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 when the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lower pad formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s, which is a surface-side mounted electronic component, the attributes of the surface-side electronic component (including the part number of the surface-side electronic component, the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed, and possibly the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the surface-side electronic component) are printed by silkscreen printing on a solid green resist using white paint that is easily visible against the green. (For example, the part number of the ROM socket 1510s 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols (L-shaped symbols) indicating the four corners) 1510s2, and the mounting orientation of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating the position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510s3).

Furthermore, while there are a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, there are a total of 70 pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is more than the number of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. In addition, as described above, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and their size is also the same. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is compared with the contact area (bonding area) between the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the lower pads mentioned above in place of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Because the size is reduced, the bonding strength between the inner peripheral walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion substrate 1510t and the lands (or the aforementioned lower pads instead of lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounted surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t and the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is higher than the bonding strength between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t.

Therefore, when the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s are soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta peels off from the substrate of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v peels off from the substrate of the peripheral control board 1510 when the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the substrate of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the substrate of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the pad formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is soldered to the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s, Since the pad 1510ta can be detached from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is soldered to the land formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, can be prevented from detaching from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented.

On the other hand, when force is applied to the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t, the soldered portion between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is easily deformed because it is a thin metal wire. This increases the load on each of the lead terminals 1510sc, and applies a force that peels off the pads 1510ta and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the soldering area on the ROM socket 1510s side, which has thin metal wires, is highly likely to experience pattern delamination. However, the soldering area on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering area between the land (or the aforementioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb on the end face of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is less likely to experience pattern delamination.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not directly mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new configuration, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, as described above, the front surface (mounting side) 1510x and back surface (solder side, non-mounting side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface (mounting side) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, both have a green resist layer formed by a green coating, resulting in a unified color. By making the resist layers of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), the presence of the conversion board 1510t can be made less noticeable to the peripheral control board 1510, making it less likely to be perceived as a target for fraud.

Furthermore, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting orientation (mounting direction, symbol (triangle symbol (△))) 1510v3 indicating the placement position of the first terminal of the control ROM 1510b is printed by silk screen printing on a solid green resist using white paint that is easily visible against the green resist. This makes it easier to determine the orientation of the conversion board 1510t when the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green). By marking the location of one pin (placement of the first terminal) with white resist, which is easily recognizable against the green resist, the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be easily determined. In other words, since the peripheral control board 1510 has one pin location (the position of the first terminal) and the conversion board 1510t also has one pin location (the position of the first terminal), even if the resist on the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be easily determined.

Furthermore, the through-holes in the conversion substrate 1510t, excluding the end-face through-hole 1510tb, are filled with insulating resin. The insulating resin filling the through-holes is processed so that one end and the other end are flush with the surface (mounting side) 1510tx and the back (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t. Both ends of the insulating resin filling the through-holes, along with the through-hole lands, are completely covered by a green coating (resin filling). This eliminates exposed metal portions of the through-holes, thus avoiding contact with, for example, exposed metal portions of the through-holes formed on the peripheral control substrate 1510, and preventing electrical problems.

This will be briefly explained with reference to Figure 175. For example, as shown in Figure 175, the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not coincidentally overlap. In the case of coincidence overlap, the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t would be electrically connected, resulting in conductivity. To avoid this, the holes in the through-holes formed in the conversion board 1510t are filled with the aforementioned resin.

Furthermore, if we consider a board on which a connector for connecting to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided, and the board is electrically connected by connecting to the connector on the peripheral control board 1510, the mounted control ROM will be close to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it more susceptible to external noise. In contrast, in this embodiment, the conversion board 1510t is connected by soldering, with the surface (mounting side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be kept away from the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it less susceptible to external noise.

Furthermore, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 consist of 70 pads corresponding to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leaded package, whereas the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package consist of 56 (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56) on the bottom surface of the leadless package. Therefore, some pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 may, for example, have an excessive number of unconnected NC terminals pre-assigned to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a leaded package. The presence of these excess pads 1510v has the effect of reinforcing the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the land formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb on the end face of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510), and can contribute to the strength of the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side. In other words, the number of NC terminals is deliberately increased to strengthen the soldering surface on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering surface between the land formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb on the end face of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounted side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510).

Furthermore, since the inner circumferential walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion substrate 1510t are connected by lands (or the aforementioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t, the bonding strength can be increased compared to soldering using simple pads. The soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, while the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad described above in place of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) The soldering portion between the pad 1510v and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected by the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb on the end face of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad described above instead of the land) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. Therefore, the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side can be configured to have stronger bonding strength compared to the soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side.

Furthermore, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), their size is the same, and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (for example, 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and is longer than the distance between the pads (pitch). The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion substrate 1510t are the same (for example, 0.8 mm) as the distance between pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510 (the so-called pitch). The distance between the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion substrate 1510t (i.e., the distance between the two sides of the conversion substrate 1510t) is larger than the inner distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, and smaller than the outer distance between two rows of pads 1510v. Furthermore, it is longer than the distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t. This increases the pitch of the joint between the land (or the aforementioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the inner circumferential wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb at the end face of the conversion substrate 1510t and on the back surface (non-mounted surface) 1510ty of the conversion substrate 1510t, and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounted surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510, thereby enhancing the deflection prevention effect of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Furthermore, to further enhance the deflection prevention effect of the peripheral control substrate 1510, for example, the substrate thickness of the conversion substrate 1510t can be increased.

Furthermore, the soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad described above in place of the land) formed on the back surface (mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are configured such that, as described above, the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 are in surface contact and surface mounting is possible. This allows for a seamless electrical connection between the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the distance between the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 can be increased, resulting in a connection method that is more resistant to noise.

Furthermore, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the through-hole 1510tb on the end face of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad described above in place of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface surface (mounted side) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby electrically connecting them via solder. This allows for a gap-free electrical connection between the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510, thus increasing the distance between the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 and the conversion board 1510, resulting in a connection method that is resistant to noise.

Furthermore, the through-holes in the conversion board 1510t, excluding the through-hole 1510tb on the end face, are filled with insulating resin. The insulating resin filling the through-holes is processed so that one end and the other end are flush with the surface (mounting side) 1510tx and the back (non-mounting side) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. Along with the through-hole lands, the insulating resin filling the through-holes is completely covered (resin-filled) with a green coating. This allows surface mounting of the conversion board 1510t's back (non-mounting side) 1510ty and the peripheral control board 1510's back (side) 1510y in surface contact, thus preventing short circuits between the seamlessly connected conversion board 1510t and peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, while the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, this process involves human intervention, potentially leading to damage to the control ROM 1510b or its wiring patterns. Therefore, by mounting the ROM socket 1510s on the conversion board 1510t, if the control ROM 1510b or the wiring patterns formed on the conversion board 1510t are damaged, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reused (the same board) by removing the conversion board 1510t from the peripheral control board 1510 and replacing it with a new one.

Furthermore, the conversion board 1510t is equipped only with the ROM socket 1510s. This means that if the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t becomes damaged and needs replacing, only the minimum unit—the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t—is required.

Furthermore, the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is soldered to the land (or the aforementioned lower pad) formed on the land (or the lower pad instead of the land) formed on the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through-hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, is located near the peripheral control IC 1510a. Since the peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC with a large package and is a surface-mount type electronic component, such surface-mount type electronic components are particularly susceptible to board deflection (the connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component may peel off from the surface of the board). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced against deflection.

Furthermore, even if the control ROM 1510b has a leaded package, it can be changed to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package. This can be handled by mounting a conversion board 1510t, equipped with a detachable ROM socket 1510s for the leadless package control ROM 1510b, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the control ROM 1510b package is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510, or the routing of the wiring patterns to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v remain the same), allowing for common use.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, and when a sampling inspection (sample) is performed to check for defects in the manufacturing process, the control ROM 1510b may get caught on the ROM socket 1510s and external force may be applied to the ROM socket 1510s when it is removed using a special tool. However, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as described above, and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is peripheral Because the peel strength is smaller than that of the control board 1510, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is soldered to the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s, peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t. This prevents the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is soldered to the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t, from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thus preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510. This allows the damaged ROM socket 1510s to be mounted on a conversion board 1510t, which is attached to the peripheral control board 1510. The conversion board 1510t with the new ROM socket 1510s attached can then be mounted onto the peripheral control board 1510's surface (mounting surface) 1510x. This eliminates the need to replace the peripheral control board 1510 itself with a new one.

Furthermore, since the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted onto the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and fixed without any gaps, it becomes difficult to place improper electronic components in the gap between the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, when changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, as described above, the thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm) (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm). Therefore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is housed and sealed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box), the predetermined height distance dimension from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is at most about the thickness of the conversion board 1510t. This allows for high noise immunity against noise entering from the cover body 1501.

Furthermore, as described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when a sampling inspection (sample) is performed to check for defects during the manufacturing process. In other words, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, when a sampling inspection (sample) is performed to check for defects during the manufacturing process. When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, since the lead terminals do not protrude outward from the conversion board 1510t, even if the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is accidentally dropped by someone using a special tool to remove it, the lead terminals will not bend as they would with a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package, thus preventing it from becoming unusable.

Furthermore, as described above, semicircular end-face through-holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion substrate 1510t. The diameter of the holes in the end-face through-holes 1510tb is approximately the same as the width dimension (0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm). Alternatively, the diameter of the holes in the end-face through-holes 1510tb may be larger than the width dimension (0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion substrate 1510t (for example, a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm × 0.5 mm) (for example, 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm). In this case, the end-face through-holes 1510tb will have a shorter arc shape compared to a semicircle.

Furthermore, the pad 1510v is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be positioned corresponding to the multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. This mechanism allows for changes in the package by changing the object to which the pad 1510v is soldered, but other mechanisms may also be employed. For example, as shown in Figure 176(a), the lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached are soldered to the pad 1510v (that is, the conventional ROM socket 1510s' is reused as is), and the conversion board 1510t' to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting part 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' are closed. Note that the mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc' have the same function as the mounting portion 1510sa, the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s shown in Figure 173(a), therefore their explanation here is omitted.

Furthermore, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion substrate 1510t', a green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist liquid to a layer (copper plane) on which pads, wiring patterns, and lands to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered. The conversion substrate 1510t' has multiple through-holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through-holes") that have lands that are electrically connected to the wiring patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, and the inner circumferential walls of the through-holes are copper-plated to provide conductivity. The through-holes are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through-holes are machined to be flush with the surface (mounting side) 1510tx' and the back (non-mounting side) 1510ty' respectively. Both the land and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin filling).

Furthermore, protrusions projecting downwards are formed at both ends of the longitudinal direction of the back surface (non-mounted side) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on these protrusions. These pads are positioned corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', with 35 pads at one end and 35 at the other, for a total of 70 pads.

When the conversion board 1510t', to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered, is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotating retaining pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' are closed, the board is positioned such that, as shown in Figure 176(b), the point where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower edges of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right edges intersects with the point where the line connecting the centers of the upper and lower edges of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with the line connecting the centers of the left and right edges intersects (the center point). (This includes cases where they almost coincide.)

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, it is necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the modification of the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is briefly explained with reference to Figure 177. Figures 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the board management numbers of the peripheral control board. Note that the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 needs to be changed when the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed.

As shown in Figure 177(a), a foil-removed area KBRGN (i.e., an area formed by removing copper foil from the copper foil surface where the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and the wiring pattern) is formed on a predetermined location (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control substrate 1510) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Within this foil-removed area KBRGN, foil-removed characters KBNUM are formed using the wiring pattern, with the common part of the management number (in the figure, "XYZA") representing the substrate management number, left-aligned. Both the foil-removed area KBRGN and the foil-removed characters KBNUM are covered by a solid green resist liquid applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control substrate 1510.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, for example, as shown in Figure 177(b), a laser marker is used to print the symbol HKBNUM (the letter A in the figure) following the left-aligned foil-punched character KBNUM within the foil-punched area KBRGN (etched from the surface to a predetermined depth along the symbol HKBNUM). Using a laser marker, the board management number (XYZAA in the figure) can be created by printing the symbol HKBNUM following the foil-punched character KBNUM each time the conversion substrate 1510t is replaced (including repair). Alternatively, the board management number may be changed by erasing part of the foil-punched character with a laser marker, or by both erasing part of the foil-punched character and adding a character.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 177(c), for example, the common part of the management number (in this figure, "XYZ-") is used as the substrate management number, and foil-punched characters KBNUM are formed using a wiring pattern. Foil-punched areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are formed in a neighboring area (directly below foil-punched area KBRGN in this figure), separate from foil-punched area KBRGN. Foil-punched characters are also formed using a wiring pattern as symbols (in this figure, the letters A, B, and C) within foil-punched areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3. Foil-punched areas KBRGN and areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are covered by a solid green resist liquid applied to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control substrate 1510. Regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are perforated with a router, allowing them to be removed from the peripheral control board 1510. When regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from the peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC". If the control ROM 1510b with a leaded package is changed to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, the board management number can be changed by removing one, two, or all of regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a power supply generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages. This power supply generation circuit consists of a rectangular board on which various electronic components are mounted. The back side of this board is directly soldered to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in surface contact. The surface (mounting surface) of this board is covered by a metal cover that crimps and holds the edges of the board. Once mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply generation circuit board is not a detachable electronic component. Therefore, if the power supply generation circuit is damaged, it is not possible to replace the power supply generation circuit board and directly solder a new board to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact; rather, the peripheral control board 1510 itself must be replaced.

It should be noted that gaming machines equipped with a performance control board on which electronic components such as ROMs are mounted have been known for some time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-217381 (paragraph [0061], Figure 5)). However, there was room for improvement in the method of mounting electronic components to the control board in conventional gaming machines.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1500 (Figure 170), which is a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 (Figure 173), which is a control board; a ROM socket 1510s (Figure 173), which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b (Figure 173), which stores performance data, is mounted; and a conversion board 1510t (Figure 173), which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a position 1510v2 is formed for positioning the control ROM 1510b (Figure 173), which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new configuration, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above includes a peripheral control unit 1500, shown in Figure 170, which is a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510, shown in Figure 173, which is a control board; a ROM socket 1510s, shown in Figure 173, on which a control ROM 1510b, shown in Figure 173, which stores performance data, is mounted; and a conversion board 1510t, shown in Figure 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a position 1510v2 is formed for arranging the control ROM 1510b, shown in Figure 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. The conversion board 1510t has a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t shown in Figure 173, which is a first board surface portion that can be soldered, and an inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the side through-hole 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t shown in Figure 173, which is a second board surface portion. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have a lead terminal 1510sc which is the lead terminal portion of the ROM socket 1510t and the first The pad 1510ta, which is the board surface portion, is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering). The peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are connected by soldering (electrically connected) the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (Figure 173) and the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the side through-hole 1510tb, which is the second board surface portion of the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new configuration, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above includes a peripheral control unit 1500, shown in Figure 170, which is a performance control means that controls the performance related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510, shown in Figure 173, which is a control board; a ROM socket 1510s, shown in Figure 173, on which a control ROM 1510b, shown in Figure 173, which stores performance data, is mounted; and a conversion board 1510t, shown in Figure 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The conversion board 1510t is provided with a first terminal portion, a pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t as shown in Figure 174, for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface where the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The second terminal portion, the inner peripheral wall 1510tba of the side through-holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t, is for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface where the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The first and second terminal portions are of different configurations, and the second terminal portion is electrically connected to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 via solder.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 due to external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, to the peripheral control board 1510 can be changed to a new configuration, making it more convenient.

[8. Power System]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figure 178. Figure 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko game machine. First, the power supply board will be explained, followed by the power supply supplied to the backup power supply, each control board, etc. Note that the board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 and are on the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power Supply Board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the circuit board unit 620 shown in Figures 94 and 95, is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is plugged into a power outlet of the island equipment in the amusement hall. In the island equipment of an amusement hall, a system is usually employed in which, for example, four pachinko machines 1 are treated as one group and each is supplied with AC power (AC 24V) from one transformer. For example, in the island equipment of an amusement hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group (a total of five transformers), and AC power (AC 24V) is supplied to each group. Therefore, a transformer with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned ON, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall is supplied to the power board 630, allowing the power to be turned on to the pachinko machine 1. Conversely, when the power switch 630a is turned OFF, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall is no longer supplied to the power board 630, allowing the power to be shut off to the pachinko machine 1. Normally, the power switch 630a is kept in the ON state, and when the staff of the gaming hall start business, they turn ON (switch on) the circuit breaker installed in the gaming hall, thereby simultaneously turning on the power to the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows on the island equipment of the gaming hall. Then, when the staff of the gaming hall end business, they turn OFF (switch off) the circuit breaker installed in the gaming hall, thereby simultaneously shutting off the power to the pachinko machines 1 installed in multiple rows on the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, when individually powering on or off a pachinko machine 1 among multiple rows of pachinko machines 1 installed in a gaming hall's island equipment, examples include when a staff member of the gaming hall turns off the power switch 630a during maintenance and turns it back on after the maintenance is completed, or when a staff member of the gaming hall turns off the power switch 630a to resolve a problem with a pachinko machine 1 that has occurred and turns it back on after the problem is resolved.

As shown in Figure 178, the power supply board 630 includes, in addition to the power switch 630a, fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a backup power supply circuit 630h. The AC power (AC 24V (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, regardless of whether the power switch 630a is ON or OFF. From this interface board 635, power is supplied to the ball dispensing machine (for example, the CR unit) located adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When the power switch 630a is turned ON, the AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the gaming hall is supplied to the noise suppression circuit 630b via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and then the power switch 630a, where the noise is removed. The noise-free AC24V is supplied to the rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) to become a DC power supply. This rectified DC power supply is supplied to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the power supply destruction circuit 630g, where a DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with an improved power factor is created. This created +35V is supplied to the smoothing circuit 630e, where the ripple of the +35V is removed and the circuit is smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power supply generation circuit 630f.

The power supply disruption circuit 630g electrically disconnects the AC24V supplied from the gaming hall's island equipment by causing fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to melt and blow a large current exceeding the allowable current limit (a predetermined cutting current for each) when the voltage supplied to it exceeds a predetermined voltage. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current limit (cutting current) flows through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the elements of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 melt, interrupting the AC24V supplied to subsequent devices via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

The power supply generation circuit 630f, which is supplied with smoothed +35V, includes a +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa, a +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb, and a +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc. The +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied from the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power lines (power systems) supplied with +5V applied by the power supply board 630 are designated as +5V power lines, the power lines (power systems) supplied with +12V applied by the power supply board 630 are designated as +12V power lines, and the power lines (power systems) supplied with +24V applied by the power supply board 630 are designated as +24V power lines.

[8-2. Backup Power Supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "dispensing control built-in RAM") built into the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control unit 633a of the dispensing control board 633.

The +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f is supplied to the payout control board 633. The +5V supplied to the payout control board 633 becomes the +5V power line on the payout control board 633 via the payout control filter circuit 633h, and is applied to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, as well as to the power terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the +12V power supply generation circuit 630fb of the power supply generation circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. This +5V generation circuit 1310g generates +5V from the +12V from the payout control board 633 as a local power supply that becomes the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board-side generated +5V") becomes the main control board-side generated +5V power line on the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as well as to the power terminal of the main control's built-in RAM via diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 (main control board-side generated +5V) are not electrically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM on the payout control board 633, and also to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on the payout control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 flows towards the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, and also flows towards the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM (which is forward due to diode PD0) and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1.

Thus, capacitor BC1 can be charged by a +5V supply via an electrical connection method where the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is supplied to the payout control board 633, and then returns from the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. Therefore, if the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Although current is blocked by diode PD0 and does not flow to the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, preventing the MPU 633aa from operating, payout VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the built-in payout control RAM, thus maintaining the contents of the built-in payout control RAM.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g (the +5V created on the main control board side) flows towards the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also flows towards the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM (which is forward-facing) and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 via diode MD0.

Thus, capacitor BC0 can be charged by the supply of +5V (generated on the main control board side) generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, which is then supplied to the main control board 1310 and then to the power supply board 630 from the payout control board 633, through this electrical connection method. As a result, if the +12V generated by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the +5V generation circuit 1310g is unable to generate +5V (the +5V generated on the main control board side), the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied as main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. Therefore, although the diode MD0 prevents current from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control's built-in RAM, thus maintaining the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

[8-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the power supplies provided to each control board, followed by a description of the power supply primarily provided to the dispensing control board, and then to the main control board.

As shown in Figure 178, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa, +12V power supply generation circuit 630f, and +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc on the power supply board 630, are supplied to the dispensing control board 633. Of these three types of power supplies, the +12V and +24V power supplies are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. Furthermore, the three types of power supplies—+5V, +12V, and +24V—generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa, the +12V power supply generation circuit 630f, and the +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc, respectively, on the power supply board 630f are supplied to the interface board 635, and through this interface board 635, they are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the like, respectively.

Furthermore, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., may be interrupted by overcurrents flowing through these power lines. These fuses (not shown) for +5V, +12V, and +24V may be provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc.

In particular, the +12V power line and the +24V power line are monitored for potential drops by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described later. When the potential of the +12V power line drops and a power outage warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing to stop the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing to stop the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, if a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., respectively, then when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if leakage current or a short circuit occurs in the +12V power line or +24V power line of the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., due to some electrical trouble with the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., and an overcurrent flows through the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, the door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, etc., can be configured to blow. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As a result, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

The three types of power supplies supplied to the peripheral control board 1510—+5V, +12V, and +24V—are supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via fuses (not shown) for +5V, +12V, and +24V, respectively.

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510. It can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the +5V power supply line peripheral control board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +5V power supply line peripheral control board flows through the +5V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse melts, interrupting the +5V power supply line to subsequent boards supplied via the fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself, the current used by subsequent boards such as various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510, and the current used by subsequent devices via the peripheral control board 1510. It can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the +12V power line peripheral control board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse melts, interrupting the +12V power line supplied to subsequent devices via the fuse (not shown).

The +24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +24V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, and can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the peripheral control board on the +24V power supply line. Furthermore, if the peripheral control board 1510 uses +24V to provide an electrical drive source (e.g., a drive solenoid) with a +24V driver circuit, the capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset, taking into account both the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself on the +24V power supply line and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the peripheral control board on the +24V power supply line flows through the +24V fuse (not shown), the element of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts, interrupting the +24V power supply line supplied to subsequent boards via the fuse (not shown).

Note that the +5V, +12V, and +24V fuses (not shown) are the main fuses supplying the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the peripheral control board 1510 to the subsequent boards. Because they carry a large current and can generate heat, it is preferable to position them away from the electronic components (e.g., microprocessor, VDP, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the display control unit 1512 to prevent thermal shutdown failures in the ICs due to this heat. Specifically, they should be positioned near the connectors to which the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the interface board 635 are supplied (particularly near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines supplying the +5V, +12V, and +24V power from the interface board 635 are connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a control power supply generation circuit (not shown) that generates 3.3V DC (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) becomes the +3.3V power line on the peripheral control board 1510 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The control power supply generation circuit (not shown) can generate a local power supply of +3.3V from the +12V power line, which serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512. This is possible even if an abnormal current flows through and blows the +5V power supply line (not shown) and/or the +24V power supply line (not shown) (excluding the +12V power supply line supplied via a +12V fuse not shown), thus preventing the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from stopping and allowing them to continue operating. Furthermore, if the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, it becomes difficult to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid), but the performance can continue.

Furthermore, the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) may generate multiple control power supplies in addition to +3.3V, corresponding to various devices such as the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.) as local power supplies. In this case, fuses for the control power supplies (not shown) will be provided for each of the multiple control power supplies (for example, a fuse for +3.3V, a fuse for +1.5V, and a fuse for +1.25V, with the +3.3V fuse becoming the +3.3V power line, the +1.5V fuse becoming the +1.5V power line, and the +1.25V fuse becoming the +1.25V power line).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +3.3V power supply line, and can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the peripheral control board in the +3.3V power supply line. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the peripheral control board in the +3.3V power supply line flows through the control power supply fuse (not shown), the element of the control power supply fuse (not shown) melts, interrupting the +3.3V power supply line supplied to subsequent boards via the control power supply fuse (not shown). Furthermore, if control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided for each of the multiple control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.25V fuse for +1.25V), the capacity of the fuse is predetermined by taking into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510. This allows current to flow up to the permissible current limit (breaking current) of each power line of the multiple control power supplies. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the permissible current limit of each power line of the multiple control power supplies flows, the element of the control power supply fuse (not shown), provided for each of the multiple control power supplies, melts, and the power line of the subsequent control power supply supplied through this melted control power supply fuse (not shown) is interrupted.

Note that the control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse for the +3.3V power supply line that provides the control power for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512. Because it carries a large current and can generate heat, it is preferable to position it away from specific electronic components in the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 to prevent thermal shutdown failures caused by this heat. It is preferable to position it near the control power supply creation circuit (particularly near the terminal that creates +3.3V and supplies it as the +3.3V power supply line).

In this embodiment, the fuses for +5V, +12V, +24V, and the control power supply on the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses. They blow when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (a predetermined breaking current for each) flows through them. Unlike resettable fuses, once a fuse blows, it cannot supply power to subsequent circuits even if the current decreases.

Furthermore, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse on the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) may be replaced with lead-type fuses instead of SMD-type chip fuses. Alternatively, resettable fuses such as SMD-type or lead-type thermistors may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse on the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown). In this case, when using resettable fuses, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, power lines cannot be supplied to subsequent devices, but power lines can be supplied again to subsequent devices once the current decreases.

Of the three types of power supplies—+5V, +12V, and +24V—supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit (not shown) via a +5V fuse (not shown), +24V is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 via a +24V fuse (not shown), and +12V is supplied to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 via a +12V fuse (not shown), and is also supplied to multiple decorative boards (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5") provided on the game board 5.

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +5V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the +5V power supply line of the subsequent board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +5V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 flows through the +5V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse melts, interrupting the +5V power supply line to the subsequent board supplied through the fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 (excluding the decorative boards of the game board 5) and the current used by the decorative boards of the game board 5, and can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the subsequent boards of the +12V power line. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the subsequent boards of the +12V power line flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse (not shown) melts, interrupting the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent boards via the fuse (not shown).

The +24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +24V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and can handle current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the +24V power supply line of the subsequent board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +24V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 flows through the +24V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse melts, interrupting the +24V power supply line to the subsequent board supplied through the fuse (not shown).

Note that the +5V, +12V, and +24V fuses (not shown) are fuses that supply power to the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines. While the current flowing through them is smaller than that of the main +5V, +12V, and +24V fuses on the peripheral control board 1510, the current is still large, and they may generate heat. Therefore, to prevent failure due to shutdown caused by the thermal shutdown unit built into the +12V driver circuit (not shown) due to this heat, it is preferable to position them away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit (not shown). It is particularly preferable to position them near the connectors to which the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the peripheral control board 1510 are supplied (especially near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines supplied with +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 are connected).

The input buffer circuit (not shown) receives control signals (which may be serial or parallel signals) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510. It removes noise from these input control signals and outputs them to the +24V driver circuit (not shown) and the +12V driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is configured as a circuit where one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) is applied, and the other end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND), are electrically connected to the multiple wiring harnesses that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 and the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510. By removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring harnesses, noise immunity can be improved.

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) primarily consists of a driver IC that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown)") that interrupts overcurrent to this driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the +24V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the drive solenoid on the game board side. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) melts, interrupting the +24V power supply line to the subsequent components supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown).

The +12V driver circuit (not shown) primarily consists of a driver IC that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown)") that interrupts overcurrent to this driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) is supplied to the driver IC through the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the game board's drive motor. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board's drive motor flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) melts, interrupting the +12V power line supplied to the subsequent components via the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown).

In this embodiment, the fuses for +5V, +12V, +24V, the fuse in the +24V driver circuit, and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit, which are not shown on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses. They blow when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (a predetermined breaking current for each) flows through them. Unlike resettable fuses, once a fuse blows, it cannot supply power to subsequent circuits even if the current decreases. Note that instead of SMD type chip fuses, lead-type fuses may be used for the +5V, +12V, +24V, the fuse in the +24V driver circuit, and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit, which are not shown on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead type thermistors may be used as the fuses for +5V, +12V, +24V, the fuse in the +24V driver circuit, and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown). In this case, when using resettable fuses, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to the subsequent boards. However, once the current decreases, the power line can be supplied to the subsequent boards again.

The +12V supplied to each decorative circuit board of the game board 5 is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various types of illumination, such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting, for multiple LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the game board 5") provided in the game board 5, including full-color LEDs and monochrome LEDs. The LED constant current drive circuit mainly consists of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can supply a constant current to the various LEDs of the game board 5, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current supplied to the various LEDs of the game board 5. If an input buffer circuit is not provided in the LED constant current drive circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided before the LED constant current drive circuit.

The +12V fuse (not shown) is located on the +12V power line of each decorative circuit board of the game board 5. Its capacity is pre-set, taking into account the current used by each decorative circuit board of the game board 5, and it can handle current up to the game board's decorative circuit board's allowable current limit (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the game board's decorative circuit board's allowable current limit flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse melts, interrupting the subsequent +12V power line supplied through the fuse (not shown).

Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12V power line. While the current flowing through it is smaller than that of the main +12V fuse on the peripheral control board 1510, the current is still significant, and it may generate heat. Therefore, to prevent damage to the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board due to this heat, it is preferable to position it away from the various LEDs and the LED constant current drive circuit. It is particularly preferable to position it near the connector to which the +12V is supplied (especially near the connector of the terminal to which the power line supplying +12V is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative circuit board of the game board 5 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses. They blow when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (a predetermined breaking current) flows through them. Unlike resettable fuses, once a fuse blows, it cannot supply power to subsequent circuits even if the current decreases. Note that instead of SMD type chip fuses, lead-type fuses may be used as the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative circuit board of the game board 5. Alternatively, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead-type thermistors may be used as the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative circuit board of the game board 5. In this case, when using a resettable fuse, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, power cannot be supplied to subsequent circuits, but power can be supplied again once the current decreases.

The three types of power supplies—+5V, +12V, and +24V—supplied to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are provided to the door frame side drive boards (not shown, sometimes referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3") and the multiple decorative boards (sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") that are located on the door frame 3, each supplying the power it requires. Each board is equipped with a fuse (not shown) corresponding to its respective power supply.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 is provided with a fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply (e.g., a +5V fuse, a +24V fuse, a +12V fuse), as well as fuses in the +24V driver circuit that controls the +24V electrical drive source (e.g., a drive solenoid), and fuses in the +12V driver circuit that controls the +12V electrical drive source (e.g., a drive motor). The capacity of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is set in advance, taking into account the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power line corresponding to the power supply of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can carry current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for each power line drive board on the door frame side (e.g., upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) for the door frame side +5V power line drive board, upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) for the door frame side +24V power line drive board, upper limit of allowable current (cutting current) for the door frame side +12V power line drive board). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for each power line drive board on the door frame side (for example, the maximum allowable current limit for the +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, the maximum allowable current limit for the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, and the maximum allowable current limit for the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side) flows through the power supply and the corresponding fuse (not shown), the element of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply melts, interrupting the power supply line to the subsequent power lines supplied through the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the melted power supply.

The fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit have a capacity that is pre-set, taking into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive sources (drive solenoids) and the +24V driver circuit of the door frame 3 in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) of the door frame-side drive solenoid. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the door frame-side drive solenoid flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the subsequent +24V power supply line supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit. The fuses in the +12V driver circuit have a pre-set capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive sources (drive motors) and the +12V driver circuit of each drive board in the door frame 3, allowing current to flow up to the upper limit of the door frame drive motor's allowable current (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the door frame drive motor's allowable current flows, the fuse element in the +12V driver circuit melts, interrupting the subsequent +12V power supply line supplied through the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

The fuses (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board in the +12V power line of the door frame 3, and can handle current up to the upper limit of the door frame side decorative board's allowable current (breaking current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the door frame side decorative board's allowable current flows, the element of the fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3 melts, interrupting the subsequent +12V power line supplied through the fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the door frame 3.

For example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +12V, it is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is an electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. The +12V driver circuit mainly consists of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that interrupts overcurrent to this driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse in the +12V driver circuit has a capacity that is preset, taking into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) and the +12V driver circuit of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the drive board, and can allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutoff current) of the door frame drive motor. The fuse in the +12V driver circuit will blow if an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side drive motor flows through it. This will cause the fuse element to blow, interrupting the subsequent +12V power supply line supplied via the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

Furthermore, for the drive boards of the door frame 3 that are equipped with (mounted on) a +12V driver circuit, a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown) are provided. A control signal (which may be a serial or parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 is input to this buffer circuit, and noise is removed from this input control signal before it is output to the +12V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse is applied and the other end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to the multiple wiring harnesses that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5 and the drive boards of the door frame 3. By removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring harnesses, noise immunity can be improved. Replacing the +5V supplied to this resistor with +12V supplied via a +12V fuse can achieve the same effect (i.e., improved noise immunity).

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +24V, it is supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the driving of the electrical drive sources (e.g., drive solenoids) provided in the door frame 3. The +24V driver circuit mainly consists of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V electrical drive sources (drive solenoids, drive motors) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that interrupts overcurrent to this driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The fuse in the +24V driver circuit has a capacity that is preset, taking into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive sources (drive solenoids, drive motors) and the +24V driver circuit of the door frame 3 in the +24V power supply line of the drive board, and can allow current to flow up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cutting current) of the door frame side drive solenoid. The fuse in the +24V driver circuit will blow if an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side drive solenoid flows through it. This will cause the fuse element to blow, interrupting the subsequent +24V power supply line supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit.

Furthermore, for each drive board in the door frame 3, the drive board equipped with a +24V driver circuit (which is mounted or installed) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal (which may be a serial or parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 in the game board 5 is input to this buffer circuit, and noise is removed from this input control signal before it is output to the +24V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse is applied and the other end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to the multiple wiring harnesses that electrically connect the peripheral control board 1510 in the game board 5 and each drive board in the door frame 3. By removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring harnesses, noise immunity can be improved. Instead of supplying +5V to this resistor, if +24V or +12V supplied via a +24V fuse is also available, supplying +12V via a +12V fuse will achieve the same effect (i.e., improved noise immunity).

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the decorative boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, a +12V fuse (not shown) supplies power to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls various types of illumination, such as lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and gradation lighting, for multiple LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs of the door frame 3"), such as full-color LEDs and mono-color LEDs, provided in the door frame 3, via a +12V fuse (not shown). The LED constant current drive circuit mainly consists of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can supply a constant current to the various LEDs of the door frame 3, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the various LEDs of the door frame 3. The +12V fuse (not shown) has a capacity that is pre-set taking into account the respective currents used by each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the +12V power supply line of the decorative board, and can supply current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (breaking current) for the decorative board on the door frame side. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative circuit board on the door frame side flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) will melt, interrupting the subsequent +12V power supply line supplied through the fuse (not shown).

Furthermore, if, among the decorative boards of the door frame 3, one decorative board does not have an LED constant current drive circuit and the light emission of multiple LEDs mounted on that decorative board is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative board of the door frame 3, then a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on that decorative board. Also, if the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit provided (mounted, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3, an input buffer circuit may be provided before the LED constant current drive circuit.

In this embodiment, the fuses provided on the door frame 3 are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) chip fuses. They blow when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (a predetermined breaking current) flows through them. Unlike resettable fuses, once a fuse blows, it cannot supply power to subsequent devices even if the current decreases. Note that instead of SMD type chip fuses, lead-type fuses may be used as the fuses provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, resettable fuses such as SMD type or lead-type thermistors may be used as the fuses provided on the door frame 3. In this case, if a resettable fuse is used, a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit will prevent power from being supplied to subsequent devices, but power can be supplied again once the current decreases.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in Figure 178, the dispensing control board 633 includes a dispensing control MPU 633aa and the like, as well as a dispensing control filter circuit 633h. This dispensing control filter circuit 633h is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 630, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the dispensing control MPU 633aa and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a. The +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the dispensing control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of this external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs signals to a hall computer installed in the amusement hall that convey the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1. The hall computer monitors the players' games by understanding the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. The +24 from the power supply board 630 is not used in any way by the payout control board 633, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Figure 178, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like. The +5V generation circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633 and generates +5V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured such that the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V created on the main control board side by the +5V creation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V created on the main control board side by the +5V creation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 is not electrically connected to the various electronic components of other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V (generated by the main control board) from the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 via diode MD0, and also to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and the main control input circuit 1310b. The +12V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the +24V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633 and monitors for signs of power outages or momentary interruptions in these +12V and +24V power supplies. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption in the +12V and +24V power supplies, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the main control board 1310 and then to the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to both the +12V power line and the +24V power line. This allows for more accurate detection of signs of power outages or momentary power interruptions compared to monitoring only one of the power lines (either the +12V or +24V).

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12V power supply creation circuit 630f, and +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc, respectively, in the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to various boards such as the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply is at the same potential on all the boards, and the +24V power supply is at the same potential on all the boards. Furthermore, although the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, they are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, with the exception of the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with (mounted on) a +12V fuse and a +24V fuse (not shown), and the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are also equipped with (mounted on) a +12V fuse and a +24V fuse (not shown).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, both the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted/installed) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted/installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential. Similarly, the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted/installed) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted/installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, as described above, it is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is an electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3. If one, multiple, or all of the drive boards among the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, as described above, it is supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3. In this case, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment includes a +12V power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the successor board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3. The fuses are at the same potential, and the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are all at the same potential.

[9. Circuits of the main control board and the dispensing control board]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly explained with reference to Figures 179 to 182. Figure 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Figure 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function, Figure 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Figure 182 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be explained, followed by the circuit of the dispensing control board 633. Here, we will explain an example in which the setting key switch 1311a, which is mounted on the setting change board 1311 mentioned above, is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of the various boards will also be explained as appropriate.

[9-1. Circuitry of the main control board]
In the power supply circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied via the payout control board 633 from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and +5V is created from this supplied +12V in the +5V creation circuit 1310g as a local power supply that becomes the control power supply for the main control board 1310. This local power supply, +5V, is at the same potential as the +5V created by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

In the +5V generation circuit 1310g, the +5V, which serves as the local power supply for the control board 1310, is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h, as shown in Figure 179. This main control filter circuit 1310h is primarily composed of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics due to magnetic shielding with ferrite. The +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is first smoothed by removing ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The +5V output from terminal 3 is further smoothed and ripple removed by being electrically connected to the other ends of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), each having one end electrically connected to ground (GND) (circuit board ground). This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Furthermore, in the event of a momentary power outage and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage occurs.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC3, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and also to the anode terminal of diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by capacitor MC3, which removes ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0. Furthermore, the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC4, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). In addition, it is electrically connected via resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB power supply from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via resistor MR0, while the main VBB power supply from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is prevented from being supplied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via resistor MR0 by diode MD0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d (which may be called the RAM clear switch 1310f) provided on the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general prize slot sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first start slot sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start slot sensor 2401, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a are input to the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b"), which does not have an error detection function. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. In contrast, detection signals from the general prize entry sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the first start-up sensor 3002, and the second start-up sensor 2401 are input to the input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, respectively, via the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function.

The power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the display device 1600, etc., via the main control output circuit 1310c. Input ports PA and PB are configured with 8 bits. Furthermore, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of input ports PA and PB via the main control input circuit 1310b or the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. Unused input terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal treatment.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from its predetermined output port terminals via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e via the main control output circuit 1310c, or outputs a drive signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the main control output circuit 1310c.

Furthermore, detection signals from other sensors may be input to designated input terminals of port PC in addition to port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. Unused input terminals on port PC are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal treatment. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, is configured with 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main Control Input Circuit]
Next, we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from the RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b, to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 is input, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR2, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)), as shown in Figure 179. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR0 via resistor MR3. In addition to resistor MR3, the base terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR4, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. They are connected precisely. The collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Furthermore, the other end of resistor MR2 may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in order to align it with the waveform of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, if the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor within the main control MPU 1310a via a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), then the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from the setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, an A terminal, and a B terminal. The B terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, and A terminal are also electrically connected. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, resulting in a conductive state between the internal circuits of the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal and the A terminal. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, resulting in a conductive state between the internal circuits of the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal and the B terminal, resulting in an electrically connected state to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is OFF, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to terminal A in the internal circuitry, while when the setting key switch 1311a is ON, the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal are electrically connected to terminal B in the internal circuitry, and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR10, one end of which is electrically connected to the main control board side's +5V power supply line (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), as shown in Figure 179. In addition, it is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC10, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR10 via resistor MR11. The base terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to resistor MR11, and also to the other end of resistor MR12, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR13, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

The logic inversion circuit 1310iv is a circuit that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. The logic inversion circuit 1310iv consists of resistors MR14, MR15, MR16, and a transistor MTR11. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR10, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR13, which is electrically connected at one end to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR11 via resistor MR14. The base terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to resistor MR14, as well as the other end of resistor MR15, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground). The collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR16, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

Furthermore, if the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor that is electrically connected via a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), then the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. Furthermore, even if the input terminals PA1-PA4 and PA6-PA7 of input port PA are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor within the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PA1-PA4 and PA6-PA7 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without electrically connecting one end to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF position, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and terminal A are electrically connected in the internal circuit. As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a has its voltage boosted to the +5V side created on the main control board by the resistor MR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b, and its logic becomes HIG, turning on the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side of the main control board 1310 (board ground), turning off transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. The voltage at the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is then raised to the +5V side created by the main control board by resistor MR16 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. This results in a setting key signal with a logic of HIGH, which is then input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is in the OFF position, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HIGH (a logic indicating an unsettable state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a has a LOW logic, and the transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board by resistor MR13 of the main control input circuit 1310b, turning on transistor MTR11 of the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. The voltage at the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is then lowered to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground), and the setting key signal, with a logic of LOW, is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (a logic indicating a settable state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, as will be described later. Therefore, the resistor PR50 of the dispensing control input circuit 633ab on the dispensing control board 633, as described later, pulls the signal up to the power supply (+5V) side created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f. This turns on the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac on the dispensing control board 633, as will be described later. The voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is then pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the dispensing control board 633, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes LOW, which is then input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d, whose logic is LOW, is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board by the resistor MR5 of the main control input circuit 1310b. This RWM signal, whose logic is now HI, is then input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic indicating a non-pressed state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, as will be described later. As a result, the transistor PTR 60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac on the dispensing control board 633 is turned OFF, and the voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor PTR 60 is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board by the resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b on the main control board 1310, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. Consequently, the transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns ON, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The RWM signal, with its logic set to LOW, is then input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic indicating the press operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

Thus, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated, the logic of the RAWM signal indicating this is set to HI. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, the logic of the RAWM signal indicating this is set to LOW. In other words, the logic indicating that the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the logic indicating that the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is being operated are the same logic (HI), and the logic indicating that the setting key switch 1311a is OFF (not ON) and the logic indicating that the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not being operated are the same logic (LOW).

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. Since the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is the same circuit, we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b with error detection function, which receives the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, which receives the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, is mainly composed of the processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in Figure 180. The processing circuit 1310b2a receives a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side via the VCC terminal (this is a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). This power supply is provided as an internal power source to various internal circuits, and the ground (GND) of each internal circuit is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the GND terminal.

Furthermore, the processing circuit 1310b2a includes a power terminal circuit that monitors the power supply of the +12V power supply line (i.e., the +12V power supply line) supplied via the VS terminal (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f), a disconnection monitoring circuit that monitors for disconnections based on detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, a short-circuit monitoring circuit that monitors for short circuits based on detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, a comparison circuit that compares and determines whether a game ball has passed with a predetermined threshold value based on detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal, an abnormality processing circuit that determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, disconnection monitoring circuit, and short-circuit monitoring circuit, and performs processing in case of an abnormality, an error output circuit that communicates the abnormality based on the inspection results from each monitoring circuit, and an output circuit that outputs the comparison results from the comparison circuit.

The abnormality handling circuit, upon determining an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (error detection), sets and controls the logic to output a message indicating the abnormality (that an abnormality has occurred) to the outside via the ER terminal from the error output circuit. It also sets and controls the logic to stop the comparison result from the comparison circuit output from the output circuit, outputting it to the outside via the output terminal.

The VS terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)), one end of resistor MR50, and the other end of capacitor MC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, as well as to the other end of the resistor MR50. Furthermore, to align the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a may also be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC51, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with error detection function.

The ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR52, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. Furthermore, the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the ER terminal of another main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. In other words, the signals from the ER terminals of multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection function are OR connected. The signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function is input as a sensor error signal to input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Here, we will explain the state of the input terminals of the processing circuit 1310b2a when the abnormal processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormal situation has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, the open circuit monitoring circuit, and the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a. When the abnormal processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormal situation has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminals of the processing circuit 1310b2a is undefined, indicating a power supply abnormality. When the abnormal processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormal situation has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the open circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminals of the processing circuit 1310b2a is HI, indicating an open circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is set to LOW, indicating a short circuit.

Furthermore, the state of the output terminal and ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a when an abnormality is detected (error detection) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit such as the power supply monitoring circuit, open circuit monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a will be explained. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, it determines that a power supply abnormality has occurred. The abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW in order to stop the comparison result from the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a. Furthermore, to indicate that an abnormality has occurred, the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to HI in order to communicate that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the disconnection monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, it determines that a disconnection has occurred. The abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW in order to stop the comparison result output from the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a. Furthermore, to indicate that an abnormality has occurred, the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to HI in order to control the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (error detection) based on the monitoring results from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to LOW in order to stop the comparison result from the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a that is output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a. Furthermore, to indicate that an abnormality has occurred, the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a to HI.

[9-1-3. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 178, the main control board 1310 receives two types of voltages via the payout control board 633: +12V from the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, and +24V from the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630. Both +12V and +24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of power outages or momentary power interruptions of +12V and +24V. When it detects signs of a power outage or momentary power interruption, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, as well as to the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the display device 1600, and the like. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, stopping the game's progress. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing, stopping the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls). The peripheral control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information. The performance display device 1600 stops the performance by turning off an inverter (not shown) that generates power for the backlight to cut power consumption, in order to ensure that the main control side power outage processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power outage processing by the payout control MPU 633aa are completed reliably.

This section will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, followed by explanations of monitoring for +24V power outages or momentary power interruptions, monitoring for +12V power outages or momentary power interruptions, and finally, the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in Figure 181, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e mainly consists of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)). A +5V power supply created on the main control board side is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (in this embodiment, 2.495V is set), which is the comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. Terminal K is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC20, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The reference voltage Vref output from terminal K is smoothed by capacitor MC20, which removes ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage). Terminal A, the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

Comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits. One of them (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitoring voltage V1") of the +24V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +24V power supply line)) with the reference voltage Vref. The other one (MIC21B) is used for the +12V power supply line. This is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as "+12V monitoring voltage V2") of the power supply line (i.e., the +12V power supply line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630f, 630fb, with the reference voltage Vref. A +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, the positive terminal of MIC21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, the negative terminal of MIC21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12V is applied to terminal 5, the positive terminal of IC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, the negative terminal of MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 comprises two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The power supply terminal Vcc of comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC21, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V created on the main control board side, applied to the Vcc terminal of comparator MIC21, is smoothed by capacitor MC21 to remove ripple, and the ground terminal GND of comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

[9-1-3b. Monitoring of +24V power outage or momentary power interruption]
As described above, monitoring of a +24V power outage or momentary interruption is performed by the comparator MIC21A comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR21, which is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +24V power supply line) at one end, and to the other end of resistor MR22, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) at one end, as shown in Figure 181. The other end of resistors MR21 and MR22 is electrically connected to capacitor MC23, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) at one end. The terminals are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that when the +24V power is interrupted or the voltage starts to drop from +24V and reaches a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment), the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The output terminal 1 of comparator MIC21A, terminal 1, is an open-collector output. One end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board. The other end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). This capacitor MC24 is then electrically connected to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 1, the output terminal of comparator MIC21A, is then pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal, now HIGH in logic, is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is less than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes less than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a signal with a LOW logic is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power interruption]
As described above, monitoring of a +12V power outage or momentary interruption is performed by the comparator MIC21B comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. Terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of comparator MIC21B to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR24, which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line) at one end, and to the other end of resistor MR25, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) at one end, as shown in Figure 181. The terminals are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that when the +12V power is interrupted or the voltage starts to drop from +12V and reaches a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment), the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref.

The MIC21B output terminal, terminal 7, of comparator MIC21 is an open-collector output and is electrically connected to the MIC21A output terminal, terminal 1. Therefore, it is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23 (one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line on the main control board), and electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24 (one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) - board ground), and thus electrically connected to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24, as described above, acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of comparator MIC21B, is then pulled up to the +5V side created on the main control board by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal, now HIGH in logic, is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is less than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes less than the reference voltage Vref. The voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of comparator MIC21B, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a signal with a LOW logic signal is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of type D flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Output of power outage warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the D-input terminal 1D terminal based on the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal 1CK terminal. This stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and the inverted value of the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state and outputs a signal with the logic of the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal inverted from the output terminal 1Q terminal (at this time, the signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR terminal, is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a signal with a logic of HI is input to the clear terminal CLR terminal, the latch state is set. Furthermore, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latch state by inputting a signal with a logic of HIGH to the clear terminal CLR terminal, and a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the preset terminal PR terminal, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic of HIGH from the output terminal 1Q (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q inverted from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has its D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, both electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). Therefore, there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to the clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, and the circuit is configured so that the value (logic) of the signal input to the D input terminal, terminal 1D, is not stored and output from the output terminal, terminal 1Q. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, as described above, a signal from terminal 1, which is the output terminal of comparator MIC21A that monitors for +24V power outages or momentary power interruptions, and a signal from terminal 7, which is the output terminal of comparator MIC21B that monitors for +12V power outages or momentary power interruptions, at the preset terminal PR terminal, and outputs a signal from the output terminal, terminal 1Q, based on these signals. Furthermore, the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC22, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V power supplied to the Vcc terminal (power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22), generated on the main control board, is smoothed by capacitor MC22, with ripple removed. The GND terminal (ground terminal) is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), while the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is electrically unconnected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c to its clear terminal, CLR terminal. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control power-on processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described later), and is stopped after a predetermined time. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with its logic set to LOW. When the power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latch state. At this time, it inverts the logic input to the preset terminal, PR terminal, and outputs it from the output terminal, 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, its logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is configured to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state when the logic is LOW input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The signal output from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. Furthermore, the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c. The signal output from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is output from the main control output circuit 1310c to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal, and also to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b, which electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal PB of the input port of the main control MPU 1310a, is shown in Figure 181. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 via resistor MR27. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor MR27, the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR28, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of the main control MPU1310a.

Furthermore, if the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor within the main control MPU 1310a via a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), then the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the transistor's collector terminal is electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the main control MPU 1310a's input port PB, within the main control MPU 1310a, an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to the main control board-side +5V power supply line (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)) is electrically connected, the transistor's collector terminal may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the main control MPU 1310a's input port PB without electrically connecting one end to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the main control board-side +5V power supply line, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, if the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and different from the power supply line created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), then the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a without electrically connecting one end to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, that is, without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

The circuit, consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28, and transistor MTR20, is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. Conversely, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is raised to +5V (main control board side), turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, causing transistor MTR20 to turn OFF. This increases the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 by resistor MR29 to the +5V side created on the main control board, and a power outage warning signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the input terminal PB of the main control MPU1310a.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of HI (high) and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, turning the transistor MTR20 ON. This pulls the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a power outage warning signal with a logic of LOW is input to the input terminal PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type, as shown in Figure 181. Terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor MR30, the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22 via resistor MR33. The base terminal of the following transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the following transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the following transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness). In the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633, one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)). It is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the preceding transistor MTR21 is the preceding switch circuit, while the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the succeeding transistor MTR22 is the succeeding switch circuit, which is switched ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning off the preceding transistor MTR21 and thus turning off the preceding switch circuit. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board by resistor MR32, turning on the following transistor MTR22 and thus turning on the subsequent switch circuit. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HIGH, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is raised to the +5V side created by the main control board, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit also ON. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, is lowered to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR22 OFF and the subsequent switch circuit OFF.

When both conditions are met—that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is raised to the +5V side created on the main control board by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, turning the subsequent transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground) on the dispensing control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the dispensing control board 633.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground) and applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22, turning the subsequent transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and a payout power outage warning signal with a logic state of HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open collector output type, as shown in Figure 181. Terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 via resistor MR35. In addition to being electrically connected to resistor MR35, the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)), and also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port on the peripheral control unit 1511.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36, and transistor MTR23, is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. Conversely, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V (main control board side), turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both conditions are met—that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, and that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic of LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, causing transistor MTR23 to turn OFF. Consequently, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic of HIGH is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the following conditions is met—that the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, or that the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf—a signal with a LOW logic signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. As a result, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a HI logic signal and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, turning the MTR23 ON. This causes the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 to be pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground) on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), resulting in a peripheral power outage warning signal with a LOW logic signal being input to the peripheral control board 1510.

Thus, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 are... While the logic of the other components is identical, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal from terminal 1Q (the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22) to the payout control board 633 as a payout power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the pre-stage and one in the post-stage. The logic of the payout power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is therefore different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the peripheral power outage warning signal.

Furthermore, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 in the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. In contrast, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 in the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are mounted on the main control board 1310. Therefore, power outage warnings are given using the logic (ON/OFF signal) of a power outage warning signal that uses the +5V power supply created on the main control board side, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. However, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, power outage warnings are given using the logic (ON/OFF signal) of a power outage warning signal that uses a DC power supply that is higher than the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa, and the peripheral control board 1511, for example, +12V, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

Thus, the power lines (i.e., +12V power lines) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are supplied to, as described above, the main control input circuit 1310b and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control boards, the LED constant current drive circuits of each decorative board of the game board 5, the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, and the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuits (not shown) of the performance display device 1600. In other words, the +12V power line is supplied not only to the main control board 1310, but also to the payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board of the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, etc. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, for example, an electrical problem for some reason in the control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 may cause an overcurrent to flow into the control power generation circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop, or an electrical problem for some reason in the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 may cause the liquid crystal panel power generation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 to malfunction. An overcurrent may flow to any of the LCD panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. Alternatively, when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is in standby mode), an overload or electrical trouble for any reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or a +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. Another possibility is that an electrical trouble for any reason in the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5 causes an overcurrent to flow to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5, causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. Furthermore, if any electrical trouble occurs in the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the display device 1600, or the decorative boards of the game board 5, or in the wiring (harnesses) that electrically connect the boards, leakage current or a short circuit may occur, causing an overcurrent and a drop in the potential of the +12V power line. In such a case, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a then performs the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and stops the game from progressing.

Furthermore, the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is supplied, as described above, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as to the payout control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power line via the payout control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) of the board following the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the +24V power line is supplied not only to the main control board 1310 but also to the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is on standby for driving), an overload or electrical trouble for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +24V power line to drop. Furthermore, if any electrical trouble occurs in the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, or in the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the potential of the +24V power line will drop. In such cases, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 will output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a will then perform the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power on processing, thereby stopping the game.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for the +12V and +24V power lines]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection for the +12V power line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as overcurrent protection for the +12V power line, the +12V power line is provided with a fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 that can allow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line peripheral control board as an overcurrent countermeasure, a fuse (not shown) on the performance display device 1600 that can allow current up to the upper limit of the main allowable current of the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, a fuse (not shown) on the performance display device 1600 that can allow current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branch system as the fuse of the first branch system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown), and a fuse (not shown) on the performance display device 1600 that allows current up to the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system as the fuse of the second branch system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown). A fuse for +12V (not shown) is provided, and a fuse for +12V (not shown) that can supply current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the +12V power line performance drive board is provided on the board following the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse for +12V system driver circuit (not shown) on the board following the peripheral control board 1510 that can supply current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board side drive motor is provided, and a fuse for +12V (not shown) that can supply current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board side decoration board is provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted (however, a fuse for +12V (not shown) that can supply current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board side decoration board may be provided for all decoration boards of the game board 5 to which the +12V power line is supplied, regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit). Furthermore, the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse for the first branch circuit is used to create the liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown). This liquid crystal panel power supply is then supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600 are supplied with both the liquid crystal panel power supply created from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse for the first branch circuit, and the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse for the second branch circuit.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board 1510 flows to the control power generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 due to some electrical trouble in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +12V fuse (not shown) that blows if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the peripheral control board on the +12V power line blows. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. This prevents the power outage warning signal from being output by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current limit of the first branch line flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600 due to some electrical trouble in the liquid crystal panel power supply circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse for the first branch line of the display device 1600, will blow. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current limit of the first branch flows to the liquid crystal panel power supply circuit (not shown), which creates a liquid crystal panel power supply from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse for the second branch, due to an electrical trouble for any reason to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse for the first branch of the display device 1600, will blow. Similarly, if an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current limit of the second branch flows to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the display device 1600 due to an electrical trouble for any reason to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse for the second branch of the display device 1600, will blow. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main fuse for the display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown), is pre-selected to have a capacity greater than that of either the +12V fuse for the first branch system (not shown) or the +12V fuse for the second branch system (not shown), and less than the combined capacity of both. Therefore, in the +12V power line, even if an overcurrent flows and one of the fuses (not shown) blows, the main fuse (not shown) may still blow if an overcurrent flows through the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the main allowable current limit. Furthermore, if the capacity of the main fuse for the display device 1600, which is a +12V fuse (not shown), is the same as the sum of the capacity of the fuse for the first branch system, which is a +12V fuse (not shown), and the capacity of the fuse for the second branch system, which is a +12V fuse (not shown), then the main fuse, which is a +12V fuse (not shown), may blow if an overcurrent flows through the +12V power line and either of the fuses (the +12V fuse for the first branch system, or the +12V fuse for the second branch system, blows, and if an overcurrent continues to flow through the system of the blown fuse, exceeding the main allowable current limit, the main fuse, which is a +12V fuse (not shown), may also blow. Thus, the display device 1600 is equipped with a main fuse (not shown) for the display device 1600 (+12V fuse), a fuse for the first branch system (+12V fuse, not shown), and a fuse for the second branch system (+12V fuse, not shown), so that in the event of an overcurrent, the main fuse (+12V fuse, not shown), the fuse for the first branch system (+12V fuse, not shown), and the fuse for the second branch system (+12V fuse, not shown) will blow, supplying power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. By suppressing the potential drop in the +12V power line, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue gameplay without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and allows the payout control MPU 633aa to continue payouts (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V power supply line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, when the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board is driving the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 (or when the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven, due to an overload or electrical trouble for any reason, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied not only to the +12V driver circuit (not shown) but also to each decorative board of the game board 5. Therefore, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is pre-selected based on the upper limit of the allowable current of the game board-side drive motor of the +12V driver circuit (not shown) and the upper limit of the allowable current of each decorative board of the game board 5.

The +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to operate. Therefore, between the effects provided by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the various LED lighting effects provided by the various decorative circuit boards of the game board 5, the lighting effects provided by the various LEDs on the decorative circuit boards of the game board 5 are prioritized and continued over the effects provided by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5. Therefore, the capacities of the +12V fuses on each decorative board of the game board 5 and the fuses on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) are pre-selected so that the fuses on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) blow before the +12V fuses on each decorative board of the game board 5 blow. Furthermore, the capacity of the +12V fuse on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) is pre-set so that the various LED lighting effects on each decorative board of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued over the effects provided by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5.

In a case where the illumination effects of various LEDs on each decorative board of the game board 5 are prioritized over the effects provided by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is larger than the capacity selected so that each decorative board of the game board 5 can use up to the maximum allowable current limit of the game board side decorative board, and smaller than the sum of this selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown). If selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if, while each decorative board of the game board 5 is being used up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board's decorative board, an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the game board's drive motor flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to blow, but if the overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the maximum allowable current limit for the +12V power line display drive board, the fuse may blow. Furthermore, for example, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is pre-selected to be the same as the sum of the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to be used up to the maximum allowable current limit of the game board side decorative board, and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown), then the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow even if the fuse in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) blows due to an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit of the game board side drive motor flowing to the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) or the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the game board 5, while each decorative board of the game board 5 is being used up to the maximum allowable current limit of the game board side decorative board, if the overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the maximum allowable current limit of the +12V power supply line display drive board.

Furthermore, when the effects generated by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the various LED lighting effects from the various decorative boards of the game board 5 are prioritized and continued, the opposite is true when the effects generated by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 are prioritized and continued, in which case a fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. Rather than causing the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative circuit board of the game board 5 to blow first, the capacities of the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative circuit board of the game board 5, and the capacities of the fuses (not shown) provided in the +12V driver circuit of the subsequent circuit board of the peripheral control board 1510 are pre-selected. Furthermore, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent circuit board of the peripheral control board 1510 is pre-set so that the effects provided by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 can be prioritized and continued over the various LED lighting effects provided by each decorative circuit board of the game board 5.

Furthermore, if an overload or electrical trouble occurs in the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 for any reason, causing an overcurrent to flow through the 12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and stopping both the effects of the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the lighting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the game board 5, then the capacity of the +12V fuse on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (not shown) will be pre-set to be less than or equal to the smaller of the following two fuse capacities: the capacity of the fuse in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 and the capacity of the +12V fuses (not shown) on each decorative board of the game board 5.

In this way, by providing a +12V fuse (not shown) on the board following the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse (not shown) in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), the fuses for the +12V and +12V driver circuits (not shown) will blow in the event of overcurrent. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As a result, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board's decorative board flows through the +12V power line of each decorative board of the game board 5, the +12V fuse (not shown) on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted will blow. Furthermore, if a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided for all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit, and which can supply current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side, then the +12V fuse (not shown) for all decorative boards of the game board 5 will blow if an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board 5 flows through each LED or all decorative boards of the game board 5. Thus, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, so that the +12V fuse (not shown) will blow if an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side occurs. (Note that if a +12V fuse (not shown) that can allow current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit, then a +12V fuse (not shown) will be provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5 so that an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side occurs.) (Because the fuse is designed to blow), the potential drop in the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed. This prevents the main control board 1310's power outage monitoring circuit 1310e from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of distributing game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for any reason in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the game board 5, causing leakage current or a short circuit to occur and overcurrent to flow through the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the game board 5, an overcurrent will flow through the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the game board 5, etc., provided on each board (not shown) Because the 12V fuses are designed to blow, the potential drop in the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, preventing the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa from outputting a power outage warning signal by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described later. Furthermore, if an electrical problem occurs in the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 for any reason, resulting in leakage current or a short circuit, an overcurrent will flow to the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, as well as to the peripheral control board 1510 itself, which is the higher-level board of the subsequent board. This will cause the +12V fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 to blow.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor flows to the +12V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical trouble for any reason, while the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 is driving the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 (or while the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven, a fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +12V fuse for each drive board of the door frame 3 is predetermined based on the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor of the +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow even if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side drive motor flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) or the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuse in the +12V driver circuit to blow, if the overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side +12V power supply line drive board. In this way, by providing a +12V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3, and also by providing a fuse in the +12V driver circuit, the +12V fuses and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit will blow in the event of overcurrent. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As a result, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side decoration board flows through the LEDs or decoration boards of the door frame 3 via the +12V power supply line of each decoration board of the door frame 3, the +12V fuse of the decoration board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted will blow. Note that if a +12V fuse capable of supplying current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side decoration board is provided for all decoration boards of the door frame 3, regardless of whether or not an LED constant current drive circuit is present, then if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side decoration board flows through the LEDs or all decoration boards of the door frame 3 via the +12V power supply line of all decoration boards of the door frame 3, the +12V fuse of all decoration boards of the door frame 3 will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted, so that the +12V fuse blows if an overcurrent exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side. (Note that if a +12V fuse capable of supplying current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side is provided on all decorative boards of the door frame 3 that are supplied with a +12V power line regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit, then a +12V fuse is provided on all decorative boards of the door frame 3 so that the +12V fuse blows if an overcurrent exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side.) Therefore, the potential drop in the +12V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, preventing the power outage warning signal from being output to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and allows the payout control MPU 633aa to continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if leakage current or a short circuit occurs in the +12V power line of each drive board and each decorative board of the door frame 3 due to some electrical trouble with the drive board and each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., and an overcurrent flows to the drive board and each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuses provided on each board will blow. By suppressing the potential drop in the +12V power line supplied to 33, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue gameplay without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and allows the payout control MPU 633aa to continue payouts (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection for the +24V power line]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, as overcurrent protection for the +24V power supply line, the +24V power supply line is provided with a +24V fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 that can supply current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +24V power supply line peripheral control board as an overcurrent countermeasure, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse for the performance display device 1600 that can supply current up to the upper limit of the main allowable current, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the board following the peripheral control board 1510 that can supply current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +24V power supply line performance drive board, and a fuse (not shown) is provided in the +24V system driver circuit on the board following the peripheral control board 1510 that can supply current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side drive solenoid.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the +24V power line peripheral control board flows through the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510 due to some electrical trouble in the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, a +24V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +24V fuse (not shown) that blows if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the peripheral control board on the +24V power line blows. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. This prevents the main control board 1310's power failure monitoring circuit 1310e from outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue gameplay without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue payouts (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the +24V system drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or to the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) due to an overload or electrical trouble for any reason, while the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or while the drive solenoid of the game board 5 is on standby), a fuse (not shown) provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow if, even after the fuse in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) blows, an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the +24V power line driver board. As described above, by providing a +24V fuse (not shown) on the board following the peripheral control board 1510, and a fuse (not shown) in the +24V driver circuit, the fuses (not shown) and the +24V driver circuit fuse (not shown) will blow in the event of overcurrent. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. This prevents the main control board 1310's power failure monitoring circuit 1310e from outputting a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue gameplay without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue payouts (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 due to some electrical trouble to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, and if an overcurrent flows to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, a +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board will blow, thus preventing the main control board from malfunctioning. By suppressing the potential drop in the +24V power supply line supplied to the board 1310 and the payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue the game without performing the main control side power-off processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and allows the payout control MPU 633aa to continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid flows to the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical trouble for any reason, while the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 is driving the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 (or while the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is on standby for driving, a fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +24V fuse for each drive board of the door frame 3 is predetermined based on the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow even if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side drive solenoid flows to the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) or the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuse in the +24V driver circuit to blow, if the overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame-side +24V power supply line drive board. In this way, by providing a +24V fuse on each drive board of the door frame 3, and also by providing a fuse in the +24V driver circuit, the +24V fuses and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit will blow in the event of overcurrent. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +24V power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. As a result, the power outage warning signal is not output by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. The main control MPU 1310a can continue the game without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, which constitute the main board, are operating normally, if leakage current occurs or a short circuit occurs in the +24V power supply line of each drive board of the door frame 3 due to some electrical trouble to each drive board of the door frame 3, and an overcurrent flows to each drive board of the door frame 3, the +24V fuse provided on each board will blow, thereby preventing the +24V power supply to the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 from leaking current or short-circuiting. By suppressing the drop in the input potential, the power outage warning signal is not output by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue gameplay without performing the main control side power outage processing described later in the main control side power-on processing, and allows the payout control MPU 633aa to continue payouts (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power outage processing described later in the payout control unit power-on processing.

[9-2. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
In the power supply circuit of the dispensing control board 633, the control power supply for the dispensing control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, while the backup power supply supplied to the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is supplied as dispensing VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figure 182, the +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h is mainly composed of a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit with excellent attenuation characteristics due to magnetic shielding with ferrite. The +5V from the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, its second terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the +5V with noise components removed is output from its third terminal. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is first smoothed by removing ripple (the AC component superimposed on the voltage) through its electrical connection to the other end of capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (the circuit board ground).

The +5V output from terminal 3 is further smoothed and ripple removed by being electrically connected to the other ends of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. Furthermore, in the event of a momentary power outage and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage occurs. Furthermore, since the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is greater than that of the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 on the main control board 1310 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) is selected to be larger than that of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 on the payout control board 633 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). As a result, when a momentary power outage occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 on the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 on the payout control board 633, respectively, is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage occurs.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC3, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and also to the anode terminal of diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by capacitor PC3, which removes ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0. Furthermore, the VBB terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC4, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0. As a result, while the VBB terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0, the diode PD0 prevents the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa from receiving payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0.

Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb depletion detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively.

The detection signals from the full tank sensor 154, the bulb depletion sensor 574, the blade rotation sensor 590, the payout detection sensor 591, and the RWM switch 633d are each input to the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa, respectively, via the payout control input circuit 633ab. This input port PA is configured with 8 bits.

The payout power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Input ports PA and PB are configured with 8 bits. Furthermore, detection signals from other sensors are input to predetermined input terminals of input ports PA and PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab, respectively. Unused input terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal treatment.

[9-2-1. Dispensing Control Input Circuit]
Next, we will describe the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. Since the dispensing control input circuits 633ab are the same circuit, we will describe the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the dispensing power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input.

First, the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 has the following functions: a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various information (game information) stored in the payout control RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633 and the main control RAM of the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; a setting switching button that can select and switch a setting value for a predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; and an error clearing button that can clear an error when an error is reported after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 has terminals 1 to 4. Terminals 1 and 2 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and terminals 3 and 4 are also electrically connected. When the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuit. However, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits of terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 conduct, resulting in an electrical connection to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

When the RWM switch 633d's press-button is not pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuitry. However, when the RWM switch 633d's press-button is pressed, the internal circuits of terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 become conductive, electrically connecting them to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

As shown in Figure 182, the payout control input circuit 633ab, to which the signal from the RWM switch 633d is input, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, as well as the other end of capacitor PC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50 via resistor PR51. The base terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR52, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633, in addition to resistor PR51. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR53, which is electrically connected to the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of power supply creation circuit 630f. It is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. The signal from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input as RWM signal 2 to the input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

Furthermore, the other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (the opposite end of resistor PR51 that is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50), as well as electrically connected to the dispensing control output circuit 633ac. The dispensing control output circuit 633ac consists of resistors PR60, PR61, and transistor PTR60. The other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (the opposite end of resistor PR51 that is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50), as well as electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR60 via resistor PR60. The base terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to resistor PR60, as well as to the other end of resistor PR61, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), and is electrically connected to the main control input circuit 1310b shown in Figure 179 (one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the other end of resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)). The signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR60 in the dispensing control output circuit 633ac of the dispensing control board 633 is input to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) as the main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The payout control input circuit 633ab, which receives the payout power outage warning signal, a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (the power supply line created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power supply line)), as shown in Figure 182. It is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via resistor PR41. In addition to resistor PR41, the base terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The terminal of resistor PR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa. The payout power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input as power outage warning signal 2 to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. In addition, the other end of resistor PR40 may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in order to align it with the waveform of the payout power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320, which houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game, will be described with reference to Figure 183. Here, we will describe an example in which the setting key switch 1311a, which is mounted on the setting change board 1311 mentioned above, is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Figure 183 is a perspective view (a) of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and a perspective view (b) of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism.

In pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is a crucial board that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent unauthorized modifications to the main control board 1310 to obtain illegal game balls. To this end, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320, which consists of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped together by a sealing mechanism, such as a one-way screw, in a crimping section 1303.

This crimping section 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and there are multiple such sections. Using one sealing mechanism, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped together by the one-way screw or the like of the crimping section 1303, allowing the main control board box 1320 to be closed. To open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy that sealing mechanism. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body can accommodate the main control board 1310. Because the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded to be transparent, the condition of the mounting side (front) and solder side (back) of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modifications have been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC has been mounted) can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, it is necessary to destroy that sealing mechanism in order to open the main control board box 1320 next, leaving a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, thereby increasing the deterrent against unauthorized actions against the main control board 1310.

To briefly explain the assembly method of the main control board box 1320, as shown in Figure 183(a), the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310 is positioned so that it faces the bottom surface of the cover body 1301, and various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and a portion of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310 are exposed through corresponding openings formed in the cover body 1301. Subsequently, fixing screws are inserted from the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310 through through holes formed in the four corners of the main control board 1310 and screwed into mounting boss holes formed in the four inner corners of the cover body 1301, thereby fixing the main control board 1310 in the inner space of the cover body 1301. Next, the base body 1302 is positioned to substantially close the opening of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is then slid along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (indicated by the arrow in the figure) (movement distance sd) until the outer surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner surface of the cover body 1301, completely closing the opening of the cover body 1301. The main control board 1310 is then housed within the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Subsequently, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are screwed together and crimped using the one-way screws of the crimping portion 1303, as shown in Figure 183(b). This fixes the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, sealing the main control board box 1320 (i.e., the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

Furthermore, multiple cover-side rib portions 1301rb are formed on the inner wall of the cover body 1301 at predetermined distances apart, allowing them to contact the outer circumference of the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. Similarly, multiple base-side rib portions 1302rb are formed on the base body 1302 at predetermined distances apart, allowing them to contact the outer circumference of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 is positioned (clamped) in the narrow space (space) formed by the multiple cover-side rib portions 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the multiple base-side rib portions 1302rb formed on the base body 1302.

Furthermore, the base body 1302 has a projection 1302p that can contact the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310, corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board 1310. When a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the force of this insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and flex. The projection 1302p contacts the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310, preventing further bending and flexing of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern and delamination of the solder on the main control board 1310.

[11. Setting Key Switches]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to Figure 184. Figure 184 is a perspective view (a) of the setting key switch seen from the front right, a perspective view (b) of the setting key switch seen from the front left, and a top view (c) of the setting key switch. Here, we will describe an example in which the setting key switch 1311a, which is mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above, is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a comes in two types: one in which a resin setting key cylinder, into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, is housed inside a resin outer casing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "resin type setting key switch 1311a"), and another in which a metal setting key cylinder, into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, is housed inside a metal cylindrical outer casing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The structure of the resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a are identical, differing only in their materials.

[11-1. Resin-type setting key switch]
As shown in Figures 184(a) and (b), the resin-type setting key switch 1311a consists of a cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa made of non-conductive resin, a setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a setting key is inserted and rotated inside the outer cylinder 1311aa, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of non-conductive resin connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and forming a circuit that turns the contacts ON or OFF by the rotation of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad with a hole formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa and bent to cover the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac, with a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both sides (front side and rear side in the figure) that protrude to the rear of the base body 1311ac.

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is positioned almost flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. The front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is provided with an insertion slot 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. As shown in Figure 184(c), the metal setting key can be inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba and removed from the insertion slot 1311aba when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (that is, when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion slot 1311aba is aligned with the vertical direction)). The base body 1311ac has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad, and two brass lead terminals are formed on each side (right side and left side in the figure) rotated 90 degrees from the frame plate, spaced at a predetermined distance apart.

In the figure, the COM1 terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the left side, and the COM2 terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the left side, are common terminals, and either one of the terminals or both ends can be used. The A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side, are connected electrically to the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal by a circuit formed in the base body 1311ac when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is at the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa, and the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal are disconnected electrically (therefore, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a (An OFF signal is transmitted.) On the other hand, when the rotational position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects the COM1 and COM2 terminals from terminal A, interrupting the circuit, while electrically connecting the COM1 and COM2 terminals from terminal B, creating conductivity (thus transmitting the ON signal for the setting key switch 1311a). Note that the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the distance between the A and B terminals are the same.

A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada extending from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the main control board 1310 on the solder side (back side), thereby fixing the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board 1310. Terminals A, B, COM1, and COM2 of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the main control board 1310 on the solder side (back side). On the back side of the base body 1311ac, a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed, which specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a so that when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting side (front side) of the main control board 1310, the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in the figure. This cylindrical protrusion prevents the manufacturer's workers from, for example, incorrectly soldering the setting key switch 1311a upside down when mounting it to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if electromagnetic noise enters through the metal setting key when inserting it into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the resin-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, has no effect on terminals A, B, COM1, and COM2 because its outer cylinder 1311aa, setting key cylinder 1311ab, and base body 1311ac are all molded from non-conductive resin.

[11-2. Metal-type setting key switches]
Next, the metal type setting key switch 1311a has the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above, but differs in material, in that it has the same configuration as the resin type setting key switch 1311a described above, with a metal cylindrical outer cylinder 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. Furthermore, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, but the metal frame plate 1311ad has a hole formed in the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa that penetrates the outer cylinder 1311aa and covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected, so there is a risk that electromagnetic noise may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be explained with reference to Figure 185. Figure 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As described above, the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion slot 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box. As shown in Figure 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 has a tubular rib portion 1301za (the thickness of the tubular rib portion 1301za is the same as the thickness of the cover body 1301) that extends a predetermined distance toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of a through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (for example, a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder 1311ab. The inner circumference of the through-hole 1301z and the inner circumference of the tubular rib portion 1301za are connected without any step, forming a single inner surface. This ensures that the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are aligned on the same plane (flush surface).

The through-hole 1301z is also the area where the fingers or fists of someone accessing the setting key switch 1311a might come into contact. Therefore, the rib portion 1301za is designed to increase the strength around the through-hole 1301z. This prevents the area around the through-hole 1301z from being pushed in by human force, causing it to flex and increasing the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab, or from being damaged and increasing the outer diameter of the through-hole 1301z, thereby increasing the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab. For example, even if someone intentionally pushes their fingers or fist around the through-hole 1301z to gain unauthorized access to the setting key switch 1311a, this helps prevent them from inserting a long, thin tool such as a wire into the gap between the through-hole 1301z and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.

Furthermore, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is designed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za is spaced apart from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance dimension d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), so that the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a cannot be directly touched by anyone accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, even if a long, thin unauthorized tool such as a wire is inserted into the "gap" between the through-hole 1301z and rib portion 1301za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is formed to be 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, resulting in a gap of 1 mm), the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is formed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, thus preventing the tip of the long, thin unauthorized tool from hitting the surface of the base body 1311ac, bending, and penetrating toward the main control board 1310. In other words, it is possible to prevent modification of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in the resin-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, since the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from non-conductive resin, even if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from entering the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a. Furthermore, because the end of the rib portion 1301za, formed along the outer circumference of the through-hole 1301z in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, and the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are separated by a distance dimension d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), even if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the through-hole 1301z or its surroundings in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, it becomes difficult for electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge to enter the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a through the through-hole 1301z and the rib portion 1301za, thereby preventing it from entering the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In the metal type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Although the outer cylinder 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, the metal frame plate 1311ad has holes formed in it at positions corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa that penetrate the outer cylinder 1311aa, and covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person with static electricity were to bring their finger close to or touch the through-hole 1301z or its surroundings in the non-conductive resin cover 1301, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge could enter the metal frame plate 1311ad because the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Therefore, if a person with static electricity were to bring their finger close to or touch the through-hole 1301z or its surroundings in the non-conductive resin cover 1301, electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge could enter the metal frame plate 1311ad and potentially enter the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

Furthermore, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush surface), when an operator is installing the game board 5 onto the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 which is installed in the island equipment of a gaming hall, they first temporarily place it on the front surface or around the pachinko machine 1. In this case, if the operator accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with their foot during the work and causes it to fall, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Furthermore, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are aligned on the same plane (flush surface), even when removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on or around the front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, if the worker accidentally knocks over the temporarily placed game board 5 with their foot during the work, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

Furthermore, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front) of the main control board box cover 1301 are aligned on the same plane (flush surface), a protective cover (made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently) may be provided on the cover 1301 to protect the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab).

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will be explained with reference to Figures 185 to 187. Figure 186 is a diagram (a) showing the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, a diagram (1) (b) showing the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, and a diagram (2) (c) showing the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted. Figure 187 is a continuation of Figure 186, and is a diagram (3) (d) showing the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, and a diagram (4) (e) showing the solder side (back) of the main control board corresponding to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is positioned (clamped) in the narrow space (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed on the base body 1302. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion 1302p that can contact the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board 1310. The protruding portion 1302p is designed to prevent further bending and flexing of the main control board 1310 when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. When the main control board 1310 bends and flexes due to the force of this insertion, the protruding portion 1302p contacts the solder side (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing further bending and flexing of the main control board 1310 and preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern and delamination of the solder on the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, and the metal setting key is not inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to the ON position and the hand is released from the setting key, releasing the pressure from the setting key), as shown in Figure 185, the solder side (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p are separated by a clearance dimension d2 (approximately 1 mm in this embodiment). Therefore, when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, the solder side (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p do not come into contact.

The protruding portion 1302p can be cylindrical or have a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same dimension as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protruding portion 1302p). Here, we will first explain the routing of the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a, followed by an explanation of the cylindrical protruding portion 1302p and the protruding portion 1302p having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302.

[11-4-1. Wiring to the setting key switch 1311a]
As shown in Figure 186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x such that the side surface of the rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the side surface opposite to the lower side surface of the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa) is near the lower edge of the main control board 1310 and is parallel to the lower edge of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x such that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the upper edge side of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, a pair of long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2") are formed in the vertical direction of the main control board 1310, having a long, elongated hole shape along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310, through which a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. In addition, two lead terminals, terminal A and terminal B, formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. The main control board 1310 is formed with a pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2, each having a pair of lands (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2"), and a pair of through-holes SLH3 and SLH4, each having a pair of lands through which two lead terminals, COM1 and COM2, formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted. These two through-holes are formed at a 90-degree rotation angle to the pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2.

Furthermore, a through-hole SSTD, through which a cylindrical projection (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a, provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, is formed on the center line in the left-right direction of the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, within the area surrounded by through-holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through-holes SLH1, SLH2.

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 186(b), a vertical linear wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed, running linearly along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. This pattern electrically connects through-hole SLTH4, through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and through-hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, because the vertical linear wiring pattern SPTN1 is routed linearly from through-hole SLTH4 to through-hole SLTH4, its length is minimized.

Furthermore, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a linear wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed in a straight line along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. This pattern electrically connects through-hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and through-hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, the linear wiring pattern SPTN2 runs parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, in a straight line from through-hole SLTH3 to through-hole SLTH1, thus minimizing its length.

Furthermore, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and a bent wiring pattern SPTN3 is formed by bending multiple times in the up, down, left, and right directions of the main control board 1310 to electrically connect the SPTN3 to the main control input circuit 1310b shown in Figure 179 (the other end of a resistor MR10, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, or the other end of a capacitor MC10, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground)).

Furthermore, the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring patterns that are electrically connected to the through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. Instead, it is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, various wiring patterns forming the setting signal transmission path from the through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the predetermined input terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, are formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting signal transmission path does not involve through-holes that electrically connect the various wiring patterns on the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y. Even when the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is visible, it is not possible to see how the various wiring patterns electrically connected to the terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are routed.

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed in the inner space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is positioned in a predetermined location so as to substantially close the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (movement distance dimension sd) to completely close the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 is slid along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides along the base body 1302 in the specific direction. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and rub against it, potentially damaging the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wiring patterns are routed so that they do not overlap with the area in which the protruding portion 1302p slides. In other words, the wiring patterns are routed in such a way that the protruding portion 1302p does not cross over them when it slides. This prevents damage to the wiring patterns from the sliding protruding portion 1302p during assembly of the main control board box 1320.

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, copper foil is removed around the through-hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, the through-hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. Copper foil is also removed around various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission path (e.g., vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2, bent wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.). Furthermore, copper foil is removed around the through-hole SSTD through which a cylindrical projection (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted.

In contrast, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x and solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is removed almost around the long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2, respectively, and thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) are formed in the regions provided at both ends in the longitudinal direction of each long hole. The thermal patterns (cross-shaped patterns) electrically connect the long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 to the solid ground (substrate ground) of the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solid ground (substrate ground) of the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x and soldering surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil around the through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is removed, and a thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) is formed on both surfaces. The thermal pattern (cross-shaped pattern) electrically connects the through-hole SLTH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the soldering surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The entire surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is provided with various through-holes, as shown in Figures 186(a) and (b), for example, through holes through which lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back) 1310y, through holes through which wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solder surface (back) 1310y are electrically connected, and through holes connecting the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the ground plane (GND) of the solder surface (back) 1310y. Except for certain through-holes (for example, through-holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solder surface (back) 1310y) among the various wiring patterns and through-holes (that electrically connect to the substrate ground and that fix electronic components), a resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) that has insulating properties is applied to cover the copper thin layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through-holes are formed, thereby forming an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side and an insulating coating film 1310yr on the solder surface side. Furthermore, on the insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side, an area SSLSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is placed is printed as a solid line using a paint that has insulating properties and is a different color from the predetermined color of the resist liquid (white in this embodiment). Furthermore, the color of the resist solution can be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black instead of green. The color of the silkscreen ink can also be any of the following colors, as long as it is different from the color of the resist solution: green, red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black.

The size of region SSLKSW1 is larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. When the setting key switch 1311a is positioned and mounted (soldered on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310) within region SSLKSW1, the outline (solid rectangle) of region SSLKSW1 is positioned outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the outline (solid rectangle) of region SSLKSW1 does not overlap with the setting key switch 1311a.

[11-4-2. Cylindrical projection]
If the projection 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the projection 1302p will be circular. As described above, the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. The outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 1302p is smaller than half the distance between terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a. This ensures that even if the front surface of the sliding projection 1302p temporarily contacts the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 while assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding projection 1302p does not come into contact with the land of through-hole SLTH1 through which terminal A of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, nor with the land of through-hole SLTH2 through which terminal B of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of this insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and flex, bringing the front surface of the circular projection 1302p into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the circular projection 1302p comes into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, the solder side insulating coating 1310yr, formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, may be rubbed by the front surface of the projection 1302p, causing the solder side insulating coating 1310yr to be scraped away and potentially damaging the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), a circular foil-removed area SINSy is formed in the area of the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts, and around it. This prevents damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, even if the solder side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil-removed area SINSy, with its copper foil removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

Furthermore, when assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (movement distance dimension sd). At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides along the base body 1302 in the specific direction (movement distance dimension sd).

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(c), a foil-punched area SINSy, having an elongated hole shape with copper foil removed, may be formed in the region where the protrusion 1302p slides and around it. This prevents damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side of the main control board box 1310, even if the solder-side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the sliding protrusion 1302p during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil-punched area SINSy, with its elongated hole shape with copper foil removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

[11-4-3. Protrusions having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
If the projection 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same dimension as the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 1302p), then the front surface of the projection 1302p will be a long rectangle along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Note that both ends of the front surface of the projection 1302p, which has a long rectangle along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, are given rounded edges and have a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a are the same distance. The outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 1302p is smaller than half the distance between terminals A and B of the setting key switch 1311a. This ensures that even if the front surface of the sliding projection 1302p temporarily contacts the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 while assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding projection 1302p does not come into contact with the land of through-hole SLTH1 through which terminal A of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, nor with the land of through-hole SLTH2 through which terminal B of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of this insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and flex, resulting in contact between the front surface of the rectangular projection 1302p, which is long along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the long rectangular projection 1302p, which extends along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, comes into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, the solder side insulating coating 1310yr, formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the projection 1302p. This can cause the solder side insulating coating 1310yr to be scraped away, potentially damaging the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(d), a foil-removed area SINSy is formed in the area of the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts, and around it, having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, where the copper foil has been removed. Both ends of the foil-removed area SINSy are rounded, giving it a circular shape. This prevents damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, even if the insulating coating 1310yr on the solder side is scraped by the protrusion 1302p. The foil-removed area SINSy, having a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 where the copper foil has been removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

Furthermore, when assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protruding portion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides together with the base body 1302 in the specific direction.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(e), a foil-punched area SINSy, having an elongated hole shape with copper foil removed, may be formed in the region where the protrusion 1302p slides and around it. This prevents damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side of the main control board 1310, even if the solder-side insulating coating 1310yr is scraped by the sliding protrusion 1302p during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil-punched area SINSy, with its elongated hole shape with copper foil removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

[11-5. Notification of the location of the RWM switch used for configuration changes]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. In contrast, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d (which may be a RAM clear switch 1310f) is mounted is housed in a payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are placed on separate boards, and the boards are mounted on different objects, thereby separating the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d were to be placed together on a single board, unauthorized modifications would only need to be made to one board, which is undesirable from a security standpoint. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged on separate circuit boards, and the boards are mounted on different objects, thereby enhancing security for the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs both game preparation control and game control (game preparation control is followed by game control). Game preparation control consists of a first step (the determination in step S14 and the processing in step S16A in the main control side power-on processing described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310; and a second step (the determination in step S216 and the processing in step S218 in the setting change processing described later) in which the setting value can be selected and switched based on a signal from the RWM switch 633d of the payout control board 633 (which functions here as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values). Following game preparation control, game control consists of the main control side processing in the main control side power-on processing described later and the main control side timer interrupt processing described later.

While this enhances security, the configuration employs separate circuit boards for the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d, and the boards are mounted on different surfaces. Because the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to specifically indicate its location. However, the location of the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting switching button, can be difficult for staff, such as the manager or employees of a gaming hall, to determine, especially if they are unfamiliar with the system.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is marked with location information that indicates the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) that indicates the location of the RWM switch 633d is affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, the words "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the payout control board" are printed in red, semi-transparent letters (height: 7 mm). This allows the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button) to be communicated to staff such as the manager and staff of the amusement hall, so that they can easily find the RWM switch 633d when operating it, without getting confused. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily known.

Furthermore, even if this sticker is affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it will not obstruct the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of the text printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Alternatively, when molding the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, recessed or raised characters may be molded together (i.e., the cover body 1301 and the characters may be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Alternatively, the text (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be silk-screen printed in white on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310, or the text (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switch button)" may be silk-screen printed in white on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screen printing color may be the same or different. Also, symbols such as arrows may be used instead of the silk-screened text. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Alternatively, the text portion may be masked and cut out (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the dispensing control board" may be formed using resist on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310, or the text portion may be masked and cut out (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting switch button)" may be formed using resist on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633. The resist colors may be the same, but using different colors is preferable to distinguish the boards. Also, instead of cut-out text, cut-out symbols such as arrows may be used. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Alternatively, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, printed with, for example, red translucent letters (height: 7 mm) that read "The RWM switch (setting switch button) is located on the dispensing control board") may be affixed to the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM switch (setting switch button)" (red translucent letters (height: 7 mm)) may be affixed to the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that conveys the location information that can communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. Instead, the location of the RWM switch 633d may be indicated by broadcasting an announcement voice from various speakers, or by displaying an announcement image on the performance display device 1600. Specifically, for example, with the pachinko machine 1 powered on, an employee of the amusement hall, such as the manager or staff member of the amusement hall, operates the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the performance display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button). As a result, an announcement voice stating, "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button," is broadcast from various speakers, and an announcement image (which may be a photograph) showing the location of the RWM switch 633d is displayed on the display device 1600. After understanding the location of the RWM switch 633d through this announcement voice and image, staff members of the amusement hall can smoothly change the settings by shutting off the power to the pachinko machine 1. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that could convey the location information of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the system and repeatedly plays an announcement voice from various speakers indicating where the RWM switch 633d is located: "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." Upon completing the setting change process, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then stops the announcement audio and proceeds with various processes based on the received command (such as advancing the performance or the customer waiting state performance (demo performance)). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined. Furthermore, following this announcement audio, an announcement audio explaining how to operate the setting keys after the setting value has been determined may be played from various speakers. Additionally, while the announcement audio is playing, the performance display device 1600 may display an image indicating "Setting in Progress."

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. In addition to this, when changing the setting value, an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 controls the system, and an announcement voice saying, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value," is repeatedly played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM switch 633d is located. This eliminates the need to search for the sticker affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although this announcement voice is repeatedly played from various speakers, anticipating that the content of the announcement voice may be missed, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be determined by visually checking the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement voice begins to play. In addition to "The RWM switch is on the dispensing control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please change the setting value by operating the RWM switch," the announcement voice may also include information on where the sticker indicating the location of the RWM switch is attached. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which then stops the announcement voice. If the person changing the setting values becomes accustomed to the process and finds the announcement annoying, they can quickly stop the announcement by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the process. Similarly, if the process must be performed after the gaming hall has opened, the announcement can be quickly stopped by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the process, thus avoiding inconveniencing players. Furthermore, following this announcement, an announcement explaining how to operate the setting keys after the setting values have been determined may be played from various speakers. Additionally, while the announcement is playing, the display device 1600 may display an image indicating "Setting in Progress."

[11-6. Procedure for changing setting values, procedure for displaying setting values]
Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, and the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display, mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310. Here, we will first briefly explain how to change the setting value, and then briefly explain how to check the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the manager of the amusement hall, are permitted to possess it, and this is limited to 2 to 3 people.

When changing the setting value, the following "predetermined conditions for permission to change the setting value" must be met: when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633 is operated. In other words, the person actually changing the settings must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the metal setting key into the slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. Then, while operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1.

The person performing the setting change must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the metal setting key into the slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. Next, while operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1. This sends the setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (one of the setting values 1 to 6 set when the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h consists of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row, and can display numbers up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting indicator, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six-segment LED displays (i.e., the ones digit of the six digits). (In this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it should light up while a setting change is being made and turn off when the setting change is complete.) Alternatively, the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays. (In this case, the dot may be lit or unlit. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it should light up while a setting change is being made and turn off when the setting change is complete.)

When a user changes the setting value, they press the press-button on the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633. A detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is then input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time the user presses the press-button on the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a, based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, increases the current setting value by 1. When it reaches the maximum value of 6, it returns to the initial value of 1, and then increases the value again by 1. The setting value is then displayed on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting indicator.

When a person changes a setting value, they operate the setting key switch 1311a to OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, switches the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display, from a state where the setting value is displayed to a state where it is not displayed, and then, either immediately thereafter, performs control to display the number of game balls (total number) collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned in the game board 5 on the base monitor 1310h from the specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, the "predetermined condition for ending setting value changes" is met when the setting key cylinder rotates 60 degrees clockwise, returning the setting key switch 1311a from its rotational position when the confirmation key is ON to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This fulfills the "predetermined condition for ending setting value changes," and thus ends the period during which the setting value can be changed.

The person performing the setting change removes the metal setting key from the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the setting change procedure.

In order to display the currently set value, the following "predetermined conditions for permission to display the set value" must be met: when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. In other words, the person actually checking the currently set values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the metal setting key into the slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON. After that, without operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, they will operate the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1.

The person performing the verification of the currently set settings first confirms that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then opens the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, and then inserts the metal setting key into the slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotates the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. Next, without operating the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set from setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if the person checking the currently set setting value presses the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value will not change at all in response to this press operation, nor will the content displayed on the setting display 1310g change.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h consists of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row, and can display numbers up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting indicator, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (i.e., the ones digit of the six-digit value). (In this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it should light up while the currently set setting value is being checked and extinguished when the check is complete.) Alternatively, the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row. (In this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it should light up while the currently set setting value is being checked and extinguished when the check is complete.)

The person performing the confirmation display of the currently set value, after confirming the currently set value, rotates the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that activated the setting key to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that deactivates the setting key switch 1311a) to activate the OFF operation. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display, from a state where it displays the setting value to a state where it does not. Subsequently or immediately afterward, it controls the display on the base monitor 1310h of the number of game balls (total number) collected by the out port 1008 located in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, using a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

The person performing the verification and display of the currently set values removes the metal setting key from the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the verification and display of the currently set values.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions for permitting a change in the setting value are as follows: when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for permitting the display of the set value are as described above: when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. Thus, the predetermined conditions for permitting setting value changes and the predetermined conditions for permitting setting value display share a common requirement: when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to activate the setting key. However, the predetermined conditions for permitting setting value changes require that "the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage," whereas the predetermined conditions for permitting setting value display require that "the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage."

[12. Wiring patterns for setting key switches and RWM switches on the main control board]
Next, the wiring pattern for transmitting detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the wiring pattern for transmitting detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 will be explained with reference to Figures 188 and 189. Figure 188 is a schematic diagram illustrating the general arrangement of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the main control board, and Figure 189 is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back) of the main control board illustrating the general arrangement of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU. Here, we will explain an example in which the setting key switch 1311a, which is mounted on the setting change board 1311 as described above, is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

On the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, DIP-type electronic components such as connectors MCN1 to MCN8, a crystal oscillator, and various ICs, as well as lead-type electronic components such as a setting key switch 1311a, resistors, resistor arrays, diodes, capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and transistors are mounted. Each lead terminal of the DIP-type electronic component is inserted through a through-hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and then soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of a lead-type electronic component is inserted through a through-hole formed in the main control board 1310, from the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and then soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, or to the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function. Connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are located near the top edge of the main control board 1310, arranged sequentially from the center of the top edge toward the left edge, with connector MCN5 located near the left edge of the main control board 1310.

The various detection signals input via connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function. The various detection signals input via connector MCN5 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function or to the main control input circuit 1310b (the circuit composed of resistors and transistors as described above) which does not have an error detection function. Connector MCN4 is for outputting commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

Multiple DIP-type ICs (two in this embodiment) integrating multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection (eight main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection function in this embodiment) are mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, instead of integrating multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection into an IC, multiple individual main control input circuits 1310b2 may be mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

Connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, arranged in the order of connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and then connector MCN8, from the left edge towards the center of the bottom edge. Connector MCN8 is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, slightly to the left of the center of the bottom edge. Connector MCN6 outputs a signal to drive the electrical drive source (solenoid) provided in the game board 5. Connector MCN7 handles the input and output of signals related to command exchange with the payout control board 633, and also receives detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "RWM switch 633d provided in the payout control board 633") mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633. Connector MCN8 is used for exchanging various signals during inspection and verification.

The main control MPU 1310a is positioned slightly above the center line connecting the left and right edges of the main control board 1310, and slightly to the right of the center of the main control board 1310, so as to be parallel to the bottom (top) edge of the main control board 1310 (i.e., along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310). The IC package of this main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are alternately bent to form two rows along the longitudinal direction of the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a. For the sake of explanation, the two rows of lead terminals will be described here as the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row.

Above the setting key switch 1311a, located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are multiple lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc. Above these, two lead-type resistor arrays are arranged in a single row, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Above this left-hand lead-type resistor array (i.e., away from the main control MPU 1310a), resistors MR2 and MR5, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b, are arranged to receive the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 via connector MCN7. Below this left-hand lead-type resistor array (i.e., with the left-hand lead-type resistor array acting as a boundary (protective wall)), resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b, are arranged to receive the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 via connector MCN7.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7, is configured with a leaded left-side resistor array as a boundary (protective wall). Below the leaded left-side resistor array are the resistors MR3, MR4, and transistor MTR0 that constitute the main control input circuit 1310b, while above the leaded left-side resistor array are the resistors MR2 and MR5 that constitute the main control input circuit 1310b. This design, using the leaded left-side resistor array as a protective wall, prevents unauthorized modification of resistors MR2 and MR5 located above the leaded left-side resistor array, thereby contributing to improved security. Furthermore, since transistor MTR0 incorporates resistors MR3 and MR4 as bias resistors, unauthorized modification of resistors MR3 and MR4 is also prevented, further contributing to improved security.

To the right of the setting key switch 1311a, located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and above the connector MCN8, are the resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, and transistor MTR10, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input. Note that transistor MTR10 has resistors MR11 and MR12 built in as bias resistors. This prevents unauthorized modification of resistors MR11 and MR12, contributing to improved security.

To the right of the main control input circuit 1310b, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, are resistors MR14 to MR16 and transistor MTR11, which constitute the logic inversion circuit 1310iv that inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Note that transistor MTR11 has resistors MR14 and MR15 built in as bias resistors. This prevents unauthorized modification of resistors MR14 and MR15, contributing to improved security.

Connectors MCN1-5, arranged in a row parallel to the top edge near the top edge of the main control board 1310, connectors MCN6-MC8, arranged in a row parallel to the bottom edge near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a are partially exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above. This allows an unauthorized tool (for example, a thin wire) to enter through the gap formed by the cover body 1301, connectors MCN1-MCN8, and the setting key switch 1311a, thereby illegally accessing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Even if one attempts to modify the system, the area around connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and the setting key switch 13111a contains electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, resistor arrays, various ICs, and transistors. Furthermore, the area around the main control MPU 1310a also contains electronic components such as resistors, diodes, capacitors, a crystal oscillator (located near the bottom of the main control MPU 1310a), resistor arrays, and various ICs. These electronic components act as obstacles or protective barriers, requiring multiple bends of an unauthorized tool (e.g., a thin wire), which realistically prevents the unauthorized tool from reaching the main control MPU 1310a.

The main control board 1310 has multiple through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are inserted through these through-holes from the mounting side (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and then soldered and fixed to the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 189, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a that are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In addition, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for supplying +5V power is formed that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310) and the main VBB power supply line supplied from the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630. Furthermore, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, output signal wiring patterns for outputting various signals from the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, and input signal wiring patterns for inputting various signals to the lead terminals are formed.

The input signal wiring pattern includes an RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms an RWM signal transmission path from connector MCN7, to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input, to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) from terminal A of the setting key switch 1311a to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This includes a setting key signal wiring pattern (which may be referred to as "various wiring patterns" below) that forms a setting signal transmission path extending to the child (and a detection signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e) (a power outage warning signal wiring pattern (which may be referred to as "various wiring patterns" below) that forms a power outage warning signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) constituting the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a).

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, areas are formed where the copper foil has been removed from the through-holes through which each lead terminal of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes that electrically connect the output signal wiring patterns between the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y).

The areas of the main control substrate 1310's solder side (back surface) 1310y, excluding the areas where various wiring patterns are formed, various through-holes are formed, and foil punching is formed, are formed as a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. A resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) with insulating properties is applied to cover the substrate and copper thin layers (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control substrate 1310, thereby forming a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr over the entire area of the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310.

Furthermore, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes through which each of the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground), around the wiring pattern for the +5V power supply, around the output signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes that electrically connect the output signal wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solder surface (back) 1310y). Although a die-cut area is formed, in the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a, between the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row, a die-cut area is not formed along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, along the upper edge of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the lower edge or the center line connecting the center of the left and right edges of the main control board 1310) and a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) is formed.

The areas of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, excluding the areas where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the areas where various through-holes are formed, and the areas where foil punching is formed, are formed as a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310. A resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) with insulating properties is applied to cover the substrate and copper thin layers (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control substrate 1310, thereby forming an insulating coating film 1310xr on the mounting surface side of the main control substrate 1310x.

Furthermore, on the copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a small copper foil area may be formed surrounded by various wiring patterns and the numerous lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, due to the wiring patterns routed to the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, to stabilize the ground in this small copper foil area, through-holes for a solid ground plane are formed to electrically connect the solid ground plane (GND) (substrate ground) of the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solid ground plane (GND) (substrate ground) of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the size of the lands in the through-holes for the ground plane comes in several sizes. These include lands that are the same size as the through-holes for wiring patterns that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front) 1310x and the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310, lands that are the same size as the through-holes for lead terminals through which the lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and soldered on the solder surface (back) 1310y, lands that are larger than the through-holes for wiring patterns and smaller than the through-holes for lead terminals, and lands that are larger than the through-holes for lead terminals. Multiple through-holes for ground planes are scattered across almost the entire surface of the main control board 1310. This stabilizes the ground plane (GND) on the mounting side (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the ground plane (GND) on the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they become the same ground plane (GND).

Furthermore, while the main control board 1310 has no through-holes for electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting side (front) 1310x and the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns into which various signals are input, multiple through-holes for electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting side (front) 1310x and the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be formed for the wiring patterns of the output wiring patterns to prevent interference between the wiring patterns during routing.

Furthermore, while it is preferable that the main control board 1310 does not have any through-holes for wiring patterns that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting side (front) 1310x and the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns into which various signals are input, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the routing of the wiring patterns, it may be unavoidable to form through-holes for wiring patterns that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting side (front) 1310x and the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns into which various signals are input.

However, if the through-holes for the wiring patterns (hereinafter referred to as "through-holes for input signal wiring patterns") formed in the wiring patterns into which various signals are input are illegally modified by, for example, electrically switching them with a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, there is a risk that the cheater may acquire illegal game balls, as the main control MPU 1310a is a critical electronic component that controls the progress of the game.

Therefore, security measures must be implemented for through-holes used in input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1. Security measures for through-holes used for input signal wiring patterns]
As a security measure for through-holes for input signal wiring patterns, a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for input signal wiring patterns (hereinafter referred to as "the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the first to fourth embodiments") will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 193. Figure 190 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the first embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of the cross-section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Figure 191 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the second embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of the cross-section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Figure 192 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the third embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of the cross-section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Figure 193 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the fourth embodiment, formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of the cross-section along the X-X line in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Note that in Figures 190 to 193, components that perform the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals.

Various through-holes have copper plating on the inner circumferential wall of the through-hole to provide conductivity. The main control board 1310 also has non-through-holes in addition to through-holes. Non-through-holes differ significantly from through-holes in that they have copper plating on the inner circumferential wall of the through-hole and do not have lands on the mounting surface (front) 1310x and solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Non-through-holes are formed to attach the board to a component or to fix electronic components (such as connectors where wiring is attached and detached) to the board. It is acceptable to apply an insulating coating to the lands of through-holes to through-holes used for mounting electronic components (i.e., through which the lead terminals of electronic components are inserted). Furthermore, there is no objection to adopting the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating coating for the lands of through-holes for wiring patterns formed for wiring patterns from which various signals are output (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through-holes for output signal wiring patterns"). Also, there is no objection to adopting the configuration of covering the through-hole lands with an insulating coating for through-holes for ground planes that electrically connect the ground plane (GND) (board ground) on the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

[12-1-1. Configuration for covering the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns according to the first embodiment with an insulating coating]
In the configuration according to the first embodiment, where an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern, as shown in Figures 190(a) and (b), a narrow through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the surface (or back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310), and by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, mounting surface (front surface) lands KRDx1 and solder surface (back surface) lands KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHHD1, are formed, and mounting surface (front surface) wiring patterns SPTN and solder surface (back surface) wiring patterns are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner circumferential surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, with an outer diameter KTHHD1.

A mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A solder-side (backside) land KRDy1 formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a solder-side (backside) wiring pattern formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the solder-side (backside) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder-side (backside) land KRDy1 formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the through-hole KTH1. The mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, the through-hole KTH1, and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to form a mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the region of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1, a mounting surface-side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1.

Furthermore, although a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr, a solder side resist opening KByra is formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1.

The aperture diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting side (front side) and the aperture diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder side (back side) are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and then cutting them out. The process involves fixing the single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment, followed by painting, drying, drilling, and other processes, before finally cutting out each individual board.

Thus, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front) resist opening KBxra is formed in the region of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1. As a result, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 towards the center of the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 to be covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, thereby reducing the area of exposed copper foil on the mounting surface (front)-side land KRDx1. This makes it difficult to tamper with input signal wiring patterns by electrically switching the through-holes to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board, thereby providing security measures for input signal wiring patterns. Therefore, it contributes to improving security for input signal wiring patterns.

Furthermore, since the copper foil is exposed on both the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 and the solder side (back) land KRDy1, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe to the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 from the mounting side (front) of the main control board 1310, and electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe to the solder side (back) land KRDy1 from the solder side (back) of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 and the solder side (back) land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. Note that a dedicated probe or a test lead used for continuity checks on a so-called "tester" can be used as the contact probe.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. As a result, from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 In the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating film toward the center. However, as shown in Figure 190(c), a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra may be formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) that is larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is located on the back side of the game board 5. Therefore, if unauthorized modifications are made to the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually inspected. Furthermore, when an inspector performing an inspection of the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple through-holes formed on the main control board 1310 are for input signal wiring patterns, they can compare the size of the land on the mounting side (front) 1310x with the land on the solder side (back) 1310y to determine whether or not it is a through-hole for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-2. Configuration for covering the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns with an insulating coating according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration according to the second embodiment, where an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern, as shown in Figures 191(a) and (b), a narrow through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the surface (or back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310), and by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, mounting surface (front surface) lands KRDx1 and solder surface (back surface) lands KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHHD1, are formed, and mounting surface (front surface) wiring patterns SPTN and solder surface (back surface) wiring patterns are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner circumferential surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, with outer diameter KTHHD1. This is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating film is placed over the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above.

A mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A solder-side (backside) land KRDy1 formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a solder-side (backside) wiring pattern formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the solder-side (backside) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder-side (backside) land KRDy1 formed on the solder-side (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to form a mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the region of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1, a mounting surface-side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1, even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration for covering the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the first embodiment described above, and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through-hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention region that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface side of the through-hole KTH1. It is sized to be a distance of at least 0.5 mm from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface side of the through-hole KTH1 (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance is at least 0.5 mm to prevent the green resist liquid from entering the through-hole KTH1 of the main control substrate 1310; in the configuration where an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment, 0.5 mm is used). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through-hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance (0.5 mm), resulting in a diameter 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole KTH1.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration described above for covering the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole with an insulating coating.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and then cutting them out. The process involves fixing the single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to the manufacturing equipment, followed by painting, drying, drilling, and other processes, before finally cutting out each individual board.

Thus, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the region of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1 has an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1, and even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above, and larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. Because a surface-side resist opening KBxra is formed, the outer circumference of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film, excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area (i.e., the area extending from the mounting surface-side inner edge of the through-hole KTH1 to a position separated by a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)) toward the center of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1. As a result, a green resist can be applied as an insulating film to the entire outer circumference of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, from almost the inside (i.e., over the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). Therefore, the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small compared to the configuration in the first embodiment where an insulating film is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole. As a result, it becomes difficult to make unauthorized modifications to the input signal wiring pattern through-hole, such as electrically switching it with a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, and security measures can be taken for the input signal wiring pattern through-hole. Therefore, this can contribute to improving security for through-holes used in input signal wiring patterns.

Furthermore, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when the green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-size copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, so that the front surface of the single standard-size copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will not penetrate into the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and will dry without blocking these holes.

Furthermore, since the copper foil is exposed on both the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 and the solder side (back) land KRDy1, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe to the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 from the mounting side (front) of the main control board 1310, and electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe to the solder side (back) land KRDy1 from the solder side (back) of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting side (front) land KRDx1 and the solder side (back) land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. Note that a dedicated probe or a test lead used for continuity checks on a so-called "tester" can be used as the contact probe.

Furthermore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. As a result, from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 In the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating film toward the center. However, as shown in Figure 191(c), a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra may be formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) that is larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is located on the back side of the game board 5. Therefore, if the main control board 1310 is to be illegally modified in this state, only the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually inspected. Furthermore, when an inspector performing an inspection of the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple through-holes formed on the main control board 1310 are for input signal wiring patterns, they can compare the size of the land on the mounting side (front) 1310x with the land on the solder side (back) 1310y to determine whether or not it is a through-hole for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-3. Configuration for covering the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns with an insulating coating according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment, as shown in Figures 192(a) and (b), a narrow through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the surface (or back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310), and by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 are formed, each having an outer diameter KTHHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner circumferential surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, with outer diameter KTHHD1. This is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating film is placed over the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above.

A mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a green resist solution is applied as an insulating coating to form the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr. Therefore, the area of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1 is also coated with the green resist solution as an insulating coating, forming the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. The process involves fixing a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to a manufacturing apparatus, followed by painting, drying, drilling, and other processes, before finally cutting out each individual board. Therefore, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (since the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, the front surface of the single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward). The green resist liquid then penetrates the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner edge on the mounting surface (front) side, sealing the hole. The green resist liquid that has penetrated the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state due to its own weight, moving from the inner edge on the mounting surface (front) side towards the center of the hole.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration described above for covering the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole with an insulating coating.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, the area of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1 is also covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, and the green resist liquid penetrates from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (front) side of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control substrate 1310, sealing the hole. As a result, the entire mounting surface-side land KRDx1 and the hole of the through-hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 are covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, so that the copper foil on the mounting surface-side land KRDx1 is not exposed, and the conductive plated portion applied to the entire inner peripheral surface of the through-hole KTH1 is not exposed from the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310. Furthermore, the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be sealed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, for example, by electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board side. This provides security for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. Therefore, it contributes to improving security for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes.

Furthermore, while the green resist liquid has entered the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (front side) and blocked the hole, the solder side (back side) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 remains open. In other words, the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is blocked on the mounting surface (front side) by the green resist liquid, while the solder side (back side) remains open. This is because, if the green resist liquid enters the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface (front side), and air remains inside the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 while the solder side (back side) of the through-hole KTH1 is sealed, there is a risk that liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside the through-hole KTH1. This liquid could cause corrosion of the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1, leading to poor contact. Furthermore, during soldering processes (such as reflow soldering) where heat is applied, the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 could instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "steam explosion"), damaging the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and potentially causing an electrical disconnection of the through-hole KTH1.

Furthermore, although the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 holes exist, their presence can be concealed by the green resist. Therefore, the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through-hole KTH1 holes can be made less noticeable against the solid green resist applied to the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult for malicious actors attempting to illegally modify the board by electrically switching the input signal wiring pattern through-holes to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side, to detect the input signal wiring pattern through-holes (the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 holes).

Furthermore, since the copper foil is exposed on both the solder side (back side) lands KRDy1, the electrical inspection of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check) can be performed by touching the tip of a contact probe to the solder side (back side) lands KRDy1 from the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310. In other words, the solder side (back side) lands KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical inspection of the main control board 1310. The contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used for continuity checks on a so-called "tester".

Furthermore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. As a result, from the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 In the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 was covered with a green resist as an insulating film toward the center. However, as shown in Figure 192(c), a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra may be formed in the region of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) that is larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is located on the back side of the game board 5. Therefore, if the main control board 1310 is to be illegally modified in this state, only the mounting surface (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually inspected. Furthermore, when an inspector performing an inspection of the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple through-holes formed on the main control board 1310 are for input signal wiring patterns, they can compare the size of the land on the mounting side (front) 1310x with the land on the solder side (back) 1310y to determine whether or not it is a through-hole for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1-4. Configuration for covering the lands of through-holes for input signal wiring patterns with an insulating coating according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration according to the fourth embodiment, where an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern, as shown in Figures 193(a) and (b), a narrow through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the surface (or back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control substrate 1310), and by removing the copper foil from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 are formed, each having an outer diameter KTHHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner circumferential surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, with outer diameter KTHHD1. This is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating film is placed over the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above.

A mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of a mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, or to a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

On the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to form a mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the region of the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface-side land KRDx1, a mounting surface-side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface-side land KRDx1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration described above for covering the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole with an insulating coating.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. Therefore, the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is also coated with the green resist liquid as an insulating film, forming the solder side insulating coating 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting them out. The process involves fixing a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) to a manufacturing apparatus, followed by painting, drying, drilling, and other processes, before finally cutting out each individual board. Therefore, when a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that its solder side (back side) 1310y is oriented vertically upward (since the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, the back surface of the single standard-sized copper-clad laminate (base material) is oriented vertically upward). This allows the green resist liquid to penetrate the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner edge on the solder side (back side) and seal the hole. The green resist liquid that has penetrated the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 will dry in a recessed state due to its own weight, moving from the inner edge on the solder side (back side) toward the center of the hole.

Thus, on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a mounting surface (front) resist opening KBxra is formed in the region of the mounting surface (front) land KRDx1 in the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front) land KRDx1. As a result, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front) land KRDx1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 towards the center of the mounting surface (front) land KRDx1. Furthermore, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is also covered with a green resist as an insulating film. In addition, the green resist liquid penetrates from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, sealing the hole. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the mounting side (front side) land KRDx1 on the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is covered with a green resist as an insulating film. This reduces the area of the mounting side (front side) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed, and also seals the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to tamper with input signal wiring patterns by electrically switching the through-holes to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board, thereby providing security measures for input signal wiring patterns. Therefore, it contributes to improving security for input signal wiring patterns.

Furthermore, since the copper foil is exposed on the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1, the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310 to perform electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational check and abnormal potential check). In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used for continuity checks on a so-called "tester".

Furthermore, while the green resist liquid has entered the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner edge on the solder side (back side) and blocked the hole, the mounting side (front side) of the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 remains open. In other words, the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 is blocked on the solder side (back side) by the green resist liquid, while the mounting side (front side) remains open. This is because, if the green resist liquid enters the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the inner edge on the solder side (back side), and air remains inside the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 while the mounting side (front side) of the through-hole KTH1 is sealed, there is a risk that liquid such as resist removal liquid may remain inside the through-hole KTH1. This liquid could cause corrosion of the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1, leading to poor contact. Furthermore, during processes such as soldering (reflow soldering), where heat is applied, the liquid inside the through-hole KTH1 could instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "steam explosion"), damaging the conductive plating inside the through-hole KTH1 and potentially causing an electrical disconnection of the through-hole KTH1.

Furthermore, although the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 holes exist, the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 can be hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, and the through-hole KTH1 holes can be hidden by the green resist on the solder side (back) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. Therefore, the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and the through-hole KTH1 holes can be made less noticeable against the white resist that is applied to the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310. This makes it difficult for malicious actors attempting to illegally modify the system by electrically switching the input signal wiring pattern through-holes to, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power supply line created on the main control board, to detect the input signal wiring pattern through-holes (the holes in the mounting surface (front) side lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1).

Furthermore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. As a result, the outer circumference of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 extends to the middle of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. In the case where the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating film toward the center, however, as shown in Figure 193(b), a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1, and larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention region that extends concentrically outward from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface side of the through-hole KTH1. It is sized to be a distance of at least 0.5 mm from the inner peripheral edge on the mounting surface side of the through-hole KTH1 (the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance is at least 0.5 mm to prevent the white resist liquid from entering the through-hole KTH1 of the main control substrate 1310; in the configuration where an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole according to the fourth embodiment, 0.5 mm is used). Therefore, the inner diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of the through-hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance (0.5 mm), resulting in a diameter 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of the through-hole KTH1.

This allows a green resist to be applied as an insulating film to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310, from almost the inside (i.e., over the area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control substrate 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). Therefore, the area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, thus significantly reducing the area of the exposed copper foil on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x.

Furthermore, since a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when the green resist liquid is applied as an insulating film to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single standard-size copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out, so that the front surface of the single standard-size copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will not penetrate into the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and will dry without blocking these holes.

Furthermore, by covering the entire outer circumference of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, from almost the inside (i.e., over the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area) with a green resist coating as an insulating film, the area where the copper foil is exposed is reduced to the resist liquid intrusion prevention area. However, since it is possible to perform electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (operational confirmation and abnormal potential confirmation) by contacting the tip of a contact probe to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. Note that the contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used for continuity checks with a so-called "tester".

[12-2. Wiring Pattern to Input Terminals]
The detection signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 is input as a power outage warning signal to input terminal PB0 of input port PB, which is the third input from the left in the diagram among the lead terminals located in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA, which is the eighth input from the left in the diagram among the lead terminals located in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is located as the 20th terminal from the left (13th from the right in the diagram) among the lead terminals located in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit this detection signal.

The various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 are routed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they are located close to each other but do not run parallel to each other.

Furthermore, the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 are routed only to the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, without using through-holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which allows the probability of granting benefits to the player to be changed, are formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to visually see how the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed from the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, thus contributing to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improved security. Furthermore, since various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 used for changing settings are formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it becomes difficult to visually see how the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed from the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, thereby contributing to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improved security. Furthermore, by forming various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it becomes difficult to visually see how the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) are routed from the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This contributes to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it contributes to improved security.

As described above, changing the setting values requires operating the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are important signals that allow for changing the probability of generating a game state favorable to the player. Therefore, in a pachinko parlor where the machine 1 is installed, it is necessary to prevent the settings from being fraudulently changed to a probability unintended by the parlor staff.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the probability of granting a profit to the player, and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d, are not placed close together and are routed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so as not to run parallel to each other. As a result, the various wiring patterns that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a (setting key signal wiring patterns) and the various wiring patterns that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d (RWM signal wiring patterns) are separated from each other and input to predetermined input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This makes it difficult to tamper with both the various wiring patterns that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d simultaneously. Therefore, this contributes to improving the security of setting changes.

Furthermore, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). The input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA is located as the 8th terminal from the left in the diagram among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, while the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA is located as the 20th terminal from the left (13th terminal from the right) in the diagram among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. Thus, the predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal, and the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal, are not arranged adjacent to each other. The input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the 1310a and the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal, are interposed by other lead terminals (specifically, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the diagram, a total of 11 lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a).

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as described above, areas are formed where the copper foil has been removed from the through-holes through which each lead terminal of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a is inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground), around the wiring pattern for +5V power supply, around the wiring pattern for signal output, around the wiring pattern for input signal, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes that electrically connect the output signal wiring patterns between the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y). Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a settable state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Similarly, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a pressed state) and is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This makes it difficult to tamper with the system by electrically switching the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) with ground (GND) (board ground) by removing foil around them, thereby contributing to improved security.

Furthermore, in addition to the connection between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that receive other signals or output other signals, such that the logic of the RWM signal indicating that the RWM switch 633d is not pressed is HI (logic indicating a non-pressed state), and the logic of the setting key signal indicating that the setting key switch 1311a is OFF is HI (logic indicating a setting impossible state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

Furthermore, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Thus, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signals from the RWM switch 633d were input to the lead terminals located in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. However, for example, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a may be input from the lead terminals located in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals located in the upper row. When the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), the input terminal PB7 of input port PB is located as the 22nd terminal from the left (11th from the right) in the diagram among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. Thus, even with a configuration where the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminals in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the lead terminals in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, the security of setting changes can be improved.

The logical states of input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in the address space using a memory-mapped I/O method. For example, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously acquire the logical state of each input terminal at the same address for input port PA. Similarly, for input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously acquire the logical state of each input terminal at the same address (a different address from that of input port PA). Input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are 8-bit input ports, and each input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of input ports PA and PB are pre-assigned to one of the bits from bit 0 to bit 7.

[12-3. Summary]
[12-3a. Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. However, the wiring patterns that electrically connect the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal), the lead terminals of the electronic components constituting the main control input circuit 1310b (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10), and the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) are all formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y, which is the side opposite to the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

A2. Because the wiring pattern in the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a is formed by routing it to the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as described above, through-holes for electrically connecting the wiring pattern between the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are not formed on the main control board 1310.

A3. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) and the lead terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA), it is difficult to route the wiring pattern using only the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 must also be used. When forming through-holes to electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting side (front side) 1310x and the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 190 to 193, the outer perimeter and the entirety of the through-hole lands on the mounting side (front side) 1310x and/or the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are covered with a green resist, which is an insulating coating.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320, which is openable and closable by a longitudinal sliding mechanism and consists of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 such that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Subsequently, by screwing in the one-way screws of the crimping portion 1303, which is the sealing portion, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a, which is mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, is operated by inserting the setting key into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab and rotating it. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, causing the main control board 1310 to bend and flex, which may cause the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 to break. Therefore, in order to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, a protrusion 1302p, as shown in Figure 185, is formed on the base body 1302 in the area of the solder side (back) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (i.e., when the setting key is inserted into the slot 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the slot 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), as described above, a predetermined clearance of distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. A predetermined clearance, as described above, is provided between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, with a distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm). When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 do not come into contact. Furthermore, when assembling the main control board box 1320 and sliding the cover body 1301 and base body 1302, or when removing the main control board 1310 and releasing the seal on the main control board box to slide the cover body 1301 and base body 1302, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p contacts the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing damage to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed from the area of the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 that the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with, and the surrounding area is covered with a green resist, which is an insulating coating. Even if the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310, is rubbed off by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p when the setting key switch 1311a is repeatedly pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane). This prevents the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from contacting the wiring pattern or the ground plane (GND) of the main control board 1310. This prevents damage to the wiring pattern or disconnection caused by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, and also prevents damage to the ground plane (GND) of the main control board 1310.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320, which is openable and closable by a longitudinal sliding mechanism and consists of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 such that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. When the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also moves longitudinally. The front surface of the protrusion 1302p is positioned such that no wiring patterns are routed along the corresponding solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This is because, although a predetermined clearance of distance d2 (for example, approximately 1 mm) is provided between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent damage to the wiring patterns or disconnections.

Furthermore, it is possible to avoid forming a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in addition to the wiring pattern, in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves. This is because, although a predetermined clearance of distance dimension d2 (for example, about 1 mm) is provided between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may rub against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, it is necessary to prevent damage to the solid ground (GND) (substrate ground).

A8. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. This allows the front surface of the protrusion 1302p to move, specifically the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder. As the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the lower edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance in the left-right direction becomes the length of the slide movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the distance in the up-down direction becomes the diameter of the cylinder. This reduces the area over which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. This contributes to increasing the freedom of routing the wiring pattern when avoiding the area over which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

Furthermore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the lower edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the region where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes constant, equal to the diameter of the cylinder. This prevents (suppresses) interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of electronic components soldered to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)).

A9. The projection 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may be formed in a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape in which the constant width is the same dimension as the outer diameter of the cylindrical projection 1302p). In this case, the region in which the front surface of the projection 1302p moves can be such that, as the projection 1302p slides parallel to the lower edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the distance dimension in the left-right direction becomes the length of the sliding movement of the projection 1302p, and the distance dimension in the up-down direction becomes the constant width of the projection 1302p. This allows the wiring pattern to be routed along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 when routing the wiring pattern to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the area where the protrusion 1302p moves. This ensures that the wiring pattern and the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p are in a parallel positional relationship. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from rubbing against the green resist, which is an insulating coating formed on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing damage to the wiring pattern or causing disconnection.

Furthermore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the lower edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes constant, and this constant width prevents (suppresses) interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of electronic components soldered to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)).

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed with a shape that is long in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protrusion 1302p were formed with a shape that is long in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 is moved in the longitudinal direction to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the side surface of the protrusion 1302p would interfere with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic components soldered to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. For this reason, the protrusion 1302p is not formed with a shape that is long in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. This prevents (suppresses) interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal)).

A11. As shown in Figure 184, the setting key switch 1311a consists of a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and forming a circuit that turns the contacts ON or OFF by the rotation of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a frame plate 1311ad formed on both sides of the base body 1311ac, with a hole formed at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa that penetrates the outer cylinder 1311aa and is bent to cover the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac, projecting to the rear of the base body 1311ac. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from a non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from a conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and the frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted through holes from the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and protrude from the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, where they are soldered. The internal circuitry of the setting key switch 1311a electrically connects to the wiring pattern that forms the signal transmission path from the main control board 1310 to the main control MPU 1310a. The frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on it. As shown in Figure 186, the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada are inserted from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310 of the main control board 1310 into long through-holes SLH1, SLH2, and protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, where they are soldered. This electrically connects them to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, resulting in an electrically connected state between the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, although the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted through the long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 from the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and protrude from the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and are soldered, they are not electrically connected to the main control board 1310's ground plane (GND) (board ground), and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a may be electrically floating.

A13. The locking unit 650, which locks the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is grounded to the island equipment of the gaming hall via an earth wire (not shown).

A14. To operate the setting key switch 1311a, the operator must first release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Therefore, they must insert a key (a conductive metal key; hereinafter sometimes referred to as "metal key") into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650 and rotate it. Even if the operator is charged with an electric potential, by inserting the metal key into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650, the electric potential from the operator is grounded to the locking unit 650 and then to the island equipment of the gaming hall via an earth wire (not shown), thus eliminating the electric potential from the operator.

Even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the potential charged on the operator has already been grounded and removed to the island equipment of the gaming hall. Therefore, damage to the setting key switch 1311a due to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the potential charged on the operator can be prevented. Furthermore, even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a while charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the frame plate 1311ad are electrically insulated as described above. Therefore, the potential charged on the operator cannot penetrate the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad, which is connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab, thus preventing damage to the main control board 1310. (Naturally, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal), which are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, since the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a will not remain charged.

Furthermore, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, then the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a will not be electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 together with the frame plate 1311ad. Even if a worker inserts the setting key into the slot 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab while charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected (insulated) from the main control board 1310's ground (GND) via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and the frame plate 1311ad. Therefore, the potential from the worker's charge does not penetrate the main control board 1310's ground (GND) via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, thus preventing damage to the main control board 1310. However, because the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the main control board 1310's ground (GND), the setting key switch 1311a will not be able to discharge if it becomes charged.

The long through-holes SLH1' and SLH2' to which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and are electrically floating. Through-holes SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are electrically connected to wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. Through-hole SLTH1 is electrically connected to wiring pattern SPTN3, and through-hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Thus, since wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and through-holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 exist around the long through-holes SLH1' and SLH2', a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through-holes SLH1' and SLH2' and wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3, and a solid ground (GND) (substrate ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through-holes SLH1' and SLH2' and through-holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. By forming lands, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, it is necessary to ensure that the long through-holes SLH1', SLH2' and wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 are not adjacent to each other without the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 intervening, so that the setting key switch 1311a is not affected even if it becomes unable to discharge. Furthermore, it is necessary to ensure that the long through-holes SLH1', SLH2' and through-holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are not adjacent to each other without the ground plane (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 intervening.

[12-3b. Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected to an input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, which is a different lead terminal from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA.

Furthermore, the logical states of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in the address space using the memory-mapped I/O method, and can be simultaneously acquired by the main control MPU 1310a at the same address. In other words, as described above, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a are pre-assigned to one of the bits from bit 0 to bit 7 of a predetermined 8-bit port.

As described above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and is formed by alternately bending lead terminals that protrude vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a body, arranging them in two rows along the longitudinal direction. The input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA are not arranged adjacent to each other in one of the two rows.

For example, when arranging input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA in one of two rows, the terminals should not be placed adjacent to each other. Instead, other lead terminals should be positioned between input terminal PA5 and input terminal PA0.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 is connected to a different lead terminal from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA. Although the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA were arranged in one of the two rows due to their electrical connection, the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, may be electrically connected so that they are arranged in separate rows of the two.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 is a different lead terminal from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is an input terminal Although the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the PA was electrically connected, the logical states of the setting key signal input terminal, to which the setting key signal wiring pattern transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected, and the RWM signal input terminal, to which the RWM signal wiring pattern transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected, may be acquired at different addresses. In other words, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be pre-assigned to different input ports so that their states can be acquired separately. If the input terminals (read terminals) are grouped together for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by using different addresses.

B4. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, has two logic states: a logic (HI) indicating a setting impossible state and a logic (LOW) indicating a setting possible state. In the logic indicating a setting impossible state (HI), the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is raised to the +5V power line side created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. In contrast, in the logic indicating a setting possible state (LOW), the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the circuit is configured such that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. This ensures that even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) will be raised to the +5V power line side created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), will ultimately become a logic (HI) indicating a setting impossible state, thus preventing setting changes.

The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, has two logic states: a logic (HI) indicating a pressed/unoperated state and a logic (LOW) indicating a pressed/operated state. In the logic indicating a pressed/unoperated state (HI), the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is raised to the +5V power line side created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. In contrast, in the logic indicating a pressed/operated state (LOW), the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is lowered to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is also configured in the same way as the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) so that the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if an unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) will be raised to the +5V power line side created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. This will result in the logic state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), becoming a logic (HI) indicating a non-pressed/non-operated state, thus preventing setting changes.

Furthermore, in addition to the connection between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that receive other signals or output other signals, such that the logic of the RWM signal indicating that the RWM switch 633d is not pressed is HI (logic indicating a non-pressed state), and the logic of the setting key signal indicating that the setting key switch 1311a is OFF is HI (logic indicating a setting impossible state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and the setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a settable state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the area around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the area around the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) is a foil-cut area where ground (GND) (board ground) is not formed to prevent the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, a ground (GND) (board ground) where the logic of the setting key signal indicating that the setting key switch 1311a is ON is LOW (logic indicating a settable state) is not formed (not placed) around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal). This prevents the voltage applied to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the press operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the area around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the area around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is a foil-punched area where no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed to prevent the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, a ground (GND) (board ground) where the logic of the RWM signal indicating that the RWM switch 633d is pressed is LOW (logic indicating the pressed state) is not formed (not placed) around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal). This prevents the voltage applied to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is either a logic (HI) indicating an unsettable state or a logic (LOW) indicating a settable state. In addition, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is... The logic state of a certain operation signal consists of a logic (HI) that indicates a non-pressed state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a pressed state. The logic (HI) that indicates a non-pressed state and the logic (HI) that indicates a non-pressed state are the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that indicates a settable state and the logic (LOW) that indicates a pressed state are the same logic (LOW). However, instead, the logic state of the logic that indicates a non-settable state and the logic that indicates a pressed state may be the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logic state of the logic that indicates a settable state and the logic that indicates a non-pressed state may be the same logic (LOW or HI). By using the same logic for both the logic indicating the configurable state and the logic indicating the pressed state, it becomes more difficult for anyone attempting to tamper with input terminal PA5 (configurable key signal input terminal), the configuration key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and the RWM signal wiring pattern to understand the logic of this combination. This would result in a short circuit between ground (GND) (board ground) and power supply, requiring considerable effort and time. Therefore, tampering with the RWM signal input terminal, configuration key signal wiring pattern, and configuration key signal wiring pattern becomes more difficult, contributing to improved security.

Furthermore, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is positioned (clamped) in the narrow space (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed on the base body 1302. Also, as described above, the base body 1302 has a protrusion 1302p that can contact the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board 1310. The protrusion 1302p is designed to prevent further bending and bending of the main control board 1310 when a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion slot 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. When the main control board 1310 bends and flexes due to the force of insertion, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder side (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing further bending and flexing of the main control board 1310 and preventing disconnection of the wiring pattern and peeling of the solder formed on the main control board 1310. As shown in Figure 186(b), a circular foil-removed area SINSy is formed in the area of the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 comes into contact with, and around that area, where copper foil has been removed. This prevents damage to the solid ground (substrate ground) on the solder side (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, even if the insulating coating 1310yr on the solder side is scraped by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil-removed area SINSy, where the copper foil is removed, safely and effectively utilizes the limited substrate area.

B7. The setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633. As a result, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are mounted on separate control boards. This ensures that the setting key switch 1311a, mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the game board 5, and the RWM switch 633d, mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633 in the main frame 4, are spaced apart. Therefore, even if someone attempts to cheat, they would need to illegally modify both the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d, a process that would take an extremely long time. Seeing the arrangement of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d would discourage any cheater from attempting to illegally modify them, making cheating difficult.

To actually change the settings, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a, then the RWM switch 633d, and then the power switch 630a for turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1. Since the power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the circuit board unit 620 of the main frame 4, the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM switch 633d, and the power switch 630a, which are necessary for changing the settings, are each mounted on separate circuit boards.

B8. The detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, it is also possible to input them to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs equipped with input circuits (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input via a dedicated setting key input IC, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input via a dedicated RWM input IC). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the logic state of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, thereby contributing to improved anti-tampering measures.

Furthermore, the main control input circuit 1310b, which is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and lacks an error detection function, is primarily composed of resistors and transistors. Since the circuit configuration is common to all of these circuits, they may be configured as a DIP-type transistor array, where the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b are combined into a single IC.

B9. The detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, it is also possible to input them to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs equipped with input circuits (that is, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input via a dedicated setting key input IC, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input via a dedicated RWM input IC). In this case, resistors and transistors that constitute the main control input circuit 1310b, which lacks other error detection functions, are interposed between the separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult for the circuit to distinguish between the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, thus contributing to improved anti-tampering measures.

B10. The detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633 are input to predetermined input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, which does not have an error detection function, as shown in Figure 179. When using a DIP-type transistor array that integrates the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b into a single IC, the input terminals of the DIP-type transistor array receiving the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the input terminals of the DIP-type transistor array receiving the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d should not be adjacent to each other. Alternatively, the wiring pattern should be formed so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the input terminals protruding from one side of the DIP-type transistor array, and the wiring pattern should be formed so that the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to one of the input terminals protruding from the other side. This can contribute to improving anti-tampering measures.

B11. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, are respectively pulled up to the power line side by resistors MR16 and MR5, as shown in Figure 179. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors and are positioned away from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is positioned to the right of the connector MCN8 located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. The resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located above the lead-type resistor array which is located above the setting key switch 1311a. Since the RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the dispensing control board 633, resistors MR16 and MR5 are located away from the RWM switch 633d. If resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, there is a risk that the logical state of the operation signal detected from the setting key switch 1311a and the logical state of the operation signal detected from the RWM switch 633d may be manipulated. Therefore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (and RWM switch 633d), the presence of these important resistors can be concealed by blending them in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), even if unauthorized access is achieved by inserting a thin, slender tool such as a wire through the gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5, thereby contributing to improved security.

B12. The resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located to the right of the connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. The resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located above the lead-type resistor array, which is located above the setting key switch 1311a. Thus, the resistors MR16 and MR5 are spaced apart. This makes it difficult to notice that resistors MR16 and MR5 are important electronic components that are involved in the logic state of the operation signal detected from the setting key switch 1311a and the operation signal detected from the RWM switch 633d, by allowing them to blend in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5, it becomes more difficult to simultaneously tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5, thereby contributing to improved security.

B13. Between the main control input circuit 1310b, which does not have an error detection function and receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a, other circuits are arranged as shown in Figure 187, including various DIP type ICs, lead type resistors, lead type diodes, lead type capacitors, lead type electrolytic capacitors, and a DIP type crystal oscillator. In this way, even if someone tries to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuits can prevent the illegal tool from entering, and can also induce a short circuit to the other circuits, thereby preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play the game. Even if the main control input circuit 1310b, which lacks an error detection function and receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, is replaced with a dedicated IC equipped with an input circuit, other circuits will still be interposed between it and the dedicated IC. Even with this configuration, if someone attempts to insert a long, thin, unauthorized tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuits will prevent the unauthorized tool from entering. Furthermore, this will induce a short circuit in the other circuits, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and thus preventing the game from being played.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the game board side drawer connector and the main frame side drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the opposite side where the game board side drawer connector is mounted (or, even if formed on the mounting surface where the game board side drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector), making it difficult to see. Similarly, the wiring pattern for transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted is formed on the opposite side where the main frame side drawer connector is mounted (or, even if formed on the mounting surface where the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, it is covered by the drawer connector), making it difficult to see.

Here, we will explain the drawer connector. The drawer connector is a connector that automatically establishes an electrical connection between the game board 5 and the main frame 4 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4. A game board-side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board-side relay board located at a predetermined position on the rear of the game board 5, and a main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main frame-side relay board located at a predetermined position on the front of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, thereby electrically connecting each terminal of the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to each terminal of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4.

For example, regarding the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame 4, it is made of a non-conductive resin, has a rectangular opening on the front side, and a box-shaped body that is long in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped base body that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped body, resulting in an overall shape resembling the letter T.

Around the opening of the box-shaped body, inclined sections are formed to guide the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped body, extending from the front of the opening toward the bottom surface of the box-shaped body for a predetermined distance. On the inner upper surface of the opening of the box-shaped body, grooves are formed from near the front of the opening towards the bottom of the box-shaped body. These grooves prevent the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 from being inserted upside down in a non-standard orientation into the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type), and also prevent lateral misalignment between the game board side drawer connector (convex type) and the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) when the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is inserted in the standard orientation, thereby improving the fit between the two connectors.

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped body, pin-type terminals are arranged in two rows perpendicular to the bottom surface (six pin-type terminals in one row horizontally), and these terminals penetrate the box-shaped body and the base.

Mounting through-holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body. When mounting the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board, rivets are first inserted from the front of the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) into these mounting through-holes. The ends are then crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder side) of the main frame-side relay board. This secures the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board.

Furthermore, a cylindrical protrusion is formed on the back of the base unit to ensure that the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) is mounted to the main frame-side relay board in the correct orientation.

The main frame-side relay board has a main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type), as well as a DIP (Dual Inline Package) type miniature connector that is electrically connected to this main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type). This connector is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided to the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) of the main frame 4. This electrical connection between the terminals of the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) and the terminals of the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) forms a control signal line that transmits various control signals from the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 on the main frame 4 via the DIP type miniature connector and wiring (harness).

Furthermore, the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame side electrically connects the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 and the payout control board 633 on the main frame 4, and also electrically connects to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply various power from the power supply board 630 to various boards on the game board 5. In addition to the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame side, there is another drawer connector (recessed type) on a different main frame side relay board. This other main frame side relay board has a DIP (Dual Inline Package) type miniature connector mounted on it that is electrically connected to the other drawer connector (recessed type), and is electrically connected to various decorative boards and various sensors on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, a different game board side drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5, which is electrically connected to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), is guided to another main frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame 4. As a result, each terminal of the other game board side drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type), thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals and detection signals from the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards, various sensors, and various speakers on the door frame 3 via a DIP type miniature connector and wiring (harness). The structure of the other main frame-side drawer connectors (recessed type) is identical to that of the main frame-side drawer connectors (recessed type), and the method of fixing these other main frame-side drawer connectors (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board is the same as the method of fixing the main frame-side drawer connectors (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board (using rivets).

Furthermore, the method of fixing the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5, which is guided by the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, to the game board-side relay board, and the method of fixing the other game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5, which is guided by another main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, to another game board-side relay board (this other game board-side relay board is different from the game board-side relay board on which the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5, which is guided by the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, is the same as the method of fixing the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame-side relay board (a fixing method using rivets).

The reason rivets are used to secure the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board is that while using the drawer connector allows for automatic electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, a significant force may be applied to the box-shaped body of the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) from the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 when attaching it to the main frame 4. The rivets are used to prevent the soldered surfaces of the pin-type terminals on the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) from peeling off on the back surface (solder side) of the main frame-side relay board due to this significant force. Furthermore, when using bolts and nuts to secure the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame-side relay board, or when securing the game board-side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board-side relay board, there is a drawback that the nuts may loosen when attaching or removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4.

In this embodiment, pin-type connectors are used for each terminal of the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame side. However, using a bellows type connector with terminals and contacts presents the following problems. For example, if the terminals of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 are terminals and the terminals of the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame 4 are contacts, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the contacts between the terminals and contacts (specifically, contacts for various power supply lines where a large current (inrush current) flows) will weld together. If the game board 5 is forcibly pushed into the main frame 4 while in this welded state, the contacts of the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame side may bend and break, or when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, the contacts may detach from the drawer connector (recessed type) and break, rendering the drawer connector (recessed type) unusable.

Furthermore, if the terminals and contacts fuse together, there is a risk that the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunctions in various control boards or damage to electronic components mounted on those boards. Therefore, a dedicated circuit is needed to prevent this fusion.

In this embodiment, by using pin-type terminals for each terminal of the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame side, the aforementioned problem does not occur at all. In other words, even if a worker mistakenly attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the terminals of the drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 and the terminals of the drawer connector (recessed type) on the main frame 4 will not weld together, eliminating the need for a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

B15. Instead of using ON and OFF signals as detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a pulse signal or serial signal (command transmission) may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above, includes a game board 5 as shown in Figure 11, where a game area 5a is defined and formed through which the launched game balls flow. It also includes a main control board 1310 as shown in Figure 188, which has a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x through which the lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and electronic components are mounted, and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y through which the lead terminals of the electronic components are soldered.

On the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (as shown in Figure 188) is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game. Also mounted is a setting key switch 1311a (as shown in Figure 188), an electronic component that allows the player to change the probability of receiving a benefit, which is electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a.

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are soldered, as are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern that electrically connects the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Thus, by forming the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operation unit that allows the probability of granting benefits to the player to be changed, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it becomes difficult to visually see how the wiring pattern is routed from the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310, thereby contributing to making it difficult to tamper with the wiring pattern. Therefore, it can contribute to improved security.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it includes a game board 5 as shown in Figure 11, where a game area 5a is demarcated and formed where the launched game balls flow down; a setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 as shown in Figure 188, which serves as a first operation unit that allows the probability of granting profits to the player to be changed; a main control board 1310 as shown in Figure 188, which is equipped with a main control built-in RAM of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a as a storage unit that can store and hold game information, and on which the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a as shown in Figure 188 is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game; and an RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board as shown in Figure 182, which serves as a second operation unit that can clear (erase) the game information stored (held) in the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the probability of granting a benefit to the player based on the operation signal detected from the setting key switch 1311a and the operation signal detected from the RWM switch 633d.

The main control board 1310 is configured such that the setting key signal wiring pattern, which serves as the first transmission path for the operation signal detected from the setting key switch 1311a and input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which serves as the second transmission path for the operation signal detected from the RWM switch 633d and input to the main control MPU 1310a, do not run parallel to each other.

Thus, the main control board 1310 is configured such that the first transmission path, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which receives an operation signal (detection signal) from the setting key switch 1311a (a first operation unit that can change the probability of granting benefits to the player) to the main control MPU 1310a, and the second transmission path, the RWM signal wiring pattern, which receives an operation signal (detection signal) from the RWM switch 633d (a second operation unit that can clear (erase) game information held in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a) to the main control MPU 1310a, do not run parallel to each other. As a result, the setting key signal wiring pattern (first transmission path) and the RWM signal wiring pattern (second transmission path) are input to the main control MPU 1310a at a distance from each other, making it difficult to tamper with both the setting key signal wiring pattern and the RWM signal wiring pattern simultaneously. Therefore, this contributes to improved security.

[13. Game Details]
The gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145, etc. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, thereby starting the game with the game balls B. The game balls B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flow down either to the left or right of the center mechanism 2500 depending on the force with which they are driven. The force with which the game balls B are driven can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195, and the more it is rotated clockwise, the stronger the balls are driven, and it is possible to continuously drive up to 100 game balls B per minute, that is, at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Furthermore, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted on the front of the game panel 1100 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement. When the game ball B strikes the obstacle nails N, its flow velocity is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing players to enjoy these movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates upon contact with the game ball B is located above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center mechanism 2500.

When a game ball B is driven into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the area to the left of the highest point on the outer surface of the center mechanism 2500 when viewed from the front. It then flows down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500, contacting multiple obstacle nails N along the way. As the game ball B flows down the area to the left of the center mechanism 2500, it enters the warp entrance 2511, which is opening in the peripheral wall 2501 of the center mechanism 2500, and is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the central part in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received by the first start opening 2002 with a high probability because the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first start opening 2002. When a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3 balls) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Simultaneously, the main control board 1310 conducts a lottery to determine a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a favorable game state for the player (for example, "Big Win," "Medium Win," "Small Win," "Special Feature Win," "Probability Fluctuation (Probability Change) Win," or "Time Reduction (Time Reduction) Win).

The game balls B released from the stage 2513 of the center mechanism 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100.

Incidentally, if the game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center mechanism 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it will be pushed towards the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstructing nails N, and may be received by the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, or the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, etc. When the game ball B is received by the general prize entry opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B will be dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, when a game ball B, which has been driven into the upper part of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a, enters to the right of the highest point of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center mechanism 2500, it is released above the gate 2003 through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 of the center mechanism 2500, strikes one of the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate 2003, and then passes through the gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center mechanism 2500 consists of a first guide passage 2521 whose entrance opens near the impact section 1006, and a second guide passage 2522 whose entrance opens to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Therefore, when a game ball B is struck with enough force to hit the impact section 1006 (so-called "right-handed shot"), it enters the first guide passage 2521. When a game ball B is struck with enough force to not hit the impact section 1006 (somewhat weaker than a right-handed shot), it enters the second guide passage 2522 with a high probability. In other words, a game ball B struck to the upper right side of the center mechanism 2500 will circulate through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the force with which it was struck.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that the game ball B passes through gate 2003 with a higher probability when routed through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521. Furthermore, the configuration is such that the game ball passes through gate 2003 and the area to the left of gate 2003 with a higher probability when routed through the second guide passage 2522 rather than the first guide passage 2521.

When the game ball B passes through gate 2003 and is detected by gate sensor 2801, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the result of the normal lottery is a "normal win," the closed second start port 2004 in the first attacker unit 2400 opens for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing the game ball B to be received into the second start port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery conducted when the game ball B passes through gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set between the start of the normal lottery and the indication of the normal lottery result (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start gate 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

Furthermore, if game ball B passes through gate 2003 between the time it passes through gate 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is indicated, the indication of the normal lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the indication of the normal lottery result is suspended until the previous indication of the normal lottery result has finished. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is capped at four; any results beyond that are discarded without being reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2003. This prevents an increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to an accumulation of reserved results.

The game balls B that pass through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 are, with a high probability, directed down the left side of the side right-center unit 2700 by multiple obstacle nails N planted between gate 2003 and the side right-center unit 2700. Occasionally, they are received into the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right-center unit 2700, and rarely, into the second sub-out opening 2022. When game balls B are received into the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side right-center unit 2700, a predetermined number of game balls B are dispensed, similar to the general prize entry opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when game balls B are received into the second sub-out opening 2022, they are discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be received into the prize entry opening 2006, the second start opening 2004, or the large prize entry opening 2005.

Furthermore, game ball B, which passes to the right of gate 2003, is received by the second sub-out port 2022 of the side right-center unit 2700. It is not received by the general prize port 2001, the special prize port 2006, the second start port 2004, or the large prize port 2005 of the side right-center unit 2700, and is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Thus, when a game ball B is received into the second sub-outlet 2022 downstream of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to perform a shooting operation that prevents the game ball B from being received into the second sub-outlet 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center mechanism 2500, the probability of game ball B being received into the second sub-outlet 2022 is lower in the second guide passage 2522 than in the first guide passage 2521. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to shoot the game ball B aiming for the second guide passage 2522. In other words, it is possible to encourage shooting operations that require subtle adjustments to the rotation of the handle 182, rather than "right-handed shooting" where the game ball B hits the impact point 1006, allowing the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which focuses on shooting the game ball B.

The game ball B, passing to the left of the side right-center unit 2700, is guided by multiple obstacle pins N planted to the left of the side right-center unit 2700, passes to the left of the prize entry opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600, and is then released towards the first attacker unit 2400 via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center prize mechanism 2500.

At this time, if game balls B are received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the result of the first special lottery is "prize win", the prize entry port 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that game balls B flowing down the left side of the side right-center unit 2700 are received into the prize entry port 2006 with a high probability. When the prize entry port 2006 is open and game balls B are received into the prize entry port 2006, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 dispense a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B from the payout device 580 into the upper tray 201.

The game ball B, received into the prize entry opening 2006 and detected by the prize entry opening sensor 2601, flows through the distribution passage 3158 and is distributed to either the V-entry opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by the V-entry opening door 3006, which moves back and forth. If game ball B is distributed to the V-entry opening 2007, the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, creating a favorable game state for the player. On the other hand, if game ball B is distributed to the losing opening 2008, no favorable game state is created for the player.

The game ball B, released towards the first attacker unit 2400 after passing to the left of the prize entry opening 2006, rolls to the left over the first shelf 2421, the second start opening door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, before being released to the left. Furthermore, it rolls to the left over the third shelf 2423, the large prize entry opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424 before being released into the game area 5a.

Then, when the game ball B is rolling on the second start door 2411, if the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the passage of game ball B through gate 2003 is "ordinary win," and the second start door 2411 is retracted, the game ball B is received into the second start opening 2004. Upon receiving the game ball B into the second start opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Simultaneously, the main control board 1310 conducts a lottery to determine a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that generates a favorable game state for the player (for example, "big win," "medium win," "small win," "prize win," "probability variation (probability change) win," or "time reduction (time reduction) win."

Furthermore, when the game ball B is rolling on the large prize opening door 2413, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state (for example, "jackpot"), then after the special variation time has elapsed, the large prize opening 2005 will be in a state where it can accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When the large prize opening 2005 is in the open state and the game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 will dispense a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B from the payout device 580 into the upper tray 201. Therefore, when the large prize slot 2005 is capable of accepting game ball B, allowing game ball B to be accepted into the large prize slot 2005 allows for the payout of a large number of game ball B, thus providing enjoyment to the players.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, when game balls B are received into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 performs a lottery to determine a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state for the player (for example, "Big Win," "Medium Win," "Small Win," "Feature Win," "Probability Fluctuation (Probability Change) Win," "Time Reduction (Time Reduction) Win." Then, the special lottery result is set to a predetermined time (for example, 0 The game provides hints to the player over a period of 1 to 360 seconds (also referred to as the special variation time). The special lottery results, which are determined when game ball B is received into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, include: "Miss," "Small Win," "2R Big Win," "5R Big Win," "15R Big Win," "Probability Change Win," "Time Reduction Win," "Probability Change Time Reduction Win," "Probability Change No Time Reduction Win," "Second Big Win," etc.

If the special lottery result is "prize win," the prize entry opening 2006 opens to accept game balls B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes, repeating this opening and closing pattern multiple times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "jackpot," the large prize entry opening 2005 opens to accept game balls B, and then, after a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 10) have been accepted into the large prize entry opening 2005, it closes to a state where it cannot accept game balls B (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round), repeating this opening and closing pattern a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" would result in 2 rounds, a "5R jackpot" in 5 rounds, and a "15R jackpot" in 15 rounds, each repeating to create a favorable game state for the player.

Furthermore, in the case of a "jackpot," there are types of wins that, after the jackpot game ends, change the probability of drawing a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" ("probability-changing win"), or change the display time of the visual effect that suggests the special lottery result ("time-saving win").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is "Second Jackpot," the large prize slot 2005 will become capable of accepting game balls B in a predetermined pattern, and then a special time (ST) will be triggered as a favorable game state. This ST maintains a state of probability variation or time reduction for a predetermined number of spins.

In this embodiment, if game balls B are received into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004, between the start of the special lottery and the indication of the drawn special lottery results, the indication of the special lottery results cannot be started. Therefore, the indication of the special lottery results is withheld until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery results is completed. The number of withheld special lottery results is limited to four for both the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004. Any results exceeding this limit are discarded without being withheld, even if game balls B are received into the first and second starting ports 2002 and 2004. This suppresses the increase in the burden on the gaming hall due to the accumulation of withheld results.

The indication of the special lottery result is provided by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to indicate the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 indicates the special lottery result by repeatedly switching multiple LEDs on and off for a predetermined time, and then indicating the special lottery result based on the combination of the lit LEDs.

Meanwhile, the display device 1600, based on control signals from the main control board 1310, is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and displays an image indicating the special lottery result. The image indicating the special lottery result on the display device 1600 displays three rows of symbols arranged horizontally. Each row of symbols is then manipulated, and the manipulated rows are sequentially stopped. The three stopped rows of symbols are then displayed so that their combinations correspond to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is anything other than "miss," after the three rows of symbols stop and each symbol is displayed, a confirmation image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the display device 1600, and a favorable game state (e.g., "minor win" game, "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

Furthermore, the time indicated by the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time indicated by the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the confirmed image is displayed) are different, with the function display unit 1400 having a longer time setting.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying performance images to indicate the special lottery results from the performance display device 1600, can also perform player-participation performances in which the player operates the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 301 in the door frame 3, depending on the special lottery results. In the player-participation performance, the press operation section 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, allowing the player to enjoy the player-participation performance by operating the performance operation section 301.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately utilize the decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the rear front performance unit 3100, rear upper performance unit 3200, and rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 to perform illumination and display effects, etc. This allows for various effects to entertain the player and helps prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in player-participation events involving the operation of the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player if they make a mistake or fail to perform the required operation, prompting them to perform the correct operation.

[14. Second Embodiment of the Game Board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 194 to 196. Figure 194(a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment at the same location as (a). Figure 195(a) is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in (a) where the front left decorative unit of the front back performance unit is illuminated. Figure 196 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in Figure 195(a) where the panel plate of the game panel is illuminated.

The game board 5A of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100 are made of a translucent, milky white synthetic resin. Detailed explanations of the parts with the same configuration are omitted.

In the first embodiment, the game board 5 has a front component 1000 and a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) made of transparent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in Figure 194(a), the rear unit 3000, located behind the front component 1000 and the game panel 1100, can be seen from the front (player side).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the game board 5A has front components 1000A and panel board 1110A made of milky white synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in Figure 194(b), etc., the parts of the panel board 1110A, excluding the inside of the opening 1112, cannot be seen from the front (player side) of the front components 1000 and the rear unit 3000 located behind the game panel 1100.

The front component 1000A and the panel plate 1110A are formed from a translucent, milky-white, opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be formed by cutting a milky-white synthetic resin plate, or it may be formed by injection molding using a milky-white synthetic resin.

In this embodiment, the game board 5A has a milky white panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100. Therefore, a portion of the rear unit 3000 (the part outside the opening 1112 in a front view) can be made invisible through the panel plate 1110A. Because the panel plate 1110A is translucent, when decorative elements at the rear are illuminated, light from the decorative elements passes through the panel plate 1110A, allowing the illuminated decorations to be visible to the player.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 195(a), in the rear-front display unit 3100 of the rear-front unit 3000, which is located behind the panel board 1110A, the rear-front left decorative unit 3120, including the rear-front upper left logo decorative section 3122 and the rear-front left sub-decorative section 3123, which are located outside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, are not visible from the front when viewed from the front. However, when the rear-front left logo decorative section 3121, the rear-front upper left logo decorative section 3122, and the rear-front left sub-decorative section 3123 are illuminated, as shown in Figure 195(b), the light from the rear-front upper left logo decorative section 3122 and the rear-front left sub-decorative section 3123, which are located behind the translucent panel board 1110A, is transmitted, making the illuminated rear-front upper left logo decorative section 3122 and the rear-front left sub-decorative section 3123 visible.

Because this panel 1110A, etc., is milky white, the illuminated colors of the front left logo decoration section 3122 and the front left sub-decoration section 3123 can be transmitted through in their original colors, allowing players to see a richly colored illumination display.

Furthermore, for the translucent opaque material of the panel board 1110A, it is desirable that the light transmittance is 2% to 80% and the haze value is 80% to 100%. This is because a lower transmittance makes it difficult to achieve sufficient brightness for illumination decoration, and a higher transmittance makes it difficult to obtain an opaque material. Additionally, a lower haze value may make the shape and decoration of components located behind the panel easily recognizable, potentially reducing the effectiveness of the concealment effect.

Furthermore, while panel boards 1110A etc. are listed as milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), other colors are also available: "White Munsell value (N 9.5)", "White Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Deutzia Green Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Natural White Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead White Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster White Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Grayish White Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "White Blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Secs Green Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream Yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", and "Cherry Blossom Pink". It can also be used as a white-based color, such as a Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5).

Furthermore, since the panel 1110A is made of translucent milky white material, if a colored decorative element such as black, red, or blue is placed behind the panel 1110A, it may be visible through the panel 1110A even when the decorative element is not illuminated, depending on its color. This visibility of the decorative element through the panel 1110A could cause the player to notice its presence, potentially reducing the impact (surprise) on the player when the decorative element is illuminated, thus preventing the desired visual effect from being achieved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front left first decorative body 3124, front left second decorative body 3125, front left third decorative body 3126, and front left decorative body base 3127, which constitute the front left upper left logo decorative body 3122 and the front left sub-decorative body 3123 of the front left decorative unit 3120 located behind the panel board 1110A, are formed from a colorless, transparent material. Therefore, the front left upper left logo decorative body 3122 and the front left sub-decorative body 3123 are not visible through the translucent, milky white panel board 1110A. Consequently, when the front left upper left logo decorative body 3122 and the front left sub-decorative body 3123 are not illuminated, they are not visible to the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their presence. Furthermore, by illuminating the logo decoration section 3122 on the upper left of the back front and the sub-decoration section 3123 on the left of the back front, these become visible through the translucent, milky white panel 1110A, surprising the player and allowing them to enjoy the illuminating effect. Additionally, the light from the illuminating decorations visible through the panel 1110A makes the game area 5a appear brighter and more beautiful, strongly attracting the player's attention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game board 5A is provided with a panel decoration substrate 1130 mounted on the outside of a translucent, milky white panel board 1110A. The LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 are illuminated, the panel board 1110A can be illuminated, as shown by the shading in Figure 196. This causes the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), through which the game balls B flow, to self-illuminate, brightening the game area 5a, making the game balls B flowing within the game area 5a more visible, improving the appearance of the game area 5a, and strongly attracting the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the game panel 1100 illuminates itself, the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a become visible as silhouettes, making them easier to see and allowing for easier adjustment of the launch intensity. Additionally, by providing the panel decoration board 1130 on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, players can intuitively understand when receiving advice on "shooting to the right" or "shooting to the left." More specifically, by illuminating the LED 1130a on either the left or right panel decoration board 1130 depending on the game situation, the left or right side of the panel board 1110A can be illuminated, allowing players to intuitively understand that they are receiving advice on "shooting to the left" or "shooting to the right." This enhances the enjoyment of shooting the game balls B and provides a new kind of lighting effect not seen in previous pachinko machines.

To elaborate, in conventional pachinko machines, where the game board uses opaque plywood as the game panel, the game area is decorated by attaching a decorative film with predetermined patterns to the front of the plywood. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, decoration with decorative film does not differentiate it from other game machines, making it difficult to increase its appeal to players. On the other hand, as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, if the panel board 1110 through which the game balls B flow is made transparent, the decoration of the rear unit 3000 and the display images of the display device 1600 located at the rear are easily visible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness. However, the game balls B flowing in front of the transparent panel board 1110 may appear to be floating in mid-air, which may make it difficult for some players to understand the movement of the game balls B.

In contrast, the game board 5A of this embodiment can illuminate the translucent panel board 1110A using multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130. By appropriately combining the light-emitting color and light-emitting pattern of the LEDs 1130a, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied in many ways. This allows players to see a self-illuminating game board 5A, unlike any conventional pachinko machine, and strongly attracts their attention, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players. Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is self-illuminating due to the multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game balls B flowing in front of the panel board 1110A can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

In addition to the effects described above, the game board 5A of this embodiment uses a milky white synthetic resin for the panel board 1110A, and since a lower-grade resin than transparent resin is sufficient, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced compared to the case where transparent resin is used.

In the above embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is shown on the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may also be provided behind the panel board 1110A. This will achieve the same effects as described above. Furthermore, compared to the case where the panel board is transparent, the point-like light from the LEDs 1130a etc. located at the rear can be diffused by the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A. This allows the panel board 1110A to be softly illuminated, suppressing glare and resulting in a game board 5A that is easy on the eyes.

Furthermore, in the game board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown in the illustration, a decorative film (also called a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110A. This suppresses wear on the panel board 1110A due to the flow of game balls B, and also improves the appearance of the game area 5a by preventing a decrease in appearance when the rear decorative elements are not illuminated by the cell's pattern. Additionally, the light from the LED located behind the panel board 1110A can illuminate the cell's pattern together with the panel board 1110A, making the panel board 1110A's decoration appear even more beautiful.

Furthermore, as described above, when cells are provided on the front surface of the panel 1110A, the patterns on the cells can be used as outlines to clearly define the LED illumination (lighting) provided on the rear of the panel 1110A, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the illumination.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A. This allows light from LEDs or other sources located behind the panel board 1110A (cells) to cast shadows of the cells (or the patterns on the cells) onto the panel board 1110A. Therefore, the LED illumination can change the decoration of the panel board 1110A, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment. These shadows projected onto the panel board 1110A could be, for example, words such as "Right-Handed," "Left-Handed," or "Chance," suggesting changes in the game situation and thus entertaining the player.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a fixed decorative element (rear front left decorative unit 3120) located behind the milky white panel 1110A, the invention is not limited to this configuration. A movable decorative element may also be provided behind the panel 1110A, which can move between a retracted position behind the panel 1110A and an exposed position inside the opening 1112 of the panel 1110A in a front view.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a panel board 1110A, etc., that is entirely milky white, including its interior, it is not limited to this. It may also be partially milky white, or transparent with at least one side milky white. Specifically, examples include a panel board molded in two colors using a transparent resin and a milky white resin, a panel board formed by laminating a transparent resin board and a milky white resin board, a panel board with a milky white film (cell) attached to at least one side of a transparent resin board, a panel board with a shrinkage process using UV-curing ink applied to the rear surface of a transparent resin board, a panel board with a sandblasted finish applied to the rear surface of a transparent resin board, and so on.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the panel board 1110A, etc., as being milky white, it is not limited to this, and panel boards of appropriate colors such as red, blue, yellow, etc., may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the front component 1000A as translucent and milky white, it is not limited to this. It may also be a transparent front component 1000, similar to the game board 5 in the first embodiment, or it may be a front component of a different color from the panel board 1110A.

[14-1. Characteristic effects and advantages of the game board of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5A, the various decorative parts (front left logo decorative part 3121, front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and front left sub-decorative part 3123) of the front left decorative unit 3120 of the front display unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are illuminated by a light-emitting means (LEDs mounted on the front left decorative substrate 3128, etc.) In its normal state, when not in operation, the translucent, opaque, white panel board 1110A, located in front of the front left decorative unit 3120, obscures the front left upper logo decoration section 3122 of the front left decorative unit 3120, making it difficult to recognize. This makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front left upper logo decoration section 3122, and the white color also makes the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 appear brighter, thus making the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Furthermore, as the game progresses, the multiple LEDs of the front left decorative unit 3120 appropriately illuminate the respective front left upper logo decorative parts 3122, etc. The light from the illuminated front left upper logo decorative parts 3122, etc. is projected forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, causing the illuminated decorations of the front left upper logo decorative parts 3122, etc. to be projected onto the white panel board 1110A. As a result, the illuminated decorations of the front left upper logo decorative parts 3122, etc. can be shown to the player through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the front left upper logo decorative parts 3122, etc. and preventing a decline in enjoyment. Furthermore, by illuminating the upper left logo decoration section 3122 of the front left decorative unit 3120, the presence of the upper left logo decoration section 3122, which the player could not have foreseen, can be made to notice. This greatly surprises the player, making them strongly believe that a chance has arrived, and also allows the player to see a highly effective illuminating effect, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the translucent opaque panel board 1110A is white in color, the decorative parts (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3127) of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 located at the rear are also white. The illuminated colors of the decorative section 3125e, the second left sub-decorative section 3125f, the third back left logo decorative section 3126d, the third upper left logo decorative section 3126e, the third left sub-decorative section 3126f, and the base upper left logo decorative section 3127d can be displayed to the player through the panel board 1110A in their original colors. This allows the player to see various illuminated effects in different colors, and the diverse illuminated effects can keep the player from getting bored, thus preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5A, the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, which is provided with a game area 5a in which game balls B flow in front, is made of a translucent, opaque milky white material. This makes the inside of the game area 5a appear brighter, making the game balls B flowing within the game area 5a easier to see. In addition, when light from LEDs and display devices 1600 provided in the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, slot machines, and other game machines shines on the game panel 1100, the light diffuses on the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, making the panel plate 1110A appear to be dimly lit and self-illuminating. Furthermore, when the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, which can irradiate light onto the periphery of the panel board 1110A, are illuminated, the light is diffused by the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A. As a result, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated with a soft, indirect light similar to fluorescent lighting, brightening the game area 5a while suppressing glare from the LEDs 1130a, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy on the eyes of the player. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent panels as game panels, this pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a that glows like a fluorescent light, unlike anything seen before. This allows players to be strongly drawn to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a), creating a sense of anticipation and raising expectations for the game. Furthermore, the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a are illuminated by light from the rear panel 1110A, making them easier to see and allowing players to enjoy the movement of the balls, thus preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, by providing a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the milky white panel board 1110A enhances the color development of the patterns on the decorative film, improving the appearance of the game area 5a through the decorative patterns. Additionally, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, the patterns on the decorative film can be illuminated via the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, further improving the appearance of the game area 5a and providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the translucent, opaque panel board 1110A can easily obscure the areas illuminated by LEDs 1130a, etc. However, by devising the pattern so that the areas where the illuminated decoration becomes obscured are partially hidden by the pattern on the decorative film (or by devising the arrangement of LEDs 1130a, etc.), the illuminated decoration can be made clearly visible, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is applied to the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, using a material with excellent abrasion resistance as the decorative film allows the front surface of the panel board 1110A to be protected from the flow of game balls B by the decorative film. This eliminates the need to use a highly abrasion-resistant material for the panel board 1110A, allowing the use of a lower-grade, less expensive material, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, if a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, the shadow of the design on the decorative film is projected onto the panel board 1110A by light radiated from the rear to the front of the decorative film, allowing the design to be shown to the player. This creates a light projection effect where the design or text of the decorative film is projected onto the panel board 1110A from the rear. This effect can make the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in their enjoyment. Alternatively, as part of this light projection effect, the decorative film can project designs or text that encourage actions such as "shooting to the right" or operation of the performance control unit 301 onto the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 from the rear, allowing the player to enjoy actions such as shooting the game balls B and operating the performance control unit 301 in player-participation events, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when decorative films are provided on both the front and rear surfaces of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, shining light onto the side surface of the panel board 1110A using LEDs 1130a, etc., of the panel decoration substrate 1130, as described above, causes the panel board 1110A to self-illuminate, illuminating the decorative film on the front side and allowing the player to enjoy the design on the front decorative film. On the other hand, when light is shone from the rear to the front of the game panel 1100 using LEDs, etc., the shadow of the design on the rear decorative film is projected onto the panel board 1110A, and this shadow overlaps with the design on the front decorative film, causing the design on the front decorative film to appear to change. This allows for a variety of light-emitting effects to be shown to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the rear front left logo decoration section 3122 of the rear front left decoration unit 3120 and the rear front right logo decoration section 3142 of the rear front right decoration unit 3140, which are located behind the translucent, opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, are illuminated in accordance with the progress of the game, the light is transmitted to a certain extent through the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 to the front (towards the player). This allows the panel board 1110A to be partially illuminated in the same manner as the rear front left logo decoration section 3122 and the rear front right logo decoration section 3142 located at the rear, and also makes the presence of the rear front left logo decoration section 3122 and the rear front right logo decoration section 3142 located at the rear to be noticed by the player. Therefore, by making the illuminated decorations of the upper left and upper right logo decorations on the back of the game panel 1100 visible through the panel board 1110A, it is possible to make the player think that something good might happen, thereby increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the rear front upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration section 3142, which are located at the rear of the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, are made of a colorless, transparent material, and because the panel board 1110A is a milky white color, the colors of the rear front upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration section 3142 blend in with the color of the panel board 1110A and become invisible from the front, thus preventing the player from noticing the presence of the rear front upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration section 3142. Furthermore, by illuminating the upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the upper right logo decoration section 3142 on the back front, as described above, the illuminated decorations of the upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the upper right logo decoration section 3142 become visible through the panel board 1110A. This allows players to notice the presence of the upper left logo decoration section 3122 and the upper right logo decoration section 3142, which they had not anticipated, greatly surprising them and making them strongly believe that an opportunity has arrived. It also allows for a more visually impressive illumination effect, entertaining the players and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower display unit 3300 are normally located behind the opaque, milky white panel 1110A, making them invisible from the front. However, as the game progresses, they move to the rear of the opening 1112 in the panel 1110A, becoming visible through the opening 1112. This allows the player to see the movable decorative elements 3301 and 3302. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left and right movable decorative elements suggests an opportunity to the player, strongly suggesting that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" state) may occur, thereby increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, by making the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 capable of emitting light, when the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 are not visible, the emitting light decorations of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 (or the rear front upper left logo decoration part 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration part 3142) can be lit or flashed, allowing the player to notice the presence of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 through the translucent panel board 1110A. At the same time, the player can be made to feel excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 move to a state where they become visible (whether or not the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 appear or not), enabling a movable effect that can entertain the player even more.

Furthermore, since the panel plate 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has a game area 5a at its front, is made of a translucent, opaque material, when a player looks into the game area 5a, their focus is easily drawn to the front of the panel plate 1110A. As a result, simply by looking at the panel plate 1110A, the focus naturally shifts to the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a. In this case, as described above, the panel 1110A appears to be self-illuminating due to light from external sources or from the emitting LED 1130a, etc. Therefore, the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a can be made to appear as silhouettes due to the light from the rear panel 1110A. This makes it easier to see the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in enjoyment. Furthermore, it makes it easier to make subtle adjustments to the force with which the game balls B are driven, thus enhancing the enjoyment of playing the pachinko machine 1 by allowing players to devise ways to drive the game balls B.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 is made of a translucent, opaque, milky-white synthetic resin, a lower-grade synthetic resin can be used compared to when the panel board is transparent, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is made of translucent, opaque milky white material, the colors of the decorative elements on this pachinko machine 1 are made to stand out relatively, allowing the decorative effect of the elements to be strongly exhibited. This provides a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players. In addition, when the LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the decorative elements provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 are illuminated, the light can be transmitted forward while maintaining its original color, allowing players to enjoy a colorful illumination display.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A is translucent, opaque, and milky white, decorative elements (for example, the rear front left decorative unit 3120) provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 can be made invisible from the front (player side). When the decorative elements provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 are illuminated, the light from the decorative elements passes through the translucent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) to the front, allowing the game panel 1100 to be partially illuminated and making the presence of the decorative elements at the rear known to the player. Also, when the decorative elements provided at the rear of the game panel 1100 are moved to a position behind the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel board 1110A, the decorative elements can be made visible from the front through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see a movable effect in which the decorative elements are hidden and reappear. In this way, a variety of lighting and moving effects can be presented to the player, making it less likely for the player to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A allows for the diffusion of light from the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. This enables the game panel 1100 to be softly illuminated, creating a gentle, indirect lighting effect within the game area 5a. Simultaneously, it reduces glare from the LEDs 1130a, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes.

Furthermore, since the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130, for example, if the LEDs 1130a are provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A and each can be illuminated independently, and the right side is illuminated according to the game situation (progress), the right side of the game area 5a will be lit through the panel board 1110A, thereby directing the player's attention to the right side of the game area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the game ball B into the right side of the game area 5a ("shoot to the right"). On the other hand, if the left side is illuminated, the left side of the game area 5a will be lit through the panel board 1110A, thereby directing the player's attention to the left side of the game area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the game ball B into the left side of the game area 5a ("shoot to the left"). In this way, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a at appropriate positions, the illuminated decorations on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) can be intuitively understood as advising players to "shoot left" or "shoot right," allowing players to enjoy the operation of shooting the game balls B, and providing a new kind of illumination effect not found in previous pachinko machines 1, thus entertaining the players.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel board 1110A (panel board 1110) and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is thicker than the panel board 1110A and holds the outer perimeter of the panel board 1110A, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is the same as that of a conventional pachinko machine's game panel, the thickness of the panel board 1110A (panel board 1110), where the game area 5a is provided at the front, can be made thinner than that of a conventional game panel. This reduces the amount of material used for the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel board 1110A), thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is composed of a panel board 1110 or panel board 1110A and a panel holder 1120, the panel board 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detached, making the panel holder 1120 a common, general-purpose part. This allows for mass production of the panel holder 1120, thereby reducing its cost. Additionally, by manufacturing a panel board 1110 or panel board 1110A tailored to each machine model, costs associated with new developments and model changes can be reduced.

[15. Third Embodiment of the Game Board]
Next, the game board 5B of the third embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 197. Figure 197 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of the third embodiment, with the panel and cell separated and viewed from the front. The game board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment, except that a cell 1140 is provided behind the panel 1110. Detailed explanations of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the game board 5B has a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern applied to it, which is detachably provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and the predetermined pattern is applied by printing. Examples of materials for the cell 1140 include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride.

This cell 1140 is sized to cover only a portion of the entire panel board 1110 (in this case, the area from the left side to the bottom of the center component 2500). Although not shown in the illustration, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel board 1110 using screws, with a predetermined amount of play. This simplifies the installation process compared to attaching the cell 1140 to the entire panel board 1110, reduces the amount of cell 1140 used, and thus suppresses the increase in costs for the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided on a portion of the panel board 1110, the number of cells 1140 that can be obtained from the resin sheet can be increased compared to conventional cells that are attached to the panel board, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with some degree of looseness, even if the cell 1140 expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction between the cell 1140 and the panel board 1110 can be absorbed by the looseness. This prevents wrinkles or cracks from forming in the cell 1140 even if it contracts relative to the panel board 1110, thus maintaining the decorative effect of the pattern on the cell 1140.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is attached to the panel board 1110 with screws, the cell 1140 can be easily attached to and detached from the panel board 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cell 1140 with one featuring a different pattern, it is possible to easily accommodate changes in the specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1. This helps to suppress increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and by replacing the cell 1140 with one featuring a more decorative pattern, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is located on the rear side of the transparent panel 1110, the distance from the player to the cell 1140 is greater compared to when it is located on the front of the panel 1110, thereby reducing the feeling of pressure on the player.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the cell 1140 be translucent. Light from the LED located behind the panel board 1110 (cell 1140) can illuminate the pattern on the cell 1140, improving the appearance within the game area 5a. The illumination of the cell 1140 can also strongly attract the player's attention, thereby enhancing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is shown attached to the panel board 1110 using screws. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the cell 1140 may be attached by sandwiching it between the panel board 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 in which the center fitting 2500 of the panel plate 1110 is provided is shown to be positioned off-center to the upper right (eccentric to the upper right) relative to the panel plate 1110. However, the embodiment is not limited to this; it may also be positioned off-center upwards (eccentric upwards) or off-center to the left or right (eccentric to the left or right). By providing the cell 1140 behind the widened portion caused by the off-center positioning (eccentricity) of the opening 1112, the same effects and advantages as described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, the opening 1112 where the center feature 2500 is provided may be off-center or off-edge with respect to the center or outer edge of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or it may be off-center or off-edge with respect to the center or outer edge of the game area 5a. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the game area 5a do not coincide, the center of the opening 1112 off-center with respect to the center of the panel board 1110 may coincide with the center of the game area 5a, or the center of the opening 1112 off-center with respect to the center of the game area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

[15-1. Characteristic effects and advantages of the game board of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the game board 5B, even if the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 expands or contracts due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 is provided in a state that allows it to expand or contract relative to the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the cell 1140 can expand or contract freely, and wrinkles or cracks will not occur in the cell 1140 even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. In this case, the cell 1140 is positioned behind the part of the panel board 1110 opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center feature 2500 is attached is off-center, that is, behind the wider part of the panel board 1110. This makes it easier for the player to see the pattern of the cell 1140 through the transparent panel board 1110, allowing the decorative effect of the cell 1140 to be fully realized. Furthermore, the pattern of the cell 1140 visible through the transparent panel board 1110 improves the appearance of the game area 5a, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in an expandable and retractable state, and are not attached to the game panel (panel plate) as in conventional methods, the effort required for decorating the transparent panel plate 1110 can be simplified, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, in the case of a panel plate 1110 that is machined, the cells 1140 can be provided after machining, so the cells 1140 are not damaged during the machining process of the panel plate 1110. Also, due to differences in materials between the panel plate 1110 and the cells 1140, the machined surface does not become rough, eliminating the need for a finishing process after machining. On the other hand, in the case of a game panel (panel plate) formed with an opening by machining or injection molding, the cells 1140 are not attached, thus eliminating the effort required for attachment. Therefore, the cells 1140 can be provided behind the transparent panel plate 1110 more easily than with conventional technology, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the cell 1140 is provided behind a portion of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the amount of cell 1140 used can be reduced compared to the case where the cell 1140 is provided across the entire surface of the panel board 1110, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 can be attached to and detached from the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications or models of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5B) by attaching or replacing cells 1140 with different patterns to the panel board 1110, thereby suppressing increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the various LEDs in the back-front display unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 illuminate the cell 1140. This illuminates the pattern of the cell 1140 visible through the panel 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100, improving the appearance within the game area 5a. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the game area 5a, while also brightening the game area 5a and making the game balls B circulating within it easier to see.

Furthermore, the various LEDs provided in the rear-front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 can illuminate and decorate the cell 1140 located behind the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. This illumination of the cell 1140 illuminates the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a from behind, making it appear as a silhouette. This makes the game ball B easier to see, allowing players to enjoy its movement and preventing a decline in enjoyment. Additionally, by making the game ball B appear as a silhouette, it becomes easier to make subtle adjustments to the force with which the game ball B is struck, allowing players to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which involves devising ways to strike the game ball B.

Furthermore, since a cell 1140 is provided behind a portion of the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the player looks into the game area 5a, their focus is easily drawn to the pattern on the cell 1140. Therefore, simply by looking at the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the player's focus naturally shifts to the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a. This makes it easier to see the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, since a cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a portion of the transparent panel 1110, the pattern on cell 1140 can conceal the decorative elements of the rear-front display unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 from the player's perspective. Therefore, when the decorative elements behind cell 1140 are not illuminated, the pattern on cell 1140 prevents the player from noticing their presence. Then, when the decorative elements are illuminated as the game progresses, cell 1140 is illuminated by the light from the decorative elements, making the player aware of the previously unforeseen decorative elements. This greatly surprises the player, strongly suggesting that a chance has arrived, and allows for a more effective illumination display, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, as described above, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 of the rear-lower display unit 3300, which is a movable decorative element located at the rear, can be hidden from view by the cell 1140. Therefore, by moving the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 from a state where it is invisible due to the cell 1140 to a state where it becomes visible through the opening 1112 that penetrates the front and back of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, as the game progresses, a movable effect can be shown in which the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 appears as the game progresses. Consequently, the appearance of the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 suggests to the player that a chance is approaching, strongly suggesting that a favorable game state (for example, a "jackpot" game state) may occur, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

[16. Another Embodiment of the Function Display Unit]
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board 5, etc., will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 198 to 203. Figure 198(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a) along the line S-S, (c) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) from the rear. Figure 199 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Figure 198, taken apart and viewed from the front, and Figure 200 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Figure 198, taken apart and viewed from the rear. Figure 201 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of Figure 198 and the player. Figure 202 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. Figure 203 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

The function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, similar to the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, displays the game status (game situation), normal lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery results, second special lottery results), the number of reserved normal lottery results, the number of reserved special lottery results, the number of rounds in the case of a "jackpot," etc., by blinking multiple LEDs 1401 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and then turning each LED on or off in a predetermined combination.

To elaborate, in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, when a game ball B is received into, for example, the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 performs an internal process to draw a special lottery result. The main control board 1310 then transmits a control signal to the function display unit 1400 to display the drawn special lottery result, and the function display unit 1400 displays the drawn special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401.

Furthermore, the control signal for the special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 displays a predetermined animation image on the animation display device 1600 as an indication of the special lottery result. Because the animation image displayed on the animation display device 1600 focuses on entertaining the player, while the special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, the details are difficult to discern. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the drawn special lottery result, but because it uses the illumination of multiple small LEDs 1401, the displayed content is difficult to understand at a glance.

Therefore, it is conceivable to analyze the LED illumination state of the function display unit 1400 by photographing it with a digital camera or a camera attached to a mobile phone, in order to quickly determine the content displayed on the function display unit 1400.

However, if the special lottery result can be easily determined by the illumination of the LED in the function display unit 1400, then if the special lottery result displayed on the function display unit 1400 is a "loser," even if the performance display device 1600 displays a performance image suggesting that special lottery result, knowing the result beforehand will prevent players from enjoying the performance image and may lead them to wish for the performance image to end quickly. This could cause frustration for some players and reduce their enjoyment of the game.

In contrast, the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment allows the player to clearly see the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401, but when photographed with a digital camera or the like, the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401 becomes unclear, making it impossible to discern the displayed content.

Specifically, the function display unit 1400A comprises a function display board 1402 on which multiple LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front; a rear reflector 1403 provided in front of the function display board 1402, which transmits light from each LED 1401 independently forward; a translucent light-transmitting sheet 1404 provided in front of the rear reflector 1403; and a front reflector 1405 provided in front of the translucent sheet 1404, which radiates light from the LEDs 1401 that have passed through the rear reflector 1403 in different directions.

As shown in Figure 199, the functional display board 1402 has multiple LEDs 1401 randomly mounted on it. The rear of the reflector 1403 has multiple through-holes 1403a corresponding to each LED 1401 on the functional display board 1402. These multiple through-holes 1403a are positioned perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1402 (see Figure 198(b), etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has multiple display holes 1405a that penetrate in the front-to-back direction, corresponding to each through-hole 1403a of the rear reflector 1403. The rear ends of each of the multiple display holes 1405a are located directly in front of the corresponding through-hole 1403a of the rear reflector 1403, while their front ends are at varying distances from the vertical line on the front of the functional display board 1402, passing through the center of the rear end. In other words, the axial directions of the multiple display holes 1405a are oriented in varying directions relative to the vertical line on the front of the functional display board 1402.

Furthermore, the front of the reflector 1405 has a distinguishing recess 1405b that extends from the front to the rear, connecting the multiple display holes 1405a. The distinguishing recess 1405b divides the multiple display holes 1405a into two: a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the first special lottery result and a display hole 1405a (LED 1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in Figure 201, the multiple display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 direct the light from the LED 1401 in three directions when viewed by a player seated 50 cm to 70 cm away from the front function display unit 1400A of the pachinko machine 1. These directions include light visible only to the left eye, light visible only to the right eye, and light visible to both the left and right eyes. In other words, the multiple display holes 1405a are divided into three sections: for the left eye, for the right eye, and for both eyes.

According to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, since the player can see the light from all LEDs 1401 by looking with both eyes, when displaying special lottery results, etc., the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen, and it can perform the same functions as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment without any inferiority.

Furthermore, with the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, either the left eye and both eyes, or the right eye and both eyes, will be photographed, making it difficult to photograph the illumination status (illumination state) of all LEDs 1401. In other words, when a photograph is taken with a digital camera or the like, the illumination status of multiple LEDs 1401 can be obscured, making it difficult to discern the display content on the function display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the captured photograph, the display content on the function display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the result of the special lottery, such as "miss," "simple jackpot," "probability change jackpot," "time-saving jackpot," or "second jackpot (ST jackpot)," can be determined. This prevents players from losing enjoyment of the effects that suggest the result of the special lottery or from enjoying the advantageous game state that is currently occurring (for example, a "jackpot" game), thus keeping players entertained and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the function display unit 1400A has a different orientation for the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405, and the display content is made clearly visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the display content of the function display unit 1400A can be made unclear from behind the seated player. Consequently, it is difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reducing the likelihood of other players peeking at the player's screen, and allowing the player to enjoy the game without feeling self-conscious.

Furthermore, as described above, since the display content is positioned to be clearly visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, it becomes more difficult to photograph the display content of the function display unit 1400A with a digital camera or similar device from a position behind the player, thereby reliably achieving the aforementioned effects.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400A, the display hole 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 is oriented differently not only horizontally but also vertically, so that the display content is clearly visible when viewed from the eye level of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it more difficult to photograph the display content of the function display unit 1400A with a digital camera or similar device, as the height must also be adjusted.

Furthermore, by differentiating the orientation of the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 to accommodate left-eye and right-eye displays, it is possible to suppress the large horizontal distance between the multiple LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402, thereby reducing the horizontal width of the function display unit 1400A.

In the above embodiment, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are shown facing in different directions for the left eye, right eye, etc. However, the invention is not limited to this configuration, and a functional display unit 1400B with a configuration like that shown in Figure 202 may also be used.

The function display unit 1400B comprises a function display board 1411 on which multiple left-facing LEDs 1411a and multiple right-facing LEDs 1411b are mounted on the front surface, spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction (the distance between the player's left and right pupils); a rear reflector 1412 provided in front of the function display board 1411, which independently transmits light from the left-facing LEDs 1411a and right-facing LEDs 1411b forward; a light-transmitting sheet 1413 provided in front of the rear reflector 1412; and a front reflector 1414 provided in front of the light-transmitting sheet 1413, which radiates light from the left-facing LEDs 1411a and right-facing LEDs 1411b that have passed through the rear reflector 1412 forward.

The left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411 are spaced 40 mm to 80 mm apart in the left-right direction. The rear of the reflector 1412 is provided with multiple through-holes 1412a corresponding to the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b of the function display board 1411. These multiple through-holes 1412a are positioned perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411. The front of the reflector 1414 is provided with multiple display holes 1414a corresponding to the multiple through-holes 1412a of the rear of the reflector 1412. These multiple display holes 1414a are positioned perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411.

This function display unit 1400B is configured such that, when viewed by a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only to the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only to the right eye. Therefore, by viewing with both eyes, the player can see the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b, thus achieving the same functionality as the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment without any significant difference.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400B, since the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated and spaced apart in the left-right direction, a monocular digital camera or the like can only capture one of them, thus achieving the same effect as the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400B, since the multiple display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411, the display content is not clearly visible from any position other than the front of the functional display unit 1400B, making it difficult to photograph the display content with a digital camera or similar device.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a of the reflector front 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the function display board 1411, and since they all face the same direction, the reflector front 1414 can be easily molded, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, function display units 1400A and 1400B were shown, which have configurations that are difficult to photograph with a monocular digital camera, etc. However, the invention is not limited to these, and a function display unit 1400C with a configuration as shown in Figure 203 may also be used.

This functional display unit 1400C makes the displayed content difficult to discern by emitting invisible light (infrared, ultraviolet, etc.) that can be captured by digital cameras, etc. Specifically, it comprises a functional display board 1421 with multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on its front, a rear reflector 1422 located in front of the functional display board 1421, a flat light guide plate 1423 located in front of the rear reflector 1422, an auxiliary board 1424 on which invisible light LEDs 1424a that emit invisible light are mounted on the side of the light guide plate 1423, and a front reflector 1425 located in front of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear part 1422 of the reflector has multiple through holes 1422a, each corresponding to one of the multiple LEDs 1421a of the functional display board 1421. When light from the invisible light LEDs 1424a of the auxiliary board 1424 is incident on the light guide plate 1423 from the side, at least the portion of the display hole 1425a in the front part 1425 of the reflector illuminates.

The invisible light LED 1424a on the auxiliary substrate 1424 emits either infrared or ultraviolet light as invisible light. This invisible light LED 1424a is illuminated when multiple LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results, etc., and emits invisible light from the light guide plate 1423. The front of the reflector 1425 has multiple display holes 1425a corresponding to the through holes 1422a of the rear of the reflector 1422. The multiple through holes 1422a of the rear of the reflector 1422 and the multiple display holes 1425a of the front of the reflector 1425 are provided perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1421.

According to this function display unit 1400C, even though the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light via the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see this invisible light. Therefore, the light from the LED 1421a located behind the light guide plate 1423 is visible, allowing the display content to be viewed clearly.

On the other hand, if this function display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or similar device, and the camera is capable of capturing invisible light, then the light guide plate, which emits light due to the invisible light, will appear to illuminate all of the display holes 1425a. This obscures the display content, achieving the same effect as described above.

In the above embodiment, a configuration with a reflector rear 1403 (reflector rear 1412) and a light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) was shown. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) may be directly provided on the front surface of the function display board 1402 (function display board 1411).

Furthermore, to make it difficult to photograph the display content of the function display unit with a digital camera, for example, the LEDs may be distributed over a wider area than the shooting range of the digital camera, or the LEDs may be blinked at a speed that makes them appear lit to the player but off when photographed with a digital camera, or multiple dummy LEDs unrelated to the display may be used in combination, appearing off to the player but appearing lit or off when photographed with a digital camera, or high-brightness LEDs may be placed near the function display unit to cause halation when photographed with a digital camera, preventing the display content from being captured.

[16-1. Characteristic effects and benefits of the function display unit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the starting conditions are met by receiving game balls B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a special lottery result (special lottery result) is drawn. Then, in the function display unit 1400A and the function display unit 1400B, a special symbol is displayed by the illumination and flashing of multiple LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the function display board 1411. After that, a special symbol indicating the special lottery result is displayed by a combination of illumination and extinguishing of multiple LEDs 1401 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b. In this configuration, the light from multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b is directed forward independently by multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 and multiple display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414, so that a portion of the light is directed only to one eye of the player, while at least a portion of the remaining light is directed only to the other eye of the player. Therefore, by viewing with both eyes simultaneously, all LEDs 1401 and left LED 1411a are directed forward. Because the light from LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b can be seen, the lighting and extinguishing of multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, allowing the special patterns created by multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b to be clearly visible, and enabling the display functions of multiple LEDs 1401, the left LED 1411a, and the right LED 1411b to be performed without compromise.

Furthermore, when multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b (function display units 1400A and 1400B) are photographed with a digital camera or mobile phone camera, as described above, the light from all LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b is visible to the player's eyes. Therefore, a monocular camera can only photograph one eye, making it difficult to accurately capture the illumination status of all LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b. Consequently, because the illumination status of multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b cannot be accurately captured, it becomes difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not a special symbol indicating an advantageous game state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) is displayed. This allows the player to enjoy the spectacle hinting at the results of the special lottery until the very end, preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400A, some of the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of one of the player's eyes, while the remaining holes are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of the other player's eye, and are also positioned straight in the front-to-back direction. As a result, in addition to the same effects as described above, the tilting of the display holes 1405a makes it difficult for players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to clearly see the light from all the LEDs 1401. This makes it difficult for other players to understand the game situation, reduces the risk of other players peeking at the player's screen, and allows players to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400B, multiple left LEDs 1411a and multiple right LEDs 1411b mounted on the function display board 1411 are spaced a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) apart in the left-right direction, and a reflector front 1414 with multiple display holes 1414a is provided in front of them. This allows for the same effects as described above, and because each display hole 1414a is oriented straight in the front-back direction, the molding process for the multiple display holes 1414a becomes easier, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400C, the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on the function display board 1421 is visible to the player through the transparent light guide plate 1423, allowing the special symbols created by the multiple LEDs 1421a to be clearly displayed to the player. When invisible light is emitted from the invisible light LED 1424a onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side is radiated from the light guide plate 1423 towards the player. However, since the player cannot see the invisible light radiated from the light guide plate 1423, the special symbols created by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1421a to be fully utilized. Furthermore, when the invisible light LED 1424a is illuminated, if a photograph is taken from the front using a digital camera or similar device, depending on the model of the digital camera, the invisible light radiating forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured in the photograph. This causes the light guide plate 1423 to appear brightly illuminated, making it difficult to capture the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a located at the rear. This makes it difficult to distinguish the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1421a, thus reliably realizing the aforementioned effects of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 may be configured to flash multiple LEDs at a speed that allows the player to recognize that a special symbol is lit. This allows the display of the special symbol using multiple LEDs to be clearly visible to the player, even when the main control board 1310 flashes the multiple LEDs of the function display unit 1400 at a predetermined speed, thus fully utilizing the display function of the multiple LEDs. Additionally, when photographing the LEDs flashing at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 with a digital camera, depending on the shutter speed, the LEDs may appear to be off even when they are lit. Therefore, even when photographing multiple LEDs that appear to be in the same state, the LEDs may appear lit or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to distinguish the illumination status of multiple LEDs. This ensures the realization of the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the aforementioned effects. Furthermore, the predetermined blinking speed for the LEDs controlled by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30Hz to 100Hz. If the blinking speed is slower than this, the LEDs may not appear to be lit, and the special pattern may appear to be fluctuating. If the blinking speed is faster than this, the LEDs will appear lit in the photograph.

Furthermore, a high-brightness LED capable of emitting light brighter than the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 may be provided close to the function display unit 1400, etc., and projecting it forward. This allows the high-brightness LED, when illuminated close to the function display unit 1400, to be perceived as dazzling due to its high brightness. However, because the dynamic range of brightness perception for players (humans) is wide, they can still see the light from the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 despite the brightness, thus enabling them to recognize the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400, etc., and allowing the display function of the function display unit 1400, etc., to function without compromise. Additionally, when the function display unit 1400, etc. is photographed with a digital camera while the high-brightness LED is illuminated, the digital camera's dynamic range for brightness is narrower than that of humans. Therefore, the light from the high-brightness LED causes halation, resulting in overexposure around the LED, which can obscure parts of the function display unit 1400, etc. Therefore, the illumination status of multiple LEDs in the function display unit 1400, etc., can be obscured, and a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as described above can be realized.

[17. Second Embodiment of Magnetic Sensor Mounting]
Next, a second embodiment of the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050, which is different from the game board 5 etc. described above, will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 204. Figure 204(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of the mounting of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, (c) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b) in an exploded state, and (d) is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor with a holding member different from that in (c).

A second embodiment of the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050 comprises a retaining member 1071 mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and having a pair of locking portions 1071a consisting of through holes, and a retaining container 1072 that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 and has elastic claws 1072a that lock onto the locking portions 1071a of the retaining member 1071. The retaining member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The retaining container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to be seen from the outside. Furthermore, the retaining member 1071 and the retaining container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material.

Furthermore, the retaining container 1072 has a hole on the side opposite to the elastic claw 1072a. Through this hole in the retaining container 1072, the wires from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed within the retaining container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

With this holding member 1071 and holding container 1072, since the holding member 1071 and holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, when a magnet is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1071 etc. can be prevented from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet, thereby preventing a reduction in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect magnetism acting on the game area 5a, enabling early detection of fraudulent activities using magnets. Furthermore, by notifying the magnetic sensor 1050 of the detection of suspicious magnetism, fraudulent activities can be deterred, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the retaining container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the retaining member 1071. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the retaining container 1072 without the need for metal screws made of magnetic material. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 and helps to suppress increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since a locking portion 1071a is provided that penetrates the holding member 1071, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 to this locking portion 1071a, the structure of the holding member 1071 to which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be simplified, thereby reducing the cost associated with the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, since the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are locked to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in Figure 204(d), multiple sets of locking portions 1071a are provided on the holding member 1071 in advance, and the position where the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached can be arbitrarily set by locking the elastic claws 1072a to any locking portion 1071a. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a different position from the locking portion 1071a to which the elastic claws 1072a are locked. This allows for changes in the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 or the addition of more magnetic sensors 1050 without replacing the holding member 1071 with a new one, thereby reducing costs and increasing the versatility of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and secured to the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily standardized, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing multiple locking portions 1071a on the holding member 1071 in advance, and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the appropriate locking portions 1071a, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be positioned at any location or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position and addition of magnetic sensors 1050 can be easily performed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, a biasing portion, such as a projection, that presses against the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided inside the holding container 1072. This suppresses fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby reducing the risk of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or experiencing poor contact due to such vibrations, and ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

In the above embodiment, the locking portion 1071a of the retaining member 1071 is shown as a through-hole, but it is not limited to this. Any shape that allows the elastic claw 1072a to lock into is acceptable, and it may be a groove, slit, etc.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows a holding container 1072 that accommodates the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, it is not limited to this configuration, and a holding container that accommodates the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the magnetic sensor 1050 housed in a holding container 1072 having elastic claws 1072a and attached to a holding member 1071, the invention is not limited to this configuration. Alternatively, elastic claws may be formed on the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 to engage with the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, while the above describes the mounting of the magnetic sensor 1050, this mounting structure may also be used to mount a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be housed in a retaining container with elastic claws, and the vibration sensor may be mounted by engaging these elastic claws with the locking portion of the retaining member. Although the vibration sensor is not affected by surrounding magnetic materials, using a mounting structure similar to that of the magnetic sensor 1050 is effective in changing or moving the mounting location and reducing mounting costs.

[17-1. Characteristic effects and benefits related to the mounting configuration of magnetic sensors]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 by housing the magnetic sensor 1050 in the housing portion 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 of the holding member 1060 and engaging the elastic claw 1062 with the magnetic sensor 1050. Alternatively, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed on the game board 5 via the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 by housing the magnetic sensor 1050 in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a and engaging the elastic claw 1072a with the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071. In this case, since the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the game area 5a, the holding member 1060 etc. will not attract the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, and a reduction in the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055, and by notifying the magnetic sensor 1050 of the detection of suspicious magnetism, fraudulent activity can be discouraged, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, the non-magnetic holding members 1060, 1071, and 1072 prevent the attraction of magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, thereby preventing a reduction in the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This allows for effective detection of the magnetism acting on the game area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, reducing the number of magnetic sensors 1050 and thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the housing section 1061 and 1072a of the retaining container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and removed from the locking portion 1071a of the retaining member 1060 and retaining member 1071. Therefore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without the need for metal screws made of magnetic material. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 and helps to suppress increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing multiple locking portions 1071a on the holding member 1071 in advance, and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the appropriate locking portions 1071a, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be positioned at any location or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position and addition of magnetic sensors 1050 can be easily performed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the projection 1063 on the holding member 1060 biases the magnetic sensor 1050 into the housing portion 1061, the biasing force by the projection 1063 suppresses fine vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050. This reduces the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or experiencing poor contact due to such vibrations, thereby ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is visibly held by the holding member 1060, holding member 1071, and holding container 1072. Since the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be shown to the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, since the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor body 1051, which is a different color (for example, black), can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be strongly made aware that the magnetic sensor 1050 is real and not a dummy. The visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can deter those attempting to commit fraud using magnets 1055, thereby increasing the deterrent against fraudulent activity and reducing the burden on the pachinko hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, even though the sensor body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, ordinary players do not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 and therefore do not notice it. In contrast, those attempting to commit fraud will focus their attention on the game area 5a, and the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 makes the magnetic sensor 1050 easily noticeable and visible. Therefore, by noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to deter attempts to commit fraud using magnets, thus providing a highly deterrent pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, since the surface of the sensor substrate 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor substrate 1052 can be made less conspicuous, and it can also be mistaken for a decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor substrate 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and the appearance of the game area 5a can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be viewed from the outside, it is possible to check for damage to the sensor body 1051 from the outside. This simplifies the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, since the magnetic sensor 1050 is mounted on the game board 5 via a non-magnetic holding member 1060, a holding member 1071, and a holding container 1072, if magnetic materials such as screws are used to attach the holding members 1060 and 1071 to the game board 5, it becomes possible to position the parts of the holding members 1060 and 1071 that are attached to the game board 5 at a location away from the magnetic sensor 1050, or at a location outside the magnetic detection range of the game area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect the magnetic field acting on the game area 5a, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against fraudulent activities using magnets 1055.

[18. Another Embodiment Regarding the Attachment of Decorative Objects such as Seals]
Next, another embodiment relating to the attachment of decorative elements such as seals, which differs from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 205 to 208, etc. In this chapter, a member to which a predetermined decoration is applied will be referred to as a decorative element, a member to which a decorative element is attached on one side will be referred to as a first member, and a member attached to the other side of the first member will be referred to as a second member. The decorative element, the first member, and the second member may be arranged in a front-to-back arrangement, a top-to-bottom arrangement, or a left-to-right arrangement.

Figure 205(a) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example where the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element is also used as a positioning hole for the second member; (b) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example where a closed space is formed behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element by the second member; (c) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating the state in (b) where decorative elements of different thicknesses are attached; and (d) is a cross-sectional diagram illustrating an example where the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative element is also used as a mounting hole for the decorative element. Figure 206(a) is a front view diagram showing the first member with the decorative element attached; (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a); and (c) is a front view diagram showing the first member with a different decorative element attached than in (a).

Figure 207(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative element and the first member; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative element and the first member; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative element and the first member; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative element with a different shape from (c) and the first member. Figure 208(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative element and the movable first member from the front; (b) is a cross-sectional view obtained by cutting along the tartare line in (a); (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative element and the first member in (a) and (c); (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative element of a different form from (a) and the movable first member from the front; and (e) is a cross-sectional view obtained by cutting along the chichre line in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(a) comprises a decorative body 1801, which is a sheet-like sticker with predetermined decorations or characters printed on it; a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached; and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 comprises a flat plate portion 1821a, a mounting recess 1821b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a boss portion 1821c protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1821a opposite to the mounting recess 1821b, a separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the flat plate portion 1821a, and a rib 1821e protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 comprises a base portion 1841a on one side, with the boss portion 1821c and the tip of the rib 1821e of the first member 1821 in contact with it, and a positioning projection 1841b protruding from one side of the base portion 1841a and inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821. The insertion of the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 positions the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other.

The separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative member 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1821b when assembled, and closed on the other side by the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841, creating a closed space inside. The separation hole 1821d is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative member 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 onto the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from one side to the other. This allows the edge of the decorative body 1801 to peel off to one side, and the worker can then easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b by pulling the peeled-off portion, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, by separating the first member 1821 and the second member 1841, passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, and pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side with its tip, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b. This makes the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models much easier.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative element 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, the separation hole 1821d can be concealed from one side. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1821d, and makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, thus making it harder for them to plot fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1821d.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841, which is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side. Since there is no through-hole that runs throughout the entire machine, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a wire-like fraudulent tool, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1841 through the hole, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 and into the separation hole 1821d from one side, the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the other side. Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decorative body 1801 when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), while the second member 1841 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Furthermore, examples of decorative elements 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), Potting Seals, Aluminum Seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(b) comprises a decorative body 1801, which is a sheet-like sticker with predetermined decorations or characters printed on it; a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached; and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the location of the mounting recess 1822b, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative member 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b when assembled, while the other side is open within a closed space surrounded by multiple ribs 1822d and one side surface of the second member 1842, thus forming a closed space overall. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b, where it is hidden by the decorative member 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from one side to the other. This allows the edge of the decorative body 1801 to peel off to one side, and the worker can then easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b by pulling the peeled-off portion, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b by pressing the decorative body 1801 from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member. This makes the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models much easier.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative element 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be concealed from one side. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1822c, and makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, thus making it harder for them to plot fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member 1842, attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side. Since there is no through-hole that extends throughout the entire machine, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a wire-like fraudulent tool, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decorative body 1801 and into the separation hole 1822c from one side, the second member 1842 prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the other side. Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decorative body 1801 when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), while the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120).

Furthermore, examples of decorative elements 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), Potting Seals, Aluminum Seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(c) comprises a decorative body 1802 made of a seal with a predetermined decoration and a certain thickness (for example, 0.4 mm to 5 mm), a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached on one side, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a configuration not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the location of the mounting recess 1822b, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed to a depth shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative member 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b when assembled, while the other side is open within a closed space surrounded by multiple ribs 1822d and one side surface of the second member 1842, thus forming a closed space overall. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative member 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from one side to the other. This allows the edge of the decorative body 1802 to peel off to one side, and the worker can then easily remove the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b by pulling the peeled-off portion, allowing the decorative body 1802 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the decorative body 1802 can be pressed from the other side with the tip of the rod-shaped member. This allows the decorative body 1802 to be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b, thus simplifying the replacement of the decorative body 1802 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative element 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be concealed from one side. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1822c, and makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, thus making it harder for them to plot fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member 1842, attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side. Since there is no through-hole that extends throughout the entire machine, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a wire-like fraudulent tool, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decorative body 1802 and into the separation hole 1822c from one side, the second member 1842 prevents further insertion (intrusion) to the other side. Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decorative body 1802 when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), while the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

Furthermore, examples of decorative elements 1802 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc. Examples of decorative elements 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum forming, compressed air forming, high-frequency molding, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 205(d) comprises a decorative body 1803 that is thick (for example, 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid, with a predetermined decoration; a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached; and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative element 1803 has a mounting pin 1803a that protrudes to the other side. By press-fitting this mounting pin 1803a into the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 (described later), the decorative element 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, a mounting recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a where the decorative body 1803 abuts, a separation hole 1822c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1822a at the location of the mounting recess 1822b and into which the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted, and a plurality of ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The mounting recess 1821b is recessed to a depth shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the plurality of ribs 1822d are provided so as to surround the separation hole 1822c.

The separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by a mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803 when assembled, while the other side is open within a closed space surrounded by multiple ribs 1822d and one side surface of the second member 1842, thus forming a closed space overall. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b, where it is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod-shaped member can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to the one side. This separates the other side of the decorative body 1803 from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, allowing the decorative body 1803 to be easily removed from the first member 1822 and reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of this member can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side. This allows the decorative body 1803 to be easily removed from the first member 1822, thus simplifying the replacement of the decorative body 1803 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by press-fitting the mounting pin 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be concealed from one side. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1822c, makes it difficult for players to notice its presence, and thus makes it difficult for them to plot fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1822c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member 1842, attached to the other side of the first member 1822, closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side. Since there is no through-hole that extends throughout the entire machine, unlike conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent a wire-like fraudulent tool, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fitted into the separation hole 1822c from one side, and the decorative body 1803 has rigidity, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to penetrate the decorative body 1803 and insert it into the separation hole 1822c from one side, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a will prevent penetration. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 will prevent further insertion (intrusion) to the other side. Therefore, the intrusion of an unauthorized tool into the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the unauthorized tool penetrating the decorative body 1803 leaves a mark on it, it can deter fraudulent activity, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), while the second member 1842 may be a game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

Furthermore, the decorative element 1803 may be one that features relief-like decoration and is formed by injection molding. The mounting pin 1803a for the decorative element 1803 may be integrally molded with the decorative element 1803, insert-molded, or separately assembled.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 206(a) and (b) comprises a decorative body 1804, which is a sheet-like sticker with predetermined decorations or characters printed on it, and a first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above.

The decorative element 1804 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern or text printed on its surface, and is translucent. The decorative element 1804 has a roughly square shape, and chamfered portions 1804a of a predetermined radius are provided at three corners. Because the overall shape of the decorative element 1804 makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shapes of the other corners to allow for orientation identification. Note that here, the chamfered portion 1804a is shown as an R-chamfer, but a C-chamfer may also be used.

Furthermore, the decorative element 1804 has an adhesive surface 1804b on its back surface, which is provided along the outer edge with a substantially constant width (a width within the range of 3 mm to 6 mm) (the area shown in shaded areas in Figure 206(a)). The width of the adhesive surface 1804b is set to an appropriate width according to the size of the decorative element 1804. Limiting the adhesive surface 1804b to only the outer edge in this way is often used, especially with transparent stickers (decorative elements 1804), when it is desired to show the LED lighting or design surface behind them.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a, a mounting recess 1823b that is slightly larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1804 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) on one side of the flat plate portion 1823a to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the location of the mounting recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is made of transparent material.

The separation hole 1823c is located close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b, in a position where the adhesive surface 1804b does not come into contact with the decorative element 1804 when it is attached (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b). This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, thus avoiding a reduction in the adhesive strength of the decorative element 1804.

The separation hole 1823c is a round hole. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the separation hole 1823c is within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c is smaller than this, the diameter of the separation rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing it from adequately pressing the decorative body 1804. If the separation hole 1823c is larger than this, bending may occur at the location of the separation hole 1823c in the decorative body 1804, potentially detracting from the appearance of the decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, the first member 1823 is formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, and is provided with chamfered portions 1823d that are larger (in radius) than the chamfered portions 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner is designated as a mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e. As a result, the mounting recess 1823b has a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two edges that constitute the corners of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portions 1823d are not provided are set as reference surfaces for attaching the decorative body 1804. This ensures clearance in at least two directions for attaching the decorative body 1804, making the attachment process easier.

Furthermore, the first component 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f in the mounting recess 1823b that indicates the location of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed relative to the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By viewing this identification portion 1823f, the worker can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative element 1804, preventing errors in the placement of the contact surface and facilitating the attachment process.

Furthermore, in the first member 1823, it is desirable that the distance from the outer edge of the flat plate portion 1823a to the outer edge of the mounting recess 1823b be 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1823b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative element 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of the decorative element 1804 without the chamfered portion 1804a is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the mounting recess 1823b, indicated by the identification portion 1823f. Then, the adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1823b and attached. Note that if the corner of the decorative element 1804 with the chamfered portion 1804a is attempted to contact the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1823e differs from that of the chamfered portion 1804a. This allows the user to realize that the decorative element 1804 is being attached in the wrong orientation, enabling them to attach the decorative element 1804 in the correct orientation.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from one side to the other with its tip, the edge of the decorative body 1804 can be peeled off to one side. The peeled-off portion can then be easily removed from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823) by the worker, achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is positioned so that it does not come into contact with the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 due to the adhesive surface 1804b coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, and thus make it difficult for the decorative body 1804 to come off.

Furthermore, since a mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative element 1804 is attached, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative element 1804 in a direction other than the correct orientation, the difference in shape between the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative element 1804 and the mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1804. This allows the decorative element 1804 to be attached to the first member 1823 in the correct orientation, and prevents the decorative element 1804 from being shipped in an incorrectly attached state.

Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided with an identification section 1823f indicating the contact surface, the worker can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface that serves as the reference point for attaching the decorative body 1804, thereby preventing errors in the positioning of the contact surface and making the attachment work easier.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 may be a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative materials 1804 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), Potting Seals, Aluminum Seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 206(c) is a modification of the embodiments in Figures 206(a) and (b), in which the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative element 1804 is provided not only along the outer edge but also on one diagonal. The other configurations are the same as those in the embodiments of Figures 206(a) and (b), and their explanation is omitted.

According to this embodiment, in addition to achieving the same effects as described above, since adhesive surfaces 1804b are also provided diagonally on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, the adhesive strength can be increased, making the decorative body 1804 less likely to come off. Furthermore, even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a different rate than the first member 1823 due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, the central part is attached by the diagonal adhesive surfaces 1804b, which suppresses swelling or warping of the decorative body 1804, thus preventing the decorative body 1804 from becoming unsightly.

Furthermore, because the adhesive surface 1804b is provided diagonally, the amount of adhesive surface can be reduced compared to the case where the entire surface of the decorative body 1804 is covered with adhesive, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Also, compared to the case where the entire surface is covered with adhesive, the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 is lower, making it easier to remove the decorative body 1804 using the separation hole 1823c.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 207(a) comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded portion) made of a sheet-like sticker with predetermined decorations or characters printed on it, and a first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1824 (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface on the first member 1824 are omitted.

The decorative element 1805 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern or text printed on its surface. This decorative element 1805 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and one corner (the lower left corner in the figure) is provided with a diagonally cut C-shaped chamfered portion 1805a. Because the orientation of the decorative element 1805 is difficult to determine, the shape of one corner is made different from the shapes of the other corners to allow for orientation identification. The adhesive surface of the decorative element 1805 may be provided along the outer edge at a constant width, as shown in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided across the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and a mounting recess 1824b that is slightly larger than the decorative body 1805 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) on one side of the flat plate portion 1824a, to which the decorative body 1805 is attached.

Furthermore, the first member 1824 has a C-shaped mis-adhesion prevention portion 1824c protruding into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner of the mounting recess 1824b (the lower left corner in the figure). This gives the mounting recess 1824b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending end portion of the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1824c are set as reference surfaces for attaching the decorative body 1805. This ensures clearance for attaching the decorative body 1805 in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the diagonal edge of the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1824c, making the attachment process easier.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1824b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative element 1805 to the mounting recess 1824b, first, the slanted edge of the chamfered portion 1805a of the decorative element 1805 and the short edge connected to the chamfered portion 1805a are brought into contact with the contact surface of the mounting recess 1824b (the slanted edge portion of the mis-attachment prevention portion 1824c and the short edge portion connected to the mis-attachment prevention portion 1824c). Then, the adhesive side on the back is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1824b and attached.

Furthermore, if the corner of the decorative element 1805, which does not have a chamfered portion 1805a, is attempted to come into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1824c), the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c differs from that of the chamfered portion 1805a. This allows the user to realize that the decorative element 1805 has been attached in the wrong direction, enabling them to attach the decorative element 1805 in the correct orientation. Additionally, if the decorative element 1805 is attached to the mounting recess 1824b in the wrong orientation, the right-angle corner of the decorative element 1805 will protrude from the mounting recess 1824b at the location of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c, allowing the user to realize that the decorative element 1805 has been attached incorrectly.

According to this embodiment, since the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative element 1805 is attached is provided with a mis-attachment prevention portion 1824c, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative element 1805 in a direction other than the correct orientation, the shape of the corner portion of the decorative element 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided will differ from the shape of the mis-attachment prevention portion 1824c. This will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1805, allowing the decorative element 1805 to be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation, and preventing the decorative element 1805 from being shipped in an incorrectly attached state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 may be a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative materials 1805 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), Potting Seals, Aluminum Seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 207(b) comprises a circular decorative element 1806 (shaded portion) made of a sheet-like sticker with predetermined decorations or characters printed on it, and a first member 1825 to which the decorative element 1806 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the separation hole and the identification portion indicating the contact surface on the first member 1825 are omitted.

The decorative element 1806 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern or text printed on its surface. This decorative element 1806 has a circular shape, and a notch 1806a is provided, cut out in an arc shape from the outside (bottom in the figure). Because the orientation of this decorative element 1806 is difficult to determine, the notch 1806a is provided to allow for orientation identification. The adhesive surface of the decorative element 1806 may be provided along the outer edge at a constant width, as shown in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided across the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and a mounting recess 1825b that is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) on one side of the flat plate portion 1825a, to which the decorative body 1806 is attached.

Furthermore, the first member 1825 has an anti-misapplication portion 1825c that protrudes in an arc shape at the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure) with a radius matching the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806. This gives the mounting recess 1825b a shape similar to the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped end of the anti-misapplication portion 1825c is set as a reference surface for attaching the decorative body 1806. This ensures at least two clearance directions for attaching the decorative body 1806: one along the arc of the anti-misapplication portion 1825c and another away from the anti-misapplication portion 1825c (the up and down direction in the figure), making the attachment process easier.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1825b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative element 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first, the notched portion 1806a of the decorative element 1806 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b. Then, the adhesive side on the back of the decorative element is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b and attached.

Furthermore, if the decorative element 1806 is attached to a surface other than the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1825c) of the mounting recess 1825b, the decorative element 1806 will protrude from the mounting recess 1825b at the misapplication prevention portion 1825c, allowing the worker to notice the misapplication of the decorative element 1806.

According to this embodiment, since the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative element 1806 is attached is provided with a mis-attachment prevention portion 1825c, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative element 1806 in a direction other than the correct orientation, the decorative element 1806 will protrude at the portion of the mis-attachment prevention portion 1825c. This allows the user to notice the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1806, enabling them to attach the decorative element 1806 to the first member 1825 in the correct orientation, and preventing the decorative element 1806 from being shipped in an incorrectly attached state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 may be a front component 1000 or a front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, second attacker unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative materials 1806 include PET seals, Flexmetal seals (trade name), Metatic seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 207(c) and (d) comprises a pair of decorative elements, left 1807L and right 1807R (shaded portion), which are symmetrically arranged and made of sheet-like stickers with predetermined decorations or characters printed on them, and a pair of first members, left 1826L and right 1826R, to which the left 1807L and right 1807R are attached. The configuration of the other side of the left 1807L and right 1807R (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the separation holes and identification parts indicating the contact surface of the left 1807L and right 1807R are omitted.

The decorative elements 1807L (left) and 1807R (right) are stickers with predetermined patterns or characters printed on their surfaces. These decorative elements are symmetrical to each other. They are formed in a vertically elongated, approximately semicircular shape, with their close edges extending linearly vertically, and the upper and lower ends of these edges connected by arc-shaped edges that bulge outwards from each other.

In Figure 207(c), the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R have different radii for the R-chamfers at both ends in the longitudinal direction, i.e., the upper and lower ends of the semicircle. On the other hand, in Figure 207(d), the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R have an R-chamfer on the upper end (one end in the longitudinal direction) of the semicircle, and a straight cutout on the lower end (the other end in the longitudinal direction). Since both the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to distinguish between left and right when reversed, the shapes of the upper and lower ends are different to allow identification of whether they are for left or right use.

The adhesive surfaces of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R may be provided along the outer edge at a constant width, as shown in Figure 206(a), etc., or they may be provided over the entire surface.

The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R each have a flat plate portion 1826a, a mounting recess 1826b that is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, and to which the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached, and a mis-attachment prevention portion 1826c at the lower end of the mounting recess 1826b.

In Figure 207(c), the mis-adhesion prevention portions 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are provided in the shape of a chamfer with a radius larger than the radius of the R-chamfer on the lower end side of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. On the other hand, in Figure 207(d), the mis-adhesion prevention portions 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are provided in the shape of a horizontally extending, linear notch. In both the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the mounting recess 1826b has the end edge of the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1826c set as a reference surface for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R.

As a result, in the embodiment shown in Figure 207(c), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: an arc direction in which they roll along the arc of the mis-attachment prevention part 1826c, and a direction away from the mis-attachment prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in Figure 207(d), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: a direction along the straight line of the mis-attachment prevention part 1826c (left and right in the figure), and a direction away from the mis-attachment prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). Thus, in both embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making the attachment process easier.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b in the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1826b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the decorative element left 1807L and the decorative element right 1807R should be positioned so that the end with the larger radius of the R-chamfer or the linearly notched end of the long side is facing downwards. They should then be brought into contact with the contact surface (the edge of the mis-attachment prevention portion 1826c) of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b, and the adhesive side on the back should be gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b to attach them.

Furthermore, if the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R are inverted vertically and then reversed horizontally before being attached, the shape of the contact surface (mis-attachment prevention part 1826c) differs from the shape of the lower end. This allows the user to realize that the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R have been attached in the wrong orientation, enabling them to attach the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R in the correct orientation.

According to this embodiment, since the mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R to which the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R are attached are provided with an incorrect attachment prevention portion 1826c, if an attempt is made to attach the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R in a orientation other than the correct one, the difference in shape between the longitudinal ends of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R and the shape of the incorrect attachment prevention portion 1826c will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R. This allows the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R to be attached to the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in the correct orientation, and prevents the product from being shipped with the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R attached in the wrong orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R may be made into members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative elements 1807L (left) and 1807R (right) include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 208(a) to (c) comprises a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern or characters are printed, and a movable first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface on the first member 1827 is omitted.

The decorative element 1808 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern or text printed on its surface. This decorative element 1808 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with the two upper corners beveled with a rounded edge (R-chamfer) and the two lower corners beveled with a rounded edge (C-chamfer). The difference in the chamfer shapes of the upper and lower corners allows for the identification of the orientation of the decorative element 1808. The adhesive surface of the decorative element 1808 may be provided along the outer edge at a constant width, as shown in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided across the entire surface.

The first member 1827 comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular, flat plate portion 1827a, a mounting recess 1827b extending from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a, slightly larger than the decorative body 1808 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1808 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the location of the mounting recess 1827b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1827d provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b.

Furthermore, the first member 1827 has a pair of cylindrical shaft portions 1827e that protrude in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both the left and right sides of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in Figure 208(b), the shaft portions 1827e are located on the side opposite to the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. The first member 1827 is rotatably supported by a member (not shown) that allows the pair of shaft portions 1827e to rotate. In other words, the first member 1827 is movable and can rotate (rotate) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1827e. The shaft portions 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, insert-molded, or separately assembled.

The separation holes 1827c are circular holes located near the upper corners within the mounting recess 1827b. Because the two separation holes 1827c are positioned far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1827e can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated (went around), thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 and allowing the first member 1827 to move smoothly. Furthermore, because the two separation holes 1827c are located near the upper left and right corners, the forces acting on the left and right sides of the shaft portion 1827e can be made equal, balancing the first member 1827 and reducing uneven wear.

In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the separation hole 1827c is set to be within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing it from adequately pressing the decorative body 1808. If the separation hole 1827c is larger than this, bending may occur at the location of the separation hole 1827c in the decorative body 1808, potentially detracting from its appearance.

The mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b with a shape corresponding to the C-chamfer at the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the slanted edge of the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as reference surfaces for attaching the decorative body 1808.

The mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d protrudes from the mounting recess 1827b, increasing the weight of the first member 1827. However, because the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d is positioned close to the axis of the shaft portion 1827e, the effect of the increased rotational moment due to the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d can be minimized, thereby suppressing the increase in load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827. Furthermore, because the mis-adhesion prevention portions 1827d are provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1827b, the first member 1827 can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft portion 1827e, and allowing the first member 1827 to rotate (rotate) in a stable state.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1827b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative element 1808 to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827, first, the chamfered corner of the decorative element 1808 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1827d) of the mounting recess 1827b, and the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1827b from that portion to attach it. If an attempt is made to attach the decorative element 1808 upside down, the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1827d will differ from the shape of the R-chamfer of the corner of the decorative element 1808, so the user will realize that the decorative element 1808 is being attached in the wrong direction and will be able to attach the decorative element 1808 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decorative element 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b in the wrong orientation, the corner of the decorative element 1808 will protrude from the mounting recess 1827b at the location of the mis-attachment prevention section 1827d, allowing the worker to notice the incorrect attachment of the decorative element 1808.

Furthermore, the first member 1827 has a recessed separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction, located near the edge within the mounting recess 1827b (see Figure 208(b)). When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the decorative body 1808 straddles this separation groove 1827f, forming a space between the decorative body 1808 and the separation groove 1827f. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, pressing the portion of the decorative body 1808 at the separation groove 1827f from the outside causes a portion of the decorative body 1808 to sink into the separation groove 1827f, and the edge of the decorative body 1808 to lift away from the mounting recess 1827b. By pulling the lifted portion, the decorative body 1808 can be removed from the mounting recess 1827b.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827 and pressing the decorative body 1808 from one side to the other with its tip, the edge of the decorative body 1808 can be peeled off to one side. The peeled portion can then be easily removed by the worker from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative element 1808 is attached is provided with a mis-attachment prevention section 1827d, if someone attempts to attach the decorative element 1808 in a direction other than the correct orientation, the difference in shape between the corner of the decorative element 1808 and the mis-attachment prevention section 1827d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1808. This allows the decorative element 1808 to be attached to the first member 1827 in the correct orientation, and prevents the decorative element 1808 from being shipped in an incorrectly attached state.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1827c is located far from the axis of rotation, and the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1827d is located close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting on the first member 1827 when it is rotated can be reduced. This reduces the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827, allowing it to move (rotate) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the first member 1827 is provided with two separation holes 1827c and two mis-adhesion prevention sections 1827d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1827e can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft sections 1827e and allowing the first member 1827 to rotate (rotate) in a stable state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be used as a door member for a variable prize entry point, such as a large prize entry point or a prize entry point for special items, or it may be used as a movable member for display purposes provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative materials 1808 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (trade name), Metatic Seals (trade name), Potting Seals, Aluminum Seals, etc.

By the way, if the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the main prize opening 2005 and the prize opening 2006, the game ball B will come into contact with the decorative body 1808. Therefore, it is desirable to have the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1827 in the following relationship.

To elaborate, as shown in Figure 208(c), if the distance from the front surface of the flat plate portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, and the distance from the upper end of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to the upper end of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then it is desirable to set the distance d within the range [0 < d < r] and the distance c within the range [0 ≤ c < (2rd^2 - d^2)^0.5]. Note that the terms in the brackets above represent equations.

This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, thereby preventing the decorative body 1808 from detaching due to contact with the game ball B and suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance d be within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If the distance d is smaller than this, depending on the tolerance of the decorative element 1808, the decorative element 1808 may protrude forward beyond the flat plate portion 1827a, potentially allowing the game ball B to come into contact with its upper edge. If the distance d is larger than this, the shadow cast by the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b is more likely to fall on the decorative element 1808, potentially reducing the decorative effect of the decorative element 1808.

Furthermore, the contact surface in the mounting recess 1827b may be set to the upper edge. This ensures that the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is in contact with the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, preventing the game ball B from contacting the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, thus achieving the same effect as described above.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 208(d) and (e) comprises a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern or characters are printed, and a movable first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached. The configuration of the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may be any of the configurations described above. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the description of the identification portion indicating the contact surface on the first member 1828 is omitted.

The decorative element 1809 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern or text printed on its surface. This decorative element 1809 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with rounded corners at the two upper corners and square-shaped notches 1809a at the two lower corners. These notches 1809a are shaped to correspond to the mis-application prevention portion 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners allows for the identification of the orientation of the decorative element 1809. The adhesive surface of the decorative element 1809 may be provided along the outer edge at a constant width, as shown in Figure 206(a), or it may be provided across the entire surface.

The first member 1828 comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular, flat plate portion 1828a, a mounting recess 1828b extending from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a, slightly larger than the decorative body 1809 and deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1809 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c penetrating the flat plate portion 1828a at the location of the mounting recess 1828b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1828d provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b.

Furthermore, the first member 1828 comprises semi-cylindrical shaft support portions 1828e bulging outwards to one side with their axis oriented in the left-right direction at the left and right corners of the lower side of the flat plate portion 1827a, shaft holes 1828f provided on the left and right outer end faces of the shaft support portions 1828e, and a cylindrical shaft portion 1828g inserted into the shaft holes 1828f. The first member 1828 is rotatably supported by a member (not shown) for the pair of shaft portions 1828g. In other words, the first member 1828 is movable and rotatable (whips) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during the molding of the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., or they may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e extends to the mounting recess 1828b, and a portion of the shaft support portion 1828e constitutes the mis-attachment prevention portion 1828d. This shaft support portion 1828e (mis-attachment prevention portion 1828d) creates a shape where the lower left and right corners of the mounting recess 1828b appear as if they have been cut out in a square shape.

The separation holes 1828c are circular holes located near the upper corners within the mounting recess 1828b. Because the two separation holes 1828c are positioned far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at positions far from the axis of the shaft portion 1828g can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1828 is rotated (went around), thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 and allowing it to move smoothly. Furthermore, because the two separation holes 1828c are located near the upper left and right corners, the forces acting on the left and right sides of the shaft portion 1828g can be made equal, balancing the first member 1828 and reducing uneven wear.

In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the separation hole 1828c is set to be within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c is smaller than this, the diameter of the rod-shaped member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c becomes smaller, making it more prone to bending and potentially preventing it from adequately pressing the decorative body 1809. If the separation hole 1828c is larger than this, bending may occur at the location of the separation hole 1828c in the decorative body 1809, potentially detracting from its appearance.

The mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d is formed by a shaft support portion 1828e, protruding in a rectangular shape at the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b, and its shape corresponds to the notch portion 1809a at the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d is set as a reference surface for attaching the decorative body 1809.

The mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d protrudes from the mounting recess 1828b, increasing the weight of the first member 1828. However, because the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d is positioned close to the axis of the shaft portion 1828g, the effect of the increased rotational moment due to the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d can be minimized, thereby suppressing the increase in the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828. Furthermore, because the mis-adhesion prevention portions 1828d are provided at the two lower corners of the mounting recess 1828b, the first member 1828 can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft portion 1828g, and allowing the first member 1828 to rotate (rotate) in a stable state.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the distance from the outer circumference of the flat plate portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1828b is more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative element 1809 to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828, first, the notched portion 1809a of the decorative element 1809 is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1828d) of the mounting recess 1828b, and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1828b from that portion and attached. Note that if one attempts to attach the decorative element 1809 upside down, the shape of the misapplication prevention portion 1828d differs from the shape of the R-chamfer at the corner of the decorative element 1809, which will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1809, allowing them to attach the decorative element 1809 in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if the decorative element 1809 is attached to the mounting recess 1828b in the wrong orientation, the corner of the decorative element 1809 will protrude from the mounting recess 1828b at the location of the mis-attachment prevention section 1828d, allowing the worker to notice the incorrect attachment of the decorative element 1809.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828 and pressing the decorative body 1809 from one side to the other with its tip, the edge of the decorative body 1809 can be peeled off to one side. The peeled portion can then be easily removed by the worker from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative element 1809 is attached is provided with a mis-attachment prevention portion 1828d, if someone attempts to attach the decorative element 1809 in a direction other than the correct orientation, the difference in shape between the corner of the decorative element 1809 and the mis-attachment prevention portion 1828d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative element 1809. This allows the decorative element 1809 to be attached to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation, and prevents the decorative element 1809 from being shipped in an incorrectly attached state.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1828c is located far from the axis of rotation, and the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1828d is located close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting on the first member 1828 when it is rotated can be reduced. This reduces the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828, allowing it to move (rotate) smoothly.

Furthermore, since the first member 1828 is provided with two separation holes 1828c and two mis-adhesion prevention sections 1828d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1828g can be balanced, reducing uneven wear of the shaft sections 1828g, and allowing the first member 1828 to rotate (rotate) in a stable state.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be used as a door member for a variable prize entry point, such as a large prize entry point or a prize entry point for special items, or it may be used as a movable member for display purposes provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative materials 1809 include PET seals, Flexmetal seals (trade name), Metatic seals (trade name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

[18-1. Characteristic effects of decorative elements]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be described. Here, unless otherwise specified, the decorative body will be described as the decorative body 1804, the base member as the first member 1823, the flat plate portion as the flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess as the mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole as the separation hole 1823c, the mis-adhesion prevention portion as the mis-adhesion prevention portion 1823e, and the positioning portion as the contact surface of the first member 1823 (mis-adhesion prevention portion 1823e). Configurations (members) that correspond to other embodiments will have similar effects and will therefore not be described here.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first member 1823 has a portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, which serves as the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be positioned relative to the first member 1823 by bringing two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 into contact with the portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b that serves as the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823 and attaching it. This makes the positioning work of the decorative body 1804 easier and allows the decorative body 1804 to be accurately attached to the correct position. Therefore, the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823 reduces the likelihood of the decorative body 1804 being attached to the first member 1823 at an angle or misalignment. This prevents the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 from looking unattractive, thus ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is reliably achieved, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of the first component 1823 allows the decorative element 1804 to be accurately attached to the correct position. This makes it easier to attach the decorative element 1804 in the correct position, reducing the likelihood of failure in attaching the decorative element 1804 and thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative element 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to align the decorative element 1804 incorrectly. This allows the decorative element 1804 to be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 in the correct orientation, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative element 1804 is reliably achieved.

Furthermore, since the first member 1823 is provided with a mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e protruding from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b, if the decorative body 1804 is attached in the wrong orientation, the decorative body 1804 will curl up at the portion of the mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e. This allows the user to recognize that the decorative body 1804 has been attached in the wrong orientation, prompting them to reattach the decorative body 1804 in the correct orientation and ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is reliably achieved.

Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is provided with a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a, inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the back surface of the decorative body 1804 with its tip will cause a portion of the decorative body 1804 to lift to the front side against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b, allowing the decorative body 1804 to be easily removed by pulling on that portion of the decorative body 1804 and detaching it from the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a decorative body 1804, which has a predetermined decoration, is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. This improves the appearance of the first member 1823, and the first member 1823 can support the decorative body 1804. Also, because the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b, the surrounding portion of the mounting recess 1823b on the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 surrounds the decorative body 1804. This edging enhances the decorative body 1804, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 and improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative element 1804, which is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a, is provided only on specific areas consisting of a band-shaped portion at the periphery of the decorative element 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band-shaped portion, and is not provided on the entire back surface. Therefore, the adhesive strength is weaker compared to conventional designs. However, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the back surface of the decorative element 1804 with its tip, the decorative element 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 with relatively weak force, resisting the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b. Moreover, even if the decorative element 1804 itself is weak, it can be removed without tearing midway, improving the workability of the decorative element 1804 removal process.

Furthermore, for the reasons described above, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with its tip, thus allowing the decorative body 1804 to be easily reattached. In addition, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with its tip, thus making the replacement of the decorative body 1804 when changing models easier. Furthermore, as described above, since the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, it becomes easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is positioned so as not to come into contact with the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire surface of the adhesive surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, while providing the adhesive surface 1804b only to a portion (specific area) of the decorative body 1804 would reduce the adhesive strength compared to conventional methods, the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a. This prevents the adhesive strength from being excessively reduced by the separation hole 1823c overlapping the adhesive surface 1804b, thus maintaining sufficient adhesive strength and allowing the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in a good condition.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided on the peripheral band-shaped portion and the diagonally crossing band-shaped portion (diagonal portion), the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a by the band-shaped portion of the adhesive surface 1804b, thereby preventing the peripheral edge of the decorative body 1804 from lifting away from the flat plate portion 1823a, and making it difficult to peel off the decorative body 1804 starting from the peripheral edge. In addition, the diagonally crossing band-shaped portion of the adhesive surface 1804b allows the portion of the decorative body 1804 closer to the center to be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, so even if the difference in shrinkage between the first member 1823 and the decorative body 1804 becomes large due to changes in the environment such as temperature and humidity, it is possible to reduce swelling and wrinkling of the decorative body 1804, and prevent deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 1804. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorative element 1804 can be reliably achieved, and a larger decorative element 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of the decorative body 1804, if the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823 are made translucent, and a light source such as an LED that shines light towards the decorative body 1804 is provided on the back side of the first member 1823, the band-shaped adhesive surface 1804b will be located in a place that does not obstruct the light from the light source. This reduces the deterioration of the appearance of the decorative body 1804's luminous decoration due to light diffusion and attenuation by the adhesive surface 1804b. Therefore, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high performance and display effects, allowing the decorative body 1804 to be illuminated in a good state and the light source to be clearly visible through the decorative body 1804 and the first member 1823.

Furthermore, since a separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole 1823c, and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, thus making it difficult for them to plan fraudulent activities using the separation hole 1823c.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a location close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed, the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804. Therefore, the edge side of the decorative body 1804 is more likely to lift away from the portion in contact with the rod-shaped member, making it easier to remove the attached decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, since the separation hole 1823c is provided in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when the decorative body 1804 is pressed from the back side of the first member 1823 through the separation hole 1823c with the rod-shaped member, as described above, the edge side of the decorative body 1804 from the portion in contact with the rod-shaped member will lift up from the flat plate portion 1823a. Therefore, by grasping and pulling the lifted portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed by peeling it off the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, since the separation holes 1823c are provided to a size that allows a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to touch them, in addition to the same effects as described above, an upper limit is set on the size of the separation holes 1823c. This prevents the size of the adhesive surface on the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation holes 1823c, and thus maintains the desired adhesive strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, as described above, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative element 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a, by using the boundary between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide to attach the decorative element 1804, it becomes easier to attach the decorative element 1804 in the correct position, thereby reducing the chances of failure in attaching the decorative element 1804 and suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative element 1804 is attached to the recessed mounting recess 1823b in the flat plate portion, even if one attempts to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative element 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b in order to remove the decorative element 1804 from the front side, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the peripheral wall of the recessed mounting recess 1823b. However, since the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is provided in the portion covered by the decorative element 1804, the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative element 1804 is attached. Therefore, as described above, by inserting a rod-shaped member from the back side into the separation hole 1823c and pressing the decorative element 1804 toward the front side, the decorative element 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, in conventional pachinko machines, the hole for removing the sticker penetrates all the way to the back of the pachinko machine (game board). This makes it possible to insert a wire-like tool, such as piano wire, through the hole to reach the pathways for the game balls B or signal lines, thus posing a risk of fraudulent activity. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 205) on the back of the first member 1823 that can close the separation hole 1823c. This ensures that, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the second member closes the back of the separation hole 1823c from the outside. As a result, unlike conventional pachinko machines, the hole does not penetrate all the way to the other side of the game board. This prevents wire-like fraudulent tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, thus preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 205) is provided on the back side of the first member 1823 to close the separation hole 1823c, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decorative body 1804 from the front side and into the separation hole 1823c, the tip of the illegal tool will come into contact with the second member, blocking its insertion (intrusion) into the outside (inside the game board 5). Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the game board 5 from the front side through the separation hole 1823c can be prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool will leave a mark on the decorative body 1804 when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activity.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the first member (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) and the second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second component 1841, second component 1842, etc.) that form the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game balls B in the game board 5 flow, and the flat plate portion of the first member (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 18 Since decorative bodies (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) that have predetermined decorations are attached to the attachment parts (spec seal attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) of the first member (21a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.), the appearance of the first member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. Furthermore, since the attachment point to which the decorative element is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion, when the decorative element is attached to the attachment point, the surrounding portion of the flat plate portion of the first member surrounds the decorative element. This edging enhances the decorative element, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative element and improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the attachment points (spec seal attachment point 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) to which the decorative elements (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative element 1801, decorative element 1802, decorative element 1803, etc.) are attached are recessed from the flat plate portion (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.), the boundary between the flat plate portion and the attachment point can be used as a guide to attach the decorative elements, making it easier to attach the decorative elements in the correct position. This reduces the failure of decorative element attachment and suppresses the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first component (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) is recessed into the contact portion (spec seal attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting) Since decorative elements (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative element 1801, decorative element 1802, decorative element 1803, etc.) are attached to recesses (1822b, etc.), even if one attempts to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative element and the attachment point to remove the decorative element from one side, the insertion of the tool is prevented by the wall portion of the periphery of the recessed attachment point. In contrast, since the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) of the first member are provided in the area where one side is closed by the decorative element, separation holes are provided in the attachment point to which the decorative element is attached. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative element to one side, the attachment to the attachment point can be easily released, and the decorative element can be easily removed from the recessed attachment point. Therefore, if the first component fails to properly attach to the flat plate portion during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, the attachment can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first component and pressing the decorative element from the other side with its tip. This allows the decorative element to be easily removed from the flat plate portion of the first component and reattached. Furthermore, with the first and second components separated, the attachment can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first component and pressing the decorative element from the other side with its tip. This allows the decorative element to be easily removed from the flat plate portion, simplifying the replacement of decorative elements during model changes. Moreover, as described above, with the first and second components separated, the decorative element can be easily removed from the flat plate portion using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since separation holes (separation holes 1023, separation holes 1821d, separation holes 1822c, separation holes 2531b, separation holes 2810d, etc.) are provided in the flat plate portions (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first members (front component 1000, front component 2531, etc.), decorative elements (spare) are provided in the flat plate portions. By attaching the lock seal 1020, the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, the gate seal 2811, decorative elements 1801, 1802, 1803, etc., the separation hole can be made less visible or hidden from one side, thereby suppressing the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation hole, and making it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, thus making it difficult for them to plan fraudulent activities through the separation hole.

Furthermore, in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative elements (spec seal 1020, decorative element 1801, decorative element 1802, decorative element 1803, etc.) are attached to the first member (front component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) to which the extension parts (insertion pin 1022, boss part 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) surround the separation holes (separation holes 1023, separation holes 1821d, separation holes 1822c, etc.) from the other side of the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, etc.) of the second member (game panel 1100, second member 184) 1. The second member (1842, etc.) extends to the other side of the first member, and the second member is attached to the other side of the first member. Because the other side of the separation hole is enclosed by the extension and one side of the second member, a closed space is formed, preventing unauthorized tools from being inserted into the separation hole from the outside of the extension or the other side of the second member. Furthermore, unlike conventional pachinko machines, there is no through-hole that penetrates to the other side, thus preventing linear unauthorized tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, and thus preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the second component (game panel 1100, second component 1841, second component 1842, etc.) creates a closed space on the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.), even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) from one side and into the separation hole, the tip of the illegal tool will be inserted into a closed space that is isolated from the outside, and the extension portion (insertion) of the first component (previous component 1000, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) will not be affected. The through-pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc., and the second member can block insertion (intrusion) into the passage area (game area 5a, etc.) and the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entry of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole, thus preventing fraudulent activity through the separation hole and passage. Furthermore, since the illegal tool will leave a mark on the decorative element when it penetrates it, it can deter fraudulent activity, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities.

Furthermore, by inserting the positioning projection 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other. This simplifies the assembly process and reduces the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1. Additionally, by inserting the positioning projection 1841b into the separation hole 1821d and positioning the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning projection 1841b. Therefore, the separation hole 1821d itself can be made into the aforementioned closed space, providing a pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) with predetermined decorations is attached to the front part (spec seal attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) of the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of the center mechanism 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) which is provided on the front side of the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) that has a passage section through which the game balls B flow (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, etc.), so the appearance of the passage member can be improved by the decoration of the decorative body. Furthermore, because the part to which the decorative element is attached is recessed to the rearward side than the depth of the decorative element in the front-to-back direction, when the decorative element is attached to the part to which it is attached, the portion of the front member surrounding the part to which it is attached protrudes forward of the front of the decorative element. This protruding portion of the front member frames the decorative element, making it stand out and enhancing its decorative effect, thereby improving the overall appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative parts to which the decorative elements (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached (spec seal attachment area 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) are recessed towards the rear, attaching the decorative elements to the front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center component 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) can be used as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative elements in the correct position. This reduces the likelihood of failure in attaching the decorative elements and suppresses the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorative parts (spec sticker attachment area 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) of the front components (front component 1000, front component 2531 of the center component 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate component 2800, etc.) are recessed towards the rear. Therefore, when decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached to the decorative parts, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorative part is in a recessed position. As a result, even when trying to remove a decorative body attached to the decorative part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, making removal time-consuming. In contrast, since the decorative portion is provided with separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.), the attachment to the decorative portion can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative portion forward, allowing the decorative portion to be easily removed from the decorative portion. Therefore, if the decorative portion is not properly attached to the decorative portion of the front member during manufacturing, the attachment can be easily released by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative portion from the rear with its tip, allowing the decorative portion to be easily removed from the decorative portion and reattached.

Furthermore, by separating the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of the center component 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), and passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and pressing the decorative body (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from the rear with its tip, the attachment to the decorated part (spec seal attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) can be easily released, allowing the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated part, and simplifying the replacement of decorative bodies when changing models. Furthermore, as described above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decorative element can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole. This makes it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment area 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), by attaching decorative elements (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) to the decorated parts, the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from the front. This suppresses the deterioration of appearance caused by the separation holes, makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation holes, and makes it difficult for them to plan fraudulent activities through the separation holes.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) attached to the rear of the front members (front component 1000, front member 2531 of the center component 2500, gate body 2810 of the gate member 2800, etc.) to which decorative elements (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached, close the separation holes (separation holes 1023, separation holes 2531b, separation holes 2810d, etc.) from the rear. Because there are no holes that penetrate to the rear like in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent wire-like fraudulent tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through these holes, thus preventing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), even if an illegal tool is inserted into the separation hole from the front, penetrating the decorative elements (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.), the passage members prevent further insertion (intrusion) to the rear. Therefore, the intrusion of an illegal tool into the passage section (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole (gate 2003) of the gate sensor 2801, etc.) from the front through the separation hole is prevented, thus preventing fraudulent activity. Additionally, since the illegal tool leaving a trace on the decorative elements deters fraudulent activity, a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be provided.

[19. Various control processes of the main control board]
Next, the various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 210 to 215. Figure 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Figure 211 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on process in Figure 210, Figure 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, Figure 213 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, Figure 214 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and Figure 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, the various random numbers used in game control will be explained, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the setting value confirmation display process, and the error display process.

[19-1. Various Random Numbers]
Various random numbers are provided for game control, including special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a minor jackpot game state, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of these special random numbers, random numbers for reach determination used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (missed reach) when a jackpot game state is not generated, random numbers for variation display patterns used to determine the variation display pattern of special symbols that are varied and displayed on the first and second special symbol indicators of the function display unit 1400, symbol random numbers used to determine the jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols (determination of the type of win) that are derived and displayed on the first and second special symbol indicators of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot symbols used to determine the initial value of these symbol random numbers. In addition to these random numbers, there are also random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the second start-up door 2411 that can guide the game ball B into the second start-up opening 2004, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the second start-up door 2411, random numbers for determining the initial value of the random numbers for determining whether or not to open and close the second start-up door 2411, and random numbers for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbols that are displayed on the normal symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400.

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other types of random numbers are updated by software.

[19-2. The behavior of a counter with an initial value update]
For example, special random numbers are directly updated by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first uses a value of 1 within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value, and then rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs this high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number used for determining whether a symbol wins is normal is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum value to the maximum value. This range from the minimum to the maximum value is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process (described later) occurs. This counter counts up from the initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal towards the maximum value, and then from the minimum value towards the initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal. Once the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum to the maximum value of the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal, the initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal is updated. This method of updating a counter is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal can be obtained by performing an initial value lottery process that draws a value of 1 from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins is normal.

In this embodiment, if the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) of the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or if the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of various information stored in the main control MPU 1310a's built-in RAM, which is treated as numerical values during the main control side power-on processing described later, does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (power-off), then, when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol win determination is set by the main control MPU 1310a retrieving an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol win determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and then deriving this derived fixed value. In other words, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol win determination is always overwritten and updated by the execution of the initial value determination processing, which derives the same fixed value derived based on the ID code. Thus, the value set as the initial random number for determining the winning combination is derived using an ID code. This prevents analysis through a two-stage security measure: firstly, the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a stores the ID code in a non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, preventing the ID code from being overwritten even with external devices; and secondly, the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire RAM area of the main control unit is cleared except for a specific area, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, we will explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using this extracted ID code as the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins. For example, even if someone trying to illegally obtain game balls dispensed as prize balls somehow obtains and disassembles the game board 5, illegally obtains the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and is able to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins matches the normal symbol win determination value, that ID code will be completely different from the ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other game boards 5' because it has a unique code attached to identify the individual. In other words, in other game boards 5', the timing when the value of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol wins matches the normal symbol win determination value will also be completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless for other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1'. Therefore, even if a momentary power outage is generated at predetermined intervals determined by the disassembly and analysis, and game balls are passed through gate 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to create a state where the second start gate door 2411 can be opened and closed to guide game balls B into the second start gate 2004.

[19-3. Processing when the main control side power is turned on]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address by default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address to which the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use are pushed onto the stack for temporary storage, or the address to which the return address of the main routine is pushed onto the stack for temporary storage when a subroutine finishes and the main routine returns. The stack pointer advances each time an item is pushed onto the stack.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 210 and 211. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permissions (step S10). This setting of RAM access permissions allows updates to be performed on the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). This power outage clearing process involves a wait timer process to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been received from the power outage monitoring circuit. The voltage does not rise immediately from power-on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power interruption (a phenomenon where power supply is temporarily suspended), the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is received from the power outage monitoring circuit. Similarly, from power-on until the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is received from the power outage monitoring circuit when the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process to wait after power-on until the voltage rises above the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error release switch), and here it operates as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM. In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HIGH, while determining that the RAM clear switch has been operated if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW. Note that the period from the start of this routine (main control side power-on processing) to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. Therefore, in practice, the person pressing the RAM clear switch's press button will do so while simultaneously powering on the pachinko machine 1.

In the determination in step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S14, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where it can perform a RAM clear process (step S38) to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined time from the time the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG mentioned above is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, including game information related to the game such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter). It is set to a value of 1 when various information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when various information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. In order to execute the RAM clear process (step S38) which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), the "predetermined initialization process execution conditions" must be met, which are that the RAM clear switch is operated and the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON when the power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a makes the determination based on a detection signal from the main frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is made when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) and turned ON, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. Furthermore, since the period from the start of this routine, the main control side power-on processing, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, in practice, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the determination in step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame release switch, and also determines that the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination in step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame release switch, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to allow the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a predetermined area (a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area, described later) of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to be changed or to display a confirmation. It is set to a value of 1 when changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation is permitted, and to a value of 0 when changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation is not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time processing (step S22). During this wait time processing, it waits until the system that controls the drawing on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, a waiting time (boot timer) of 2.5 seconds (s) is set until booting. At the time the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time processing, the peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, at the time the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time processing, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, and therefore the dispensing control board 633 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary interruption, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. In the determination in step S24, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. A detailed explanation of why the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time processing in step S22 will be given later.

In step S24, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no power outage warning signal input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 1 (step S25). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met, based on the determination that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 1.

In step S25, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not value 1, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0 (step S26). The main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, and therefore, although the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, it determines to erase various information in the same way as if the predetermined setting value change permission condition were met.

In the determination in step S26, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not valued at 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure) described later (step S30). In step S30, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to value 1 when the main control side power failure processing is completed normally, and to value 0 when the main control side power failure processing is not completed normally. Furthermore, a detailed explanation of the checksum calculation in step S29 and the determination in step S30, which occur when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection during the inspection process of the main control board 1310, will be provided later.

In the determination in step S30, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination in step S32, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not valued as 1 (is valued as 0), that is, that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it performs an error display process (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop maintains the state after the error display process has finished, making it impossible to proceed with the game, so the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned back on. In this error display process, a detailed explanation will be given later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or if it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is cut off, it displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Furthermore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the main frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again by operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, thereby restarting the main control side power-on processing routine. In the determination of step S14 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and in the determination of step S16A described above, sets the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to 1. In the determination of step S18 described above, it determines that the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, and also determines that the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and in the determination of step S20A described above, sets the setting key ON flag C To set the value of S-FLG to 1, in the determination in step S25 described above, it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 1. Following the setting change process in step S37 (described later), in the process of step S38 (described later), the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as "the first RAM error clearing method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error clearing method, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and while the setting key cylinder remains in its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, thereby restarting the main control side power-on processing routine. In the determination in step S14 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the press operation part of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the value of 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. In step S18 described above, the detection signal from the main frame open switch determines that the main frame 4 is not open to the outer frame 2, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON by the setting key ON signal, and sets the value of 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20B described above. To set it to 0, in the determination in step S26 described above, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are not met, but it is determined that various information should be erased in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met. Therefore, in the processing of step S38 described later, the RAM error is cleared by clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby allowing the game to proceed (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error clearing method").

Thus, in this embodiment, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (is value 0), that is, that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, it displays an error in step S33 to indicate that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM) and that the contents are unreliable, it can do so using two methods: a first RAM error clearing method and a second RAM error clearing method. Therefore, if there is no need to change the setting value at all, the RAM error can be cleared by using the second RAM error clearing method via the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1, that is, that the main control side power outage processing has been completed successfully, it sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the power restoration state (step S34). This setting is done by reading the power restoration information from the ROM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control's built-in ROM) and setting this power restoration information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, "power restoration" includes not only the state of power being restored after being cut off, but also the state of power being restored after a power outage or momentary interruption, and the state in which the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored after being exposed to high-frequency waves from an unauthorized means (for example, a high-frequency output device hidden in the sleeve of an unauthorized person) on the main control board 1310.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc., are changed during subsequent processing. Therefore, if the main control power failure processing (described later) is not completed successfully and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, except for a specific area, will be cleared, as described later.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 1 (step S27). Having determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is valued at 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is valued at 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

In step S27, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined conditions for displaying the set value are met, based on the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG being valued at 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG being valued at 1. If it does so, it performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28). This setting value confirmation display process, which will be explained in detail later, displays the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values within a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM on the setting display unit 1310g.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S25, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1, that is, when it determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition has been met, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process will be explained in detail later, but it is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has a function that combines three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error release switch), and here it operates as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values. Each time the RAM clear switch's press operation is performed, a signal (a setting value selection switching signal) is input to indicate this, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display unit 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is switched from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the processing of step S37, or in the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 0, that is, when the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are not met, but the MPU determines that various information should be erased in the same way as when the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, it clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a does this by writing the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, in addition to when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not value 0 (value 1), that is, when the MPU determines that various information should be erased, when the setting change process is completed, it is always cleared the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). Here, the "specific area" consists of a dedicated area for setting values where the setting values are stored, and a dedicated area for counting out balls where the count result (total number) of the game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, which are located in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5, is stored. The dedicated area for setting values stores the setting values that are changed in the setting change process described later, and the dedicated area for counting out balls stores the count result (total number) of the game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, which are counted in the ball counting process described later.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as its initial value and set it. Also, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been pressed indicates that a RAM clear is necessary to erase various information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in its non-volatile RAM. Based on this retrieved ID code, it performs an initial value derivation process to always derive the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol win, and sets this fixed value as the random number for determining the initial value of the normal symbol win determination, as described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter is set to its initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a proceeds with the game based on the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area within a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following steps S36, S28, or S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and startup setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value for the main control built-in WDT, which monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, the timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control built-in WDT is started, and timing begins until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is started, timing by the main control built-in WDT begins, and if the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control's built-in WDT starts and timing begins, setting the timer clear setting in the WDT clear register before the timing reaches the time set by the timer setting clears the timing by the main control's built-in WDT, and timing starts again. By repeatedly performing this process of clearing the timing by the main control's built-in WDT before the time set by the timer setting is reached and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is functioning correctly.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting determines the interrupt period when the main control-side timer interrupt processing, described later, occurs. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial serial communication setup (step S44). Here, it sets the communication speed and parity settings in the transmit serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channel and transmit channel) for the dispensing control board 633, and the serial input/output ports (receive channel and transmit channel) for the peripheral control board 1510, as well as setting the initialization of the transmit circuit and enabling transmission in the transmit serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs the test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, the test signal output port (not shown), used for outputting various inspection information at the gaming machine testing facility, is initialized (set to OFF data output) upon power-on.

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs the activation settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, it sets up the main control MPU 1310a to latch and acquire a special random number, which is used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, from among the various random numbers related to the game, in order to update it by hardware. It also sets the activation of the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit in the hardware random number setting register. When the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit is activated by these settings, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value of 1 within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without repetition based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the circuit. The MPU 1310a then acquires the random number (random value) extracted by the circuit upon receiving this latch signal from its built-in hardware random number latch register. The MPU 1310a then sets this acquired random value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a sets the scheduled commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34, the MPU creates a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, all categorized as power-on, to indicate that the power has been turned on (restored), and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In some cases, the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM may also contain various commands corresponding to various information read from the game backup information during the work area setting of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34. In such cases, after the transmission of the various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are transmitted. These commands are sent during the main control timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed explanation of how the command to be sent when the power is turned on is reserved in step S50 will be provided later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt enable settings (step S52). This setting causes the main control timer interrupt processing, described later, to be repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, i.e., every 4ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary interruption, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a from the power outage monitoring circuit. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In step S54, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no power outage warning signal input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers used for reach determination, the random numbers used for the variable display pattern, the random numbers used for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbols, and the random numbers used for determining the initial value of the minor jackpot symbols, as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers unrelated to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) using software. Note that the random numbers used for normal symbol win determination, the random numbers used for determining the initial value of normal symbol win determination, and the random numbers used for normal symbol variable display patterns, as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54. The main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been received. If no power outage warning signal is received, the non-winning/losing random number update process is performed in step S56, and steps S54 to S56 are repeated. This process from steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main control side main process."

On the other hand, in the determination in step S54, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that a power outage warning signal has been received, it sets the interrupt disable setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later from occurring, preventing writing to the main control's built-in RAM and protecting against overwriting of various information, including the game information and other information mentioned above.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a begins outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the one performed in step S12, where the power outage clear signal was initiated, is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals output to, for example, the various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the prize entry port solenoid 2612, the V distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access prohibition setting (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control's built-in RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control's built-in WDT, which was activated in step S41. This clears the timing performed by the main control's built-in WDT, preventing it from restarting timing. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. Afterward, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control power-on processing again. The processing from steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "main control power-off processing."

As described above, if the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, a forced reset will occur via its built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination in step S54 and cannot perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, it will reset without performing the main control side power-off processing and will then perform the main control side power-on processing again. In other words, because the main control power-off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) from the main control power-off processing based on the moment immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control power-off processing was executed during the previous power outage will not match the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S29 when the system restarts after a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. This will inevitably result in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control's built-in RAM, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) resets when there is a power outage or momentary power interruption, and then performs the power-on processing on the main control side upon restoration of power.

Furthermore, in step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to determine if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to determine if the main control's power-off process was completed successfully. In this way, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked twice to determine whether or not it was stored through fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in the determination in step S25, if the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not valued as 0 (value is 1), that is, if setting value changes are permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed, and in the process in step S38, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In the determination in step S26, if the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not valued as 0 (value is 1), that is, if it is determined that various information should be erased, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. Thus, when the press operation unit is operated during power restoration (more precisely, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the press operation unit of the RAM clear switch), and when a setting change is performed that allows the setting value to be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM. This is because, when the RAM clear switch's press operation is performed, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a favorable state for the player (for example, in a state where a probability variation (jackpot) win is occurring) when the amusement hall closes for business, it is necessary to erase (clear) the aforementioned game backup information before the next business day begins. Therefore, an employee of the amusement hall or other staff member needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM clear switch's press operation. Furthermore, when a setting value is to be changed, the setting change process must be performed. Even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained, the game backup information, including various information such as gameplay data obtained based on the setting value before the change process, must be erased (cleared) from the main control's built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that allows for checking the current setting value in addition to changing it. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the pachinko parlor, are permitted to possess it, and its possession is limited to two or three individuals. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even without the setting key possessed by a limited number of specific individuals, staff members of the pachinko parlor can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control's built-in RAM by pressing the RAM clear switch while powering on the pachinko machine 1.

Here, we will explain the point that the determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal is present in step S24 is performed following the wait time processing in step S22. First, we will explain the problems that arise when the determination of whether or not a power outage warning signal is present in step S24 is not performed; that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined after the wait time processing in step S22 and the subsequent processing proceeds.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is configured so that when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) from the time the power outage or momentary power interruption occurs. In other words, even when the power supply from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power interruption or power outage, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power outage processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms from the time the power supply from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off while a player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is running.

However, in an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time processing in step S22 upon power restoration, the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). If a momentary power outage or blackout occurs just before this waiting time is reached, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within approximately 7ms, the interrupt initial setup is performed in step S42, followed by the interrupt enable setting in step S52. This triggers the main control timer interrupt processing described later, updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM. In this case, the main control power-on processing cannot be completed. Therefore, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control power-on processing starts again upon power restoration.

Consequently, when power is restored, the main control power-on process begins, and without any momentary power interruption or blackout, the wait time processing in step S22 is completed. Then, in step S30, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM in step S29 is compared with the value stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power interruption or blackout occurred. Since the checksum values will not match, step S38 will clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area. In other words, when power is restored, even without an explicit indication from an employee of the gaming hall that the RAM clear switch is operated, the aforementioned game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared).

Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, a process to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input is provided as step S24. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated. This prevents the game from progressing. Although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time processing in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a, as described above. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process called step S24 is provided to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has been input (that is, when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process in step S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, preventing the game from progressing and preventing the updating of various information, including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter), so that the checksum calculation result does not change. As a result, when the main control board 1310a restarts, it will determine that the checksum calculation result in step S29 and the value of the checksum calculated and stored in step S64 match, so the game information immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout stored in the main control's built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, when power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information from being reset immediately before a momentary power outage or blackout occurred.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input (i.e., if it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 will not be cut off after waiting in the wait time processing in step S22), even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control board 1310a is running the game, power will be supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, and the game information and other information (for example, main prize ball count information output determination) based on the progress of the game will be output. The main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a can complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of the backup processing in steps S58 to S68 (including information indicating the value of the counter) and an infinite loop, for storing various information. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a restarts, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S29 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup processing (i.e., the value stored in step S64). As a result, the game information stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the power outage or interruption occurs is not initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started up with the game information restored to what it was immediately before the power outage or interruption occurred.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, allowing the main control side power outage processing to start again without updating the contents of the main control's built-in RAM at all. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that no power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period during momentary power outage or blackout" of approximately 7 ms by hardware, as before. In other words, in this embodiment, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs during the main control power-on processing when power is restored, and the power from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) from the time of the blackout or momentary power outage. Therefore, if the main control power-off processing cannot be completed within the approximately 7 ms "momentary power outage or power supply period" provided by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 hardware, then in step S24, immediately after the wait time processing in step S22, it is determined whether or not a blackout warning signal has been input. If a blackout warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination in step S24, and as long as the blackout warning signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated, preventing the game from progressing.

This system employs a mechanism that prevents the game from progressing by using such software, thereby preventing the system from proceeding to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are performed in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). This prevents the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter)) from being updated. In this way, when a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and the power supply from the gaming hall's island equipment is cut off, the system is configured in two parts: one part handled by software to ensure that the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the main prize ball count output determination counter)) remain completely unchanged, and another part handled by hardware to ensure that the main control's power outage processing is reliably completed and the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the main prize ball count output determination counter)) remain completely unchanged. By dividing the system into these two parts, it is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the main prize ball count output determination counter)) from being altered.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM in order to convey that the power has been turned on (power restored). This power-on main control return destination command mainly consists of information indicating the drive state of the start solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414. This section first explains the problems that arise when the power-on main control return command does not include information indicating the drive state of the starter solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414. In other words, it describes the problems that arise when the power-on main control return command does not have a scheduled command setting for when the power is turned on in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen showing a jackpot game state (e.g., a screen showing a jackpot game animation) on the display area of the animation display device 1600, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while the main control board 1310 is driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the jackpot entry point 2005 by the opening/closing member, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout occurred, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM during the setting of the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34. This will cause the attacker solenoid 2414 to start driving, transitioning the jackpot entry point 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member.

However, in the event of a momentary power outage or blackout, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover upon power restoration. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state and a jackpot game state is generated, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration, but it cannot display which round of the jackpot game state is currently in. In other words, even if, for example, a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 and is detected by the large prize slot sensor 2402, and the main control board 1310 transmits a large prize slot 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating the number of game balls that entered the large prize slot 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives this command, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of game balls that entered the large prize slot 2005 on the screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state, but it cannot display which round of the jackpot game state (i.e., which round it is) at all.

In this situation, for example, when the fourth round (the fourth time) of a jackpot game state is ending, the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 should be stopped and the jackpot opening 2005 should transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the closure of the jackpot opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 between rounds should begin). When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (the fifth time) of a jackpot game state, it sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 should be started and the jackpot opening 2005 should transition from an open state to an open state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the jackpot opening 2005 should begin opening for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen indicating the start of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game state in the display area of the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a screen on the display area of the performance display device 1600 indicating that the game is in a favorable state for the player, where a game ball can be received into the second start opening 2004 (for example, a screen indicating that the second start opening door 2411 is open), and the main control board 1310 is driving the start opening solenoid 2412 to open the second start opening door 2411, making it possible to guide game ball B into the second start opening 2004, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310, based on the power restoration information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34, will be restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout occurred. This will cause the start opening solenoid 2412 to start, closing the second start opening door 2411 and closing the second start opening 2004.

However, in the event of a momentary power outage or blackout, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover upon power restoration. Therefore, when a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 upon power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a game state where game balls can be accepted into the second start port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is restored afterward, even if the peripheral control board 1510 can return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 that indicates that the game state is in a game state where game balls can be accepted into the second start port 2004, creating a game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, players seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the momentary power outage or blackout and forget that, upon power restoration, the machine was in a state where game balls could be received into the second start port 2004, just before the outage or blackout occurred. In such cases, even though the machine has returned to a state where game balls can be received into the second start port 2004, the display area of the performance display device 1600 does not show a screen instructing the player to play (i.e., a screen instructing the player to insert game balls into the second start port 2004), leading to the problem that players are unsure of what to do.

Thus, in the two examples described above, there was a problem in that the game state immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, players seated in front of the pachinko machine might mistakenly believe the machine was broken when a momentary power outage or blackout occurred and then power was restored, as the machine's system appeared to freeze.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary interruption), in order to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted in the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, can, for example, in the above example, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs during the 4th round of the jackpot game state and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the main control board 1310 that it will start driving the attacker solenoid 2414 and transition the jackpot opening 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 that identifies the 4th round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen that shows which round it is), but it can display a screen that indicates that the jackpot game state is in progress and the attacker solenoid 2414 has started to drive, and the large prize slot 2005 is open by the opening/closing member (for example, "It's a jackpot. The large prize slot is open. Please play the game and put the game ball into the large prize slot.") A screen displaying a message to the player can be shown in the display area of the performance display device 1600, instructing the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to insert the game ball into the large prize opening 2005 after power is restored. For example, in the above example, when the game state is such that the game ball can be received into the second start opening 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and power is restored afterward, the main control board 1310 will start driving the start opening solenoid 2412 as the reset destination. The peripheral control board 1510 then displays a screen on the display area of the display device 1600 indicating that the second start gate door 2411 has been opened and that the game ball B is ready to be guided into the second start gate 2004 (for example, a screen displaying the message, "The second start gate door 2411 is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second start gate."). This allows the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to be instructed to play the game by entering the game ball into the second start gate 2004 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to precisely instruct the peripheral control board 1510 on its recovery destination when power is restored after a momentary power outage or blackout. Therefore, the game can quickly return to the state it was in immediately before the power outage or blackout after power is restored. In other words, this prevents players seated in front of the pachinko machine from mistakenly believing the machine is broken when it appears to freeze or become immobile after a power outage or blackout.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing described above, which consists of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing composed of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, the checksum value will not match in the comparison judgment in step S30. Consequently, in step S38, the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the command to be sent when the power is turned on is reserved in step S50, the following commands are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM: a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. This ensures that only these three commands—the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command—are stored as transmission information in the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, with the power-on status command being sent first, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, and then the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. Using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the power-on status command is sent from the main control board 1310 as the first command to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on status command consists of information indicating whether the RAM clear switch is operated to perform a RAM clear when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), information indicating which state (probability and time reduction state) to return to from the aforementioned low-probability time reduction state, high-probability time reduction state, low-probability non-time reduction state, and high-probability non-time reduction state, and information indicating the pachinko machine model code. Here, we will explain the problems that arise when the power-on status command does not include information indicating the pachinko machine model code.

The model code for a pachinko machine (specifically, the main control board 1310) allows for the identification of which copyrighted work it is based on, and what kind of game specifications it has (for example, in addition to game specifications where, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot occurs, there are also game specifications where the number of special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) before a probability change occurs (so-called ST machine)).

In the manufacturing line of a pachinko machine 1, when producing the main control board 1310, there are cases where main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works are mixed together. This can lead to workers on the manufacturing line becoming confused about which copyrighted work (for example, the copyrights for movies A, B, C, D, E, and F) the main control board 1310 is intended for, or they may mistakenly believe that a main control board 1310 intended for one copyrighted work (for example, the copyright for movie D) is being produced for another copyrighted work (for example, the copyright for manga F).

Therefore, in the manufacturing line of a manufacturer of pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple different copyrighted works are mixed together during production, the workers on the manufacturing line cannot confirm which copyrighted work each main control board 1310 produced on the line belongs to. Furthermore, even for the same copyrighted work, they cannot confirm which machine type (Max type, Middle type, or Sweet type) or what the game specifications are (e.g., a game specification where, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, in the manufacturing line of a pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310, if main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works are mixed together, the main control boards 1310 for multiple types of copyrighted works will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control boards 1310 to the game boards 5 while still mixed together. Therefore, workers on the game board assembly line sometimes mounted main control boards 1310 that did not correspond to the game board 5 with the copyrighted work. This resulted in a problem of reduced production efficiency for the game boards 5.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary interruption), in order to send a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine's model code to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a power-on status command categorized as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted in the main control-side timer interrupt processing described later.

As a result, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process of the manufacturing line, the workers on the production line of the Pachinko machine 1 can power on the main control board 1310, and the inspection device will, based on the information indicating the model code of the Pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310, configure the information indicating the model code of the Pachinko machine, which consists of a series code to identify which of the above-mentioned Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type is the model type, a copyright code to identify the copyright of the work, and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). In addition to the game specifications mentioned above, the system also uses a game specification code to identify game specifications (such as ST machines) where probability fluctuations occur with a limited number of special symbol variations. By visually inspecting the detailed machine information displayed on the inspection monitor based on this code, it is possible to determine which copyright the main control board 1310 belongs to. Furthermore, even for the same copyright, it is possible to determine the machine type (Max type, Middle type, or Sweet type) and the game specifications (such as a game specification where, once a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot occurs, or an ST machine).

This allows the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 to accurately identify the model type, copyright, and game specifications of each main control board 1310 by visually inspecting the inspection monitor, even if multiple main control boards 1310 for different copyrighted works are mixed together on the manufacturing line. This enables them to separate the main control boards 1310 according to their copyright and send them to the subsequent game board assembly line. The workers on the game board assembly line can then reliably install the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5, preventing a decrease in production efficiency caused by installing a main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5. Therefore, this contributes to improving the production efficiency of the game boards 5.

[19-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing will be explained. This main control side timer interrupt processing is repeated at the interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figures 210 and 211.

When the main control timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a switches register banks as shown in Figure 212 (step S100). The main control MPU 1310a's general-purpose memory elements (general-purpose registers) consist of two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing during the main control power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing routine, the register bank is switched from the first register bank, which is used in the main control main processing during the main control power-on processing, to the second register bank. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack when the main control timer interrupt processing routine begins.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). This timer subtraction process manages time, for example, the time during which the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process described later, the time during which the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined in the normal symbol and normal electric mechanism control process described later, and the time during which the normal symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 lights up. In addition, it manages time such as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a payer ACK signal has been input to indicate that the payout control board 633 has successfully received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the variation time of the variable display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, each time this timer subtraction process is performed, 4 ms is subtracted from the variation time, and the variation time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the result of this subtraction becomes 0.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input detection time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input detection time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input detection time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input detection time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a reads, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize slot sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start slot sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start slot sensor 2401, the detection signal from the large prize slot sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signals from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payout ACK signal from the payout control board 633 indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later, and stores them as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, when detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start port entry command, categorized as "other," is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port entry command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Similarly, when a detection signal is received from the second start port sensor 2401, the corresponding start port entry command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input processing begins, the input status of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been processed as empty terminals) is read for the first time, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, it is read again for the second time. The results read for the second time are then compared with the results read for the first time. It is determined whether or not there are any results that are the same. If the results are not the same, the input is read for the third time, and the results read for the third time are compared with the results read for the second time. It is determined again whether or not there are any results that are the same. If the results are not the same, the input is read for the fourth time, and the results read for the fourth time are compared with the results read for the third time. It is determined again whether or not there are any results that are the same. If the results are not the same, it is treated as if no game balls have entered, or the input is ignored.

Thus, in the switch input processing, the state of input to all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those with unused terminal processing) is compared twice: once from the 1st to the 3rd time, and again from the 2nd to the 4th time. This allows for a total of two double readings, thereby avoiding false detections due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, detection signals from gate sensor 2801, general prize slot sensor 3001, first start slot sensor 3002, and second start slot sensor 2 This improves the reliability of the detection signal from 401, the detection signal from the large prize slot sensor 2402, the detection signals from the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main body frame open switch, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switching button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the payout command transmitted in the payout ball control processing described later.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring (step S105). In this input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been treated as unused terminals is checked based on the information obtained in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as an unused terminal, so its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring process, the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been treated as unused terminals is checked based on the information obtained in the switch input processing of step S104 to determine whether or not the logic state is LOW. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of an input terminal that has undergone terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command, classified as a notification display indicating a malfunction in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a, as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). In this win/loss random number update process, the symbol random numbers described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in Figure 211, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and minor jackpot symbols are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further increase their randomness. In contrast, since the symbol random numbers are random numbers related to the win/loss determination (win determination), their respective counters are counted up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. Furthermore, the random numbers used for determining the outcome of a regular symbol win and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for determining the outcome of a regular symbol win, as mentioned above, are also updated by this win/loss random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number used for determining whether a symbol wins is normal is, as described above, an initial value update type counter. It is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range from the minimum to the maximum value, and this range from minimum to maximum is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is executed. The counter counts up from the initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins, towards the maximum value, and then from the minimum value towards the initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins. Once the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum to the maximum value of the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins, the initial random number used to determine the win is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial random number used to determine whether a symbol wins can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that selects a value of 1 from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether a symbol wins.

In this embodiment, the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols are updated in the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in Figure 211, and in the win/lose random number update process at step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time of this routine becomes inconsistent each time an interrupt timer occurs, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs, resulting in a random number execution count for the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56, then the random numbers for determining the initial values of the jackpot symbols and the random numbers for determining the initial values of the minor jackpot symbols may be updated only at the non-win/lose random number update process at step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs ball counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out sensor 664 is input, and game balls that are ejected from the game board 5 and flow through the out ball passage 663 (game balls that are driven into the game area 5a and received into prize slots such as the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc., and ejected from the game board 5, and game balls that are driven into the game area 5a When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been discharged from the game board 5 without being accepted into any of the prize-winning slots after being played, and is received into one of the out slots 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, or second sub-out slot 2022, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter, and when a detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 is input and the ball is received into the out slot 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, or second sub-out slot 2022, When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball flowing through the first ball path 701, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the value of the out ball counter, which counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, so-called out balls. When a detection signal from the second ball sensor 704 is input and the ball is driven into the game area 5a, it enters the general prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been accepted into an entry opening such as the second start opening 2004, the big prize entry opening 2005, or the special prize entry opening 2006 and is circulating through the second ball path 702, it performs an operation to add (increment) the value of the safe ball counter, which counts the number of game balls accepted into entry openings such as the general prize entry opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big prize entry opening 2005, or the special prize entry opening 2006, so-called safe balls. In other words, during the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both the game balls received in the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc., and the game balls received in the out slot 1008, the first sub-out slot 2021, and the second sub-out slot 2022. The first ball sensor 703 detects the game balls collected by the out slot 1008, the first sub-out slot 2021, and the second sub-out slot 2022, and the second ball sensor 704 detects the game balls received in the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc.

The main control MPU 1310a then stores the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, in a dedicated area for total recovered ball counting in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, as the total number of game balls received in the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, big prize slot 2005, special prize slot 2006, etc., and the game balls received in the out slot 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, and second sub-out slot 2022, and the value of the out ball counter out The total number of balls recovered through outlet 1008, the first sub-out outlet 2021, and the second sub-out outlet 2022 is stored in a dedicated area for ball counting in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM. The value of the safe ball counter is also stored in a dedicated area for safe ball counting in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM as the total number of safe balls received into the general prize outlet 2001, the first start outlet 2002, the second start outlet 2004, the large prize outlet 2005, the special prize outlet 2006, etc. Furthermore, the ratio of the number of balls dispensed (total number of prize balls dispensed) to the value of the total recovered ball counter, that is, the ratio of the number of balls dispensed (total number of prize balls dispensed) to the total number of game balls played, is calculated and stored in a base calculation area in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM. The output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is also set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a generates a ball retrieval command to indicate that the total number of game balls retrieved from the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, special prize slot 2006, etc., as well as the out slot 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, and second sub-out slot 2022, reaches 10 balls each time the total number of game balls retrieved reaches 10. This command is then stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the calculated values of the ball retrieval counter, out ball counter, and safe ball counter reach their maximum values (65535 in this embodiment), and the main control MPU 1310a further increments (adds 1) to the ball retrieval counter, out ball counter, and safe ball counter, the values of the ball retrieval counter, out ball counter, and safe ball counter overflow to 0, and the calculation is performed starting from this value of 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command is created to dispense game balls based on this input information, and a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize slot 2005, a prize ball command is created to dispense 15 prize balls. Since the number of game balls to be dispensed as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball count information output signal is set to indicate this, stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If the payout control board 633 does not receive a payout ACK signal within a predetermined time to indicate successful reception of this prize ball command, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 and sent to the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, in the prize ball control process of step S108, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, a main prize ball count information output command, categorized as "other," is created to convey this fact and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball count information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter. The value of this main prize ball count information output determination counter is calculated by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and counting the number of game balls that are scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize slots provided on the game board 5, such as the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc. (hereinafter referred to as "various prize slots provided on the game board 5"). In the prize ball control processing of step S108, this value is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM is read. The number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to this read value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter, based on input information read from the aforementioned input information storage area. If the value indicating this added number exceeds 10 (i.e., the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball count information output command is created to indicate this, stored in the output information storage area as transmission information, and the value indicating the excess number of balls is updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM as the value of the main prize ball count information output determination counter.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands categorized as status indicators (for example, frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command). In the frame command reception processing, upon successful reception of the various commands as payer serial data, information to inform the dispensing control board 633 of this is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a formats the successfully received commands as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands categorized as status indicators (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command)) and stores them as transmission information in the aforementioned transmission information storage area.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs fraud detection processing (step S112). This fraud detection processing checks for abnormal conditions related to prize balls. If it determines that fraudulent activity using radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation fraud") is occurring, the value of the radio wave irradiation fraud counter is incremented by 1. This radio wave fraud counter value is incremented each time radio wave irradiation fraud is determined to be occurring during the fraud detection processing, and when the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). When the value of the radio wave irradiation fraud counter reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control side timer interrupt processing), a radio wave irradiation fraud notification command, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is occurring, is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Furthermore, in the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above. When a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet fraud") is being performed, and the value of the magnet fraud counter is incremented by 1. This value of the magnet fraud counter is incremented each time it is determined in the fraud detection process that radio wave irradiation fraud is being performed. It is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). When the value of the magnet fraud counter reaches the upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the interrupt period of 4ms, which is the interrupt period during which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control side timer interrupt process), a magnet fraud notification command, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is being performed, is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying staff of magnetic cheating using this mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the early detection of magnetic cheating by staff members of amusement halls and other personnel.

Furthermore, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when a detection signal is input from the large prize pocket sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot state (when a game ball enters the large prize pocket 2005), or when an abnormal entry into the large prize pocket occurs, an entry abnormality display command is created, which is classified as an abnormal state and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is used for general entry. If the total number of game balls detected by the mouth sensor 3001, first start-up sensor 3002, second start-up sensor 2401, large prize-winning-out-out sensor 2402, and special prize-winning-out-out sensor 2601 differs from the total number of game balls actually received into the prize-winning-out

In step S112, during the fraud detection process, when radio wave irradiation and/or magnet-based fraud are detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 1. Conversely, when neither radio wave irradiation nor magnet-based fraud is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is reset to its initial value of 0 (zero). Furthermore, when an abnormal entry into the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to 1 as a detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to inform the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launching the game ball B is permitted. Specifically, based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG described above, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is valued at 0, that is, when it is determined that no fraud has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch permission logic and stores it in the output information storage area described above as output information. On the other hand, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not valued at 0 (value is 1), that is, when it is determined that fraud has been detected, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, and stores it in the output information storage area described above as output information. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, if a detection signal is received from the door frame open switch and the door frame 3 is detected as open relative to the main frame 4, or if a detection signal is received from the main frame open switch and the main frame 4 is detected as open relative to the outer frame 2, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the firing permission logic, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The firing permission signal logic is configured, as an initial value (default), to be set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the firing permission logic, from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after power is restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 of the main control side timer interrupt processing routine begins, using hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit. The random number (random value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random value is set as a special random number. Then, it determines whether a special random number (i.e., a random number obtained from the hardware random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches a jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as a "special lottery")). Alternatively, it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the symbol random numbers and determines whether or not it matches one of the jackpot type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or minor jackpot type (determining the jackpot type).

If these determination results (lottery results) are determined by the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the synchronization performance in Special Figure 1 are created. On the other hand, if the determination results (lottery results) are determined by the second start port sensor 2401, various commands related to the synchronization performance in Special Figure 2 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The variable display pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbols, and this is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Furthermore, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands categorized as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, command to display the Nth time the jackpot opening 1 has been opened, command to display the jackpot closing 1, command to display the jackpot count 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. Alternatively, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open or close the opening/closing member is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information. If the number of times (rounds) the jackpot opening 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is 2, At times, the system may set the output signal to illuminate the 2-round indicator lamp on the round indicator unit 1400, and store this information in the output information storage area. Similarly, when there are 15 rounds, the system may set the output signal to illuminate the 15-round indicator lamp on the round indicator unit 1400, and store this information in the output information storage area. Furthermore, the system may set the output signal to illuminate the status indicator on the function display unit 1400 in a predetermined color to indicate whether or not a time-saving event has occurred, and store this information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs control processing for normal symbols and normal electric prizes (step S116). In this control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal prize entry processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal prize entry processing, it is determined from the input information whether or not a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 was input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this determination, if a detection signal was input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter used to update the normal symbol win determination is extracted and stored as normal prize entry information in the normal prize entry information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This general prize winning information storage area is provided with four sections (Sections 0 through 3), and the general prize winning information is stored in the order of Section 0, Section 1, Section 2, and Section 3. For example, if the general prize winning information is stored in Sections 0 through 2 of the general prize winning information storage, and a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the general prize winning information is stored in Section 3 of the general prize winning information storage.

The information for winning the regular prize slots is stored in section 0 of the regular prize slot information memory and is set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. Once this regular prize slot information is set, the regular prize slot information in section 1 of the regular prize slot information memory is shifted to section 0, the regular prize slot information in section 2 of the regular prize slot information memory is shifted to section 1, and the regular prize slot information in section 3 of the regular prize slot information memory is shifted to section 2, making section 3 of the regular prize slot information memory an empty area. For example, if the normal prize winning information is stored in sections 1 and 2 of the normal prize winning information storage, the normal prize winning information from section 1 is shifted to section 0, and the normal prize winning information from section 2 is shifted to section 1, leaving sections 2 and 3 as free areas. At this point, if the normal prize winning information is stored in sections 1 to 3, the output of the normal prize winning indicator's illumination signal for the function display unit 1400 is set based on the above-mentioned normal prize winning information, so that the total number of stored normal prize winning information points is treated as reserved balls and the normal reserved indicator of the function display unit 1400 is illuminated. This signal is then stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the normal prize entry process, the normal prize entry information set in the work area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and a random number value for determining whether a normal symbol win occurs is extracted from this read normal prize entry information. It is then determined whether or not this value matches the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (this is called "normal lottery"). Based on this determination result (the result of the normal lottery), it is decided whether or not to open or close the second start gate door 2411. If the decision is made to open or close the door, the second start gate door 2411 will be opened, allowing game balls to be received into the second start gate 2004, resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player. Based on this determination, the corresponding variation display pattern for the regular symbols is determined using the random number for the variation display pattern of the regular symbols described above. Various commands categorized as related to the regular symbol synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Furthermore, the output of a lighting signal to the regular symbol display unit 1400 is set to light up the regular symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the regular symbols, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Furthermore, for example, if the extracted random number for determining a normal symbol win matches the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At the same time, the output of a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 is set to open and close the second start port door 2411 and stored in the output information storage area as output information. On the other hand, if the extracted random number for determining a normal symbol win does not match the normal symbol win determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number mentioned above. Various commands categorized as normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. At the same time, the output of a lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern and stored in the output information storage area as output information. In this example, the probability of winning a regular draw (the probability of getting a regular win) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when the main control MPU 1310a has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 633 from the output terminals of predetermined output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, it outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633, when it has successfully received various commands from the payout control board 633, it outputs a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the big prize opening 2005 when it is in a big win game state, it outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2412 which opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 for opening and closing the second start opening 2004, and also outputs a 15-round big win information output signal, a 2-round big win information output signal, and small The system outputs various game-related information signals (game information), such as winning information output signals, special symbol display information output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time-saving information output signals, and starting gate entry information output signals, to the payout control board 633. It also outputs a launch permission signal, set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), to the payout control board 633. Furthermore, it outputs a display signal to a special monitor that shows the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls dispensed) to the total number of game balls played. Finally, it outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM on the setting display unit 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. This transmitted information includes various commands created in this routine, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, that are categorized as follows: various commands related to the synchronization effects of special figure 1, various commands related to the synchronization effects of special figure 2, various commands related to big wins (for example, a big win 1 count display command corresponding to the big win jackpot count command based on the detection signal from the big win jackpot sensor 2402 when a game ball that has entered the big win jackpot 2005 is detected), various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as the synchronization effects of the normal game, various commands categorized as the normal electric game effects, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands categorized as status display, various commands categorized as test-related, and various commands categorized as others (for example, when the main control board 1310 receives 10 game balls that have entered the various win jackpots on the game board 5, it sends a message to that effect). The system stores commands such as a main prize ball count output command, which instructs the system to send a main prize ball count information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558, using the main prize ball count information as the main prize ball count information, and various commands categorized into specific histories (for example, a ball retrieval command that notifies the system whenever the number of game balls retrieved from prize slots such as the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize slot 2005, the special prize slot 2006, etc., as well as the out slot 1008, the first sub-out slot 2021, and the second sub-out slot 2022 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the system that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the system that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM are unreliable), and a setting key ON operation command that notifies the system to check the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area described later in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM). The main frequency serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main-period serial data consists of a status indicating the command type (with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), a mode indicating the variation of the effect (also with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits)), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values. This sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main frequency serial data. As described above, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main frequency serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a can, at a minimum, have the commands set in its transmission buffer register transferred to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and then completed to transmit them as main frequency serial data from the transmission shift register. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs, in the reservation setting of commands to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211, in order to inform that power has been restored, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Therefore, as main frequency serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on status command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are then sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order. Furthermore, in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, various commands corresponding to various information read from the game backup information may be stored during the setting of the main control's built-in RAM's work area in step S34 of the main control side power-on processing. In such cases, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information is completed, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are transmitted.

Furthermore, each time the number of game balls collected from the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, big prize slot 2005, special prize slot 2006, etc., as well as the out slot 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, and second sub-out slot 2022 reaches 10, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate this. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 then, for each ball collection command received, sends a ball collection command to the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, big prize slot 2005, special prize slot 200 6. The number of game balls collected from the prize winning slots, the out slot 1008, the first sub-out slot 2021, and the second sub-out slot 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information (information that associates the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected from the prize winning slots such as the general prize winning slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, the second start slot 2004, the big prize winning slot 2005, the special prize winning slot 2006, etc., as well as the out slot 1008, the first sub-out slot 2021, and the second sub-out slot 2022) with the date and time of the update) stored in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) is updated. Furthermore, if the ball retrieval command is not received and the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the amusement hall closes, the ball retrieval information, which associates the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls retrieved from the entry points such as the general entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the big entry point 2005, the special feature entry point 2006, etc., as well as the out entry point 1008, the first sub-out entry point 2021, and the second sub-out entry point 2022) with the date and time of update, is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the amusement hall opens for business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 creates new ball retrieval information from the date of opening, replacing the ball retrieval information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the ball retrieval information is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball retrieval history information. Furthermore, the counted values stored as ball retrieval information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may use either the values counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or the sum of the values counted from 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of all previously counted values.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the built-in WDT (Waste Time Controller) (step S122), and terminates this routine. The clearing of the built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timing performed by the built-in WDT. Then, by restarting the timing performed by the built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the built-in WDT.

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the backup process described above to store game information based on the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is in progress. In addition, when power is restored, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and attacker solenoid 2414, which are electrical drive sources, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off by the port output processing in step S118 of this routine, based on the game information for which the backup process was executed, as the destination for the return of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the setting of commands to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211, and in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 of the same processing shown in Figure 210, based on the power-up information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, creates a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, all of which are classified as power-on, to communicate that power has been turned on (power restored), and sends them as information to the main control built-in RAM. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area. In step S120 of this routine, during the peripheral control board command transmission process, the following information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data: status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command. This is followed by the transmission of the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in the same order: status, mode, and sum value. Finally, the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, in the same order: status, mode, and sum value.

Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the destination of the game's progress as restored by the main control board 1310 upon power restoration, based on the main control board 1310's power-on restoration command, within the display area of the performance display device 1600. This allows the game to quickly return to the state it was in immediately before the power outage or interruption while a player is playing, and the destination of the game's progress as restored by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified within the display area of the performance display device 1600. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing the pachinko machine 1 has malfunctioned because it appears to be frozen. Therefore, by quickly returning to the game state it was in immediately before the power outage or interruption, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing the machine has malfunctioned.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, in step S38 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 210, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of commands to be sent at power-on in step S50 of the same process shown in Figure 211, when the reservation setting of commands to be sent at power-on is performed, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Thus, only three commands—the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command—are transmitted as transmission information in the main control's built-in RAM. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area of M, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on state command, are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process as main frequency serial data. Subsequently, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process. Subsequently, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process displays detailed machine information on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. Specifically, it displays detailed machine information based on the series code (which identifies the machine type from the aforementioned Max type, Middle type, and Sweet type), the copyright code (which identifies the copyright of the work), and the game specification code (for example, in addition to a game specification where, once a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot occurs, there is also a game specification where a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol variations (ST machine)).

[19-5. Configuration Change Process]
Next, the setting change process will be explained. This setting change process is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 210.

When the setting change process is initiated, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values as shown in Figure 213 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. When acquiring these setting values, they can be read or retrieved; however, when retrieving the setting values, the retrieved setting values are set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and summing them up. This is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S29 of the main control power-on processing shown in Figure 210.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 (step S204). In step S204, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1 (step S206). The determinations in step S204 and step S206 are the same as the determinations in step S30 and step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 210. The backup flag BK-FLG, as described above, is a flag that indicates whether or not game backup information, such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, was stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control power-off processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main control power-off processing is completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control power-off processing is not completed successfully.

In the determination in step S204, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or in the determination in step S206, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (is value 0), that is, that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, then it determines whether the setting value obtained in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" is the value that the setting value can be changed, and in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values up to setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. As the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally when the power is cut off, therefore there is an abnormality (or it cannot be trusted) in the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM. Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area of a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, obtained in step S200, is one of the normal range setting values 1 to 6. If it determines that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is not within the normal range, it sets the initial value, setting value 1, to the setting value obtained in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, obtained in step S200, is one of the values from setting value 1 to setting value 6, which are within the normal range. However, instead of performing the determination in step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination in step S204 that the checksum value (sum value) does not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in the determination in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not value 1 (value 0), that is, that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, it may proceed to the process in step S210 and set the initial value, setting value 1, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination in step S206, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is valued at 1, that is, that the main control side power failure processing has been completed successfully, or in the determination in step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the result is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to illuminate the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to the setting indicator 1310g to display the set value on the setting indicator 1310g, and displays the set value on the setting indicator 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switch button has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switch button and determining whether a detection signal from the setting switch button has been input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated when a detection signal from the setting switch button has been input, and determines that the setting switch button has not been operated when no detection signal from the setting switch button has been input.

In step S216, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs an operation to add (increment) the value of 1 to the setting value and updates it (step S218). At this time, if, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM was retrieved and set in a predetermined area, then the value of 1 will be added (incremented) to the setting value set in this predetermined area.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal to the setting indicator 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the determination in step S216, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and that the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (that is, the setting key switch 1311a has been rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is turned ON to its original initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF) By rotating the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees to the left (to the OFF position) and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise (to the ON position), the setting key switch 1311a is activated. Based on the ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the key has been operated when the ON signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a. Conversely, if the ON signal is not received from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the key has not been operated.

In the determination in step S222, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the OK key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether the setting switch button has been operated. In the determination in step S216, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has been operated, it repeats the processes of step S218 and step S220, and makes the determination in step S222. If it determines that the OK key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216. Until the OK key is operated, if the setting switch button is operated, the setting value is increased by 1 each time it is operated and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value updated when the setting switch button was operated most recently is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Furthermore, even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored before the determination in step S222 that the confirmation key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM. Therefore, it is discarded, and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM remains unchanged.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S222, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the confirmation key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, if, when acquiring the setting value in step S200, the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control's built-in RAM was retrieved and set in a predetermined area, the setting value set in this predetermined area will be updated. Therefore, this updated setting value will be returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored after the completion of this step S224, the updated setting value from when the confirmation key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred will be stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON back to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This determination is based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. If an OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, the MPU determines that the setting key has been turned OFF. Conversely, if no OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, the MPU determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S226, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the determination in step S226 and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S226, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the illumination signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value, thereby hiding the updated setting value from the setting indicator 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the signal to illuminate the setting change permission lamp 1310z, thereby turning off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG indicates whether or not to allow a change to the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in a dedicated area for setting values within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. It is set to a value of 1 when a setting change is permitted, and to a value of 0 when a setting change is not permitted. In the process of step S232, by setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to a value of 0, further changes to the setting value are not permitted.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values up to setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. In the determination in step S233, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the setting value is an abnormal value. It determines whether the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S224 is one of the normal range values (setting value 1 to setting value 6). If it determines that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

In the determination in step S233, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initial setup (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to send the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 as main frequency serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S238), and then terminates this routine. The serial communication initial setup in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setup in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Here, in the serial communication initialization step S234, the process precedes the serial communication initialization step S44. In the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data. This is because, prioritizing the notification of the setting change to the peripheral control board 1510 via the setting change command, before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-up in step S50 of the main control side power-up processing shown in Figure 211. The setting change command is a command that communicates the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information associating the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, in the determination in step S233, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is outside the normal range, it performs an error display process (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop maintains the state where the error display process has ended, making it impossible to proceed with the game. Therefore, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off and then turned back on. This error display process, which will be explained in detail later, is performed if it determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or if it determines that the main control's power-off process has not completed normally when the power is shut off. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

In the example above, the setting change process was shown to set the system to one of several setting values (setting values 1 to 6). However, it is not limited to setting to one of several setting values. Alternatively, a system with multiple setting values may have a single setting value, and the setting change process may be limited to setting to this single value. Furthermore, a system with multiple setting values may have a setting change process that sets the system to only one predetermined setting value (meaning it can only be set to the predetermined value and cannot be set to any other setting). In this case, the setting value will not be changed during the setting change process, and the system will remain at the same setting value before and after the process.

[19-6. Setting Value Confirmation and Display Process]
Next, the setting value confirmation and display process will be explained. This setting value confirmation and display process is performed in step S28 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 210 and 211.

When the setting value confirmation and display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is valued at 0 or not, as shown in Figure 214 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. It is set to value 1 when the setting value is being confirmed and displayed, and to value 0 when the setting value is not being confirmed and displayed. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays "Power Restoring" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. Furthermore, when the setting value confirmation display process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing begins, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a sends a setting value confirmation display start command as main frequency serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the setting value confirmation display will begin. When the setting value confirmation display process ends, a setting value confirmation display end command is sent as main frequency serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This allows for the display of "Checking settings" following "Power recovery in progress," or for "Checking settings" to be displayed instead of "Power recovery in progress."

In the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is valued at 0, that is, when the set value is not being confirmed and displayed (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2, a detection signal from the main frame opening switch to detect the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and whether the setting key has been inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby performing the first ON operation and turning the setting key switch 1311a ON. Based on the setting key ON signal from 11a, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. Therefore, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met. On the other hand, based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not set to ON. Therefore, it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met.

In step S352, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met, it terminates this routine. However, if it determines that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 1 (step S354) to indicate that the setting value will be displayed for confirmation, and then retrieves the current set value (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area within a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determinations made in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change process shown in Figure 213. As described above, in this embodiment, the values are pre-set to setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a reconfirms whether the setting value is an abnormal value by determining whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM) is one of the values within the normal range, from setting value 1 to setting value 6. If it determines that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

In the determination in step S357, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is within the normal range, it outputs a signal to the setting indicator 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates an ON operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, sets the ON operation command for the setting key (step S360), and terminates this routine. This ON operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. The ON operation command for the setting key is a command that indicates that the setting value confirmation and display process of this routine has started (that is, that the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM has been confirmed).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an ON operation command for the setting key, it updates the ON operation history information for the setting key (information that associates the confirmation of the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an ON operation command for the setting key, it enters a state where a predetermined condition for permission to display specific history information is met, allowing it to display the ball retrieval history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information, as described above. In this state where the predetermined condition for permission to display specific history information is met, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the display device 1600 by switching from the previously displayed image to a specific history information display image that selects and displays the specific history information, upon the user who wishes to view the specific history information performing a rotation operation of the contact operation unit 302 and a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S350, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting key has been turned OFF when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not valued at 0 (value is 1), that is, when the set value is being confirmed and displayed (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, determines that the setting key has been turned OFF. This is done by inserting the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON back to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). This OFF operation is performed by an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a. When an OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. Conversely, when no OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

In the determination in step S362, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it terminates this routine. However, if it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0, indicating that the setting value will not be displayed (step S364). Subsequently, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356, thereby hiding the acquired setting value from the setting display 1310g (step S366). Subsequently, it creates an OFF operation command for the setting key, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and sets the OFF operation command for the setting key (step S368), and terminates this routine. This OFF operation command for the setting key is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. The OFF command for the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation and display process of this routine has finished (i.e., that the setting value stored in the dedicated area for setting values in a specific region of the main control's built-in RAM has been confirmed).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an OFF operation command for the setting key, the predetermined conditions for permitting the display of specific history information described above are no longer met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it will switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S357, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is outside the normal range, it sets the interrupt to disabled (step S370). This setting stops the main control-side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, which was repeatedly performed every 4ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372), and then enters an infinite loop in which it continuously clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared. This is because once the main control's built-in WDT is started, it cannot be stopped. By continuously clearing the main control's built-in WDT, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, clearing the timing by the main control's built-in WDT. When the timing by the main control's built-in WDT is restarted, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. Furthermore, this infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing has ended, making it impossible to proceed with the game. As a result, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned back on. This error display process, which will be explained in detail later, will display an error message if it determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, or if it determines that the main control's power-off process has not completed properly when the power is cut off. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Furthermore, as described above, if the system is configured to have only one setting value and the setting change process executes a process to set that single setting value, or if it has multiple setting values but the setting change process executes a process to set only one predetermined setting value (where it is only possible to set to the predetermined single setting value and not to set to any other setting values), then when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, only the single set setting value may be displayed.

[19-7. Error Display Processing]
Next, the error display process will be explained. This error display process is performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 210, in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 210 (the process performed in step S240 of the setting change process shown in Figure 213), and in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in Figure 214.

When error display processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal as shown in Figure 215 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launching the game ball B is permitted. When its logic is set to launch permission logic, it can communicate permission to launch. Conversely, when its logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can communicate that launch should be stopped (not permitted).

If the error display process in this routine is initiated as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 210, or in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 210 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 of the setting change process shown in Figure 213), the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the interrupt enable setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 211. Therefore, it cannot perform the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, and thus cannot perform the launch enable signal setting processing in step S113 of the same process. Since the launch enable signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function, the main control output circuit with a reset function is reset upon power restoration, and its logic becomes the launch stop logic (launch non-enable logic), which is the inverse of the launch enable logic.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is initiated as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 210, or in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 210 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in Figure 213), the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to ensure that the game ball B is not launched even after power is restored and this routine, the error display processing, has started. This signal is then output from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

When this routine, the error display process, is initiated as a process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in Figure 214, the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in Figure 214 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt enable setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 211, the interrupt disable setting has already been performed in step S370 of the setting value confirmation display process shown in Figure 214 before this routine, the error display process, ends, as described above, entering an infinite loop. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212 cannot be performed, and the launch enable signal setting process in step S113 of the same process cannot be performed.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is initiated as a process performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in Figure 214, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of its predetermined output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

Following step S400, a signal is output to the setting indicator 1310g to display the letter E as an error, and an error message is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error to the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, the MPU outputs a signal to the function display unit 1400 to illuminate all of its indicators, thereby displaying an error to the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial serial communication setup (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs a peripheral control board transmission command transmission process (step S410) to send the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data, and then terminates this routine.

The serial communication initial setup in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setup in step S234 in the setting change process shown in Figure 213 and the serial communication initial setup in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in Figure 211. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 in the setting change process shown in Figure 213 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 212. When this routine, the error display process, starts and finishes in the following stages: step S33 in the main control power-on process shown in Figure 210, step S37 in the main control power-on process shown in Figure 210 (the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Figure 213), and step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Figure 214. As described above, this process enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop maintains the state where the error display process has finished, making it impossible to proceed with the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, after performing the initial serial communication setup in step S406, the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main frequency serial data during the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that indicates that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control's built-in RAM) are unreliable. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time it was received) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display area of the display device 1600 to display a message image with a blue background image and white text that reads "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." It also controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant." to be forcibly set to maximum volume, regardless of the volume adjustment made by rotating the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510, and broadcast it through various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker on the main frame 4, etc.). The process of notifying of a RAM error via an error display command has the highest priority. If the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving other error commands, it prioritizes the RAM error notification.

[20. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, the various control processes performed by the dispensing control board 633 will be explained with reference to Figures 216 to 219. Figure 216 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit power-on process, Figure 217 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figure 216, Figure 218 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process following Figure 217, and Figure 219 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. First, the dispensing control unit power-on process will be explained, followed by the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process.

[20-1. Processing when the power to the dispensing control unit is turned on]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in Figures 216 to 218. When this payout control unit power-on processing starts, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts for the payout control MPU. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt for this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, it is processed preferentially.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). These I/O input/output settings involve configuring the various input and output ports of the dispensing control MPU.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from power-on until it reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power outage or momentary power interruption (a phenomenon where power supply is temporarily suspended), the voltage drops, and when it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Similarly, from power-on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer processing 1 in step S506 is a process to wait after power-on until the voltage becomes higher than the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination in step S508 is made based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HIGH, it is determined that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, as it does not instruct a RAM clear. Conversely, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear switch has been operated, as it instructs a RAM clear.

In step S512, if the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU is in a state where it can perform a RAM clear process (step S38) to initialize the RAM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the payout control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time from power-on.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S512, if the payout control MPU determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase payout information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags and various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the number of actual balls counted PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, etc., which sets the logical state of the PRDY signal, stored in the CR communication information storage area). It is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased. Furthermore, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG, set in steps S514 and S516, is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the dispensing control MPU configures the system to allow access to the built-in dispensing control RAM (step S518). This configuration allows access to the built-in dispensing control RAM, enabling operations such as writing (storing) or reading dispensing information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address where the contents of a currently used memory element (register) are temporarily stored on the stack, or the address where the return address of the main routine is temporarily stored when a subroutine terminates and the main routine returns. The stack pointer advances each time data is added to the stack. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the registers, the return address, etc., are pushed onto the stack. Then, by reading sequentially from the last stacked data to the first stacked data, the stack pointer returns to its initial address.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is valued at 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 when the payout information is cleared, and to 0 when the payout information is not cleared.

In the determination in step S522, if the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is valued at 0, that is, that the payout information will not be erased, it calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information stored in the built-in payout control RAM as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S524, the dispensing control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored during the dispensing control unit power-off processing (power-off) described later (step S526). In step S526, if the dispensing control MPU determines they match, it determines whether the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is valued at 1 (step S528). This dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG indicates whether dispensing backup information, such as dispensing information and the checksum value, was stored in the dispensing control unit's built-in RAM during the dispensing control unit power-off processing described later. It is set to value 1 when the dispensing control unit power-off processing is completed successfully, and to value 0 when the dispensing control unit power-off processing is not completed successfully.

In the determination in step S528, if the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is valued at 1, that is, that the payout control unit power outage processing has been completed successfully, it sets the working area of the built-in RAM of the payout control as the power restoration time (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to value 0, the power restoration time information is read from the ROM built into the payout control MPU (i.e., the built-in ROM of the payout control), and this power restoration time information is set in the working area of the built-in RAM of the payout control. This sets information used for various processes based on the payout information, including the payout backup information stored in the built-in RAM for payout control, various flags, and various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the number of prize balls stocked PBS, the number of actual balls counted PB, the number of drive commands DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., stored in the prize ball information storage area; the PRDY signal output setting information, where the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area; the mismatch counter reset judgment time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state of turning the power back on after it has been cut off, but also the state after power has been restored following a power outage or momentary interruption.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, if the payout control MPU determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not valued as 0 (i.e., valued as 1), that is, that the payout information should be erased; or in the determination in step S526, if the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match; or in the determination in step S528, if the payout control MPU determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not valued as 1 (i.e., valued as 0), that is, that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully, then the entire area of the built-in payout control RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the built-in payout control RAM.

Following step S532, the dispensing control MPU sets the working area of the built-in dispensing control RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading initial information from the built-in dispensing control ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the built-in dispensing control RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting determines the interrupt period when the payout control timer interrupt processing, described later, occurs. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt enablement settings (step S538). This setting causes the payout control timer interrupt process to be repeatedly executed at the interrupt cycle set in step S536, i.e., every 2ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By sequentially setting values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when there is a power outage or momentary interruption, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In step S540, if the payout control MPU determines that there is no power outage warning signal input, it determines whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is valued at 1 (step S542). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag used in the payout control timer interrupt processing, which is performed every 2ms (described later). It is set to value 1 when 2ms have elapsed and value 0 when 2ms have not elapsed.

In step S542, if the payout control MPU determines that the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is valued at 0, meaning that 2ms have not elapsed, it returns to step S540 and determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, if the payout control MPU determines that the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is valued at 1, that is, that 2ms have elapsed, it sets the value of the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control MPU sets value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, following value A which was set in step S539.

Following step S546, the dispensing control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the built-in dispensing control RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the dispensing control MPU based on this information. The output information storage area stores various information, such as payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball commands and self-check commands) have been successfully received, drive information for controlling the payout motor 584, prize ball count information for the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, the payout control MPU outputs a payout ACK signal to the main control board 1310 when various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, and outputs the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 584 as a prize ball count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 (in this embodiment, the prize ball count information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 every time the payout motor 584 actually dispenses 10 game balls).

Specifically, a counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball count information is provided. This prize ball count information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 during the port input processing in step S550, which will be described later. The number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 584 is monitored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the built-in RAM for payout control through a process (program) not shown.

In the process (program) not shown, which monitors the number of game balls actually dispensed by the dispensing motor 584, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball information, stored in the prize ball information storage area of the built-in RAM for dispensing control, is updated by adding the number of game balls actually dispensed by the dispensing motor 584, based on the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550 described later.

In the port output processing of step S548, the value of the prize ball count information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area. If the read value of the prize ball count information output determination counter exceeds 10 (i.e., the number of game balls actually dispensed by the payout motor 584 has reached 10), a prize ball count information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558. (At this time, the value indicating the excess number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the value of the prize ball count information output determination counter.) A display signal is also output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM for the payout control. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, and the main payout ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later, are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). This timer update process determines whether or not a ball jamming condition has occurred due to the payout vane 589, which receives the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, and sets the ball jamming determination time as a determination condition; the skip determination time set when no fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is performed; the full determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower tray 202 is full with stored game balls; and the balls that have been taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574. In addition to managing time for determining whether the number of balls exceeds a predetermined number, the system also manages the time for resetting the inconsistency counter INCC, which monitors whether the system is repeatedly dispensing inconsistent game balls due to a discrepancy between the number of game balls received and dispensed by the ball storage section 589b of the dispensing vane 589 and the number of game balls actually detected by the dispensing detection sensor 591. For example, when the ball jamming detection time is set to 5005ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2ms. Therefore, each time this timer update process is performed, the ball jamming detection time is subtracted by 2ms, and the result of this subtraction becomes 0, thus accurately measuring the ball jamming detection time. These various detection times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it is determined whether various signals from the CR unit (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) are being input. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payouts, such as various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY signal output setting information, where the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, etc., stored in the CR communication information storage area).

This process allows the values of prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., stored as payout backup information, to be restored to the values of prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc., immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout, even if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs while the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is being performed, making it impossible to continue the payout operation. As a result, even if a momentary power outage or blackout occurs and the payout operation cannot be continued, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that the correct number of game balls can be dispensed into the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202. In other words, the payout control MPU, while dispensing game balls into the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 during CR communication processing, experiences a momentary power outage or blackout that interrupts the communication between the CR unit and the MPU, preventing the continued dispensing of game balls. However, upon power restoration, the values of prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, and mismatch counter INCC are restored to the values stored as payout backup information, which are those from immediately before the momentary power outage or blackout. This allows the communication between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit to continue from the time of power restoration, and enables the continued dispensing of game balls.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is designed so that even if there is a momentary power outage or stoppage, the system will be restored to the state it was in immediately before the outage or stoppage when power is restored. This prevents the various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of a momentary power outage or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be improved.

Furthermore, various types of information stored in the CR communication information storage area are included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to a logical state for the PRDY signal, for example, indicating that a payout operation to dispense a ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. Then, as part of the main operation setting process, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, based on the value of the mismatch counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the built-in RAM of the payout control, which is included in the payout backup information, it is determined whether the value of this mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is malfunctioning, that is, that the payout operation of the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the value of 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. In the payout ball mishap operation determination setting process, as a setting for outputting an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation for dispensing the balls is impossible, is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, from the time power is restored until the next timer interrupt, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area, and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 was in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power outage, that state is restored when power is restored. Therefore, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for dispensing borrowed balls is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU at a very early stage after power is restored, informing the CR unit that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state. This prevents the output of unnecessary BRDY signals, which are requests for borrowed balls, from the CR unit at a very early stage after power is restored.

Furthermore, in the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM. Based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to indicate that a payout operation for dispensing balls is possible. On the other hand, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU to indicate that a payout operation for dispensing balls is impossible. Furthermore, the logical state of the EXS signal, which indicates the start or end of a single dispensing operation, is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM. The CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, is stored as CR connection information in the status information storage area.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball depletion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball depletion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the lower tray 202 described above is determined to be full with stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is determined to be greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball depletion detection sensor 574. For example, the determination of whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made using a timer interrupt period of 2ms. When the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON during the current full-tank and ball-out check process, and when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 was OFF during the previous (2ms ago) full-tank and ball-out check process, that is, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts timing the full-tank determination time described above. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 during the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON during this full-tank and ball-out check process. In this determination, if the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the system stores full-tank information in the status information storage area, indicating that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls.

The determination of whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also made using the timer interrupt period of 2ms. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON during the current full-tank and ball-out check process, and when the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF during the previous (2ms ago) full-tank and ball-out check process, that is, when the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts timing the ball-out determination time as described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 during the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, it is determined whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON during this full-tank and ball-out check process. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball depletion detection sensor 574 is ON, the system stores ball depletion information in the status information storage area indicating that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. Conversely, when the detection signal from the ball depletion detection sensor 574 is OFF, the system stores ball depletion information in the status information storage area indicating that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than or equal to a predetermined number.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). This command reception processing receives various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 (prize ball commands and self-check commands). When these commands are successfully received, payout ACK information indicating this is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the commands are not successfully received, connection abnormality information indicating an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs command analysis (step S560). This command analysis analyzes the command received in step S558 and stores the analyzed command as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs the main operation setting process (step S562). This main operation setting process involves setting operations such as prize balls, ball lending, ball removal, and ball jamming, determining retry operations, and monitoring the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area described above. For example, the bulb failure information described above is read from the status information storage area, and based on this bulb failure information, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (the digit "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission processing, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and based on this information, various commands (frame status 1 command, error clear navigation command, and frame status 2 command) categorized for status display are created and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, if ball depletion information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this ball depletion information, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a frame status 1 command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

Following step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). In step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set with values A, B, and C in that order, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539. The payout control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether a power outage warning signal has been input, and if no power outage warning signal has been input, determines in step S542 whether the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is value 1. When this 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is value 1, i.e., 2ms have elapsed, sets the value 0 in the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and then steps S548 The process involves port output processing in step S539, port input processing in step S550, timer update processing in step S552, CR communication processing in step S554, full tank and bulb burnout check processing in step S556, command reception processing in step S558, command analysis processing in step S560, main operation setting processing in step S562, LED display data creation processing in step S564, command transmission processing in step S566, setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and repeating steps S539 to S568. This process from steps S539 to S568 is called the "dispensing control unit main processing".

The processing content of the main processing unit of the payout control unit changes depending on the progress of the game as controlled by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the processing time required by the payout control MPU fluctuates. To address this, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU prioritizes outputting a payout ACK signal to the main control board 1310, indicating that it has successfully received various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310. This ensures that the payout control MPU has sufficient processing time to adequately handle other fluctuating processes.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S540, if the payout control MPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been received, it sets the interrupt disable setting (step S570). This setting prevents the payout control timer interrupt processing described later from occurring, preventing writing to the payout control's built-in RAM and protecting against the rewriting of the payout information mentioned above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU performs a clear setting for the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the built-in payout control RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value, as numerical values and summing them up.

Following step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the dispensing control MPU disables access to the built-in dispensing control RAM (step S582). This setting disables access to the built-in dispensing control RAM, preventing writing and reading, and protecting the dispensing backup information stored in the RAM.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to values A, B, and C in sequence, thus preventing the watchdog timer from being cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and the payout control unit power-on processing is then performed again. The processing from steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "payout control unit power-off processing."

Pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) resets in the event of a power outage or momentary power interruption, and then performs the power-on processing for the payout control unit upon restoration of power.

In step S526, the system checks whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control's built-in RAM is correct. Subsequently, in step S528, it checks whether the payout control unit's power-off process was completed successfully. In this way, the system double-checks the payout backup information stored in the payout control's built-in RAM to determine whether the information was stored through fraudulent means.

[20-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control timer interrupt processing will be explained. This payout control timer interrupt processing is repeated at the interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control power-on processing shown in Figures 216 to 218.

When the payout control timer interrupt processing begins, the payout control MPU (Multi-Purpose Unit) disables the timer interrupt and performs register switching (save) as shown in Figure 219 (step S590). Here, it switches from the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the main payout control processing described above to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the corruption of the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main payout control processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value of the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 1 (step S592). This 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2ms each time the payout control timer interrupt process is performed, i.e., every 2ms. It is set to a value of 1 when 2ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2ms have not elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU performs a register switch (reset) (step S594). This reset switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control main processing, the values of the auxiliary registers are no longer overwritten. This prevents the corruption of the contents of the auxiliary registers used in the payout control timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt enable setting (step S596) and terminates this routine.

[21. Various control processes of peripheral control boards]
Next, the various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be explained with reference to Figures 220 to 224. Figure 220 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, Figure 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt process, Figure 222 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, Figure 223 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and Figure 224 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-off warning signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be explained, followed by the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power-off warning signal interrupt process. In this embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processes is set so that the peripheral control unit power-off warning signal interrupt process has the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and then the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt process.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") integrates the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip.

[21-1. Processing when the peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit will be explained with reference to Figure 220. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in Figure 220. When this power-on processing for the peripheral control unit starts, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initial setup process (step S1000). This initial setup process includes initializing the peripheral control IC itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, setting the wait timer after reset, and transferring various control information (peripheral data). The CPU of the peripheral control IC first performs the process of initializing the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for initializing the peripheral control IC is on the order of microseconds (μs), so the peripheral control IC can be initialized in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is in a state where interrupts are enabled, and is able to receive various commands, such as commands related to the control of game effects and commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1, which are output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, and day, and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC's CPU acquires calendar and time information from the real-time clock IC's built-in RAM only once, upon power-up. Furthermore, after performing this current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control IC's CPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) to prevent a reset of the peripheral control IC's CPU.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing described later, which is executed when a V-blank signal is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP indicating that it is ready to receive screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the peripheral control IC's CPU. In step S1004, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value of VB-FLG to 0. Furthermore, the peripheral control IC's CPU sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control IC's CPU from being reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control IC's CPU determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1 (step S1006). If the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not valued at 1 (i.e., valued at 0), it returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1. By repeating this determination, the system enters a waiting state until the peripheral control unit can perform its regular processing. Furthermore, after determining whether the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1, the peripheral control IC's CPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent a reset.

In the determination in step S1006, when the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is valued at 1, that is, that the peripheral control unit should execute its steady-state processing, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to value 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit is executing its steady-state processing, and to value 0 when the peripheral control unit has completed its processing.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control IC's CPU performs a 1ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). This 1ms interrupt timer activation process activates the 1ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process (described later). It also initializes the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting its value to 1, which counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer has been activated and the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. This 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated during the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt process.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this performance operation unit monitoring process, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the contact operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided on the performance operation unit 300") such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, the pressure detection sensor 373, and the lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 provided on the performance operation unit 300) is acquired based on the rotation (direction of rotation) of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation of the press operation unit 303, etc., and the RAM of the peripheral control IC is set to monitor the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and whether or not the press operation unit 303 is operated, and it is appropriately decided whether or not to reflect the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation status of the press operation unit 303 in the game performance. Specifically, if the volume has been adjusted during the performance control unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume. If the brightness has been adjusted, the schedule data for generating the light emission pattern is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This ensures that volume and brightness adjustments are reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. If, during the performance, the lamp palette setting processing is executed and the player (or an employee of the gaming hall, etc.) operates the performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value (maximum brightness), the aforementioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to reflect that set brightness specification value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table. The brightness specification value is a value that allows setting one brightness specification value within a range of 32 levels, from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value (minimum brightness, off) to the 31st brightness specification value (maximum brightness). Corresponding to the 0th (zero) to 31st brightness specification values are pre-set, as described later, for each. The player (or staff member of the gaming hall, etc.) can set one brightness specification value within the range from the 1st brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value (maximum brightness) by operating the operable performance control unit 301 (contact control unit 302, press control unit 303).

For example, when a player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) rotates the contact operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current brightness is set to the first brightness setting value, which is the next highest brightness setting after the 0th (zero) brightness setting value (the minimum brightness, meaning the lights are off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are increased along a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness setting value to the 31st brightness setting value, which is the maximum brightness. On the other hand, when the contact operation unit 302 is rotated counterclockwise, and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light are decreased along a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness setting value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness setting value. When a player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) rotates the contact operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and then presses the press operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, there are pre-defined cases where the player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) can set the brightness during the performance. At this time, the player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. Furthermore, during the performance, when the player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) operates the contact operation unit 302, a bar-shaped indicator showing the position from the 1st brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600. This allows the player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) to visually see the desired brightness level as an image. In this embodiment, the 14th brightness specification value is set as the initial value (default).

The typical palette value is set as the gradation information described above, based on the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards on the game board side and the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame side that are directly illuminated by light. The typical palette value is selected from 17 steps in 5% increments, ranging from the minimum palette value (20%) to the maximum palette value (100%). Within a range of 32 steps, from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, each brightness specification and its corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-curve-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness specification to the 31st brightness specification. Similarly, for other palette values, the values (%) indicated in parentheses represent the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range from the 0th (zero) brightness specification to the 31st brightness specification.

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%) for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the door frame side that are directly illuminated with light, and this is set as the grayscale information described above. Furthermore, for specific decorative substrates (LEDs that may appear dazzling to the player) among the various decorative substrates provided on the game board side that are directly illuminated with light, a palette value (50%) is set to the grayscale information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above, based on the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that emit indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and within the range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) brightness specification to the 31st brightness specification, one brightness specification and the corresponding palette value are set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-curve-like tone curve).

As mentioned above, if the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is the same as that of the LEDs used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate will be dimmer than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set using a special palette value, rather than the normal palette value set for the LEDs used as direct light. The first brightness specification value, which is the next highest brightness level after the zero brightness specification value (the minimum brightness, meaning the light is off), is set to approximately the same value as the 18th brightness specification value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), as the minimum brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually observed emitting light through indirect light. Within the range from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, the palette value corresponding to one brightness specification value is set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-curve-like tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of LEDs used as direct light and LEDs used as indirect light, based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values, the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value obtained by the player (or staff such as employees of the gaming hall) operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303, while the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value obtained by the player (or staff such as employees of the gaming hall) operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303. As a result, when a player finds the brightness of the LED used as direct light too bright and adjusts it by operating the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303, even if the brightness of the LED used as direct light is set to the lowest level (i.e., the first brightness setting value, which is the next highest brightness level after the zero brightness setting value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest level (i.e., the first brightness setting value, which is the next highest brightness level after the zero brightness setting value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness setting value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Therefore, the minimum brightness level at which the light guide plate is illuminated by indirect light is set.

Furthermore, programmers designing the light emission patterns can easily adjust the overall balance of the light emission patterns by setting the light emission patterns according to the flow of the performance, and then observing the flow of the performance based on the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board and door frame, setting the normal palette value to a smaller palette value (for example, 50%) for specific decorative boards that are too bright (or where a slightly dimmer brightness would better enhance the performance), and setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards. In other words, even if a player (or an employee of a gaming hall, etc.) operates the operable performance control unit 301 (contact control unit 302, press control unit 303) to set a single brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value (maximum brightness), a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to that brightness specification value is set for a specific decorative board, while the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to that brightness specification value is set for other decorative boards. Therefore, brightness adjustment can be performed very easily without disrupting the relationship between the mutually set light emission patterns (the relationship between bright or dark).

Furthermore, while adjusting the brightness of indirect light using a light guide plate is more difficult than with direct light, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light can be set using a special palette value that differs from (i.e., is independent of) the normal palette value. This allows the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light to be controlled by the special palette value, while the brightness of LEDs used as direct light is controlled by the normal palette value. Therefore, the brightness of LEDs used as indirect light and those used as direct light can be easily adjusted independently.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC and outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the display device 1600. Note that in the display data output processing, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. This prevents processing delays, although it does result in frame drops. However, the system prioritizes the use of various speakers (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers"), such as the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, through the audio data output processing described later.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs it to various speakers from the designated output channel. As a result, music and sound effects, etc., corresponding to various effects, are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). This scheduler update process updates various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. For example, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data in the time-series arrangement of screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data, should be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

Furthermore, during the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which of the time-series arranged emission data points, which constitute the schedule data for generating emission patterns, should be output.

Furthermore, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC. This is done by selecting the sound command data that instructs the sound data for performance sounds such as music and sound effects, as well as the sound data for notification and announcement sounds, which are arranged in a time-series order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data.

Furthermore, in the scheduler update process, a pointer is updated to indicate which drive data from the first drive data to be output among the drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data. The drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is executed repeatedly each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. In this motor and solenoid drive processing, which is executed repeatedly each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated each time the process is executed. In other words, the drive data pointed to by the updated pointer during motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated during the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive processing inadvertently points to a different drive data than the one it was originally supposed to point to, the scheduler update process will forcibly update it to point to the originally intended drive data.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (described later), and the received commands are analyzed. Additionally, random numbers used for various settings of the effects (for example, random numbers used for effects related to hold-pre-reading) are updated. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM. This received command analysis process analyzes the various commands stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM. Based on the analyzed commands, the peripheral control IC's CPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM.

Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on the lamp palette setting table, which consists of the brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value described above. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the light emission mode generation schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on these analyzed commands, and executes the lamp palette setting processing. When a player (or an employee of the gaming hall, etc.) operates the performance operation unit 301 (contact operation unit 302, press operation unit 303) and sets a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value (maximum brightness), the peripheral control IC can update the grayscale information described above to match the set brightness specification value and set it in its RAM.

Furthermore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 via the peripheral control command interrupt process is, for example, a start-up entry command to instruct the start of the start-up entry animation, a normal symbol memory command to identify the number of normal symbols held (0 to 4), a variation pattern command to instruct the start of variation animations such as the variation display of decorative symbols on the animation display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of special symbols, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-up held symbols changes, or a large prize-entry 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted into the large prize-entry opening 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are analyzed. The various commands include commands related to the synchronization of special feature 1, commands related to the synchronization of special feature 2, commands related to big wins, commands related to power on, commands related to the synchronization of normal feature, commands related to normal electric performance, commands related to notification display, commands related to status display, commands related to testing, and various other commands. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a lottery process related to announcements, etc., based on the received commands, and reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, etc., from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on the lottery results. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 to execute animations based on the lottery results.

The peripheral control ROM pre-stores the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission pattern generation schedule data for generating light emission patterns for various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive patterns for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, specifying the order in which screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission pattern generation schedule data is composed of light emission pattern data that defines the light emission patterns of various LEDs arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, specifying the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies the output channel number, which indicates which output channel to use from among the multiple output channels of the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source, and the track number, which indicates which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects from among the multiple tracks of the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source. The electrical drive source schedule data consists of drive data for electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and defines the operation of these electrical drive sources.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands categorized as notification displays, the CPU reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data—which are set for various abnormality display modes—from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM. In the warning process, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notifications are issued in order of priority, starting with the highest priority, and automatically transition to other remaining abnormality notifications once the first abnormality is resolved. This allows for simultaneous monitoring of multiple abnormalities without losing information that an abnormality has occurred if another abnormality occurs after the first one has occurred but before it is resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs RTC acquisition information update processing (step S1026). This RTC acquisition information update processing updates the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 and stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM. This RTC acquisition information update processing updates the time information (hours, minutes, seconds) stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information (year, month, day) stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM is updated.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation processing, the pointer is updated during the scheduler update process in step S1020. The screen data indicated by that pointer, from the screen data arranged in a time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When the peripheral control IC's VDP receives screen data from the peripheral control IC's CPU, it reads image data from the SDRAM based on this input screen data and generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn (displayed) on the display device 1600 in its built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated during the scheduler update process in step S1020. The sound command data indicated by that pointer, from the sound command data arranged in a time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Furthermore, during the sound data creation process, the rotation position of the volume control switch is determined based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume control switch each time this process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs a steady-state operation). The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC so that the volume corresponds to the rotation position of the volume control switch. In the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set during this sound data creation process. As a result, music and sound effects, etc., corresponding to various effects, are played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value is varied by rotating the volume control switch. The voltage, divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch, is converted from an analog value to a digital value, resulting in 1024 values ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, these 1024 values are divided into seven levels and managed as board volume controls 0 to 6. Board volume control 0 is set to mute, and board volume control 6 is set to maximum volume. The volume increases from board volume control 0 to board volume control 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volume controls 0 to 6, causing music and sound effects to play from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3, and from the bass speaker on the main frame 4. Thus, music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3, and from the bass speaker on the main frame 4, based on volume adjustment through the rotation of the volume control switch.

Furthermore, the sound command data also includes sub-volume values for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to sound data for musical and sound effect sounds and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for notification sounds used to alert hall staff, etc., to malfunctions of the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, along with sub-volume values for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for sound effects, the circuit board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch, as described above, is set as the sub-volume value. For notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume control switch. The sub-volume value for sound effects can be adjusted by operating the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setup process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) is started or stopped on the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbol begins, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the final display of the decorative symbol).

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setup process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) starts or stops the display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variation pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed after the final display of the decorative symbols) By operating the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch during the sound data creation process is converted into seven values from 0 to 6 for the circuit board volume. Furthermore, by adding or subtracting predetermined values to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch according to the operation of the contact operation section 302 and the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the value of the circuit board volume is increased or decreased, thereby setting the circuit board volume and adjusting the sub-volume value of the performance sound.

Furthermore, the sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel. For the multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, the sound data of the effect sound embedded in the track being used, along with a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound embedded in the track being used, are combined. The volume of this combined effect sound is then amplified to the master volume value corresponding to the volume actually emitted from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and the bass speaker on the main frame 4. This amplified effect sound is then serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound effect is at its maximum volume, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume emanating from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4, reaches the maximum permissible volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used from among the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC, and the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated into the track to be used are combined, and the volume of this combined sound effect is amplified up to the master volume value which is the actual volume emanating from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side, and the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound effect is serialized and audio The output is as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated into the track being used, and the maximum volume (which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated into the track being used) are combined. This combined notification sound volume is amplified to the master volume value, which corresponds to the volume actually emitted from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and the main frame speaker for bass on the main frame 4. This amplified notification sound is then serialized and output as audio data.

To briefly explain the control mechanism for playing an alert sound to notify hall staff of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or any fraudulent activity against the machine 1 when the performance sound is being played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker for bass frequencies on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track containing the performance sound is forcibly set to mute. Then, the sound data of the track containing the performance sound, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track containing the alert sound, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume for the alert sound are combined. The combined volume of the performance sound and the alert sound are amplified to the master volume value, which corresponds to the volume actually played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker for bass frequencies on the main frame 4. Finally, the amplified performance sound and alert sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound emitted from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and the bass speaker on the main frame 4, is the maximum volume notification sound. At this time, the sound effects are muted, so they do not emanate from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, nor from the bass speaker on the main frame 4. However, the sound effects continue to play according to the sound generation schedule data mentioned above.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is emitted for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and from the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4. After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effect, which has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly set to silent, is reset to a sub-volume value by rotating the volume adjustment switch. (At this time, if the volume of the sound effect has been adjusted by operating the contact operation section 302 or the press operation section 303 of the sound effect operation unit 300, it is set to the sub-volume value of that adjusted sound effect.) The sound then emits from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, and from the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

Thus, when the performance sound is being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3, and the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and an alert sound is played to notify hall staff of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the performance sound is muted, and the alert sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3, and the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4. However, since the muted performance sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data, once the alert sound has elapsed for a predetermined period and is no longer playing from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 and the bass-heavy main frame speaker on the main frame 4, the performance sound does not start playing again from where the alert sound began, but rather from where it had progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up to the point when the alert sound began and the predetermined period had elapsed.

Furthermore, the notification and alert sounds are designed to play independently of the volume adjustment via the volume control switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC via a program, adjusting the volume from silent to maximum. This program-controlled volume transitions smoothly from silent to maximum. For example, even if an employee of a gaming hall adjusts the volume to a low level using the volume control switch, while the music and sound effects from the various speakers become quieter, a loud notification sound (maximum volume in this embodiment) can still be played when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine or when a player is engaging in fraudulent activity. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, the notification sound prevents employees of a gaming hall from becoming less aware of malfunctions or fraudulent activity.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a backup process (step S1034). This backup process copies the contents stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM to a backup area for steady-state processing provided in the peripheral control IC's RAM, and also copies the contents stored in the SDRAM to a backup area for steady-state processing provided in the SDRAM.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). This WDT clear process outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the peripheral control IC's CPU from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the value of the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 to indicate the completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit (step S1038), returns to step S1004, initializes the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting the value to 0, and repeatedly performs the determination in step S1006 until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing described later. In other words, in step S1006, it waits until the value of the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, and if it is determined in step S1006 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 and returns to step S1004. Thus, if it is determined in step S1006 that the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, it performs the processing in steps S1008 to S1038. The processing from steps S1008 to S1038 is called "peripheral control unit steady-state processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the process begins in step S1008 by setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is in progress. Then, in step S1010, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated, followed by the processes in steps S1014, ..., and S1036. Finally, in step S1038, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0, indicating that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is complete. The peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed in step S1006 when the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. As described above, this V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing, which will be executed later, triggered by the input of a V-blank signal from the peripheral control IC's VDP to the peripheral control IC's CPU, indicating that the peripheral control IC is ready to receive screen data from its CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[21-2. Peripheral Control Unit V Blank Signal Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing, which is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the peripheral control IC is ready to receive screen data from the CPU is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP. When this peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing starts, the peripheral control IC's CPU determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0, as shown in Figure 221 (step S1045). As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1008 to S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220 is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

In step S1045, the peripheral control IC's CPU terminates this routine if the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not valued at 0 (i.e., valued at 1), meaning that the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is currently being executed. On the other hand, in step S1045, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0, meaning that the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing has been completed, it sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to value 1 (step S1050) and terminates this routine. As described above, the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing. It is set to value 1 when the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is being executed and to value 0 when it is not.

In this embodiment, step S1045 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is valued at 0, that is, whether the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing has been completed. If the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing has been completed, step S1050 sets the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to value 1. However, this is because if a V-blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is being executed and the V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to value 1, the determination in step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220 will execute the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing, forcibly canceling the currently executing peripheral control unit's steady-state processing midway and starting the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing from the beginning. To prevent this, the peripheral control unit power supply in Figure 220 In step S1008 of the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the value of the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1, informing the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. Furthermore, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) shown in Figure 220, the value of the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0, informing the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Therefore, step S1045 of the peripheral control unit V-blank signal interrupt processing routine determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is a procedure to handle cases where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of one V-blank signal and the input of the next V-blank signal, resulting in a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms, the system will wait until the next V-blank signal is input, as determined in step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 220. In other words, the time required to execute the failed peripheral control unit steady-state processing becomes approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, described later, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 220, is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if there is a failed peripheral control unit steady-state processing as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times instead of 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails, consistency is maintained between the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the progress of the performance by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing fails, the progress of the performance can be reliably maintained.

[21-3. Peripheral Control Unit 1ms Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs due to the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 220. When this peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is less than 33, as shown in Figure 222 (step S1100). As described above, this number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 220, and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V-blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed repeatedly every approximately 33.3 ms. Therefore, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and then the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt.

In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC terminates the routine if it determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is not less than 33, that is, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. If the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, in this embodiment, although the priority of the interrupt processing is set higher for the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing than for the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing. Then, upon generation of the V-blank signal, the 1ms interrupt timer is reactivated in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing. Following this, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing begins again due to the occurrence of the first 1ms timer interrupt.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1100, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN is less than 33, it adds (increments, step S1102) 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN. This addition of 1 to the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN increases the number of times the 1ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing routine is executed in step S1010 of the peripheral control steady-state processing in the peripheral control power-on processing shown in Figure 220, by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, based on the drive data of the motor and solenoid, which are arranged in a time series that constitutes the electrical drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. As a result, the electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, the electrical drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and the electrical drive sources provided in the various performance units on the game board 5) are driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a movable body information acquisition process (step S1106). This process determines whether detection signals have been received from various sensors on the various performance units installed on the game board 5. This creates history information of the detection signals from these sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and sets it in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable position by setting the original position (standby position) or acquiring the movable position of the various movable bodies on the various performance units installed on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). This performance operation unit information acquisition process determines whether detection signals have been input from various sensors provided on the performance operation unit 300. This process creates history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the contact operation unit 302, and operation history information of the press operation unit 303), and sets it in the peripheral control IC's RAM. The operation status of the contact operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the peripheral control IC's RAM. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker of the main frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and terminates this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the peripheral control IC's RAM, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the peripheral control IC's RAM and the backup area for steady-state processing provided in the peripheral control IC's RAM are set to different areas, and the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for steady-state processing provided in the SDRAM are also set to different areas.

Thus, in the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, various processing related to the performance, from steps S1104 to S1108, is executed within a period of 1ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during power-on processing in Figure 220, various processing related to the performance, from steps S1014 to S1032, is executed within a period of approximately 33.3ms. In the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, if the number of 1ms timer interrupt executions STN in step S1100 is not less than 33, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts, the routine terminates immediately. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd interrupt is forcibly canceled. After the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing due to the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing starts anew due to the first 1ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing and the progress of the performance controlled by the peripheral control unit's 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. Therefore, the progress of the performance can be reliably synchronized.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the size of the liquid crystal display 1600, and may also vary slightly depending on the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control ICs are mounted. In this embodiment, since the V-blank signal is the signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V-blank signal, the start of the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing triggered by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control V-blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V-blank signal is output changes slightly, the time lag caused by this slight change in the V-blank signal output interval can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing triggered by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt.

[21-4. Peripheral Control Unit Command Reception Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing that receives various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it takes this as a trigger to receive one byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data into the receive buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC. Once this reception is complete, an interrupt is generated, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main frequency serial data consists of three bytes per packet. The first byte is assigned the status, the second byte is assigned the mode, and the third byte is assigned a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values and adding them together.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing starts, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in Figure 223 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which one byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In step S1200, the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, meaning it is within the period in which it can receive 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. If it does so, it retrieves the 1 byte of information received from the reception buffer of the peripheral control IC's serial I/O port (step S1202) and adds a value of 1 to the receive counter SRXC (incrementing it, step S1204). This receive counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. Its value is 1 when the first byte of the main frequency serial data, the status, is retrieved from the receive buffer; its value is 2 when the second byte, the mode, is retrieved; and its value is 3 when the third byte, the sum value, is retrieved. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is valued at 3, that is, whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determination checks whether the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

In step S1206, the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the receive counter SRXC is not valued at 3, meaning that it has not yet retrieved the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) in sequence from the receive buffer. In this case, the CPU sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and terminates this routine. Setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208 establishes a period during which the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the receive counter SRXC is valued at 3, that is, that it has sequentially retrieved the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data) from the receive buffer, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). This calculation treats the status (the first byte of the main frequency serial data) and the mode (the second byte of the main frequency serial data), which were already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, as numerical values and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, step S1214 determines whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already extracted from the receive buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. The sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already extracted from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the gaming hall, and since the game balls become charged by rubbing against each other and generate noise through electrostatic discharge, the pachinko machine 1 is in an environment susceptible to noise.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 considers the status assigned as the first byte of the received main frequency serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main frequency serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main frequency serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main frequency serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been altered to a non-standard value due to noise interference.

In step S1214, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the sum value (the third byte of the main frequency serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202) matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status (as assigned to the first byte of the received main frequency serial data) and the mode (as assigned to the second byte of the main frequency serial data) in the peripheral control IC's RAM (step S1216), and terminates this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1200, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period for receiving 1 byte (8 bits) of information from the main frequency serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 has exceeded the time limit, or in the determination in step S1214, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main frequency serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, then this routine terminates.

[21-5. Peripheral Control Unit Power Outage Warning Signal Interrupt Processing]
Next, we will describe the peripheral control unit's power outage warning signal interrupt processing, which is executed when a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 to the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit's power outage warning signal interrupt processing starts, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in Figure 224, and then determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination in step S1302, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it terminates this routine.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1302, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). This determination checks whether 2 microseconds have elapsed since the timer started in step S1300. In the determination in step S1304, if 2 microseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control IC's CPU returns to step S1302 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it terminates this routine. However, if it determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to step S1304 to determine whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, the determination in step S1304 checks whether the power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit's power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine began.

In step S1304, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the start of this routine, the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing, and performs power saving processing (step S1306). This power saving processing sequentially performs actions such as turning off the backlight of the display device 1600, turning off the excitation of motors and solenoids on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By reducing the overall power consumption of the pachinko machine 1 system, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, the time during which the peripheral control IC's CPU can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception waiting process (step S1308). This command reception waiting process assumes that the main control board 1310 is transmitting various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds to allow the peripheral control IC to receive the transmitted commands. Upon receiving a command, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command backup process (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the peripheral control IC's RAM are copied to a backup area for steady-state processing provided in the peripheral control IC's RAM.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). This WDT clear process outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1312, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, or if it proceeds to step S1314 and then returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continuously determines indefinitely whether or not a power outage warning signal has been input. By continuously determining indefinitely in this way, in the determination in step S1312, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the peripheral control IC's CPU is reset. Conversely, in the determination in step S1312, if the peripheral control IC's CPU determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs the WDT clearing process in step S1314, and the peripheral control IC's CPU is not reset. Note that if the peripheral control IC's CPU is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 220 will start again.

Thus, if the power outage warning signal input continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is executed in step S1314, preventing the peripheral control IC's CPU from resetting just before a power outage occurs. Conversely, if the power outage warning signal input does not continue in the infinite loop and is released as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of a clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's power outage warning signal interrupt processing routine is incorrectly started due to noise, and the noise persists for more than 2 microseconds, causing the system to pass the determination in step S1302, if the power outage warning signal input does not continue in the infinite loop and is released as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, resulting in a reset of the peripheral control IC's CPU. This allows the system to automatically reset and recover from such noise.

[22. Control Processing of the Main Control Board]
Next, an example of control processing performed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Figure 225 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric mechanism control processing (step S114) described above.

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in Figure 225, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the first start gate passage process, such as obtaining the first special random number for the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol hold memory area of the RAM, under the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is ON (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231) (step S232). Furthermore, under the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is ON (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), it performs the second start gate passage process, such as obtaining the second special random number for the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold memory area of the RAM (step S234).

Next, it is determined whether the "Big Win Execution" flag, which indicates that the game is controlled to a big win state, is set (step S235). If the "Big Win Execution" flag is set, the big win control process (step S235A) is executed to control the game state. In the big win control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display pattern when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop moving indicates a "15R big win," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize slot 2005 according to the 15R big win state. Furthermore, when the pattern indicates a "5R big win," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize slot 2005 according to the 5R big win state. And when the pattern indicates a "2R big win," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the large prize slot 2005 according to the 2R big win state.

Furthermore, in the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the jackpot entry point 2005, the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter are set. The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state. It is set when the 2R jackpot game state ends based on the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops moving during the time-saving state, when the result of the lottery process suggests a "2R jackpot," when the 5R jackpot game state ends based on the result suggesting a "5R jackpot," and when the 15R jackpot game state ends during or outside of the time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset when the next jackpot occurs, or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter becomes "0," by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 236 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown), which will be described later.

Furthermore, the time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will change, which represents the number of times the time-saving state will continue. When the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game, the number of times this time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot game ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the special symbols change until its counter value reaches "0". However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0", it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 236 (described later) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

Furthermore, if the "Big Win Execution" flag is not set, the first special symbol process, including a lottery process related to the display mode when the first special symbol's display stops, is executed, provided that the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area, is "0" (step S237). Then, the second special symbol process, including a lottery process related to the display mode when the second special symbol's display stops, is executed, provided that the value of the second special symbol reserve counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S237). Thus, in this example, the system is configured to prioritize the display of the second special symbol's variation when the value of the second special symbol reserve counter is not "0".

Figure 226 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first start port passage process (step S232) described above.

Now, in the process of step S231 described above, if the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the first start port 2002, then, as shown in Figure 226, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S241, first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuating random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 retrieves a counter value from the main control's built-in RAM, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold memory area, and determines whether the first hold memory number is at its maximum value (upper limit) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If, in step S242, it is determined that the first hold memory number is not at its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a new hold state. Specifically, in step S243, the first special hold counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, in step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol hold memory area corresponding to the counter value of the first special hold counter in the main control's built-in RAM.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a pre-determination process (step S245) to determine, based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S241, whether the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and, if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach animation as a game animation to be executed on the performance display device 1600, or the type of game animation to be executed (type of fluctuation pattern), before starting the fluctuation display corresponding to the initial win. The process then terminates.

However, if, during the process in step S242, it is determined that the first reserved memory count has reached its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol will not be newly reserved. In other words, by terminating the process without executing steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol will not be newly placed in a reserved state.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002, the number of reserved balls changes. The two LEDs on the first special reserved ball indicator in the function display unit 1400 are updated to correspond to the new reserved ball count. Simultaneously, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command to specify the new reserved ball count (first reserved ball count specification command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4)) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 displays the new reserved ball count on the performance display device 1600 based on its receipt of the first reserved ball count specification command 0-4 (special symbol 1 memory command 0-4).

Figure 227 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the above-mentioned pre-determination process for game effects (step S245). When the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a starts the pre-determination process, it compares a pre-determination table (not shown) with the random numbers obtained in step S241—specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number—to determine whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot is achieved, and, if not, whether to execute a reach animation as a game effect on the game effect display device 1600, or the type of game effect to be executed (step S261).

Then, a pre-determination command is set according to the identified pre-determination information (whether or not it will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether or not a reach animation will be executed as a game animation on the animation display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game animation to be executed), the type of special random number acquired (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the acquired special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the animation pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S245 of the first start gate passage process, a first special symbol pre-determination command is set according to the identified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved memory (value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) described above, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. This allows the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp pre-determination information before the variation display corresponding to the initial win occurs. This information includes the number of reserved symbols stored in relation to the initial win in the first start slot 2002, whether the display result of the special symbol variation based on the initial win is a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, and if not a jackpot, whether a reach animation is executed as a game animation on the performance display device 1600, and the type of game animation to be executed.

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to store pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command when it receives one from the main control board 1310. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information related to the variation display of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the first hold memory area has 1 to 4 memory areas corresponding to the number of hold memories. The peripheral control IC stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command sequentially, starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When a pre-determination command is received while pre-determination information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the notified pre-determination information is stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) memory area. Upon receiving a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the pre-determination information stored in the first memory area of the first hold memory area is discarded according to the received first variation pattern command, and the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area is moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) memory area (the pre-determination information stored in the hold memory area is shifted). This ensures that the pre-determination information for the first special symbol is stored in a way that allows for the identification of the order in which the hold for the start of variation display occurred, and that the earliest pre-determination information is discarded sequentially.

In this way, when the variable display control is in a pending state, even though the variable display control remains in an unexecuted state (pending state), the expected probability of a big win (pseudo-winning probability) of that variable display control can be announced in advance at predetermined timings, such as when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display shifts in response to the consumption of the pending display.

Figure 228 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second start port passage process (step S234) described above.

Now, in the process of step S233 described above, if the second start port sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, then, as shown in Figure 228, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S251, first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuating random number from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 retrieves the counter value from the main control's built-in RAM using the second special reserve counter, and determines whether the second reserve memory is at its maximum value (upper limit) of "1" based on this counter value (step S252). If, in step S252, it is determined that the second reserve memory is not at its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new reserve state. Specifically, in step S253, the second special reserve counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, in step S254, each random number obtained in step S251 is stored in the second special symbol reserve memory area of the main control's built-in RAM, corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserve counter.

However, if, during the process in step S252, it is determined that the second reserved memory count has reached its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol will not be newly reserved. In other words, by terminating the process without executing steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol will not be newly placed in a reserved state.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second reserved ball count changes. The two LEDs on the second special reserved ball indicator in the function display unit 1400 are updated to reflect this change. Simultaneously, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) sets a command to specify the second reserved ball count (second reserved ball count specification command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1)) and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved ball count on the performance display device 1600 based on its receipt of the second reserved ball count specification command 0-1 (special symbol 2 memory command 0-1).

Thus, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the upper limit of the first reserved ball memory, based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002, is set to "4," while the upper limit of the second reserved ball memory, based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 2004, is set to "1." Furthermore, the second start port 2004 allows for the entry of numerous game balls during the time-saving state. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, even though the upper limit of the second reserved ball memory is set to "1," the machine prevents situations that are disadvantageous to the player, such as prolonged periods without the second special symbol variation display, or prolonged periods where the second reserved ball memory is at its upper limit, resulting in the player not having an opportunity to win a jackpot even when a game ball enters the second start port 2004.

Figure 229 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 are the same program module, differing only in the random numbers and tables used for determination. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 will be explained here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag mentioned above.

1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process is performed regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S280).
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process is performed to determine the display mode when the first special symbol's fluctuation control is stopped, based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped.
3. First variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed regarding the variation pattern of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1400 based on the fluctuating random number, and the variation pattern of the performance display executed on the performance display device 1600 in accordance with the special symbol.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S283) which waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400 stops.
5. First special symbol stop processing (step S284) to stop the display of the first special symbol so that the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped, determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the first special symbol when the control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is operated in the main control side power-on processing (see Figure 210) to indicate that the above-mentioned first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed.

Figure 230 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal processing of the first special pattern (step S280) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in Figure 230, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, as the process of step S301, whether or not there is variable display control for the first special symbol that is in a reserved state, based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter. If, as a result, it is determined that there is variable display control for the first special symbol that is in a reserved state, then as the process of step S302, the main control MPU 1310a reads from the RAM the random number stored in the earliest memory area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Next, in steps S303 and S304, the first special reserve counter is counted down, and the random numbers related to the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol stops (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variation random number) stored in each memory area of the first special symbol reserve memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold memory area has four memory areas, 1 to 4. Random numbers extracted in response to a starting win are stored sequentially starting from the first (earliest) memory area. When a starting win occurs while random numbers are stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) memory area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the (n+1)th (n=1 to 3) memory area. When the start condition for the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first memory area is met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) memory area are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the hold for the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be identified and stored, and the hold for the variable display control is released sequentially, starting from the earliest hold (the first hold to occur).

Then, as part of step S305, a win determination process is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out, which is the lottery process for determining whether or not to win the jackpot. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281), this process terminates.

Figure 231 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit detection process (step S305) described above.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the hit determination table shown in Figure 232(A) with a special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 if the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing if the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The win determination table shown in Figure 232(A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low probability time-saving state)), and a high-probability jackpot determination table used when the game state is high probability (high probability time-saving state). Furthermore, in the low-probability win determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated such that they match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a jackpot at a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6; they match the jackpot determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a minor win at a minor win probability of 3/319; and all other first special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating that they are misses. Furthermore, in this example, within the second special symbol process, the low-probability win judgment table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is associated such that the second special random number matches the jackpot judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won a jackpot at a jackpot probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6; matches the minor win judgment value indicating that the second special random number has won a minor win at a minor win probability of 144/319; and matches the loss judgment value indicating that any other second special random number is a loss. In other words, the win determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of determining a minor win compared to the win determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number. This ensures that the player is more favorably affected when the second special symbol is displayed based on a start-up entry into the second start-up slot 2004 than when the first special symbol is displayed based on a start-up entry into the first start-up slot 2002. Furthermore, the win determination table during high probability is configured to increase the jackpot probability for each setting value tenfold compared to the win determination table during low probability.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, after comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol), determines that a jackpot has been won (step S312). If it does so, it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the spin has resulted in a jackpot (step S313), and terminates the hit determination process.

Furthermore, if the comparison between the selected win determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, or the second special random number read in the normal processing of the second special symbol) determines that it is a minor win (step S314), a minor win flag is set to indicate that the spin has resulted in a minor win (step S315), and the win determination process ends.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win is achieved, i.e., if it is determined to be a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control unit and includes a reach determination table for when the game state is in a time-saving state, and a reach determination table for when the game state is not in a time-saving state. In the reach determination table for the time-saving state, each of the 71 reach random numbers is associated such that one reach random number matches a reach determination value indicating a reach, and 71 reach random numbers match a reach determination value indicating no reach.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for non-time-saving states, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers set in the reach determination table for time-saving states, are associated with the reach determination value indicating a reach, while the 67 types of reach random numbers are associated with the reach determination value indicating no reach. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating a reach is higher in non-time-saving states than in time-saving states.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, after comparing the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316), determines that the result is a miss (step S317). If it does so, it sets a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is a reach and terminates processing (step S318).

Figure 233 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in Figure 233, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol's display stops, that is, the result of the above-mentioned win determination process (step S305). The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether the jackpot flag is set (step S321) or whether the minor win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the random number of the first symbol read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in Figure 232(B), and then determines the manner in which the variation control of the first special symbol stops (the stopping symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S322).

in particular,
1. After the large prize slot 2005 is left open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005, the game is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds). After the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state in which the execution period of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) variation display is shortened compared to normal until the variation display is executed 77 times, and the special lottery result is drawn at a higher probability than normal. 2. The opening and closing pattern is repeated five times (five rounds) to control the game into a 5R jackpot state where game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. This is done after the large prize slot 2005 has been left open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. After the jackpot state ends, the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed 77 times, shortening the duration of the display of these symbols compared to normal.
3. The opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to control the game to a 2R jackpot state in which game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. This is done when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when it has been detected that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. If the game is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ends if a jackpot does not occur within 77 times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed after the end of the jackpot state. If the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot state.
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

Furthermore, if a jackpot flag is set during the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second symbol random number read during the second special symbol normal processing with the jackpot symbol determination table shown in Figure 232(B), and the manner in which the second special symbol's variation control stops (the stop symbol of the second special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.
in particular,
1. After the large prize slot 2005 is left open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005, the game is controlled to a 15R jackpot game state in which game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds). After the jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state in which the execution period of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) variation display is shortened compared to normal until the variation display is executed 77 times, and the special lottery result is drawn at a higher probability than normal. 2. The opening and closing pattern is repeated five times (five rounds) to control the game into a 5R jackpot state where game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. This is done after the large prize slot 2005 has been left open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. After the jackpot state ends, the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed 77 times, shortening the duration of the display of these symbols compared to normal.
3. The opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (2 rounds) to control the game to a 2R jackpot state in which game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. This is done when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or when it has been detected that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005. If the game is controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a time-saving state in which the game ends if a jackpot does not occur within 77 times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed after the end of the jackpot state. If the game is controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 2R jackpot state, the game is controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot state.
The winner will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

Furthermore, the jackpot symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, assigns 8 judgment values when it results in a 15R probability variation jackpot, 100 judgment values when it results in a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 92 judgment values when it results in a 2R jackpot. In other words, when a jackpot is obtained through the lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% chance of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, assigns 92 judgment values when it results in a 15R probability variation jackpot, 100 judgment values when it results in a 5R time-saving jackpot, and 8 judgment values when it results in a 2R jackpot. In other words, if the lottery based on the second special random number results in a jackpot, there is a 46% probability of a 15R probability-increasing jackpot, a 50% probability of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% probability of a 2R jackpot. Thus, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number is configured such that the probability of determining a 15R probability-increasing jackpot is higher in the second symbol random number determination table compared with the first symbol random number determination table. This configuration makes the player more favorable when the second special symbol variation display based on a starting entry into the second starting entry 2004 is executed than when the first special symbol variation display based on a starting entry into the first starting entry 2002 is executed.

Furthermore, once the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping symbols corresponding to that type of jackpot are determined as the stopping pattern of the first special symbol. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbols will be set to 2R jackpot symbols; if a 5R jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbols will be set to 5R jackpot symbols; and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the jackpot symbols will be set to 15R jackpot symbols.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the minor jackpot flag is set (step S324), compares the random number of the first symbol read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol with the minor jackpot symbol determination table shown in Figure 232(C) to determine the type of minor jackpot, and then determines the manner in which the variation control of the first special symbol stops (the stopping symbol of the first special symbol) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S325).

in particular,
1. The opening and closing pattern of the prize entry opening 2006 is executed twice to control the game to a state where the game ball can easily enter the prize entry opening 2006. When the game ball received in the prize entry opening 2006 is distributed to the V-entry opening 2007 and detected by the V-entry opening sensor 3003, the large prize entry opening 2005 is opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or the game ball enters the large prize entry opening 2005. When the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have entered the slot, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the game state to a 15R jackpot state in which the game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. After the jackpot state ends, the execution period of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened compared to normal until the variation display is executed 77 times, and the game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state in which the special lottery result is drawn at a higher probability than normal. The system controls the game to a minor win state where game balls can easily enter the prize entry opening 2006 by executing an opening and closing pattern twice, where the prize entry opening 2006 is opened for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then closed. When game balls received in the prize entry opening 2006 are distributed to the V prize entry opening 2007 and detected by the V prize entry opening sensor 3003, the large prize entry opening 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds), or game balls are placed in the large prize entry opening 2005. When the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have entered the slot, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the game to a 15R jackpot state in which the game balls can easily enter the large prize slot 2005. If the game was controlled to a time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot state, the game will be controlled to a time-saving state that ends if a jackpot does not occur within 77 times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed after the end of the jackpot state. If the game was controlled to a non-time-saving state before the start of the 15R jackpot state, the game will be controlled to a normal state after the end of the jackpot state. The game will be controlled to one of two types of minor wins.

The minor win symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, has 200 judgment values assigned to it when it results in a first minor win. That is, if the lottery result based on the first special random number determines a minor win, there is a 100% probability of it being a first minor win, and it will not result in a second minor win. On the other hand, the minor win symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, has 20 judgment values assigned to it when it results in a first minor win, and 180 judgment values assigned to it when it results in a second minor win. That is, if the lottery result based on the second special random number determines a minor win, there is a 10% probability of it being a first minor win and a 90% probability of it being a second minor win.

Furthermore, once the type of minor win is determined, the stopping symbols corresponding to that type of minor win are determined as the stopping pattern of the first special symbol. Specifically, if the first minor win is determined, the minor win symbol is determined as the first minor win symbol; if the second minor win is determined, the minor win symbol is determined as the second minor win symbol.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines a losing symbol if neither the jackpot flag nor the minor jackpot flag is set (step S327). After this determination of the stopping symbol is completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a judgment result notification command corresponding to each lottery result (step S328) to send the lottery result (indicating either the type of jackpot, minor jackpot, near miss, or loss (which may also indicate the pattern of the stopping symbol for the first special symbol)) to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, in step S329, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (displaying the left, center, and right decorative symbols in a variation pattern and stopping them in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → center decorative symbol (in some cases, the left, center, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variation pattern synchronized with the same symbol and stopped simultaneously)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stopped symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols displayed on the performance display device 1600 stops as follows: if a minor win or a 2R big win is identified from the received judgment result notification command, it will be determined to be the minor win symbol ("Final Battle"); if a 5R time-saving big win is identified, it will be determined to be the 5R time-saving big win symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same even number from "0" to "9"); and if a 15R probability-changing big win is identified, it will be determined to be the 15R probability-changing big win symbol (a combination in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are the same odd number from "0" to "9"). Furthermore, if a missed reach is identified, the system determines a losing symbol with a reach (a combination where the left and right decorative symbols are identical symbols from "0" to "9" and the middle decorative symbol is different; a missed reach symbol). If a loss is identified, the system determines a losing symbol without a reach (a combination where at least the left and right decorative symbols are different). At the end of the game animation (when the animation finishes), the system controls the display of the animation display device 1600 to show the determined stopped symbols.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to a time-saving state for up to 77 times after a jackpot game state, during which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable state. However, the time-saving state may be terminated based on a predetermined number of jackpots occurring after the transition to the time-saving state. Specifically, if the machine is controlled to a time-saving state after a jackpot game state, and then a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur, the machine may be controlled to a normal state without switching to a time-saving state after the predetermined number of jackpot game states have ended. Furthermore, even if the number of jackpots is less than the predetermined number, the machine may be controlled to a non-time-saving state during the jackpot game state, and then the time-saving state may be switched again after the jackpot game state has ended.

Figure 234 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in Figure 234, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table for big wins (not shown) corresponding to the type of big win determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process if the big win flag is set (step S341) (step S342), selects a variation pattern table for small wins (not shown) corresponding to the type of small win determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process if the small win flag is set (step S343) (step S344), selects a variation pattern table for reach (not shown) if the reach flag is set (step S345) (step S346), and selects a variation pattern table for misses (not shown) if neither the big win flag nor the reach flag is set, i.e., it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach effect is not performed) (step S347).

Then, by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol, the variation pattern to be executed is determined (step S348). A variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 to start the determined variation pattern, and the variation display of the first special symbol on the function display unit 1400's first special symbol display unit begins (step S349). Furthermore, once the main control MPU 1310a determines the variation pattern, it sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1400 and the above-mentioned performance display device 1600 perform performance control only for the variation time thus determined.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each judgment result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Furthermore, each variation pattern set in the variation pattern table stores multiple variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for controlling the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), associated with each of the variation random numbers. The main control MPU 1310a then compares the selected variation pattern table from the multiple types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the judgment results based on the special random numbers and symbol random numbers with the variation random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special symbol. By obtaining the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. This allows the lottery processing for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to be performed. The above-mentioned variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Furthermore, in this example's reel-reach pattern table, the type of reel-reach animation to be executed is determined by comparing a judgment value indicating which reel-reach animation to execute with a randomly generated variable. For example, among the reel-reach animations, the super reel-reach animation has a higher probability of winning than the normal reel-reach animation, and when the super reel-reach animation is executed, the player's expectation of winning increases.

Furthermore, once the variable display control of the first special symbol begins, the next step, S351, determines whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of consecutive time-saving states, is "0". If this counter value is not "0", the time-saving count counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0" (step S353). If this result shows that the counter value is "0", a time-saving end flag is set to indicate the termination of the time-saving state control (time-saving control) (step S354).

If the time-saving count counter is determined to be "0" in step S351, or if the time-saving count counter is determined to be "0" in step S353, the process proceeds to step S355. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated to initiate the process to the first special symbol variation process (step S283), this process terminates.

In this example, in the losing spin pattern table, the special symbol spin pattern is set such that, during the time-saving mode, the spin time information for the special symbols, set to approximately 1 second, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while during the non-time-saving mode, the spin time information for the special symbols, set to approximately 12 seconds, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the spin time information for the special symbols is set so that the time required for controlling the spin display of the special symbols is extremely short compared to the spin pattern selected during the non-time-saving mode.

Figure 235 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S283) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in Figure 235, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first decrements the variation timer, which is set to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern lottery process (step S282), by 1 as the process of step S371. Then, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, that the lottery-determined variation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in the process of step S373, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated to proceed to the first special symbol stop process (step S284), this process ends.

Figure 236 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S284) described above.

When the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in Figure 236, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display unit 1400, and simultaneously sets a stop display command as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S382).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving termination flag (step S383) and the time-saving flag (step S385) when the time-saving termination flag is set (step S384). This causes the time-saving control (control in time-saving state) to end and the non-time-saving control (control in normal state) to begin when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example).

Furthermore, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command to indicate the start of a jackpot game (step S387), and sets the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game (the time for displaying an indication that the jackpot game is about to start) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown in the diagram, step S388 also executes a process to set the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot in the jackpot counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds. In the jackpot control process described later, the jackpot counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed, and when the jackpot counter reaches "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been executed and controls the game to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described later, the pre-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S401) and the process during the jackpot opening (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot count counter reaches "0". When the round ends in the jackpot opening process (step S402), the jackpot count counter is deducted by 1, and based on this reaching "0", the process transitions to the post-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S403), executing the control to end the jackpot game.

Then, a "Big Win Execution in Progress" flag is set to indicate that a big win game is currently being played (step S389). The big win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and each command is prepared individually according to the type of big win. In step S387, the big win start command (15R probability variation big win start command, 5R time reduction big win start command, 2R big win start command) is set according to the type of big win (15R probability variation big win, 5R time reduction big win, 2R big win). As a result, the effects of the big win game according to the type of big win instructed by the big win start command are executed by the effects display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol process's second special symbol stop process, the jackpot start command (15R probability variation jackpot start command, 5R time-saving jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 5R time-saving jackpot, 2R jackpot).

Furthermore, the "Big Win Execution" flag, which indicates that a big win game is in progress, is reset when the big win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the large prize slot 2005 according to the type of big win is completed in the post-opening processing of the large prize slot (step S403) of the big win control processing (step S235A) (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern 2, 5, or 15 times after the large prize slot 2005 has been left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005) (for all rounds that can be executed in the big win game). When the "Big Win Execution" flag is reset, the big win control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process (step S114). At the same time, the function display unit 1400 becomes capable of displaying the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display and the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display.

Furthermore, if the jackpot flag is not set (step S386), and the minor jackpot flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a minor jackpot start command to indicate the start of the minor jackpot game (step S391), and sets the waiting time until the start of the minor jackpot game (the time for displaying information that the minor jackpot game is starting) in the interval timer (step S392). Then, it sets a minor jackpot execution flag to indicate that the minor jackpot game is in progress (step S393). The minor jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and each command is prepared individually according to the type of minor jackpot. In step S391, the minor jackpot start command (first minor jackpot start command, second minor jackpot start command) according to the type of minor jackpot (first minor jackpot, second minor jackpot) is set. As a result, the animations for the mini-win game, corresponding to the type of mini-win instructed by the mini-win start command, are executed by the animation display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, and speakers, etc. Similarly, in the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process, mini-win start commands (first mini-win start command, second mini-win start command) corresponding to the type of mini-win (first mini-win, second mini-win) are set.

Furthermore, the "minor win in progress" flag, which indicates that a minor win game is currently being played, is reset when the minor win game ends. Specifically, this reset occurs during the minor win processing (step S411) of the minor win control processing (step S236A), which is described later, when the opening and closing control of the prize entry slot 2006 according to the type of minor win (for example, an opening and closing pattern that repeats twice, where the prize entry slot 2006 is briefly opened (for example, 80 ms) and then closed) is completed. The reset of the "minor win in progress" flag prevents the execution of the minor win control processing (step S236A) in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric prize control processing (step S114), while enabling the display of the first special symbol's variation on the first special symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400 and the display of the second special symbol's variation on the second special symbol display unit of the function display unit 1400.

Furthermore, if the minor win flag is not set, i.e., if it is a loss, the waiting time until the next special symbol variation display begins (the time the special symbol's stopped symbol is displayed) is set in the interval timer (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

When steps S386 to S394 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag to its initial value, which is the normal process for the first special symbol, and then terminates this process (step S395).

Figure 237 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A) described above. In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. Pre-opening process for the big prize slot (step S401) which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will transition to the big win state based on the fact that the state in which the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stop changing has become a big win symbol, or until the next round begins.
2. The process of keeping the large prize slot open (step S402) involves controlling the large prize slot 2005 to an open state based on the fact that the pattern of the special symbol display has stopped becoming a jackpot symbol, or based on the start of the next round, and closing the large prize slot 2005 after it has been open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize slot 2005.
3. Post-opening processing of the big prize slot (step S403) waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big win game state has ended when all rounds are completed.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned jackpot process flag is operated in step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process for the jackpot opening (step S401) should be performed. In the jackpot opening process (step S402), at the start of the round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be open, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and at the end of the round in which the jackpot opening 2005 is controlled to be closed, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set. The jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effects corresponding to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, etc.

[23. Rainbow-colored effect]
Next, we will explain the rainbow effect that is performed when there is a high probability of a big win (for example, when a big win is achieved (big win confirmation effect) or when the decorative symbols become a reach (reach notification)). The rainbow effect in this example is an effect in which the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined form (pattern, character, letters, etc.) using multiple colors, then rapidly changes the display color in an arbitrary display area of the effect display device 1600, and in conjunction with the transition of the display color in the effect display device 1600, the LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 emit light in multiple colors (at least two or more colors), and rapidly changes the emitted light color. The following describes a system in which the performance display device 1600 and the LEDs on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are all linked to perform a rainbow-colored effect, causing a predetermined display color on the performance display device 1600 and the light emission color of the LEDs on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to transition in a short time. However, it is also possible to transition the display color and light emission color in a short time using only one of the LEDs on the performance display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame 3, or the LEDs on the various decorative boards installed on the game board 5, or any combination thereof.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 238(A), in this example, when the rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas, the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display pattern is displayed with different colors in each area. Then, as the variation time progresses, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e, as well as the size and shape of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, are changed in a short period of time.

Furthermore, the rainbow effect displayed on the display device 1600 can take the form of not having information such as characters or text across the entire area of the display device 1600. For example, as shown in Figure 238(A), the display area of the display device 1600 can be divided into multiple areas by multiple striped lines (in the example shown in Figure 238(A), there are five display areas: the first display area a to the fifth display area e), or as shown in Figure 238(B), the display area of the display device 1600 can be divided into multiple areas by multiple radial lines (in the example shown in Figure 238(B), there are five display areas: the first display area a to the sixth display area f), and the first to fifth display areas can be colored with different colors for each area, and the colors of some or all of these multiple areas can be changed in a short time. It may also be done by coloring multiple characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) or letters in different colors for each character and/or letter (for each meaningful block (component) such as a character, letter, word, etc.) (for example, displaying the letters "CHANCE" with the first "C" in white, the "H" in yellow, the "A" in green, the "N" in blue, the second "C" in purple, and the "E" in red), or dividing a single character or letter into multiple areas and coloring each area in a different color (for example, displaying each petal in a different color, displaying a person's skin in stripes of multiple colors, or, as shown in Figure 238(C), displaying the letters "CHANCE" with seven imaginary lines from line 1 to line 7 The letters of "CHANCE" are divided into six areas: area a (the area enclosed by lines 1 and 2 of the letters of "CHANCE") to area f (the area enclosed by lines 6 and 7 of the letters of "CHANCE"). Each area is displayed in a different color, making each letter of "CHANCE" appear in multiple colors in a striped pattern (for example, area 1 a (the area enclosed by lines 1 and 2 of the letters of "CHANCE") is "white", area 2 b (the area enclosed by lines 2 and 3 of the letters of "CHANCE") is "yellow", area 3 c (the area enclosed by lines 3 and 4 of the letters of "CHANCE") is "green", and area 4 d (the area enclosed by lines 4 and 5 of the letters of "CHANCE") is "blue"). For example, the fifth area e (the area enclosed by lines 5 and 6 of the word "CHANCE") may be displayed in purple, and the sixth area f (the area enclosed by lines 6 and 7 of the word "CHANCE") may be displayed in red. The color or shape of these forms, or both, may be changed in a short time. Alternatively, the size and shape of each of the multiple areas displayed in a predetermined color may be changed, or their display positions may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display area of the display device 1600. (The areas where the background other than the word "CHANCE" is displayed may not be displayed in the same way as the word "CHANCE" (e.g., the display may not change in a short time).)

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 239 and 240, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards installed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are divided into multiple groups, and the illumination of each group can be controlled. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards installed on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are illuminated in predetermined colors for each group. The illumination color of each group is then changed rapidly as the variation time progresses.

In this example, as shown in Figure 239, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are as follows: the multiple LEDs mounted on the front front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating the front front upper left logo decorative section 3122 form the first board illuminating group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the front front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating the front front left logo decorative section 3121, the front front upper left logo decorative section 3122, and the front front left sub-decorative section 3123 form the second board illuminating group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the front front lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating the front front lower logo decorative section 3167 form the third board illuminating group; the front front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating the front front lower middle decorative section 3161 form the front front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating the front front lower left inner decorative section 3163 form the front front lower left outer decorative section 3164 form the front front lower left outer decorative section 3164 Multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating the rear front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the rear front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the rear front lower right outer decorative body 3166 form the fourth panel illuminating group. Multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating the rear front right logo decorative body 3141 form the fifth panel illuminating group. Multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating the rear front upper right logo decorative body 3142 form the sixth panel illuminating group. When a rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, so that LEDs in the same group emit light of the same color, and LEDs in different groups emit light of different colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow-colored effect is not limited to dividing multiple LEDs mounted on the same board into the same group and controlling the light emission for each group, but may also be implemented by dividing LEDs mounted on the same board into different groups and controlling the light emission for each group. For example, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-bottom logo decoration substrate 3173, which illuminates the back-front-bottom logo decoration 3167 bearing the letters "Queen," may be divided into different groups for each letter and controlled for each group. Alternatively, each letter may be divided into multiple regions by predetermined imaginary lines and grouped, with each group controlled for each region (for example, each letter of "Queen" could be divided into three regions: upper, middle, and lower. The LEDs belonging to the upper region on the back-front-bottom logo decoration substrate 3173 could be controlled as the upper group, the LEDs belonging to the middle region as the middle group, and the LEDs belonging to the lower region as the lower group, thereby illuminating the letters "Queen" in a striped pattern).

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in Figure 240, the LEDs on the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are as follows: multiple LEDs mounted on the central decorative substrate 455, the left decorative substrate 456, and the right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top unit 450 constitute frame light-emitting group A; multiple LEDs mounted on the upper decorative substrate 422 of the left side of the door frame unit 420 constitute frame light-emitting group B; multiple LEDs mounted on the lower decorative substrate 423 of the left side of the door frame unit 420 and the left decorative substrate 273 provided behind the left decorative lens 272 constitute frame light-emitting group C; and multiple LEDs mounted on the outer peripheral decorative substrate 320 of the performance operation unit 300 constitute frame light-emitting group 3 20a. The multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decorative substrate 355 and the LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative substrate 364 are divided into frame light-emitting group D. Multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the door frame right side unit 430 and the right side decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right side decorative lens 277 are divided into frame light-emitting group E. Multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the door frame right side unit 430 are divided into frame light-emitting group F. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, so that LEDs in the same group emit light of the same color, and LEDs in different groups emit light of a different color.

Figure 241 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts variation effects such as the variation display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbols, and controls the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 in conjunction with the display on the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect, and the elapsed time since the start of the variation display of the decorative symbols reaches a predetermined timing t1, at least the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer decorative board 355 of the button, the LED 364a of the inner decorative board 364 of the button, and the rear upper movable decorative The LEDs that illuminate the first decorative section 3211 on the back upper side of the five 7-segment display sections of the body 3210, which are arranged horizontally, are all turned off. The performance display device 1600 then executes a button operation prompting display (for example, "Press the button!") on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Simultaneously, it controls the illumination of multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decorative substrate 320 of the performance operation section of the performance operation unit 300, multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer decorative substrate 355 of the button, and LEDs 364a on the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button.

Then, at timing t2, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, or if the button validity period (e.g., 5 seconds) elapses without the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), the display area of the performance display device 1600 is divided into the first display area a to the fifth display area e, and a rainbow-colored performance display mode is displayed, with each of the first to fifth display areas e displayed in a different color. The LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the frame emission groups A to F, and the LEDs included in each group are made to emit light in a different color for each group. The LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 are divided into the first to sixth board emission groups, and the LEDs included in each group are made to emit light in a different color for each group.

Furthermore, in accordance with the passage of time, the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light emission colors of each frame light emission group A to frame light emission group F, and the light emission colors of each panel light emission group from the first to sixth panel light emission group are changed at predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds) (timing t2 to t100).

In this example, when the player presses the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 at timing t2, the button operation prompting performance (in this example, the performance displaying "Press the button!") being executed on the performance display device 1600 ends, the rotating decorative symbols are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right corner of the performance display device 1600, and the first display area a of the performance display device 1600 displays "white," the second display area b displays "yellow," the third display area c displays "green," the fourth display area d displays "blue," and the fifth display area e displays "purple." At predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the display area displaying "white" changes to "yellow," the display area displaying "yellow" changes to "green," the display area displaying "green" changes to "blue," the display area displaying "blue" changes to "purple," the display area displaying "purple" changes to "red," and the display area displaying "red" changes to "white."

Furthermore, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first light-emitting group on the game board 5 is illuminated in "white," the second light-emitting group in "yellow," the third light-emitting group in "green," the fourth light-emitting group in "blue," the fifth light-emitting group in "purple," and the sixth light-emitting group in "red." At predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" is changed to "yellow," the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" is changed to "green," the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" is changed to "blue," the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" is changed to "purple," the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" is changed to "red," and the light-emitting color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" is changed to "white."

Similarly, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the frame illumination group A on the door frame 3 is illuminated in "white," frame illumination group B in "yellow," frame illumination group C in "green," frame illumination group D in "blue," frame illumination group E in "purple," and frame illumination group F in "red." At predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" is changed to "yellow," the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" is changed to "green," the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" is changed to "blue," the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" is changed to "purple," the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" is changed to "red," and the illumination color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" is changed to "white."

In this way, by controlling the LED illumination of the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 to sequentially switch between multiple illumination colors in short intervals, it becomes possible to visually create the illusion of a rainbow of colors, enabling an impactful illumination effect. Furthermore, by linking and controlling the display on the display device 1600 with the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the game board 5 and the door frame 3, it is possible to display multiple colors on the display device 1600, or to illuminate the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 in multiple colors. By rapidly switching between the displayed and illuminated colors, an even more impactful effect than usual can be achieved.

In this example, the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups on the game board 5 are shown to be changed regularly in a predetermined order for each display area or group. However, the display colors or light-emitting colors of one or more of the following (or all of them) may be changed irregularly, while the remaining colors are changed regularly.

Furthermore, the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups are not limited to being changed in the same order. Alternatively, one or more combinations (or all of them) of the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups may be changed in a different order (for example, changing the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F in the order of "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow →...", and changing the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple →...").

Furthermore, the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups may be combined into a combination of multiple colors, with at least some of the colors differing (for example, the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F may be controlled to emit light with one of the following colors: "white," "yellow," "green," "blue," "purple," or "red," while the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups may be controlled to emit light with one of the following colors: "white," "orange," "yellow-green," "blue," "pink," or "red").

Furthermore, it is not limited to changing the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups on the game board 5 at the same timing (matching the timing of color changes). Alternatively, the timing of changing the display colors of the performance display device 1600, the timing of changing the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3, and the timing of changing the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups on the game board 5 in any combination (or all of them) may be changed at the same timing (for example, after 1 second), while the remaining timings are changed at different intervals (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

Furthermore, the period (predetermined period) between changing the display colors of the first to fifth display areas e of the display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth light-emitting groups on the game board 5, is not necessarily constant. Some or all of these periods may be varied. For example, the display and light-emitting colors may be changed every second at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) and every two seconds at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10, t98, t100).

In this example, prior to the rainbow effect, the LEDs that illuminate the first rear upper decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, are controlled to emit light. Specifically, as shown in Figure 241, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310 and controls the first rear upper decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, to be turned off during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, when the variable effect such as the variable display of decorative patterns is started in the effect display device 1600 until the button prompt effect is executed. When the button prompt effect is executed at timing t1, the first rear upper decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the rainbow effect. In this example, when the button operation prompting effect begins (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units on the upper rear decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light, causing the words "HOT!" to repeatedly flow from right to left across the five 7-segment display units.

Furthermore, if the button press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player during the execution of the button press promotion performance, or if the button validity period (e.g., 5 seconds) elapses without the button press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed and the button press promotion performance ends, and then the rainbow effect begins (timing t2), the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 will remain red without changing their illumination color until the rainbow effect ends (timing t2 to timing t100), and the words "Rainbow Chance!" will repeatedly flow from right to left across the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper first decorative section 3211. As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 are controlled to illuminate in red. Furthermore, in the rainbow effect, the LEDs belonging to frame illumination groups A through F, and the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel illumination groups, are controlled to emit red light in the same way as the five seven-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211. Therefore, although the illumination color of the five seven-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 is not changed, the player can be made to perceive that illumination control related to the rainbow effect is being performed.

Furthermore, around the first rear upper decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally, LEDs (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame illumination groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and LEDs (decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to the first to sixth panel illumination groups provided on the game board 5 are provided. This creates the impression that the illumination spreads around the five 7-segment display units of the first rear upper decorative section 3211, which are illuminated in red when the button operation promotion effect ends, thereby enhancing the effect and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this example, even after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100 to timing t101), the illumination control continues without changing the illumination color of the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear first decorative unit 3211. Specifically, after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100), for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach in the decorative symbols, the illumination control is set so that the words "Reach!" repeatedly flow from right to left across the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear first decorative unit 3211, or, while a reach occurs in the decorative symbols and the reach effect is being executed, the illumination control is set so that the words "Super Hot!" repeatedly flow from right to left across the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear first decorative unit 3211. In addition, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to turn off based on the cessation of the display of the changing decorative symbols. This allows the player to recognize that the changing effect has ended. Furthermore, after the display of the decorative symbols stops, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may be controlled to turn off after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In this case, the display of moving characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may also be stopped when the display of the decorative symbols stops. In this case as well, the player can recognize that the variation effect has ended because the display of moving characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 has stopped.

In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit light prior to the rainbow effect, and the illumination control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 continues even after the rainbow effect has ended. Therefore, the illumination control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, which is performed prior to the rainbow effect, can increase anticipation for the start of the rainbow effect, and the illumination control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, which continues even after the rainbow effect has ended, can increase anticipation for a big win.

Furthermore, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear first decorative unit 3211 only needs to be started at least prior to the rainbow effect and continue after the rainbow effect has ended. It may be started at any timing between the timing t0, when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, and the timing t2, when the rainbow effect begins (including when the light emission control is started at timing t0), or it may be ended at any timing between the timing t100, when the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, and the timing t101, when the light emission control is stopped (including when the light emission control is stopped at timing t101). Furthermore, even if the display of the decorative pattern stops, if the display of the decorative pattern starts again before a predetermined period has elapsed, the five 7-segment display units of the first upper rear decorative unit 3211 may not be controlled to turn off. In this case, when the display of the decorative pattern stops, the movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display units of the first upper rear decorative unit 3211 may be stopped (timing t101), and when the display of the decorative pattern starts, the characters displayed in the five 7-segment display units of the first upper rear decorative unit 3211 may be updated, and the movement display of the characters from right to left in the five 7-segment display units of the first upper rear decorative unit 3211 may be resumed (timing t0). Even in this case, the presence or absence of the display of the decorative pattern can be determined by the presence or absence of the movement display of the characters in the five 7-segment display units of the first upper rear decorative unit 3211.

Furthermore, the display on the upper rear first decorative section 3211 during the execution of the rainbow effect is not limited to those described above. For example, as a supplementary display to the variable decorative pattern display being performed on the performance display device 1600, which becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, a variable pattern display may be shown, or multiple LEDs may be controlled to blink in a predetermined lighting pattern to derive a pattern corresponding to the special lottery result after the execution of the rainbow effect (for example, when the decorative pattern is displayed as stopped). Alternatively, the number of LEDs that light up may be changed when predetermined increase or decrease conditions are met, such as when the player operates the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the execution of the variable pattern display. This makes it possible to avoid causing anxiety that the variable decorative pattern display is not being performed because it is difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, or anxiety that the special lottery result will not be derived. Also, the display of the decorative pattern on the performance display device 1600 may be hidden during the execution of the rainbow effect, and in this case as well, the above-mentioned anxiety can be avoided.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the rainbow effect starting upon the end of the button-operation prompting effect (either the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player during the execution of the button-operation prompting effect, or the button validity period (e.g., 5 seconds) elapses without the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed), the rainbow effect may also be started when predetermined execution conditions are met, without the execution of the button-operation prompting effect. For example, the rainbow effect may be started when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect, or when a period of no variation effect has elapsed since the end of the variation effect.

Furthermore, in this example, when the rainbow effect ends, a high percentage of the decorative symbols (including those that do not result in a reach state (so-called false alarms)) are displayed in a reach state (timing t100). Then, when the rainbow effect ends, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 disappears, and the reach effect is executed. Simultaneously, the illumination control of the rainbow effect for the LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel illumination groups on the game board 5 and the LEDs belonging to frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3 is terminated, and the illumination control on the effect display device 1600 is restored to the illumination mode corresponding to the reach effect displayed.

In this example, the rainbow effect is performed as a reach notification during the period from the start of the decorative symbol's movement display until the display of the reach state. Furthermore, the rainbow effect may be performed at a predetermined rate even when the decorative symbol does not result in a reach (this could be a win without the decorative symbol reaching, or a miss without the decorative symbol reaching), or when the decorative symbol reaches but does not result in a win. Alternatively, the rainbow effect may be performed only when a win is guaranteed (as a win confirmation effect). The timing of the effect is also not limited to a reach notification; it may be performed as a reach effect during the period from the display of the decorative symbol's reach state until the decorative symbol stops, or as a pre-announcement or other effect before the decorative symbol's movement begins, or independently of the decorative symbol's movement display (for example, as a customer-waiting demo effect performed when the decorative symbol's movement display does not begin for a predetermined period).

As mentioned above, the rainbow effect is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot, and it is an important effect that enhances the player's expectations. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted is characterized in order to make the colors of the LEDs controlled for the rainbow effect more vivid. Specifically, the game board 5 is equipped with multiple decorative boards that have LEDs whose illumination is controlled to produce a rainbow effect, namely, a front front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating the front front upper left logo decorative section 3122, a front front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating the front front left logo decorative section 3121, the front front upper left logo decorative section 3122, and the front front left sub-decorative section 3123, a front front lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating the front front lower logo decorative section 3167, a front front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating the front front lower middle decorative section 3161, a front front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating the front front lower left inner decorative section 3163, and a front front lower left outer decorative section 3164 The front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, the front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating the front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating the front right logo decorative part 3141, and the front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating the front upper right logo decorative part 3142 have a white solder resist (protective material) coating on their surface, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates are screen printed using inks of high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow). In other words, the multiple decorative circuit boards on the game board 5, which are equipped with LEDs whose illumination is controlled by a rainbow effect, are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflectivity. Furthermore, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components, as well as other decorative circuit boards, are screen-printed using inks with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow).

Furthermore, the door frame 3 is equipped with multiple decorative boards that have LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect, namely, the central decorative board 455 on the top of the door frame top unit 450, the left decorative board 456 on the top of the door frame top, the right decorative board 457 on the top of the door frame top, the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame left side unit 420, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame left side unit 420, the left decorative board 273 on the rear side of the left decorative lens 272, and the right side of the door frame The decorative substrate 433 on the lower right side of the door frame of the knit 430, the decorative substrate 278 on the right side of the dish-right decorative lens 277, and the decorative substrate 432 on the upper right side of the door frame of the door frame right side unit 430 are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces. Furthermore, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). In other words, the multiple decorative substrates mounted on the door frame 3, which are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, are coated with white solder resist (protective material), the color with the highest reflectivity, on their surfaces. Furthermore, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow).

Furthermore, the first rear-upper decorative substrate (not shown), on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display sections of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, is coated with white solder resist (protective material) on its surface. In addition, characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative substrates are screen printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (for example, yellow). However, while the multiple decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, which are equipped with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, are equipped with full-color LEDs, the first rear-upper decorative substrate is equipped with monochromatic LEDs (red in this example). Therefore, even when the LEDs on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are illuminated to create a rainbow effect, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative unit 3210 do not change their illumination color. Instead, they simply display letters, numbers, patterns, etc., in the same illumination color (red in this example). In other words, by not changing the illumination color of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative unit 3210 that display letters, numbers, patterns, etc., even when a rainbow effect is performed, the displayed letters, numbers, patterns, etc., are presented in a way that is easy for the player to see, thus preventing the player from receiving incorrect information.

Thus, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with white solder resist (protective material) to enhance the reflection efficiency. Therefore, even when multiple full-color LEDs are emitted in a wide variety of colors, it is possible to uniformly reflect all the light and produce vivid colors. The game board 5 is provided with the front left upper logo decoration section 3122, the front left logo decoration section 3121, the front left upper logo decoration section 3122, the front left sub-decoration section 3123, the front lower logo decoration section 3167, the front lower middle decoration section 3161, and the front lower left inner decoration section 3163. The rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166, the rear front right logo decorative element 3141, and the rear front upper right logo decorative element 3142 can each be illuminated more brightly. Furthermore, the door frame top unit 450, the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side unit 420, the plate left decorative lens 272, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate right decorative lens 277, and the door frame right side unit 430, all of which are provided on the door frame 3, can each be illuminated more brightly and vividly (clearly), enhancing the visual effect. Additionally, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative element 3211, which emit light in only one color (red in this example), can also be illuminated more brightly and vividly, enhancing the visual effect.

Furthermore, by using high-brightness and high-saturation inks (e.g., yellow) to screen print characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the implemented LEDs and other decorative substrates, it is possible to bring the reflective efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols closer together, resulting in a nearly uniform reflective efficiency on the substrate surface. This allows for uniform reflection of all light even when multiple full-color LEDs emit light in a variety of colors, suppressing uneven illumination in the illuminated decorations and enhancing the visual effect. Additionally, by reducing the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed characters and symbols, the characters and symbols screen-printed on the surface of the decorative substrate become less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the substrate, regardless of whether the LEDs are emitting light or not. This prevents players from seeing irrelevant information and diminishing their enjoyment of the game when they directly look at the LED-mounted surface of these decorative substrates. Furthermore, in conventional decorative substrates where letters and symbols are screen-printed using low-brightness and low-saturation (dark) inks such as black, even if the letters and symbols are not clearly visible when viewed through the lens covering the substrate, the lens itself may appear darkened, potentially resulting in a poor appearance. However, by screen-printing letters and symbols using high-brightness and high-saturation inks, the lens appears brighter, thus preventing a decrease in appearance. While it is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflectivity to white, any color other than low-brightness and low-saturation (dark colors, black, brown, etc.) such as yellow-green or light blue can achieve the above effect.

In the example above, all of the decorative substrates mounting LEDs with rainbow-colored light emission control are shown to be coated with white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces. However, this is not the only option. Some of the decorative substrates mounting LEDs with rainbow-colored light emission control may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than white (e.g., green or black). Alternatively, all or some of the decorative substrates mounting LEDs with rainbow-colored light emission control may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) only on the surface where the LEDs are mounted, while the back surface without LEDs is coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than white (e.g., green or black).

Furthermore, to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components or decorative substrates, the letters and symbols are not limited to those applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using inks of high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). For some of the decorative substrates among the multiple decorative substrates on which the LEDs that emit light controlled by rainbow effects are mounted, the letters and symbols may be applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using inks of low brightness and saturation (e.g., black). For all or some of the multiple decorative substrates on which the LEDs that emit light controlled by rainbow effects are mounted, the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other decorative substrates may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., letters are formed by creating a wiring pattern using copper foil in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane) and then cutting out the surrounding copper foil), and the surface of these foil-cut letters may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) that is also coated on the LED mounting surface. For some of the multiple decorative substrates on which the LEDs that emit light controlled by rainbow effects are mounted, two coats of white solder resist may be applied. Alternatively, the letters may be formed as white resist-cut characters using a resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components or other decorative substrates are masked, and the entire area excluding these is coated again with white solder resist (second layer), thereby forming the masked area, i.e., the characters and symbols, as white resist-cut characters). Or, for all or some of the multiple decorative substrates on which LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow colors are mounted, measures other than screen printing characters and symbols on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow) may be used, such as screen printing on the back side where the LEDs are not mounted using ink of a predetermined color (not limited to high brightness and saturation colors, but also including colors with low brightness and saturation), forming them as foil-cut characters, or forming them as white resist-cut characters using a double coat of white resist, thereby avoiding confusion with the LEDs and other electronic components or other decorative substrates mounted on the decorative substrate. In these cases as well, the decrease in reflective efficiency on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted can be suppressed, and furthermore, the reflective efficiency on the LED mounting surface can be made nearly uniform, resulting in uniform light emission, thus enhancing the visual effect.

The LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates are electronic components whose packages are white or close to white (for example, ivory, beige, or cream). Only packaged LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of these decorative substrates, and no other electronic components are mounted. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is designed to suppress a decrease in reflectivity even with the LED package, thereby achieving uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. In addition, the non-LED mounting surface may have one or more electronic components mounted on it, such as a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative substrate, a resistor, a capacitor, or a circuit for controlling the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit). Furthermore, the connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), the constant current drive circuit is an electronic component that is a surface-mount type (SMD type) LED driver IC housed in an IC package that may be black as an integrated circuit, the resistor is a surface-mount type (SMD type) electronic component that is black, blue, or white, etc., and the capacitor is a surface-mount type (SMD type) electronic component that is black, brown, gray, or white, etc. In the decorative substrate described above, at least electronic components with low brightness and saturation colors such as black, brown, and gray should be mounted on the non-LED mounting side and not on the LED mounting side, while electronic components with high brightness and saturation colors such as white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream) may be mounted on the LED mounting side. This makes the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative substrate less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering it, and suppresses the decrease in reflective efficiency on the LED mounting surface, resulting in nearly uniform reflective efficiency. Therefore, it enables highly efficient and uniform light emission, enhancing the visual effect.

In this example, even when executing a rainbow-colored effect as a variation effect, the system accepts operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the light intensity of the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 can be changed (adjusted). Specifically, pressing the button marked "+" on the light intensity adjustment button 228 immediately brightens (increases the light intensity) the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5, while pressing the button marked "-" immediately dims (decreases the light intensity) the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

As shown in Figure 241, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a variable animation that performs a rainbow-colored effect, the light intensity of the LEDs that perform the rainbow-colored effect (also called rainbow-colored illumination) for the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups and the multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F is immediately changed, regardless of whether the LEDs are turned off or not. The illumination of the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups and the multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F is then controlled with the changed light intensity. In this example, while the button operation prompting effect is being executed, multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups, and multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to C, and frame illumination groups E to F are controlled to be turned off. However, multiple LEDs in frame illumination group D (multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decorative substrate 320 of the effect operation unit 300, multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer decorative substrate 355 of the button, and LED 364a on the inner decorative substrate 364 of the button) are kept lit, and when the player operates the light intensity adjustment button 228, the outer decorative substrate of the effect operation unit 300 Because the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on 320, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decoration board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the button inner decoration board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity, it is possible to adjust the light intensity of all LEDs, including the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F, while observing the changes in light intensity of the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decoration board 320 of the performance operation section of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular button outer decoration board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the button inner decoration board 364.

On the other hand, among the various decorative circuit boards provided on the game board 5, the LEDs mounted on the first decorative circuit board on the back upper part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, and which do not perform the rainbow-colored illumination decoration, are configured so that the light intensity cannot be changed (adjusted) even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated while the variation effect that performs the rainbow-colored effect is being executed (the light intensity is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable effect that performs the rainbow effect, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs mounted on the first rear-top decorative circuit board provided on the first rear-top decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear-top movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, cannot be changed (adjusted). Therefore, the light intensity (brightness) remains constant regardless of whether the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated or not. This can be used as a reference when changing the light intensity of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F. The difference between the brightness of these LEDs and the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the first rear-top decorative circuit board provided on the first rear-top decorative section 3211 becomes clear, making it easy for the player to adjust the brightness to their preference. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the first rear-upper decorative circuit board, which is located on the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side, may always be configured so that their brightness cannot be changed (adjusted) even when the brightness adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether or not the rainbow-colored variation effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in this example, the rear upper first decorative board, which is equipped with LEDs that do not perform rainbow-colored illumination and whose light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted, is provided. Around the rear upper first decorative section 3211, where five 7-segment display units are arranged left and right, LEDs belonging to frame illumination groups A to F (on decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted) located on the door frame 3, and LEDs belonging to the first to sixth illumination groups (on decorative boards on which the LEDs are mounted) located on the game board 5, are provided, and their light intensity (brightness) can be adjusted. In this way, because the LED that serves as the reference for light intensity (brightness) adjustment and the LED that changes the light intensity (brightness) are located close together, it becomes easy to compare the light intensity (brightness), making it easier for the player to adjust to their preferred light intensity (brightness).

As described above, in this example, pachinko machine 1 executes a rainbow-colored animation when there is a high probability of a jackpot. However, depending on the state of the game machine, there may be situations where the rainbow-colored animation cannot be properly executed. In such cases, not only is the effect of enhancing the enjoyment of the game through the rainbow-colored animation not expected, but it may even decrease the enjoyment of the game.

For example, if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect on the display device 1600 (such as an abnormality where some or all of the LEDs in the backlight of the display device 1600 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the display is distorted due to noise, etc.), or if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the emission of the rainbow effect from the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (such as an abnormality where some or all of the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the emission pattern is distorted due to noise, etc.), then the rainbow effect cannot be realized in its complete form as designed, using the display by the display device 1600 and the emission from the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Instead, an incomplete rainbow effect will be executed, with some of the elements of the display by the display device 1600 and the emission from the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 missing.

When such an incomplete rainbow-colored effect is executed, not only is the intended entertainment value of the rainbow effect not achieved, but players may perceive a different effect from the rainbow effect as being performed, potentially leading to misunderstanding. This example is designed to minimize such misunderstandings for players. Please refer to Figure 242 for an explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if an abnormal state occurs at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being executed, and one of the following abnormalities occurs: an abnormality where the display mode of the rainbow effect on the effect display device 1600 is difficult to display; an abnormality where the light emission control of the rainbow effect of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is difficult; or an abnormality where the light emission control of the rainbow effect of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is difficult, the light emission decoration of the rainbow effect by the multiple LEDs of the first to sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, the multiple LEDs of the first to sixth board light emission groups are controlled to turn off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission groups A to F are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light intensity)) to notify the occurrence of the abnormality.

As shown in Figure 242, if an abnormal state occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, where it is difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600, where it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect from the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3, or where it is difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect from the LEDs of the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5, then even at timing t2, when the rainbow effect would normally start, the multiple LEDs of the first to sixth panel light emission groups provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 will not start emitting light for the rainbow effect. Instead, the multiple LEDs of the first to sixth panel light emission groups will be controlled to turn off, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light emission groups A to F will be controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light intensity)) to notify the occurrence of the abnormality.

Furthermore, if the above-described abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the variable animation that performs the rainbow effect, the display of the rainbow effect on the animation display device 1600 will disappear, and a message will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred. Similarly, if the above-described abnormality occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow effect in the variable animation that performs the rainbow effect, the display of the animation display device 1600 will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred without starting the display of the rainbow effect. Note that some parts of the rainbow effect display may be omitted, and even in this case, the user can still recognize that an abnormality has occurred through a message notifying them of the abnormality.

Thus, in this example of pachinko machine 1, if the rainbow effect cannot be fully realized as designed using the display device 1600 and the LED illumination of various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5, the rainbow effect is interrupted or not started. This prevents the rainbow effect from being executed in an incomplete form, thus preventing misunderstandings for the player.

Furthermore, regarding the LEDs mounted on the first rear-upper decorative circuit board, which is located on the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of a variation performance that performs a rainbow effect, the LEDs may continue to be controlled to remain lit in an off state or to an abnormal notification emitting mode, without being controlled to remain lit. In this case, even if the illumination decoration of the rainbow effect by multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3 ends or does not start due to the occurrence of an abnormal condition, or even if multiple LEDs in frame illumination groups A to F are controlled to emit an abnormal notification emitting mode, the player can be made to recognize that the variation performance is continuing, and the player will not be misled into thinking that the variation performance has ended.

Furthermore, the decision to turn off the rear upper first decorative section 3211 may vary depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, errors that have little impact on gameplay or the execution of rainbow-colored effects (minor errors: when the door frame 3 is detected to be open relative to the main frame 4 (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3), or when a vibration sensor (not shown) continuously detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) (when actions such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 are performed) If it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is vibrating, causing the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 to vibrate and the display on the performance display device 1600 to become blurred and difficult to see, if a detection signal is received from the full-tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), or if a detection signal is received from the ball-out detection sensor 574 (when it is detected that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), it is possible that cheating is taking place. For errors of low probability, the LEDs mounted on the first decorative circuit board on the upper rear section 3211 are controlled to emit light without being turned off. However, for errors that significantly affect gameplay or the execution of rainbow-colored effects (serious errors: when radio wave irradiation cheating is detected (when noise is introduced into the illumination of LEDs on various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 or game board 5 due to electromagnetic waves, etc., or when noise is introduced into the display of the effect display device 1600), when magnetic cheating is detected, when a detection signal is input from the second start-up-out-out-out-of

Furthermore, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the performance display device 1600 may be changed depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have little impact on the execution of the game or the rainbow-colored animation, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the performance display device 1600 may not be changed, and a warning display (e.g., "Door Open") may be displayed so as to partially overlap the rainbow-colored animation. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on the execution of the game or the rainbow-colored animation, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the performance display device 1600 may be changed to a warning display (e.g., "Illegal Win!"), thereby interrupting or terminating the display of the rainbow-colored animation (rainbow-colored animation display) even while the rainbow-colored animation is being executed. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the performance display device 1600 according to the degree of the error, and to determine when an abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, when controlling the system to turn off the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and to eliminate the rainbow effect display on the performance display device 1600 in the event of an error that significantly affects the execution of the game or the rainbow effect, the performance display, such as the rainbow effect display, on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated at a predetermined time later than the timing of turning off the rear upper first decorative unit 3211. In this case, the sudden switching of the display content on the performance display device 1600 can be suppressed, allowing the display content to be switched while retaining the lingering effect of the rainbow effect display.

Furthermore, in the event of an abnormal condition, depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency), one or more (including all) of the following may be implemented: a display on the performance display device 1600 indicating an abnormal condition; notification by controlling the illumination of the LEDs on the door frame 3 in the manner of an error; and notification by audio output indicating that an abnormal condition has occurred. For example, if a minor error occurs that has little impact on gameplay, one or any two of the following may be implemented: a display on the performance display device 1600 indicating an abnormal condition; notification by controlling the illumination of the LEDs on the door frame 3 in the manner of an error; and notification by audio output indicating that an abnormal condition has occurred. If a serious error occurs that has a significant impact on gameplay, all of the following may be implemented: a display on the performance display device 1600 indicating an abnormal condition; notification by controlling the illumination of the LEDs on the door frame 3 in the manner of an error; and notification by audio output indicating that an abnormal condition has occurred.

Furthermore, in this example, if an anomaly occurs during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow-colored effect (any timing between timing t0 and timing t2) in the variation effect that performs the rainbow-colored effect, and the anomaly is resolved during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect (before the rainbow-colored effect ends), the anomaly notification illumination pattern by the multiple LEDs of frame illumination groups A to F will end, but the illumination decoration of the rainbow-colored effect by the multiple LEDs of the first to sixth illumination groups on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3 will not be performed (the illumination decoration of the rainbow-colored effect will not be resumed (the illumination decoration of the rainbow-colored effect will not be returned to)).

In other words, if an abnormality occurs in the LEDs of the various decorative circuit boards installed on the door frame 3 and game board 5, causing the light emission pattern to be disrupted due to noise, and the rainbow-colored light emission display is terminated or not started, it is possible that noise may reappear even after the abnormality is initially judged to have been resolved. If the system were to restart the rainbow-colored light emission display in response to the resolution of the abnormality in such a case, the execution and termination of the rainbow-colored light emission display would be repeated, potentially confusing the player. Therefore, in this example, if the rainbow-colored light emission display is terminated or not started based on the occurrence of an abnormality, the system is designed not to execute or restart the rainbow-colored light emission display even if the abnormality is resolved during the execution period of the rainbow-colored light emission display.

For example, in a variable animation that performs a rainbow-colored effect as shown in Figure 242, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect due to noise or other reasons, making it difficult to control the illumination of any of the LEDs in the first to sixth LED groups on the game board 5, the illumination decoration of the rainbow-colored effect by the LEDs in the first to sixth LED groups on the game board 5 and the LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3 will be terminated. The LEDs in the first to sixth LED groups will be controlled to turn off, and the LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F will be controlled to flash red at maximum brightness (light intensity) in an abnormality notification illumination mode.

At this time, the display device 1600 displays a warning ("Anomaly Occurred," etc.) by making the rainbow-colored display mode disappear, but the control data for the rainbow-colored display mode is updated according to the scheduler. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the first rear-upper decorative board, located on the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged horizontally, do not perform the rainbow-colored illumination decoration, but they continue the illumination control corresponding to the variable animation that performs the rainbow-colored illumination. This allows the player to recognize that the variable animation is continuing even when the display of the rainbow-colored display mode on the display device 1600 disappears. In addition, a warning sound is output in the above-mentioned abnormal state, allowing the player or arcade staff to recognize that an abnormal state has occurred by hearing the warning sound.

Furthermore, at timing t10 after the abnormal state occurs, when the noise is resolved and the system returns to a state where it is possible to control the illumination of the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth LED illumination groups on the game board 5 to produce the rainbow effect (timing t10), the display device 1600 terminates the warning display and resumes displaying the rainbow effect. As described above, even while the abnormal state is occurring, the control data for the rainbow effect display is updated according to the scheduler, and the display device 1600 displays the rainbow effect in a manner corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the variation effect. Instead of displaying the rainbow effect at timing t6, when the abnormality occurred making it difficult to control the illumination of any of the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth LED illumination groups on the game board 5 due to noise, the display shows the rainbow effect display corresponding to timing t10, when the noise is resolved and the system returns to a normal state.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the anomaly is resolved at timing t10, the anomaly notification illumination mode continues for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds), in which multiple LEDs in frame illumination groups A to F flash red at maximum brightness (light intensity) (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, if an anomaly occurs again after the resolution of the anomaly (timing t10) but before the certain period has elapsed, the anomaly notification illumination mode continues even after the period has elapsed, rather than ending at the timing when the period has ended. This makes it easier for arcade staff to notice anomalies when they occur and resolve frequently, by continuously controlling the illumination in the anomaly notification mode without repeatedly ending and restarting the illumination control each time.

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the LEDs in the first to sixth LED light-emitting groups on the game board 5 will be turned off (timing t6). Even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the LEDs in the first to sixth LED light-emitting groups on the game board 5 will remain off, and the rainbow-colored light-emitting effect will not resume (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification pattern (timing t6). If the abnormality is resolved at timing t10 and a certain period of time has elapsed without further abnormalities occurring, the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to turn off, and the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration does not revert (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, at timing t100, when the rainbow effect ends and the reach effect begins, the lighting control of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel lighting groups on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs in the frame lighting groups A to F on the door frame 3 is executed to illuminate in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if an abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect, the lighting decoration of the rainbow effect is not restored, making it possible to determine whether or not an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect. Note that if an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow effect and is resolved before the start of the rainbow effect, the lighting decoration of the rainbow effect may be started at timing t2, which is the timing for starting the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, the timing of the start of light emission control between the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light emission groups on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame light emission groups A to F on the door frame 3 is not limited to the timing t100 when the abnormality is resolved, but rather to the timing t100 when the rainbow effect ends (the timing when the next effect to be executed after the rainbow effect (in this example, the reach effect) begins). It may also occur when the variation effect that executes the rainbow effect ends, when the variation effect that executes the rainbow effect ends and the next variation effect begins, or when the demo effect begins after the variation effect that executes the rainbow effect ends without the next variation effect starting, etc. Even in these cases, it is possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect or the variation effect in question.

Furthermore, if the abnormality is resolved after the completion of a variation animation that performs a rainbow-colored effect, the system may initiate the illumination control of at least the LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups on the game board 5 and the LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3, at the time the abnormality is resolved. In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of a variation animation different from the one in which the abnormality occurred, and the rainbow-colored effect is being performed at the time the abnormality is resolved, the system may control the illumination to match the rainbow-colored effect at that time.

Furthermore, when the abnormality is resolved, some LEDs may be restored to their rainbow-colored illumination state. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, multiple LEDs in the fourth panel illumination group (among the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups on the game board 5) may be restored to their rainbow-colored illumination state. Similarly, after a certain period has elapsed since the abnormality was resolved, frame illumination group A (among the multiple LEDs in frame illumination groups A to F on the door frame 3) may be restored to its rainbow-colored illumination state. In this case, the schedule data for the illumination control patterns of LEDs that were not controlled during the abnormal state is advanced, and the illumination resumes from the state at the time the abnormality was resolved, rather than the state at the time the abnormality occurred. In this way, when some LEDs are restored to their rainbow-colored illumination state and others are turned off after the abnormality is resolved, it becomes possible to determine that the abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow-colored illumination state because only some LEDs are displaying the rainbow-colored illumination state.

Furthermore, in this example, even during abnormal conditions, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated, allowing the light intensity (brightness) settings of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F to be changed.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F is immediately changed at the moment the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is received, and the illumination of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F is controlled with the changed light intensity (brightness). In contrast, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A to F is set at the moment the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is received. Although the fixed values are changed, at the moment the operation is received, the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups and the multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F will not illuminate at the changed light intensity (brightness). Instead, after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups will be controlled to illuminate at the changed light intensity (brightness) after the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved (t10). The multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F will be controlled to illuminate at the changed light intensity (brightness) after a certain period of time has elapsed since the door frame 3 was closed and the abnormality was resolved (t11).

Thus, even when an abnormality occurs, operating the light intensity adjustment button 228 does not change the light intensity (brightness) of multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups and multiple LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F. This prevents the abnormality notification illumination pattern from becoming difficult to notice. Furthermore, even when an abnormality occurs, the light intensity adjustment button 228 is accepted, and the light intensity (brightness) setting is changed, reflecting the actual LED illumination state after the abnormality is resolved. Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, the opportunity for the player to adjust the light intensity (brightness) is not taken away.

In this example, the game board 5 is configured to have a separate back-upper first decorative board on which multiple non-dimmable LEDs (hereinafter referred to as the non-dimmable LED group) are mounted, in addition to the multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs (hereinafter referred to as the dimmable LED group) with adjustable light intensity are mounted, belonging to the first to sixth light-emitting groups. However, the configuration is not limited to this. LEDs for illuminating the seven-segment display may be mounted on a portion of any of the multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first to sixth light-emitting groups are mounted. In other words, multiple LEDs with adjustable light intensity (dimmable LED group) and multiple LEDs with non-dimmable light intensity (non-dimmable LED group) may be mounted on a single decorative board.

For example, a group of dimmable LEDs, consisting of multiple LEDs with adjustable light intensity, and a group of non-dimmable LEDs, consisting of multiple LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity, may be arranged with a predetermined spacing between them. In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimmable LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimmable LED group may be made shorter than the distance between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. This configuration makes it easy to distinguish between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, and facilitates the comparison of the brightness between LEDs with adjustable light intensity and LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity.

Furthermore, the LEDs with adjustable brightness (hereinafter referred to as "dimmable LEDs") and LEDs with non-dimmable brightness (hereinafter referred to as "non-dimmable LEDs") may be packaged in the same or very similar color (white in this example), or in addition, the same type of package may be used. This allows the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs to emit light under similar conditions, making the difference between the brightness of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs after brightness adjustment clear, and making it easy for players to adjust the brightness to their preference.

Furthermore, multiple through-holes may be formed between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. In the area of the decorative substrate surface where through-holes are formed, the light emitted from the LEDs is not reflected and leaks to the back side of the decorative substrate (the side without LEDs). By forming through-holes between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, interference between the light from the dimmable LEDs and the light from the non-dimmable LEDs is suppressed, making it possible to individually observe the light from each LED. This allows for brightness adjustment based solely on the light from the dimmable LED group, and enables the use of the light from the non-dimmable LED group as an indicator for brightness adjustment. As a result, the accuracy of the comparison is improved, and it becomes easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Furthermore, by forming through-holes with an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs (i.e., the proportion (area) occupied by one through-hole on the LED mounting surface (front) of the decorative substrate ≤ the proportion (area) occupied by one dimmable LED or one non-dimmable LED), it is possible to suppress the leakage of light from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs from the through-holes to the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative substrate more than necessary. In this case, by making the number of through-holes formed between the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs greater than the number of dimmable or non-dimmable LEDs mounted to the side of the through-holes, it is possible to suppress the reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs while preventing an unnecessary reduction in the brightness of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, on the LED mounting surface (front) of the decorative substrate, a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or structure with a predetermined thickness) may be provided to separate some or all of the dimmable LED group from the non-dimmable LED group, thereby suppressing the reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs. For example, on the LED mounting surface (front) of the decorative substrate, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers, which are mounted on a circuit board, may be mounted between the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs. By providing an electronic component with a predetermined thickness that protrudes from the LED mounting surface (front) of the decorative substrate between the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs, some or all of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs can be separated, thereby suppressing the reflection and interference of light emitted from each of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, the electronic components placed between the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED may have a dark appearance (such as black, gray, green, blue, or brown) with low reflectivity (they may also have parts that are different in color from the dark color, such as metallic silver or transparent parts). This further enhances the suppression of reflection and interference of light emitted from both the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the first decorative section 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, on which a non-dimmable LED is mounted, is formed to extend across the left and right edges of the performance display device 1600, so that the characters, numbers, patterns, etc., displayed by the 7-segment display of the first decorative section 3211 are easily noticeable to the player. However, the first decorative section 3211 may be formed with, for example, a single 7-segment display, or a smaller decorative board may be provided compared to other decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted, thereby enabling performances that are less noticeable to the player. In this case, players who notice the presence of the 7-segment display can be given further enjoyment through the performances performed by the 7-segment display in addition to the performances by the performance display device 1600, etc. Furthermore, if the surface of a decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted is configured to be divided into two areas: one area where multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate a decorative body covering the substrate, and another area where multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate a seven-segment display unit provided on a part of the decorative body, the area where multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate the seven-segment display unit provided on a part of the decorative body may be made narrower than the area where multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate the decorative body covering the substrate.

Thus, because the non-dimmable LED, which serves as the reference for brightness adjustment, and the dimmable LED, which changes the brightness, are mounted on a single decorative circuit board and positioned close together, it is possible to place the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs closer together compared to when they are mounted on separate circuit boards. This makes it easier to compare the brightness of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the brightness of the LEDs that perform the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, specifically the LEDs included in the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups and the LEDs included in frame light-emitting groups A to F, is adjustable, while the brightness of the LEDs that do not perform the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, specifically the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, is not adjustable. However, in addition to the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211, one or more non-rainbow-colored light-emitting LEDs that do not perform the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration may also be provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5. These non-rainbow-colored light-emitting LEDs are controlled to be turned off when the rainbow effect is performed, or controlled to perform a different light-emitting decoration than the rainbow effect, and although they do not perform the rainbow-colored light-emitting decoration, unlike the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211, their brightness is adjustable. In this way, even non-rainbow LEDs that do not perform the rainbow-colored light effect can reflect the results of brightness adjustments made during the rainbow effect. Therefore, these non-rainbow LEDs can also be illuminated at the player's preferred brightness (light intensity) during the light effect that follows the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, when the aforementioned dimmable LEDs are performing the rainbow-colored illumination, the illumination color changes rapidly (flickers), making it difficult to accurately determine the light intensity (brightness) based on the light from these dimmable LEDs. Therefore, even when the player intends to adjust the light intensity (brightness) to their preference, it may actually be set to a different level. However, if non-rainbow-colored LEDs are provided that perform a different illumination than the rainbow-colored illumination, even during the rainbow-colored illumination, then when adjusting the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5, it becomes possible to accurately determine the light intensity (brightness) based on the light from the non-rainbow-colored LEDs, making it easy to adjust to the player's preference.

Furthermore, as a light decoration during the execution of the rainbow effect of non-rainbow-colored LEDs, it is sufficient if the LEDs switch their light color at a longer unit illumination time than at least the LEDs performing the rainbow effect, specifically the LEDs included in the first to sixth panel illumination groups and the LEDs included in frame illumination groups A to F, or if they perform the light decoration with the same light color without switching colors.

Furthermore, the non-rainbow-emitting LEDs (full-color LEDs controlled to emit light in a different color from the five 7-segment display sections of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, which is equipped with a rear-upper first decorative board on which the above-mentioned light intensity (brightness) adjustment is impossible and non-dimmable LEDs that do not perform rainbow-color illumination decoration are implemented) may be controlled to emit light in a different color from the five 7-segment display sections of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210. In this case, it becomes easy to distinguish between the non-rainbow-emitting LEDs and the non-dimmable LEDs, and it becomes easy to compare the light intensity (brightness) when adjusting the light intensity (brightness), allowing the player to easily adjust the light intensity (brightness) to their preference.

In the example described above, the first decorative substrate on the back of the back upper, where monochromatic LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) are mounted to illuminate the first decorative section 3211 of the back upper, where five 7-segment display sections of the movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, is coated with white solder resist (protective material), which has the highest reflectivity, and characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components or other decorative substrates are screen printed using inks with high brightness and saturation (for example, yellow, a color with similar reflectivity to white) to enhance the reflectivity of the surface on which the LEDs are mounted on the first decorative substrate. However, in addition to this, or instead, light interference on the surface of the first decorative substrate on the back upper, where the LEDs are mounted may be suppressed to clarify the illumination of each LED and to make the characters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display sections clearer.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 243(A), the movable decorative body 3210 contains a first decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the first decorative section 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative section 3211 are arranged horizontally, and a second decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the second decorative section 3212, which is located on the back side of the first decorative section 3211 and has predetermined characters (in this case, "JACKPOT") arranged in a row. The movable decorative body 3210 is formed with a predetermined thickness (approximately 10 mm in this example) using an opaque resin (white in this example) that does not transmit light, except for the five 7-segment display units of the first decorative section 3211 and the predetermined characters of the second decorative section 3212.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 243(B), the 7-segment display section of the first rear upper decorative section 3211 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each segment, defining the surface of the first rear upper decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes. Similarly, the second rear upper decorative section 3212 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each predetermined character (in this case, "JACKPOT"), defining the surface of the second rear upper decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes.

Furthermore, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed to be divided into two decorative bodies, front and rear. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is constructed by assembling (fixing) the two divided decorative bodies together, with the inside of one decorative body in close contact with the surface of the first rear upper decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the inside of the other decorative body in close contact with the surface of the second rear upper decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted.

This suppresses light from leaking from the LEDs positioned within the through-holes corresponding to each segment of the 7-segment display section of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 into the through-holes corresponding to other segments, thereby suppressing interference of light emitted from each of the multiple segments of the 7-segment display section. This makes it easier to individually identify the information (letters, numbers, patterns, etc.) displayed by each of the multiple segments of the 7-segment display section of the rear upper first decorative section 3211. Furthermore, since light from the LEDs positioned within the through-holes can be emitted from each segment of the 7-segment display section of the rear upper first decorative section 3211 without leaking outside the through-holes, a decrease in light intensity (brightness) within the through-holes can be suppressed.

Similarly, by suppressing the leakage of light from LEDs positioned within the through-holes corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") of the rear upper second decorative section 3212 into the through-holes corresponding to other characters, interference of light emitted from each predetermined character can be suppressed, making it easier to individually identify each predetermined character of the rear upper second decorative section 3212. Furthermore, since light from the LEDs positioned within the through-holes can be emitted from each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") of the rear upper second decorative section 3212 without leakage outside the through-holes, a decrease in light intensity (brightness) within the through-holes can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in addition to the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210), the surface on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate, on which LEDs that illuminate the rear upper first decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display sections of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged on the left and right, and the rear upper second decorative substrate, on which LEDs that illuminate the rear upper second decorative section 3212 where predetermined characters (in this case, "JACKPOT") are arranged in a row, may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a dark color (black, purple, dark blue, dark green, etc.) with low reflectivity instead of white solder resist (protective material). In this case, although the reflection efficiency decreases on the LED mounting surface of the first rear upper decorative substrate, where the LEDs that illuminate the first rear upper decorative section 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the second rear upper decorative substrate, where the LEDs that illuminate the second rear upper decorative section 3212 are mounted, the light from each penetration point can be emitted independently without interference. Therefore, the characters, numbers, and patterns shown by the five 7-segment display sections of the first rear upper decorative section 3211, as well as the predetermined characters on the second rear upper decorative section 3212, can be clearly displayed, and this information can be accurately conveyed to the player.

Furthermore, even if a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) is coated on the LED mounting surface of the first rear-upper decorative substrate on which the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the second rear-upper decorative substrate on which the LEDs that illuminate the second rear-upper decorative section 3212 are mounted, a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than dark (for example, white or green) may be coated on the LED-less surface of the first rear-upper decorative substrate on which the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 are not mounted, and on the LED-less surface of the second rear-upper decorative substrate on which the LEDs that illuminate the second rear-upper decorative section 3212 are mounted. Furthermore, the LED mounting surface of the first rear-upper decorative substrate, on which the LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second rear-upper decorative substrate, on which the LEDs that illuminate the second rear-upper decorative section 3212 are mounted, may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) or a white coating film may be formed by silk printing, etc., only on the inner region of the through-hole, while the outer region of the through-hole may be coated with dark solder resist (protective material) or a dark coating film may be formed by silk printing, etc. In this case, the reflectivity of the substrate surface is reduced to suppress interference of light from each of the through-holes, while reflecting a high proportion of the light emitted from the LEDs placed within the through-holes, thereby brightly illuminating each segment of the five 7-segment display sections of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 and each of the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the rear-upper second decorative section 3212.

Furthermore, the surface (the part where the through-hole is formed) of the movable decorative body 3210, corresponding to each of the five 7-segment display sections of the movable decorative body 3210 and the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") of the second decorative body 3212, may be provided with a cover made of a translucent film (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass-like film) or a translucent resin (in this example, red, etc.) that allows light to pass through. This prevents the light from the LEDs that illuminate the first decorative body 3211 and the second decorative body 3212 from being directly viewed, thus preventing the player from feeling dazzled. Also, by making the film or cover emit light from the surface, the light sources can be made less conspicuous when the LEDs illuminating the first decorative body 3211 and the second decorative body 3212 are illuminated.

Furthermore, the LED mounting surface of the first rear upper decorative substrate, on which the LEDs that illuminate the first rear upper decorative section 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second rear upper decorative substrate, on which the LEDs that illuminate the second rear upper decorative section 3212 are mounted, have letters and symbols printed using high-brightness and high-saturation ink (for example, yellow) to avoid confusion with other decorative substrates and other electronic components such as LEDs that are also mounted on these substrates. Furthermore, for one or both of the LED mounting surface of the first decorative substrate on the back upper side, on which the LEDs that illuminate the first decorative section 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative substrate on the back upper side, on which the LEDs that illuminate the second decorative section 3212 are mounted, a low-brightness and low-saturation color (for example, green) ink may be used to screen print on the LED mounting surface. Alternatively, characters or symbols to avoid confusion with mounted LEDs and other electronic components or decorative substrates may be formed as die-cut characters (that is, characters formed from copper foil wiring patterns in the layer where the wiring patterns are formed (copper plane) and the surrounding copper foil is removed), and the surface of these die-cut characters may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is also coated on the LED mounting surface. Alternatively, the non-LED mounting surface (back side) may be screen printed using an ink of a predetermined color (including not only high-brightness and low-saturation colors but also low-brightness and low-saturation colors). In this case as well, it is possible to suppress light interference between the LED mounting surface of the first decorative substrate on the back upper side, where the LEDs that illuminate the first decorative section 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative substrate on the back upper side, where the LEDs that illuminate the second decorative section 3212 are mounted.

Furthermore, the first rear-upper decorative substrate, on which LEDs that illuminate the first rear-upper decorative section 3211 are mounted, and the second rear-upper decorative substrate, on which LEDs that illuminate the second rear-upper decorative section 3212 are mounted, may be firmly attached to the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (in an irreversible mounting state, such as being difficult to remove, requiring the destruction of at least a part of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, the first rear-upper decorative substrate, or the second rear-upper decorative substrate by welding or other means). This protects the LED mounting surfaces of the first and second rear-upper decorative substrates from the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, thereby preventing malfunctions in the LEDs mounted on the first and second rear-upper decorative substrates due to tampering or other reasons.

Furthermore, when mounting LEDs for illuminating a 7-segment display on a portion of one of several decorative substrates on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first to sixth panel light-emitting groups are mounted, that is, when mounting multiple LEDs with adjustable light intensity (dimmable LED group) and multiple LEDs with non-dimmable light intensity (non-dimmable LED group) on a single decorative substrate, a decorative body with the aforementioned through-hole formed on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group may be provided. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from both the dimmable LEDs and the non-dimmable LEDs is further enhanced.

As described above, the first and second rear upper decorative sections 3211 and 3212 display information such as characters, numbers, and patterns, and can play an important role in gameplay by displaying crucial information. Alternatively, the main control MPU 1310 of the main control board 1310 may directly control the first rear upper decorative board (which has LEDs mounted to illuminate the first rear upper decorative section 3211) and the second rear upper decorative board (which has LEDs mounted to illuminate the second rear upper decorative section 3212) (either one or the other). In this case, compared to the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the first and second rear upper decorative sections 3211 and 3212 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, malfunctions (such as displaying content different from what was intended) can be suppressed, preventing disadvantages to players.

Furthermore, while the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs constant peripheral control processing approximately every 33.3 ms, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control-side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms. Therefore, compared to the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the display content of the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212 can be updated at a shorter cycle. Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from what should be displayed is shown on the first rear upper decoration section 3211 or the second rear upper decoration section 3212, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) to change it back to the original display content, thus not causing any disadvantage to the player or others. In other words, the first and second decorative parts 3211 and 3212 on the back upper side, which display important information (high importance), are equipped with control signals that update the illumination pattern of the light-emitting means (LEDs) at a shorter interval than the light-emitting decorative parts that do not display important information (low importance). Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in the display content of the first and second decorative parts 3211 and 3212 on the back upper side, which display important information, the display content can be immediately changed to normal, thereby preventing the display of incorrect content that would otherwise cause harm to the player. Furthermore, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a communication error may occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, potentially causing malfunctions in the information displayed by the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212. However, in this example, by having the main control board 1310 directly control the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212, malfunctions in the information displayed by the first rear upper decoration section 3211 and the second rear upper decoration section 3212 are less likely to occur compared to the case where the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls them, thereby minimizing disadvantages to the player.

[23-1. Variation 1 of the rainbow effect]
Next, a modified version of the rainbow effect described above will be explained. In this example, the player can determine the probability of winning a jackpot by pressing the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the rainbow effect is being performed. Note that in Modification 1, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 244, when a rainbow-colored effect is being performed, if a variation display indicating a high probability of a big win, such as a decorative symbol showing a "reach," is being performed after the rainbow-colored effect, even if the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the rainbow-colored effect will continue to be executed until timing t100 without ending.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 245, when the rainbow effect is being performed, unless a high-probability variation display (such as a reel stop) is being performed after the rainbow effect, if the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect being performed will end at timing t6 when the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 was pressed, a predetermined effect mode (for example, a variation display of decorative symbols) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 will be controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner (this may include turning off some or all of them).

This allows for the determination of the probability of a jackpot when the rainbow-colored effect is being performed, and encourages the player to actively press the press button 303 of the effect control unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow-colored effect is being performed. Furthermore, if the player presses the press button 303 of the effect control unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow-colored effect is being performed and determines that the probability of a jackpot is high, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, after the rainbow-colored effect is terminated based on the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display an effect unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect. This allows the player to be aware that the rainbow-colored effect has ended and to be certain that the probability of winning a jackpot is low. In addition, when the effect display device 1600 executes an effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect may also be configured to terminate in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300, or the effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect may be configured to terminate if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period of time while the effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect is being executed. Furthermore, after the effect display device 1600 has terminated an effect display unrelated to the rainbow-colored effect, the rainbow-colored effect may be restarted if a predetermined start condition is met (for example, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period of time, or if a predetermined period of no-variation effects in which no variation effects are being executed has reached a predetermined period of time). This imprints the rainbow-colored light and display patterns in the player's mind, leading them to anticipate that a high-probability jackpot is being achieved when the rainbow-colored effect is executed in subsequent spinning sequences, thus prompting them to operate the spinning sequence control unit 300.

Furthermore, in Figure 245, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow effect is being executed, the performance display device 1600 will terminate the rainbow effect display mode and other performance displays at a predetermined time after the rainbow effect's illumination on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 has finished. This prevents the display content of the performance display device 1600 from switching abruptly, allowing the display content to switch while retaining the lingering effect of the rainbow effect display mode and other performance displays.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to output a predetermined sound when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the rainbow effect. In this case, after outputting the predetermined sound based on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the performance display on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated at a predetermined time (the same period from the end of the rainbow effect's illumination if the predetermined sound is output at the same time as the end of the rainbow effect's illumination; or a different period from the end of the rainbow effect's illumination if the predetermined sound is output at a different time than the end of the rainbow effect's illumination) after the timing of outputting the predetermined sound (which may be the same time as or different from the timing of the end of the rainbow effect's illumination). In this case as well, the performance display device 1600 can prevent abrupt switching of the display content, allowing the display content to be switched while retaining the lingering effect of the performance display, such as the rainbow effect display.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow effect is being performed, the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 may be restarted after the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 has finished. In this case, the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 may be restarted after the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect on the LEDs of the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 has finished, but before the performance display such as the rainbow effect display mode on the performance display device 1600 has finished (while the performance display such as the rainbow effect display mode on the performance display device 1600 is continuing). This can improve the interest of players who have become disappointed after judging that the probability of winning a jackpot is low because the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect has finished, and can draw their attention back to the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, in addition to the examples above, the probability of a jackpot can be determined by varying the sound output pattern during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect. For example, if the rainbow-colored effect is being executed and a high probability of a jackpot is indicated by a symbol combination (such as a winning combination) is occurring after the effect, the sound output pattern corresponding to the rainbow-colored effect should be executed. On the other hand, if the rainbow-colored effect is being executed and a high probability of a jackpot is not indicated by a symbol combination (such as a winning combination) after the effect, the sound output pattern corresponding to the rainbow-colored effect may not be executed; instead, another sound output pattern may be executed, or no sound output may be executed at all. In this case as well, the probability of a jackpot can be determined by the execution of the rainbow-colored effect and the sound output pattern, and if a high probability of a jackpot is determined, the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

[23-2. Variation of the rainbow effect, part 2]
Although the rainbow effect described above does not involve the movement of the movable parts, the movable parts that are illuminated and decorated in the rainbow effect may be made to perform movements that are always, or at a predetermined rate, linked to the rainbow effect, in addition to the illumination decoration in the rainbow effect. This is shown below as Modification 2. Note that in Modification 2, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be given.

As shown in Figure 246, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at timing t2, or when the button validity period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the rainbow effect is initiated (timing t2). At this point, multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower center decorative board 3168 belonging to the fourth board light-emitting group are illuminated in a predetermined color (blue in this example), and then controlled to change the illumination color at predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "purple" → ...).

Furthermore, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed by the player at timing t2, or when the button validity period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the rainbow-colored performance starts. The back-front-lower-center decorative element 3161 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160, which is equipped with the back-front-lower-center decorative board 3168, rises from its normal standby position as shown in Figure 164 to a raised position in front of the performance display device 1600 (in this example, the back-front-lower-center decorative element 3161 rises so that a part of it overlaps with the front of the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, it may rise to near the center of the performance display device 1600 so that the entire back-front-lower-center decorative element 3161 overlaps with the front of the performance display device 1600), and stops there, then rotates around the front-to-back axis.

As a result, during the execution of the rainbow-colored effect, LED illumination and movement by a movable body (rear-front-lower-center decorative board 3168) are performed in front of the display device 1600. Furthermore, since multiple LEDs mounted on the rear-front-lower-center decorative board 3168, which illuminates the rear-front-lower-center decorative body 3161, change their illumination color at predetermined intervals (e.g., 0.1 seconds), a highly attention-grabbing effect can be achieved. Additionally, because the rear-front-lower-center decorative body 3161 is exposed in front of the display device 1600 and rotates while partially overlapping with the display device 1600, it can create the impression that something good is about to happen to the player, thereby increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, when the rainbow effect ends (timing t99), the rotation of the front-front lower-center decorative element 3161 around its front-to-back axis stops, and it descends from the front of the display device 1600, stopping in its normal standby position. In this example, the display device 1600 generates a decorative symbol reach in sync with the movement of the front-front lower-center decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position. In this way, by rotating the front-front lower-center decorative element 3161, which is visible in front of the display device 1600, while illuminating it, a part of the display device 1600 is obscured, and attention is drawn to the front-front lower-center decorative element 3161. Therefore, when the display device 1600 generates a decorative symbol reach in sync with the movement of the front-front lower-center decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position, the player is surprised, and their expectation of a big win is heightened.

Furthermore, if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the variation animation that performs the rainbow effect as described above, the illumination of the rainbow effect by the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 will be terminated. This prevents the rainbow effect from being performed in an incomplete manner.

On the other hand, the rear front lower middle decorative unit 3161 is designed to operate as if no abnormal condition were occurring, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, without stopping its operation. Furthermore, even if an abnormal condition occurs before the start of the rainbow effect in the variation effect that executes the rainbow effect, it will operate at the intended timing for the rainbow effect to begin, just as if no abnormal condition were occurring. In other words, if the light emission control of the rainbow effect cannot be achieved perfectly as designed, the light emission decoration by the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168 will be stopped or not executed. However, operations that do not affect the light emission decoration of the rainbow effect will not be stopped and will be executed as planned (as designed). This allows the player to recognize that the variation effect is continuing and prevents them from mistakenly believing that the variation effect has ended when the rainbow effect is stopped.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 247, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the illumination of the rainbow effect by the multiple LEDs in the first to sixth panel illumination groups on the game board 5, which includes multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161, is terminated and controlled to a blacked-out state. Furthermore, even if the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect, the illumination of the rainbow effect does not resume (the illumination of the rainbow effect is not restarted).

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 when the lower-middle decorative element 3161 is operating in conjunction with the rainbow effect (timing t6), the operation of the lower-middle decorative element 3161 in conjunction with the rainbow effect will not be stopped, but will continue to be performed in a predetermined manner in conjunction with the rainbow effect (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the illumination of the rainbow effect will be terminated, while the operation of the lower-middle decorative element 3161 will continue. This allows the player to recognize that the variation effect is continuing because the operation of the lower-middle decorative element 3161 is continuing, thus preventing them from feeling anxious.

Furthermore, even if an anomaly occurs during a variation animation that performs a rainbow-colored effect, and the anomaly is resolved before the rainbow-colored effect ends, and the system returns to a normal state, the illumination of the rainbow-colored effect by the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear-front-lower-center decorative substrate 3168, which illuminates the rear-front-lower-center decorative element 3161, will not be resumed. In other words, if an anomaly occurs during the execution of a rainbow-colored effect in a variation animation, and the anomaly is resolved before the rainbow-colored effect ends, and the system returns to a normal state, the rear-front-lower-center decorative element 3161 will operate in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect while remaining unlit. This allows the system to determine whether an anomaly has occurred in a variation animation that performs a rainbow-colored effect based on whether the rear-front-lower-center decorative element 3161 is illuminated, thereby suppressing fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency), the operation of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 linked to the rainbow color effect may be continued or initiated differently. For example, for errors with little impact on gameplay, the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 may be continued or executed as scheduled (at the timing set in the scheduler). On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the operation linked to the rainbow color effect of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 may be stopped (it may also be returned to the normal standby position and stopped after stopping the operation linked to the rainbow color effect), or the operation linked to the rainbow color effect that has been scheduled in advance (set in the scheduler) may be prevented from being performed, thereby interrupting or terminating the variable effect even if it is currently running. This allows the operating state of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 to differ according to the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the display device 1600 may be changed depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors with little impact on gameplay, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the display device 1600 may not be erased, but a warning display (e.g., "Door Open") may be shown overlapping the rainbow-colored animation. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the display of the rainbow-colored animation on the display device 1600 may be erased, and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal Win!") may be shown, thereby interrupting or terminating the display of the rainbow-colored animation (rainbow-colored animation) even while it is running. This allows the display mode on the display device 1600 to be changed according to the degree of the error, making it possible to determine the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, as shown in the modified example 1 of the rainbow-colored effect described above, if a variation display indicating a high probability of a jackpot, such as a reel symbol appearing in a near-jackpot sequence, is performed after the rainbow-colored effect, the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 may be operated in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect, either always or at a predetermined rate. Conversely, if a variation display indicating a high probability of a jackpot, such as a reel symbol not appearing in a near-jackpot sequence, is not performed after the rainbow-colored effect, the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 may not be operated in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect. This allows for an increased expectation of a jackpot if the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect, and prevents the expectation of a jackpot from being lost even if the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 does not operate in conjunction with the rainbow-colored effect, as there is still a possibility of a variation display indicating a high probability of a jackpot being performed.

Furthermore, while the above embodiments (including all embodiments such as Modifications 1 and 2) demonstrate the rainbow color effect, this technical concept is also applicable to effects other than the rainbow color effect. For example, in Modification 2, the application is not limited to cases where the lower front center decorative element 3161 is operated in conjunction with the rainbow color effect, but is also applicable when it is operated in conjunction with other effects.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. Various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention, as described below.

For example, in the above embodiment, we showed through-holes (separation holes 1023, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, 1823c, 1827c, 1828c, etc.) that allow decorative elements such as seals to be separated. However, we are not limited to these, and slit-shaped or notched shapes may also be used.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as mahjong ball machines and arrangement ball machines, and furthermore, it is also applicable to slot machines that rotate multiple drums (slot machines or reels) using game tokens. Here, a slot machine will be explained with reference to Figure 209. Figure 209 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in Figure 209, the slot machine 6000 is comprised of a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). Using this hinge as a pivot point, the front door (front frame) 6002 can be opened from the main body (box) 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device located on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and works in cooperation with the locking unit (not shown) to open, close, and lock the front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004. The metal locking device comprises a cylindrical metal cylinder body (not shown) extending front to back, a metal keyhole 6005 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) attached to the rear side of the cylinder body, which is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with a standard metal key. The cylinder body of the metal locking device penetrates the front part of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear, and its rear end is attached to the front part. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (more specifically, a conical shape with a diameter that increases towards the rear), and has a pair of notches cut out from the rear end toward the front at positions opposite each other on the central axis. The rotation transmission member is designed so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed against the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) is inserted from the rear. A pair of projections on the transmission cylinder are inserted into a pair of notches, thereby transmitting the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) to the transmission cylinder, allowing it to rotate. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact while the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed against the main body (box) 6004, the metal locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit not only reinforces the front door (front frame) 6002 to provide rigidity, but also functions as a door frame metal ground, electrically connected to a grounding board located inside the main body (box) 6004 via a door frame metal grounding wire (not shown). In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit acts as the frame ground on the door frame side. This grounding board (not shown) can collect electromagnetic noise generated at various points and ground it to the island equipment of the gaming hall, electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the gaming hall via an island equipment grounding wire (not shown).

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (enclosure) 6004 is located on either the main body (enclosure) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. This open switch does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (enclosure) 6004 due to an electrical signal input from the opening and closing operation of the metal locking device, but rather detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (enclosure) 6004 independently of the opening and closing operation of the metal locking device. Furthermore, the open switch is not located near the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device, on either the main body (enclosure) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002, so as not to be affected by electromagnetic noise that may enter the metal locking device. Thus, even if electromagnetic noise were to penetrate the metal locking mechanism, the signal transmission line from the release switch would not be affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000 and is equipped with various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts have no decorative plating at all, while others have decorative plating on both the front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is made of precious metals such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and because it is conductive, electromagnetic noise may penetrate. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on both the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit of the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while others have conductive members directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit for electrical connection.) This prevents electromagnetic noise that has penetrated the decorative parts from penetrating the circuit board ground of the decorative circuit boards equipped with the decorative parts by transmitting it to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. Furthermore, electromagnetic noise that penetrates the decorative parts, particularly those with decorative plating on both the front and back surfaces, is transmitted via wiring (not shown) to the metal door frame reinforcement unit. From there, it is transmitted via the door frame metal ground wire to the grounding board located inside the main body (box) 6004. Finally, from the grounding board, it is transmitted via the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the gaming hall's island equipment, thus being removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit acts as the frame ground on the door frame side, as described above.

Furthermore, an electrostatic discharge pad may be provided as a static discharge unit at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, or, when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, an electrostatic discharge pad may be provided as a static discharge unit on the opening side, which is opposite to the side where the hinge is located (the closing side). The electrostatic discharge pad is capable of removing noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Furthermore, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and is equipped with various decorative parts. Some of these decorative parts have no decorative plating at all, while others have decorative plating on both the front and back surfaces. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on both the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to a metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and an earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 is electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the gaming hall via an island equipment earth wire. However, instead of electrically connecting the door frame metal earth wire to the earth board, it may be electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, thereby electrically connecting the metal door frame reinforcement unit and the power supply board. The power supply board is supplied with 24V AC from the island equipment in the gaming hall. This 24V AC power supply has L (live) and N (neutral) terminals. The L terminal of the power supply board receiving the L (live) input is connected to the ungrounded side, while the N terminal of the power supply board receiving the N (neutral) input is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) is installed on the power supply board to protect against transient overvoltages. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance and allows almost no current to flow, but when an overvoltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance instantly decreases, allowing current to flow. Once the overvoltage disappears, it returns to its original normal resistance value (high resistance). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the power supply board terminals to the ground side (earth) via the surge protection element (surge absorber), and is removed from the slot machine 6000.

The upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 is equipped with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 has a protruding portion that extends forward from the game panel 6006. This protruding portion houses the coin slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, etc., all positioned along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. The lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 also houses the coin deposit/settlement button 6022 and decorative panel 6024, with a receiving tray 6026 located below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the storage/settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is mounted and fixed in a board holder (not shown) located inside the main body (box) 6004.

The main control board box 1320 also houses a setting change board 1311, which has a setting key switch 1311a that allows the setting value to be changed, along with the main control board 1310. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is mounted and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, so the setting key switch 1311a is located inside the main body (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate board box from the main control board box 1320 and mounted and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, or it may be mounted and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. Furthermore, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting side) of the setting change board 1311 may also be equipped with a setting change button for selecting and switching setting values, a setting indicator 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), and the setting change permission lamp 1310z mentioned above.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed approximately in the center of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, it is possible to see inside the slot machine 6000, including three variable rotating parts (not shown) and a display device (not shown). The three variable rotating parts (not shown) are attached and fixed to a mounting member (not shown) located inside the main body (box) 6004. In contrast, the display device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a mounting member (not shown) located on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

These variable rotating bodies have translucent pattern strips printed with multiple types of patterns (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) attached to their respective cylindrical frames. These cylindrical variable rotating bodies are called reels or drums in amusement machines such as slot machines, and are connected to the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310. As the output shafts of the stepping motors rotate, multiple types of patterns appear to continuously change from top to bottom through the display window described above.

The performance device comprises a plurality of movable performance elements (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative circuit boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls based on various commands from the main control board 1310, such as controlling the operation of the plurality of movable performance elements, controlling the drawing of the performance display device 1600, and controlling the light emission of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

The main control board 1310 starts displaying the changing symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of tokens are inserted into the token slot 6008 as the game medium. It stops the display of the changing symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020, or after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a bonus state (jackpot game state) when the symbol information reaches a predetermined specific display pattern, and dispenses a large quantity of tokens into the receiving tray 6026.

In the integrated gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008'. The main control board 1310 starts displaying the changing symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 when a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as the game medium. It stops the display of the changing symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, or the right stop button 6020, or after a predetermined amount of time has elapsed. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a bonus state (jackpot game state) when the symbol information reaches a predetermined specific display pattern, and dispenses a large quantity of game balls into the receiving tray 6026.

(Solution 1)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine having a game board in which a game area is formed into which game balls can flow, which performs a lottery based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and awards a prize based on the result of the lottery, which comprises a specific mounting area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, an image display means capable of displaying an image, and an image control means for performing an image control, wherein the image control means controls the display means to display a specific image and is capable of performing multicolor light emission control to simultaneously emit light from multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area in different colors, and when a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission by multicolor light emission control, the brightness of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while continuing to emit light by multicolor light emission control. The present invention relates to a gaming machine described in Solution 1, which relates to a specific mounting area. Furthermore, since the brightness of the light emitted during multi-color light emission control, which is performed with improved reflectivity due to the white coating, can now be changed by the player, the player can perform the multi-color light emission control at their preferred brightness, thereby improving the inconvenience and difficulty in seeing the light emitted during multi-color light emission control. As a result, factors that reduce the enjoyment of the light emitted during multi-color light emission control are eliminated, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 1, a special mounting area is provided, separate from the specific mounting area, on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface where multiple light-emitting elements are mounted. The performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and when performing multi-color light emission control to simultaneously emit light from multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area with different light-emitting colors, it is possible to perform a control separate from the multi-color light emission control on the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area. If a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission by multi-color light emission control, the brightness of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while continuing to emit light by the multi-color light emission control. Furthermore, while the brightness of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area is adjusted by operation of the adjustment unit, the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and a control separate from the multi-color light emission control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 2, the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a special mounting area can be used as an indicator for adjusting brightness. This improves the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area and the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine described in Solution 1 has a plurality of special mounting areas where control separate from multi-color light emission control is performed as a special mounting area, and in the first special mounting area of the plurality of special mounting areas, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements that emit light in multi-color light emission control is adjusted by operation to the adjustment unit, the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the first special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment and are kept under a first control separate from multi-color light emission control at a predetermined constant brightness, and in the second special mounting area of the plurality of special mounting areas, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements that emit light in multi-color light emission control is adjusted by operation to the adjustment unit, the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the second special mounting area is also adjusted in sync, and a second control separate from multi-color light emission control is kept under control. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 3, the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a special mounting area can be used as an indicator for adjusting brightness. This improves the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area and the light emitted by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 4)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine having a game board in which a game area is formed into which game balls can flow, which performs a lottery based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and awards a prize based on the result of the lottery, which comprises a specific mounting area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, an image display means capable of displaying an image, an image control means for performing control related to the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the image control means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and is capable of performing multicolor light emission control to simultaneously emit light from multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area with different light-emitting colors, and when the state detection means detects that a specific state is in place during light emission by multicolor light emission control, it turns off some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements that are emitting light by multicolor light emission control. The present invention relates to a gaming machine described in Solution 4, which relates to a gaming machine having a game area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed, which improves the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface to the light of the light-emitting elements and suppresses the occurrence of uneven illumination. This makes it possible to avoid a decrease in the effect of simultaneously emitting light from multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area with different light-emitting colors. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached while the multi-color light emission control is active, some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements being emitted by the multi-color light emission control will be turned off. This prevents, for example, situations where the state of the gaming machine prevents the proper execution of the multi-color light emission effect, which could result in an incomplete light emission effect and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. (See, for example, the description in [23. Rainbow Effect] above, Figures 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 5)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 4, a special light-emitting region is provided as a light-emitting region, separate from the specific light-emitting region, on which a white coating is provided on the mounting surface on which the light-emitting element is mounted. The performance control means controls the light-emitting element mounted in the specific light-emitting region to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in relation to a specific performance image displayed on the performance display device, while also being able to control the light-emitting element mounted in the special light-emitting region to emit light in a pattern other than the rainbow pattern. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached within a specific light-emitting period in which the light-emitting element mounted in the specific light-emitting region emits light in a rainbow pattern, the state detection means controls the termination of the rainbow-pattern emission, regardless of whether the specific light-emitting period remains. On the other hand, the light-emitting element mounted in the special light-emitting region is controlled to continue emitting light in a different pattern until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed, even if the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached within the specific light-emitting period, without terminating the emission in the other pattern. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 5, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off due to the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the continued illumination of the light-emitting elements implemented in the special light-emitting area, thus preventing the player from being misled into believing that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine described in Solution 4 or Solution 5 is characterized in that it has a plurality of special light-emitting regions where a light-emitting element emits light in a manner different from the rainbow pattern, and the first special light-emitting region among the plurality of special light-emitting regions is capable of emitting light in a special manner within a specific luminescence period, and even if the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached within the specific luminescence period, control is performed to continue emitting light in the special manner until the specific luminescence period has elapsed without terminating the luminescence in the special manner, and the second special light-emitting region among the plurality of special light-emitting regions is capable of emitting light in a special manner different from the special manner within a specific luminescence period, and when the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached within the specific luminescence period, control is performed to terminate the luminescence in the special manner for the light-emitting element implemented in the second special light-emitting region, along with the termination of the luminescence in the rainbow pattern. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 6, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off due to the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the continued illumination of the light-emitting elements implemented in the special light-emitting area, thus preventing the player from being misled into believing that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 7)
The present invention relates to a gaming machine having a game board in which a game area is formed into which game balls can flow, which performs a lottery based on the fulfillment of a starting condition and awards a prize based on the result of the lottery, which comprises a specific mounting area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, an image display means capable of displaying an image, an image control means for performing control related to the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the image control means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and can generate a specific period for performing multicolor light emission control in which multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area emit light simultaneously in different colors, and when the state detection means detects that a specific state is in place during the specific period, it terminates the multicolor light emission control regardless of whether the specific period remains or not, and even if the state changes from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period, it does not restart the light emission by multicolor light emission control. The present invention relates to a gaming machine described in Solution 7, which is characterized in that, because a white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface to the light of the light-emitting elements is improved and the occurrence of uneven illumination can be suppressed. This prevents a decrease in the visual effect caused by simultaneously illuminating multiple light-emitting elements in different colors within a specific mounting area. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects a specific state during multi-color light emission control, the multi-color light emission control is terminated, and even if the state returns to normal within a specific period, the multi-color light emission control is not restarted. This prevents, for example, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to an incomplete light emission effect being executed when the state of the game machine is such that the multi-color light emission control effect cannot be properly implemented, and even when the state returns to normal, it is possible to determine that a specific state occurred within that specific period until the specified period has elapsed. (For example, see the description in [23. Rainbow Effect] above, Figures 238 to 242, etc.).

(Solution 8)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 7, a special light-emitting region is provided as a light-emitting region, separate from the specific light-emitting region, on which a white coating is provided on the mounting surface on which the light-emitting element is mounted. The performance control means controls the light-emitting element mounted in the specific light-emitting region to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in relation to a specific performance image displayed on the performance display device, while also being able to control the light-emitting element mounted in the special light-emitting region to emit light in a pattern other than the rainbow pattern. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects that the light-emitting element mounted in the specific light-emitting region is in a specific state within a specific period in which it emits light in a rainbow pattern, it controls the emission to end the rainbow pattern regardless of whether the specific period remains or not, and controls the emission to not return to the rainbow pattern even if the state changes from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period. On the other hand, the light-emitting element mounted in the special light-emitting region continues to emit light in a different pattern without ending the emission even if the state detection means detects that it is in a specific state within the specific period, and also controls the emission to continue in a different pattern even after the state changes from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 8, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off due to the gaming machine entering a specific state, it is possible to determine that the specific period remains by the continued illumination of a light-emitting element in a manner different from the rainbow pattern by the light-emitting elements implemented in the special light-emitting area, thereby preventing the player from being misled into believing that the specific period has ended.

(Solution 9)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 8, the performance control means is characterized in that, in relation to a specific performance image displayed on the performance display device after a specific period of time has elapsed and the state has returned from a specific state to a normal state, it is possible to control the light-emitting element implemented in a specific light-emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern. In the gaming machine described in Solution 9, in relation to a specific performance image displayed on the performance display device after a specific period of time has elapsed and the state has returned from a specific state to a normal state, it is possible to control the light-emitting element to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern, thereby suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

(Solution 10)
A gaming machine having a game board in which a game area is formed into which game balls can flow down, performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and executing a winning game based on the result of the lottery, comprising a specific mounting area on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, and a performance control means for performing performance control, wherein the performance control means is capable of performing a first light-emitting control that causes the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to light up simultaneously in the same color, and a second light-emitting control that causes the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to light up simultaneously in different colors, the second light-emitting control notifies that the possibility of executing a winning game is higher than that of the first light-emitting control, and furthermore, separate from the second light-emitting control, it is possible to perform a third light-emitting control that causes the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to light up simultaneously in different colors, the third light-emitting control is a control that is performed when there is no possibility of executing a winning game. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 10, a white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface to the light of the light-emitting elements and suppressing the occurrence of uneven illumination. This prevents a decrease in the effect of simultaneously illuminating multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area with different colors. Furthermore, while the system notifies that there is a higher probability of winning a game when the second light-emitting control, which simultaneously illuminates multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area with different colors, is executed, there is no possibility of winning a game when the third light-emitting control, which simultaneously illuminates multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area with different colors, is executed, the system can increase the expectation of winning a game when the second light-emitting control is executed, while simultaneously creating anxiety that the third light-emitting control may be executed, thereby attracting attention and improving the enjoyment of the game. (For example, see the description in [23-1. Modification Example 1 of Rainbow Color Effect] above, Figures 244 to 245, etc.).

(Solution 11)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 10, when a light-emitting element implemented in a specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the third control, the player can terminate the emission in the rainbow pattern by operating a predetermined performance control unit. However, when a light-emitting element implemented in a specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the second control, the player cannot terminate the emission in the rainbow pattern even if they operate a predetermined performance control unit. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, the player can be prompted to operate the performance control unit when a light-emitting element implemented in a specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game when operating the performance control unit.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine described in Solution 11 is characterized in that, after the rainbow-colored illumination is terminated by the player's operation of a predetermined performance control unit during the execution of the third control, the rainbow-colored illumination is disabled until a specific period of time has elapsed, and the rainbow-colored illumination is enabled after the elapsed period of time. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, if the rainbow-colored illumination is terminated by the player's operation of a predetermined performance control unit during the execution of the third control, the rainbow-colored illumination is disabled until a specific period of time has elapsed, thereby preventing the player from overlooking the termination of the rainbow-colored illumination.

(Solution 13)
A gaming machine having a game board formed with a game area through which game balls can flow, performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of starting conditions, and awarding a prize based on the result of the lottery, comprising: a first specific mounting area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; a second specific mounting area on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; and an image display means capable of displaying an image, wherein when a specific performance image is displayed on the image display means, multicolor illumination is possible, in which the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area are made to emit light in different colors simultaneously, and the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the second specific mounting area are capable of emitting monocolor light different from the multicolor illumination, even when multicolor illumination is being performed by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 13, since a white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the mounting surface to the light of the light-emitting elements is improved, and the occurrence of illumination unevenness can be suppressed. This prevents a decrease in the visual effect caused by simultaneously emitting multiple light-emitting elements of different colors in a first specific mounting area where a white coating is formed on the mounting surface. Furthermore, even when multi-color emission is performed by multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area, a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, which allows for monochromatic emission distinct from multi-color emission. As a result, interference from the emission of each of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area can be suppressed, making it possible to clearly emit light from each of the multiple light-emitting elements. (See, for example, the description in [23. Rainbow Effect] above, Figure 243, etc.).

(Solution 14)
A gaming machine having a game board in which a game area is formed that allows game balls to flow down, performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of a starting condition, and awarding a prize based on the result of the lottery, comprising: performance control means for performing control related to performances; a movable body that can operate in a predetermined operating mode; a plurality of specific decorative substrates on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and on which a white coating is formed on the mounting surface; and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the specific decorative substrates are also provided on the movable body, and the performance control means can operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode and perform multi-color light emission control in which the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the plurality of specific decorative substrates emit light simultaneously in different colors, and when the state detection means detects that a specific state is in place during the execution of the multi-color light emission control, some or all of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the plurality of specific decorative substrates are turned off, while the operation of the movable body in a predetermined operating mode continues. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 14, a white coating is formed on the mounting surfaces of multiple specific decorative substrates on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted. This improves the light reflection efficiency of the light-emitting elements on the mounting surfaces of the specific decorative substrates, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven illumination. This avoids a decrease in the visual effect caused by simultaneously emitting multiple light-emitting elements of different colors on specific mounting substrates on which a white coating is formed. Furthermore, when the state detection means detects that a specific state is being reached during the execution of multi-color light emission control, some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative substrates are turned off, while the operation of the movable body in a predetermined mode continues. Therefore, even if some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off because the gaming machine has entered a specific state, the player can determine that the multi-color light emission control is continuing as intended by the continued operation of the movable body in a predetermined mode, thus avoiding misunderstanding or anxiety for the player. (For example, see the description in [23-2. Modification 2 of Rainbow Color Effect] above, Figures 246 to 247, etc.).

[24. Split Game Board]
The pachinko machine 1 is a frame composed of a door frame 3 and a main body frame 4. By removing the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 and attaching a new game board 5 to the main body frame 4, the pachinko machine 1 can be changed to a different specification. The game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, as described above, is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that demarcates the rear end of the game area 5a, and various units and components are attached to the front and back of this plate-shaped game panel 1100. By dividing the plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and components to each, it is possible to easily consider combinations of designs and appearances during the development stage, and it is also possible to accommodate changes in the number and arrangement of various prize winning holes provided on the game board 5, the shape of decorative components, the shape of the game area 5a, etc.

This section will explain a completely new and unprecedented game board 5A (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "divided game board 5A," where "A" indicates the A specification), which involves dividing a plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and components to each of them, with reference to Figures 248 to 250. Figure 248 is a schematic front view (a) and a schematic rear view (b) of the divided game board. Figure 249 is a rear perspective view (a) of the divided game board, seen from the lower left rear, before the right and left game boards constituting the divided game board are combined, and a rear perspective view (b) of the divided game board, seen from the lower left rear. Figure 250 is a schematic front view of the divided game board after the decoration of the divided game board in Figure 248(a) has been changed. Note that Figures 248 to 250 omit various units and components that correspond to the various units and components attached to the game board 5 already explained in Figure 129, etc.

The divided game board 5A is composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, which are formed by dividing the front component 1000, which demarcates the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is roughly rectangular when viewed from the front, and the plate-shaped game panel 1100, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcates the rear end of the game area 5a, into two parts in the left-right direction. The left game board 5AL has a length of approximately three-quarters of the left-right distance dimension of the divided game board 5A, while the right game board 5AR has a length of approximately one-quarter of the left-right distance dimension of the divided game board. The right side of the left game board 5AL and the left side of the right game board 5AR, which are joined together, have an interlocking structure, with the right side of the left game board 5AL being formed in a convex shape and the right game board 5AR being formed in a concave shape. After joining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are fastened together by passing a bolt (not shown) through a connecting member (not shown) on each side from one end to the other. This ensures that the surfaces of the game area 5a where the game balls roll automatically become flush (i.e., no steps or gaps are created), thus fixing the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR together.

The split game board 5A is constructed by combining the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, and then fastening them together by passing a bolt (not shown) through connecting members (not shown) provided on each of the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR from one end to the other, thereby fixing the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR in place and mounting the split game board 5A to the main frame 4. However, the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR may also be configured to be fixed to the main frame 4 individually. Even in this case, the surfaces of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, automatically become flush (i.e., no steps are created) so that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are fixed to the main frame 4.

The left-side game board 5AL has a function display unit 1400, which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310, located on the front (surface) of the upper left region of the front component 1000. In contrast, the left-side game board 5AL has a sub-function display unit 2250 (referred to as the "fourth symbol"), which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the peripheral control board 1510, located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and protruding toward the game area 5a. Although the sub-function display unit 2250 was located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 and protruding toward the game area 5a, it may instead be located on any of the units or components that make up the above-described front unit 2000. Furthermore, the game status displayed on the sub-function display unit 2250 may include at least the first special symbol display and/or the second special symbol display displayed on the function display unit 1400, and the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a predetermined light emission pattern, or it may be displayed in a light emission pattern similar to that of the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400.

The left-side game board 5AL has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side front component 1000L") and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side game panel 1100L") positioned on the back side of the left-side front component 1000L. The right-side game board 5AR has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side front component 1000L") and a plate-shaped game panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side game panel 1100R") positioned on the back side of the right-side front component 1000R. The aforementioned back unit 3000 is positioned on the back side of the divided game board 5A, that is, on the back side of the left-side game panel 1100L and the right-side game panel 1100R. When viewing the split game board 5A from the front, the right side (facing the right game panel 1100R) of the back box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left back box 3010L") of the back unit 3000 located behind the left game panel 1100L on the left game board 5AL is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right opening of left back box 3010L"). Similarly, the left side (facing the left game panel 1100L) of the back box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right back box 3010R") of the back unit 3000 located behind the right game panel 1100R on the right game board 5AR is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left opening of right back box 3010R").

Behind the left rear box 3010L are the aforementioned detachable display device 1600, a peripheral control unit 1500 housing the aforementioned peripheral control board 1510, a main control unit 1300 housing the aforementioned main control board 1310, and a left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L") housing various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to the various display units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The main control board 1310 is equipped with the aforementioned setting key switch 1311a, which allows switching and confirmation of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1.

Behind the right rear box 3010R is the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right drive board unit 1700R"), which houses various circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.).

Thus, in the split game board 5A, the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, which are boards on which microprocessors are mounted, are located at the rear of the left game board 5AL, while the drive board that drives the decorative board on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motor and drive solenoid, etc., of the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R is located at the rear of the right game board 5AR. In other words, the split game board 5A is composed of the left game board 5AL, which has a microprocessor mounted on it, and the right game board 5AR, which does not have a microprocessor mounted on it. Furthermore, while the front of the right-side game board 5AR is equipped only with the control targets of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., movable parts on the game board side) to execute game effects, the front of the left-side game board 5AL is equipped not only with the control targets of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., sub-function display unit 2250) but also with the control targets of the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) to display information directly related to the progress of the game (information regarding wins and losses, information regarding the type of jackpot, etc.). Thus, the right-side game board 5AR is configured to have only a board without a microprocessor mounted on the rear and only the control targets of the peripheral control board 1510 on the front, making it easier to modify the right-side game board 5AR in response to changes in design, specifications, etc.

Furthermore, in addition to the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 mentioned above, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with a panel relay board 1710, a general prize entry sensor 3001, a first start entry sensor 3002, a second start entry sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large prize entry sensor 2402, a special prize entry sensor 2601, a V prize entry sensor 3003, a losing entry sensor 3004, a start entry solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a special prize entry solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid 3007, a magnetic sensor 1050, a base monitor 1310h, and the like. In other words, in this example, even if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected to the left-side game board 5AL, or if the combination of the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR is deemed incompatible, it is possible to run the game using only the left-side game board 5AL.

[24-1. Drawer Connector]
As described above, the left drive board unit 1700L, located at the rear of the left rear box 3010L, houses various relay boards. Among these various relay boards, the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is located at the upper rear of the left rear box 3010L, near the right opening of the left rear box 3010L, and has two left game board drawer connectors LDRW mounted vertically. The two left game board drawer connectors LDRW are of the convex type. The left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 either via various relay boards or directly. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to various relay boards, and via the relay boards, or directly, to the drive boards that drive decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units in the left drive board unit 1700L, and is also electrically connected to the sub-function display unit 2250.

Furthermore, as described above, the right-side drive board unit 1700R, located behind the right-side rear box 3010R, houses various relay boards. Of these relay boards, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW is located on the upper rear side of the right-side rear box 3010R, near the left-side opening. This relay board has two left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW and LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, corresponding to the RDRW and LDRW connectors on the RDRW and LDRW connectors on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW. The two right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW are of the concave type. The drive boards that drive the decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motors, and the drive solenoids, which are attached to the various performance units in the right-side drive board unit 1700R, are electrically connected to the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW via the various relay boards, or directly.

Below the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL, in the center of the lower edge of the divided game board 5A, which is formed by combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, a lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is positioned, on which two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of the convex type. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. On the front surface of the main frame 4, at positions corresponding to the two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL, two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on a main frame side relay board (not shown). The two drawer connectors on the main frame are of the recessed type. Various circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative circuit boards and various relay circuit boards located on the tray unit 200, the left side unit 420, the right side unit 430, and the top unit 450 of the door frame; these relay circuit boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors of the performance control unit 300 of the tray unit 200) are electrically connected to the drawer connectors on the main frame.

This section describes drawer connectors such as the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type), the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type), the lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type), and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). The left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) and the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) are connectors that automatically establish an electrical connection between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR simply by combining them. The lower-side game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) are connectors that automatically establish an electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the split game board 5A simply by attaching the split game board 5A to the main frame 4.

[24-1a. Drawer connector for left-side game board, drawer connector for right-side game board]
When the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined, the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, which are mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL (which are convex type), are guided and fitted into the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, which are mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR (which are concave type). As a result, each terminal of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL is electrically connected to each terminal of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, which are mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR.

When the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined, the terminals of the left game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL and the terminals of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR are electrically connected, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left back box 3010L of the left game board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right back box 3010R of the right game board 5AR, and also, left A ground (GND) line is formed in which the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the side game board 5AL is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R of the right game board 5AR. Furthermore, various power lines are formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R of the right game board 5AR via the various control boards and/or other various boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left game board 5AL.

Furthermore, mounting through-holes are formed in the insulating outer casings of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the insulating outer casings of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW. The left-side game board 5AL, on which the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are mounted, has through-holes provided at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW. Similarly, the right-side game board 5AR, on which the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, has through-holes provided at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW.

When mounting the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW onto the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, first insert the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW from the mounting side of the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW into the through-holes for terminals formed on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, toward the soldering side of the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, and solder the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW that protrude from the soldering side to the land portion of the through-hole for terminals. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating outer casing of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW is fixed to the through-hole land portion of the terminals by soldering the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, and further fixed to the left-side game board 5AL's drawer connector relay board 5ALLDRW by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this manner, when joining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided and fitted into the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the through-holes to which the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW are soldered from the base material of the left-side game board 5AL's drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW.

When mounting the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, the same procedure as when mounting the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, is followed by connecting each terminal of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW of the right-side game board 5AR to the right side of the right-side game board 5AR. The right-side game board 5AR is inserted from the mounting side of the right-side game board 5AR into the through-holes for terminals formed on the game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, and the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW that protrude from the soldering side are soldered to the land portion of the through-hole for terminals. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating outer casing of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board are fixed to the through-hole land portion of the terminals by soldering each terminal of the RDRW, RDRW, and further, the insulating outer casing of the RDRW, RDRW is fixed to the right-side game board 5AR's drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this manner, when joining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided and fitted into the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the through-holes to which the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW are soldered from the base material of the right-side game board 5AR's right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW.

[24-1b. Lower game board drawer connector, main frame side drawer connector]
When the split game board 5A is mounted on the main frame 4, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL (which is a convex type), are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 (which is a concave type), and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 are electrically connected.

By mounting the split game board 5A onto the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, which is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, and the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 are electrically connected. This connects the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left back box 3010L of the left game board 5AL to various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, door frame top unit 450). The various relay boards receive signals from various sensors of the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200. This includes a relay for control signals that transmit detection signals and various information. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals to ( ). Furthermore, a ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4. Additionally, various power lines are formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) generated by the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other various boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL.

Furthermore, by mounting the split game board 5A onto the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, and the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 are electrically connected. This forms a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310, located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left game board 5AL, and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

Furthermore, mounting through-holes are formed in the insulating outer casing of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, and in the insulating outer casing of the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are mounted, has through-holes at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW. Additionally, the main frame side relay board (not shown), on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, has through-holes at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

Here, for example, when mounting the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW onto the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, first, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are inserted from the mounting surface of the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW towards the soldering surface of the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW into the through-holes for terminals formed on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW that protrude from the soldering surface are soldered to the land portion of the through-hole for terminals. Then, rivets are inserted into the mounting through-holes formed in the insulating outer casing of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are fixed to the through-hole land portion of the terminals by soldering their respective terminals, and furthermore, the insulating outer casing of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW is fixed to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing it in this manner, when the divided game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the load generated when the lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) is guided and fitted into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) prevents the lower game board drawer connector UDRW and the land portions of the through-holes to which the terminals of the UDRW are soldered from the base material of the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310, which is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a (a microprocessor), transmits various commands to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, including a self-identification code (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID") that can identify itself. In other words, the various commands from the main control board 1310 are composed of an ID. To put it another way, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands containing the ID to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, allowing the microprocessor on the receiving control board to determine the compatibility (integrity) of the combination between the main control board 1310 and the receiving control board.

The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, and various commands are transmitted in a unidirectional direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 extracts IDs from the received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is compatible (matched). This determination is performed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing, as shown in Figure 220.

In step S1022, during the received command analysis process, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is incompatible (inconsistent). In this case, it passes the received command as a command to be displayed as a notification to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the power-on process of the peripheral control unit, as shown in Figure 220. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting a process to stop the progress of the effects.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can only transmit data in one direction to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the game proceeds without resolution.

In contrast, the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is achieved by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL when the split game board 5A is mounted on the main frame 4, to the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Through these drawer connectors, various commands are transmitted bidirectionally between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 extracts IDs from the received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matches). This determination is performed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control main processing of the payout control power-on processing shown in Figure 218.

When the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 determines in the command analysis process of step S560 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the state information storage area of the built-in dispensing control RAM, and also sets information to stop the dispensing operation in the output information storage area of the built-in dispensing control RAM, and passes this information to the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the dispensing control main process of the dispensing control power-on process shown in Figure 218, and to the command transmission process of step S566 in the dispensing control main process of the dispensing control power-on process shown in Figure 218. In step S564, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 creates display data (for example, display data showing the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the dispensing control board 633 as a non-conformity (inconsistency) and sets it as LED display information in the output information storage area of the built-in RAM of the dispensing control. In step S566, the command transmission process creates a non-conformity command (inconsistency command) to convey the non-conformity (inconsistency) and transmits it to the main control board 1310. Furthermore, in step S548, the port output process of the main processing of the dispensing control unit in the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit shown in Figure 218, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 stops the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 584 and outputs display data (for example, the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator.

As described above, the main control board 1310 receives various commands bidirectionally between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, the dispensing control board 633 can determine the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and transmits this determination result as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 analyzes the received command result in step S1022 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 220. If this determination result is incompatible (inconsistent), the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 220 is set to notify the system of this incompatibility. At this point, the system may either continue the performance as is or set to stop the performance.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 receives the judgment result from the payout control board 633 regarding the compatibility (inconsistency) of the combination between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. If the received judgment result indicates incompatibility (inconsistency), the game may continue as is or be stopped.

In the game board 5A shown in Figures 248 and 249, the A specification is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR. When changing from the A specification of the divided game board 5A to the A2 specification (where the shape of the decorative members and the shape of the game area 5a on the right game board differ from those of the A specification, but the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are the same as those in the various ROMs, and it simply involves a redesign of the right game board), to create game board 5A2, as shown in Figure 250, game board 5A2 consists of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5A2R. The A2 specification is a redesign of the right game board in the A specification, and the left game board 5AL from the A specification can be used in common. Therefore, it is only necessary to replace the right game board 5AR of the A specification with the right game board 5A2R of the A2 specification (i.e., only the right game board needs to be replaced).

Furthermore, various components that can be used in common across various specifications, such as the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and other various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), may be arranged on the left game board 5AL. Specifically, various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be arranged on the left game board 5AL because they can be implemented by changing the contents of various ROMs. In addition, prize winning slots whose arrangement and number are fixed regardless of the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. Furthermore, decorative components and game area 5a whose shapes can be used in common regardless of the specifications are arranged on the left game board 5AL. Furthermore, other various circuit boards that can be used in common regardless of specifications (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards with various LEDs mounted on them that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) are placed on the left game board 5AL.

In contrast, parts that depend on the specifications may be placed on the right-hand game board 5AR. Specifically, the prize winning slots that depend on the specifications will be placed on the right-hand game board 5AR. Furthermore, the shapes of the decorative elements and the shapes of the game area 5a that depend on the specifications will be placed on the right-hand game board 5AR.

[24-2. Self-identification code of the right-hand game board in a split game board]
In the split game board, as described above, a configuration is adopted in which the left game board and the right game board are combined, and a microprocessor is installed in the left game board, while a microprocessor is not installed in the right game board.

However, while such split game boards allow for simple combination of the left and right game boards, human error can occur, such as workers assembling the split game boards mistakenly assembling an incorrect (incompatible) combination of the left and right game boards. If such an incompatible (incompatible) split game board is installed in the main frame 4 of a pachinko machine 1 in a gaming hall and a player plays, for example, the overall design uniformity of the pachinko machine may be lost, potentially reducing the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, it is undesirable for a pachinko machine different from the specifications submitted to the application agency and approved to be installed in the gaming hall. Additionally, if, due to human error, decorative components corresponding to the old game board are not replaced with those corresponding to the new game board, the overall uniformity of the game machine may be lost, potentially reducing the player's enjoyment of the game.

[24-2a. ID Output Circuit]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the right-side game board 5AR (right-side game board 5A2R) is equipped with an ID output circuit that can output a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself to the left-side game board 5AL. The ID output circuit will be described here with reference to Figure 251. Figure 251 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the ID output circuit.

The right-side game board 5AR is equipped with an ID output circuit IDC that can identify itself. This ID output circuit IDC may be mounted on a dedicated circuit board located behind the right-side game board 5AR, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards.

The ID output circuit IDC is mainly composed of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is an electronic component that is mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (eight flip-flop circuits) and can be integrated into a chip for daisy-chain connection. It has eight ID setting terminals (A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H) that can set the ID (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set the ID with an 8-bit width), a CK terminal into which the ID acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H and outputs it serially as serial data without inversion, an inverting QH terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) that takes the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H, inverts it and outputs it serially as serial data, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of the clock signal. It primarily consists of the INH terminal, the S/inverting L terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram), which switches between a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit acquires information set at the eight ID setting terminals A through H, the SI terminal into which serial data is input, the power supply terminal Vcc into which control power is supplied, and the GND terminal which is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa has its power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, and its GND terminal, CK INT terminal, and SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). The non-inverting QH terminal is left unconnected, and the inverting QH terminal outputs the serial data converted from the parallel data (ID) set in the eight ID setting terminals as an ID code signal.

The S/Inverting L terminal receives the SH/LD switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa captures and stores (holds) the information set at the eight ID setting terminals A through H at that moment. However, when the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is shift operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI), which is the inverted parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the circuit performs sequential shift operations on the captured information at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverting L terminal may be output from the peripheral control board 1510, or from a delay circuit provided together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. This delay circuit is implemented on the board as part of the ID output circuit IDC, coexisting with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. For a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is powered on, the SH/LD switching signal logic is set to parallel operation logic. After this predetermined time has elapsed, the circuit switches from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined time" is set to, for example, 30 milliseconds. When the pachinko machine is powered on and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 220, the initial setup processing in step S1000, followed by the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002, is completed within this predetermined time. This is because the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 needs to acquire an ID code signal from the output of the ID acquisition clock signal in the ID determination processing described later, and determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR.

When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/Inverting L terminal is configured to be output from the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can adjust the timing of when it starts to acquire the information set in the eight ID setting terminals from terminal A to terminal H. This allows for verification (malfunction testing) of the parallel operation of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa. However, it is necessary to provide a transmission path for the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/Inverting L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa.

In contrast, when the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverting L terminal is configured to be output from a delay circuit, the period during which each flip-flop circuit of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa starts to acquire the information set at the eight ID setting terminals from terminal A to terminal H is limited to a predetermined time (for example, 30 milliseconds) from the time the pachinko machine is powered on. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot verify the parallel operation of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa (defect check), and there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverting L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa. When transmitting various control signals via a drawer connector, there is a limit to the number of terminals on the drawer connector, so it is necessary to reduce the number of control signals as much as possible. When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverting L terminal is configured to be output from the delay circuit, it is not necessary to provide a transmission path for the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverting L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa. Therefore, this contributes to reducing the number of control signals transmitted via the drawer connector.

In this embodiment, the eight ID setting terminals of the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V at terminals A, B, C, and D, while terminals E, F, G, and H are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side game board 5AR, when represented with an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, becomes 11110000B (where the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when represented in hexadecimal, it becomes F0H (where the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the eight ID setting terminals of the right-side game board 5A2R shown in Figure 250 are electrically connected to +5V at terminals A, B, C, D, and H, while terminals E, F, and G are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side game board 5A2R, when represented as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, becomes 11110001B (where the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when represented as a hexadecimal number, it becomes F1H (where the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). Thus, the IDs of the right-side game board 5AR and the right-side game board 5A2R are pre-set to be different. In this embodiment, although the A and A2 specifications of the split game board 5A differ in the shape of the decorative members on the right-hand game board and the shape of the game area 5a, as described above, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are the same as those in the various ROMs. Since the right-hand game board can be redecorated, the combination of the left-hand game board 5AL and the right-hand game board 5AR is compatible (aligned), and the combination of the left-hand game board 5AL and the right-hand game board 5A2R is also compatible (aligned).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the S/inverting L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa operates as an 8-bit shift register because each flip-flop circuit shifts sequentially on the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (i.e., the information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → and then shifts one bit at a time from the non-inverting QH terminal and inverting QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data).

By combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL and the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side back box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right-side back box 3010R of the right-side game board 5AR. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right game board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that allows it to identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL, via the terminals of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR and the terminals of the left game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. Therefore, the loss of overall design uniformity in the pachinko machines can be prevented, thus mitigating the decline in players' enjoyment of the game. Further explanation of this determination will follow later.

Furthermore, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL. However, instead of this, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left-side game board drawer connector of the left-side game board 5AL can be used to transmit an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. The connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, thereby transmitting the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC on the right-side game board 5AR to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, thereby transmitting the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC on the right-side game board 5AR to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL.

Furthermore, the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR, may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors, or they may be distributed and transmitted through both drawer connectors.

[24-2b. Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions of various movable parts on the right-side game board]
Next, when the right-side game board 5AR is equipped with various movable parts, the detection signals from the photosensor that detect the positions (original position and operating position) of the various movable parts will be explained with reference to Figure 252. Figure 252 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit.

The detection signals from the photosensor that detects the positions (original position and operating position) of various movable parts on the right-side game board 5AR are aggregated in the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as shown in Figure 252. The photosensor information serial output circuit PSO mainly consists of a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit PSOa. This parallel-to-serial conversion circuit PSOa in the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is the same circuit as the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC described above. Therefore, explanations of each terminal, the parts with identical circuit configurations, and the operation are omitted here.

The detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (original and operating positions) of the various movable parts on the right-side game board 5AR are input to eight input terminals: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can be set with an 8-bit width ID). If the number of photosensors that detect the positions (original and operating positions) of the various movable parts on the right-side game board 5AR is less than eight, the number of input terminals corresponding to the missing number will be electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground).

The inverting QH terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) receives the information set in the eight input terminals A through H, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data. It is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC mentioned above. In other words, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit PSOa and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are daisy-chained together.

The S/Inverting L terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) switches between a shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit acquires information set at the eight input terminals A through H. The SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input to this terminal. The SH/LD switching signal is input to the S/Inverting L terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as well as the S/Inverting L terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

In the right-side game board 5AR, when the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are electrically connected to +5V, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC have their respective flip-flop circuits shift sequentially on the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal. (In other words, the information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → and the ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverting QH terminal and the inverting QH terminal.) Therefore, it operates as a 16-bit shift register, consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, and an 8-bit shift register by the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

By combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL and the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side back box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL and the various boards in the right-side game board 5AR. As a result, from the perspective of the peripheral control board 1510, which is located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL, the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC in the right-side game board 5AR becomes the preceding 8-bit shift register, and the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR becomes the succeeding 8-bit shift register. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 receives, one bit at a time, as serial data, first the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR, which becomes the succeeding 8-bit shift register, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR, which becomes the succeeding 8-bit shift register.

The ID output circuit IDC and the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, both located on the right-side game board 5AR, transmit an ID code signal that allows the right-side game board 5AR to identify itself, and a detection signal that detects the position of various movable parts on the right-side game board 5AR, as a single serial signal, a photo and an ID code signal, to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. This signal is transmitted via a drawer connector formed by the right-side game board 5AR's drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left-side game board LDRW terminals on the left-side game board 5ALDRW. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL acquires a photo and ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, allowing it to determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, and to determine the positions of various movable parts. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, for example, at a predetermined timing, in the movable part information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, sets and outputs the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to perform parallel operation, then serial operation, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal to acquire a photo and ID code signal, allowing it to determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, and to determine the positions of various movable parts.

Furthermore, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can transmit photo and ID code signals to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL. However, instead of this, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and The left-side game board 5AL and the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors at both ends, and the photo and ID code signals may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors at both ends, and the photo and ID code signals may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL.

Furthermore, by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side game board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC, it operates as a 16-bit shift register as described above. The photo and ID code signals are configured as serial signals containing information from the detection signals from the photosensor that detects the positions (original position and operating position) of various movable parts provided in the right-side game board 5AR, and the ID information of the right-side game board 5AR. The terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW, which are mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, and the left-side game board drawer connector, which is mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL Previously, the data was transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via a drawer connector using the terminals of LDRW and LDRW. Alternatively, the inverted QH terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the SI terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC in the right-side game board 5AR could be configured as separate serial systems. This data could then be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via a drawer connector using the terminals of the RDRW and RDRW drawer connectors mounted on the right-side game board 5AR's drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, and the terminals of the LDRW and LDRW drawer connectors mounted on the left-side game board 5ALDRW's drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW.

[24-2c. Self-identification code when the right-side game board is further divided]
Here, we will explain the ID output circuit in the case where the right-side game board 5AR is further divided into an upper and lower section, consisting of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, with reference to Figure 253. Figure 253 is a circuit diagram showing an example of multiple ID output circuits.

The right-side game board 5AR can be assembled by combining the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU. After combining the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU, the right-side game board 5AR is fixed together by tightening bolts (not shown) through connecting members (not shown) provided on each of the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU from one end to the other. This ensures that the surfaces of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connection point between the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU, automatically become flush (i.e., no steps are created).

Furthermore, the right-side game board 5AR is fixed to the right-side game board 5ART and the right-side game board 5ARU by fastening them together with connecting members (not shown) provided on the right-side game board 5ART and the right-side game board 5ARU, with bolts (not shown) passing from one end to the other. After that, the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are combined. The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are fixed together by fastening connecting members (not shown) provided on each of the game boards (5AL and 5AR) from one end to the other using bolts (not shown), and the divided game board 5A is then mounted on the main frame 4. However, the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU may each be individually fixed to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surfaces of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which are the connecting portions between the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU, automatically become flush (i.e., no steps are created) as the left game board 5AL, the upper right game board 5ART, and the lower right game board 5ARU are fixed to the main frame 4.

The upper right game board 5ART has a right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which the aforementioned right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted. The two right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of the concave type. Furthermore, the upper right game board 5ART also has a right-side game board drawer connector relay board on which two upper-side game board drawer connectors (not shown) are mounted. These two upper-side game board drawer connectors are of the convex type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motors, and the drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units in the upper right game board 5ART, are electrically connected to the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW either via various relay boards or directly.

The lower right game board 5ARU has a lower right game board drawer connector relay board, which is mounted on a position corresponding to the two upper right game board drawer connectors located on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board (not shown). The two lower right game board drawer connectors are of the concave type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, the drive motors, and the drive solenoids attached to the various performance units in the lower right game board 5ARU are electrically connected to the lower right game board drawer connector relay board (not shown) via various relay boards, or directly.

The two upper-right game board drawer connectors (convex type) and the two lower-right game board drawer connectors (concave type), not shown in the diagram, are connectors that automatically electrically connect the upper-right game board 5ART and the lower-right game board 5ARU simply by joining them together.

When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board, which are convex type and mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, are guided and fitted into the two drawer connectors for the lower right game board, which are concave type and mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU. This electrically connects the terminals of the two drawer connectors on the upper right game board 5ART to the terminals of the two drawer connectors on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU. This electrical connection forms control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the various circuit boards in the upper right game board 5ART and the various circuit boards in the lower right game board 5ARU. It also forms a ground (GND) line that electrically connects the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the various circuit boards in the upper right game board 5ART to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the various circuit boards in the lower right game board 5ARU. Furthermore, it forms various power lines that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various circuit boards in the lower right game board 5ARU via the various circuit boards in the upper right game board 5ART.

The insulating outer casings of the two upper-right game board drawer connectors and the two lower-right game board drawer connectors, similar to the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW and RDRW described above, each have mounting through-holes. Rivets are inserted into these mounting through-holes, and the ends of the rivets are crimped. The rivets then undergo plastic deformation, fixing the two upper-right game board drawer connectors to the upper-right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper-right game board 5ART, and the two lower-right game board drawer connectors to the lower-right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower-right game board 5ARU.

By fixing them in this manner, when the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are joined together, the load generated when the upper right game board drawer connector (convex type) is guided and fitted into the lower right game board drawer connector (concave type) prevents the soldered terminals of the through-holes of the upper right game board drawer connector from peeling off from the base material of the upper right game board 5ART's drawer connector relay board. Similarly, the soldered terminals of the lower right game board drawer connector from the soldered terminals of the through-holes of the lower right game board drawer connector from the base material of the lower right game board 5ARU's drawer connector relay board.

The upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART may be mounted on a dedicated circuit board that only it has on it, located behind the upper right game board 5ART, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the upper right game board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the upper right game board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the upper right game board 5ART. The ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU may be mounted on a dedicated circuit board located behind the lower right game board 5ARU, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the lower right game board 5ARU, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the lower right game board 5ARU, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the lower right game board 5ARU.

The ID output circuits IDCT and IDCU have the same circuit configuration as the ID output circuit IDC described above, and a detailed explanation will be omitted, but they are mainly composed of parallel serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa, respectively. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART is the same as the ID output circuit IDC described above, and the ID of the upper right game board 5ART, when represented in an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when represented in hexadecimal, it is F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the ID of the lower right game board 5ARU, when represented as an 8-bit number with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (where the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when represented in hexadecimal, it is F8H (where the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART is identical to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC mentioned above, except that the SI terminal is not electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted. When the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU are combined, the CK terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa is automatically electrically connected via a drawer connector consisting of two (not shown) drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board 5ART and two (not shown) drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board 5ARU, as described above. Through this drawer connector, the CK terminal and S/inverting L terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right game board 5ART are electrically connected, respectively, and the ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input.

The S/inverted L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU receives the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART receives the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART, while the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU receives the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right game board 5ARU. Thus, the S/inverted L terminals of parallel serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa each receive SH/LD switching signals from separate delay circuits. The delay circuits in the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU, as described above, are designed to operate the SH/LD switching signal logic in parallel mode for a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is powered on. After this predetermined time has elapsed, the logic switches from parallel operation to shift operation.

Alternatively, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART may be input to the S/inverting L terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via drawer connectors consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board 5ART (not shown) and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board 5ARU (not shown). Furthermore, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL is transmitted to the upper right game board 5ART via a drawer circuit consisting of the terminals of the left game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL, and the terminals of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR. The signal is input to the S/inverting L terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa, and furthermore, it may be input to the S/inverting L terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right game board 5ARU via drawer connectors formed by two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board 5ART (not shown) and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board 5ARU (not shown).

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and its inverted QH terminal is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART via drawer connectors formed by two upper right game board drawer connectors (convex type) (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two lower right game board drawer connectors (concave type) (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART are daisy-chained.

With the S/inverting L terminal electrically connected to +5V, the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU have their respective flip-flop circuits shift sequentially on the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the information input to terminal A → the information input to terminal B → the information input to terminal C) The information input to terminal D is then transferred to terminal E, then to terminal F, then to terminal G, then to terminal H. Because the ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverting QH and inverting QH terminals, this results in a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU.

By combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR (that is, by combining the left-side game board 5AL, the upper-right game board 5ART, and the lower-right game board 5ARU), as described above, the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL and the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the upper-right game board 5ART are electrically connected, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side back box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL and the various boards in the upper-right game board 5ART and the various boards in the lower-right game board 5ARU. As a result, from the perspective of the peripheral control board 1510, which is located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left-side game board 5AL, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART becomes the preceding 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU becomes the succeeding 8-bit shift register. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 receives serial data one bit at a time, sequentially, containing the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which becomes the succeeding 8-bit shift register, following the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the upper right game board 5ART, which becomes the preceding 8-bit shift register.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU can transmit an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via the terminals of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the upper right game board 5ART and the terminals of the left game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALLDRW of the left game board 5AL. This ID code signal allows the ID code to identify itself based on the input ID acquisition clock signal. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL can acquire an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and can determine the compatibility (consistency) between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART can transmit an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right game board drawer connector RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR, and the terminals of the left game board drawer connector LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. However, instead, the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left game board drawer connector relay board of the left game board 5AL... Alternatively, the 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, allowing the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right game board 5ART to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right game board 5ART is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, allowing the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right game board 5ART to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL.

Furthermore, the ID output circuit IDCU, provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, transmits the ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via a first drawer connector formed by the terminals of the two lower right game board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU and the terminals of the two upper right game board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and via a second drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR and the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. While transmission is possible, alternatively, the ID code signal may be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU on the lower right game board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends between the lower right game board drawer connector relay board and the left game board 5ALDRW. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDCU on the lower right game board 5ARU is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via an electrical harness with connectors at both ends, allowing the ID code signal to be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU on the lower right game board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL.

Furthermore, although the first and second drawer connectors each consist of two drawer connectors, the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, and the ID code signals from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the first drawer connector, or distributed and transmitted to both drawer connectors. Similarly, the signals may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the second drawer connector, or distributed and transmitted to both drawer connectors.

When combining the upper right game board and the lower right game board, the upper right game board 5ART should be combined with the lower right game board 5ARU. However, if the upper right game board 5ART is combined with another lower right game board that is not compatible (aligned), the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (aligned). As a result, the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART will change their illumination pattern as the performance progresses, but the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is not compatible (aligned) with the upper right game board 5ART will turn off (all off). Alternatively, when combining the upper right and lower right game boards, specifically when combining the upper right game board 5ART with the lower right game board 5ARU, if the upper right game board 5ART is not compatible (aligned) with another lower right game board, even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (aligned), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART, and the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is not compatible (aligned) with the upper right game board 5ART, may be turned off (all LEDs turned off).

[24-3. ID Determination Process]
In this embodiment, the performance control unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 may be replaceable to match the specifications of the divided game board. In this case, the performance control unit 300 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. That is, the game frame side component, which consists of the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, is provided with a game board side component, which consists of a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a performance control unit 300 not equipped with a microprocessor, in a state that allows for easy attachment and detachment (for example, in a state where it can be attached and detached without using tools such as a screwdriver). Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the performance control unit 300, and are driven by various LED drivers.

In contrast, the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"), such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, which are installed on the door frame 3, are installed in a state that makes them difficult to attach or detach (for example, they are screwed in with screws and are difficult to attach or detach without using tools such as a screwdriver) and are not replaced (or may be made not replaceable) according to the specifications of the divided game board. They are used in common with any divided game board specification, regardless of the specifications of the divided game board. Various LEDs are installed on the divided game board and the door frame units and are driven by various LED drivers. Here, the combinations of the performance operation unit installed on the door frame 3 and the divided game board that are suitable (compatible) as pachinko machine A and the combinations that are suitable (compatible) as pachinko machine B will be explained with reference to Figures 254 and 255. Figure 254 is a table showing the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatching) of combinations, and Figure 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit that can perform ID determination. The power-on processing for the peripheral control unit in Figure 255 performs almost the same processing as the power-on processing for the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 220, and in Figure 255, steps that perform the same processing are shown with the same names and step numbers. Detailed explanations of the same names and step numbers are omitted. Furthermore, in the following description, the door frame units such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, which are provided on the door frame 3, are shown as not being replaced (or not being replaceable) in accordance with the specifications of the split game board. However, instead of the above-mentioned performance operation unit 300, or in addition to the performance operation unit 300, a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) provided on the door frame 3, such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side component may be composed of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the performance operation unit 300 and/or a specific door frame unit that is not equipped with a microprocessor.

Here, the aforementioned ID output circuit is provided, which allows the performance control unit 300 to identify itself as a unit that can be replaced according to the specifications of the split game board. The ID used for pachinko machine A is 00110000B in binary (where "B" represents a binary number) and 30H in hexadecimal (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the performance control unit used for pachinko machine A will be referred to as "performance control unit 300A"). The ID used for pachinko machine B is 00110001B in binary (where "B" represents a binary number) and 31H in hexadecimal (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the performance control unit used for pachinko machine B will be referred to as "performance control unit 300B").

In the configuration of the split game boards in pachinko machine A, the settings are configured as specification A (for example, a type with a setting key, or one that is not a so-called "sweet" type), and the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched). In the configuration of the split game boards in pachinko machine B, the settings are configured as specification B, which is different from specification A (for example, one without a setting key, or one that is a so-called "sweet" type), and the new left game board 5BL and the right game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched).

In that case, as a combination of the performance control unit installed in the door frame 3 of pachinko machine A and the divided game board, the left game board 5AL is compatible (matches) with the combination of the right game board 5AR and the performance control unit 300A, as shown in Figure 254(a). Similarly, as a combination of the performance control unit installed in the door frame 3 of pachinko machine B and the divided game board, the left game board 5BL is compatible (matches) with the combination of the right game board 5AR and the performance control unit 300B, as shown in Figure 254(b). Furthermore, the door frame units, including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, which are installed on the door frame 3, are not replaced according to the specifications of the split game board, as described above. They are used in common with any split game board specification, regardless of the specific split game board specification. Therefore, as shown in Figures 254(a) and (b), the combination of the left game board 5AL and the door frame unit is not subject to compatibility (alignment) in specification A, nor is it subject to compatibility (alignment) in specification B, where the left game board 5BL and the door frame unit are not subject to compatibility (alignment).

The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL acquires IDs from ID code signals transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on, and determines whether the combination of the performance operation unit installed in the door frame 3 and the divided game board is compatible (matched). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the initial setting processing in step S1000, followed by the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002, as shown in Figure 255. Subsequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the ID determination processing in step S1003. In this ID determination processing, in order to acquire the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, it outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal exclusive to the right-side game board) to the right-side game board and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal exclusive to the performance operation unit) to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a then acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (an ID code signal specifically for the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance control unit (an ID code signal specifically for the performance control unit) via separate serial systems. It then determines (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (the peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310, both equipped with microprocessors) by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM. It also determines (compares) the combination of the performance control unit and the split game boards by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

Furthermore, in this ID determination process, the determination (comparison) of the combination of the split game board (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (the board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (the peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor)) and the determination (comparison) of the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board may be performed multiple times (for example, five times). In this case, if three consecutive matches (matches) are obtained as the determination result, the process proceeds as a match (match). Conversely, if three consecutive matches (matches) are not obtained as the determination result, the process proceeds as a mismatch (inconsistency).

In the ID determination process of step S1003, if the determination result for the combination of the divided game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, if the determination result for the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit power-on process. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processes related to the effects.

Furthermore, in the ID determination process of step S1003, if the determination result for the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board is found to be incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processes related to the performance.

Since the peripheral control board 1510 needs to receive various commands from the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine is powered on, the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to complete startup before the main control board 1310's system starts up. For this reason, if the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board is incompatible (incompatible), even if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible), the configuration in which the performance operation unit and the split game board are incompatible (incompatible) will take precedence until a command indicating this is received. Subsequently, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible), it will prioritize the configuration in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible) over the configuration in which the performance operation unit and the split game board are incompatible (incompatible). The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is such that the main control board 1310 is placed on the split game board, while the payout control board 633 is placed on the main frame 4, and the split game board is mounted on the main frame 4. In other words, it is a combination of the split game board and the main frame.

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 previously performed the ID determination process only once when power was supplied (including cases where power was restored after a power outage or after a momentary power outage), before the start of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing. However, to allow the ID determination process to be performed at any time, it may be modified to perform it as part of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (for example, performing the ID determination process as step S1012 following the 1ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010, followed by the performance operation unit monitoring process in step S1014). This would allow the peripheral control IC 1510a to verify the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board multiple times at any desired time.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs an SH/LD switching signal (which may be composed of an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the right game board and an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the performance operation unit, or one SH/LD switching signal may be split into two signals and input to the right game board and the performance operation unit respectively) to the right game board and the performance operation unit, in the ID determination process, first, the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is set to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time (a sufficient time for the parallel serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the right game board and the parallel serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit in the performance operation unit to acquire and store (hold) the information set to the eight ID setting terminals by parallel operation, for example, 2 milliseconds), and this predetermined time After a certain period, the system switches from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic. It then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (a clock signal specifically for the right-side game board) to the right-side game board and an ID acquisition clock signal (a clock signal specifically for the performance control unit) to the performance control unit. The ID code signal from the right-side game board (an ID code signal specifically for the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance control unit (an ID code signal specifically for the performance control unit) are acquired via separate serial systems. The system then determines the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)), and also determines the combination of the performance control unit and the split game boards.

Next, returning to Figure 254, we will explain the state, behavior, and countermeasures of the pachinko machine based on the compatibility (alignment)/incompatibility (incompatibility) of the combination of the performance control unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame. The door frame units, such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, which are provided on the door frame 3, are, as described above, not replaced according to the specifications of the divided game board. They are used commonly regardless of the specifications of the divided game board, and therefore have no effect on the compatibility (alignment)/incompatibility (incompatibility) of the combination of the performance control unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame.

This section explains the details of pachinko machine A. The details of pachinko machine B are identical to those of pachinko machine A and are therefore omitted except for a few parts (in Figure 254(c), the symbols for pachinko machine A are followed by the symbols for pachinko machine B in parentheses).

The combination of the divided game boards in pachinko machine A, and the combination of the divided game boards and the performance operation unit in pachinko machine A, are determined in the ID determination process at step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. The combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame is determined in the command analysis process at step S560 of the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 218. In other words, the combination of the divided game boards in pachinko machine A, and the combination of the divided game boards and the performance operation unit in pachinko machine A, are determined by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 located on the divided game board, while the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame is determined by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 on which the divided game board is mounted. The determination result made by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 stores information on whether the combination of divided game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of divided game boards and the performance operation unit in pachinko machine A are compatible (matched), and information on whether the combination of divided game board 5A and the main frame is compatible (matched).

In the combination of the split game board and the performance control unit in pachinko machine A, it is set as specification A (for example, a type with a setting key, or one that is not a so-called "sweet digital" type), and the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is suitable (compatible), and the combination of the split game board and the performance control unit in pachinko machine A, which consists of the split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A, is suitable (compatible). Furthermore, the combination of the split game board in pachinko machine B, and the combination of the split game board and the performance control unit in pachinko machine B, are set to the B specification (for example, those without setting keys, or so-called "sweet" type machines). The split game board combination that is compatible (matches) is split game board 5B, which consists of the left game board 5BL and the right game board 5AR. The combination of the split game board and the performance control unit in pachinko machine B that is compatible (matches) is split game board 5B and performance control unit 300B.

As shown in Figure 254(c), there are 10 possible states of the pachinko machine, ranging from state 1 to state 10, depending on the combination of the performance control unit 300A and the divided game board 5A, and the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame, resulting in compatibility (alignment) or incompatibility (misalignment).

State 1: Normal. Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are composed of a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are configured and in a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is in a compatible (matched) state.
Behavior of the pachinko machine during the error: Normal operation (no error handling performed).
Solution: None, as it is functioning normally.

Status 2: ID Error 1 (Incompatibility (mismatch) of the right-side game board)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not combined, resulting in a non-conforming (incompatible) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are configured and in a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Solution: After shutting off the power, replace it with a compatible ID part (matched ID part).

Status 3: ID Error 2 (Incompatibility (mismatch) of the performance control unit)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined and in a compatible (aligned) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are not combined, resulting in a mismatch (incompatibility).
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Solution: Replace with a compatible ID part (matching ID part) (replacement is possible even while the power is on).

Condition 4: ID Error 3 (Incompatibility (mismatch) between the main control board and the dispensing control board)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined and in a compatible (aligned) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are configured and in a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Solution: After shutting off the power, replace it with a compatible ID part (matched ID part).

Condition 5: ID Error 4 (Incompatibility (mismatch) of the right-side game board + Incompatibility (mismatch) of the performance control unit)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not combined, resulting in a non-conforming (incompatible) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are not combined, resulting in a mismatch (incompatibility).
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 4.
Solution: After shutting off the power, replace it with a compatible ID part (matched ID part).

Condition 6: ID Error 1, 3 (Incompatibility (mismatch) of the right-side game board + Incompatibility (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not combined, resulting in a non-conforming (incompatible) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are configured and in a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 5.
Solution: After shutting off the power, replace it with a compatible ID part (matched ID part).

Condition 7: ID Error 2, 3 (Incompatibility (mismatch) of the performance control unit + Incompatibility (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined and in a compatible (aligned) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are not combined, resulting in a mismatch (incompatibility).
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 6.
Solution: After shutting off the power, replace it with a compatible ID part (matched ID part).

Status 8: Disconnection Error 1 (Connection to the right-side game board could not be confirmed)
Combination of split game boards: No ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right game board 5AR could not be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: The split game board 5A and the performance control unit 300A are configured and in a compatible (harmonious) state.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is in a compatible (matched) state.
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 7.
Solution: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Status 9: Disconnection Error 2 (Unable to confirm connection with the performance control unit)
Combination of split game boards: The left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are combined and in a compatible (aligned) state.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: No ID code signal input from performance control unit 300A (inability to confirm input of ID code signal from performance control unit 300A), resulting in a state where connection cannot be confirmed due to malfunctions such as short circuits or disconnections in the transmission path that transmits various signals.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is in a compatible (matched) state.
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 8.
Solution: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Status 10: Disconnection Error 3 (Connection to the right-side game board could not be confirmed + Connection to the performance control unit could not be confirmed)
Combination of split game boards: No ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right game board 5AR could not be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and performance control unit: No ID code signal input from performance control unit 300A (inability to confirm input of ID code signal from performance control unit 300A), resulting in a state where connection cannot be confirmed due to malfunctions such as short circuits or disconnections in the transmission path that transmits various signals.
Combination of the split game board and the main frame: The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched).
Pachinko machine behavior during an error: Error response 9.
Solution: Check the connection after turning off the power.

Next, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), we will explain error responses 1 to 9 separately, divided into cases where there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic cheating) when the power is turned on (including recovery from a power outage and recovery from a momentary power outage; the same applies hereinafter), when the performance progresses after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots), or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is stopped), and cases where there is magnetic detection (magnetic cheating) when the performance progresses after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots), or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is stopped).Specific examples 1 will be explained with reference to Figures 256 to 258, and specific examples 2 will be explained with reference to Figures 259 to 261. Figure 256 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 1) at power-on, Figure 257 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 1) without magnetic detection during the progress of performances or while waiting for customers after power-on, and Figure 258 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 1) with magnetic detection during the progress of performances or while waiting for customers after power-on. Furthermore, Figure 259 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 2) at power-on, Figure 260 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 2) without magnetic detection during the progress of performances or while waiting for customers after power-on, and Figure 261 is a table showing various error handling methods (Specific Example 2) with magnetic detection during the progress of performances or while waiting for customers after power-on. Various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID Error 1, ID Error 2, and ID Error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof) cause a greater disruption to gameplay than various disconnection errors (disconnection error 1, disconnection error 2, and disconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)). Furthermore, while magnetic detection resolves after a certain period of time, ID errors and disconnection errors do not resolve even after a certain period of time.

Furthermore, the items listed in the upper row of the tables in Figures 256 to 261 are as follows: "Error Response Number" corresponds to Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error; "Sound" indicates the type of sound emitted from the various speakers installed in the pachinko machine; "Various LEDs of the Door Frame Unit (Various LEDs related to effects (Various decorative LEDs))" indicates the type of light emission of various LEDs (Various LEDs related to effects (Various decorative LEDs)) installed in the door frame unit, such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, which are installed in the door frame 3; and "Various LEDs of the Game Board (Various LEDs related to effects (Various decorative LEDs))" refers to the various LEDs (Various LEDs related to effects (Various decorative LEDs)) installed in the game board (divided game board). This indicates the light emission mode. "Performance Display Device" indicates the display mode of the performance display device 1600 installed on the game board (divided game board). "Sub-Performance Display Device" is installed separately from the performance display device 1600 on the game board (divided game board) or door frame unit, and indicates the display mode of the sub-performance display device. "Function Display Unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 installed on the game board (divided game board). "Sub-Function Display Unit" indicates the display mode of the sub-function display unit 2250 installed on the game board (divided game board). "Game Board Side Movable Body (Performance-Related Movable Body)" indicates the operation of various movable bodies (performance-related movable bodies) installed on the game board (divided game board). "Door Frame Side" indicates the operation of various movable bodies installed on the door frame unit.

Of the items mentioned above, "sound," "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "effect display device," "sub-effect display device," "sub-function display unit," "game board side movable body (movable body related to effects)," and "game frame side movable body" are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 installed on the game board (divided game board), while the "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 installed on the game board (divided game board). Furthermore, if a sub-effect display device is not installed in the pachinko machine, the content displayed on the sub-effect display device is displayed on the effect display device 1600 installed on the game board (divided game board).

Furthermore, as described above, the door frame unit is equipped with a performance control unit 300 on the plate unit 200. Some performance control units 300 do not have the aforementioned ID output circuit; that is, they do not have an ID for self-identification and are used in common across all specifications. In such cases, when the performance control unit 300 is equipped with a movable body such as the performance control section 301, the movable body provided on the performance control unit 300 is treated as part of the "game frame side movable body," and various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards provided on the performance control unit 300 (e.g., the performance control section outer periphery decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button inner decorative board 364, etc.) are treated as part of the "various LEDs of the door frame unit."

In Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) and Error Response 7, "Game Board Side Movable Body" refers to the various movable bodies provided on the left game board, while in Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response) and Error Response 8, it refers to the various movable bodies provided on the left game board and/or the various movable bodies provided on the right game board.

As shown in Figure 254(c), when errors occur in a pachinko machine, errors 1 through 9 must be addressed. To resolve these various errors, the main frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2, or the door frame 3 from the main frame 4. Although the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the door is open, it prioritizes notifying errors 1 through 9 and therefore does not announce that the door is open.

Furthermore, when the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310 determines that the checksum value in step S30 of the main control power-on process shown in Figure 210 does not match when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, it performs the error display process in step S33 of the same process, treating it as a RAM error in the main control's built-in RAM, and then restarts. Even after restarting, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are not updated at all, and the process proceeds again to the error display process in step S33 based on the determination in step S30, leading to repeated restarts and ultimately stopping gameplay.

In a state where such a RAM error occurs, even if error responses 1 to 9 occur as shown in Figure 254(c), only a notification (error display) indicating that a RAM error has occurred is given. However, as shown in Figure 254(c), no notification indicating that error responses 1 to 9 have occurred is given.

To prevent repeated restarts, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turn it ON. Then, while pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, operate the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 to power on the pachinko machine 1. This operation causes the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, clear the entire RAM area in step S38, and then proceed with the game using the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the pachinko hall, are permitted to possess it, and this is limited to 2-3 people.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up by, for example, displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background on the display device 1600. At this time, "Setting" may be displayed after "Power Restoring," or "Setting" may be displayed instead of "Power Restoring." In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, it needs to send a setting change start command as main-peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the setting change has started.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has finished the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, that is, after receiving a setting change command from the main control board 1310, will, as a trigger, issue a notification to indicate if any of the error responses 1 to 9 shown in Figure 254(c) have occurred in the pachinko machine during an error. In other words, even if errors 1 to 9 occur as shown in Figure 254(c) during an error in the pachinko machine, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can change the start time of the error notification by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people in the gaming hall. This is possible if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change processing is completed, in other words, until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed).

[24-3a. Specific example 1: When power is turned on]
First, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254(c) when the power is turned on, Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 will be explained with reference to Figure 256.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: After the startup music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This audio pattern will be repeated.
Door frame unit LEDs: Turn off (all off).
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and displays the image from the performance once the startup music finishes.
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the message "Game board ID error" is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: No movement such as returning to original position (not functioning).
Movable parts on the game frame side: No movement such as returning to the original position (not functioning).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-effect display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, it displays the message "Effect Operation Button ID Error" on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
Audio: After the startup music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by two predetermined error alert sounds. This audio pattern will be repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, a notification message "Main Payout ID Error" is displayed on a predetermined background image, indicating an inconsistency between the main control board installed in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board installed in the main frame 4 on which the game board (split game board) is mounted.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Game board side movable parts: Performs actions such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable parts on the game frame side: Performs actions such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a predetermined background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the notification text "Main Pay ID Error" and "Game Board ID Error" are displayed on a predetermined background image (this is a combination of the content of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response) and Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response) + Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-effect display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Effect operation button ID error" are displayed on a predetermined background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: After the startup music ends, an announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
The display device shows the following messages on a black background: "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait a moment," and "The game board cable has not been inserted" and "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable." Once the startup music finishes, it displays the image from the game's special effects.
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the message "Game board not connected" is displayed on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: No movement such as returning to original position (not functioning).
Movable parts on the game frame side: No movement such as returning to the original position (not functioning).

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: After the startup music ends, an announcement saying "The performance control unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the message "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and the message "Cable for performance control unit detected not inserted" and "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable" and then displays the image from the performance once the startup music finishes.
Sub-effect display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, it displays the message "Performance control unit not connected" on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: After the startup music ends, a first announcement sound saying "Game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. Then, a second announcement sound saying "Performance control unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated (combining the content of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and the message "The game board cable has not been inserted" and "The performance control unit cable has not been inserted" and "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable" are displayed. When the startup music finishes, it displays the image from the performance (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, the device displays the notification text "Game board not connected" and "Display operation unit not connected" on a predetermined background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[24-3b. Specific Example 1: Cases where magnetic detection (so-called magnetic cheating) is not involved during the progress of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic cheating) during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the screen is still), error responses 1 to 9 will be explained with reference to Figure 257.

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
The system plays an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant," followed by a predetermined error alert sound seven times. This sequence of voice messages is repeated.
Door frame unit LEDs: Turn off (all off).
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Please wait a moment" on images during performances (such as images displayed during the progress of a performance, the same applies hereinafter) or on images while customers are waiting (such as images displayed during the progress of a demonstration, the same applies hereinafter).
Sub-display device: Displays the message "Game board ID error" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-effect display device: Displays the message "Effect operation button ID error" on the image during an effect or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
The system plays an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant," followed by a predetermined error alert sound twice. This sequence of voice messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays the message "Main Payout ID Error" on the image during a performance or while the player is waiting, indicating an inconsistency between the main control board installed in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board installed in the main frame 4 on which the game board (split game board) is mounted.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Display operation button ID error" on the image during a performance or while waiting for a customer (this is a combination of the content of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the content of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) and Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) + Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Display operation button ID error" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: An announcement stating "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sequence of audio messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the following message on the image during performances or while the player is waiting: "The game board cable has not been inserted" or "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable."
Sub-display device: Displays the message "Game board not connected" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Game board side movable parts: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: An announcement stating "The performance control unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sequence of audio messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the following message on the image during a performance or while the audience is waiting: "The performance control unit cable has not been inserted" or "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable."
Sub-effect display device: Displays the message "Effect operation unit not connected" on the image during an effect or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: The first announcement sound, "Game board is not connected," is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. Then, the second announcement sound, "Performance control unit is not connected," is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated (combining the content of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has not been inserted" or "The performance control unit cable has not been inserted" on the image during a performance or while the player is waiting (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" or "Display operation unit not connected" on the image during a performance or while the player is waiting (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[24-3c. Specific Example 1: Cases involving magnetic detection (magnet cheating) during the progress of the performance or while waiting for customers after power-on]
Next, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which describe the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), when magnetic detection (magnet cheating) is involved during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is stopped), with reference to Figure 258. Note that when magnetic detection (the act of magnet cheating) is absent, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 257, when magnetic detection (magnet cheating) is not involved during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is stopped), will be as described in error responses 1 to 9.

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
The system plays an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant," followed by a predetermined error alert sound three times. This sequence of voice messages is repeated.
Door frame unit LEDs: Turn off (all off).
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performances (such as images displayed during the progress of a performance, the same applies hereinafter) or images while customers are waiting (such as images displayed during the progress of a demonstration, the same applies hereinafter).
Sub-display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" or "Game board ID error" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-effect display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" or "Effect operation button ID error" on the image during an effect or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
The system plays an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant," followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This sequence of voice messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: When an image is displayed during a performance or while waiting for a customer, the device displays the message "Main Payout ID Error" and the message "Magnet Detected" on the image, indicating an inconsistency between the main control board installed in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board installed in the main frame 4 on which the game board (split game board) is mounted.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected,""Game board ID error," and "Display operation button ID error" on the image during a performance or while waiting for a customer (this is a combination of the content of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays notification text such as "Main payment ID error,""Game board ID error," and "Magnet detection" on the image during a performance or while waiting for a customer (this is a combination of the content of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) and Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) + Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays notification text such as "Main payment ID error,""Display operation button ID error," and "Magnet detection" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) and Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response) (Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 response) + Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: An announcement stating "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sequence of audio messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays the following message on the image during performances or while the player is waiting: "The game board cable has not been inserted" or "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable."
Sub-display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" or "Game board not connected" on the image during a performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Game board side movable parts: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: An announcement stating "The performance control unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sequence of audio messages is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The performance control unit cable has not been inserted" or "Please cut off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during a performance or while customers are waiting.
Sub-effect display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" or "Effect operation unit not connected" on the image during the performance or while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: An announcement stating "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. Then, an announcement stating "The performance control unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeated (combining the content of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has not been inserted" or "The performance control unit cable has not been inserted" on the image during a performance or while the player is waiting (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-effect display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected,""Game board not connected," or "Effect operation unit not connected" on the image during an effect or while waiting for a customer (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[24-3d. Specific example 2: When power is turned on]
Next, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254(c) when the power is turned on, error responses 1 to 9 will be explained with reference to Figure 259.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is silent. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and displays an image of the game board connection error section of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: Perform actions such as returning to their original position and advancing the effects (operation).
Movable parts on the game frame side: No movement such as returning to the original position (not functioning).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is silent. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the performance control unit. Please turn off the power and check the performance control unit." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it displays notification text such as "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:","Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the performance operation unit," and displays an image of the performance operation unit connection error area of the pachinko machine lit up.
Sub-effect display device: Simultaneously with the start of the startup music, it displays the message "Effect Operation Button ID Error" on a predetermined background image.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is silent. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it displays notification text such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the main control and payout control" indicating an incompatibility between the main control board in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board in the main frame 4 in which the game board (split game board) is mounted, and displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Game board side movable parts: Performs actions such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable parts on the game frame side: Performs actions such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is silent. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "The game board is not connected." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it switches to displaying an image from the performance (such as an image displayed during the progress of the performance, the same applies below), and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board not connected error".
Sub-effect display device: Displays images during the performance.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Game board side movable parts: Performs actions such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable parts on the game frame side: No movement such as returning to the original position (not functioning).

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is silent. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "The performance control unit is not connected." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it switches to the image used during the performance and displays the notification text "Error Number:" and "Performance Operation Unit Not Connected Error".
Sub-effect display device: Displays images during the performance.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no startup music and the system is muted. Then, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "The game board is not connected." This is followed by another predetermined error notification sound, and then an announcement saying "The performance control unit is not connected" (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off) (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background, it switches to the image shown during the performance, displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error", and then displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit unconnected error" (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-effect display device: Displays the image during the effect (combines the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specification, in specific example 2: Error response 1 to error response 6 when power is turned on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit are also flashing red. However, only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit may be turned off (all turned off). Furthermore, in specific example 2: Error handling 7 to error handling 9 during power-on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit blink white. Therefore, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance control unit also blink white. However, it is possible to turn off only some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance control unit (the LEDs mounted on one of the decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards), or to turn off all of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance control unit. In other words, if only some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance control unit (the LEDs mounted on one of the decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards) are turned off (all turned off), the restriction of turning off (all turned off) does not apply to the other LEDs on the various decorative boards in the performance control unit, excluding those partially turned off (the LEDs mounted on one of the decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards).

[24-3e. Specific Example 2: Cases where magnetic detection (so-called magnetic cheating) is not involved during the progress of the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic cheating) during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the screen is still), error responses 1 to 9 will be explained with reference to Figure 260.

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and displays an image of the pachinko machine with the game board connection error area lit up.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the performance control unit. Please turn off the power and then check the performance control unit." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays notification text on a black background that reads "Performance control unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance control unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the performance control unit," and displays an image of the performance control unit connection error section of the pachinko machine illuminated.
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: On a black background, it displays notification text such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the main control and payout control," indicating that the combination of the main control board installed in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board installed in the main frame 4 into which the game board (split game board) is mounted is incompatible, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: The sound effects are played, along with a predetermined error notification sound played once, followed by an announcement saying "The game board is not connected." This audio sequence is repeated along with the sound effects.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performances (such as images displayed during the progress of a performance, the same applies hereinafter) or images while customers are waiting (such as images displayed during the progress of a demonstration, the same applies hereinafter).
Sub-display device: Displays images during performances or while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: The sound effects are played, along with a predetermined error notification sound played once, followed by an announcement saying, "The performance control unit is not connected." This audio sequence is repeated along with the sound effects.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash white.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performances or while customers are waiting.
Sub-display device: Displays images during performances or while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: The system plays a sound effect, a predetermined error notification sound once, an announcement saying "The game board is not connected," followed by another predetermined error notification sound once, and then an announcement saying "The performance control unit is not connected." This audio pattern is repeated along with the sound effect (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Display device: (Same as Error Handling 7 and Error Handling 8 (Error Handling 7 + Error Handling 8)).
Sub-display device: (Same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 is not provided with an ID for self-identification and the performance control unit 300 can be used in common with any specification, in specific example 2: Error response 1 to error response 6 when power is turned on (without magnetic trick), the various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit are also flashing red. However, only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit may be turned off (all turned off). Furthermore, in specific example 2: Error response 7 to error response 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic trick), the various LEDs on the door frame unit are blinking white, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit are also blinking white. However, it is also possible to turn off (turn off all) only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards), or to turn off (turn off all) all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit. In other words, if only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (turn off all), the restriction of turning off (turning off all) does not apply to the other various LEDs other than some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[24-3f. Specific Example 2: Cases involving magnetic detection (magnet cheating) during the progress of the performance or while waiting for customers after power-on]
Next, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which describe the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c), when magnetic detection (magnet cheating) is involved during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is frozen), with reference to Figure 261. Note that when magnetic detection (the act of magnet cheating) is absent, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 260, when magnetic detection (magnet cheating) is not involved during the progression of the performance after power-on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the entry of game balls into various prize slots) or when the machine is waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when the image is frozen), will be as described in error responses 1 to 9.

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: Displays the following messages on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and displays an image of the pachinko machine with the game board connection error area illuminated.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: No action such as returning to the original position (not operating). However, if the parts are operating in conjunction with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, in addition to the progress of the performance, they may stop or return to the original position at the point when this error occurs.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred with the performance control unit. Please turn off the power and then check the performance control unit." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Displays notification text on a black background that reads "Display operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Display operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the display operation unit," and displays an image of the display operation unit connection error section of the pachinko machine illuminated.
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Display device: On a black background, it displays notification text such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the main control and payout control," indicating that the combination of the main control board installed in the game board (split game board) and the payout control board installed in the main frame 4 into which the game board (split game board) is mounted is incompatible, and also displays an image of the incompatible combination of the game board and frame.
Sub-display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display device: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Movable part on the game frame side: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Sub-display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 2 (ID Error 2 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 Response).

[Error Handling 7]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "Magnetic sensor error." This audio pattern is repeated.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red.
All LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (such as images displayed during the progress of the performance, the same applies hereinafter) or images while waiting for customers (such as images displayed during the progress of the demonstration, the same applies hereinafter), and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Magnetic sensor error".
Sub-display device: Displays images during performances or while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: The designated LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Designated LEDs light up (when waiting for customers: off (all LEDs off)).
Game board side movable parts: In addition to the progression of the performance, they move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).
Movable parts on the game frame: In addition to the progression of the game's effects, they also move in accordance with the progress of demonstrations while customers are waiting, and they also move to return to their original position (movement).

[Error Handling 8]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-display unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Display device: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-display unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Sub-function display unit: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Game board side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Game frame side movable part: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 is not provided with an ID for self-identification and the performance control unit 300 can be used in common with any specification, in specific example 2: Error response 1 to error response 9 when power is turned on (without magnetic trick), the various LEDs on the door frame unit are flashing red, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit are also flashing red. However, only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance control unit may be turned off (all turned off). In other words, if only some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards in the performance control unit (specific LEDs mounted on one of the decorative circuit boards, or specific LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards) are turned off (all turned off), then the restriction of turning off (all turned off) does not apply to the other LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards in the performance control unit, excluding those specific LEDs.

Furthermore, in the error responses 7, 8, and 9 in Figures 256 to 261, which correspond to states 8: unconnected error 1, 9: unconnected error 2, and 10: unconnected error 3 in Figure 254(c), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as another example, provides various LED drivers that drive various LEDs and various electrical drive source drivers that drive various electrical drive sources (for example, solenoid drive circuits and motor drive circuits) that are located on the right-side game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300A (300B) where connection confirmation is not possible, each time, You may choose to send no-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs, data to stop electrical drive sources), or to send no-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs, data to stop electrical drive sources) only once when a disconnection error occurs, or to include reset data (data to reset various LED drivers, data to reset various electrical drive source drivers (e.g., solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.)) in the transmitted data to reset the various LED drivers and various electrical drive source drivers.

[25. Combination of game board and door frame]
As described above, the door frame 3 is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). The door frame units are designed according to a unified concept. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be one that has been submitted to and approved by the application agency. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, human error may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 being different from that which has been submitted to and approved by the application agency. In this case, a pachinko machine with specifications different from those submitted to and approved by the application agency may be installed in the amusement hall, which is undesirable.

Therefore, in this embodiment, one of the decorative substrates provided in the door frame unit (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative substrate") is given a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, the ID comparison circuit will be described with reference to Figure 262. Figure 262 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the ID comparison circuit. Note that since there are compatible (matching) and incompatible (incompatible) combinations of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board component installed on the main frame 4 consists of a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) that is not equipped with a microprocessor. The game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is mounted on a door frame 3 that is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. To put it another way, the game board component, consisting of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4, is equipped with a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) that is not equipped with a microprocessor. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), and are driven by various LED drivers.

[25-1. Various lines formed between the game board and the door frame]
First, to briefly explain the various lines formed between the game board 5 and the door frame 3, in the lower central part of the back box 3010 of the game board 5 shown in Figure 132, etc., there is a lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW on which two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction (not shown). The two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of the convex type. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via various relay boards or directly. On the front surface of the main frame 4, at positions corresponding to the two lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the back box 3010 of the game board 5, there are two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) on a main frame side relay board (not shown). The two main frame side drawer connectors are of the concave type. Various circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative circuit boards and various relay circuit boards provided on the tray unit 200, the left side unit 420 of the door frame, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, and the top unit 450 of the door frame. The relay circuit boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors of the performance control unit 300 of the tray unit 200) are electrically connected to the drawer connector on the main frame side.

When the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (a convex type), are guided and fitted into two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 (a concave type). This electrically connects the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, are electrically connected to the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) which are mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Through these drawer connectors, the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the back box 3010 of the game board 5 and various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200. This includes relaying control signals that transmit detection signals and various information from various sensors. A control signal line is formed that transmits various control signals. Furthermore, a ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the ground (GND, circuit ground) of various control boards and other various boards located behind the back box 3010 of the game board 5 to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4. In addition, various power lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created by the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4 to various control boards and other various boards located behind the back box 3010 of the game board 5. Furthermore, various power lines supplying various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V) generated by the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4, as well as a ground (GND) line electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630, are formed on the door frame 3 via electrical wiring. These power lines supply various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V) generated by the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4.

Furthermore, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 are electrically connected. This creates a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310, located behind the back box 3010 of the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4, via this drawer connector.

Furthermore, mounting through-holes are formed in the insulating outer casing of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, and in the insulating outer casing of the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW are mounted, has through-holes at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW. Additionally, the main frame side relay board (not shown), on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, has through-holes at positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through-holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

[25-2. ID comparison circuit]
As shown in Figure 262, the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame-side decorative board WKB as one of the decorative boards provided on a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is mainly composed of an LED driver WIDCa and an 8-bit digital comparator circuit WIDCb (hereinafter referred to as "comparator circuit WIDCb").

The LED driver WIDCa has 24 output channels electrically connected to LED elements, and each channel is a sink-type constant current drive circuit capable of supplying a constant current. The maximum output current is set by an output current setting circuit WIDCc, located outside the LED driver WIDCa. The LED driver WIDCa is assigned a self-identification code (ID) for self-identification, and an address setting circuit WIDCd, located outside the LED driver WIDCa, sets the ID to one of the settings between 1 and 64.

The output current setting circuit WIDCc is electrically connected to the Rx1, Rx2, and Rx3 terminals, which are the maximum output current setting terminals of the LED driver WIDCa. By electrically connecting predetermined resistors to each terminal, the maximum output current of each output channel can be set. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum output current is set by the hardware configuration, and it is not possible to change the maximum output current by software (program).

The address setting circuit WIDCd is electrically connected to the ID1, ID2, and ID3 terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, which are the ID setting terminals. The voltage applied to each terminal sets one of the setting values from setting value 1 to setting value 64. In other words, in this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set by the hardware configuration, and the ID of the LED driver WIDCa cannot be changed by software (program).

In this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set to value 64. This is because, in addition to the door frame unit, the LED drivers are also implemented on various decorative boards and other boards on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. Therefore, in program development, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. For this reason, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to value 64 for the frame-side decorative board WKB on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided.

The RST terminal (reset) and GND terminal (ground) of the LED driver WIDCa are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB, and the Vcc terminal (power supply) is electrically connected to +5V. Of the 24 output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa, OUT0 to OUT23, eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, output to the comparator circuit WIDCb, while the remaining 16 output terminals, OUT8 to OUT23, are either unconnected or electrically connected to the LED elements. For a single-color LED, one LED element is packaged and its cathode terminal is electrically connected to one output terminal. For a full-color LED, three LED elements (red, green, and blue) are packaged and their respective cathode terminals are electrically connected to the three corresponding output terminals. +12V is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the LED element. Alternatively, a resistor may be inserted between the cathode terminal of the LED element and the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa (i.e., one end of the resistor is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the LED element, and the other end of this resistor is electrically connected to the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa) to suppress heat generation from the LED element.

The LED driver WIDCa's SDA terminal receives light emission information signals, which are serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 located in the game board 5. This data is input via the drawer connectors. The game board 5 is mounted in the main frame 4, and the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW terminals are electrically connected to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW mounted on the game board 5. The connection is also made to the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) in the main frame 4. The peripheral control board 1510 has multiple serial communication lines electrically connected to it. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to multiple serial communication lines for transmitting or receiving various serial data to and from various boards and door units within the game board 5.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives a clock signal for transmitting light emission information signals from the peripheral control board 1510 equipped on the game board 5. This signal is input via the drawer connectors, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (not shown) of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, consists of an ID code indicating which LED driver the light emission information signal is for and light emission data indicating the LED's light emission mode. When the ID code included in the light emission information signal matches the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver captures the light emission data included in the signal and controls the light emission mode of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals (OUT0 to OUT23) based on this captured light emission data. However, when the ID code included in the light emission information signal does not match the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver discards the light emission data included in the signal and maintains the light emission mode of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals (OUT0 to OUT23) based on the previously captured light emission data.

As described above, the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa consists of an ID code and light emission data. The light emission data includes the ID of the frame-side decorative substrate WKB. In other words, the light emission data consists of information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using signals output from the eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, and information output from the sixteen output terminals, OUT8 to OUT23.

The signals output from the eight output terminals (OUT0 to OUT7) of the LED driver WIDCa are input to the eight input terminals (P0 to P7) of the comparator circuit WIDCb, respectively. The eight setting terminals (Q0 to Q7) of the comparator circuit WIDCb correspond one-to-one with the eight input terminals (P0 to P7) of the comparator circuit WIDCb, serving as the primary reference points.

In this embodiment, the eight reference setting terminals, Q0 to Q7, are represented as an 8-bit width, with Q0 being the most significant bit and Q7 being the least significant bit. This results in 11110000B (where "B" represents a binary number), and in hexadecimal, it becomes F0H (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The inverting G terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "G" in the diagram), which is the enable terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V.

The comparator circuit WIDCb outputs the ID enable signal logic to enabled logic (logic LOW) from the output terminal, the inverted P=Q terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "P=Q" in the diagram), when the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the signals to be compared) matches the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7. Conversely, when the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the signals to be compared) does not match the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7, the output terminal, the inverted P=Q terminal, outputs the ID enable signal logic to disabled logic (logic HI), which is the inverse of the enabled logic (logic LOW).

Thus, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic, it can convey a determination that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matches). Conversely, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic, it can convey a determination that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matches).

The ID activation signal output from the inverting P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is transmitted from the frame-side decorative board WKB via electrical wiring (harness) to the relay board TKB located on the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510, input to the frame-side decorative board WKB, are transmitted to other frame-side decorative boards via electrical wiring (harness).

[25-3. Intermediate circuit board provided in the dish unit]
Next, with reference to Figure 263, we will explain the relay board TKB, which is provided on the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, to which the ID activation signal output from the inverting P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB is input via electrical wiring (harness). Figure 263 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of the relay board provided on the dish unit.

The relay board TKB, installed on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, is equipped with a door frame-side information output circuit TOC that receives detection signals from various sensors installed on the performance operation unit 300 mounted on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, and detection signals from various sensors installed on other units of the door frame 3 (for example, if a movable body is installed on the door frame 3, detection signals from a photosensor that detects the original position and moving position of the movable body, and detection signals from a distance measuring sensor that detects the player's actions (such as holding a hand over or waving a hand) on the door frame 3).

The door frame-side information output circuit TOC is primarily composed of two parallel-to-serial conversion circuits, TOCa and TOCb. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuits IDCa and TOCb are mainly composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (eight flip-flop circuits) and are integrated into a single chip. They are identical electronic components to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251, etc.

The door frame side information output circuits TOCa and TOCb have eight input terminals: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., eight 8-bit wide parallel input terminals), a CK terminal for receiving the information acquisition clock signal, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes the information input to the eight input terminals A through H and outputs it serially as serial data without inversion, an inverting QH terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) that takes the information set to the eight input terminals A through H, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of the clock signal. It primarily consists of the INH terminal, the S/inverting L terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram), which switches between a shift operation based on the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and a parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit acquires information set at the eight input terminals A through H, the SI terminal into which serial data is input, the power supply terminal Vcc into which control power is supplied, and the GND terminal which is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The eight input terminals A through H of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and four of the eight input terminals A through D of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, receive detection signals from various sensors provided on the performance control unit 300 mounted on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, and detection signals from various sensors provided on other units of the door frame 3, respectively. Three of the eight input terminals E through G of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb are unused terminals and are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground) (these three input terminals E through G of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb may also be electrically connected to +5V). The remaining input terminal H of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb receives the ID activation signal from the frame-side decorative board WKB.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb have their power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, their GND terminal and CK INT terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and the non-inverting QH terminal left unconnected.

The IDCa parallel-to-serial conversion circuit has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and outputs serial data converted from parallel data input to its eight input terminals via the inverting QH terminal.

The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCb has its SI terminal electrically connected to the inverting QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa. It outputs serial data, converted from parallel data input to the eight input terminals, through the inverting QH terminal.

The S/Inverting L terminal receives an information acquisition switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb. When the logic of the information acquisition switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW), each flip-flop circuit in the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb acquires and stores (holds) the information input to the eight input terminals A through H at that time. However, when the logic of the information acquisition switching signal is shift operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI), which is the inverted parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the acquired information is sequentially shifted on the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb are electrically connected, with the inverted QH terminal of parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa and the SI terminal of parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb. As a result, the flip-flop circuits of the two parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb sequentially shift on the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal are shifted one bit at a time to output serial data). This results in the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa acting as an 8-bit shift register and the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb acting as an 8-bit shift register, totaling 16 bits. Consequently, the door frame side information signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb to the peripheral control board 1510.

The clock signal and switching signal for information acquisition from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via these drawer connectors. This is done by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted in the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Furthermore, the door frame-side information signal from the door frame-side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB, which is provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 equipped on the game board 5 via these drawer connectors. This is achieved by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switching signal input to the S/inverting L terminal, thereby switching between parallel operation and serial operation, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal. This allows it to acquire information signals from the door frame side, understand the player's operations and the movement of movable parts (performance parts) on the performance operation unit 300 mounted on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, understand the movements of movable parts (performance parts) and the player on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units).

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) may be as follows: It may be performed only the first time after power-on during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process; or it may be performed continuously or intermittently during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power-on. By continuously or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power-on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB is affected by noise based on the difference in judgment results.

Furthermore, regarding the timing for obtaining the determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may perform the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, only during the first power-on.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines, based on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), that the combination is not compatible (consistent), it will perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 to 258, or Figures 259 to 261.

Thus, because the light emission data that indicates the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) includes the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB, it becomes unnecessary to provide dedicated terminals for transmitting the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

Furthermore, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, are provided with extra unused terminals so as to accommodate the specifications of the game board 5. However, even if a terminal is unused in one specification of the game board 5, all terminals may be used in other specifications of the game board 5. In such cases, increasing the number of terminals on the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 would necessitate increasing the number of terminals on the two (not shown) main frame-side drawer connectors mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This would necessitate replacing the main frame 4 (in reality, the entire frame of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4), resulting in increased costs. Furthermore, the convenience of electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 to the terminals of the two (not shown) main frame-side drawer connectors mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, regardless of the game board's specifications, would be lost.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the light emission data that indicates the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) includes the ID of the frame-side decorative substrate WKB. This eliminates the need to increase the number of terminals on the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay substrate 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the number of terminals on the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay substrate (not shown) of the main frame 4.

Alternatively, the clock signal for acquiring information and the clock signal for emitting information may be transmitted using a common transmission line (the transmission line for the door frame side clock signal) among the transmission lines electrically connected between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In this case, the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a control signal to the hardware-based clock signal switching circuit on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW or on the peripheral control board 1510 to transmit either the clock signal for acquiring information or the clock signal for emitting information to the common transmission line (the transmission line for the door frame side clock signal). This helps to suppress an increase in the number of terminals between the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW terminals mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As shown in Figure 254, the compatibility (consistency) of combinations of split game boards and the compatibility (consistency) of combinations of split game boards and performance operation buttons is determined by the peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor, based on an 8-bit wide ID sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. In contrast, as shown in Figure 262, the compatibility (consistency) of combinations of game board 5 and specific door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) is determined by an ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame-side decorative board WKB, and does not have a microprocessor implemented on it.

[25-4. Configuration that does not transmit information about the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board and the door frame unit to the peripheral control board.]
Regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) as described above, a circuit without a microprocessor called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which consists of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB, determines the compatibility (consistency), and outputs the determination result as an ID valid signal to the relay substrate TKB provided on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3. On this relay substrate TKB, the signal is serialized along with other information as a door frame-side information signal. This door frame side information signal is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 via the drawer connectors. This is done by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Alternatively, the ID valid signal may be output to another frame side decorative board instead of to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In other words, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) may not be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 264 shows a circuit that is an example of a modified version of Figure 262. Figure 264 is basically the same as the circuit in Figure 262, differing in that it has multiple LED drivers with external address setting circuits and output current setting circuits, and the output destination of the ID activation signal is different. The differences will be explained here. Note that parts identical to those in Figure 262 are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The frame-side decorative board WKB has LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCana (multiple LED drivers) in addition to the LED driver WIDCaa. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the frame-side decorative board WKB via these drawer connectors, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510, which are input to the frame-side decorative substrate WKB, are input to the SDA terminal and SCLK terminal of each LED driver of LED driver WIDCa and LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and are further transmitted to subsequent frame-side decorative substrates. Each LED driver WIDCa and LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is assigned a unique self-identification code (ID) without duplication.

As described above, the RST terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. In contrast, the RST terminals of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) receive the ID enable signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and this signal is then transmitted to subsequent frame-side decorative boards. When the logic of the ID enable signal is set to enable logic (logic LOW), as described above, it indicates that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched). Conversely, when the logic of the ID enable signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), as described above, it indicates that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), the voltage applied to the RST terminal of the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is raised to the logic HI side, resetting the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and also resetting the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board. In contrast, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID activation signal is set to the active logic (logic LOW), the voltage applied to the RST terminal of the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is lowered to the logic LOW side, releasing the reset state of the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and simultaneously releasing the reset state of the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board.

As a result, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched), the LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are reset, and the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board are also reset, so that the LED elements controlled by each LED driver are turned off. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), but even if the performance is progressing, the door frame unit can prevent the progress of the lighting performance by the door frame unit. Furthermore, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matches), the door frame unit will light up. This allows staff members of the gaming hall, as well as workers installing the game board 5 into the main frame 4, to be notified whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matches).

[25-5. Replacing LED drivers with serial-to-parallel conversion circuits]
Next, we will explain the case where the LED driver WIDCa, which constitutes the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB shown in Figure 262, is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit, with reference to Figure 265. Figure 265 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the case where the LED driver, which constitutes the ID comparison circuit provided on the frame-side decorative substrate shown in Figure 262, is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. In Figure 265, the various terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' are indicated by the same reference numerals as the LED driver WIDCa in Figure 262 if they have the same function. Here, we will mainly explain the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and some explanations of parts that have the same reference numerals as the LED driver WIDCa will be omitted. In Figure 262, the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 of the LED driver WIDCa are constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, whereas the 8 output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' are not constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, but are defined by the absolute maximum output current rating of the logic IC.

The WIDCa' serial-to-parallel conversion circuit is an electronic component primarily composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (eight flip-flop circuits), designed as a chip that can be daisy-chained. It converts (restores) externally input serial data into parallel data and outputs it through eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives the light emission information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 equipped on the game board 5. This signal is input via the drawer connectors, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (not shown) of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives a clock signal for light emission information, which is used to transmit light emission information signals from the peripheral control board 1510 equipped on the game board 5. This signal is input via the drawer connectors, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (not shown) of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The latch signal input terminal of the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is input via the drawer connectors, through which the latch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 is electrically connected. This connection is made between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Each flip-flop circuit in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' performs a sequential shift operation on the rising edge of the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal with respect to the information (serial data) acquired from the SDA terminal when the logic of the latch signal is parallel operation logic (logic electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground): LOW). This shift operation is then output from the SO terminal, which is the serial data output terminal, to subsequent serial-to-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with this serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' (for example, other serial-to-parallel conversion circuits provided in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', or subsequent serial-to-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained on other frame-side decorative boards). However, when the logic of the latch signal is shift operation logic (logic electrically connected to +5V: HI), which is the inverse of the parallel operation logic, the information acquired at this point (information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb) is converted into parallel data and output from the eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7.

The inverted G terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "G" in the diagram), which is the enable terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The inverted CLR terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "CLR" in the diagram), which is the reset terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to +5V.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', consists of light emission data. For the light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb is output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is output from the peripheral control board 1510 following the light emission data for the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. Furthermore, if the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' drive an electrical drive source (solenoid, stepping motor) in addition to emitting various LEDs, the drive data for the electrical drive source is output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the light emission information signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 includes not only light emission data for various LEDs, but also information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb, and may also include drive data for the electrical drive source.

The latch signal, the clock signal for light emission information, and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy-chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', are transmitted from this frame-side decorative board WKB to other frame-side decorative boards. If a subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit is daisy-chained to this frame-side decorative board WKB along with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the latch signal and the clock signal for light emission information are input to both the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' and the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit's SO terminal (daisy-chain connection terminal) is input to the SDA terminal (serial data input terminal) of the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal of this subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit is then output to other frame-side decorative boards.

Thus, by replacing the LED driver WIDCa, which constitutes the ID comparison circuit WIDC on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB, with a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit, it becomes necessary to include an ID code in the light emission information signal that indicates which LED driver is being used.

[25-6. Configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is given a self-identification code]
In Figures 262 and 263, the door frame 3 is equipped with door frame units such as the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). One of the decorative boards (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board") provided on a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is given a self-identifying code (ID) that can identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) and output the determination result. In other words, one ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided for each specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). Here, we will explain, with reference to Figures 266 and 267, the configuration in which each door frame unit, which is subject to judgment regarding compatibility (matching) with the game board 5, is given a self-identification code (ID). Figure 266 is a schematic diagram showing the general allocation of each unit, and Figure 267 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the ID output circuit in each unit. In the following description, all door frame units (in this example, the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the top door frame unit 450) are assigned a self-identification code (ID) as they are all subject to judgment regarding compatibility (matching) with the game board 5. However, some parts of the door frame units (for example, the left door frame unit 420 and the tray unit 200) may not be subject to judgment regarding compatibility with the game board 5. In this case, the parts of the door frame units that are not subject to judgment regarding compatibility with the game board 5 (for example, the left door frame unit 420 and the tray unit 200) may not be assigned a self-identification code (ID), and only the door frame units that are subject to judgment regarding compatibility with the game board 5 (for example, the right door frame unit 430 and the top door frame unit 450) may be assigned a self-identification code (ID).

The door frame unit consists of a left side unit 420, a right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top unit 450. Each unit can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3, allowing for design changes and modifications to accommodate different game specifications. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must, as described above, be one that has been submitted to and approved by the application agency. However, human error during the replacement of the door frame unit may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that approved by the application agency. This would mean that a pachinko machine with specifications different from those approved by the application agency would be installed in the gaming hall, which is undesirable.

Therefore, one configuration can be considered in which one of the decorative circuit boards provided in each unit of the door frame unit is equipped with a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result.

Here, as shown in Figure 266, the door frame unit is divided into four units, Units A through D: the tray unit 200 is designated as Unit A, the right side unit 430 as Unit B, the top unit 450 as Unit C, and the left side unit 420 as Unit D.

One of the decorative circuit boards included in Unit A (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative circuit board A") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa that has an ID output circuit capable of identifying itself.

One of the decorative circuit boards included in Unit B (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative circuit board B") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa that has an ID output circuit capable of identifying itself.

One of the decorative circuit boards included in Unit C (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative circuit board C") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa that has an ID output circuit capable of identifying itself.

One of the decorative circuit boards included in Unit D (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative circuit board D") is equipped with a parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa that has an ID output circuit capable of identifying itself.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative substrates A to D are identical to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251. Therefore, explanations of each terminal, the parts with identical circuit configurations, and their operation are omitted here.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa, located on the frame-side decorative substrate A, have terminals A, B, C, D, E, F, and G electrically connected to +5V, while terminal H is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). Therefore, the ID of frame-side decorative substrate A (i.e., the ID of Unit A, which is the dish unit 200) is represented as 11111110B (where "B" represents a binary number) when expressed as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit. In hexadecimal, this becomes FEH (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa, located on the frame-side decorative board B, have terminals A, B, C, D, E, and F electrically connected to +5V, while terminals G and H are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). Therefore, the ID of the frame-side decorative board B (i.e., the ID of Unit B, which is the right-side unit 430 of the door frame) is represented as 11111100B (where "B" represents a binary number) when expressed as an 8-bit number with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, and as FCH (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) when expressed in hexadecimal.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa, located on the frame-side decorative substrate C, have terminals A, B, C, D, and E electrically connected to +5V, while terminals F, G, and H are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). Therefore, the ID of the frame-side decorative substrate C (i.e., the ID of Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450) is represented as 11111000B (where "B" represents a binary number) when expressed as an 8-bit number with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit. In hexadecimal, this becomes F8H (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa, located on the frame-side decorative board D, have terminals A, B, C, and D electrically connected to +5V, while terminals E, F, G, and H are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). Therefore, the ID of the frame-side decorative board D (i.e., the ID of Unit D, which is the left-side unit 420 of the door frame) is represented as 11110000B (where "B" represents a binary number) when expressed as an 8-bit number with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, and as F0H (where "H" represents a hexadecimal number) when expressed in hexadecimal.

The S/inverting L terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits on the frame-side decorative boards A to D is configured to perform a shift operation based on the conformance judgment clock signal input to the CK terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits on the frame-side decorative boards A to D, and each flip-flop circuit of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits on the frame-side decorative boards A to D is configured to connect to the eight input terminals from A to H. The system switches between parallel operation to acquire the information being received, and a switching signal for suitability determination from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the drawer connectors. This is done by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4), with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board D, which is part of the door frame left side unit 420 (Unit D), is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D. The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa on the frame-side decorative board D, which is part of the ID output circuit, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCaa on the frame-side decorative board C, which is part of the ID output circuit on the door frame top unit 450 (Unit C). (This connection may be made via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector.) As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa on the frame-side decorative board D, which is part of the door frame left side unit 420 (Unit D), and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCaa on the frame-side decorative board C, which is part of the ID output circuit, are daisy-chained together.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of the door frame top unit 450 (Unit C) and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of the door frame right side unit 430 (Unit B) are electrically connected (this connection may be made via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of the door frame top unit 450 (Unit C) and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of the door frame right side unit 430 (Unit B) are daisy-chained together.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, which is the right side unit 430 of the door frame, and the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the tray unit 200, are electrically connected (this connection may be made via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, which is the right side unit 430 of the door frame, and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the tray unit 200, are daisy-chained together.

Thus, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D (the left side unit of the door frame 420) is daisy-chained to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C (the top unit of the door frame 450), the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B (the right side unit of the door frame 430), and finally to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A (the dish unit 200).

The four flip-flop circuits in the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa sequentially shift on the rising edge of the conformance judgment clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → and the serial data is output by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverting QH terminal and inverting QH terminal). Therefore, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa has an 8-bit shift register, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa has an 8-bit shift register, and the parallel... The 8-bit shift register provided by the parallel serial conversion circuit UCa and the 8-bit shift register provided by the parallel serial conversion circuit UDa operate as a 32-bit shift register. The ID code signal is sent as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa. This signal is then electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4), and to the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This connection then transmits the signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the plate unit 200 is equipped with the performance operation unit 300. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, sets and outputs the logic of the compatibility determination switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal, thereby switching between parallel and serial operation. After outputting the compatibility determination clock signal, it acquires the ID code signal and obtains a determination result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit.

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be limited to the initial power-on during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process, or it may be performed continuously or intermittently during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power-on. By continuously or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit during the aforementioned performance operation unit information acquisition process after power-on, it is possible to confirm whether or not noise is affecting the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB, based on whether the judgment result differs.

Furthermore, regarding the timing for obtaining the judgment result on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may perform the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, only during the first power-on.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines, based on the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit, that the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (consistent), it may perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on the entire door frame unit, or it may perform error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 to 258 or Figures 259 to 261 on the unit of the door frame unit that is not compatible (consistent) (for example, Unit A to Unit D, followed by Unit C (door frame top unit 450)).

[25-7. Configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is given both a self-identification code and a manufacturer's identification code.]
Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be configured to be used in common by multiple manufacturers. In this case, if the self-identification code (ID) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by one manufacturer happens to match the self-identification code (ID) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by another manufacturer, when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, the control board may determine that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is different from that which was submitted to the application agency for approval, even though it is different from that which was submitted to the application agency for approval. In this case, a pachinko machine whose specifications are different from those submitted to the application agency for approval may be installed in the amusement hall, which is undesirable.

Therefore, we can consider a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is given a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in addition to a self-identification code (ID), and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, we will explain a configuration in which each unit of the door frame unit is given a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) and a self-identification code (ID), with reference to Figure 268. Figure 268 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 267 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). Figure 268 is basically the same circuit as the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D in Figure 267, and here we will omit the explanation of each terminal, the parts of the circuit configuration that are the same, and the explanation of operation.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits on each of the frame-side decorative substrates A to D are followed by parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap. These parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are set with a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value).

Specifically, the ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap, which are located after the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuits provided on each of the frame-side decorative boards A to D, are electrically connected to terminals A, B, C, and E +5V, while terminals D, F, G, and H are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the manufacturer identification code (i.e., the manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value)) of frame-side decorative boards A to D, when represented as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, becomes 11101000B (where the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when represented in hexadecimal, it becomes E8H (where the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The S/inverting L terminal (shown as a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa and the subsequent parallel serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative substrates A to D is used for a shift operation based on the conformance judgment clock signal input to the CK terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa and the subsequent parallel serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative substrates A to D, and the subsequent parallel serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa Each flip-flop circuit from Aap to UDap switches between parallel operation and parallel operation, receiving information set at the eight input terminals from terminal A to terminal H. A switching signal for suitability determination from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and to the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap, which is the downstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, which is the left side unit 420 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D. The inverted QH terminal of this downstream parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa. The inverted QH terminal of this preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap, which is the downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, which is the top unit 450 of the door frame (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap, located on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D (the left side unit of the door frame 420), is daisy-chained to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa, located on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D (the left side unit of the door frame 420), and then to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap, located on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C (the top unit of the door frame 450).

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap, which is the downstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, which is the top unit of the door frame 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa. The inverted QH terminal of this preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap, which is the downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, which is the right side unit of the door frame 430 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap, located downstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of the door frame top unit 450 (Unit C), is daisy-chained to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCaa, located upstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board C of the door frame top unit 450 (Unit C), and then to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap, located downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of the door frame right side unit 430 (Unit B).

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap, which is the downstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, which is the right side unit 430 of the door frame, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa. The inverted QH terminal of this preceding parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the dish unit 200 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBap, located downstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B (the right side unit 430 of the door frame), is daisy-chained to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UBa, located upstream of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B (the right side unit 430 of the door frame), and then to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAap, located downstream of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A (the dish unit 200).

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the downstream of the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative substrate A of Unit A (which is part of the dish unit 200), is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel serial conversion circuit UAa. This results in a daisy-chain connection between the parallel serial conversion circuit UAap (the downstream of the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa on the frame-side decorative substrate A of Unit A) and the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa (the upstream of the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa on the frame-side decorative substrate A of Unit A).

Thus, the following parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDap, located on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, which is the left side unit of the door frame, is transmitted to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UDa, located on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, which is the left side unit of the door frame, then to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCap, located on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, which is the top unit of the door frame, then to the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit UCa, located on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, which is the top unit of the door frame, and finally to the Uni, located on the right side unit of the door frame, 430. The following are daisy-chained together: UBap, the downstream parallel-to-serial converter of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of tB; UBa, the upstream parallel-to-serial converter of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, which is the right-side door frame unit 430; UAap, the downstream parallel-to-serial converter of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the plate unit 200; and UAa, the upstream parallel-to-serial converter of the ID output circuit on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, which is the plate unit 200.

The eight flip-flop circuits of the parallel serial conversion circuits UAap, UAa, UBap, UBa, UCap, UCa, UDap, and UDa are sequentially shifted on the rising edge of the conformance judgment clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, the information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → non-inverting QH terminal and inverting QH terminal are shifted one bit at a time to output serial data). Therefore, the 8-bit shift register by the parallel serial conversion circuit UAap, the 8-bit shift register by the parallel serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register by the parallel serial conversion circuit UBap, and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel serial conversion circuit UBa The shift register operates as a 64-bit shift register, consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap, an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCaa, an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap, and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. The ID code signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa. This signal is electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4), and to the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The signal is then output to the peripheral control board 1510 via these drawer connectors.

[25-8. ID Error Detection Switch]
Of the left game board 5AL and right game board 5AR that constitute the split game board 5A shown in Figure 248, the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power is turned on, and determines whether the combination of the performance operation unit provided on the door frame 3 and the split game board is compatible (matched). This determination result can be triggered by the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch being pressed. Figure 269 is a schematic front view (a) of the split game board provided with the ID error determination switch, and a schematic rear view (b) of the split game board provided with the ID error determination switch. In Figures 269(a) and (b), the same reference numerals are used for components that are the same as those in Figures 248(a) and (b), and detailed explanations are omitted.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 in Figure 248(b) is provided with a setting key switch 1311a, while the main control board 1310 in Figure 269(b) is not provided with a setting switch. Also, the main control board 1310 in Figure 248(b) is not provided with an ID error detection switch, while the main control board 1310 in Figure 269(b) is provided with an ID error detection switch 1310v.

The ID error detection switch 1310v, located on the main control board 1310, has its pressable operation part exposed (not shown) from the cover of the main control board box 1320. When an employee of a gaming hall or other staff member presses the pressable operation part of the ID error detection switch 1310v, a detection signal from the ID error detection switch 1310v is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 repeatedly performs the main control side main processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the system of the main control board 1310 is started.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, in the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control-side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed based on the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v has operation logic and non-operation logic; when operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, and when non-operation logic, which is the inverse of operation logic, is input, it determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed). When it determines that the press operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, it sends an ID error determination result notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control-side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, to start notifying the ID error determination result.

The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 repeatedly performs the following processes when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the peripheral control board 1510's system is activated: the peripheral control steady-state processing shown in Figure 255 during the peripheral control power-on processing, the peripheral control V-blank signal interrupt processing shown in Figure 221, and the peripheral control 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222 (if there is a command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 is also performed).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, it outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal exclusive to the right-side game board) to the right-side game board and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal exclusive to the performance operation unit) to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a then acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (an ID code signal specifically for the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance control unit (an ID code signal specifically for the performance control unit) via separate serial systems. It then determines (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (the peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310, both equipped with microprocessors) by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM. It also determines (compares) the combination of the performance control unit and the split game boards by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223. When it analyzes the received command in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it uses this as a trigger to start notifying the ID error judgment result. In the ID judgment processing of step S1003, if the judgment result for the combination of the divided game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, if the judgment result for the combination of the right game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes a command to be classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning processing of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, the light emission pattern generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 then notifies that the corresponding error has occurred, as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error, from error response 1 to error response 9. When the judgment result for the combination of divided game boards is compliant (inconsistent), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since there is "none" as a countermeasure, there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, in the event of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is issued, and the special notification sound does not play from the speaker.

Thus, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 based on the determination result for the combination of divided game boards, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it cannot pass the command to be classified as a notification display to the warning processing in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and therefore cannot start notifying the ID error determination result. In other words, even if errors 1 through 9 occur, until the ID error judgment result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the start time of the error notification can be changed by pressing the ID error judgment switch 1310v by an employee of the gaming hall or other staff member.

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223. When it analyzes the received command in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it uses this as a trigger to start notifying the ID error judgment result. In the ID judgment processing of step S1003, if the judgment result for the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes the command to be classified as notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning processing of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, the light emission pattern generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 then notifies that the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254(c) corresponds to error response 1 to error response 9. When the judgment result for the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board is correct (inconsistent), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since there is "none" as a countermeasure, there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, in the event of normal operation (no error handling), no notification is issued, and the special notification sound does not play from the speaker.

Thus, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, based on the determination result regarding the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board, it must receive the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 and analyze it in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Without this, it is not possible to pass the command classified as a notification display to the warning processing in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and thus the notification of the ID error determination result cannot be started.

Although the main control board 1310 is equipped with an ID error detection switch 1310v, the ID error detection switch 1310v can be replaced by a setting key switch 1311a, which can switch and confirm the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a shown in Figure 248(b) is provided, and the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510. However, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, thereby starting the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing. Based on the fact that the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 of the setting change processing. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, it triggers a notification if any of the error responses 1 to 9 shown in Figure 254(c) have occurred in the pachinko machine during an error. Because the setting key is a critical key, only a limited number of people, including the manager of the amusement hall, are permitted to possess it, and this is limited to 2-3 people.

Specifically, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 (as shown in Figure 248(b)) and turning it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 while operating the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 of the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process (step S238) in the setting change process shown in Figure 213 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This setting change command communicates the changed setting value and the completion of setting value storage. Upon receiving the setting change command, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes it as receiving an ID error judgment result notification start command, and proceeds with the process of starting the notification of the ID error judgment result.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 during the main control power-on processing, then clears the entire RAM area in step S38, and subsequently performs the main control main processing and the main control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up by, for example, displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background on the display device 1600. At this time, "Setting" may be displayed after "Power Restoring," or "Setting" may be displayed instead of "Power Restoring." In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, it needs to send a setting change start command as main-peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the setting change has started.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives an ID error judgment result notification start command after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has finished the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, that is, after receiving a setting change command from the main control board 1310. This triggers the notification of any errors occurring, such as those shown in Figure 254(c), specifically errors 1 to 9, in the pachinko machine's behavior during an error. In other words, even if errors 1 to 9 occur as shown in Figure 254(c) during an error in the pachinko machine, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not issue a notification regarding the occurrence of errors 1 to 9 if the setting key has been inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1310a is performing the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change process is completed, in other words, until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed)). Therefore, until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed), the start time for the error notification, even if errors 1 to 9 occur, can be changed by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people in the gaming hall.

In contrast, if, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing is not performed, and the entire RAM area in step S38 is not cleared, and then the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212 are performed. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 starts up by, for example, displaying "Power Restoring" on a black background on the performance display device 1600, and if error responses 1 to 9 have occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) of the error behavior of the pachinko machine, it provides notification to that effect. In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can notify the user if, even when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, then error responses 1 to 9, as shown in Figure 254(c), have occurred in the pachinko machine during an error.

In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 may be unable to notify the system that error responses 1 to 9 have occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) until a predetermined period has elapsed (until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed)), or it may be able to notify the system regardless of the predetermined period.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310, which is the operating unit, is operated, a notification can be issued according to the determination result of the compatibility between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. This allows for immediate detection of a mismatch between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, and prevents the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are mismatched. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

[25-9. Summary]
[25-9a. Summary A]
A0:
A gaming machine comprising a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame, and a game board side component that is detachably provided on the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component consists of a plurality of boards, including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes a specific board that does not have a microprocessor. The specific board includes an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means that transmits the eigenvalue to the performance control board. The performance control board can compare the eigenvalue transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with an eigenvalue it possesses. The first game board side component and the second game board side component are each individually fixed to the game frame side component.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, which is a game frame component; a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2 in an open and close manner; and a divided game board 5A, shown in Figure 248, which is a game board component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board component. The left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor capable of executing game performances (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the left-side back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, includes one specific circuit board (one of the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) that do not have a microprocessor. One of the various circuit boards, which is the specific circuit board, includes a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side game board 5AR, and an ID output circuit IDC (shown in Figure 251), which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, is configured to compare the self-identification code (ID), which is an intrinsic value transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC (an intrinsic value transmission means), with its own intrinsic values (a combination table pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM (Figure 254)), during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.

The left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are each individually and detachably attached to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component.

Thus, a self-identification code (ID), which is an eigenvalue that can identify the right game board 5AR (the second game board component) from the ID output circuit IDC, which is an eigenvalue transmission means provided in the right game board 5AR (the second game board component), is transmitted as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board provided in the left game board 5AL (the first game board component). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right game board 5AR (the second game board component). This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left-side game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right-side game board 5AR (the second game board component). This prevents the execution of incomplete gameplay due to these inconsistencies, thus mitigating a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

A1:
The game board side component comprises an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame, and a game board side component that is detachably provided on the game frame side component. The game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a plurality of boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board side component includes a board that does not have a microprocessor, an eigenvalue that indicates that it is the second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame side component. The eigenvalue transmission means can transmit to the sub-control board using serial communication. The eigenvalue transmission means is electrically connected to the sub-control board of the first game board side component. The sub-control board can compare the eigenvalues from the eigenvalue transmission means with the eigenvalues it possesses.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a game frame-side component, and a divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is a game board-side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board-side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board-side component. The left game board 5AL, which is the first game board-side component, includes a plurality of boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various effect units housed in the left back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, comprises a circuit board without a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") which houses various circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR, and an ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251, which is a unique value transmission means for transmitting the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value.

Furthermore, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is the game frame component.

The ID output circuit IDC, which is the unique value transmission means, can transmit data to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, using serial communication. The ID output circuit IDC is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board of the left-side game board 5AL, a component of the first game board. The peripheral control board 1510 can compare the self-identification code (ID), which is the unique value from the ID output circuit IDC, with its own unique values (a combination table pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM (Figure 254)) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255.

Thus, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided in the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that indicates it is the right-side game board 5AR, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board provided in the left-side game board 5AL, the first game board component, using serial communication. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side game board 5AL, the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, the second game board component. This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left-side game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right-side game board 5AR (the second game board component). This prevents the execution of incomplete gameplay due to these inconsistencies, thus mitigating a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

A2:
Furthermore, the serial communication signals include eigenvalues and signals related to game effects generated in the second game board component. The system also includes a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board and the payout control board, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the first game board component and the second game board component. If the comparison judgment in the first serial communication means is false, balls will not be dispensed. If the comparison judgment in the second serial communication means is false, the decorative effects of the second game board component will not be performed.

Specifically, for example, the photo and ID code signals in Figure 252, which are serial communication signals, include a unique value, a self-identification code (ID), and signals related to game effects generated in the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component (detection signals from the photosensor that detects the position of various movable parts, which are input to the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in Figure 252). Furthermore, it includes a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component.

If the comparison judgment by the first serial communication means is false, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the control board equipped with a microprocessor, including a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself. Therefore, in the command analysis process of step S560 in the main processing of the payout control unit during the power-on processing of the payout control unit shown in Figure 218, if the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control unit 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control unit 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the state information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM, and also sets information to stop the payout operation in the output information storage area of the built-in payout control RAM. As a result, the payout of game balls will not be performed. In other words, if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (incompatible) due to an operator error, even if the player can play the game and proceed with the game, the payout operation will be stopped, preventing the player from receiving game balls. This allows the player to be informed that there is some kind of malfunction with the pachinko machine, and the player can also inform the staff of the pachinko hall or other personnel that the machine is not dispensing game balls. This contributes to the early detection of the incompatible (incompatible) combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

If the comparison determination by the second serial communication means is false, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, acquires the ID code signal from the right game board (an ID code signal exclusive to the right game board), and determines (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM. If it determines that there is a mismatch (inconsistency), it passes a command classified as notification display as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261, which corresponds to state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c), to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning processing of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the effects. As a result, the various LEDs of the split game board 5A (various LEDs of the game board) turn off and the decorative effects of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are not performed. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards constituting the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) due to a worker's error, when the pachinko machine is powered on, the various LEDs on the split game board 5A (various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, and the decorative effects of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will cease. Therefore, this contributes to the early detection of the incompatible (inconsistent) combination of the left and right game boards.

A3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error will be notified, and the ID error will not be notified. Also, LED errors in the decorative unit will not be notified. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification will be given indicating that a RAM error has occurred, while no notification will be given indicating that state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the game progress by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. To notify the system of this, even if state 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) in Figure 254(c) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, will be notified with the highest priority, regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

A4:
The first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected by connectors. Specifically, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected via drawer connectors, where the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR and the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALLDRW of the left game board 5AL are connected. This drawer connector allows for automatic electrical connection between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, simply by joining them together.

[25-9b. Summary B]
B0:
A gaming machine comprising a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component and is fixed to the game frame side component. The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes the performance of the game. The second game board side component includes a specific board that is not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board includes an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue as a signal to the performance control board. The performance control board is capable of notifying the first error, which occurs when it fails to receive an eigenvalue from the second game board component within a predetermined time, and the second error, which occurs when the eigenvalue transmitted from the second game board component is not a predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame side component. The left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor capable of executing game performances (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the left-side back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a specific circuit board that does not have a microprocessor. This specific circuit board is one of several circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards with various LEDs mounted on them that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). This right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") is equipped with a specific circuit board that does not have a microprocessor. This specific circuit board is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR, and an ID output circuit IDC (as shown in Figure 251), which is a unique value transmission means for transmitting the self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is configured to notify the following: Error Response 7 (Figures 256-261), which occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 fails to receive the self-identification code (ID), a unique value, from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, within a predetermined time (the ID determination process in step S1003 of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in Figure 255), resulting in state 8: unconnected error 1 (Figure 254(c)); and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) (Figures 256-261), which occurs when the self-identification code (ID), a unique value, received from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is not a predetermined value, resulting in state 2: ID error 1 (Figure 254(c)).

In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which corresponds to the first error, state 8: unconnected error 1 in Figure 254(c), passes a command classified as notification display to the warning processing step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing. In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

The second error, State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c), is represented by a command classified as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is then passed to the warning processing step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing. In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

Thus, a self-identification code (ID), which is an eigenvalue that can identify the right game board 5AR (the second game board component), is transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC, which is an eigenvalue transmission means provided in the right game board 5AR (the second game board component), to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board provided in the left game board 5AL (the first game board component). Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, operates within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 operates as shown in the peripheral control section of Figure 255). In the power-on processing step S1003 (ID determination process), if the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), cannot be received, the first error, state 8: unconnected error 1 (Figure 254(c)), can be generated, resulting in error response 7 (Figures 256-261). If the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), is received within a predetermined time but is not a predetermined value, the second error, state 2: ID error 1 (Figure 254(c)), can be generated, resulting in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (Figures 256-261). This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left game board 5AL (first game board component) and the right game board 5AR (second game board component), preventing the execution of incomplete gameplay due to inconsistencies. Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

B1:
The system comprises a game frame side component and a game board side component. The game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes multiple circuit boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board side component includes a circuit board without a microprocessor, an eigenvalue indicating that it is the second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame side component. The first game board side component includes a first error that occurs if it fails to receive an eigenvalue from the second game board side component within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs if it receives an eigenvalue from the second game board side component that is not a predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a game frame-side component, and a divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is a game board-side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board-side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board-side component. The left game board 5AL, which is the first game board-side component, includes a plurality of boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various effect units housed in the left back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, comprises a circuit board without a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") which houses various circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR, and an ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251, which is a unique value transmission means for transmitting the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component. The process of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the process of attaching the door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, are separate processes. Therefore, when attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, human error may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame unit not being compatible (matching).

The left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is equipped with error response 7 shown in Figures 256 to 261, which results in a first error, state 8: unconnected error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c), when it fails to receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is subjected to the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 255). It also includes error response 1 shown in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response), which results in a second error, state 2: ID error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c), when it receives the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right-side game board 5AR, and it is not a predetermined value.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, specifically the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as notification display to the warning processing step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during power-on processing. This command corresponds to error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the first error, state 8: disconnection error 1 in Figure 254(c). In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processes related to the game's presentation.

The second error, State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c), is represented by a command classified as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is then passed to the warning processing step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing. In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

Thus, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided in the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that indicates that it is the right-side game board 5AR, to the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component. Therefore, the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, performs the following steps within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the step in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255). If the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), is not received during the ID determination process of S1003, a first error, state 8: unconnected error 1 in Figure 254(c), can be generated, resulting in error response 7 shown in Figures 256 to 261. Furthermore, if the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), received within a predetermined time is not a predetermined value, a second error, state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c), can be generated, resulting in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 261. This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right game board 5AR (the second game board component), preventing the execution of incomplete gameplay due to these inconsistencies. Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

B2:
Furthermore, the second type of error (ID error), which includes various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof), is more disruptive to gameplay than the first type of error (disconnection error), which includes various disconnection errors (disconnection error 1, disconnection error 2, and disconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)).

Furthermore, while the third error (magnetic detection) resolves after a certain period of time, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) do not resolve even after a certain period of time has elapsed. In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the act of so-called magnetic tampering, and therefore resolves after a certain period of time has elapsed since detection. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are due to operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fitting of structural components and the connection of drawer connectors must be carefully checked after the power is cut off. Similarly, for the second error (ID error), the part must be replaced with a compliant ID part after the power is cut off. Therefore, these errors do not resolve even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effects of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will not be performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a worker's error, and the combination of the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incompatible (inconsistent). Performing the decorative effects of the right-side game board 5AR in this state could cause the right-side game board 5AR to malfunction electrically.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs at the same time as a second error (ID error), the warning sound for the second error (ID error) remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs at the same time as a second error (ID error), as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the audio in Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) repeatedly plays the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the act of so-called magnetic fraud, and resolves itself after a certain period of time has elapsed. In contrast, the second error (ID error) is a worker error, and since a second error (ID error) requires replacement with a compliant ID product after power is cut off, the warning sound for the second error (ID error) remains even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

B3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error will be notified, and the ID error will not be notified. Also, LED errors in the decorative unit will not be notified. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification will be given indicating that a RAM error has occurred, while no notification will be given indicating that state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the game progress by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. To notify the system of this, even if state 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) in Figure 254(c) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, will be notified with the highest priority, regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

B4:
In the event of a third error (magnetic detection), the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, will change by lighting up a predetermined LED. Specifically, in the event of a third error (magnetic detection), if various ID errors occur (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof), the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, will change by lighting up a predetermined LED, as shown in Figures 258 and 261. In other words, even in the event of a third error (magnetic detection), if various ID errors occur (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof), the predetermined LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 will light up and change, allowing the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to continue the performance.

During a second error (ID error), the decorative sound effect will not play even if the symbols change. Specifically, when various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID Error 1, ID Error 2, and ID Error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof) occur, as shown in Figures 257 and 260, even if the game progresses and the symbols displayed by the function display unit 1400 change, the error notification sound and announcement sound will play repeatedly, and the decorative sound effect will not play. This is because a second error (ID error) is a work error by the operator, and if it is a second error (ID error), the part must be replaced with a compliant ID part after the power is cut off, so the decorative sound effect will not play, and the warning sound for the second error (ID error) will remain.

The third error (magnetic detection), which is a magnetic sensor error, resolves after a certain period of time. However, the error of the right-side game board 5AR not being installed (i.e., not being connected) and the ID error of the right-side game board 5AR as a decorative unit do not resolve even after a certain period of time. These error notifications work differently: the magnetic sensor error detects and reports the act of so-called magnetic cheating, and therefore resolves after a certain period of time has elapsed since detection. In contrast, the not-connection error and ID error are due to operator errors. For the not-connection error, the fitting of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after the power is cut off. Similarly, for the ID error, the part must be replaced with a compatible ID part after the power is cut off. Therefore, these errors do not resolve even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

[25-9c. Summary C]
C0:
The game machine comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main body frame, and a game board side component that can be detachably attached to the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a plurality of second game board side components and is fixed to the game frame side component. The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of circuit boards including a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes a specific circuit board that does not have a microprocessor. The specific circuit board includes an eigenvalue that can identify it as a second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue to the performance control board. Each of the plurality of second game board side components has a different eigenvalue, and if it is determined that the eigenvalue of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the plurality of second game board side components will be in a manner different from the normal operation.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A as shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a plurality of right game boards 5AR (upper right game board 5ART and lower right game board 5ARU in Figure 253), which are the second game board side components, and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame side component. The left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is composed of multiple boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor capable of executing game performances (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the left-side back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with a specific circuit board that does not have a microprocessor. This specific circuit board is one of several circuit boards (for example, various relay circuit boards, decorative circuit boards with various LEDs mounted on them, drive circuit boards for driving motors and drive solenoids, etc., housed in the right-side drive circuit board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive circuit board unit 1700R")). The specific circuit board is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR, and includes an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right game board 5ART and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right game board 5ARU, which constitute the right-side game board 5AR in Figure 253. These are unique value transmission means for transmitting the ID to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control circuit.

The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units").

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 253, the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, consists of multiple upper-right game boards 5ART and lower-right game boards 5ARU, each having a different unique value. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, that the self-identification code (ID of upper-right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower-right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is the unique value of at least one of the upper-right game board 5ART and lower-right game board 5ARU, is not a predetermined value. If the connection is interrupted, the system will enter state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), resulting in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 and 259. The power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple components of the second game board, will differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.). As a result, the various LEDs on the divided game board 5AR (the various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, causing the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, to turn off.

In this manner, the ID output circuits IDCT and IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided in the right-side game board 5ART and the right-side game board 5ARU, which constitute the right-side game board 5AR, respectively, transmit signals from these circuits to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board provided in the left-side game board 5AL, a first-side game board component. These circuits transmit signals to the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is the unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board components, is not a predetermined value, then the system will enter state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), which corresponds to error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 and 259, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board components, will be different from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) (lights off). This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left-side game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right-side game boards 5AR (multiple second game board components) (including inconsistencies in the combination of the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU). This prevents the execution of incomplete gameplay when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game boards 5AR (multiple second game board components) are inconsistent (including inconsistencies in the combination of the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU). Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

C1:
The game board side component comprises an outer frame, a main frame that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame that is openable and closable on the main frame, and a game board side component that is detachably attached to the game frame side component. The game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a plurality of circuit boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board side component includes a circuit board that is not equipped with a microprocessor, an eigenvalue that indicates that it is the second game board side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue. Furthermore, the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. The second game board component consists of multiple parts, each with different unique values. If it is determined that the unique value of at least one of the second game board component parts is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the second game board component will be different from the normal operation.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a game frame-side component, and a divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is a game board-side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is a first game board-side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is a second game board-side component. The left game board 5AL, which is the first game board-side component, includes a plurality of boards, including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various effect units housed in the left back box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, includes a circuit board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "right-side drive board unit 1700R") which houses various circuit boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted and attached to various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR, a component of the second game board, and an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right-side game board 5ART and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right-side game board 5ARU, which constitute the right-side game board 5AR in Figure 253, which are unique value transmission means for transmitting the self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main body frame 4, which is the game frame. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. The process of attaching the game board 5 to the main body frame 4 and the process of attaching the door frame units to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, are separate processes. Therefore, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is possible that, due to human error, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame units may not be compatible (match).

Furthermore, the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, consists of multiple components, as shown in Figure 253, comprising an upper-right game board 5ART and a lower-right game board 5ARU, each with a different unique value. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, determines if the self-identification code (ID of upper-right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower-right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is the unique value of at least one of the upper-right game board 5ART and the lower-right game board 5ARU, is not a predetermined value. If this is determined, the system will enter state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), resulting in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 and 259. The power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, will differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.). As a result, the various LEDs on the split game board 5AR (the various LEDs on the game board) will turn off, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, will turn off.

In this manner, the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the right-side game board 5AR, is configured to transmit a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value indicating that it is the right-side game board 5AR, to the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first-side game board component, from the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided in the right-side game board 5ART and lower-side game board 5ARU, respectively. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is the unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board components, is not a predetermined value, then the system will enter state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), which corresponds to error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 and 259, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board components, will be different from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) (lights off). This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left-side game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right-side game boards 5AR (multiple second game board components) (including inconsistencies in the combination of the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU). This prevents the execution of incomplete gameplay when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game boards 5AR (multiple second game board components) are inconsistent (including inconsistencies in the combination of the upper right-side game board 5ART and the lower right-side game board 5ARU). Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

C2:
Furthermore, if it is determined that the unique value of at least one component on the second game board side is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation will also differ from the normal operation in other components on the second game board side whose unique values are determined to be normal. Specifically, if, for example, the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART does not match the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU matches the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART will turn off the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.), and the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU will turn off the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.). Furthermore, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART matches the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU will turn off the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.), and the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART will turn off the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.).

In other words, if the self-identification code (ID) of either the upper right game board 5ART or the lower right game board 5ARU does not match a predetermined value (predetermined value: determination for the upper right game board or determination for the lower right game board), it indicates a worker error resulting in a mismatch (incompatibility) between the left game board 5AL and either the upper right or lower right game board. This requires replacing the faulty ID with a compatible one after power is cut off, thus deviating from normal operation.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the self-identification code (ID) of at least one of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU (ID of upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B) is not a predetermined value, then the system will enter state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), resulting in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) as shown in Figures 256 and 259. In this case, the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board, will be different from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the divided game board 5AR (various LEDs of the game board) will turn off. However, if, for example, the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART is not the right If the value for the upper game board 5ART does not match the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the power-on operation for the upper right game board 5ART will be to turn off the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART which differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation for the lower right game board 5ART will be to the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.). If the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the power-on operation for the lower right game board 5ARU will be to turn off the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU which differ from the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation for the upper right game board 5ARU will be to the normal operation (lighting, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.). This way, you can communicate which parts are non-conforming (inconsistent) and which parts are conforming (consistent).

The left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, is equipped with error response 7 shown in Figures 256 to 261, which results in a first error, state 8: unconnected error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c), when it fails to receive the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is subjected to the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 255). It also includes error response 1 shown in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response), which results in a second error, state 2: ID error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c), when it receives the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, from the right-side game board 5AR, and it is not a predetermined value.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, specifically the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as notification display to the warning processing step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during power-on processing. This command corresponds to error response 7 in Figures 256 to 261, which is the first error, state 8: disconnection error 1 in Figure 254(c). In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processes related to the game's presentation.

The second error, State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 254(c), is represented by a command classified as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in Figures 256 to 261, which is then passed to the warning processing step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing during the peripheral control unit's power-on processing. In the warning processing step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission pattern generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the peripheral control IC's RAM, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

Thus, the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, can generate error response 7 shown in Figures 256 to 261, resulting in a first error, state 8: unconnected error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c), if it fails to receive the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 undergoes ID determination processing in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255). Furthermore, if the unique value, the self-identification code (ID), received within the predetermined time is not a predetermined value, it can generate error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 256 to 261, resulting in a second error, state 2: ID error 1, as shown in Figure 254(c).

Furthermore, the second type of error (ID error), which includes various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID Error 1, ID Error 2, and ID Error 3 shown in Figure 254(c), as well as combinations thereof), has a greater impact on gameplay than the first type of error (disconnection error), which includes various disconnection errors (disconnection error 1, disconnection error 2, and disconnection error 3 shown in Figure 254(c)).

Furthermore, while the third error (magnetic detection) resolves after a certain period of time, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) do not resolve even after a certain period of time has elapsed. In these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the act of so-called magnetic tampering, and therefore resolves after a certain period of time has elapsed since detection. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are due to operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fitting of structural components and the connection of drawer connectors must be carefully checked after the power is cut off. Similarly, for the second error (ID error), the part must be replaced with a compliant ID part after the power is cut off. Therefore, these errors do not resolve even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, when the second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effects of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will not be performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a worker's error, and the combination of the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is incompatible (inconsistent). Performing the decorative effects of the right-side game board 5AR in this state could cause the right-side game board 5AR to malfunction electrically.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs at the same time as a second error (ID error), the warning sound for the second error (ID error) remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs at the same time as a second error (ID error), as shown in Figures 258 and 261, the audio in Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) repeatedly plays the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the act of so-called magnetic fraud, and resolves itself after a certain period of time has elapsed. In contrast, the second error (ID error) is a worker error, and since a second error (ID error) requires replacement with a compliant ID product after power is cut off, the warning sound for the second error (ID error) remains even after a certain period of time has elapsed.

C3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error will be notified, and the ID error will not be notified. Also, LED errors in the decorative unit will not be notified. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) occur simultaneously, only a notification will be given indicating that a RAM error has occurred, while no notification will be given indicating that state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 254(c) (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the game progress by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped. To notify the system of this, even if state 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261) in Figure 254(c) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, will be notified with the highest priority, regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

[25-9d. Summary D]
D0:
The game machine comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component being detachably provided on the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board capable of performing game effects and serial communication for sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The second game board side component includes a light-emitting element, a decoration driving means capable of driving the light-emitting element and receiving decoration data from serial communication, a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration driving means, and a first ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration driving means. At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the performance control board is configured such that the first ID code and the second ID code are included in the serial communication data.

Specifically, for example, the system comprises a main frame 4 as a game frame component and a game board 5 as a game board component. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left door frame side unit 420, a right door frame side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450. Because there are compatibility (matching) and incompatibility (mismatching) in the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame units, the door frame units may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board component provided on the main frame 4 consists of a game board 5, which is a first game board component on which a microprocessor is mounted, and a specific door frame unit (a combination of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) which is a second game board component on which a microprocessor is not mounted. The game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the door frame units are mounted on the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. In this case, where the door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 consists of a first game board component, the game board 5, and a second game board component, a specific door unit. The first game board component, the game board 5, includes a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board capable of executing game effects and performing serial communication for sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The second game board component, the specific door unit, includes various LEDs that are light-emitting elements, an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Figure 262), which drives the various LEDs and receives decorative data from serial communication, a uniquely assigned first ID code, and a second ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Figure 262).

The LED driver WIDCa, mounted on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB, which is the decorative driving means, has a uniquely assigned first ID code, which is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, mounted on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB as shown in Figure 262, and has a setting value 64. The specific door unit, which is the second game board component, has an 8-bit information: 11110000B, in which the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb, mounted on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB as shown in Figure 262, which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards in the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit). At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, contains in its serial communication data a setting value 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is a first ID code (an ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa), and 8 bits of information where the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is a second ID code, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) (information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb by signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, within the serial communication line (i.e., within the serial communication data) that transmits the light emission data instructing the LED light emission pattern, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is a component of the second game board, the following are included: the first ID code is the ID of the LED driver WIDCa (ID code that instructs the LED driver WIDCa: setting value 64), and the second ID code is the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB (8-bit information where the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, terminals Q0 to Q7, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B).

Thus, in at least one serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board, the serial communication data includes a setting value 64, which is a first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, and a second ID code 11110000B, which is a second game board component uniquely assigned to the door unit. Therefore, in addition to the serial communication line that transmits light emission data instructing the light emission patterns of various LEDs, which are decorative data, the LED driver WIDCa... This eliminates the need to provide separate serial communication lines for transmitting the first ID code (setting value 64), which is uniquely assigned to the first game board, and the second ID code (11110000B), which is uniquely assigned to a specific door frame unit, which is a component of the second game board. This allows the compatibility (consistency) of the combination between the first game board component (game board 5) and the second game board component (specific door frame unit) to be handled by the second game board component (specific door frame unit). As a result, any inconsistency between the first game board component (game board 5) and the second game board component (specific door frame unit) can be immediately detected, preventing the execution of incomplete gameplay due to this inconsistency. Therefore, a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

D1:
The game board side component comprises an outer frame, a main frame that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame that is openable and closable on the main frame, and a game board side component that is detachably attached to the game frame side component. The game board side component comprises a light-emitting element and a decorative driver that drives the light-emitting element. The game board side component consists of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a sub-control board that executes game effects and performs serial communication for sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The second game board side component includes a decorative driver that receives decorative data from serial communication. The decorative driver has a uniquely assigned first ID code. The second game board side component has a uniquely assigned second ID code. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the sub-control board. The serial communication line that transmits decorative data to the second game board component includes a first ID code and a second ID code.

Specifically, for example, the system comprises a main frame 4, which is a component on the game frame side, and a game board 5, which is a component on the game board side. The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left door frame side unit 420, a right door frame side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top door frame unit 450. Since there are compatibility (matching) and incompatibility (mismatching) in combinations of the game board 5 and specific door frame units (combinations of one or more (or all) of the door frame units), specific door frame units may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side components provided on the main frame 4 consist of a game board 5, which is a first game board side component on which a microprocessor is mounted, and a specific door frame unit, which is a second game board side component on which a microprocessor is not mounted. The game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit is mounted on a door frame 3 that is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. Here, in the case where the specific door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 consists of the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and the door unit, which is the second game board side component. The game board 5 and the specific door frame unit are equipped with various LEDs, which are light-emitting elements, and LED drivers, which are decorative drivers that drive the various LEDs, which are light-emitting elements. The game board 5, which is the first game board side component, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board that can perform serial communication for executing game effects and sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with an LED driver WIDCa, which is mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in Figure 262. WIDCa is a decorative driver that receives light emission data from serial communication, which instructs the LED's light emission mode. The LED driver WIDCa, mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, has a uniquely assigned first ID code, which is a setting value 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, also mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in Figure 262. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has an 8-bit information: 11110000B, where the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb, also mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in Figure 262, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit). The serial communication line that transmits light emission data instructing the light emission pattern of an LED, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is a component of the second game board, contains a setting value 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code (an ID code that instructs the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa), and 8 bits of information where the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is the second ID code, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) respectively (information that is compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb by signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the LED driver WIDCa, which is included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data instructing the LED light emission pattern, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is a component of the second game board, contains the following as a first ID code: the ID of the LED driver WIDCa (ID code that instructs the LED driver WIDCa: setting value 64), and the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB as a second ID code (8-bit information where the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, terminals Q0 to Q7, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B).

Thus, the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver that drives various LEDs that are light-emitting elements in the door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has a first ID code, which is a setting value 64, that is uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, and a second ID code, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is a component of the second game board, 11110000B, that is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is a component of the second game board. These are included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission patterns of the various LEDs, which are decorative data, to the door unit, which is a component of the second game board. In addition to the serial communication line for sending data, it is no longer necessary to provide separate serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, for transmitting the setting value 64, which is a first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is a second ID code uniquely assigned to a specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component. This eliminates the need to provide separate serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board. As a result, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component, can be checked at the specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if there is an inconsistency between the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component, and prevents the execution of incomplete effects when the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component, are inconsistent. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in players' interest in the game.

D2:
Furthermore, in serial communication between the first game board component and the second game board component, a second ID code is provided (included) within the data area that decorates the light-emitting element, and a decoration driver is used as a second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code from the serial signal into a parallel signal. Specifically, in serial communication between the first game board component, the game board 5, and the second game board component, a specific door frame unit, the light emission data, which is a data area for decorating various LEDs that are light-emitting elements and instructs the light emission mode of the LEDs, includes (includes) the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB (8 bits of information where the eight setting terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb, terminals Q0 to Q7, are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B) as a second ID code expansion means, and the LED driver WIDCa, which is implemented on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, is used to expand (restore) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal into a parallel signal. As a result, there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code expansion means on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB to expand (restore) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal. Instead, the LED driver WIDCa that drives the various LEDs can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb.

Furthermore, although the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the game frame component. Specifically, the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected, but they are each independently fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component. In other words, the process of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the process of attaching the specific door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, are separate processes. Therefore, when attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, it is possible that, due to human error, the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit may not be compatible (match).

D3:
Furthermore, serial signals from the sub-control board and serial signals to the sub-control board communicate using the same domain as various data related to game performance. Specifically, the light emission information signal, which is a serial signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (which is the sub-control board) to the frame-side decorative board WKB in a specific door frame unit shown in Figure 262, and the door frame-side information signal, which is a serial signal from the relay board TKB provided on the plate unit 200 in a specific door frame unit shown in Figure 263 to the peripheral control board 1510 (which is the sub-control board), share the same domain as various data related to game performance. This communication takes place via the drawer connectors, as the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4 and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, which are mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, are electrically connected to the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. As a result, existing serial lines can be used as is for the drawer connector, and without increasing the number of drawer connectors, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, can transmit an ID for determining the authenticity of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit, and can also receive the determination result for the specific door frame unit.

In a system capable of determining the compatibility (matching) of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit as shown in Figures 262 and 263, if a normal ID is determined within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S1108 of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222 (only the first time after power-on), or in the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, does not make a notification if it determines that state 1 in Figure 254(c) is normal, i.e., a normal ID (applicable method in the same figure: none). However, if it determines that state 2 in Figure 254(c) is ID error 1 (error response 1 in Figures 256 to 261 (ID error 1 response)), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. In the countermeasure in Figure 254(c): after power-off and replacement with a compliant ID product, if it determines that state 1 in Figure 254(c) is normal, i.e., a normal ID, the notification will no longer be made. In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit. Even if the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). This limits the determination of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit to a predetermined period after power-on, thereby contributing to a reduction in the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is shut off, cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board. The game board must then be reinstalled, and the pachinko machine's power must be turned back on. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is shut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

D4:
A separate serial communication means transmits the result of the truth/false determination. Specifically, while the peripheral control board 1510 outputs to the frame-side decorative board WKB via a serial communication line (serial communication line for light emission information signals) that transmits light emission data instructing the LED light emission mode to the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit as a light emission information signal, the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame-side decorative board WKB is input to the door frame-side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided on the dish unit 200 of the door frame 3, and is output from the door frame-side information output circuit TOC to the peripheral control board 1510 via a serial communication line (a serial communication line for door frame-side information signals that is a different system from the serial communication line for light emission information signals) that transmits the serialized door frame-side information signal together with detection signals from various sensors such as the performance operation unit 300. In other words, the ID validity signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame-side decorative substrate WKB, which is the result of the truth/false determination, is transmitted via a serial communication line for door frame-side information signals, which is a different serial communication means from the serial communication line for light emission information signals.

The first ID code uses the last configurable number. Specifically, the setting value 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa on the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit. This is because, in addition to specific door frame units, LED drivers are also implemented on various decorative boards and other boards on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. Therefore, in program development, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. For this reason, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to setting value 64 for the frame-side decorative board WKB where the ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided.

The LEDs are driven by a decorative driver used in the second ID code expansion means. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, the light emission data, which is a data area for decorating various LEDs that are light-emitting elements and instructs the light emission mode of the LEDs, includes (includes) the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB (8 bits of information where the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground): 11110000B) as the second ID code expansion means, which expands (restores) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal from the serial signal, uses the LED driver WIDCa, which is mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, and the decorative driver uses this LED driver WIDCa. This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated second ID code decomposition means on the frame-side decorative substrate WKB to decompose (restore) the second ID code, 11110000B, into a parallel signal. Instead, the LED driver WIDCa, which drives the various LEDs, can be used directly as the second ID code decomposition means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb. Furthermore, the LED driver WIDCa can control the illumination of various LEDs based on the illumination data, by electrically connecting them to the other output terminals (16 output terminals) that are not electrically connected to the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb.

The drawer connector is divided into a main connector and a sub-connector. Specifically, the clock signal for acquiring information and the switching signal for acquiring information from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 installed in the game board 5 are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector. This is done by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW (main connector or sub-connector) which is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is mounted on the main frame 4, with the terminals of two main frame side drawer connectors (sub-connector or main connector) which are mounted on a main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. Furthermore, the door frame-side information signal from the door frame-side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB, which is provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 equipped with the game board 5 via these drawer connectors. This is achieved by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connector UDRW, UDRW, which is mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (main or sub connector) of the game board 5, with the terminals of two main frame-side drawer connectors (sub or main connector) mounted on a main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

If the status changes from false (incompatible) to true (compatible), the game becomes playable (noise countermeasure). Specifically, for example, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222, sets the logic of the information acquisition switching signal input to the S/inverting L terminal and outputs it to switch between parallel operation and serial operation, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire information signals from the door frame side, thereby grasping the player's operation and the operation of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 mounted on the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasping the operation of the movable body (performance body) and the player on other units of the door frame 3, and obtaining a judgment result on the compatibility (compatibleness) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit. Thus, if the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit changes from false (incompatible) to true (compatible), that is, if the change result is reversed, it is assumed that the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (compatible), but that a part of the door frame side information signal (the part indicating the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit) has been distorted due to the influence of noise, and the performance proceeds as if the combination of the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (compatible).

While the system is in a false, non-compliant (inconsistent) state, data indicating that the LEDs are not lit is transmitted to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits light emission data to the various LED drivers that causes the various LEDs on the game board (divided game board) (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs)) and/or the various LEDs on a specific door frame unit (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs)) to turn off (all turn off).

If the false mismatch (inconsistency) is resolved, LED illumination data is transmitted to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits illumination data to the various LED drivers so that the various LEDs of the game board (divided game board) (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) and/or the various LEDs of a specific door frame unit (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) illuminate in a manner that corresponds to the progression of the effects.

[25-9e. Summary E]
E1:
The game board side component comprises an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame, and a game board side component provided on the game board side component, the game board side component comprising a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and further comprising a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and an operation unit provided on the first game board side component, and when the operation unit is operated, notification can be performed according to the determination result of the consistency determination means.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A, shown in Figure 248, which is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a game frame side component. The divided game board 5A, which is a game board side component, is composed of a left game board 5AL, shown in Figure 248, which is a first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, shown in Figure 248, which is a second game board side component. It further comprises an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, and an ID error determination switch 1310v of the main control board 1310, which is an operation unit provided on the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, shown in Figure 269. When the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, notification can be performed according to the determination result of the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is the matching determination means.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an employee of the gaming hall presses the press operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v in the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v has operation logic and non-operation logic, and when operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a receives an ID error When the press operation section of the error detection switch 1310v is determined to have been pressed, and a non-operation logic (the inverted operation logic) is input, the press operation section of the ID error detection switch 1310v is determined to have not been pressed. Based on this, when the press operation section of the ID error detection switch 1310v is determined to have been pressed, an ID error detection result notification start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, to start notifying the ID error detection result.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the performance operation unit, it outputs an ID acquisition clock signal (a clock signal for acquiring an ID specifically for the right-side game board) to the right-side game board and an ID acquisition clock signal (a clock signal for acquiring an ID specifically for the performance operation unit) to the performance operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a then acquires the ID code signal from the right-side game board (an ID code signal specifically for the right-side game board) and the ID code signal from the performance control unit (an ID code signal specifically for the performance control unit) via separate serial systems. It then determines (compares) the combination of the split game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (the peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310, both equipped with microprocessors) by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM. It also determines (compares) the combination of the performance control unit and the split game boards by referring to a combination table (Figure 254) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives an ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223. When it analyzes the received command in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it uses this as a trigger to start notifying the ID error judgment result. If the judgment result determined in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 is non-compliant (inconsistent), it passes a command classified as notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning processing of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, the light emission pattern generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the performance. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 then notifies that the corresponding error has occurred, as shown in Figure 254(c), from error response 1 to error response 9.

In this way, when the press operation section of the ID error judgment switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is pressed, notification can be executed according to the determination result of the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. This allows for immediate detection of a mismatch between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, preventing the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are mismatched. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

E2:
In the event of an ID error or disconnection error, the start time for error notification can be changed by pressing the ID error judgment switch 1310v. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 based on the judgment result for the combination of divided game boards, if it does not receive the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 and analyze it in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, it will not be able to pass the command classified as a notification display to the warning processing in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and will not be able to start notifying the ID error judgment result. In other words, until the command to start notifying the ID error judgment result is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, even if errors 1 to 9 have occurred, the start time for informing that fact can be changed by pressing the press operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v by an employee of the gaming hall or other staff member.

ID errors and disconnection errors can be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 based on the determination result for combinations of split game boards, etc., the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 223 by pressing the ID error determination switch 1310v by an employee of the game store, and unless it is analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, the command to be classified as a notification display cannot be passed to the warning processing in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and the notification of the ID error determination result cannot be started. In other words, staff members at the amusement hall can become aware of ID errors or disconnection errors at any time after powering on the pachinko machine 1 (at any time after the pachinko machine 1's system has finished starting up).

The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510, when error responses 1 to 9 are not occurring as shown in Figure 254(c) for the pachinko machine's behavior during an error, i.e., when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response), the corresponding action is "none," and therefore there is no special notification behavior for normal operation (no error response). In other words, when operating normally (no error response), no notification is given, and no special notification sound is emitted from the speaker.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the press operation section of the ID error judgment switch 1310v on the main control board 1310 is pressed, this may trigger a notification sound (for example, a "beep") to be emitted from the speaker via control by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, this may trigger a notification sound (for example, "beep beep") to be emitted from the speaker via control by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510. If the setting is changed by pressing the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, a notification sound (for example, "beep," which may be the same sound as the notification sound emitted when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a and turned ON) may be emitted from the speaker via control by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 each time the press operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed.

E3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR via hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251 on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign the ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they match, an effective signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matches), and provided that the other IDs shown in Figure 254(c) are also compatible, the state becomes 1: Normal, and the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 installed on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A, proceed with the performance. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs a control signal to light up a predetermined LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A, for example, as an active signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they are not the same, the valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the split game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510, for example, when it reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), will, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 257, not output a control signal to light a predetermined LED on the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an effective signal to proceed with the performance, and will instead turn off (turn off all) the sub-function display unit 2250.

There are cases where operating the control unit at any time after power-on does not result in notification (if it is a valid ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured such that if error responses 1 to 9 have not occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, that is, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and the setting key has been inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change process is completed), it will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error response). Also, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the system operates normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

Furthermore, if the system is to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in Figure 254(c), the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, such as normal operation (no error handling), error handling 1 to error handling 9, ID errors, and disconnection errors were determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a predetermined period after power-on. However, it is also possible to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error may be determined by the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. The valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error related to the performance operation unit may also be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, as shown in Figure 254(c), is normal operation (no error handling), then there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error handling) because the response method is "none". In other words, if the system is functioning normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

If the ID is determined to be legitimate, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated afterward. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, will not issue a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c) (applicable method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the ON operation is performed at this time, the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Therefore, it cannot perform the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing. Consequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 cannot notify that normal operation (no error handling) is occurring.

If an abnormal ID is detected, the notification will continue until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), specifically state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), and the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action shown in Figure 254(c): power cut off and the correct ID is replaced with a suitable ID. This notification makes it difficult to play games while the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (incompatible).

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

E4:
In case of mismatch, an abnormality is notified on the LCD. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, it displays an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots). Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Please wait" on an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots) or an image of the waiting time (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed).

In the event of inconsistency, control by the performance control means will not be performed. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), then, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the various LEDs of the specific door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the various LEDs of the game board, will be turned off (all turned off), and the movable parts on the game board side and the movable parts on the game frame side, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will not perform any actions such as returning to their original positions (no operation).

In case of mismatch, an abnormality will be announced by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, will determine that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched). For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated.

In the event of a mismatch, the lamps on the door frame (which may be lamps provided on decorative members that are removable or lamps provided on decorative members that are not removable) will be illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control board 1510 power-on processing shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 259, the various LEDs on the door frame unit will blink red in an abnormal state. Furthermore, the various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided not only on the various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, but also on the various decorative members that are attached to and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple components on the second game board side, all of the components on the second game board side will not be driven unless at least one of them has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is further divided into an upper and lower part, and consists of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU as shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained together, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives, one bit at a time, as serial data, following the contents held by each flip-flop in the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which is the subsequent 8-bit shift register. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (inconsistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. In a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, if the upper right game board 5ART is to be combined with another lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, then even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (inconsistent), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART, and the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off).

[25-9f. Summary F]
F1:
The system comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame; a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component; a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component; a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; and a plurality of display units for displaying the lottery results of the lottery means. If a mismatch is determined by the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on some of the plurality of display units is restricted.

Specifically, for example, the main frame 4, which is a game frame side component; the divided game board 5A in Figure 248, which is a game board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a game frame side component and has the left game board 5AL in Figure 248, which is a first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR in Figure 248, which is a second game board side component; and step S1 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in Figure 255, which is a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The system includes an ID determination process (003), a special symbol and special electric mechanism control process in step S114 of the main control side timer interrupt process (Figure 212), which is a lottery means that executes a lottery process based on the fulfillment of the lottery conditions, and a plurality of display units that display the lottery results of the special symbol and special electric mechanism control process, which is the lottery means: a function display unit 1400 (Figure 248) controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2250 (Figure 248) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. If the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (Figure 255), which is the consistency determination means, determines that there is a mismatch, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 (controlled by the peripheral control board 1510), which is one of the plurality of display units, the function display unit 1400 (controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 257, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 lights up a predetermined LED, while the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off). If it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, the display of the lottery result on either or both of the sub-function display unit 2250 and the performance display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 may be restricted. In this case, the display of the lottery result may be restricted by turning off the sub-function display unit 2250, stopping the flashing light emission and making it emit light in a predetermined emission mode (e.g., all lights on), turning off the performance display device 1600, or displaying notification characters (e.g., "Please call an attendant") on the performance display device 1600 to cover the display of the changing decorative patterns.

Thus, if there is a mismatch between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, the display of the lottery results in the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is restricted. This is because the sub-function display unit 2250, which is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is one of several display units that display the lottery results for the special symbols and special electric mechanism control processing in step S114 of the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212, which is the lottery means. This allows for immediate detection of inconsistencies between the left-side game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right-side game board 5AR (the second game board component). This prevents the execution of incomplete gameplay due to these inconsistencies, thus mitigating a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

F2:
The system further includes connection determination means for determining the connection status of the second game board component, and even if the connection determination means determines that the second game board component is not connected, the display of the lottery results on the multiple display units is not restricted.

Specifically, the system further includes an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a connection determination means for determining the connection status of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component. (In other words, the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 functions as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and also functions as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the second game board component.) It has the function of a connection determination means for determining the connection status with the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component. Even if the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the connection determination means, determines that the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is in an unconnected state, the display of the lottery results on the multiple display units, namely the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is not restricted. For example, in error response 7 after power-on in Figure 257 (state 8 in Figure 254(c): unconnected error, connection with the right-side game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 lights up a predetermined LED, and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 lights up a predetermined LED.

The first game board component comprises a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and an effect control means for controlling the effects based on signals from the game control means. The game control means controls a first display unit among a plurality of display units to display the lottery results, and the effect control means controls a second display unit among a plurality of display units to display the lottery results. If an inconsistency is detected by the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the second display unit controlled by the effect control means is restricted, while the display of the lottery results on the first display unit controlled by the game control means is not restricted.

Specifically, the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, comprises a main control board 1310, which is a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control means for controlling the performance based on signals (various commands) from the main control board 1310, which is the game control means. The main control board 1310, which is the game control means, comprises a plurality of display units: a function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit of the 250, controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit of the 250, to display the lottery results of the special symbols and special electric mechanism control process in step S114 of the main control side timer interrupt processing in Figure 212. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control means, controls the function display unit 1400, which is a function display unit controlled by the main control board 1310, and the sub-function display unit 1400, which is a sub-function display unit controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit of the 250, to display the lottery results of the special symbols and special electric mechanism control processing in step S114 of the main control side timer interrupt processing in Figure 212. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control means, controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the main control board 1310, which is a display unit of the 250, and the sub-function display unit 1400, which is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a part of the display unit 2250, is controlled to receive a command sent in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 212, which is the lottery result of the special symbol and special electric prize control process in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 212, and displays the lottery result based on this received command. If an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 255, which is the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery result on the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, is restricted, while the display of the lottery result on the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit controlled by the main control board 1310, which is the game control means, is not restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 257, the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off), while the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 illuminates a predetermined LED.

F3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR via hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251 on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign the ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they match, an effective signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (matches), and provided that the other IDs shown in Figure 254(c) are also compatible, the state becomes 1: Normal, and the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 installed on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A, proceed with the performance. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs a control signal to light up a predetermined LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A, for example, as an active signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they are not the same, the valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the split game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510, for example, when it reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), will, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 257, not output a control signal to light a predetermined LED on the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an effective signal to proceed with the performance, and will instead turn off (turn off all) the sub-function display unit 2250.

There are cases where operating the control unit at any time after power-on does not result in notification (if it is a valid ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured such that if error responses 1 to 9 have not occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, that is, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and the setting key has been inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change process is completed), it will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error response). Also, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the system operates normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

Furthermore, if the system is to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in Figure 254(c), the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, such as normal operation (no error handling), error handling 1 to error handling 9, ID errors, and disconnection errors were determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a predetermined period after power-on. However, it is also possible to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error may be determined by the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. The valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error related to the performance operation unit may also be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, as shown in Figure 254(c), is normal operation (no error handling), then there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error handling) because the response method is "none". In other words, if the system is functioning normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

If the ID is determined to be legitimate, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated afterward. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, will not issue a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c) (applicable method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the ON operation is performed at this time, the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Therefore, it cannot perform the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing. Consequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 cannot notify that normal operation (no error handling) is occurring.

If an abnormal ID is detected, the notification will continue until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), specifically state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), and the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action shown in Figure 254(c): power cut off and the correct ID is replaced with a suitable ID. This notification makes it difficult to play games while the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (incompatible).

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

F4:
In case of mismatch, an abnormality is notified on the LCD. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, it displays an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots). Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Please wait" on an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots) or an image of the waiting time (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed).

In the event of inconsistency, control by the performance control means will not be performed. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), then, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs on the game board, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off), and the movable parts on the game board side and the movable parts on the game frame side, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will not perform any actions such as returning to their original positions (no operation).

In case of mismatch, an abnormality will be announced by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, will determine that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched). For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated.

In the event of a mismatch, the lamps on the door frame (which may be lamps provided on decorative members that are removable or lamps provided on decorative members that are not removable) will be illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control board 1510 power-on processing shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 259, the various LEDs on the door frame unit will blink red in an abnormal state. Furthermore, the various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided not only on the various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, but also on the various decorative members that are attached to and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple components on the second game board side, all of the components on the second game board side will not be driven unless at least one of them has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is further divided into an upper and lower part, and consists of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU as shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained together, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives, one bit at a time, as serial data, following the contents held by each flip-flop in the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which is the subsequent 8-bit shift register. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (inconsistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. In a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, if the upper right game board 5ART is to be combined with another lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, then even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (inconsistent), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART, and the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off).

[25-9g. Small portion G]
G1:
The system comprises a game frame side component having a movable decorative body that is driven in a predetermined manner, a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component, wherein the illumination of the plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component is restricted when a mismatch is determined by the consistency determination means, and although the movable decorative body provided on the game frame side component is not subject to determination by the consistency determination means, its driving is restricted if it is determined that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are mismatched.

Specifically, for example, a game board is mounted on the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 includes the performance operation section 301 shown in Figure 52 and is a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined manner. The game frame side component, consisting of the door frame 3 and the main frame 4, includes, as the game board side component, a game board and a performance operation unit 300 equipped with a performance operation section 301, which is a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, the system includes a game board component, the divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is provided on the main frame 4, the game frame component, and has a first game board component, the left game board 5AL shown in Figure 248, and a second game board component, the right game board 5AR shown in Figure 248; an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, the second game board component; and various LEDs, which are multiple light-emitting elements, provided on the right game board 5AR, the second game board component.

This performance control unit 300 is not equipped with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specification. It is equipped with a movable body such as the performance control section 301 shown in Figure 52. The movable body such as the performance control section 301 provided on the performance control unit 300 is treated as part of the "game frame side movable body" shown in Figures 256 to 261.

If a mismatch is determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, the illumination of various LEDs, which are multiple light-emitting elements provided on the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is restricted. The performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, is not subject to determination by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, but if it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are mismatched, the drive is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 256, the movable body on the game frame side does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (no operation). Furthermore, if it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, the control of the movable decorative element (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, should be in a different manner than when it is determined that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are compatible. For example, some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, may be driven in a specific driving manner (such as rotating at a constant speed), or some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, may be controlled so that they are not driven.

Thus, if the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, the drive of the performance operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element provided on the door frame 3, a game frame component that is not subject to determination by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (which is the consistency determination means), is restricted. This allows for immediate detection of the inconsistency between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, preventing the execution of incomplete performances due to the inconsistency. Therefore, a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

G2:
If the alignment determination means determines alignment within a predetermined period after power-on, the driving of the movable decorative body will not be restricted even if misalignment occurs later. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the alignment between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. If it determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (aligned), it does not determine the compatibility (alignment) between the left game board and the right game board at all thereafter. Even if the combination of the left game board and the right game board becomes incompatible (misaligned), the driving of the performance operation unit 300, which is the movable decorative body, will not be restricted and will operate. In other words, the performance operation unit 301 will be driven and operated in a predetermined operating mode (in accordance with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period from power-on, the restriction on the movable decorative body is released based on the determination that consistency has been achieved. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines the consistency between state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), that is, the left game board 5AL which is the first game board side component and the right game board 5AR which is the second game board side component, and determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is inconsistent. If a mismatch is detected, the notification for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) is maintained. The solution shown in Figure (c) is as follows: after power cut-off and replacement with a compatible ID part, the system returns to State 1 in Figure 254(c): normal. This means the system determines the compatibility between the left game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right game board 5AR (the second game board component). If the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be compatible (matched), the notification is deactivated.

G3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR via hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251 on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign the ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they match, an effective signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matches), and provided that the other IDs shown in Figure 254(c) are also compatible, the state becomes 1: Normal, and the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 installed on the door frame 3, and the divided game board 5A, proceed with the performance. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal to the performance operation unit 300, which drives the performance operation section 301 to operate in a predetermined manner, as an effective signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they are not the same, the valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the divided game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510, for example, when it reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 254(c), does not output a control signal for driving and operating the movable part on the game frame side in a predetermined manner as an effective signal to proceed with the performance, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 256, and instead keeps the movable part on the game frame side inactive (no operation), such as returning to its original position.

There are cases where operating the control unit at any time after power-on does not result in notification (if it is a valid ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured such that if error responses 1 to 9 have not occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, that is, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and the setting key has been inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change process is completed), it will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error response). Also, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the system operates normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

Furthermore, if the system is to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in Figure 254(c), the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, such as normal operation (no error handling), error handling 1 to error handling 9, ID errors, and disconnection errors were determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a predetermined period after power-on. However, it is also possible to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error may be determined by the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. The valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error related to the performance operation unit may also be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, as shown in Figure 254(c), is normal operation (no error handling), then there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error handling) because the response method is "none". In other words, if the system is functioning normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

If the ID is determined to be legitimate, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated afterward. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, will not issue a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c) (applicable method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the ON operation is performed at this time, the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Therefore, it cannot perform the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing. Consequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 cannot notify that normal operation (no error handling) is occurring.

If an abnormal ID is detected, the notification will continue until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), specifically state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), and the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action shown in Figure 254(c): power cut off and the correct ID is replaced with a suitable ID. This notification makes it difficult to play games while the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (incompatible).

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure 254(c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a compliant ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then judged to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is returned to the effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

G4:
In case of mismatch, an abnormality is notified on the LCD. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, it displays an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots). Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the performance display device 1600 displays the notification text "Please wait" on an image of the performance (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game balls entering the various prize slots) or an image of the waiting time (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a stopped image is displayed).

In the event of inconsistency, control by the performance control means will not be performed. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), then, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs on the game board, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off), and the movable parts on the game board side and the movable parts on the game frame side, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will not perform any actions such as returning to their original positions (no operation).

In case of mismatch, an abnormality will be announced by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, will determine that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched). For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 256, after the startup music ends, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 257, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" will be played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This voice pattern will be repeated.

In the event of a mismatch, the lamps on the door frame (which may be lamps provided on decorative members that are removable or lamps provided on decorative members that are not removable) will be illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control board 1510 power-on processing shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 259, the various LEDs on the door frame unit will blink red in an abnormal state. Furthermore, the various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided not only on the various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, but also on the various decorative members that are attached to and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple components on the second game board side, all of the components on the second game board side will not be driven unless at least one of them has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is further divided into an upper and lower part, and consists of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU as shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained together, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives, one bit at a time, as serial data, following the contents held by each flip-flop in the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which is the subsequent 8-bit shift register. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (inconsistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. In a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, if the upper right game board 5ART is to be combined with another lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, then even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (inconsistent), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART, and the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off).

[25-9h. Summary H]
H1:
The system comprises a game board side component having multiple frame light-emitting means, a game board side component provided on the game board side component having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and multiple board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component. When the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch, the system restricts the illumination of the multiple board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component. Although the multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the game board side component are not subject to determination by the consistency determination means, at least some of their illumination is restricted when it is determined that there is a mismatch between the first game board side component and the second game board side component.

Specifically, for example, a game board is mounted on the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is provided with various decorative circuit boards (for example, the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative circuit board 320, the button outer decorative circuit board 355, the button inner decorative circuit board 364, etc.) on which various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) shown in Figure 53 are mounted. The game frame side component, consisting of a door frame 3 and a main body frame 4, includes a game board side component, which comprises a game board and a performance operation unit 300 having multiple frame light-emitting means, such as various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, 355a, 364a, etc.).

Furthermore, the system includes a game board component, the divided game board 5A shown in Figure 248, which is provided on the main frame 4, the game frame component, and has a first game board component, the left game board 5AL shown in Figure 248, and a second game board component, the right game board 5AR shown in Figure 248; an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left game board 5AL, the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, the second game board component; and various LEDs (for example, various LEDs mounted on decorative substrates in various performance units housed in the right back box 3010R located behind the right game board 5AR) which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right game board 5AR, the second game board component.

This performance control unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specification. It is equipped with various decorative substrates (e.g., the performance control unit outer perimeter decorative substrate 320, the button outer decorative substrate 355, the button inner decorative substrate 364, etc.) on which various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364a, etc.) are mounted, as shown in Figure 53. The various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, LEDs 364, etc.) mounted on the various decorative substrates provided on the performance control unit 300 are treated as part of the "various LEDs of the door frame unit" shown in Figures 256 to 261.

If a mismatch is determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is a consistency determination means, the emission of various LEDs mounted on decorative substrates in various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R, which is a plurality of board light-emitting means provided on the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, is restricted. Although various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative substrates in the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a game frame side component, are not subject to determination by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is a consistency determination means, if a mismatch is determined between the left game board 5AL, which is a first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is a second game board side component, the emission of at least some of them (for example, LED 364a) is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when the power is turned on in Figure 259, the various LEDs on the door frame unit blink red, but only some of the LEDs (for example, LED 364a) among the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 are turned off (all are turned off). Furthermore, if it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, the mode of controlling the emission of various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is a plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame component, is different from the mode of control when it is determined that the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are compatible. For example, some or all of the LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is a component of the door frame 3 that is part of the game frame, may be turned off, or some or all of the LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is a component of the game frame, may be made to light up in a specific pattern (e.g., flashing red).

Thus, when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, the illumination of some of the various LEDs (for example, LED 364a) mounted on the various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame illumination means, is restricted. These LEDs are not subject to determination by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the compatibility determination means. This allows for immediate detection of the incompatibility between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, preventing the execution of incomplete performances due to the incompatibility. Therefore, a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

H2:
If the alignment determination means determines alignment within a predetermined period from power-on, the illumination of the frame illumination means will not be restricted even if misalignment occurs later. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the alignment between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Figure 255. If it determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (aligned), it does not determine the compatibility (alignment) between the left game board and the right game board at all thereafter. Even if the combination of the left game board and the right game board becomes incompatible (misaligned), the illumination of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame illumination means, will not be restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, will light up in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (in accordance with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period from power-on, the restrictions on the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means are released based on the determination that consistency has been achieved. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines the consistency between state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 259 to 261), that is, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, and determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), then the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is issued (implemented on the decorative board of the various performance units housed in the right back box 3010R, which is located behind the right game board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means). Various LEDs on the game board are turned off (all turned off), while some of the LEDs (e.g., LED 364a) on the various decorative circuit boards of the frame-illuminating performance control unit 300 (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are turned off (all turned off). The countermeasure shown in Figure (c): After power cut-off and replacement with a compatible ID part, the system determines the consistency between the left game board 5AL (the first game board component) and the right game board 5AR (the second game board component). If it is determined that the combination of the left and right game boards is compatible (matched), the notification is canceled.

Once a matched state is achieved, even if a mismatched state occurs again before the power is cut off, the illumination of the board light-emitting means and the frame light-emitting means will not be restricted. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines the match between the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. If it determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is compatible (matched), it then does not determine the compatibility (match) between the left game board and the right game board at all. Even if the combination with the side game board becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, which is positioned behind the right-side game board 5AR (the game board illumination means), will not have their illumination restricted as the LEDs of the game board. Similarly, the illumination of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, 355a, 364a, etc.) mounted on the decorative boards of the performance operation unit 300 (the frame illumination means) will not be restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the various performance units housed in the right-side back box 3010R, which is positioned behind the right-side game board 5AR (the game board illumination means), will illuminate in a predetermined illumination pattern (in accordance with the progression of the performance), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards of the performance operation unit 300 (the frame illumination means) will also illuminate in a predetermined illumination pattern (in accordance with the progression of the performance).

H3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR via hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 251 on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign the ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they match, an effective signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (matches), and provided that the other IDs shown in Figure 254(c) are compatible, the state becomes 1: Normal, and the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, and the divided game board 5A, which are installed on the door frame 3, proceed with the performance. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal to the performance operation unit 300 that causes various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance operation unit 300 to emit light in a predetermined pattern, as an effective signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit) is compared with the judgment ID code, and if they are not the same, the valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of the right-side game board 5AR (Figure 251) is input to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL (Figure 249). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side game board 5AR from this input ID code signal and makes a judgment (comparison) by referring to the combination table (Figure 254) that is pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the judgment ID code. The combination of the divided game boards is determined in the ID judgment process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Figure 255). If the combination of the divided game boards is not compatible (matched), the peripheral control board 1510, for example, when it reaches state 2: ID error 1 as shown in Figure 259(c), will, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on as shown in Figure 259, not output a control signal to the performance operation unit 300 for the illumination of some of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards of the performance operation unit 300, as an active signal to proceed with the performance. Instead, it will turn off the illumination of this portion (for example, LED 364a) (total off).

There are cases where operating the control unit at any time after power-on does not result in notification (if it is a valid ID). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured such that if error responses 1 to 9 have not occurred as shown in Figure 254(c) for the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, that is, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), and the setting key has been inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing (until a predetermined period has elapsed until this setting change process is completed), it will not be able to notify that it is operating normally (no error response). Also, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 254(c) is normal operation (no error response), there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error response) because the countermeasure is "none". In other words, if the system operates normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

Furthermore, if the system is to determine whether a valid ID, ID error, or disconnection error is detected at any time after power-on, that is, as shown in Figure 254(c), the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, such as normal operation (no error handling), error handling 1 to error handling 9, ID errors, and disconnection errors were determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, which is a predetermined period after power-on. However, it may be determined at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error may be determined by the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. The valid ID, ID error, and disconnection error related to the performance operation unit may be determined in the performance operation unit information acquisition process in step S of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 222. In any case, if the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error, as shown in Figure 254(c), is normal operation (no error handling), then there is no special notification method for normal operation (no error handling) because the response method is "none". In other words, if the system is functioning normally (without error handling), it will not notify you of this.

If the ID is determined to be legitimate, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated afterward. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, will not issue a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c) (applicable method in the same figure: none). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and the ON operation is performed at this time, the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 211 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 212. Therefore, it cannot perform the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing. Consequently, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 cannot notify that normal operation (no error handling) is occurring.

If an abnormal ID is detected, the notification will continue until the ID becomes normal. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), specifically state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), and the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained until the corrective action shown in Figure 254(c): power cut off and the correct ID is replaced with a suitable ID. This notification makes it difficult to play games while the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (incompatible).

If a normal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, no notification is given. However, if an abnormal ID is determined to be present within a predetermined period after power-on, the notification method may be changed when the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification method is changed when it becomes normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not give a notification if it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). However, if it determines that the state is 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 259 to 261), i.e., an abnormal ID, the notification for Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained. The countermeasure in Figure (c): After the power is cut off and the product is replaced with a suitable ID product, the notification will stop when it determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal within a predetermined period after power-on, and a normal ID is determined, the system will not subsequently check the state of the combination of the left and right game boards. Even if the combination of the left and right game boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), the system will not issue a notification indicating an abnormal ID due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). By limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right game boards to a predetermined period after power-on, this contributes to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the game's effects.

Except for some notifications, the notification will be terminated. Specifically, for example, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID is abnormal, in state 2: ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 256 to 261), then it will save the information as history information in the built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it will be saved linked to the date and time. Then, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, the correct combination of the left and right game boards is installed in the main frame 4, and when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, determines that the state is 1: normal, i.e., a normal ID, as shown in Figure 254(c). In this case, for example, the history "ID abnormal" may be displayed on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, or this history may be displayed for a predetermined period or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected. At this time, the power to the pachinko machine is cut off, the power supply to the peripheral control board is interrupted, and the game board must be reinstalled and the pachinko machine powered on again. Once the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") can be verified by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255. Therefore, if the ID confirmation by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, and the notification process that continues until the pachinko machine's power is cut off are performed at the time of power-on, then further control of ID confirmation and notification processing is not required thereafter.

In other words, while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at any given time (when the system of the pachinko machine 1 has finished starting up and is ready to proceed with the game and the effects), the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes shown in Figure 222. Furthermore, when the effect operation unit is attached to or detached from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, if an effect operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID at least once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with another effect operation unit that has an abnormal ID (or, if an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with an effect operation unit with a normal ID, and then determined to have a normal ID once in the ID determination process that is repeatedly performed as one of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processes is replaced with an effect operation unit with an abnormal ID), the effect will continue to progress and no notification will be given that the effect operation unit has an abnormal ID, even if the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent). Therefore, once the system returns to normal, the notification method will not change even if it becomes abnormal again.

H4:
In case of mismatch, an abnormality is notified on the LCD. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 259, the display device 1600 displays "Power Restoring" on a black background, followed by notification characters such as "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and displays an image with the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 260, the display device 1600 displays notification characters such as "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," on a black background, and displays an image with the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine lit up.

In the event of inconsistency, control by the performance control means will not be performed. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (inconsistent), then, for example, in the error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 260, the various LEDs on the door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will blink red, the various LEDs on the game board will turn off (all off), and the movable parts on the game frame side controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not perform any actions such as returning to their original position (no operation).

In case of mismatch, an abnormality will be announced by voice. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 255, will determine that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched). For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on shown in Figure 259, the startup music at power-on will be muted, followed by a predetermined error notification sound once, and then an announcement sound stating, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game boards." This voice pattern will be repeated. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 260, a predetermined error notification sound will be played once, followed by an announcement sound stating, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game boards." This voice pattern will be repeated.

In the event of a mismatch, the lamps on the door frame (which may be lamps provided on decorative members that are removable or lamps provided on decorative members that are not removable) will be illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, the door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, is fitted with door frame units such as the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units"). In the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control board 1510 power-on processing shown in Figure 255, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left game board and the right game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on shown in Figure 259, the various LEDs on the door frame unit will blink red in an abnormal state. Furthermore, the various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided not only on the various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, but also on the various decorative members that are attached to and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple components on the second game board side, all of the components on the second game board side will not be driven unless at least one of them has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is further divided into an upper and lower part, and consists of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU as shown in Figure 253, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chained together, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register by the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The peripheral control board 1510 receives, one bit at a time, as serial data, following the contents held by each flip-flop in the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which is the subsequent 8-bit shift register. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (inconsistency) between the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR. In a combination of the upper right game board and the lower right game board, if the upper right game board 5ART is to be combined with another lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, then even if the left game board 5AL and the upper right game board 5ART are compatible (inconsistent), the various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART, and the various LEDs on the other lower right game board that is incompatible (inconsistent) with the upper right game board 5ART, will be turned off (all LEDs turned off).

[25-10. Layout of the circuit board on which the ID output circuit (IDC) is mounted]
In the above embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC, which mainly consists of a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa having eight flip-flop circuits for generating a self-identification code (ID), may be mounted on a dedicated board on which only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, located behind the right-side game board 5AR; it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards; it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board; or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards. However, it may also be mounted on a decorative board housed in the right-side back box 3010R of the back unit 3000; or it may be mounted on a decorative board provided in the door frame unit. Below, an embodiment will be described in which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board on which various LEDs, etc. are mounted, the decorative board is housed in the right-side back box 3010R of the back unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is located behind the right-side game panel 1100R. When mounting the ID output circuit IDC on the decorative board provided in the door frame unit, it may be mounted on any of the above-mentioned multiple decorative boards (the upper decorative board 422 and lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame unit 420, and the upper decorative board 432 and lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame unit 430).

Figure 270 is a schematic exploded perspective view from the front (the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the right game board 5AR fixed to the main frame 4), after disassembling the right game board 5AR into the right game panel 1100R and the right back box 3010R of the back unit 3000. As shown in Figure 270, in the configuration in which the decorative circuit board 4100 on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted is housed in the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is mounted to the rear of the right game panel 1100R, the decorative circuit board 4100 is mounted to the right back box 3010R such that the ID output circuit IDC, which includes a parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID) and various LEDs 4120 mounted on its surface (front, front mounting surface), faces the front of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative circuit board 4100 may be attached, for example, to the rear of the right-side game panel 1100R within the right-side back box 3010R via fixing members such as screws or pins, or it may be attached to the rear of the right-side game panel 1100R within the right-side back box 3010R via engaging portions formed on both the decorative circuit board 4100 and the right-side back box 3010R.

Furthermore, as described above, the right game panel 1100R and the right front component 1000R of the right game board 5AR are made transparent, so that the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the right game board 5AR is fixed to the main frame. Alternatively, a cover (which may be made opaque or translucent by attaching a sticker, by using resin materials such as opaque or translucent resin, or by coloring, painting, printing, etc.) may be provided between the right game panel 1100R and the decorative circuit board 4100, in which at least a portion is made opaque or translucent. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from seeing the ID output circuit IDC, LEDs, and other electronic components mounted on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when mounting the ID output circuit IDC on the decorative substrate of the door frame unit, a cover may be provided on the front of the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, at least partially opaque or translucent. This cover may be formed by applying a sticker, using opaque or translucent resin materials, or by coloring, painting, printing, etc. In this case as well, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the ID output circuit IDC, LEDs, and other electronic components mounted on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 to the player, thereby preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing the enjoyment of the game.

On at least the surface (front, front mounting surface) (or both the front (front, front mounting surface) and back (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100), a light-colored resist is formed by a light-colored coating over the entire area, excluding pads, through-holes, lands, etc., to which electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC, each LED 4120, and connectors are soldered. In this embodiment, the light-colored resist is a white resist, and the white resist is formed by a white coating (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solidly coated white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid. The light-colored resist may also be a yellow or pink resist. Furthermore, a light-colored resist may be formed on at least a portion of the exposed copper foil, such as lands, on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100. In this case, the copper foil, such as lands, becomes less noticeable, preventing the visual impact of the copper foil from disrupting the world view of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the enjoyment of the game. It also allows for uniformity of reflectivity on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100, suppressing uneven illumination and improving the visual effect. Additionally, a light-colored resist may be formed on a portion of the exposed copper foil, such as lands, on the back (rear) side of the decorative substrate 4100. In this case, uniformity of reflectivity on the back (rear) side of the decorative substrate 4100 can be achieved, enabling uniform reflection when the decorative substrate 4100 functions as a reflector for other decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other surface-side electronic components, a surface-side marking area indicating the part number of the surface-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component should be placed (and possibly including the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the surface-side electronic component) is printed by silk screen printing on a solid white resist using a light-colored yellow paint that is less conspicuous against white. Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the surface-side marking area may be printed by silk screen printing using a different color of paint—white, yellow, or pink—from the resist.

Here, we will explain the reason for using white as the resist liquid color and yellow as the silk screen printing ink. First, the reflectivity of a color increases as it approaches white, while decreasing as it approaches black. For example, the reflectivity of yellow is very close to that of white compared to red, and the reflectivity of red is very far from that of white compared to that of yellow. While yellow's reflectivity is lower than that of white, it still has a high reflectivity. Therefore, in a combination of white and red, if the background is white, the red will stand out, and if the surface-side markings (backside markings) are red, the red surface-side markings (red backside markings relative to the white resist) will stand out. Conversely, in a combination of white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), if the background is white, the yellow will not stand out, and if the surface-side markings (backside markings) are yellow, the yellow surface-side markings (yellow backside markings relative to the white resist) will be less noticeable.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 1 is illuminated brilliantly by the lighting effects of multiple LEDs and other light-emitting parts mounted on each decorative circuit board, the multiple LEDs 4120 mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 are, for example, multi-color LEDs, and the lighting patterns change in various ways when they are lit (illuminated) and turned off. For this reason, as described above, a white resist is formed on the front (surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 by applying a white resist liquid to the entire area except for the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the multiple LEDs are soldered, forming a white resist (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). In addition, a surface-side marking area that makes it possible to identify the multi-color LEDs is printed on this solid white resist using yellow paint by silk printing. This makes the yellow surface-side marking area less noticeable against the white resist when the multi-color LEDs are turned off, and information unrelated to the game is not visible to the player. In addition to preventing the world view of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and the enjoyment of playing from decreasing due to visibility, the combination of a highly reflective solid white resist and a surface-side marking printed by silk-screen printing with yellow paint that has a reflectivity very close to that of white, when the multi-color emitting full-color LED is lit (illuminated), allows for the maintenance of high reflectivity on the surface (front, surface mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100. Furthermore, by using a combination of resist and surface-side marking with similar reflectivity, the reflectivity on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, suppressing the occurrence of uneven illumination and improving the visual effect.

On the back (rear) side of the decorative substrate 4100, although not shown in the illustration, a back-side marking area is printed by silkscreen printing on a solid white resist using a light yellow paint that is less conspicuous against white. This area indicates the part number of the back-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component should be placed, and other attributes of the back-side electronic component (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the back-side electronic component). Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the back-side marking area may be printed using a different color of paint—white, yellow, or pink—from the resist.

Furthermore, the surface markings formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 are not limited to those applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (for example, yellow). They may also be formed by creating foil-cut characters (that is, characters made from copper foil wiring patterns in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and then cutting out the surrounding copper foil to form the markings), and then coating the surface of these foil-cut characters with white solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the LED mounting surface to form the markings. Alternatively, they may be formed as white resist-cut characters using two coats of white resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components or other decorative substrates are masked, and the entire area excluding these is coated again with white solder resist (second layer), thereby forming the masked area, i.e., characters and symbols, as white resist-cut characters), and the markings may also be formed on the front of the decorative substrate 4100. On the back surface where LEDs and other electronic components are mounted, the part numbers of the electronic components mounted on the (front surface), the areas indicating the positions where these electronic components are placed, and other attributes of the electronic components (which may also include the shape of the electronic components, the size of the electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic components, and the model number of the electronic components) may be formed on the back surface where LEDs are not mounted by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (including not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation), foil stamping, white resist stamping using a two-coat white resist, etc. Furthermore, the surface-side markings become less conspicuous, and are not visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1. This prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, thus preventing the game's atmosphere from being disrupted and reducing the enjoyment of the game. It also suppresses the decrease in reflectivity on the front (surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, and ensures uniform reflectivity on the front (surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted. This suppresses uneven illumination and improves the visual effect.

A partition cover 4130 is attached to the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100. The partition cover 4130 divides the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100 into multiple areas, and as shown in Figure 270, multiple openings are formed to separate the ID output circuit IDC from various electronic components such as LEDs 4120. That is, only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in the specific area of the decorative substrate 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, and other electronic components are mounted in areas of the decorative substrate 4100 other than the specific area partitioned by the partition cover 4130. In the example shown in Figure 270, the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100 is divided into three regions by the partition cover 4130. The ID output circuit IDC is mounted in a specific region (the central region in Figure 270), and multiple LEDs 4120 are mounted in each of the other two regions. However, the number of regions to be partitioned is not limited to the above, as long as the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100 is divided by the partition cover 4130 into a region where only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and a region where other electronic components are mounted.

In this case, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 on which the ID output circuit IDC is implemented, there is a risk that the effects performed by the decorative board 4100 may not be executed properly, and this inability to perform the effects properly may reduce the enjoyment of the game. The partition cover 4130 of this embodiment covers the surface (front, surface mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which includes the parallel serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.). This makes it easier to find the electronic component to be checked (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) when the decorative substrate 4100 is accessed illegally while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is on and the decorative substrate 4100 cannot perform normal effects, or when investigating whether or not there has been any illegal activity while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is off. Therefore, it becomes possible to quickly identify the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the decorative substrate 4100, restore the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state so that the decorative substrate 4100 can perform normal effects, or determine whether or not there has been any illegal activity with the ID output circuit IDC, thereby contributing to improved security. In this way, it becomes easier to find the electronic component that needs to be checked when investigating whether or not fraud has occurred (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD). Therefore, it becomes possible to determine whether or not there is a risk that the decorative board 4100 has been accessed illegally before the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects normally, and to return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state. Alternatively, if the decorative board 4100 has been accessed illegally while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects normally, the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC can be immediately returned to a normal state. Furthermore, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to constantly determine whether the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC is normal or not (for example, by executing the ID determination process each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed), then when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 occurs, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing normal effects, the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC can be restored to a normal state, immediately restoring the decorative board 4100 to a state where it can perform effects normally. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the inability to perform effects normally on the decorative board 4100.

Furthermore, the partition cover 4130 in this example has an opening that exposes the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, when the mounting state of the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side front component 1000R and the right-side back box 3010R, which are provided in front of the decorative substrate 4100, is released, the ID output circuit IDC can be operated to set the self-identification code (ID) without removing the partition cover 4130 from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Also, because the ID output circuit IDC is positioned on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, separated from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified when the decorative substrate 4100 is viewed from the surface (front, front mounting surface) side. Furthermore, it is sufficient to form an opening in the partition cover 4130 that exposes at least a portion of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch for setting the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front, surface-mount side) of the decorative substrate 4100. Other electronic components (in this example, the LED 4120) may be covered by the partition cover 4130, or at least a portion of the other electronic components (in this example, the LED 4120) may be exposed by forming an opening in the partition cover 4130. Additionally, when the LED 4120 is used as another electronic component, forming an opening in the partition cover 4130 that exposes a portion of the LED 4120 (for example, the light-emitting element of the LED 4120) allows the light emitted from the LED 4120 to be projected forward onto the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced by the partition cover 4130, thus enabling the execution of effects with increased light intensity.

Furthermore, the partition cover 4130 in this example is formed from an opaque material (e.g., PP, opaque or semi-transparent), and although the surface (front, surface-mount side) of the decorative substrate 4100 cannot be seen through the partition cover 4130, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be visually inspected through the openings formed in the partition cover.

Furthermore, the partition cover 4130 may be formed from a transparent material (for example, a colorless or colored transparent material such as PS or PET) so that the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be seen through the partition cover 4130. In this case as well, an opening may be formed in the partition cover 4130 that exposes at least a part of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch for setting the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, while covering the rest. Other electronic components (LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the partition cover 4130, or an opening may be formed in the partition cover 4130 that exposes at least a part of the other electronic components (LED 4120 in this example) (for example, the light-emitting element of LED 4120). This allows the partition cover 4130 to protect electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, preventing unauthorized access and enhancing security. Furthermore, because the partition cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, the light emitted from the LEDs 4120 can be projected onto the front of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced as much as possible by the partition cover 4130, enabling the execution of effects with increased light intensity. In addition, when the partition cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, a partition wall extending from the back surface of the partition cover 4130 toward the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 may be formed around all or part of the ID output circuit IDC to separate the area on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted from other areas. Alternatively, printing, stickers, etc., may be applied to the surface of the partition cover 4130 to surround all or part of the area where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted. Furthermore, while the above effects can be achieved even when the partition cover 4130 is made of colored transparency, making it colorless and transparent improves the light transmittance of the various LEDs 4120 and the visibility of the ID output circuit IDC compared to when it is made of colored transparency. It also suppresses the emphasis of a specific color of light (the same color as the partition cover 4130) by the partition cover 4130, allowing all light-emitting colors to emit under the same conditions and achieving uniform illumination without unevenness.

Furthermore, the decorative circuit board 4100, on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that its surface (front, surface mounting side) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) when the right-side game board 5AR is fixed to the main frame 4 (so that its surface (front, surface mounting side) faces the player). The ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, surface mounting side) of the decorative circuit board 4100 are also positioned to face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player).

As described above, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative circuit board 4100 corresponding to the new right-side game board 5AR, there is a risk that the effects provided by the decorative circuit board 4100 may not be executed properly, and this inability to execute the effects properly may reduce the enjoyment of the game. In this embodiment, the decorative circuit board 4100 is arranged so that its surface (front, surface mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player), and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative circuit board 4100 are also arranged so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player). Therefore, anyone attempting to perform unauthorized access to the decorative circuit board 4100 (ID output circuit IDC, various LEDs, etc.) will access it from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to detect unauthorized access as it will be more visible to the island equipment and employees of the gaming hall during the unauthorized access. This prevents unauthorized external access to the ID output circuit (IDC), thereby preventing the decorative circuit board 4100 from failing to perform its effects correctly and thus mitigating the decline in gameplay enjoyment caused by the inability to perform the effects correctly.

In this example, the configuration makes it difficult to access the decorative circuit board 4100 from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, a plate-shaped member is positioned behind the decorative circuit board 4100 on the right-side game board 5AR where the decorative circuit board 4100 is installed. The plate-shaped member of the right-side game board 5AR is attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back surface member (rear member) of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 in which the decorative circuit board 4100 is housed. The plate-shaped member of the right-side game board 5AR increases the strength of the back box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the processability of the back box 3010, such as forming an opening in the back surface member (rear member) of the back box 3010. For example, it can prevent unauthorized access to the decorative circuit board 4100 housed inside the back box 3010 by forming an opening in the back surface member (rear member) of the back box 3010. This prevents unauthorized external access to the ID output circuit IDC from causing the decorative circuit board 4100 to malfunction, thereby suppressing the decline in gameplay enjoyment caused by the malfunction of the decorative circuit board 4100. Furthermore, the plate-shaped member of the right-side game board 5AR is preferably made of metal, for example, an alloy such as aluminum or iron, in order to increase the strength of the back box 3010 against external impacts and to avoid reducing the processability of the back box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back surface (rear surface) of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, the metal plate-shaped member of the right-side game board 5AR only needs to be positioned behind the decorative circuit board 4100 and overlapping it in at least a portion. It may be attached along part or all of the inner surface of the back panel (rear panel) of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 that houses the decorative circuit board 4100. Alternatively, part or all of the back panel (rear panel) of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 may be made of metal. Similar to the case where it is attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back panel (rear panel) of the back unit 3010, this increases the strength of the back box 3010 against external impacts, while reducing the processability of the back box 3010, such as creating an opening in the back panel (rear panel). This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, which could prevent the decorative circuit board 4100 from performing its effects correctly, thus suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the inability to perform the decorative circuit board 4100's effects correctly.

Furthermore, as described above, a white resist is formed on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100. The LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100 have white packages (not limited to white, but including off-white, beige, and other colors similar to white). In addition, on the surface (front, front mounting side) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other surface-side electronic components, a surface-side marking area indicating the part number of the surface-side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component should be placed, and other attributes of the surface-side electronic component (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model number of the surface-side electronic component) is printed by silk-screen printing on a solid white resist using a light yellow paint that is less conspicuous against the white. In contrast, the ID output circuit IDC has a dark-colored exterior (in this embodiment, black; however, it is not limited to black; other colors with high contrast against white, such as navy blue or purple, may also be used) (it is sufficient for the majority of the exterior to be dark; however, it may also have a light-colored exterior in part, or light-colored lettering (such as a model number) on part of the exterior). Furthermore, among the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative substrate 4100, electronic components with dark-colored exteriors other than the ID output circuit IDC, such as resistors and capacitors, are mounted on the back side of the decorative substrate 4100.

Therefore, on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 on which the white resist is formed, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a dark exterior with high contrast (brightness/darkness), can be easily identified, for example, by visual inspection. In other words, the decorative circuit board 4100 is configured to employ a low-contrast combination excluding the ID output circuit IDC on its surface (front, front-mount surface). Therefore, when the surface of the decorative circuit board 4100 is visually inspected, the ID output circuit IDC becomes more prominent. This directs attention to the ID output circuit IDC, making it easier to identify. Consequently, if there is unauthorized external access to the ID output circuit IDC, preventing the decorative circuit board 4100 from performing its effects correctly, employees of the gaming hall can easily identify the dark-colored ID output circuit IDC from its surface (front, front-mount surface) and immediately determine whether unauthorized access occurred. This allows for correction of the ID output circuit IDC in the event of unauthorized access, thereby mitigating the decline in gaming enjoyment caused by the inability of the decorative circuit board 4100 to perform its effects correctly.

Furthermore, while the electronic components with dark-colored casings (such as resistors and capacitors) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative substrate 4100, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, are configured to be mounted on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, it is sufficient to configure the system so that, at least among the areas of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, electronic components with dark-colored casings different from the ID output circuit IDC are not placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is located. In fact, electronic components with dark-colored casings separate from the ID output circuit IDC may be placed in areas where the ID output circuit IDC is not located. Furthermore, while the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130 is shown as being divided into areas where only the ID output circuit IDC is placed and areas where the ID output circuit IDC is not placed, it is also possible to place an electronic component with an exterior color that has low contrast with the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, separate from the ID output circuit IDC, in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted. In this case as well, the ID output circuit IDC can still be made conspicuous. Alternatively, the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130 may be divided into areas where only the ID output circuit IDC is placed and areas where multiple types of electronic components other than the ID output circuit IDC are placed. In this case as well, the placement of only the ID output circuit IDC differentiates it from other areas, making it easy to identify the area where the ID output circuit IDC is placed and the ID output circuit IDC itself.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the partition cover 4130 is formed in the same white color as the resist formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, in addition to the resist formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface-side markings, and the LED 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the partition cover 4130 also has a low contrast with the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. As a result, only the ID output circuit IDC has a high contrast with the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is visually inspected, the ID output circuit IDC stands out, making it easy to identify the ID output circuit IDC. Furthermore, the entire compartment cover 4130 is not limited to being a color with low contrast (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) with the surface (front, front-mount surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. It is sufficient if the surface of the decorative substrate 4100 (the side facing forward of the pachinko machine 1) is a color with low contrast to the surface of the decorative substrate 4100 (front, front-mount surface). The compartment cover 4130 may be colored, painted, or printed with a color with low contrast (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) to white, or a sticker with a color with low contrast (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) may be attached. Also, even if the compartment cover 4130 is made colorless and transparent, the color of the surface (front, front-mount surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 remains visible. Therefore, the area of the surface (front, front-mount surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, including the compartment cover 4130, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, can be made with a low-contrast combination.

Here, on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, where the area excluding the ID output circuit IDC is a combination of light colors with low contrast, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a black exterior and high contrast on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, may be visible to the player, potentially disrupting the world view of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the enjoyment of the game. In this embodiment, by mounting the ID output circuit IDC on the same surface as the various LEDs 4120 on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120 makes it difficult to directly view the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, the ID output circuit IDC can be made less conspicuous, and the disruption of the world view of the pachinko machine 1 and the reduction in enjoyment of the game, caused by the player seeing information unrelated to the game, can be suppressed.

[25-11. Other embodiments of the parallel-to-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID)]
In the above embodiment, a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa was exemplified as an eigenvalue generation unit that generates an eigenvalue that can identify the right-side game board 5AR, and it was explained that a self-identification code (ID) pre-set in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is transmitted as a signal from the ID output circuit IDC to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the eigenvalue generation unit of the present invention is not limited to the form of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and may be configured as, for example, a switch mechanism using at least one DIP switch mounted on a decorative board 4100 attached to the right-side game board 5AR, or as a photosensor mechanism in which a self-identification code (ID) is mechanically set when the right-side game board 5AR is assembled.

Figure 271 is a schematic perspective view from the front of a portion of the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000 of the right-side game board 5AR. As shown in Figure 271, the switch mechanism has at least one DIP switch mounted on the decorative circuit board 4100 of the right-side game board 5AR. In this embodiment, the switch mechanism has two DIP switches 4110A and 4110B. DIP switch 4110A is a rotary switch that allows setting a binary value by rotating the operating part, and in this embodiment, DIP switch 4110A can be set to a value from 0 to 15. DIP switch 4110B is an on/off switch that can be switched on or off by operating the operating part. The switch mechanism of this embodiment includes a DIP switch 4110A that can be set to a value from 0 to 15, and a DIP switch 4110B that can be switched on or off. By operating the operating sections of each DIP switch 4110A and 4110B, 32 different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated. The self-identification codes (IDs) are preset by operating the operating sections of each DIP switch 4110A and 4110B.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the above-described switch mechanism is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the above-described switch mechanism, similar to the configuration in this embodiment where the self-identification code (ID) is pre-set to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, human errors such as the old left-side game board 5AL remaining in place instead of being replaced with the new right-side game board 5AR are suppressed. This prevents the loss of overall uniformity in the game machine in the event of human error, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the configuration using the above-described switch mechanism, the self-identification code (ID) can be easily set by operating the DIP switches 4110A and 4110B.

Figure 272 is a schematic exploded perspective view from the front, showing a portion of the right-side game board 5AR disassembled into the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side back box 3010R. As shown in Figure 272, the photosensor mechanism has at least one photosensor 4110C mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side game board 5AR, and a shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side game panel 1100R of the right-side game board 5AR that can block the light guide of the photosensor 4110C. The photosensor mechanism of this embodiment has three photosensors 4110C and two shielding portions 4110C4. The photosensor 4110C, for example, has a light-emitting unit 4110C2 that emits light and a light-receiving unit 4110C3 that receives the light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2. Its on/off state is switched depending on whether the light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives the light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2. In this embodiment of the photosensor mechanism, three photosensors 4110C are mounted side-by-side on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side game board 5AR. Each photosensor 4110C is turned on when the light-receiving unit 4110C3 is receiving light. In this embodiment of the photosensor mechanism, eight different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated by switching the on/off states of the three photosensors 4110C.

The shielding portion 4110C4 can be attached to the back surface of the right-side game panel 1100R at a position facing each photosensor 4110C. It extends from the back surface of the right-side game panel 1100R between the light-emitting portion 4110C2 and the light-receiving portion 4110C3 of the opposing photosensor 4110C, and has a shielding member that blocks the light emitted from the light-emitting portion 4110C2 from being received by the light-receiving portion 4110C3. In this embodiment, the shielding portion 4110C4 is attached at a position facing the two photosensors 4110C on both sides, excluding the center, of the three photosensors 4110C mounted side by side on the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side game board 5AR. Furthermore, if the shielding portion 4110C4 is not provided, a self-identification code (ID) will be generated in which all three photosensors 4110C are turned on. However, since all three photosensors 4110C will also be turned on if the right-side game panel 1100R is not attached to the right-side game board 5AR, it is preferable not to use a self-identification code (ID) that turns on all three photosensors 4110C.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the above-described photosensor mechanism is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the above-described photosensor mechanism, similar to the configuration in this embodiment where the self-identification code (ID) is pre-set to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, human errors such as the old left-side game board 5AL remaining in place instead of being replaced with the new right-side game board 5AR are suppressed. This prevents the loss of overall uniformity in the game machine in the event of human error, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in the configuration using the above-described photosensor mechanism, it is difficult to change the mounting position of the shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side game panel 1100R. Therefore, it is difficult to easily change the setting of the self-identification code (ID), thus preventing unauthorized alteration of the self-identification code (ID).

[25-12. Summary A]
[25-12-1. Summary A1]
The game machine comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of performing an unconnected notification process that notifies that it is in an unconnected state when there is no input of an eigenvalue from the eigenvalue transmission unit. The second game board component has a partitioning section that divides the first substrate surface of a specific substrate into a specific region including the region where the eigenvalue generation means is provided, and a non-specific region not including the region where the eigenvalue generation means is provided.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A is composed of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which is a means for generating a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC, which is a signal transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various electronic components such as LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, which includes the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa and the IDC output circuit IDC.

The peripheral control board 1510 can perform disconnection notification processing (e.g., power-on error response 7 described above) to notify that the system is disconnected (e.g., power-on state 8 described above) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., in the case of disconnection error 1 described above during power-on). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130 which is a partition separating the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

Thus, when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) that notifies that the system is in an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are unconnected, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which generates a self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside and prevent the execution of unauthorized effects, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the compartment cover 4130 has an opening, when the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side back box 3010R, the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other electronic components are visible through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side game panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[25-12-2. Summary A2]
The game machine comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of performing an unconnected notification process that notifies that it is in an unconnected state when there is no input of an eigenvalue from the eigenvalue transmission unit. The specific circuit board is positioned so that its first surface faces forward towards the front of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL consists of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is an eigenvalue generation means for generating a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (Figure 251), which is an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, on which multiple electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 can perform disconnection notification processing (e.g., power-on error response 7 described above) to notify that the system is disconnected (e.g., power-on state 8 described above) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., in the case of disconnection error 1 described above during power-on). The decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces forward of the pachinko machine 1.

Thus, when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the power-on disconnection error 1 described above), a disconnection notification process (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) can be executed to notify that the system is in a disconnection state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above). This prevents the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are disconnected, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the decorative circuit board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first circuit board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, it facilitates the detection of unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside through the island equipment of the gaming hall and visual inspection by employees. This suppresses unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, prevents the execution of fraudulent effects due to unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, and prevents a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

[25-12-3. Summary A3]
The game machine comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of performing an unconnected notification process that notifies that it is in an unconnected state when there is no input of an eigenvalue from the eigenvalue transmission unit. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of a specific substrate, and the eigenvalue generating means provided on the side of the first substrate surface where the white resist is formed has a dark exterior.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL consists of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is an eigenvalue generation means for generating a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (Figure 251), which is an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, on which multiple electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 can perform disconnection notification processing (e.g., power-on error response 7 described above) to notify that the system is disconnected (e.g., power-on state 8 described above) when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., in the case of disconnection error 1 described above during power-on). The first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted has a white resist formed as a light color, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

Thus, when there is no input of a self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the power-on disconnection error 1 described above), a disconnection notification process (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) can be executed to notify that the system is in a disconnection state (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are disconnected, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since a white resist is formed on the first board surface of the decorative substrate 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside and unauthorized effects are executed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified, for example, by a game hall employee visually, relative to the white decorative substrate 4100. By correcting the ID output circuit IDC, the execution of unauthorized effects can be suppressed, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

[25-13. Summary B]
[25-13-1. Summary B1]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame; and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can be identified as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of performing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies the system of an abnormal connection state when the eigenvalue input from the eigenvalue transmission unit is not a preset value. The second game board side component has a partitioning section that divides the first board surface of the specific board into a specific region including the region where the eigenvalue generation means is provided, and a non-specific region not including the region where the eigenvalue generation means is provided.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL consists of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is an eigenvalue generation means for generating a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (Figure 251), which is an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, on which multiple electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (e.g., the power-on error response 1 described above) to notify that an abnormal connection state (e.g., the power-on state 2 described above) is occurring when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (e.g., the ID error 1 described above during power-on). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition separating the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

Thus, when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), an abnormal connection notification process (for example, state 2 at power-on described above) can be executed to notify that an abnormal connection state is in place (for example, state 2 at power-on described above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of incomplete effects when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which includes the parallel serial circuit IDCa that generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to suppress unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside and prevent the execution of unauthorized effects, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the compartment cover 4130 has an opening, when the right-side game panel 1100R and the right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side back box 3010R, the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 and other electronic components are visible through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side game panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[25-13-2. Summary B2]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame; and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can be identified as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of performing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies the system of an abnormal connection state if the eigenvalue input from the eigenvalue transmission unit is not a preset value. The specific board is positioned so that its first board surface faces forward towards the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL consists of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is an eigenvalue generation means for generating a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (Figure 251), which is an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, on which multiple electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (e.g., power-on state 2 described above) to notify that an abnormal connection state (e.g., power-on state 2 described above) is occurring when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (e.g., in the case of ID error 1 described above during power-on). The decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), an abnormal connection notification process (for example, state 2 at power-on described above) can be executed to notify that an abnormal connection state is in place (for example, state 2 at power-on described above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent incomplete performances from being executed when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are abnormally connected, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the decorative circuit board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first circuit board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1, it facilitates the detection of unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside through the island equipment of the gaming hall and visual inspection by employees. This suppresses unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, prevents the execution of fraudulent effects due to unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, and prevents a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

[25-13-3. Summary B3]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame; and a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The first game board side component includes a performance control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game performances. The second game board side component includes an eigenvalue generation means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can be identified as the second game board side component, an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generation means to the performance control board as a signal, and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are provided. The eigenvalue generation means is provided on the first substrate surface side of a specific substrate, and the performance control board is capable of performing abnormal connection notification processing to notify that an abnormal connection state is in effect if the eigenvalue input from the eigenvalue transmission unit is not a preset value. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the specific substrate, and the eigenvalue generation means provided on the first substrate surface side where the white resist is formed has a dark exterior.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the game frame side component, and a divided game board 5A fixed to the main frame 4 shown in Figure 248, which is the game board side component. The divided game board 5A consists of a left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and a right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component. The left game board 5AL consists of multiple boards (for example, a main control board 1310 housed in the main control unit 1300) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances by mounting a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor on which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side game board 5AR comprises a parallel serial circuit IDCa, which is an eigenvalue generation means for generating a self-identification code (ID), a unique value that identifies it as the right-side game board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (Figure 251), which is an eigenvalue transmission unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface, on which multiple electronic components (various LEDs 4120, etc.) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 can execute an abnormal connection notification process (e.g., power-on state 2 described above) to notify that an abnormal connection state (e.g., power-on state 2 described above) exists when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (e.g., in the case of ID error 1 described above during power-on). The first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted has a white resist formed as a light color, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), an abnormal connection notification process (for example, state 2 at power-on described above) can be executed to notify that an abnormal connection state is in place (for example, state 2 at power-on described above). Therefore, it is possible to prevent incomplete performances from being executed when the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are abnormally connected, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since a white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside and unauthorized effects are executed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified from the white decorative substrate 4100 by, for example, visual inspection by an employee of the gaming hall. By modifying the ID output circuit IDC, the execution of unauthorized effects can be deterred, and the decline in the player's enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

[25-14. Settings Change and ID Errors in Split Game Boards]
Next, the combination of the split game boards 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (which has only a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (which has a peripheral control board 1510 and a main control board 1310 with a microprocessor, and a board without a microprocessor)) is incompatible (incompatible or incompatible state. In this example, the right game board 5AR, which has an ID different from the regular ID, is connected to the left game board 5AL, which has the regular ID) or the right game board 5AR This section describes an example of behavior when changing setting values in an unconnected state (unconnected state. In this example, regardless of whether the right game board 5AR has a valid ID or not, the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL, which has a valid ID) when there is no input of an ID code signal from the left game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and malfunctions such as short circuits or open circuits occur in the transmission path that transmits various signals. For comparison, this section also describes an example of behavior when changing setting values in a matched state (matched state) when the combination of split game boards 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor)) is matched (aligned). Figure 273 shows an example of the behavior when changing the setting value when the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is compatible (aligned). Figure 274 shows an example of the behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). Figure 277 shows an example of the behavior when changing the setting value when the right game board 5AR is not connected.

[25-14a. Changing the setting value when compliance is achieved]
As shown in Figure 273, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays "power on" on the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time to notify that power has been supplied to the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, when the predetermined conditions for permission to change the setting value are met when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, when a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power supply board 630), a setting change process (step S37) is executed by the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, making it possible to select and determine the setting value. Furthermore, some or all of the LEDs on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as well as the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the LEDs on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may also be lit in a predetermined manner, which makes it easier to determine when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started.

Furthermore, when the setting change process begins, a setting change start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the setting value change is starting. Upon receiving the setting change start command, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 displays a setting change notification (in this example, "Setting Change in Progress") on the display device 1600 (this may be displayed until the setting change process is completed, or it may be displayed for a certain period before the display ends). It also repeatedly outputs a setting change notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting Change in Progress" and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum configurable volume, or the default volume adjusted by the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting change process is completed, or it may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) before the output stops).

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 illuminates various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR in a setting change notification illumination pattern corresponding to the setting change (in this example, the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are illuminated in the same color, and the illumination color is switched in a short period of time). (The illumination may be kept in the setting change notification illumination pattern until the setting change process is completed, or it may be kept in the setting change notification illumination pattern for a certain period of time, after which the setting change notification illumination pattern is terminated and the lights are turned off or illuminated in a different illumination pattern.) This notifies that a setting value change process is being executed, and allows for immediate detection if the setting value has been changed fraudulently.

Furthermore, the volume of the setting change notification sound output from the various speakers during the setting change process cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227. As mentioned above, players can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the setting change notification sound output during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, during the setting change process, the setting change notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, reliably informing players that a setting change is taking place through the audio output from the various speakers. This allows for immediate detection of fraudulent setting changes, thus deterring unauthorized changes to setting values.

Furthermore, the setting change notification illumination pattern, which occurs during the setting change process, cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As mentioned above, while players can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the setting change notification illumination pattern, which occurs during the setting change process, cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting change process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness) to perform the setting change notification illumination pattern. This reliably communicates that a setting change has been made, allowing for immediate detection of fraudulent setting changes and thus deterring unauthorized changes to setting values.

Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are divided into two types: LEDs that are subject to brightness adjustment when the brightness adjustment button 228 is operated during normal operation (game mode) (dimmable LEDs), and LEDs that are never subject to brightness adjustment even when the brightness adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether it is during normal operation (game mode) (non-dimmable LEDs). For example, the LEDs that display information related to wins and losses, such as the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL, are non-dimmable LEDs, while most of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 are dimmable LEDs, with the exception of the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250. Furthermore, some of the various LEDs provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be non-dimmable LEDs. In this case, brightness can be adjusted based on the non-dimmable LEDs, making it easier to adjust to the desired brightness.

Furthermore, in this example of pachinko machine 1, when the volume control button 227 is operated during normal operation (game mode), a scale corresponding to the current volume is displayed on the display device 1600, and a confirmation sound (e.g., "Volume changed.") corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 is output from various speakers at the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227. Similarly, when the light intensity control button 228 is operated during normal operation (game mode), a scale corresponding to the current light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the display device 1600, and a confirmation sound (e.g., "Brightness changed.") corresponding to the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is output from various speakers at the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227. The scales displayed on the display device 1600 are provided to correspond to the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228, respectively, and the scales are changed by operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 while the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is displayed.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is running, operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the display device 1600, nor will it output a confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. Furthermore, because the display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, the visibility of the setting change notification display on the display device 1600 is not obstructed by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), and the setting change notification sound is not made difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. This allows for immediate detection of any unauthorized setting changes.

Furthermore, while the example shows a display device 1600 that shows a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) adjusted based on the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, the method is not limited to the above example. For example, the degree of volume or light intensity adjustment based on the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 could be indicated by changes in color or character (such as equipment enhancement, height changes, or body shape changes).

Furthermore, during the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board located on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 located on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are all turned off. In other words, in this example of pachinko machine 1, although the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR constitute a split game board 5A, during the setting change, all the various LEDs located on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, while only the various LEDs located on the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are lit. In this way, while the setting change process is being executed, the various LEDs provided on the split game board 5A, specifically the LEDs on the left game board 5AL and the LEDs on the right game board 5AR, emit light in different patterns. This creates a sense of unease for anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1, allowing them to immediately realize that the setting change process is being performed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board, function display unit 1400, and sub-function display unit 2250 of the left-side game board 5AL may be illuminated with a different notification light pattern (e.g., flashing red light) when a setting change occurs, compared to the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, may be illuminated with a notification light pattern when a setting change occurs. In this case, the light patterns of the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR and the LEDs on the left-side game board 5AL can be made different, allowing the player to immediately notice that a setting change process is being performed.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the determined setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, based on the setting value determination operation (in this example, the OFF operation which returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)), and transmits a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it that the setting change process has ended.

Furthermore, once the setting value determination operation is performed, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls various LEDs, excluding the LEDs in the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (such as various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the right game board 5AR, and various LEDs in the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3)), and performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the LEDs can be lit normally and whether the movable parts can be operated normally by driving the drive motors and drive solenoids.

In this example, the movable parts that operate by driving drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 include, for example, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. In the above power-on operation check, the peripheral control IC 1510a drives the drive motor and drive solenoid, etc., to move the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 from the raised position to the lowered position while keeping the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward, and then rotate it around the axis in the left-right direction. After that, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position while keeping the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. The rear lower performance unit 3300 moves the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 from a retracted position that does not cover the front of the performance display device 1600. The system is configured to perform the following confirmation operations: move the unit 1600 to an appearance position that covers the front of the unit, then move it to a retracted position; move the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 from its normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then rotate it around its front-rear axis, and then move it back to the standby position; drive the vibration motor 356 to vibrate the performance operation unit 301 and then stop it; and drive the operation button lifting drive motor 367 to lift and lower the performance operation unit 301 relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310. Furthermore, at this time, the LEDs that illuminate the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the LEDs that illuminate the rear left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 (LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314), the LEDs that illuminate the rear right movable decorative body 3302 (LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear right movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324), the LEDs that illuminate the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, are each controlled in a predetermined illumination pattern.

Furthermore, in this example, during the power-on operation check, all LEDs except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, which displays information regarding success or failure among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are lit in a predetermined light emission pattern (light emission pattern during power-on operation check). Alternatively, during the power-on operation check, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be lit to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality. Similarly, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, are not all lit; some may be left unlit. The drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not all driven; some may be left undriven. Furthermore, when executing the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), some or all of the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be illuminated in a light emission mode that indicates that the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM has been cleared except for a specific area (for example, a RAM clear notification light emission mode), rather than being illuminated in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode when checking operation at power-on). Furthermore, in this example, during power-on operation verification, all drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are configured to be driven. However, some of the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be left undriven.

When the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a finishes the setting change process, it sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area. Furthermore, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 changes the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) to a predetermined light emission pattern (light emission pattern when power is turned on to check operation, in this example white-purple). The system lights up (indicated by a light), and simultaneously drives a drive motor, drive solenoid, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (the operating mode used for power-on operation confirmation), thereby performing a power-on operation confirmation. At the same time, a RAM clear notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Memory has been cleared." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). (This output may be repeated until the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation confirmation are completed, or it may be repeated a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) before stopping the output.) On the other hand, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the performance display device 1600 with the performance mode, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal operation (game mode), and does not notify the user that the main control's built-in RAM is being cleared except for a specific area. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the system may display "Door Open" as a door-open abnormality notification display mode until the main frame 4 is closed. The door-open abnormality notification display mode can be any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc., depending on the error content.

Furthermore, the performance display device 1600 may also be configured to notify that the entire area of the built-in RAM for the main control has been cleared except for a specific area. In this case, only the notification that the entire area of the built-in RAM for the main control has been cleared except for a specific area may be executed without displaying decorative symbols or background images during normal operation (when the game is ready to play). Alternatively, both the display of performance elements (decorative symbols, background images during normal operation (when the game is ready to play), etc.) and the notification that the entire area of the built-in RAM for the main control has been cleared except for a specific area may be executed. If both the display of performance elements (decorative symbols, background images during normal operation (when the game is ready to play), etc.) and the notification that the entire area of the built-in RAM for the main control has been cleared except for a specific area may be executed, the notification that the entire area of the built-in RAM for the main control has been cleared except for a specific area may be displayed on a higher layer that overlaps with the display of performance elements (decorative symbols, background images during normal operation (when the game is ready to play), etc.). Furthermore, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which displays information regarding the success or failure of various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, may be configured to emit light in a manner that indicates the clearing of all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, or in a manner that indicates operation confirmation upon power-on.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then until the power-on operation check is completed (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information related to wins and losses among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit (door frame 3) The various LEDs on the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., are lit in a predetermined light emission pattern (light emission pattern during power-on operation check, in this example they light up in white-purple), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating pattern (operating pattern during power-on operation check). The volume cannot be adjusted by the volume control button 227 until the lighting in the predetermined light emission pattern and operation in the predetermined pattern are completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume output from the various speakers can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the RAM clear notification sound output in the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, when the process of clearing the entire RAM area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area, is initiated, a RAM clear notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume. This ensures that the clearing of the main control's built-in RAM is reliably communicated through the audio output from various speakers, allowing for immediate detection of unauthorized clearing. Furthermore, even if the unauthorized change in settings goes unnoticed, the subsequent process of clearing the entire RAM area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area, will alert the system to the possibility of unauthorized clearing and subsequent setting changes, thus deterring unauthorized changes to settings.

Similarly, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then the power-on operation check will be performed from the end of the setting change process until the power-on operation check is completed (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information related to wins and losses among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit (provided on the door frame 3) The various LEDs on the left side unit 420 of the door frame, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the plate unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., are lit in a predetermined light emission pattern (light emission pattern during power-on operation check, in this example they light up in white-purple), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating pattern (operating pattern during power-on operation check). The light emission pattern cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the lighting in the predetermined light emission pattern and operation in the predetermined pattern are completed. Therefore, when the power-on operation check is initiated, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards installed on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined brightness level. This reliably signals that power has been supplied to the pachinko machine 1, allowing for immediate detection of any fraudulent activity, such as the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 being cut off and then restored to change a setting value. Furthermore, even if the fraudulent change in the setting value goes unnoticed, the subsequent power-on operation can recognize that power to the pachinko machine 1 was fraudulently started, and consequently, that a biased setting change may have occurred. This helps to deter fraudulent changes to the setting value.

Furthermore, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 will not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the display device 1600 until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is finished. Also, since the display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scales will not change even if the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are operated multiple times. Furthermore, even if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, once the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is completed and the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, the ball launcher 540 is enabled to launch game balls, and the detection of game balls at the various receiving ports (first start port 2002, first start port 2002, big prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, gate 2003) is enabled, making it possible to play the game. In this example, the display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) until the power-on operation check is complete, and the scales do not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the visibility of part or all of the display of the performance on the display device 1600 (decorative patterns, background images during normal operation (when playable), etc.) from being obstructed by scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), making it easier to determine whether the display device 1600 is functioning correctly as part of the power-on operation check. In other words, during normal operation (when playable), operating the volume control button 227 or the brightness control button 228 causes the display device 1600 to display a scale corresponding to the current volume or brightness, superimposed on the display of the performance elements (decorative symbols, background image during normal operation, etc.). While the scale can be changed by operating the volume control button 227 or brightness control button 228 multiple times, during the power-on operation check to verify whether the display of the display device 1600 is functioning correctly, the display device 1600 does not display the scale corresponding to the current volume or brightness. This is to avoid interfering with the verification of whether the performance elements (decorative symbols, background image during normal operation, etc.) are being displayed correctly.

On the other hand, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then a special confirmation sound (e.g., "beep") different from the normal sound (e.g., "beep") is output at a predetermined volume (a different volume from the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227) in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, until the power-on operation check is completed. However, while the normal confirmation sound is output at a volume changed by the volume control button 227 (the volume of the confirmation sound changes when the volume control button 227 is operated), the special confirmation sound output during the power-on operation check is output at a predetermined volume (the volume does not change even when the volume control button 227 is operated). This makes it easy to determine whether the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are functioning correctly as part of the power-on operation check, and the output of a dedicated confirmation sound makes it easy to understand that a process (step S38) is being executed to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area.

After the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a completes the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the interrupt enable setting (step S52) is performed, the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching game balls, and the LED illumination control of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, is started. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball launcher 540 does not launch game balls while the setting value change process (step S37) is being executed. Furthermore, it is sufficient to have the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in a state where their illumination can be controlled. This is not limited to immediately illuminating one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 or the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner based on the ball launching device 540 enabling the launch of game balls. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 or the sub-function display unit 2250 may be illuminated in the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or variation performance based on the fulfillment of the start condition for variation display (i.e., a game ball entering the start gate (first start gate 2002 or one of the first start gate 2002 and the second start gate 2004)). Alternatively, after the termination of an illumination pattern indicating an abnormal state, the LEDs may be illuminated in the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or variation performance, or they may be set to a state where their illumination can be controlled to the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or performance.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control board 1310a performs a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, and the power-on operation check is completed and the illumination pattern at the time of the power-on operation check and the operation pattern at the time of the power-on operation check are changed. Based on the completion of the operation (if the operation mode for power-on operation check is configured to end earlier than the operation mode for power-on operation check, this may be based on the completion of the operation mode for power-on operation check; or if the operation mode for power-on operation check is configured to end later than the operation mode for power-on operation check, this may be based on the completion of the operation mode for power-on operation check), the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification mode, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be turned off. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since closing the main frame 4 (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from when the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts until the power-on operation check ends), the control of the illumination of the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR for the critical abnormality notification, and the control of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL for turning off, are terminated, and illumination control becomes possible in the same way as during game mode, with illumination modes corresponding to the game state (illumination modes during performances). Furthermore, it is sufficient that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since closing the main frame 4, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL are made capable of controlling the illumination of the LEDs of the door frame unit (the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL are made capable of controlling the illumination of the LEDs immediately after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since closing the main frame 4. This is not limited to illuminating some or all of the various LEDs installed. It may also involve illuminating some or all of the various LEDs in the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the left-side game board 5AL, in the illumination pattern used during the variation display based on the fulfillment of the start condition (when a game ball enters the start opening (either the first start opening 2002 or one of the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004)). Alternatively, it may involve illuminating in the illumination pattern used during the variation display after the end of an illumination pattern indicating an abnormal state, or setting the illumination to a state where it can be controlled to the illumination pattern used during the performance.

As described above, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a to perform the first ON operation, and the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met when the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. In other words, the setting change process is performed with the main body frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed when the setting change process is completed.

Furthermore, in this example, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 during normal operation (game mode), a door open notification sound (an announcement saying "The door is open." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum configurable volume or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this period is shorter than the time required for power-on operation check), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed (however, if the main frame 4 is continuously open relative to the outer frame 2, the output may be stopped after a certain number of repeated outputs (for example, 5 times), or the output may be stopped when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed). The output may be stopped after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; however, this period may be shorter than the period from the start of the process of clearing the entire area of the built-in RAM of the main control except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing the entire area of the built-in RAM of the main control except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed) has elapsed since closing the main frame 4 which was open to frame 2. In addition, the output may be stopped when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds. However, this period may be shorter than the period from the start of the process of clearing the entire area of the built-in RAM of the main control except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510) until both the process of clearing the entire area of the built-in RAM of the main control except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed) has elapsed since closing the main frame 4 which was open to frame 2. The critical malfunction notification light emission mode is terminated when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed by repeatedly controlling the light emission mode in a changing mode (high-speed flashing mode), and a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, longer than the period from the start of the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed) has elapsed (the critical malfunction notification light emission mode may be terminated when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or the critical malfunction notification light emission mode may be terminated when it is repeatedly executed a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or the outer frame When the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, the critical abnormality notification illumination mode ends and the system repeatedly switches to a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination mode (a mode in which the lights switch between maximum brightness red and off for a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (a slow flashing mode)). The semi-critical abnormality notification illumination mode may also end after a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination mode, or after a predetermined number of repetitions (e.g., 10 times). Furthermore, when the critical abnormality notification illumination mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination mode if the illumination control switches from the critical abnormality notification mode to the semi-critical abnormality notification mode) ends (when the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed), the system controls the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left-side game board 5AL in an illumination mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is being executed, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, but the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious abnormality notification, which would occur due to the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, are not performed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious abnormality notification, which would occur due to the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, are not performed, and the output of setting change notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for setting change notification are performed. Furthermore, in this example, even while the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a is performing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, and while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing a power-on operation check, the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the light emission control of the critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is performed to switch to the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode) are not performed. Therefore, when a setting change process is executed, after the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a completes the power-on operation check, the system can output door-opening notification sounds from various speakers and control the illumination of critical abnormality notification patterns (including the semi-critical abnormality notification pattern if illumination control is performed after the critical abnormality notification pattern).

Furthermore, if the setting change process is completed after closing the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, that is, if the main frame 4 is closed during the execution of the setting change process and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a will not perform the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a will not perform the output of door-open notification sounds from various speakers and the critical abnormality notification flashing patterns (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern if the flashing control is performed to switch to a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern after the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern) after the completion of the power-on operation check. However, normally, when deciding to change the setting value, the manager of the amusement hall or similar establishment performs the operation to change the setting value while the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, after the setting change process is complete, the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed.

Furthermore, when the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation), or when the main frame 4, which is open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, the output of the door opening notification sound from the various speakers stops, and the system becomes capable of outputting sound during performances (output of performance sounds based on the fulfillment of the start conditions for the variable display (when a game ball enters the start opening (first start opening 2002 or one of the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004)). Therefore, normally, when a setting change process is performed, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a performs a power-on operation. After the operational check is complete, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period, both the output of door-open notification sounds from various speakers due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and the illumination control of the critical malfunction notification mode (including the semi-critical malfunction notification mode if illumination control is performed after the critical malfunction notification mode) are executed. If the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, or if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period, only the illumination control of the critical malfunction notification mode due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

Furthermore, in this example, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the right-hand game board 5AR of the divided game board 5A are illuminated in a critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the illumination control is performed to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the left-hand game board 5AL are kept off. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a viewer aware that an abnormality has occurred (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2). Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR may have a critical abnormality notification emission pattern (if the emission control is performed after the critical abnormality notification emission pattern, it may include a semi-critical abnormality notification emission pattern, or it may not include a semi-critical abnormality notification emission pattern. In other words, when the emission control is performed in the critical abnormality notification emission pattern, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also emit light in a predetermined emission pattern, and when the emission control is performed in the semi-critical abnormality notification emission pattern, the LEDs may continue to emit light in the predetermined emission pattern, or when the emission control is performed in the semi-critical abnormality notification emission pattern, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also emit light in a predetermined emission pattern, and when the emission control is performed in the semi-critical abnormality notification emission pattern, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also emit light in a predetermined emission pattern. Regarding the LEDs, they may be configured to terminate their predetermined emission mode and then be controlled to emit light in a manner appropriate to the game situation (e.g., the emission mode during special effects) in the same manner as during normal operation (when the game is ready to play). In synchronization with the emission in this manner, the LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the left-hand game board 5AL, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may also be configured to emit light in a predetermined emission mode. In this case, they may emit light in a different emission mode than the critical abnormality notification emission mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification emission mode if the emission control switches to a semi-critical abnormality notification emission mode after the critical abnormality notification emission mode). For example, they may emit light in red at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, or a brightness lower than the maximum brightness, and may be such that the brightness cannot be adjusted by the brightness adjustment button 228) (for example, by lighting up (not flashing) red). Even in this case, it is easy for anyone who sees it to notice that an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, the volume of the door opening notification sound output from the various speakers due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227. As described above, players can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the door opening notification sound output from the various speakers due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player even if they operate the volume control button 227. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a door opening notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume. Even without visually inspecting the pachinko machine 1, the sound output from various speakers will alert the user that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. This allows for immediate detection of the open main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, thus preventing fraudulent activities such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry points (starting points (first starting point 2002, second starting point 2004), large prize entry point 2005, general prize entry point 2001, etc.) or replacing the circuit board with a fraudulent one.

Furthermore, the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern (including the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination is controlled to a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern after the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern) which is controlled due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, players can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the volume adjustment button, but the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern (including the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination is controlled to a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination is controlled to a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern after the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern) which is controlled due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player even if they operate the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined amount (luminance) to enable the serious malfunction notification illumination mode. Even when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined amount (luminance) until a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, enabling the serious malfunction notification illumination mode (or the semi-serious malfunction notification illumination mode if the illumination control is performed after the serious malfunction notification illumination mode). In some cases, the system can reliably communicate that an abnormality has occurred with respect to the outer frame 2 (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open, or that the main frame 4 was open), by using a quasi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, it can immediately alert the user, thus preventing fraudulent activities such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry points (starting points (first starting point 2002, second starting point 2004), large prize entry point 2005, general prize entry point 2001, etc.) or replacing the circuit board with a fraudulent one. Even if the user does not notice that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the system can alert them to the possibility that fraudulent activity may have occurred.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the display device 1600 displays scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, but no confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated, after the severe abnormality notification flashing pattern (or the semi-severe abnormality notification flashing pattern if the flashing control is performed to a semi-severe abnormality notification flashing pattern after the severe abnormality notification flashing pattern) that is executed due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 has finished, the flashing control is performed to the light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the operation of the light intensity control button 228, and after the output of the door opening notification sound that is executed due to the opening of the main frame 4 has stopped, the output is performed to the volume corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227. This allows for pre-adjustment of volume and light intensity (brightness) during variable effects without depriving the user of the opportunity to adjust volume and light intensity (brightness) even when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. It also prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the door opening notification sound difficult to hear. Furthermore, it immediately alerts the user if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, preventing unauthorized entry into the ball entry slots (start slots (first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004), grand prize slot 2005, general prize slots). This can suppress the occurrence of fraudulent activities such as inserting game balls into the machine (e.g., 2001) or replacing the circuit board with an illegal one. Furthermore, when the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the display indicator 1600 may not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. In this case, it is possible to suppress the display of the display indicator 1600 being obscured by the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), thus preventing obstruction of visibility.

On the other hand, during the period when the setting change process is being executed, during the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and during the period when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing power-on operation checks, the output of the door open notification sound caused by the opening of the main frame 4 and the illumination control in the critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if illumination control is performed in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode) are not executed. This allows for immediate detection if the setting change process is being executed illegally or if the setting value is being changed illegally and the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area is executed, thereby improving security.

Furthermore, in this example, the light emission control for the critical abnormality notification mode is initiated based on the fact that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2. The period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed until the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is changed to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode) is terminated is longer than the period during which the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are performed. Therefore, after the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2 when the setting change process is completed, is closed, and after the period in which the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 etc. provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR are turned off. The ED switches from the RAM clear notification mode to the serious abnormality notification illumination mode (or the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode if illumination control is performed after the serious abnormality notification illumination mode), and then, after the period since the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed reaches a predetermined period, the serious abnormality notification illumination mode (or the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode if illumination control is performed after the serious abnormality notification illumination mode) ends and illumination control in the game mode (illumination mode during performance) begins. In this way, by continuing to use the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern (or the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern if the flashing control switches from the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern) even after the game mode has been entered after the setting change process has been executed, it becomes possible to ensure that the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern (or the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern if the flashing control switches from the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing pattern) is not overlooked when the main frame 4 is illegally opened relative to the outer frame 2, thereby improving security. In this case, even when in game mode, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 that do not perform light control in the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light control is performed after the critical abnormality notification mode) are kept in a state where light control is possible. However, it is not limited to lighting one or both, or some or all, of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 when in game mode. It is also possible to maintain an off state or a predetermined lighting mode until the start condition for the variable display is met (when a game ball enters the starting port (either the first starting port 2002 or one of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004) is met, and then control the light of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined light-emitting mode based on the meeting of the variable display start condition.

[25-14b. Changing setting values in case of non-conformity]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when changing the setting values while the combination of the split game board 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is incompatible (incompatible) state (incompatible state), referring to Figure 274. Note that below, we will only explain the parts that differ from the compatible state, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in Figure 274, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR. The electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off) regardless of whether or not a setting change is being performed.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), it does not notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible until the setting change process is completed (until a setting change command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). That is, during the execution of the setting change process, the various LEDs (some or all) of the display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process is performed when the combination is compatible (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be identical with only some differences).

Then, once the setting change process is complete, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts a process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area, it controls various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to the main control when appropriate. The control is performed in the same manner as when the built-in RAM is cleared (step S38) (it may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only a few differences). Meanwhile, the display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or the background image used during normal operation (when playable). Instead, it displays an abnormal background image (e.g., black) across the entire screen, along with the message "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as a non-conforming error notification, to indicate that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, the non-conformity error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a static image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the conditions for starting a variable display are met (a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400 or the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the performance display device 1600 continues to display the non-conformity error notification display mode and does not perform variable displays such as the variable display of decorative symbols. The non-conformity error notification display method can be any method appropriate to the error content, and may be one or any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc. During the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the display device 1600 is configured to notify that the combination of the split game boards 5A is non-conformity in a static manner, regardless of the passage of time. This allows notification of the non-conformity of the split game boards 5A combination without interfering with the verification process during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, in the power-on operation check performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which have been determined to be unsuitable, but the power-on operation check is also not performed for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper display unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). The operation check at power-on is also not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301, which is located on the door frame unit and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), among other movable decorative elements (such as the movable decorative element 3210, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 located on the door frame 3, etc.

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if the power-on operation check is started, the control to illuminate the LEDs on the right-hand game board 5AR, which was determined to be incompatible, in the same illumination pattern as during the power-on operation check, and the control to operate the movable parts in the same operation pattern as during the power-on operation check, will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right-hand game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right-hand game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation section 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit, which are not subject to ID judgment, may also be deemed non-conforming. Therefore, when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation. To this end, some or all of the movable parts provided on the right-side game board 5AR, which has been determined to be non-conforming, and on the door frame unit, which is not subject to ID judgment in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and which are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are not driven. This prevents damage to the movable parts or door frame unit, as well as failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts, due to the movable parts operating in a manner different from their intended operation. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same predetermined illumination pattern as in the case of compliance. This makes it possible to determine that the power-on operation check has been performed correctly.

Furthermore, as described above, the game board side component may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be non-compliant in the ID determination process (step S1003), then some or all of the movable parts that are provided on the door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be deactivated. In addition to this, or separately, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame) If a side unit 430 and a door frame top unit 450 are present, and a part of them (for example, one of the right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be non-compliant, then all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be deactivated. Alternatively, all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be deactivated.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that performs ID determination processing (step S1003) is mounted (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation check at power-on starts. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided in the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, which are located on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) are controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the power is turned on and operation is confirmed. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the same manner as when the operation is confirmed at power-on, and the LEDs provided on the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the operation is confirmed at power-on. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided on the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) will not be controlled to emit light in the same way as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed, and the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AL is in a non-conforming state. If it is determined that the game board 5AR is not connected, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable parts provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc., provided on the left game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) may be controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed, thereby making it possible to determine whether the right game board 5AR is in an incompatible state or whether the right game board 5AR is not connected.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the control process (step S1003) does not drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (the plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination, to operate the performance operation unit 301. However, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same way as usual (when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. In other words, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the same way as when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, as they would be during the power-on operation check. Note that the performance operation unit 300 may also be a specific door frame unit subject to ID determination. In this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the performance operation unit 300 or a combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the control to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed, while the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the same way as during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the ID determination process (step S1003) may choose not to control the illumination of some of the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination, or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, to the illumination pattern used during power-up operation confirmation. Similarly, some movable parts may not be operated in the same manner as during power-up operation confirmation (for example, power-up operation confirmation may be omitted for some or all of the LEDs provided on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc., provided on the movable parts provided on the door frame unit).

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the right-side game board 5AR, which was determined to be incompatible, and some or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be prevented from being driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation, preventing damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding a specific area, by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (step S38), and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are completed (the LED illumination pattern for the power-on operation check ends and is turned off or illuminated in a predetermined illumination pattern, and the operation pattern for the power-on operation check of the movable body ends and is in a standby state (stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position), thus completing the power-on operation check). Furthermore, if the system is configured so that the operation pattern during power-on operation check ends earlier than the illumination pattern during power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the illumination pattern during power-on operation check ends. If the system is configured so that the operation pattern during power-on operation check ends later than the illumination pattern during power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the operation pattern during power-on operation check ends (the movable body stops (is housed) in the standby position after operating in the operation pattern during power-on operation check).

Then, after the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38), is completed and the machine enters game mode, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the non-conformity error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board non-conformity notification sound (an announcement voice saying "A right-side game board non-conformity error has occurred. Turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (it may also be set to repeatedly output for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) before stopping the output), and the door The various LEDs (some or all) of the frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern (in this example, a pattern where the LEDs switch between maximum brightness red illumination and extinguishing in a short time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing pattern)). At the same time, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to an extinguished state. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is located on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is located on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are kept in a state where they can be controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the system is functioning correctly (they may be illuminated in a predetermined pattern).

Furthermore, the game board mismatch notification sound is not a single, intermittent output of the same sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between a muted state and an output state. Also, the critical abnormality notification light pattern is not fixed in a lit state, but repeatedly controlled between a lit state and an off state, changing the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is mismatched in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice the mismatch in the combination of the divided game boards 5A once the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require further checks begins.

Thus, in this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, when changing the setting value, after the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM after the setting change process is completed (step S38), the system immediately notifies that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible without issuing an abnormal notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period, the system outputs a game board incompatible notification sound without outputting a door opening notification sound. Furthermore, when the settings change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the system controls the illumination to a critical malfunction notification pattern. However, this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but rather because the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible. Therefore, when the settings change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the system always controls the illumination to a critical malfunction notification pattern, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was closed.

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the conditions for starting the variable display are met (even if a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or one of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004)), the display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 etc. provided on door frame 3), and decorative boards provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be displayed. The system is designed to notify of an abnormality without executing the various LED fluctuation effects implemented in the system. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, once the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is enabled after the setting change process (step S37), are controlled to emit light in a predetermined pattern based on the fulfillment of the fluctuation display start condition (a game ball entering the starting gate (either the first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), enabling the display of information related to winning or losing.

Furthermore, the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output from the various speakers cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227. As mentioned above, players can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume. This ensures that the incompatibility of the combination of the divided game boards 5A is reliably communicated through the audio output from the various speakers, thus preventing disadvantages to the player and preventing the game from proceeding in a manner unintended by the designer.

Furthermore, when the game board mismatch notification sound is emitted, it is impossible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, while the player can adjust the light intensity of the LEDs on the door frame 3 and the various decorative circuit boards on the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern, which is controlled when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is mismatched, cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is mismatched, the system can control the flashing pattern to a predetermined light intensity (brightness) for the critical abnormality notification. This ensures that the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern reliably communicates the mismatch, preventing disadvantages to the player and preventing the game from proceeding in a way unintended by the designer.

Furthermore, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is output, the display device 1600 will not display scales corresponding to the current volume or brightness even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated. Also, because the display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or brightness, the scales will not change even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, the visibility of part or all of the incompatibility error notification display on the display device 1600 is prevented from being obstructed by scales corresponding to the current volume or brightness, and the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) can be reliably communicated.

Furthermore, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is output, the confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are also not output. Therefore, the confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 can prevent the game board incompatibility notification sound from becoming difficult to hear, and ensure that the combination of the split game boards 5A is reliably communicated as incompatible (mismatched).

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that display information regarding wins and losses, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as in normal times (when play is possible). In other words, by notifying the player that the game will not start if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the system prevents the game from being disadvantaged or proceeding in a way unintended by the designer. However, if the game does start with an incompatible (inconsistent) combination of the divided game boards 5A, the LEDs displaying information about wins and losses are controlled to allow the game to continue without disadvantageing the player.

Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, will be affected. It is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs displaying the information is controlled to emit light in the same way as during normal operation (when the game is ready to play). For example, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be kept off or illuminated in a manner unrelated to the fulfillment of the start condition, even when the start condition is met (when a game ball enters the start opening (either the first start opening 2002 or one of the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004)), without any light emission control.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the critical abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board incompatibility notification sound differ depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, and whether or not a specific area is cleared from the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area) according to the incompatible (mismatched) state of the divided game boards 5A.

Specifically, if neither the setting value change nor the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (excluding a specific area) is performed, and the combination of the divided game boards 5A is found to be incompatible (inconsistent), then, based on the commencement of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time. Then, when the power-on operation check begins, the following actions will be initiated: illumination control of various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in a critical abnormality notification pattern, and the output of a game board incompatible notification sound from various speakers.

On the other hand, when either a setting value change or a process to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area), if the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a will perform a process to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a will perform a power-on operation check. Without initiating the illumination control of various LEDs (some or all) of unit 450, etc., in a critical abnormality notification pattern, or the output of a game board incompatibility notification sound from various speakers, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a completes the power-on operation check, the door frame unit's various LEDs (some or all) illuminate in a critical abnormality notification pattern corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in a non-compliant state, and the output of a game board incompatibility notification sound from various speakers is initiated.

Thus, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, by changing the setting value or clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area)), the timing of the light emission control in the critical abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board incompatibility notification sound can be changed depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not a specific area is cleared from the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), thereby prioritizing the notification of highly important information and suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions and fraudulent activities. In other words, since unauthorized changes to setting values or the clearing of the main control's built-in RAM could cause damage to the amusement parlor, the system prioritizes notifying the unauthorized changes to setting values or the clearing of the main control's built-in RAM over notifying the system that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This helps prevent the escalation of damage.

Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the timing for displaying the abnormal background image (for example, black) and the incompatible error notification display on the performance display device 1600 is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed, and whether or not the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). Specifically, at the same time that the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a starts power-on operation verification, the display device 1600 displays an abnormal background image (e.g., black) and a non-conforming error notification display. This allows for prioritizing the execution of high-priority notifications while also enabling the display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the display of the abnormal background image (e.g., black) and the non-conforming error notification display on the display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not the main control's built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area). In this case, high-priority information can be notified in order, enabling sequential action, thus ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and addressed.

Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be in a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003). Therefore, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5AR becomes incompatible (unmatched) after the execution of the ID determination process (step S1003), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light mode, etc.) corresponding to the incompatible state of the right game board 5AR is executed. Therefore, LEDs (various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250), as well as drive motors and drive solenoids, performance display devices 1600, and various speakers, which are provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is installed. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a control signal assuming that the right game board 5AR with a valid ID is installed, and the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the divided game board 5AR are driven based on this control signal. However, if the arrangement configuration of the non-compliant split game board 5AR differs from that of the compliant right-side game board 5AR, the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., installed on the non-compliant split game board 5AR may operate in a manner different from the design (a manner different from the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., installed on the right-side game board 5AR, decorative circuit board, decorative body, etc., which have a valid ID, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510).

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched). If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which receive detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting change process, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 275, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the execution of the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is configured to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (either the input of the detection signal is not checked, or even if the input of the detection signal is checked, the processing based on that input is not executed), and after the completion of the setting change process, control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting change process, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, which involves a process to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not performed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is performed, but the processing based on the detection (notification, etc.) is not performed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 276, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the completion of the power-on operation check, the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (notification, etc.) is not executed).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (incompatible) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch), an abnormality notification will not be issued.

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be in a non-conforming state, the game may proceed in a manner unintended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the arcade and the players. Furthermore, since it deviates from the original specifications, it may lead to a loss of player trust. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that the game is stopped. For this reason, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be in a non-conforming state, notification is given with priority over notifications caused by abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch). This prevents the game from being stopped and minimizes harm to the arcade and the players.

Furthermore, some LEDs may be controlled to emit light in different patterns depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (making light emission control impossible).

Furthermore, the system is not limited to determining whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1. It may also be configured so that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 periodically (for example, constantly, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) determines whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible after power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1. In this case, since notification can be given if the combination of divided game boards 5A becomes incompatible after power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of disadvantages can be suppressed.

Furthermore, even if an ID determination process is performed periodically to determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compliant, the ID determination process may not be performed during the execution of the setting change process. Similarly, even if the ID determination process is performed during the execution of the setting change process and determines that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible, notification regarding the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR may not be provided during the execution of the setting change process.

Furthermore, if an ID determination process is performed periodically to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compliant, the system may initiate notification (game board compliant notification sound, compliant error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light mode, etc.) corresponding to the compliant state of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compliant, and then terminate the notification corresponding to the compliant state of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compliant. Alternatively, the system may initiate notification corresponding to the compliant state of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compliant after the ID determination process has determined that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compliant.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process starts, and it is determined that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then, similar to the case where the system determines whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, while various Regarding the speakers and the various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3), it is possible to configure the system so that, without outputting a game board incompatibility notification sound or illuminating a critical malfunction notification light pattern to indicate an incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A, the system outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound and illuminates a critical malfunction notification light pattern when the power-on operation check is completed and the system enters game mode.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting change process, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the process based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the setting change process, abnormality notifications based on detections during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and during the power-on operation check after the setting change process, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is found to be incompatible, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full-tank detection sensor 154, a ball-out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects this, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, prioritizing this notification over notification of detection by the abnormality detection means. Notification of detection by the abnormality detection means may then be given when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible.

[25-14c. Changing settings when disconnected]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when changing the setting value in an unconnected state (unconnected state) where the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL, due to the absence of an ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and malfunctions such as short circuits or open circuits occur in the transmission path that transmits various signals. Please refer to Figure 277. In the following, we will only explain the parts that differ from the conforming and non-conforming cases, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in Figure 277, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, that is, if the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR. Therefore, the electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off) regardless of whether or not a setting change is being made. Note that if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may choose not to output a control signal to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, it does not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting change process is completed. That is, during the execution of the setting change process, the various LEDs (some or all) of the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the left-side door frame unit 420, right-side door frame unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was performed upon successful completion (they may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences).

Then, once the setting change process is completed and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the dish unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the process of clearing the main control's built-in RAM (step S38) is executed (they may be completely identical, or almost all of them may be identical with only some differences). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the performance display device 1600 in the same manner as during normal operation (decorative patterns, background images during normal operation, etc.), and also displays "Right side game board disconnection error occurred" as a disconnection error notification on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

Thus, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, and the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the various LEDs such as the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3, the left side unit 420, the right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, and the main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4 are controlled in the same manner as when the process to clear the main control's built-in RAM (step S38) is performed when the above conditions are met (they may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences), so as notifying that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, then when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the display device 1600 provided on the left-side game board 5AL displays "Right-side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display, thereby notifying that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

In other words, during the power-on operation check, which involves the execution of a process (step S38) by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, the various speakers and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 as frame-side display means do not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, while the display device 1600 provided on the left-side game board 5AL as a game board-side display means does not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. At this time, the various speakers and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are notified that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area. Although only the display device 1600 is shown as a game board-side display means, the game board-side display means also include the various LEDs provided on the left-side game board 5AL. Furthermore, while the various LEDs on the left-side game board 5AL do not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (step S38), the display device 1600 does not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. Therefore, the entire left-side game board 5AL (game board-side display means), including the display device 1600, is configured to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. In other words, a portion of the game board-side display means is configured to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

Here, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, there is a risk that an unauthorized setting change process (step S37) may be executed, or the game state before power restoration may be unauthorizedly reset, causing disadvantage to the player or the amusement parlor. Also, since the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are arranged around the divided game board 5A, they can be easily seen even from a distance from the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, regardless of whether the setting change process (step S38) has been executed or not, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, various speakers and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 notify the staff that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has performed a process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, thereby notifying the staff that an unauthorized setting change process (step S37) has been performed or that the game state before power restoration has been reset, thereby suppressing the occurrence of fraudulent activity. Furthermore, the display means on the board side may include display means other than the various speakers and LEDs described above. For example, display devices may be provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. In this case, during the power-on operation check, which involves the execution of a process (step S38) by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, the display devices provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may also be configured to notify that the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a is executing the process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, without notifying that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. Alternatively, neither the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected nor the fact that the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a is executing the process (step S38) to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area may be notified.

On the other hand, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with game board-side display means such as a display device 1600 that attracts the player's attention during gameplay, various movable parts, and various LEDs. During the power-on operation check, it is confirmed whether the game board-side display means can be driven normally. In other words, if the operation of the game board-side display means is checked at a position close to the pachinko machine 1, even if only the display device 1600 indicates that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the operator can easily notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. Furthermore, regarding the game board-side display means other than the display device 1600, it is possible to confirm whether they can be driven normally by controlling them in the same manner as when the process of clearing the main control's built-in RAM (step S38) is executed (it may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences), without informing the operator that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. This ensures that the effects are executed without malfunction when the game is played.

Furthermore, the disconnection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a static image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the conditions for starting a variation display are met (a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), the variation display of the special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400 or the variation display of the fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the performance display device 1600 displays the disconnection error notification mode and performs variation effects such as the variation display of decorative symbols. The notification display method can be any method appropriate to the error content, and may include a combination of letters and numbers (e.g., an error code) or a mark. During the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the display device 1600 displays a static notification, regardless of the passage of time, indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. This allows the notification that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL to be displayed without interfering with the verification process during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, in the power-on operation check performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but the power-on operation check is not performed for the movable body (rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A) which performs the power-on operation check. The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301, which is located on the door frame unit and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), are also configured not to perform an operation check when the power is turned on. (Examples include the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 located on the door frame 3, etc.)

Furthermore, as described above, the game board side component may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), then some or all of the movable parts that are provided on the door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be deactivated. In addition to this, or separately, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame) If, in the case of a side unit 430 and a door frame top unit 450, it is determined that a part of it (for example, one of the right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is not connected, then all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on a specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be deactivated. Alternatively, all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on all door frame units, including a specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be deactivated.

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, then even if the power-on operation check is started, the control to illuminate the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR (which was determined to be not connected) in the same illumination pattern as during the power-on operation check, and the control to operate the movable parts in the same operation pattern as during the power-on operation check, will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation section 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, there is a risk that some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit, which are not subject to ID determination, may also be poorly connected. This could cause the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to change into a signal different from the intended one due to noise, etc., and the movable parts to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit and operated by the drive motor or drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), are not driven. This prevents damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit due to the movable parts operating in an unintended manner, and also prevents failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable parts. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same predetermined illumination pattern as in the case of compliance. This makes it possible to determine that the power-on operation check has been performed correctly.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that performs ID determination processing (step S1003) is mounted (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation check at power-on starts. Furthermore, LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided on the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all located on the left-side game board 5AL of the split game board 5A) are operated in the same manner as during the power-on operation check, and the LEDs provided on the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 is located.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the control process (step S1003) does not drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (the plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination, to operate the performance operation unit 301. However, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same way as usual (when the combination of split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. In other words, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided on the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, as in the case where the power-on operation check was performed.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the ID determination process (step S1003) may choose not to control the illumination of some of the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination, or some of the LEDs mounted on one board, to the illumination pattern used during power-on operation confirmation. Similarly, some movable parts may not be operated in the same manner as during power-on operation confirmation (for example, power-on operation confirmation may be omitted for some or all of the LEDs provided on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc., provided on the movable parts provided on the door frame unit).

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the split game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR, which was determined to be unconnected, and part or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be prevented from being driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation, preventing damage to the movable parts or door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's illumination pattern during the power-on operation check ends and turns off or illuminates in a predetermined illumination pattern, and the movable body's operation pattern during the power-on operation check ends and enters a standby state (stopped in a predetermined standby position) (housed) The power-on operation check is completed when the system is in the specified state. If the system is configured to terminate the operation mode during the power-on operation check earlier than the illumination mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check is completed when the illumination mode ends. If the system is configured to terminate the operation mode during the power-on operation check later than the illumination mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check is completed when the operation mode during the power-on operation check ends (the movable body stops (is housed) in the standby position after operating in the operation mode during the power-on operation check).

Then, after the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the machine enters game mode, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the disconnection error notification on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board disconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right game board is not connected." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds)), and the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit provided on the door frame 3) also outputs a sound at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The various LEDs (some or all) of the door unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a critical malfunction notification mode (or a semi-critical malfunction notification mode if the light emission control is performed after the critical malfunction notification mode). Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be off. At the same time, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is located on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is located on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are made capable of emission control in the same manner as when the system is functioning correctly (they may be illuminated in a predetermined manner).

Furthermore, the notification sound for unconnected game boards is not a single, intermittent sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between silent and on states. Also, the critical malfunction notification light pattern is not fixed in a lit state, but repeatedly controlled between lit and off states, changing the light intensity. In other words, various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify the right game board 5AR of the fact that it is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require further checks has started.

Furthermore, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) whose illumination is controlled due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, will continue to emit a critical abnormality warning light (or a semi-critical abnormality warning light if the illumination control is changed from a critical abnormality warning light to a semi-critical abnormality warning light) until a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed. Furthermore, in this example, the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, until the termination of the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification mode is set to be longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed, regardless of whether the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, once the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light emission control is performed to the serious abnormality notification mode caused by the main frame 4 being open to the outer frame 2, without being controlled to the minor abnormality notification mode (a mode that switches between turning on and off at maximum brightness in a short time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)) caused by the right game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Furthermore, after a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since closing the main frame 4, which was previously open to the outer frame 2, the light emission control changes to a minor abnormality notification mode due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected. This minor abnormality notification mode continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Furthermore, the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, until the termination of the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification mode may be shorter than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. In this case, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the light emission control may be changed to a minor abnormality notification mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, instead of a serious abnormality notification mode caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started. Even in this case, after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 is closed, if the time elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period, the illumination will not be controlled to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but rather to a major abnormality notification illumination mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. If a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was closed relative to the outer frame 2, the illumination will change to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode due to the right game board 5AR being not electrically connected.

Furthermore, in this example, even when the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, and the light emission control for minor malfunction notification and the output of a game board disconnection notification sound are being performed, if the main body frame 4, which was closed to the outer frame 2, is opened, the notification caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected (light emission control for minor malfunction notification and output of a game board disconnection notification sound) is terminated, and a notification caused by the main body frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2 (light emission control for serious malfunction notification and output of a door open notification sound) is performed. After a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main body frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2, the output of the door open notification sound is stopped and the output of the game board disconnection notification sound is started again. After a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control for serious malfunction notification is terminated and the light emission control for minor malfunction notification is started again. In this way, the notification that the main frame 4 has been opened takes precedence over the notification that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, thus deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, in this example, the output period for the door open notification sound is shorter than the period required for power-on operation confirmation. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is opened at the start of the setting change process and closed at the end of the setting change process, and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door open notification sound will not be output, and instead, the game board unconnected notification sound will be output. Note that the output period for the door open notification sound may be longer than the time required for power-on operation confirmation. If the main frame 4 is closed after the end of the setting change process and remains closed thereafter, or even if the output period for the door open notification sound is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation, if the main frame 4 is closed after the end of the setting change process and then opened again, the elapsed time from when the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation confirmation, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started is predetermined. If the period has not been reached, a door open notification sound may be output, and a game board unconnected notification sound may be output based on whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Alternatively, when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, a game board unconnected notification sound may be output without outputting a door open notification sound, regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, if the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, or if the elapsed time since the main body frame 4 was closed after being open relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), even if the elapsed time since the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), the game board disconnection notification sound may not be output until the main body frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the critical abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 is terminated.

In this example, if the setting value is changed while the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected and no ID code signal is input, and the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed, and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, various speakers will emit an abnormal notification corresponding to the disconnected state of the right-side game board 5AR. At the same time, various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will emit an abnormal notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2. In other words, while various speakers, LEDs on the door frame unit, and LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR each trigger abnormality notifications, the causes of these abnormalities differ (for the speakers, the abnormality notification is triggered by disconnection; for the LEDs on the door frame unit and the LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR, the abnormality notification is triggered by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

Furthermore, the notification sound emitted from various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, unlike the setting change notification sound, RAM clear notification sound, door open notification sound, and game board incompatibility notification sound, can be adjusted in volume using the volume control button 227. In other words, since the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR poses little risk of causing harm to players or arcades and is not an emergency, volume adjustment using the volume control button 227 is made possible. However, the volume control button 227 may also be disabled for the notification sound emitted from various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. In this case, the notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, reliably informing players that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, thus preventing any harm to players.

Furthermore, during the period when the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected and the system is controlled to emit a minor abnormality warning light, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, players can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the minor abnormality warning light emission mode, which is activated when the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, cannot be adjusted by the player even if they operate the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined brightness level, enabling a minor abnormality notification illumination pattern. This minor abnormality notification illumination pattern indicates that some kind of abnormality has occurred, allowing players to see the divided game board 5A and realize that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when the game board disconnection notification sound is output, the display device 1600 will display scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) levels in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is effective, and the displayed scales allow the user to understand the level of volume and light intensity (brightness). Also, as mentioned above, in the minor abnormality notification flashing mode, light intensity (brightness) adjustment using the light intensity control button 228 is impossible. However, even when the flashing mode is controlled for security purposes, the opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) is not taken away. It is also possible to choose not to display scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) levels on the display device 1600 when the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated while the game board disconnection notification sound is output.

Furthermore, if the game board disconnection notification sound is output, confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are also output. Therefore, the confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 allow the user to recognize that the operation of these buttons is effective, and the volume of the confirmation sound allows the user to determine the volume after operating the volume control button 227. Note that if the game board disconnection notification sound is output, the confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 may be disabled.

As described above, the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing mode is controlled to a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) which is controlled due to the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, cannot have its light intensity adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, the period from closing the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, until the end of the flashing control for the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing mode is controlled to a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) is performed, and the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performed, and the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are performed. Because the duration is longer than the time it takes for both processes to complete, when executing the setting change process, after the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a completes the power-on operation check, the light emission control for a critical abnormality notification (or a semi-critical abnormality notification if the light emission control switches to a semi-critical abnormality notification after the critical abnormality notification) is executed, due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and a setting change process is performed, after closing the main frame 4 which was open to the outer frame 2, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a checks the operation when power is turned on. At the same time, an alert sound indicating that the game board is not connected is output from various speakers, and a critical malfunction alert light pattern (critical malfunction alert) is emitted due to the main frame 4 being open to the outer frame 2. When the light emission control switches from the normal illumination mode to the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode, the illumination control for the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode is executed. While the volume of the game board disconnection notification sound output from various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity of the serious abnormality notification illumination mode (including the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode when the light emission control switches from the serious abnormality notification illumination mode to the semi-serious abnormality notification illumination mode) which is activated due to the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is executed, after closing the main frame 4 which was open relative to the outer frame 2, the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, excluding a specific area (step S38), and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are completed, the system can control the illumination to a predetermined brightness level for a critical abnormality notification illumination pattern (or a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination control is to switch from a critical abnormality notification illumination pattern to a semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern), preventing the setting change notification illumination pattern from being missed during the execution of the setting change process, or missing a specific area of the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM. Even if the RAM clear notification is missed during the execution of the clearing process (step S38) excluding a specific area and the power-on operation check, the subsequent visibility of the critical error notification light pattern (or the semi-critical error notification light pattern if the light emission control switches to a semi-critical error notification light pattern after the critical error notification light pattern) allows the user to realize that a setting change process or a process to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) may have been performed. Meanwhile, to avoid causing discomfort to the player, the volume can be adjusted using the volume control button 227 to indicate that the right-side game board 5AR, which poses a low risk of disadvantage to the player or the arcade, is not connected.

Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control is set to a critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is set to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), the display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume and light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, and the scale may be changed when the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated while the scale is displayed. Alternatively, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control is set to a critical abnormality notification mode, the volume control may be set to a critical abnormality notification mode. Even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the performance display device 1600 may not display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness). Instead, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 and the light is controlled in the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light control is switched to the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), the performance display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. The scale may then be changed when the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated while the scale is displayed. Alternatively, in this case, after the critical abnormality notification mode light control and door opening notification sound output are completed, the performance sound output and light effects may be executed at the volume and light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the scale changed based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Furthermore, when the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control is set to a critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is set to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), a confirmation sound may be output at a volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227 based on the operation of the volume control button 227. Alternatively, when the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control is set to a critical abnormality notification mode, a confirmation sound may not be output even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated. However, when the main body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control is set to a critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is set to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), a confirmation sound may be output based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, resulting in the light emission being controlled to a critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is performed to a semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), the device may, based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, perform both the display of a scale corresponding to the volume and light intensity (brightness) on the display device 1600 and the output of a confirmation sound, or perform only one of these actions.

In this case, based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the display device 1600. Furthermore, even if the scale is changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality flashing mode, which is executed after the flashing control of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) is completed, is flashed with the light intensity (brightness) changed according to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, if the setting change process is executed with the right-side game board 5AR disconnected, and the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, and the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, then the system is controlled to emit light in the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), during the emission control of the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), the amount of light (luminance) of the emission mode that will be controlled after the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode) is adjusted. This allows the system to prevent players from being deprived of the opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) even when the light emission is controlled to the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is switched from the critical abnormality notification mode to the semi-critical abnormality notification mode), thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the case of an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, even if the conditions for starting the variation display are met (a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or one of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004)), the variation display will not be executed by various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on door frame 3), or various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left-side game board 5AL, which is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Instead, the system will notify that an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, if the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, until the end of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) is shorter than the period from the start of the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed, then if the main frame 4 is closed after the completion of the setting change process and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, then the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit provided on door frame 3) The various LEDs (some or all) of unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., are not controlled to emit light in a manner indicating a serious malfunction caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. Instead, as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode starts, the LEDs are controlled to emit light in a manner indicating a minor malfunction corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected. This allows the system to immediately notify that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected by the LED emission pattern as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode starts.

Furthermore, even in the case of an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that display information regarding wins and losses, will not be turned off, but will continue to light up in the same way as during normal operation (when the game is ready to play). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the system notifies the player that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, thereby preventing the game from proceeding in a way unintended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in a disconnected state without an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the LED displaying information regarding wins and losses is controlled to allow the game to proceed as normal, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, in this example, the right-side game board 5AR is not equipped with ball entry points (starting points (first starting point 2002, second starting point 2004), big prize entry point 2005, general prize entry point 2001, etc.) or gates 2003, etc., and these are configured to be provided only on the left-side game board 5AL. Therefore, even if the game is played in an unconnected state without input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, there is little risk of causing disadvantage to the player. In other words, if the split game board 5A does not have a right-side game board 5AR and only has a left-side game board 5AL, nothing is provided in the part corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR, and although there is a risk of causing disadvantage to the player by playing the game, it is possible to easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred by sight. A player who detects an anomaly should avoid playing. On the other hand, if the split game board 5A has both a right-side game board 5AR and a left-side game board 5AL, but the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected due to a connection problem, it is difficult to visually recognize that an anomaly has occurred. Therefore, the player will continue playing, but since the right-side game board 5AR does not have ball entry points or gates that affect the player's interests, the risk of causing the player any disadvantage is low. Thus, the state in which the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected poses a lower risk of causing the player any disadvantage compared to the state in which it is deemed non-compliant. Therefore, although the disconnection is indicated, the game can proceed as if it were compliant.

Furthermore, the right-side game board 5AR is not equipped with any detection means, such as a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting fraudulent activity, in addition to the ball entry point and gate 2003; all of these are provided on the left-side game board 5AL. In other words, electronic components related to the profits of players and amusement parlors (general prize entry sensor 3001, first start entry sensor 3002, second start entry sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, big prize entry sensor 2402, special prize entry sensor 2601, V prize entry sensor 3003, losing entry sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, start entry solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, special prize entry solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, etc.) and ball entry points (general prize entry 2001, first start entry 2002, gate 2003, second start entry 2004, big prize entry 2005, etc.), gate 2003, etc. are all located on the left side of the game board 5AL. Therefore, even if fraudulent activity occurs while the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected and no ID code signal is input, the detection means provided on the left-side game board 5AL can detect the fraudulent activity, thus preventing any disadvantage to the gaming establishment.

Furthermore, in the unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, it is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs that display information regarding wins and losses—the LED of the function display unit 1400 on the left-side game board 5AL, controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 on the left-side game board 5AL, controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510—is controlled to emit light in the same way as in normal operation (when the game is ready to play). For example, even when the start condition is met (a game ball enters the start gate (first start gate 2002 or one of the first start gate 2002 and the second start gate 2004)), the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 on the left-side game board 5AL may be kept off or illuminated in a manner unrelated to the meeting of the start condition without any light emission control.

Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state during the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, and whether or not a specific area is cleared from the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) according to the unconnected state of the right-side game board 5AR.

Specifically, in the case of an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR, and neither the setting value change nor the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is performed, the display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the commencement of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then the power-on operation check will be initiated. During the execution of the power-on operation check, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will be controlled to emit a minor abnormality notification light, and the output of an unconnected game board notification sound will be initiated from various speakers. In other words, at the time of power-on and operation check, the system starts flashing a minor abnormality notification pattern due to the absence of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in the output of a game board disconnection notification sound from various speakers.

On the other hand, in the case of an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR, when either a setting value change or a process to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is performed, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a performs the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a performs the power-on operation check, during which the system is considered unconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in the emission control in a minor abnormality notification emission mode and the output of an unconnected game board notification sound from various speakers. Without initiating power-on, the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a performs a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area. At the timing after the peripheral control board 1510's peripheral control IC 1510a completes its power-on operation check (in this example, at the timing of starting the game mode, a game board disconnection notification sound is output due to the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in a disconnected state; after starting the game mode, the minor abnormality notification light control begins), the system starts light control in a minor abnormality notification light mode due to the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, and outputs a game board disconnection notification sound from various speakers.

In this way, even when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (in a disconnected state), the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification mode and the output timing of the game board disconnection notification sound can be differed depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared (excluding a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM). This allows for prioritizing the notification of highly important information and suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions and fraudulent activities. In other words, since fraudulent changes to the setting value or the clearing of the main control's built-in RAM could cause damage to the pachinko parlor, the notification of fraudulent changes to the setting value or the clearing of the main control's built-in RAM takes precedence over notification of the disconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR), thereby preventing the escalation of damage.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the timing at which the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed, and whether or not the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control's built-in RAM (the area of the main control's built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). In other words, the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display at the timing when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), or when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation when power is turned on. This allows for prioritizing the execution of notifications of high importance, while also enabling the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the "Right-side game board disconnection error" display in the display device 1600 may also be varied depending on whether the setting value is changed or whether a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM is cleared (excluding a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM). In this case, information of high importance can be notified in order and addressed sequentially, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably conveyed and addressed.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible (matched), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003). Therefore, even if there is no input of an ID code signal from the divided game board 5AR after the execution of the ID determination process (step S1003), the above-mentioned notifications (game board disconnection notification sound, disconnection error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light mode, etc.) are not executed. Therefore, at least the LEDs provided in parts other than the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (such as the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250), the drive motors and drive solenoids, the performance display device 1600, and various speakers, all controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a, are controlled in the same manner as when the right-side game board 5AR is adapted.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting change process, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 278, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the execution of the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is designed to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. That is, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected because no ID code signal is input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected in the ID determination process (step S1003), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and after the completion of the setting change process, control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Thus, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting change process, then after the completion of the setting change process, the notification caused by the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over the abnormality notification caused by the detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent activity occurs during a non-playable state before gameplay can begin, such as during the execution of a settings change process, the risk of disadvantage occurring when gameplay mode is activated is low. However, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in a disconnected state, there is a risk of disadvantage occurring when gameplay is executed after gameplay mode is activated. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and a disconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) occur during the execution of the settings change process, the notification resulting from the disconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) is prioritized after the completion of the settings change process, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, which involves a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, the detection by the abnormality detection means is considered valid, however, for some abnormality notifications, the abnormality notification is not given during the power-on operation check, but only after the power-on operation check is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 279, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process, then during the power-on operation check, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism, nor will a magnetic detection notification sound (for example, "Magnetic detection error occurred.") be repeatedly output from the various speakers.

After the power-on operation check is complete, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on door frame 3) are controlled to illuminate in a critical abnormality warning mode due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetic field, and a magnetic field detection warning sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality warning due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetic field is terminated after a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection of the unauthorized magnetic field. When the abnormality warning due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetic field has terminated, and no other abnormalities have been detected, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on door frame 3) are controlled to illuminate in a minor abnormality warning mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected, and a game board disconnection warning sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process is completed, then control of the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the completion of the power-on operation check, an abnormality notification is executed due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetic field.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected in the ID determination process (step S1003), and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full-tank detection sensor 154, a ball-out detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the power-on operation check performed after the setting change process is completed, then the abnormality notification caused by the detection by the abnormality detection means takes priority over the notification caused by the disconnected state due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the power-on operation check is completed.

In other words, since the game mode starts immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is a possibility that similar fraudulent activity may occur in game mode as well. On the other hand, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the system is in a disconnected state, the likelihood of suffering a disadvantage compared to fraudulent activity is lower. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and a disconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) occur during the power-on operation check, the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means after the completion of the power-on operation check (or, in some cases, during the power-on operation check) is given priority, thereby suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is considered unconnected because there is no input of an ID code signal, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected, and during the execution of the power-on operation check, an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball-out detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc.) receives a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When detection is made by the sensors or switches, the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality notification when the power-on operation check is completed. However, the display device 1600 will issue an abnormality notification (for example, displaying "Magnetic Error Occurred" as a magnetic detection error notification) when detection is made by the abnormality detection means. In other words, when the detection signal from the anomaly detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnetic cheat counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the start of anomaly notification (for example, a magnetic cheat notification command, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation cheating is occurring). Upon receiving this command to instruct the start of anomaly notification (magnetic cheat notification command), the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 starts control related to anomaly notification. Furthermore, even if an anomaly notification resulting from detection by the anomaly detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an anomaly notification resulting from the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected (disconnection error notification display mode) is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. That is, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected occur simultaneously, the performance display device 1600 displays an anomaly notification for each anomaly.

Furthermore, while the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame release switch are shown as abnormality detection means, the sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may be configured so that for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the setting change process is completed (including during the power-on operation check and in game mode), the display device 1600 does not receive an abnormality notification. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the setting change process is completed (including during the power-on operation check and in game mode), the display device 1600 may not receive an abnormality notification.

Furthermore, even if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid. However, unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, an abnormality notification is made at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in its ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then at the timing of the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an abnormality notification caused by detection by the abnormality detection means is performed on the performance display device 1600 and on the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 from an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, or other sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), then the abnormality notification caused by the detection by the abnormality detection means takes priority over the notification caused by the disconnected state due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

Therefore, in a game mode where there is a high risk of disadvantages due to fraudulent activity, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and a disconnected state (no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR) occur, the notification resulting from the detection by the anomaly detection means will be given priority, thereby suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages.

Furthermore, the determination of whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible is not limited to only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. Alternatively, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) determine whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, since the system can notify the system when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages.

Furthermore, even if an ID determination process is performed periodically to determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be performed during the execution of the setting change process. Similarly, even if the ID determination process is performed during the execution of the setting change process and it determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected may not be issued during the execution of the setting change process.

Furthermore, when performing an ID determination process to periodically determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, the system may initiate notification (game board disconnection notification sound, disconnection error notification display, minor abnormality notification light display, etc.) corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. After this notification is initiated, the system may terminate the notification corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible. Alternatively, the system may initiate notification corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR after the ID determination process has determined that the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process starts, and it is determined that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, then, similar to the case where the system determines whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible only when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display a notification during the power-on operation check indicating that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that it is in an unconnected state, while various... Regarding the LEDs on the Peeker and the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), it is possible to configure the system so that, when the operation check at power-on is complete and the game-ready state is established, the system does not output a game board disconnection notification sound or illuminate in a minor abnormality notification pattern to indicate that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and therefore no connection is established. Instead, when the system is powered on and the game-ready state is established, it may be configured so that the system outputs a game board disconnection notification sound and illuminates in a minor abnormality notification pattern to indicate that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and therefore no connection is established.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting change process, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the process based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the setting change process, abnormality notifications based on detections during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, and the right-side game board 5AR is found to be disconnected during the power-on operation check after the setting change process, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full-tank detection sensor 154, a ball-out detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects this abnormality, the performance display device 1600 will report both that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected (no ID code signal input) and that an abnormality detection means has detected the abnormality during the power-on operation check. While displaying information, the various speakers and LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that an abnormality has been detected. Instead, when the power-on operation check is complete and the game mode starts, the various speakers and door frame unit may prioritize notifying that an abnormality has been detected by the abnormality detection means over notifying that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the system is disconnected.

Thus, in this example, when the setting change process is executed, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to three game states after power is turned on: a first game state during the execution of the setting change process, a second game state during the power-on operation check, and a third game state as the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed. Furthermore, in the first game state, even if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected or the combination of split game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, the system does not notify the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected due to the lack of an ID code signal input or that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible. In other words, during the first game state, the display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that indicates an unconnected state due to the lack of ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, or that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, during the second game state following the first game state, various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that indicates that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible. On the other hand, the performance display device 1600 is controlled in a manner that indicates that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible. Furthermore, if, during the second game state, there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (i.e., it is disconnected), the display device 1600 will only display text information to indicate that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. If the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible, the display device 1600 will display both text and image information to indicate that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible. Thus, in the second game state, the display device 1600 alone will indicate that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (i.e., it is disconnected) or that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible. However, the intensity of the notification will vary depending on the degree of disadvantage. This makes it easier to notice when the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible, which results in a higher degree of disadvantage compared to when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (i.e., it is disconnected).

Furthermore, during the third game state following the end of the first and second game states, in addition to the display device 1600, various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in a manner that indicates an unconnected state due to the lack of ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, or that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible.

In other words, the first game state is a period during which work is performed to change the setting values, and since this determines the game performance (such as the likelihood of winning), the worker needs to concentrate and work carefully. Therefore, even if the right game board 5AR is disconnected or the combination of split game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, the system does not notify that the right game board 5AR is disconnected (no ID code signal input) or that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible, so as not to interfere with the work of changing the setting values. Furthermore, in the first game state, the system not only fails to notify the user of the disconnected state (no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR) and the incompatible combination of the split game boards 5A, but also fails to notify the user of other abnormalities (for example, when detection signals are input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch, or when a situation arises where detection is possible even though no actual detection has occurred (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and does not detect vibration)).

Furthermore, the second game state following the first game state is a period for confirming whether it is possible to light up the LEDs normally and whether it is possible to drive the drive motors and drive solenoids to operate the movable parts normally. Although this requires concentration as it involves confirmation work, it does not determine the game performance, so only notifications that do not interfere with the confirmation work (such as notifications on the display device 1600 as in this example) are provided, and attention-grabbing notifications such as flashing LEDs or outputting notification sounds from various speakers are not provided. In the second game state, it is possible to confirm whether the various LEDs can light up normally by repeatedly controlling the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative circuit boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A to a special illumination mode that is executed only in the second game state. Furthermore, in the second game state, the display device 1600 only notifies that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, and does not notify the various speakers or the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 etc. provided on the door frame 3), and does not notify other abnormalities (for example, the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb depletion detection sensor 574, door frame open switch etc.) When a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 by a sensor or switch, or when a situation arises where detection is possible even though no actual detection has occurred (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and therefore not detecting the vibration), the notification is only sent via the display device 1600, and the various speakers and the various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are notified.

Furthermore, since the third game state, which occurs after the first and second game states have ended, does not involve any verification work or work to determine game performance, the system uses the display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to notify the operator that the ID code signal from the right game board 5AR is not being received and that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as the game state changes from the first game state to the second game state, and then to the third game state, the level of notification for the unconnected state (no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR) and the incompatible combination of the split game boards 5A are changed. In the first game state, no notification is given; in the second game state, a weak notification is given; and in the third game state, a strong notification is given. This allows for appropriate notification depending on the game state and the work situation.

Furthermore, in the second game state, as described above, special behaviors not performed in the first and third game states are output when the performance operation unit 300, which is an operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, is operated, such as the performance operation unit 301, volume control switch, light intensity control switch, etc. Specifically, special sounds are output from various speakers based on the operation of the volume control switch or light intensity control switch, the light emission color of various LEDs is changed based on the operation of the performance operation unit 301, volume control switch, or light intensity control switch, or a specific display is shown on the performance display device 1600 based on a specific operation (for example, pressing the volume control switch and light intensity control switch simultaneously for a predetermined period) performed on the performance operation unit 301, volume control switch, or light intensity control switch. This makes it possible to confirm whether the performance operation unit 301, volume control switch, light intensity control switch, etc. of the performance operation unit 300, which is an operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, are able to accept operation normally.

[25-15. Confirmation display of setting values and ID errors in split game boards]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when displaying the setting value confirmation when the combination of split game boards 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is incompatible (incompatible state, incompatible state) or when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (it is not possible to confirm the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR), resulting in a short circuit or open circuit in the transmission path that transmits various signals, and the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL (unconnected state). For comparison, we will also explain an example of the behavior when displaying the setting value confirmation when the combination of split game boards 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in compatible (compatible state). Figure 280 shows an example of the behavior when the split game board 5A, which consists of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is compatible (aligned) and the setting value is displayed. Figure 281 shows an example of the behavior when the split game board 5A combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and the setting value is displayed. Figure 284 shows an example of the behavior when the right game board 5AR is not connected and the setting value is displayed. Below, only the parts that differ from when the setting change process is performed will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

[25-15a. Confirmation display of set values when applicable]
As shown in Figure 280, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays "power on" on the performance display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time to notify that power has been supplied to the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, when the predetermined conditions for permitting the display of the set value are met when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1 (in this example, when the power is turned on by operating the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 without pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON), the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process (step S28) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the current set value stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (the value set among setting values 1 to setting values 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) is displayed on the setting display unit 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display unit).

Furthermore, when the setting value confirmation display process begins, a setting value confirmation display start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the setting value confirmation display will begin. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 displays a setting confirmation notification (in this example, "Setting Confirmation in Progress") on the display device 1600 (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be displayed for a certain period before the display ends). It also repeatedly outputs a setting value confirmation notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting Confirmation in Progress" and a warning sound such as "Ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum configurable volume, or the default volume adjusted by the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) before the output stops).

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the illumination of various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR to illuminate in a setting confirmation notification illumination pattern when the setting value confirmation is displayed (in this example, the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are switched between blue and white illumination in a short period of time). (The setting confirmation notification illumination pattern may be kept lit until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or the setting confirmation notification illumination pattern may be terminated and the LEDs turned off or illuminated in a different illumination pattern after illuminating for a certain period of time.) This notifies that the setting value confirmation display is being performed, allowing for immediate detection if the setting value has been checked fraudulently.

As described above, in this example, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met when, after inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. That is, the setting value confirmation display process is executed with the main body frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed when the setting value confirmation display process is completed.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious malfunction notification, which are caused by the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are not performed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious malfunction notification, which are caused by the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are not performed. Instead, the setting value confirmation display notification sound is output from various speakers, and the light emission pattern for setting confirmation notification is controlled. Therefore, after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the output of door opening notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious malfunction notification (including the semi-serious malfunction notification light emission pattern if the light emission control proceeds to a semi-serious malfunction notification light emission pattern after the serious malfunction notification light emission pattern) become possible.

Furthermore, if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated after the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, that is, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is running and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the output of door-open notification sounds from various speakers and the serious abnormality notification flashing patterns (including the semi-serious abnormality notification flashing pattern if the flashing control is performed to a semi-serious abnormality notification flashing pattern after the serious abnormality notification flashing pattern) caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 will not be executed after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, normally, when the setting value is to be confirmed and displayed, the manager of the amusement hall or similar person will operate the machine from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2 to confirm and display the setting value, so the operation to close the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. Furthermore, as described above, if the main frame 4, which is open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, or if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this period is shorter than the time required for power-on operation check), the output of the door open notification sound is stopped, and the system is silenced. Therefore, normally, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached the predetermined period, both the output of the door open notification sound from various speakers due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the critical abnormality notification mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission control is performed after the critical abnormality notification light emission mode) are executed. If the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached the predetermined period, only the light emission control of the critical abnormality notification mode due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

Furthermore, the volume of the setting value confirmation notification sound output from the various speakers during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227. As mentioned above, players can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the setting value confirmation notification sound output during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the setting value confirmation notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers reliably communicates that the setting value confirmation display is being performed. This allows for immediate detection of the setting value confirmation display, thus deterring fraudulent confirmation of the setting value.

Furthermore, the setting confirmation notification light pattern, which is displayed during the setting value confirmation process, cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As mentioned above, while players can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the setting confirmation notification light pattern, which is displayed during the setting value confirmation process, cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting value confirmation display process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness) to perform the setting confirmation notification light pattern. This reliably communicates that the setting value has been confirmed, allowing for immediate detection of fraudulent setting value confirmations and thus deterring fraudulent confirmations.

Furthermore, while the setting value confirmation display process is running, operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the display device 1600. No confirmation sound will be output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. Since the display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, the visibility of the setting confirmation notification on the display device 1600 will not be obstructed by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness). The confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 will not make the setting value confirmation display notification sound difficult to hear. This allows for immediate detection of any fraudulent setting value confirmation display.

Furthermore, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. In other words, in this example of pachinko machine 1, although the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR constitute a divided game board 5A, during setting confirmation, all LEDs on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Only the LEDs on the right game board 5AR that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are illuminated.

In this way, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the various LEDs provided on the split game board 5A, specifically the LEDs on the left game board 5AL and the LEDs on the right game board 5AR, emit light in different patterns. This creates a sense of unease for anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1, allowing them to immediately notice that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board, function display unit 1400, and sub-function display unit 2250 of the left-side game board 5AL may be illuminated in a different light emission pattern than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR (for example, illuminated in red at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or a brightness that cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228) (without flashing)). Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, may be illuminated in a setting confirmation notification light emission pattern. In this case as well, the light emission patterns of the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR and the LEDs on the left-side game board 5AL can be made different, making it possible to immediately notice that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

Furthermore, based on the completion of the setting value confirmation display operation (in this example, the OFF operation which returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 hides the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM displayed on the setting display unit 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display unit), and sends a setting value confirmation display completion command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the setting value confirmation display process has ended.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a command from the main control MPU 1310a to end the display of the set value confirmation, it performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the drive motor and drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can be driven in a predetermined manner to perform normal lighting and operation. During the power-on operation check, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (such as the LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left game board 5AL, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3), are illuminated in a predetermined light emission pattern (the light emission pattern during the power-on operation check). However, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses, are illuminated in a predetermined light emission pattern (the light emission pattern during the power-on operation check) only if the light emission control for the critical abnormality notification pattern caused by the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is not performed.

As described above, the light emission control for the critical abnormality notification light emission mode resulting from the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is not executed after the end of the setting value confirmation display process if the main frame 4 is closed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. In other words, if the main frame 4 is closed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit), excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding win/loss, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are lit in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode during power-on operation confirmation). If the main unit frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the system controls the illumination to a critical malfunction notification light pattern, which indicates that the main unit frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2. After a predetermined period has elapsed since closing the main unit frame 4 (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from the start to the end of the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510), the critical malfunction notification light pattern is terminated, and the system starts the illumination control to a light pattern appropriate to the game state (the light pattern used during special effects), similar to the normal state (when the game is ready to play).

Furthermore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the performance display device 1600 displays the performance mode (decorative patterns, background image during normal play (when playable state) etc.), and when the power-on operation confirmation is completed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, light up in a predetermined light-emitting pattern, or the light-emitting pattern during the performance mode (flashing for a predetermined period of time and then lighting up in a predetermined light-emitting pattern) is controlled based on the condition for starting the variation display being met (a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)). Also, as described above, in this example, the output period of the door opening notification sound is the power-on operation confirmation period. Because the time required for confirmation is shorter than the time required for confirmation, if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process starts, and the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process ends, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened has already reached the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process ends, no door opening notification sound will be output from the various speakers, and the system will be in a state where sound output during the performance (output of performance sound based on the fulfillment of the start condition for the variable display (output of performance sound based on the start opening (first start opening 2002 or one of the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004))) can be executed.

Furthermore, once the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) and the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching game balls, and the LED illumination control of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, is started. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball launcher 540 does not launch game balls while the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is being executed. Furthermore, it is sufficient to have the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in a state where their illumination can be controlled. This is not limited to immediately illuminating one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 or the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner based on the ball launching device 540 enabling the launch of game balls. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 or the sub-function display unit 2250 may be illuminated in the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or variation performance based on the fulfillment of the start condition for variation display (i.e., a game ball entering the start gate (first start gate 2002 or one of the first start gate 2002 and the second start gate 2004)). Alternatively, after the termination of an illumination pattern indicating an abnormal state, the LEDs may be illuminated in the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or variation performance, or they may be set to a state where their illumination can be controlled to the illumination pattern for special symbol variation display or performance.

[25-15b. Display of setting values in case of non-conformity]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is incompatible (incompatible) (incompatible state), with reference to Figure 281. In the following, we will only explain the parts that differ from when the setting change process is performed or when the setting value confirmation display process is performed when it is compatible, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in Figure 281, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR. The electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR are then set to a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the set value confirmation display is in progress or not. Furthermore, in this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL are also set to a turned-off state regardless of whether the set value confirmation display is in progress or not.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, it does not notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until the setting value confirmation display completion command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. That is, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the performance display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification (in this example, "Setting Confirmation in Progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be displayed for a certain period of time and then the display may be terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting Confirmation in Progress" and warning sounds such as "Ding dong") is played at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) The speaker repeatedly outputs a signal (this may be repeated until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be repeated a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) before stopping the output). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in the setting confirmation notification pattern during the setting value confirmation display. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the right-hand game board 5AR and the left-hand game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are kept off.

Then, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting value confirmation display completion command to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting value confirmation display completion command, it repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "A right-side game board incompatibility error has occurred. Turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum configurable volume or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Along with a device that repeatedly outputs an output a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) before stopping the output, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern (in this example, a pattern that switches between turning on and off red at maximum brightness in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing pattern)). Furthermore, the performance display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or background images during normal times (when playable), but instead displays a background image for abnormal times (for example, black) and the message "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification pattern on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the right-side game board 5AR and the left-side game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are continuously controlled to be off.

Furthermore, the game board mismatch notification sound is not a single, intermittent output of the same sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between a muted state and an output state. Also, the critical abnormality notification light pattern is not fixed in a lit state, but repeatedly controlled between a lit state and an off state, changing the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is mismatched in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice the mismatch in the combination of the divided game boards 5A when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require further checks is started.

Furthermore, once the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed and the game mode is started, the output of the game board non-conformity notification sound, the control of the light emission mode of the door frame unit for serious abnormality notification, and the display mode of the performance display device 1600 for non-conformity error notification will continue, while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will set the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, to a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they are conforming (they may also be lit in a predetermined manner). In other words, based on the condition for starting the variable display being met (a game ball entering the starting gate (either the first starting gate 2002 or both the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 are blinked in a predetermined manner, and then illuminated in a predetermined light emission pattern to display information regarding the win or loss.

Furthermore, the non-conformity error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a static image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the conditions for starting a variable display are met (a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400 or the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the performance display device 1600 continues to display the non-conformity error notification display mode and does not perform variable displays such as the variable display of decorative symbols. The non-conformity error notification display method in 00 can be any method appropriate to the error content, and may include a combination of letters and numbers (e.g., an error code) or a mark. In this way, during the execution of the power-on operation check, which does not involve clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) after the setting value confirmation display process, the display device 1600 is configured to notify that the combination of the split game boards 5A is non-conformity in a static manner that does not change regardless of the passage of time. This allows notification of the non-conformity of the split game boards 5A combination without interfering with the verification work during the power-on operation check.

Thus, in this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the system immediately notifies that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible without issuing an abnormality notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process. In other words, after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the system outputs a game board incompatible notification sound without outputting a door opening notification sound, regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Furthermore, although the system controls the illumination to a serious abnormality notification illumination pattern after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, this is not caused by the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, but rather by the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. Therefore, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since closing the main unit frame 4 after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the light emission control is always set to the critical abnormality notification emission mode.

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the conditions for starting the variable display are met (even if a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or one of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004)), the display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 etc. provided on door frame 3), and decorative boards provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be displayed. The system is designed to notify of an abnormality without executing the various LED fluctuation effects implemented in the system. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, once the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is enabled after the setting change process (step S37), are controlled to emit light in a predetermined pattern based on the fulfillment of the fluctuation display start condition (a game ball entering the starting gate (either the first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), enabling the display of information related to winning or losing.

Furthermore, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the system is configured to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) at the same time, regardless of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed, when the power-on operation check is performed, the system is configured to initiate the following: light emission control of various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in a critical abnormality notification light emission mode, output of a game board incompatible notification sound from various speakers, and the timing of displaying an abnormal background image (for example, black) and an incompatible error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600. This allows for the sequential notification and action of high-priority information (in this case, notification that the setting value confirmation display is being executed), ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and addressed. Furthermore, the timing of the illumination control of various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 on the door frame 3) in the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern, the output of the game board non-conformity notification sound from various speakers, and the timing of the display of the abnormal background image (e.g., black) and non-conformity error notification pattern on the display device 1600 may be adjusted depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation display is being performed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227 when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume output from various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output after the completion of the setting change process cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, once the setting value confirmation and display process is complete, a predetermined volume of a game board non-conformity notification sound can be output. This ensures that the combination of the split game board 5A is reliably communicated through the sound output from various speakers, thus preventing any disadvantage to players or arcades.

Similarly, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the door frame 3 and the various decorative boards provided on the divided game boards 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern, which is controlled to emit light after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, once the setting value confirmation display process is complete, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards installed on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness). This ensures that the combination of the divided game board 5A is clearly indicated by the illumination pattern, thus preventing any disadvantage to players or arcades.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) will not be displayed on the performance display device 1600 even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Also, because the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed on the performance display device 1600, the scale will not change even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the obstruction of visibility of part or all of the incompatible error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), and to reliably convey that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are not output. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in hearing the game board incompatibility notification sound due to confirmation sounds corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228, and to reliably communicate that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 282, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is designed to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. That is, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the execution of the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the execution of the power-on operation check without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process of checking whether or not a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process of checking whether or not a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (notification, etc.) is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 283, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the completion of the power-on operation check, the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (notification, etc.) is not executed).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (incompatible) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch), an abnormality notification will not be issued.

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be in a non-conforming state, the game may proceed in a manner unintended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the arcade and the players. Furthermore, since it deviates from the original specifications, it may lead to a loss of player trust. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that the game is stopped. For this reason, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be in a non-conforming state, notification is given priority over notifications caused by abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch). This prevents the game from being stopped and minimizes harm to the arcade and the players.

Furthermore, some LEDs may be controlled to emit light in different patterns depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (making light emission control impossible).

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be in a compatible (matched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible. In this case, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5AR subsequently becomes incompatible (mismatched), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light mode, etc.) corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR will be executed. However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, always determined each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible. In this case, since it becomes possible to notify the system that the combination of the divided game boards 5A has become incompatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, the occurrence of disadvantages can be suppressed.

Furthermore, even if an ID determination process is performed periodically to determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compliant, the ID determination process may not be performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process. Similarly, even if the ID determination process is performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and determines that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible, the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may not be displayed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process starts, and it is determined that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then, similar to the case where the compatibility of the divided game boards 5A is determined only when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the system may also be configured to notify the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, all provided on the door frame 3) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the process based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, abnormality notification based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the setting value confirmation display process may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is found to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects this, the display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to prioritize notification of the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A over notification of detection by the abnormality detection means. Notification of detection by the abnormality detection means may then be given when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible.

Furthermore, in the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (after receiving the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which have been determined to be non-compliant, but the power-on operation check is also not performed for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the back of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301 (such as the upper rear movable decorative body 3210, the lower rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the lower rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the lower rear performance unit 3300, the lower front center decorative body 3161 of the lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are also configured not to perform operation checks when the power is turned on.

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if the power-on operation check is started, the control to illuminate the LEDs on the right-hand game board 5AR, which was determined to be incompatible, in the same illumination pattern as during the power-on operation check, and the control to operate the movable parts in the same operation pattern as during the power-on operation check, will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right-hand game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right-hand game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation section 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit, which are not subject to ID judgment, may also be deemed non-conforming. Therefore, when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation. To prevent this, some or all of the movable parts provided on the right-side game board 5AR, which has been determined to be non-conforming, and the door frame unit, which is not subject to ID judgment in the ID judgment process (step S1003), and which are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are not driven. This prevents damage to the movable parts or door frame unit, and prevents failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, as described above, the game board side component may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be non-compliant in the ID determination process (step S1003), then some or all of the movable parts that are provided on the door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be deactivated. In addition to this, or separately, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame) If a side unit 430 and a door frame top unit 450 are present, and a part of them (for example, one of the right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be non-compliant, then all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be deactivated. Alternatively, all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be deactivated.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that performs ID determination processing (step S1003) is mounted (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation check at power-on starts. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided in the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided in the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the same way as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all located on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) are operated in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. However, the LEDs provided on the movable parts on the left-side game board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the same manner as during the power-on operation check; instead, they remain off while operating in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is located.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the ID determination process (step S1003) does not control the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination, to operate the performance operation unit 301. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light in the same way as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed. In other words, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting confirmation display process, then the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern due to the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. Note that the performance operation unit 300 may also be a specific door frame unit targeted for ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the performance operation unit 300 or a combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the control to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed, and the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern instead of the emission pattern used during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the right-side game board 5AR, which was determined to be incompatible, and some or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be prevented from being driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation, preventing damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

[25-15c. Display of setting values when not connected]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when displaying the setting value confirmation in an unconnected state (unconnected state) where the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (it is not possible to confirm the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or open circuit occurs in the transmission path that transmits various signals, with reference to Figure 284. In the following, we will only explain the parts that differ from when the setting change process is performed or when the setting value confirmation display process is performed in the case of compliance or non-compliance, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in Figure 284, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, that is, if the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR. Therefore, the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off) regardless of whether or not the set value confirmation display is in progress. Note that if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not output a control signal to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR. Furthermore, in this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, then the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are turned off, regardless of whether or not the set value confirmation display is currently active.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, it will notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until the setting value confirmation display completion command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), and will instead notify that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. That is, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the performance display device 1600 will display a setting confirmation notification (in this example, "Setting Confirmation in Progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be displayed for a certain period of time and then the display may be terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting Confirmation in Progress" and warning sounds such as "Ding dong") will be played at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) The speaker repeatedly outputs a signal (this may be repeated until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or it may be repeated a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) before stopping the output). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in the setting confirmation notification pattern during the setting value confirmation display. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the right-hand game board 5AR and the left-hand game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are kept off.

Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control MPU 1310a indicating that the setting value confirmation display process has been completed, it repeatedly outputs a game board disconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right game board is not connected." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (it may also be repeated for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) before stopping the output). 0. Various LEDs (some or all) of the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification mode (or a semi-serious abnormality notification mode if the emission control is to switch to a semi-serious abnormality notification mode after the serious abnormality notification mode) due to the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. After a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the emission control is switched to a minor abnormality notification mode (a mode in which the light is switched between turning on and off at maximum brightness in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)) due to the right game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Furthermore, regarding the performance display device, in addition to displaying the performance (normal state) on the performance display device 1600 (decorative patterns, background image during normal state (playable state), etc.) as in the compliant version, the performance display device 1600 also displays "Right game board disconnection error occurred" as a disconnection error notification display mode to notify that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL. The various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards provided on the right game board 5AR and the left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are continuously controlled to be off.

Furthermore, the notification sound for unconnected game boards is not a single, intermittent sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between silent and on states. Also, the critical malfunction notification light pattern is not fixed in a lit state, but repeatedly controlled between lit and off states, changing the light intensity. In other words, various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify the right game board 5AR of the fact that it is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require further checks is started.

Furthermore, the disconnection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a static image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the conditions for starting a variable display are met (when a game ball enters the starting gate (first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), the variable display of special symbols is started in the function display unit 1400 or the variable display of the fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the performance display device 1600 displays the disconnection error notification mode and performs variable effects such as the variable display of decorative symbols. The display format can be anything that corresponds to the error content, and may include a combination of letters and numbers (e.g., an error code) or a mark. During the power-on operation check, which does not involve clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the display device 1600 displays a static message, regardless of the passage of time, indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. This allows the system to notify the system that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL without interfering with the verification process during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, as described above, the period from closing the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, until the termination of the critical malfunction notification illumination mode is set to be longer than the period required for power-on operation confirmation. Therefore, if the main body frame 4 is closed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the critical malfunction notification illumination mode will continue to be controlled even after the game mode starts, regardless of whether the main body frame 4 remains closed afterward. After a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since closing the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, the critical malfunction notification illumination mode will terminate and the illumination will switch to the minor malfunction notification mode.

As described above, the light intensity of the critical malfunction notification light pattern (including the semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern if the light pattern is controlled to a semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern after the critical malfunction notification light pattern) and the minor malfunction notification light pattern (caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the game mode is started, it remains impossible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

In other words, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed with the right-side game board 5AR disconnected, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board disconnection notification sound is output from various speakers, and a serious malfunction notification light pattern (or a semi-serious malfunction notification light pattern if the light control is to switch from the serious malfunction notification light pattern to a semi-serious malfunction notification light pattern) is executed due to the main body frame 4 being open to the outer frame 2. The volume of the game board disconnection notification sound output from various speakers can be adjusted using the volume control button 227. Although it is possible to adjust the light intensity, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the critical abnormality notification light emission mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission control proceeds to a semi-critical abnormality notification light emission mode after the critical abnormality notification light emission mode) which is controlled due to the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, and for the minor abnormality notification light emission mode which is controlled after the critical abnormality notification light emission mode (caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2) has finished, and because the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting value confirmation display process is executed, after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the system can control the illumination to a predetermined brightness level for the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern (or the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination control is performed after the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern). Even if the setting value confirmation notification illumination pattern is missed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern (or the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination pattern if the illumination control is performed after the critical abnormality notification illumination pattern) becomes visible after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, allowing players to realize that the setting value confirmation display process may have been performed. Meanwhile, to avoid causing discomfort to players, the system allows volume adjustment via the volume control button 227 when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, which poses a low risk of causing disadvantage to players or the arcade.

Furthermore, during the light emission control of the minor abnormality notification mode, if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated, the display device 1600 may be configured to either display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), or to output a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, or both.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 284, the output period for the door open notification sound (30 seconds in this example) elapses before the setting value confirmation display process is completed. However, if the setting value confirmation display process is completed before the output period for the door open notification sound elapses, the door open notification sound will be output after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process until the output period for the door open notification sound is reached. Once the output period for the door open notification sound has elapsed, the game board disconnection notification sound will be output. Additionally, if the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or if the elapsed time since the main body frame 4 was closed after being open relative to the outer frame 2 has not reached a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), the game board disconnection notification sound may not be output until the main body frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the critical abnormality notification light emission mode resulting from the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 is completed, even if the elapsed time since the main body frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds).

Thus, in this example, when displaying the setting value confirmation in an unconnected state (without input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR), if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, different notification sounds are output from various speakers to the outer frame 2 depending on the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened. Meanwhile, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are configured to display an abnormal notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, taking precedence over the abnormal notification corresponding to the unconnected state of the right-side game board 5AR.

In other words, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR each perform abnormality notification, but depending on the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, there are cases where a common abnormality (an abnormality in which the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2) is notified, and cases where different abnormalities (for the various speakers, an abnormality caused by disconnection, and for the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR, an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2) are notified. Therefore, if, for example, the setting value is displayed in a short time due to fraudulent activity, and the setting value verification process is completed relatively quickly after the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the various LEDs on the door frame unit will be controlled to illuminate in a critical abnormality notification pattern, and a door opening notification sound will be output from various speakers. This will reliably inform the outer frame 2 that the main frame 4 has been opened and that the setting value may have been displayed fraudulently. On the other hand, if the setting value is displayed legitimately by the manager of the gaming hall, the opening of the main frame 4 can be notified to the outer frame 2 simply by controlling the various LEDs on the door frame unit to illuminate in a critical abnormality notification pattern.

Furthermore, even in the case of an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, which is provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, which is provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, that display information regarding wins and losses, will not be turned off, but will continue to light up in the same way as during normal operation (when the game is ready to play). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the system notifies the player that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, thereby preventing the game from proceeding in a way unintended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in a disconnected state without an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the LED displaying information regarding wins and losses is controlled to allow the game to proceed as normal, thus preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in a disconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board disconnection notification sound differ depending on whether or not the set value confirmation display is performed.

Specifically, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the system is in an unconnected state, and the setting value confirmation display is not executed, then, based on the commencement of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time, after which the power-on operation check will begin. During the execution of this power-on operation check, the system will start light control in a minor abnormality notification light pattern and output of a game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers, due to the unconnected state resulting from the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. In other words, at the timing of starting the power-on operation check, the system will start light control in a minor abnormality notification light pattern and output of a game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers, due to the unconnected state resulting from the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR.

On the other hand, when the system is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the setting value confirmation display is to be executed, the system does not initiate the light control in the minor abnormality notification light pattern and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers at the timing when the power-on operation check begins, due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR. Instead, it initiates the light control in the minor abnormality notification light pattern and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers at a timing after the power-on operation check has started (in this example, the game board unconnected notification sound is output after the power-on operation check has started but before the game mode has started, and the light control in the minor abnormality notification light pattern begins when the power-on operation check has finished and the game mode has started).

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, even if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (indicating an unconnected state), the timing of the light control in the minor abnormality notification flashing mode and the output timing of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prioritize the notification of highly important information and suppress the occurrence of malfunctions and fraudulent activities. In other words, since fraudulent display of the setting value confirmation could cause damage to the pachinko parlor, this prioritizes notification of the unconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) over notification of the fraudulent display of the setting value confirmation, thereby preventing the escalation of damage caused by such fraudulent display.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated and there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the timing of the display of "Right-side game board unconnected error" on the performance display device 1600 as an unconnected error notification is the same regardless of whether or not a confirmation of the set value is displayed. That is, the display of "Right-side game board unconnected error" on the performance display device 1600 is set to display at the same time that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 begins checking the operation upon power-on. This allows for prioritizing the execution of high-priority notifications while also enabling the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Alternatively, the timing of the display of "Right-side game board unconnected error" on the performance display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not a confirmation of the set value is displayed. In this case, high-priority information can be notified in order and addressed sequentially, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and addressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and that the machine is in an unconnected state, then the volume can be adjusted using the volume control button 227 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. However, if a door-open notification sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume can be adjusted using the volume control button 227 after the output of the door-open notification sound stops. In other words, if a door-open notification sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227 while the door-open notification sound is being output, but it can be adjusted using the volume control button 227 during the period when the game board unconnected notification sound is being output after the output of the door-open notification sound stops. This makes it possible to adjust the volume of the sound effects output during the variation effect in advance.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no connection and no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, then when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the door frame 3 and the various decorative boards provided on the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, however, the critical abnormality notification flashing pattern, which is controlled due to the opening of the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, once the setting value confirmation display process is complete, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness). This ensures that the system reliably indicates an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, thus preventing any disadvantage to players or arcades. Furthermore, if the system does not switch to a critical malfunction notification emission mode after the setting value confirmation display process is complete, or if the critical malfunction notification emission mode is completed during the power-on operation check, the light intensity (brightness) can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 even during the power-on operation check. In other words, if the system switches to a minor malfunction notification emission mode after the critical malfunction notification emission mode is completed, the light intensity (brightness) can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the minor malfunction notification emission mode.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no connection and no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, then when the power-on operation check is performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when only the power-on operation check is performed without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 will display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 will be output. Therefore, the display of the scale and the output of the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 will allow the user to recognize that the volume or light intensity (brightness) has been changed. Furthermore, after either or both of the following have been completed—the illumination control for the critical abnormality notification light pattern resulting from the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the output of the door opening notification sound—it may be possible to display a scale corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness), and to output a confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 285, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is designed to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. That is, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process.

Thus, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, then after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, the notification caused by the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over the abnormality notification caused by the detection by the abnormality detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent activity occurs during a non-playable state before gameplay can begin, such as during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the probability of a disadvantage occurring after the game mode starts is low. However, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the probability of a disadvantage occurring after the game mode starts and gameplay is executed is high. Therefore, if both the detection by the abnormality detection means and the unconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) occur during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the notification resulting from the unconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process is prioritized to prevent the occurrence of a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check without the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is considered valid, and an abnormality notification is made at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 286, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered unconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, then, at the timing of the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an abnormality notification caused by detection by the abnormality detection means is performed on the performance display device 1600 and on the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

Then, when the abnormality notification caused by the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 ends, and if no other abnormalities are detected, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification pattern indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a game board disconnection notification sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, then an abnormality notification caused by the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is performed by various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various speakers, and the performance display device 1600, respectively.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full-tank detection sensor 154, a ball-out detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process, then the abnormality notification caused by the detection means takes priority over the notification caused by the disconnection due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

In other words, while the probability of harm occurring during the power-on operation check is low even if fraudulent activity takes place, the probability of similar fraudulent activity occurring in game mode is high because the game mode starts immediately after the power-on operation check is completed. On the other hand, if there is no input of the ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the system is in a disconnected state, the probability of harm occurring is lower compared to when fraudulent activity occurs. Therefore, if both an abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means and a disconnected state (no input of the ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) occur during the power-on operation check, the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means is given priority, thereby suppressing the occurrence of harm.

Furthermore, while the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame release switch are shown as abnormality detection means, the system may be configured so that even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the display device 1600 does not receive an abnormality notification, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (including during the power-on operation check and in game mode). Alternatively, the system may be configured so that even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check or after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (including during the power-on operation check and in game mode), the display device 1600 does not receive an abnormality notification.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also considered valid, and an abnormality notification is made at the timing when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means, similar to when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the execution of the power-on operation check.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in its ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then at the timing of the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, an abnormality notification caused by detection by the abnormality detection means is performed on the performance display device 1600 and on the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 from an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), then the abnormality notification caused by the detection by the abnormality detection means is prioritized over the notification caused by the disconnected state due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

Therefore, in game modes where there is a high probability of disadvantages occurring due to fraudulent activity, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and a disconnected state (no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR) occur, the notification resulting from the detection by the anomaly detection means will be prioritized, thereby suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of divided game boards 5A is determined to be in a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if there is no input of an ID code signal from the divided game board 5AR thereafter, no notification (game board disconnection notification sound, disconnection error notification display, minor abnormality notification light display, etc.) corresponding to the disconnection state is not executed. However, the determination of whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible is not limited to when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, but the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to determine whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible. In this case, since the system can notify the user when the ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR is not received after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, thus preventing any disadvantages from occurring.

Furthermore, even if an ID determination process is performed periodically to determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process. Similarly, even if the ID determination process is performed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process and it determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected may not be displayed during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process starts, and it is determined that there is no connection due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, then, similar to the case where the system determines whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible only when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the system may prioritize notification of detection by the abnormality detection means (using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc.)) over notification of the incompatible combination of the split game boards 5A. The notification of the incompatible combination of the split game boards 5A may then be performed only after the notification of detection by the abnormality detection means has finished.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the process based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, abnormality notification based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the setting value confirmation display process may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, and the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full-tank detection sensor 154, ball-out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to notify that an abnormality detection means has detected an abnormality, prioritizing this notification over notification that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. The notification of the abnormality detection means detection may then be followed by notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, in the power-on operation check performed after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (after receiving the setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but the power-on operation check is also not performed for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 320 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A). The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301, which is located on the door frame unit and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), are also configured not to perform an operation check when the power is turned on. (Examples include the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of unit 0, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 located on the door frame 3, etc.)

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, then even if the power-on operation check is started, the control to illuminate the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR (which was determined to be disconnected) in the same illumination pattern as during the power-on operation check, and the control to operate the movable parts in the same operation pattern as during the power-on operation check, will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, there is a risk that some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit, which are not subject to ID determination, may also be disconnected. This could cause the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to change into a different signal due to noise, potentially causing the movable parts to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, to prevent the movable parts of the right-side game board 5AR, which is determined to be disconnected, and the door frame unit, which is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), from being driven by the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, or some or all of the movable parts, is prevented from operating in an abnormal manner, thereby preventing damage to the movable parts or door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, as described above, the game board side component may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), then some or all of the movable parts that are provided on the door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be deactivated. In addition to this, or separately, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame) If, in the case of a side unit 430 and a door frame top unit 450, it is determined that a part of it (for example, one of the right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is not connected, then all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on a specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be deactivated. Alternatively, all movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on all door frame units, including a specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be deactivated.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that performs ID determination processing (step S1003) is mounted (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation check at power-on starts. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided in the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided in the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the same way as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all located on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) are operated in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. However, the LEDs provided on the movable parts on the left-side game board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the same manner as during the power-on operation check; instead, they remain off while operating in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is located.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the ID determination process (step S1003) does not control the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination, to operate the performance operation unit 301. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are not controlled to emit light in the same manner as when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed. In other words, if the power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, then the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in either a serious abnormality notification mode caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, or a minor abnormality notification mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR being not connected. Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may be a specific door frame unit targeted for ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the performance control unit 300 or the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the control to operate the performance control unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance control unit 300 will not be performed. Additionally, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance control unit 300 may not be controlled to emit light in the same manner as during power-on operation confirmation, but rather to emit light in a manner indicating a serious malfunction due to the main frame 4 being open to the outer frame 2, or a manner indicating a minor malfunction due to the right-side game board 5AR being unconnected.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, the right-side game board 5AR, which is determined to be disconnected, and some or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be kept from being driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be suitable. In this case, the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation, preventing damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, the above example of setting changes and ID errors in the split game board involved a setting change process that clears all areas except a specific area from the entire RAM of the main control's built-in RAM. That is, it showed a process where, after the setting change process, the setting value change permission condition is met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the process of clearing all areas except a specific area from the entire RAM of the main control's built-in RAM is executed. However, this is not the only example. Even in cases where the setting value change permission condition is not met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the process of clearing all areas except a specific area from the entire RAM of the main control's built-in RAM is performed, such as when the setting key is not inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is not performed, but only the press operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the system may be controlled in the same state as the above example.

[25-16. Summary]
[25-16a. Summary A]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting determination state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting determination state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; a performance control board for controlling the performance of the game; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, The performance control board includes a disconnection notification means capable of notifying when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of notifying when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism. Even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the game machine, the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means will not provide notification during the setting determination state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting any improperly acting magnetism within the game area 5a. It also includes a main control board 1310 with a main control MPU 1310a, which serves as a lottery means for executing a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the system to a setting determination state (the state from when the setting value change permission condition is met until the setting value change termination condition is met) where the setting values related to the lottery can be determined.

Furthermore, the system has the function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances, and as an unconnected notification means, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 will display an unconnected error notification, or various speakers will output a game board unconnected notification sound, or the door frame unit (door frame left side provided on the door frame 3) The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a which has the following functions: controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the unit (such as the unit 420, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means, receiving a magnetic fraud notification command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is occurring, causing the performance display device 1600 to display a magnetic detection error notification mode, outputting a magnetic detection notification sound from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420 of the door frame, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a serious abnormality notification illumination mode.

Furthermore, even if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 is detecting magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is completed, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured not to issue notifications via the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism or the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting change process begins or during the execution of the setting value change process, the situation is not such that the game can be started, so the risk of causing harm to the amusement parlor is low. Furthermore, the setting change process is performed based on the operation of the amusement parlor staff, and if a notification is issued by the disconnection notification means or the magnetic detection abnormality notification means while the setting change process has started and the operation to determine the setting value is being performed, attention may be diverted to the notification, potentially leading to an error in determining the setting value. If the setting value is determined incorrectly and an unintended setting value is set, it may cause harm to the amusement parlor and the players. According to the above invention, when the setting value change process is being executed, the staff can concentrate on determining the setting value, preventing the setting value from being determined incorrectly and thus avoiding harm to the amusement parlor and the players.

Furthermore, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value change process starts or during the execution of the setting value change process, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the setting value change process ends, it means that the magnetism was detected only when the conditions were not suitable for starting the game, and the risk of causing harm to the amusement parlor is low. On the other hand, if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value change process starts or during the execution of the setting value change process, there is a high possibility that the disconnection will continue even after the execution of the setting value change process. If the game starts in such a state, the game may proceed with behavior not intended by the designer, which could cause harm to the amusement parlor and the players. Therefore, if, within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 until the start of the setting change process, the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 until the end of the setting change process, the period from the start of the setting change process until the end of the setting change process, etc.), the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism, then after the end of the setting change process, only the disconnection notification means may be used to notify, or the notification by the disconnection notification means may be given priority over the notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[25-16b. Summary B]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting determination state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting determination state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; a performance control board for controlling the performance of the game; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component The system includes a connection determination means for determining whether or not a connection is made, a disconnection notification means that can notify when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means that can notify when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism. If the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the end of the setting determination state, then both the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means are limited in function to provide notification.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a. It also includes a main control board 1310 with a main control MPU 1310a, which serves as a lottery means for executing a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the system to a setting determination state (the state from when the setting value change permission condition is met until the setting value change termination condition is met) where the setting values related to the lottery can be determined.

Furthermore, the system has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances; a connection determination means that performs an ID determination process (step S1003); and an unconnected notification means that, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification, outputs an unconnected game board notification sound from the various speakers, and the door frame unit The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the following functions: controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means, receiving a magnetic fraud notification command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is occurring, causing the performance display device 1600 to display a magnetic detection error notification mode, outputting magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state and is not electrically connected, and if, within a specific period after the setting change process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a magnetic cheating notification command, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation cheating is being performed, based on a detection signal input from the magnetic sensor 1050, the performance display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode and a magnetic detection error notification mode, while not outputting game board unconnected notification sounds or magnetic detection notification sounds from the various speakers, and not controlling the illumination of the various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode or a major abnormality notification illumination mode. In other words, the notification is made by limiting some of the functions of the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection anomaly notification means.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the completion of the setting change process (for example, during the execution period of the power-on operation check), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected, the situation is not such that the game can be started. Although there is little risk of the game shop suffering any loss, the remaining time until the situation is such that the game can be started is short. Therefore, a warning is issued only on the performance display device 1600, and warnings are not issued on the various speakers or the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is crucial for verifying whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. However, if notifications are issued by the disconnection notification means or the magnetic detection anomaly notification means during this power-on operation check, attention may be diverted to these notifications, potentially causing abnormal behavior to be overlooked. Overlooking such abnormal behavior could result in disadvantages for the amusement parlor and players. According to the above invention, concentration on the power-on operation check is possible, preventing the overlooking of abnormal behavior and thus avoiding disadvantages for the amusement parlor and players.

Furthermore, if the notification period of the magnetic detection anomaly notification means remains after a specific period has elapsed following the completion of the setting change process (for example, the execution period for power-on operation checks), the restricted function may be released and notification may be performed. Also, while the detection of magnetism by the magnetic sensor 1050 may indicate that fraudulent activity directly related to the prize payout of game balls is occurring, the possibility of fraudulent activity directly related to the prize payout of game balls is low when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected. Therefore, in this case, the restricted function of the magnetic detection anomaly notification means may be released and notification may be performed, while the unconnected notification means may remain restricted. After the notification period of the magnetic detection anomaly notification means has elapsed, the restricted function of the unconnected notification means may be released and notification may be performed. In other words, notification by the magnetic detection anomaly notification means may be given priority over notification by the unconnected notification means.

[25-16c. Summary C]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided to the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided to the game frame side component; a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a performance control board for controlling the performance of the game; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. Furthermore, the performance control board includes a disconnection notification means capable of notifying when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of notifying when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism. Even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic sensor detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply, the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means will not provide notification during the setting confirmation state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting any improperly acting magnetism within the game area 5a. It also includes a main control board 1310 with a main control MPU 1310a, which serves as a lottery means for executing a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting confirmation state control means for executing a setting confirmation display process to control the system to a setting confirmation state (the state from when the setting value display permission condition is met until the setting value display termination condition is met) where the setting values related to the lottery can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the system has the function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances, and as an unconnected notification means, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 will display an unconnected error notification, or various speakers will output a game board unconnected notification sound, or the door frame unit (door frame left side provided on the door frame 3) The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a which has the following functions: controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the unit (such as the unit 420, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means, receiving a magnetic fraud notification command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is occurring, causing the performance display device 1600 to display a magnetic detection error notification mode, outputting a magnetic detection notification sound from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420 of the door frame, the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a serious abnormality notification illumination mode.

Furthermore, even if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 is detecting magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the start of the setting value confirmation display process, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the end of the setting value confirmation display process, the period from when the setting value confirmation display process is started until the end of the setting value confirmation display process, etc.), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured not to issue notifications via the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism or the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process starts or during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the situation is not such that the game can be started, so the risk of harm to the amusement parlor is low. Furthermore, the setting value confirmation display process is performed based on the operation of the amusement parlor staff, and if a notification is issued by the disconnection notification means or the magnetic detection abnormality notification means while the setting value confirmation display process is started and the operation to determine the setting value is being performed, attention may be diverted to the notification, potentially leading to an error in confirming the setting value. If the setting value is incorrectly confirmed and a setting value different from the intended one is recognized, it may cause harm to the amusement parlor and the player. According to the above invention, when the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, it is possible to concentrate on confirming the setting value, preventing the recognition of an incorrect setting value, and thus avoiding harm to the amusement parlor and the player.

Furthermore, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value confirmation display process starts or during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the end of the setting value confirmation display process, it means that the magnetism was detected only when the conditions were not right for the game to start, and there is little risk of causing harm to the amusement parlor. On the other hand, if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process starts or during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, there is a high possibility that the disconnection will continue even after the execution of the setting value confirmation display process. If the game starts in such a state, the game may proceed with behavior not intended by the designer, which could cause harm to the amusement parlor and the players. Therefore, if, within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 until the start of the setting value confirmation display process, the period from the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 until the end of the setting value confirmation display process, the period from the start of the setting value confirmation display process until the end of the setting value confirmation display process, etc.), and the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not connected, and the magnetic sensor 1050 is detecting magnetism, then after the end of the setting value confirmation display process, only notification by the disconnection notification means may be performed, or notification by the disconnection notification means may be given priority over notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[25-16d. Summary D]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that can be opened and closed on the outer frame, and a door frame that can be opened and closed on the main frame; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a performance control board for controlling the performance of the game; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is connected to the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The system includes a connection determination means for determining whether or not a connection is made, a disconnection notification means that can notify when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means that can notify when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism. If the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the end of the setting confirmation state, the function of the disconnection notification means is restricted to provide notification, while the function of the magnetic abnormality notification means is not restricted to provide notification.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting any improperly acting magnetism within the game area 5a. The main control board 1310 also includes a main control MPU 1310a, which serves as a lottery means for executing a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting confirmation state control means for executing a setting confirmation display process to control the system to a setting confirmation state (the state from when the setting value display permission condition is met until the setting value display termination condition is met) where the setting values related to the lottery can be confirmed.

Furthermore, the system has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances; a connection determination means that performs an ID determination process (step S1003); and an unconnected notification means that, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification, outputs an unconnected game board notification sound from the various speakers, and the door frame unit The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the following functions: controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality notification means, receiving a magnetic fraud notification command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation fraud is occurring, causing the performance display device 1600 to display a magnetic detection error notification mode, outputting magnetic detection notification sounds from various speakers, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) to a major abnormality notification illumination mode.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, and within a specific period after the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 1050, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a magnetic cheating notification command to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation cheating is being performed. When a signal is received, the display device 1600 displays both a disconnection error notification and a magnetic detection error notification. However, the various speakers only output a magnetic detection notification sound, without outputting a disconnection notification sound for the game board. Furthermore, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light only in a severe abnormality notification mode, without controlling them to emit light in a minor abnormality notification mode. In other words, the disconnection notification means emits a notification with some of its functions restricted, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means emits a notification without any function restrictions.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected, the game cannot be started. Although the risk of loss to the amusement parlor is low, the remaining time until the game can be started is short, and if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism, it could be considered fraudulent activity directly related to the prize balls awarded. While there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is taking place, if the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected, the likelihood of fraudulent activity directly affecting the prize payout is low. Therefore, while warnings are issued by both the disconnection notification means and the magnetic detection anomaly notification means, the magnetic detection anomaly notification means, which notifies of the possibility of fraudulent activity directly affecting the prize payout, is not restricted in its function. In other words, the notification by the magnetic detection anomaly notification means is given priority over the notification by the disconnection notification means.

Furthermore, since power-on operation verification is crucial for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, it may be possible to perform power-on operation verification with some functions restricted even when a magnetic detection anomaly notification is being issued. For example, the LEDs may be controlled to emit light in the manner specified during power-on operation verification, while the movable parts may not be operated in the manner specified during power-on operation verification. Alternatively, the movable parts may be operated in the manner specified during power-on operation verification, while the LEDs may not be controlled to emit light in the manner specified during power-on operation verification. This allows for the execution of power-on operation verification, even with some functions restricted, thereby preventing the oversight of abnormal behavior and avoiding disadvantages to amusement parlors and players.

[25-16e. Summary E]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided to the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided to the game frame side component; a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner; a sound output unit capable of producing a predetermined sound output; and a performance control board for controlling the performance of the game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board notifies of a specific light-emitting unit among the light-emitting units when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected. The system includes a disconnection notification means capable of emitting light in a specific mode and outputting a disconnection notification sound from the sound output unit, a volume changing means capable of changing the volume of the sound output unit in response to a first operation, and a brightness changing means capable of changing the brightness of the specific light-emitting unit in response to a second operation. When the disconnection notification means is outputting the disconnection notification sound, the volume of the disconnection notification sound can be changed in response to the first operation. On the other hand, when the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the disconnection notification mode, even if the second operation is performed, the brightness of the disconnection notification mode will not be changed and the unit will emit light at a constant brightness.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a. It also features various LEDs as light-emitting elements in the door frame unit (including the left-side door frame unit 420, right-side door frame unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the left-side game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR. It also includes various speakers as sound output elements (such as the top center speaker, top side speakers, and the main frame speaker on the main frame 4).

Furthermore, the system has the function of controlling the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances. As a means of notifying disconnected, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in a disconnected state, the performance display device 1600 will display a disconnected error notification, or various speakers will output a game board disconnected notification sound, or the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 4 provided on the door frame 3) will be used as a specific light-emitting part. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a which has the following functions: 20. A function to control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., to a minor abnormality notification illumination pattern; a function to adjust the volume of various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 as a volume adjustment means; and a function to adjust the brightness of various LEDs in the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 as a brightness adjustment means.

Furthermore, when a game board disconnection notification sound is output from various speakers, the volume of the game board disconnection notification sound can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227. However, when the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification mode, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) will emit light at a predetermined constant brightness without changing its brightness.

In other words, even when the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected, the volume of the game board disconnection notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted. However, the brightness of the minor abnormality notification flashing patterns of the various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 on the door frame 3), which are specific light-emitting parts, cannot be changed. This allows the player to be aware that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected, while avoiding excessive discomfort to the player, through the control of the minor abnormality notification flashing patterns of the various LEDs on the door frame unit, which are specific light-emitting parts.

[25-16f. Summary F]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame that is openable and closable on the main frame; a game board side component that is detachably provided on the game frame side component; a lottery means that performs a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting determination state control means that controls the lottery means to a setting determination state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; and a performance control board that controls the performance of the game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is composed of the first game board side component The system includes a connection determination means for determining whether the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected, and a disconnection notification means that can notify when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, wherein the disconnection notification means can notify at a first timing after the end of the setting determination state, and can notify at a second timing later than the first timing, which is stronger than the first notification.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a which serves as a lottery means for executing a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the system to a setting determination state (the state from when the setting value change permission condition is met until the setting value change termination condition is met) in which the setting values related to the lottery can be determined.

Furthermore, the system has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR to execute game performances, and a connection determination means that performs ID determination processing (step S1003). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the following functions: displaying a disconnection error notification on the performance display device 1600 when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected; outputting a game board disconnection notification sound from various speakers; and controlling the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode.

Then, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, at the first timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check starts), the display device 1600 will display a disconnection error notification, while the various speakers will not output a game board disconnection notification sound. Without controlling the illumination of the various LEDs (such as the 450) to a minor abnormality notification pattern, at a second timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check is completed), the display device 1600 displays a disconnection error notification pattern, outputs a disconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and controls the illumination of the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification pattern.

In other words, if it is determined that the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are not electrically connected after the setting change process is completed, the game cannot be started, and therefore the risk of loss to the pachinko parlor is low. However, because the remaining time until the game can be started is short, a first notification is issued at the first timing, only on the performance display device 1600, to warn the user. The various speakers and LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, which are provided on the door frame 3) do not warn the user. Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. If a notification is issued by the disconnection notification means during the execution of this power-on operation check, the user's attention may be drawn to the notification, and if abnormal behavior occurs that is different from the normal behavior, there is a risk of missing the abnormal behavior. Overlooking unusual behavior could result in disadvantages for both the amusement parlor and the players. According to the above invention, it is possible to concentrate on checking the operation at power-on, thus preventing the oversight of abnormal behavior and avoiding disadvantages for the amusement parlor and the players.

Furthermore, if the connection status does not improve after the first timing using the display of the performance display device 1600 to issue a warning, a second notification is issued at the second timing, using the display of the performance display device 1600 in addition to the output of various speakers and the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit. This allows the notification to be gradually strengthened according to the degree of risk of harm, thereby suppressing the occurrence of harm. In other words, when the situation is not such that gameplay can begin (e.g., during power-on operation checks), the risk of harm to the arcade is low, so a first notification is issued using only the performance display device 1600. When the situation is such that gameplay can begin (e.g., after power-on operation checks are completed), the risk of harm to the arcade is high, so a second notification is issued using multiple notification means (performance means), including the display of the performance display device 1600 in addition to the output of various speakers and the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit. This allows the notification to be gradually strengthened to issue a warning, thereby suppressing the occurrence of harm.

[25-16g. Summary G]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided to the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided to the game frame side component; a lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fulfillment of lottery conditions; a setting determination state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting determination state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner; a display unit capable of displaying an image; a movable unit that operates in a predetermined manner; and a performance control board that controls the light-emitting unit, the display unit and the movable unit, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component The system includes connection determination means for determining whether or not the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected, unconnected notification means which can display a notification display mode on the display unit when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and can also make a specific light-emitting unit among the light-emitting units emit light in a notification emission mode, and drive control means which can operate the movable part in a specific mode after the end of the setting determination state, wherein when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the notification display mode is displayed while the movable part is operating in the specific mode, while the notification emission mode is not emitted while the movable part is operating in the specific mode.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment consists of a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on the island equipment (not shown) of a gaming hall, a door frame 3 that can open and close the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that can open and close the door frame 3 and is also attached to the outer frame 2. The gaming frame side component includes a detachable split gaming board 5A, consisting of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a which serves as a lottery means that performs a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and a setting determination state control means that performs a setting change process to control the system to a setting determination state (the state from when the setting value change permission condition is met until the setting value change termination condition is met) in which setting values related to the lottery can be determined. Furthermore, the light-emitting section includes various LEDs in the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, all provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the left game board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the right game board 5AR. The display section includes a performance display device, and the movable section includes movable bodies provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all provided on the left game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A).

Furthermore, the following LEDs are mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the left game board 5AL, and on the decorative circuit board provided on the right game board 5AR, and on the left game board 5AL The system has a function to control movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, which are located on the left side of the divided game board 5AL, to execute game effects, a function to execute an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means, and an ID determination process as an unconnected notification means In step S1003, if it is determined that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the display device 1600 will display a disconnection error notification, output a game board disconnection notification sound from various speakers, and control the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality notification illumination mode, and after the setting change process is completed, The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the function of operating the movable parts provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, which are provided on the left game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) in the operating mode when the power is turned on and operation is confirmed.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all located on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) are operated in the same manner as during the power-on operation check. During this period, the display device 1600 displays a disconnection error notification, while the various LEDs on the door frame unit are not controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification mode.

In other words, the power-on operation check is crucial for verifying whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. However, if an unconnected notification is issued during this power-on operation check, attention may be diverted to the notification, potentially causing an abnormal behavior to be overlooked. Overlooking such abnormal behavior could result in disadvantages for the amusement parlor and players. According to the above invention, concentration on the power-on operation check is possible, preventing the overlooking of abnormal behavior and thus avoiding disadvantages for the amusement parlor and players.

Furthermore, as part of the operation mode during power-on operation check, some or all of the movable parts provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc., provided on the left game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) may be exposed in front of the performance display device 1600. In this case, it becomes easier to notice the disconnection error notification displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[25-16h. Summary H]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
A special state generating means (the part of the main control MPU 1310a that executes the RAM clear process (step S38)) is provided, which can generate a special state (a state in which the RAM clear process (step S38) and power-on operation check are performed) based on a predetermined special operation (an operation that satisfies the conditions for executing the initialization process),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The system includes notification means (for example, one or any combination of several (including all) of the following: various speakers, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs, etc.) that can notify when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.
The notification means is,
Static notifications whose notification method does not change over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers with constant pitch and volume, fixed notification displays on the performance display device 1600, and light emission from various LEDs with constant light intensity and color),
It is possible to implement dynamic notifications in which the notification method changes over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers that change pitch and volume, notification displays in the performance display device 1600 that change content, and light emission from various LEDs that changes light intensity and color),
When the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected, static notification may be performed during the special state, and static and dynamic notification may be performed after the special state.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring it in this way, static notifications are made during the special state to prevent interference with work performed during the special state, and dynamic notifications are made after the special state is over to easily alert users that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the system includes display means (e.g., a performance display device 1600) and sound output means (e.g., various speakers) or light-emitting means (e.g., various LEDs),
The notification means may perform static notification by displaying still image information on the display means, and dynamic notification by outputting a notification sound with at least a change in volume from the sound output means, or by emitting a notification light with at least a change in light intensity from the light emission means.
By configuring it in this way, still image information is displayed so as not to interfere with work in special conditions, and after the special condition is gone, the notification sound output from the sound output means and the light emitted from the light emission means make it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the special state may be configured to terminate automatically (without requiring any specific operation) after a certain period of time. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special state, thereby reducing the effort required during the special state in a gaming facility with multiple pachinko machines 1, and shortening the time spent on tasks during the special state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. This configuration allows the special state to be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thereby suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special state.

[25-16i. Summary I]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
The game frame side components include game frame side display means (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3),
The game board side components include game board side display means (for example, a display device 1600, various LEDs mounted on a decorative circuit board provided on the left game board 5AL, etc.),
The game frame-side performance means and the game board-side performance means are controlled by performance control means (for example, peripheral control IC 1510a),
A special state generating means (the part of the main control MPU 1310a that performs the RAM clear process (step S38)) capable of generating a special state (a state in which the RAM clear process (step S38) and power-on operation check are performed) based on a predetermined special operation,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The aforementioned performance control means is
When the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected, the game frame side display means is caused to output a game frame side notification mode (for example, a minor abnormality notification light emission mode), and the game board side display means is caused to output a game board side notification mode (for example, a disconnection error notification display mode in the display device 1600).
If the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special state, the game board side display means will output the game board side notification mode, but the game frame side display means will not output the game frame side notification mode.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring the system in this way, during a special state, the game board-side display means outputs the game board-side notification mode, but the game frame-side display means does not output the game frame-side notification mode, thereby preventing interference with tasks and other activities during the special state.

Furthermore, the performance control means is characterized in that it can cause the game frame side performance means to output a game frame side notification mode after the special state is reached.
By configuring it in this way, after a special state, the game frame side display means can output a game frame side notification mode, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the game board-side presentation means includes a display means (for example, a presentation display device 1600),
The aforementioned game frame-side performance means includes sound output means (e.g., various speakers) or light emission means (e.g., various LEDs),
The performance control means may, if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, cause the display means to display the game board side notification mode, but not cause the sound output means and the light-emitting means to output the game frame side notification mode.
By configuring the system in this way, the display means shows the game board side notification pattern so as not to interfere with work in special conditions, and after the special condition is gone, the sound output means and light output means output the game frame side notification pattern, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the special state may be configured to terminate automatically (without requiring any specific operation) after a certain period of time. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special state, thereby reducing the effort required during the special state in a gaming facility with multiple pachinko machines 1, and shortening the time spent on tasks during the special state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. This configuration allows the special state to be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thereby suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special state.

[25-16j. Summary J]
A gaming machine comprising a game frame (for example, a main frame 4) and a game board (for example, a divided game board 5A),
The aforementioned gaming machine has a first gaming machine state in which the game performance of the gaming machine can be determined (for example, a state in which a setting change process (step S37) is performed),
A second game machine state in which it is possible to play games and which is capable of outputting a specific sound (for example, a RAM clear notification sound) by sound notification means (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of main frame 4, etc.)) (for example, a state in which the RAM clear process (step S38) and power-on operation check are performed),
The machine has a third game machine state in which it is possible to play games (for example, a state in which the game mode is executed after the completion of the RAM clear process (step S38) and the power-on operation check),
The game board comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR),
It is possible to transition from the first gaming machine state to the second gaming machine state, and further, it is possible to transition from the second gaming machine state to the third gaming machine state, and each gaming machine state does not reverse.
The first game board component and the second game board component are each individually fixed to the game frame.
The first game board component consists of multiple boards, including a performance control board (e.g., peripheral control board 1510) equipped with a microprocessor (e.g., peripheral control IC 1510a) that performs game performances.
The second game board component includes a specific circuit board that does not have a microprocessor (for example, a circuit board on which an ID output circuit IDC is mounted),
The aforementioned specific circuit board is provided with an eigenvalue that allows it to be identified as a component of the second game board (for example, an eigenvalue that allows it to be identified as the right-side game board 5AR),
When the first game board component fails to receive the eigenvalue transmitted from the second game board component, resulting in an eigenvalue error state,
In the first gaming machine state, no error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is given.
In the second gaming machine state, error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is performed, but error notification by the sound notification means is not performed.
In the third gaming machine state, error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is performed, including error notification by the sound notification means.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring the system in this way, during the first game machine state in which the game performance of the game machine can be determined, error notifications corresponding to eigenvalue error states are not made to avoid interfering with the determination process. During the second game state in which a specific sound is output by the sound notification means, error notifications by the sound notification means are not made to avoid interfering with the process of confirming whether the sound notification means is functioning correctly. During the third game state in which neither the determination of the game performance of the game machine nor the confirmation of the sound notification means is performed, error notifications corresponding to eigenvalue error states are made, including error notifications by the sound notification means, to prevent overlooking eigenvalue error states.

Furthermore, the performance control board may include an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalues as signals from the specific board, and may be capable of comparing the eigenvalues transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with the eigenvalues it possesses.
By configuring it in this way, the performance control board can determine whether or not an eigenvalue error state is occurring and issue an error notification.

[25-17. Pachinko machine confirmation mode]
Next, a modified example will be described for controlling the transition to a confirmation mode to verify whether various functions and operations of the pachinko machine 1 are normal or possible. Figure 287 is a schematic diagram of the main control board 1310 in the modified example, and Figure 288 is an example of the behavior when the split game board 5A, which consists of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR as a combination of split game boards 5A, is controlled to transition to confirmation mode when it is in a state of compatibility (matching). In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in Figure 287, an operation confirmation switch 1310j with a pressable operation part is located near the center of the lower edge of the main control board 1310 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and can only be operated by staff of the gaming hall. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, if the "confirmation mode transition conditions" are met, the machine is controlled to transition to confirmation mode. The "confirmation mode transition conditions" described above may be that the pressable operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated, or that in addition to the pressable operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j being operated, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, or that in addition to the pressable operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j being operated and the main body frame 4 being open to the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON. In other words, the system may be able to transition to confirmation mode when the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met, such as when the operation confirmation switch 1310j is pressed during power-on or power restoration after a power outage. Alternatively, the system may be able to transition to confirmation mode when the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met, such as when the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the operation confirmation switch 1310j is pressed. Furthermore, the system may be able to transition to confirmation mode when the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met, such as when the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to ON, and the operation confirmation switch 1310j is pressed.

Furthermore, in this example, the confirmation mode includes an external terminal board output confirmation mode for checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal, and various operating parts provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (operating parts such as the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300, volume control button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.), various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, and door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.). The system can be controlled to switch to an operation check mode to verify whether some or all of the various LEDs, speakers, movable parts on the left-side game board 5AL (the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160), and various movable parts on the door frame 3 (the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300), etc., are functioning correctly.

In this example, the transition conditions for the external terminal board output confirmation mode and the operation confirmation mode are different. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, namely that the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to ON, and the press operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated, the system is controlled to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met, namely that the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the press operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated, the system is controlled to transition to the operation confirmation mode. In addition, in this example, the system is always controlled to transition to the operation confirmation mode after transitioning to the external terminal board output confirmation mode. In other words, if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, the system sequentially transitions to the external terminal board output confirmation mode and then to the operation confirmation mode. If the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met, the system transitions only to the operation confirmation mode. Therefore, it is no longer necessary to shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 after the external terminal board output confirmation mode and then restore power when the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met, thus preventing deterioration of work efficiency. Furthermore, since the operation confirmation mode automatically terminates after a certain period, unnecessary operations such as ending the operation confirmation mode are unnecessary even if there is no need to transition to the operation confirmation mode.

Furthermore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, which is that the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the press operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated. This triggers a transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Subsequently, the "external terminal board output confirmation mode termination condition" is met, which is that the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from its rotational position where the setting key switch 1311a was turned ON to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This triggers the termination of the external terminal board output confirmation mode. In other words, the system is designed to switch to the external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by a manager or other administrator of the gaming hall, and then to terminate the external terminal board output confirmation mode and start the operation confirmation mode in response to an operation by a manager or other administrator of the gaming hall while in the external terminal board output confirmation mode.

Here, the installation locations of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall computer differ from one gaming hall to another. The pachinko machine 1 and the hall computer may be installed in separate locations, or the user may have to pass through narrow passages when moving from the pachinko machine 1 to the hall computer. Furthermore, when checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal for multiple pachinko machines 1, the time from fulfilling the conditions for transitioning to the first confirmation mode to arriving at the hall computer's location becomes longer. Therefore, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode is configured to end after a certain period, there is a risk that the external terminal board output confirmation mode will end before the hall computer can confirm whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. Conversely, extending the duration of the external terminal board output confirmation mode will increase the time required for the work. Therefore, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to terminate the external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by a manager or other administrator of the gaming hall, ensuring that the output to the external terminal board 558 is reliably confirmed by the hall computer while preventing delays in the administrator's work.

As shown in Figure 288, in the external terminal board output confirmation mode, an output confirmation signal is output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. By confirming that the output confirmation signal has been received by the hall computer, it is possible to confirm that the signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer is normal. Note that the output confirmation signal is output only during the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the output confirmation signal has been output without confusing it with other signals output from the external terminal board 558.

Furthermore, the output confirmation signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is turned on (output state) when the system is controlled to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and turned off (output stopped state) after a certain period has elapsed since the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode. In other words, the output confirmation signal is not only turned on (output state) during the control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, but also remains on (output state) for a certain period after the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode.

As described above, the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated by an operator such as the manager of the gaming hall. Therefore, if the operator accidentally terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode prematurely, the output period of the output confirmation signal will be shortened, potentially preventing the hall computer installed in the gaming hall from confirming that the output confirmation signal has been received. In such cases, it becomes necessary to shut off and then restore power to the pachinko machine 1 to fulfill the "first confirmation mode transition condition," increasing the workload. In this example, the output confirmation signal continues to be output for a certain period after the termination of the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Therefore, even if the operator accidentally terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode prematurely, the hall computer installed in the gaming hall can reliably confirm that the output confirmation signal has been received.

Furthermore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that launching game ball B is permitted is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and the launching of game balls by the ball launcher 540 is prohibited. Then, after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that launching game ball B is permitted is set to launch permission logic, and the launching of game balls by the ball launcher 540 is permitted. Note that if a process to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, except for a specific area (step S38), is executed after the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that launching game ball B is permitted is set to launch permission logic when the process to clear the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM, except for a specific area (step S38) by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is completed and the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, and the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that launching game ball B is permitted is set to launch permission logic, and the launching of game balls by the ball launcher 540 is permitted.

Thus, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the launching of game balls by the ball launcher 540 is prohibited, thereby stopping the game. This prevents the transmission of a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1) from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the signal confirmation output verification process.

Furthermore, the game may be stopped not only by prohibiting the launch of game balls by the ball launcher 540 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, but also without prohibiting the launch of game balls by the ball launcher 540 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or in addition to prohibiting the launch of game balls by the ball launcher 540 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, by disabling detection by the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2401 (by either disabling detection by the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2401, or disabling detection by the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2401 without executing any processing corresponding to the detection). In this case as well, the display of special symbols can be prevented from starting, thus stopping the game, and preventing a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1) from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the confirmation work of the signal confirmation output.

Furthermore, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is started, an external terminal board output confirmation mode start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the external terminal board output confirmation mode is starting. Upon receiving the output confirmation mode start command, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 displays an output confirmation mode notification pattern (in this example, "Output Confirmation in Progress") on the display device 1600 (this may be displayed until the output confirmation mode ends, or it may be displayed for a certain period before ending). It also repeatedly outputs an output confirmation mode notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Output Confirmation in Progress" and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum configurable volume, or the default volume adjusted by the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be repeatedly output until the output confirmation mode ends, or it may be repeatedly output for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) before stopping the output).

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 illuminates various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR in an output confirmation mode notification illumination pattern corresponding to the output confirmation mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are illuminated in the same color, and the illumination color is switched in a short period of time) (they may remain illuminated in the output confirmation mode notification illumination pattern until the output confirmation mode is terminated, or they may remain illuminated in the output confirmation mode notification illumination pattern for a certain period of time and then turn off or illuminate in a different illumination pattern). This notifies that the output check of the external terminal board 558 is being performed, and allows for verification of whether the output signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is normal. This system provides notification that the output check of the external terminal board 558 is being performed, and allows for verification of whether the output signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is normal.

Furthermore, the volume of the output confirmation mode notification sound output from the various speakers during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume control button 227, but the volume of the output confirmation mode notification sound output during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the output confirmation mode notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers reliably conveys that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558, allowing the player to confirm whether the output signal is normal or not.

Furthermore, the output confirmation mode notification light pattern, which is activated during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As mentioned above, while the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the output confirmation mode notification light pattern, which is activated during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, cannot be adjusted by the player even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness) to activate the output confirmation mode notification light pattern. This ensures that the output confirmation signal is reliably communicated from the external terminal board 558, allowing the player to confirm whether the output signal is normal or not.

Furthermore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, operating the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600. No confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. Since the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, the visibility of the output confirmation mode notification display on the performance display device 1600 is not obstructed by the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness). The confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 does not make the output confirmation mode notification sound difficult to hear. This ensures that the output confirmation signal is reliably communicated from the external terminal board 558.

Furthermore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are all turned off. In other words, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, although the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR constitute a divided game board 5A, during output confirmation, all LEDs on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the LEDs on the right game board 5AR that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are lit. In this way, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the illumination patterns of the LEDs on the left game board 5AL and the LEDs on the right game board 5AR of the divided game board 5A are made different, so that anyone looking at the pachinko machine 1 will feel something is off and immediately realize that the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board, function display unit 1400, and sub-function display unit 2250 of the left-side game board 5AL may be illuminated with a different notification light pattern (e.g., flashing red light) when settings are changed compared to the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information regarding wins and losses, may be illuminated with a notification light pattern when settings are changed. In this case as well, the light patterns of the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR and the LEDs on the left-side game board 5AL can be made different, thus reliably indicating that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits an output confirmation mode termination command to the peripheral control board 1510, notifying it that the external terminal board output confirmation mode has been terminated based on the termination operation of the external terminal board output confirmation mode (in this example, the OFF operation which returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)).

Furthermore, in this example, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 during normal operation (playable state), a door open notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum configurable volume or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this period is shorter than the time required for the operation confirmation mode), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed (however, if the main frame 4 is continuously open relative to the outer frame 2, the output is stopped after being repeated a certain number of times (for example, 5 times)). It is also possible to stop the output when the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or to stop the output when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds; however, this may be shorter than the period from the start to the end of the operation confirmation mode) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, was closed.) Along with this, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the right side game board 5AR are switched in a critical abnormality notification emission mode (in this example, switching between maximum brightness red on and off for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) The critical abnormality notification flashing mode is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from the start to the end of the operation confirmation mode) has elapsed after the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, has been closed (the critical abnormality notification flashing mode may be terminated when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or the critical abnormality notification flashing mode may be terminated after a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) of repeated execution after the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, has been closed, or the critical abnormality notification flashing mode is terminated when the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed and a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode (red with maximum brightness) is terminated. The system may repeatedly control the light emission in a manner that switches between on and off at long intervals (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow flashing mode), and terminate the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the light emission control of the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode, or when it has been repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Furthermore, when the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission control switches to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) ends (when the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, closes), the system controls the light emission of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left-side game board 5AL in a light emission mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the output of door open notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious abnormality notification, which are caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2, are not performed. In other words, if the predetermined "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output confirmation mode notification sound is output from various speakers and the light emission control for the output confirmation mode notification is performed without the output of door open notification sounds from various speakers and the control of the light emission pattern for serious abnormality notification, which are caused by the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, in this example, even during the operation confirmation mode executed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the output of door open notification sounds from various speakers and the light emission control for serious abnormality notification (including the quasi-serious abnormality notification light emission pattern if the light emission control is performed to a quasi-serious abnormality notification light emission pattern after the serious abnormality notification light emission pattern) are not performed due to the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed, after the operation confirmation mode, it becomes possible to output door opening notification sounds from various speakers due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and to control the illumination of the critical abnormality notification (including the semi-critical abnormality notification illumination if illumination control is performed after the critical abnormality notification illumination) . This makes it less likely that errors will occur due to distraction during the verification of the output signal of the external terminal board 558 in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode, causing abnormalities to be overlooked.

Furthermore, if the operation to terminate the external terminal board output confirmation mode is performed, or if the external terminal board output confirmation mode is not executed, and the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met—that is, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2, and the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated—then the operation confirmation mode is performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds).

Specifically, the control of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding wins and losses (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3), controls the LEDs to light up in a predetermined light emission pattern (in this example, an operation confirmation light emission pattern that is performed only in operation confirmation mode and not in game performance), and the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control IC 1510a controls drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., to operate movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during operation confirmation), and controls the output of operation confirmation notification sounds (in this example, notification sounds that are output only in operation confirmation mode and not output during game performances) from various speakers.

In operation confirmation mode, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls various LEDs, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3), and by executing control to light up these LEDs in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (operation confirmation light-emitting pattern), it is possible to confirm whether the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL, the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit can emit light normally. If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is detected, repairs can be made to restore it to a normal state, allowing the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs to be executed as designed, thereby suppressing a decrease in the effect of the effects. Furthermore, in operation confirmation mode, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be illuminated to check for abnormalities. Additionally, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, it is not necessary to illuminate all of them except for those of the sub-function display unit 2250; some LEDs may remain unlit.

Furthermore, in operation confirmation mode, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., to drive the movable bodies (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) to operate in a predetermined operating manner (operating manner during operation confirmation). This allows confirmation of whether the movable bodies provided on the left game board 5AL and the door frame 3 are able to operate normally. If an abnormality (failure to operate normally) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore them to a normal state, enabling the movable performance by the movable bodies to be executed as designed, thereby suppressing a decrease in the performance effect. In the operation confirmation mode, it is sufficient to operate at least one of the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL and the movable parts provided on the door frame 3 in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during operation confirmation). Furthermore, the operating mode during operation confirmation may only be executable during the operation confirmation mode. In this case, the operating mode during operation confirmation can be identified without being confused with the operating mode executed in the variation effects related to the variation display of special symbols, thus making it easy to determine whether the movable parts are functioning correctly.

Furthermore, when the movable parts are operated in operation confirmation mode, the LEDs that illuminate the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, and the LEDs that illuminate the rear left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 (LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314) and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 (LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear right movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324) are used. The system controls the illumination of LEDs that illuminate and decorate the front front lower decorative element 3161 of the front front lower decorative unit 3160, and multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, using an operation confirmation illumination pattern. This allows for confirmation not only of the operation of the movable parts but also of whether the LEDs mounted on the movable parts are able to illuminate normally.

Furthermore, in operation confirmation mode, by executing a control that outputs an operation confirmation notification sound from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum configurable volume or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510), it is possible to confirm whether or not the various speakers are able to output sound normally. If an abnormality (failure to output sound normally) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing the various speakers to output sound as designed, thus suppressing a decrease in the effect. In this example, by sequentially executing the following controls, the speaker that is malfunctioning can be immediately identified: the pair of top center speakers located on the front of the door frame top base 451 output "Top center speaker," the left top side speaker located to the left outside the top center speaker output "Top left speaker," the right top side speaker located to the right outside the top center speaker output "Top right speaker," and the main frame speaker 622 output "Bottom speaker."

Furthermore, if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated during the operation check mode, a special sound (e.g., "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume (a different volume from the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227, and the volume will not change even if the volume control button 227 is operated) in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228. This allows for confirmation of whether the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are functioning correctly. If an abnormality (such as the special sound not being output) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore the system to a normal state, allowing the player to output sound from the various speakers at their preferred volume. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player experiencing unpleasant sound output from the speakers.

In this example, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume control button 227 until the operation check mode is completed. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the volume output from various speakers can be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227. However, the volume of the operation check notification sound output during operation check mode cannot be adjusted by operating the volume control button 227. Therefore, when operation check mode is started, the operation check notification sound is output at a predetermined volume, allowing the system to confirm whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally, and enabling immediate detection of abnormalities (failure to output sound normally).

Furthermore, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the operation check mode is completed. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the light emission pattern controlled during the operation check mode cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the operation check mode is started, the LEDs on the various decorative circuit boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), allowing for confirmation of whether the various LEDs can emit light normally. This enables immediate detection of abnormalities (failure to emit light normally).

Furthermore, when the operation confirmation mode is started, the display device 1600 displays the display mode, i.e., decorative patterns and the background image during normal operation (when the game is playable). This allows confirmation of whether the display device 1600 can display images correctly. If an abnormality (failure to display images correctly) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing the display device 1600 to display images as designed, thus preventing a decrease in the effectiveness of the performance.

Furthermore, the display device 1600 is configured so that the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated until the operation confirmation mode is completed. Also, since the display device 1600 does not display the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated multiple times. In addition, if the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated during the operation confirmation mode, the display device 1600 may be configured to display a special message that is only shown during the operation confirmation mode. For example, if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated during the operation check mode, a special indication showing that the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 has been successfully received may be displayed. This allows for confirmation of whether the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 can be properly operated. If an abnormality is detected (i.e., the special indication is not displayed), repairs can be performed to restore the system to a normal state, allowing the player to output sound from the various speakers at their preferred volume or illuminate the various LEDs at their preferred brightness. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player experiencing unpleasant volume levels or LED illumination.

Furthermore, when an operating button located on the front of the pachinko machine 1, such as the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228, is operated during the operation confirmation mode, the light emission color of the LEDs (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses) controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode, may be changed. These LEDs include those mounted on the decorative board on the left game board 5AL, those mounted on the decorative board on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) are all controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which emits light in the operation confirmation mode. For example, when the volume control button 227 with the "+" sign is operated, the various LEDs controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode may be changed to "red," when the volume control button 227 with the "-" sign is operated, the various LEDs controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode may be changed to "green," when the light intensity control button 228 with the "+" sign is operated, the various LEDs controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode may be changed to "blue," and when the light intensity control button 228 with the "-" sign is operated, the various LEDs controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode may be changed to "white." This allows for verification of whether the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 are functioning correctly. If an abnormality (such as the failure to display a special indication) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore them to normal operation. This allows for the output of sound from the speakers at the player's preferred volume and the illumination of the LEDs at the player's preferred brightness, thereby suppressing the decrease in game enjoyment caused by the player experiencing unpleasant volume levels or LED illumination. Furthermore, it allows for verification of whether the illumination of the lights corresponding to the operation of the volume control button 227 and the light intensity control button 228 is functioning correctly.

Furthermore, if the performance control unit 301 of the performance control unit 300 is operated during the operation confirmation mode, the performance control unit 350 may be vibrated or moved upward from its normal position. In this case as well, it is possible to confirm that the operation of the performance control unit 301 of the performance control unit 300 has been properly received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect due to the performance not being executed in response to the operation of the performance control unit 301 of the performance control unit 300 because the operation was not received.

Furthermore, the operation check mode is controlled to transition according to the administrator's operation, and unlike the external terminal board output check mode described above, it checks whether some or all of the devices installed on the pachinko machine 1 are functioning correctly in the vicinity of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the risk of the administrator overlooking the operation of the devices installed on the pachinko machine 1 is low. Also, if the operation check mode were configured to terminate according to the administrator's operation, further operation would be required after the check, resulting in increased work time. Therefore, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to automatically terminate the operation check mode after a certain period of time has elapsed, preventing delays in the administrator's work.

[25-17a. Pachinko machine verification mode in case of non-conformity]
Next, an example of the behavior when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to switch to a confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) when the combination of the split game boards 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board without a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 with a microprocessor)) is incompatible (incompatible state) will be explained with reference to Figure 289. In the following, only the compatible state and parts that differ from the above-described embodiment will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As shown in Figure 289, if the ID determination process (step S1003) performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR. The electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off) regardless of whether or not the external terminal board output confirmation mode is active.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal without sending an incompatible error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode. That is, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode and for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal in the same way as when it is compatible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transmission of an incompatible error signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the verification process of the output confirmation signal.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the external terminal board 558 does not output an incompatible error signal indicating that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, even during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the output confirmation signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output confirmation mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, that is, for a certain period during the operation confirmation mode. Therefore, if an incompatible error signal is output during the operation confirmation mode, the incompatible error signal and the output confirmation signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the signal input to the hall computer is an incompatible error signal or an output confirmation signal, and there is a risk that it will become difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal or not. Therefore, in this example, the external terminal board 558 is configured not to output a non-conformity error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the operation confirmation mode, and the non-conformity error signal can be output after the operation confirmation mode is completed. Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the non-conformity error signal may be configured not to output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether the operation confirmation mode is active or not. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 may be notified that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), it does not notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated (until the output confirmation mode termination command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). That is, during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the various LEDs (some or all) of the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed in a compatible state (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be identical with only some differences).

When the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the main control MPU 1310a sends an output confirmation mode end command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts the operation confirmation mode. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the output confirmation mode end command, it controls various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed when the system was compliant (they may be completely identical, or almost all of them may be identical with only some differences). Meanwhile, the performance display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or background images for normal operation (when the system is ready to play), but instead displays an abnormal background image (for example, black) on the entire surface and the message "Right side game board non-compliant error occurred" as a non-compliant error notification display on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the combination of the split game boards 5A is non-compliant.

In other words, when the operation confirmation mode is started, the LEDs (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about wins and losses, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light emission pattern (in this example, this is done only in operation confirmation mode and is performed in game effects) in the same way as when the operation confirmation mode was performed during compatibility (it may be completely identical, or it may be almost entirely identical with only some differences). The system performs the following actions: control to illuminate in a specific operation confirmation mode (a mode of illumination that does not occur during gameplay); control to operate movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation mode during operation confirmation); and control to output an operation confirmation notification sound (in this example, a notification sound that is output only in operation confirmation mode and not output during gameplay) from various speakers.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated during the operation confirmation mode, a special sound (for example, "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume (a different volume from the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227, and the volume will not change even if the volume control button 227 is operated) in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228.

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs other than the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are also affected. The display device 1600, which drives the movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear upper display unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower display unit 3300, and the rear front lower center decorative element 3161 of the rear front lower display unit 3160, etc., provided on the left side of the game board 5AL), various speakers, volume control buttons 227, and light intensity control buttons 228, is configured to display "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as a non-conformity error notification display mode, thereby notifying that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible. This allows notification of the incompatible combination of the split game boards 5A without interfering with the verification work in operation confirmation mode.

Thus, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, during the operation confirmation mode, only the display device 1600 will display "Right game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification display mode, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information related to wins and losses among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 provided on the door frame 3) The various LEDs on the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the plate unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., as well as the various movable parts provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left game board 5AL, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and the various speakers are controlled in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode is executed when the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, rather than being controlled in a manner that notifies that the combination is incompatible.

Therefore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, it is possible to confirm whether the movable body provided on the left game board 5AL is functioning correctly. If an abnormality (failure to function correctly) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing the movable body to perform the movable effects as designed, thus suppressing a decrease in the effect of the performance. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the movable body are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation mode without being controlled to a turned-off state. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are functioning correctly, and if an abnormality (failure to emit light correctly) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing it to emit light as designed, thus suppressing a decrease in the effect of the performance.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses, are not controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification emission mode that indicates that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, but rather to emit light in an operation confirmation emission mode. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the LEDs, excluding those in the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding win/loss results, are functioning correctly. If an abnormality (failure to light up correctly) is detected during this check, repairs can be performed to restore the LEDs to their normal state, thus preventing a decrease in the visual effect. Furthermore, it prevents the high-brightness illumination of the critical abnormality notification from hindering the visibility of the movable parts on the left-side game board 5AL, or from obscuring the illumination of the LEDs mounted on those movable parts, thus preventing interference with verification work.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, it outputs an operation confirmation notification sound without outputting a game board incompatibility notification sound. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the various speakers can output sound normally, and if an abnormality (failure to output sound normally) is found during the confirmation of whether they can output sound normally, repairs can be made to restore them to a normal state, allowing the various speakers to output sound as designed, thus suppressing a decrease in the performance effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, a special sound is output when the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 can properly receive input. If an abnormality (no special sound output) is detected during this confirmation, repairs can be performed to restore the system to a normal state, allowing the player to output sound from the various speakers at their preferred volume. This suppresses the reduction in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player receiving sound from the various speakers at an unpleasant volume.

Furthermore, in the operation confirmation mode, the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which have been determined to be unsuitable, are not only not operated in a predetermined operating manner (operating manner during operation confirmation), but the movable parts (the rear upper display unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the rear unit 5A) that operate in a predetermined operating manner (operating manner during operation confirmation) in the operation confirmation mode performed when the combination of split game boards 5A is suitable are also not operated. The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301, which is provided on the door frame unit and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), are also prevented from operating in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during operation confirmation). (Examples include the movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, etc.)

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, even if the operation confirmation mode is started, the control to light up the LEDs on the right game board 5AR that were determined to be incompatible in the operation confirmation emission mode, or the control to operate the movable parts in the operation confirmation operation mode will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation section 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed. This prevents damage to the movable parts or door frame unit due to operation in a manner different from its intended use, and also prevents failure of the drive motors and solenoids that operate the movable parts. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same predetermined illumination manner as in the case of compliance. This makes it possible to determine that the operation confirmation mode is being executed correctly.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, where the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that performs the ID determination process (step S1003) is mounted is located (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is started. Furthermore, LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided on the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation emission mode. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operation confirmation mode, and the LEDs provided on the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right game board 5AR is in a non-conforming state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided on the movable parts of the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc., which are provided on the left game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) will not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation emission mode, and the ID determination process (step S1003) If the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be disconnected, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc., provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A) may be controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation pattern so that it is possible to determine whether it is in a non-compliant state or disconnected state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, when the operation confirmation mode is started, the control to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), is not performed. However, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same way as normally (when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the operation confirmation mode is executed, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided on the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation emission mode, just as if the combination of the divided game boards 5A were determined to be compatible. Note that the performance operation unit 300 may also be a specific door frame unit targeted for ID determination. In this case as well, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the performance operation unit 300 or a combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the control to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed, while the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided on the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation emission mode.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation emission mode. Similarly, some movable parts may not be operated in the operation confirmation mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs provided on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc., provided on the movable parts provided on the door frame unit may not operate or drive in operation confirmation mode).

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the right-side game board 5AR, which was determined to be incompatible, and part or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be deactivated until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, the movable parts may operate in a manner different from their intended operation, preventing damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit, and preventing failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable parts.

Furthermore, once the operation confirmation mode ends (the operation confirmation illumination pattern by the LED ends and is turned off or illuminated in a predetermined illumination pattern, and the operation confirmation pattern for the movable body ends and is in standby mode (stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the non-conformity error notification pattern on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board non-conformity notification sound (an announcement voice saying "A non-conformity error has occurred on the right game board. Turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (repeated a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds)). Along with a mechanism that may stop outputting after repeated output, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification mode (in this example, a mode that switches between maximum brightness red illumination and extinguishing in a short time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL are controlled to be off. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are made capable of emission control in the same manner as when compliant (they may be illuminated in a predetermined mode).

Furthermore, the game board incompatibility notification sound is not a single, intermittent sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between silent and on states. Additionally, the critical malfunction notification light pattern is not fixed in a constant state, but repeatedly controls between on and off states, changing the light intensity. In other words, various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify that the combination of split game boards 5A is incompatible in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice the incompatibility of the split game boards 5A combination when the operation check mode ends and the game mode, which does not require further checks, begins.

Thus, in this example, when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when controlling the transition to the operation confirmation mode, the system immediately notifies that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible without issuing an abnormality notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 after the operation confirmation mode. In other words, when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, the system outputs a game board incompatible notification sound without outputting a door opening notification sound, regardless of whether the main frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 and whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Furthermore, when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, the system controls the illumination to a serious abnormality notification pattern, but this is not caused by the opening of the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2, but rather by the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. Therefore, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode starts, the light emission control is always set to the critical malfunction notification pattern, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since closing the main unit frame 4.

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the conditions for starting the variable display are met (even if a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 2002 or one of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004)), the display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 etc. provided on door frame 3), and decorations provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be displayed. The system is designed to notify of an abnormality without executing any variable animations using the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is enabled after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, are controlled to emit light in a predetermined pattern based on the fulfillment of the variable display start condition (i.e., a game ball entering the starting gate (either the first starting gate 2002 or one of the first starting gate 2002 and the second starting gate 2004)), enabling the display of information related to winning or losing.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the critical abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board incompatibility notification sound differ depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) state of the divided game boards 5A.

Specifically, if the system does not switch to either the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, and the combination of the divided game boards 5A is found to be incompatible (incompatible), then, based on the commencement of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time. Following this, the system will initiate illumination control of various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) in a critical abnormality notification pattern, and will also begin outputting a game board incompatibility notification sound from various speakers.

On the other hand, when executing either the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, if the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible (incompatible), during the external terminal board output confirmation mode and the operation confirmation mode, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit a severe abnormality warning light, nor will the output of a game board incompatibility warning sound from the various speakers be initiated. However, after the operation confirmation mode, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit will emit a severe abnormality warning light corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR, and the output of a game board incompatibility warning sound from the various speakers will be initiated.

Thus, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, by changing the timing of the light emission control in the critical abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board incompatibility notification sound depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to prioritize the notification of highly important information and suppress the occurrence of malfunctions and fraudulent activities. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, even if fraudulent activity is occurring, the hall computer may not detect it, potentially causing damage to the amusement parlor. Furthermore, if there is a malfunction in the device installed in the pachinko machine 1, it may damage the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, by prioritizing notification over a mismatch (incompatibility) in the combination of the split game boards 5A, it is possible to prevent the escalation of damage and damage to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (incompatible) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the timing at which the performance display device 1600 displays the abnormal background image (e.g., black) and the incompatible error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the performance display device 1600 displays the abnormal background image (e.g., black) and the incompatible error notification display mode at the timing when the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows for prioritizing the execution of notifications of high importance while also enabling the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the background image (e.g., black) displayed during an abnormality in the performance display device 1600, and the display timing of the non-conformity error notification on the performance display device 1600, may be differentiated depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode. In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order, allowing for sequential action, thus ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and addressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is configured to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (either the input of the detection signal is not checked, or even if the input of the detection signal is checked, processing based on that input is not executed), and after the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the control of the operation confirmation mode is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected during the operation confirmation mode by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensors or switches that input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the operation confirmation mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (incompatible) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control of the operation confirmation mode continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and an abnormality is detected during the game mode after the operation confirmation mode by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the detection by the abnormality detection means is invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (incompatible) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation confirmation mode has ended, the detection signal is discarded without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an invalid magnetism. In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation confirmation mode has ended, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then regardless of whether the machine is controlled in external terminal board output confirmation mode or operation confirmation mode, an abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch) will not issue an abnormality notification.

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, the game may proceed with behavior unintended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the arcade and players. Furthermore, since it deviates from the original specifications, it may lead to a loss of player trust. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that the game is stopped. For this reason, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, regardless of whether the system is controlled in external terminal board output confirmation mode or operation confirmation mode, notification is given priority over notifications caused by abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). This prevents the game from being stopped and minimizes harm to the arcade and players.

Furthermore, regardless of whether some LEDs are controlled in external terminal board output confirmation mode or operation confirmation mode, they may be controlled to emit light in different patterns depending on the type of abnormality detection means, etc. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (making light emission control impossible).

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, constantly, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) determine whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running. Alternatively, even if the ID determination process is executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running and it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible, notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may not be provided while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible, then, similar to the case where the system determines whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the performance display device 1600 will display a notification that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the operation confirmation mode. However, the various speakers and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will not output a game board incompatible notification sound or light up in a serious abnormality notification pattern to indicate that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible. Instead, the system may configure the system to output a game board incompatible notification sound and light up in a serious abnormality notification pattern to indicate that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode is activated.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch) detects an abnormality during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, abnormality notification based on detection during the external terminal board output confirmation mode by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and during the operation confirmation mode the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects this, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, prioritizing this notification over notification of detection by the abnormality detection means. Notification of detection by the abnormality detection means may then be given only when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible.

[25-17b. Confirmation mode for pachinko machines when not connected]
Next, we will explain an example of the behavior when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to switch to a confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) when the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL (disconnected state) due to the absence of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR (inability to confirm the input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) and malfunctions such as short circuits or open circuits occur in the transmission path that transmits various signals, with reference to Figure 290. In the following, we will only explain the parts that differ from the above-described embodiment, such as when the machine is compliant or non-compliant, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in Figure 290, in the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, that is, if the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, then the control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR. Therefore, the electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR will be in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs will be turned off), regardless of whether or not the external terminal board output confirmation mode is active. Note that if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may choose not to output a control signal to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode and for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal without outputting a disconnection error signal indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. In other words, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode and for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal in the same manner as when it is compliant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the transmission of a disconnection error signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the verification process of the output confirmation signal.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the external terminal board 558 does not output a disconnection error signal indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, even during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the output confirmation signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output confirmation mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, that is, for a certain period during the operation confirmation mode. Therefore, if a disconnection error signal is output during the operation confirmation mode, the disconnection error signal and the output confirmation signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the signal input to the hall computer is a disconnection error signal or an output confirmation signal, and there is a risk that it will become difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal or not. Therefore, in this example, the external terminal board 558 is configured not to output a disconnection error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the operation confirmation mode, and the disconnection error signal can be output after the operation confirmation mode is completed. Alternatively, if the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the disconnection error signal may be configured not to be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether the operation confirmation mode is active or not. In this case, the pachinko machine 1 may provide notification to indicate that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, it does not notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated. That is, during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the various LEDs (some or all) of the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the left-side door frame unit 420, right-side door frame unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed upon successful completion (they may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences).

Then, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be identical with only some differences). In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the performance display device 1600 in the same manner as during compatibility (decorative patterns, background images for normal play, etc.), and also displays "Right side game board unconnected error occurred" on the performance display device 1600 as an unconnected error notification, informing that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

In other words, when the operation confirmation mode is started, the LEDs (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about wins and losses, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light emission pattern (in this example, this is done only in operation confirmation mode and is performed in game effects) in the same way as when the operation confirmation mode was performed during compatibility (it may be completely identical, or it may be almost entirely identical with only some differences). The system performs the following actions: control to illuminate in a specific operation confirmation mode (a mode of illumination that does not occur during gameplay); control to operate movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation mode during operation confirmation); and control to output an operation confirmation notification sound (in this example, a notification sound that is output only in operation confirmation mode and not output during gameplay) from various speakers.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, if the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated during the operation confirmation mode, a special sound (for example, "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume (a different volume from the volume set according to the operation of the volume control button 227, and the volume will not change even if the volume control button 227 is operated) in response to the operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228.

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs other than the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, etc. The display device 1600, which does not interfere with the operation check of the movable parts (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.) of the rear unit 3000, various speakers, volume control button 227, and light intensity control button 228, is configured to display "Right game board disconnection error occurred" as a disconnection error notification display mode to notify that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected. This allows notification that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected without interfering with the check operation in operation check mode.

Thus, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, during the operation confirmation mode, only the display device 1600 will display "Right-side game board disconnection error occurred" as a disconnection error notification display mode, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information related to wins and losses among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 provided on the door frame 3) The various LEDs on the right side unit 430 of the door frame, the plate unit 200, and the top unit 450 of the door frame, etc., as well as the various movable parts provided on the left game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left game board 5AL, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and the various speakers are controlled in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (it may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences), without being controlled in a manner that indicates that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected.

Therefore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, it is still possible to check whether the movable body on the left-side game board 5AL is functioning correctly. If an abnormality (failure to function correctly) is detected, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing the movable body to perform its effects as designed. This suppresses a decrease in the effectiveness of the effects. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the movable body are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation mode without being controlled to a turned-off state. This prevents the inability to check whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are functioning correctly. If an abnormality (failure to emit light correctly) is detected during this check, repairs can be performed to restore it to a normal state, allowing it to emit light as designed. This suppresses a decrease in the effectiveness of the effects.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding wins and losses, are not controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification emission mode that indicates that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, but rather to emit light in an operation confirmation emission mode. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the LEDs, excluding those in the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding the outcome of the game, are functioning correctly. If an abnormality (failure to light up correctly) is detected during this check, repairs can be performed to restore the LEDs to their normal state, thus preventing a decrease in the visual effect. Furthermore, it prevents the high-brightness illumination of minor abnormality warnings from hindering the operation of the movable parts on the left-side game board 5AL, or from obscuring the illumination of the LEDs mounted on those movable parts, thus preventing interference with verification work.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, it outputs an operation confirmation notification sound without outputting a game board disconnection notification sound. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the various speakers can output sound normally, and if an abnormality (failure to output sound normally) is found during the confirmation of whether they can output sound normally, repairs can be made to restore them to a normal state, allowing the various speakers to output sound as designed, thus suppressing a decrease in the performance effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, a special sound is output when the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is operated. This prevents the inability to confirm whether the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 can properly receive input. If an abnormality (no special sound output) is detected during this confirmation process, repairs can be performed to restore the system to a normal state, allowing the player to output sound from the various speakers at their preferred volume. This suppresses the reduction in the enjoyment of the game caused by the player receiving sound from the various speakers at an unpleasant volume.

Furthermore, in operation confirmation mode, the operation confirmation mode is not only not performed for drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR that are determined to be disconnected and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also for drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301, which is provided on the door frame unit of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, then even if the operation confirmation mode is started, the control to light up the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR in the operation confirmation emission mode and the control to operate the movable parts in the operation confirmation mode will not be performed (no control signal will be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or it will not be possible to perform these actions (a control signal will be output, but no control signal will be input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the control to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid provided on the plate unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300), which is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), and to operate the performance operation section 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300 will not be performed.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, there is a risk that some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit, which are not subject to ID determination, may also be poorly connected. This could cause the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to change into a signal different from the intended one due to noise, etc., and the movable parts to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable parts provided on the door frame unit and operated by the drive motor or drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), are not driven. This prevents damage to the movable parts or the door frame unit due to the movable parts operating in an unintended manner, and also prevents failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable parts. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same predetermined illumination pattern as in the case of compliance. This makes it possible to determine that the operation confirmation mode is being executed correctly.

On the other hand, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL, where the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that performs the ID determination process (step S1003) is mounted is located (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and the rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) operate in the same way as usual (when it is determined that the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is started. Furthermore, LEDs mounted on the circuit boards provided on the movable parts of the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation emission mode. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative part 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200, the rear left movable decorative part 3301 and rear right movable decorative part 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative part 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, all located on the left-side game board 5AL of the split game board 5A) are operated in the operation confirmation mode, and the LEDs provided on the movable parts provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation mode. This makes it easy to identify the game board on which the peripheral control board 1510 is located (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) of the split game board 5A.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the control process (step S1003) does not drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (the plate unit 200 in this example), which is not subject to ID determination, to operate the performance operation unit 301. However, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board of the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same way as usual (when the combination of split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected when the operation confirmation mode is executed, the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided on the performance operation unit 300 will be controlled to emit light in the same operation confirmation emission pattern as when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation emission mode. Similarly, some movable parts may not be operated in the operation confirmation mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs provided on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc., provided on the movable parts provided on the door frame unit may not operate or drive in operation confirmation mode).

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the split game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR, which was determined to be unconnected, and part or all of the movable parts operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., which are provided on the door frame unit not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be prevented from being driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or until the combination of split game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, regardless of whether it is in operation confirmation mode or not. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable parts from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could cause damage to the movable parts or door frame unit, or to prevent the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc., that operate the movable parts from failing.

Furthermore, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends (the operation confirmation light emission mode by the LED ends and is turned off or lit in a predetermined light emission mode, and the operation confirmation mode for the movable body ends and is in standby mode (stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode starts, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will, in addition to displaying the disconnection error notification mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly output a game board disconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right game board is not connected." and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being repeated a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds)). The various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a critical malfunction notification mode (or a semi-critical malfunction notification mode if the light emission control is performed after the critical malfunction notification mode). Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be off. Meanwhile, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, are made capable of emission control in the same manner as during normal operation (they may be illuminated in a predetermined manner).

Furthermore, the notification sound for unconnected game boards is not a single, intermittent sound (e.g., "beep"), but rather consists of multiple sounds with different pitches, and is repeatedly controlled between silent and on states. Additionally, the critical malfunction notification light pattern is not fixed in a constant state, but repeatedly controls between on and off states, changing the light intensity. In other words, various speakers and LEDs are designed to notify the right-side game board 5AR of the fact that it is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL in a dynamic manner, with changes in pitch, volume, and light intensity over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the operation check mode ends and the game mode, which does not require any further checks, begins.

Thus, in this example, when the system transitions to operation confirmation mode in an unconnected state without an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, the various speakers issue an abnormality notification corresponding to the unconnected state of the right-side game board 5AR. Meanwhile, the various LEDs (some or all) on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., located on the door frame 3) issue an abnormality notification corresponding to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, while the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR each issue an abnormality notification, the underlying abnormalities (the various speakers issue an abnormality notification due to unconnection, while the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit board on the right-side game board 5AR issue abnormality notifications due to the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2) are different.

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the main body frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 during the operation confirmation mode, a game board disconnection notification sound will be output from the various speakers, and a critical malfunction notification light pattern (or a semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern if the light control proceeds from the critical malfunction notification light pattern to the semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern) will be executed due to the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. While the volume of the game board disconnection notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume control button 227, the light intensity of the critical malfunction notification light pattern (including the semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern if the light control proceeds from the critical malfunction notification light pattern to the semi-critical malfunction notification light pattern) that is controlled due to the main body frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

In this case, based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the display device 1600. Furthermore, even if the scale is changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality flashing mode, which is executed after the flashing control of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (including the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) is completed, is flashed with the light intensity (brightness) changed according to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, if the operation check mode is executed with the right-side game board 5AR unconnected, and the operation check mode ends and the game mode starts, and the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, and the system is controlled to emit light in the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), then during the emission control of the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode), it is possible to adjust the amount of light (luminance) of the emission mode that will be controlled after the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the system controls the emission to emit light in the semi-critical abnormality notification mode after the critical abnormality notification mode) ends. This allows the system to prevent players from being deprived of the opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) even when the light emission is controlled to the critical abnormality notification mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification mode if the light emission control is switched from the critical abnormality notification mode to the semi-critical abnormality notification mode), thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, until the end of the critical abnormality notification flashing mode (or the semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode if the flashing control is performed to a semi-critical abnormality notification flashing mode after the critical abnormality notification flashing mode) is shorter than the period from the start of the operation confirmation mode until the end of the operation confirmation mode, then if the main frame 4 is closed after the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and dish unit provided on the door frame 3) will be affected. The various LEDs (some or all) of the set 200 and the door frame top unit 450, etc., are controlled to emit a minor abnormality notification light immediately after the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts, without being controlled to emit a major abnormality notification light due to the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2. This allows the system to immediately notify that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected based on the LED emission pattern when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode starts.

Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR is not received and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, corresponding to the unconnected state of the right-side game board 5AR.

Specifically, if neither the external terminal board output confirmation mode nor the operation confirmation mode is selected, and there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (indicating an unconnected state), then, based on the commencement of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, the display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time. Following this, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) will begin emitting a minor abnormality notification light, and the various speakers will begin outputting an unconnected game board notification sound.

On the other hand, when executing either the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR (i.e., it is in an unconnected state), then during the external terminal board output confirmation mode and operation confirmation mode, the light control in the minor abnormality notification light pattern and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers will not be initiated due to the unconnected state caused by the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. Instead, after the operation confirmation mode, the light control in the minor abnormality notification light pattern and the output of the game board unconnected notification sound from various speakers will be initiated due to the unconnected state caused by the lack of input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR.

Thus, even if, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the system is considered disconnected because there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, by differentiating the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output timing of the game board disconnection notification sound depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to prioritize the notification of highly important information and suppress the occurrence of malfunctions and fraudulent activities. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, even if fraudulent activity is occurring, the hall computer may not detect it, potentially causing damage to the amusement parlor. Furthermore, if there is a malfunction in the device installed in the pachinko machine 1, it may damage the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, by prioritizing notification over a mismatch (incompatibility) in the combination of the split game boards 5A, it is possible to prevent the escalation of damage and damage to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and that the machine is in an unconnected state, the timing at which the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display is the same regardless of whether or not the system is controlled to switch to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or to the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side game board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display at the timing when the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows for prioritizing the execution of notifications of high importance while also enabling the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the "Right-side game board disconnection error" display in the display device 1600 may also be varied depending on whether or not the system switches to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode. In this case, the most important information can be notified in order, allowing for sequential action, thus ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and addressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, then even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection is invalidated (either the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether or not a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed).

Specifically, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the system is designed to discard the detection signal without executing an abnormality notification based on the detection of an abnormal magnetic field. That is, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the right-side game board 5AR is considered unconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected in the ID determination process (step S1003), if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality is detected during the operation confirmation mode by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.), that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the operation confirmation mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is considered valid. However, for some abnormality notifications, the abnormality notification is not given during the power-on operation confirmation, but is given after the operation confirmation mode ends.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, and the right-side game board 5AR is not receiving an ID code signal, resulting in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected, if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode, then during that operation confirmation mode, the various LEDs of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a critical abnormality notification pattern due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism, nor will a magnetic detection notification sound (for example, "Magnetic detection error occurred.") be repeatedly output from the various speakers.

When the operation confirmation mode ends, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on door frame 3) are controlled to illuminate in a severe abnormality notification pattern due to the detection of an unauthorized magnet, and a magnetic detection notification sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality notification due to the detection of an unauthorized magnet ends after a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection of the unauthorized magnet. When the abnormality notification due to the detection of an unauthorized magnet ends, if no other abnormalities are detected, the various LEDs on the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on door frame 3) are controlled to illuminate in a minor abnormality notification pattern due to the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected, and a game board disconnection notification sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

Thus, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode, then control of the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the completion of the operation confirmation mode, an abnormality notification is executed due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetic field.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected in the ID determination process (step S1003), and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality during the operation confirmation mode, then the abnormality notification caused by the detection means takes priority over the notification caused by the disconnection due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the operation confirmation mode ends.

In other words, while the risk of harm from fraudulent activity is low in the operation confirmation mode, the game mode starts immediately after the operation confirmation mode ends, meaning that similar fraudulent activity may occur in the game mode as well. On the other hand, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the likelihood of harm is lower compared to fraudulent activity. Therefore, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and an unconnected state (no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR) occur during the operation confirmation mode, the notification resulting from the detection by the anomaly detection means is prioritized and executed after the operation confirmation mode ends (or, in some cases, during the operation confirmation mode) to suppress the occurrence of harm.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected because there is no input of an ID code signal from it, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc.) inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode, When detection occurs by sensors or switches, the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (including the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all located on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality notification when the operation confirmation mode ends. However, the display device 1600 will issue an abnormality notification (for example, displaying "Magnetic Error Occurred" as a magnetic detection error notification) when detection occurs by the abnormality detection means.

In other words, when the detection signal from the anomaly detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnetic cheat counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to instruct the start of anomaly notification (for example, a magnetic cheat notification command, which is classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation cheating is occurring). Upon receiving this command to instruct the start of anomaly notification (magnetic cheat notification command), the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 starts control related to anomaly notification. Furthermore, even if an anomaly notification resulting from detection by the anomaly detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an anomaly notification resulting from the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected (disconnection error notification display mode) is also displayed on the performance display device 1600. That is, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being disconnected occur simultaneously, the performance display device 1600 displays an anomaly notification for each anomaly.

Furthermore, while the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame release switch are shown as abnormality detection means, the system may configure the display device 1600 not to notify of abnormalities even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode or after the external terminal board output confirmation mode (including during the operation confirmation mode and the game mode). Alternatively, the system may configure all sensors and switches not to not notify of abnormalities even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the operation confirmation mode or after the external terminal board output confirmation mode (including during the operation confirmation mode and the game mode).

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, and no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the operation confirmation mode has ended, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid. However, unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the operation confirmation mode, an abnormality notification is made at the timing when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is initiated, and the right-side game board 5AR is not receiving an ID code signal, resulting in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation confirmation mode has ended, an abnormality notification caused by detection by the abnormality detection means is performed on the performance display device 1600 and on the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is considered disconnected due to the lack of an ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 from an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame open switch, etc., which are sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), then the abnormality notification caused by the detection by the abnormality detection means takes priority over the notification caused by the disconnected state due to the lack of an ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

Therefore, in a game mode where there is a high probability of disadvantage resulting from fraudulent activity, if both detection by the anomaly detection means and a disconnected state (no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR) occur, the notification resulting from the detection by the anomaly detection means will be given priority, thereby suppressing the occurrence of disadvantage.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing is executed) perform an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be performed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running. Similarly, even if the ID determination process is performed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running and it is determined that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is unconnected may not be provided while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is running.

Furthermore, when performing an ID determination process to periodically determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, the system may initiate notification (game board disconnection notification sound, disconnection error notification display, minor abnormality notification light display, etc.) corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR. After this notification is initiated, the system may terminate the notification corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible. Alternatively, the system may initiate notification corresponding to the disconnection of the right-side game board 5AR based on the determination that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR after the ID determination process has determined that the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible, and the ID determination process is performed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR, then, similar to the case where the system determines whether the combination of split game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the display device 1600 will display a notification during the operation confirmation mode indicating that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that it is in an unconnected state, while various speakers Regarding the various LEDs on the car and door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450, all provided on the door frame 3), it is possible to configure the system so that, when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode begins, the system does not output a game board disconnection notification sound or illuminate a minor abnormality notification light to indicate that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the system is disconnected.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if an abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball depletion detection sensor 574, and door frame opening switch) detects an abnormality during the execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection may be considered invalid (either the process to check whether a detection has occurred is not executed, or the process to check whether a detection has occurred is executed, but the processing based on the detection (such as notification) is not executed). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, abnormality notification based on detection during the external terminal board output confirmation mode by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

Furthermore, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, and the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected during the operation confirmation mode, and an abnormality detection means (for example, a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball depletion detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, or other sensors or switches that input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects an abnormality, the display device 1600 will notify both that the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected (no ID code signal input) and that an abnormality detection means has detected an abnormality during the operation confirmation mode. While the system performs the display, the various LEDs on the various speakers and door frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 on the door frame 3) may not notify the system that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that an abnormality has been detected. Instead, when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode begins, the system may prioritize the notification of detection by the abnormality detection means over the notification of the disconnected state due to the lack of ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

In the example described above, the system is configured to switch to the external terminal board output confirmation mode if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and to switch to the operation confirmation mode if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1. However, for example, the system may be configured to switch to the external terminal board output confirmation mode if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, such as when the function display unit 1400 is in standby mode (demonstration) and the special symbol variation display has not been performed for a predetermined period, and to switch to the operation confirmation mode if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the example described above, a new operation confirmation switch 1310j was added, and the operation of the operation confirmation switch 1310j was shown as a "first confirmation mode transition condition" and a "second confirmation mode transition condition." However, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used as a substitute for the operation confirmation switch 1310j. In this case, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be placed on the main control board 1310, or on the payout control board 633 or the power supply board 630. Furthermore, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is used as a substitute for the operation confirmation switch 1310j, the "setting value change permission condition" and the "first confirmation mode transition condition" are set to the same condition, and the "execution condition for the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38)" and the "second confirmation mode transition condition" are set to the same condition. In this case, the external terminal board output confirmation mode may also be executed when the setting change process is executed, and the operation confirmation mode may also be executed when the process of clearing the entire area of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is executed. Furthermore, in this case, the same control as in the example of behavior when changing the setting value in an unconnected state where the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL, such as when the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, or when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side game board 5AR and malfunctions such as short circuits or disconnections occur in the transmission path that transmits various signals, may be executed in the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Additionally, the same control as in the example of behavior when clearing all areas except a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM after the setting change process (step S38) and performing power-on operation confirmation may be executed in the operation confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the output signals, light emission patterns, display patterns, sound output patterns, etc., shown in the multiple embodiments described above are merely examples, and are not limited to those described above, as long as they do not deviate from the concept of this technology (for example, if the output period and output timing are similar). For example, the above example shows an output confirmation signal being output when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is started, but other signals may also be output. For example, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed when a setting change process is performed, a signal indicating that the setting change process has been executed may be output.

[25-17c. Summary]
[25-17c-1. Summary 1]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
A mode output means capable of outputting a predetermined mode (for example, one or any combination of several (including all) of various speakers, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs, etc.),
A mode control means (for example, peripheral control IC 1510a) that controls the mode output means,
A first operating means (for example, an operation confirmation switch 1310j) is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine and is not operable by the player,
A second operating means provided on the front side of the gaming machine that can be operated by the player (for example, the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, a volume control switch, a light intensity control switch, etc.),
A gaming machine equipped with,
The system further includes a special state generating means (a part that performs control of the operation confirmation mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a predetermined special state in response to a special operation on the first operating means,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The mode control means is
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, it is possible to output a notification mode to the mode output means.
In response to the operation of the second operating means during the aforementioned special state, a special mode is output.
If the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, the mode output means will suppress and output the notification mode.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the operation of the second operating means is effective during a special state, and it becomes possible to determine that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected without interfering with the confirmation process of whether or not the operation of the second operating means is effective. As a result, the game can be played without malfunction, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game and avoiding any disadvantage to players or game parlors.

Furthermore, the mode control means may be configured to output the special mode (such as special sounds from various speakers, special modes of the performance display device 1600, or changes in the light emission color of various LEDs) only during the special state. This configuration makes it easy to determine that the operation of the second operation means is effective when a special mode is output during the special state. In other words, it becomes easy to determine that the operation of the second operation means is effective, as the special mode can be identified without being confused with other modes performed during variable performances, etc.

Furthermore, the mode output means may include a display means (e.g., a performance display device 1600) and a sound output means (e.g., various speakers) or a light-emitting means (e.g., various LEDs). If the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special state, the display means may display the notification mode, while the sound output means and light-emitting means may output the special mode without outputting the notification mode. This configuration allows for the output of the special mode without outputting the notification mode from various sound output means and light-emitting means that would interfere with the verification process during the special state, and the notification mode is displayed only on the display means that would not interfere with the verification process during the special state, thereby reducing errors in the verification process.

Furthermore, the aforementioned special state may be configured to terminate automatically after a certain period of time (without requiring any specific operation). This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special state, reducing the effort and time required for verification in amusement facilities with multiple gaming machines.

[25-17c-2. Summary 2]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
A light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner,
A light emission control means (for example, peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the light emission of the light emission unit,
A special light emission state generating means (for example, a part that performs control of the operation confirmation mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) capable of generating a special light emission state based on a predetermined special operation,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in a notification light-emitting mode (for example, a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode).
During the special light-emitting state, the light-emitting unit is made to emit light in a special manner (for example, an operation confirmation light-emitting manner).
Even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special light-emitting state, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in the special mode without emitting light in the notification light-emitting mode.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring the system in this way, it becomes possible to check whether the light-emitting part can light up properly during the special light-emitting state, thus enabling the game to be played without malfunction and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the light emission control means may be capable of emitting light in the special mode only during the special light emission state. This configuration makes it easy to determine whether the light-emitting unit can illuminate normally when it emits light in the special mode during the special light emission state. In other words, it becomes possible to identify the special mode without confusing it with other light emission modes performed during fluctuation effects, etc., thus making it easy to determine whether the light-emitting unit can illuminate normally.

Furthermore, the system may also include a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600). If the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special illumination state, the display means may show a notification pattern, and after the special illumination state, the light-emitting unit may be illuminated in the notification pattern. This configuration allows the light-emitting unit to illuminate in the special illumination pattern without being illuminated in the notification pattern, while the notification pattern is only displayed on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special illumination state. This reduces errors in the confirmation process. Additionally, after the special illumination state, in addition to displaying the notification pattern on the display means, illuminating the light-emitting unit in the notification pattern makes it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the special illumination state may be configured to automatically terminate after a certain period of time (without requiring any specific operation). This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special illumination state, thereby reducing the effort and time required for verification in amusement facilities where multiple pachinko machines are installed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special illumination state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. With this configuration, the special illumination state can be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thus suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special illumination state.

[25-17c-3. Summary 3]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
A sound output unit (for example, various speakers) capable of outputting a predetermined sound pattern,
The sound output unit is controlled by sound output control means (for example, peripheral control IC 1510a),
A special sound output state generating means (for example, a part that performs control of the operation confirmation mode by a peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special sound output state based on a predetermined special operation,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The sound output control means is
When the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected, the sound output unit can output a notification sound (for example, a game board unconnected notification sound).
During the aforementioned special sound output state, the sound output unit outputs a special sound (for example, a special sound).
Even when the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special sound output state, the special sound can be output from the sound output unit without outputting the notification sound output mode.
This configuration allows for confirmation of whether the sound output unit is able to output sound normally during the special sound output state, thereby enabling the game to be played without malfunction and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the sound output control means may be configured to output the special sound only during the special sound output state. This configuration makes it easy to determine that the sound output unit is functioning correctly when the special sound is output during the special sound output state. In other words, it becomes possible to distinguish the special sound without mistaking it for other sound output modes performed during fluctuation effects, thus easily determining that the sound output unit is functioning correctly.

Furthermore, a display means (e.g., a performance display device 1600) may be provided to display a notification pattern on the display means if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special sound output state, and to output a notification sound pattern from the sound output unit after the special sound output state has ended. By configuring it this way, the output of the sound output unit that would interfere with the confirmation work during the special sound output state is output as a special sound without outputting in the notification sound pattern, and the notification pattern is displayed only on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation work during the special sound output state, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation work. Additionally, after the special sound output state has ended, in addition to displaying the notification pattern on the display means, outputting in the notification sound pattern from the sound output unit makes it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the special sound output state may be configured to automatically terminate after a certain period of time (without requiring any specific operation). This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special sound output state, thereby reducing the effort and time required for verification in amusement facilities where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special sound output state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. This configuration allows the special sound output state to be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thereby suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special sound output state.

[25-17c-4. Summary 4]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
A movable part that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, a movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL (the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160, etc.))
A movable control means for controlling the movement of the movable part (for example, a part that controls the movement of a movable body provided on the left side game board 5AL of the peripheral control IC 1510a),
A light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting manner,
Light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emission unit (for example, the part of the peripheral control IC 1510a that controls the light emission of various LEDs),
A special operating state generating means (for example, a part that performs control of the operation confirmation mode by a peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special operating state based on a predetermined special operation,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
When the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in a notification mode (for example, a minor abnormality notification mode).
The aforementioned movable control means is
During the aforementioned special movable state, the movable part is operated in a special movable mode (for example, the operating mode used for operation confirmation).
Even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special movable state, the light-emitting unit will not emit light in the notification light-emitting mode.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring the system in this way, it becomes possible to check whether the movable parts are functioning correctly during the special operating state, thus enabling the game to be played without malfunction and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the movable control means may be configured to operate the movable part in a special movable mode only during the special movable state. This configuration makes it easy to determine if the movable part is functioning normally when it operates in a special movable mode during the special movable state. In other words, it becomes possible to identify the special movable mode without confusing it with other movable modes performed during fluctuation effects, etc., thus easily determining if the movable part is functioning normally.

Furthermore, the system may also include a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600). If the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special operating state, the display means may show a notification pattern, and after the special operating state, the light-emitting unit may be made to emit light in the notification pattern. This configuration allows for the emission of the light-emitting unit in the notification pattern without interfering with the verification process during the special operating state. The notification pattern is displayed only on the display means that does not interfere with the verification process during the special operating state, and the light-emitting unit is made to emit light in the notification pattern after the special operating state. This reduces errors in the verification process. Additionally, after the special operating state, displaying the notification pattern on the display means and emitting light in the notification pattern makes it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

Furthermore, the aforementioned special operating state may be configured to automatically terminate after a certain period of time (without requiring any specific operation). This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special operating state, thereby reducing the effort and time required for verification in amusement facilities where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special movable state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. This configuration allows the special movable state to be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thereby suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special movable state.

[25-17c-5. Summary 5]
A game frame side component having an outer frame (for example, outer frame 2), a main frame (for example, main frame 4) that is openable and closable on the outer frame, and a door frame (for example, door frame 3) that is openable and closable on the main frame,
A game board component (for example, a divided game board 5A) is detachably attached to the game frame component,
Information output means capable of outputting information related to the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a part that outputs information related to the gaming machine, such as the number of gaming balls B actually dispensed by the payout control MPU, from the external terminal board 558 to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side),
A special state generating means (for example, a part that performs control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode of the payout control MPU) that can generate a special state based on a predetermined special operation,
A gaming machine equipped with,
The game board side component comprises a first game board side component (for example, the left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (for example, the right game board 5AR), each individually fixed to the game frame side component.
The aforementioned information output means is
During the aforementioned special state, it is possible to output special information (for example, an output confirmation signal),
Even if, during the special state, the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected, the special information is output without outputting information indicating this disconnection to the outside of the game machine.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to confirm whether or not information related to the gaming machine can be output normally from the information output means during a special state, and information related to the gaming machine such as fraudulent activity can be collected by the hall computer, etc., thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the information output means may be capable of outputting the special information only during the special state.
By configuring it in this way, when special information is output during a special state, it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to output information related to the gaming machine in a normal manner. In other words, because the special information can be confirmed without being mistaken for other information that is executed during fluctuation effects, it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to output information related to the gaming machine in a normal manner.

Furthermore, the information output means may be configured to continue outputting the special information for a predetermined period of time, even after the special state has ended, without outputting the disconnection information to the outside of the gaming machine. This configuration allows the special information to be confirmed even if the special state ends after a short period of time.

A launching means (for example, a ball launching device 540) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined operation,
The system further comprises a launch control means (for example, a launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633) for controlling the launch means,
The launch control means will not launch the game ball even if the operation is performed during the special state.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring it in this way, information about the gaming machine resulting from the launch of a game ball during a special state is output from the information output means, which can prevent it from becoming difficult to determine whether or not special information is being output.

An entry point capable of receiving game balls (for example, the first starting point 2002, the second starting point 2004, etc.),
A lottery means that performs a lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball into the ball entry slot (the part that executes the winning determination process (step S305) of the main control MPU 1310a),
The system further includes a game control means (the part of the main control MPU 1310a that performs special symbol processing, etc.) that controls the progress of the game based on the lottery result of the lottery means,
The game control means stops the game from progressing during the special state, regardless of whether or not a game ball has been received into the ball entry slot.
It is characterized by the following:
By configuring the system in this way, even if a game ball enters the ball entry slot during a special state, the game will not proceed. This suppresses the output of information different from the special information during a special state, and makes it easy to determine whether the information output means is capable of outputting information related to the game machine in a normal manner when special information is output.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 may also have an operating unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side that can receive predetermined operations, and the special state may be generated in response to operations on this operating unit. This configuration allows the special state to be generated when the operating unit, which is difficult for the player to operate, is operated, thereby suppressing the unnecessary generation of the special state.

[26. Delay in the start of specific performances]
Next, we will describe a modified example in which the start timing of a specific performance, performed by the performance display device 1600, etc., can be delayed by the player's operation. Figure 291 is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific performance. In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will be avoided.

In this example, as shown in Figure 291(A), the pachinko machine 1 starts a specific performance when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed after the start of the symbol variation display. Based on the fulfillment of this condition, the specific performance begins. In other words, when a variation pattern command instructing the start of the symbol variation display is received, a timer is started to measure the period since the command was received. When this measured period reaches the predetermined period T1, it is determined that the condition for starting the specific performance has been met, and the specific performance begins. For example, as shown in Figure 291(A), after the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to instruct the start of the variation performance, the performance display device 1600 starts a variation performance such as the variation display of decorative symbols (t1). Then, after the timer starts measuring and the predetermined period T1 has elapsed (t2), the specific performance is executed for a certain period T2.

Furthermore, the specific performance ends after a certain period T2 (t3). Alternatively, a timer may be started after the performance, and the performance may be restarted once the measured period reaches a predetermined period T1. The timer value is reset when period T is reached, and measurement restarts from its initial value (e.g., "0") after the performance ends. If the timer can individually measure the period from start to interruption, the timer value may be cumulatively added without being reset each time period T is reached. Also, the period T1 as the start condition for the specific performance may be set to a single value (the period until the specific performance starts is always constant (e.g., the performance starts when 10 seconds have always elapsed)), or multiple periods may be set (the period until the specific performance starts varies (e.g., one of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or 15 seconds is chosen, and the performance starts when this chosen period has elapsed, or these multiple periods may be switched in a predetermined order, so the period until the specific performance starts is not always constant)).

Furthermore, the system determines whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on the elapsed time since receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, it is not limited to determining whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met by measuring the elapsed time since receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 using a timer, but also includes the period from receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until receiving a start-up entry command (the timer value is reset based on the receipt of the start-up entry command), the period until the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 (the timer value is reset based on the detection of the player's contact by the handle touch sensor 192), The system may also determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met based on any or any combination of the following: the period until the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation (the timer value is reset based on the detection of rotation by the handle rotation detection sensor 189); the period until the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is detected (the timer value is reset based on the detection of the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300); the period until the operation of the volume control button 227 is detected (the timer value is reset based on the detection of the operation of the volume control button 227); the period until the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected (the timer value is reset based on the detection of the operation of the light intensity control button 228). In other words, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met may be made based on whether the elapsed time since receiving the variable pattern command reaches T1, or/or whether the start-out prize command was received before the elapsed time reached T1, whether the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, whether the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, whether a contact operation is detected by the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300, whether the operation of the volume control button 227 is detected, whether the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected, etc.

If the system is configured to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on any one or any combination of the following periods: the period from receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until receiving a start-out prize command; the period until the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; and the period until the rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, then it is possible to prevent so-called "stop-shooting" (stopping the launch of game balls) and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

In this example, the system is configured to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met when a variation pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, it is not limited to this configuration; the system may also determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met when a specific control command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is received. For example, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on the elapsed time since receiving the start-up slot entry command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (measured by a timer) or the elapsed time since receiving the stop display command (measured by a timer). In this case, the timing of the start of the specific performance can be changed, preventing players from becoming bored.

In this example, a specific animation is displayed where characters appear and perform predetermined actions, or where the appearance of characters changes over time. For example, a specific animation is performed where characters appear according to the probability of a big win, and the displayed characters indicate the probability of a big win. However, since this specific animation occurs relatively early after the start of the variation animation, if the player realizes early on that they will not win a big win or that the probability of a big win is low, they may lose interest in the ongoing variation animation. Therefore, in this example of a pachinko machine, the start timing of the specific animation can be delayed by the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to grasp the probability of a big win early on and thus preventing them from losing interest in the variation animation prematurely.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 291(B), if the timer starts measuring before a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the changing pattern display, that is, based on the reception of a changing pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific way (for example, an operation to start a special period that allows delaying the start timing of the specific performance (in this example, a press operation)) before the period T1 in which the start conditions for the specific performance are met has elapsed (t2'), then a special period that allows delaying the start timing of the specific performance is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, press operation section 303)), and the specific performance does not start even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the changing pattern display (t2). Furthermore, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, the performance display device 1600 will display text information different from the abnormality information (e.g., text information indicating the nature of the abnormality, such as "door opening error"), in a static state (e.g., "specific performance delayed"). This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance is being delayed.

Furthermore, the special period ends in response to a special operation of the performance operation unit 300 (for example, an operation to end the special period (end operation)) (t2"), and when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the special period ended in response to a special operation of the performance operation unit 300, the conditions for starting the specific performance are met and the specific performance begins (t3'). In other words, by starting the special period through player operation and ending the special period through the player's own operation, the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed throughout the special period. In addition, the timer value is reset when the special period starts, and measurement by the timer is suspended during the special period, and measurement starts again from the initial value (for example, "0") after the special period ends. Thus, not only is the specific performance not executed during the special period, but whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, the timer value is reset when the special period starts, and measurement by the timer does not start until the special period ends, and measurement by the timer starts from the initial value based on the end of the special period. Therefore, the player can delay the start of a specific animation for a period of time of their choosing, allowing the animation to begin at a time of their own choosing. This prevents the animation from being executed at an unintended time, thus reducing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the animation control unit 300 is operated during the special period, i.e., when the special period ends, the display of the aforementioned text information (e.g., "Specific animation delayed") will cease. This makes it easy for players to recognize that the special period has ended.

During the special period, the special period will not end even if other operating means (such as the contact operating part 302, volume control button 227, or light intensity adjustment button 228) are operated until the press operating part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated. This prevents the special period from ending at an unintended time for the player. Furthermore, a predetermined display different from the variable performance may be executed during the special period. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the special period has started, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific performance has been delayed. Also, when a predetermined display is executed during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the performance operation unit 300, etc., while the predetermined display is being executed. For example, a character may be displayed during the special period, and a part of the character may change in response to the operation of the performance operation unit 300, etc. This prevents the player from feeling idle during the special period, which has an extended start timing.

In this example, even if the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variation display of the symbols) but before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the special period will not start. However, if the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the determination of whether the start conditions for the specific performance are met is based on a period calculated from the end of the operation of the contact operation unit 302, not from the start of the variation display of the symbols (receiving a specific control command (variation pattern command in this example) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, if the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variation display of the symbols) but before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the timer value is reset, but the timer measurement is not interrupted and starts again from the initial value.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 291(C), if the timer starts measuring based on the receipt of a specific control command (a variable pattern command in this example) from the main control board 1310's main control MPU 1310a, and the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed (t2'), then the specific performance will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the receipt of the specific control command (a variable pattern command in this example). Instead, the specific performance will start based on the completion of the operation of the contact operation unit 302 and the subsequent elapsed period T1 (t3').

In this case, the start timing of a specific performance can be delayed within a predetermined period T1. This allows for delaying the start timing of a specific performance even if a player attempting to delay the start timing of a specific performance by performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 accidentally operates the contact operation section 302, or if the player only wants to delay the start timing of a specific performance for a short period within the period T. This prevents a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in addition to the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, or separately from the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met may be made based on a period calculated from the time when the handle touch sensor 192 ceases to detect player contact, rather than a period calculated from the time when the pattern variation display begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of player contact by the handle touch sensor 192, and measurement by the timer may be suspended during the period when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, and measurement may be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 ceases to detect player contact. In this case, so-called "stop-and-go" play, which stops the launch of game balls, can be prevented, and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the special period ending through player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the performance operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the player operation described above as a condition for ending the special period, the timer may be set to start measuring from an initial value at the later of the time when the special period begins or when the performance operation unit 300 stops operating, and the system may determine whether the condition for ending the special period has been met based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining whether the condition for ending the special period has been met may be set to be longer than the period T1 for determining whether the condition for starting a specific performance has been met. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific performance by a longer period than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation means other than the press operation unit 303 (for example, a contact operation unit 302 or a handle touch sensor 192). As mentioned above, in this example, the conditions for starting the specific performance are met and the specific performance begins when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed after the special period ends. Therefore, even if the special period ends based on a termination condition other than player operation, such as the period calculated from the later of the start of the special period or the end of operation of the performance operation unit 300 reaching a predetermined period, the specific performance will not start immediately. This allows players to roughly grasp the timing of the specific performance's start, but makes it difficult to pinpoint the exact timing, thus increasing interest in the performance.

Furthermore, in addition to the player operations described above, the special period may also be terminated when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball enters one of the ball entry points (e.g., all of the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the gate 2003, the second start entry point 2004, and the large prize entry point 2005, or a specific entry point (e.g., the first start entry point 2002 and the second start entry point 2004)). In this case, the operation to terminate the special period becomes unnecessary, avoiding inconvenience to players and encouraging continued gameplay, thus preventing a decline in the machine's operating rate.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to terminate a specific performance if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the performance. In this case, a special period may be initiated after the performance ends (the timer value is reset based on the press operation unit 303 being operated, and timer measurement is suspended until the special period ends), or the special period may not be executed after the performance ends.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 292(A), a specific performance is initiated (t2) after a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display. Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of the specific performance (t3'), the currently running specific performance may be terminated, even if it is still in progress. In other words, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before all of the pre-set specific performances have been executed, the currently running specific performance may be terminated midway through.

In this case, if a specific performance is initiated because the player has not performed a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the player can terminate the specific performance simply by performing a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Furthermore, if the special period ends based on a predetermined termination condition, such as the period starting from the later of the start of the special period or the termination of the operation of the performance operation unit 300, the player can terminate the specific performance simply by performing a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, even if the specific performance starts at an unintended time, thus avoiding inconvenience to the player.

In addition to the above, the specific performance may also be terminated if any one or any combination of the following is detected: when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player; when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation; when the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 detects contact; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated and the volume is changed; or when the light intensity (brightness) is changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. If the system is configured to terminate a specific animation when the player's touch is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 or when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the animation can be terminated simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without requiring any special operation, thus avoiding inconvenience to the player. Furthermore, if the system is configured to terminate a specific animation when contact is detected by the contact operation section 302 of the animation operation unit 300, or when the volume control button 227 or light intensity control button 228 is operated, the animation can be terminated with simple operations such as operating the contact operation section 302, volume control button 227, or light intensity control button 228, encouraging participation in the game and preventing a decrease in the machine's operating rate.

Furthermore, if a specific performance is initiated after the end of a special period based on the fulfillment of its start conditions, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the performance rather than from where it was interrupted. In other words, if the start conditions for a specific performance are met, the performance may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, regardless of when the performance was interrupted, the entire performance can be executed, allowing for indication of the likelihood of a big win.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 292(B), a specific performance is initiated (t2) after a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display. If the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the specific performance (t3'), the currently running specific performance may be terminated and a special period may begin, even if the performance is still in progress. In other words, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed before all of the pre-set specific performances have been executed, the currently running specific performance may be terminated and a special period may begin.

In this case, if a specific performance is initiated because the player has not performed a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the player can simply perform a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to end the specific performance and start the special period. This allows the special period to be executed without causing inconvenience to the player, and also allows the player to delay the start timing of the specific performance for a period of their choosing, enabling the player to start the specific performance at a time of their choosing. Furthermore, if the special period ends based on an termination condition different from the player's operation, such as reaching a predetermined period calculated from the later of the start of the special period or the end of operation on the performance operation unit 300, even if a specific performance is initiated at an unintended time, the player can simply perform a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 to end the specific performance and start the special period. This allows the special period to be executed without causing inconvenience to the player, and the start timing of the specific performance to be delayed.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), the specific performance may not be started. Alternatively, even if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended and the specific performance may be started when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation section 303 was operated in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example). In other words, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, and the timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, but the timer measurement may be restarted from the initial value without interruption. If the system is configured so that the specific performance is not started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 performs a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), a special operation may be performed after the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) of the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is completed, ending the special period, and the start condition for the specific performance may be determined according to the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately, if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, the specific performance may not be started. Alternatively, even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, the specific performance may be started after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the special operating means began. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may not start if the operation is performed intermittently. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may be used to measure the elapsed time from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance is not initiated when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, the system may determine whether the conditions for initiating the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance is initiated even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, the system may determine whether the conditions for initiating the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may be interrupted during the period in which the operation is ongoing. The elapsed time since the end of the operation may then be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value may not be reset or the timer measurement interrupted. Instead, the elapsed time since the initial operation may be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

Furthermore, the system may be provided with multiple special operating means. For example, it may be configured to include a first special operating means and a second special operating means, and the specific performance may not start if the first special operating means is operated intermittently, while the specific performance may start even if the second special operating means is operated intermittently. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the specific performance does not start if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated intermittently, or the specific performance may start even if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated intermittently. In other words, when the first special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, and while the operation is ongoing, the timer measurement is interrupted and the elapsed time since the operation ended is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is interrupted, and the elapsed time since the operation was first performed is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, and while the operation is ongoing, the timer measurement is interrupted and the elapsed time since the operation ended is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is interrupted, and the elapsed time since the operation was first performed is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately from the above, if a non-special operating means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operating means described above is operated, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not, the specific performance may be started without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, even before a predetermined period T has elapsed since the operation of the non-special operating means. In other words, even if the non-special operating means is operated, the timer measurement may continue without resetting the timer value. Thus, the system may include at least one or any combination (or all of them) of the following: a specific operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a first period (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300), a special operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operating means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

Furthermore, the special operating means may be any one or any combination of the following: the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the volume control button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Also, if the system is configured to prevent the specific performance from starting when the player's contact is intermittently detected by the handle touch sensor 192 by touching the handle 195, or when the rotation of the handle 195 is intermittently detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 by rotating the handle 195, then the specific performance can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without requiring any special operation, thus avoiding inconvenience to the player. Similarly, if the system is configured to prevent the specific performance from starting when the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated, the volume control button 227 is intermittently operated, or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is intermittently operated, then the specific performance can be prevented from starting with simple operations.

Furthermore, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific animation may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-winning animation state where there is no possibility of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific animation can be delayed by pressing the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, in a winning animation state where there is a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation), it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific animation by pressing the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, when there is no possibility of a jackpot, the player will not immediately see an unpleasant and unnecessary animation (specific animation), while when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the gameplay intended by the designer can be realized.

Furthermore, when a specific animation is being performed, the system may differentiate whether or not to terminate the animation depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-winning animation state where there is no possibility of a jackpot, the animation can be terminated midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, in a winning animation state where the probability of a jackpot is higher (higher jackpot expectation), it may be impossible to terminate the animation midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 292(C), in the winning-possible performance execution state, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-winning performance execution state, a specific performance is started (t2) after a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) when the specific performance is started. Furthermore, after the specific performance is started in the winning-possible performance execution state, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the execution period T2 of the specific performance has elapsed (before the specific performance ends) (t3'), unlike the non-winning performance execution state, the currently running specific performance will continue without ending. In other words, in the winning-possible performance execution state, which has a higher probability of winning a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-winning performance execution state, the currently running specific performance will not end even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated until all the performances predetermined as specific performances have been executed. This configuration allows for the immediate termination of unpleasant and unnecessary animations (specific animations) when there is no possibility of a jackpot, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game. At the same time, when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the gameplay intended by the designer can be realized.

The examples of special effects and special periods described above (display of text information) are merely examples, and the forms of special effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, a special effect could be an introduction to the game machine or characters, or other effects unrelated to the probability of winning a jackpot. Similarly, a special period could not only display text information indicating a delay in the start of the special period (e.g., "Special effect delayed"), but could also be a period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific performances performed in the non-winning performance state and the specific performances performed in the winning performance state are not limited to being the same. Some displays, sounds, lights, etc., may be the same or similar, or the manner of the specific performance performed in the non-winning performance state and the manner of the specific performance performed in the winning performance state may be different. In addition, the specific performances are not limited to those performed during the period when the variation performance is being performed. They may also be performed during the period when the variation performance is not being performed. In this case, the determination of whether the conditions for starting the specific performance have been met may be made based on any or any combination of the following: the period from receiving a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until receiving a variation pattern command, the period until receiving a start prize command, the period until the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until the operation of the volume control button 227 is detected, the period until the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is in progress or not, any method that allows for delaying the start timing of a specific animation, or that allows for the termination of a specific animation while it is running, is acceptable, regardless of the form of implementation. Furthermore, the manner in which a specific animation is performed during an abnormal state may differ from the manner in which it is performed when no abnormal state is present.

Furthermore, the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state are not necessarily identical. Some displays, sounds, and lights may be identical or similar, or the nature of the special period during the non-winning animation state and the nature of the special period during the winning-possible animation state may be different. Also, the special period is not limited to periods during which variable animations are occurring; it may also occur during periods when variable animations are not occurring. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is occurring or not, any form of implementation that allows for a delay in the start timing of the special period is acceptable. Furthermore, the nature of the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the nature of the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state may be different.

Furthermore, while the above examples show delays in the start timing of specific effects and termination of currently running specific effects, when controlling multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the effect display device 1600 and the game board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame, in a specific effect manner, it is also possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect or terminate (interrupt) a portion of the currently running specific effect for some of these multiple LEDs mounted on the effect display device 1600 and the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine equipped with an auxiliary display device different from the performance display device 1600, if the auxiliary display device is configured to be controlled in a specific performance manner in addition to the performance display device 1600 as a specific performance, the start timing of the specific performance may be delayed only for the auxiliary display device, or only the specific performance currently being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated.

Furthermore, if some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the game board 5, as well as some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, are configured to delay the start timing of a specific performance or to terminate (interrupt) a part of a specific performance, then when starting or resuming a specific performance for this part, it will be controlled in a specific performance mode that is synchronized with the specific performance mode being executed in the electronic components (the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) where the start timing of the specific performance has been delayed or the specific performance being executed has not been terminated (interrupted) midway. This allows for the execution of a unified specific performance across all LEDs on the display device 1600, auxiliary display device, and various decorative boards on the game board 5, as well as on the various decorative boards on the door frame, even if the start timing of a specific performance is delayed or if a specific performance is partially terminated (interrupted).

[26-1. Specific演出 (performance/presentation) when an anomaly occurs]
Next, we will describe a modified example in which the start timing of the specific performance described above can be delayed by a predetermined operation when an abnormal condition occurs. Figure 293 is a time chart showing an example of an abnormal condition in which the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism. In the following, we will only describe the parts that differ from the above embodiment and will not provide redundant explanations.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is in an abnormal state (a door open abnormal state in which the door frame open switch or main frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; a vibration detection abnormal state in which the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds); a full tray abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154; a ball depletion abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the ball depletion detection sensor 574; a radio wave detection abnormal state in which the radio wave sensor detects an unauthorized radio wave; a magnetic detection abnormal state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 detects an unauthorized magnetism within the game area 5a; a detection signal is input from the second start port sensor 2401 when the second start port 2004 is not open; or when the game is not in a jackpot or minor win state. When an abnormal condition occurs (such as an abnormal prize detection state triggered by a detection signal from the large prize slot sensor 2402), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) will provide abnormality notification. This notification will include: displaying abnormality information (such as text indicating the nature of the abnormality (e.g., "door open error")) in a static state in a portion of the performance display device 1600; outputting notification sounds from various speakers; and controlling the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) in abnormality notification illumination modes (minor abnormality notification illumination mode, major abnormality notification illumination mode, etc.).

Furthermore, the specific performance can be executed even when a particular abnormal state is present among the multiple abnormal states described above (for example, a door-open abnormal state or a magnetic detection abnormal state, and this may include all of the above abnormal states, or one of the above abnormal states or any combination thereof).

Furthermore, within the performance display device 1600, the area where characters, etc., are displayed when a specific performance is executed and the area where abnormal information is displayed when an abnormal state occurs overlap. The abnormal information is displayed on a higher layer than the characters, etc., displayed in the specific performance (the abnormal information is overlaid on top of the characters, etc., displayed in the specific performance). In other words, if an abnormal state occurs while the performance display device 1600 is executing the specific performance, the characters, etc., from the specific performance are displayed as the background image (the image displayed in the background of the symbols, etc.) of the abnormal information.

Furthermore, as described above, the specific performance in this example displays a dynamic mode on the performance display device 1600, where the appearance of characters, etc., changes over time as predetermined actions are performed. Therefore, if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the specific performance on the performance display device 1600 and abnormal information is displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600, the display of the characters, etc., in action as a background image for the abnormal information may make it difficult to see the abnormal information, potentially making it difficult to understand the content of the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this case, even if fraudulent activity is occurring, it may be difficult to identify the nature of the fraudulent activity from the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600, or the player may suffer disadvantages without realizing that a problem has occurred in the game's progress. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if abnormal information is displayed in a part of the performance display device 1600 while the specific performance is in progress, the specific performance can be terminated to make the abnormal information easily visible, or the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed to prevent the abnormal information from becoming difficult to see when it is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293(A), the timer starts measuring based on the reception of the pattern variation command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, before a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). If an abnormal state occurs (t1') before the period T1 in which the conditions for starting a specific performance are met has elapsed, the performance display device 1600 displays abnormal information. In the example shown in Figure 293(A), the abnormal state is an abnormal magnetic detection state where the magnetic sensor 1050 detects an improperly acting magnetic field within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) (i.e., before the specific performance begins), based on the receipt of the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and before the period T1 in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed (t2'), a special period is started that allows for a delay in the start timing of the specific performance, and the specific performance will not start even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (t2).

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated on a specific basis (for example, an operation to start a special period that allows delaying the start timing of a specific performance (press operation)), and then the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated on a specific basis (for example, an operation to end the special period (end operation)) (t2"), the special period ends, and the specific performance starts when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3'). Note that when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated on a specific basis, i.e., when a special period is started, the performance display device 1600 displays character information different from abnormal information (for example, "Specific performance delayed," etc.) in a static state. When the performance operation unit 300 is operated on a specific basis during the special period, i.e., when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned character information ends. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance is being delayed and that the special period has ended.

Furthermore, while the background image displayed on the performance display device 1600 during normal operation (when no specific effects or reach effects are being performed, and the game is waiting for the start of a spin), some parts of it change, but the changes are smaller compared to the display patterns of specific effects. Also, within the background image displayed on the performance display device 1600 during normal operation, the area surrounding (the adjacent part, the boundary) of the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 remains static (or changes very little). Therefore, when the normal background image is displayed, it is easier to see the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 than when a specific effect is being performed.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 allows for a delay in the start timing of a specific performance when an abnormal state occurs, and the delay period can be appropriately set by the player or the staff of the pachinko parlor depending on the timing of a special operation (end operation). In other words, even when an abnormal state occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement is suspended during the special period. After the special period ends, measurement resumes from the initial value (for example, "0"). Furthermore, not only is the specific performance not executed during the special period, but whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, even when an abnormal state occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement does not start until the special period ends. Based on the end of the special period, timer measurement resumes from the initial value. Therefore, specific effects can be delayed for a period arbitrarily determined by the player or arcade staff. Furthermore, by displaying the normal background image as the background image for the abnormal information shown on the effect display device 1600 when an abnormal state occurs, the abnormal information is made more easily visible compared to when a special period is in effect, allowing for easier recognition of the abnormal state through the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. This makes it easier to detect fraudulent activity and to easily identify abnormalities that would be detrimental to the player, thus preventing such harm.

Furthermore, during the special period, operating other means of operation (such as the contact operation unit 302, volume control button 227, or light intensity control button 228) on the performance control unit 300 will not terminate the special period until the press operation unit 303 of the performance control unit 300 is specifically operated. This prevents the special period from ending at an unintended time for the player or staff in an abnormal situation, ensuring reliable recognition of abnormal information. Additionally, a predetermined display different from the variable performance may be executed during the special period. This makes it easy to recognize that the special period has begun, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific performance is delayed. Furthermore, when executing a predetermined display during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the performance control unit 300, etc., while the predetermined display is being executed. For example, a character may be displayed during the special period, and a part of the character may change in response to operation of the performance control unit 300, etc.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, operating the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 before the conditions for starting a specific performance are met, after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variation display of the symbols), does not initiate a special period. However, when the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the system determines whether the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on a period calculated from the end of the operation of the contact operation section 302, rather than a period calculated from the start of the variation display of the symbols (receiving a specific control command (variation pattern command in this example) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, even in an abnormal state, if the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variation display of the symbols), the timer value is reset, but the timer measurement is not interrupted and starts again from the initial value.

Specifically, if, in an abnormal state, a specific control command (a variable pattern command in this example) is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and before the period T1 has elapsed, that is, based on the receipt of the specific control command (a variable pattern command in this example) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer starts measuring. If the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 for which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed, the specific performance will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the receipt of the specific control command (a variable pattern command in this example). Instead, the specific performance will start based on the completion of the operation of the contact operation section 302 and the subsequent elapsed period T1.

In this case, the start timing of a specific performance can be delayed within a predetermined period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific performance even if a player or arcade employee, attempting to delay the start timing of a specific performance by performing a specific operation (pressing in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in an abnormal state, accidentally operates the contact operation section 302, or if the player only wants to delay the start timing of a specific performance for a short period within the period T. Furthermore, it makes the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, allowing for easy recognition of the abnormal state.

Furthermore, in addition to the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, or separately from the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met based on a period calculated from the time when the handle touch sensor 192 ceases to detect player contact, rather than a period calculated from the time when the symbol variation display begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact in an abnormal state. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of player contact by the handle touch sensor 192 in an abnormal state, and measurement by the timer may be suspended during the period when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact. Measurement may then be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 ceases to detect player contact. In this case, even if an abnormal state occurs, simply performing normal gameplay by touching the handle touch sensor 192 will delay the start timing of the specific performance, making the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and the content of the abnormal state can be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, while the above example shows a special period initiated under abnormal conditions being terminated by player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the performance operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the player operation described above as a condition for terminating the special period, the timer may be set to start measuring from an initial value at the later of the time when the special period begins or when the performance operation unit 300 stops operating, and the system may determine whether the condition for terminating the special period has been met based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining whether the condition for terminating the special period has been met may be set to be longer than the period T1 for determining whether the condition for starting a specific performance has been met. This allows the start timing of a specific performance to be delayed by a longer period than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the press operation unit 303 (for example, the contact operation unit 302 or the handle touch sensor 192), making the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and allowing the content of the abnormal condition to be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, the specific performance will begin once a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period, thus fulfilling the conditions for initiating the specific performance. Therefore, even if the special period ends based on termination conditions different from those of a special operation (termination operation) by a player or arcade staff member, such as reaching a predetermined period calculated from the later of the time the special period began in an abnormal state or the time the operation of the performance operation unit 300 ended, the specific performance will not begin immediately. This makes the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see until the specific performance begins, allowing for easy recognition of the abnormal state based on the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, in addition to the player operations described above, the special period may also be terminated when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball enters one of the ball entry points (e.g., all of the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the gate 2003, the second start entry point 2004, and the large prize entry point 2005, or a specific entry point (e.g., the first start entry point 2002 and the second start entry point 2004)). In this case, a special operation to terminate a special period started in an abnormal state becomes unnecessary, and the player can resume playing without inconvenience after recognizing the abnormal state through the abnormal information displayed on the display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in abnormal conditions, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of a specific performance, the currently running specific performance may be terminated. In this case, a special period may be started after the termination of the specific performance (the timer value is reset based on the press operation unit 303 being operated, and timer measurement is suspended until the special period ends), or the special period may not be started after the termination of the specific performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293(B), a specific animation is initiated (t2) after a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). If an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the specific animation (t1'), abnormal information is displayed on the animation display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the execution period T2 of the specific performance has elapsed (before the specific performance ends) (t3'), the currently running specific performance may be terminated, even if it is still in progress. In other words, in an abnormal state, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before all the pre-set specific performances have been executed, the currently running specific performance may be terminated midway.

In this case, if an abnormal state occurs, the player or arcade staff can terminate the specific performance simply by performing a specific operation on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic form of characters, etc. in the specific performance to the static form of the normal state. This makes the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and the content of the abnormal state can be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, if the special period ends at a timing unintended by the player or arcade staff based on termination conditions different from the termination operation performed by the player or arcade staff, such as the period starting from the later of when the special period begins or when the operation of the performance operation unit 300 ends reaching a predetermined period, even if the specific performance starts after the end of the special period, the player or arcade staff can terminate the specific performance with a specific operation and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic form of characters, etc. in the specific performance to the static form of the normal state. This makes the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and the content of the abnormal state can be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In addition to the above, the specific performance may also be terminated if any one or any combination of the following is detected: when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player; when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation; when the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 detects contact; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated and the volume is changed; or when the light intensity (brightness) is changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. If the system is configured to terminate a specific animation when the player's touch is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 or when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, then the specific animation can be terminated simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation. Even if an abnormal condition occurs, the specific animation can be terminated by playing the game, and the background image of the abnormal information can be changed from the dynamic form of characters etc. in the specific animation to the static form of the normal state, making the abnormal information displayed on the animation display device 1600 easier to see, and the content of the abnormal condition can be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the animation display device 1600. Furthermore, if the system is configured to terminate a specific performance when contact is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300, or when operation of the volume control button 227 or the light intensity control button 228 is detected, then when an abnormal condition occurs, the specific performance can be terminated with a simple operation of the contact operation section 302, volume control button 227, or light intensity control button 228. This changes the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic form of characters, etc., in the specific performance to the normal static form, making the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see. The abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 allows for easy recognition of the content of the abnormal condition.

Furthermore, when a specific performance is initiated after the end of a special period, based on the fulfillment of its start conditions, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the performance rather than from the point where it was interrupted. In other words, if the start conditions for a specific performance are met, it may be configured to always execute the performance from the beginning. In this case, the entire content of the specific performance can be executed regardless of when it was interrupted, ensuring that the content of the performance (in this example, the indication of the probability of a big win) is clearly recognized. This also makes it easier to obtain cooperation from players who are paying attention to the content of the specific performance when an abnormal state occurs, allowing them to easily see the abnormal information and thus encouraging them to terminate the performance.

Furthermore, if, during an abnormal state, the execution of a specific performance is terminated based on a specific operation performed on the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, a special period may be initiated to delay the start timing of the specific performance for a period arbitrarily determined by the player or arcade staff. In this case, even if the specific performance is terminated midway through an abnormal state, the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed for a period arbitrarily determined by the player or arcade staff, making the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easily visible, and allowing the content of the abnormal state to be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) in an abnormal state, the specific performance may not be started. Alternatively, even if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is performed a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended and the specific performance may be started when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation section 303 was performed a specific operation (pressing operation in this example). In other words, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), but the timer measurement may be restarted from the initial value without interruption. If the system is configured so that the specific performance is not started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 performs a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by performing a special operation after the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 has finished performing the specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the start condition for the specific performance may be determined according to the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately, if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, the specific performance may not be started. Alternatively, even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, the specific performance may be started after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the special operating means began. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may not start if the operation is performed intermittently. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may be used to measure the elapsed time from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance is not initiated when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, the system may determine whether the conditions for initiating the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means was stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance is initiated even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, the system may determine whether the conditions for initiating the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 was started. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may be interrupted during the period in which the operation is ongoing. The elapsed time since the end of the operation may then be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value may not be reset or the timer measurement interrupted. Instead, the elapsed time since the initial operation may be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to include multiple special operating means. For example, it may be configured to include a first special operating means and a second special operating means, and the specific performance may not be initiated if the first special operating means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, while the specific performance may be initiated even if the second special operating means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. Alternatively, the system may be configured to not initiate the specific performance if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or the specific performance may be initiated even if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. In other words, if the first special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the timer value is reset, and while the operation continues, the timer measurement is interrupted, and the elapsed time since the end of the operation is measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. Alternatively, if the second special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the timer value is reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value is not reset, nor is the timer measurement interrupted, and the elapsed time since the operation was first performed is measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. If either the stage or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and while the operation is ongoing, the timer measurement may be suspended. The elapsed time since the operation ended may then be measured using the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. Alternatively, in an abnormal state, if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value may be reset. However, even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset, nor may the timer measurement be suspended. Instead, the elapsed time since the operation was first performed may be measured using the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately from the above, if a non-special operating means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operating means described above is operated, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not, the specific performance may be started without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, even before a predetermined period T has elapsed since the operation of the non-special operating means. In other words, even if the non-special operating means is operated, the timer measurement may continue without resetting the timer value. Thus, the system may include at least one or any combination (or all of them) of the following: a specific operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a first period (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300), a special operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operating means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

Furthermore, the special operating means may be any one or any combination of the following: the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the volume control button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Also, if the system is configured so that a specific performance is not started when the player touches the handle 195 in an abnormal state and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the player rotates the handle 195 in an abnormal state and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific performance will not be started simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game without any special operation. This allows the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 to be easily seen by continuing the static background image, and the content of the abnormal state can be easily recognized by the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, if the system is configured to prevent the specific performance from starting when the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, when the volume control button 227 is being operated intermittently, or when the light intensity control button 228 is being operated intermittently, then the specific performance can be prevented from starting with simple operations. This allows the static background image to continue, making the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easily visible, and enabling easy recognition of the abnormal state based on the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in abnormal states, the possibility of delaying the start timing of specific animations may differ depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs during a non-winning animation execution where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to delay the start timing of the specific animation by performing a specific operation (in this example, a pressing operation) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal state occurs during a winning animation execution where there is a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation), it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific animation by performing a specific operation (in this example, a pressing operation) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, if an abnormal state occurs when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the animation (specific animation) that is unpleasant and unnecessary for the player will not be executed immediately, making it easier to see higher-priority abnormal information. At the same time, if there is a possibility of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer, without causing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when a specific animation is being performed in an abnormal state, the decision to terminate the animation may differ depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs while a non-winning animation is being performed (where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot), it may be possible to terminate the animation midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal state occurs while a winning animation is being performed (where the probability of a jackpot is higher than in the non-winning animation state), it may be impossible to terminate the animation midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the animation operation unit 300. With this configuration, when an abnormal state occurs while a non-winning animation is being performed (where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot), the player can be immediately informed of an abnormal state that is unpleasant and unnecessary for them, while when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the gameplay intended by the designer can be realized.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 293(C), after the symbol variation display begins in the winning-possible performance state (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), a predetermined period T1 has elapsed. That is, based on the receipt of the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer starts measuring, and when the period T1 in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed, the specific performance begins (t2). If an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the specific performance (t1'), abnormal information is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the state of an abnormal condition where a winning animation is being performed, if the press operation unit 303 of the animation operation unit 300 is pressed before the execution period T2 of the specific animation has elapsed (before the specific animation ends) (t3'), unlike the state of a non-winning animation being performed, the currently running specific animation will continue without ending. In other words, in the state of a winning animation being performed, where the probability of a jackpot is higher (higher jackpot expectation) than in the state of a non-winning animation being performed, even if the press operation unit 303 of the animation operation unit 300 is pressed, the currently running specific animation will continue, and the background image of the abnormal information will not change from a dynamic to a static state until all the pre-set specific animations have been executed.

The examples of special effects and special periods described above (display of text information) are merely examples, and the forms of special effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, a special effect could be an introduction to the game machine or characters, or other effects unrelated to the probability of winning a jackpot. Similarly, a special period could not only display text information indicating a delay in the start of the special period (e.g., "Special effect delayed"), but could also be a period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific performances performed in the non-winning performance state and the specific performances performed in the winning performance state are not limited to being the same. Some displays, sounds, lights, etc., may be the same or similar, or the manner of the specific performance performed in the non-winning performance state and the manner of the specific performance performed in the winning performance state may be different. In addition, the specific performances are not limited to those performed during the period when the variation performance is being performed. They may also be performed during the period when the variation performance is not being performed. In this case, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting the specific performance have been met based on any or any combination of the following: the period from receiving a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until receiving a variation pattern command, the period until receiving a start winning command, the period until the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until the rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until the operation of the volume control button 227 is detected, the period until the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is being performed or not, any method that allows delaying the start timing of a specific animation during an abnormal state, or that allows terminating a specific animation midway through an abnormal state, is acceptable, regardless of the form of implementation. Furthermore, the nature of the special period performed during a non-winning animation may differ from that performed during a winning animation. Also, the nature of the specific animation performed during an abnormal state may differ from that performed when no abnormal state is occurring.

Furthermore, the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state are not necessarily identical. Some displays, sounds, and lights may be identical or similar, or the manner of the special period during the non-winning animation state and the manner of the special period during the winning-possible animation state may be different. Also, the special period is not limited to periods during which variable animations are occurring; it may also occur during periods when variable animations are not occurring. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is occurring or not, any form of implementation that allows for a delay in the start timing of the special period during an abnormal state is acceptable. Furthermore, the manner of the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the manner of the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state may be different. Also, the manner of the special period performed during an abnormal state and the manner of the special period performed when no abnormal state is occurring may be different.

Furthermore, while the above examples show delays in the start timing of a specific performance during an abnormal state, and termination of a specific performance if it is being executed during an abnormal state, when controlling multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the performance display device 1600 and the game board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame, in a specific performance manner, it is also possible to delay the start timing of a specific performance or terminate (interrupt) a portion of a specific performance being executed during an abnormal state for some of these multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the performance display device 1600 and the game board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame. Also, in a game machine equipped with an auxiliary display device different from the performance display device 1600, if the auxiliary display device is also configured to be controlled in a specific performance manner in addition to the performance display device 1600, it is possible to delay the start timing of a specific performance only for the auxiliary display device during an abnormal state, or to terminate only the specific performance being executed on the auxiliary display device during an abnormal state.

Furthermore, as described above, during an abnormal state, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, all of which are provided on the door frame 3) provide abnormality notification (for example, display abnormality information (such as text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (e.g., "door open error")) in a static state in a part of the performance display device 1600, output notification sounds from various speakers, and control the illumination of various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, plate unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame, all of which are provided on the door frame 3) in abnormality notification illumination modes (minor abnormality notification illumination mode, major abnormality notification illumination mode, etc.). Furthermore, even if some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the game board 5, as well as some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, are configured to delay the start timing of a specific performance or to terminate (interrupt) a specific performance, abnormal notification is prioritized for execution. In other words, when the start timing of a specific performance is delayed while multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame are illuminated in an abnormal notification flashing pattern, the system will not perform the flashing pattern of the specific performance for the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame at the timing to start the specific performance, but will instead continue the abnormal notification flashing pattern for at least a predetermined period of time. Alternatively, when the specific performance is terminated (interrupted) while multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame are illuminated in an abnormal notification flashing pattern, the system will continue the abnormal notification flashing pattern for at least a predetermined period of time for the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame. However, if it is possible to delay or terminate (interrupt) a specific performance for electronic components that do not provide abnormality notifications or only provide abnormality notifications for some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards on the door frame, then when starting or resuming the specific performance, it may be controlled in the same manner as when the specific performance is not delayed or terminated (interrupted) (for example, a specific performance mode synchronized with the specific performance mode being executed by electronic components (the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards on the door frame) where the start timing of the specific performance is not delayed or the execution of the specific performance is not terminated (interrupted) midway), or if there are no electronic components continuing the specific performance, the specific performance may be started from the beginning.

[26-2. Delay in specific effects to make text information easier to read]
Next, we will describe a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect, which displays a nearly single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600, can be delayed. Figure 294 is a time chart showing an example when a preview display is executed. In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

In this example, as a specific effect, a whiteout mode is displayed, where approximately the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is made white, and a blackout mode is displayed, where approximately the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is made black.

Furthermore, in this example of pachinko machine 1, it is possible to display a preview that suggests the probability of a big win by displaying text information such as numerical values and character dialogue in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600. In addition, the background image of the preview may be a whiteout mode, where almost the entire display area of the performance display device 1600 is white, or a blackout mode, where almost the entire display area is black. By making the background image of the preview a nearly single color in the whiteout or blackout mode, the text information of the preview becomes easier to see.

However, since the pre-announcement display appears relatively early after the start of the reel spinning sequence, if the player realizes early on that a jackpot is unlikely or unlikely based on the pre-announcement display, they may lose interest in the ongoing reel spinning sequence. Therefore, in this example of a pachinko machine, the start timing of a specific sequence can be delayed by the player's operation, and a normal background image is used as the background image for the pre-announcement display instead of the specific sequence. This makes it more difficult to read the text information in the pre-announcement display compared to when the specific sequence is displayed as the background image, thus making it difficult to grasp the jackpot probability early on and preventing the player from losing interest in the reel spinning sequence prematurely.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 294(A), before a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, based on the receipt of the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer starts measuring. If the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific way (for example, an operation that starts a special period that allows delaying the start timing of the specific performance (in this example, a press operation)) before the period T1 in which the start conditions for the specific performance are met has elapsed (t1'), then a special period that allows delaying the start timing of the specific performance is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation section 301 (contact operation section 302, press operation section 303)). When the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific way, the performance display device 1600 displays character information different from the preview display (for example, "Specific performance delayed") in a static state. This makes it easier to recognize when the start timing of a specific effect is being delayed.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) (i.e., before the specific performance begins), based on the receipt of the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and before the period T1 in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed (t2'), a special period is started that allows for a delay in the start timing of the specific performance, so that the specific performance does not start even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 294(A), in this example, after the display of the changing patterns begins (after receiving a pattern change command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, after the timer starts measuring based on receiving the pattern change command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, a predetermined period T1 elapses. Then, the display device 1600 displays a notification, showing static text information indicating the probability of a big win (for example, "30%", "0%", "50%", etc., or "Super Hot!", "Guaranteed Win!", "Guaranteed Loss...", etc.) (t2').

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., before the specific performance begins (t1'), a special period is initiated that allows for a delay in the start timing of the specific performance. This prevents the specific performance from starting even after the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display.

Furthermore, as described above, when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, that is, when a special period begins, text information different from the preview display (for example, "Specific Performance Delayed") is displayed statically in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 (this area may be different from the area where the text information for the preview is displayed, or a portion of the areas may overlap). When the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information is terminated. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance is being delayed and that the special period has ended.

Furthermore, after the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation to start a special period that allows delaying the start timing of a specific performance (press operation)), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation to end the special period (end operation)) (t2"), the special period ends, and the specific performance starts when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3').

As described above, during specific effects, a whiteout or blackout pattern is displayed, and a nearly uniform single-color pattern is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which no characters, scenery, or other elements are displayed (if the effect display device 1600 displays the number of reserved items, this number may also be displayed during specific effects, and if a corresponding decorative pattern smaller than the decorative pattern is displayed on the periphery of the effect display device 1600 in addition to the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600, this corresponding decorative pattern may also be displayed during specific effects. In other words, it is sufficient that the area overlapping with the text information or a predetermined range including the text information is a nearly uniform single-color pattern in which no characters, scenery, or other elements are displayed). Therefore, when this is used as the background image for text information displayed in a part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a pre-announcement, only this text information will be displayed in a different color on the effect display device 1600, making the text information easily visible. On the other hand, during normal times (when specific effects or reach effects are not being executed, and the state is waiting for the start of a variation), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 displays characters, scenery, and other elements in various colors (multicolor pattern). Furthermore, the format of the text information used as a preview does not change during the execution of the specific performance or during the special period. In other words, the image displayed in the background of the text information has a significant impact on its readability. Therefore, by changing the background image of the text information between a nearly uniform single-color format during the execution of the specific performance and a format where characters, scenery, etc., are displayed in various colors (multicolor format), the text information becomes more difficult to read during the special period compared to when the specific performance is displayed as the background image for the preview text information during the performance.

In other words, for players who wish to see the text information indicating the probability of a big win displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a preview, the text information is made easier to recognize by executing a specific performance as the background image for the text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 without requiring a specific operation of the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. On the other hand, for players who do not wish to see the text information indicating the probability of a big win displayed on the performance display device 1600 as a preview, the start timing of the specific performance is delayed by performing a specific operation of the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 before the specific performance begins. This prevents the specific performance from being executed as the background image for the text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 as a preview, and by displaying the normal background image as the background image for the text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 as a preview, the text information becomes more difficult to see compared to when the specific performance is executed. This allows for gameplay tailored to the player's preferences and helps to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In this example, a specific effect is shown where a whiteout or blackout pattern is displayed across the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. However, it is sufficient if at least a nearly uniform single color is displayed around (the adjacent portion, the boundary) the text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, without any characters, scenery, or other elements being displayed. It is also acceptable if characters, scenery, or other elements are displayed in a different color than the whiteout or blackout pattern in a portion of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, the specific effect is not limited to executing only a whiteout or blackout pattern; if a specific effect includes a period during which a whiteout or blackout pattern is displayed, it may also include a period during which other patterns are displayed.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, the system is designed so that the special period will not end if a different operating means (for example, the contact operating part 302, volume control button 227, or light intensity control button 228) is operated until the press operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated. This prevents the special period from ending at an unintended time for the player or arcade staff while the warning display is running, and ensures that the textual information in the warning display is reliably difficult to read.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, if the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the start of the changing symbols but before the conditions for starting the specific performance are met, it is difficult to delay the specific performance for a period arbitrarily determined by the player. However, the determination of whether the conditions for starting the specific performance are met is made based on a period calculated from the end of the operation of the contact operation section 302, rather than a period calculated from the start of the changing symbols.

Specifically, if the contact operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 has elapsed since receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, before the conditions for starting the specific performance are met after the start of the variation display of the symbols, the specific performance will not be executed even if the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the symbols. Instead, the specific performance will be started based on the fact that the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the operation of the contact operation unit 302 was completed.

In this case, the start timing of a specific effect can be delayed within a predetermined period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect even if a player attempting to delay the start timing of a specific effect by performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 accidentally operates the contact operation section 302, or if the player only wants to delay the start timing of a specific effect for a short period within the period T. Furthermore, when a notification display is executed, the text information of the notification display becomes more difficult to read compared to when the normal background image is displayed and the specific effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in addition to the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300, or separately from the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met based on the period from when the handle touch sensor 192 ceases to detect player contact, rather than the period from when the symbol variation display begins after the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact. In this case, simply performing normal gameplay by touching the handle touch sensor 192 can delay the start timing of the specific performance, allowing the normal background image to be displayed when the preview display is executed, making the text information of the preview display difficult to read.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the special period ending through player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the performance operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the player operation described above, the termination condition for the special period may also be determined based on a period calculated from the later of the time the special period started or the time the performance operation unit 300 stopped operating. In this case, the period for determining whether the termination condition for the special period is met may be set to be longer than the period T1 for determining whether the start condition for the specific performance is met. This makes it possible to ensure that the specific performance is not displayed as a background image when the start timing of the specific performance is delayed for a longer period than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the press operation unit 303 (for example, the contact operation unit 302 or the handle touch sensor 192), and makes it difficult to see the text information as a preview. Furthermore, since the specific performance begins when a predetermined period T1 has elapsed after the special period ends, even if the special period ends based on a different termination condition than the player's special operation (termination operation), such as reaching a predetermined period calculated from the later of the start of the special period or the end of operation of the performance operation unit 300, it is possible to prevent the specific performance from starting immediately. This ensures that the specific performance is not displayed as a background image, making the text information used as a preview difficult to read.

Furthermore, in addition to the player operations described above, the special period may also be terminated when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball enters one of the ball entry points (for example, all or specific of the general prize entry point 2001, first start entry point 2002, gate 2003, second start entry point 2004, and large prize entry point 2005 (for example, the first start entry point 2002 and the second start entry point 2004)). In this case, no special operation is required to terminate the special period, and the special period can be terminated without causing inconvenience to the player after the notification display ends.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to terminate a specific performance if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the performance. In this case, a special period may be initiated after the performance ends (the timer value is reset based on the press operation unit 303 being operated, and timer measurement is suspended until the special period ends), or the special period may not be initiated after the performance ends.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 294(B), a specific animation sequence begins (t2) after a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the pattern variation display (after receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In this example, a preview display also begins when the specific animation sequence starts, and text information indicating the probability of a jackpot is displayed on the animation display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the execution period T2 of this specific performance has elapsed (before the specific performance ends) (t3'), the currently running specific performance may be terminated even if it is still in progress. In other words, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before all the pre-set specific performances have been executed, the currently running specific performance may be terminated midway, and the background image of the preview display may be changed from the specific performance background image to the normal background image.

In this case, when the notification display and the specific performance are being executed at the same time, the player can terminate the specific performance simply by performing a specific operation on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, thereby changing the background image of the notification display from a nearly uniform single color where the characters and scenery in the specific performance are not displayed to a state where the characters and scenery in the normal performance are displayed in various colors. This makes it more difficult to read the text information as a notification display shown on the performance display device 1600 compared to when the specific performance is being executed. Furthermore, if the special period ends at an unintended time based on termination conditions other than the player's termination operation, such as the period starting from the start of the special period or the end of operation on the performance operation unit 300 being reached, whichever is later, the player can terminate the specific performance by performing a specific operation, thereby changing the background image of the notification display from a nearly uniform single color where the characters and scenery in the specific performance are not displayed to a state where the characters and scenery in the normal performance are displayed in various colors. This makes it more difficult to read the text information as a notification display shown on the performance display device 1600 compared to when the specific performance is being executed.

In addition to the above, the specific performance may also be terminated if any one or any combination of the following is detected: when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player; when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation; when the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 detects contact; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated and the volume is changed; or when the light intensity (brightness) is changed by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. If the system is configured to terminate a specific performance when the player's touch is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 or when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, then the specific performance can be terminated and the background image of the予告 (preview) display can be changed from a nearly uniform single color where the characters and scenery of the specific performance are not displayed to a normal state where the characters and scenery are displayed in various colors, making it more difficult to see the text information as a preview displayed on the performance display device 1600 compared to when the specific performance is being performed, and the contact operation part 30 of the performance operation unit 300 If the system is configured to terminate a specific effect when a contact operation (2), an operation of the volume control button 227, or an operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected, then when the preview display and the specific effect are running simultaneously, the specific effect can be terminated with a simple operation of the contact operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, or the light intensity control button 228. This changes the background image of the preview display from a nearly uniform single color where the characters and scenery from the specific effect are not displayed to a normal state where the characters and scenery are displayed in various colors. Therefore, compared to when the specific effect is running, the textual information displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a preview display can be made more difficult to read.

Furthermore, if a specific performance is initiated after the end of a special period based on the fulfillment of its start conditions, it may be configured to start from the beginning of the performance rather than from where it was interrupted. In other words, if the start conditions for a specific performance are met, it may always be configured to execute the performance from the beginning. In this case, the entire content of the specific performance can be executed regardless of when it was interrupted, making it possible to achieve the intended effect of the performance (such as attracting attention).

Furthermore, if the execution of a specific performance is terminated based on a specific operation performed on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the performance, a special period may be initiated to delay the start timing of the specific performance for a period arbitrarily determined by the player. In this case, even if the specific performance is terminated midway, the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed for a period arbitrarily determined by the player, making the text information as a pre-announcement displayed on the performance display device 1600 more difficult to see compared to when the specific performance is being executed, thus reliably realizing a game tailored to the player's preferences.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), the specific performance may not be started. Alternatively, even if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended and the specific performance may be started when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation section 303 was operated in a specific manner (pressing operation in this example). In other words, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), but the timer measurement may be restarted from the initial value without interruption. If the system is configured so that the specific performance is not started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently performing a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 performs a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by performing a special operation after the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 has finished performing the specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the start condition for the specific performance may be determined according to the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately, when text information as a preview is displayed, the specific performance may not start if a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently. Alternatively, even when text information as a preview is displayed and a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently, the specific performance may start after a certain period of time has elapsed since the operation of the special operating means began. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may not start if the operation is performed intermittently. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may be used to measure the elapsed time from the first time the operation was performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance does not start if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently while text information as a preview is displayed, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance starts even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently while text information as a preview is displayed, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting the specific performance have been met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and the timer measurement may be interrupted during the period in which the operation is ongoing. The elapsed time since the end of the operation may then be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value may not be reset or the timer measurement interrupted. Instead, the elapsed time since the initial operation may be measured by the timer to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

Furthermore, the system may be equipped with multiple special operating means. For example, it may be configured to include a first special operating means and a second special operating means, such that if the first special operating means is operated intermittently while text information as a preview is displayed, the specific performance will not be initiated, while if the second special operating means is operated intermittently while text information as a preview is displayed, the specific performance will be initiated. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that if either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated intermittently while text information as a preview is displayed, the specific performance will not be initiated. In other words, when the first special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, and while the operation is ongoing, the timer measurement is interrupted and the elapsed time since the operation ended is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is interrupted, and the elapsed time since the operation was first performed is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, and while the operation is ongoing, the timer measurement is interrupted and the elapsed time since the operation ended is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met. Alternatively, when either the first special operating means or the second special operating means is operated, the timer value is reset, but even if the operation is ongoing, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is interrupted, and the elapsed time since the operation was first performed is measured by the timer to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, or separately from the above, if a non-special operating means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operating means described above is operated, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not, the specific performance may be started without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, even before a predetermined period T has elapsed since the operation of the non-special operating means. In other words, even if the non-special operating means is operated, the timer measurement may continue without resetting the timer value. Thus, the system may include at least one or any combination (or all of them) of the following: a specific operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a first period (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300), a special operating means capable of delaying the start timing of the specific performance by a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operating means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

Furthermore, the special operating means may be any one or any combination of the following: the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300, the volume control button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Also, if the system is configured so that the specific performance is not started when the player touches the handle 195 while text information as a pre-announcement is displayed and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the player rotates the handle 195 while text information as a pre-announcement is displayed and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific performance can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation, and the text information as a pre-announcement can be made more difficult to see compared to when the specific performance is being performed. Furthermore, if the system is configured to prevent the specific performance from starting when the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated while text information as a preview is displayed, or when the volume control button 227 is intermittently operated while text information as a preview is displayed, or when the light intensity control button 228 is intermittently operated while text information as a preview is displayed, then the specific performance can be prevented from starting with simple operations, making the text information as a preview more difficult to see compared to when the specific performance is being executed.

Furthermore, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific animation may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if text information as a warning is displayed during a non-winning animation where there is no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to delay the start timing of the specific animation by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if text information as a warning is displayed during a winning animation where there is a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation), it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific animation by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, if text information as a warning is displayed when there is no possibility of a jackpot, it is only an unpleasant and useless animation for the player. Therefore, by delaying the start timing of the specific animation, the text information as a warning becomes more difficult to see compared to when the specific animation is being performed. On the other hand, when text information as a warning is displayed when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to realize the game as intended by the designer and draw attention to the animation being performed.

Furthermore, the decision to terminate a specific animation during execution may differ depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if text information as a warning is displayed during a non-winning animation where there is no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to terminate the animation midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if text information as a warning is displayed during a winning animation where there is a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation), it may be impossible to terminate the animation midway through execution by performing a specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) on the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, if text information as a warning is displayed when there is no possibility of a jackpot, it is only an unpleasant and useless animation for the player. Therefore, by interrupting the specific animation, the text information as a warning becomes more difficult to see compared to when the specific animation is being executed. On the other hand, when text information as a warning is displayed when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the designer's intended gameplay can be realized, and the player's attention can be drawn to the animation being executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 294(C), after the symbol variation display begins in the winning-possible performance state (after receiving the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), a predetermined period T1 elapses. That is, based on the receipt of the variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer starts measuring, and when the period T1 in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met has elapsed, the specific performance begins (t2). Furthermore, when the specific performance begins, a preview display also starts, and text information indicating the probability of a big win is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the execution period T2 of the specific performance in this winning-possible performance state has elapsed (before the specific performance ends) (t3'), unlike the non-winning performance state, the currently running specific performance will continue without ending. In other words, in the winning-possible performance state, which has a higher probability of winning (higher expectation of winning) than the non-winning performance state, even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the currently running specific performance will continue to be displayed as the background image for the予告演出 (preview performance) until all the pre-set specific performances have been executed, and the background image will not change to the normal background image.

The examples of specific effects and special period effects (display of text information) described above are merely examples, and the forms of specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, if a specific effect includes a period in which a whiteout or blackout effect is displayed, it may also include an effect that introduces the game machine or characters. Furthermore, a special period is not limited to displaying text information (e.g., "Specific effect delayed") indicating a delay in the start of the specific period; it may also be controlled during a period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific performances performed in the non-winning performance state and the specific performances performed in the winning performance state are not limited to being the same. Some displays, sounds, lights, etc., may be the same or similar, or the manner of the specific performance performed in the non-winning performance state and the manner of the specific performance performed in the winning performance state may be different. In addition, the specific performances are not limited to those performed during the period when the variation performance is being performed. They may also be performed during the period when the variation performance is not being performed. In this case, the system may determine whether the conditions for starting the specific performance have been met based on any or any combination of the following: the period from receiving a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until receiving a variation pattern command, the period until receiving a start winning command, the period until the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until the rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until the operation of the volume control button 227 is detected, the period until the operation of the light intensity control button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is in progress or not, any method that allows delaying the start timing of a specific animation when a pre-announcement display begins, or that allows terminating a specific animation midway through if it is running simultaneously with a pre-announcement display, is acceptable. Furthermore, the nature of the special period during a non-winning animation is to be different from the nature of the special period during a winning animation is to be different.

Furthermore, the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state are not necessarily identical. Some displays, sounds, and lights may be identical or similar, or the nature of the special period during the non-winning animation state and the nature of the special period during the winning-possible animation state may be different. Also, the special period is not limited to periods during which variable animations are occurring; it may also occur during periods when variable animations are not occurring. In other words, regardless of whether a variable animation is occurring or not, any form of implementation is acceptable as long as it allows for a delay in the start timing of the special period when the notification display begins. Furthermore, the nature of the special period performed during the non-winning animation state and the nature of the special period performed during the winning-possible animation state may be different.

Furthermore, in the examples described above, the start timing of a specific performance is delayed when a preview display is initiated, or the currently running specific performance is terminated when the specific performance and the preview display are being executed simultaneously. However, when controlling the performance display device 1600 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame in a specific performance manner, the start timing of the specific performance may be delayed when a preview display is initiated for some of these multiple LEDs mounted on the performance display device 1600 and the game board 5 and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame, or some of the specific performance may be terminated (interrupted) when the specific performance and the preview display are being executed simultaneously. Furthermore, in a gaming machine equipped with an auxiliary display device different from the performance display device 1600, if the auxiliary display device is configured to be controlled in a specific performance manner in addition to the performance display device 1600 as a specific performance, the start timing of the specific performance may be delayed only for the auxiliary display device when a pre-announcement display begins, or if the specific performance and pre-announcement display are being executed simultaneously, only the specific performance being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated.

Furthermore, when a preview display is initiated, if some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the door frame are configured to delay the start timing of a specific performance, or to terminate (interrupt) a part of a specific performance when a specific performance and a preview display are being executed simultaneously, then when starting or restarting the specific performance for this part, it will be controlled in a specific performance mode that is synchronized with the specific performance mode being executed in the electronic components (the display device 1600, the auxiliary display, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame) where the start timing of the specific performance has been delayed or the specific performance being executed has not been terminated (interrupted) midway. This allows for the execution of a unified specific performance across the entire system, even when a preview is initiated. This is achieved by delaying the start timing of a specific performance for some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the game board 5, as well as some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame. Furthermore, even if a specific performance is partially terminated (interrupted) when a specific performance and a preview are running simultaneously, the entire system can execute a unified specific performance across the entire system.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during the execution of a specific performance, at least the mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the specific performance (whiteout mode, blackout mode) may be terminated. The multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame may continue the illumination mode being performed during the specific performance (this may include continuing the illumination mode performed as the specific performance for at least a certain period after the termination of the mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the specific performance, or continuing the abnormality notification illumination mode for at least a certain period after the termination of the mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 as the specific performance when an abnormal condition occurs).

Furthermore, in the example described above, when text information as a warning and a specific performance are displayed simultaneously on the performance display device 1600, the start timing of the specific performance is delayed or the specific performance is terminated. However, the text information displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not limited to warning information, as long as the normal background image (when no performance is being performed) is displayed as a background image, making it more difficult to see than when the specific performance is being performed. For example, if the performance display device 1600 displays abnormal information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality, such as "door opening error") in a static state when an abnormal condition occurs, this abnormal information may be made more difficult to see than when the specific performance is being performed, even when the normal background image is displayed.

[27. Button operation methods and display methods]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the display mode of the performance display device 1600 is changed according to the operation mode of the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Figure 295 is a timing chart showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device 1600, and Figure 296 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device 1600. In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given. Furthermore, the following modified examples may be performed in combination with the above embodiment, for example, a specific performance that has the possibility of a jackpot in the above embodiment may be performed as the following first specific performance, and a specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot in the above embodiment may be performed as the following second specific performance, or they may be performed as performances different from the specific performances of the above embodiment.

The pachinko machine 1 in this example is capable of executing a first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot, and a second specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot. The player can determine whether the performance is the first specific performance with the potential to result in a jackpot or the second specific performance without the potential to result in a jackpot by pressing the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300. Specifically, as shown in Figure 295(A), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the period from the start of the second specific performance without the potential to result in a jackpot (ts) until the end of the second specific performance (te) (t1), the performance display device 1600 will display the non-winning state until the period T1 has elapsed (t2). Thus, in this example, the player can recognize that the second specific performance without the potential to result in a jackpot is being executed by displaying the non-winning state when the press operation section 303 is pressed.

Furthermore, in this example, based on the fact that the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the performance display device 1600 displays the non-winning state (t1). If the press operation of the press operation unit 303 continues for a certain period (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, even if the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is still in progress, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is removed) based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the press operation of the press operation unit 303 (t2). In other words, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden at a timing (t2) before the timing (t3) when the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is released.

In this example, as shown in Figures 296(A) to (D), after the second specific performance begins (A), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed (B), the performance display device 1600 displays a crying character and the words "Too bad! You lost" as the non-winning pattern 1600a. Furthermore, once a preset period T1 has elapsed with the press operation section 303 pressed, the non-winning pattern 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (C), and the second specific performance ends (D). In this way, since the non-winning pattern 1600a is displayed when the press operation section 303 is pressed during the second specific performance, the player can easily recognize that there is no possibility of winning. Furthermore, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed and a preset period T1 has elapsed, the display of the non-winning scenario 1600a disappears from the performance display device 1600. This allows for a performance that considers players who may be disappointed by the display of the non-winning scenario 1600a based on their press operation of the press operation unit 303 and are unable to release the press operation, thus avoiding an excessive decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Note that if the press operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific performance after the display of the non-winning scenario 1600a disappears from the performance display device 1600, the non-winning scenario 1600a may be displayed again on the performance display device 1600. This allows players to visually confirm that they do not have a chance of winning the jackpot by seeing the re-displayed non-winning scenario 1600a.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 295(B), when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a big win, the performance display device 1600 displays the non-winning state (t1). Subsequently, if the press operation section 303 repeatedly changes between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1) (t1 to t3'), even if the press operation section 303 is released after a preset period T1 has elapsed since the press operation of the press operation section 303 began, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not hidden but continues to be displayed (t2). In other words, from the time the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 begins (t1), the display of the non-winning state shown on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden even after the period T1 has elapsed (t2). Then, from the time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (t3'), based on the elapsed period T1, the display of the non-winning state shown on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is removed) (t4).

In other words, based on the fact that the press operation unit 303 is pressed in Figure 296(B), the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600. If the press operation unit 303 is then pressed repeatedly, or if the state of the press operation unit 303 changes repeatedly between being released and being pressed in a short period of time (at least shorter than T1), even if the press operation unit 303 is released in Figure 296(C), the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 will continue to be displayed without being hidden. If the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again within the predetermined period T1 that has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 will be hidden (the display of the non-winning state will disappear). In this way, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning pattern 1600a is displayed. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly thereafter, even if the period of repeated pressing is longer than the preset period T1, the non-winning pattern 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not hidden but continues to be displayed. This allows a warning to be given to a player who, angered by the display of the non-winning pattern 1600a, is hitting the press operation unit 303, thereby protecting the press operation unit 303 and preventing malfunction or damage.

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific performance, the performance display device 1600 will display the non-winning state 1600a. If the press operation unit 303 is repeatedly pressed thereafter, or if the state of the press operation unit 303 changes repeatedly between being released and being pressed within a short period (at least a period shorter than T1), the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 will be changed. For example, each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (it may be once or two or more times), the character's face displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may change (for example, gradually changing from a crying face to an angry face), or the text displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may change (for example, changing from "Too bad! You lost" to "You lost," "Hitting won't change anything," etc.), or each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (it may be once or multiple times), the non-winning state 1600a may be switched between being displayed on the performance display device 1600 and being hidden from the performance display device 1600 (the number of operations A on the pressing operation unit 303 when switching from the state where the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the state where it is hidden, and the state where the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600). The number of operations B of the press operation unit 303 when switching states may be made different (for example, once for A and twice for B). Alternatively, each time the press operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (it may be once or multiple times), the display may switch between a state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a state in which a special non-winning state (for example, display of a character, etc.) different from the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (the number of operations A' of the press operation unit 303 when switching from the state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the state in which the special non-winning state is displayed, and the number of operations B of the press operation unit 303 when switching from the state in which the special non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed may be made different (for example, once for A and twice for B). This allows the warning level to be changed according to the number of times the press button 303 is pressed, and the non-winning pattern 1600a can be displayed or hidden to emphasize the non-winning pattern 1600a, thereby warning the player. This protects the press button 303 and prevents malfunction or damage. Furthermore, if the press button 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific performance after the non-winning pattern 1600a has disappeared from the performance display device 1600, the non-winning pattern 1600a may be displayed again on the performance display device 1600. This allows the player to reconfirm that there is no possibility of winning, and also allows warnings to be issued to players who repeatedly press the press button 303 again after the non-winning pattern 1600a has disappeared, protecting the press button 303 and preventing malfunction or damage.

On the other hand, during the second specific performance, based on the fact that the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, the performance display device 1600 displays the non-winning state (t1). If the press operation of the press operation section 303 continues for a certain period (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state disappears) based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the press operation of the press operation section 303, without changing the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600. In this way, if there is no risk of malfunction or damage to the press operation section 303, the system avoids giving the player a warning, thereby preventing causing discomfort to the player or further disappointment to an already disappointed player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 295(C), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific performance which has the potential to result in a jackpot (t1), the performance display device 1600 will not display the non-winning state regardless of the timing of the press operation of the press operation section 303. Therefore, by not displaying the non-winning state, the player can recognize that the first specific performance which has the potential to result in a jackpot is being performed, thus creating anticipation for a jackpot and drawing attention to the first specific performance, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In other words, as shown in Figures 296 (A') to (D'), during the first specific performance which has the possibility of a big win, (A') even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, the performance display device 1600 does not display the non-winning pattern (B') to (D'). Furthermore, since the performance display device 1600 does not display the non-winning pattern regardless of the timing of the press operation of the press operation section 303, it is possible to reliably recognize that the first specific performance which has the possibility of a big win is being performed, and to draw attention to the first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. In addition, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a predetermined period while the first specific performance is being performed, a winning indication pattern different from the non-winning pattern (a pattern that indicates that it is a win or that there is a possibility of a win) may be displayed. This allows players to visually recognize the winning indication and understand that a first specific performance with a possibility of a jackpot is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, creating anticipation for a jackpot and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, while Figures 296 (A') to (D') show examples where the first specific animation results in a jackpot, the first specific animation is also performed in cases of losses. In other words, when the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300 is pressed, the animation display device 1600 does not display a non-winning state, meaning that even if the first specific animation, which has the potential for a jackpot, is being performed, it is impossible to determine whether it will result in a jackpot or a loss. Therefore, it is possible to prevent players from losing interest in the first specific animation once they realize it is being performed, and to keep them focused on the first specific animation displayed on the animation display device 1600 until a result (stopping of a jackpot symbol or stopping of a losing symbol) is obtained, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this example, the system is configured to execute the first and second specific performances when a variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the system is not limited to this configuration, and the first and second specific performances (or just one of them) may be executed when a specific control command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is received. For example, the system may be configured to determine whether or not to execute the first and second specific performances (or just one of them) based on the elapsed time since receiving the start-up slot entry command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the elapsed time since receiving the start-up slot entry command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), or the elapsed time since receiving the stop display command (the elapsed time since receiving the stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer). In this case, the start timing of the first or second specific performance (or just one of them) can be changed, preventing players from getting bored.

Furthermore, when the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning state disappears) by performing an operation other than the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 described above. That is, the non-winning state may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on a first operation (in this example, a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303) performed on the performance operation unit 300 during the second specific performance described above. Then, the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning state disappears) based on a second operation (for example, a predetermined operation on the contact operation unit 302, or a first termination operation on the contact operation unit 302 and a second termination operation on the pressing operation unit 303) performed on the performance operation unit 300 while the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600. This makes it possible to perform performances that are considerate of players who feel uncomfortable with the display of the non-winning state, and does not excessively diminish the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a predetermined control unit other than the performance control unit 300 (for example, one or any combination of the handle 195, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, etc.) is operated, the performance display device 1600 may display a special mode that is different from the non-winning mode and makes it difficult to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot, not only during the second specific performance but also during the first specific performance. In this case, although the display of the special mode on the performance display device 1600 while the first specific performance is being executed may disappoint the player, if they realize that it is not the non-winning mode, their expectation of a jackpot can be greatly increased. If a jackpot occurs without the player realizing that it is not the non-winning mode, the suddenness of the unexpected event can enhance the enjoyment of the game. In this case, the special mode may be changed according to the operation of the predetermined control unit, and the change in the special mode may be used to suggest that it is different from the non-winning mode.

Furthermore, since the second specific performance described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution may disappoint players and reduce their enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, the second specific performance is executed only when certain conditions are met, thereby preventing an excessive decrease in enjoyment of the game. Specifically, the second specific performance can be executed when a jackpot is not achieved and a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting player contact. This prevents so-called "stop-and-go" play, which stops the launch of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the second special effect may be executed in the following cases: when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation has reached a predetermined period; when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the stop display command was received has reached a predetermined period; or when the number of reserved first and second special symbols (first reserved number, second reserved number) is 0. In this case as well, stopping play can be prevented, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

The above-mentioned second specific presentation and non-winning display are merely examples and are not limited to those described above. For example, the second specific presentation may display a display unrelated to the symbol variation, such as an introduction of the game machine or characters. Similarly, the non-winning display is not limited to notifying the player that a jackpot has not been won; it may also display a display unrelated to the symbol variation (e.g., a display for settings) on the presentation display device 1600.

Furthermore, the first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot and the second specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot may have some or all of the following characteristics (e.g., rainbow-colored illumination, rainbow-colored performance display characteristics, etc.): the display mode of the performance display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker (main frame speaker 622, etc.), and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. Alternatively, the first and second specific performances may have different characteristics. Also, one or both of the first and second specific performances are not limited to those performed during periods when variable performances are occurring; they may also be performed during periods when variable performances are not occurring, for example, as a pre-announcement or similar performance. This increases the variety of performances and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine equipped with an auxiliary display device capable of displaying images separately from the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device may be configured to display a non-winning pattern based on the press operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific performance, or a special pattern may be displayed on the auxiliary display device based on the operation of a predetermined operation unit different from the performance operation unit 300. In this case, it becomes possible to display the non-winning pattern or special pattern without obstructing the view of the second specific performance executed by the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the non-winning pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the press operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific performance, the second specific performance may be interrupted (terminated midway through execution). In this case, the non-winning pattern can be displayed instead of the second specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, making it easier to see the non-winning pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 and allowing the user to immediately notice when the non-winning pattern is displayed. Alternatively, after interrupting the specific performance when displaying the non-winning state (t1), the second specific performance may be started based on the disappearance of the display of the non-winning state (t2 in Figure 295(A), t4 in Figure 295(B)); or after interrupting the specific performance when displaying the non-winning state (t1), and after the disappearance of the display of the non-winning state, a different performance from the second specific performance (which may not involve any special performance, similar to the display waiting for the start of variation) may be performed, and the second specific performance may be started when a predetermined period has elapsed since the disappearance of the display of the non-winning state or since the last operation of the press operation unit 303 (for example, t2 + n seconds in Figure 295(A) (for example, n=30) or t1 + T1 + n seconds in Figure 295(A) (for example, T1 + n=30), t4 + n seconds in Figure 295(B) (for example, n=30), or t3' + T1 + n seconds in Figure 295(B) (for example, n=30)). Furthermore, if a special pattern is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of a predetermined control unit other than the performance operation unit 300 during the second specific performance, the second specific performance may be continued without interruption. This allows the player to be aware that a special pattern has been displayed, i.e., that it is not the pattern for when a win has not occurred.

Furthermore, the first and second specific performances displayed on the performance display device 1600 include changes in the symbols, and the display mode changes over time. On the other hand, the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 does not change its display mode over time, but rather changes its display mode in response to the operation of the performance operation unit 300. In other words, videos are displayed for the first and second specific performances, and still images are displayed for the non-winning mode. Therefore, when the non-winning mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600 in place of the second specific performance based on the press operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific performance, the performance display device 1600 changes from displaying a video to displaying a still image. By making such a large change in the display mode on the performance display device 1600 from displaying a video to displaying a still image, it becomes easier to notice that the winning mode has been displayed. Furthermore, when the non-winning state is terminated and the non-winning state is displayed on the display device 1600, it is sufficient that at least the non-winning state is displayed as a still image. Some of the background displays and other elements displayed on the lower layers of the non-winning state may change their display mode over time.

Furthermore, in the example described above, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600. If the press operation unit 303 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time, even if the press operation unit 303 is being pressed, the non-winning state is hidden based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was operated. If the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, and the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed (based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was last operated), (t) Although the non-winning state is shown to be hidden, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period after the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the non-winning state 1600a will continue to be displayed, but a predetermined display or performance will be executed based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was operated. If the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between being pressed and released after the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the predetermined display or performance may be executed if the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again within the predetermined period T1 that has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed.

For example, similar to the delay in the start of the specific performance described above, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a predetermined display performance, the predetermined display performance is continued and the start of the second specific performance is delayed. However, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time, even if the press operation section 303 is being pressed, the predetermined display performance may be terminated and the specific performance started based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the press operation section 303 was operated. If the press operation section 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, the predetermined display performance may be terminated and the specific performance started if the press operation section 303 is not pressed again within the predetermined period T1 that has elapsed since the press operation section 303 was pressed. In this case, the non-winning state 1600a may be displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed. In addition, as described in [27. Button Operation Modes and Display Modes] above, control may be implemented to differentiate the display termination time of the non-winning state 1600a depending on whether the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed over a certain period of time or whether it is quickly changed between a pressed state and an unpressed state. Furthermore, control related to this control (for example, control to change the state of the non-winning state 1600a based on the operation of the press operation section 303, etc.) may also be implemented. Moreover, the predetermined display effect is not limited to a symbol variation effect; it may also be a standby display waiting for the variation display to start, etc.

Furthermore, the above example shows how the end and start times of predetermined displays (e.g., non-winning state 1600a) and predetermined effects (e.g., second specific effect) differ depending on whether the press operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed over a certain period of time or changed between a pressed state and an unpressed state in a short period of time. However, this is not limited to cases where the press operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, but also applies when the contact operation part 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously contacted over a certain period of time. The end and start times of predetermined displays (e.g., non-winning mode 1600a) and predetermined effects (e.g., second specific effect) may be different depending on whether the state changes rapidly between a state of contact and a state of non-contact. Similarly, the end and start times of predetermined displays (e.g., non-winning mode 1600a) and predetermined effects (e.g., second specific effect) may be different depending on whether the handle touch sensor 192 is continuously in contact for a certain period of time or rapidly between a state of contact and a state of non-contact.

[27-1. Specific Abnormal Conditions]
Next, we will describe variations that occur when a specific abnormal state occurs during the execution of a first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot or a second specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot. Figure 297(A) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the second specific performance, Figure 297(B) is a timing chart showing an example of a performance pattern during the first specific performance, and Figure 298(C) is a timing chart showing an example of a variation of the performance pattern during the second specific performance. In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given. Furthermore, the following variations may be executed in combination with the above embodiment, for example, the specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot in the above embodiment may be executed as the following first specific performance, and the specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot in the above embodiment may be executed as the following second specific performance, or they may be executed as performances different from the specific performances of the above embodiment.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example exhibits the following abnormal conditions: an abnormal door opening state where the door frame release switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4, or that the main frame release switch detects that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; an abnormal vibration detection state where the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds); an abnormal lower tray full state where a detection signal is received from the full tank detection sensor 154; an abnormal ball depletion state where a detection signal is received from the ball depletion detection sensor 574; an abnormal radio wave detection state where the radio wave sensor detects an unauthorized radio wave; and an abnormal magnetic sensor 1050 detecting vibration in the game area 5a. When an abnormal magnetic field is detected inside the machine, or an abnormal entry detection occurs (such as when a detection signal is input from the second start port sensor 2401 when the second start port 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the big prize entry sensor 2402 when the machine is not in a big win or small win state), the performance display device 1600 will display an abnormality notification (such as text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (e.g., "Door Open")), output a notification sound from various speakers such as the main frame speaker 622, or various decorative boards provided on the door frame side (in this example) Then, various LEDs mounted on the door frame unit (including the left door frame side unit 420, the right door frame side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and in the case of a split game board 5A, various decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR, are illuminated in an abnormal notification illumination pattern, or LEDs are mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side (in this example, LEDs are mounted to illuminate the first rear upper decorative part 3211 of the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (the function display board 1402 is not included in the decorative boards as it does not perform decoration)). The system notifies the occurrence of an abnormal condition by turning off various LEDs on the decorative boards (excluding the second decorative board on the back upper part 3212, which has LEDs mounted on it; in the case of a split game board 5A, excluding the first decorative board on the back upper part 3211, which has LEDs mounted on it, and the second decorative board on the back upper part 3212, which has LEDs mounted on it (either one or the other)) of the left game board 5AL). Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the game board side may also be configured to illuminate in an abnormality notification mode. In other words, when an abnormal condition occurs, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the decorative boards on the game board side should be controlled to an abnormal illumination mode (abnormality notification illumination mode) that includes off, among other pre-set illumination modes.

Furthermore, the second specific performance can be executed with some functions restricted when a specific abnormal state (in this example, the door-open abnormal state, but it could be any of the above multiple abnormal states, or one of the above multiple abnormal states or any combination thereof) occurs. For example, if a specific abnormal state occurs while the second specific performance is being executed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality notification display mode is displayed on the top layer of the performance display device 1600, but the second specific performance continues to be displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. In other words, the area for displaying the second specific performance and the area for displaying the abnormality notification display mode based on the occurrence of a specific abnormal state overlap on the performance display device 1600. By displaying the abnormality notification display mode on the top layer and the second specific performance on a lower layer than the abnormality notification display mode, the display of the second specific performance and the abnormality notification display mode are performed simultaneously.

In this example, if the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the first specific performance or the second specific performance, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame side and the various decorative boards installed on the game board side (all or some of them) will interrupt their illumination patterns corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific illumination pattern) or the second specific performance (second specific illumination pattern), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame side will illuminate in an abnormal notification illumination pattern, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed on the game board side will be turned off. Then, based on the resolution of the abnormal condition (in this example, the door frame release switch detecting that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, or that the main frame release switch detecting that the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2), the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormality notification illumination mode is terminated, and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side is terminated. If the first specific performance is in progress, illumination is resumed in the illumination mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific illumination mode), and if the second specific performance is in progress, illumination is resumed in the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination mode).

Furthermore, when resuming illumination in the illumination mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific illumination mode) or the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific illumination mode) based on the resolution of the abnormal condition, the illumination is not restarted from the illumination mode at the time of interruption, but rather from the illumination mode corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the first and second specific effects. In other words, when starting the illumination mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific illumination mode) or the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific illumination mode), the timer starts measuring and the illumination is restarted in the illumination mode corresponding to the timer. Even during the interruption and restart of illumination in the illumination mode corresponding to the first and second specific effects (first specific illumination mode) without interruption, the timer continues measuring and, when starting the illumination mode corresponding to the first and second specific effects (first specific illumination mode) again, the illumination is restarted in the illumination mode corresponding to the timer.

Furthermore, in this example, even after the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition is resolved, for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side will illuminate in an abnormality notification illumination mode, while the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side will be turned off. In other words, after a certain period of time has elapsed since the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition was resolved, if the first specific performance is in progress, illumination will resume in the illumination mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific illumination mode), and if the second specific performance is in progress, illumination will resume in the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination mode). On the other hand, the abnormality notification display mode shown on the performance display device 1600 is hidden when the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition is resolved. This allows for real-time monitoring of the occurrence of specific abnormal conditions through the abnormality notification display mode shown on the display device 1600. Furthermore, even after a specific abnormal condition has been resolved, the abnormality notification illumination mode of various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame allows for confirmation that the specific abnormal condition persisted for a certain period. This facilitates the detection of fraudulent activity, making it easier to detect and deter such activity.

Furthermore, in this example, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the lighting patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are changed. Specifically, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, the lighting patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side that correspond to the second specific performance (second specific lighting pattern) are terminated, and the LEDs are made to light up in a special lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific lighting pattern). In this example, as the special lighting pattern, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are made to light up in white.

The illumination from the various LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame and the game board is easily visible to the player and is conspicuous as it occurs over a wide area of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the LEDs on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame and the game board are illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to a second specific performance (second specific lighting pattern) that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, it may be visually distracting and unpleasant for the player. To address this, the pachinko machine 1 in this example allows the illumination to be terminated by the player's operation when the LEDs on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame and the game board are illuminated in a lighting pattern corresponding to a second specific performance (second specific lighting pattern), thereby preventing the unpleasant illumination from continuing and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the special illumination mode is not limited to those described above, as long as it is different from the second specified illumination mode. Also, the LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame side and the LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the game board side may emit different colors, or one of the LEDs mounted on the decorative circuit boards on the door frame side or the decorative circuit boards on the game board side may emit a predetermined color while the other remains off.

Furthermore, in this example, even when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a big win, it is possible to change the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side. Specifically, as shown in Figure 297(A), if a door opening abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of the second specific performance (ts) which does not have the possibility of a jackpot and the end of the second specific performance (te), the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4, or that the main frame opening switch detects that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2, the second specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues, and "Door Opening" is displayed as a door opening abnormality notification display mode. The various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side cease emitting light in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) (t1), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, in the event of an abnormal door open state, a door open notification sound (an announcement such as "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding-dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum configurable volume or the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or the output stops when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed. (Note that even if the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 remains open relative to the main frame 4, the output may stop after a certain number of repeated outputs (e.g., 5 times), or the output may continue until the main frame 4 or door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4 is closed, or the output may continue until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed after the main frame 4 or door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4 is closed.)

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the door is in an abnormal open state (t2), the illumination patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side will not be changed. However, after the abnormal door open state has been resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormal notification illumination pattern and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side have ended (t4), the illumination will be changed to a special illumination pattern different from the illumination pattern corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination pattern).

Thus, in this example, when a door-open abnormal state occurs as a specific abnormal condition during the second specific performance, which does not have the possibility of a big win, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side to light up in an abnormal notification light pattern and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side to turn off, pressing the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 resolves the door-open abnormal state, ending the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in an abnormal notification light pattern and the turning off of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side. After this, the LEDs are not illuminated in the light pattern corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light pattern), but rather in a special light pattern. Therefore, for players who do not wish for the illumination to continue in the second specific illumination mode corresponding to the second specific animation (second specific illumination mode), even during the door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state, it is possible to change the illumination mode by pressing the press operation section 303 of the animation operation unit 300. This eliminates the restriction on the period during which the illumination in the second specific illumination mode can be terminated, thus preventing players from feeling anxious or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 298(C), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance (t2), the display of the second specific performance being executed on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated and the display of the special performance may be started. In this case, when the abnormal door opening condition is resolved and the abnormal notification illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side ends, and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side ends, if a special effect display is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will illuminate in a special illumination mode. If a second specific effect display is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific illumination mode). If a first specific effect display is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific illumination mode). If other displays such as standby are being executed, the LEDs may illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the other state (which may be off).

Furthermore, the special performance may be set to end when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 was pressed. In this case, the second specific performance may be executed again after the special performance has ended, or another performance (which may not include a special performance, similar to the display waiting for the start of variation) may be executed after the special performance has ended, and then the second specific performance may be executed again based on the fulfillment of predetermined performance conditions. In other words, the second specific performance may not be executed while the special performance is running, and may be made available for execution after the special performance has ended, or the second specific performance may be executed again based on the fulfillment of predetermined performance conditions after the special performance has ended. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed again while the second specific performance is being executed, the special performance may be executed again to cause the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side to light up in a special illumination mode. This gives players who do not wish to continue the second specific performance or who do not wish to continue illuminating in the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination mode) an opportunity to change the performance or illumination mode, thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, when the abnormal door opening condition is resolved and the abnormal notification illumination mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side ends, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side turn off, based on the execution of a special performance, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side illuminate in a special illumination mode, and then when the special performance ends and the second specific performance begins, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side illuminate in a special illumination mode. The various LEDs installed may be made to light up in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light-emitting mode), or, if the second specific performance is being executed when the abnormal door open state is resolved and the abnormal notification light-emitting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are terminated, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be made to light up in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light-emitting mode). In this case as well, the second specific performance may be terminated by pressing the press operation unit 303 again, making the special performance executable, and the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light-emitting mode) of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be terminated and made to light up in the special light-emitting mode. Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 is terminated during the special performance, the special performance can be terminated. If the performance control unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the termination operation, the period until the special performance is terminated can be extended, in other words, the start time of the second specific performance can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance control unit 300 in a manner different from the termination operation during the special performance, the start time of illumination in the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination mode) can be delayed.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display text information such as characters and symbols. For example, the performance display device 1600 may display the non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, the fact that the second specific performance is continuing as a special display state, the fact that the second specific performance has ended when the press operation section 303 is pressed, or that a special performance is being executed in place of the second specific performance. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second specific performance is being executed, that there is no possibility of a jackpot, or that the second specific performance has ended. In addition, some of the text information displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be changed in response to the operation of the performance operation unit 300. This allows players to pass the time until the second specific performance ends, and if the period until the special performance ends is extended based on the performance operation unit 300 being operated in a manner different from the termination operation, players will be able to recognize that the period until the special performance ends has been extended—in other words, that the start time of the second specific performance has been definitively delayed—which will give players a sense of security and prevent a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, a special feature may be implemented to provide a beneficial experience for the player. That is, since the second specific feature is useless to the player because it does not offer the possibility of a jackpot, and only serves to disappoint or annoy the player, it is possible to terminate it when the press operation unit 303 is pressed. However, the special feature that is executed in place of the second specific feature when the press operation unit 303 is pressed may be designed to allow the player to customize the game to their liking and enjoy it, providing a beneficial experience for the player. For example, the special feature may include character introductions, introductions to reach animations, notification of winning probabilities, volume settings, light intensity settings, and selection of animation modes. This reduces the player's discomfort when the second specific feature, which offers no possibility of a jackpot, is terminated and the special feature begins, thus preventing an excessive decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this example, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side, which emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission pattern), are not changed. Similarly, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are not changed. Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a predetermined period while the first specific performance is being executed, the first specific performance may be continued without executing a special performance, while the display mode of the performance display device 1600 may be changed (for example, to display a winning indication mode that suggests it is a win or that there is a possibility of winning), or the pointer that points to the light emission data arranged in a time series that constitutes the light emission mode generation schedule data indicating the light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance by various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be updated to change the light emission data and change the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side (changing to other light emission data from the light emission mode generation schedule data as the first specific light emission mode, while continuing the first specific light emission mode), or the performance display device 1600 may be displayed a winning indication mode (a mode that suggests it is a win or that there is a possibility of winning) that is different from the display of the special performance. This allows players to visually recognize the winning indication and understand that a first specific performance with a possibility of a jackpot is being executed. This creates anticipation for a jackpot and draws attention to the first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, thus preventing a decline in game enjoyment. Furthermore, even if the system is configured to terminate the second specific performance and execute a special performance when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific performance with a possibility of a jackpot, the first specific performance may not be terminated, nor may the special performance be initiated. Similarly, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a specific abnormal state, such as a door-open abnormal state, that occurs during the first specific performance with a possibility of a jackpot, the first specific performance may not be terminated, nor may the special performance be initiated.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 297(B), if a door opening abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of the first specific performance (ts) which has the potential to result in a jackpot (te), and the end of the first specific performance (te), the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4, or that the main frame opening switch has been opened relative to the outer frame 2. In this case, the performance display device 1600 continues to display the first specific performance while showing "Door Open" as a door opening abnormality notification display mode. The various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side cease emitting light in the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission mode) (t1). The various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side then emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the door is in an abnormal open state (t2), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will continue to emit abnormal notification light patterns without changing the light emission patterns of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side. The first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600 will also continue without ending. After the abnormal door open state is resolved and the abnormal notification light patterns of the LEDs on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the extinguishing of the LEDs on the decorative boards on the game board side have ended, if the first specific performance is still being executed (t4), the LEDs will emit light again in the light emission pattern corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission pattern).

Thus, in this example, when a specific abnormal state, such as a door-open abnormal state, occurs during the first specific performance which has the possibility of a jackpot, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side to light up in an abnormal notification light pattern and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side to turn off, even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, the door-open abnormal state is resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side in an abnormal notification light pattern and the turning off of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side ends, after which the illumination of the LEDs will start again in the light pattern corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light pattern). Furthermore, even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific performance which has the possibility of a jackpot, the first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600 will continue without ending. Therefore, after the abnormal notification flashing pattern ends, the flashing pattern corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific flashing pattern) continues, giving the player a sense of reassurance that the first specific performance is being executed. This allows the player to focus on the display of the first specific performance executed on the performance display device 1600, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the abnormal door opening condition is resolved and the abnormal notification illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side ends, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side turn off, and the first specific performance is not being executed at this time, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be made to illuminate in a different illumination pattern than that of the first specific performance (this may be an illumination pattern that is executed when no special performance is being executed, similar to the display waiting for the start of a variation, including turning off). In other words, if the first specific performance has already ended, the special lottery result is displayed and the display of the variation of the symbols has ended, so it is preferable to suppress the unnecessary illumination in the illumination pattern corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific illumination pattern) and instead make them illuminate in an illumination pattern corresponding to the state of the game at the time the abnormal door opening condition is resolved and the abnormal notification illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side ends, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side turn off.

Furthermore, in this example, even if a specific abnormal state, such as a door-opening abnormal state, occurs during the first specific performance (which has the potential for a jackpot) or the second specific performance (which does not have the potential for a jackpot), the LEDs mounted on the first rear upper decoration board 3211 and the LEDs mounted on the second rear upper decoration board 3212 (either one or the other) among the various decorative boards provided on the game board will continue to illuminate in the same manner as during the first or second specific performance, at least until the first or second specific performance ends. This allows the player to recognize that the first or second specific performance is continuing, preventing them from feeling anxious or distrustful.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to display text information such as characters and symbols on the performance display device 1600 when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, it is also possible to choose not to display text information such as characters and symbols on the performance display device 1600 based on the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the first specific performance. This allows players to recognize that the second specific performance is being executed and, consequently, that there is no possibility of a jackpot, by visually confirming the text information such as characters and symbols displayed on the performance display device 1600 when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed. Conversely, if text information such as characters and symbols is not displayed on the performance display device 1600 even when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, it can increase the expectation of a jackpot, thereby drawing attention to the first specific performance executed on the performance display device 1600 and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a predetermined operating unit other than the performance operation unit 300 (for example, one or any combination of the handle 195, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, etc.) is operated, special character information such as characters and symbols different from the character information such as characters and symbols displayed on the performance display device 1600 may be displayed, regardless of whether the second specific performance or the first specific performance is in progress. In this case, although the display of special character information on the performance display device 1600 during the first specific performance may cause the player to mistakenly believe that the second specific performance is being executed, if the player who mistakenly believed that the second specific performance was being executed realizes (after the end of a specific abnormal state) that the first specific performance is being executed, their expectation of a big win can be greatly increased. Also, if the special lottery result for a big win is displayed when the first specific performance ends without the player realizing that the first specific performance is being executed, the sudden occurrence of an unexpected big win can enhance the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, in this case, the display mode of the special character information shown on the performance display device 1600 may be changed in response to the operation of a predetermined control unit. This allows players who notice that the first specific performance is being executed to operate the predetermined control unit with anticipation of a big win, thus enjoying the changes in the special character information. Additionally, by changing the display mode of the special character information in a manner different from the character information such as letters and symbols displayed based on the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific performance, it may be made visually easier to distinguish it from the character information such as letters and symbols displayed based on the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific performance.

Furthermore, since the second specific performance described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution may disappoint players and reduce their enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, the second specific performance is executed only when certain conditions are met, thereby preventing an excessive decrease in enjoyment of the game. Specifically, the second specific performance can be executed when a jackpot is not achieved and a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting player contact. This prevents so-called "stop-and-go" play, which stops the launch of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the second special effect may be executed in the following cases: when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation has reached a predetermined period; when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the stop display command was received has reached a predetermined period; or when the number of reserved first and second special symbols (first reserved number, second reserved number) is 0. In this case as well, stopping play can be prevented, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Furthermore, the first specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot and the second specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot may have some or all of the following characteristics (e.g., rainbow-colored illumination, rainbow-colored performance display characteristics, etc.): the display mode of the performance display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker (main frame speaker 622, etc.), and the light emission mode of the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3. Alternatively, the first and second specific performances may have different characteristics. Also, one or both of the first and second specific performances are not limited to those performed during periods when variable performances are occurring; they may also be performed during periods when variable performances are not occurring, for example, as a pre-announcement or similar performance. This increases the variety of performances and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the group of light emission data that instructs the respective light emission patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side is output serially as serial data from the serial communication line. In addition, the group of light emission data that is indicated by a pointer that specifies which group of light emission data to output from the first group of light emission data updated in the scheduler update process, among the group of light emission data arranged in a time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission pattern, is output serially to the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side each time the peripheral control unit performs a steady-state process (approximately every 33.3 ms in this example). In this way, since the group of light emission data is output at regular intervals, even if abnormal light emission occurs due to noise, etc., it can be immediately restored to normal light emission, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the output is generated not only when the set of light emission data indicated by the pointer after the pointer update differs from the set of light emission data indicated by the pointer before the pointer update, but also when they are the same. Therefore, if the pointer indicates a set of light emission data that suggests emitting light in a predetermined pattern for a certain period, and the light emission pattern changes due to noise or other factors, it can be immediately restored to the predetermined pattern, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Incidentally, the transmission of each bit of serial data is synchronized with the clock input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver and transmitted at regular intervals.

[27-2. Alternative performance]
Next, we will describe a modified version in which, in the first specific performance which has the possibility of a big win and the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a big win, a sound corresponding to the first specific performance is output from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the first specific performance, and a sound corresponding to the second specific performance is not output from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the second specific performance. Figure 299(A) is a timing chart showing an example of the performance mode during the second specific performance, Figure 299(B) is a timing chart showing an example of the performance mode during the first specific performance, Figures 300(A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device 1600 during the second specific performance, and Figures 300(A') to (D') are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device 1600 during the first specific performance. In the following, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given. Furthermore, the following modifications may be performed in combination with the above-described embodiment. For example, the specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot in the above embodiment may be designated as the first specific performance below, and the specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot in the above embodiment may be designated as the second specific performance below, or they may be performed as performances different from the specific performances in the above embodiment.

As described above, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 controls the illumination of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side in a light emission mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission mode) during the first specific performance which has the possibility of a jackpot, and outputs performance sounds corresponding to the first specific performance from a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622). On the other hand, during the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the illumination of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side is controlled in a light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode), and the output of performance sounds corresponding to the second specific performance from a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) is not performed. Furthermore, if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the second specific performance, which does not have the possibility of a big win, is being performed, the second specific performance is terminated. Specifically, as shown in Figure 299(A), a second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot is started, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode), and the speaker provided on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) is controlled to not output performance sound (ts). If the press operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the period until the second specific performance is ended (te) (t1), the second specific performance without the output of performance sound from the speaker provided on the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) is terminated, and the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side is terminated. This allows the second specific performance, which lacks excitement because it does not involve the output of sound effects from the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, to be terminated. Furthermore, it allows the termination of the second specific performance, which is useless to the player as it does not offer the possibility of a jackpot, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game caused by the execution of the second specific performance.

Furthermore, in this example, after the second specific performance is terminated based on the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, a performance similar to the special performance described above is executed to control the illumination of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side in an illumination mode (special illumination mode) corresponding to the special performance, and the second specific performance is not executed while the special performance is being executed (t1). Also, as described above, the special performance may be a performance beneficial to the player. In this case, since there is no output of performance sound from the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622), the special performance is executed instead of the second specific performance, which is not only unexciting but also does not offer the possibility of a jackpot, thus rendering it useless to the player. This prevents the useless second specific performance from being executed for a long period of time, which would reduce the enjoyment of the game, and reduces the player's discomfort caused by the execution of the second specific performance, thereby preventing a decline in enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this example, the special performance executed after the completion of the second specific performance is configured to output performance sounds corresponding to the special performance from a speaker installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622). Specifically, when the second specific performance ends and the special performance begins at timing t1 in Figure 299(A), the special performance accompanied by the output of performance sounds from the speaker installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) is executed. This allows for an exciting performance to be executed not only by the display of the special performance on the performance display device 1600, but also by the output of performance sounds from the speaker installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622), thereby preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In this example, as shown in Figures 300(A) to (D), after the second specific performance is started (A), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed (B), the performance display device 1600 displays a crying character and the words "Too bad! You lost" as the non-winning mode 1600a, and also displays the stopped symbol of the decorative pattern to end the second specific performance and terminate the light emission mode (second specific light emission mode) corresponding to the second specific performance by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side. After that, a special performance is executed in place of the second specific performance, and a performance sound corresponding to the special performance is output from a speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622), and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (special light emission mode) corresponding to the special performance ((C), (D)). Thus, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning pattern 1600a is displayed to notify the player that there is no possibility of winning a jackpot, the second specific performance is terminated, and then a special performance is executed in its place. This reduces the discomfort the player might feel from having a useless specific performance executed, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, since the non-winning pattern 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 disappears after a predetermined period, the performance can be executed in a way that is considerate of the player, without excessively diminishing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned special effects are implemented to allow players to customize the game to their liking or to enhance their enjoyment, the output of sound effects from the speakers installed in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) can further enhance the special effects. This reduces the unpleasantness players might feel from the execution of a second specific effect that is useless to them because it does not involve sound effects and does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In the example described above, a special performance accompanied by the output of sound from a speaker (for example, a main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed when the second specific performance, which does not involve the output of sound, is terminated based on the pressing operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during that performance. However, the technical concept is not limited to the above example, as long as the second specific performance is terminated based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition during the second specific performance, which does not involve the output of sound from a speaker (for example, a main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, if the second specific performance is terminated based on the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during a second specific performance that does not involve the output of performance sounds from a speaker (e.g., main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, a special performance may be executed in place of the second specific performance, but during the special performance, the speaker (e.g., main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 may not output performance sounds corresponding to the special performance. Furthermore, if the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 during a second specific performance that does not involve the output of performance sounds from the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, the second specific performance may be replaced (the second specific performance may be terminated) and a special performance may be executed, and performance sounds corresponding to the special performance may be output from the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, during a second specific performance that does not involve the output of performance sounds from the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, the first start port 2002 or the second start port When a game ball enters the 2004 slot (when a starting prize is awarded), instead of the second specific performance (after the second specific performance ends), a special performance may be executed, and a sound corresponding to the special performance may be output from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, based on the special lottery result determined by the acceptance of a game ball into the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004, a first specific performance with the possibility of a jackpot may be executed, and a sound corresponding to the first specific performance may be output from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1. This can prevent players from stopping play and improve the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the special performance may be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) as described above, and the second specific performance may be executed again after the special performance has finished, or another performance (which may not include a special performance, similar to the display waiting for the start of a variation) may be executed after the special performance has finished, and then the second specific performance may be executed again based on the fulfillment of predetermined performance conditions. In other words, the second specific performance may not be executed while the special performance is running, and may be executed after the special performance has finished, or the second specific performance may be executed again based on the fulfillment of predetermined performance conditions after the special performance has finished. In addition, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed again while the second specific performance is running, the special performance may be executed again, thereby reducing the unpleasantness for the player caused by the execution of a useless specific performance and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, if the performance control unit 300 is terminated during the special performance, the special performance can be terminated. If the performance control unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the termination operation, the period until the special performance is terminated can be extended, in other words, the start time of the second specific performance can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance control unit 300 in a manner different from the termination operation during the special performance, the start time of illumination in the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific illumination mode) can be delayed.

Furthermore, in special performances executed based on the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific performance, the performance display device 1600 may display character information such as letters and symbols. For example, the performance display device 1600 may display the non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, or a special display state indicating that the second specific performance has ended, or that a special performance is being executed in place of the second specific performance. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a jackpot, or that the second specific performance has ended. In addition, the performance operation unit 300 may be modified to change some of the character information displayed on the performance display device 1600 in response to an operation (for example, a contact operation of the contact operation section 302), or the performance display device 1600 may be modified to switch between a state in which the character information is displayed and a state in which it is not displayed in response to an operation (for example, a pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300. This allows players to pass the time during special effects, and if the duration of the special effect is extended based on the operation of the effect control unit 300 in a manner different from the termination operation, the player will be able to recognize that the duration of the special effect has been extended—in other words, that the start time of the second specific effect has been definitively delayed—providing a sense of security to the player and preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in this example, during the first specific performance which has the possibility of a big win, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission mode), and the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) outputs a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance. If the press operation part 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during this first specific performance, the first specific performance is not terminated but continues, and the light emission control of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side in a light emission mode corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission mode) continues, and the output of a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance from the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) continues. Similarly, even if the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192 during the first specific performance, when the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1 outputs a sound corresponding to the first specific performance, the first specific performance continues without ending. Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 (a start-up win) during the first specific performance, when the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1 outputs a sound corresponding to the first specific performance, the first specific performance continues without ending.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 299(B), the system starts a first specific performance that has the possibility of a big win, accompanied by the output of a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622). The system controls the illumination of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side to a light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance, and controls the system to output a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance from a speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 (ts), until the first specific performance ends (te). Even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the ming (t1), the first specific performance continues, accompanied by the output of a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance from the speaker (e.g., the main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. The light emission control of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side, corresponding to the first specific performance (first specific light emission mode), continues, and the output of a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance from the speaker (e.g., the main frame speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 continues.

In this example, as shown in Figures 300(A') to (D'), after the first specific performance begins (A'), if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed (B'), the decorative symbols displayed on the performance display device 1600 continue to change without stopping ((B') to (C')). Based on the receipt of a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the decorative symbols are then stopped (D'). In this way, even if the press operation section 303 is pressed during the first specific performance, the changing display of the decorative symbols continues. This allows players who recognize the possibility of a jackpot to increase their expectation of a jackpot and draw their attention to the first specific performance.

Furthermore, the first specific performance may have a period during which the performance sound is not output, or the second specific performance may have a period during which the performance sound is output, or the second specific performance may not output performance sound from the speaker (e.g., the main unit frame speaker 622) for the entire duration, while the first specific performance may output performance sound from the speaker (e.g., the main unit frame speaker 622) for at least a portion of the duration. In other words, this technical concept is applicable to any machine where, during the first specific performance, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed, or if the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, or if a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 (a start-up win occurs), the first specific performance continues without ending. Conversely, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed, or if the player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, or if a game ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 (a start-up win occurs), the second specific performance ends (but is not limited to these cases).

Furthermore, even if the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific performance, the non-winning pattern 1600a will not be displayed. Therefore, even if there is a period during the first specific performance when no performance sound is output, pressing the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during that period will allow it to be determined whether the first specific performance or the second specific performance is being performed. If it is determined that the first specific performance is being performed, the expectation of a big win will increase, and attention will be drawn to the first specific performance being performed on the performance display device 1600, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game. It is also possible to display a winning indication pattern (a pattern that indicates that it is a win or that there is a possibility of winning) different from the non-winning pattern 1600a when the press operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a preset period while the first specific performance is being performed. This allows players to visually recognize the winning indication and understand that a first specific performance with a possibility of a jackpot is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first specific performance displayed on the performance display device 1600, creating anticipation for a jackpot and thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if a predetermined operating unit other than the performance operation unit 300 (for example, one or any combination of the handle 195, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, etc.) is operated, it may be possible to display special character information such as characters and symbols that are different from the character information such as characters and symbols displayed on the performance display device 1600, regardless of whether it is during the first specific performance, the second specific performance, or a special performance. In this case as well, although there is a risk that the display of special character information on the performance display device 1600 may lead to the misunderstanding that the second specific performance is being performed, if the result of the special lottery for a jackpot is displayed, it will be possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game by causing a jackpot that the player did not expect to occur suddenly. Furthermore, the display mode of the special character information shown on the performance display device 1600 may be changed in response to the operation of a predetermined control unit. This allows players who notice that the first specific performance is being executed to operate the predetermined control unit with anticipation of a big win, thus enjoying the changes in the special character information. Additionally, the display mode of the special character information may be changed in a manner different from the character information such as letters and symbols displayed based on the operation of the press control unit during the second specific performance, making it easier to visually distinguish it from the character information such as letters and symbols displayed based on the operation of the press control unit during the second specific performance. Moreover, the display of special character information is not limited to always being shown when the predetermined control unit is operated; it may also be shown when the predetermined control unit is operated during the execution of any combination of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the special performance (or all of them). That is, even if the predetermined control unit is operated during the execution of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the special performance, there may be a period during which the special character information is not displayed.

Furthermore, since the second specific performance described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution may disappoint players and reduce their enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, the second specific performance is executed only when certain conditions are met, thereby preventing an excessive decrease in enjoyment of the game. Specifically, the second specific performance can be executed when a jackpot is not achieved and a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting player contact. This prevents so-called "stop-and-go" play, which stops the launch of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, the second special effect may be executed in the following cases: when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation has reached a predetermined period; when a jackpot is not achieved and the period since the stop display command was received has reached a predetermined period; or when the number of reserved first and second special symbols (first reserved number, second reserved number) is 0. In this case as well, stopping play can be prevented, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

Furthermore, the first specific performance, which has the possibility of a big win and is accompanied by the output of a performance sound, and the second specific performance, which does not have the possibility of a big win and is not accompanied by the output of a performance sound, may have some or all of the following characteristics identical or similar: the display mode of the performance display device 1600 (for example, a rainbow performance display mode in which three or more areas of the display area of the performance display device 1600 in the above embodiment are each displayed in different colors to achieve a display of three or more colors, and the display colors of the multiple areas are sequentially switched (see Figure 238)) or the light emission mode of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 (for example, a rainbow light emission in which multiple LED groups emit light in different colors to achieve a display of three or more colors by multiple LED groups, and the light emission control of multiple LED groups is sequentially switched (see Figure 241)) or the characteristics of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 (for example, a rainbow light emission in which multiple LED groups emit light in different colors to achieve a display of three or more colors by multiple LED groups, and the light emission control is performed to sequentially switch the light emission colors of multiple LED groups). Alternatively, the first specific performance and the second specific performance may have different characteristics (for example, rainbow light emission and light emission different from rainbow light emission, or a rainbow performance display mode and a display mode different from the rainbow performance display mode). Furthermore, one or both of the first and second specific effects are not limited to those performed during periods when variable effects are occurring; they may also be performed during periods when variable effects are not occurring, for example, as a pre-announcement effect as described above. This increases the variety of effects and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 described above, if the amount of balls dispensed (also called the difference in balls) from a predetermined value (plus or minus 0, the lower limit of the number of payouts minus the number of balls inserted (outs), etc.) reaches a predetermined upper limit, the machine may transition to a game restriction state that restricts part or all of the game. For example, in the game restriction state, the launching of game balls by the ball launching device 540 may be prohibited, detection by the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2401 may be disabled, processing related to the display of special symbols (special symbol process processing in this example) may not be started, LEDs related to the lottery processing such as the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be turned off or illuminated in a manner appropriate to the game restriction state, or decorative symbols may be hidden in the performance display device 1600 and displayed in a manner appropriate to the game restriction state, or one or any combination of these may be performed. Furthermore, the game restriction state may be released by a predetermined operation (such as turning the power OFF and then ON + clearing the RAM, or turning the power OFF and then ON).

Furthermore, even in a game restriction state, the controls in the above-described embodiment, such as controls related to specific effects, first specific effects, second specific effects, and special effects, may be made executable. Specifically, the controls relating to modifications that delay the start timing of specific effects by player operation in a game restriction state, the controls relating to modifications that delay the start timing of specific effects by predetermined operation when an abnormal state occurs in a game restriction state, the controls relating to modifications that delay the start timing of specific effects that display a substantially single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a game restriction state, the controls relating to modifications that change the display mode of the effect display device 1600 according to the operation mode of the press operation part 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in a game restriction state, and the controls relating to first specific effects and special effects that have the possibility of a big win in a game restriction state The above-described embodiments may also be made executable in the game restriction state, such as the control relating to a modified version in which a specific abnormal state occurs during the execution of a second specific performance that does not have the possibility of winning, the control relating to a modified version in which a special performance is executed in place of the second specific performance in the game restriction state, and the control relating to a modified version in which, in the game restriction state, the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) does not output a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance during the first specific performance, and the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main frame speaker 622) does not output a performance sound corresponding to the second specific performance during the second specific performance. Furthermore, in a restricted game state, specific animations that have the potential to result in a jackpot, including the first specific animation, may be made unplayable, while specific animations that do not have the potential to result in a jackpot, the second specific animation, and special animations may be made playable. Alternatively, in a restricted game state, specific animations that do not have the potential to result in a jackpot, including the second specific animation, may also be made unplayable, similar to the specific animations that have the potential to result in a jackpot and the first specific animation, while only special animations may be made playable in a restricted game state.

Furthermore, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of the above-mentioned specific performance, the first specific performance, the second specific performance, or a special performance, the performance display device 1600 may display a special indication corresponding to the game restriction state (a display indicating that a game restriction state has occurred, "Game Restriction State"), or a special notification sound corresponding to the game restriction state may be output from the speaker (for example, the main frame speaker 622) (a sound indicating that a game restriction state has occurred, "Game Restriction State Has Been Activated"), or the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be made to light up in a special light emission pattern corresponding to the game restriction state (for example, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side may flash red, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be turned off). Furthermore, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot or the first specific performance, the specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot or the first specific performance may be interrupted. Also, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, the second specific performance, or a special performance, the specific performance that does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, the second specific performance, or a special performance may be interrupted. Also, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot or the first specific performance, the specific performance that has the potential to result in a jackpot or the first specific performance may be interrupted, while the possibility of a jackpot If a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance, a second specific performance, or a special performance that does not have the potential for a jackpot, the specific performance, the second specific performance, or the special performance that does not have the potential for a jackpot may not be interrupted. Alternatively, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance, a second specific performance, or a special performance that does not have the potential for a jackpot, the specific performance, the second specific performance, or the special performance that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be interrupted. On the other hand, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific performance or a first specific performance that does have the potential for a jackpot, the specific performance or the first specific performance that does have the potential for a jackpot may not be interrupted.

[28. Decorative circuit board installed in the rear-view lower performance unit]
Next, the decorative circuit board provided in the rear lower display unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described with reference to Figures 301 to 303.

As described above, the rear lower display unit 3300 has a rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear right movable decorative body 3302, whose base ends, adjacent to each other on the left and right, are supported so as to be rotatable around an axis in the front-rear direction and also so as to be able to move up and down. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 is provided with rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 on which LEDs 3311a to 3314a are mounted to illuminate the rear left movable decorative body 3301, and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 is provided with rear right movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324 on which LEDs 3321a to 3324a are mounted to illuminate the rear right movable decorative body 3302.

Furthermore, since the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 provided on the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative substrates 3321-3324 provided on the rear right movable decorative body 3302 have the same configuration, only the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 provided on the rear left movable decorative body 3301 will be described below.

As shown in Figure 301, the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 have a white solder resist (protective material) coating on their surface, and multiple full-color LEDs 3311a to 3314a are mounted on the front mounting surface facing the player. In this example, the multiple LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface. Furthermore, some of the multiple LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 (either one substrate will have both top-view type LEDs and side-view type LEDs mounted on it, or one substrate will have only top-view type LEDs mounted on it and another substrate will have only side-view type LEDs mounted on it) or all of them may be wide-angle side-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range around the horizontal optical axis. In fact, it is not limited to wide-angle top-view type LEDs or wide-angle side-view type LEDs; any top-view type or side-view type LED is acceptable.

Furthermore, by illuminating the multiple full-color LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of each of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 can be illuminated. The white solder resist coating the surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 makes the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 less visible through the illuminated decorative portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. Additionally, the light from the LEDs mounted on the front mounting surface can be reflected off the surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, allowing the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to illuminate more brightly.

Furthermore, on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314, the front mounting surface side markings 3311b-3314b, which indicate the placement of electronic components, and diode marks 3311c-3314c, which indicate the orientation of the LEDs, are printed on a white resist using silk screen printing with yellow paint, a light color that is less conspicuous against white. In addition, the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 have board management numbers 3311d-3314d, which are unique identification numbers for managing each board, formed as die-cut letters (that is, die-cut letters formed by creating characters from the copper foil wiring pattern in the layer where the wiring pattern is formed (copper plane), and then removing the surrounding copper foil).

Furthermore, the color of the solder resist is not limited to white; it may be green, black, silver, etc. The markings on the front mounting side 3311b to 3314b and the diode marks 3311c to 3314c are not limited to yellow; they may be printed with white, light blue, yellow-green, black, or other colors. Also, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are not limited to those formed by foil-cutting; they may be formed by foil-retaining characters (i.e., characters formed by removing the copper foil corresponding to the characters in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed), or they may be printed on the resist by silkscreen printing, similar to the markings on the front mounting side 3311b to 3314b and the diode marks 3311c to 3314c. Additionally, instead of coating the surface of the front mounting side of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted (for example, the rear left movable decorative board 3311 to 3314) with solder resist, the entire surface of the front mounting side of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted may be coated with a mirror-like solder plating. Coating the front mounting surface of the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted with silver solder resist or with a mirror-like plating using solder can improve the reflectivity of the front mounting surface of the decorative circuit board, thereby suppressing the decrease in brightness of each LED mounted on each board, and allowing it to be used as a reflector to reflect light from LEDs mounted on other boards. Furthermore, the mirror-like surface of the front mounting surface of the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted may be positioned so that it is visible to the player and used as part of the design of the pachinko machine 1. Also, when almost the entire front mounting surface of the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a mirror-like plating using solder, electronic components other than LEDs may not be placed on the front mounting surface of the decorative circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted, and only a minimum number of wiring patterns may be provided, while electronic components other than LEDs and wiring patterns other than the minimum number of wiring patterns may be provided on the back mounting surface.

Furthermore, in this example, board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed on both the front and back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314. Alternatively, board management numbers 3311d to 3314d may be formed only on the back mounting surface where LEDs are not mounted. In this case, the reflectivity of the front mounting surface where LEDs are mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 can be made more uniform, suppressing uneven illumination and enhancing the visual effect.

Although not shown in the diagram, wiring patterns and through-holes are also formed on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314. Furthermore, the wiring patterns are covered with a white resist. Additionally, the configuration of covering the lands of the input signal wiring patterns through-holes with an insulating film, as described in the first to fourth embodiments, may be applied to the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 and the rear right movable decorative substrates 3321-3324. That is, at least a portion of the lands formed on the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 and the rear right movable decorative substrates 3321-3324 may be covered with a white resist.

Furthermore, the LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314, and the LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear right movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324, are designed to adjust their light intensity (brightness) in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, the light effects of the rear lower display unit 3300 (rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302) can be performed at the player's preferred light intensity (brightness), ensuring that the player does not experience any discomfort.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 301, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed by a string of characters arranged in a straight line (a horizontal row in this example). In this example, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed by a string of characters (in this example, three alphabetical characters + four Arabic numerals) arranged in a straight line in the same direction (horizontal direction) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. In addition, the LEDs 3311a to 3313a, the front mounting surface markings 3311b to 3313b, and the diode marks 3311c to 3313c mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3313 are provided horizontally or vertically to the markings of the board management numbers 3311d to 3313d described above. In other words, the LEDs 3311a to 3313a, the front mounting surface markings 3311b to 3313b, and the diode marks 3311c to 3313c, which are surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3313, are provided horizontally or perpendicularly to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting the electronic components. Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3313 is formed such that the largest portion is provided horizontally or perpendicularly to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3313d. In other words, the wiring patterns on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314 are formed so that when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed by 90 degrees, horizontal and vertical wiring patterns with respect to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) are connected by wiring patterns at a 45-degree angle to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction). However, the majority of the wiring is formed to be horizontal or vertical to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

As described above, the wiring patterns on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are formed so that when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed by 90 degrees, the wiring patterns horizontal and vertical to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) are connected by a wiring pattern at a 45-degree angle to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction). In other words, when the pattern on the substrate is bent at a right angle, the width of the pattern in the bent part widens, and the impedance changes in this widened part, causing reflection and resulting in ringing and noise. However, by connecting with a 45-degree wiring pattern, the widening of the pattern width is suppressed, the change in impedance is suppressed, and the generation of ringing and noise is suppressed. Furthermore, during the manufacturing of the substrate, even when the substrate is etched with an etching solution to dissolve excess copper foil, the dissolving solution tends to accumulate inside the right-angled part where the wiring pattern has been changed by 90 degrees, and there is a risk that the inside of the right-angled part will not be etched cleanly. However, by configuring the wiring pattern to be changed to 45 degrees, the dissolving solution is less likely to accumulate, and the inside of the 45-degree part can be etched cleanly. Furthermore, the characters comprising board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are not limited to strings of characters arranged linearly in the same direction (horizontal direction) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. They may also be formed by strings of characters arranged linearly in a direction perpendicular to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 (either horizontally or vertically).

On the other hand, the LED 3314a, the front mounting surface marking section 3314b, and the diode mark 3314c mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 have a first group of LEDs provided horizontally or vertically with respect to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d, and a second group of LEDs provided at an angle with respect to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d. In other words, the LED 3314a, the front mounting surface marking section 3314b, and the diode mark 3314c, which are surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, are provided horizontally or vertically with respect to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components. Although not shown in the figures, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 is formed so that the largest portion is provided horizontally or vertically with respect to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d. In other words, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 is formed such that the majority of the pattern is horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

Specifically, it comprises a first LED group consisting of three LEDs 3314a1 positioned on the upper part of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, a front mounting surface-side marking section 3314b1, and a diode mark 3314c1, which are positioned horizontally or vertically to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d; and a second LED group consisting of four LEDs 3314a2 positioned in a row along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 (each of the four LEDs 3314a2 is positioned approximately horizontally to the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314), a front mounting surface-side marking section 3314b2, and a diode mark 3314c2, which are tilted relative to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d.

As shown in the example in Figure 301, the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 has two LEDs mounted: LED 3314a1, which is horizontal or perpendicular to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d, and LED 3314a2, which is inclined relative to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d. Note that the configuration is not limited to mounting both the horizontal/perpendicular LED and the inclined LED on the front mounting surface of a single substrate. Alternatively, one of the LEDs may be mounted on the front mounting surface of a single substrate, and the other LED on the back mounting surface of that substrate. Furthermore, one of the LEDs may be mounted on the front mounting surface of a single substrate, and the other LED may be mounted on a separate substrate.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the orientation of an electronic component is defined as the direction of the straight line connecting the center points of two pads formed on the substrate so as to be opposite or adjacent to each other for soldering a single electronic component, in the case of a surface-mount type electronic component. In other words, an electronic component in which the straight line connecting the center points of the pads is horizontal or vertical with respect to a string of characters arranged linearly in a line, namely substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, is defined as an electronic component provided horizontally or vertically with respect to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, and an electronic component in which the straight line connecting the center points of the pads is inclined with respect to a string of characters arranged linearly in a line, namely substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, is defined as an electronic component provided so as to be inclined with respect to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. Furthermore, the pads formed on the substrate are rectangular in shape. For electronic components that are provided horizontally or perpendicularly to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, the four sides of the pads formed on the substrate for soldering the electronic components are also horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. For electronic components that are provided at an angle to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, the four sides of the pads formed on the substrate for soldering the electronic components are also at an angle to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, the positional relationship between board management numbers 3311d to 3314d and the electronic components (whether they are mounted horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and the angle between board management numbers 3311d to 3314d and the electronic components) is designed to coincide with the positional relationship between board management numbers 3311d to 3314d and the four sides of the pads (whether they are mounted horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and the angle between board management numbers 3311d to 3314d and the four sides of the pads).

Furthermore, whether an electronic component is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, or at an angle to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, may be defined based on whether any one side of the electronic component's outer shape is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d. Alternatively, if three pads—two adjacent pads and one pad opposite to those two—are formed on the board for soldering an electronic component, whether an electronic component is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, or at an angle to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, may be defined based on whether a perpendicular line from the center point of the one pad opposite to the center points of the two adjacent pads is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, or at an angle to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, may be defined based on whether a perpendicular line from the center point of the one pad opposite to those two pads is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, or at an angle to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, is positioned horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d.

Furthermore, in the case of lead-type electronic components, the direction may be defined as the direction of the straight line connecting the center points of through-holes formed opposite or adjacent to each other for mounting a single electronic component. That is, electronic components where the straight line connecting the center points of the through-holes is horizontal or vertical to a row of characters arranged linearly as board management numbers 3311d to 3314d may be defined as electronic components mounted horizontally or vertically to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d. Similarly, electronic components where the straight line connecting the center points of the pads is inclined to a row of characters arranged linearly as board management numbers 3311d to 3314d may be defined as electronic components mounted inclined to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d.

Furthermore, the full-color LEDs 3311a to 3314a are packaged LEDs (packaged LEDs) in which red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are fixed in a straight line by a sealing resin, and are configured to display all emitted colors (full-color display) through RGB emission. In this example, a highly hard and light-transmitting epoxy resin is used as the sealing resin, protecting the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements from moisture and impact, and also acting as a lens with a dome shape to concentrate the light emitted from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements. In addition, the light distribution properties may be controlled by mixing each scattering agent into the sealing resin, or the light from the light-emitting elements may be converted to an arbitrary wavelength by incorporating a fluorescent agent (for example, to emit an arbitrary color (white, etc.) with a monocolor LED). Furthermore, when LEDs 3311a to 3314a are installed horizontally or vertically with respect to a string of characters arranged linearly in a line as board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, the sealing resin acting as a lens on the surface of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of each LED 3311a to 3314a will be horizontal or vertical with respect to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d. On the other hand, when LEDs 3311a to 3314a are installed at an angle with respect to a string of characters arranged linearly in a line as board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, the sealing resin acting as a lens on the surface of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of each LED 3311a to 3314a will be at an angle with respect to board management numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, in the case of a packaged LED in which red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are arranged in a straight line and have a sealing resin acting as a lens on its surface, if the sealing resin acting as a lens on the surface of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements is horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, it is defined as an LED provided horizontally or perpendicularly to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. If the sealing resin acting as a lens on the surface of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements is inclined with respect to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, it may be defined as an LED inclined with respect to substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d.

Furthermore, the wiring pattern connected to the second LED group on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 is connected perpendicularly to the pads of each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group, and therefore is inclined with respect to the substrate management number 3314d in the vicinity of each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group. However, when the wiring pattern connected to each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group is connected to an electronic component (e.g., IC 3314e) that is provided horizontally or perpendicularly with respect to the substrate management number 3314d, it is connected perpendicularly to the pads of the electronic component, and therefore is horizontal or perpendicular with respect to the substrate management number 3314d in the vicinity of this electronic component. In other words, even a wiring pattern connected to an electronic component that is provided inclined with respect to the substrate management number 3314d is formed to be inclined with respect to the substrate management number 3314d in the vicinity of this electronic component, but is formed horizontally or perpendicular with respect to the substrate management number 3314d at positions away from this electronic component, except when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed. In other words, the wiring patterns on each of the rear left movable decorative circuit boards 3311 to 3314 are formed such that the largest portion is horizontal or vertical to circuit board management number 3314d.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 167 and 301, the portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 corresponding to the upper part of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a width greater than a certain amount and has a substantially straight shape without bending, while the portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 corresponding to the lower part of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a shape that bends while changing in width in a tapering manner, so that the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a shape that conforms to the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. In other words, the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 are arranged along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 and also along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. For example, in the example of Figure 301, each LED 3314a of the second LED group is provided so that it is horizontal or nearly perpendicular to one side of the substrate. By configuring it in this way, the light from the LED 3314a mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 can be efficiently directed onto the bent and narrowed portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby illuminating the decorative body and suppressing uneven illumination. In other words, the orientation of the LED 3314a can be positioned to match the design of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, allowing for appropriate illumination. This achieves efficient illumination, enhances the lighting effect of the LED 3314a (such as achieving high-brightness illumination to create a powerful lighting effect), and prevents a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In other words, in the bent and narrowed portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, the LED 3314a is tilted to match the inclination of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, so that the distance from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the package LED to the bent and narrowed portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is made nearly equal, and the distance from the LED 3314a to the inner surface of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is made equal to the distance from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the package LED. By irradiating light almost vertically through the sealing resin acting as a lens, the LED 3314a irradiates the rear left movable decorative body 3301 in an optimal state, suppressing the intensification of some of the light emitted from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the package LED. This ensures that light is uniformly irradiated from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED 3314a to every corner of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission. Furthermore, the above effect can be achieved by tilting each of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group to match the shape of the rear left movable decorative body 3301; therefore, it is not necessarily limited to positioning them horizontally or nearly vertically to one side of the substrate.

As described above, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is a decorative part facing the player, and has a predetermined design (in this example, a design that is a stylized "A") and a light-emitting decorative part formed of translucent resin, and is illuminated by LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314. By tilting the LEDs 3314a in accordance with the inclination of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, light is shone from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LEDs, respectively, through the sealing resin acting as a lens, almost perpendicularly to the light-emitting decorative part of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, thereby ensuring that the light-emitting decorative part of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is illuminated evenly and the light-emitting effect is enhanced, thereby preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 that is located in front of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 and illuminated by light from the LED 3314a may be entirely light-transmitting (light-emitting decorative part), or it may be a mixture of light-transmitting parts (light-emitting decorative part) and light-impermeable parts. In addition, the light-impermeable parts may be plated, decorated, or otherwise processed to represent a design such as letters or characters (in this example, a design that is a stylized "A") as the rear left movable decorative body 3301. Furthermore, the light-transmitting light-emitting decorative part may be colorless and transparent, or it may be colored and transparent. Furthermore, the light-transmitting light-emitting decorative part may have a light-diffusing process such as a lens cut, or it may not have a light-diffusing process. Furthermore, a light-transmitting member (such as a diffusion lens) may be further provided between the light-transmitting decorative part and the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314. The light-transmitting decorative part may be formed as a double structure by integrally forming the light-transmitting member and the decorative part, or the light-transmitting member and the decorative part may be formed as separate components.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 301, no other electronic components are mounted between each LED 3314a2 of the second LED group and the end of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which is positioned approximately horizontally with respect to each LED 3314a2. This prevents the light emitted from the LEDs 3314a2 from being blocked by other electronic components, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated from the LEDs 3314a2 to the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby suppressing uneven light emission. In addition, by arranging the four LEDs 3314a2 in a line along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, the distance from each of the four LEDs 3314a2 to the end of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which is positioned approximately horizontally with respect to each LED 3314a2, can be made approximately uniform, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated from each of the LEDs 3314a2 to the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby suppressing uneven light emission. In the example shown in Figure 301, the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group, which are provided horizontally or vertically with respect to board management number 3314d, are shown arranged in a line along the outline of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314. However, the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group, which are provided horizontally or vertically with respect to board management number 3314d, may be arranged independently of the outline of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314.

Furthermore, in portions of the substrate's outer shape that have a curved slope, the multiple LEDs, each positioned to be inclined relative to the substrate management number, are arranged to be inclined relative to each other (at different angles relative to the substrate management number). On the other hand, in portions of the substrate's outer shape that have a linear slope, the multiple LEDs, each positioned to be inclined relative to the substrate management number, are arranged to be horizontal or vertical relative to each other (at the same angle relative to the substrate management number). By arranging multiple LEDs inclined along the substrate's outer shape in this way, light can be uniformly irradiated onto the substrate's outer shape (in this example, the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314) and the decorative element provided on the substrate's surface (in this example, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301), thereby suppressing uneven light emission.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 301, the markings on the front mounting side of the second LED group, name 3314b and diode mark 3314c, are also marked in accordance with the inclination of the LED 3314a of the second LED group. Therefore, misinterpretation of the LED orientation and placement during mounting of the LED 3314a of the second LED group is suppressed, thereby reducing the occurrence of defects. Furthermore, if the part numbers of electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 are also silk-screen printed as a front mounting surface indication, the front mounting surface indication for the part numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group may be provided horizontally or vertically with respect to the indication of the board management number 3314d, and the front mounting surface indication for the part numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group may be provided at an angle that matches the inclination of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group. Alternatively, both the front mounting surface indication for the part numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group and the front mounting surface indication for the part numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group may be provided horizontally or vertically with respect to the indication of the board management number 3314d. If the part number marking on the front mounting side of LED 3314a in the second LED group is angled to match the inclination of LED 3314a in the second LED group, the relationship between the part number and the LED becomes clear, preventing mounting errors of LED 3314a in the second LED group. Furthermore, if the part number marking on the front mounting side of LED 3314a in the second LED group is positioned horizontally or vertically to the marking of the board management number 3314d, the need to rotate the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 to easily check the part number during mounting of LED 3314a in the second LED group becomes unnecessary, improving the workability during mounting of LED 3314a in the second LED group.

Furthermore, other electronic components besides the LED 3314a may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. In this example, as shown in Figure 301, IC 3314e is mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314. Also, IC 3314e mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 is positioned horizontally or vertically with respect to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d. In this way, among the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, those that do not illuminate the bent and narrowed portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 are positioned horizontally or vertically with respect to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d without being tilted to match the bent shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. Therefore, when mounting electronic components other than the LED 3314a, misreading of the mounting direction or the position of the first terminal is suppressed, and the occurrence of defects can be suppressed. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid mounting electronic components other than LEDs 3311a to 3314a on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. Alternatively, if electronic components other than LEDs 3311a to 3314a are mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, only electronic components with light-colored casings such as white or yellow (e.g., connectors with white casings) may be mounted, while electronic components with dark-colored casings such as black (e.g., resistors with black casings or capacitors with brown casings) may be mounted on the back mounting surface. This allows for uniformity of reflectivity on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission.

Furthermore, the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 are not limited to IC 3314e, but may also be capacitors, resistors, connectors, etc. Also, electronic components with light-colored (e.g., white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) casings may be placed only on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, without placing any electronic components with dark-colored casings. In this case, capacitors and resistors may be placed only on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314. This suppresses a decrease in reflectivity on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, ensures uniform reflectivity, and prevents uneven light emission.

Furthermore, in the example described above, a rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 was shown, comprising a first group of LEDs 3314a arranged horizontally or vertically with respect to substrate management number 3314d, and a second group of LEDs 3314a arranged at an angle with respect to substrate management number 3314d. However, all LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 are arranged at an angle with respect to substrate management number 3314d, and the front mounting surface marking section 3314b and diode marking section corresponding to the LEDs 3314a are also provided. The mark 3314c is also positioned at an angle to the board management number 3314d. Electronic components other than the LED 3314a (IC 3314e in this example) are positioned horizontally or vertically to the board management number 3314d. The front-mount side marking section 3314b corresponding to electronic components other than the LED 3314a, and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, first terminal position) of the electronic component, are also positioned horizontally or vertically to the board management number 3314d. In this example, the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, first terminal position) of the electronic component is printed on the resist using the silkscreen printing described above. Furthermore, the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, first terminal position) of the electronic component is not limited to the above; a triangle (△) or a circle may also be used.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 is shown to be divided into an area where the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group are mounted, which are arranged horizontally or vertically with respect to the substrate management number 3314d, and an area where the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group are mounted, which are arranged at an angle with respect to the substrate management number 3314d. However, the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 may also be arranged with a mixture of LEDs 3314a of the first LED group and LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, without dividing the area into these two regions.

Furthermore, the LEDs may be divided into a first group and a second group based on their outer diameter shape. The LEDs 3314a of the first group may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, while the LEDs 3314a of the second group may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d.

For example, as shown in Figure 302, the LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a square and the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314. The LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a square may be positioned horizontally or vertically with respect to the substrate management number 3314d, while the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be positioned at an angle with respect to the substrate management number 3314d. This allows the distances from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED to the inner surface of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 to be nearly uniform, matching the shape of the rear left movable decorative element 3301. This ensures uniform light illumination from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED to every corner of the rear left movable decorative element 3301, suppressing uneven light emission.

In the example described above, a full-color LED packaged with a red, green, and blue LED having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle was shown. However, even a monocolor LED packaged with only one of the red, green, or blue LEDs, as long as it has an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle and a rectangular lens-like sealing resin on its surface, can be arranged so as to be tilted along the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 (tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d). This allows the distance from the longitudinal end of the rectangular lens-like sealing resin to the inner surface of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to be nearly uniform, preventing some of the light from becoming too strong or too weak on the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission.

Furthermore, in the example described above, LED 3314a1 of the first LED group, which has an outer diameter shape close to a square, was mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group, which has an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle, was mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted to the substrate management number 3314d. However, LED 3314a1 of the first LED group may be an LED with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle, and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group may be an LED with an outer diameter shape close to a square. In this case as well, the distance from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED to the inner surface of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 can be made nearly equal, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated to every corner of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that at least one of the LEDs—one with an outer diameter shape close to a square and the other with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle—is arranged only inclined relative to board management number 3314d, while the other configuration includes those arranged horizontally or vertically relative to board management number 3314d and those arranged inclined relative to board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that at least one of the LEDs—one with an outer diameter shape close to a square and the other with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle—is arranged only inclined relative to board management number 3314d, while the other configuration includes those arranged horizontally or vertically relative to board management number 3314d and those arranged inclined relative to board management number 3314d.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and the LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d, are shown to differ according to the outer diameter shape of the LEDs. However, for LEDs having at least one outer diameter shape, it is sufficient that they are mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and for LEDs having the other outer diameter shape, it may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d. In other words, the first group of LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d may include multiple types of LEDs with different outer diameters, while the second group of LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d may include only LEDs with a common outer diameter.

Furthermore, in the example above, LEDs with an outer diameter shape close to a square and LEDs with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle (elongated) were classified as having different outer diameter shapes. However, even if LEDs have different outer diameter shapes, if their outer diameter shapes are similar, they may be grouped together (for example, the first LED group). For example, LEDs with an outer diameter shape that is not square but close to a square and square LEDs may be classified together as the same group. Alternatively, LEDs that are symmetrical left-to-right or up-to-down and LEDs that are asymmetrical may be classified into a first LED group and a second LED group as having different outer diameter shapes.

Furthermore, the LEDs may be separated according to their type. For example, single-color LEDs and full-color LEDs may be separated, and the single-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to the board management number 3314d, while the full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are tilted relative to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to the board management number 3314d, while the single-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are tilted relative to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the single-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to the board management number 3314d. The LEDs are mounted on the movable decorative substrate 3314. For full-color LEDs, this may include those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 at an angle relative to substrate management number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 horizontally or vertically relative to substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, the full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 horizontally or vertically relative to substrate management number 3314d, while the monochrome LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 at an angle relative to substrate management number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 horizontally or vertically relative to substrate management number 3314d. Furthermore, the monochrome LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate or on separate substrates. That is, the substrate on which the monochrome LEDs are mounted and the substrate on which the full-color LEDs are mounted may be different, or both monochrome LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate.

Furthermore, the LEDs may be distinguished into top-view type and side-view type. The top-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to board management number 3314d, while the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are tilted relative to board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to board management number 3314d, while the top-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are tilted relative to board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be vertical, and the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d, and the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical relative to the substrate management number 3314d. Or, the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical relative to the substrate management number 3314d, and the top-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d, and the top-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical relative to the substrate management number 3314d. Furthermore, the top-view type LEDs and the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate or on separate substrates. In other words, the substrate on which the top-view type LEDs are mounted and the substrate on which the side-view type LEDs are mounted may be different, or both top-view type and side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate. Furthermore, when mounting side-view type LEDs, the light from the side-view type LEDs may be incident on a polarizing plate to illuminate the front of the mounting surface where the side-view type LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, packaged LEDs (packaged LEDs) that are soldered and electrically connected to the wiring pattern and bare chip LEDs (unpackaged LEDs) that are electrically connected to the wiring pattern by bonding wires may be distinguished. Packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to board management number 3314d, while bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be tilted with respect to board management number 3314d. Alternatively, bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to board management number 3314d, while packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be tilted with respect to board management number 3314d. Furthermore, packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d, and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d, and packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to the substrate management number 3314d, and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to the substrate management number 3314d. In addition, packaged LEDs and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate, or they may be mounted on separate substrates. In other words, the substrate on which packaged LEDs are mounted and the substrate on which bare chip LEDs are mounted may be different, or both packaged LEDs and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the same substrate.

Furthermore, the LEDs may be divided according to their placement. For example, a central LED may be placed in the center of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314, and an end LED may be placed at the end of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314. The central LED may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to substrate management number 3314d, and the end LED may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted with respect to substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, the end LED may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to substrate management number 3314d, and the central LED may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted with respect to substrate management number 3314d. For the LEDs, they may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d. For the end LEDs, this may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, for the end LEDs, they may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d, and for the central LEDs, this may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d.

Furthermore, LEDs may be classified according to the size of the LED package or the size of the LED element. For example, large LEDs larger than a predetermined standard size and small LEDs smaller than a predetermined standard size may be classified. The large LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical with respect to the substrate management number 3314d, while the small LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are tilted with respect to the substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, the small LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical with respect to the substrate management number 3314d, while the large LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so that they are tilted with respect to the substrate management number 3314d. For the LEDs, they may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d. For the small LEDs, this may include mounting them on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d, and mounting them on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d. Alternatively, for the small LEDs, they may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d, and for the large LEDs, this may include mounting them on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be tilted relative to substrate management number 3314d, and mounting them on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 so as to be horizontal or perpendicular to substrate management number 3314d.

Furthermore, in the example described above, the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 was shown to have a shape that conforms to the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. However, if the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 does not have a shape that conforms to the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 may be arranged along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, rather than along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314. In this case as well, the light from the LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 can be efficiently directed onto the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby illuminating and decorating it, suppressing the occurrence of uneven illumination, enhancing the illumination effect, and preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in Figures 301 and 302, the main section of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which has a roughly linear outer shape (in this example, the part on which the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 are mounted), has electronic components (IC 3314e in this example) mounted in addition to the LEDs 3314a. In contrast, the branch section of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which has a curved outer diameter (in this example, the part on which the four LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 are mounted), has no electronic components mounted in addition to the LEDs 3314a. That is, the branch section is narrower than the main section, and its shape makes it difficult for light from the LEDs 3314a to illuminate it. Therefore, if electronic components other than the LEDs 3314a are mounted, the light from the LEDs 3314a will be blocked by these electronic components, and there is a risk that the light illuminating the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 will be weakened. In this example, by not placing any electronic components other than the LED 3314a on the branch portion of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314, the light illuminating the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is prevented from weakening, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission.

In the example described above, the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 was shown as having a roughly straight outer shape for the main body and a curved outer diameter for the branch portion. However, in a substrate on which LEDs are mounted, the portion that protrudes from a part of the main body (a part of the side of the main body) may be defined as the branch portion, and the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group may be mounted on the branch portion. Furthermore, the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group are not limited to being mounted only on the branch portion; they may be mounted on part or all of the main body.

Furthermore, in the example described above, multiple LEDs (in this example, each LED 3314a2 of the second LED group) that are arranged to be tilted relative to the board management number are shown to be arranged in a line along the outer shape of the board (in this example, the rear left movable decorative board 3314). However, even when the LEDs are not arranged along the outer shape of the board, they may still be tilted relative to the board management number. In this case, the multiple LEDs that are tilted relative to the board management number do not have to be arranged in a line, or the multiple LEDs that are tilted relative to the board management number may be arranged so that they are not horizontal or vertical to each other (some of the multiple LEDs that are tilted relative to the board management number may be arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to each other, but at least half of the multiple LEDs that are tilted relative to the board management number should be arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to each other). In other words, when arranging multiple LEDs to match the shape of the rear left movable decorative element 3301, they may not conform to the outer shape of the circuit board. In this case, by arranging the multiple LEDs so that they are tilted relative to the circuit board management number, it becomes possible to position each LED so that light is optimally shone onto the rear left movable decorative element 3301, thereby suppressing uneven illumination and enhancing the illumination effect, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, on the back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, where the LED 3314a is not mounted, other electronic components may be mounted. As shown in Figure 303, in this example, the back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are coated with white solder resist (protective material), similar to the front mounting surfaces. IC 3311e and connector 3311g are mounted on the back mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative substrate 3311, connector 3312g and resistor 3312f are mounted on the back mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative substrate 3312, connector 3313g is mounted on the back mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative substrate 3313, and connector 3314g is mounted on the back mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314. In addition, in this example, LEDs are not mounted on the back mounting surfaces of rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314.

Furthermore, the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311-3314, where the LED 3314a is not mounted, may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a different color than the front mounting surface. That is, since there is no need to coat the back mounting surface, where the LED is not mounted, with a solder resist (protective material) of a color that enhances the reflectivity of light from the LED, a different color solder resist (protective material) such as green or black may be used. However, as in this example, by coating the back mounting surface where the LED 3314a is not mounted with a solder resist (protective material) of a color that enhances the reflectivity of light from the LED, it is possible to make it function as a reflector that reflects light from LEDs mounted on other substrates.

Furthermore, on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, through-holes 3311h to 3314h are formed, and the back mounting surface side markings 3311b to 3314b indicating the position of electronic components are printed on the white resist using silk screen printing with a light yellow paint that is less conspicuous against white. On the rear left movable decorative substrate 3311, a 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, position of the first terminal) of IC 3311e is printed on the white resist using silk screen printing with a light yellow paint that is less conspicuous against white. Also, similar to the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314, board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, which are unique identification numbers for managing each board, are formed as die-cut letters (that is, die-cut letters formed by creating letters from the wiring pattern, which is copper foil, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and then removing the surrounding copper foil). Furthermore, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are the same on both the front and back mounting surfaces of the same board, and the direction of the linearly arranged strings is also the same (the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d on the front mounting surface and the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d on the back mounting surface are considered horizontal). In other words, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d formed on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 are formed by a linearly arranged string (in this example, three letters of the alphabet + four Arabic numerals) in the same direction as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314, just like the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d formed on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. Furthermore, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d are not limited to being formed by a linear string of characters arranged in the same direction (horizontal direction) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. They may also be formed by a linear string of characters arranged in a line (either horizontally or vertically) perpendicular to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. Additionally, the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d formed on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 and those formed on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 are not limited to being formed in the same direction (horizontal direction), but may also be formed vertically.

Furthermore, Figure 303 also shows the wiring patterns on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314. The wiring patterns on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are also formed such that the majority of the wiring is horizontal or vertical relative to the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, while the wiring patterns on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are formed to connect horizontal and vertical wiring patterns with a 45-degree wiring pattern relative to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when the wiring pattern direction is changed by 90 degrees, the majority of the wiring is formed so that the majority of the wiring is horizontal or vertical relative to the substrate flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

As shown in Figure 303, the electronic components mounted on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are positioned horizontally or perpendicularly to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. Furthermore, the marking sections 3311b to 3314b on the back mounting surface and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 are also positioned horizontally or perpendicularly to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d provided on the back and front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314. In addition, most of the wiring patterns on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 are positioned horizontally or perpendicularly to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d provided on the back and front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314. In other words, the surface-mount type electronic components IC 3311e, connectors 3311g to 3314g, and resistor 3312f, which are mounted on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3313, as well as the back mounting surface markings 3311b to 3314b and the 1-pin mark 3314e1, are provided horizontally or perpendicularly to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting the electronic components.

As described above, the LED 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314 is positioned at an angle to the marking of the substrate management number 3314d provided on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314. Furthermore, since the notation for board management number 3314d is horizontal between the front and back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, the LED 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 is positioned at an angle with respect to board management number 3314d on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314. Additionally, the electronic components (IC 3311e, connectors 3311g to 3314g, and resistor 3312f), the back mounting surface notation sections 3311b to 3314b, and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 are positioned at an angle with respect to board management number 3314d on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, which are mounted horizontally or vertically with respect to board management number 3314d on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314.

Thus, in this example, the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 include LEDs that are positioned horizontally or vertically to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d, as well as LEDs that are positioned at an angle to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. On the other hand, the electronic components mounted on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3314 include only electronic components that are positioned horizontally or vertically to the markings of the substrate management numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, since the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative circuit boards 3311-3314, which face the player, is easily noticed by the player, the LEDs mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative circuit boards 3311-3314 are positioned at an angle to match the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This ensures that light from the LEDs 3314a is uniformly delivered to every corner of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, suppressing uneven illumination and enhancing the illumination effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, the electronic components placed on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative circuit boards 3311-3314, which do not face the player, are positioned horizontally or vertically to the markings of the circuit board management numbers 3311d-3314d. This improves the efficiency of checking and mounting the electronic components.

[29. Game board of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a fourth embodiment of the game board 5C, which is different from the game board 5 shown in Figure 129, will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 304 to 310. Here, components that are the same as those in the game board 5 shown in Figure 129 will be denoted by the same reference numerals. Figure 304 is a front view of the fourth embodiment of the game board, which is different from the game board in Figure 129, in which the transparent center component and the like are made opaque. Figure 305 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 304 from the front right, Figure 306 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 304 from the front left, and Figure 307 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 304 from the rear. Figure 308 is an exploded perspective view of the game board in Figure 304, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 309 is an exploded perspective view of the game board in Figure 304, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. Figure 310 is a front view of a game board showing the game area through which game balls circulate, with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5C of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are inserted when the player operates the handle 182. The game area 5a is equipped with a general prize slot 2001, a normal prize slot 2011, a first start slot 2002, a second start slot 2004, a large prize slot 2005, and a V prize slot 2010, which grant the player predetermined benefits (for example, an increase in the number of balls held) upon receipt or passage of game balls B. This game board 5C is designed to allow players to enjoy a game involving the insertion operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of game balls B within the game area 5a, so that game balls B are received into the general prize slot 2001, normal prize slot 2011, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, etc.

The game board 5C comprises a front component 1000 that demarcates the outer perimeter of the game area 5a and has a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and demarcates the rear end of the game area 5a; a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 (see Figure 345) that detect magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a; and a vibration sensor 1040 (see Figure 345) that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5C (pachinko machine 1). Multiple obstacle pins that come into contact with the game balls B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the portion of the front of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the game board 5C includes a film-like decorative cell 1140A provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 to decorate the game area 5a, a cell fixing piece 1141 supporting the decorative cell 1140A on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, which has a main control board 1310 (see Figure 345, etc.) that controls the game content performed by driving game balls B into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, unlike the game board 5 of the first embodiment described above, the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment does not have a circuit board holder 1200. Instead, the lower wall portion of the back box 3010 and the lower part of the rear wall portion serve the function of the circuit board holder 1200.

Furthermore, the game board 5C includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is mounted on the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so that it is visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 located behind the game panel 1100; an effect display device 1600 located in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying predetermined effect images; a panel relay board (not shown) located behind the game panel 1100 and relaying the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510; a front unit 2000 mounted on the front of the game panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 mounted on the rear of the game panel 1100.

A display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the rear unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the display device 1600.

The front unit 2000 has multiple (three in this case) general prize slots 2001 that are always open and capable of receiving game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, a normal prize slot 2011 that is always open and capable of receiving game balls B and is located at a predetermined position within the game area 5a, a first start slot 2002 that is always open and capable of receiving game balls B and is located in the center in the left-right direction below the center mechanism 2500, and when game balls B are received into the normal prize slot 2011 The game board 5C includes a second starting port 2004 that allows game balls B to be received according to the result of the lottery for the regular symbols drawn by the lottery, a large prize port 2005 that allows game balls B to be received according to the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn by the receipt of game balls B into the first starting port 2002, and a losing port 2009 or V prize port 2010 that allows game balls B received into the large prize port 2005 to be received. Furthermore, the game board 5C is equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 (see Figures 148 and 345, etc.) that detect magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is located at the downstream end of the game area 5a and includes an outlet 1008 that is always open to receive game balls B and discharges the received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them, and a sub-outlet 2021 located upstream of the outlet 1008 within the game area 5a, which is also always open to receive game balls B and discharges the received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them. The outlet 1008 is located directly below the first start port 2002. The sub-outlet 2021 is located to the left of the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a start-up unit 2100 mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, having a first start-up opening 2002; a side unit 2200 provided to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, along the inner rail 1002, having three general prize-winning openings 2001 and a sub-out opening 2021; a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 in a front view; and a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 provided slightly above the approximate center in a front view of the game area 5a, having a normal prize-winning opening 2011, a large prize-winning opening 2005, a losing opening 2009, and a V-prize-winning opening 2010.

The back unit 3000 comprises a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 for detecting magnetic fields acting improperly within the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5C (pachinko machine 1), a back box 3010 attached to the rear of the game panel 1100, which is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in its rear wall, a lock slider 3020 for detachably attaching the performance display device 1600 to the rear wall of the back box 3010, and a back circuit board unit 3040 located behind the performance display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guidance unit 3100A located at the lower part near the front end of the back box 3010, through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flow; a back decoration unit 3200A located behind the back ball guidance unit 3100A within the back box 3010; a back front performance unit 3300A located above the back ball guidance unit 3100A near the front end within the back box 3010; and a back rear performance unit 3400 located behind the back front performance unit 3300A within the back box 3010.

[29-1. Pre-constituent components]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 311 to 316. Figure 311(a) is a front perspective view of the assembly having the front component, game panel, and front unit in the game board of Figure 304, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the assembly having the front component, game panel, and front unit in the game board of Figure 304. Figure 312 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in Figure 311, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 313 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in Figure 311, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear, and Figure 314 is an explanatory diagram showing the assembly shown in Figure 311 cut in the middle in the vertical direction and viewed in plan view. Figure 315 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and game panel disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 316 is an exploded perspective view of the front component and game panel disassembled and viewed from the rear, and

The front component 1000 is made entirely of transparent material. The front component 1000 has a roughly square outer shape when viewed from the front, and its inner shape is roughly circular, penetrating in the front-to-back direction. The inner circumference of the inner shape defines the outer perimeter of the game area 5a. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 314, the rear side of the front component 1000 is recessed forward from the rear end surface to a depth that accommodates the game panel 1100. The game panel 1100 is mounted by being fitted into this recessed area. When the game panel 1100 is mounted, the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear end surface of the front component 1000 are on the same plane.

This front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end slightly to the left of the center in a front view, passing the upper end of the center in a front view and extending to the upper right diagonally; an inner rail 1002 positioned inside the front component 1000, roughly along the outer rail 1001, and extending in an arc shape from the lower center in a front view to the upper left diagonally; and an out-guide section 1003 formed at the lowest point of the game area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in a front view, and inclined to be lower towards the rear.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a right-lower rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out-guiding section 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right edge of the front component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the right-lower rail 1004 along the right edge of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with its upper part curving inward from the front component 1000; and a stopper 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and which the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

Furthermore, the aforementioned component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatable only between a closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001. The backflow prevention member 1007 is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet opening 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the outlet guide section 1003, located at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with anti-theft recesses 1009 that are recessed from the front end to the rear at the outer side of the parts of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 that extend approximately vertically from the lower ends, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5C is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the rear projection (not shown) of the anti-theft cover (not shown) on the door frame 3 is inserted into these anti-theft recesses 1009. As a result, the space between the security cover and the game board 5C (front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection of the security cover and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an unauthorized tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a from below the front of the game board 5C through the space between the security cover and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection and the security recess 1009, thus preventing the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 has a notch 1010 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100. This notch 1010 is designed so that, when attached to the main frame of a pachinko machine that dispenses game balls to the player, the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage and the lower full-ball dispensing passage of the lower full-ball path unit face forward, supplying game balls to the upper and lower trays of the door frame.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 includes a function display unit mounting section 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached; a sticker attachment section 1012 formed in the lower right corner; a first game board information display section 1015 provided in the upper right corner; a second game board information display section 1020A provided in the upper left corner; and a third game board information display section 1025 provided in the lower left corner.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed to be almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 and the rear unit 3000, which are located on the rear side, to be visible from the front.

[29-1a. Game board first information display unit]
Next, the first information display unit 1015 of the game board in the aforementioned component 1000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 317. Figure 317(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the part of the first information display unit of the game board in the aforementioned component, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the part of the first information display unit of the game board, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the disassembled first information display unit and the first information sticker base, and (d) is a perspective view from the front of the first information sticker base to which the first information sticker is attached.

The first information display unit 1015 of the game board has a first information sticker base 1016 attached to it, on which a first information sticker 1017 containing information about the game board 5C is affixed. For example, the first information sticker 1017 contains the model name and specifications of the game board 5C.

The first information display unit 1015 of the game board is located at the upper right corner of the front surface of the front component 1000. The first information display unit 1015 extends in an arc shape along the outer circumference of the game area 5a, continuing to the right and downward from the right end of the stopper 1006. The first information display unit 1015 has a shallow recessed housing recess 1015a in the front surface of the front component 1000, two rectangular through-holes 1015b penetrating the housing recess 1015a from front to back, and two circular positioning holes 1015c penetrating the housing recess 1015a from the bottom surface.

Furthermore, the first information display section 1015 of the game board is provided with two locking ribs 1015d extending in a flat, plate-like manner from the outside of one side of each of the square insertion holes 1015b. The locking ribs 1015d extend backward to approximately half the depth of the front component 1000. As shown in Figure 317(b), the two locking ribs 1015d extend backward from the outside of the farthest side of each of the two insertion holes 1015b. In other words, the insertion hole 1015b is provided between (inside) the two locking ribs 1015d.

The first information sticker base 1016 has a flat base plate 1016a on its front surface, to which the first information sticker 1017 is attached, and which is housed in the housing recess 1015a of the game board's first information display unit 1015 from the front. The first information sticker base 1016 also has two locking claws 1016b extending rearward from the rear surface of the base plate 1016a, passing through the insertion hole 1015b, with their rear ends locked to the locking rib 1015d. As shown in Figure 317(b), when locked to the locking rib 1015d, the rear ends of the locking claws 1016b extend rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000.

Furthermore, the first information seal base 1016 includes a positioning projection 1016c that protrudes from the rear surface of the base plate 1016a and is inserted into the positioning hole 1015c, and peeling holes 1016d that penetrate the base plate 1016a from front to back near both the upper and lower ends. The peeling holes 1016d allow for the removal of a portion of the first information seal 1017 by inserting a rod from the rear and pushing the seal forward while the first information seal 1017 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 1016a, thus facilitating reuse.

Furthermore, the first information sticker base 1016 is provided in a different color (for example, black, blue, red, etc.) than the previous component 1000. This makes it easier to notice if the first information sticker base 1016 (first information sticker 1017) is forgotten during the manufacturing of the game board 5C.

The first information display unit 1015 of this game board has a first information sticker base 1016 that can be attached and detached from the front. Therefore, when reusing the front component 1000, only the first information sticker base 1016 to which the first information sticker 1017 is attached needs to be replaced. When removing the first information sticker base 1016, since the two locking claws 1016b are located between the two locking ribs 1015d, the locking with the locking ribs 1015d can be easily released by pinching the rear ends of the two locking claws 1016b with your fingers from the rear side of the front component 1000 and bringing them closer together. Although not shown in the illustration, the rear of the first information display unit 1015 of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100, and therefore, when removing the first information sticker base 1016, it is necessary to remove the game panel 1100 from the front component 1000.

Furthermore, since the first information sticker base 1016 is provided with a peeling hole 1016d, when reusing or separately disposing of the first information sticker base 1016, the first information sticker 1017 can be easily peeled off by inserting a rod from behind into the peeling hole 1016d and pushing the first information sticker 1017 forward.

Furthermore, since the base plate 1016a of the first information sticker base 1016 is housed in the receiving recess 1015a, it is difficult for fingers or tools to get caught on the first information sticker base 1016 from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the first information sticker base 1016 with one bearing a first information sticker 1017 containing fraudulent information different from the legitimate information, thereby enhancing the deterrent against fraudulent activity.

[29-1b. Game board second information display section]
Next, the second information display unit 1020A of the game board in the aforementioned component 1000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 318, etc. Figure 318(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the part of the second information display unit of the game board in the aforementioned component, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the part of the second information display unit of the game board, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the second information display unit and the second information sticker base disassembled, and (d) is a perspective view from the front of the second information sticker base to which the second information sticker is attached.

The second information display unit 1020A of the game board has a second information sticker base 1021A attached to it, on which a second information sticker 1022A containing information related to the game board 5C is affixed. For example, the copyright information for the game board 5C is included on the second information sticker 1022A.

The second information display unit 1020A of the game board is located above the function display unit 1400 at the upper left corner of the front surface of the front component 1000. The second information display unit 1020A is formed in a vertically elongated rhombus shape, following the outer circumference of the game area 5a. This second information display unit 1020A is provided with a shallow recessed housing recess 1020a extending from the front surface of the front component 1000, and two rectangular through-holes 1020b penetrating the housing recess 1020a along its upper and lower edges.

Furthermore, the second information display section 1020A of the game board is provided with a locking rib 1020c that extends in a flat, plate-like manner backward from the outer part of the upper edge of the receiving recess 1020a in the upper insertion hole 1020b. The locking rib 1020c extends backward to approximately half the depth of the preceding component 1000. In addition, the second information display section 1020A of the game board is provided with a guide recess 1020d that is recessed upward from the lower surface of the locking rib 1020c and open forward. As shown in Figure 318(b), the guide recess 1020d is inclined so that it is positioned downward as it approaches the rear.

The second information sticker base 1021A has a second information sticker 1022A attached to its front surface and is equipped with a flat base plate 1021a that is housed from the front in the housing recess 1020a of the game board's second information display section 1020A. The second information sticker base 1021A also includes a locking claw 1021b that extends rearward from the upper end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a and whose rear end is locked to the locking rib 1020c through the upper insertion hole 1020b, and an L-shaped locking portion 1021c that extends briefly rearward from the lower end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a and then extends downward, and is inserted into the lower insertion hole 1020b. As shown in Figure 318(b), when the locking claw 1021b is locked to the locking rib 1020c, its rear end extends rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000. Furthermore, the locking portion 1021c is locked to the back side of the flat plate-shaped portion that forms the front surface of the front component 1000, where the L-shaped tip is located.

Furthermore, the second information sticker base 1021A is provided with peel-off holes 1021d that penetrate from front to back near both the upper and lower ends of the base plate 1021a. The peel-off holes 1021d allow the end of the second information sticker 1022A to be peeled off by inserting a rod from the rear and pushing the sticker forward while the second information sticker 1022A is attached to the front surface of the base plate 1021a, thus facilitating reuse.

Furthermore, the second information sticker base 1021A is provided in a different color (for example, black, blue, red, etc.) than the previous component 1000. This makes it easier to notice if the second information sticker base 1021A (second information sticker 1022A) is forgotten during the manufacturing of the game board 5C.

The second information display unit 1020A of this game board allows the second information sticker base 1021A to be attached and detached from the front. Therefore, when reusing the previous component 1000, only the second information sticker base 1021A to which the second information sticker 1022A is attached needs to be replaced. To remove the second information sticker base 1021A, insert the tip of a tool such as a flathead screwdriver into the guide recess 1020d from the front. The tip will be guided into the guide recess 1020d, pressing the locking claw 1021b downwards, releasing the lock between the locking rib 1020c and the locking claw 1021b, and allowing the second information sticker base 1021A to be removed from the front. Note that when the second information sticker base 1021A is removed from the front using a tool, traces are likely to remain in the guide recess 1020d.

Another way to remove the second information seal base 1021A is to operate the locking claw 1021b from the rear side of the front component 1000 to release the lock from the locking rib 1020c and remove it. Note that, although not shown in the illustration, the rear of the second information display unit 1020A of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100; therefore, when removing the second information seal base 1021A, it is necessary to remove the game panel 1100 from the front component 1000.

Furthermore, since the second information sticker base 1021A is provided with a peeling hole 1021d, when reusing or separately disposing of the second information sticker base 1021A, the second information sticker 1022A can be easily peeled off by inserting a rod from behind into the peeling hole 1021d and pushing the second information sticker 1022A forward.

Furthermore, since the base plate 1021a of the second information sticker base 1021A is housed in the receiving recess 1020a, it is difficult to catch fingers or tools on the second information sticker base 1021A from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the second information sticker base 1021A with one bearing a second information sticker 1022A containing fraudulent information different from the legitimate information, thereby enhancing the deterrent against fraudulent activity.

[29-1c. Game board third information display section]
Next, the third information display unit 1025 of the game board in the aforementioned component 1000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 319 and the like. Figure 319(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the third information display unit of the game board in the aforementioned component, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the third information display unit of the game board, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a disassembled perspective view of the third information display unit and the third information sticker base, and (d) is a perspective view from the front of the third information sticker base to which the third information sticker is attached.

The third information display unit 1025 of the game board has a third information sticker base 1026 attached to it, on which a third information sticker 1027 containing information about the game board 5C is affixed. For example, the manufacturer of the game board 5C is indicated on the third information sticker 1027.

The third information display section 1025 of the game board is located above the notch 1010 at the lower left corner of the front surface of the front component 1000. The third information display section 1025 is formed in a roughly square shape. This third information display section 1025 has a shallow recessed housing recess 1025a extending from the front surface of the front component 1000, and three square through-holes 1025b penetrating the bottom surface of the housing recess 1025a. One of the three through-holes 1025b is located in the center along the upper edge of the housing recess 1025a, while the remaining two are spaced apart to the left and right along the lower edge of the housing recess 1025a.

Furthermore, the third information display section 1025 of the game board is provided with a locking rib 1025c that extends in a flat, plate-like manner backward from the outer part of the upper edge of the receiving recess 1025a in the upper insertion hole 1025b. The locking rib 1025c extends backward to approximately half the depth of the preceding component 1000. In addition, the third information display section 1025 of the game board is provided with a guide recess 1025d that is recessed upward from the lower surface of the locking rib 1025c and open forward. As shown in Figure 319(b), the guide recess 1025d is inclined so that it is positioned downward as it approaches the rear.

The third information sticker base 1026 has a flat base plate 1026a on its front surface, to which the third information sticker 1027 is attached, and which is housed from the front in the housing recess 1025a of the game board's third information display section 1025. The third information sticker base 1026 also includes a locking claw 1026b extending rearward from the upper end of the rear surface of the base plate 1026a, passing through the upper insertion hole 1025b, and its rear end engaging with the locking rib 1025c. As shown in Figure 319(b), when the locking claw 1026b is engaged with the locking rib 1025c, its rear end extends rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000.

Furthermore, the third information seal base 1026 is spaced apart in the left-right direction along the lower end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a, and includes two L-shaped locking portions 1026c that extend briefly to the rear and then downward. The locking portions 1026c are inserted into the lower through-hole 1020b, and their L-shaped tips are locked to the back side of the flat plate-like portion that constitutes the front surface of the front component 1000.

Furthermore, the third information sticker base 1026 is provided in a different color (for example, black, blue, red, etc.) than the previous component 1000. This makes it easier to notice if the third information sticker base 1026 (third information sticker 1027) is forgotten during the manufacturing of the game board 5C.

The third information display unit 1025 of this game board allows the third information sticker base 1026 to be attached and detached from the front. Therefore, when reusing the previous component 1000, only the third information sticker base 1026 to which the third information sticker 1027 is attached needs to be replaced. To remove the third information sticker base 1026, insert the tip of a tool such as a flathead screwdriver into the guide recess 1025d from the front. The tip will be guided into the guide recess 1025d, pressing the locking claw 1026b downwards, releasing the lock between the locking rib 1025c and the locking claw 1026b, and allowing the third information sticker base 1026 to be removed from the front. Note that when the third information sticker base 1026 is removed from the front using a tool, traces are likely to remain in the guide recess 1025d.

Another way to remove the third information seal base 1026 is to operate the locking claw 1026b from the rear side of the front component 1000 to release the lock from the locking rib 1025c and remove it. Note that, although not shown in the illustration, the rear of the third information display unit 1025 of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100; therefore, to remove the third information seal base 1026, it is necessary to remove the game panel 1100 from the front component 1000.

Furthermore, since the base plate 1026a of the third-party information sticker base 1026 is housed in the receiving recess 1025a, it is difficult for fingers or tools to catch on the third-party information sticker base 1026 from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the third-party information sticker base 1026 with one bearing a third-party information sticker 1027 containing fraudulent information different from the legitimate information, thereby enhancing the deterrent against fraudulent activity.

[29-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 315 and 316. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 is formed in a flat shape from transparent synthetic resin, with its outer circumference being slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the front component 1000. This game panel 1100 is fitted into a recessed area on the rear side of the front component 1000 from the rear. Although not shown in the figures, multiple obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement.

The game panel 1100 is formed from synthetic resin plates such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or from inorganic plates such as glass or metal. The thickness of this game panel 1100 is thinner than that of a wooden game panel, which is approximately 20 mm. The minimum thickness required to adequately support obstacle nails planted on the front and the mounting of the front unit 2000 is approximately 10 mm. In this embodiment, it is formed from a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The game panel 1100 has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back. Each opening 1112 is located in a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000, the starter unit 2100 of the front unit 2000, the side unit 2200, and the center component 2500. In the opening 1112 corresponding to the outlet 1008, the portion of the game panel 1100 below the opening 1112 is recessed from the rear towards the front. In other words, the thickness of the plate in the portion below the opening 1112 is reduced.

This game panel 1100 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center mechanism 2500, which is offset above the center when viewed from the front. The presence of this opening 1112 forms a frame-like structure, but as shown in the figure, the frame is not interrupted, thus providing sufficient strength and rigidity.

Since this game panel 1100, along with the front component 1000 attached to the front, is made of transparent material, when assembled with the game board 5C, it reduces the visibility of the boundary of the game area 5a, giving the player a sense of openness. Furthermore, although the actual size of the game area 5a remains unchanged, it makes the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

Furthermore, since the game panel 1100 is transparent along with the front component 1000, light from the display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc., can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player), making it appear as if it is emitting light, thereby further enhancing the overall decorative appeal of the game board 5C.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, the game panel 1100 is provided with multiple mounting holes and positioning holes for attaching and positioning components such as the front component 1000, the cell fixing piece 1141 for supporting the decorative cell 1140A, the front unit 2000 including the start port unit 2100 and the center component 2500, and the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000.

[29-3. Decorative Cells]
The decorative cell 1140A in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 311 to 314. The decorative cell 1140A is provided so that it can be seen from the front through the transparent game panel 1100, and is for decorating the game area 5a.

The game board 5C of this embodiment is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 of the game panel 1100 and includes a film-like decorative cell 1140A with a predetermined pattern applied to it, and a cell fixing piece 1141 that supports (attaches) the decorative cell 1140A so that it can move freely within a predetermined range relative to the panel plate 1110.

The decorative cell 1140A is located within the game area 5a (within the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 in a front view) behind the area through which the game balls B flow. The decorative cell 1140A is located in the annular area between the periphery of the game area 5a and the frame of the center component 2500, covering almost the entire circumference except for the area where the second start opening 2004 of the center component 2500 is located. In this embodiment, the decorative cell 1140A is divided into four parts. Specifically, the decorative cell 1140A is composed of four sections: the area between the inner rail 1002 and the center component 2500, from near the backflow prevention member 1007 to between the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200; the area between the lower right rail 1004 and the center component 2500, including the start port unit 2100 and extending to the right end; the area between the outer rail 1001 and the center component 2500, from near the backflow prevention member 1007 to the impact point 1006; and the area between the right rail 1005 and the center component 2500, from the impact point 1006 to the vicinity of the vertical center.

The decorative cell 1140A has an outer edge that extends outward beyond the inner edge of the preceding component 1000. Furthermore, the inner edge of the decorative cell 1140A extends into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 to the frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a of the center component 2500, overlapping with the insertion portion 2511a in a front view. In other words, the gap between the inner surface of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the outer surface of the insertion portion 2511a of the center component 2500 is closed off by the decorative cell 1140A. This makes it difficult to see the components behind the gap.

As shown in the enlarged view in Figure 312, the decorative cell 1140A has multiple support holes 1140a, each shaped like a semi-circular elongated hole with a circular hole in the center that is larger in diameter than the width of the elongated hole. The decorative cell 1140A is supported by the game panel 1100 when a cell fixing piece 1141 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the rear through the support holes 1140a. Furthermore, the decorative cell 1140A has an opening 1140b at a predetermined position through which sensors, game balls B, etc., can pass.

The support holes 1140a of the decorative cell 1140A are positioned so that they are difficult to see from the front when assembled on the game board 5C. Specifically, they are located in the area that overlaps with the frame-shaped front component 1000 when viewed from the front. This makes the support holes 1140a and cell fixing pieces 1141 less visible, even if the game panel 1100 and the center component 2500 are transparent, because the rear is difficult to see due to the presence of the front component 1000, thus improving the appearance within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the decorative cell 1140A has a positioning hole 1140c into which the positioning pin 2510a, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the center component 2500, is inserted (see Figure 314, etc.). Two positioning holes 1140c are provided for each decorative cell 1140A, one being a round hole and the other an elongated hole. Note that the positioning pin 2510a of the center component 2500 mainly protrudes rearward from the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A, which will be described later, but some protrude rearward from a member attached to the center frame 2511A.

The decorative cell 1140A, with its positioning hole 1140c inserted into the positioning pin 2510a of the center component 2500, allows for the positional relationship to be corrected toward the center component 2500 even when the decorative cell 1140A is supported by the game panel 1100 via the cell fixing piece 1141, thereby reducing misalignment with the decoration of the center component 2500. Furthermore, because one of the two positioning holes 1140c is an elongated hole, the decorative cell 1140A will not wrinkle or crack even if it expands or contracts due to changes in environmental conditions such as temperature and humidity.

As shown in the enlarged view in Figure 312, the cell fixing piece 1141 has a rectangular, flat main body piece 1141a, a short cylindrical projection 1141b protruding from the center of the main body piece 1141a, a mounting hole 1141c that penetrates the projection 1141b and the main body piece 1141a, and a pair of cylindrical positioning pins 1141d protruding from both sides of the projection 1141b on the main body piece 1141a. The cell fixing piece 1141 is made transparent so that it is not easily noticeable when assembled with the game board 5C.

The main body piece 1141a of the cell fixing piece 1141 is formed to a size that substantially covers the support hole 1140a of the decorative cell 1140A. The projection 1141b has a diameter half that of the central circular hole in the support hole 1140a of the decorative cell 1140A, and protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the decorative cell 1140A.

The mounting hole 1141c of the cell fixing piece 1141 is provided coaxially with the projection 1141b, and a countersunk socket is provided on the opposite side from the projection 1141b. This mounting hole 1141c is for attaching the cell fixing piece 1141 to the game panel 1100, and a countersunk mounting screw is inserted through it. The positioning pin 1141d protrudes from the main body piece 1141a in the same direction as the projection 1141b, and is longer than the projection 1141b. By inserting the positioning pin 1141d into the positioning hole provided in the game panel 1100, the cell fixing piece 1141 can be positioned in a predetermined location.

With the decorative cell 1140A positioned at a predetermined location on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, a pair of positioning pins 1141d of the cell fixing piece 1141 are inserted from the rear through the support hole 1140a into the corresponding positioning holes of the game panel 1100. This positions the cell fixing piece 1141 at the predetermined location on the game panel, and the mounting hole 1141c of the cell fixing piece 1141 is positioned coaxially with the mounting hole of the game panel 1100. In this state, the cell fixing piece 1141 can be attached to the game panel 1100 by screwing mounting screws (not shown) into the mounting holes of the game panel 1100 from the rear through the mounting hole 1141c and tightening them.

The decorative cell 1140A is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, on which a predetermined pattern is printed. Examples of materials for the decorative cell 1140A include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, impact-resistant polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride.

When the cell fixing piece 1141 is attached to the game panel 1100, a gap larger than the thickness of the decorative cell 1140A is formed between the main body piece and the game panel 1100 by the protrusion. Furthermore, a gap is also formed between the inner circumference of the support hole 1140a of the decorative cell 1140A and the protrusion and the pair of positioning pins. Therefore, the decorative cell 1140A is supported at the rear of the game panel 1100 so as to be movable within a predetermined range. In other words, the decorative cell 1140A is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined amount of play. This makes the installation of the decorative cell 1140A easier compared to attaching it to the entire surface of the game panel 1100, reduces the amount of decorative cell 1140A used, and suppresses the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative cells 1140A are provided on a portion of the game panel 1100, the number of decorative cells 1140A that can be obtained from the resin sheet can be increased compared to conventional cells that are attached to the game panel 1100, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative cell 1140A is attached to the game panel 1100 via the cell fixing piece 1141 with some degree of looseness, even if the decorative cell 1140A expands or contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the difference in expansion and contraction between it and the game panel 1100 can be absorbed by the looseness. This prevents wrinkles or cracks from forming in the decorative cell 1140A even if it contracts relative to the game panel 1100, thus maintaining the decorative effect of the design on the decorative cell 1140A.

Furthermore, by extending the inner edge of the decorative cell 1140A to the insertion portion 2511a of the center piece 2500, and providing a positioning hole 1140c in this extended portion, and positioning by inserting the positioning pin 2510a protruding from the insertion portion 2511a, the misalignment between the decoration of the decorative cell 1140A and the decoration of the center piece 2500 can be reduced as much as possible, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative cell 1140A.

Furthermore, since the decorative cell 1140A is attached to the game panel 1100 via the cell fixing piece 1141 and mounting screws, the decorative cell 1140A can be easily attached to and detached from the game panel 1100. Therefore, by replacing it with a decorative cell 1140A with a different pattern, it is possible to easily respond to changes in the specifications, model changes, design changes, reuse, etc., of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Moreover, by replacing it with a decorative cell 1140A with a more decorative pattern, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the decorative cell 1140A is located on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, the distance from the player to the decorative cell 1140A is increased compared to when it is located on the front of the game panel 1100, thereby reducing the feeling of pressure on the player.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the decorative cell 1140A be translucent. Light from the LED located behind the game panel 1100 (decorative cell 1140A) can illuminate the patterns on the decorative cell 1140A, improving the appearance within the game area 5a. The illumination of the decorative cell 1140A can also strongly attract the player's attention, thereby enhancing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

[29-4. Main Control Board Unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5C will be described mainly with reference to Figures 307 to 309. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. The main control unit 1300 comprises a main control board 1310 (see Figure 345) that controls the game content and the granting of benefits to the player, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the back box 3010.

The main control board box 1320 consists of a board base 1330, which is attached to the back box 3010 and to which the main control board 1310 is attached to the rear, and a board cover 1340, which is attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from the rear. The board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. The main control board 1310 is housed in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. Because the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, the condition of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modifications have been made, or whether or not unauthorized ICs are mounted) can be checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320.

Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, opening the box requires destroying that sealing mechanism 1350, leaving a trace of the opening and closing. Therefore, by examining these traces, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, thus enhancing the deterrent against unauthorized actions against the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 633, the out sensor 664, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, the general prize slot sensor 3001, the normal prize slot sensor 3008, the first start slot sensor 3002, the second start slot sensor 2401, the big prize slot sensor 2402, the V prize slot sensor 2507, the losing slot sensor 2504, the start slot solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the distribution solenoid 2537, the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor 1040, etc.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 has a base monitor 1310h consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (see Figure 345). The base monitor 1310h can be viewed from the rear through the transparent board cover 1340. This base monitor 1310h displays the number of game balls B launched by the ball launcher 540 that have entered the game area 5a, been ejected downwards from the game board 5C, and detected and counted by the out-sensor 664 located on the board unit 700 of the main frame 4. In this embodiment, the base monitor 1310h displays the number of balls counted by the out-sensor 664 after 100 balls have been launched (the number of balls that have returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

[29-5. Function Display Unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 304, etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Based on control signals from the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs to display the game status, the results of the lottery for normal symbols, the results of the lottery for special symbols, etc.

The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, includes a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a regular symbol indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the lottery results for regular symbols drawn when game balls B are received into the regular prize slot 2011, and a regular reserve indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved game balls B received into the regular prize slot 2011.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display unit consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the lottery for the first special symbol drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first start port 2002; a first special reserved number display unit consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved game balls related to the acceptance of game ball B into the first start port 2002; a second special symbol display unit consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of the lottery for the second special symbol drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second start port 2004; and a second special reserved number display unit consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserved game balls related to the acceptance of game ball B into the second start port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 includes a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the large prize slot 2005 when the lottery result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "win," etc.

This function display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, symbols, etc., by appropriately lighting, extinguishing, and flashing the provided LEDs.

[29-6. Peripheral Control Unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5C will be described mainly with reference to Figure 307, etc. The peripheral control unit 1500 is located behind the performance display device 1600, which is located on the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 345) that controls the performances presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 comprises a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light-emitting effects, sound effects, and movable effects, etc., and a performance display control unit 1512 for controlling performance images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (see Figure 101). The peripheral control unit 1500 is mounted on the rear side of the performance display device 1600, as will be described in detail later.

[29-7. Performance display device]
The performance display device 1600 in the game board 5C will be described mainly with reference to Figures 308 and 309. The performance display device 1600 is positioned in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The performance display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. When the game board 5C is assembled, the performance display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player side) through the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center feature 2500.

The display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display with a white LED backlight, mounted horizontally on the front of the liquid crystal spacer 1610. The display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and videos.

The display device 1600 comprises two upper fixing pieces 1611 protruding upward from its upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 protruding downward from its lower end surface. With the liquid crystal screen facing forward, the display device 1600 is attached to the back box 3010 (described later) by inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1611 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner circumferential surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, then moving the lower fixing piece 1612 forward, inserting the lower fixing piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and sliding the lock slider 3020 to the left in a rear view.

[29-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 311 to 313. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a portion of its rear end protruding into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (three in this case) of general prize slots 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B that have been driven into the game area 5a, a normal prize slot 2011 located at a predetermined position within the game area 5a that is always open to receive game balls B, a first start slot 2002 located at a predetermined position within the game area 5a that is always open to receive game balls B, and a mechanism that allows game balls B to be received into the normal prize slot 2011. The machine includes a second starting port 2004 that allows game ball B to be received according to the result of the lottery for the regular symbols drawn by the machine, a large prize port 2005 that allows game ball B to be received according to the first special symbol drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second special symbol drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a V prize port 2010 that allows game ball B received into the large prize port 2005 to be received.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is further equipped with an outlet 1008 and a sub-outlet 2021 for discharging game balls B that have been played into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The outlet 1008 and the sub-outlet 2021 are always open to receive game balls B. The outlet 1008 is located at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a second start-up sensor 2401 for detecting game balls B received in the second start-up opening 2004, a large prize-winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game balls B received in the large prize-winning opening 2005, a V-prize-winning opening sensor 2507 for detecting game balls B received in the V-prize-winning opening 2010, a losing-prize-winning opening sensor 2504 for detecting game balls B received in the losing-prize-winning opening 2009, and a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting unauthorized magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

Multiple (three in this case) general prize entry points 2001 are located to the left of the center in the lower part of the game area 5a. The regular prize entry point 2011 is located in the lower right corner of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. The first start entry point 2002 is located in the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, directly above the out entry point 1008. The second start entry point 2004 is located near the right edge of the game area 5a, near the center in the vertical direction. The large prize entry point 2005 is located in the upper right corner of the game area 5a, below the stopper 1006.

The outlet 1008 is located at the downstream end of the game area 5a, directly below the first start jackpot 2002. The sub-outlet 2021 is located to the left of the three general prize jackpots 2001.

The front unit 2000 comprises a start-up unit 2100 mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and having a first start-up opening 2002; a side unit 2200 provided to the left of the start-up unit 2100 in a front view, along the inner rail 1002, and having three general prize-winning openings 2001 and a sub-out opening 2021; and a side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above and to the left of the side unit 2200 in a front view.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 is located slightly above the center of the front view within the game area 5a and includes a frame-shaped center mechanism 2500 having a regular prize entry opening 2011, a second start opening 2004, a large prize entry opening 2005, a V prize entry opening 2010, and a losing entry opening 2009.

[29-8a. Starter Unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 304 to 306 and Figure 310, etc. The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction, directly above the out port 1008, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that can accommodate only one game ball B.

When assembled to the game board 5C, the start port unit 2100 has its first start port 2002 located directly below the central discharge section 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center mechanism 2500, allowing it to receive game balls B released from the central discharge section 2513a with a high probability. The game balls B received by this first start port 2002 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, and then, after being detected by the first start port sensor 3002, are discharged into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

[29-8b. Side Unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 304 to 306 and Figure 310, etc. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the start opening unit 2100 within the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is equipped with three general prize openings 2001 that are open to receive game balls B at all times, and a sub-out opening 2021 that is open to receive game balls B at all times.

The three general prize entry openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002, and are positioned higher towards the left. Each general prize entry opening 2001 has an opening (width) the size of one game ball B. A sub-out opening 2021 is located to the left of the leftmost general prize entry opening 2001. The sub-out opening 2021 has an opening (width) the size of one game ball B.

Furthermore, the side unit 2200 has a shelf section 2201 located to the right of the rightmost general prize entry opening 2001, which is inclined to become lower as it moves to the right. The shelf section 2201 is positioned lower than the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, and when the game ball B rolls along the shelf section 2201, it is received into the out opening 1008.

When assembled to the game board 5C, the side unit 2200 has three general prize slots 2001 and a sub-out slot 2021 that protrude forward from the front of the game panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide the game balls B received in the general prize slots 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and hand them over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100A of the rear unit 3000. The game balls B, after being handed over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100A of the rear unit 3000, are detected by the general prize slot sensor 3001 and then discharged into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

Furthermore, the side unit 2200 can guide the game balls B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and hand them over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100A of the rear unit 3000. The game balls B handed over to the rear ball guidance unit 3100A of the rear unit 3000 are then discharged into the first ball path 701 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

[29-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 304 to 306 and Figure 310, etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to the left of the side unit 2200 and in contact with the inner rail 1002 within the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf section 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When assembled to the game board 5C, the upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf section 2301 that protrudes forward beyond the front of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can guide the game balls B, which have flowed down the left side of the center mechanism 2500, to the right side, below the center mechanism 2500, via the shelf section 2301.

[29-8d. Center piece]
Next, the center mechanism 2500 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 320 to 329. Figure 320 is a front view showing the center mechanism of the game board in Figure 304. Figure 321 is a perspective view of the center mechanism of the game board in Figure 304 seen from the front, and Figure 322 is a perspective view of the center mechanism of the game board in Figure 304 seen from the rear. Figure 328(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the upper left corner of the center mechanism in Figure 320 where the large prize opening is located, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of the part in (a) seen from the front, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the part of the ball passage of the center mechanism where the large prize opening is located. Figure 329(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the upper right end of the center mechanism in Figure 321, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of (a) from the rear, and (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a cross-section of the part of the center mechanism that extends vertically in the ball passage.

The center component 2500 of the front unit 2000 is positioned within the game area 5a, above the start unit 2100, and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center component 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

The center mechanism 2500, as will be described in detail later, includes a normal prize slot 2011 that is always open to accept game balls B and in which a lottery for normal symbols is held when game balls B are accepted; a second start slot 2004 that can accept game balls B according to the lottery result for normal symbols drawn when game balls B are accepted into the normal prize slot 2011; a large prize slot 2005 that opens and closes to accept game balls B according to the lottery result for the first special symbol drawn when game balls B are accepted into the first start slot 2002 or the second special symbol drawn when game balls B are accepted into the second start slot 2004; a V prize slot 2010 that can only accept game balls B accepted into the large prize slot 2005; and a losing slot 2009 into which game balls B that were accepted into the large prize slot 2005 but not into the V prize slot 2010 are accepted.

The center mechanism 2500 includes a second start-up sensor 2401 for detecting game ball B received in the second start-up opening 2004, a large prize-winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting game ball B received in the large prize-winning opening 2005, a V-prize-winning opening sensor 2507 for detecting game balls received in the V-prize-winning opening 2010, and a losing-prize-winning opening sensor 2504 for detecting game ball B received in the losing-prize-winning opening 2009.

The center mechanism 2500 comprises a frame-shaped main unit 2510, a second start port door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second start port 2004, a start port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by the acceptance of game balls B into the normal prize port 2011, a large prize port door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large prize port 2005, and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize port door 2413 according to the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of game balls B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004.

Furthermore, the center mechanism 2500 includes a distribution vane 2536 that distributes the game ball B received in the large prize slot 2005 to either the losing slot 2009 or the V prize slot 2010, a distribution solenoid 2537 for moving the distribution vane 2536, and a symbol display 2518 that displays special symbols, fourth symbols, etc., drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first start slot 2002 and the second start slot 2004.

[29-8d-1. Main Unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center mechanism 2500 will now be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a mechanism entry opening 2006. The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511A attached to the front of the game panel 1100, warp passages 2512A that can guide game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511A to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower edge inside the frame of the center frame 2511A that rolls the game balls B that have flowed through the warp passages 2512A in the left and right directions before releasing them into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the main unit 2510 includes a cylindrical projection from its rear end, a positioning pin 2510a inserted into the positioning hole 1140c of the decorative cell 1140A, a spherical passage 2517 provided along the right periphery of the center frame 2511A, a group of guide passages 2520 provided on the upper part of the left periphery of the center frame 2511A, and a decorative body 2570 attached to the center frame 2511A and decorated with predetermined ornamentation. The decorative body 2570 is provided along the upper edge of the frame-shaped center component, along the right edge, and along the guide passage group 2520 on the left edge. Although not shown in the illustration, an LED board with multiple LEDs mounted on it is provided behind the decorative body 2570.

The center frame 2511A includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, extending in the front-rear direction; a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the game panel 1100; an inflow restricting portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the inflow of game balls B flowing down the game area 5a into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100; and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The insertion portion 2511a is positioned so that its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5C. The inflow restriction portion 2511c, when assembled to the game board 5C, has its front end (excluding the lower edge of the frame-shaped (annular) portion) protruding forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100. This allows the inflow restriction portion 2511c to prevent (restrict) the entry (inflow) of game balls B from the outside of the center mechanism 2500 (center frame 2511A) into the inside of the frame when assembled to the game board 5C.

The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d are thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the game panel 1100). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction.

The support portion 2511d is partially and in multiple locations on the inner circumference of the insertion portion 2511a. Furthermore, the support portion 2511d is also provided on the non-protruding parts of the flange portion 2511b of the insertion portion 2511a, reinforcing the insertion portion 2511a (center frame 2511A). The protruding edges of the support portion 2511d are formed to conform to the front shape of the insertion portion 2511a, or to be straight, making the support portion 2511d inconspicuous. The amount of protrusion of the support portion 2511d from the insertion portion 2511a is within a range (1 mm to 10 mm) from the thickness of the support portion 2511d to the thickness of the game panel 1100, thus providing reinforcement while remaining inconspicuous to the player.

The warp passage 2512A is an opening in the left-hand portion of the inflow restriction section 2511c (when viewed from the front), allowing game balls B within the game area 5a to enter. The warp passage 2512A can guide the entered game balls B to the stage 2513. A portion of the warp passage 2512A is formed by the center frame 2511A.

The stage 2513 is attached to the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A. The stage 2513 has a curved shape with a recessed central section in the left-right direction. It is positioned directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. That is, when the center component 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the approximately center position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than both sides, creating a wave-like (W-shaped) form. The stage 2513 has a section that is slightly higher than both sides of the center in the left-right direction (central release section 2513a) and the lowest sections on both sides (side release sections 2513b), both of which slope downwards towards the front. This allows game balls B to be released into the game area 5a from these sections.

When assembled on the game board 5C, the raised central portion of the stage 2513 (central release section 2513a) is positioned directly above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100. This ensures that when game balls B are released from the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513, they are received by the first start opening 2002 with extremely high probability.

The main unit 2510 has multiple positioning pins 2510a, which can be inserted into the positioning holes 1140c of the decorative cell 1140A located at the rear of the game panel 1100, thereby positioning the decorative cell 1140A relative to the center component 2500. Most of the multiple positioning pins 2510a protrude rearward from the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A, but some protrude rearward from components attached to the center frame 2511A (for example, the circuit board cover located at the rear of the decorative LED circuit board).

[29-8d-2. Ball passageway for the center feature]
The ball passage 2517 in the main unit 2510 of the center mechanism 2500 is provided to be long vertically along the right edge of the center mechanism 2500. In other words, the ball passage 2517 has an entrance that opens near the lower end of the stopper 1006, extends from there along the right rail 1005 to its lower end, then extends to the left along the lower right rail 1004, and has an exit that opens below the first start opening 2002 near the out opening 1008 (see Figure 310, etc.).

The ball passage 2517 has a rear wall formed by the flange portion 2511b of the center frame 2511A or the game panel 1100, and a front wall formed by the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570. This ball passage 2517 is provided with, from top to bottom, a large prize opening 2005, a second starting opening 2004, and a regular prize opening 2011.

The ball passage 2517 can be broadly divided into: an attacker passage section 2517a that continues from the entrance and is provided with a large prize opening 2005; a right edge passage section 2517b that extends downward in an arc along the right edge (right rail 1005) of the center mechanism 2500; a first nailed passage section 2517c provided between the right edge passage section 2517b and the second start opening 2004 and equipped with obstacle nails; a left passage section 2517d that extends downward passing to the left of the second start opening 2004; a right passage section 2517e that extends downward passing to the right of the second start opening 2004; a second nailed passage section 2517f provided between the left passage section 2517d and the right passage section 2517e and the normal prize opening 2011 and equipped with obstacle nails; and an exit passage section 2517g through which game balls B that were not accepted into the normal prize opening 2011 flow and extend to the exit.

As shown in Figure 328(a), the attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517 extends downward for a short distance from near the lower end of the impact portion 1006, then bends to the left, extending downward to the left by a length of 2 to 3 times the diameter D of the game ball B, and then turns back to the right, extending downward to the right to the right rail 1005 (outer edge of flange portion 2511b). The bottom wall of the portion of this attacker passage portion 2517a that extends to the right is formed by the large prize opening door 2413. Therefore, when the large prize opening door 2413 is advanced and closing the large prize opening 2005, the descending game ball B is guided by the large prize opening door 2413 to the downstream right edge passage section 2517b. When the large prize opening door 2413 is retracted and opening the large prize opening 2005, the descending game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005.

The large prize opening door 2413 in the attacker passage section 2517a is a long, flat plate that slopes downwards to the right. While detailed illustrations are omitted, the large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by moving back and forth in the forward and backward directions due to the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the biasing force of the spring, moving the large prize opening door 2413 forward and closing the large prize opening 2005. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 retracts against the biasing force of the spring, moving the large prize opening door 2413 backward and opening the large prize opening 2005.

When a game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005, it is guided to the right below the large prize opening 2005 (large prize opening door 2413), then flows downward along the left side of the right edge passage 2517b, and is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402. The game ball B detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402 is then distributed by the distribution vane 2536 to either the losing opening 2009 or the V prize opening 2010.

The attacker passage section 2517a is provided with a passage decoration section 2590, which, as will be described in detail later, is capable of decorating the ball passage 2517 and slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B.

The right edge passage section 2517b extends downward in an arc shape from the downstream end of the attacker passage section 2517a, with its left wall serving as the rolling surface for the game balls B. Its lower end bends to the left in a crank shape before bending downward. This right edge passage section 2517b is also provided with a passage decoration section 2590, which decorates the ball passage 2517 and slows down the flow speed of the game balls B. To the left of this right edge passage section 2517b are a large prize opening sensor 2402 for detecting game balls B received into the large prize opening 2005, a distribution vane 2536 for distributing the game balls B received into the large prize opening 2005 and detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402, a losing opening 2009, and a V-prize opening 2010.

The right-edge passage section 2517b has multiple (two in this case) decorative protrusions 2511f located slightly higher than the upper end of the distribution vane 2536 on the left-side wall. The decorative protrusions 2511f are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape extending forward and backward, and can light up by reflecting and refracting light from the decorative LEDs provided on the game board 5C. The illumination of these decorative protrusions 2511f directs the player's gaze towards the distribution vane 2536, allowing them to enjoy the anticipation of whether or not the game ball B will be distributed to the V-prize opening 2010. Furthermore, since the multiple decorative protrusions 2511f constitute part of the rolling surface on which the game ball B rolls in the right-edge passage section 2517b, the multiple decorative protrusions 2511f can slow down the flow speed of the game ball B.

The distribution vane 2536, although not shown in detail in the illustration, rotates between an upright position and a tilted position with its upper end moved to the right, due to the drive (energization) of the distribution solenoid 2537. When the distribution vane 2536 is upright, game balls B are distributed to the losing slot 2009. When the distribution vane 2536 is tilted, game balls B are distributed to the V-prize slot 2010. This distribution vane 2536 moves at a constant cycle. Therefore, the timing of when game balls B are distributed to the V-prize slot 2010, and whether or not they are accepted into the large prize slot 2005, can create suspense and excitement for the player.

The first nailed passage section 2517c is formed as a vertically elongated rectangle with the downstream end (exit) of the right edge passage section 2517b as the center in the left-right direction. Flange sections 2511b are not provided except along the left and right edges, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed in the areas where flange sections 2511b are not provided. Although not shown in the illustration, multiple obstacle nails are planted in the exposed areas of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, in the first nailed passage section 2517c, a nail head housing hole 2571a is provided in the front plate 2571, which accommodates the heads of the obstacle nails.

The lower end of the first nailed passage section 2517c is positioned slightly lower than the entrance to the warp passage 2512A, which is located on the left side of the center mechanism 2500. A second start-up passage entrance 2415, which can communicate with the second start-up opening 2004, opens directly below the exit of the right-edge passage section 2517b at the lower end of the first nailed passage section 2517c. In this embodiment, only game balls B that pass through this second start-up passage entrance 2415 have the potential to be received by the second start-up opening 2004.

In this embodiment, the second start port 2004 opens to the right at a location below and to the left of the second start port passage entrance 2415, and a second start port door 2411 that moves back and forth is provided to its right. Furthermore, below the second start port passage entrance 2415, a guide piece 2411a is provided, which slopes downward from directly below the entrance towards the second start port 2004 and is also capable of moving back and forth.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the second start-up door 2411 moves back and forth in the front-to-back direction when the start-up solenoid 2412 is driven (energized), while the guide piece 2411a moves back and forth in the opposite direction to the second start-up door 2411. When the start-up solenoid 2412 is not energized, the biasing force of a spring (not shown) causes the second start-up door 2411 to move forward, making it impossible to receive the second start-up 2004, and the guide piece 2411a moves backward, making it impossible to guide the game ball B to the second start-up 2004. On the other hand, when the start-up solenoid 2412 is energized due to a normal win on a normal symbol, the second start-up door 2411 moves backward, making it possible to receive the second start-up 2004, and the guide piece 2411a moves forward, making it possible to guide the game ball B to the second start-up 2004.

The left passage section 2517d is where game balls B that flowed down to the left of the second start-up passage entrance 2415 in the first pinned passage section 2517c pass through, and it communicates with the upper end of the downstream second pinned passage section 2517f at a position slightly higher than the stage 2513. The right passage section 2517e is where game balls B that entered the second start-up passage entrance 2415 in the first pinned passage section 2517c but were not accepted by the second start-up 2004, and game balls B that flowed down to the right of the second start-up passage entrance 2415 pass through, and it is adjacent to the right side of the left passage section 2517d and communicates with the upper end of the second pinned passage section 2517f.

The second nailed passage section 2517f is formed in a long rectangle shape, and the flange section 2511b is not provided throughout, exposing the front surface of the game panel 1100. Although not shown in the illustration, multiple obstacle nails are planted in the exposed portion of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, in the second nailed passage section 2517f, a nail head housing hole 2571a is provided in the front plate 2571, which accommodates the heads of the obstacle nails. A regular prize entry opening 2011 is provided in the center of the second nailed passage section 2517f in the left-right direction.

The exit passage section 2517g extends downward from both the left and right outer sides of the normal prize entry opening 2011, merges below the normal prize entry opening 2011, and then extends downward to the left along the lower right rail 1004. The exit at the downstream end of the exit passage section 2517g is located lower than the first start opening 2002. Therefore, the game balls B that have passed through the exit passage section 2517g are not received by the first start opening 2002, but are discharged from the out opening 1008. A passage decoration section 2590 is also provided in this exit passage section 2517g.

[29-8d-3. Guideway Groups]
Furthermore, the main unit 2510 of the center mechanism 2500 is located below the upper left corner of the center frame 2511A and is equipped with a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide passage group 2520 guides the game balls B to the area above where the entrance to the warp passage 2512A is open. The rear wall of the guide passage group 2520 is formed by the center frame 2511A, and the front wall is formed by the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570. A passage decorative section 2590 is also provided in this guide passage group 2520.

As shown in Figure 310, the guide passage group 2520 is located outside the inflow restriction section 2511c of the center frame 2511A. It consists of a first guide passage 2521, whose upper entrance is adjacent to the right side of the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and a second guide passage 2522, whose upper entrance is adjacent to the right side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. Both the guide passage group 2520 (first guide passage 2521 and second guide passage 2522) are made of colorless, transparent material, allowing the game balls B circulating inside to be visible from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends downward in an arc shape along the right side of the inner rail 1002, making a short rightward bend near its lower end before bending downward again. The second guide passage 2522 extends downward along the inflow restriction section 2511c of the center frame 2511A, making a short rightward bend near its lower end before bending downward again. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are separated by a partition wall 2511e. The width of each passage in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is wide enough for game balls B to flow in a single line.

The exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are located above the vertical center of the game area 5a. Since the second guide passage 2522 is located adjacent to the inflow restriction section 2511c, game balls B guided through the second guide passage 2522 are more likely to enter the warp passage 2512A than game balls B guided through the first guide passage 2521.

[29-8d-4. Pattern Display Unit]
In this embodiment, the symbol display unit 2518 is located in the upper right corner within the frame of the inflow restriction section 2511c in the center frame 2511A. This symbol display unit 2518 is composed of 10 LEDs, and the special symbols, fourth symbols, etc., drawn by the acceptance of game balls B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are displayed by the lighting, extinguishing, flashing, and emitting color of each LED.

[29-8d-5. Details of the center component]
Next, the details of the center mechanism 2500 provided on the game board 5C will be described. The details will be described with reference to Figures 323 to 326, etc. Figure 323 is an explanatory diagram showing the center mechanism of the fourth embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and shown together with the front components. Figure 324(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body of the center mechanism separated into a front decorative part and a rear decorative part, viewed from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the decorative body consisting of the front decorative part and the rear decorative part, viewed from the front. Figure 325 is an explanatory diagram showing the center mechanism of Figure 323 with the rear end facing downwards and the center frame placed on the base. Figure 326 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross-section of a center mechanism equipped with a center frame to which a different decorative body from that of Figure 323 is attached.

This center component 2500 comprises a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511A attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), warp passages 2512A that can guide game balls B from the outside to the inside of the center frame 2511A, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower edge within the frame of the center frame 2511A, which causes the game balls B that have flowed through the warp passages 2512A to roll left and right before being released into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the center component 2500 is further equipped with a decorative body 2570, which is attached to the center frame 2511A and has a predetermined decoration applied to it.

The center frame 2511A includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided to follow the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, extending in the front-rear direction; a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100; an inflow restricting portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the inflow of game balls B flowing down the game area 5a into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100; and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The rear end of the center frame 2511A (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511A may or may not protrude beyond the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

As shown in Figure 323, the decorative body 2570 comprises a flat, transparent front plate 2571 attached to the front end of the center frame 2511A, a front decorative portion 2572 attached to the front surface of the front plate, and a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A (insertion portion 2511a). In other words, the decorative body 2570 is provided to extend within the frame of the center frame 2511A and has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A, and a front decorative portion 2572 provided to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative portion 2573. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are decorated in a way that coordinates with each other.

The front plate 2571 is positioned so that its rear surface abuts against the front end surface of the inflow restriction section 2511c. This front plate 2571 forms a ball passage 2517 through which game balls B can flow between it and the support section 2511d.

As shown in Figure 324, the front decorative portion 2572 of the decorative body 2570 is decorated with a predetermined pattern (in this case, a pattern of cloud-like designs arranged around the face of a demon). The front decorative portion 2572 has a transparent, translucent portion 2572a located in front of the spherical passage 2517, and a plurality of opaque, dot-like portions 2572b located on the translucent portion 2572a, which constitute part of the decorative pattern (see Figure 324(a)).

The transparent portion 2572a of the front decorative portion 2572 is formed to be either colorless and transparent or colored and transparent. In the colored and transparent portion 2572a, it is colored to a color similar to the color of the design, so as to constitute a part of the design. In this embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a of the demon's face is colored and transparent, while the transparent portion 2572a of the cloud design is colorless and transparent.

Each dot portion 2572b of the front decorative portion 2572 is colored in the same color as the pattern. As shown in the enlarged view in Figure 324(a), each of the multiple dot portions 2572b is formed in a circular shape and is arranged at an angle of 45 degrees vertically to the horizontal, with spacing equal to the diameter of each dot.

The rear decorative section 2573 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support section 2511d of the center frame 2511A. The rear decorative section 2573 is provided so as to extend within the frame-shaped insertion section 2511a of the center frame 2511A. The decoration on the rear decorative section 2573 is the same pattern as the front decorative section 2572, but applied opaquely. Note that if the game panel 1100 is made of a transparent material, the rear decorative section 2573 may be located on the back surface of the game panel 1100. In this case, there is an effect of increasing the area of decoration.

The front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 are made of a transparent resin film with a decorative pattern printed on it. In this embodiment, the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 are formed in film form.

As shown in Figure 324(b), when viewed from the front, the decorative element 2570 allows the decoration (pattern) of the rear decorative element 2573 to be seen through the transparent, translucent portion 2572a of the front decorative element 2572. Therefore, the pattern of the rear decorative element 2573 compensates for the translucent portion 2572a, resulting in the original pattern being visible as if the translucent portion 2572a were absent.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573, the game ball B becomes visible through the transparent translucent section 2572a of the front decorative section 2572. This prevents the game ball B from becoming temporarily invisible, thus avoiding causing distrust or anxiety in the player, and allows them to enjoy the game with the game ball B, thus preventing a decline in enjoyment.

In this embodiment, the decorative element 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511A at a point forward of the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a. That is, when the decorative element 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511A, no part of the decorative element 2570 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511A. As a result, as shown in Figure 325, when the center frame 2511A is placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a contacts (touches) the base TA.

In this embodiment, the center component 2500, although details are omitted, includes, in addition to the decorative body 2580, a symbol display 2518, a distribution solenoid 2537, a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, etc., mounted on the center frame 2511A. The symbol display 2518 displays special symbols, fourth symbols, etc., that are drawn by receiving game balls B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the solenoids attached to the center frame 2511A, such as the distribution solenoid 2537, the starter solenoid 2412, and the attacker solenoid 2414, are mounted so that their metal cases are located at the rear end. This ensures that when the center frame 2511A (center component 2500) is placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, the sturdy metal cases of the solenoids touch the base TA, making them less susceptible to damage during assembly. In this case, a resin cover that conceals the metal cases of the solenoids may also be provided.

Furthermore, although not shown in the diagram, the center component 2500 is provided with wiring connected to the LED board, relay board, solenoid, etc. This wiring is routed along the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A of the center component 2500, and is concealed by the decorative element 2570. This prevents the wiring from being visible to the player, thus minimizing the visual deterioration. Alternatively, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A could be formed as a double wall, with the wiring passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use flexible flat cable (FFC) for the wiring.

In the above embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b may be reversed. More specifically, the transparent portion 2572a may be an opaque portion with a pattern, while the dot portion 2572b may be a transparent portion.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the transparent portion 2572a as a transparent area, it is not limited to this, and may also be a portion that penetrates from front to back.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a decorative body 2570 consisting of a front decorative body 2572 having a transparent portion 2572a and a dot portion 2572b in the applied decoration (pattern), and a rear decorative body 2573 having decoration (pattern) that complements the transparent portion 2572a, is shown to be provided on the center frame 2511A of the center mechanism 2500. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the decorative body 2570 may also be provided on the start port unit 2100, side unit 2200, attacker unit 2400, back unit 3000, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and rear decorative part 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 was shown as a transparent film with a printed pattern. However, it is not limited to this, and a center component 2500 may also be provided, which includes a center frame 2511A to which the decorative body 2570A is attached, as shown in Figure 326. This decorative body 2570A comprises a flat plate-shaped front decorative part 2572 attached to the front end of the inflow restricting part 2511c of the center frame 2511A, and a rear decorative part 2573 that is attached within the frame of a frame-shaped insertion part 2511a behind the front decorative part 2572 and is formed three-dimensionally.

The front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 of the decorative body 2570A, although detailed illustrations are omitted, are each adorned with three-dimensionally molded decorations. The front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 are each adorned with decorations that harmonize with each other. Furthermore, the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 are positioned so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front.

The decorative element 2570A (rear decorative element 2573) is positioned forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511A. Therefore, when the decorative element 2570A is attached to the center frame 2511A, no portion of the decorative element 2570A protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511A.

The decorative element 2570A may be molded from pre-colored resin, or it may be painted or have stickers applied after molding. Furthermore, metallic pigments or plating may be used as decoration for the decorative element 2570A, allowing for a sparkling decoration that strongly attracts the player's attention and provides a highly appealing pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as part of the decorative element 2570A, a portion of the rear decorative element 2573 may be made to protrude forward to the same position as the front decorative element 2572. This makes it easier to create a sense of depth in the decorative element 2570A, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2570 is provided on a transparent center frame 2511A attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5C. This decorative body 2570 consists of a rear decorative part 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A, and a front decorative part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part 2573. Because the center frame 2511A is transparent, it is less conspicuous, making the decorative body 2570 stand out relatively. Furthermore, because a portion of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 of the decorative body 2570 overlap, it is possible to make the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative part 2573 difficult to discern, allowing the decoration of the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 to be shown to the player in good condition. As a result, the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 can be used to form a decorative body 2570 with a high decorative effect. This decorative body 2570 can strongly attract the player's attention, making it less likely for them to get bored, and thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the decoration of a portion of the front decorative section 2572 constituting the decorative body 2570 (the portion in front of the ball passage 2517) is composed of a transparent section 2572a and multiple dot sections 2572b. Additionally, a rear decorative section 2573 is provided behind this section, featuring decoration that coordinates with the decoration of the front decorative section 2572 (the same pattern). Therefore, the rear decorative section 2573, visible through the transparent section 2572a, compensates for the transparent section 2572a, creating the illusion of a single, excellent decoration (pattern) that appears as if the transparent section 2572a were not present. This excellent decoration provides a highly effective decorative effect, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as described above, the decoration of the front portion of the ball passage 2517 in the front decorative section 2572 is composed of a transparent section 2572a and multiple dot sections 2572b. Therefore, the game ball B circulating in the ball passage 2517 can be viewed from the front through the transparent section 2572a. This allows players to enjoy the excellent decoration of the front decorative section 2572 and rear decorative section 2573 when no game ball B is circulating in the ball passage 2517, as the decoration of the rear decorative section 2573 is visible through the transparent section 2572a. When game ball B is circulating in the ball passage 2517, the game ball B can be viewed through the transparent section 2572a, preventing the game ball B from becoming invisible and thus avoiding causing distrust or anxiety to the player. This allows players to enjoy the game with the game ball B and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is positioned in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511A and the center frame 2511A is placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a contacts the base TA. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the pachinko machine 1 with the center frame 2511A placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, the center frame 2511A does not wobble, making assembly and disassembly easier.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is positioned forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511A, the decorative body 2570 is prevented from protruding further rearward than the rear end of the center frame 2511A. This makes it easier to secure space behind the center frame 2511A (game panel 1100). Therefore, it becomes possible to install large decorative bodies or movable decorative bodies behind the center frame 2511A, making it easier to construct a pachinko machine 1 that can provide greater enjoyment for players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display unit 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511A, the symbol display unit 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511A. Compared to the case where the symbol display unit 2518 is attached separately, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the decoration of the center frame 2511A (decorative body 2570, decorative body 2570A) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

[29-8d-5a. Modification of the center component]
Modified versions of the center component 2500 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 327. Figure 327(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the main part of the center component of the second embodiment as seen from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the center component of (a) with the center frame placed on a base with the rear end facing downwards.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, this center mechanism 2500, like the center mechanism 2500 described above, comprises a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511A attached to the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), warp passages 2512A that can guide game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511A to the inside of the frame, and a stage 2513 provided at the lower edge within the frame of the center frame 2511A, which causes the game balls B that have flowed through the warp passages 2512A to roll left and right before being released into the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the center component 2500 also includes a decorative body 2580, which is attached to the center frame 2511A and has a predetermined decoration applied to it.

The center frame 2511A includes a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided to follow the inner circumferential surface of the opening 1112, extending in the front-rear direction; a flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and abuts against the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100; an inflow restricting portion 2511c that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and restricts the inflow of game balls B flowing down the game area 5a into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100; and a flat plate-shaped support portion 2511d that protrudes from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The rear end of the center frame 2511A (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511A may or may not protrude beyond the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

The decorative body 2580 comprises a front decorative section 2581, a rear decorative section 2582, a transparent front cover 2583 covering the front side of the rear decorative section 2582, a flat diffuser lens 2584 provided on the rear side of the rear decorative section 2582 and capable of irradiating light incident from the side forward, a transparent rear cover 2585 attached to the rear side of the front cover 2583 so as to cover the diffuser lens 2584 from behind, and an LED substrate 2586 on which LEDs 2586a that irradiate light onto the side of the diffuser lens 2584 are mounted.

The front decorative section 2581 is positioned in front of the rear decorative section 2582. The front decorative section 2581 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support section 2511d on the center frame 2511A.

The rear decorative section 2582 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, and a portion of it protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the center frame 2511A (insertion section 2511a).

The front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are decorated in a harmonious manner, and are arranged so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front. Although not shown in the illustration, the decoration of the front decorative section 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative section 2582 are each applied to the corresponding portion of a single design, with the overlapping portion in the front view serving as the boundary.

The front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are formed entirely of opacity. That is, the front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are composed of opaque parts. Furthermore, the front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are translucent. Alternatively, a transparent (transparent) portion may be provided in part of the decoration of the front decorative section 2581 or the rear decorative section 2582.

The front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are made of a transparent resin film with a decorative pattern printed on it. In this embodiment, the front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 are formed in film form.

The LED board 2586 is located behind the front decorative section 2581. This ensures that the LED board 2586 and the wiring connected to it are hidden from view by the front decorative section 2581. The LED board 2586 can illuminate the rear decorative section 2582 by illuminating the multiple LEDs 2586a mounted on it.

In this embodiment, when the decorative element 2580 is attached to the center frame 2511A, a portion of it protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511A. As a result, as shown in Figure 327(c), when the center frame 2511A is placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, the rear end of the decorative element 2580 (rear decorative portion 2582) contacts (touches) the base TA, and a portion of the rear end of the center frame 2511A also contacts the base TA.

In this embodiment, the center component 2500, although details are omitted, includes, in addition to the decorative body 2580, a symbol display 2518, a distribution solenoid 2537, a start port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, etc., mounted on the center frame 2511A. The symbol display 2518 displays special symbols, fourth symbols, etc., that are drawn by receiving game balls B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the solenoids attached to the center frame 2511A, such as the distribution solenoid 2537, the starter solenoid 2412, and the attacker solenoid 2414, are mounted so that their metal cases are located at the rear end. This ensures that when the center frame 2511A (center component 2500) is placed on the base TA with its rear end facing downwards, the sturdy metal cases of the solenoids touch the base TA, making them less susceptible to damage during assembly. In this case, a resin cover that conceals the metal cases of the solenoids may also be provided.

In the above embodiment, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511A may be formed as a double wall, and the wiring of the LED substrate 2586 may be passed between these walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) for the wiring.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 were shown as having a pattern printed on a transparent film. However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 may be three-dimensionally molded. Alternatively, the configuration of the decorative body 2570 shown in Figure 324 may be applied to this embodiment.

According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2580 is provided on the transparent center frame 2511A attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5C. This decorative body 2580 consists of a rear decorative part 2582 that partially protrudes further back than the rear end of the center frame 2511A, and a front decorative part 2581 that is located in front of the rear decorative part 2582. As a result, the transparent center frame 2511A is made less conspicuous, making the decorative body 2580 stand out relatively, and the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 of the decorative body 2580 create a decorative effect with depth that can be shown to the player. In this configuration, the rear decorative section 2582 and the front decorative section 2581 are adorned with decorations that coordinate with each other, and are designed so that parts of each overlap when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult to discern the boundary between the decorations of the front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 when viewed from the front. This allows the large decorations of the front and rear decorative sections 2581 and 2582 to be clearly visible to the player, and the rear and front decorative sections 2582 and 2581 can form a large, deep, and highly decorative decorative body 2580. Therefore, since a highly decorative decorative body 2580 can be provided on the center frame 2511A, this decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's attention, making it less likely for them to become bored, and thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that can suppress a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, the rear decorative portion 2582 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a. This allows players to enjoy playing with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative part 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, it is possible to decorate the area around the display device 1600 (display screen) or to display a more decorative effect (performance) in cooperation with the decorative body (movable decorative body) of the rear display unit 3300A and the rear performance unit 3400, which are located behind the game panel 1100. This allows for the creation of a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580 makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 from the front. Since the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of appearance due to visible wiring, and thus the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the decorative element 2580 (front decorative element 2581) is provided in front of the LED substrate 2586, the decorative element 2580 (decoration) can conceal the LED substrate 2586. This avoids the unsightly appearance caused by the LED substrate 2586 being visible, and makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative element 2580.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display unit 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511A, the symbol display unit 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511A. Compared to the case where the symbol display unit 2518 is attached separately, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the decoration of the center frame 2511A (decorative element 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100.

[29-8d-6. Summary]
The above-mentioned center component 2500 has the following technical features:

[29-8d-6a. Summary A]
(Background of the technical features)
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a known type of machine that includes a center component, which is attached from the front to an opening in a game panel where a game area is formed through which game balls can flow, and has a decorative body that is decorated with a predetermined ornament (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-074434). In the technology described in this patent document, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center component.

However, in the technology described in the above-mentioned patent document, a flat decorative element is placed near the front end of the center component. Therefore, even if the decorative element has relief-like decorations, it lacks a sense of depth, potentially causing players to quickly tire of it and diminishing their enjoyment.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in player interest by incorporating decorative elements with a higher decorative effect.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
In a gaming machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The RE game board is
A frame-shaped center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the aforementioned gaming panel,
A decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration,
Equipped with,
The decorative element is
It has a rear decorative portion that extends within the frame of the center frame and a portion of which protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion that is provided in front of the rear decorative portion,
The aforementioned rear decorative section and the aforementioned front decorative section are decorated in a way that coordinates with each other.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "game panel" can refer to various types of panels, including: "opaque panels such as plywood," "panel boards made of transparent resin," and "panel boards made of transparent resin and frame-shaped panel holders that hold the outer edge of the panel board."

Furthermore, examples of "center frames" include: "a flat flange portion that can abut against the front surface of the game panel, and an inflow restricting portion that extends forward from the flange portion and restricts the flow of game balls flowing down the game area into the opening of the game panel," and "an insertion portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and provided along the inner circumferential surface of the opening, a flat flange portion that extends from the front end of the insertion portion in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can abut against the front surface of the game panel, and an inflow restricting portion that extends forward from the flange portion and restricts the flow of game balls flowing down the game area into the opening of the game panel."

Furthermore, "decorative elements" include items with decorations consisting of patterns created by printing or painting, items with three-dimensionally sculpted decorations, and items with decorations that have a metallic luster, such as plating.

Furthermore, examples of "decorative elements" include: "those that are illuminated by the light emitted by LEDs mounted on an LED board," "those that have opaque sections to make the wiring of electronic components (e.g., LED boards, relay boards, sphere sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (special pattern displays), solenoids, etc.) located at the rear difficult to see from the front," and "those that have electronic components (e.g., LED boards, relay boards, sphere sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (special pattern displays), solenoids, etc.) that protrude further rearward than the rear end of the center frame."

Furthermore, examples of "harmonious decorations" include: "decorations where the decorations of the front and back sections form a single decoration (pattern)," "decorations with patterns (figures) where the decorations of the front and back sections are continuous with each other," and "decorations where the decorations of the front or back section enhance (emphasize) the decorations of the back or front section."

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area is formed through which game balls can flow, the game board comprises a frame-shaped center frame attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel, and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having predetermined decorations. The decorative body has a rear decorative part that extends within the frame of the center frame and a portion of which protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part provided in front of the rear decorative part, and the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in a manner that coordinates with each other. (See the section "29-8d-5a. Modified Center Mechanism" and the description in Figure 327, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is fitted with a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative section that partially protrudes beyond the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative section positioned in front of the rear decorative section. This allows the player to see a decorative body with depth, created by the front and rear decorative sections. Because the rear and front decorative sections are designed to coordinate with each other, a large decorative effect can be presented to the player, creating a large, deep, and highly effective decorative body. Therefore, by providing a highly effective decorative body on the center frame, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention and prevent them from becoming bored, thus providing a game machine that can suppress a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the decorative rear section, which constitutes the decorative element, extends within the frame of the center frame, it does not narrow the game area on the front of the game panel or obscure the view of the game balls flowing through the game area. This allows players to enjoy the game with the game balls in a good condition.

Furthermore, because the rear decorative section constituting the decorative element extends within the frame of the center frame, when a performance display device, movable decorative element, or other decorative element is provided behind the game panel, the rear decorative element can be used to decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or to work in conjunction with the decorative element (movable decorative element) to create a more effective decorative effect (performance), thereby providing a highly appealing game machine that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the front and rear decorative sections overlap at least partially when viewed from the front. This allows the front and rear decorative sections, which feature harmonious decorations, to partially overlap when viewed from the front. As a result, the boundary between the front and rear decorative sections becomes less noticeable when viewed from the front, allowing the large decorative elements of both sections to be displayed to the player in a more favorable state and enhancing the decorative effect of the ornament.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the center frame transparent. This makes the center frame less visible and less conspicuous to the player, allowing the decorative elements (front and rear decorative parts) to stand out more, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative elements.

Furthermore, the decorative element may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. This allows the wiring to be hidden by the opaque portion, preventing the wiring from being visible and thus preventing a deterioration in appearance, thus allowing the decorative effect of the decorative element to be more easily achieved.

Furthermore, the decorative element may be placed in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. This allows the decorative element to conceal the LED board, thus avoiding the unsightly appearance caused by the visible LED board and allowing the decorative element to more effectively enhance its decorative effect.

Furthermore, a display unit capable of showing the results of the special symbol draw, which is determined by the initial ball entry of game balls within the game area, may be attached to the center frame. This allows the display unit for showing the special symbols to be attached to the center frame, enabling it to be mounted to the game panel together with the center frame. Compared to cases where the display unit is mounted separately, this reduces the effort required for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The front decorative section and the rear decorative section are arranged so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 2, the front decorative part and the rear decorative part are provided so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front. (See the description regarding decorative body 2580 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design, which features coordinated decorations on the front and rear sections, allows them to partially overlap when viewed from the front. This makes the boundary between the front and rear decorations less noticeable when viewed from the front, allowing the large decorative elements of both sections to be more clearly displayed to the player and enhancing the decorative effect of the ornament.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 and means 2,
The center frame is characterized by being made of transparent material.

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is formed transparently. In other words, the center frame is formed from a transparent material. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This makes the center frame less visible and less conspicuous to the player because it is transparent, allowing the decorative elements (front and rear decorative parts) to stand out more and enhancing their decorative effect.

Furthermore, because the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is also transparent and decorative elements or display devices are installed behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less conspicuous. This makes the decorative elements and display images visible through the transparent game panel more noticeable, thus providing a game machine that can entertain players more.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The aforementioned decorative body is,
The center frame has an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to it from the front.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "electronic components" include "LED boards," "relay boards," "ball sensors for detecting game balls," "magnetic sensors," "display units for showing special patterns," "solenoids for opening and closing variable prize slots," and "solenoids or drive motors for moving movable decorative elements," etc.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description of decorative body 2580 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front due to the opaque portion of the decorative element. Because the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, it prevents the appearance from deteriorating due to visible wiring, and allows the decorative effect of the element to be more easily achieved.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"The aforementioned decorative body is,
It is located in front of the LED circuit board on which the LEDs are mounted.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative element is provided in front of the LED substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. (See the description regarding the LED substrate 2586 of the decorative element 2580 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design, which places the decorative element in front of the LED circuit board, allows the LED board to be concealed by the decorative element. This avoids the unsightly appearance caused by the visible LED board, and makes it easier to maximize the decorative effect of the element.

Furthermore, by directing the light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board onto the decorative object, the LED board can illuminate the decorative object, making it appear brighter and more beautiful, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 5,
"The aforementioned center frame includes,
A display unit capable of showing the results of the special symbol draw, which is determined by the initial ball entry of a game ball within the aforementioned game area, is installed."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 6, a display unit capable of displaying the lottery results of special symbols drawn by game balls entering the game area is attached to the center frame. (See the description regarding the symbol display unit 2518 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design allows the display unit for showing special symbols to be attached to the center frame, enabling the display unit to be mounted to the game panel together with the center frame. This reduces the effort required for assembling the game machine compared to a system where the display unit is mounted separately.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
In a gaming machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The RE game board is
A display unit capable of displaying the results of a special symbol lottery, which is drawn by a game ball entering the game area, is installed, and a frame-shaped transparent center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel,
A decorative body is attached to the center frame, has a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, and is provided in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted,
Equipped with,
The decorative element is
The center frame has a rear decorative portion that extends within the frame and a portion of which protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion that is provided in front of the rear decorative portion.
The rear decorative section and the front decorative section are decorated in a way that coordinates with each other, and are arranged so that at least a portion of them overlap when viewed from the front.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 7, the gaming machine comprises a game board having a game panel forming a game area through which game balls can flow. The game board has a display unit attached capable of displaying the results of a special symbol draw determined by game ball entry within the game area. It includes a frame-shaped transparent center frame mounted from the front into an opening formed in the game panel, and a decorative body attached to the center frame, which is decorated and has an opaque portion that makes the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. The decorative body is located in front of an LED substrate on which LEDs are mounted. The decorative body has a rear decorative portion extending within the frame of the center frame and a portion projecting further back than the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion located in front of the rear decorative portion. The rear and front decorative portions are decorated in a coordinated manner and are arranged so that at least a portion overlaps when viewed from the front.

As a result, a decorative body is provided on the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board. This decorative body consists of a rear decorative part that protrudes further back than the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative part that is positioned in front of the rear decorative part. Because the center frame is transparent, it is less conspicuous, making the decorative body stand out relatively. At the same time, the front and rear decorative parts of the decorative body create a decorative effect with depth, which can be seen by the player. In this case, the decorations on the rear and front decorative parts are coordinated with each other, and parts of each overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, it is possible to make the boundary between the decorations of the front and rear decorative parts difficult to discern, allowing the large decorative effect created by the front and rear decorative parts to be seen by the player in good condition, and creating a large, deep decorative body with a high decorative effect. Consequently, a decorative body with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame, which can strongly attract the player's attention and prevent them from getting bored, thus providing a game machine that can suppress the decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, because the decorative rear section, which constitutes the decorative element, extends within the frame of the center frame, it does not narrow the game area on the front of the game panel or obscure the view of the game balls flowing through the game area. This allows players to enjoy the game with the game balls in a good condition.

Furthermore, because the rear decorative section constituting the decorative element extends within the frame of the center frame, when a performance display device, movable decorative element, or other decorative element is provided behind the game panel, the rear decorative element can be used to decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or to work in conjunction with the decorative element (movable decorative element) to create a more effective decorative effect (performance), thereby providing a highly appealing game machine that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, the opaque portion of the decorative element makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front. Because the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, the aesthetic deterioration caused by visible wiring can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the element can be more easily achieved.

Furthermore, since the decorative element is positioned in front of the LED circuit board, it can conceal the LED circuit board, thus avoiding the unsightly appearance caused by the visible LED circuit board and allowing the decorative element to more effectively enhance its aesthetic appeal.

Furthermore, since the display unit for showing special symbols is mounted on the center frame, the display unit can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame. This reduces the effort required for assembling the game machine compared to when the display unit is attached separately.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the decline in player interest by providing decorative elements with a higher decorative effect.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100, consisting of a panel board 1110 and a panel holder 1120 in the game board 5, corresponds to the game panel of the above solution; the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the game panel of the above solution; the center frame 2511A of the center feature 2500 in this embodiment corresponds to the center frame of the above solution; the pattern display 2518 in this embodiment corresponds to the display of the above solution; the decorative body 2580 in this embodiment corresponds to the decorative body of the above solution; the front decorative part 2581 in this embodiment corresponds to the front decorative part of the above solution; the rear decorative part 2582 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative part of the above solution; and the LED substrate 2586 in this embodiment corresponds to the LED substrate of the above solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2580 is provided on the transparent center frame 2511A attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5C. This decorative body 2580 consists of a rear decorative part 2582 that partially protrudes further back than the rear end of the center frame 2511A, and a front decorative part 2581 that is provided in front of the rear decorative part 2582. As a result, the transparent center frame 2511A is made less conspicuous, making the decorative body 2580 stand out relatively, and the front decorative part 2581 and the rear decorative part 2582 of the decorative body 2580 create a decorative effect with depth that can be shown to the player. In this case, the rear decorative section 2582 and the front decorative section 2581 are decorated in a way that coordinates with each other, and are arranged so that parts of each overlap when viewed from the front. As a result, when viewed from the front, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative section 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative section 2582 is made indistinguishable, allowing the large decoration of the front decorative section 2581 and the rear decorative section 2582 to be shown to the player in good condition, and the rear decorative section 2582 and the front decorative section 2581 can be used to form a large, deep decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since a decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511A, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's attention and make it difficult for them to get bored, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, the rear decorative portion 2582 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a. This allows players to enjoy playing with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative part 2582 constituting the decorative body 2580 extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, it is possible to decorate the area around the display device 1600 (display screen) or to display a more decorative effect (performance) in cooperation with the decorative body (movable decorative body) of the rear display unit 3300A and the rear performance unit 3400, which are located behind the game panel 1100. This allows for the creation of a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580 makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 from the front. Since the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of appearance due to visible wiring, and thus the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily achieved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the decorative element 2580 (front decorative element 2581) is provided in front of the LED substrate 2586, the decorative element 2580 (decoration) can conceal the LED substrate 2586. This avoids the unsightly appearance caused by the LED substrate 2586 being visible, and makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative element 2580.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display unit 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511A, the symbol display unit 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511A. Compared to the case where the symbol display unit 2518 is attached separately, the effort required to assemble the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[29-8d-6b. Summary B]
(Background of the technical features)
As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a known type of machine that includes a center component, which is attached from the front to an opening in a game panel where a game area is formed through which game balls can flow, and has a decorative body that is decorated with a predetermined ornament (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-074434). In the technology described in this patent document, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center component.

However, in the technology described in the above-mentioned patent document, a flat decorative element is placed near the front end of the center component. Therefore, even if the decorative element has relief-like decorations, it lacks a sense of depth, potentially causing players to quickly tire of it and diminishing their enjoyment.

In response to this, one might consider enhancing the decorative aspect by adding a three-dimensional decorative element to the center component in the front-to-back direction. However, if the rear end of the decorative element protrudes further back than the center component (center frame), this protruding part can easily get in the way during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, potentially increasing manufacturing costs due to poor handling.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following measures is to provide a gaming machine that can improve handling during manufacturing while maintaining its decorative appeal.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
In a gaming machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The RE game board is
A frame-shaped center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the aforementioned gaming panel,
A decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration,
Equipped with,
The decorative element is
A rear decorative portion extending within the frame of the aforementioned center frame and provided in front of the rear end of the center frame,
It is characterized by having a front decorative part that overlaps at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part.

Here, "game panel" can refer to various types of panels, including: "opaque panels such as plywood," "panel boards made of transparent resin," and "panel boards made of transparent resin and frame-shaped panel holders that hold the outer edge of the panel board."

Furthermore, examples of "center frames" include: "a flat flange portion that can abut against the front surface of the game panel, and an inflow restricting portion that extends forward from the flange portion and restricts the flow of game balls flowing down the game area into the opening of the game panel," and "an insertion portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and provided along the inner circumferential surface of the opening, a flat flange portion that extends from the front end of the insertion portion in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can abut against the front surface of the game panel, and an inflow restricting portion that extends forward from the flange portion and restricts the flow of game balls flowing down the game area into the opening of the game panel."

Furthermore, "decorative elements" include items with "decorations consisting of patterns created by printing or painting," "decorations with three-dimensional forms," and "decorations with a metallic luster, such as plating."

Furthermore, examples of "decorative elements" include: "those that are illuminated by the light emitted by LEDs mounted on an LED board," "those that have opaque sections to make the wiring of electronic components (e.g., LED boards, relay boards, sphere sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (special pattern displays), solenoids, etc.) located at the rear difficult to see from the front," and "those that have electronic components (e.g., LED boards, relay boards, sphere sensors, magnetic sensors, displays (special pattern displays), solenoids, etc.) that protrude further rearward than the rear end of the center frame."

Furthermore, regarding the relationship between the rear and front decorative parts that constitute the decorative body, examples include: "the rear decorative part having decorations that coordinate with the decorations of the front decorative part," "the rear decorative part having the same decorations as the front decorative part in a way that coordinates with the decorations of the front decorative part," "the rear decorative part having decorations different from those of the front decorative part," "the front decorative part having a transparent section that allows the rear decorative part to be visible," and "the front decorative part having a transparent section that allows the rear decorative part to be visible, and multiple dot sections in the transparent section that have decorations that form part of the front decorative part."

According to the configuration of Means 1, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area is formed through which game balls can flow, the game board comprises a frame-shaped center frame attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel, and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having predetermined decorations. The decorative body extends within the frame of the center frame and has a rear decorative portion provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative portion. (See the section "29-8d-5. Details of the Center Mechanism" and the descriptions in Figures 323 to 326, etc., in the section "Modes for Carrying Out the Invention.")

This design provides a decorative element on the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board. The decorative element consists of a rear decorative section positioned in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative section overlapping at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative section. This allows the player to see a decorative element with depth, created by the overlapping front and rear decorative sections. Because the rear and front decorative sections overlap, the boundary between them is less noticeable when viewed from the front. This allows the player to see a large decorative element created by the front and rear decorative sections, resulting in a large, deep, and highly effective decorative element. Therefore, by providing a highly effective decorative element on the center frame, it is possible to strongly attract the player's attention, preventing boredom and thus providing a game machine that can suppress a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, by positioning the rear decorative section in front of the rear end of the center frame, and by preventing any parts from protruding backward from the center frame, there are no parts that would get in the way during the manufacturing of the gaming machine. This improves handling during manufacturing, enhancing work efficiency and thus suppressing increases in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench with the rear end facing downward, the center frame will not wobble. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly or transportation, since no part of the decorative section protrudes backward from the rear end of the center frame, there is no risk of the protruding part hitting and damaging other components. Therefore, it is not necessary to work with extreme caution, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, because the decorative rear section, which constitutes the decorative element, extends within the frame of the center frame, it does not narrow the game area on the front of the game panel or obscure the view of the game balls flowing through the game area. This allows players to enjoy the game with the game balls in a good condition within the game area.

Furthermore, because the rear decorative section, which constitutes the decorative element, extends within the frame of the center frame, when a performance display device, movable decorative element, or other decorative element is provided behind the game panel, the rear decorative section can decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or work in conjunction with the decorative element (movable decorative element) to create a more effective decorative effect (performance), thereby providing a highly appealing game machine that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, it is desirable to apply decorations to the rear decorative section that coordinate with the decorations of the front decorative section. This allows the decorations of the rear and front decorative sections to present a single, large decorative element to the player, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the ornament.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the center frame transparent. This makes the center frame less visible and less conspicuous to the player, allowing the decorative elements (front and rear decorative parts) to stand out more, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative elements.

Furthermore, the decorative element may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of electronic components mounted on the center frame difficult to see from the front. This allows the wiring to be hidden by the opaque portion, preventing the wiring from being visible and thus preventing a deterioration in appearance, thus allowing the decorative effect of the decorative element to be more easily achieved.

Furthermore, the rear decorative section is adorned with the same decorative decoration as the portion of the front decorative section that overlaps with the front decorative section in a front view. The front decorative section may also have a transparent portion in front of the ball passage through which game balls flow, located at least in a portion between the front and rear decorative sections of the front decorative section, allowing the rear decorative section and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front. This allows the rear decorative section to be visible through the transparent portion in front of the ball passage when no game balls are flowing through the ball passage between the front and rear decorative sections. In this case, since the rear decorative section has the same decoration as the front decorative section, the rear decorative section complements the transparent portion of the front decorative section, allowing the player to see the original decoration as if the front decorative section did not have a transparent portion, thus ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body is reliably achieved. On the other hand, when the game balls are circulating through the ball passage between the front and rear decorative sections, the game balls are visible through the transparent section of the front decorative section. Therefore, even a temporary loss of sight of the game balls can prevent feelings of distrust or anxiety from being caused to the player, thus allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, as described above, when a transparent section is provided in the front part of the front decoration section in front of the ball passage, and the same rear decoration is applied to the rear decoration section behind the transparent section, the front decoration section may have multiple dot sections, which are smaller than the game balls and form part of the front decoration, and are provided in the transparent section. This allows the player to see the game balls in the ball passage while preventing the decoration from looking unsightly, thus fully demonstrating the decorative effect of the decoration.

Furthermore, the decorative element may be placed in front of the LED board on which the LEDs are mounted. This allows the decorative element to conceal the LED board, thus avoiding the unsightly appearance caused by the visible LED board and allowing the decorative element to more effectively enhance its decorative effect.

Furthermore, a display unit capable of showing the results of the special symbol draw, which is determined by the initial ball entry of game balls within the game area, may be attached to the center frame. This allows the display unit for showing the special symbols to be attached to the center frame, enabling it to be mounted to the game panel together with the center frame. Compared to cases where the display unit is mounted separately, this reduces the effort required for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The rear decorative section is adorned with decorations that coordinate with the decorations of the front decorative section."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "harmonious decorations" include examples such as: "decorations where the decorations of the front and back parts form a single decoration (pattern)," "decorations with patterns (figures) where the decorations of the front and back parts are continuous with each other," and "decorations where the decorations of the front or back parts enhance (emphasize) the decorations of the back or front parts."

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear decorative section is fitted with decorations that coordinate with the decorations of the front decorative section. (See the description of decorative body 2570 and decorative body 2570A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design allows the rear decoration to be coordinated with the front decoration, creating a single, large decorative element that the player can see, thus enhancing the decorative effect of the ornament.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The aforementioned center frame is made of transparent material."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is formed transparently. In other words, the center frame is formed from a transparent material. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This makes the center frame less visible and less conspicuous to the player because it is transparent, allowing the decorative elements (front and rear decorative parts) to stand out more and enhancing their decorative effect.

Furthermore, because the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is also transparent and decorative elements or display devices are installed behind the game panel, the center frame becomes less conspicuous. This makes the decorative elements and display images visible through the transparent game panel more noticeable, thus providing a game machine that can entertain players more.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The aforementioned decorative body is,
The center frame has an opaque section that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to it from the front.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "electronic components" include "LED boards," "relay boards," "ball sensors for detecting game balls," "magnetic sensors," "display units for showing special patterns," "solenoids for opening and closing variable prize slots," and "solenoids or drive motors for moving movable decorative elements," etc.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic components attached to the center frame from the front. (See the description of decorative body 2570 and decorative body 2570A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front due to the opaque portion of the decorative element. Because the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, it prevents the appearance from deteriorating due to visible wiring, and allows the decorative effect of the element to be more easily achieved.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"The rear decorative section is fitted with the same decorative trim as the portion of the front decorative section that overlaps with the front decorative section in a front view."
The front decorative section has a transparent section in the front of the ball passage through which game balls flow, which is provided in at least a portion of the front decorative section and the rear decorative section, allowing the rear decorative section and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "transparent areas" can include "colorless and transparent areas," "colored and transparent areas," and "through-hole areas," among others.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear decorative section is fitted with the same decorative trim as the portion of the front decorative section that overlaps with the front decorative section in a front view. The front decorative section has a transparent portion in the front of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, located at least in a portion between the front and rear decorative sections of the front decorative section, allowing the rear decorative section and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front. (See the description regarding decorative body 2570 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows the player to see the rear decoration of the rear decoration through the transparent section located in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration when no game balls are flowing through it. Since the rear decoration of the rear decoration is the same as the front decoration of the front decoration, the rear decoration of the rear decoration compensates for the transparent section in the front decoration of the front decoration, allowing the player to see the original decoration as if there were no transparent section in the front decoration of the front decoration, thus ensuring that the decorative effect of the decoration is fully realized.

On the other hand, when the game balls are circulating through the ball passage between the front and rear decorative sections, the game balls are visible through the transparent section of the front decorative section. Therefore, even a temporary loss of sight of the game balls can prevent causing distrust or anxiety among players, thus allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Means 6: In the configuration of means 5,
"The aforementioned front decorative part is,
The transparent portion has multiple dots that are smaller than the game balls and are decorated with ornaments that form part of the front decoration."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 6, the front decorative part has multiple dots provided in the transparent section, which are smaller than the game balls and form part of the front decorative part. (See the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows the decoration of the rear decorative element to be fully realized even if the decoration of the rear decorative element, visible through the transparent portion of the front decorative element, is obscured by the game balls circulating in the ball passage between the front and rear decorative elements. This ensures that the player can still see the game balls in the ball passage while the decorative element remains visually appealing, thus fully realizing its decorative effect.

Means 7: In a gaming machine,
In a gaming machine equipped with a game board having a game panel that forms a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The RE game board is
A transparent, frame-shaped center frame is attached from the front to an opening formed in the aforementioned gaming panel,
A decorative body is attached to the center frame and has a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front,
Equipped with,
The decorative element is
A rear decorative portion extending within the frame of the aforementioned center frame and provided in front of the rear end of the center frame,
It has a front decorative portion that is provided so as to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative portion,
The rear decorative portion is fitted with the same decorative trim as the front decorative portion of the front decorative portion, in coordination with the front decorative portion, and in a front view, the portion of the front decorative portion that overlaps with the front decorative portion of the front decorative portion.
The front decorative portion includes, at least a portion of the front decorative portion between the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, a transparent portion in front of the ball passage through which game balls flow, which allows the rear decorative portion and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front, and a plurality of dot portions provided in the transparent portion, which are decorated to be smaller than the game balls and constitute a part of the front decorative portion.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area is formed through which game balls can flow, the game board comprises a frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to an opening formed in the game panel, and a decorative body that is attached to the center frame and has predetermined decorations, and has an opaque portion that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame from the front, the decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and at least one in the rear decorative portion The rear decorative section has a front decorative section that overlaps the front of the rear decorative section, and the rear decorative section is decorated in coordination with the front decorative section, and in a front view, it is decorated in the same way as the part of the front decorative section that overlaps the front decorative section of the front decorative section. The front decorative section has a transparent section in the front of the ball passage through which the game balls flow, provided in at least a portion between the front decorative section and the rear decorative section, which allows the rear decorative section and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front, and a plurality of dot sections provided in the transparent section, which are decorated to be smaller than the game balls and constitute part of the front decorative section.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is fitted with a decorative body consisting of a rear decorative part positioned in front of the rear end of the center frame and a front decorative part positioned to overlap at least a portion of the front of the rear decorative part. Because the center frame is transparent, it is less conspicuous, making the decorative body stand out relatively, and the front and rear decorative parts of the decorative body allow the player to see a decorative body with depth. In this case, the rear and front decorative parts are decorated in a harmonious manner, and parts of each overlap when viewed from the front, making it difficult to distinguish the boundary between the decorative parts of the front and rear decorative parts when viewed from the front. This allows the player to see the large decorative body formed by the front and rear decorative parts in good condition, and the rear and front decorative parts can be used to form a decorative body with a large, deep, and highly decorative effect. Therefore, since a highly decorative element can be provided on the center frame, this element can strongly attract the player's attention, making it less likely for them to get bored, and thus providing a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the rear decoration section is adorned with the same decoration as the portion of the front decoration section that overlaps with the front decoration section in a front view. The front decoration section has a transparent section in front of the ball passage through which game balls flow, located at least in a portion between the front and rear decoration sections. This transparent section allows the rear decoration and the game balls flowing through the ball passage to be visible from the front, and includes multiple dot sections, smaller than the game balls, that form part of the front decoration. Therefore, when no game balls are flowing through the ball passage between the front and rear decoration sections, the rear decoration section can be viewed through the transparent section in front of the ball passage in the front decoration section. In this case, since the rear decoration section is the same as the front decoration section, the rear decoration section complements the transparent section in the front decoration section, allowing the player to see the original decoration as if there were no transparent section in the front decoration section, thus ensuring the decorative effect of the decoration is fully realized.

On the other hand, when game balls are circulating in the ball passage between the front and rear decorative sections, the game balls are visible through the transparent section of the front decorative section. Therefore, even if the game balls are temporarily hidden, this prevents causing distrust or anxiety among players, allowing them to enjoy the game and preventing a decline in interest. In this case, because multiple dots constituting part of the front decorative section are provided in the transparent section, even if the decoration of the rear decorative section, visible through the transparent section of the front decorative section, is obscured by the game balls circulating in the ball passage between the front and rear decorative sections, the multiple dots in the transparent section in front of the game balls remain visible. This allows players to see the game balls in the ball passage while preventing the decorative elements from looking unsightly, thus allowing the decorative elements to fully exert their decorative effect.

Furthermore, by positioning the rear decorative section in front of the rear end of the center frame, and by preventing any parts from protruding backward from the center frame, there are no parts that would get in the way during the manufacturing of the gaming machine. This improves handling during manufacturing, enhancing work efficiency and thus suppressing increases in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench with the rear end facing downward, the center frame will not wobble. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly or transportation, since no part of the decorative section protrudes backward from the rear end of the center frame, there is no risk of the protruding part hitting and damaging other components. Therefore, it is not necessary to work with extreme caution, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, because the decorative rear section, which constitutes the decorative element, extends within the frame of the center frame, it does not narrow the game area on the front of the game panel or obscure the view of the game balls flowing through the game area. This allows players to enjoy the game with the game balls in a good condition.

Furthermore, because the rear decorative section constituting the decorative element extends within the frame of the center frame, when a performance display device, movable decorative element, or other decorative element is provided behind the game panel, the rear decorative element can be used to decorate the area around the performance display device (display screen) or to work in conjunction with the decorative element (movable decorative element) to create a more effective decorative effect (performance), thereby providing a highly appealing game machine that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, the opaque portion of the decorative element makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components from the front. Because the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, the aesthetic deterioration caused by visible wiring can be prevented, and the decorative effect of the element can be more easily achieved.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that maintains its decorative appeal while improving handling during manufacturing.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100, consisting of a panel board 1110 and a panel holder 1120 in the game board 5, corresponds to the game panel of the above solution; the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 in this embodiment corresponds to the opening of the game panel of the above solution; the center frame 2511A of the center mechanism 2500 in this embodiment corresponds to the center frame of the above solution; the ball passage 2517 in this embodiment corresponds to the ball passage of the above solution; the decorative body 2570 and decorative body 2570A in this embodiment correspond to the decorative body of the above solution; the front decorative part 2572 in this embodiment corresponds to the front decorative part of the above solution; the transparent part 2572a in this embodiment corresponds to the transparent part of the above solution; the dot part 2572b in this embodiment corresponds to the dot part of the above solution; and the rear decorative part 2573 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decorative part of the above solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
According to this embodiment, a decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is provided on the transparent center frame 2511A attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5C. This decorative body 2570 consists of a rear decorative part 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A and a front decorative part 2572 provided so as to overlap with at least a part of the front of the rear decorative part 2573. As a result, the transparent center frame 2511A is made less conspicuous, making the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) stand out relatively, and the front decorative part 2572 and the rear decorative part 2573 of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) provide the player with a decorative effect that gives depth. In this case, the rear decorative section 2573 and the front decorative section 2572 are decorated in a way that coordinates with each other, and are arranged so that parts of each overlap when viewed from the front. As a result, when viewed from the front, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative section 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative section 2573 is made indistinguishable, allowing the large decoration of the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573 to be shown to the player in good condition, and the rear decorative section 2573 and the front decorative section 2572 can be used to form a large, deep decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since a decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511A, the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) can strongly attract the player's attention and make it difficult for them to get bored, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that can suppress a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the decorative body 2570, the rear decorative portion 2573 is decorated with the same decorative (rear decoration) as the portion of the front decorative portion 2572 that overlaps in front of the decorative portion (front decoration) when viewed from the front, and the front decorative portion 2572 is provided with a transparent portion 2 in front of the ball passage 2517 through which the game ball B flows, which is provided in at least a part of the decoration between the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573, allowing the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 and the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 to be visible from the front. The decoration has 572a and multiple dot sections 2572b provided on the transparent section 2572a, which are smaller in size than the game ball B and form part of the decoration of the front decoration section 2572. Therefore, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration section 2572 and the rear decoration section 2573, the decoration of the rear decoration section 2573 can be seen through the transparent section 2572a provided in the front part of the decoration of the front decoration section 2572. In this case, since the decoration of the rear decoration section 2573 is the same as the decoration of the front decoration section 2572, the decoration of the rear decoration section 2573 complements the transparent section 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration section 2572, allowing the player to see the original decoration of the front decoration section 2572 as if there were no transparent section 2572a, thus ensuring that the decorative effect of the decoration body 2570 is reliably achieved.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is circulating in the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative section 2572 and the rear decorative section 2573, the game ball B is visible through the transparent section 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative section 2572. Therefore, it is possible to avoid causing distrust or anxiety to the player by temporarily making the game ball B invisible, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the game with the game ball B and preventing a decline in enjoyment. In this case, since the transparent portion 2572a is provided with multiple dot portions 2572b that constitute part of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, even if the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573, which is visible through the transparent portion 2572a of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, is obscured by the game ball B circulating in the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573, the decoration of the multiple dot portions 2572b provided on the transparent portion 2572a in front of the game ball B remains visible. This allows the player to see the game ball B in the ball passage 2517 while avoiding a deterioration in the appearance of the decorative body 2570, thus allowing the decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 to be fully realized.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A), the rear decorative part 2573 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511A. Since there are no parts that protrude rearward from the center frame 2511A and get in the way during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1, handling (manageability) during manufacturing can be improved, and the increase in manufacturing costs can be suppressed by improving work efficiency. Specifically, for example, when the center frame 2511A is placed on a workbench TA or the like with its rear end facing downwards, the center frame 2511A will not wobble. Alternatively, when handling the center frame 2511A during assembly or transportation, since a part of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511A, there is no risk of the protruding part from the center frame 2511A coming into contact with other members and causing damage or breakage. As a result, it is not necessary to work with the utmost care, and work efficiency can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, the rear decorative portion 2573 does not narrow the game area 5a on the front of the game panel 1100 or make it difficult to see the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a. This allows players to enjoy playing with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative part 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) extends within the frame of the center frame 2511A, it is possible to decorate the area around the display screen of the performance display device 1600, the front-rear performance unit 3300A, the rear-rear performance unit 3400, etc., which are located behind the game panel 1100, or to display a more decorative effect (performance) in cooperation with the decorative body (movable decorative body) of the front-rear performance unit 3300A and the rear-rear performance unit 3400, thereby providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the opaque portion of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic components such as LED substrates from the front. Since the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of appearance due to visible wiring, and thus the decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) can be more easily achieved.

[29-8e. Passageway decoration]
The aisle decoration section 2590 provided on the center component 2500, etc., will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 328 to 334, etc. Figure 330(a) is a front view of an attacker unit provided with the aisle decoration section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of the aisle decoration section in the attacker unit of (a). Figure 331 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example of the aisle decoration section. Figures 332(a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shape of the recess in the aisle decoration section, Figures 333(a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shape of the protrusion in the aisle decoration section, and Figures 334(a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing an aisle decoration section equipped with multiple protrusions and recesses of different shapes. Note that the attacker unit 2400 shown in Figure 330 has the same configuration as the first attacker unit 2400 shown in Figure 145, etc., and will be simply referred to as the attacker unit 2400 below.

The passage decoration section 2590 decorates the ball passage 2591, through which game balls B flow, such as the ball passage 2517, using three-dimensional shapes such as protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595 on the back of the protrusions 2594, which are provided on the rear plate section 2592 and front plate section 2593 that constitute the inner wall of the ball passage 2591. Furthermore, the passage decoration section 2590 can reduce (attenuate) the flow speed of the game balls B by using the protrusions 2594 that protrude into the ball passage 2591.

As the passageway decoration section 2590, for example, as shown in Figure 328, it may be provided in the attacker passage section 2517a of the ball passage 2517 (ball passage 2591). First, the attacker passage section 2517a is composed of a flange section 2511b (rear plate section 2592) and a front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593) which is provided opposite the flange section 2511b in front of the flange section 2511b with a gap between them that allows the game ball B to pass through. The aisle decoration section 2590 has a rear plate projection 2594a protruding forward from the flange section 2511b, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a, a front plate projection 2594b protruding rearward from the front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593), and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b.

The rear plate protrusions 2594a of the attacker passage section 2517a are provided in multiple locations, spaced apart along the flow direction of the attacker passage section 2517a. The rear plate protrusions 2594a have a rectangular shape in front view, elongated in the flow direction, with the center of the rectangle's longitudinal axis forming a forward-projecting triangle (triangular roof shape). The height of the rear plate protrusions 2594a from the bottom of the passage is set to include half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 1 1/2 mm). The rear plate recesses 2595a of the attacker passage section 2517a are provided on each rear plate protrusion 2594a and are recessed forward in a triangular shape approximately similar to the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a.

The front plate protrusions 2594b of the attacker passage section 2517a are spaced apart and aligned with the flow direction of the attacker passage section 2517a, with the front-to-back direction alternating with the rear plate protrusions 2594a. The front plate protrusions 2594b, when viewed from the front, are elongated rectangles, longer in the flow direction and shorter vertically than the rear plate protrusions 2594a. The center of the rectangle's longitudinal direction is formed by a triangle (triangular roof shape) projecting backward. The height of the front plate protrusions 2594b from the bottom of the passage is set to include half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 1 1/2 mm). The front plate recesses 2595b of the attacker passage section 2517a are provided on each front plate protrusion 2594b and are recessed backward in a triangular shape approximately similar to the shape of the front plate protrusions 2594b.

As shown in Figure 328(c), the decorative passage portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a has a gap large enough to prevent fingers from entering behind the flange portion 2511b, into which a specific component 2519, such as an LED substrate, is provided. This specific component 2519 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, making the rear plate recess 2595a inaccessible to fingers. This prevents the rear plate recess 2595a from becoming contaminated by workers' fingers touching it during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted in the rear plate recess 2595a. Furthermore, because the specific component 2519 is provided, it is difficult for dirt and dust to enter the rear plate recess 2595a, thus preventing the appearance from deteriorating due to dirt and other contaminants.

The decorative passage portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a is formed of a flange portion 2511b on which a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a are provided, and a front plate 2571 on which a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b are provided, and these portions are made of transparent material. As a result, the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C can be reflected or refracted at each of these portions. This makes it possible to illuminate and decorate the protrusions 2594, such as the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the recesses 2595, such as the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b. Therefore, by illuminating the passage decoration section 2590 of the attacker passage section 2517a, the player's gaze can be directed towards the attacker passage section 2517a. This increases the player's anticipation of winning a prize in the large prize opening 2005 provided in the attacker passage section 2517a, thereby preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the passage decoration section 2590 of the attacker passage section 2517a, the front plate protrusions 2594b and front plate recesses 2595b provided on the front plate 2571 are made elongated. Therefore, the front plate protrusions 2594b and front plate recesses 2595b do not obstruct the visibility of the game balls B flowing behind them.

Furthermore, the passage decoration section 2590 of the attacker passage section 2517a has multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange section 2511b and multiple front plate protrusions 2594b projecting backward from the front plate 2571, arranged in a staggered (alternating) pattern relative to the direction of flow of the game balls B. This causes the game balls B to meander back and forth as they flow, reducing their flow speed. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a large number of game balls B for a longer period of time on the large prize door 2413, which forms part of the bottom surface of the attacker passage section 2517a. In other words, the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b of the attacker passage section 2517a aim to retain a large number of game balls B on the large prize door 2413 by reducing the rolling speed of the game balls B.

The rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b of the attacker passage section 2517a are triangular in shape and protrude less than the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b provided on the door-top passage section 2416 of the attacker unit 2400, which will be described later. As a result, the passage in the attacker passage section 2517a (above the large prize-winning opening door 2413) meanders slightly (smallly) in the front-to-back direction.

Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the attacker passage 2517a at high speed after forcefully hitting the impact point 1006 with a "right-handed shot," the presence of multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b sufficiently slows down the game ball B before it reaches the large prize opening 2005 (large prize opening door 2413), making the game ball B easier to see and allowing players to enjoy its movement. Furthermore, because the speed of the game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 can be slowed, the player can feel excited and thrilled depending on whether or not the large prize opening door 2413 opens at the moment the game ball B is rolling on it, increasing the expectation of winning in the large prize opening 2005 and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, the passageway decoration section 2590 may be provided, for example, in the right edge passageway section 2517b of the ball passageway 2517 (ball passageway 2591), as shown in Figure 329. First, the right edge passageway section 2517b is composed of a flange section 2511b (rear plate section 2592) and a front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593) which is provided opposite the flange section 2511b in front of the flange section 2511b with a gap between them that allows the game balls B to pass through. The aisle decoration section 2590 has a rear plate projection 2594a protruding forward from the flange section 2511b, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a, a front plate projection 2594b protruding rearward from the front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593), and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b.

The rear plate protrusions 2594a of the right edge passage section 2517b are provided in multiple locations, spaced apart, along the arc-shaped flow direction of the right edge passage section 2517b. The rear plate protrusions 2594a, when viewed from the front, are rectangles elongated in the radial direction of the arc, with the center of the shorter side of the rectangle projecting forward in a triangular shape (triangular roof shape). The multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a in the right edge passage section 2517b are provided at approximately equal intervals in the flow direction. The rear plate recesses 2595a of the right edge passage section 2517b are provided on each rear plate protrusion 2594a and are recessed forward in a triangular shape approximately similar to the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a.

The front plate protrusions 2594b of the right edge passage section 2517b are provided in multiple locations, spaced apart along the arc-shaped flow direction of the right edge passage section 2517b, so that their front-to-back orientations are alternating with those of the rear plate protrusions 2594a. The front plate protrusions 2594b, when viewed from the front, are rectangles elongated in the radial direction of the arc, with the center of the shorter side of the rectangle projecting backward into a triangle (triangular roof shape). The multiple front plate protrusions 2594b in the right edge passage section 2517b are provided at approximately equal intervals in the flow direction. The front plate recesses 2595b of the right edge passage section 2517b are provided on each front plate protrusion 2594b and are recessed backward into a triangle approximately similar in shape to the front plate protrusion 2594b.

As shown in Figure 329(c), the passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b has a game panel 1100, which is a specific member 2519, in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b. This game panel 1100 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, making the rear plate recess 2595a inaccessible to fingers. This prevents the rear plate recess 2595a from becoming soiled by the fingers of workers touching it during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted in the rear plate recess 2595a. In addition, because the specific member 2519 is provided, it is difficult for dirt and dust to enter the rear plate recess 2595a, thus preventing the appearance from becoming unsightly due to dirt and dust. Note that while Figure 329(c) shows the specific member 2519 in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b, a gap large enough to prevent a finger from entering may be provided between the flange portion 2511b and the specific member. In other words, a gap is acceptable as long as a finger cannot enter.

In the passageway decorative section 2590 of the right edge passageway section 2517b, the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b are recessed from the rear and front, respectively, and are not open to the circumferential surfaces of the flange section 2511b or the front plate 2571. In other words, the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b of the right edge passageway section 2517b do not extend to the sides of the flange section 2511b or the front plate 2571, and are recessed only from the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b.

The passage decoration section 2590 of the right edge passage section 2517b is formed from a transparent material, with a flange section 2511b having a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a, and a front plate 2571 having a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b. Therefore, it can reflect or refract light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C. This allows for illumination and decoration of protrusions 2594, such as the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b, and recesses 2595, such as the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b. Consequently, by illuminating the passage decoration section 2590 of the attacker passage section 2517a, the player's gaze can be directed towards the right edge passage section 2517b.

Furthermore, the passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b has multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b and multiple front plate protrusions 2594b projecting backward from the front plate 2571, arranged in a staggered (alternating) pattern relative to the direction of flow of the game ball B. This causes the game ball B to meander back and forth as it flows, reducing its flow speed. Therefore, even when the right edge passage portion 2517b is nearly vertical, the flow speed (downstream velocity) of the game ball B does not become too fast, allowing the game ball B to flow downstream to the first nailed passage portion 2517c at an appropriate speed.

Furthermore, in the right-edge passage section 2517b, the multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b can reduce the falling speed of the game ball B. This makes the game ball B flowing through the right-edge passage section 2517b more visible, and prevents damage to the crank-shaped portion at the lower end of the right-edge passage section 2517b due to impact from the game ball B. In other words, unlike the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b of the attacker passage section 2517a, the purpose of the right-edge passage section 2517b is to reduce the falling speed of the game ball B, thereby preventing damage to other components and making the game ball B visible to the player.

Furthermore, the passageway decoration section 2590 may be provided, for example, in the exit passageway section 2517g of the spherical passageway 2517 (spherical passageway 2591). First, in the area of the exit passageway section 2517g where the passageway decoration section 2590 is provided, the front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593) is not provided, and only the flange section 2511b (rear plate section 2592) is provided (see Figure 304, etc.). Although not shown in the illustration, the front of the passageway decoration section 2590 in the exit passageway section 2517g is provided with the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 as the front plate section 2593.

The passage decoration section 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g is located below the ordinary prize entry opening 2011, as shown in an enlarged view in Figure 320. A larger V-shaped rear plate protrusion 2594a surrounds the outside of a smaller V-shaped rear plate protrusion 2594a. In each rear plate protrusion 2594a, the V-shaped bent portion protrudes the furthest forward, and the forward protrusion decreases towards both ends of the V. In other words, each rear plate protrusion 2594a is inclined so that its front surface protrudes further forward as it slopes downwards. Furthermore, the larger rear plate protrusion 2594a protrudes more forward than the smaller rear plate protrusion 2594a.

Although not shown in the diagram, a recessed portion 2595a is also provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate in the decorative portion 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g. Furthermore, in the decorative portion 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g, a game panel 1100, designated as a specific component 2519, abuts against the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b. This game panel 1100 covers the rear of the recessed portion 2595a, making it inaccessible to fingers. This prevents the recessed portion 2595a from becoming contaminated by a worker's fingers during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted in the recessed portion 2595a. Additionally, the presence of the specific component 2519 makes it difficult for dirt and dust to enter the recessed portion 2595a, thus preventing it from becoming unsightly due to dirt.

The decorative passage section 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g has a flange section 2511b on which a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided, which is made of a transparent material. Therefore, it can reflect or refract light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED substrate provided in the game board 5C. This allows for illumination of protrusions 2594, such as the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and recesses 2595, such as the rear plate recess 2595a, to create a luminous decorative effect. Consequently, by illuminating the decorative passage section 2590 located near the regular prize entry opening 2011 in the exit passage section 2517g, the player's gaze can be directed towards the regular prize entry opening 2011.

Furthermore, in the passage decoration section 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g, the two rear plate protrusions 2594a, one large and one small, are each formed in a V-shape. This creates an arrow-like appearance, which can draw the player's attention to the nearby regular prize entry point 2011, thereby increasing their anticipation of winning a prize.

Furthermore, the passage decoration section 2590 of the exit passage section 2517g is provided with large and small rear plate protrusions 2594a with different protrusion amounts. Therefore, the gap between the front glass plate 162 and the larger rear plate protrusion 2594a becomes smaller as you move towards it. This allows the game ball B to be sufficiently slowed down even when flowing down at high speed, reducing the impact on the lower right rail 1004.

Furthermore, the aisle decoration section 2590 may, for example, be provided in the guide aisle group 2520 to the left of the center feature 2500, although detailed illustrations are omitted. First, the guide aisle group 2520 consists of a flange section 2511b (rear plate section 2592) and a front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593) positioned opposite the flange section 2511b, with a gap sufficient for the game balls B to pass through. The aisle decoration section 2590 has a rear plate projection 2594a protruding forward from the flange section 2511b and a front plate projection 2594b protruding backward from the front plate 2571 (front plate section 2593).

The rear panel protrusions 2594a of the guide passage group 2520 are provided in multiple locations at intervals along the direction of movement of the game balls B (see Figure 320). The rear panel protrusions 2594a have a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with the center of the rectangle's longitudinal direction forming a triangle (a triangular roof shape) that protrudes forward.

The front panel protrusions 2594b of the guide passage group 2520 are arranged in multiple sections, spaced apart to align with the direction of movement of the game balls B, so that their front-to-back orientations are alternating with the rear panel protrusions 2594a. The front panel protrusions 2594b have a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, elongated in the direction of movement, with the center of the rectangle's longitudinal axis projecting backward to form a triangle (a triangular roof shape).

The aisle decoration section 2590 of the guide aisle group 2520 has a flange section 2511b on which a rear plate projection 2594a is provided, and a front plate 2571 on which a front plate projection 2594b is provided. These sections are formed from transparent materials, allowing them to reflect or refract light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED substrate of the game board 5C. This enables the projections 2594, such as the rear plate projection 2594a and the front plate projection 2594b, to be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, by illuminating the aisle decoration section 2590 of the guide aisle group 2520, the player's gaze can be directed towards the guide aisle group 2520.

Furthermore, the passage decoration section 2590 of the guide passage group 2520 has multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b and multiple front plate protrusions 2594b projecting backward from the front plate 2571, arranged in a staggered (alternating) pattern relative to the direction of flow of the game balls B. This causes the game balls B to meander back and forth as they flow, reducing their flow speed. Therefore, even when the guide passage group 2520 is nearly vertical, the flow speed (downstream velocity) of the game balls B does not become excessively fast, allowing them to flow at an appropriate speed into the downstream area where the entrance to the warp passage 2512A is located.

Furthermore, in the passageway decoration section 2590 of the guide passageway group 2520, similar to the above, a recess 2595a on the rear panel and a recess 2595b on the front panel may be provided on the back side of the rear panel projection 2594a and the front panel projection 2594b. This allows decorative light to be reflected even at the rear panel recess 2595a and the front panel recess 2595b, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 330, the passageway decoration section 2590 may be provided in the upper door passageway section 2416 of the large prize opening 2005 (large prize opening door 2413) in the attacker unit 2400. This attacker unit 2400 is provided in the game board 5C of the first embodiment, as shown in Figure 129, etc. First, the door passageway section 2416 of the attacker unit 2400 is composed of a base plate 2441 (rear plate section 2592) and a front plate 2442 (front plate section 2593) which is provided opposite the base plate 2441 at a distance that allows game balls B to flow through. The aisle decoration section 2590 has a rear plate projection 2594a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2441, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a, a front plate projection 2594b that protrudes rearward from the front plate 2442 (front plate section 2593), and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b.

The rear plate projections 2594a of the door-top passage section 2416 are provided in multiple locations, spaced apart along the flow direction of the door-top passage section 2416. In front view, the rear plate projections 2594a have a rectangular shape elongated in the flow direction. In plan view, the center of the rectangle's longitudinal direction protrudes forward, with the tip forming a trapezoidal shape parallel to the base plate 2441. The height of the rear plate projections 2594a from the bottom of the passage is set to include half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 1 1/2 mm). The rear plate recesses 2595a of the door-top passage section 2416 are provided on each rear plate projection 2594a and are recessed forward in a trapezoidal shape approximately similar to the shape of the rear plate projection 2594a.

The front panel projections 2594b of the door-top passage section 2416 are spaced apart and aligned along the flow direction of the door-top passage section 2416, with their front-to-back orientation alternating with the rear panel projections 2594a. The front panel projections 2594b have a rectangular shape in front view, elongated in the flow direction. In plan view, the center of the rectangle's longitudinal axis protrudes rearward, with the tip forming a trapezoidal shape parallel to the front panel 2442. The height of the front panel projections 2594b from the bottom of the passage is set to include half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 1 1/2 mm). The front panel recesses 2595b of the door-top passage section 2416 are provided on each front panel projection 2594b and are recessed towards the rearward in a trapezoidal shape approximately similar to the shape of the front panel projection 2594b.

As shown in Figure 330(b), the passageway decoration section 2590 of the door-top passageway section 2416 has a gap large enough to prevent fingers from entering behind the base plate 2441, and a specific component 2519, consisting of an attacker decoration substrate 2443 and a substrate cover 2444, is provided therein. This specific component 2519 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, making the rear plate recess 2595a inaccessible to fingers. This prevents the rear plate recess 2595a from becoming soiled by a worker's fingers touching it during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that the decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted in the rear plate recess 2595a. Furthermore, because the specific component 2519 is provided, it is difficult for dirt and dust to enter the rear plate recess 2595a, thus preventing the appearance from becoming unsightly due to dirt and dust.

Furthermore, the passageway decoration section 2590 of the door-top passageway section 2416 has a decorative member 2445 attached to the front surface of the front panel 2442. This decorative member 2445 covers the front of the front panel recess 2595b, making it inaccessible to the fingers. This prevents the front panel recess 2595b from becoming contaminated by the worker's fingers touching it during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that the decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted at the front panel recess 2595b. In addition, because the decorative member 2445 is provided, it is difficult for dirt and dust to enter the front panel recess 2595b, thus preventing the appearance from becoming unsightly due to dirt and debris.

The passage decoration section 2590 of the passage above the door 2416 is formed of a base plate 2441 on which a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a are provided, and a front plate 2442 on which a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b are provided, both of which are made of transparent material. Therefore, the light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED board provided on the game board 5C can be reflected or refracted at each of these points. As a result, the protrusions 2594, such as the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the recesses 2595, such as the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, can be illuminated and decorated with light. Therefore, by illuminating the passageway decoration section 2590 of the passageway section 2416 above the door, the player's gaze can be directed towards the passageway section 2416 above the door. This increases the player's anticipation of winning a prize in the large prize slot 2005 located in the passageway section 2416 above the door, thereby preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, the passage decoration section 2590 of the upper passage section 2416 has multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the base plate 2441 and multiple front plate protrusions 2594b projecting backward from the front plate 2442, arranged in a staggered (alternating) pattern relative to the direction of flow of the game balls B. This causes the game balls B to meander back and forth as they flow, reducing their flow speed. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a large number of game balls B for a longer period of time on the large prize door 2413, which forms part of the bottom surface of the upper passage section 2416. In other words, the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b of the upper passage section 2416 aim to retain a large number of game balls B on the large prize door 2413 by reducing the rolling speed of the game balls B.

In the door-top passage section 2416, the base plate 2441, which serves as the rear plate section 2592, is provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a. In other words, in the door-top passage section 2416, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a are provided on a different component (base plate 2441) from the flange section 2511b of the center mechanism 2500. Furthermore, in the door-top passage section 2416, the portion of the base plate 2441 corresponding to the large prize opening door 2413 is recessed further back than the general surface of the base plate 2441 (the front surface of the game panel 1100). The rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b of the door-top passage section 2416 each have a trapezoidal shape, and protrude significantly more than the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b provided on the attacker passage section 2517a of the center mechanism 2500 described above. As a result, the passage in the door-top passage section 2416 (above the large prize opening door 2413) meanders considerably in the front-to-back direction.

Therefore, since the speed of the game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 can be slowed, the player can experience excitement and anticipation depending on whether or not the large prize opening door 2413 opens at the moment the game ball B is rolling on it. This increases the expectation of the ball entering the large prize opening 2005 and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

In the above example, a specific component 2519, such as an attacker decorative substrate 2443, is provided behind the rear plate portion 2592, such as the base plate 2441, and a decorative component 2445, such as a decorative sticker, is provided in front of the front plate portion 2593, such as the front plate 2442. However, the system is not limited to this configuration, and a configuration like that shown in Figure 331 is also acceptable.

The example shown in Figure 331 features a specific member 2519 at the rear of the rear plate portion 2592, consisting of a sheet-like rear decorative portion 2573 and an LED substrate 2519a. Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 331, the decorative member 2445 at the front of the front plate portion 2593 is a sheet-like front decorative portion 2572. Both the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are translucent. Details of the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 will be described later with reference to Figure 324. The example shown in Figure 331 can achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, while the above examples show rectangular shapes in plan view of the protrusions 2594 (such as the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b) and recesses 2595 (such as the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b), the design is not limited to this. Various frontal shapes such as circular, oval, rhombus, hexagonal, octagonal, and diamond-shaped are also acceptable.

Furthermore, when multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b are provided, their arrangement should be as follows to allow the game ball B to flow through the passage: The distance from the tip of the rear plate protrusion 2594a to the rear surface of the opposing front plate portion 2593, the distance from the tip of the front plate protrusion 2594b to the front surface of the opposing rear plate portion 2592, and the distance between the closest rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b (for example, if the shapes of the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b are triangular or trapezoidal, the distance between the respective inclined surfaces that are positioned opposite each other) should be greater than the diameter D of the game ball B. For example, each of the above distances should be 12 mm. This prevents problems that would prevent the game ball B from flowing. Also, the closer the above distances are to the diameter D of the game ball B, the greater the deceleration effect.

As described above, according to the passage decoration section 2590 of this embodiment, the flange section 2511b (rear plate section 2592) forming the flow region of the center mechanism 2500 can reflect decorative light through the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, which affects the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, the flow region (ball passage 2591) through which the game balls B flow can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the flange section 2511b of the center mechanism 2500 does not have ostentatious decorations like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the flange section 2511b is illuminated and decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, because a recessed portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protruding portion 2594a and the recessed portion 2595a, compared to a case where only a protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided in the flow region (ball passage 2591) where the game ball B flows, the flow speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the rear plate protrusion 2594a in this flow region. This slower flow speed makes the movement of the game ball B easier to see. At this time, a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. The rear plate recess 2595a is designed to reflect decorative light, creating an luminous decoration. This luminous decoration allows the game ball B flowing through the flow region to appear as a silhouette, making its movement even easier to see. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B flowing through the flow region can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570, which is provided facing the flange portion 2511b that forms the flow region (ball passage 2591) in the center mechanism 2500, can reflect decorative light through the front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b that affects the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, the flow region through which the game balls B flow can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the front plate 2571 of the center mechanism 2500 does not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the front plate 2571 illuminates and is decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a completely different decoration from previous pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, because a recessed portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594b of the front panel, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protruding portion 2594b and the recessed portion 2595b, compared to a case where only a protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the front plate protrusion 2594b is provided in the flow region where the game ball B flows, the flow speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the front plate protrusion 2594b in this flow region, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. At this time, a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b, and decorative light is reflected in the front plate recess 2595b to create an luminous decoration. In addition, since the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are provided on the front plate 2571 in front of the flow region (ball passage 2591), the front of the game ball B flowing down the flow region is illuminated, making the game ball B appear to sparkle.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the center mechanism 2500 is provided with a rear plate projection 2594a on the flange portion 2511b and a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a, and a front plate projection 2594b on the front plate 2571 in front of the flange portion 2511b and a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b. As a result, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the flange portion 2511b and the reflected light from the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate 2571 can illuminate and decorate the back and front of the flow region (ball passage 2591) through which the game balls B flow. Therefore, since the flange portion 2511b of the center component 2500 and the front plate 2571 are illuminated, it is possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thereby providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the players' attention.

Furthermore, as described above, since the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center piece 2500 are provided with rear plate protrusions 2594a and rear plate recesses 2595a, and front plate protrusions 2594b and front plate recesses 2595b, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the rear plate protrusions 2594a and rear plate recesses 2595a on the flange portion 2511b, as well as the shapes of the front plate protrusions 2594b and front plate recesses 2595b on the front plate 2571, are visible. These shapes act as decoration, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, as described above, the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center mechanism 2500 have rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of flow of the game ball B. Therefore, the front plate protrusion 2594b and the rear plate protrusion 2594a allow the game ball B to swing back and forth. Compared to the case where a protrusion is provided on only one side, the flow speed of the game ball B can be further reduced, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. In this design, a recessed portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate, and a recessed portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594b of the front plate. These recessed portions reflect decorative light, creating an luminous decoration. The luminous decoration of the recessed portion 2595a makes the game ball B appear as a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the recessed portion 2595b makes it appear to sparkle. This allows players to enjoy the luminous decoration along with the movement of the game ball B, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the center component 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to cases where the recesses are not provided, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, making the center component 2500 lighter and reducing the cost associated with the center component 2500. In addition, because the center component 2500 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that was required in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, since the rear plate recess 2595a is covered by a specific member 2519 so that it cannot be touched by fingers, the worker's fingers do not touch the rear plate recess 2595a during manufacturing. Therefore, it is not necessary to work carefully to prevent the rear plate recess 2595a from getting dirty, making the work easier and suppressing an increase in costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 that form the flow region (door-upper passage portion 2416) of the attacker unit 2400, which is different from the center mechanism 2500, decorative light can be reflected by the recess 2595 provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594 that affects the flow speed of the game ball B. Therefore, the flow region through which the game ball B flows can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 do not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 are illuminated and decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, since the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 have recesses 2595 on the back side of the protrusions 2594, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protrusions 2594 and the recesses 2595, compared to a case where only protrusions are provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since a protrusion 2594 is provided on the upper door passage 2416 above the large prize opening door 2413 of the attacker unit 2400, the protrusion 2594 can reduce the flow speed of the game ball B at the large prize opening door 2413. This slows down the flow speed of the game ball B, making its movement easier to see, and when the large prize opening door 2413 opens at that timing, it becomes easier to get the game ball into the large prize opening 2005. In this configuration, a recess 2595 is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. The recess 2595 reflects decorative light, creating a luminous decoration. This luminous decoration allows the game ball B, rolling down (rolling) over the large prize opening door 2413, to appear as a silhouette while also sparkling. This enhances the anticipation of the game ball B entering the large prize opening 2005, while also providing enjoyment through the luminous decoration, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2441 has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2442 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Compared to a case where the recesses are not provided, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, making the attacker unit 2400 lighter and reducing the cost associated with the attacker unit 2400. In addition, because the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that was required in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, since the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b are covered by the attacker decorative substrate 2443 and decorative member 2445, making them inaccessible to the touch, the worker's fingers will not touch the rear plate recess 2595a or front plate recess 2595b during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to prevent contamination of the rear plate recess 2595a is unnecessary, simplifying the process and thus suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, because a gap is provided between the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker decorative substrate 2443, the attacker decorative substrate 2443 is separated from the base plate 2441, making it difficult to see electronic components such as LEDs and resistors mounted on the attacker decorative substrate 2443. This makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595, and the gap between the base plate 2441 and the attacker decorative substrate 2443 allows heat from the multiple LEDs to dissipate more easily.

Furthermore, because recesses 2595 are provided on the back side of the protrusions 2594 in the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center mechanism 2500, and in the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400, the weight of the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400 can be reduced compared to cases where the recesses 2595 are not provided. This allows for weight reduction and a reduction in the cost associated with the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400. Additionally, because the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the center mechanism 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 are shown to be equipped with a passage decoration section 2590 consisting of a protrusion 2594 that affects the flow of the game ball B and a recess 2595 provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. However, the invention is not limited to this, and the passage decoration section 2590 may also be provided in the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, etc.

Furthermore, while the example shown includes multiple protrusions 2594 (rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b) all equipped with recesses 2595 (rear plate recesses 2595a and front plate recesses 2595b), the design is not limited to this. Multiple protrusions 2594 may also be mixed with specific protrusions 2596 that do not have recesses 2595 on their backs. This allows for different luminous decoration patterns between the protrusions 2594 and specific protrusions 2596, as the backs of the specific protrusions 2596 cannot reflect decorative light like the recesses 2595. In this case, the visible shape from the front will differ between the protrusions 2594 with recesses 2595 and the specific protrusions 2596 without recesses 2595. Therefore, compared to the case where multiple protrusions 2594 with recesses 2595 are provided, the visible decoration from the front can be varied.

[29-8e-1. Modification of the recessed area]
Next, a modified example of the recess 2595 in the passageway decoration section 2590 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 332. In Figure 332, the shape of the convex portion 2594 is triangular, and the relationship between the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the recess 2595 is shown. Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 332(a), the shape of the recess 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 is a triangle similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594. In this example as well, decorative light can be reflected or refracted in the recess 2595 and the convex portion 2594, similar to the above. Furthermore, when the shape of the recess 2595 is similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594, the plate thickness of the member on which the convex portion 2594 and the recess 2595 are provided becomes approximately constant, which reduces partial sink marks and distortions during molding.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 332(b), the shape of the recessed portion 2595 on the back side of the triangular convex portion 2594 is a rectangle, which is different from the shape of the convex portion 2594. Note that the recessed portion 2595 only needs to have a rectangular cross-section, so the front view shape of the recessed portion 2595 can be a rectangle, a circle, an oval, etc. Also, since the cross-sectional shape of the recessed portion 2595 only needs to be different from the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 2594, the front view shape of the recessed portion 2595 can be similar to or different from the front view shape of the convex portion 2594. In this example, because the shapes of the convex portion 2594 and the recessed portion 2595 are different, the direction of reflection of decorative light differs for each, allowing decorative light to be reflected in various directions by the convex portion 2594 and the recessed portion 2595, making it possible to display a more sparkling luminous decoration. Furthermore, in this example, because the distance from the surface of the convex portion 2594 to the surface of the concave portion 2595 varies depending on the location, decorative light can be refracted in various directions, making it possible to produce a decorative effect similar to that of a prism.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 332(c), the shape of the recess 2595 on the back side of the triangular convex portion 2594 is a semicircle, which is different from the shape of the convex portion 2594. Note that the recess 2595 only needs to have a rectangular cross-section, so the front view shape of the recess 2595 can be circular, oval, rectangular, etc. Also, since the cross-sectional shape of the recess 2595 only needs to be different from the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 2594, the front view shape of the recess 2595 can be similar to or different from the front view shape of the convex portion 2594. In this example, because the shapes of the convex portion 2594 and the recess 2595 are different, the direction of reflection of decorative light differs for each, allowing decorative light to be reflected in various directions by the convex portion 2594 and the recess 2595, making it possible to display a more sparkling luminous decoration. Furthermore, in this example, because the distance from the surface of the convex portion 2594 to the surface of the concave portion 2595 varies depending on the location, decorative light can be refracted in various directions, making it possible to produce a decorative effect similar to that of a prism.

Note that while Figure 332 shows the convex portion 2594 as a triangle, it is not limited to this; it may also be a polygon such as a quadrilateral, pentagon, or hexagon, a rhombus, a semicircle, a star, or other irregular shape.

[29-8e-2. Modification of the protruding part]
Next, a modified example of the protrusion 2594 in the passageway decoration section 2590 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 333. For example, as shown in Figure 333(a), the shape of the protrusion 2594 may be a trapezoid with the area near the vertex of a triangle flattened. In this example, the shape of the recess 2595 on the back side of the protrusion 2594 is a triangle that is substantially similar to the shape of the protrusion 2594. In this example as well, decorative light can be reflected or refracted at the recess 2595 and the protrusion 2594, similar to the above.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 333(b), the shape of the protrusion 2594 may be semicircular. In this example, the shape of the recess 2595 on the back side of the protrusion 2594 is a semicircle that is approximately similar to the shape of the protrusion 2594, and the corners of the base end of the recess 2595 are rounded to form an arc shape.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 333(c), the shape of the protrusion 2594 may be an arc-shaped rectangle with a rounded base. In this example, the shape of the recess 2595 on the back side of the protrusion 2594 is an elongated rectangle that is approximately similar in shape to the protrusion 2594. Also, on the back side of the protrusion 2594, there is an outer recess 2595c that extends in an arc shape down to the flat tip of the protrusion 2594, following the arc-shaped portion of the protrusion 2594. Between the outer recess 2595c and the recess 2595, there is a flat, seat-like portion 2595d parallel to the tip of the protrusion 2594. The recess 2595 is recessed from the flat portion 2595d. In this example as well, decorative light can be reflected or refracted at the recess 2595 and the protrusion 2594, similar to the above.

Furthermore, since the outer recess 2595c can also reflect or refract decorative light, it is possible to create a more dazzling luminous decoration in combination with the recess 2595 and the protrusion 2594. Also, because it has a flat portion 2595d, light from an LED or the like can be directed onto the flat portion 2595d and guided to the protrusion 2594, causing the tip of the protrusion 2594 to emit light. Additionally, the flat portion 2595d can be used as the contact point for the ejector pin used during mold removal, preventing pin marks from being left on visible parts of the product's surface and improving its appearance. Furthermore, the recess 2595 can be used as a screw hole, and the flat portion 2595d can be used as a screw seating surface, eliminating the need to provide separate mounting screw holes.

Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 333, the front view shapes of the convex portion 2594 and the front view shapes of the concave portion 2595 may be similar or different.

[29-8e-3. Modified section of aisle decoration]
Next, while the above-described passageway decoration section 2590 shows multiple protrusions 2594 (recesses 2595) of similar shapes, it is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 334, a single passageway decoration section 2590 may have protrusions 2594 (recesses 2595) of different shapes. Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 334(a), a mixture of multiple triangular protrusions 2594 may be provided, some with recesses 2595 on the back side and others with specific protrusions 2596 that do not have recesses 2595. This passageway decoration section 2590 can also achieve the same effects as described above. In addition, since the amount of light reflected and refraction by decorative light differs between the parts of the protrusion 2594 with recesses 2595 on the back side and the parts of the protrusion 2594 (specific protrusions 2596) that do not have recesses 2595, it is possible to add variation to the luminous decoration of the passageway decoration section 2590.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 334(b), triangular protrusions 2594 and semicircular protrusions 2594 may be mixed. Here, a recess 2595 similar in shape to the respective protrusion 2594 is provided on the back side of each protrusion 2594. The same effects as described above can be achieved with this passage decoration section 2590 as well. In addition, because the shapes of each protrusion 2594 (recess 2595) are different, even when not illuminated by decorative light, the difference in their shapes can add variation to the decoration of the passage decoration section 2590, thereby enhancing the decorative effect. Also, because the difference in the shape of the protrusions 2594 (recess 2595) results in different light characteristics such as reflection and refraction by decorative light, it is possible to add variation to the illuminated decoration of the passage decoration section 2590. Furthermore, because the shape of the protrusions 2594 differs, the degree of deceleration of the game ball B varies depending on the protrusions 2594. This allows for variations in the speed and flow of the game ball B, making the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable for the player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 334(c), different shapes of protrusions 2594 (recesses 2595) may be used, with protrusions 2594 having different protrusion amounts (sizes). Here, each protrusion 2594 is triangular, and the recess 2595 on the back side of each protrusion 2594 is made to resemble the shape of each protrusion 2594. The same effects as described above can be achieved with this passage decoration section 2590 as well. In addition, because each protrusion 2594 (recess 2595) is of a different size, even when not illuminated by decorative light, the difference in their sizes can add variation to the decoration of the passage decoration section 2590, thereby enhancing the decorative effect. Also, because the difference in size of the protrusions 2594 (recess 2595) results in different light characteristics such as reflection and refraction by decorative light, it is possible to add variation to the illuminated decoration of the passage decoration section 2590. Furthermore, because the protrusions 2594 are of different sizes, the degree of deceleration of the game ball B varies depending on the protrusions 2594. This allows for variations in the speed and flow of the game ball B, making the movement of the game ball B more enjoyable for the player.

Note that while Figure 334 shows a mixture of convex portions 2594 (recessed portions 2595) with different cross-sectional shapes (forms), the design is not limited to this; it is also possible to mix convex portions 2594 (recessed portions 2595) with different shapes in plan view.

[29-8e-4. Another Embodiment of the Passageway Decoration]
Next, a passage decoration section 2590A of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 335 to 337. Figure 335(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration section in which a second protrusion of the same shape as the first protrusion is provided on the first protrusion; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration section in which a second protrusion of a different protrusion amount is provided on the first protrusion; (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration section in which a second protrusion of a different shape is provided on the first protrusion; and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration section in which a second protrusion is also provided on the inclined surface of the first protrusion. Figure 336(a1) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration section in which a second protrusion of the same shape as the first protrusion is provided on the first protrusion; (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) from the front; and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a passage decoration section from the front in which a recess of a different shape from (a2) is provided. Figure 337(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part fitted into the opening of a game panel, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of a passage decoration part in a different form from (a).

The aisle decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(a) has a first protrusion 2594c that protrudes forward within a predetermined range from the rear plate section 2592 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 or the flange section 2511b of the center feature 2500; a plurality of second protrusions 2594d that protrude forward from the first protrusion 2594c; a first recess 2595e provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed toward the front; and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of the second protrusions 2594d and recessed toward the front.

The first protrusion 2594c has a flat front surface. This first protrusion 2594c also includes the inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. The second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball B (plane of the paper). The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 2594c. The second recess 2595f is recessed in a shape similar to that of the second protrusion 2594d.

Furthermore, the first protrusion 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the first protrusion 2594c, etc., it is possible to conceal the wiring and components at the rear. Also, at least one second protrusion 2594d may be designated as a specific protrusion 2596 without a second recess 2595f on its back side (see Figure 335(b)). In addition, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate 2592 with a gap allowing the game balls B to pass through, a front plate 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figure 335(a), the aisle decoration section 2590A has a first recess 2595e and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, as well as the reflection of decorative light from the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 335(a), the passage decoration section 2590A, due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, narrows the gap in the front-to-back direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (e.g., glass plate 162, front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B entering the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, because the flow speed of the game balls B is slower in the passage decoration section 2590A, the game balls B can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 335(a), the passageway decoration section 2590A has only a glass plate 162 in front of the rear plate section 2592. Therefore, by combining the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

The passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(b) has a first protrusion 2594c that protrudes forward within a predetermined range from the rear plate section 2592 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 or the flange section 2511b of the center feature 2500; a plurality of second protrusions 2594d that protrude forward from the first protrusion 2594c; a first recess 2595e provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed toward the front; and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of some of the second protrusions 2594d and recessed toward the front.

The first protrusion 2594c of the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(b) has a flat front surface. This first protrusion 2594c also includes the inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate section 2592. The second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section and extends in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball B. As shown in Figure 335(b), some of the second protrusions 2594d have different amounts of forward projection, and the second protrusions 2594d with smaller projections are designated as specific protrusions 2596, which do not have a second recess 2595f on their back side. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 2594c. The second recess 2595f is provided on the back side of the second protrusions 2594d with larger forward projections.

Furthermore, in the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(b), game balls B can pass in front of multiple second protrusions 2594d. Therefore, game balls B can pass even in front of second protrusions 2594d with large protrusions. Also, the first protrusions 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is provided on the first protrusions 2594c, etc., it is possible to conceal wiring and other components behind them. Additionally, all second protrusions 2594d may be designated as specific protrusions 2596, where a second recess 2595f is not provided on the back side. Furthermore, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592 at a distance that allows game balls B to pass, a front plate section 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figure 335(b), the aisle decoration section 2590A has a first recess 2595e and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and on the back side of a portion of the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board of the game board 5C can be reflected or refracted by these first and second recesses. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d, as well as the reflection of decorative light from the first and second recesses 2595e and 2595f. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 335(b), the passage decoration section 2590A, due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, narrows the gap in the front-to-back direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (e.g., glass plate 162, front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B entering the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, because the flow speed of the game balls B is slowed in the passage decoration section 2590A, the game balls B can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 335(b), the passageway decoration section 2590A has only a glass plate 162 in front of the rear plate section 2592. Therefore, by combining the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

The aisle decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(c) has a first protrusion 2594c that protrudes forward within a predetermined range from the rear plate section 2592 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 or the flange section 2511b of the center feature 2500; a plurality of second protrusions 2594d that protrude forward from the first protrusion 2594c; a first recess 2595e provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed toward the front; and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of at least some of the second protrusions 2594d and recessed toward the front.

The first protrusion 2594c of the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(c) has a flat front surface. This first protrusion 2594c also includes the inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate section 2592. The second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section and consists of both forms that extend in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball B and forms that protrude far forward. The second protrusion 2594d that protrudes far forward is formed to such a length that the game ball B cannot flow in front of it, while being shorter in the direction intersecting the flow direction of the game ball B (left-right direction), allowing the game ball B to flow on both its left and right outer sides. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 2594c. The second recess 2595f is recessed in a shape similar to that of the second protrusion 2594d.

Furthermore, the first protrusion 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the first protrusion 2594c, etc., it is possible to conceal the wiring and components at the rear. Also, at least one second protrusion 2594d may be designated as a specific protrusion 2596 without a second recess 2595f on its back side. Moreover, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate 2592 with a gap allowing the game balls B to pass through, a front plate 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figure 335(c), the aisle decoration section 2590A has a first recess 2595e and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, as well as the reflection of decorative light from the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, according to the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(c), the presence of the first protrusion 2594c narrows the gap in the front-rear direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass plate 162, the front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B that enter the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game balls B. In this case, because there is a mixture of second protrusions 2594d that are short in the left-right direction and long in the forward direction, these second protrusions 2594d can change the flow direction of the game balls B in the left-right direction, thereby imparting complex movements to the game balls B. Therefore, because the flow speed of the game balls B is slowed in the aisle decoration section 2590A, the game balls B can be made more visible, and because the game balls B move in a complex manner in the left-right direction, the movement of the game balls B can be made more enjoyable.

Furthermore, according to the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(c), since only a glass plate 162 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592, the combination of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d causes the game ball B to decelerate between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

The passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(d) has a rear plate protrusion 2594a that protrudes forward from the rear plate section 2592 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 or the flange section 2511b of the center feature 2500; a rear plate recess 2595a that is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and is recessed toward the front; a first protrusion 2594c in which a predetermined range of the rear plate section 2592 protrudes forward; a plurality of second protrusions 2594d that protrude forward from the first protrusion 2594c; a first recess 2595e that is provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and is recessed toward the front; and a second recess 2595f that is provided on the back side of the second protrusion 2594d and is recessed toward the front. The rear plate protrusion 2594a has a semicircular cross-section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball B.

The first protrusion 2594c has a flat front surface. This first protrusion 2594c also includes the inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. The second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball B. As shown in Figure 335(d), a portion of the second protrusion 2594d is provided so as to overlap the rear plate portion 2592 and the first protrusion 2594c. This second protrusion 2594d that overlaps the rear plate portion 2592 is formed to be shorter in the direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball B (left-right direction), making it possible to change the direction of movement of the game ball B that it comes into contact with in the left-right direction. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the first protrusion 2594c.

Furthermore, the first protrusion 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the first protrusion 2594c, etc., it is possible to conceal the wiring and components at the rear. Also, at least one of the rear plate protrusions 2594a and the second protrusion 2594d may be designated as a specific protrusion 2596 where the rear plate recesses 2595a and 2595f are not provided. Furthermore, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592 with a gap allowing the game balls B to pass through, a front plate portion 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figure 335(d), the aisle decoration section 2590A has a rear plate recess 2595a, a first recess 2595e, and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the first protrusion 2594c, and the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the rear plate protrusions 2594a, first protrusions 2594c, and second protrusions 2594d, as well as the reflection of decorative light from the rear plate recesses 2595a, first recesses 2595e, and second recesses 2595f. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, according to the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(d), the presence of the first protrusion 2594c narrows the gap in the front-rear direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass plate 162, the front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game ball B that enters the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game ball B. In this case, when the game ball B comes into contact with the second protrusion 2594d which is provided so as to overlap the rear plate section 2592, the left-right direction of the second protrusion 2594d is shortened, allowing the flow direction of the game ball B to be changed in the left-right direction, thereby imparting complex movement to the game ball B. Therefore, because the flow speed of the game balls B is slowed in the aisle decoration section 2590A, the game balls B can be made more visible, and because the game balls B move in a complex manner in the left-right direction, the movement of the game balls B can be made more enjoyable.

Furthermore, according to the aisle decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 335(d), since only a glass plate 162 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592, the combination of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d causes the game ball B to decelerate between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

Note that while Figures 335(a) to (d) show the semi-circular projections of the rear plate 2594a and second projection 2594d, the design is not limited to these shapes. Of course, the rear plate projections 2594a and second projection 2594d could also be triangular or trapezoidal.

Next, the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figures 336(a1) and (a2) has a first protrusion 2594c that protrudes forward within a predetermined range from the rear plate section 2592 that is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 or the flange section 2511b of the center feature 2500; a plurality of second protrusions 2594d that protrude forward from the first protrusion 2594c; a first recess 2595e provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed toward the front; and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of the second protrusion 2594d and recessed toward the front. The front surface of the first protrusion 2594c is flat. This first protrusion 2594c also includes the inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate section 2592. The second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction of movement of the game ball B (the plane of the paper).

As shown in Figure 336(a2), the first recess 2595e of this passageway decoration section 2590A is recessed in a downward-pointing arrow shape when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the first protrusion 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the first protrusion 2594c, etc., it is possible to conceal the wiring and components at the rear. Also, at least one second protrusion 2594d may be designated as a specific protrusion 2596 without a second recess 2595f on its back side. Furthermore, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate 2592 with a gap allowing the game balls B to pass through, a front plate 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figures 336(a1) and (a2), the passage decoration section 2590A has a first recess 2595e and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED board provided in the game board 5C. As a result, the passage decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light by the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, and the reflection of decorative light by the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. In this case, because the first recess 2595e is recessed in the shape of an arrow, the illumination of this arrow strongly attracts the player's attention to the passage decoration section 2590A, creating the impression that something good might happen and increasing their anticipation for the game. Furthermore, it allows the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B circulating through the passage decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 336(a1) and (a2), the passage decoration section 2590A, due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, narrows the gap in the front-rear direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (e.g., glass plate 162, front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B entering the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, because the flow speed of the game balls B is slowed in the passage decoration section 2590A, the game balls B can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game balls B and preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figures 336(a1) and (a2), since only a glass plate 162 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592, the combination of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d causes the game ball B to decelerate between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

The above example shows the first recess 2595e with an arrow-shaped indentation, but it is not limited to this, and the first recess 2595e may have various shapes. For example, as shown in Figure 336(b), the front view shape of the first recess 2595e may be star-shaped. This makes it possible to enhance the decorative effect of the passageway decoration section 2590A.

The first recess 2595e may consist of a single recess or multiple recesses. Furthermore, the front view shape of the first recess 2595e may be, in addition to the arrow or star shapes described above, a heart shape, a geometric pattern, a letter shape consisting of a predetermined logo, a character shape modeled after a predetermined character, a pattern shape modeled after a predetermined image, etc. To make these shapes (first recess 2595e) more prominent, light may be incident from the end face of the rear plate 2592, and the rear plate 2592 may be used as a light guide plate. In this case, these shapes may be constructed with a textured finish. This would cause the incident light to exit through the textured area, making the shapes appear to glow. Additionally, when a textured finish is provided, it is possible to conceal wiring and other components at the rear.

Furthermore, in the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 336, the second protrusion 2594d is semi-circular, resulting in few (or no) corners, making the shape of the first recess 2595e easily visible from the front. Of course, the second protrusion 2594d could also be triangular or trapezoidal.

Next, the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(a) comprises a rear plate section 2592 inserted into an opening 1112 provided in the game panel 1100, a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the rear plate section 2592, rear plate recesses 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusions 2594a, and an LED substrate 2519a acting as a specific member 2519 that covers the rear of the rear plate recesses 2595a, making the rear plate recesses 2595a inaccessible to the touch. Here, some of the rear plate protrusions 2594a are designated as specific protrusions 2596, where the rear plate recesses 2595a are not provided on the back side.

Furthermore, the rear panel 2592 may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the rear panel 2592, it is possible to conceal wiring and other components at the rear. Also, all rear panel protrusions 2594a may be designated as specific protrusions 2596, where the rear panel recess 2595a is not provided on the back side. Additionally, while the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear panel 2592 with a gap allowing the game balls B to pass through, a front panel 2593 may also be provided.

Furthermore, although a gap is provided between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a, as shown in Figure 337(a), since the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a are inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100, the outer periphery of the gap between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a is surrounded by the inner surface of the opening 1112. Therefore, even if the gap between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a is large enough to fit a finger, the outer periphery of the gap is surrounded, making it impossible to insert a finger between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a from the outside, thus preventing finger contact with the rear plate recess 2595a of the rear plate portion 2592.

As shown in Figure 337(a), the aisle decoration section 2590A has a recessed portion 2595a on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate. This recessed portion 2595a allows for the reflection and refraction of light (decorative light) from the LEDs on the LED substrate 2519a located at the rear. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the protruding portion 2594a and the reflection of decorative light from the recessed portion 2595a. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 337(a), the passageway decoration section 2590A is provided with an LED substrate 2519a as a specific component 2519, covering the rear of the rear panel recess 2595a and making it inaccessible to fingers. This prevents the rear panel recess 2595a from becoming contaminated by a worker's fingers touching it during the manufacturing of the game board 5C, and ensures that decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted within the rear panel recess 2595a. Additionally, the presence of the LED substrate 2519a covering the rear panel recess 2595a makes it difficult for dirt and debris to enter, thus preventing the appearance from deteriorating due to dirt and debris.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 337(a), the aisle decoration section 2590A has multiple rear plate protrusions 2594a. When the game balls B come into contact with these protrusions, their speed is reduced, making them easier to see. Additionally, since an LED substrate 2519a is provided behind the rear plate section 2592, the aisle decoration section 2590A can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs on the LED substrate 2519a. This illumination allows the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A to appear as silhouettes, making their movement more visible and enhancing the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, according to the aisle decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(a), since only a glass plate 162 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592, depending on the size and shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the game ball B that comes into contact with the rear plate protrusion 2594a will bounce forward and hit the glass plate 162, creating a collision sound that can attract the attention of the player.

The passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(b) comprises a rear plate section 2592 inserted into an opening 1112 provided in the game panel 1100, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, an LED substrate 2519a as a specific member 2519 that covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a and makes it inaccessible to the touch, a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a protruding forward from the rear plate section 2592, a first protrusion 2594c protruding forward from the rear plate section 2592 and extending forward from the game panel 1100, a plurality of second protrusions 2594d protruding forward from the first protrusion 2594c, a first recess 2595e provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c, and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of the second protrusion 2594d.

In the aisle decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(b), the rear plate section 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a are inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. A gap is provided between the rear plate section 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a, but the outer periphery of this gap is surrounded by the inner surface of the opening 1112. Therefore, even if the gap between the rear plate section 2592 and the LED substrate 2519a is large enough to fit a finger, the outer periphery of the gap is surrounded, preventing the insertion of a finger from the outside, thus making the rear plate recess 2595a of the rear plate section 2592 inaccessible to fingers.

Furthermore, the rear plate portion 2592 and the first protrusion portion 2594c may be decorated with fine irregularities such as a textured finish. When a textured finish is applied to the rear plate portion 2592 and the first protrusion portion 2594c, it is possible to conceal the wiring and components at the rear. Also, at least one rear plate protrusion portion 2594a, the first protrusion portion 2594c, and the second protrusion portion 2594d may be designated as a specific protrusion portion 2596 where the rear plate recess portion 2595a, the first recess portion 2595e, and the second recess portion 2595f are not provided on the back side. Furthermore, although the glass plate 162 of the door frame 3 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592 and the first protrusion portion 2594c with a gap that allows the game ball B to pass through, a front plate portion 2593 may also be provided.

As shown in Figure 337(b), the passageway decoration section 2590A has a rear plate recess 2595a, a first recess 2595e, and a second recess 2595f on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the first protrusion 2594c, and the second protrusion 2594d. Therefore, the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED substrate 2519a located behind it. As a result, the aisle decoration section 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decorative light from the rear plate protrusions 2594a, first protrusions 2594c, and second protrusions 2594d, as well as the reflection of decorative light from the rear plate recesses 2595a, first recesses 2595e, and second recesses 2595f. This directs the player's gaze towards the aisle decoration section 2590A, allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game balls B circulating through the aisle decoration section 2590A.

Furthermore, according to the passage decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(b), the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a is covered by the LED substrate 2519a, which is a specific member 2519, and the rear of the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f are covered by the game panel 1100, which is also a specific member 2519. As a result, the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f are made inaccessible to the fingers. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f from becoming soiled by the fingers of a worker touching them during the manufacture of the game board 5C, and the decorative light can be reliably reflected or refracted in the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. Furthermore, since a specific member 2519 is provided to cover the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f, it is possible to prevent dirt and dust from entering the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f, thereby preventing the appearance from becoming unsightly due to dirt and debris.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 337(b), the passage decoration section 2590A, due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, narrows the gap in the front-to-back direction between the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (e.g., glass plate 162, front plate section 2593, etc.), thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game balls B entering the passage decoration section 2590A. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with multiple second protrusions 2594d, these second protrusions 2594d can further slow down the flow speed of the game balls B. In this case, since the LED substrate 2519a is provided behind the rear plate section 2592, the passage decoration section 2590A can be illuminated by emitting light from the LEDs on the LED substrate 2519a. This illumination allows the game balls B flowing through the passage decoration section 2590A to appear as silhouettes, making their movement more visible and entertaining for the player.

Furthermore, according to the passageway decoration section 2590A shown in Figure 337(b), since only a glass plate 162 is provided in front of the rear plate section 2592, the combination of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d causes the game ball B to decelerate between the glass plate 162 and the first and second protrusions 2594c and 2594d. At this time, the game ball B hits the glass plate 162 relatively hard, resulting in a loud collision sound, which can attract the player's attention.

Note that while Figures 337(a) and (d) show the semi-circular projections of the rear plate 2594a and second projection 2594d, the design is not limited to these shapes. Of course, the rear plate projections 2594a and second projection 2594d may also be triangular or trapezoidal.

[29-8e-5. Summary]
The above-mentioned passageway decoration section 2590 has the following technical features.

[29-8e-5a. Summary A]
(Background of the technical features)
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it has been proposed to incorporate large decorative elements to enhance their appeal to players, making them more likely to be chosen as a gaming machine (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154728). However, in conventional gaming machines like those described in the aforementioned patent document, while the large decorative elements create a strong initial impact, some players may quickly become accustomed to them, making them less likely to be chosen as a gaming machine. Furthermore, large decorative elements increase manufacturing costs and weight, requiring reinforcement to accommodate them, thus increasing the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the following approach aims to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented design while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
An extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "convex portion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "quadrilateral," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, which has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center feature. The center feature extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, an extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extension portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion (see the description in Chapter [11-8e. Passageway Decoration], Figure 128, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion forming the flow region of the center mechanism, decorative light can be reflected by the recess provided on the back of the protrusion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. Therefore, the flow region through which the game balls flow can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Consequently, even though the extension portion of the center mechanism does not have the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional gaming machines, the illumination of the extension portion makes it possible to make players perceive this gaming machine as having a completely different decoration from previous machines, thus providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, because a protrusion is provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by the protrusion in this region, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, a recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and decorative light is reflected in this recess to create an luminous decoration. This luminous decoration makes the game balls flowing through the flow region appear as silhouettes, further enhancing the visibility of their movement. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls flowing through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protruding part, the weight of the center component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center component. Additionally, because the center component is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
A flange portion extending outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view,
Equipped with,
It is a component different from the aforementioned center component and includes a front member that is fixed to the game board,
The front member is,
An extension portion that extends along the game board and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "front components" include: "components with at least a large prize entry point (e.g., attacker unit)", "components with at least a special prize entry point (e.g., special prize entry point unit)", "components with at least a starter prize entry point (e.g., starter entry point unit)", "components with at least a gate (e.g., gate unit)", and "components with at least a general prize entry point or a regular prize entry point (e.g., prize entry point unit)".

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, which has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center component. The center component extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, and a flange portion that extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view. It also has a front member, which is a different member from the center component and is fixed to the game board. The front member extends along the game board and has an extended portion that has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extended portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the recess (see the description in Chapter 29-8e. Passageway Decoration Part, Figure 330, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion that forms the flow region of the front member, which is different from the center component, decorative light can be reflected by a recess provided on the back of the protrusion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. Therefore, the flow region through which the game balls flow can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the extension portion of the front member does not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional gaming machines, the extension portion illuminates and is decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that this gaming machine has a completely different decoration from previous gaming machines. This provides a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, because a protrusion is provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by the protrusion in this region, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, a recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and decorative light is reflected in this recess to create an luminous decoration. This luminous decoration makes the game balls flowing through the flow region appear as silhouettes, further enhancing the visibility of their movement. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls flowing through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the front component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the front component. Additionally, because the front component is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Method 3: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
An extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A front plate facing the extension, spaced apart to allow the game balls to flow down,
A protrusion formed on the front plate that affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "convex portion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "quadrilateral," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side that has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center feature. The center feature extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, an extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, a front plate facing the extension portion with a gap that allows game balls to flow down, and a protrusion formed on the front plate that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the recess (see the description in Chapter [29-8e. Passageway Decoration], Figure 329, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, the front plate, which is positioned opposite the extension forming the flow region of the center mechanism, can reflect decorative light using a recess provided on the back of the protrusion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. This reflected light allows the flow region through which the game balls flow to be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even though the front plate of the center mechanism does not have the ostentatious decorations found in conventional gaming machines, the extension illuminates and decorates, making it possible to make players recognize that this gaming machine has a completely different decoration from previous machines. This provides a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, because a protrusion is provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow velocity of the game balls can be reduced by the protrusion in this region, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. In this case, a recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and the decorative light is reflected in this recess to create an luminous decoration. Since the protrusion and recess are located on the front plate in front of the flow region, the front of the game balls flowing through the flow region is illuminated, making the game balls appear to sparkle.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protruding part of the front plate of the center mechanism, the weight of the center mechanism can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center mechanism. Additionally, because the center mechanism is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing increases in the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the extension of the center mechanism may be further provided with a protruding portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls, and a recessed portion on the back of the protruding portion that can reflect decorative light. This allows the recessed portion of the extension to also reflect decorative light, thus illuminating the area in front of and behind the flow region where the game balls circulate. Therefore, since both the extension and the front panel are illuminated, it becomes possible to make players recognize that this is a game machine with decorations completely different from conventional game machines, providing a highly appealing game machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, as described above, when the extension of the center piece is provided with a protruding portion and a recessed portion on the back of the protruding portion, the shapes of the protruding and recessed portions on the front plate, as well as the shapes of the protruding and recessed portions on the extension, will be visible when viewed from the front. These shapes will act as decoration, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, as described above, when a protruding portion is provided on the extension of the center mechanism, the front protrusion and the rear protrusion of the extension allow the game ball to swing back and forth. Compared to the case where only a protrusion is provided, this further reduces the flow speed of the game ball, making the movement of the game ball easier to see. In this case, a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, and a recess is provided on the back of the extension protrusion. By reflecting decorative light in these recesses and extension recesses, the game ball can be made to appear as a silhouette due to the illumination of the extension recess, while the illumination of the recesses makes it appear to sparkle. This allows players to enjoy the illumination along with the movement of the game ball, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. In this case, it is desirable to arrange the protrusion of the front plate and the protrusion of the extension alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of the flow of the game ball.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"Front plates facing each other in front of the extension portion, with a gap between them that allows game balls to flow down,
A second protrusion is formed on the front plate, which affects the flow velocity of the game balls,
It has,
A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the second recess."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "second protrusion" may have a similar shape to the protrusion on the extension, or it may have a different shape. Similarly, the "second recess" may have a similar shape to the second protrusion, or it may have a different shape.

According to the configuration of means 4, when the extension portion is provided with a convex portion and a concave portion, it has a front plate facing the extension portion at a distance that allows the game ball to flow down, and a second convex portion formed on the front plate that affects the flow velocity of the game ball. A second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, and decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the second concave portion (see the description of the front plate 2571, the front plate convex portion 2594b, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, the extensions on the center component and front members are provided with protrusions, and the back of these protrusions is provided with recesses capable of reflecting decorative light. Furthermore, a front plate is provided in front of the extensions, and a second protrusion is provided on this front plate, with a second recess capable of reflecting decorative light on the back of the second protrusion. Therefore, the area in front of and behind the flowing region where the game balls pass can be illuminated and decorated by the reflected light from the recesses and the second recesses. Consequently, even though the extensions and front plates of the center component and front members do not have ostentatious decorations like those found in conventional gaming machines, the illumination of the extensions and front plates makes it possible to make players recognize that this gaming machine has decorations that are completely different from conventional gaming machines, thus providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, the rear extension of the flow region is provided with a convex portion and a concave portion on the back of the convex portion, while the front plate of the flow region is provided with a second convex portion and a second concave portion on the back of the second convex portion. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the convex portion, the concave portion, and the second convex portion and second concave portion are visible, and these shapes act as decoration, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, a protrusion is provided on the extended portion that forms the rear wall of the flow region through which the game balls flow, and a second protrusion is provided on the front plate that forms the front wall of the flow region. This allows the game balls to oscillate back and forth due to the interaction of the protrusions and the second protrusion. Compared to a case where only protrusions are provided, this further reduces the flow speed of the game balls, making their movement more visible. In this design, a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, and a second recess is provided on the back of the second protrusion. These recesses and the second recess reflect decorative light to create an luminous decoration. The luminous decoration in the recesses makes the game balls appear as a silhouette, while the luminous decoration in the second recesses makes them appear to sparkle. This allows players to enjoy the luminous decoration along with the movement of the game balls, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"Multiple protrusions are provided, and some of them have specific protrusions on their back side where the recesses are not provided."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, multiple protrusions are provided, and some of these protrusions have a specific protrusion on the back side that does not have a recess (see the description regarding the specific protrusion 2596 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, some of the multiple protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on their back side. In other words, protrusions with recesses on their back side and protrusions without recesses on their back side (specific protrusions) are mixed together. As a result, the back side of the specific protrusions cannot reflect decorative light like a recess, allowing for different luminous decoration characteristics between the protrusions and the specific protrusions.

Furthermore, since the shape visible from the front differs between a protrusion with a recess on the reverse side and a specific protrusion without a recess on the reverse side, it is possible to create variations in the decoration visible from the front compared to a case where only multiple protrusions with recesses on the reverse side are provided.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented ornamentation while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 (game board 5C) corresponds to the game board of the above solution, the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment corresponds to the front member of the above solution, the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400, the attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517 of the center mechanism 2500, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the exit passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 correspond to the flow region of the above solution, the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400, the flange portion 2511b of the center mechanism, and the rear plate portion 2592 correspond to the extension portion of the above solution, and the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center mechanism 2500 correspond to the front plate of the above solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the inflow restriction portion 2511c of the center component 2500 corresponds to the peripheral wall portion of the solution, the protrusion 2594, rear plate protrusion 2594a, and front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment correspond to the protrusion portion of the solution, the front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment corresponds to the second protrusion portion of the solution, the recess 2595, rear plate recess 2595a, and front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment correspond to the recess portion of the solution, and the front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment corresponds to the second recess portion of the solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the rear plate portion 2592 (flange portion 2511b) that forms the flow region of the center mechanism 2500 can reflect decorative light with a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a that affects the flow speed of the game ball B. As a result, the flow region (ball passage 2591) through which the game ball B flows can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Therefore, even though the rear plate portion 2592 of the center mechanism 2500 does not have ostentatious decorations like those in conventional pachinko machines, the rear plate portion 2592 is illuminated and decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, because a recessed portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate 2592, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protruding portion 2594a and the recessed portion 2595a, compared to a case where only a protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided in the flow region (ball passage 2591) where the game ball B flows, the flow speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the rear plate protrusion 2594a in this flow region. This slower flow speed makes the movement of the game ball B easier to see. At this time, a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. The rear plate recess 2595a is designed to reflect decorative light, creating an luminous decoration. This luminous decoration allows the game ball B flowing through the flow region to appear as a silhouette, making its movement even easier to see. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B flowing through the flow region can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the front plate portion 2593 (front plate 2571) of the decorative body 2570, which is provided opposite the rear plate portion 2592 that forms the flow region (ball passage 2591) in the center mechanism 2500, the decorative light can be reflected by the front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b that affects the flow speed of the game balls B. Therefore, the flow region through which the game balls B flow can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the front plate portion 2593 of the center mechanism 2500 does not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the front plate portion 2593 is illuminated and decorated, making it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a completely different decoration from previous pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, because a recessed portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594b of the front panel, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protruding portion 2594b and the recessed portion 2595b, compared to a case where only a protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since the front plate protrusion 2594b is provided in the flow region where the game ball B flows, the flow speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the front plate protrusion 2594b in this flow region, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. At this time, a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b, and decorative light is reflected in the front plate recess 2595b to create a luminous decoration. Additionally, since the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are provided on the front plate portion 2593 in front of the flow region (ball passage 2591), the front of the game ball B flowing down the flow region is illuminated, making the game ball B appear to sparkle.

Furthermore, in the center mechanism 2500, the rear plate portion 2592 is provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, while the front plate portion 2593 in front of the rear plate portion 2592 is provided with a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the rear plate portion 2592 and the reflected light from the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate portion 2593 can illuminate and decorate the back and front of the flow area (ball passage 2591) through which the game balls B flow. Therefore, since the rear panel 2592 and front panel 2593 of the center mechanism 2500 are illuminated, it is possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thereby providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the players' attention.

Furthermore, as described above, since the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593 of the center piece 2500 are provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a, and a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a on the rear plate portion 2592, as well as the shapes of the front plate protrusion 2594b and front plate recess 2595b on the front plate portion 2593, are visible. These shapes act as decoration, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, as described above, the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593 of the center mechanism 2500 have rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of flow of the game ball B. Therefore, the front plate protrusion 2594b and the rear plate protrusion 2594a allow the game ball B to swing back and forth. Compared to the case where a protrusion is provided on only one side, the flow speed of the game ball B can be further reduced, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. In this design, a recessed portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594a of the rear plate, and a recessed portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the protruding portion 2594b of the front plate. These recessed portions reflect decorative light, creating an luminous decoration. The luminous decoration of the recessed portion 2595a makes the game ball B appear as a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the recessed portion 2595b makes it appear to sparkle. This allows players to enjoy the luminous decoration along with the movement of the game ball B, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the rear plate portion 2592 (base plate 2441) and front plate portion 2593 (front plate 2442) of the attacker unit 2400, which forms the flow region (door-upper passage portion 2416) distinct from the center mechanism 2500, decorative light can be reflected by the recess 2595 provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594 that affects the flow speed of the game ball B. Therefore, the flow region through which the game ball B flows can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Consequently, even though the rear plate portion 2592 and front plate portion 2593 of the attacker unit 2400 do not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the illumination of the rear plate portion 2592 and front plate portion 2593 makes it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, in the rear plate portion 2592 and front plate portion 2593 of the attacker unit 2400, a recess 2595 is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. Therefore, when viewed from the front, compared to a case where only a protrusion is provided, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the shapes of the protrusion 2594 and the recess 2595. This shape acts as a decorative element, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, since a protrusion 2594 is provided on the upper door passage 2416 above the large prize opening door 2413 of the attacker unit 2400, the protrusion 2594 can reduce the flow speed of the game ball B at the large prize opening door 2413. This slows down the flow speed of the game ball B, making its movement easier to see, and when the large prize opening door 2413 opens at that timing, it becomes easier to get the game ball into the large prize opening 2005. In this configuration, a recess 2595 is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. The recess 2595 reflects decorative light, creating a luminous decoration. This luminous decoration allows the game ball B, rolling down (rolling) over the large prize opening door 2413, to appear as a silhouette while also sparkling. This enhances the anticipation of the game ball B entering the large prize opening 2005, while also providing enjoyment through the luminous decoration, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since recesses 2595 are provided on the back side of the protrusions 2594 in the rear plate portion 2592 and front plate portion 2593 of the center mechanism 2500, and in the rear plate portion 2592 and front plate portion 2593 of the attacker unit 2400, the weight of the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400 can be reduced compared to cases where the recesses 2595 are not provided, resulting in a lighter design and a reduction in the cost associated with the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400. In addition, because the center mechanism 2500 and attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, the reinforcement that was required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.
[29-8e-5b. Summary B]
(Background of the technical features)
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it has been proposed to incorporate large decorative elements to enhance their appeal to players and make them more likely to choose a particular machine to play (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154728). However, in conventional gaming machines like those described in the patent document, while the large decorative elements create a strong initial impact, some players may quickly become accustomed to them, making them less likely to choose a machine to play. Furthermore, large decorative elements increase manufacturing costs and weight, requiring reinforcement to accommodate them, thus increasing the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the following approach aims to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented design while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
An extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and this recess is covered with a specific material different from the game board, making the recess inaccessible to the touch.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "convex portion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "quadrilateral," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, "specific components" include "LED substrates on which multiple LEDs are mounted."

Furthermore, "inaccessible to fingers" means that the structure must prevent a worker's fingers from touching the recess. Examples include: "a structure where the extended portion and the specific component are in contact with each other with no gap between them," "a structure where a gap exists between the extended portion and the specific component but a finger cannot enter (a gap too small for a finger to enter)," and "a structure where a gap large enough for a finger to enter exists between the extended portion and the specific component, but its outer perimeter is surrounded by the specific component or other components, preventing a finger from entering the gap."

By the way, when a recess is created on the back side of a protruding portion, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty when a worker's fingers touch it during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, it will look unsightly. Furthermore, because the recessed area makes cleaning difficult, careful work is required to prevent the recess from getting dirty, potentially increasing working time and thus costs.

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, which has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center component. The center component extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, an extended portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extended portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the recess is covered with a specific member different from the game board, making the recess inaccessible to the touch (see the description of the center component 2500, specific member 2519, Figure 329, etc. in the chapter [29-8e. Passageway Decoration] in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion forming the flow region of the center mechanism, a recess is provided on the back of the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. Therefore, when viewed from the front, compared to a case where only a convex portion is present, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the convex and recess shapes. This shape acts as decoration, enhancing the decorative effect. Furthermore, since the recess is made inaccessible to touch by a specific component, workers' fingers will not contaminate the recess during the manufacturing of the game machine, ensuring a visually appealing design and reliably demonstrating the decorative effect of the recess. Consequently, even without the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional game machines, the extension portion of the center mechanism displays an unprecedented decorative effect created by the convex and recess. This allows players to perceive the game machine as having a completely different design from previous machines, providing a highly appealing game machine that strongly attracts their attention.

Furthermore, because protrusions are provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by these protrusions, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, since recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions, a unique decorative effect can be created using the protrusions and recesses. This decoration can be used to adorn the area behind the game balls as they flow through the flow region, making the game balls more noticeable. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the center component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center component. Additionally, the reduced weight of the center component eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered with a specific component to prevent contact with the fingers, workers' fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to avoid soiling the recess is unnecessary, simplifying the process and further reducing costs.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the convex portion, it becomes possible to reflect decorative light on the surface of the recess. This allows the reflected light from the recess to illuminate the flow area where the game balls circulate, strongly attracting the player's attention with the illuminated decoration of the extended portion. Additionally, by reflecting decorative light from the recess of the extended portion to create illumination, the game balls flowing in front of the extended portion are illuminated from behind, making the game balls appear as silhouettes and making their movement easier to see.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
A flange portion extending outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view,
Equipped with,
It is a component different from the aforementioned center component and includes a front member that is fixed to the game board,
The front member is,
An extension portion that extends along the game board and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and this recess is covered with a specific material different from the game board, making the recess inaccessible to the touch.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "front components" include: "components with at least a large prize entry point (e.g., attacker unit)", "components with at least a special prize entry point (e.g., special prize entry point unit)", "components with at least a starter prize entry point (e.g., starter entry point unit)", "components with at least a gate (e.g., gate unit)", and "components with at least a general prize entry point or a regular prize entry point (e.g., prize entry point unit)".

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, "specific components" include "an LED substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted," "a decorative sheet or decorative cell with a predetermined decoration," "a decorative body with a three-dimensional decoration," "a ball guide member for ejecting game balls at the rear of the game board," and "a drive mechanism for moving a movable decorative body," among others.

Furthermore, "inaccessible to fingers" means that the structure must prevent a worker's fingers from touching the recess. Examples include: "a structure where the extended portion and the specific component are in contact with each other with no gap between them," "a structure where a gap exists between the extended portion and the specific component but a finger cannot enter (a gap too small for a finger to enter)," and "a structure where a gap large enough for a finger to enter exists between the extended portion and the specific component, but its outer perimeter is surrounded by the specific component or other components, preventing a finger from entering the gap."

By the way, when a recess is created on the back side of a protruding portion, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty when a worker's fingers touch it during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, it will look unsightly. Furthermore, because the recessed area makes cleaning difficult, careful work is required to prevent the recess from getting dirty, potentially increasing working time and thus costs.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, which has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center component. The center component extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, and a flange portion that extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view. It also has a front member, which is a different member from the center component and is fixed to the game board. The front member extends along the game board and has an extended portion that has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extended portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the recess is covered with a specific member different from the game board, making the recess inaccessible to the touch (see the description of attacker unit 2400, specific member 2519, Figure 330, etc. in the chapter [29-8e. Passageway decoration portion] in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion that forms the flow region of the front member, which is different from the center component, a recess is provided on the back of the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. Therefore, when viewed from the front, compared to a case where only a convex portion is provided, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the convex and recess shapes. This shape acts as decoration, enhancing the decorative effect. Furthermore, since the recess is made inaccessible to the touch by a specific component, workers' fingers will not touch and contaminate the recess during the manufacturing of the game machine, ensuring a visually appealing design and reliably demonstrating the decorative effect of the recess. Consequently, even without the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional game machines on the extension portion of the front member, the unprecedented decoration created by the convex and recess is visible. This allows players to recognize that the game machine has a completely different decoration from previous game machines, providing a highly appealing game machine that strongly attracts players' attention.

Furthermore, because protrusions are provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by these protrusions, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, since recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions, a unique decorative effect can be created using the protrusions and recesses. This decoration can be used to adorn the area behind the game balls as they flow through the flow region, making the game balls more noticeable. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the front component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the front component. Additionally, the reduced weight of the front component eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered with a specific component, preventing it from being touched by fingers, workers' fingers do not come into contact with the recess during manufacturing. This eliminates the need for careful handling to prevent contamination, simplifying the process and further reducing costs.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the convex portion, it becomes possible to reflect decorative light on the surface of the recess. This allows the reflected light from the recess to illuminate the flow area where the game balls circulate, strongly attracting the player's attention with the illuminated decoration of the extended portion. Additionally, by reflecting decorative light from the recess of the extended portion to create illumination, the game balls flowing in front of the extended portion are illuminated from behind, making the game balls appear as silhouettes and making their movement easier to see.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"Front plates facing each other in front of the extension portion, with a gap between them that allows game balls to flow down,
A second protrusion is formed on the front plate, which affects the flow velocity of the game balls,
Equipped with,
A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, and a decorative member is provided on the back side of the second recess, and the second recess is made inaccessible to the touch.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "second protrusion" may have a similar shape to the protrusion on the extension, or it may have a different shape. Similarly, the "second recess" may have a similar shape to the second protrusion, or it may have a different shape.

Furthermore, examples of "decorative components" include "sheet-like decorative stickers with a predetermined decoration" and "plate-like decorative panels with a predetermined decoration."

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine comprises a front plate facing the extension portion, spaced apart to allow the game balls to flow down, and a second protrusion formed on the front plate that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, and a decorative member is provided on the back side of the second recess, making the second recess inaccessible to the touch (see the description of the front plate 2571, the front plate protrusion 2594b, the front plate recess 2595b, and the front decorative part 2572 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, the extensions provided on the center component and front member have protrusions, and recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions. Furthermore, a front plate is provided in front of the extensions, and a second protrusion is provided on the front plate, with a second recess on the back of the second protrusion. As a result, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the protrusions and recesses, as well as the shapes of the second protrusion and second recess, are visible, and these shapes act as decoration, thereby enhancing the decorative effect. In this case, the recesses are made inaccessible to the fingers by specific components, and the second recess is also made inaccessible to the fingers by decorative components. Therefore, during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, the fingers of the workers will not come into contact with the recesses or second recess and become dirty, improving the appearance and ensuring that the decorative effect of the recesses and second recess is reliably achieved. Therefore, even though the center component, the extension of the front component, and the front panel do not have the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional gaming machines, the presence of convex and concave sections, second convex and second concave sections, and decorative elements creates an unprecedented decorative effect. This allows players to recognize that the gaming machine has a completely different design from previous machines, thus providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, by providing a protrusion on the extended portion that constitutes the rear wall of the flowing region through which the game balls flow, and a second protrusion on the front plate that constitutes the front wall of the flowing region, the game balls can be made to swing back and forth by the protrusions and the second protrusion. Compared to the case where only protrusions are provided, the flowing speed of the game balls can be further reduced, making the movement of the game balls more visible. In this case, a recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and a second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion. Therefore, it is possible to display unprecedented decorations using the protrusions and recesses, and the second protrusion and second recess. This decoration can be used to decorate the rear and front of the game balls flowing through the flowing region, making the game balls more noticeable. As a result, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls flowing through the flowing region, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by providing a second recess on the back of the second protrusion on the front panel, the weight of the front panel can be reduced compared to a design without the second recess. This allows for lighter center components and front parts, and reduces the cost associated with them. Additionally, the lighter weight of the center components and front parts eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered by a specific component to prevent finger contact, and the second recess is also covered by a decorative component to prevent finger contact, workers' fingers do not touch the recesses or second recesses during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to avoid soiling the recesses and second recesses is unnecessary, simplifying the process and thus suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, by providing a second recess on the back of the second protrusion on the front panel, it becomes possible to reflect decorative light on the surface of the second recess. This allows the reflected light from the second recess to illuminate the area in front of the flow region where the game balls circulate, making the game balls appear to sparkle as they move through the flow region. If the recess in the rear extension of the front panel also reflects decorative light, the reflected light from both the second recess and the recess can illuminate both the front and rear of the flow region where the game balls circulate. This allows the game balls to appear silhouetted due to the illumination of the recesses, while simultaneously appearing to sparkle due to the illumination of the second recess. This allows players to enjoy the illumination along with the movement of the game balls, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"A gap is provided between the extension and the specific member."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, a gap is provided between the extended portion and the specific member (see the description regarding the specific member 2519 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since a gap is provided between the extended portion and the specific component, if the specific component has decorative properties, the decorative elements of the specific component are set back from the protruding and recessed portions, creating a sense of depth and enhancing the decorative effect. Furthermore, if the specific component is an LED substrate with multiple LEDs mounted on it, the LED substrate is set back from the extended portion, making the electronic components mounted on the LED substrate less visible. This allows the decorative effect of the protruding and recessed portions to be more easily achieved, while the gap between the extended portion and the specific component facilitates heat dissipation from the multiple LEDs.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"Multiple protrusions are provided, and some of them have specific protrusions on their back side where the recesses are not provided."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, multiple protrusions are provided, and some of these protrusions have a specific protrusion on the back side that does not have a recess (see the description regarding the specific protrusion 2596 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, some of the multiple protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have a recess on the back side. In other words, protrusions with a recess on the back side and protrusions without a recess on the back side (specific protrusions) are mixed together. As a result, the shape visible from the front differs between the protrusions with a recess on the back side and the specific protrusions without a recess on the back side. This allows for a variation in the visible decoration compared to a case where only multiple protrusions with a recess on the back side are provided.

Furthermore, when reflecting decorative light in a recessed area, the back side of a specific protrusion cannot reflect the decorative light in the same way as the recessed area. Therefore, the manner of luminous decoration can be made different between the protruding area and the specific protruding area.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented ornamentation while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 corresponds to the game board of the solution, the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment corresponds to the front member of the solution, the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400, the attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517 of the center mechanism 2500, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the exit passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 correspond to the flow region of the solution, the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400, the flange portion 2511b of the center mechanism, and the rear plate portion 2592 correspond to the extension portion of the solution, and the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center mechanism 2500 correspond to the front plate of the solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the inflow restriction portion 2511c of the center component 2500 corresponds to the peripheral wall portion of the solution, the protrusion 2594, rear plate protrusion 2594a, and front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment correspond to the protrusion portion of the solution, the front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment corresponds to the second protrusion portion of the solution, the recess 2595, rear plate recess 2595a, and front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment correspond to the recess portion of the solution, the front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment corresponds to the second recess portion of the solution, the attacker decorative substrate 2443, substrate cover 2444, specific member 2519, and rear decorative portion 2573 in this embodiment correspond to the specific member of the solution, and the decorative member 2445 and front decorative portion 2572 in this embodiment correspond to the decorative member of the solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) provided on the center mechanism 2500 of the game board 5 is provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a, and a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. Furthermore, a front plate 2571 is provided in front of the flange portion 2511b, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, as well as the shapes of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b, are visible, and these shapes act as decoration, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect. In this case, because the specific member 2519 makes the rear plate recess 2595a inaccessible to the touch, the worker's fingers will not touch and contaminate the rear plate recess 2595a during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), thus improving the appearance and ensuring that the decorative effect of the rear plate recess 2595a is reliably achieved. Therefore, even though the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center mechanism 2500 are not provided with ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 show unprecedented decorations created by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and front plate recess 2595b. This makes it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, in the center mechanism 2500, a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided on the flange portion 2511b that constitutes the rear wall of the flow region (ball passage 2591) through which the game ball B flows, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571 that constitutes the front wall of the flow region. As a result, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b allow the game ball B to swing back and forth. Compared to the case where only the protrusions are provided, the flow speed of the game ball B can be further reduced, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. In this configuration, a recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and a recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. This allows for unprecedented decoration using the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b. This decoration allows for the decoration of the rear and front of the game ball B as it flows through the flow area, making the game ball B more noticeable. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B as it flows through the flow area can be enjoyed by the player, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the center component 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to cases where the recesses are not provided, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, making the center component 2500 lighter and reducing the cost associated with the center component 2500. In addition, because the center component 2500 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that was required in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, since the rear plate recess 2595a is covered by a specific member 2519 so that it cannot be touched by fingers, the worker's fingers do not touch the rear plate recess 2595a during manufacturing. Therefore, it is not necessary to work carefully to prevent the rear plate recess 2595a from getting dirty, making the work easier and suppressing an increase in costs.

Furthermore, the base plate 2441 (rear plate portion 2592) provided on the attacker unit 2400 of the game board 5 is provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a, and a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. In addition, a front plate 2442 is provided in front of the base plate 2441, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2442, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the shapes of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, as well as the shapes of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b, are visible, and these shapes act as decoration, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect. In this case, the rear plate recess 2595a is made inaccessible to the fingers by the attacker decorative substrate 2443, and the front plate recess 2595b is made inaccessible to the fingers by the decorative member 2445. Therefore, during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the fingers of the worker will not come into contact with the rear plate recess 2595a or the front plate recess 2595b and become dirty, thus improving the appearance and ensuring that the decorative effect of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b is reliably achieved. Therefore, even though the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 do not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the attacker unit 2400 exhibits unprecedented decorations due to the rear plate protrusion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a, the front plate protrusion 2594b and front plate recess 2595b, and the decorative member 2445. This makes it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the player's attention.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400, a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided on the base plate 2441 that constitutes the rear wall of the flow region (door-top passage section 2416) through which the game ball B flows, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2442 that constitutes the front wall of the flow region. As a result, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b allow the game ball B to swing back and forth, which further reduces the flow speed of the game ball B compared to the case where only protrusions are provided, making the movement of the game ball B easier to see. In this configuration, a recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and a recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. This allows for unprecedented decoration using the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b. This decoration allows for the decoration of the rear and front of the game ball B as it flows through the flow area, making the game ball B more noticeable. Therefore, the movement of the game ball B as it flows through the flow area can be enjoyed by the player, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2441 has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2442 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Compared to a case where the recesses are not provided, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, making the attacker unit 2400 lighter and reducing the cost associated with the attacker unit 2400. In addition, because the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that was required in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, since the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b are covered by the attacker decorative substrate 2443 and decorative member 2445, preventing them from being touched by fingers, the worker's fingers will not touch the rear plate recess 2595a or front plate recess 2595b during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to prevent contamination of the rear plate recess 2595a is unnecessary, making the work easier and thus suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, because a gap is provided between the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker decorative substrate 2443, the attacker decorative substrate 2443 is separated from the base plate 2441, making it difficult to see electronic components such as LEDs and resistors mounted on the attacker decorative substrate 2443. This makes it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595, and the gap between the base plate 2441 and the attacker decorative substrate 2443 allows heat from the multiple LEDs to dissipate more easily.

[29-8e-5c. Summary C]
(Background of the technical features)
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, it has been proposed to incorporate large decorative elements to enhance their appeal to players and make them more likely to choose a particular machine to play (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-154728). However, in conventional gaming machines like those described in the patent document, while the large decorative elements create a strong initial impact, some players may quickly become accustomed to them, making them less likely to choose a machine to play. Furthermore, large decorative elements increase manufacturing costs and weight, requiring reinforcement to accommodate them, thus increasing the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the following approach aims to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented design while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
An extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and the shape of the recess is substantially similar to the shape of the protrusion.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "convex portion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "quadrilateral," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, which has a game area through which game balls flow. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center feature. The center feature extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, an extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view and has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extension portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave shape of the recess is substantially similar to the convex shape of the convex portion (see the description of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a of the center feature 2500 in the chapter [29-8e. Passageway Decoration Part], Figure 329, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion forming the flow area of the center mechanism, a recess is provided on the back of the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. The recess shape is approximately similar to the protruding portion. Therefore, when viewed from the front, compared to a case where only the convex portion is present, the shape of the recess, which is similar to the shape of the convex portion, overlaps, making the convex portion appear doubled. Furthermore, because the convex and recess are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of misalignment between the overlapping shapes of the convex and recess changes, making the decoration created by the convex and recess appear to move. Consequently, even without the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional gaming machines on the extension portion of the center mechanism, the unprecedented dynamic decoration created by the convex and recess is visible. This allows players to perceive this gaming machine as having a completely different decoration from previous machines, providing a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts players' attention.

Furthermore, in the extension of the center feature, since the shape of the recess is approximately similar to the shape of the convex part, the thickness from the surface of the convex part to the surface of the concave part is approximately constant. Therefore, when the convex part is impacted by the game ball, the impact is suppressed from concentrating in one area, making the convex part (extension) less susceptible to damage. Also, because the thickness between the convex and concave parts is approximately constant, shrinkage of the resin during the molding of the center feature can be reduced, resulting in a center feature with less distortion. Moreover, the center feature, which is close to the player and highly visible, can be made to look aesthetically pleasing with less distortion.

Furthermore, because protrusions are provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by these protrusions, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, since recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions, a unique decorative effect can be created using the protrusions and recesses. This decoration can be used to adorn the area behind the game balls as they flow through the flow region, making the game balls more noticeable. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the center component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center component. Additionally, the reduced weight of the center component eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered with a specific component to prevent contact with the fingers, workers' fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to avoid soiling the recess is unnecessary, simplifying the process and further reducing costs.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is,
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
A flange portion extending outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view,
Equipped with,
It is a component different from the aforementioned center component and includes a front member that is fixed to the game board,
The front member is,
An extension portion that extends along the game board and has a flow region on the front side through which game balls flow down,
A protrusion is formed on the extension portion, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
It has,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and the shape of the recess is substantially similar to the shape of the protrusion.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "front components" include: "components with at least a large prize entry point (e.g., attacker unit)", "components with at least a special prize entry point (e.g., special prize entry point unit)", "components with at least a starter prize entry point (e.g., starter entry point unit)", "components with at least a gate (e.g., gate unit)", and "components with at least a general prize entry point or a regular prize entry point (e.g., prize entry point unit)".

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side having a game area through which game balls flow, the game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center component, the center component extends forward from the game board and has a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, and a flange portion that extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a front member which is a different member from the center component and is fixed to the game board, the front member extends along the game board and has an extension portion that has a flow area on the front side through which game balls flow down, and a convex portion formed on the extension portion that affects the flow velocity of the game balls, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the convex portion (see the description of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and rear plate concave portion 2595a of the attacker unit 2400, Figure 329, etc. in the chapter [29-8e. Passageway decoration portion] in [Modes for carrying out the invention]).

According to this configuration, in the extension portion that forms the flow region of the front member, which is different from the center mechanism, a recess is provided on the back of the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. Since the shape of the recess is approximately similar to the shape of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, compared to a case where only the convex portion is provided, the shape of the recess, which is similar to the shape of the convex portion, overlaps, making the convex portion appear doubled. Furthermore, because the convex portion and the recess are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of misalignment between the overlapping shapes of the convex portion and the recess changes, making the decoration created by the convex and recess appear to be moving. Therefore, even though the extension portion of the front member does not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional gaming machines, the unprecedented movement created by the convex and recess is visible. This makes it possible to make players recognize that this gaming machine has a completely different decoration from previous gaming machines, providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, in the extended portion of the front member, since the shape of the recess is approximately similar to the shape of the convex portion, the thickness from the surface of the convex portion to the surface of the recess is approximately constant. Therefore, when an impact is applied to the convex portion by contact with a game ball, the concentration of that impact on one area is suppressed, making the convex portion (extension portion) less susceptible to damage. Also, because the thickness between the convex and recess is approximately constant, shrinkage of the resin during the molding of the front member can be reduced, resulting in a less distorted and more aesthetically pleasing product.

Furthermore, because protrusions are provided in the flow region where the game balls flow, the flow speed of the game balls can be reduced by these protrusions, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. At the same time, since recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions, a unique decorative effect can be created using the protrusions and recesses. This decoration can be used to adorn the area behind the game balls as they flow through the flow region, making the game balls more noticeable. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow region, thus preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the front component can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the front component. Additionally, the reduced weight of the front component eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered with a specific component, preventing it from being touched by fingers, workers' fingers do not come into contact with the recess during manufacturing. This eliminates the need for careful handling to prevent contamination, simplifying the process and further reducing costs.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"Front plates facing each other in front of the extension, with a gap between them that allows game balls to flow down,
A second protrusion is formed on the front plate, which affects the flow velocity of the game balls,
Equipped with,
A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, and the concave shape of the second recess is substantially similar to the convex shape of the second protrusion.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "second protrusion" may have a similar shape to the protrusion on the extension, or it may have a different shape from the protrusion.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine comprises a front plate facing the extension portion, spaced apart to allow the game balls to flow down, and a second protrusion formed on the front plate that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, and the concave shape of the second recess is substantially similar to the convex shape of the second protrusion (see the description of the front plate 2571, the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the front plate recess 2595b in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

In this configuration, the extensions provided on the center piece and front member have protrusions, and recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions. Furthermore, a front plate is provided in front of the extensions, and a second protrusion is provided on the front plate, and a second recess is provided on the back of the second protrusion. The recess shape of the recess is approximately similar to the protruding shape of the protrusion, and the recess shape of the second recess is approximately similar to the protruding shape of the second protrusion. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the shape of the protrusion and the similar shape of the recess overlap, making the protrusion appear doubled, and the shape of the second protrusion and the similar shape of the second recess overlap, making the second protrusion appear doubled. Since the protrusion and recess, and the second protrusion and second recess are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of misalignment between the overlapping shapes of the protrusion and recess, and between the overlapping shapes of the second protrusion and second recess, changes, making the decorations of the protrusion and recess, and the second protrusion and second recess, appear to be moving. Therefore, even though the center component, the extension of the front component, and the front panel do not have the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional gaming machines, the presence of unprecedented, dynamic decorations created by the convex and concave parts, and the second convex and second concave parts, allows players to perceive this gaming machine as having completely different decorations from previous machines, thus providing a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, in the front plate located in front of the center component and the extended portion of the front member, the shape of the second recess is made approximately similar to the shape of the second protrusion. Therefore, the thickness from the surface of the second protrusion to the surface of the second recess is approximately constant. This prevents the impact from concentrating in one area when the game ball strikes the second protrusion, making the second protrusion (front plate) less susceptible to damage. Additionally, because the thickness between the second protrusion and the second recess is approximately constant, shrinkage of the resin during molding of the front plate can be reduced, resulting in a front plate that is close to the player and highly visible, with minimal distortion and a pleasing appearance.

Furthermore, by providing a second recess on the back of the second protrusion on the front panel, the weight of the front panel can be reduced compared to a design without the second recess. This allows for lighter center components and front parts, and reduces the cost associated with them. Additionally, the lighter weight of the center components and front parts eliminates the need for reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines, thus suppressing increases in overall machine costs. Moreover, because the recess is covered by a specific component to prevent finger contact, and the second recess is also covered by a decorative component to prevent finger contact, workers' fingers do not touch the recesses or second recesses during manufacturing. Therefore, careful handling to avoid soiling the recesses and second recesses is unnecessary, simplifying the process and thus suppressing cost increases.

Furthermore, in the center mechanism and front components, a protrusion is provided on the extended portion that forms the rear wall of the flow area where the game balls flow, and a second protrusion is provided on the front plate that forms the front wall of the flow area. This allows the game balls to swing back and forth due to the movement of the protrusions and the second protrusion. Compared to the case where only protrusions are provided, this further reduces the flow speed of the game balls, making their movement more visible. In this case, a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, and a second recess is provided on the back of the second protrusion. This allows for unprecedented decoration using the protrusions and recesses, and the second protrusion and second recess, enabling decoration of the rear and front of the game balls as they flow through the flow area, making the game balls more noticeable. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow area, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"Multiple protrusions are provided, and some of them have specific protrusions on their back side where the recesses are not provided."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, multiple protrusions are provided, and some of these protrusions have a specific protrusion on the back side that does not have a recess (see the description regarding the specific protrusion 2596 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, some of the multiple protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have a recess on the back side. In other words, protrusions with a recess on the back side and protrusions without a recess on the back side (specific protrusions) are mixed together. As a result, the shape visible from the front differs between the protrusions with a recess on the back side and the specific protrusions without a recess on the back side. This allows for greater variation in the visible decoration compared to a case where only multiple protrusions with a recess on the back side are provided.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"The recess is designed to reflect decorative light on its surface."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, the recess is designed to reflect decorative light on its surface (see the description regarding the rear plate recess 2595a in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, decorative light can be reflected off the surface of the recesses provided on the extensions of the center component and front member. Therefore, the reflected light from these recesses can illuminate and decorate the flow area through which the game balls pass. Consequently, the extensions of the center component and front member exhibit a unique, dynamic decoration created by the combination of protrusions and recesses. Furthermore, the illumination of the recesses makes it possible to make players recognize this game machine as having a completely different design from conventional gaming machines, thus providing a highly appealing gaming machine that strongly attracts players' attention.

Furthermore, the center mechanism and front components utilize protrusions in the flow area to slow down the speed of the game balls, making their movement more visible. In this mechanism, recesses are provided on the back of the protrusions, reflecting decorative light to create an illuminated effect. This illuminated effect allows the game balls flowing through the flow area to appear as silhouettes, further enhancing visibility of their movement. Therefore, the movement of the game balls as they flow through the flow area can be enjoyed by the player, preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with decorations that enhance its appeal to players through unprecedented ornamentation while simultaneously reducing its weight.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 corresponds to the game board of the solution, the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment corresponds to the front member of the solution, the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400, the attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517 of the center mechanism 2500, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the exit passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 correspond to the flow region of the solution, the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400, the flange portion 2511b of the center mechanism, and the rear plate portion 2592 correspond to the extension portion of the solution, and the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center mechanism 2500 correspond to the front plate of the solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the inflow restriction portion 2511c of the center component 2500 corresponds to the peripheral wall portion of the solution, the protrusion 2594, rear plate protrusion 2594a, and front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment correspond to the protrusion portion of the solution, the front plate protrusion 2594b in this embodiment corresponds to the second protrusion portion of the solution, the recess 2595, rear plate recess 2595a, and front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment correspond to the recess portion of the solution, and the front plate recess 2595b in this embodiment corresponds to the second recess portion of the solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flange portion 2511b provided on the center mechanism 2500 is provided with a rear plate projection 2594a, and a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a. Furthermore, a front plate 2571 is provided in front of the flange portion 2511b, and a front plate projection 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b, and the concave shape of the rear plate recess 2595a is The protruding shape of the rear plate projection 2595a is approximately similar to the shape of the front plate recess 2595b, and the recessed shape of the front plate recess 2595b is approximately similar to the protruding shape of the front plate projection 2595b. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the rear plate projection 2594a appears doubled because the shape of the rear plate projection 2594a overlaps with the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a which is similar to the shape of the rear plate projection 2594b, and the front plate projection 2594b appears doubled because the shape of the front plate recess 2595b which is similar to the shape of the front plate projection 2594b overlaps with the shape of the front plate recess 2595b. Furthermore, since the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of misalignment between the overlapping rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the degree of misalignment between the overlapping front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b, respectively, changes in each case. As a result, the decorations formed by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b appear to be moving. Therefore, even though the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center component 2500 do not have ostentatious decorations like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and front plate recess 2595b create an unprecedented dynamic decoration. This makes it possible to make players recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, in the flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571 of the center component 2500, the shapes of the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b are substantially similar to the shapes of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, the thickness from the surface of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b to the surface of the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b is substantially constant. Therefore, when the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b are impacted by the contact of the game ball B, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the impact on a part of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b (flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571) from being concentrated on a part of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b (flange portion 2511b and front plate 2571) is less likely to be damaged. Furthermore, by making the thickness between the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b approximately constant, shrinkage of the resin can be reduced during the molding of the center component 2500 and the front plate 2571. This allows for the creation of a center component 2500 and front plate 2571 with less distortion, and also makes the center component 2500 and front plate 2571, which are close to the player and highly visible, more aesthetically pleasing with less distortion.

Furthermore, in the center component 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to a design without these recesses, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, resulting in a lighter center component 2500 and a reduction in its cost. Additionally, because the center component 2500 is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the base plate 2441 provided in the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a rear plate projection 2594a, and a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate projection 2594a. In addition, a front plate 2442 is provided in front of the base plate 2441, and a front plate projection 2594b is provided on the front plate 2442, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate projection 2594b, and the concave shape of the rear plate recess 2595a is the rear plate projection 2595a The protruding shape and the recessed shape of the front plate recess 2595b are roughly similar in shape, and the recessed shape of the front plate convex 2595b are roughly similar in shape to the protruding shape of the front plate convex 2595b. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the shape of the rear plate convex 2594a overlaps with the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a which is similar in shape, causing the rear plate convex 2594a to appear doubled. Similarly, the shape of the front plate convex 2594b overlaps with the shape of the front plate recess 2595b which is similar in shape, causing the front plate convex 2594b to appear doubled. Furthermore, since the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are separated in the front-to-back direction, as the player's eye position moves, the degree of misalignment between the overlapping rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the degree of misalignment between the overlapping front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b, respectively, changes in each case. As a result, the decorations formed by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b appear to be moving. Therefore, even though the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400 do not have ostentatious decorative elements like those found in conventional pachinko machines, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and front plate recess 2595b create a unique, dynamic decorative effect. This allows players to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a completely different design from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

Furthermore, in the base plate 2441 and front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400, the shapes of the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b are substantially similar to the shapes of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, the thickness from the surface of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b to the surface of the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b is substantially constant. Therefore, when an impact is applied to the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b by contact with the game ball B, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the impact in one area, making it difficult to damage the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b (base plate 2441 and front plate 2442). Furthermore, by making the thickness between the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b approximately constant, shrinkage of the resin can be reduced during the molding of the base plate 2441 and the front plate 2442. This allows for the creation of a base plate 2441 and a front plate 2442 with less distortion, and also makes the base plate 2441 and the front plate 2442, which are close to the player and highly visible, more aesthetically pleasing with less distortion.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2441 has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2442 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to a design without these recesses, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, resulting in a lighter attacker unit 2400 and a reduction in its cost. Additionally, because the attacker unit 2400 is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because decorative light can be reflected off the surface of the flange portion 2511b of the center mechanism 2500 and the attacker unit 2400, and the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the base plate 2441, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a can illuminate and decorate the flow area through which the game balls B pass. Therefore, the flange portion 2511b of the center mechanism 2500 and the attacker unit 2400, and the base plate 2441, display an unprecedented dynamic decoration created by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a. Additionally, the rear plate recess 2595a illuminates and decorates, making it possible to make players recognize that this pachinko machine 1 has a completely different decoration from conventional pachinko machines, thus providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract players' attention.

[29-8e-5d. Summary D]
(Background of the technical features)
It is known that some amusement machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a prize-winning device such as an attacker unit that has a movable piece that moves between an "easy-to-win" state in which it is easy for game balls to enter the prize-winning opening and an "impossible-to-win" state in which it is impossible to win (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-118989). In the technology described in the patent document, an LED board is provided behind the prize-winning opening, and the player is entertained by the way the LEDs on the LED board emit light. However, in conventional technologies such as those described in the patent document, the LEDs simply light up, so some players may quickly get tired of looking at them, which could diminish their interest in the prize-winning opening and reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following measures is to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players and prevent a decline in their enjoyment by attracting their attention to the prize winning area.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game area is equipped with a prize-winning device that awards prizes to players when game balls enter the winning area.
The prize-winning device,
A movable piece that switches the state of the prize-winning slot, which allows game balls to enter, between an easy-to-enter state and a non-enter state,
A protrusion that alters the direction of the flow of the game ball,
Equipped with,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "winning slots" include: "a starting winning slot (second starting slot) where a small number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and a special symbol lottery is held," "a large winning slot where a large number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball," and "a special prize winning slot where a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and the winning game balls can be supplied to the V-winning slot or losing slot," etc.

Furthermore, examples of "prize-winning devices" include: "an attacker unit equipped with a large prize-winning opening, in which a movable piece moves to open and close the large prize-winning opening according to the result of a lottery for special symbols drawn when a game ball enters the prize-winning opening," "a prize-winning device equipped with a special prize-winning opening, in which a movable piece moves to open and close the special prize-winning opening according to the result of a lottery for special symbols drawn when a game ball enters the prize-winning opening," and "a starting opening unit equipped with a second starting opening, in which a movable piece moves to open and close the second starting opening according to the result of a lottery for ordinary symbols drawn when a game ball passes through the gate or enters the prize-winning opening," etc.

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, examples of "protrusions and recesses" include: "those provided on extensions extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., flanges, base plates, etc.)", "those provided on a front plate positioned in front of the game board, forming a space between it and the game board through which game balls can pass", and "those provided on both extensions extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., flanges, base plates, etc.) and a front plate positioned in front of the extensions, forming a space between it and the extensions through which game balls can pass".

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side that has a game area through which game balls flow. The game area is equipped with a prize-winning device that awards prizes to the player upon successful entry of game balls. The prize-winning device includes a movable piece that switches the state of the prize-winning opening (where game balls can be entered) between an easy-to-enter state and an impossible-to-enter state, and a protrusion that changes the direction of the game ball's flow. A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess (see Chapter 29-8e. Passageway Decoration Section, Attacker Unit 2400, Figure 330, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in a prize-winning device that awards prizes upon successful entry of a game ball, decorative light can be reflected by a recess provided on the back of a protrusion that alters the direction of the game ball's flow. This reflected light can illuminate and decorate the area of the prize-winning device where the game ball flows. Because this illumination is due to reflected light from the recess, it provides a completely different illumination from that of conventional devices using direct light from LEDs, drawing the player's attention to the prize-winning device and, consequently, to the prize entry point. Furthermore, since the protrusion with the recess on its back alters the direction of the game ball's flow, it is possible to direct the game ball's flow towards the prize entry point (movable piece) or to slow down the game ball's flow speed near the prize entry point (movable piece). Therefore, the reflected light from the recess strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize entry point. Furthermore, by focusing on the prize entry point, the player experiences suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the ball will enter the entry point at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, improving the overall appearance of the prize-winning device.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protruding part, the weight of the prize-winning device can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the prize-winning device. Additionally, because the prize-winning device is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game area includes a prize slot that awards a prize to the player upon successful entry of a game ball,
A movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry opening between an easy-to-enter state and an impossible-to-enter state,
The movable piece communicates with the prize entry opening, and a ball passage through which game balls can flow is formed.
A protrusion formed in the ball passage that affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
Equipped with,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "winning slots" include: "a starting winning slot (second starting slot) where a small number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and a special symbol lottery is held," "a large winning slot where a large number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball," and "a special prize winning slot where a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and the winning game balls can be supplied to the V-winning slot or losing slot," etc.

Furthermore, examples of "ball passages" include those "provided in the center mechanism located at the opening of the game board" and those "provided in a front member different from the center mechanism." Also, the "ball passage" may be located either upstream or downstream of the movable piece.

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, examples of "protrusions and recesses" include "those provided on the rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) forming the rear wall of the spherical passage," "those provided on the front plate portion (e.g., front plate) forming the front wall of the spherical passage," and "those provided on both the rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) forming the rear wall of the spherical passage and the front plate portion (e.g., front plate) forming the front wall of the spherical passage."

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side that has a game area through which game balls flow. The game area includes a prize entry point that awards a prize to the player upon successful entry of a game ball, a movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry point between an easy-entry state and an impossible-entry state, a ball passage that communicates with the prize entry point via the movement of the movable piece and through which game balls can flow, and a protrusion formed in the ball passage that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess (see the section [29-8e. Passage Decoration], Attacker Passage 2517a, Figure 328, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in a ball passage that can communicate with the prize winning slot located in the game area through which the game balls circulate, decorative light can be reflected by a recess provided on the back of a protrusion that affects the flow speed of the game balls. As a result, the ball passage through which the game balls circulate can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Since this illumination decoration is due to reflected light from the recess, it can display an illumination decoration that is completely different from that of conventional direct light from LEDs, and can draw the player's attention to the ball passage and, consequently, to the prize winning slot. Furthermore, since the protrusion with a recess on the back can affect the flow speed of the game balls, the flow speed of the game balls circulating in the ball passage can be slowed down, making the game balls circulating in the ball passage easier to see. Therefore, the reflected light from the recess strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize entry point. Furthermore, by focusing on the prize entry point, the player experiences suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the ball will enter the entry point at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, improving the overall appearance of the component with the spherical passage.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the component with the ball passage can be reduced compared to a design without a recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with that component. Additionally, because the component with the ball passage can be made lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"A decorative member is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and the recess is made inaccessible to the finger by the decorative member."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "decorative components" include "sheet-like decorative stickers with predetermined decorations," "plate-like decorative panels with predetermined decorations," "decorative sheets or decorative cells with predetermined decorations," and "decorative bodies with three-dimensional decorations," etc.

Furthermore, "inaccessible to fingers" means that the fingers of a worker or other person cannot touch the recessed area. Examples include: "where the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member are in contact with each other with no gap between them," "where a gap exists between the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member, but a finger cannot enter (a gap too small to fit a finger)," and "where a gap large enough for a finger to enter exists between the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member, but the outer perimeter is surrounded by the decorative member or other member, preventing a finger from entering the gap."

By the way, when a recess is created on the back of a protruding part, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty when a worker's fingers touch it during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, it will look unsightly. Furthermore, because the recessed area makes cleaning difficult, careful work is required to prevent the recess from getting dirty, potentially increasing working time and thus costs.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine is equipped with a decorative member on the back of the protruding portion, and the recessed portion is made inaccessible to the finger by the decorative member (see the description regarding the decorative member 2445 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, in the prize-winning device that awards prizes when a game ball enters a prize, and in the ball passage that can communicate with the prize-winning opening located in the game area through which the game balls circulate, decorative light can be reflected by recesses provided on the back of protrusions that change the direction of flow of the game balls or affect the flow velocity. As a result, the parts of the prize-winning device through which the game balls flow and the ball passage can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Since this illumination decoration is due to the reflection of light from the recesses, it can display an illumination decoration that is completely different from that of conventional direct light from LEDs, and can draw the player's attention to the prize-winning device, the ball passage, and ultimately the prize-winning opening. At the same time, since the recesses are made inaccessible to the fingers by the decorative members, workers' fingers will not touch and contaminate the recesses during the manufacturing of the game machine, and the decorative light can be reflected well in the recesses, ensuring that the decorative effect of the illumination decoration is reliably achieved. Furthermore, the protruding portion with a recess on the reverse side can alter the direction of the game ball's flow and affect its velocity. This allows for directing the game ball's flow towards the prize entry point (movable piece) or slowing its velocity near the prize entry point. As a result, the reflected light from the recess strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize entry point. This focus on the prize entry point creates suspense and excitement for the player, as they wonder whether the game ball will enter the point at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This enhances the player's enjoyment and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the decoration created by the shapes of the convex and concave sections, the decorative elements also contribute to the overall appearance of the components containing the prize-winning devices and ball pathways.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The game board further comprises an extension portion that extends parallel to the game board, and the extension portion is provided with the convex portion and the concave portion."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "extended portion" can refer to: "a rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.)", "a front plate portion positioned in front of the game board and forming a space between it and the game board through which game balls can pass (e.g., front plate)", or "both the rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) and the front plate portion positioned in front of the rear plate portion and forming a space between it and the rear plate portion through which game balls can pass (e.g., front plate)".

According to the configuration of means 4, the gaming machine further includes an extension portion that extends parallel to the gaming board, and the extension portion is provided with a convex portion and a concave portion (see the description of the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, when the extension portion with the convex and concave parts is provided on the rear plate portion (flange portion or base plate) along the game board, the convex and concave parts are provided behind the circulating game balls, and the concave parts reflect decorative light and are illuminated, so that the player's attention is strongly drawn to the prize winning area, and the illuminated decoration makes the game balls circulating in front appear as silhouettes, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. On the other hand, when the extension portion with the convex and concave parts is provided on the front plate portion (front plate) along the game board, the convex and concave parts are provided in front of the circulating game balls, and the concave parts reflect decorative light and are illuminated, so that the reflected light from the concave parts provided in front of the circulating game balls makes the game balls appear to sparkle, strongly drawing the player's attention to the prize winning area. Furthermore, if the extension portion, which has both protrusions and recesses, consists of both a rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and a front plate portion positioned in front of the rear plate portion, creating a space between them through which the game balls can pass, then the protrusions and recesses will be provided on both the front and rear of the passing game balls. This allows the game balls to appear silhouetted due to the luminous decoration in the recesses of the rear plate portion, while the luminous decoration in the recesses of the front plate portion makes them appear to sparkle. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the winning slot and allows them to enjoy the movement of the game balls, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the extension portion with protrusions and recesses consists of both a rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and a front plate portion positioned in front of the rear plate portion, forming a space between them through which game balls can flow, and if the protrusions of the rear plate portion and the front plate portion are arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of game ball flow, then, as described above, the luminous decoration of the recesses can strongly attract the player's attention to the prize entry point, and the speed of game ball flow near the prize entry point can be significantly reduced, for example, increasing the dwell time of the game ball on the movable piece. This creates suspense and excitement for the player as they wonder whether the game ball will enter the prize entry point at the moment when the movable piece makes it easy to enter, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"Multiple protrusions are provided, and some of them have specific protrusions on their back side where the recesses are not provided."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, multiple protrusions are provided, and some of these protrusions have a specific protrusion on the back side that does not have a recess (see the description regarding the specific protrusion 2596 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, some of the multiple protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on their back side. In other words, protrusions with recesses on their back side and protrusions without recesses on their back side (specific protrusions) are mixed together. As a result, the back side of the specific protrusions cannot reflect decorative light like a recess, allowing for different luminous decoration characteristics between the protrusions and the specific protrusions.

Furthermore, since the shape visible from the front differs between a protrusion with a recess on the reverse side and a specific protrusion without a recess on the reverse side, it is possible to create variations in the decoration visible from the front compared to a case where only multiple protrusions with recesses on the reverse side are provided.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players and prevent a decline in their enjoyment by attracting their attention to the prize winning area.

(15-17c. Relationship between the means of solving the 17th technical feature and the embodiment)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 (game board 5C) corresponds to the game board of the above solution, the second start opening 2004 and the big prize opening 2005 in this embodiment correspond to the prize openings of the above solution, the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment corresponds to the prize winning device of the above solution, the second start opening door 2411 and the big prize opening door 2413 in this embodiment correspond to the movable piece of the above solution, the door upper passage section 2416 and the attacker passage section 2517a of the center mechanism 2500 in this embodiment correspond to the ball passage of the above solution, the base plate 2441, front plate 2442, flange section 2511b, and front plate 2571 in this embodiment correspond to the extensions of the above solution, and the attacker decorative substrate 2443, decorative member 2445, and front decorative section 2572 in this embodiment correspond to the decorative members of the above solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protrusions 2594, rear plate protrusions 2594a, and front plate protrusions 2594b correspond to the protrusions of the above-described solution, and the recesses 2595, rear plate recesses 2595a, and front plate recesses 2595b in this embodiment correspond to the recesses of the above-described solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the attacker unit 2400 that awards a prize when a game ball B enters the target area, decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b, which change the direction of the flow of the game ball B. As a result, the door-top passage section 2416 through which the game ball B flows in the attacker unit 2400 can be illuminated by this reflected light. Since this illumination is due to the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b, it can display an illumination that is completely different from the illumination caused by direct light from LEDs in the conventional way, and can draw the player's attention to the attacker unit 2400 and, by extension, to the large prize opening 2005. Furthermore, the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2594b, which are provided on the back side, can alter the direction of flow of the game ball B, thereby slowing down the flow speed of the game ball B near the large prize opening 2005 (large prize opening door 2413). As a result, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005, and by focusing on the large prize opening 2005, the player can experience suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the game ball B will enter the opening at the moment when the large prize opening door 2413 moves and the large prize opening 2005 becomes easy to enter, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the ball passage 2517 (attacker passage section 2517a) through which the game balls B in the center mechanism 2500 flow and where the large prize opening 2005 is located, decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b, which affect the flow velocity of the game balls B. As a result, the attacker passage section 2517a through which the game balls B flow can be illuminated and decorated by this reflected light. Since this illumination decoration is due to the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b, it can display an illumination decoration that is completely different from that of conventional machines that use direct light from LEDs, and can draw the player's attention to the attacker passage section 2517a, and by extension, to the large prize opening 2005. Furthermore, the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2594b, which are located on the back side of the rear plate and front plate recess 2595b respectively, can influence the flow speed of the game ball B. This slows down the flow speed of the game ball B circulating in the attacker passage 2517a, making the game ball B more visible. Thus, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005. By focusing on the large prize opening 2005, the player experiences suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the game ball B will enter the opening at the moment the large prize opening door 2413 opens to an easy-to-enter state. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the attacker passage section 2517a, where the attacker unit 2400 and the large prize opening 2005 of the center mechanism 2500 are located, decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b, which are provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and front plate protrusion 2594b, which change the direction of flow of the game ball B or affect the flow velocity. As a result, the door-up passage section 2416 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker passage section 2517a can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Since this illumination decoration is due to the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and front plate recess 2595b, it can display an illumination decoration that is completely different from the direct light from LEDs used in the past, and can draw the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005. In this case, the decorative members 2445 and the like make the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b inaccessible to the fingers. Therefore, during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the fingers of the workers will not touch and contaminate the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b. This allows the decorative light to be reflected well in the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, ensuring that the decorative effect of the luminous decoration is reliably achieved. Furthermore, the rear plate protrusions 2594a and the front plate protrusions 2594b, which have the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b on their back sides, can change the direction of flow of the game balls B or affect their flow velocity. This makes it possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game balls B near the large prize opening 2005 (large prize opening door 2413). Therefore, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005. Furthermore, by focusing on the large prize opening 2005, the player can experience suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the game ball B will enter the opening at the moment the large prize opening door 2413 moves, making it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in addition to the decoration provided by the shapes of the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b, and the rear plate recesses 2595a and front plate recesses 2595b, the decorative members 2445 and the like also contribute to the decoration, thus improving the appearance of the components on which the attacker unit 2400 and attacker passage 2517a are provided.

Furthermore, both the rear plate portion 2592, such as the base plate 2441 and flange portion 2511b that extend along the front of the game panel 1100, and the front plate portion 2593, such as the front plate 2442 and front plate 2571, which are positioned in front of the rear plate portion 2592 and form a space between them through which the game ball B can pass, are provided with protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595. Since the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595 are provided on both the front and rear of the passing game ball B, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recess 2595a on the rear plate portion 2592 makes the game ball B appear as a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the front plate recess 2595b on the front plate portion 2593 makes it appear to sparkle. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005 and allows them to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, because the rear plate protrusion 2594a of the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate protrusion 2594b of the front plate portion 2593 are arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of flow of the game ball B, as described above, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005. Moreover, it significantly reduces the flow speed of the game ball B near the large prize opening 2005, allowing for a longer dwell time of the game ball B on the large prize opening door 2413. This creates suspense and excitement for the player regarding whether or not the game ball B will enter the large prize opening 2005 at the moment when the large prize opening door 2413 becomes easily accessible, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2441 has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2442 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to a design without these recesses, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, resulting in a lighter attacker unit 2400 and a reduction in its cost. Additionally, because the attacker unit 2400 is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the center component 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, compared to a design without these recesses, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, resulting in a lighter center component 2500 and a reduction in its cost. Additionally, because the center component 2500 is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[29-8e-5e. Summary E]
(Background of the technical features)
In amusement machines such as pachinko machines, it is known that multiple protrusions are provided in the region where the game balls flow down in order to reduce the flow velocity of the game balls (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-196204). However, in conventional techniques such as those described in the Patent Document, although the flow velocity of the game balls can be reduced, the movement of the game balls is monotonous because the protrusions are all of similar magnitude and are not entertaining for the players.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy the movement of the game balls while simultaneously reducing their downward velocity.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back,
The opening is equipped with a center fitting,
The center component is
A peripheral wall portion that extends forward from the game board and prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening,
An extension portion that extends outward from the peripheral wall portion in a front view,
A flow region is provided on the outside of the aforementioned peripheral wall portion, through which the game balls flow down,
Equipped with,
The flow-down region is provided with a first protrusion that extends forward from the game board and through which the game balls flow down its front surface, and a second protrusion that further protrudes from the front surface of the first protrusion and affects the flow of the game balls."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "first protrusion" can be defined as having a smooth and flat front surface that protrudes forward, or a flat surface with fine irregularities due to a textured finish or similar process. Furthermore, the first protrusion may or may not have a first recess on its back side that is recessed forward. Moreover, it is desirable that the first protrusion has a size of at least one game ball in the direction of game ball circulation.

Furthermore, the "second protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "quadrilateral," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves." Additionally, the second protrusion may be present as a single portion on the first protrusion, as multiple portions on the first protrusion, or it may span both the extension and the first protrusion. The second protrusion may also be large enough for the game ball to cross over, or large enough to prevent it from crossing over. Moreover, the second protrusion may or may not have a second recess on its back side that extends forward.

Furthermore, the "first and second protrusions" only need to be located in the area where the game balls flow down. They may be located on the extension of the center mechanism (for example, the flange), or on a different part from the extension of the center mechanism. Also, the extension may have a front plate with a gap allowing the game balls to pass through, or it may not have a front plate.

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side, where a game area through which game balls flow is provided. The game board has an opening that penetrates from front to back, and the opening is equipped with a center feature. The center feature extends forward from the game board and includes a peripheral wall portion that prevents game balls from entering the inside of the opening, an extension portion that extends outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view, and a flow area provided outside the peripheral wall portion through which game balls flow. The flow area is provided with a first protrusion that projects forward from the game board and through which game balls flow, and a second protrusion that further projects from the front of the first protrusion and affects the flow of game balls (see the description of passage decoration portion 2590A, Figures 335 to 337, etc. in the section [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, a first protrusion is provided in the flow region where the game balls flow down the center mechanism, influencing the ball's flow speed. The game balls contact the step at the upstream end of the first protrusion, and the presence of the first protrusion reduces the front-to-back depth of the protrusion. This slows down the ball's flow speed, making it easier to see. Furthermore, a second protrusion is provided on the front of the first protrusion. By contacting the second protrusion after contacting the first, the ball's flow speed is further reduced, making its movement easier to see and allowing players to enjoy watching it.

Furthermore, when a game ball strikes the first or second protrusion, it bounces forward and collides with the glass or front panel. The resulting impact sound draws the player's attention to the first protrusion, allowing them to focus on the game ball circulating through the first and second protrusions and enjoy its movement. If only glass is provided in front of the first protrusion, the impact sound of the game ball becomes louder, further drawing the player's attention to the first protrusion. Even if a front panel is provided in front of the first protrusion, designing the panel to produce sound upon impact with the game ball can achieve the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, because the second protrusion is provided on the front of the first protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combined shapes of the first and second protrusions, compared to cases where only the first or second protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide a first recess on the back side of the first protrusion. This creates a more complex shape when viewed from the front compared to a case where only the first protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect and improving the overall appearance of the center piece.

Furthermore, as described above, when a first recess is provided on the back side of the first protrusion, it is desirable that the surface of the second recess be capable of reflecting decorative light. This allows the first recess on the back side of the first protrusion to reflect decorative light, enabling the first protrusion to be illuminated from the rear by the reflected light. This illumination allows the game ball flowing down the first protrusion to appear as a silhouette, making the movement of the game ball more visible. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the movement of the game ball as it flows down the flow area, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the size of the first protrusion in the direction of ball flow greater than that of a single ball. This allows for securing a certain area within the ball flow region where the depth in the front-to-back direction is narrow, enabling deceleration of the balls. Additionally, it allows for the provision of multiple second protrusions within the first protrusion. Therefore, while the first protrusion sufficiently decelerates the ball's flow speed, the multiple second protrusions can impart various movements to the balls, resulting in a game machine that offers a more enjoyable experience of ball movement.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A first recess is provided on the back side of the first protrusion."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "first recess" may be a concave shape that is substantially similar to the convex shape of the first protrusion, or it may be a completely different concave shape that differs from the convex shape of the first protrusion. Furthermore, examples of concave shapes for the first recess include arrow shapes, star shapes, geometric patterns, letter shapes, character shapes, etc. The first recess may also be reflective of decorative light, or it may have a textured finish.

According to the configuration of means 2, a first recess is provided on the back side of the first protrusion (see the description regarding the first recess 2595e in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the first recess is provided on the back of the first protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the first protrusion and the first recess, compared to a case where only the first protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect and improving the overall appearance of the center piece.

Furthermore, by providing a first recess on the back of the first protrusion, the weight of the center component can be reduced compared to a design without the first recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center component. Additionally, because the center component is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The first protrusion is,
"Having the size of one or more game balls in the direction of game ball circulation."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, the first protrusion has a size of one or more game balls in the direction of game ball circulation (see the description regarding the first protrusion 2594c in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the first protrusion is made to be at least the size of one game ball in the direction of game ball flow, it is possible to secure a certain area in the game ball flow region where the depth in the front-to-back direction is narrow and the game ball can be decelerated. Furthermore, it becomes possible to provide multiple second protrusions on the first protrusion. This allows the first protrusion to sufficiently decelerate the flow speed of the game ball, while the multiple second protrusions can impart various movements to the game ball, thus providing a game machine that allows players to enjoy the movement of the game ball more.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The back surface of the aforementioned first protrusion is capable of reflecting decorative light."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, to enable reflection of decorative light, a second recess for reflecting decorative light may be provided on the back of the first protrusion, or a highly reflective sheet may be provided on the back of the first protrusion.

According to the configuration of means 4, the back surface of the first protrusion is capable of reflecting decorative light (see the description regarding the first recess 2595e in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, a first protrusion is provided in the flow region where the game balls flow down the center mechanism, influencing the ball's flow speed. The game balls contact the step at the upstream end of the first protrusion, and the presence of the first protrusion reduces the front-to-back depth of the front side of the protrusion, thus slowing down the ball's flow speed. Furthermore, a second protrusion is provided on the front of the first protrusion. By contacting the second protrusion after contacting the first protrusion, the ball's flow speed is further reduced, making its movement more visible. In this configuration, the back surface of the first protrusion is reflective, allowing the first protrusion to be illuminated from behind. This illumination makes the game balls flowing down the first protrusion appear as silhouettes, further enhancing visibility of their movement. Therefore, players can enjoy watching the game balls flow down the flow region, preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the flow region of the center mechanism where the game balls flow, decorative light can be reflected from the back of the first protrusion that affects the ball's flow speed. This reflected light allows the flow region to be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even without the ostentatious decorative elements found in conventional gaming machines, the flow region illuminates and is decorated, making it possible to make players perceive this gaming machine as having a completely different design from previous machines. This provides a highly appealing gaming machine that can strongly attract players' attention.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "second recess" can simply be a concave shape; examples include a shape similar to the "second protrusion," or a shape different from the "second protrusion." Furthermore, the "second recess" may be capable of reflecting decorative light.

According to the configuration of means 5, a second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion (see the description regarding the second recess 2595f in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since a second recess is provided on the back of the second protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the second protrusion and the second recess, compared to a case where only the second protrusion is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect and improving the overall appearance of the center piece.

Furthermore, by providing a second recess on the back of the second protrusion, the weight of the center component can be reduced compared to a design without the second recess, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs associated with the center component. Additionally, because the center component is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in overall gaming machine costs.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that allows players to enjoy the movement of the game balls while simultaneously reducing their downward velocity.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 corresponds to the game board of the solution, the flange portion 2511b and rear plate portion 2592 of the center mechanism 2500 in this embodiment correspond to the extension portion of the solution, the inflow restricting portion 2511c in this embodiment corresponds to the peripheral wall portion of the solution, the ball passage 2591 in this embodiment corresponds to the flow region of the solution, the first protrusion 2594c in this embodiment corresponds to the first protrusion of the solution, the second protrusion 2594d in this embodiment corresponds to the second protrusion of the solution, the first recess 2595e in this embodiment corresponds to the first recess of the solution, and the second recess 2595f in this embodiment corresponds to the second recess of the solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a first protrusion 2594c is provided in the ball passage 2591 through which the game balls B flow in the center mechanism 2500, which affects the flow speed of the game balls B. As the game balls B come into contact with the step at the upstream end of the first protrusion 2594c, and the presence of the first protrusion 2594c reduces the depth in the front-to-back direction on the front side of the first protrusion 2594c, the flow speed of the game balls B is reduced, making them easier to see. Furthermore, a second protrusion 2594d is provided in front of the first protrusion 2594c, so after coming into contact with the first protrusion 2594c, the game balls B come into contact with the second protrusion 2594d, further reducing the flow speed of the game balls B, making the movement of the game balls B easier to see and allowing players to enjoy watching the movement of the game balls B.

Furthermore, when the game ball B strikes the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d, the game ball bounces forward and collides with the glass in front. The resulting impact sound can draw the player's attention to the first protrusion 2594c, drawing their attention to the game ball B circulating through the first and second protrusions 2594c and allowing them to enjoy the movement of the game ball.

Furthermore, because the second protrusion 2594d is provided on the front surface of the first protrusion 2594c, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combined shapes of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, compared to the case where only the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, because the first recess 2595e is provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible compared to the case where only the first protrusion 2594c is provided. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, enhancing the decorative effect and improving the appearance of the center component 2500.

Furthermore, since the first recess 2595e on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c is capable of reflecting decorative light, the first protrusion 2594c can be illuminated from the rear by the reflected light. This illumination allows the game ball B flowing down in front of the first protrusion 2594c to be seen in silhouette, making the movement of the game ball B more visible. Therefore, the player can enjoy watching the movement of the game ball B flowing down the ball passage 2591, thus preventing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, because the size of the flow direction of the game ball B in the first protrusion 2594c is larger than that of a single game ball B, it is possible to secure a certain area in the flow region of the game ball B (ball passage 2591) where the depth in the front-to-back direction is narrow and the game ball B can be decelerated. Additionally, it becomes possible to provide multiple second protrusions 2594d in the first protrusion 2594c. Therefore, while the flow speed of the game ball B can be sufficiently reduced by the first protrusion 2594c, various movements can be imparted to the game ball B by the multiple second protrusions 2594d, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows for a more enjoyable experience of the game ball B's movement.

Furthermore, because the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f are provided on the back sides of the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d, the weight of the center mechanism 2500 can be reduced compared to a design without the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f, resulting in a lighter design and a reduction in the cost associated with the center mechanism 2500. Additionally, because the center mechanism 2500 is lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[29-8e-5f. Summary F]
(Background of the technical features)
It is known that some amusement machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a prize-winning device such as an attacker unit that has a movable piece that moves between an "easy-to-win" state in which game balls can easily enter the prize-winning opening and an "impossible-to-win" state in which it is impossible to win (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-118989). In the technology described in the patent document, an LED board is provided behind the prize-winning opening, and the player is entertained by the way the LEDs on the LED board emit light. However, in conventional technologies such as those described in the patent document, since the LEDs simply light up, some players may quickly get tired of looking at them, which could diminish their interest in the prize-winning opening and reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following measures is to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players and prevent a decline in their enjoyment by attracting their attention to the prize winning area.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game area includes a prize slot that awards a prize to the player upon successful entry of a game ball,
A movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry opening between an easy-to-enter state and an impossible-to-enter state,
A protrusion formed upstream of the movable piece, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
Equipped with,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "winning slots" include: "a starting winning slot (second starting slot) where a small number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and a special symbol lottery is held"; "a large winning slot where a large number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball"; and "a special prize winning slot where a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and the winning game balls can be supplied to the V-winning slot or losing slot."

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, examples of "protrusions and recesses" include: "thin plate-shaped rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board," "thin plate-shaped front plate portion (e.g., front plate) positioned in front of the game board and forming a space between it and the game board through which game balls can pass," and "thin plate-shaped rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board, and thin plate-shaped front plate portion (e.g., front plate) positioned in front of the rear plate portion and forming a space between it and the rear plate portion through which game balls can pass."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side that has a game area through which game balls flow. The game area includes a prize entry point that awards a prize to the player upon successful entry of a game ball, a movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry point between an easy-entry state and an impossible-entry state, and a protrusion formed upstream of the movable piece that affects the flow velocity of the game balls. A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess (see Chapter 29-8e. Passageway Decoration Section, the passageway decoration section 2590 of the attacker unit 2400, Figure 330, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, a protrusion is provided upstream of a movable piece that switches the prize-winning opening in the game area through which the game balls circulate between an easy-to-win state and a non-win-state. This protrusion affects the flow speed of the game balls, and a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion to reflect decorative light. Because the decorative light can be reflected by the recess, the area around the movable piece can be illuminated with this reflected light. Since this illumination is due to reflected light from the recess, it is possible to create an illumination that is completely different from that of conventional designs using direct light from LEDs, and can draw the player's attention to the movable piece and, consequently, to the prize-winning opening. Furthermore, the protrusion with a recess on its back is located upstream of the movable piece and can affect the flow speed of the game balls, thus slowing down the flow speed of the game balls and making the game balls flowing toward the movable piece (prize-winning opening) more visible. In addition, because the protrusion is located upstream of the movable piece, it is possible to increase the dwell time of the game balls on the movable piece, for example. Therefore, the reflected light from the recess strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize entry point. Furthermore, by focusing on the prize entry point, the player experiences suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the ball will enter the entry point at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, improving the overall appearance of the component with both protrusions and recesses.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the components with protrusions and recesses can be reduced compared to components without recesses, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs. Additionally, because the components with protrusions and recesses are lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Method 2: In a gaming machine,
"A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The aforementioned game area includes a prize slot that awards a prize to the player upon successful entry of a game ball,
A movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry opening between an easy-to-enter state and an impossible-to-enter state,
A protrusion formed downstream of the movable piece, which affects the flow velocity of the game ball,
Equipped with,
A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "winning slots" include: "a starting winning slot (second starting slot) where a small number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and a special symbol lottery is held"; "a large winning slot where a large number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball"; and "a special prize winning slot where a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed upon winning a game ball, and the winning game balls can be supplied to the V-winning slot or losing slot."

Furthermore, the "protrusion" can be any shape that can influence the flow velocity of the game ball upon contact. Examples of side cross-sectional shapes include "semicircular," "triangular," "trapezoidal," "square," "polygonal (such as a pentagon or hexagon)," and "irregular shapes formed by free curves."

Furthermore, the "recess" simply needs to be concave; examples include a shape similar to the "convex part" or a shape different from the "convex part." It is also desirable for the "recess" to have a curved surface or multiple planes at different angles, which allows for the reflection of light in various directions.

Furthermore, examples of "protrusions and recesses" include: "thin plate-shaped rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board," "thin plate-shaped front plate portion (e.g., front plate) positioned in front of the game board and forming a space between it and the game board through which game balls can pass," and "thin plate-shaped rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board, and thin plate-shaped front plate portion (e.g., front plate) positioned in front of the rear plate portion and forming a space between it and the rear plate portion through which game balls can pass."

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is equipped with a game board on the front side that has a game area through which game balls flow. The game area includes a prize entry point that awards a prize to the player upon entry of a game ball, a movable piece that switches the state of the prize entry point between an easy-entry state and an impossible-entry state, and a protrusion formed downstream of the movable piece that affects the flow velocity of the game ball. A recess is provided on the back side of the protrusion, allowing decorative light to be reflected from the surface of the recess (see the section "[29-8e. Passageway Decoration Section]" in "[Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]," the description of the attacker passage section 2517a and the right edge passage section 2517b, Figure 328, etc.).

According to this configuration, a protrusion is provided downstream of the movable piece that switches the prize entry opening in the game area through which the game balls circulate between an easy-to-enter state and a non-entering state. This protrusion affects the flow velocity of the game balls, and a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion to reflect decorative light. Because the decorative light can be reflected by this recess, the area around the movable piece can be illuminated with this reflected light. Since this illumination is due to reflected light from the recess, it presents a completely different type of illumination compared to conventional designs using direct light from LEDs, drawing the player's attention to the movable piece and, consequently, to the prize entry opening.

Furthermore, because the protrusion is located downstream of the movable piece, if the protrusion and recess are located downstream of the prize entry point in the game area, and if another prize entry point is located further downstream of the movable piece, the recess will illuminate the area between the prize entry point with the movable piece and the other prize entry point, drawing the player's attention to both entry points. Even if the game ball does not enter the prize entry point with the movable piece, there is still a possibility of it entering the other prize entry point downstream, allowing the player to continue enjoying the game. In this case, since the protrusion with the recess on its reverse side is located upstream of the other prize entry point, the protrusion can slow down the flow speed of the game ball moving towards the other prize entry point, increasing the player's anticipation of entering that point.

Furthermore, since the protrusion is located downstream of the movable piece, when the protrusion and recess are placed inside the prize entry opening, the reflected light from the recess can illuminate and decorate the prize entry opening, strongly attracting the player's attention to the opening. This creates suspense and excitement for the player as they focus on the prize entry opening, wondering whether the ball will enter at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment. Additionally, when the protrusion with a recess on its reverse side is placed inside the prize entry opening, the protrusion slows down the flow speed of the ball once it enters the opening, making the prize entry opening (and its interior) less susceptible to damage.

Furthermore, because a recess is provided on the back of the protrusion, when viewed from the front, a more complex shape is visible due to the combination of the protrusion's and recess's shapes, compared to a case where only the protrusion is present. This complex shape acts as a decorative element, improving the overall appearance of the component with both protrusions and recesses.

Furthermore, by providing a recess on the back of the protrusion, the weight of the components with protrusions and recesses can be reduced compared to components without recesses, resulting in a lighter design and lower costs. Additionally, because the components with protrusions and recesses are lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional gaming machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing the increase in the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"A decorative member is provided on the back side of the protrusion, and the recess is made inaccessible to the finger by the decorative member."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "decorative components" include "sheet-like decorative stickers with predetermined decorations," "plate-like decorative panels with predetermined decorations," "decorative sheets or decorative cells with predetermined decorations," and "decorative bodies with three-dimensional decorations," etc.

Furthermore, "inaccessible to fingers" means that the fingers of a worker or other person cannot touch the recessed area. Examples include: "where the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member are in contact with each other with no gap between them," "where a gap exists between the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member, but a finger cannot enter (a gap too small to fit a finger)," and "where a gap large enough for a finger to enter exists between the back surface of the protrusion and the decorative member, but the outer perimeter is surrounded by the decorative member or other member, preventing a finger from entering the gap."

By the way, when a recess is created on the back of a protruding part, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty when a worker's fingers touch it during the manufacturing of the gaming machine, it will look unsightly. Furthermore, because the recessed area makes cleaning difficult, careful work is required to prevent the recess from getting dirty, potentially increasing working time and thus costs.

According to the configuration of means 3, the gaming machine is equipped with a decorative member on the back of the protruding portion, and the recessed portion is made inaccessible to the finger by the decorative member (see the description regarding the decorative member 2445 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, near the movable piece that switches the prize entry opening between an easy-to-enter state and an impossible-to-enter state, decorative light can be reflected by a recess provided on the back of a protrusion that changes the direction of flow of the game ball or affects its flow velocity. As a result, the area around the movable piece (prize entry opening) can be illuminated with this reflected light. Since this illumination is due to reflected light from the recess, it provides a completely different illumination from that of conventional direct light from LEDs, drawing the player's attention to the movable piece and, consequently, the prize entry opening. In this case, since the recess is made inaccessible to the fingers by the decorative member, workers' fingers will not touch and contaminate the recess during the manufacturing of the game machine, and the decorative light can be reflected well in the recess, ensuring that the decorative effect of the illumination is reliably achieved. Furthermore, since the protrusion with a recess on its back can affect the flow velocity of the game ball, it is possible to direct the direction of flow of the game ball towards the prize entry opening (movable piece) or to decelerate the flow velocity of the game ball near the prize entry opening (movable piece). Therefore, the reflected light from the recess strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize entry point. Furthermore, by focusing on the prize entry point, the player experiences suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the ball will enter the entry point at the moment the movable piece makes it easier for the ball to enter. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in addition to the decoration provided by the shapes of the protrusions and recesses, the decorative elements can also be used to enhance the appearance of the components with protrusions and recesses.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The game board is further provided with a thin, plate-shaped passage plate portion extending parallel to it, and the convex portion and the concave portion are provided on the passage plate portion."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, the "passageway plate section" can refer to: "a rear plate section extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., a flange section, a base plate, etc.)", "a front plate section positioned in front of the game board and forming a space between it and the game board through which game balls can pass (e.g., a front plate)", or "both the rear plate section extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., a flange section, a base plate, etc.) and the front plate section positioned in front of the rear plate section and forming a space between it and the rear plate section through which game balls can pass (e.g., a front plate)".

According to the configuration of means 4, the gaming machine further includes a thin, plate-shaped passage plate portion extending parallel to the game board, and the passage plate portion is provided with convex and concave portions (see the description of the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, when the passage plate portion with the convex and concave sections is the rear plate portion (flange portion or base plate) provided along the game board, the convex and concave sections are provided behind the circulating game balls. As a result, the concave sections reflect decorative light and are illuminated, strongly attracting the player's attention to the prize winning area. The illuminated decoration also makes the game balls circulating in front appear as silhouettes, making the movement of the game balls easier to see. On the other hand, when the passage plate portion with the convex and concave sections is the front plate portion (front plate) provided along the game board, the convex and concave sections are provided in front of the circulating game balls. As a result, the concave sections reflect decorative light and are illuminated, making the game balls appear to sparkle due to the reflected light from the concave sections located in front of the circulating game balls. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the prize winning area. Furthermore, if the passage plate section, which has protrusions and recesses, consists of both a rear plate section extending along the front of the game board and a front plate section positioned in front of the rear plate section, creating a space between them through which game balls can pass, then protrusions and recesses will be provided on both the front and rear of the passing game balls. This allows the game balls to appear silhouetted through the luminous decorations in the recesses of the rear plate section, while the luminous decorations in the recesses of the front plate section make them appear to sparkle. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the winning area and allows them to enjoy the movement of the game balls, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the passage plate section, which has protrusions and recesses, consists of both a rear plate section extending along the front surface of the game board and a front plate section positioned in front of the rear plate section, creating a space between them through which game balls can flow, and if the protrusions of the rear plate section and the front plate section are arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of game ball flow upstream of the movable piece, then, as described above, the luminous decoration of the recesses can strongly attract the player's attention to the prize entry point, and the speed of game ball flow near the prize entry point can be significantly reduced, allowing the game ball to remain on the movable piece for a longer time. This creates suspense and excitement for the player as they wonder whether the game ball will enter the prize entry point at the moment when the movable piece makes it easy to win, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"Multiple protrusions are provided, and some of them have specific protrusions on their back side where the recesses are not provided."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, multiple protrusions are provided, and some of these protrusions have a specific protrusion on the back side that does not have a recess (see the description regarding the specific protrusion 2596 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, some of the multiple protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on their back side. In other words, protrusions with recesses on their back side and protrusions without recesses on their back side (specific protrusions) are mixed together. As a result, the back side of the specific protrusions cannot reflect decorative light like a recess, allowing for different luminous decoration characteristics between the protrusions and the specific protrusions.

Furthermore, since the shape visible from the front differs between a protrusion with a recess on the reverse side and a specific protrusion without a recess on the reverse side, it is possible to create variations in the decoration visible from the front compared to a case where only multiple protrusions with recesses on the reverse side are provided.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain players and prevent a decline in their enjoyment by attracting their attention to the prize winning area.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 corresponds to the game board of the above solution, the second start opening 2004 and the big prize opening 2005 in this embodiment correspond to the prize openings of the above solution, the second start opening door 2411 and the big prize opening door 2413 in this embodiment correspond to the movable pieces of the above solution, the base plate 2441, the front plate 2442, the flange portion 2511b, and the front plate 2571 in this embodiment correspond to the passage plate portion of the above solution, and the attacker decorative substrate 2443, decorative member 2445, and front decorative portion 2572 in this embodiment correspond to the decorative members of the above solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the protrusions 2594, rear plate protrusions 2594a, and front plate protrusions 2594b correspond to the protrusions of the above-described solution, and the recesses 2595, rear plate recesses 2595a, and front plate recesses 2595b in this embodiment correspond to the recesses of the above-described solution.

(Characteristic effects of technical features)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a protrusion 2594 that affects the flow velocity of the game balls B is provided upstream of the large prize opening door 2413, which switches the large prize opening 2005, located in the game area 5a through which the game balls B flow, between an easy-to-win state and an impossible-to-win state. Furthermore, a recess 2595 that reflects decorative light is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. As a result, the decorative light can be reflected by the recess 2595, and the area around the large prize opening door 2413 can be illuminated with this reflected light. Since this illumination is due to the reflected light from the recess 2595, it is possible to create an illumination that is completely different from that caused by direct light from LEDs in the past, and can attract the attention of players to the large prize opening door 2413 and, by extension, the large prize opening 2005. Furthermore, the protrusion 2594, which has a recess 2595 on its back side, is located upstream of the large prize opening door 2413 and can affect the flow speed of the game balls B. This slows down the flow speed of the game balls B, making it easier to see the game balls B flowing toward the large prize opening door 2413 (large prize opening 2005). Also, because the protrusion 2594 is located upstream of the large prize opening door 2413, it is possible to increase the dwell time of the game balls B on the large prize opening door 2413. Therefore, the reflected light from the recess 2595 strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005, and by having the player focus on the large prize opening 2005, the player can feel the suspense and excitement of whether or not the game ball B will enter the large prize opening 2005 at the moment when the large prize opening door 2413 moves and the large prize opening 2005 becomes easy to enter, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a protrusion 2594 that affects the flow speed of the game balls B is provided downstream of the second start opening door 2411 or the large prize opening door 2413, which switches the second start opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005, located in the game area 5a through which the game balls B flow, between an easy-to-win state and a non-winning state. Additionally, a recess 2595 that reflects decorative light is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594. Because the decorative light can be reflected by the recess 2595, the area around the second start opening door 2411 (second start opening 2004) and the area around the large prize opening door 2413 (large prize opening 2005) can be illuminated and decorated with this reflected light. Because this luminous decoration uses reflected light from the recess 2595, it can create a completely different luminous decoration compared to conventional designs using direct light from LEDs, thereby drawing the player's attention to the second start gate door 2411, the main prize gate door 2413, and ultimately to the second start gate 2004 and the main prize gate 2005.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 2594 is provided downstream of the second start opening door 2411 or the big prize opening door 2413, if the protrusion 2594 and recess 2595 are located downstream of the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 in the game area 5a, and if another prize opening (for example, a regular prize opening 2011, a second start opening 2004, a big prize opening 2005, etc.) is provided further downstream of the second start opening door 2411 or the big prize opening door 2413, the recess 2595 will illuminate the area between the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 with the second start opening door 2411 or the big prize opening door 2413 and the other prize opening, thereby directing the player's attention to both prize openings. Furthermore, even if the game ball B does not enter the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005, which have the second starting opening door 2411 or the large prize opening door 2413, there is still a possibility that it will enter another prize opening downstream, allowing the player to continue enjoying the game. In this case, since the protrusion 2594, which has a recess 2595 on its back side, is located upstream of the other prize opening, this protrusion can slow down the flow speed of the game ball B as it is moving towards the other prize opening, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of entering that prize opening.

Furthermore, since the protrusion 2594 is provided downstream of the second start opening door 2411 or the big prize opening door 2413, when the protrusion 2594 and recess 2595 are provided inside the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, the reflected light from the recess 2595 can illuminate and decorate the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, strongly attracting the player's attention to the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005. At the same time, by focusing on the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005, the player can feel the suspense and excitement of whether or not the game ball B will enter at the moment when the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 becomes easy to enter due to the movement of the second start opening door 2411 or the big prize opening door 2413, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, if the protrusion 2594, which has a recess 2595 on its back side, is provided inside the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005, the protrusion 2594 slows down the flow speed of the game ball B that enters the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005, thereby making it less likely for the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005 to be damaged.

Furthermore, since the recess 2595 is made inaccessible to the touch by the decorative member 2445 and the front decorative part 2572, etc., the worker's fingers will not touch and contaminate the recess 2595 during the manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1. This allows the decorative light to be reflected well in the recess 2595, ensuring that the decorative effect of the luminous decoration is reliably achieved. In addition, since the protrusion 2594, which has the recess 2595 on its back side, can affect the flow speed of the game ball B, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball B near the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 (second start opening door 2411 or big prize opening door 2413). Therefore, the reflected light from the recess 2595 strongly attracts the player's attention to the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005. Furthermore, by focusing on the second starting opening 2004 or the large prize opening 2005, the player can experience suspense and excitement as they wonder whether the game ball B will enter the opening at the moment when the second starting opening door 2411 or the large prize opening door 2413 makes entry easier. This keeps the player entertained and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, in addition to the decoration provided by the shapes of the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595, the decorative members 2445 and the like also contribute to the decoration, thus improving the appearance of the members on which the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595 are provided.

Furthermore, both the rear plate portion 2592, which is provided along the front of the game panel 1100, and the front plate portion 2593, which is positioned in front of the rear plate portion 2592 and forms a space between it and the rear plate portion 2592 through which the game ball B can pass, are provided with protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595. Since the protrusions 2594 and recesses 2595 are provided on both the front and rear of the passing game ball B, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recess 2595a on the rear plate portion 2592 makes the game ball B appear as a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the front plate recess 2595b on the front plate portion 2593 makes it appear to sparkle. This strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005 and allows them to enjoy the movement of the game ball B, thus preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, on the upstream side of the large prize opening door 2413, the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b of the front plate 2593 are arranged alternately (staggered) with respect to the direction of flow of the game ball B. As described above, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b strongly attracts the player's attention to the large prize opening 2005. Moreover, the flow speed of the game ball B near the large prize opening 2005 can be significantly reduced, increasing the dwell time of the game ball B on the large prize opening door 2413. This creates suspense and excitement for the player regarding whether or not the game ball B will enter the large prize opening 2005 at the moment when the large prize opening door 2413 becomes easily accessible, thus entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, because a recess 2595 is provided on the back side of the protrusion 2594, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the recess 2595 compared to a configuration without the recess. This allows for lighter components with the protrusion 2594 and recess 2595, and also reduces the cost associated with those components. Additionally, because the components with the protrusion 2594 and recess 2595 are lighter, the reinforcement required in conventional pachinko machines becomes unnecessary, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[29-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of game balls B within the game area 5a will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 310, etc. When assembled on the game board 5C, the center mechanism 2500 is located approximately in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown in the illustration, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the left and right outer parts and the lower part of the center mechanism 2500, and in the first nailed passage section 2517c and the second nailed passage section 2517f of the ball passage 2517. In addition, a windmill (not shown) that rotates upon contact with the game balls B is provided on the left side of the center mechanism 2500, above the side upper left unit 2300.

Below the guide passage group 2520 on the left side of the center mechanism 2500, multiple obstacle pins are provided, planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement between them and the inner rail 1002. On the left side of the center mechanism 2500 within the game area 5a, at a point below the vertical center of the inflow restriction section 2511c of the center frame 2511A, the entrance to the warp passage 2512A opens slightly upward from the left. A windmill (not shown) is provided between the warp passage 2512A and the shelf section 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300. Also, although not shown, multiple obstacle pins (so-called path pins) are provided in a diagonal arrangement from near the lower right of the windmill to near the lower left end of the stage 2513, along the lower edge of the center mechanism 2500.

A game ball B, launched to the left of the center mechanism 2500, passes through either the first guided passage 2521 or the second guided passage 2522 of the guided passage group 2520, and then, with a certain probability, enters the warp passage 2512A. In this embodiment, a game ball B guided through the second guided passage 2522 has a higher probability of entering the warp passage 2512A than a game ball B guided through the first guided passage 2521.

The game ball B that enters the warp passage 2512A is supplied to the stage 2513 located within the frame of the center mechanism 2500. It rolls horizontally across the stage 2513 and is released back into the game area 5a from either the central release section 2513a or the side release sections 2513b. Since the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 is located in the center of the game area 5a in the horizontal direction, directly above the first start opening 2002, game ball B released from the central release section 2513a is received by the first start opening 2002 with a high probability. Game ball B released from the side release sections 2513b on either side of the central release section 2513a is received by the first start opening 2002 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 of the start port unit 2100, then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, from which it is discharged downwards. When the game ball B is detected by the first start port sensor 3002, a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the player's ball count, and a lottery for the first special symbol is performed, enabling a favorable game state for the player if predetermined conditions are met (for example, the number of reserved first special symbols is less than 4). The first special symbol drawn is also referred to as the first special symbol lottery result.

Game balls B released from stage 2513 and not received by the first start opening 2002 are received by the out opening 1008 and discharged outside the game area 5a. Game balls B received by the out opening 1008 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then discharged into the first ball path 701 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

Game balls B that are driven to the left outer edge of the center mechanism 2500 and do not enter the warp passage 2512A will, with a high probability, flow to the right along the guide pins arranged diagonally along the lower edge of the center mechanism 2500 if they circulate to the right of the center of the windmill. Game balls B that circulate to the right of the center of the windmill may be received by the first start opening 2002 or the general prize opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. Also, game balls B that circulate to the right of the center of the windmill may be received by the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200. Game balls B that are not received by the first start opening 2002, the general prize opening 2001, and the sub-out opening 2021 are received by the out opening 1008 and discharged outside the game area 5a.

The game ball B, received into the general prize slot 2001, is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general prize slot sensor 3001, it is discharged downwards. When the general prize slot sensor 3001 detects game ball B, a bonus is awarded, adding a predetermined number of balls to the player's ball count.

On the other hand, if the balls circulate to the left of the windmill's center, they flow down onto the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and then flow down the shelf 2301 to the right. Game balls B that circulate to the left of the windmill's center may be received by the general prize entry opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 located in the side unit 2200. Game balls B received by the sub-out opening 2021 are guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, and discharged downwards from the back ball guidance unit 3100A. Game balls B not received by the general prize entry opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 are received by the out opening 1008 and discharged outside the game area 5a.

Next, to the right of the center mechanism 2500, a long, vertical ball passage 2517 is provided. This ball passage 2517 has, from top to bottom, a large prize opening 2005, a second starting opening 2004, and a regular prize opening 2011. Multiple obstacle pins are planted in the first pinned passage section 2517c directly above the second starting opening 2004, and in the second pinned passage section 2517f directly above the regular prize opening 2011.

When a game ball B is shot to the right into the game area 5a and enters the ball passage 2517, it first passes through the attacker passage section 2517a and then rolls along the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large prize opening 2005. The large prize opening 2005 is opened by the attacker solenoid 2414, which retracts the large prize opening door 2413 according to the first special symbol (first special draw result) drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first start opening 2002, and the second special symbol (second special draw result) drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second start opening 2004 (for example, when the drawn special symbol (special draw result) is "Big Win," "Medium Win," "Small Win," etc.). The opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 differs depending on the draw results of the first and second special symbols.

Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is open, and a game ball B is flowing (rolling) through the attacker passage 2517a, the game ball B is received by the large prize opening 2005. This allows the player to perform a "right-handed shot" so that when a special pattern that opens and closes the large prize opening 2005 is drawn, the game ball B is received by the large prize opening 2005, and the game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 where the large prize opening 2005 is located.

The game ball B received into the large prize slot 2005 is detected by the large prize slot sensor 2402 located below it. When the large prize slot sensor 2402 detects game ball B, a bonus is awarded, adding a predetermined number of balls to the player's total.

Incidentally, when a game ball B is received into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, and a "prize win" is drawn as the first or second special symbol, the large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution vane 2536 operates in a predetermined pattern.

When a "prize hit" occurs, the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 is distributed to the losing opening 2009 by the distribution vane 2536. After being detected by the losing opening sensor 2504, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, before being discharged into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

On the other hand, when a "bonus item" is hit, the game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005 is distributed to the V prize opening 2010 by the distribution vane 2536. After being detected by the V prize opening sensor 2507, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, before being discharged into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

In this embodiment, if game ball B is received in the losing slot 2009, no special benefit is given to the player. However, if game ball B is received in the V-prize slot 2010, the player is granted the benefit of winning a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds).

In the ball passage 2517, game balls B that are not accepted into the large prize opening 2005 in the attacker passage section 2517a enter the first pinned passage section 2517c via the right edge passage section 2517b. Then, when game balls B enter the second start opening passage entrance 2415 of the first pinned passage section 2517c, there is a possibility that they will be accepted into the second start opening 2004.

The second start opening 2004 is normally closed and cannot accept balls. When a game ball B is received into the regular prize opening 2011, resulting in a "regular win" being drawn as a regular symbol (regular lottery result), the start opening solenoid 2412 causes the second start opening door 2411 to retract, and the guide piece 2411a to advance, opening the second start opening 2004 to accept balls. In this state, when a game ball B enters the second start opening passage entrance 2415 and is guided by the guide piece 2411a, the game ball B is received into the second start opening 2004.

The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, then handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000, and finally discharged from the back ball guidance unit 3100A into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700. When the game ball B is detected by the second start port sensor 2401, a bonus is granted by adding a predetermined number of balls to the player's ball count. Furthermore, if predetermined conditions are met (for example, the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol is performed, enabling a favorable game state for the player. The second special symbol drawn is also referred to as the second special symbol lottery result.

Game balls B that pass through the first pinned passage section 2517c and are not received by the second starting opening 2004 enter the second pinned passage section 2517f via the left passage section 2517d or the right passage section 2517e. A normal prize entry opening 2011 is always open at the center of the lower end of the second pinned passage section 2517f, and game balls B are received by the normal prize entry opening 2011 with a certain probability.

The game ball B received in the regular prize slot 2011 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then handed over to the back ball guidance unit 3100A of the back unit 3000. After being detected by the regular prize slot sensor 3008, it is discharged into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700. When the regular prize slot sensor 3008 detects game ball B, a bonus is granted, adding a predetermined number of balls to the player's ball count. Furthermore, if predetermined conditions are met (for example, the number of reserved regular symbols is less than 4), a lottery for regular symbols is performed, enabling the acceptance of game ball B into the second start slot 2004. The drawn regular symbols are also referred to as the regular lottery results.

Then, the game balls B that were not accepted into the regular prize slot 2011 are discharged outside the game area 5a through the exit passage 2517g and the out slot 1008.

In this embodiment, during the drawing of special symbols for the first and second special symbols, where the large prize slot 2005 and the special prize slot 2006 open and close to create an advantageous game state for the player, the first start slot 2002 is always open to receive game balls B, whereas the second start slot 2004 is configured to accept game balls B in a predetermined pattern only when the normal drawing, which is conducted by receiving game balls B into the normal prize slot 2011, results in a "normal win". As a result, the first start slot 2002 has a higher probability of receiving game balls B than the second start slot 2004.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can be instructed to insert the game ball B so that it flows down the left side of the center mechanism 2500, allowing the game ball B to be received into the first start opening 2002. This allows the player to observe the movement of the game ball B guided by multiple obstacle pins, enabling them to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 using the game ball B, while also increasing their anticipation for the game ball B to be received into the first start opening 2002.

Then, when game ball B is received into the first starting opening 2002, if a "win" (for example, "minor win," "medium win," "big win," "prize win," etc.) is drawn as the result of the first special symbol lottery, the large prize opening 2005 will open and close in a predetermined pattern. This allows players to enjoy the operation of shooting game ball B towards the right side of the center prize 2500 (so-called "right-handed shooting") so that game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005, and also increases the anticipation of game ball B being received into the large prize opening 2005.

To the right of this center mechanism 2500, there is a regular prize entry opening 2011. When a game ball B is received into the regular prize entry opening 2011, a regular lottery is held, which makes the second start opening 2004 available for acceptance. Therefore, the player can be entertained by whether or not the game ball B, shot to the right, passes through the regular prize entry opening 2011, and also by whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second start opening 2004 when it becomes available.

Furthermore, when a "bonus item" is triggered, there is a possibility that the game ball B received in the large prize slot 2005 will be distributed to the V prize slot 2010 by the distribution wing 2536. Therefore, the outcome of whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the V prize slot 2010 can create suspense and excitement for the player, thus entertaining them and preventing a decline in their enjoyment.

Furthermore, when game ball B is received into the V-entry slot 2010, or when a "jackpot" is drawn as the first special symbol or second special symbol by receiving game ball B into the first start slot 2002 and the second start slot 2004, the large entry slot 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, creating an opportunity for many game balls B to be added to the player's ball count. Therefore, the player can be instructed to aim their shots at the right side of the center mechanism 2500 so that game ball B is received into the opening and closing large entry slot 2005, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in enjoyment.

[29-10. Overall configuration of the hidden unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5C will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 308 and 309. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see Figure 345) that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5C (pachinko machine 1), a general prize entry sensor 3001 that detects game balls B that have been received into the general prize entry 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, a normal prize entry sensor 3008 that detects game balls B that have been received into the normal prize entry 2011 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a 3003 that detects game balls B that have been received into the first start entry 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. The general prize entry sensor 3001, the normal prize entry sensor 3008, and the first start entry sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball guidance unit 3100A.

The back unit 3000 comprises a back box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100, is box-shaped with an open front and has a square opening 3010a in its rear wall, a lock slider 3020 that is slidably mounted on the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction and is used for attaching and detaching the display device 1600, and a back circuit board unit 3040 that is hinge-rotatably mounted on the rear wall of the back box 3010.

The back circuit board unit 3040 comprises a thin, box-shaped circuit board box 3041 with an L-shape when viewed from the front, and a panel relay board and a performance drive board (not shown) housed within the circuit board box 3041. The circuit board box 3041 has two shaft portions 3041a on the outer edges of the vertically extending L-shaped portion, which are rotatably supported by the pivot portion 3010f of the back box 3010. Furthermore, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b at the ends of the horizontally extending L-shaped portions, which engage with the locking portion (not shown) of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back ball guidance unit 3100A located at the lower part near the front end of the back box 3010, through which the game balls B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flow; a back decoration unit 3200A located behind the back ball guidance unit 3100A within the back box 3010; a back front performance unit 3300A located above the back ball guidance unit 3100A near the front end within the back box 3010; and a back rear performance unit 3400 located behind the back front performance unit 3300A within the back box 3010.

The back decoration unit 3200A, the back pre-effect unit 3300A, and the back post-effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 are capable of showing predetermined movable and illuminating effects to the player in accordance with the progress of the game.

[29-10a. Back of the box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 308 and 309. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the performance unit is mounted inside the box, while the performance display device 1600 and the back circuit board unit 3040 are mounted on the rear surface. The back box 3010 is made of transparent material. This allows the inside to be seen from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5C.

The back box 3010 is box-shaped with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall; a mounting surface 3010h provided on the lower edge of the opening 3010a on which the display device 1600 is placed; two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper edge of the opening 3010a; and a locking mechanism 3010i provided on the lower side near the center in the left-right direction of the mounting surface 3010h on which the lock slider 3020 is mounted so as to be slidable from side to side.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed as a rectangle with a length-to-width ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to be approximately the same size as the left-to-right dimension of the back wall of the back box 3010. Furthermore, the opening 3010a is positioned offset (eccentrically) upward from the vertical center of the back box 3010. The opening 3010a is formed to be the same size as the display device 1600 (a 19-inch liquid crystal display device).

The upper fixing piece 1611 of the display device 1600 is inserted from below into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010. Furthermore, the lower fixing piece 1612 of the display device 1600 can be inserted from the rear into the locking mechanism 3010i of the back box 3010 when the lock slider 3020 is slid to the left in a rear view. When the lower fixing piece 1612 is inserted into the locking mechanism 3010i, sliding the lock slider 3020 to the right in a rear view prevents the lower fixing piece 1612 from moving backward, thereby allowing the display device 1600 to be attached.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 is equipped with a flat, plate-shaped fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

Furthermore, the back box 3010 includes a pair of shaft support portions 3010f on its rear surface, capable of rotatably supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back circuit board unit 3040 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and a locking portion (not shown) provided on the rear surface opposite to the pair of shaft support portions 3010f in the left-right direction, into which the locking claw 3041b of the back circuit board unit 3040 is locked.

The back box 3010, with its pair of pivot points 3010f and locking portion, allows the back circuit board unit 3040 to be attached to the rear side, straddling the opening 3010a (display device 1600). When assembled to the game board 5C, the L-shaped vertically extending portion of the back circuit board unit 3040 is located to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in a rear view. The L-shaped horizontally extending portion of the back circuit board unit 3040 is located below the peripheral control unit 1500.

With the back box 3010 assembled to the game board 5C, the locking claw 3041b of the back circuit board unit 3040, which is locked to the locking part, can be released. By rotating the back box 3010 so that the locking claw 3041b moves backward around the shaft 3041a, the rear of the LCD spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, allowing the display device 1600 to be attached and detached without removing the back circuit board unit 3040 from the back box 3010.

[29-10b. Reverse Ball Guidance Unit]
Next, the back ball guidance unit 3100A in the back unit 3000 will be explained, mainly with reference to Figure 308, etc. The back ball guidance unit 3100A is provided at the lower part near the front end inside the back box 3010 and is attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200A. The back ball guidance unit 3100A includes a general prize entry sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received into the general prize entry 2001, a normal prize entry sensor 3008 that detects game balls B received into the normal prize entry 2011, a first start entry sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received into the first start entry 2002, and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that can detect illegal magnetism acting within the game area 5a.

The reverse ball guidance unit 3100A receives the game balls B received in the general prize slot 2001, normal prize slot 2011, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, losing slot 2009, and V prize slot 2010 of the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides them to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then discharges them into the second ball path 702 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

Furthermore, the back ball guidance unit 3100A receives the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 of the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then discharges it into the first ball path 701 of the lower circuit board unit 700.

Furthermore, the back-light induction unit 3100A is located in the center in the left-right direction and comprises a back-front decorative body 3101 modeled after a demon's face, and a back-front decorative substrate located behind the back-front decorative body 3101, on which multiple LEDs are mounted. By illuminating the LEDs on this back-front decorative substrate, the back-front decorative body 3101 can be illuminated.

[29-10c. Reverse Decorative Unit]
Next, the back decorative unit 3200A in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 308, 338, and 339. The back decorative unit 3200A is located behind the back ball guide unit 3100A inside the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface below the opening 3010a in the rear wall of the back box 3010. The back ball guide unit 3100A is attached to the front surface of this back decorative unit 3200A.

The back decoration unit 3200A comprises a back lower left decorative body 3201 and a back lower right decorative body 3202, which are formed in the shape of two halves resembling a single peach; a back lower drive mechanism (not shown) that raises and lowers the back lower left decorative body 3201 and the back lower right decorative body 3202 and rotates them in a direction that separates their upper ends; and a back lower left decorative substrate and a back lower right decorative substrate (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted to illuminate the back lower left decorative body 3201 and the back lower right decorative body 3202, respectively.

The lower left decorative element 3201 and the lower right decorative element 3202 are formed symmetrically to each other and are designed to combine (combine) to form a single decorative element resembling a peach. In their normal state, the lower left decorative element 3201 and the lower right decorative element 3202 are combined and located behind the lower front decorative element 3101, in a retracted position where they are not visible from the front. These lower left and right decorative elements 3201 and 3202 can move from their retracted position, while remaining combined, to an exposed position where they rise above the lower front decorative element 3101 and become visible from the front, using the lower drive mechanism. Furthermore, the lower left and right decorative elements 3201 and 3202 can move from their exposed position to an expanded position where their upper ends are separated, also using the lower drive mechanism.

The lower left decorative element 3201 and the lower right decorative element 3202 can be illuminated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the lower left decorative substrate and the lower right decorative substrate, respectively.

[29-10d. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the front-rear performance unit 3300A in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 308, 343, and 344. The front-rear performance unit 3300A is located above the back ball guidance unit 3100A near the front end of the back box 3010 and is attached near the front end of the back box 3010.

The back-facing display unit 3300A comprises a back-facing decorative body 3360, which is long on the left and right sides and has predetermined decorations applied to it; a back-facing decorative circuit board (not shown) located behind the back-facing decorative body 3360 and on which multiple LEDs are mounted; and a back-facing drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the back-facing decorative body 3360.

The rear front decorative element 3360 is provided to move up and down between the retracted position of its raised end and the emerging position of its lowered end by a rear front drive mechanism, and is also provided to rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. Under normal conditions, the rear front decorative element 3360 is moved to the retracted position of its raised end. In the retracted position, the rear front decorative element 3360 is located behind the decorative element 2570, which is provided along the upper edge of the center feature 2500, and is therefore not visible from the front.

The front-facing decorative element 3360, when moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the front-facing drive mechanism, is positioned approximately in the center of the frame of the center feature 2500 and becomes visible through the frame of the center feature 2500. In the appearing position, the front-facing decorative element 3360 can be rotated by the front-facing drive mechanism around an axis extending forward and backward through the center of the front-facing decorative element 3360.

Furthermore, the front-facing decorative element 3360 can be illuminated even while rotating by appropriately illuminating the LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the front-facing decorative substrate.

[29-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the rear-view performance unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 308, 340 to 342, and 344. It is mounted behind the front-view performance unit 3300A inside the rear box 3010. The rear-view performance unit 3400 includes a rear-left decorative body 3420 which has predetermined decorations and is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at its left end, a rear-right decorative body 3430 which has predetermined decorations and is mounted so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at its right end, a rear-left drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the rear-left decorative body 3420, and a rear-right drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the rear-right decorative body 3430.

The rear left decorative element 3420 and the rear right decorative element 3430 are positioned after the rear front decorative element 3360. Furthermore, the rear left decorative element 3420 is positioned after the rear right decorative element 3430. Therefore, the rear front decorative element 3360, the rear left decorative element 3420, and the rear right decorative element 3430 do not interfere with each other.

The rear left decorative element 3420 is movable between a retracted position, where its left and right ends extend horizontally at the same height, and an emerging position, where its right end is lowered and it extends diagonally downwards to the right, via a rear left drive mechanism. In its normal state, the rear left decorative element 3420 is in the horizontally extended retracted position. In this retracted position, the rear left decorative element 3420 is located behind the decorative element 2570, which is provided along the upper edge of the center component 2500, and is not visible from the front. When the rear left decorative element 3420 moves from the retracted position to the emerging position, it becomes diagonally positioned, crossing the frame of the center component 2500 from the upper left to the lower right, and becomes visible through the frame of the center component 2500.

The rear right decorative element 3430 is movable between a retracted position, where its left and right ends extend horizontally at the same height, and an emerging position, where its left end is lowered and it extends diagonally downwards to the left, via a rear right drive mechanism. In its normal state, the rear right decorative element 3430 is in the horizontally extended retracted position. In this retracted position, the rear right decorative element 3430 is located behind the decorative element 2570, which is provided along the upper edge of the center component 2500, and is not visible from the front. When the rear right decorative element 3430 moves from the retracted position to the emerging position, it becomes diagonally positioned, crossing the frame of the center component 2500 from the upper right to the lower left, and becomes visible through the frame of the center component 2500.

The rear left decorative element 3420 and the rear right decorative element 3430 can be illuminated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the rear left decorative substrate and the rear right decorative substrate, respectively, which are located on the rear side of each.

[29-11. Game board-based presentation]
Next, the effects provided by the game board 5C will be explained in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 304, 338 to 344. Figure 338 is a front view of the game board showing the lower left and lower right decorative elements of the back decorative unit in their normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Figure 339 is a front view of the game board showing the lower left and lower right decorative elements of the back decorative unit in their expanded position, compared to the state shown in Figure 338. Figure 340 is a front view of the game board showing the lower left decorative element of the back performance unit in its normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Figure 341 is a front view of the game board showing the lower right decorative element of the back performance unit in its normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Figure 342 is a front view of the game board showing the lower left and lower right decorative elements of the back performance unit in their normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position, respectively. Figure 343 is a front view of the game board showing the front decorative element of the front-back performance unit in its normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Figure 344 is a front view of the game board showing the front decorative element of the front-back performance unit and the rear left and rear right decorative elements of the rear-back performance unit in their normal state, moved from the retracted position to the appearing position, respectively.

As shown in Figure 304 and other figures, the game board 5C of this embodiment allows the rear unit 3000 and the display screen of the performance display device 1600 to be visible mainly through the frame of the center mechanism 2500. The rear lower front decorative element 3101 of the rear ball guidance unit 3100A is always visible through the frame of the center mechanism 2500 on this game board 5C.

In the normal state, the game board 5C has the lower left and lower right decorative elements 3201 and 3202 of the back decorative unit 3200A in the back unit 3000 moved to their retracted positions at the lower end, positioned behind the lower front decorative element 3101, making them invisible from the front. Furthermore, the front decorative element 3360 of the front display unit 3300A moves to its retracted position at the upper end, positioned behind the decorative element 2570 located on the upper edge of the center mechanism 2500, making it invisible from the front. Additionally, the rear left decorative element 3420 and rear right decorative element 3430 of the rear display unit 3400 move to their respective horizontally extending retracted positions, positioned behind the decorative element 2570 and the front decorative element 3360, making them invisible from the front.

In this normal state, the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center component 2500.

The game board 5C of this embodiment can perform the effects (movable effects) shown in Figures 338 and 339 using the back decoration unit 3200A of the back unit 3000. This effect involves moving the back lower left decoration 3201 and the back lower right decoration 3202 from their retracted position to their appearing position while they are combined (see Figure 338). This makes the peach-shaped decoration formed by the back lower left decoration 3201 and the back lower right decoration 3202 visible, thus making the player think that something good might happen.

Then, with the lower left decorative element 3201 and the lower right decorative element 3202 moved to their appearance positions, they are further moved to the expanded position, causing the upper ends of the lower left decorative element 3201 and the lower right decorative element 3202 to rotate so that they separate. This creates the appearance of a split and open peach, giving the player the impression that a chance has arrived.

Next, the game board 5C can execute the effect shown in Figure 340 using the rear effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. This effect moves the rear left decorative element 3420 from its retracted position to its appearance position. As a result, the rear left decorative element 3420 appears visible diagonally, crossing the frame of the center feature 2500 from the upper left to the lower right. This can surprise the player, making them believe a chance has arrived and increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, the game board 5C can execute the effects shown in Figure 341 using the rear-view effect unit 3400 of the rear-view unit 3000. This effect moves the rear-right decorative element 3430 from its retracted position to its appearance position. As a result, the rear-right decorative element 3430 appears visible diagonally, crossing the frame of the center feature 2500 from the upper right to the lower left, surprising the player and creating a sense of anticipation for the game, making them believe a chance has arrived.

Furthermore, the rear-view performance unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000 can be used to execute the performance shown in Figure 342. This performance moves the rear-left decorative element 3420 and the rear-right decorative element 3430 from their retracted positions to their appearance positions. As a result, the rear-left decorative element 3420 and the rear-right decorative element 3430 appear visibly within the frame of the center feature 2500 in a diagonally crossing manner, which can greatly surprise the player and make them believe that a chance has arrived.

Furthermore, the rear left decorative element 3420 and the rear right decorative element 3430 may be moved to their appearance positions simultaneously, or their movements may be staggered.

Furthermore, as a preview effect using the rear-view unit 3400, the rear-view left decorative element 3420 and the rear-view right decorative element 3430 may be slightly moved or vibrated from their retracted position to their appearance position.

Next, the game board 5C can execute the effects shown in Figure 343 using the front-rear effect unit 3300A of the back unit 3000. This effect moves the front-rear decorative element 3360 from its retracted position to its appearance position. As a result, the front-rear decorative element 3360 appears in the center of the frame of the center feature 2500, becoming visible and surprising the player, creating the impression that a chance has arrived and increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, as a performance using the back-front display unit 3300A, the back-front decorative element 3360 may be moved to its appearance position and then rotated. This can greatly surprise the player.

Next, the game board 5C can execute the effects shown in Figure 344 using the front-rear effect unit 3300A and the rear-rear effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. This effect moves the front-rear decorative element 3360, the left-rear decorative element 3420, and the right-rear decorative element 3430 from their retracted positions to their appearance positions. As a result, the three decorative elements—front-rear decorative element 3360, left-rear decorative element 3420, and right-rear decorative element 3430—appear overlapping within the frame of the center mechanism 2500 in an asterisk (*) shape, making them visible and creating a strong impact on the player. Furthermore, rotating the front-rear decorative element 3360 in this state can create an extremely strong impact on the player, confirming a "jackpot."

[29-12. Control configuration of the game board in the fourth embodiment]
Next, the control configuration for performing various controls on the game board 5C of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figure 345 and the like. Figure 345 is a block diagram that schematically shows the control configuration of the game board of the fourth embodiment. Note that in Figure 345, some electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the payout control board 633 are omitted. Also, the same configuration as the game board 5 of the first embodiment will not be explained.

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in the figure, consists of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the game board 5C, and a payout control board 633 mounted on the main frame 4, with each board responsible for a specific control function. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during gameplay based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511.

In the game board 5C of this embodiment, as shown in Figure 345, the main control board 1310 is connected to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2401, the general prize port sensor 3001, the normal prize port sensor 3008, the large prize port sensor 2402, the V prize port sensor 2507, the losing port sensor 2504, and so on. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor 1040, and so on. Furthermore, the main control board 1310 is connected to the start port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the distribution solenoid 2537, and so on.

[30. Outlet Signage]
[30-1. Structure of Outlet Signage]
Next, the output slot markings 2050 provided on game board 5, game board 5B, game board C, etc. (simply referred to as game board 5) will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 346. Figure 346 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the output slot markings.

The out-port indicator 2050 indicates the out-ports (e.g., out-port 1008, sub-out-port 2023, etc.) provided on the game board 5. By looking at the out-port indicator 2050, the player recognizes that the ball entry point is an out-port. As will be described in detail later, the game board 5 of this embodiment is provided with multiple sub-out-ports 2023, and the out-port indicator 2050 provided near each sub-out-port 2023 helps to prevent misidentification with the prize entry point (e.g., general prize entry point 2001).

The outlet marking 2050, as shown in the figure, consists of a marking body 2051 made up of letters and symbols, and a peripheral portion 2052 provided around the periphery of the marking body 2051. At least the marking body 2051 of the outlet marking 2050 is formed to have lower light transmittance than the surrounding area (for example, the component on which the outlet marking 2050 is attached, or decorative elements such as patterns or designs). Furthermore, the color of the peripheral portion 2052 of the outlet marking 2050 is different from the color of the marking body 2051. This peripheral portion 2052 may be transparent.

Furthermore, the "Out" slot marking 2050 is smaller than the "In" slot marking 2060, which is provided as the "IN" lettering on the front plate 2101 of the first start slot 2002.

Outlet marking 2050 can be described as "printed together with decorative patterns," "printed on stickers and applied," or "formed as convex or concave shapes during the molding of the component," etc.

Furthermore, the "Outlet" designation (2050) may include not only letters such as the alphabet, hiragana, katakana, and kanji, but also symbols or pictograms that represent the outlet.

Furthermore, the areas where the "Outlet" marking 2050 is provided include: "the front plate of the component constituting the outlet," "the base plate of the component constituting the outlet that abuts the front of the game panel," "the front of the game panel," "the rear of the transparent game panel," and "a component located behind the game panel."

Furthermore, regarding the relationship between the main body 2051 and the peripheral portion 2052 of the outlet indicator 2050, while the difference in color (hue) was explained above, other relationships are also possible, such as different light transmittances (translucency) between the main body 2051 and the peripheral portion 2052. For example, if the light transmittance decreases in the order of the outer periphery of the outlet indicator 2050, the peripheral portion 2052, and the main body 2051, then when the area behind the outlet indicator 2050 becomes bright (for example, when an LED located at the rear lights up), it can be made to appear as a light gradient.

Furthermore, the light transmittance of at least one of the marking body 2051 and peripheral edge 2052 constituting the outlet marking 2050 may be higher than the light transmittance of the surrounding area. This allows the outlet marking 2050 to light up when the area behind it becomes brighter, making it easier to recognize.

Furthermore, the outlet marking 2050 may be designed not to emit light (not glow) when illuminated by light from an LED or similar source. Examples of suitable colors for the outlet marking 2050 in this case include "black," "dark colors," "matte finishes," and "materials with a lower light reflectivity than the surrounding area."

Furthermore, the outlet marking 2050 may be designed to emit light (glow) when illuminated by light from an LED or similar source. In this case, the outlet marking 2050 may emit light from an LED located behind it, or from an LED located to the side or in front of it. Alternatively, the transparent component on which the outlet marking 2050 is mounted may be used as a light guide plate, causing the outlet marking 2050 to emit light. Examples of the outlet marking 2050 in this case include "transparent," "colored transparent," "plated," "glittery," and "having countless tiny prisms."

The output port indicator 2050 of this embodiment can be provided in various embodiments (examples of use), as will be described later. The game board 5 may have only one embodiment, or it may have a combination of multiple embodiments.

[30-2a. Example of using outlet notation 1]
Next, an example of the use of the out-port markings 2050 on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 347, etc. Figure 347(a) is a lower front view of the game board with out-port markings, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) from the front. First, as shown in Figure 347, the game board 5 is equipped with a first start-up opening 2002 located below the central discharge section 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center mechanism 2500, an out-port 1008 located below the first start-up opening 2002 at the downstream end (lowest end) of the game area 5a, a general prize-winning opening 2001 located to the left of the first start-up opening 2002, and a number of sub-out-ports 2023 (three in this case) that are different from the out-port 1008.

This game board 5 has a game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) with a game area 5a at its front, and a panel decoration 1113 is applied to the front surface of the panel. In this embodiment, the panel decoration 1113 has a crack-like pattern.

The sub-outlet 2023 is always open, and game balls B that enter it are ejected from the game board 5 as out balls. In other words, similar to the outlet 1008, no bonus is awarded even if game balls B enter the sub-outlet 2023. The sub-outlet 2023 consists of three outlets from right to left: the first outlet 2023a, the second outlet 2023b, and the third outlet 2023c. Hereafter, the first to third outlets 2023a to 2023c will be collectively referred to simply as the sub-outlet 2023.

The first start port 2002 is provided in the start port unit 2100. The start port unit 2100 has a front plate 2101, which forms the front end of the first start port 2002, with a prize port indicator section 2060 consisting of the letters "IN" on its front surface. This prize port indicator section 2060 is formed in a relief shape, protruding forward, and is integrally molded with the start port unit 2100. Note that the prize port indicator section 2060 may be a symbol such as a design or picture, in addition to letters.

The general prize entry opening 2001 and some of the sub-out openings 2023 (here, the second out opening 2023b and the third out opening 2023c) are located in the left-side side unit 2200 of the starter unit 2100. The general prize entry opening 2001 is located between the second out opening 2023b and the third out opening 2023c. In this side unit 2200, the second out opening 2023b is positioned with its opening facing upwards, while the third out opening 2023c is positioned with its opening facing diagonally upwards and to the left.

The remaining sub-outlet 2023 (first outlet 2023a) is located in the attacker unit 2400 (details omitted) to the right of the starter unit 2100. This first outlet 2023a is positioned away from the large prize-winning opening 2005 (not shown) and protrudes forward from the base plate 2441. In the attacker unit 2400, the first outlet 2023a is positioned with its opening angled diagonally upwards and to the right.

In this embodiment, the outlet notation 2050 includes a first outlet notation 2050a indicating the first outlet 2023a, a second outlet notation 2050b indicating the second outlet 2023b, and a third outlet notation 2050c indicating the third outlet 2023c. The first to third outlet notations 2050a to 2050c each have different characteristics. Hereafter, the first to third outlet notations 2050a to 2050c will be collectively referred to simply as the outlet notation 2050.

The details of each outlet marking 2050 will be described below. First, the first outlet marking 2050a is provided on the front plate 2450a of the receiving portion 2450, which protrudes forward from the base plate 2441 of the attacker unit 2400 to form the first outlet 2023a, as shown in Figure 347. More specifically, the first outlet marking 2050a is printed on a decorative sticker 2446 attached to the front plate 2450a. This first outlet marking 2050a is positioned so that the text is slanted to match the inclination of the opening of the first outlet 2023a. This first outlet marking 2050a is located behind the prize entry marking portion 2060 of the first start opening 2002.

The second output slot marking 2050b is located on the front of the game panel 1100, directly above the second output slot 2023b. The second output slot marking 2050b is applied (printed) together with the panel decoration 1113. The text of this second output slot marking 2050b is arranged horizontally.

The third outlet marking 2050c is located on the upper left portion of the third outlet 2023c on the front of the game panel 1100. The third outlet marking 2050c is applied (printed) together with the panel decoration 1113. This third outlet marking 2050c is formed by dividing the word "OUT" into "O," "U," and "T," and arranging them diagonally from the upper right to the lower left, following the angled opening of the third outlet 2023c.

The second and third output indicators 2050b and 2050c are positioned to overlap with the patterns (designs) of the panel decoration 1113 on the game panel 1100, as shown in the figure. This makes the second and third output indicators 2050b and 2050c appear to be integrated with the design of the panel decoration 1113, making them less conspicuous while preserving the decorative quality of the panel decoration 1113.

Furthermore, the second outlet markings 2050b and the third outlet markings 2050c have white edges 2052. This separates the marking body 2051 from the pattern of the panel decoration 1113 by the white edges 2052, ensuring that the characters on the marking body 2051 (outlet markings 2050) are not difficult to read.

Furthermore, since the first out-out

According to this example of use 1, the first outlet markings 2050a and 2050b, which correspond to the first outlet 2023a and second outlet 2023b, are provided in different identification manners. This makes it possible to align each outlet marking 2050 with the opening direction of the sub-outlet 2023 or with the decoration of the area where the sub-outlet 2023 is located, allowing the outlet markings 2050 to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous. Specifically, if the first outlet 2023a opens diagonally upwards to the right and the second outlet 2023b opens upwards, the first outlet marking 2050a is written diagonally and the second outlet marking 2050b is written horizontally. This ensures that each outlet marking 2050 aligns with the opening edge of the corresponding sub-outlet 2023, making each outlet marking 2050 less conspicuous and less likely to cause any sense of incongruity. This allows for a pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to players due to the "outlet" indication 2050, reliably utilizes the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a, improves the appearance, and suppresses a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the first outlet marking 2050a is applied to the decorative sticker 2446, the outlet marking 2050 can be provided by attaching the decorative sticker 2446 with the first outlet marking 2050a printed on it to the front plate 2450a of the receiving portion 2450 of the corresponding first outlet 2023a.

Furthermore, since the decorative sticker 2203 (decorative sticker 2446) bearing the "Outlet" marking 2050 is attached to the front panel 2202, which does not come into contact with the game ball B, the decorative sticker 2203 will not peel off due to contact with the game ball B.

Furthermore, because the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 has lower light transmission than its surroundings, when the area around the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes brighter, the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes relatively darker. This allows the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 to be recognizable (visible) to the player while still being difficult to see, thus suppressing any deterioration in appearance caused by the "Outlet Point" marking 2050.

Furthermore, in the attacker unit 2400 having a large prize opening 2005, the first out opening indicator 2050a of the first out opening 2023a is positioned forward of the second out opening indicator 2050b of the side unit 2200 having a general prize opening 2001. As a result, even if the first out-out Therefore, the out-out-port indicator 2050 does not cause any discomfort to the player, the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

In other words, the out-out

Furthermore, the multiple out-port indicators 2050 are positioned behind the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060 corresponding to the first-start-port 2002. This allows the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060, which corresponds to the first-start-port 2002, to alert the player to the existence of the first-start-port 2002, thereby encouraging them to strongly desire to enter the first-start-port 2002 with the game ball B. Additionally, in the case of the multiple sub-out-ports 2023, which are provided separately from the first-start-port 2002, the corresponding out-port indicators 2050 are positioned behind the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060. This makes the out-port indicators 2050 less conspicuous than the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060, allowing the presence of the sub-out-ports 2023 to be recognized while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) due to the out-port indicators 2050. As a result, even with the presence of the output slot indicator 2050, the player will not feel any discomfort. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

[30-2b. Example of using outlet notation 2]
Next, an example of using an out-out notation 2050 different from the above will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 348. Figure 348 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of a game board from the front, in which the out-out notation is used in accordance with the pattern of the decorative part. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of this embodiment includes a first start-up opening 2002 located below the central release section 2513a of the stage 2513 in the center mechanism 2500, a second start-up opening 2004 located below the first start-up opening 2002 and opening and closing according to the result of the lottery for the normal symbols drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2003, an out-out opening 1008 located below the second start-up opening 2004 at the downstream end (lowest end) of the game area 5a, a plurality of general prize-winning openings 2001 located to the left of the second start-up opening 2004, and a sub-out-out opening 2023 located to the right of the second start-up opening 2004.

The first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are provided on the start port unit 2100. This start port unit 2100 has a front plate upper 2101a that forms the front end of the first start port 2002, and a front plate lower 2101b that forms the front end of the second start port 2004. The front surface of the front plate upper 2101a is provided with a first prize port indicator section 2060a consisting of the character "始" (start). On the other hand, the front surface of the front plate lower 2101b is provided with a symbolic second prize port indicator section 2060b consisting of a design of multiple circles. These first prize port indicator sections 2060a and second prize port indicator sections 2060b are formed in a relief shape with raised and recessed areas and are integrally molded with the start port unit 2100.

Multiple general prize slots 2001 are provided on the side unit 2200. The side unit 2200 has a front plate 2202 that forms the front end of each general prize slot 2001. The front surface of these front plates 2202 is provided with a third prize slot marking section 2060c, consisting of a spiral design (symbol). This third prize slot marking section 2060c is formed in a relief shape with raised and recessed areas and is integrally molded with the side unit 2200.

The sub-out opening 2023 is always open upwards, and game balls B that enter it are discharged from the game board 5 as out balls. In other words, similar to the out opening 1008, no bonus is awarded even if game balls B enter the sub-out opening 2023. This sub-out opening 2023 is provided in the attacker unit 2400 (details omitted). The attacker unit 2400 has a receiving part 2450 that protrudes forward from the base plate 2441 to form the sub-out opening 2023. This receiving part 2450 has a front plate 2450a that constitutes the front end of the sub-out opening 2023. On the front surface of this front plate 2450a is a decorative part 2450b consisting of a spiral design (pattern) similar to that of the third prize opening indicator part 2060c. The decorative section 2450b is formed in a relief shape with uneven surfaces and is integrally molded with the receiving section 2450 (front plate 2450a). In this way, by making the design (pattern) of the decorative section 2450b resemble the design (pattern) of the third prize slot indication section 2060c, it is possible to make the sub-out slot 2023 appear to be a general prize slot 2001 in terms of design.

In this embodiment, the outlet markings 2050 are arranged so that the letters "O," "U," and "T" are aligned with the spiral pattern of the decorative section 2450b, as shown in the figure. This makes the outlet markings 2050 appear integrated with the pattern of the decorative section 2450b, allowing the markings to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous, without compromising the decorative quality of the decorative section 2450b.

According to the game board 5 of this embodiment, the out-port indicator 2050 is provided on the decorative section 2450b, which has a pattern similar to the design of the third-entry-port indicator section 2060c. Therefore, when viewed from a distance, it is possible to create the illusion of many general-entry-ports 2001, making it easier to select this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play. On the other hand, upon closer inspection of an entry port that was thought to be a general-entry-port 2001, the out-port indicator 2050 is displayed, allowing the player to recognize it as an out-port (sub-out-port 2023), thus preventing a decrease in enjoyment due to misidentification.

Furthermore, since the text for the "Outlet" label 2050 is positioned to align with the decorative portion 2450b on the front plate 2450a of the receiving portion 2450 in the attacker unit 2400, it is possible to make the "Outlet" label 2050 appear as part of the decoration. This allows the player to recognize it as a sub-outlet 2023 while making it less conspicuous, thus not detracting from the decorative quality of the game board 5, and the appearance of the "Outlet" label 2050 does not deteriorate.

Furthermore, since the outlet marking 2050 is integrally molded with the attacker unit 2400 (receiving part 2450) that forms the corresponding sub-outlet 2023, compared to the case where the outlet marking 2050 is provided by attaching a sticker, there is no risk of forgetting to attach the sticker, ensuring that the outlet marking 2050 is reliably displayed, and eliminating the need for sticker attachment, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the outlet marking 2050 is integrally molded with the receiving portion 2450, it will not peel off even if the game ball B or an operator comes into contact with it, compared to cases where the outlet marking 2050 is provided by a sticker or printing (painting).

Furthermore, because the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 has lower light transmittance than its surroundings, when the area around the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes brighter, the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes relatively darker. This allows the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 to be recognizable (visible) to the player while still being difficult to see, thus suppressing any deterioration in appearance caused by the "Outlet Point" marking 2050.

[30-2c. Example of using outlet notation 3]
Next, an example of using an out-out notation 2050 that is different from the above will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 349. Figure 349 is an explanatory diagram showing a part of a game board from the front, in which multiple out-out notations are used with different levels of prominence. As shown in the figure, the game board 5 of this embodiment includes a first start-up opening 2002 located at the bottom of the left-right center of the game area 5a, where a special symbol is drawn when a game ball B enters; a plurality of general prize-winning openings 2001 located to the left of the first start-up opening 2002; a large prize-winning opening 2005 located near the first start-up opening 2002, which opens and closes according to the result of the special symbol draw drawn when a ball enters the first start-up opening 2002 or the second start-up opening 2004 (not shown); an out-out opening 1008 located at the downstream end (lowest end) of the game area 5a; and a plurality of sub-out-out openings 2023 located at predetermined positions within the game area 5a.

The first start port 2002 is provided in the start port unit 2100. The start port unit 2100 has a front plate 2101 that forms the front end of the first start port 2002. The front surface of the front plate 2101 is provided with a prize port indication section 2060 consisting of the letters "IN". In this embodiment, the prize port indication section 2060 is formed by a seal.

Multiple general prize slots 2001 are provided on the side unit 2200. The multiple general prize slots 2001 are arranged side-by-side in a left-right direction. The side unit 2200 has a single front plate 2202 that forms the front end of each general prize slot 2001. A decorative sticker 2203, printed with a predetermined decoration, is affixed to the front surface of this front plate 2202. The decorative sticker 2203 is decorated with a geometric pattern consisting of multiple triangles.

The large prize slot 2005 is located in the attacker unit 2400. The attacker unit 2400 has a front plate 2442 positioned in front of the large prize slot 2005. A decorative sticker 2446, printed with a predetermined design, is affixed to the front surface of this front plate 2442. The decorative sticker 2446, like the decorative sticker 2203 on the side unit 2200, features a geometric pattern composed of multiple triangles.

The sub-outlet 2023 is always open, and game balls B that enter it are ejected from the game board 5 as out balls. In other words, similar to the outlet 1008, no bonus is awarded even if game balls B enter the sub-outlet 2023. The sub-outlet 2023 consists of three outlets from right to left: the first outlet 2023a, the second outlet 2023b, and the third outlet 2023c. Hereafter, the first to third outlets 2023a to 2023c will be collectively referred to simply as the sub-outlet 2023.

The first and second outports 2023a and 2023b are located on the attacker unit 2400, while the third outport 2023c is located on the side unit 2200. More specifically, the first outport 2023a opens upward at the right corner of the upper edge of the attacker unit 2400, upstream of the main prize opening 2005. The second outport 2023b opens to the left at the lower part of the left edge of the attacker unit 2400, downstream of the main prize opening 2005. The third outport 2023c opens upward at a location to the left of the general prize opening 2001 on the side unit 2200. Note that at the location of the third outport 2023c on the side unit 2200, the upper edge of the front plate 2202 is inclined diagonally so that it is lower to the left.

In this embodiment, the multiple sub-outlets 2023 are arranged such that the probability of ball entry differs for each, due to the multiple obstruction pins N planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The probability of game ball B entering decreases in the order of first outlet 2023a, second outlet 2023b, and third outlet 2023c. In other words, it is easier for balls to enter the third outlet 2023c than the first outlet 2023a.

In this embodiment, the outlet notation 2050 includes a first outlet notation 2050a indicating the first outlet 2023a, a second outlet notation 2050b indicating the second outlet 2023b, and a third outlet notation 2050c indicating the third outlet 2023c. The first to third outlet notations 2050a to 2050c each have different characteristics. Hereafter, the first to third outlet notations 2050a to 2050c will be collectively referred to simply as the outlet notation 2050.

The details of each output port marking 2050 are described below. The first output port marking 2050a is located above the first output port 2023a, in the upper right corner of the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400. The first output port marking 2050a consists of the word "OUT" arranged horizontally. Although smaller than the letters of the prize port marking section 2060, the letters are relatively large to ensure visibility. The first output port marking 2050a is printed on top of the decorative sticker 2446 attached to the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400, overlapping with the decorative sticker's (geometric pattern). The peripheral edge 2052 of the first output port marking 2050a is white, allowing it to be recognized (readable) even when overlapped with the decorative sticker 2446.

The second outlet marking 2050b is located above the second outlet marking 2023b and is provided on the decorative sticker 2446 attached to the front plate 2442 of the attacker unit 2400. The second outlet marking 2050b consists of the word "OUT" arranged side by side. This second outlet marking 2050b is composed of smaller characters than the first outlet marking 2050a. The second outlet marking 2050b is printed together with the decoration (geometric pattern) of the decorative sticker 2446, overlapping it from above. The peripheral edge 2052 of the second outlet marking 2050b is white, allowing it to be recognized (readable) even when overlapped with the decoration of the decorative sticker 2446.

The third outlet marking 2050c is located in front of the third outlet 2023c and is provided on the decorative sticker 2203 attached to the front panel 2202 of the side unit 2200. The third outlet marking 2050c consists of the word "OUT" separated into "O," "U," and "T," arranged diagonally along the slanted upper edge of the front panel 2202. This third outlet marking 2050c is composed of smaller letters than the first outlet marking 2050a and the second outlet marking 2050b. The third outlet marking 2050c is printed together with the decoration (geometric pattern) on the decorative sticker 2203, overlapping it from above. The peripheral edge 2052 of the third outlet marking 2050c is white, allowing it to be recognized (readable) even when overlapped with the decoration on the decorative sticker 2203.

In this embodiment, when a special symbol such as "Big Win" is drawn by an entry into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 (not shown here), the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. Since this big prize opening 2005 is located below the center mechanism 2500 and to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, the game ball B will be "shot to the right" so that it flows down to the right of the center mechanism 2500. The first out opening 2023a is provided on the route of the game ball B that has been "shot to the right" (upstream of the big prize opening 2005), and the first out opening indicator 2050a that indicates the first out opening 2023a is provided in a conspicuous manner. This makes it possible to make the player aware of the existence of the first out opening 2023a and to make them wish that the game ball B that has been "shot to the right" does not enter the first out opening 2023a. The probability of balls entering the first exit slot 2023a is set lower than that of the second exit slot 2023b and the third exit slot 2023c. Therefore, balls do not enter the first exit slot 2050a to a noticeable degree. Furthermore, even if a game ball B enters the first exit slot 2023a, the player is already well aware of its existence, so the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and they can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the second out-port 2023b is located downstream of the main prize-winning port 2005, even if the presence of the second out-port 2023b is recognized by the second out-port indicator 2050b, there is little interest in the game balls B that did not enter the main prize-winning port 2005, and even if a ball enters the second out-port 2023b, the enjoyment does not diminish.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the third out-port 2023c is located to the left of the general prize-winning port 2001 in the side unit 2200, and the third out-port indicator 2050c is made less conspicuous than the others, thereby reducing the player's interest in the third out-port 2023c. Even if the probability of balls entering the third out-port 2023c is set higher than that of the first out-port 2023a and second out-port 2023b, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice balls entering the third out-port 2023c, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Thus, according to this embodiment, even with multiple sub-outlets 2023, each sub-outlet 2023 has its own corresponding outlet indicator 2050, preventing players from mistaking the sub-outlets 2023 for prize-winning outlets. Furthermore, by making the first outlet indicator 2050a, which corresponds to the first outlet 2023a (which is difficult to enter), more prominent than the other outlet indicators 2050, the player's attention can be drawn to the first outlet 2023a, making it difficult for them to notice balls entering the easier second outlet 2023b and third outlet 2023c. This suppresses the decrease in enjoyment caused by balls entering the sub-outlets 2023.

Furthermore, since each of the multiple sub-outlet 2023 corresponding outlet markings 2050 are provided in a different identification manner, it is possible to align each outlet marking 2050 with the opening direction of the sub-outlet 2023 or with the decoration of the area where the sub-outlet 2023 is located, making the outlet markings 2050 less conspicuous while still being displayed. Specifically, the first outlet 2023a opens upwards, and the third outlet 2023c opens diagonally upwards to the left. The first outlet marking 2050a is written horizontally, and the third outlet marking 2050c is written diagonally. As a result, each outlet marking 2050 is aligned with the opening edge of the corresponding sub-outlet 2023, making each outlet marking 2050 less conspicuous and less likely to cause any sense of incongruity. This allows for a pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to players due to the "outlet" indication 2050, reliably utilizes the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a, improves the appearance, and suppresses a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the text for the "Outlet" label 2050 is positioned to align with the decorations on the decorative stickers 2203 and 2446, it is possible to make the "Outlet" label 2050 appear as part of the decoration. This allows players to recognize it as a sub-outlet 2023 while making it less conspicuous, thus not detracting from the decorative qualities of the game board 5, and the presence of the "Outlet" label 2050 does not negatively impact its appearance.

Furthermore, since the out-port marking 2050 is applied to decorative stickers 2203 and 2446, the out-port marking 2050 can be provided by attaching the decorative stickers 2203 and 2446, which have the out-port marking 2050 printed on them, to the front panel 2202 or front panel 2450a of the corresponding sub-out-port 2023. Also, for example, even with the same side unit 2200, if it is designated as a general prize-winning port 2001 or a sub-out-port 2023 depending on the specifications or model, this can be accommodated by simply changing the decorative sticker 2203, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the decorative stickers 2203 and 2446, which bear the "Outlet" marking 2050, are attached to the front panel 2202 and 2450a, which do not come into contact with the game ball B, the decorative stickers 2203 and 2446 will not peel off due to contact with the game ball B.

Furthermore, because the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 has lower light transmittance than its surroundings, when the area around the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes brighter, the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 becomes relatively darker. This allows the "Outlet Point" marking 2050 to be recognizable (visible) to the player while still being difficult to see, thus suppressing any deterioration in appearance caused by the "Outlet Point" marking 2050.

Furthermore, the sub-outlet 2023 (in this case, the third outlet 2023c), which is easier for balls to enter than others, has its corresponding outlet indicator 2050 (third outlet indicator 2050c) positioned further forward than the circulating game ball B. In other words, the third outlet indicator 2050c is located on the front panel 2202 of the side unit 2200. This ensures that even if game ball B frequently enters the third outlet 2023c, the entering game ball B will not obscure the third outlet indicator 2050c, making it difficult to see (read). This allows for clear visibility of the third outlet indicator 2050c, ensuring the presence of the third outlet 2023c is recognized.

[30-2d. Example of using outlet notation 4]
Next, we will explain in detail, with reference to Figure 350, an example of using the output opening notation 2050 which is different from the above. Figure 350(a) is a schematic front view showing a pachinko machine in which the output opening notation is provided so as to overlap with the performance operation unit in a front view, and (b) is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view showing the pachinko machine in (a) cut in the center in the left-right direction.

In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has a start port unit 2100 at the bottom of the game board 5, which has a first start port 2002 and two sub-out ports 2023. The two sub-out ports 2023 are located below the first start port 2002, on both the left and right sides with the first start port 2002 in between. This start port unit 2100 has a front plate 2101 that forms the front end of the first start port 2002 and the sub-out ports 2023. On the front surface of the front plate 2101, in front of the sub-out ports 2023, there is an outlet port marking 2050 consisting of the word "OUT". In this embodiment, the outlet port marking 2050 is attached as a sticker.

The start-up unit 2100 of the game board 5 is located above the lower end of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. In other words, the start-up unit 2100 (indicated as the out-up unit 2050) is located in a position facing forward from the door window 101a when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, in this embodiment of the pachinko machine 1, a performance operation unit 300 is provided as a front element on a tray unit 200 located below and in front of the door window 101a in the door frame 3. The performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation section 301 that allows the player to participate in the performance when a player-participation performance is being executed. This performance operation unit 300 is formed in a spherical shape, with its upper end protruding above the lower end of the door window 101a.

As shown in Figure 350(a), in a front view, the two output indicators 2050 of the starter unit 2100 are located behind the front-facing performance control unit 300 and are not visible from the front. This makes it difficult for other players to see the output indicators 2050, thus suppressing the deterioration of the game board 5's appearance due to the visibility of the output indicators 2050, and making it easier to encourage players to choose this pachinko machine 1 as their preferred pachinko machine.

Incidentally, in this pachinko machine 1, a space 2055 is provided between the performance operation unit 300 and the start-up unit 2100 (out-

Furthermore, the front element is not limited to the performance control unit 300 (performance control section 301), but also includes the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200, the decorative element provided on the plate unit 200, the decorative element provided on the right side unit 430 of the door frame, etc. The notation of the outlet opening 2050 may be changed according to the shape of the part of the front element that conceals the outlet opening 2050. In other words, the notation of the outlet opening 2050 may be changed according to how the outlet opening 2050 is concealed by the front element. Specifically, for example, the front performance control unit 300 conceals the outlet opening 2050 horizontally, so the outlet opening 2050 is written horizontally. Also, the decorative element of the vertically elongated right side unit 430 conceals the outlet opening 2050 vertically, so the outlet opening 2050 is written vertically.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the outlet indication 2050 being completely hidden by the front body in a front view, it is not limited to this; it is also acceptable for a portion of the outlet indication 2050 to be hidden in a front view. In this case, the outlet indication 2050 may be longer in the same direction as the direction in which the front body hides it, or it may be longer in a direction intersecting the direction in which the front body hides it, so that a portion is hidden. Specifically, for example, if the front body is hidden horizontally (in the case of the performance operation unit 300), the outlet indication 2050 is written vertically, and if the front body is hidden vertically (in the case of the door frame right side unit 430), the outlet indication 2050 is written horizontally.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300 may be detachably attached to the plate unit 200. This allows for easy adaptation to changes in specifications or models when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1. By replacing the performance control unit with one that matches the concept of the game board 5's decoration and effects, it becomes easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

According to this example, at least a portion of the out-of-slot marking 2050 is obscured from the front by the performance control unit 300, which acts as a front-facing unit, making it invisible. However, it is visible to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 through the space 2055. Therefore, while the out-of-slot marking 2050 provides the aforementioned effects to the player currently playing the pachinko machine 1, the performance control unit 300 makes the out-of-slot marking 2050 less conspicuous to other players, thus avoiding any deterioration in appearance caused by the out-of-slot marking 2050. Consequently, since the out-of-slot marking 2050 is difficult for other players to see, it does not cause any discomfort, allowing the decorative effect of the pachinko machine 1 to be fully realized, and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to be chosen as a machine to play.

Furthermore, since the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is positioned close to the periphery of the door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be visible from the front, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 becomes less conspicuous, and does not cause any discomfort to the player, thus achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is positioned to extend in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the portion that overlaps with the performance control unit 300 in a front view. Specifically, because the portion overlapping with the performance control unit 300 is elongated horizontally, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is written horizontally. This ensures that the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is completely hidden by the performance control unit 300, making it difficult for other players to see it, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as described above.

[30-3a. Relationship between outlet markings and LEDs 1]
Next, the relationship between the output port indicator 2050 and the LED 2056a mounted on the rear decorative circuit board 2056, etc., in the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 351. Figure 351(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the output port indicator and the LED in a front view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the player seated in front, the output port indicator, and the LED. Here, we will explain using as an example a case in which a sub-output port 2023 is provided on the side unit 2200, and the output port indicator 2050 corresponding to the sub-output port 2023 is provided on the front of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a side unit 2200 attached to a transparent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and having a sub-out port 2023; an out port indicator 2050 provided on the front of the game panel 1100 and corresponding to the sub-out port 2023; and a decorative circuit board 2056 provided behind the game panel 1100 and having multiple LEDs 2056a mounted on its front. In this game board 5, the game panel 1100 and the side unit 2200 can be illuminated and decorated by illuminating the multiple LEDs 2056a on the decorative circuit board 2056.

Figure 351(a) shows an example where the LED 2056a is not provided behind the outlet sign 2050 in a front view. In other words, the outlet sign 2050 and the LED 2056a are positioned so that they do not overlap in a front view. This prevents the light from the LED 2056a from being blocked by the low light transmittance of the outlet sign 2050, ensuring that the lighting effect of the LED 2056a is fully realized. Furthermore, because the LED 2056a provides bright illumination, the outlet sign 2050 becomes relatively dimmer and harder to see, thus preventing the deterioration of appearance caused by the visible outlet sign 2050.

Figure 351(b) shows an example where the LED 2056a is not positioned in the line of sight of a player seated in front of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050. In other words, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 and the LED 2056a are not obscured from the player's view. This ensures that the light from the LED 2056a is not blocked by the low light transmittance of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050, allowing the player to fully enjoy the LED 2056a's illumination effect. Furthermore, because the light from the LED 2056a is more easily visible to the player, the illumination effect can appear brighter. This brightness makes the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 appear relatively dimmer and harder to see, thus preventing the visual deterioration caused by the visibility of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050.

The above example shows an example where the output indicator 2050 is provided on the game panel 1100. However, this is not the only option; the output indicator 2050 may also be provided on the front plate 2101 of the side unit 2200 that forms the front end of the sub-output indicator 2023.

Furthermore, while the above example shows a configuration where the side unit 2200 is provided with a sub-outlet 2023, the configuration is not limited to this. The sub-outlet 2023 may also be provided in the starter unit 2100, attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, etc.

Furthermore, a panel decoration 1113 with predetermined decorations may be provided on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In this case, the panel decoration 1113 may have a high-transparency section 1113a and a low-transparency section 1113b, as described later (see Figure 352(a)).

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 351, at least a portion of the out-out indicator 2050 may be placed in a location that overlaps with a front body (for example, the performance operation unit 300) located in front of the game board 5 when viewed from the front. A space 2055 may be provided between the front body and the game board 5, allowing the player to see the portion of the out-out indicator 2050 that overlaps with the front body when viewed from the front. This allows the player playing the pachinko machine 1 to see the out-out indicator 2050 and recognize the existence of the sub-out-out 2023, while the performance operation unit 300 makes the out-out indicator 2050 less conspicuous to other players, thus avoiding a deterioration in appearance caused by the out-out indicator 2050.

[30-3b. Relationship between output indicators and LEDs 2]
Next, a different relationship between the out-port indicator 2050 and the LED 2056a on the game board 5 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 352. Figure 352(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the area on the game board where the out-port indicator is provided in a front view, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the out-port indicator and the LED in a front view of the game board in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the player seated in front of the game board in (a), the out-port indicator, and the LED. Here, we will explain using as an example a case in which a sub-out-port 2023 is provided on the side unit 2200, and an out-port indicator 2050 corresponding to the sub-out-port 2023 is provided on the front of the game panel 1100.

The game board 5 of this embodiment includes a side unit 2200 attached to a transparent game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and having a sub-out port 2023; an out port indicator 2050 provided on the front of the game panel 1100 and corresponding to the sub-out port 2023; and a decorative substrate 2056 provided behind the game panel 1100 and having multiple LEDs 2056a mounted on its front. In this game board 5, a decorative panel 1113 is provided on the front of the game panel 1100. Furthermore, in the game board 5, the game panel 1100 and the side unit 2200 can be illuminated by illuminating the multiple LEDs 2056a on the decorative substrate 2056.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 352(a), the panel decoration 1113 provided on the front of the game panel 1100 has a high-transmittance portion 1113a with high light transmittance and a low-transmittance portion 1113b (shaded portion) with low light transmittance. The out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is positioned to overlap with the low-transmittance portion of the panel decoration 1113. As a result, at a glance, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 appears as part of the panel decoration 1113, making it less conspicuous.

The example shown in Figure 352(b) is one in which the LED 2056a is placed behind the outlet marking 2050 when viewed from the front. In other words, the outlet marking 2050 and the LED 2056a are arranged to overlap when viewed from the front. As a result, when the LED 2056a is not illuminated, the LED 2056a can be hidden by the outlet marking 2050 on the front, thereby suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the LED 2056a being visible. When the LED 2056a is illuminated, the light shining in front of it is blocked by the outlet marking 2050. However, since the panel decoration 1113 has a high light transmittance section 1113a around the outlet marking 2050, the area around the outlet marking 2050 becomes brightly illuminated, and this brightness makes the outlet marking 2050 relatively darker and harder to see. Therefore, when the LED 2056a is used for illumination, the outlet indicator 2050 can be made less visible, suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the visibility of the outlet indicator 2050, while ensuring that the illumination effect of the LED 2056a is reliably achieved.

The example shown in Figure 352(c) is one in which the LED 2056a is positioned in the line of sight of a player seated in front of the out-out indicator 2050. In other words, the out-out indicator 2050 and the LED 2056a are positioned so that they overlap from the perspective of the seated player. This allows the out-out indicator 2050 to conceal the LED 2056a when it is not illuminated, thus suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the LED 2056a being visible. When the LED 2056a is illuminated, the light directed towards the player is blocked by the out-out indicator 2050. However, since the panel decoration 1113 has a high-transmittance section 1113a with high light transmittance around the out-out indicator 2050, the area around the out-out indicator 2050 becomes brightly illuminated, and this brightness makes the out-out indicator 2050 relatively darker and harder to see. Therefore, when the LED 2056a is used for illumination, the outlet indicator 2050 can be made less visible, suppressing the deterioration in appearance caused by the visibility of the outlet indicator 2050, while ensuring that the illumination effect of the LED 2056a is reliably achieved.

The above example shows an example where the output indicator 2050 is provided on the game panel 1100. However, this is not the only option; the output indicator 2050 may also be provided on the front plate 2101 of the side unit 2200 that forms the front end of the sub-output indicator 2023.

Furthermore, while the above example shows a configuration where the side unit 2200 is provided with a sub-outlet 2023, the configuration is not limited to this. The sub-outlet 2023 may also be provided in the starter unit 2100, attacker unit 2400, center component 2500, etc.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, as shown by the dashed line in Figure 352, at least a portion of the out-out indicator 2050 may be placed in a location that overlaps with a front body (for example, the performance operation unit 300) located in front of the game board 5 when viewed from the front. A space 2055 may be provided between the front body and the game board 5, allowing the player to see the portion of the out-out indicator 2050 that overlaps with the front body when viewed from the front. This allows the player playing the pachinko machine 1 to see the out-out indicator 2050 and recognize the existence of the sub-out-out 2023, while the performance operation unit 300 makes the out-out indicator 2050 less conspicuous to other players, thus avoiding a deterioration in appearance caused by the out-out indicator 2050.

[30-4. Others]
Next, we will explain other examples such as the outlet notation 2050. Note that in the following explanation, sub-outlets such as 2023 will simply be referred to as "outlets."

(Other 1)
In the game board 5, if the game area 5a through which the game ball B flows down by a center mechanism 2500 or the like is composed of multiple flow areas, and each flow area is provided with at least one outlet, the outlet notation 2050 corresponding to each outlet may be made to differ in appearance according to the flow area. For example, if the game area 5a is composed of a left flow area and a right flow area by a component such as a center mechanism 2500, and the right flow area is provided with a prize opening such as a big prize opening 2005 that opens and closes when the game is in a favorable state, then in a normal game state, the player will shoot the ball so that the game ball B flows down the left flow area (left shot), and in a favorable state such as a "jackpot", the player will shoot the ball so that the game ball B flows down the right flow area where the big prize opening 2005 is located (right shot). Therefore, in the advantageous game state (right-handed play), it is necessary to shoot a large number of game balls B in a short time, resulting in a different sense of speed and excitement compared to the normal game state. Accordingly, the appearance of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 in the left-lower-flow area and the appearance of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 in the right-lower-flow area are made different. For example, the font of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 in the left-lower-flow area is made Gothic, and the font of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 in the right-lower-flow area is made Pop. As a result, even though the presence of an out-of-bounds area that is disadvantageous to the player is indicated, the Pop font of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 helps to suppress a decrease in interest and allows the player to enjoy the game.

(Other 2)
In the game board 5, it is desirable to provide the out-of-bounds marking 2050 in a location where it will not come into contact with the worker or the game balls B. More specifically, when providing the out-of-bounds marking 2050 on a transparent material (by attaching a sticker, printing, integral molding with the material, etc.), the out-of-bounds marking 2050 should be provided on the back side of the material. This prevents the worker or the game balls B from coming into contact with the out-of-bounds marking 2050 from the front, thus preventing the out-of-bounds marking 2050 from peeling off due to the passage of the game balls B or contact by the worker.

(Other 3)
In the game board 5, when providing multiple out-out indicators 2050 on parts of the game panel 1100 that have predetermined patterns or designs such as panel decorations 1113 or decorative stickers 2203, it is desirable to change the color of the peripheral edge 2052 of the out-out indicator 2050 according to the color of the patterns or designs surrounding the out-out indicator 2050. Specifically, for example, if the surrounding color of the first out-out indicator 2050 is white and the surrounding color of the second out-out indicator 2050 is yellow, the peripheral edge 2052 of the first out-out indicator 2050 should be yellow, and the peripheral edge 2052 of the second out-out indicator 2050 should be white. As a result, at first glance, the color of the peripheral edge 2052 of the outlet marking 2050 and the color of the area surrounding the outlet marking 2050 appear to be the same. Therefore, the outlet marking 2050 does not interfere with the surrounding colors, and the decorative effect of patterns and designs such as the panel decoration 1113 can be reliably achieved.

In this case, it is desirable that the color of the peripheral portion 2052 of the outlet opening marking 2050 be different from both the color of the marking body 2051 of the outlet opening marking 2050 and the color of the surrounding area (the color of the patterns and designs on the panel decoration 1113, etc.). This prevents the marking body 2051 of the outlet opening marking 2050 from blending in with the colors of the panel decoration 1113, etc., and becoming inconspicuous due to the color of the peripheral portion 2052.

Furthermore, when differentiating the color of the peripheral portion 2052 of the outlet marking 2050 from the color of the area surrounding the outlet marking 2050, the brightness of the two colors may be made similar. This makes it less likely for the outlet marking 2050 to interfere with the colors of the patterns and designs of the panel decoration 1113, etc.

(Other 4)
In the game board 5, a portion of the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 may overlap with a hole provided in the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) (for example, a nail hole into which an obstacle nail N is planted, a mounting hole for a component provided on the front of the game panel 1100, an opening that penetrates the game panel 1100 and into which components or ball passages are inserted, etc.). This allows the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 to be recognized by the remaining portion even if an obstacle nail N or the like is stuck in it, and it can be inferred that it is an out-of-bounds area.

(Other 5)
In the game board 5, the multiple out-port markings 2050 may be made different according to the size of the opening of the corresponding out-port. Specifically, for example, the color of the out-port markings 2050 may be made different according to the size of the opening of the out-port. For example, the peripheral edge 2052 of the out-port marking 2050 may be made white for the first out-port whose opening is the size of one game ball B, and the peripheral edge 2052 of the out-port marking 2050 may be made yellow for the second out-port whose opening is larger than that of the first out-port.

Furthermore, the wider the outlet opening, the larger the letters of "Outlet Opening 2050" may be. Alternatively, the letters of "Outlet Opening 2050" may be the same size, but the spacing between them may be adjusted to match the width of the outlet opening.

In this way, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is varied according to the size of the out-of-bounds opening. Therefore, by simply looking at the corresponding out-of-bounds indicator 2050 for multiple out-of-bounds openings, it is possible to recognize the ease of entering the corresponding out-of-bounds opening.

(Other 6)
In the game board 5, a front decorative body may be provided to make the out-out opening invisible from the front, and an out-out opening notation 2050 may be provided on the front decorative body near the entrance of the out-out opening. In this case, if the opening of the out-out opening faces to the left or to the right, the string of characters for the out-out opening notation 2050 may be written vertically and provided in front of the opening of the out-out opening. Examples of the front decorative body include "decorative stickers attached to the front panel,""plating layers or printed layers applied to the front panel," and "relief-like indentations formed on the front panel."

Thus, even if the outlet is not visible due to the front decorative element, the outlet indication 2050 on the front decorative element makes its presence known. Furthermore, because the outlet indication 2050 makes the presence of the outlet known, it becomes possible to widen the decorative area of the front decorative element compared to a case where the outlet is visible from the front, thereby improving the overall appearance.

(Other 7)
In the game board 5, a movable body is provided behind the out-hole provided in the transparent member, and an out-hole indicator 2050 corresponding to the out-hole of the transparent member may be provided in front of the movable body's range of motion. Specifically, for example, the movable body may be a movable mechanism that moves regularly, such as a distribution member, and the out-hole indicator 2050 may have slightly lower light transmittance than the transparent part. In this case, the indicator body 2051 of the out-hole indicator 2050 may be made transparent, and the peripheral part 2052 may have slightly lower light transmittance than the transparent part. As a result, when the movable mechanism is positioned behind the out-hole indicator 2050, the out-hole indicator 2050 becomes difficult to see, and when the movable mechanism is not positioned behind it, the out-hole indicator 2050 becomes visible. Therefore, by increasing the light transmittance of the out-hole indicator 2050, even if the out-hole indicator 2050 becomes somewhat difficult to see, there is a period within one cycle of the movable mechanism when it becomes visible, so the presence of the out-hole can be recognized.

Furthermore, while the above example shows an outlet marking 2050 with increased light transmittance, the color of the outlet marking 2050 could, for example, be the same as the color of the movable body located at the rear. This would make the outlet marking 2050 difficult to see when the movable body is positioned at the rear, as its color would blend in with the movable body's color. Conversely, when the movable body is not positioned at the rear, the difference in color between the outlet marking 2050 and the rear component would make the outlet marking 2050 visible, thus achieving the same effect as described above.

The above example shows a configuration where the "Outlet 2050" marking is difficult to see when the movable part is positioned at the rear. However, this is not the only possible configuration; the "Outlet 2050" marking may be designed to be easily visible when the movable part is positioned at the rear.

(Other 8)
In the game board 5, the string of characters constituting the out-out indication 2050 may be broken down into individual characters, and the front-to-back position of each character may be made different. Specifically, for example, if the out-out indication 2050 consists of the characters "OUT", it may be broken down into "O" and "UT", with "O" placed on the front panel and "UT" on the game panel, so that it looks like "OUT" to a player seated directly in front of or in front of the machine. This makes the out-out indication 2050 meaningless to other players, appearing as part of a picture or pattern, while making sense to the player playing the pachinko machine 1, thus allowing them to recognize the existence of the out-out.

(Other 9)
In the game board 5, the multiple prize slot indicators 2060 may be made different depending on the corresponding prize slot. In other words, the letters, symbols, or pictograms on the prize slot indicators 2060 may indicate the rank of the prize given to the player. Specifically, for example, the prize slot indicator 2060 for the first starting slot 2002 (starting prize slot) may say "GO" or "IN", the V prize slot 2007 may say "V" or "victory", and the general prize slot 2001 may simply say "pattern" or "mark".

Alternatively, if a general prize slot is provided in a way that obstructs the entry of game ball B to a specific prize slot (for example, the V prize slot), the prize slot indicator 2060 of that general prize slot may be marked in a way that makes it appear as an out slot (for example, "×", "skull", etc.). This strongly encourages the player to aim for the V prize slot, and since a bonus is awarded for entering a general prize slot that looks like an out slot, it does not diminish the player's enjoyment. In this case, it is preferable that the prize slot indicator 2060 for the general prize slot obstructing entry to the V prize slot and the other general prize slots are different.

[30-5. Summary]
The above-mentioned outlet designation 2050 has the following various technical characteristics.

[30-5a. Summary A]
(Background of the technical features)
Pachinko machines and similar gaming machines are equipped with a game area through which the balls are played, which includes multiple prize-winning openings that award predetermined benefits upon ball entry, and an outlet opening at the lower end of the game area that discharges balls that do not enter any of the prize-winning openings. In addition to the outlet opening at the lower end of the game area, there are known gaming machines of this type that have multiple outlet openings located in the middle of the game area (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-136134).

However, if multiple payout slots are provided, it becomes difficult to distinguish between payout slots and payout slots. Some players may mistake a payout slot for a payout slot, leading to frustration when they don't receive a reward despite entering a slot, potentially diminishing their enjoyment of the game. While labeling each payout slot could address this problem, such prominent labeling might create a sense of unease for players and further reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots without causing any sense of incongruity.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising a game board having a prize entry opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
At least a first outlet and a second outlet are provided as the aforementioned outlets.
The game board is provided with a first out notation corresponding to the first out opening and a second out notation corresponding to the second out opening.
The first out notation and the second out notation are provided in different identification manners."
It is characterized by the following:

Here, "winning slots" refer to: "general winning slots that are always open within the game area," "starting winning slots (starting slots) that are always open within the game area and where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state that is beneficial to the player as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball," "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, special feature winning slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter within the game area as a predetermined benefit when a game ball enters a specific receiving slot (chucker) within the game area," and "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter as a predetermined benefit depending on the result of a normal lottery held when a game ball passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area." Examples include: "a prize entry slot for special features, etc.," "a variable-start prize entry slot (variable-start slot) where, depending on the result of a normal lottery conducted when a game ball passes through a specific area within the game area (e.g., a gate, checker, etc.), a special lottery is held to determine whether or not a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball, which is advantageous to the player," "a V-prize entry slot where, upon game balls entering the prize entry slot and being distributed by a distribution means, a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit," and "a large prize entry slot or prize entry slot that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to allow game balls to enter, as a special advantageous game state for the player."

Furthermore, examples of "out markings," such as the first and second out markings, include: "characters from languages such as English (alphabet) and Japanese (katakana, hiragana)," "designs such as patterns, symbols, and pictograms," and "images or characters that evoke negative images." Additionally, examples of out markings include: "those with different light transmission properties than the surrounding decorations and materials," and "those with different light reflectivity than the surrounding decorations and materials." When out markings are text, they may be written horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Moreover, out markings may be placed on stickers, printed together with the decorations on decorative sheets, or integrally molded with materials such as ball entry slot components.

Furthermore, "different identification methods" include: "those with different characters such as the alphabet or katakana," "those with different appearances (designs) such as characters, symbols, and pictograms," "those with different colors," "those with different sizes," "those with different orientations of text strings such as horizontal, vertical, and diagonal writing," "those with different light transmittance," "those with different light reflectivity," and "those with different formation methods such as sticker application, printing, and integral molding with the ball entry opening component."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board having a prize entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, wherein at least a first out entry point and a second out entry point are provided as the out entry points, and the game board is provided with a first out entry marking corresponding to the first out entry point and a second out entry marking corresponding to the second out entry point, and the first and second out entry markings are provided in different identification manners. (See Chapter 30. Out Entry Point Markings, Figures 346 to 349, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention])

In this configuration, the game board's game area is provided with multiple prize entry points and multiple output points, such as the first and second output points. The first output point is indicated by a first output marking, and the second output point is indicated by a second output marking, each with a different identification method. This ensures that players are aware of the output points by visually identifying them. Therefore, players will not mistake the first or second output points for prize entry points, and even if no bonus is awarded for entering the first or second output points, they will not become frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, by providing the first and second out-out indicators, which correspond to the first and second out-out openings, in different identification configurations, it becomes possible to align each indicator with the opening direction of the out-out opening or with the decoration of the area where the out-out opening is located. This allows the indicators to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous. Specifically, for example, if the first out-out opening faces upwards and the second out-out opening faces left and right, writing the first out-out indicator horizontally and the second out-out indicator vertically will cause each indicator to align with the opening edge of the corresponding out-out opening. This makes each indicator less conspicuous and less likely to cause any sense of incongruity. As a result, the indicators do not cause any sense of incongruity to the player, the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decrease in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, it is desirable that at least one of the multiple out indicators, including the first and second out indicators, be composed of text that aligns with the decorations on the game board. This allows the out indicators to appear as part of the decoration, making them less conspicuous while still allowing players to recognize them as out indicators. This ensures that the decorative quality of the game board is not diminished, and the presence of out indicators does not detract from its appearance.

Furthermore, at least one of multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be applied to the sticker. This allows for the out indicator to be provided by attaching the sticker with the printed out indicator around the corresponding out opening. Additionally, for example, if the same ball entry component is used as either a prize entry opening or an out opening depending on the specifications or model, this can be handled by simply changing the sticker, thereby reducing the cost associated with the gaming machine.

Furthermore, when applying the "out" marking to a sticker as described above, it is desirable to attach the sticker to a part that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the back of the transparent component, the front plate of the component forming the out opening, etc.). This prevents the sticker from peeling off due to contact with the game ball. Additionally, it is desirable to attach the sticker to a part that is difficult for workers to touch (for example, the back of the transparent component), in addition to the game ball, thus preventing the sticker from being peeled or damaged by workers touching it during maintenance of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, at least one of the multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be integrally molded with the ball entry member forming the corresponding out opening. This allows the out indicator to be reliably displayed without the possibility of forgetting to apply a sticker, compared to the case where the out indicator is provided by applying a sticker. It also eliminates the need for sticker application, thus reducing the overall cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry slot component, it will not peel off even if it comes into contact with the game ball or worker, compared to when the "out" indicator is applied using a sticker or printing (painting). It is desirable to place the "out" indicator in a location that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the front of the front panel, the back of the base plate, etc.).

Furthermore, it may be possible to make at least the first and second out indicators, as well as multiple other out indicators, less translucent than their surroundings. This allows the out indicators to appear relatively darker when the surrounding area is brighter, making them recognizable to the player while still being difficult to see, thus mitigating the visual deterioration caused by the out indicators.

Furthermore, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be made so conspicuous that it is difficult for balls to enter the corresponding out openings. For example, by placing an out opening that is difficult for balls to enter near the upstream of a prize-winning opening (e.g., a large prize-winning opening, a special prize-winning opening, etc.) where a favorable game state allows for the entry of many game balls, and by making the corresponding out indicators conspicuous, the existence of the out opening can be strongly recognized along with the prize-winning opening, and players can be strongly encouraged to avoid entering that out opening. Although the probability of a game ball entering this out opening is low, the conspicuousness of the corresponding out indicator ensures that the existence of the out opening is fully recognized beforehand. Even if a game ball does enter this out opening, the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and players can continue to enjoy playing with game balls.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-out slots are made more prominent, for example, if an easy-to-enter out-out slot is provided downstream of a prize slot that allows many game balls to enter due to the occurrence of a favorable game state (e.g., a large prize slot, a special prize slot), or near a prize slot where entering a game ball does not create a favorable game state (e.g., a general prize slot), and the corresponding "out" marking is made less prominent, players will pay less attention to game balls circulating near that out-out slot. Therefore, even if the existence of the out-out slot is recognized by the marking, it will not be strongly remembered, and interest in easy-to-enter out-out slots will be reduced. As a result, players will be less likely to notice game balls entering easy-to-enter out-out slots, and the enjoyment of the game will not diminish even if a game ball enters such an out-out slot.

Therefore, as described above, making the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds areas more prominent will alert players to their presence, preventing them from mistaking them for prize-winning areas. Even if no reward is given for entering an out-of-bounds area, players will not feel frustrated. Furthermore, making the "out" markings for difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds areas more prominent will not cause players any discomfort, thus preventing a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
At least one of them consists of a string of characters that conforms to the decoration applied to the game board."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 2, at least one of the multiple out indicators, including the first and second out indicators, is composed of a string of characters that conforms to the decoration applied to the game board. (See the description of the out indicator 2050 and Figure 348 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design aligns the "out" indicator with the decorations on the game board, making it appear as part of the overall design. This allows players to recognize it as an "out" point while keeping it inconspicuous, without compromising the decorative quality of the game board. The presence of the "out" indicator does not detract from the overall appearance.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"At least the first out notation and the second out notation, and the multiple out notations,
At least one of them is applied to the sticker.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, at least one of multiple out markings, including at least a first out marking and a second out marking, is applied to the seal. (See the description of the first out marking 2050a and Figure 347 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows for the "out" designation to be added by attaching a sticker with the "out" designation printed on it to the area around the corresponding out opening. Furthermore, even if the same ball entry component is used as either a prize entry opening or an out opening depending on the specifications or model, this can be handled by simply changing the sticker, thereby reducing the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, it is desirable to affix the "Out" sticker to a part that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the back of the transparent component, the front plate of the component forming the out opening, etc.). This will prevent the sticker from peeling off due to contact with the game ball. Additionally, it is desirable to affix the sticker to a part that is difficult for workers to touch (for example, the back of the transparent component), thus preventing the sticker from being peeled or detached by workers during maintenance of the gaming machine.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
At least one of them is integrally molded with the ball entry member that forms the corresponding outlet."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least one of multiple out indicators, including at least a first out indicator and a second out indicator, is integrally molded onto the ball entry member forming the corresponding out opening. (See the description of the out opening indicator 2050, the receiving portion 2450 of the attacker unit 2400, and Figure 348, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry component that forms the out exit. Compared to cases where the "out" indicator is provided by attaching a sticker, this eliminates the possibility of forgetting to attach the sticker, ensuring reliable "out" indication. Furthermore, it eliminates the need for sticker attachment, thus suppressing increases in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, because the "out" indicator is integrally molded with the ball entry slot component, it will not peel off even if it comes into contact with the game ball or by an operator, unlike cases where the "out" indicator is applied using stickers or printing (painting). It is preferable to place the "out" indicator in a location that does not come into contact with the game ball (for example, the front of the front panel, the back of the base plate, etc.).

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"At least the first out notation and the second out notation, and the multiple out notations,
"The light transmission is lower than that of the surrounding area."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, at least the first and second out markings, as well as multiple other out markings, have lower light transmission than the surrounding areas. (See the description of the out marking 2050 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design, by making the "out" indicator less translucent than its surroundings, causes it to appear relatively darker when the surrounding area is bright. This allows the indicator to be recognized by the player while still being difficult to see, thus minimizing the visual deterioration caused by the "out" indicator.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 5,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
The corresponding out-of-bounds opening is designed to be so conspicuous that it is difficult for the ball to enter.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 6, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, are provided in such a conspicuous manner that it is difficult for the ball to enter the corresponding out gate. (See the descriptions of the first out gate indicator 2050a, the second out gate indicator 2050b, the third out gate indicator 2050c, and Figure 349 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows for, for example, the placement of an out-out opening near the upstream of a prize-winning opening (e.g., a large prize-winning opening, a special prize-winning opening, etc.) that allows for the entry of many game balls when a favorable game state occurs. Furthermore, by making the corresponding out-out opening's markings more prominent, the existence of the out-out opening can be strongly recognized along with the prize-winning opening, thus strongly encouraging players to avoid entering it. Although the probability of a game ball entering this out-out opening is low, the prominent corresponding out-out markings ensure that its existence is fully recognized beforehand. Even if a game ball does enter this out-out opening, the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and players can continue to enjoy playing with the game balls.

Furthermore, if an easy-to-enter exit is provided downstream of an entry point that allows many game balls to enter due to the occurrence of a favorable game state (e.g., a large entry point, a special prize entry point, etc.), or near an entry point that does not generate a favorable game state even if a game ball enters (e.g., a general entry point), and the corresponding exit marking is made inconspicuous, then players will pay less attention to the game balls circulating near that exit point. Even if the existence of the exit point is recognized by the exit marking, it will not be strongly remembered, thus reducing attention to the easy-to-enter exit point. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice game balls entering the easy-to-enter exit point, and the enjoyment of the game does not diminish even if a game ball enters that exit point.

Therefore, the "out" indicator makes the presence of the out-of-bounds area noticeable, preventing players from mistaking it for a prize-winning area. Even if no reward is given for entering the out-of-bounds area, players won't feel frustrated. Furthermore, by making the "out" indicator for the difficult-to-enter out-of-bounds area prominent, it avoids causing players any discomfort and helps prevent a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

Thus, by using the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the big prize entry point 2005, the special prize entry point 2006, and the V prize entry point 2010 correspond to the prize entry points of the above solution means; the out entry point 1008, the losing entry point 2009, and the sub-out entry point 2023 correspond to the out entry points of the above solution means; the first out entry point 2023a and the second out entry point 2023b correspond to the first and second out entry points of the above solution means; the out entry point notation 2050 corresponds to the out entry notation of the above solution means; and the first out entry point notation 2050a and the second out entry point notation 2050b correspond to the first and second out entry notation of the above solution means.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the starter unit 2100, side unit 2200, and attacker unit 2400 correspond to the ball entry member of the above-described solution, and the decorative seals 2203 and 2446 correspond to the seals of the above-described solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of prize-winning openings such as a general prize-winning opening 2001 and a plurality of sub-out openings 2023 such as a first out opening 2023a and a second out opening 2023b. The first out opening notation 2050a corresponding to the first out opening 2023a and the second out opening notation 2050b corresponding to the second out opening 2023b are provided in different identification manners. As a result, when a player sees the out opening notation 2050, such as the first out opening notation 2050a corresponding to the first out opening 2023a and the second out opening notation 2050b corresponding to the second out opening 2023b, they can become aware of the existence of the sub-out openings 2023. Therefore, players will not mistake the first out gate 2023a or the second out gate 2023b for prize winning gates, and even if no bonus is awarded when game ball B enters the first out gate 2023a or the second out gate 2023b, they will not feel frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, since the first outlet markings 2050a and 2050b, which correspond to the first outlet 2023a and second outlet 2023b, are provided in different identification manners, it becomes possible to align each outlet marking 2050 with the opening direction of the sub-outlet 2023 or with the decoration of the area where the sub-outlet 2023 is located, making the outlet markings 2050 less conspicuous while still being displayed. Specifically, for example, as shown in Figure 347, if the first outlet 2023a opens diagonally upwards to the right and the second outlet 2023b opens upwards, writing the first outlet marking 2050a diagonally and the second outlet marking 2050b horizontally will result in each outlet marking 2050 being aligned with the opening edge of the corresponding sub-outlet 2023, making each outlet marking 2050 less conspicuous and less likely to cause any sense of incongruity. This allows for a pachinko machine 1 that does not cause discomfort to players due to the "outlet" indication 2050, reliably utilizes the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a, improves the appearance, and suppresses a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 348, the text of the out-out-out indication 2050 is positioned along the decorative portion 2450b on the game board 5 (in this case, the front plate 2450a of the receiving portion 2450 in the attacker unit 2400). This makes the out-out-out indication 2050 appear as part of the decoration, allowing the player to recognize it as a sub-out-out 2023 while making it less conspicuous. The decorative quality of the game board 5 is not diminished, and the appearance is not negatively affected by the presence of the out-out-out indication 2050.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 347, the out-out

Furthermore, since the decorative sticker 2203 (decorative sticker 2446) bearing the "Outlet" marking 2050 is affixed to the front panel 2202 (front panel 2450a), which does not come into contact with the game ball B, the decorative sticker 2203 (decorative sticker 2446) will not peel off due to contact with the game ball B. It is desirable to affix the decorative sticker 2203 (decorative sticker 2446) to a location other than the game ball B that is difficult for workers to touch (for example, the back of a transparent component (for example, the base plate 2441)), thereby preventing the decorative sticker 2203 (decorative sticker 2446) from being peeled or detached by workers during maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 348, the outlet marking 2050 is integrally molded with the attacker unit 2400 (receiving part 2450) that forms the corresponding sub-outlet 2023. Compared to the case where the outlet marking 2050 is provided by attaching a sticker, this eliminates the possibility of forgetting to attach the sticker, ensuring reliable marking of the outlet 2050, while also eliminating the need for sticker attachment, thus suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the outlet marking 2050 is integrally molded with the receiving portion 2450, it will not peel off even if the game ball B or an operator comes into contact with it, compared to cases where the outlet marking 2050 is provided by a sticker or printing (painting).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 347 and other figures, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 has lower light transmittance than its surroundings. Therefore, when the area around the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 becomes brighter, the indicator 2050 becomes relatively darker. This allows the indicator 2050 to be recognized (visible) by the player while still being difficult to see, thus suppressing any deterioration in appearance caused by the indicator 2050.

Furthermore, the out-out Although the probability of game ball B entering this first exit slot 2023a is low, the corresponding first exit slot marking 2050a is prominent, so players are well aware of the existence of the first exit slot 2023a beforehand. Therefore, even if game ball B enters the first exit slot 2023a, the enjoyment is not significantly diminished, and players can continue to enjoy playing with game ball B.

On the other hand, a second out-out The markings 2050a are less conspicuous than the markings 2050a, and since less attention is paid to game balls B circulating near the second and third outports 2023b and 2023c, even if the existence of the second and third outports 2023b and 2023c is recognized by the markings 2050b and 2050c, it is not strongly remembered, thus reducing attention to the easily accessible second and third outports 2023b and 2023c. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice game balls B entering the easily accessible second and third outports 2023b and 2023c, and the enjoyment does not diminish even if game balls B enter these second and third outports 2023b and 2023c.

Therefore, in the example shown in Figure 349, making the out-port marking 2050 for the difficult-to-enter sub-out-port 2023 as conspicuous as the out-port marking 2050 makes the existence of the sub-out-port 2023 noticeable. This prevents players from mistaking the sub-out-port 2023 for a prize-winning port, and even if no bonus is awarded for entering the sub-out-port 2023, players will not feel frustrated. Furthermore, by making the out-port marking 2050 for the difficult-to-enter sub-out-port 2023 conspicuous, it avoids causing discomfort to players and helps prevent a decline in their enjoyment of the game.

[30-5b. Summary B]
(Background of the technical features)
Pachinko machines and similar gaming machines are equipped with a game area through which the balls are played, which includes multiple prize-winning openings that award predetermined benefits upon ball entry, and an outlet opening at the lower end of the game area that discharges balls that do not enter any of the prize-winning openings. In addition to the outlet opening at the lower end of the game area, there are known gaming machines of this type that have multiple outlet openings located in the middle of the game area (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-136134).

However, if multiple payout slots are provided, it becomes difficult to distinguish between payout slots and payout slots. Some players may mistake a payout slot for a payout slot, leading to frustration when they don't receive a reward despite entering a slot, potentially diminishing their enjoyment of the game. While labeling each payout slot could address this problem, such prominent labeling might create a sense of unease for players and further reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots without causing any sense of incongruity.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising a game board having a prize entry opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
At least a first outlet and a second outlet are provided as the aforementioned outlets.
The game board is provided with a first out notation corresponding to the first out opening and a second out notation corresponding to the second out opening.
The first out indicator and the second out indicator are located at different positions in the front-to-back direction."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "winning slots" refer to: "general winning slots that are always open within the game area," "starting winning slots (starting slots) that are always open within the game area and where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state that is beneficial to the player as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball," "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, special feature winning slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter within the game area as a predetermined benefit when a game ball enters a specific receiving slot (chucker) within the game area," and "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter as a predetermined benefit depending on the result of a normal lottery held when a game ball passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area." Examples include: "a prize entry slot for special features, etc.," "a variable-start prize entry slot (variable-start slot) where, depending on the result of a normal lottery conducted when a game ball passes through a specific area within the game area (e.g., a gate, checker, etc.), a special lottery is held to determine whether or not a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball, which is advantageous to the player," "a V-prize entry slot where, upon game balls entering the prize entry slot and being distributed by a distribution means, a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit," and "a large prize entry slot or prize entry slot that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to allow game balls to enter, as a special advantageous game state for the player."

Furthermore, examples of "out" markings, such as the first and second "out" markings, include: "characters from languages such as English (alphabet) and Japanese (katakana, hiragana)," "designs such as patterns, symbols, and pictograms," and "images or characters that evoke negative images." Also, examples of "out" markings that differ in translucency from surrounding decorations and materials, and "different in light reflectivity from surrounding decorations and materials" are also included. When "out" markings are text, they may be written horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Multiple "out" markings may have the same identification method or different identification methods. Furthermore, "out" markings may be placed on stickers, printed together with decorations on decorative sheets, or integrally molded with materials such as ball entry slot components.

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board having a prize entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out entry point into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. The game board is provided with at least a first out entry point and a second out entry point, and the game board is provided with a first out entry marking corresponding to the first out entry point and a second out entry marking corresponding to the second out entry point, with the first and second out entry markings located at different positions in the front-to-back direction. (See the section "[30-2a. Example of Out Entry Point Marking 1]," the description of Out Entry Point Marking 2050, Figures 346 and 347, etc. in the section "[Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].")

In this configuration, the game board's play area is provided with multiple prize entry points and multiple output points, such as the first and second output points. The first output point is marked with a corresponding "first output" indicator, and the second output point with a corresponding "second output" indicator. This allows players to recognize the existence of the output points by visually identifying them. Therefore, players will not mistake the first or second output points for prize entry points, and even if no bonus is awarded for balls entering these points, they will not become frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, because the first and second out indicators, corresponding to the first and second out gates, are placed in different locations in the front-to-back direction, it becomes possible to vary the front-to-back position of each out indicator according to the positional relationship between the corresponding out gate and the prize gate (type of prize gate), the distance from the player seated in front, and the probability (ease of entry) of the game ball into the corresponding out gate. This allows for the out indicators to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous.

Specifically, for example, in an attacker unit with a large prize winning slot, the first out indicator for the first out slot and the second out indicator for the second out slot in a side unit with a general prize winning slot are positioned in front of each other. This ensures that even though the first out indicator is positioned in front of the second out indicator, the large prize winning slot is located near the first out indicator (first out slot). Therefore, even if the first out indicator is prominent due to its forward positioning, the player's attention will be strongly directed towards the large prize winning slot, relatively reducing their interest in the first out indicator. As a result, the first out indicator will not be noticeable and will not detract from the surrounding decorations. On the other hand, since the second out indicator is positioned behind the first out indicator, it can be made less conspicuous than the first out indicator.

Alternatively, for example, the "First Out" indicator for the first out gate, which is farther from the player, and the "Second Out" indicator for the second out gate, which is closer to the player, could be positioned further forward than the "Second Out" indicator. This way, the first out gate (first out indicator), being farther from the player, would not be conspicuous even if positioned further forward. On the other hand, since the second out gate is closer to the player, positioning the second out indicator behind the first out indicator would make it further away from the player and less conspicuous.

Therefore, by differentiating the front-to-back positions of the first and second out indicators, it becomes possible to make both out indicators less conspicuous. This prevents the out indicators from causing discomfort to the player, ensuring that the decorative effects of the decorations within the game area are fully realized, improving the overall appearance, and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, it is possible to place multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, behind the indicators corresponding to the winning slots. This ensures that the winning indicators for the winning slots are present, alerting the player to their presence and encouraging them to strongly desire to enter those slots. Additionally, for multiple out slots separate from the winning slots, placing the corresponding out indicators behind the winning indicators makes the out indicators less conspicuous than the winning indicators. This allows the player to recognize the existence of the out slots while minimizing any deterioration in the appearance of the game machine (game board) due to the out indicators. As a result, even with the out indicators present, the player will not feel any discomfort, allowing the decorative effects of the decorations within the game area to be fully realized, improving the overall appearance and preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, it is desirable to place multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, in front of the circulating game balls, especially in the out slots that are easier for balls to enter. This ensures that the corresponding out indicators are placed in front of the circulating game balls, preventing the indicators from being obscured and becoming difficult to see (read) even if game balls frequently enter the out slot. This allows for clear visibility of the out indicators and recognition of the out slot's presence.

Furthermore, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, may be positioned further forward, with those corresponding to out indicators closer to prize-winning entries offering greater rewards upon ball entry being placed further forward. This ensures that players' attention is strongly focused on prize-winning entries offering greater rewards (e.g., large prize entries, special prize entries, V-prize entries, etc.). Consequently, players will pay less attention to out indicators for out-winning entries near these prize-winning entries. Therefore, even if these indicators are positioned further forward than others, they will not be noticeable, and they will not detract from the surrounding decorations. Thus, even with out indicators present, the game does not cause players any discomfort, allowing the decorative effects of the game area to be fully realized, improving the overall appearance, and preventing a decline in player interest.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
It is located behind the prize entry mark corresponding to the aforementioned prize entry slot.
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "prize indication" includes examples such as: "the name of the prize slot," "letters such as [IN], [GO], and [V], or kanji characters such as [START], [賞], and [当]," "numbers indicating the number of balls dispensed or the ranking," and "designs such as patterns, symbols, or pictograms."

According to the configuration of means 2, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, are placed behind the prize indicators corresponding to the prize winning slots. (See the description of the out slot indicator 2050 and Figure 347 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

In this configuration, prize entry points are indicated by corresponding markings, allowing players to become aware of the presence of these points and strongly encourage them to aim for those points. Furthermore, for the multiple separate exit points, the corresponding exit markings are positioned behind the prize entry markings, making them less conspicuous. This allows players to recognize the presence of the exit points while minimizing any visual deterioration of the game machine (game board) due to the exit markings. As a result, even with the presence of exit markings, players will not feel any discomfort, ensuring that the decorative effects of the game area are fully realized, improving the overall appearance, and preventing a decline in player enjoyment.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"At least the first out notation and the second out notation, and the multiple out notations,
The aforementioned out-of-bounds openings, which make it easier for balls to enter, are positioned further forward than the game balls that are in circulation.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, are positioned further forward than the game balls circulating in the out exits, with the easier it is for the balls to enter. (See the description of out exit indicator 2050 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design ensures that the out indicator for easier ball entry points is positioned further forward than the circulating game balls (for example, on the front panel of the ball entry point component). Therefore, even if game balls frequently enter the out indicator, the incoming balls will not obscure the indicator, making it difficult to see (read). This ensures that the indicator is clearly visible and the presence of the out indicator is recognized.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"At least the multiple out notations, including the first out notation and the second out notation,
The out indicator is positioned further forward, corresponding to the out exit that is closer to the prize entry point, where more benefits are awarded for each game ball that enters the exit.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, multiple out indicators, including at least the first and second out indicators, are arranged so that the out indicators corresponding to out exits closer to the winning entry points, where more benefits are awarded upon ball entry, are positioned further forward. (See the description of the out exit indicator 2050 and Figure 347 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, players' attention is strongly drawn to prize winning slots (e.g., large prize slots, special prize slots, V prize slots, etc.) where more benefits are awarded upon ball entry. Therefore, they tend to pay less attention to the "out" indicators for the "out" slots located near these prize winning slots. Even if these "out" indicators are placed further forward than other "out" indicators to make them more noticeable, it won't be a concern, and they won't detract from the surrounding decorations. Consequently, even with "out" indicators present, players won't feel any discomfort, the decorative effects of the game area can be effectively utilized, improving the overall appearance and preventing a decline in player interest.

Thus, by using the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the big prize entry point 2005, the special prize entry point 2006, and the V prize entry point 2010 correspond to the prize entry points of the above solution means, the out entry point 1008, the losing entry point 2009, and the sub-out entry point 2023 in this embodiment correspond to the out entry points of the above solution means, the first out entry point 2023a in this embodiment corresponds to the first out entry point of the above solution means, and the second out entry point 2023b and the third out entry point 2023c in this embodiment correspond to the second out entry points of the above solution means.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the out-port notation 2050 corresponds to the out-port notation of the above-described solution, the first out-port notation 2050a corresponds to the first out-port notation of the above-described solution, the second out-port notation 2050b and the third out-port notation 2050c correspond to the second out-port notation of the above-described solution, and the prize-winning-port notation section 2060 corresponds to the prize-winning-port notation of the above-described solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with multiple prize entry points such as a general prize entry point 2001 and a first start entry point 2002, and multiple sub-out entry points 2023 such as a first out entry point 2023a and a second out entry point 2023b. A first out entry point notation 2050a corresponding to the first out entry point 2023a and a second out entry point notation 2050b corresponding to the second out entry point 2023b are provided. As a result, when a player sees the out entry point notation 2050 such as the first out entry point notation 2050a and the second out entry point notation 2050b, they will become aware of the existence of the sub-out entry points 2023. Therefore, players will not mistake the first out gate 2023a or the second out gate 2023b for prize winning gates, and even if no bonus is awarded when game ball B enters the first out gate 2023a or the second out gate 2023b, they will not feel frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, because the first and second out-port indicators 2050a and 2050b, which correspond to the first and second out-ports 2023a and 2023b, are positioned at different locations in the front-to-back direction, it becomes possible to vary the front-to-back position of each out-port indicator 2050 according to the positional relationship between the corresponding sub-out-port 2023 and the prize-winning port (type of prize-winning port), the distance from the player seated in front, and the probability (ease of entry) of the game ball B into the corresponding sub-out-port 2023. This allows the out-port indicators 2050 to be displayed while remaining inconspicuous.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 347, the first out-out As a result, even if the first exit indicator 2050a for the first exit 2023a is placed in front of the second exit indicator 2050b, the large prize opening 2005 is located near the first exit indicator 2050a (first exit 2023a). Therefore, even if the first exit indicator 2050a is placed in front and becomes more conspicuous, the player's attention will be strongly directed towards the large prize opening 2005. This relatively reduces the player's interest in the first exit indicator 2050a, making it less noticeable and preventing it from interfering with the surrounding decorations. On the other hand, since the second exit indicator 2050b is placed behind the first exit indicator 2050a, the second exit indicator 2050b can be made less conspicuous than the first exit indicator 2050a.

Alternatively, although not shown in the diagram, the first sub-outlet 2023 (first outlet 2050), which is farther from the player, and the second sub-outlet 2023 (second outlet 2050), which is closer to the player, can be positioned such that the first outlet 2050 is positioned further forward than the second outlet 2050. This ensures that the first sub-outlet 2023 (first outlet 2050), being farther from the player, will not be conspicuous even if positioned further forward. On the other hand, since the second sub-outlet 2023 is closer to the player, positioning the second outlet 2050 behind the first outlet 2050 makes the second outlet 2050 further away from the player, thus making it less conspicuous.

Therefore, by differentiating the front-to-back positions of the first and second out-of-bounds indicators 2050a and 2050b, it is possible to make both out-of-bounds indicators 2050 less conspicuous. This prevents the out-of-bounds indicators 2050 from causing discomfort to the player, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorations within the game area 5a is fully realized, improving the overall appearance, and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that meets these criteria.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 347, the multiple out-port indicators 2050 are positioned behind the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060 corresponding to the first-start-port 2002. This allows the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060, which corresponds to the first-start-port 2002, to alert the player to the existence of the first-start-port 2002, thereby encouraging them to strongly desire to enter the first-start-port 2002 with the game ball B. Additionally, in the case of the multiple sub-out-ports 2023, which are provided separately from the first-start-port 2002, the corresponding out-port indicators 2050 are positioned behind the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060. This makes the out-port indicators 2050 less conspicuous than the prize-winning-port indicator section 2060, allowing the presence of the sub-out-ports 2023 to be recognized while suppressing the deterioration of the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) due to the out-port indicators 2050. As a result, even with the presence of the output slot indicator 2050, the player will not feel any discomfort. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

Furthermore, the easier it is for a sub-outlet 2023 to receive a ball (for example, the third outlet 2023c in Figure 349), the more the corresponding outlet indicator 2050 (third outlet indicator 2050c) is positioned in front of the circulating game ball B (on the front plate 2202). Therefore, even if game balls B frequently enter the sub-outlet 2023, the incoming game balls B will not obscure the outlet indicator 2050, making it difficult to see (read). This ensures that the outlet indicator 2050 is clearly visible, allowing the presence of the sub-outlet 2023 to be recognized.

Furthermore, the out-out Therefore, even with the presence of the output slot indicator 2050, it does not cause any discomfort to the player, and the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

[30-5c. Summary C]
(Background of the technical features)
Pachinko machines and similar gaming machines are provided with a game area through which the balls are played, which includes multiple prize-winning openings that award predetermined benefits upon ball entry, and an outlet opening at the lower end of the game area that discharges balls that do not enter any of the prize-winning openings. In addition to the outlet opening at the lower end of the game area, there are known gaming machines of this type that have multiple outlet openings located in the middle of the game area (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2019-136134).

However, if multiple payout slots are provided, it becomes difficult to distinguish between payout slots and payout slots. Some players may mistake a payout slot for a payout slot, leading to frustration when they don't receive a reward despite entering a slot, potentially diminishing their enjoyment of the game. While labeling each payout slot could address this problem, such prominent labeling might create a sense of unease for players and further reduce their enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots without causing any sense of incongruity.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
A gaming machine comprising a game board having a prize entry opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
At least a first outlet and a second outlet are provided as the aforementioned outlets.
The game board is provided with a first out notation corresponding to the first out opening and a second out notation corresponding to the second out opening.
At least a portion of the second out indication is located in a position that overlaps with the front body, which is located in front of the game board, when viewed from the front.
A space is provided between the front body and the game board that allows the player to see the portion of the second out indicator that overlaps with the front body when viewed from the front."
It is characterized by the following:

Here, "winning slots" refer to: "general winning slots that are always open within the game area," "starting winning slots (starting slots) that are always open within the game area and where a special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous game state that is beneficial to the player as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball," "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, special feature winning slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter within the game area as a predetermined benefit when a game ball enters a specific receiving slot (chucker) within the game area," and "variable winning slots (variable starting slots, etc.) that allow game balls to enter as a predetermined benefit depending on the result of a normal lottery held when a game ball passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) within the game area." Examples include: "a prize entry slot for special features, etc.," "a variable-start prize entry slot (variable-start slot) where, depending on the result of a normal lottery conducted when a game ball passes through a specific area within the game area (e.g., a gate, checker, etc.), a special lottery is held to determine whether or not a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit upon the entry of a game ball, which is advantageous to the player," "a V-prize entry slot where, upon game balls entering the prize entry slot and being distributed by a distribution means, a special advantageous game state is generated as a predetermined benefit," and "a large prize entry slot or prize entry slot that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern to allow game balls to enter, as a special advantageous game state for the player."

Furthermore, examples of "out markings," such as the first and second out markings, include: "characters from languages such as English (alphabet) and Japanese (katakana, hiragana)," "designs such as patterns, symbols, and pictograms," and "images or characters that evoke negative images." Also, examples of out markings include: "those with different light transmission properties than the surrounding decorations and materials," and "those with different light reflectivity than the surrounding decorations and materials." When out markings are text, they may be written horizontally, vertically, or diagonally. Multiple out markings may have the same identification method or different identification methods. Furthermore, out markings may be placed on stickers, printed together with the decorations on decorative sheets, or integrally molded with materials such as ball entry slot components.

Furthermore, examples of "front components" include: "the window frame portion of a door frame having a window that allows the game area of the game board to be viewed from the front," "the decorative element of the tray unit provided below the window in a door frame having a window that allows the game area of the game board to be viewed from the front," "the performance control unit (performance control section) provided below and in front of the window that can be operated by the player in a door frame having a window that allows the game area of the game board to be viewed from the front," "the decorative element of the right side unit of the door frame provided on the right outer side of the window in a door frame having a window that allows the game area of the game board to be viewed from the front," and "the decorative element of the left side unit of the door frame provided on the left outer side of the window in a door frame having a window that allows the game area of the game board to be viewed from the front."

In the configuration of Means 1, a game machine is provided with a game board having a prize entry opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and an out entry opening into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter. The out entry opening has at least a first and a second, and the game board is provided with a first out entry marking corresponding to the first out entry opening and a second out entry marking corresponding to the second out entry opening. At least a portion of the second out entry marking is provided in a location that overlaps with a front body located in front of the game board when viewed from the front. A space is provided between the front body and the game board to allow the player to see the portion of the second out entry marking that overlaps with the front body when viewed from the front. (See the description in Chapter 30-2d. Example of Use of Out Entry Marking 4, Out Entry Marking 2050, Figure 350, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

In this configuration, the game board's play area is provided with multiple prize entry points and multiple output points, such as the first and second output points. The first output point is marked with a corresponding "first output" indicator, and the second output point with a corresponding "second output" indicator. This allows players to recognize the existence of the output points by visually identifying them. Therefore, players will not mistake the first or second output points for prize entry points, and even if no bonus is awarded for balls entering these points, they will not become frustrated, and their enjoyment will not diminish.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the second out indicator is obscured by the front body from the front view, making it invisible. However, it is visible through the open space to players seated in front of the machine. Therefore, while the first and second out indicators provide the aforementioned effects to the player currently playing, the second out indicator is less conspicuous to other players due to the front body, thus avoiding any visual deterioration caused by the second out indicator. Consequently, other players will not perceive the out indicator as inconspicuous, allowing the decorative effects of the machine's design to be fully realized, and making it a more likely choice for players.

Furthermore, the second out indicator may be positioned in a location that does not overlap with the light source located at the rear when viewed from the front, or in a location that does not overlap with both the light source located at the rear and the surrounding space. This ensures that the second out indicator does not obstruct the light from the rear light source, thus not diminishing the player's sensation during the light-emitting effects. This allows the effects of the light-emitting effects to be reliably realized, keeping the player entertained and preventing a decline in interest. In this case, the light from the light source will relatively dim the second out indicator, making it difficult to see. Therefore, the out indicator will not cause the player any discomfort, the decorative effects of the decorations within the game area can be reliably realized, improving the appearance and providing a gaming machine that prevents a decline in player interest.

Alternatively, the second out indicator may be positioned with lower light transmission than its surroundings at a location that overlaps with the light source located at the rear when viewed from the front, or at a location that overlaps with both the rear light source and the surrounding space. This ensures that the second out indicator is positioned to block light from the rear light source, but because its light transmission is lower than its surroundings, the area around the second out indicator is illuminated by light from the light source, making the second out indicator relatively darker and harder to see. Therefore, since the out indicator does not cause discomfort to the player, the decorative effect of the decorations within the game area can be reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, as described above, if at least the second out indicator is positioned to overlap with the light source and has lower light transmittance than the surrounding area, the surrounding area, which has higher light transmittance than the second out indicator, will light up brighter due to the light from the light source. Therefore, even if the second out indicator is dark, it will not affect the light-emitting effect, allowing the light-emitting effect to be fully realized, and providing a gaming machine that can entertain players and prevent a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, at least the second out indicator may be positioned close to the periphery of the window that allows the game area to be visible from the front. This makes the second out indicator less conspicuous, as it is closer to the edge of the window, thus avoiding causing discomfort to the player and achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, the second out indication may be provided so as to extend in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the part that overlaps with the front body in a frontal view. Specifically, for example, if the part that overlaps with the front body is long horizontally, the second out indication may be written horizontally, and if the part that overlaps with the front body is long vertically, the second out indication may be written vertically. This ensures that the second out indication is completely hidden by the front body, making it difficult for other players to see, and thus providing a gaming machine that achieves the same effect as described above.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"At least the second out notation mentioned above is,
It is located in a place that does not overlap with the light source located at the rear when viewed from the front, or in a place that does not overlap with both the light source located at the rear and the aforementioned space."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "light sources" can include "LEDs," "display devices," "incandescent lamps," "fluorescent lamps," and "cold cathode tubes," among others. Furthermore, the light source can be self-illuminating, reflecting light like a mirror, or refracting light like a prism.

According to the configuration of means 2, at least the second outlet indicator is positioned in a location that does not overlap with the light source located at the rear when viewed from the front, or in a location that does not overlap with both the light source located at the rear and the empty space. (See the section "[30-3a. Relationship between Outlet Indication and LED 1]" and Figure 351, etc., in the [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention] section.)

As a result, at least the second out indicator does not obstruct the light from the light source located behind it. Therefore, the stimulation felt by the player during the light-emitting effects is not diminished, and the effects of the light-emitting effects can be reliably demonstrated, keeping the player entertained and preventing a decline in interest. In this case, at least the second out indicator becomes relatively darker due to the light from the light source, making it difficult to see. Therefore, the out indicator does not cause discomfort to the player, and the decorative effects of the decorations provided within the game area can be reliably demonstrated, improving the appearance and providing a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in the player's interest.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1,
"At least the second out notation mentioned above is,
In a front view, the area where it overlaps with the light source located at the rear, or in the area where it overlaps with both the light source located at the rear and the aforementioned space, is provided with lower light transmittance than the surrounding area.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, at least the second outlet indicator is provided with lower light transmission than the surrounding area at a location that overlaps with the light source located at the rear when viewed from the front, or at a location that overlaps with both the light source located at the rear and the space. (See the section "[30-3b. Relationship between Outlet Indication and LED 2]" and Figure 352, etc., in the [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention] section.)

This design ensures that at least the second out indicator is positioned to block light from the light source located behind it. However, because the second out indicator has lower light transmittance than its surroundings, the area around the second out indicator is brightly illuminated by the light source, making the second out indicator relatively darker and harder to see. Therefore, it does not cause any discomfort to the player due to the out indicator, allowing the decorative effect of the decorations within the game area to be fully realized, improving the appearance and preventing a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, because the area surrounding the second out indicator is more translucent than the second out indicator itself is illuminated by the light from the light source, even if the second out indicator is dim, it will not affect the light-emitting effect. This allows the light-emitting effect to be fully realized, providing a gaming machine that entertains players and prevents a decline in enjoyment.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"At least the second out notation mentioned above is,
It is positioned to be close to the periphery of the window that makes the aforementioned game area visible from the front.
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least the second out indicator is provided so as to be close to the periphery of the window portion that allows the game area to be viewed from the front. (See the section [30-2d. Example of Use of Out Indicator], Out Indicator 2050, Figure 350, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the second out indicator is located close to the edge of the window, it becomes less conspicuous, preventing the indicator from causing discomfort to the player, and thus achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, the "out" markings, such as the second "out" marking, may be placed along the periphery of the window area. Specifically, for example, if placed near the lower edge of the window area, the "out" marking may be written horizontally, while if placed near the right or left edge of the window area, it may be written vertically.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"At least the second out notation mentioned above is,
It is provided so as to extend for a long distance in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the portion that overlaps with the aforementioned front body in a front view."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, at least the second outlet marking is provided so as to extend in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the portion that overlaps with the front body in a front view. (See the section [30-2d. Example of Use of Outlet Marking 4], Outlet Marking 2050, Figure 350, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

In this configuration, the longitudinal direction of the overlapping area between the second out indicator and the front panel is the same as the longitudinal direction of the second out indicator. Specifically, for example, if the overlapping area is longer horizontally, the second out indicator is written horizontally; if the overlapping area is longer vertically, the second out indicator is written vertically. This ensures that the second out indicator is completely hidden by the front panel, making it difficult for other players to see, thus providing a gaming machine that achieves the same effect as described above.

Thus, by using the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a decline in enjoyment by clearly indicating the multiple output slots.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the general prize entry point 2001, the first start entry point 2002, the second start entry point 2004, the big prize entry point 2005, the special prize entry point 2006, and the V prize entry point 2010 correspond to the prize entry points of the above solution, the out entry point 1008, the losing entry point 2009, and the sub-out entry point 2023 in this embodiment correspond to the out entry points of the above solution, the two sub-out entry points 2023 separated to the left and right in this embodiment correspond to the first and second out entry points of the above solution, and the two out entry point markings 2050 separated to the left and right in this embodiment correspond to the first and second out entry markings of the above solution.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the door window 101a of the door frame 3 corresponds to the window portion of the solution, the performance operation unit 300 corresponds to the front body of the solution, the space portion 2055 corresponds to the space portion of the solution, and the LED 2056a of the decorative substrate 2056 corresponds to the light source of the solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of prize-winning openings including the first start opening 2002, and a plurality of sub-out openings 2023 such as the left sub-out opening 2023 and the right sub-out opening 2023. A left-side out opening notation 2050 corresponding to the left sub-out opening 2023 and a right-side out opening notation 2050 corresponding to the right sub-out opening 2023 are provided. As a result, players can become aware of the existence of the sub-out openings 2023 by visually checking the out opening notation 2050 corresponding to the sub-out openings 2023. Therefore, players will not mistake the sub-out openings 2023 for prize-winning openings such as the first start opening 2002, and even if no bonus is awarded by entering the game balls B into the sub-out openings 2023, they will not feel frustrated, and their enjoyment will not decrease.

As shown in Figure 350, at least a portion of the out-of-slot marking 2050 is obscured from the front by the performance control unit 300, which acts as the front element. However, it is visible to a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 through the space 2055. Therefore, while the out-of-slot marking 2050 provides the aforementioned effects to the player currently playing the pachinko machine 1, the performance control unit 300 makes the out-of-slot marking 2050 less conspicuous to other players, thus avoiding any visual deterioration caused by the out-of-slot marking 2050. Consequently, other players will not perceive the out-of-slot marking 2050 as being difficult to see, thus avoiding any sense of incongruity. This allows the decorative effects of the pachinko machine 1 to be fully realized, making it a pachinko machine 1 that is more likely to be chosen by players.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 351, the outlet indicator 2050 is positioned so as not to overlap with the light source (LED 2056a) located at the rear when viewed from the front, or so as not to overlap with both the light source (LED 2056a) located at the rear and the space 2055. This ensures that the outlet indicator 2050 does not obstruct the light from the LED 2056a located at the rear, thus not diminishing the stimulation felt by the player during the LED 2056a's light-emitting effects. This allows the effects of the light-emitting effects to be reliably realized, keeping the player entertained and preventing a decline in enjoyment. In this case, the light from the LED 2056a makes the output opening indicator 2050 relatively darker, making it difficult to see. Therefore, the output opening indicator 2050 does not cause discomfort to the player, and the decorative effect of the decorations provided within the game area 5a is reliably achieved, improving the appearance and preventing a decrease in the player's enjoyment. This allows for the provision of a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

Alternatively, as shown in Figure 352, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 can be positioned with lower light transmission than its surroundings at a location that overlaps with the light source (LED 2056a) located at the rear when viewed from the front, or at a location that overlaps with both the light source (LED 2056a) located at the rear and the space 2055. This ensures that the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is positioned to block the light from the LED 2056a, but because its light transmission is lower than its surroundings, the area around the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is brightly illuminated by the light from the LED 2056a. This relatively darkens the out-of-bounds indicator 2050, making it difficult to see. Therefore, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 does not cause any discomfort to the player, thus ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorations within the game area 5a is fully realized, improving the appearance and preventing a decrease in the player's enjoyment. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that achieves this.

Furthermore, as described above, if the output opening indicator 2050 is positioned to overlap with the LED 2056a and has lower light transmittance than the surrounding area, the light from the LED 2056a will illuminate the surrounding area, which has higher light transmittance than the output opening indicator 2050. Therefore, even if the output opening indicator 2050 is dim, it will not affect the lighting effect of the LED 2056a, allowing the lighting effect to be fully realized and providing a pachinko machine 1 that can entertain players and prevent a decline in enjoyment.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 350, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is positioned close to the periphery of the door window 101a, which allows the game area 5a to be visible from the front. This makes the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 less conspicuous, preventing it from causing discomfort to the player, and thus achieving the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 350, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is provided to extend in the same direction as the longitudinal direction of the portion that overlaps with the performance operation unit 300 in a front view. Specifically, because the portion that overlaps with the performance operation unit 300 is long horizontally, the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is written horizontally. This ensures that the out-of-bounds indicator 2050 is completely hidden by the performance operation unit 300, making it difficult for other players to see it, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as described above.

[31. Door frame of the second embodiment]
Next, the door frame 3A of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 353 to 362, etc. Figure 353 is a front view of the door frame of the second embodiment, Figure 354 is a rear view of the door frame of the second embodiment, Figure 355 is a left side view of the door frame of the second embodiment, and Figure 356 is a right side view of the door frame of the second embodiment. Figure 357 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment from the front right, Figure 358 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment from the front left, and Figure 359 is a perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment from the rear. Figure 360 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front, and Figure 361 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. Figure 362 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the door frame of the second embodiment. Here, parts with the same configuration as the door frame 3 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

The door frame 3A is formed as a rectangle extending vertically when viewed from the front, with approximately the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2. It is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4, allowing it to be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3A closes the game area 5a of the game board 5, where the game balls B are inserted, allowing it to be visible from the front. It stores the game balls B for insertion into the game area 5a and includes a handle 197 operated by the player to insert the stored game balls B into the game area 5a. Furthermore, the door frame 3A decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3A consists of a rectangular door frame base unit 100 with an outer shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, a handle unit 180A attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a handle that covers the outer circumference of the handle unit 180A. The system comprises a cover unit 290A, a tray unit 200 mounted on the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left door frame side unit 420 mounted on the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right door frame side unit 430A mounted on the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top door frame unit 450A mounted on the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left door frame side unit 420 and the right door frame side unit 430A.

The handle 197 operated by the player is provided on the handle unit 180A. The handle cover unit 290A is shorter in the front-to-back direction compared to the handle cover unit 290 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment, and the handle 197 of the handle unit 180A protrudes further forward than the handle cover unit 290A.

The door frame right side unit 430A has a right side left panel 442 that is detachably provided on the left side and a right side right panel 443 that is detachably provided on the right side. Therefore, when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 due to specification changes or model changes, the right side left panel 442 and the right side right panel 443, which are decorated with decorations and patterns corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5, can be easily adapted to model changes, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

The door frame top unit 450A, compared to the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment, has a door frame top decorative body 453A integrally configured with the top cover and is detachably attached to the door frame top base 451. The door frame top decorative body 453A can be removed forward by loosening the thumbscrew 469 screwed into the rear of the door frame base unit 100. Therefore, when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 due to specification changes or model changes, replacing it with a door frame top decorative body 453A that has decorations corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5 makes it easy to adapt to model changes, etc., and makes it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

[31-1. Door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3A will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 363. Figure 363(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main frame 4 on its left side in a front view, allowing it to hinge and rotate. It closes the front of the main frame 4 in an openable and closable manner, while also allowing the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the main frame 4 to be visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 mainly comprises a rectangular, flat door frame base 101 with an extended vertical shape, a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110A attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 in a rear view.

The door frame base unit 100 is equipped with the following components: a handle unit 180A and a handle cover unit 290A at the lower front corner; a tray unit 200 at the lower front of the door window 101a; a left side unit 420 at the left outer front of the door window 101a; a right side unit 430A at the right outer front of the door window 101a; and a top unit 450A at the upper outer front of the door window 101a.

Furthermore, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[31-1a. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110A of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 364 to 367. Figure 364(a) is a perspective view of the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the rear. Figure 365(a) is a perspective view of the intermediate reinforcement frame of the door frame reinforcement unit, viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the intermediate reinforcement frame of the door frame reinforcement unit, viewed from the rear. Figure 366 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the intermediate reinforcement frame in the vertical cross-section of the door frame of the second embodiment. Figure 367 is an explanatory diagram showing the dimensional relationship of the upper part of the intermediate reinforcement frame.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110A is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, thereby reinforcing the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101, which is made of synthetic resin, and providing rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110A comprises a left reinforcing frame 111 and a right reinforcing frame 112, which extend vertically and are spaced apart to the left and right; an upper reinforcing frame 113, which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112; an intermediate reinforcing frame 117, which connects the upper portions of the lower ends of the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112; a cylinder mounting frame 115 (see Figure 363) attached to the right reinforcing frame 112; and multiple hooking members 116, which are attached vertically spaced apart to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 and to which the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 is hooked.

The left reinforcing frame 111 extends vertically with a roughly constant width and a length roughly equal to the height of the door frame base 101. It has a bulging portion 111a projecting to the right from the upper part of its lower end. The left end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is attached to the bulging portion 111a of the left reinforcing frame 111.

The right reinforcing frame 112 extends vertically with a roughly constant width and a length roughly equal to the height of the door frame base 101. It has a bulge 112a projecting to the left from the upper part of its lower end. The right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is attached to the bulge 112a of the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the front surface of the bulge 112a. The right reinforcing frame 112 has multiple through-holes that are spaced apart vertically and penetrate through in the front-to-back direction. These through-holes are through which the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted when the door frame 3A is closed relative to the main frame 4.

The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends horizontally with a length approximately equal to the width of the door frame base 101.

[31-1a-1. Intermediate reinforcement frame]
Next, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 in the door frame reinforcement unit 110A will be described in detail. As shown in Figure 365, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is attached so as to connect the bulging portion 111a of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the bulging portion 112a of the right reinforcing frame 112. The intermediate reinforcing frame 117 extends left and right with a width wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The lower end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is a straight line extending left and right, while the left and right ends of the upper end become higher as they extend outward in the left and right direction. The intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has a through portion 114b that penetrates front to back near the right end and a rectangular opening 114c that penetrates front to back near the left end. The through portion 114b is formed at a position that coincides with the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The opening 114c is formed to coincide with the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has a strip-shaped base plate portion 117a with its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction, an upper flange portion 117b extending rearward from the upper edge of the base plate portion 117a, a rear flange portion 117c extending upward from the rear edge of the upper flange portion 117b, and a lower flange portion 117d extending forward from the lower edge of the base plate portion 117a.

Furthermore, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 protrudes forward, and multiple elongated bead portions 117e are provided on the base plate portion 117a. These multiple bead portions 117e enhance the strength and rigidity of the base plate portion 117a (intermediate reinforcing frame 117).

As shown in Figure 365(b), the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is composed of a first sheet metal section 118a with the same thickness as the sheet metal constituting the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, and a second sheet metal section 118b with a thicker sheet metal section than the first sheet metal section 118a. The first sheet metal section 118a has a base plate section 117a, an upper flange section 117b, and a lower flange section 117d. The second sheet metal section 118b has a base plate section 117a, an upper flange section 117b, and a rear flange section 117c. The upper flange section 117b, rear flange section 117c, and lower flange section 117d are formed by bending the sheet metal. The first sheet metal section 118a and the second sheet metal section 118b are attached to each other by multiple rivets at the base plate section 117a, with the first sheet metal section 118a facing forward.

The length of the first sheet metal section 118a in the left-right direction is the same as the length of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 in the left-right direction. The length of the second sheet metal section 118b in the left-right direction is shorter than that of the first sheet metal section 118a. The second sheet metal section 118b is attached so as to overlap the left-right central portion of the first sheet metal section 118a. The thickness tc of the second sheet metal section 118b is approximately 1.7 times the thickness of the first sheet metal section 118a.

When assembled to the door frame 3A, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is located below the door window 101a and behind the plate unit 200 (the performance operation unit 300C, described later) (see Figures 362 and 366). As shown in the figures, the lower end of the glass frame 161 (locking piece 161b) of the glass unit 160 abuts against the upper surface of the upper flange portion 117b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117. In other words, the glass unit 160 is placed on the upper flange portion 117b. Furthermore, the lower rear surface (rear surface of the locking piece 161b) of the glass frame 160 abuts against the front surface of the rear flange portion 117c of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117. As a result, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 restricts the downward movement of the glass unit 160 and the rearward movement of the lower part of the glass unit 160. In this embodiment, the rear surface of the rear flange portion 117c is located in front of the rear surface of the glass unit 160 and does not protrude rearward.

In this embodiment, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has a greater vertical width at both ends in the left-right direction than the vertical width in the center in the left-right direction. Because it is attached to the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 at the portion with the larger vertical width, it is more securely attached than the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame 3 of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has an upper flange portion 117b, a rear flange portion 117c, and a lower flange portion 117d, and is formed in a cross-sectional shape that combines two crank shapes. The intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is also composed of two sheet metal parts: a first sheet metal portion 118a and a second sheet metal portion 118b. For these reasons, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has higher strength and rigidity than the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment. Therefore, the door frame reinforcing unit 110A itself also has higher strength and rigidity than the door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment.

As described above, the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) are increased. Therefore, even if a player grabs and strongly pulls the upper tray 201 or lower tray 202, or strongly pulls the lever operating part 304 of the performance operation unit 300C (described later), the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) will not bend (plastically deform). Consequently, it is possible to prevent a gap from forming between the door frame 3A and the main body frame 4 due to the distortion of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117.

Furthermore, even if someone attempts to commit fraud by forcefully pulling the upper tray 201 or lever operating section 304 forward to create a gap between the door frame 3A and the main body frame 4, as described above, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A), which has increased strength and rigidity, prevents the door frame 3A from plastically deforming and creating a gap between it and the main body frame 4. This provides a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, since the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has an upper flange portion 117b on which the glass unit 160 is placed, and a rear flange portion 117c extending upward from the upper flange portion 117b, it can support the load of the glass unit 160. Moreover, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool between the upper flange portion 117b and the lower end of the glass unit 160, the upward-extending rear flange portion 117c can prevent the tool from entering, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against illegal activities.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 367, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is configured such that the distance L1 from the rear surface of the base plate portion 117a to the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b is slightly shorter than the distance L2 from the upper surface of the upper flange portion 117b to the upper end of the rear flange portion 117c. Also, the sum of distances L1 and L2, L0, is longer than the distance from the rear surface of the base plate portion 117a to the rear end of the door frame 3A (not shown). Therefore, if the rear flange portion 117c is extended backward in the same way as the upper flange portion 117b without being bent upward, its rear end protrudes further backward than the rear end of the door frame 3A. In other words, the length is set such that the rear end can enter the rear game board 5 depending on the angle at which the rear flange portion 117c is extended (bent) relative to the upper flange portion 117b.

[31-1a-2. Modified Intermediate Reinforcement Frame]
Next, modified examples (Modifications 1 to 5) of the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 368 and 369. Figure 368(a) is an explanatory diagram showing Modification 1 of the intermediate reinforcement frame in the door frame of the second embodiment, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing Modification 2 of the intermediate reinforcement frame, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing Modification 3 of the intermediate reinforcement frame. Figure 369(a) is an explanatory diagram showing Modification 4 of the intermediate reinforcement frame in the door frame of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing Modification 5 of the intermediate reinforcement frame. Here, parts with the same configuration as the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 will be denoted by the same reference numerals.

(Modified example 1 of the intermediate reinforcement frame)
The intermediate reinforcing frame 117A shown in Figure 368(a) is constructed from a single sheet of thick metal (sheet metal). This intermediate reinforcing frame 117A also provides the same effects as described above. Furthermore, because this intermediate reinforcing frame 117A is constructed from a single sheet of metal, it does not require assembly with rivets or the like compared to cases where multiple sheet metals are used, thus reducing costs. A bead portion 117e may also be provided in this intermediate reinforcing frame 117A.

(Modified example 2 of the intermediate reinforcement frame)
The intermediate reinforcing frame 117B shown in Figure 368(b) has a lower flange portion 117d that extends rearward from the lower end of the base portion 117a. The lower flange portion 117d that extends rearward also increases the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117B, producing the same effects as described above. The intermediate reinforcing frame 117B may be made of a single sheet metal as shown in the figure, or it may be made of multiple sheet metals, similar to the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 described above. In addition, a bead portion 117e may also be provided on the intermediate reinforcing frame 117B.

(Modified example 3 of the intermediate reinforcement frame)
The intermediate reinforcing frame 117C shown in Figure 368(c) has an upper flange portion 117b that extends to the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and a rear flange portion 117c that extends upward from the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b is located behind the glass unit 160. This intermediate reinforcing frame 117C also provides the same effects as described above. Furthermore, in this intermediate reinforcing frame 117C, the width (depth) of the upper flange portion 117b in the front-rear direction is wider than that of the upper flange portion 117b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 described above, so that the glass unit 160 can be supported over a wider area. The intermediate reinforcing frame 117C may be made of a single sheet of metal as shown in the figure, or it may be made of multiple sheet metals, similar to the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 described above. A bead portion 117e may also be provided on the intermediate reinforcing frame 117C. In addition, a locking piece 161b similar to the above may be provided on the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160.

(Modified example 4 of the intermediate reinforcement frame)
The intermediate reinforcing frame 117D shown in Figure 369(a) has a rear flange portion 117c that extends downward from the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b. More specifically, the rear flange portion 117c hangs down from the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b. This configuration also increases the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117D, preventing distortion (plastic deformation) even when the upper plate 201 or lever operating portion 304 of the door frame 3A are strongly pulled forward. Furthermore, it is possible to place the glass unit 160 on the upper flange portion 117b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117D. Note that in Figure 369(a), the rear surface of the rear flange portion 117c does not protrude further rearward than the rear surface of the glass unit 160, but the rear flange portion 117c may protrude further rearward than the glass unit 160. Furthermore, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117D may be made of a single sheet of metal as shown in the figure, or it may be made of multiple sheet metals, similar to the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 described above. Also, a bead portion 117e may be provided on the intermediate reinforcing frame 117D. Also, a locking piece 161b similar to the above may be provided on the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160.

(Modified example 5 of the intermediate reinforcement frame)
The intermediate reinforcing frame 117E shown in Figure 369(b) has a rear flange portion 117c that extends downward from the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b. More specifically, the rear flange portion 117c extends diagonally downward from the rear end of the upper flange portion 117b. This configuration also increases the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E, so that it does not deform (plastically deform) even if the upper tray 201 or lever operating portion 304 of the door frame 3A is strongly pulled forward. When the door frame 3A is closed, the rear end of the rear flange portion 117c of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E is inserted into the game board 5 (in this case, into the front component 1000). The insertion of this rear flange portion 117c creates a meandering gap, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool along the front of the game board 5, the rear flange portion 117c will prevent it, thereby increasing the deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the rear flange portion 117c of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E may be made to contact the game board 5. This allows for positioning the door frame 3A and the game board 5 via the rear flange portion 117c, or for supporting the game board 5 with the rear flange portion 117c. Also, when the rear flange portion 117c is made to contact the game board 5, it may be connected to ground. Furthermore, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E may be constructed from a single sheet metal as shown in the figure, or it may be constructed from multiple sheet metals, similar to the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 described above. A bead portion 117e may also be provided on the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E. Additionally, a locking piece 161b similar to the one described above may be provided on the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160.

[31-1a-3. Other examples of countermeasures]
Next, we will explain countermeasures to prevent a gap from forming between the door frame 3A and the main body frame 4 when the upper tray 201, etc., is pulled forward. As a specific example, for instance, a spacing sensor (for example, a simple switch, optical sensor, magnetic sensor, proximity sensor, displacement sensor, etc.) can be provided to detect the spacing (change in spacing) between the vicinity of the left-right center of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 and the game board 5, and an alarm can be issued when the signal from the spacing sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold. In this case, the spacing sensor may be provided on the main body frame 4, on the game board 5, or on the door frame 3A.

In Specific Example 1, as described above, the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) are increased, so the door frame 3A does not undergo plastic deformation even when pulled forward with strong force. However, if pulled strongly, elastic deformation may occur, potentially changing the distance between the door frame 3A and the game board 5 and creating a gap. Therefore, a gap sensor is provided to detect this gap. This allows the gap sensor to detect changes in the gap due to elastic deformation, enabling notification that the door frame 3A has been forcibly pulled in response to the detection signal from the gap sensor. This prevents players from unnecessarily pulling the door frame 3A too hard or pulling it strongly to commit fraud, thus providing a highly secure pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as a second specific example, the door frame release switch (not shown in the illustration), which is located near the right end of the front of the main frame 4, may be moved to the rear of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 near its left-right center. This allows the door frame release switch to detect the opening of the door frame 3A when the upper tray 201, etc., of the door frame 3A is strongly pulled, causing the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 to elastically deform and move forward. In this case, the door frame release switch may be located both near the right end and near the left-right center of the main frame 4. Alternatively, the door frame release switch near the left-right center may be located on the game board 5.

Furthermore, as a third specific example, a strain sensor may be provided on the intermediate reinforcement frame 117, and an alarm may be issued when the signal from the strain sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold.

Furthermore, as a specific example (specifically, a fourth example), a hook-shaped intermediate hook (not shown) that moves in conjunction with the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 may be provided at the rear portion near the center in the left-right direction of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 of the main frame 4. When the door frame 3A is closed relative to the main frame 4, the intermediate hook may engage with the intermediate reinforcing frame 117. This prevents the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 from deforming (plastic or elastic deformation) by bulging forward near its center in the left-right direction, even if the upper plate 201, etc., is pulled forward, due to the engagement of the intermediate hook.

[31-1a-4. Summary]
The above-mentioned door frame reinforcement unit 110A has the following technical features.

(Background of the technical features)
A pachinko machine, as a gaming machine, comprises a main frame that supports the game board in a detachable manner from the front, and a door frame that is attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable from the front. The door frame is hinged and rotatable at one end of the left and right front edges of the main frame, and is provided with a window section closed by a glass plate, through which the game area of the game board can be seen from the front.

In this type of gaming machine, a frame-shaped reinforcing plate made of multiple metal plates is provided on the door frame. Multiple hooks are attached to the opening end of the reinforcing plate, opposite the hinge side, from the main frame side, preventing the door frame from opening even when pulled forward (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2008-110159).

However, in the technology described in the above-mentioned patent document, for example, if a hand were placed on the ball tray (e.g., upper tray, lower tray, etc.) located on the front of the door frame and pulled forward, there was a risk that the door frame (reinforcement sheet metal) would warp, causing the center of the door frame in the left-right direction to bulge forward. When the door frame warps, a gap is formed between the door frame and the main frame, and there was a risk that an illegal tool could be inserted into the gaming machine through this gap.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraudulent activities using gaps by making it difficult for gaps to form between the door frame and the main frame even when the door frame is pulled.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls, from the front,
A gaming machine comprising a window that allows the gaming area to be viewed from the front, and a door frame that is provided to the main frame so as to be openable and closable from the front,
The aforementioned door frame is
The reinforcing sheet metal unit comprises a first reinforcing portion that extends left and right along the lower edge of the window portion,
The first reinforcing portion is,
A substrate portion parallel to the opening surface of the window portion,
The upper flange portion extends rearward from the upper edge of the substrate portion,
The invention is characterized by comprising a rear flange portion extending upward or downward from the rear end edge of the upper flange portion.

Here, the "first reinforcing section" can be described as "one made of a single metal plate (sheet metal)" or "one made of multiple metal plates (sheet metal)," etc.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine comprises a main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area where the game is played using game balls, and a door frame that has a window portion allowing the game area to be viewed from the front and is provided to the main frame so as to be openable and closable from the front. The door frame includes a reinforcing sheet metal unit having a first reinforcing portion that extends left and right along the lower edge of the window portion. The first reinforcing portion comprises a base portion parallel to the opening surface of the window portion, an upper flange portion extending rearward from the upper edge of the base portion, and a rear flange portion extending upward or downward from the rear edge of the upper flange portion. (See the section [31-1. Door Frame Base Unit], door frame reinforcing unit 110A, Figures 364 to 369, etc. in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, a reinforcing sheet metal unit is provided on the door frame, which is installed to open and close from the front relative to the main frame, thereby increasing the strength and rigidity of the door frame. This reinforcing sheet metal unit has a first reinforcing portion that extends left and right along the lower edge of the window portion of the door frame. This first reinforcing portion is provided with a flat base plate portion, an upper flange portion that extends rearward from the upper edge of the base plate portion, and a rear flange portion that extends upward or downward from the upper flange portion. When the rear flange portion extends upward from the rear edge of the upper flange portion, the cross-sectional shape of the first reinforcing portion becomes crank-shaped, and when the rear flange portion extends downward from the rear edge of the upper flange portion, the cross-sectional shape of the first reinforcing portion becomes U-shaped. Therefore, it is possible to achieve higher strength and rigidity than conventional reinforcing portions (reinforcing sheet metal) with a straight or L-shaped cross-section. In other words, because the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcing section of the reinforcing sheet metal unit are higher than before, even if the door frame is strongly pulled forward near the center in the left-right direction, the first reinforcing section will not distort (plastically deform), and no gap will be formed between the door frame and the main frame. Therefore, even if someone attempts to commit fraud by pulling the door frame forward to create a gap between the door frame and the main frame, the door frame will not distort and a gap will not be formed due to the increased strength and rigidity of the first reinforcing section (reinforcing sheet metal unit), thus providing a gaming machine with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the door frame is strongly pulled forward near the center in the left-right direction, the first reinforcing part (reinforcing sheet metal unit) will not distort. Therefore, it becomes possible to incorporate features that are easy for players to pull forward (for example, upper and lower trays, lever-shaped control buttons, protruding or protruding push-button control buttons, protruding decorative elements, recessed decorative elements, etc.), thereby providing a gaming machine that can entertain players even more.

Furthermore, the glass unit that closes the window section may be mounted on the upper flange. This allows the weight of the glass unit to be supported by the upper flange (reinforcement sheet metal unit), thus reducing the load on the resin component (e.g., the door frame base) that constitutes the door frame, and suppressing premature deterioration of the resin component due to overload.

Furthermore, when the glass unit is mounted on the upper flange, if the front surface of the rear flange, which extends upward from the rear edge of the upper flange, is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit, the rearward movement of the lower end of the glass unit can be prevented by the rear flange. This allows the upper end of the glass unit to be fixed, making it possible to attach it to the door frame, thus facilitating the installation (attachment and detachment) of the glass unit.

Furthermore, in the first reinforcement section, it is desirable that the sum of the lengths of the upper flange and the rear flange along their respective surfaces be longer than the length from the base plate to the front of the game board. This ensures that the sum of the lengths of the upper and rear flanges in their respective extension directions is greater than the distance (length) from the base plate to the front of the game board. Compared to the case where this length is shorter, the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcement section can be increased, making it less susceptible to distortion even when the door frame is pulled forward.

Furthermore, as described above, if the sum of the lengths of the upper flange and the rear flange is made longer than the distance from the circuit board to the front of the game board, it becomes possible to position the tip of the rear flange behind the front of the game board. In other words, it becomes possible to insert the rear flange into the game board from the front. This allows the rear flange, inserted into the game board, to prevent unauthorized tools from entering along the front of the game board, thus providing a game machine with a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the first reinforcing portion with a lower flange portion extending forward or backward from the lower edge of the base plate. This allows the first reinforcing portion to have both an upper flange portion extending backward from the upper edge of the base plate and a lower flange portion extending forward or backward from the lower edge of the base plate. This further enhances the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcing portion, enabling the provision of a gaming machine that reliably achieves the aforementioned effects.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the first reinforcing section thicker than the sheet metal of the other reinforcing sections in the reinforcing sheet metal unit. This increases the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcing section, thereby providing a gaming machine that achieves the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, the gaming machine may be further equipped with a spacing sensor to detect the distance between the first reinforcement section and the game board. In other words, as described above, because the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcement section (reinforcement sheet metal unit) are increased, the door frame will not undergo plastic deformation even if pulled forward with great force. However, since strong pulling may cause elastic deformation and change the distance between the door frame and the game board, potentially creating a gap, a spacing sensor may be provided to detect this change. This allows the spacing sensor to detect the change in distance due to elastic deformation, enabling notification when the door frame is being forcibly pulled in response to the detection signal from the sensor. This prevents players from unnecessarily pulling the door frame too hard or pulling it hard to commit fraud, thus providing a gaming machine with high security.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The upper flange portion is,
A glass unit that closes the aforementioned window section is placed on top."
It is characterized by the following:

According to the configuration of means 2, a glass unit that closes the window portion is mounted on the upper flange portion. (See the description of the upper flange portion 117b and Figure 366, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows the weight of the glass unit to be supported by the upper flange (reinforcement sheet metal unit). Compared to a case where the glass unit is supported by the synthetic resin component (e.g., the door frame base) that makes up the door frame, this reduces the load on the resin component and suppresses premature deterioration of the resin component due to overload.

Furthermore, since the glass unit is mounted on the upper flange, if the front surface of the rear flange, which extends upward from the rear edge of the upper flange, abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit, the rearward movement of the lower end of the glass unit can be prevented by the rear flange. This allows the upper end of the glass unit to be fixed, making it possible to attach it to the door frame, thus facilitating the installation (attachment and detachment) of the glass unit.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The first reinforcing portion is,
The sum of the lengths along the respective surfaces of the upper flange portion and the rear flange portion is longer than the length from the substrate portion to the front surface of the game board.
It is characterized by the following:

According to the configuration of means 3, in the first reinforcing section, the sum of the lengths along the respective surfaces of the upper flange and the rear flange is made longer than the length from the base plate to the front of the game board. (See the description of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 and Figure 367 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design ensures that the sum of the lengths of the upper and rear flanges in their respective extension directions is greater than the distance (length) from the base plate to the front of the game board. Compared to a shorter length, this increases the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcement section, making it less susceptible to distortion even when the door frame is pulled forward.

Furthermore, by making the sum of the lengths of the upper flange and the rear flange longer than the distance from the circuit board to the front of the game board, it becomes possible to position the tip of the rear flange behind the front of the game board. In other words, the rear flange can be inserted into the game board from the front. This allows for the prevention of unauthorized tool insertion by the rear flange, even if an attempt is made to insert an unauthorized tool along the front of the game board, thus providing a game machine with a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The first reinforcing portion is,
The substrate portion is provided with a lower flange portion that extends forward or backward from the lower edge of the substrate portion."
It is characterized by the following:

According to the configuration of means 4, the first reinforcing portion is provided with a lower flange portion extending forward or backward from the lower edge of the base plate portion. (See the description of the lower flange portion 117d and Figure 365, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the first reinforcement section has an upper flange extending rearward from the upper edge of the substrate, and a lower flange extending forward or rearward from the lower edge of the substrate. Therefore, the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcement section can be further increased, making it possible to provide a gaming machine that reliably achieves the aforementioned effects.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"The first reinforcing portion is,
The sheet metal in the aforementioned reinforcing sheet metal unit is thicker than the sheet metal in other reinforcing parts."
It is characterized by the following:

According to the configuration of means 5, the first reinforcing portion has a thicker sheet metal than the other reinforcing portions in the reinforcing sheet metal unit. (See the description of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 and Figure 365 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, the thickness of the first reinforcement section is made thicker than that of the other reinforcement sections, thereby increasing the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcement section, and enabling the provision of a gaming machine that can achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, the first reinforcing section may have a thicker plate thickness along its entire length in the left-right direction, or it may have a thicker plate thickness only in a portion of its entire length in the left-right direction (for example, within a predetermined range from the center in the left-right direction).

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 5,
"A spacing sensor is used to detect the distance between the first reinforcing portion and the game board."
It is characterized by having "additional features."

Here, "spacing sensors" can include switches, optical sensors, magnetic sensors, proximity sensors, displacement sensors, etc. The spacing sensors may be installed in the first reinforcement section (door frame), on the game board, or on the main frame. As for switches used as spacing sensors, for example, a switch used in a door open sensor (door open switch) may be used. By using a switch similar to that of a door open sensor, the input circuit can be designed in the same way as the input circuit of a door open sensor. Furthermore, because it is a simple contact, depending on the connection method, it is possible to easily combine multiple inputs using wired or similar connections.

According to the configuration of means 6, the gaming machine is further equipped with a spacing sensor that detects the distance between the first reinforcing part and the gaming board. (See Chapter 31-1a-3. Other Countermeasures in the [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention] section.)

In this configuration, as described above, the strength and rigidity of the first reinforcing section (reinforcing sheet metal unit) are increased, so the door frame will not undergo plastic deformation even if pulled forward with great force. However, if pulled strongly, elastic deformation may occur, potentially changing the gap between the door frame and the game board. Therefore, a gap sensor is provided to detect this gap. This allows the gap sensor to detect changes in the gap due to elastic deformation, enabling notification when the door frame is being pulled forcefully. This prevents players from pulling the door frame unnecessarily or for fraudulent purposes, thus providing a highly secure gaming machine.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents fraudulent activities using gaps by making it difficult for gaps to form between the door frame and the main frame even when the door frame is pulled.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3A corresponds to the window portion of the above solution, the door frame reinforcement unit 110A of the door frame base unit 100 in this embodiment corresponds to the reinforcement sheet metal unit of the above solution, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 (intermediate reinforcement frame 117A to intermediate reinforcement frame 117E) of the door frame reinforcement unit 110A in this embodiment corresponds to the first reinforcement portion of the above solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a door frame reinforcement unit 110A made of multiple metal plates is provided on the door frame 3A, which is installed on the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable from the front, thereby increasing the strength and rigidity of the door frame 3A. The door frame reinforcement unit 110A has an intermediate reinforcement frame 117 that extends left and right along the lower edge of the door window 101a of the door frame 3A, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 is provided with a flat base plate portion 117a, an upper flange portion 117b that extends rearward from the upper edge of the base plate portion 117a, and a rear flange portion 117c that extends upward or downward from the upper flange portion 117b. Furthermore, when the rear flange portion 117c extends upward from the rear end edge of the upper flange portion 117b, the cross-sectional shape of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (intermediate reinforcing frame 117A, intermediate reinforcing frame 117B, intermediate reinforcing frame 117C) becomes crank-shaped, and when the rear flange portion 117c extends downward from the rear end edge of the upper flange portion 117b, the cross-sectional shape of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117D (intermediate reinforcing frame 117E) becomes U-shaped. As a result, the strength and rigidity can be increased compared to conventional reinforcing portions (intermediate reinforcing frames) with straight or L-shaped cross-sections. In other words, because the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110A are higher than in conventional designs, even if the area near the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 3A is strongly pulled forward, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 will not be distorted (plastically deformed), and no gap will be formed between the door frame 3A and the main frame 4. Therefore, even if someone attempts to commit fraud by pulling the door frame 3A forward to create a gap between the door frame 3A and the main frame 4, the reinforced intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A), which has increased strength and rigidity, will prevent the door frame 3A from distorting and creating a gap between it and the main frame 4, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, as described above, even if the door frame 3A is strongly pulled forward near its center in the left-right direction, the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) will not be distorted. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide parts that are easy for players to pull forward (for example, the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202, a lever-shaped performance control unit (lever control unit 304), a protruding or protruding push-button-shaped performance control unit (pressure control unit 303), a protruding decorative element, a recessed decorative element, etc.), thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can more entertain players.

Furthermore, since the glass unit 160 that closes the door window 101a is mounted on the upper flange portion 117b, the weight of the glass unit 160 can be supported by the upper flange portion 117b (door frame reinforcement unit 110A). Compared to the case where the glass unit 160 is supported by the synthetic resin component (for example, the door frame base 101) constituting the door frame 3A, the load on the resin component can be reduced, thereby suppressing premature deterioration of the resin component due to overload.

Furthermore, since the glass unit 160 is mounted on the upper flange portion 117b, and the rear surface of the glass unit 160 abuts against the front surface of the rear flange portion 117c, which extends upward from the rear end edge of the upper flange portion 117b, the rearward movement of the lower end of the glass unit 160 can be prevented by the rear flange portion 117c. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame 3A by fixing only its upper end, thus facilitating the installation (attachment and detachment) of the glass unit 160.

Furthermore, in the intermediate reinforcement frame 117, the sum of the lengths (L1 and L2) along the respective surfaces of the upper flange portion 117b and the rear flange portion 117c (L0) is made longer than the length from the base plate portion 117a to the front of the game board 5. Compared to the case where this length is shorter, the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 can be increased, making it less susceptible to distortion even when the door frame 3A is pulled forward.

Furthermore, by making the sum of the length L1 of the upper flange portion 117b and the length L2 of the rear flange portion 117c (L0) longer than the length from the base plate portion 117a to the front of the game board 5, it becomes possible to position the tip of the rear flange portion 117c behind the front of the game board 5. In other words, it becomes possible to insert the rear flange portion 117c into the game board 5 from the front, similar to the intermediate reinforcing frame 117E. This allows the rear flange portion 117c, inserted into the game board 5, to prevent unauthorized tools from entering along the front of the game board 5, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, since the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 is equipped with a lower flange portion 117d extending forward or backward from the lower edge of the base plate portion 117a, in addition to the upper flange portion 117b, the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 can be further increased, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, since the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 has a thicker sheet metal than the other reinforcing parts of the door frame reinforcing unit 110A (left reinforcing frame 111, right reinforcing frame 112, upper reinforcing frame 113), the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) can also be increased, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can achieve the same effects as described above.

Furthermore, a spacing sensor may be provided to detect the gap between the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 and the game board 5. In other words, as described above, because the strength and rigidity of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 (door frame reinforcing unit 110A) are increased, the door frame 3A will not undergo plastic deformation even if pulled forward with strong force. However, if pulled strongly, elastic deformation may occur, potentially changing the gap between the door frame 3A and the game board 5 and creating a gap. Therefore, a spacing sensor is provided to detect this gap. This allows the spacing sensor to detect changes in the gap due to elastic deformation, enabling notification that the door frame 3A has been forcibly pulled in response to the detection signal from the spacing sensor. This prevents players from unnecessarily pulling the door frame 3A too hard or pulling it strongly to commit fraud, thus providing a highly secure pachinko machine 1.

[31-2. Handle Unit]
Next, the handle unit 180A in the door frame 3A of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Figures 370 to 374, etc. Figure 370 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, plate unit and performance operation unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the front, and Figure 371 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit, plate unit and performance operation unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, viewed from the rear. Figure 372 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 373 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame of the second embodiment, disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 374(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, handle, handle return spring and handle touch sensor in the handle unit in a perspective view, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) disassembled and in a perspective view. Figure 375 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, handle, handle return spring and handle touch sensor and inner base in the handle unit, viewed from the rear in a perspective view. Furthermore, parts with the same configuration as the handle unit 180 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and described accordingly. Also, in Figure 375, the position of the first mounting portion 190a of the handle return spring 190A has been changed for clarity.

In this embodiment, the handle unit 180A is attached to the door frame base unit 100 from the front within the cylindrical handle cover unit 290A. By operating it, the player can launch the game balls B from the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

The handle unit 180A comprises a handle base 181 whose rear end is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101, a handle 197 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, a disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end of the handle 197, a handle decorative circuit board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface, and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decorative circuit board 184.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180A includes an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 at the rear of the handle 197, a shaft member 187 to which the handle 197 is attached at its front end and which is rotatably mounted by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 and has a drive gear portion 187a on its outer circumference, a transmission gear 188 that meshes with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 having a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and being sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180A includes a handle return spring 190A, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end to the handle 195, which biases the handle 197 to return to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end to the transmission gear 188, which biases the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180A includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, a single-shot button 193 whose tip protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer circumference of the handle base 181 in a front view, and whose base end is rotatably mounted on the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180A comprises a cylindrical base portion 181a extending front to back, a disc-shaped front end portion 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and three groove portions 181c that are recessed from the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a, extending axially and formed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290 (see Figures 42 and 43). The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 291d of the handle cover base 291. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291. Furthermore, with the protrusions 291d inserted into each of the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

Furthermore, the handle base 181 includes a sensor housing recess 181d into which the handle touch sensor 192 is housed from the front, a tab contact portion 181e into which the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 abuts, and a mounting hole 181f provided in the tab contact portion 181e (see Figure 374). The handle touch sensor 192 is housed in the sensor housing recess 181d, and the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 is brought into contact with the tab contact portion 181e. At the same time, the rear part of the inner base 168 is inserted into the handle base 181 from the front, and the mounting piece 168a of the inner base 168 (see Figure 375) is positioned in front of the tab-shaped terminal 192a. Then, by screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole 181f from the front of the mounting piece 168a of the inner base 168 and tightening it, the handle touch sensor 192 can be attached to the handle base 181 together with the inner base 168. At this time, by screwing the mounting screw so that the U-shaped second mounting portion 190b, provided on the rear end of the handle return spring 190A, is sandwiched together with the mounting piece 168a of the inner base 168 and the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192, the rear end of the handle return spring 190A can be attached to the handle base 181, and the handle return spring 190A and the handle touch sensor 192 can be electrically connected. The tab contact portion 181e on the handle base 181 can be viewed from the front through the slit 197e of the handle 197 (described later), allowing a screwdriver, as a tool, to be approached from the front through the slit 197e.

The handle 197 has a conductive plating layer on its surface. The handle 197 includes four first projections 197a, 197b, 197c, and 197d projecting outward from its outer surface in the circumferential direction; two slits 197e extending in an arc shape around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating in the front-rear direction; a spring mounting piece 197f provided at one end of one of the slits 197e, facing forward in a recessed portion toward the center of the handle 197; and a mounting hole 197g penetrating the spring mounting piece 197f in the front-rear direction.

By bringing the annular first mounting portion 190a, located at the front end of the handle return spring 190A, into contact with the upper surface of the spring mounting piece 197f on the handle 197, and then screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole 197g from the front and tightening it, the front end of the handle return spring 190A can be attached from the front, and the plated layer on the surface of the handle 197 and the handle return spring 190A can be electrically connected. As a result, the handle touch sensor 192 and the handle 197 are electrically connected via the metal handle return spring 190A, making it possible to detect contact between the player and the handle 197.

Furthermore, the four protrusions 197a, 197b, 197c, and 197d on the handle 197 are arranged in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Thus, in this embodiment, the handle unit 180A, which electrically connects the handle touch sensor 192 and the handle 197, has both ends of the metal handle return spring 190A attached by mounting screws. Compared to the case where the ends of the handle return spring 190A are simply in contact, this ensures a reliable electrical connection and reliably prevents contact failure (detection malfunction of the handle touch sensor 192). Therefore, even if chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite used during cleaning enter the handle unit 180A in the gaming hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, or if gases are generated from the chemicals and adhere to the handle return spring 190A, causing corrosion or oxidation of the surface, contact failure will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's touch.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the handle unit 180A allows a screwdriver to be accessed from the front through the slit 197e of the handle 197 to turn the mounting screws on the first mounting portion 190a and the second mounting portion 190b, which are the ends of the handle return spring 190A. This makes the handle unit 180A easier to assemble and maintain.

[31-2a. Modification of the handle unit]
Next, we will describe some variations of the handle unit. Note that you may use only one of the following variations, or you may use multiple variations in combination with the above embodiment as appropriate.

(Variation 1)
In the above embodiment, the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 and the second mounting portion 190b of the handle return spring 190A are shown to be attached together with a mounting screw, but the embodiment is not limited to this. For example, a projection may be provided on the handle 197, and the shape of the front end side (first mounting portion 190a) of the handle return spring 190A may be made to conform to a part of the outer circumference of the projection on the handle 197, so that the front end of the handle return spring 190A is locked to the projection. This causes the front end side of the handle return spring 190A to make line contact with the projection, and the contact area is increased compared to point contact, thus preventing contact failure. In this case, it is desirable to provide the projection on the handle 197 in a place where it is not easily exposed to chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite used for cleaning. Alternatively, a cover may be provided on the part to prevent exposure to chemicals such as alcohol.

(Variation 2)
Alternatively, for example, the configuration shown in Figure 376 may be used. Figure 376 is a modified example of the handle unit and is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the handle base, the handle, the handle return spring, the handle touch sensor, and the inner base in a perspective view from the rear. In this modified example, the handle 197 is composed of a main body portion 197A and an annular ring portion 197B, and the ring portion 197B is made of metal or resin having a plated layer on its surface. The ring portion 197B of the handle 197 is provided so that its outer circumferential surface is exposed to the outside at the rear end of the handle 197 (the front end of the handle base 181). The ring portion 197B and the handle touch sensor 192 may be electrically connected by an electric wire 198.

Specifically, one of the ring terminals 198a on the wire 198, which has ring terminals 198a on both ends, is screwed in together with the mounting screw between the mounting piece 186a of the inner base 186 and the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192, and the other ring terminal 198a of the wire 198 is screwed in to the mounting piece 197h of the ring portion 197B on the handle 197. As a result, when a player grips the handle 197, their fingers come into contact with the ring portion 198B, and contact can be detected via the ring portion 198B and the wire 198. Therefore, as described above, poor contact (detection malfunction of the handle touch sensor 192) can be reliably prevented. Thus, even if chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite are used during cleaning in the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, poor contact will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's contact.

Furthermore, the ring portion 197B of the handle 197 may be fixed to the main body portion 197A and rotatable as an integral part of it, or it may be guided by the main body portion 197A or the handle base 181 and rotatable relative to it. Also, although an annular ring portion 197B is shown above, a non-annular ring portion 197B, such as a C-shape, that does not complete a full circle is also acceptable.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the handle 197 composed of a main body 197A and a ring portion 197B, it is not limited to this configuration; the ring portion 197B may be a separate and independent component from the handle 197.

(Variation 3)
Alternatively, for example, the handle touch sensor 192 may be installed in a different location, and a wire 198 with ring terminals 198a at both ends may be used. One ring terminal 198a may be screwed together with the tab-shaped terminal 192a using a mounting screw, while the other ring terminal 198a may be screwed together with the second mounting portion 190b of the handle return spring 190A using a mounting screw. This also reliably prevents poor contact (detection failure of the handle touch sensor 192) in the same way as described above. Therefore, even if chemical solutions such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite are used during cleaning in the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, poor contact will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's contact. In this case, the front end (first mounting portion 190a) of the handle return spring 190A may be attached to the handle 197 with a mounting screw, or it may be locked to a projection provided on the handle 197.

(Variation 4)
Alternatively, for example, a mounting hole may be provided on the back of the handle 197, and one of the ring terminals 198a of the electric wire 198, which has ring terminals 198a at both ends, may be screwed in together with the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 using a mounting screw, while the other ring terminal 198a may be screwed in using a mounting screw that is screwed into the mounting hole of the handle 197. In this case, the length of the electric wire 198 should be such that the handle 197 can rotate. As for the part of the handle 197 to which the ring terminal 198a of the electric wire 198 is screwed in, for example, if the handle 197 has a ring portion 197B as shown in Figure 376, the ring portion 197B may be provided so as to rotate integrally with the main body portion 197A, and the ring terminal 198a may be screwed in to the mounting portion 197h of the ring portion 197B. This also ensures that poor contact (detection failure of the handle touch sensor 192) is reliably prevented, as described above. Therefore, even if chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite are used during cleaning in the amusement hall where this pachinko machine 1 is installed, poor contact will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's contact.

(Other forms of torture)
The above example shows the device being screwed to the plating layer on the handle 197, but it is not limited to this. For example, if the handle 197 has a metal part, the device may be screwed to that metal part to electrically connect it to the handle touch sensor 192. This metal part could be, for example, the ring part 197B described above, made of metal.

Furthermore, while the above example shows a handle touch sensor 192 with a tab-shaped terminal 192a, it is not limited to this configuration; a handle touch sensor with a connector is also acceptable. In this case, the end of the wire connected to the connector can be electrically connected to the handle 197 either directly or via the handle return spring 190A.

[31-2b. Summary]
The handle unit 180A described above has the following technical features.
(Background of the technical features)
Pachinko machines, as a form of amusement, are equipped with a handle operated by the player to launch game balls into the game area, and a touch sensor to detect when the player is touching the handle (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2020-137794). In conventional amusement machines like the one described in the above patent document, the touch sensor and the handle are electrically connected via a spring that returns the handle to its original position, thereby detecting contact between the player and the handle. In this type of conventional amusement machine, the spring that returns the handle is designed to bring the end on the touch sensor side and the end on the handle side into contact using the biasing force of the spring.

Incidentally, in amusement halls where gaming machines are installed, chemicals such as alcohol and sodium hypochlorite are sometimes used when cleaning and disinfecting the machines. If these chemicals enter the handle or if gases are generated and adhere to springs, the surface of the springs and other parts may corrode or oxidize, potentially causing electrical contact problems. This contact problem could lead to unstable ball launching or even prevent ball launching altogether, potentially diminishing the enjoyment of the players.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the objective of the following method is to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect contact with the handle by the player.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
A gaming machine equipped with a handle unit for launching game balls into the game area,
The aforementioned handle unit is
A rotatable handle,
A handle base that rotatably supports the handle,
A touch sensor is provided on the handle base,
The device is characterized by comprising a linear metal body, one end of which is screwed together with the electrode tab of the touch sensor, or the tip of a wire connected to the electrode tab or the connector of the touch sensor, and the other end of which is in contact with the plated or metal part of the handle.

Examples of "linear bodies" here include "springs" and "electric wires."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine is equipped with a handle unit for launching game balls into the game area. The handle unit comprises a rotatable handle, a handle base that rotatably supports the handle, a touch sensor provided on the handle base, and a linear metal body. One end of the linear metal body is screw-fastened to the electrode tab of the touch sensor, or the tip of a wire connected to the electrode tab or the connector of the touch sensor, while the other end contacts a plated or metal part of the handle. (See Chapter 31-2, "Handle Unit," and Figures 372-376 in the section on "Modes for Carrying Out the Invention.")

In this configuration, in the handle unit for launching game balls into the game area, one end of a metal wire, whose other end is in contact with the plated or metal part of the handle, is screwed together with the electrode tab of the touch sensor provided on the handle base, or the tip of the wire connected to the electrode tab or the connector of the touch sensor. In other words, one end of the wire is screwed to the electrode tab of the touch sensor, or the tip of the wire electrically connected to the touch sensor via the electrode tab or connector. Compared to the case where one end of the wire is simply in contact without being screwed, this prevents contact failure even if chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite used during cleaning of the game machine enter the handle or gases are generated and adhere to springs, causing corrosion or oxidation of the surface, and the touch sensor can reliably detect the player's contact with the handle via the wire. Therefore, a gaming machine can be provided that prevents unstable ball launching or inability to launch game balls due to detection malfunctions by the touch sensor, allowing players to enjoy the game in a good condition and suppressing a decline in player enjoyment.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the touch sensor's electrode tabs be screwed in so that the touch sensor can be attached to the handle base. This allows for simultaneous attachment of one end of the linear body and the touch sensor, reducing the effort required for assembly and disassembly.

Furthermore, the other end of the linear body may be secured to a projection extending from the handle. This allows for an electrical connection by securing the other end of the linear body to the handle projection, thereby reducing the effort (man-hours) required for assembling and disassembling the handle unit, and thus suppressing the increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the other end of the linear body may be screwed to the handle. This ensures that contact failures are less likely to occur at both ends, as the other end is also screwed to the handle. Therefore, even if the linear body corrodes or oxidizes due to chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite during cleaning of the gaming machine, contact failures will not occur, and the touch sensor can reliably detect the player's contact with the handle via the linear body.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the other end of the linear body is also secured with screws, it is desirable to ensure that a screwdriver or other tool can be accessed from the same direction for both the one end and the other end of the linear body. This allows for screw fastening from the same direction at both ends of the linear body, reducing the effort required for assembling the handle unit and thus suppressing the increase in costs associated with the gaming machine.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the linear element act as a spring that biases the handle around its axis. This allows the linear element electrically connecting the handle and the touch sensor to function as the spring biasing the handle. Compared to cases where the linear element is a separate component (e.g., an electrical wire), this reduces the number of parts in the handle unit, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The linear body is secured to a projection at its other end that protrudes from the handle."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "protrusions" can refer to: "those integrally molded with the handle," "those insert-molded into the handle (e.g., metal pins)," and "those attached to the handle separately (e.g., metal pins, screws, etc.)."

According to the configuration of means 2, the other end of the linear body is locked into a projection protruding from the handle. (See Chapter 31-2. Handle Unit in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention])

This allows for electrical connection by locking the other end of the linear body to the projection on the handle, thereby reducing the effort (man-hours) required for assembling and disassembling the handle unit, and thus suppressing the increase in costs associated with the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the other end of the linear body may be secured to the projection on the handle and then fastened with a screw. This makes it less likely for poor contact to occur at both ends of the linear body, and allows the touch sensor to reliably detect contact with the handle by the player.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The other end of the linear body is screwed to the handle."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 3, the other end of the linear body is screwed to the handle. (See the description of the handle return spring 190A and Figure 374 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design ensures that the other end of the linear body is also screwed to the handle, making contact failures less likely to occur at both ends. Therefore, even if the linear body corrodes or oxidizes due to chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite during cleaning of the gaming machine, contact failures will not occur, and the touch sensor can reliably detect the player's contact with the handle via the linear body.

Furthermore, since the linear body is secured to both ends with screws, it is desirable that tools such as screwdrivers be accessible from the same direction to each screw (mounting screw). This allows for screw fastening from the same direction to both ends of the linear body, reducing the effort required for assembling the handle unit and thus suppressing the increase in costs associated with the gaming machine.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
"The linear body is a spring that biases the handle around its axis."
It is characterized by the following:

According to the configuration of means 4, the linear body is used as a spring that biases the handle around its axis. (See the description of the handle return spring 190A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design, which uses a linear element electrically connecting the handle and touch sensor as the spring biasing the handle, reduces the number of parts in the handle unit compared to a case where the linear element is a separate component (e.g., an electrical wire), thereby suppressing the increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably detect contact with the handle by the player.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the handle unit 180A in the door frame 3A corresponds to the handle unit of the above solution, the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180A corresponds to the handle base of the above solution, the handle return spring 190A of the handle unit 180A corresponds to the linear body and spring of the above solution, the handle touch sensor 192 of the handle unit 180A corresponds to the touch sensor of the above solution, the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 corresponds to the electrode tab of the above solution, and the handle 197 of the handle unit 180A corresponds to the handle of the above solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the handle unit 180A for launching the game ball B from the door frame 3A into the game area 5a, one end (second mounting portion 190b) of the handle return spring 190A, which is a linear metal body whose other end (first mounting portion 190a side) is in contact with the plated portion of the handle 197, is screwed together with the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192 provided on the handle base 181. In other words, one end of the handle return spring 190A is screwed to the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192. As a result, compared to the case where one end of the handle return spring 190A is simply in contact without being screwed in, even if chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite used during cleaning of the pachinko machine 1 enter the handle unit 180A or gases are generated and adhere to the spring, causing corrosion or oxidation of the surface, contact failure will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's contact with the handle 197 via the handle return spring 190A. Therefore, the launch of the game balls B will not become unstable or impossible to launch due to detection malfunctions by the handle touch sensor 192, and a pachinko machine 1 can be provided that allows players to enjoy the game in good condition and suppresses a decline in the player's enjoyment.

Furthermore, since the handle touch sensor 192 can be attached to the handle base 181 by screwing in the tab-shaped terminal 192a of the handle touch sensor 192, the attachment of one end of the handle return spring 190A (the second mounting portion 190b side) and the attachment of the handle touch sensor 192 can be performed simultaneously, reducing the effort required for assembly and disassembly.

Furthermore, since the other end (first mounting portion 190a) of the handle return spring 190A is screwed to the handle 197, contact failure is less likely to occur at both the first end (second mounting portion 190b) and the other end (first mounting portion 190a). Therefore, even if the handle return spring 190A corrodes or oxidizes due to chemicals such as alcohol or sodium hypochlorite during cleaning of the pachinko machine 1, contact failure will not occur, and the handle touch sensor 192 can reliably detect the player's contact with the handle 197 via the handle return spring 190A.

Furthermore, at both ends of the handle return spring 190A (the second mounting portion 190b side) and the other end (the first mounting portion 190a side), a screwdriver or other tool can be accessed from the same direction (in this case, the front) for each screw (mounting screw). Since both ends of the handle return spring 190A can be screwed in from the same direction, the effort required for assembling the handle unit 180A can be reduced, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the linear body electrically connecting the handle 197 and the handle touch sensor 192 is the handle return spring 190A that biases the handle 197, the number of parts in the handle unit 180A can be reduced compared to the case where the linear body is a separate component (for example, an electric wire), thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the other end of the handle return spring 190A (the first mounting portion 190a side) may be secured to a projection extending rearward from the handle 197. This allows for an electrical connection by securing the other end of the handle return spring 190A to the projection on the handle 197, thereby reducing the effort (man-hours) required for assembling and disassembling the handle unit 180A and suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[31-3. Performance Control Unit]
Next, the performance operation unit 300C in the door frame 3A of the second embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 377 to 381. Figure 377(a) is a perspective view showing the performance operation unit in the door frame of the second embodiment with the transparent portion made opaque and the lever operating part not protruding, and (b) is a perspective view showing the performance operation unit in (a) with the lever operating part protruding. Figure 378(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the performance operation unit with the lever operating part not protruding, together with the advance/return mechanism, from the right side, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the lever operating part protruding in (a). Figure 379(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit from the front with the transparent portion made transparent, and (b) is a right side view of the performance operation unit in (a). Figure 380 is a perspective view of the unit reinforcing frame in the performance operation unit of Figure 377 from the front. Figure 381 is an explanatory diagram showing the rotation mechanism of the rotating body in the lever operating part.

The performance control unit 300C in this embodiment is located in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. It not only decorates the plate unit 200 but also allows the player to participate in the performance by operating it when a player-participation performance is being executed. The performance control unit 300C is attached to the plate base unit 210 (see Figure 370, etc.).

The performance control unit 300C is equipped with a performance control section 301 that can be operated by the player. The performance control section 301 consists of a pressable control section 303 that the player can press, and a lever control section 304 that the player can operate in the forward and backward directions. It can receive player input and move (vibrate) the performance control section 301, allowing the player to participate not only in the operation of inserting the game balls B, but also in the performance effects during the game. The pressable control section 303 of the performance control section 301 is located on the upper surface to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 3A. The lever control section 304 is located in the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 3A.

The performance control unit 300C comprises a base unit 400 attached to the disc base unit 210, and a lever operation unit 410 that is rotatably mounted on the base unit 400 around an axis extending in the left-right direction. The pressing operation unit 303 is provided on the upper surface of the base unit 400.

The base unit 400 comprises a unit body 401 having an operating section housing recess 401a capable of accommodating the rear portion of the lever operating section unit 410, a reciprocating mechanism 402 that moves the lever operating section unit 410 forward and backward by rotating it in the front-rear direction, and a unit reinforcing frame 403 for supporting the lever operating section unit 410. The base unit 400 also has a spring (not shown) that biases the lever operating section unit 410 in a forward-projecting direction.

The unit body 401 has an upper bulge 401b that bulges forward, continuous with the left and right decorative elements 271 and 276 provided at the front end of the upper tray 201, and a lower bulge 401c that extends forward and downward in an arc shape from the lower surface of the upper bulge 401b, with its lower end protruding forward beyond the lower tray 202. A pressing operation part 303 is provided on the upper surface to the left of the operation part housing recess 401a in the upper bulge 401b. The upper bulge 401b of the unit body 401 is formed opaquely, while the lower bulge 401c is formed transparently. The internal unit reinforcing frame 403 and the rotating body 412 (described later) can be viewed through the transparent lower bulge 401c (see Figure 379).

As shown in Figure 378, the reciprocating mechanism 402 is located to the right of the operating section housing recess 401a in the unit body 401. The reciprocating mechanism 402 comprises a reciprocating drive motor 402a attached to the unit body 401, a drive gear 402b attached to the rotation shaft of the reciprocating drive motor 402a, a large-diameter transmission gear 402c meshing with the drive gear 402b, and a small-diameter transmission gear 402d that rotates integrally with the large-diameter transmission gear 402c and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter transmission gear 402c. The small-diameter transmission gear 402d of the reciprocating mechanism 402 meshes with an arc-shaped reciprocating rack gear 411b located on the right side of the lever operating section unit 410.

The forward/backward drive motor 402a of the forward/backward mechanism 402 rotates the drive gear 402b in the appropriate direction, thereby allowing the lever operating unit 410 to move forward and backward (rotate around the pivot axis 403e) via the forward/backward rack gear 411b.

As shown in Figure 380, the unit reinforcing frame 403 comprises a flat left reinforcing plate 403a, a flat right reinforcing plate 403b, a flat rear reinforcing plate 403c connecting the rear ends of the left and right reinforcing plates 403a and 403b, a flat upper reinforcing plate 403d connecting the upper parts of the left and right reinforcing plates 403a and 403b, a cylindrical pivot shaft 403e connecting the front ends of the lower parts of the left and right reinforcing plates 403a and 403b, and a cylindrical connecting shaft 403f connecting the intermediate front-rear portions of the lower parts of the left and right reinforcing plates 403a and 403b.

The left reinforcing plate 403a and the right reinforcing plate 403b of the unit reinforcing frame 403 are formed in an arc shape, with their front edges moving backward as they extend upward. The left reinforcing plate 403a and the right reinforcing plate 403b are provided with multiple decorative openings 403g that penetrate from left to right. These decorative openings 403g are shaped to align with the rotating body 412, which will be described later. The rotating body 412 can be viewed through these decorative openings 403g (see Figure 379).

The rear reinforcing plate 403c is integrated with the left reinforcing plate 403a, and its rear portion is bent to the right. The pivot shaft 403e supports the lower front end of the lever operating unit 410 so that it can rotate around the left-right axis.

The lever operating unit 410 comprises a transparent unit cover 411, an annular rotating body 412 provided inside the unit cover 411, a rotation mechanism 413 provided inside the unit cover 411 for rotating the rotating body 412, and a vibration mechanism 414 provided at the lower rear end inside the unit cover 411.

The unit cover 411 of the lever operation unit 410 is formed so that its rear portion is housed within the operation unit housing recess 401a of the unit body 401 in the base unit 400. The unit cover 411 has a transparent, arc-shaped cylindrical portion 411a centered on an axis extending in the left-right direction. This cylindrical portion 411a is formed to a thickness that allows the player to grasp (grip) it, and constitutes the lever operation portion 304 of the performance operation unit 301. A portion of the rotating body 412 is inserted inside this cylindrical portion 411a.

Furthermore, the unit cover 411 has a reciprocating rack gear 411b on its right side. The reciprocating rack gear 411b is formed in an arc shape centered on the pivot axis 403e. In addition, the unit cover 411 has multiple mounting portions 411c on its left and right sides, to which mounting screws for assembly are attached.

Incidentally, the mounting portion 411c provided on the side of the unit cover 411 of the lever operating unit 410 is positioned so as to overlap with the unit body 401 in a side view, regardless of whether the lever operating unit 410 is in a retracted position (rearward) or a protruding position (forward). Therefore, it is not possible to access the mounting portion 411c with a tool such as a screwdriver (see Figure 378). On the other hand, when the lever operating unit 410 is in the protruding position, the mounting portion 411c can be viewed through the gap between the side of the unit cover 411 and the inner surface of the operating portion housing recess 401a in the unit body 401 of the base unit 400. This allows for checking the presence or absence of mounting screws on the mounting portion 411c, as well as whether the mounting screws are loose, etc.

The rotating body 412 of the lever operating unit 410 is provided within the unit cover 411, and a portion of it passes through the cylindrical portion 411a, forming a donut shape. This rotating body 412 has a plated portion with metallic luster and a light-transmitting portion on its surface. The rotating body 412 is provided to slide along the outer periphery of an annular ring base 415 (see Figure 362) provided within the unit cover 411, and is designed to rotate around an axis in the left-right direction by sliding along the outer periphery. As shown in Figure 381, etc., the rotating body 412 has an annular ring gear 412a on its inner circumferential surface, with the teeth of the gear pointing towards the center. It is rotated by the rotation mechanism 413 via this ring gear 412a.

Incidentally, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the ring base 415 (see Figure 362), which rotatably supports the rotating body 412, is attached within the unit cover 411 via support stays provided on the left and right outer sides of the rotating body 412 by left and right support plates. The left and right support plates are formed in a similar shape to the left reinforcing plate 403a and right reinforcing plate 403b of the unit reinforcing frame 403 in the base unit 400. The left and right support plates are provided with multiple openings that penetrate in the left-right direction, allowing the rotating body 412 to be viewed from the side through these openings. Furthermore, a rotating body decoration substrate 416 (see Figure 362), on which multiple LEDs 416a are mounted for illuminating the rotating body 412, is attached to the ring base 415.

As shown in Figure 381, the rotation mechanism 413 of the lever operating unit 410 is housed within the unit cover 411 and comprises a rotary drive motor 413a with its rotation axis oriented in the left-right direction, a drive gear 413b attached to the rotation axis of the rotary drive motor 413a, a first transmission gear 413c meshing with the drive gear 413b, a second transmission gear 413d that rotates integrally with the first transmission gear 413c and has half the number of teeth of the first transmission gear 413c, and a third transmission gear 413e that meshes with the second transmission gear 413d and also meshes with the ring gear 412a of the rotating body 412. The first transmission gear 413c and the second transmission gear 413d have the same diameter. By rotating the drive gear 413b using the rotary drive motor 413a of this rotation mechanism 413, the rotating body 412 can be rotated.

As shown in Figure 381, the vibration mechanism 414 of the lever operating unit 410 is provided on the unit cover 411 and comprises a vibration motor 414a with its rotation axis oriented in the left-right direction, a drive gear 414b attached to the rotation axis of the vibration motor 414a, a driven gear 414c meshing with the drive gear 414b, and a weight 414d that rotates integrally with the driven gear 414c and has its center of gravity eccentric with respect to the center of rotation. The vibration mechanism 414 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 414d using the vibration motor 414a.

In this embodiment, the center of gravity of the lever operating unit 410 of the performance control unit 300C is located behind the pivot axis 403e. Under normal conditions, it is in a retracted position, retracted against the biasing force of a spring (not shown). The retraction mechanism 402 for moving the lever operating unit 410 forward and backward consists of a drive gear 402b, a large-diameter transmission gear 402c, and a small-diameter transmission gear 402d, all formed by spur gears. Therefore, pulling the lever operating unit 410 (lever operating section 304) forward allows it to move to the protruding position. Furthermore, when the power is off (or the retraction drive motor 402a is not driven), pulling the lever operating section 304 to the forward protruding position and then releasing it will cause the lever operating unit 410 to return to the retracted position due to its own weight.

In this performance control unit 300C, regardless of whether a player-participation performance is being executed, the press operation section 303 located on the top surface can be pressed at any time, and the lever operation section 304 can be moved forward and backward.

The performance control unit 300C allows the annular rotating body 412 to be viewed from the outside through the transparent portion of the unit body 401 and the transparent unit cover 411. Furthermore, the rotating body 412 can also be viewed from the outside through the multiple decorative openings 403g provided in the left reinforcing plate 403a and the right reinforcing plate 403b of the unit reinforcing frame 403. In this case, since the opening shape of the decorative openings 403g is formed to have an aesthetically pleasing shape, the appearance is not detracted even when the left reinforcing plate 403a and the right reinforcing plate 403b are visible.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300C can rotate the rotating body 412 in any direction by driving the rotation drive motor 413a of the rotation mechanism 413, allowing users to enjoy the movable effects caused by the rotation of the rotating body 412. In addition, the performance control unit 300C can illuminate the rotating body 412 even while it is rotating by illuminating the multiple LEDs 416a provided on the rotating body decoration substrate 416, allowing users to enjoy the illumination effects of the rotating body 412.

Furthermore, in the performance control unit 300C, in response to the execution of a player-participation performance, the lever operation unit 410 (lever operation unit 304) moves to a forward-protruding position by the drive of the forward/backward drive motor 402a of the forward/backward mechanism 402. As an example of a performance using this lever operation unit 304, the player may be prompted to grasp the lever operation unit 304, and when the player pushes or pulls the lever operation unit 304, the forward/backward drive motor 402a drives it to move in the opposite direction to the player's operation, thereby applying resistance (operating resistance) to the operation of the lever operation unit 304. This provides a tactile sensation to the operation of the lever operation unit 304, allowing the player to enjoy the performance using the lever operation unit 304. At this time, by increasing or decreasing the operating resistance of the lever operation unit 304, the player may be given indications of the level of expectation regarding the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a "jackpot" game).

Furthermore, by driving the vibration motor 414a of the vibration mechanism 414 when operating the lever operation unit 304, a tactile sensation can be added to the lever operation unit 304, thus enhancing the player's enjoyment. In this case, the vibration motor 414a may be used to provide strong, weak, or rhythmic vibrations, thereby suggesting to the player the level of anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, the performance control unit 300C prompts the player to press the press operation unit 303 in response to the execution of a player-participation performance, and changes the performance based on the press operation of the press operation unit 303, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the performance controlled by the press operation unit 303.

[31-4. Security measures for door frames]
Next, the security measures in the door frame 3A of the second embodiment will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 382 and 383. Figure 382 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-sectional view of an example of security measures using a glass unit in the door frame of the second embodiment. Figure 383 is an explanatory diagram showing the security measures using the glass unit shown in Figure 382 from the rear. Parts with the same configuration as the door frame 3 of the first embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals. It goes without saying that the following security measures, including modified versions, can be used in combination with each other.

First, the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3A of the second embodiment will be described. The glass unit 160 is detachably installed by being inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear, so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, this glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 to be visible from the player's side (front), while also closing the front of the game area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner circumference of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h; two transparent glass plates 162 that enclose the inside of the glass frame 161 and whose outer circumferences are attached to the glass frame 161; and a pair of glass unit mounting members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in a front view, and a strip-shaped locking piece 161b that protrudes downward from the lower end and extends along the lower edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 are capable of contacting the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b is capable of being inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the rear flange portion 117c of the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110A so as to be placed on the upper flange portion 117b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 117 (see Figure 366). In this embodiment, the rear surface of the locking piece 161b contacts the front surface of the rear flange portion 117c. The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart front to back so as to form a space between them.

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction, and a rod-shaped projection portion 163b that protrudes from the base portion 163a perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the two upper corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the rear flange portion 117c of the intermediate reinforcing frame 117 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110A, and place it on the upper flange portion 117b, then bring the front end of the glass frame 161 into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and bring the protruding portion 163b into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This allows the glass unit 160 to be attached to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the procedure can be reversed from the one described above. This makes the glass unit 160 detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

Furthermore, in the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is positioned below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibrations or other forces act on the glass unit mounting member 163, it will not rotate to a position where the protruding portion 163b is above the base portion 163a. Consequently, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released spontaneously, and the glass unit 160 will not spontaneously detach from the door frame base 101.

A frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110A is attached to the door frame base 101 to which the glass unit 160 is mounted from the rear, and the glass unit 160 is mounted within the frame of this door frame reinforcement unit 110A. In this embodiment, the door frame base 101 is provided with a protruding portion 101k that extends rearward to fill the gap between the door frame reinforcement unit 110A and the glass unit 160 (see Figures 382 and 383). More specifically, the door frame base 101 has a protruding portion 101k that extends rearward from its rear surface and is long in the vertical direction to fill the gap between the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110A and the left side of the glass unit 160, and the gap between the right reinforcement frame 112 and the right side of the glass unit 160. The thickness of the door frame base 101 in the front-rear direction is considerably thicker in the area of this protruding portion 101k. When assembled to the door frame 3A, the door frame reinforcing frames 100A (left reinforcing frame 111 and right reinforcing frame 112) and the glass unit 160 are in contact with both sides of the protruding portion 101k.

Next, the right side unit 430A of the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 in the first embodiment, the right side unit 430A is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in a front view. In this right side unit 430A, the reflector portion 431a of the right side base 431 of the door frame is formed in a recessed shape so as to open forward and outward in the left and right directions on both the left and right sides. Furthermore, the outer surfaces of the right side left lens 439 and the right side right lens 441 are formed flat without any protruding portions. In addition, the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame is provided only in the lower part of the right side unit 430 from the bottom end to a predetermined height.

This door frame right side unit 430A includes a right side left panel 442 that is detachably provided on the left outer side of the right side left lens 439, and a right side right panel 443 that is detachably provided on the right outer side of the right side right lens 441.

The right side left panel 442 is made of a transparent material, and a decorative sticker with the design surface facing left is attached to its right side. The right side right panel 443 is made of a transparent material, and a decorative sticker with the design surface facing right is attached to its left side.

The right-side left panel 442 has its rear end in contact with the front surface of the glass unit 160. This right-side left panel 442 can be removed from the door frame right-side unit 430A by sliding it backward with the glass unit 160 removed. The right-side right panel 443 can be removed to the right by operating the lock lever 444 located in the upper left corner of the rear view of the door frame base unit 100.

The right side unit 430A of the door frame allows for the removal of the right-side left panel 442 and the right-side right panel 443. Therefore, when replacing the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 due to specification changes or model changes, the right-side left panel 442 and the right-side right panel 443, which feature decorations and patterns corresponding to the decoration (concept) of the game board 5, can be easily adapted to model changes, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Incidentally, since the right-side left panel 442 of the door frame right-side unit 430A is detachably mounted by sliding it in the front-to-back direction, there is a risk that an illegal tool could be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 using the gap between it and other detachable parts (for example, the right-side left lens 439) as a guide. However, in the door frame 3A of this embodiment, a glass unit 160 (glass plate 162) is provided on the rear end side of the right-side left panel 442, so even if an illegal tool is attempted to enter, it can be blocked by the glass unit 160. Furthermore, if an illegal act is forced through, the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 will break, alerting the staff of the gaming hall to the illegal act and stopping it, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, since the glass unit 160 prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools, it can be used for security purposes in addition to the conventionally provided door frame reinforcement unit 110A and anti-theft fittings, thereby suppressing the increase in costs for the pachinko machine 1 compared to installing new anti-theft components. Also, because the glass unit 160 has a large surface area when viewed from the front, if the tip of an unauthorized tool inserted into the right side unit 430A of the door frame comes into contact with the glass unit 160 and changes its direction of entry, even if the unauthorized tool is further extended, it will simply move along the surface of the large glass unit 160. The tip of the unauthorized tool cannot penetrate beyond the glass unit 160, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 383, the mounting status of the right-side left panel 442 can be visually inspected from the rear of the door frame 3A through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. Therefore, the mounting status of the right-side left panel 442 can be checked without removing the glass unit 160, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to maintain.

Furthermore, although detailed illustrations are omitted, at the rear end of the right-side left panel 442, the area where the glass unit 160 is not provided is protected from the rear by the right reinforcing frame 112 of the metal door frame reinforcement unit 110A. This ensures that even if an intruder attempts to insert a tool into the area without the glass unit 160, the right reinforcing frame 112 will prevent it. In other words, as described above, the door frame reinforcement unit 110A not only possesses high security against strong forward pulling due to its increased strength and rigidity, but also offers security against the insertion of intruder tools from the front. Therefore, the door frame 3A of this embodiment has enhanced security against intruder tools from the front, not only by the glass unit 160 but also by the door frame reinforcement unit 110A.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, which reinforces the door frame 3A, prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools from the front. Therefore, the existing door frame reinforcement unit can be utilized for security purposes, and the increase in costs for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed compared to installing new security components.

Furthermore, the space between the right reinforcing frame 112 and the glass unit 160 (the right side) is filled by the protruding portion 101k of the door frame base 101. Because the protruding portion 101k is thicker in the front-to-back direction, attempting to penetrate the protruding portion 101, which is made of synthetic resin less hard than the door frame reinforcing unit 110A and the glass unit 160, becomes difficult, thus discouraging the insertion of unauthorized tools.

Furthermore, while the above examples show the door frame reinforcement unit 110A and the glass unit 160 as components that prevent the intrusion (blockage) of unauthorized tools from the front, the system is not limited to these; any hard material that is harder than other components such as metal or glass is acceptable. Examples of such hard materials (hard parts) include the metal cylinder mounting frame 115 (cylinder mounting frame 115A) for attaching the cylinder lock 130 (cylinder lock 130A), the reinforcing sheet metal (not shown) that reinforces the plate unit 200, the metal unit reinforcement frame 403 provided on the performance operation unit 300C, and the anti-theft hardware. In addition to metal parts, hard resin parts formed from materials such as hard resins harder than ordinary synthetic resins or fiber-reinforced resins are also acceptable.

Furthermore, while the above example shows the glass unit 160 and the door frame reinforcement unit 110A (right reinforcement frame 112) in contact with each other across the protruding portion 101k, the design is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the rear-protected area, the glass unit 160 and the metal part (e.g., the door frame reinforcement unit 110A) may overlap in a front view. This allows for a double layer of protection against the insertion of unauthorized tools, making insertion extremely difficult even if the front-facing glass unit 160 or metal part is breached, as the rear-facing metal part or glass unit 160 provides further protection. This provides a highly secure pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the use of both the door frame reinforcement unit 110A and the glass unit 160 to prevent the insertion of unauthorized tools from the front, it is not limited to this configuration. The insertion of unauthorized tools may be prevented using only the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, or only the glass unit 160.

[31-4a. Modification 1 of security measures for door frames]
Next, a modified example 1 of the security measures using the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3A will be described in detail with reference to Figure 384. Figure 384 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 1 of the security measures using the glass unit in a door frame different from Figures 382 and 383.

In this embodiment, a door frame decorative element 470 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100. An opening 470b is provided in the rear wall 470a of the door frame decorative element 470, and a transparent cover 471 is attached to close the opening 470b. Wiring cables 472 connected to electrical components such as LEDs and speakers are provided inside the door frame decorative element 470, and these wiring cables 472 are visible from the rear through the transparent cover 471.

In this embodiment, when the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 from the rear, the glass unit 160 is positioned behind at least a portion of the cover 471, preventing the cover 471 from detaching to the rear. Furthermore, the mounting status of the cover 471 and the wiring cables 472 within the opening 470b, which is closed by the cover 471, can be viewed through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160.

Furthermore, the right reinforcing frame 112 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110A is located at least a portion of the rear of the cover 471. Moreover, the right reinforcing frame 112 and the glass unit 160 are arranged to be in close contact without any gaps. In other words, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the size of the glass unit 160 is set to be in close contact with the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 with virtually no gaps.

In this embodiment, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 470b in the rear wall 470a of the door frame decorative body 470 and the cover 471, the glass unit 160 (glass plate 162) provided behind the cover 471 can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering. Furthermore, if the unauthorized entry is forced, the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 will break, alerting the staff of the gaming hall to the unauthorized activity and stopping it. This provides a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against unauthorized activity.

Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, the mounting status of the cover 471 and the condition of the wiring cables 472 inside the door frame decorative body 470 can be visually inspected from the rear through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. Therefore, inspection can be performed without removing the glass unit 160, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to maintain.

Furthermore, in the area behind the cover 471 where the glass unit 160 is not provided, a right reinforcing frame 112 of the metal door frame reinforcing unit 110A is provided. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter (insert) in the area where the glass unit 160 is absent, it can be prevented by the right reinforcing frame 112.

Furthermore, because the glass unit 160 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are in contact without any gaps, even if someone attempts to pass an unauthorized tool between the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcing frame 112, the gap between them will not widen because both the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcing frame 112 are rigid. This makes it extremely difficult to insert an unauthorized tool, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance.

[31-4b. Modification of security measures for door frames, part 2]
Next, a modified example 2 of the security measures using the glass unit 160 will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 385. Figure 385 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example 2 of the security measures using a glass unit and the like, which is even different from Figure 384.

In this embodiment, a door frame decorative element 470 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100, and a speaker 473 is attached to the door frame decorative element 470. The rear wall 470a of the door frame decorative element 470 is provided with an opening 470b for mounting the speaker 473 from the rear, and a transparent cover 471 is attached to close the opening 470b. Through this transparent cover 471, the back of the speaker 473 and the mounting area of the speaker 473 can be viewed from the rear.

In this embodiment, when the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 from the rear, the glass unit 160 is positioned behind at least a portion of the cover 471, preventing the cover 471 from coming off to the rear. Furthermore, the mounting status of the cover 471, the back of the speaker 473 located in front of the transparent cover 471, and the mounting status of the speaker 473 can be visually inspected through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160.

Furthermore, the right reinforcing frame 112 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110A is located at least a portion of the rear of the cover 471. Moreover, the right reinforcing frame 112 and the glass unit 160 are arranged to be in close contact without any gaps. In other words, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the size of the glass unit 160 is set to be in close contact with the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 with virtually no gaps.

In this embodiment, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker 473 attached to the door frame decorative body 470, the glass unit 160 (glass plate 162) located behind the speaker 473 (cover 471) prevents the unauthorized tool from entering. Furthermore, if the unauthorized entry is forced, the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 will break, alerting the staff of the gaming hall to the unauthorized activity and stopping it. This provides a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, the mounting status of the cover 471, the back of the speaker 473 located in front of the transparent cover 471, and the mounting status of the speaker 473 can be visually inspected from the rear through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. Therefore, these can be checked without removing the glass unit 160, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to maintain.

Furthermore, in the area behind the cover 471 where the glass unit 160 is not provided, a right reinforcing frame 112 of the metal door frame reinforcing unit 110A is provided. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter (insert) in the area where the glass unit 160 is absent, it can be prevented by the right reinforcing frame 112.

Furthermore, because the glass unit 160 and the metal right reinforcing frame 112 are in contact without any gaps, even if someone attempts to pass an unauthorized tool between the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcing frame 112, the gap between them will not widen because both the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcing frame 112 are rigid. This makes it extremely difficult to insert an unauthorized tool, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance.

[31-4c. Summary]
The security measures using the glass unit 160 described above have the following technical features.
(Background of the technical features)
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine comprises a main frame that detachably holds a game board having a game area, and a door frame that can be opened and closed from the front of the main frame. This door frame has a window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front, and a cover-like decorative element is provided on the front surface around the window, and this decorative element decorates the appearance of the gaming machine.

As a type of gaming machine, a design has been proposed in which the decorative element (cover) on the door frame is replaceable (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2021-65649). According to the technology described in this patent document, when replacing the game board due to specification changes or model changes, it is possible to replace the cover with one that corresponds to the game board, thereby creating a sense of unity between the game board and the door frame and enhancing its appeal to players.

However, if the door frame cover is made replaceable, a boundary will be created between the replaceable part (cover) and the non-replaceable part (main body) within the door frame. This boundary could be used as a guide to insert an unauthorized tool into the gaming machine from the front.

Therefore, in light of the above circumstances, the following measures aim to provide gaming machines with high security features.

(Means of resolving technical features)
Method 1: In a gaming machine,
"A main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area where games are played using game balls, from the front,
A gaming machine comprising a window that allows the gaming area to be viewed from the front, and a door frame that has a glass unit closing the window and is provided to the main frame so as to be openable and closable from the front,
The aforementioned door frame is
It has a main body and a cover attached to the main body,
At least a portion of the cover is protected from the rear by a hardened portion that is harder than the other components, including the glass unit."
It is characterized by the following:

Here, "cover" can refer to: "a decorative sheet that is visible between the main body and the cover," "a cover that allows the inside of the main body to be seen from the outside," "a cover with three-dimensional decoration (e.g., a decorative element)," and "a cover that conceals an opening (inspection port) for inspecting the inside of the main body."

Furthermore, "hard parts" include, in addition to the glass unit (glass), "metal parts formed from metals such as iron or aluminum," and "hard resin parts formed from hard resins, fiber-reinforced resins, etc., that are harder than ordinary synthetic resins."

According to the configuration of Means 1, the game machine comprises a main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area where the game is played using game balls, and a door frame that is openable and closable from the front of the main frame, having a window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front and a glass unit that closes the window. The door frame has a main body and a cover attached to the main body, and at least a part of the cover is protected from the rear by a hard part that is harder than the other members, including the glass unit. (See Chapter 30-4. Security Measures for the Door Frame, Figures 382 to 385, etc., in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

In this configuration, the gaming machine is provided with a main frame that detachably supports a game board having a game area from the front, and a door frame that is provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable from the front. This door frame includes a window that allows the game area to be viewed from the front, a glass unit that closes the window, a main body, and a cover attached to the main body. Furthermore, since at least a portion of the cover is protected from the rear by a hard part such as the glass unit, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool into the gaming machine from the front of the door frame using the space between the cover and the main body as a guide, the tip of the tool will strike the hard part, preventing insertion. This provides a gaming machine with high security against fraudulent activity from the front.

Furthermore, since the glass unit acts as a rigid part to prevent the insertion of unauthorized tools, it can be used for security purposes in addition to conventionally provided reinforcing frames (door frame reinforcement units) and anti-theft fittings, thereby suppressing the increase in the cost of the gaming machine compared to installing new anti-theft components. Also, because the glass unit as a rigid part has a large surface area when viewed from the front, if the tip of an unauthorized tool inserted between the main body and the cover comes into contact with the glass unit and changes its direction of entry, even if the unauthorized tool is further extended, it will simply move along the surface of the large glass unit, preventing the tip of the unauthorized tool from penetrating beyond the glass unit, thus providing a gaming machine with high security performance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since a hard part such as a glass unit can prevent the insertion of unauthorized tools between the main body and the cover, even if the cover is a detachable decorative element attached to the main body, the security effect against fraudulent activity will not be reduced, and it will be possible to install a detachable decorative element on the door frame. This allows for the replacement of the game board with a decorative element that corresponds to the game board when the game board is replaced due to specification changes or model changes. Therefore, it is possible to create a game machine where the decoration of the game board and the decoration of the door frame are integrated, providing a game machine with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the rigid section include a metal part, including a metal reinforcing frame that reinforces the door frame. This ensures that at least a portion of the cover is protected from the rear by the metal part, including the reinforcing frame. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an unauthorized tool into the gaming machine from the front of the door frame, using the space between the cover and the main body as a guide, the metal part, in addition to the glass unit, will prevent it, thus providing a gaming machine with high security against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, if the hard part includes a metal part, ensuring that the glass unit and the metal part are in contact without any gaps will, in addition to the effects described above, make it extremely difficult to insert an unauthorized tool between the glass unit and the metal part, as both are hard, preventing the gap from widening. This provides a gaming machine with high security performance.

Furthermore, as described above, if the hardened portion includes a metal part, and that metal part is used as a reinforcing frame to reinforce the door frame, the existing reinforcing frame (door frame reinforcement unit) can be utilized for security purposes, thereby suppressing the increase in costs associated with the gaming machine compared to installing a new security component.

Furthermore, as described above, when the hardened portion includes a metal part, and when the hardened portion uses both a glass unit and a metal part, the glass unit and the metal part may overlap in a front view, at least in the area protecting the cover from the rear. This allows for a double layer of protection against the insertion of unauthorized tools, making insertion extremely difficult even if the front glass unit or metal part is breached, thus providing a gaming machine with high security performance.

Furthermore, the main body can be made visible through the cover. This allows for external inspection of the main body without removing the cover, enabling verification of electrical components (e.g., LEDs, sensors, connectors, wiring cables, speakers, circuit boards, etc.), and the mounting status of the main body or components within it. This provides a gaming machine that is easy to maintain.

Furthermore, at least a portion of the cover may be protected by the glass of the glass unit. This protects a portion of the cover from the rear, preventing the insertion of an unauthorized tool into the gaming machine from the front of the door frame, even if the tool is guided between the cover and the main body. The tip of the tool will strike the glass of the glass unit, preventing insertion. Moreover, if the unauthorized insertion is forced, the glass of the glass unit will break, alerting the gaming hall staff to the fraudulent activity and stopping it. This provides a gaming machine with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, the mounting points of the cover may be made visible from the rear through the glass of the glass unit. This allows for easy maintenance of the gaming machine, as the mounting status of the cover can be checked through the glass of the glass unit simply by opening the door frame relative to the main frame and looking at the door frame from the rear, without having to remove the glass unit.

Means 2: In the configuration of means 1,
"The hard part is,
This includes a metal part, including a metal reinforcing frame that reinforces the aforementioned door frame."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "metal parts" in the rigid components include: "metal door frame reinforcement units that reinforce the door frame," "security hardware," "metal cylinder mounting frames for attaching cylinder locks," "reinforcement sheet metal that reinforces the plate unit," and "metal unit reinforcement frames provided in the performance control unit," etc.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rigid part includes a metal part that includes a metal reinforcing frame that reinforces the door frame. (See the description regarding the door frame reinforcing frame 110A in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the metal part, including a reinforcing frame, is included as a rigid part that protects at least a portion of the cover from the rear, even if someone attempts to insert an unauthorized tool into the gaming machine from the front of the door frame using the space between the cover and the main body as a guide, it can be prevented not only by the glass unit but also by the metal part, thus providing a gaming machine with high security performance against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, because the hardened portion includes a metal component, ensuring that the glass unit and the metal component are in seamless contact provides the same effects as described above. Additionally, even if an unauthorized tool attempts to pass between the glass unit and the metal component, the gap will not widen due to the hardness of both components. This makes the insertion of the unauthorized tool extremely difficult, thus providing a gaming machine with high security performance.

Furthermore, if the metal part that prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools is used as a reinforcing frame that reinforces the door frame, the existing reinforcing frame (door frame reinforcement unit) can be utilized for security purposes, and the increase in costs for the gaming machine can be suppressed compared to installing new security components.

Furthermore, when using both a glass unit and a metal part as a hard protective section for the cover from the rear, the glass unit and the metal part may be arranged so that they overlap when viewed from the front, at least in the area protecting the cover from the rear. This allows for a double layer of protection against the insertion of unauthorized tools, making insertion extremely difficult even if the glass unit or metal part on the front is breached, thus providing a gaming machine with high security performance.

Means 3: In the configuration of means 1 or means 2,
"The interior of the main body can be viewed through the cover."
It is characterized by being such.

Here, "cover" can refer to "colorless transparent," "colored transparent," "colorless semi-transparent," "colored semi-transparent," etc.

According to the configuration of means 3, the inside of the main body can be inspected through the cover. (See the description regarding cover 471 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows for inspection of the main body through the cover, enabling external inspection of electrical components (e.g., LEDs, sensors, connectors, wiring cables, speakers, circuit boards, etc.) and the mounting status of the main body or components within it, without removing the cover. This provides a gaming machine that is easy to maintain.

Means 4: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 3,
The present invention is characterized in that "at least a portion of the cover is protected by the glass of the glass unit."

According to the configuration of means 4, at least a portion of the cover is protected by the glass of the glass unit. (See the description of the glass unit 160, the right-side left panel 442, and the cover 471 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This design protects a portion of the cover from the rear by the glass of the glass unit. Therefore, even if someone attempts to insert an unauthorized tool into the gaming machine from the front of the door frame, using the space between the cover and the main body as a guide, the tip of the tool will strike the glass of the glass unit, preventing insertion. Furthermore, if the unauthorized insertion is forced, the glass of the glass unit will break, alerting the gaming hall staff to the fraudulent activity and stopping it. This provides a gaming machine with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4,
"The mounting area of the cover can be seen from the rear through the glass of the glass unit."
It is characterized by being such.

According to the configuration of means 5, the mounting area of the cover can be viewed from the rear through the glass of the glass unit. (See the description of the glass unit 160, the right side left panel 442, and the cover 471 in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention].)

This allows the cover's mounting points to be visible from the rear through the glass unit. Therefore, without removing the glass unit, the cover's mounting status can be checked simply by opening the door frame relative to the main frame and viewing the door frame from the rear. This provides a gaming machine that is easy to maintain.

Thus, the above solution makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with high security features.

(Relationship between the means of solving the technical features and the embodiments)
In this embodiment, the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3A is the window portion of the above solution, the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, cylinder mounting frame 115, cylinder mounting frame 115A, intermediate reinforcement frame 117, glass unit 160, and unit reinforcement frame 403 in this embodiment are the hard portion of the above solution, and the left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, cylinder mounting frame 115, cylinder mounting frame 115A, intermediate reinforcement frame 117, and unit reinforcement frame 403 in this embodiment are the metal portion of the above solution In this embodiment, the door frame reinforcement unit 110A corresponds to the reinforcement frame of the above solution, the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3A of this embodiment corresponds to the glass unit of the above solution, the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 of this embodiment corresponds to the glass of the above solution, the door frame right side unit 430A, the door frame right side base 431, the right side left lens 439, and the door frame decorative body 470 in the door frame 3A of this embodiment correspond to the main body of the above solution, and the right side left panel 442 and cover 471 of this embodiment correspond to the cover of the above solution.

(Characteristic effects of this embodiment)
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main body frame 4 that detachably supports a game board 5 having a game area 5a from the front, and a door frame 3A that is provided on the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable from the front. The door frame 3A is provided with a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front, a glass unit 160 that closes the door window 101a, a right side unit 430A (right side left lens 439) of the door frame, and a right side left panel 442 attached to the right side unit 430A of the door frame. At least a part of the right side left panel 442 is protected from the rear by a hard part such as the glass unit 160, so even if someone tries to insert an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 from the front of the door frame 3A using the space between the right side left panel 442 and the right side left lens 439 as a guide, the tip of the tool will come into contact with the glass unit 160 (hard part), preventing the insertion of the illegal tool. This makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent activity from the front.

Furthermore, since the glass unit 160 acts as a rigid part to prevent the insertion of unauthorized tools, the glass unit 160 can be used for security in addition to the conventionally provided door frame reinforcement unit 110A and anti-theft fittings, thereby suppressing the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 compared to when new anti-theft components are installed. Also, because the glass unit 160, as a rigid part, has a large surface area when viewed from the front, if the tip of an unauthorized tool inserted into the right side unit 430A of the door frame comes into contact with the glass unit 160 and changes its direction of entry, even if the unauthorized tool is further extended, it will simply advance along the surface of the large glass unit 160. The tip of the unauthorized tool cannot penetrate behind the glass unit 160, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance.

Furthermore, as described above, the glass unit 160 (hard part) prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools between the right-side left lens 439 and the right-side left panel 442. Therefore, even if the right-side left panel 442 is detachable from the door frame right-side unit 430A, the security effect against fraudulent activity will not be reduced. This allows for the replacement of the game board 5 due to specification changes or model changes, as the right-side left panel 442, which has decorations corresponding to the game board 5, can be replaced. This results in a pachinko machine 1 where the decorations of the game board 5 and the door frame 3A appear as one integrated unit, providing a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to players.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the right-side left panel 442 is protected from the rear by the right reinforcing frame 112 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110A, which is made of metal as a rigid part, even if someone attempts to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1 from the front of the door frame 3A using the space between the right-side left panel 442 and the right-side left lens 439 as a guide, it can be prevented not only by the glass unit 160 but also by the metal right reinforcing frame 112, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance against fraudulent activities.

Furthermore, because the glass unit 160 and the door frame reinforcement unit 110A (right reinforcement frame 112) are in contact without any gaps, in addition to the effects described above, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to pass between the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcement frame 112, the gap between them will not widen because both the glass unit 160 and the right reinforcement frame 112 are rigid. This makes it extremely difficult to insert an unauthorized tool, thus providing a pachinko machine 1 with high security performance.

Furthermore, since the metal part that prevents the insertion of unauthorized tools is the door frame reinforcement unit 110A that reinforces the door frame 3A, the existing door frame reinforcement unit can be used for security purposes, and the increase in cost for the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed compared to when a new security component is installed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 384 and 385, since the inside of the door frame ornament 470 can be inspected through the cover 471, it is possible to check the electrical components (e.g., LEDs, sensors, connectors, wiring cables 472, speakers 473, circuit boards, etc.) installed inside the door frame ornament 470, and to check the mounting status of the door frame ornament 470 or the components installed inside the door frame ornament 470, from the outside without removing the cover 471. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to maintain.

Furthermore, since at least a portion of the right-side left panel 442 (cover 471) is protected by the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160, even if someone attempts to insert an illegal tool into the pachinko machine 1 from the front of the door frame 3A using the space between the right-side left panel 442 and the right-side left lens 439 (door frame decorative element 470) as a guide, the tip of the tool will come into contact with the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160, preventing the insertion of the illegal tool. Moreover, if the illegal insertion is forced, the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 will break, alerting the staff of the gaming hall to the illegal activity and stopping it. This provides a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against illegal activities.

Furthermore, since the mounting area of the cover 471 (right side left panel 442) can be viewed from the rear through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160, the mounting status of the cover 471 and other components can be checked through the glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 simply by opening the door frame 3A relative to the main frame 4 and looking at the door frame 3A from the rear, without removing the glass unit 160. This provides a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to maintain.

The embodiments for carrying out the present invention have been described above, but the embodiments described above can be modified as appropriate without departing from the technical concept. That is, the technical concept can be applied even if some of the above embodiments are modified or multiple embodiments are combined.

For example, while the above embodiment shows the application to pachinko machines 1 and slot machines, it is not limited to these. It can also be applied to pachislo machines or gaming machines that combine pachinko and pachislo machines, and in this case, the same effects and advantages as described above can be achieved. Furthermore, it can also be applied to so-called sealed gaming machines or managed gaming machines, where the player does not touch the game balls B.

1. Pachinko machine 2. Outer frame 3A 4. Door frame 5. Main body frame 5. Game board 5a 5. Game area 2001 6. General prize slot (prize slot)
2002 First Starting Gate (Prize Gate)
2004 Second starting gate (prize gate)
2005 Grand Prize Winner (Prize Winner)
2006 Prize Entry Point (Prize Entry Point)
2009 Losing Entrance (Out Entrance)
2010 V Prize Winner (Prize Winner)
2011 Regular Prize Winner (Prize Winner)
2023 Sub-outlet (outlet)
2023a First Outlet (Outlet, First Outlet)
2023b Second exit (exit, second exit)
2023c Third Exit (Exit)
2050 Outlet Sign (Outlet Sign)
2050a First Out Exit Sign (Out Sign, First Out Sign)
2050b Second Out Exit Sign (Out Sign, Second Out Sign)
2050c Third Outlet Sign (Outlet Sign)
2051 Main body 2052 Peripheral part 2200 Side unit (ball entry opening member)
2202 Front panel 2203 Decorative sticker (sticker)
2400 Attacker Unit (Inlet Member)
2441 Base plate 2446 Decorative sticker (sticker)
2450 Receiving part 2450a Front plate 2450b Decorative part

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a game board on the front side, in which a game area is provided through which game balls circulate,
The game board is provided with a center mechanism having a peripheral wall that prevents game balls from entering the inside.
The center component is
In a front view, it extends outward from the peripheral wall portion and has an extended flow region in front of which game balls can flow down.
The extended flow region is provided with a first protrusion that extends forward from the front surface of the extended flow region, and a second protrusion that extends forward from the first protrusion, and both the first and second protrusions can influence the flow pattern of the game balls.
Furthermore, the game board is provided with a prize entry opening into which game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, an out entry opening at the lower part of the game area into which game balls that have flowed down the game area can enter, and a sub-out entry opening above the out entry opening into which game balls can enter.
Near the sub-out port, an out indicator is provided to show that the sub-out port is not a prize entry port.
The aforementioned out-of-notation portion has at least a main notation body portion that forms the basis of the notation and a peripheral notation portion that is in contact with the periphery of the main notation body portion, and a character or symbol is formed therein.
The main body of the notation is formed such that its degree of light transmission is lower than that of a specific decorative area outside the outer notation portion .
Furthermore, behind the "Out" marking section and the specific decorative area, a light-emitting substrate is arranged on which a light-emitting element that emits light toward the front is mounted.
The light-emitting element is positioned so as not to overlap with the "out" indicator when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.